{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-001.png}}}}}}

Giaekwad*s Orienatal Series
Published under the Authority of
the Maharaja Sayajirao University
of BarOda..
General Editor :
B. J. S5andesara,
M, A., Ph, D,
N0. 134
A [)I0TI0NARW
OF
SANSKRIT 0iRAMMAR



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-002.png}}}}}}




{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-003.png}}}}}}

A DI0TI0NARY
OF'
SAMSKRIT 0GRAMMAR
by
Mahāmahopādhyāya
KASHINATH VASUDEV ABHYANKAR, M.A..
Retired Professor of Sansf*rit, Grjarat Coilege, AhmedaÉad.
H०rt• Profe&०r ०f SarnsÊrit, BharndarÊटैar Orierital Researah fnstitnr¢e, Poori¢:
ORlENTAL 1NSTTUTE
BARODA
1961
 



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-004.png}}}}}}

Fitrst Edition : 1000 Copies.
Printed (०n beha1f of tbe M - S- University of Baroda Press)
by M. N. Chapekar, Aryasanskriti Mudranalaya, 1575 l|2
Sadashiv, Tilak Road, £*eerna 2, arad Published On bebualf Cof
the Maharaja Sayajira० University of Baroda by Dr. 13hogilal,
|]. Sandesara, Director, C9rieBital Institute, Baroda, Marcb, 196]l•
Price Rs. 2ś9= 00
C०pies cara be had fy°orra-
Marnager,
Thne University Publicatioras SaIes Unit,
M. S• University of Baroda Press ( Sadhana Press ),
neaY Palace Gate, Palace Road, BARODA.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-005.png}}}}}}

|DED1CATED
to
The Memory of
the late Mahāmahopādhyaya,
WASUDH}W SHASTRI ABHYANKAR
my father, whose example has inspired
me to undertake this and similar
other works on Sanskrit Grammar.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-006.png}}}}}}




{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-007.png}}}}}}

iFO]REWO]RD
We take this opportumत्रंty to place before the world of Sanskrit
seholars this IDictionary of Sanskrit Grarmmar, which, we are confident,
will be an indispensable reference book for all students working in
this field as well as allied branches of knOwledge.
Prof.ईं Kashinath Vasudev Abhayश्ankar has' the good fortune to
inherit traditional Sanskrit lear ning from his father, Mahāmahopā-
dhyāya Pandit Vasudevashastri Abhyankar, who is well known for his
translations of The Brahmastātra Sarākara Bhāsya and The Pātafंjala
|Mahābhasya. Prof. Abhyankar had a briIliant academic_career and is
a reputed teacher and a very well known scholar of Sanskrit Grammar
and Prakrit language and literature. He has himself edited several books,
and is at present bringing out revised editions Of The Pātafंjala Mahā-
bhā$ya and Paribhasenduśekhara and has compiled a Paribhā$ंāsaihgraha
all*of which are being published by the Bhandarkar Oriental Research
Imstitute, Poona.. His exhaus¢ive introduction to The Patafंjala, Mahā-
bhāsya is enough to show that he is pre-eminently qualified for pre-
|paring this Dictionary of Sanskrit Grammar, which is a valuable
product of a life-time of devoted scholarship.
We are thankful to the Univ♚rsity Grants Commission and the
State Government for the liberal fi ठancial assistance they have given
towards publication of this wOrk•
Oriental Institute, Baroda, B. J. SANDEप्र्SARA
17-3-1961• 1Director



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-008.png}}}}}}




{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-009.png}}}}}}

iNTRODUCTION
Object of this Dictionary
No apology is needed for undertaking the compilation of the preserat
* Dictionary of Sanskrit Grammar ', which, although concise, is expected
to mect the needs of Sanskrit scholars and research students ofWyàkarama
and other Shastras by serving as a useful reference book in their study of,
and research work in, any branch of Sanskrit learning• The rmany
independent treatises in the several Shastras and the learned commentaries
upon them, as also the commentaries on classical poems and dramas, are;in
fact, full of grammatical explanations of words and constructions, involving
a liberal use of grammatical expressions and technical terms at several
places. The elementary knowledge of grammar which a general scholar_of
Sanskrit poSSeSSes, i$ not found sufficient for his underStanding fully the
grammatical references in these books, especially so at present, when the
practice of sending young boys to the Tolls and Sanskrit Pāthashālās to
study the standard classical works with commentaries along with SOme
standard elementary treatises on grammar, has already stopped. . The
number ofSanskrit Pandits and Shastris,who had to obtain asoundfooting if
grammar before they undertook the study of the higher textS of the Several
Shastras, and who therefore could be consulted by young Scholars and
research Workers in the seweral Shastras, has also diminished considerably.
The usual Sanskrit Dictionaries such as those of Monier Williams, VS.Apte
and othets are found of no avail in supplying explanations Of the gramma-
tical technique which confronts modern Scholars at every step in their
critical reading of the several Sanskrit texts. In these circumstances it is
only the technical dictionaries of the type of the present * Dictipnary of
Sanskrit Grammar ' that can render a valuable assistance tO Scholars and
research workers in their reading of the higher Sanskrit texts in the several
Shastras.
Beginnings of Sanskrit Grammar
Every Science has mecessarily its own terminology and a Special
vOcabulary. The remark is true with respect to Sanskrit Grammar Or
Vyākarahaśāstra which has developed as a science during the last two
thouSand year$ and has got several technical terms and mumerOuS words
with a special grammatical significance. The origin of gratmmar can well-
nigh be traced to the Period of the Brāhmanas i. e. about 2000 B.C., when
Vedic seholars began to discuss the meaning of the inspireà Vedic hymns
by carefully showing disconnected, the words of the Vedic hymns
and noting down the differences in accents as also the changes cauSed by
their coalescence in the continuous recital or the Sarihhitāpātha. They alsO
tried to explain the sense of the Wedic words by tracing them back to the
roots ofsuitable senses and laid down rules for their proper and correet



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-010.png}}}}}}

3X
pronunciation. These three pursuits viz. (a) the discüSsioi३ of the featureS of
the Pada text, (b) the derivation of words, and (c) dircctionS rcgarding the
proper pronunciation of the Vedic wOrds, were carricd On,with vigOur with
ā view to preserving the Vedic texts intact, and the treatiseS dealing.. with
these three branches were respectively called by the nameS Prātisākhya,
Nirukta and Sikgā, all of which could rightly be called Vyakaraऐa .9r
Grammar, as they were devoted to determining the corrcct Words_aS dis-
tinguished from the incorrect ones. AlthOugh a numbcr Qf boQkS wefe
written by Vedic scholars in these three branchcs, not rhore than, five or $ix
|Prātiśākhya works, a $olitary Nirukta work, and a few Siksंà wOrkS are the
only available workS at present.
Development of Sanskrit Grammar
In course of time, on the analogy of the derivation of wOrds, an
analysis of the word into itS constitue1nt cletments such as the baSe, the afiix,
the augments and the modifications, was u ndcrtaken by gramtmarianS• This
separation of the different elements of a word constituted Vyākarat]a Or
grammar, which waS developcd as an art by ancient grarm tmarianS 'like
ApiŚali, Sākatāyana and others before Pāaini. I t was P:àrhini whO Carried
it to perfection, and his wgrk, the A$tādhyāyi, compact yct exhaustivc, and
laconic yel clear,iS Simply a marvellous product of art by a man of amazing
intelligence. AS a result, the works on grammar by all ancicnt scholarS
who flourished before Patini disappeared in course of time lcaving Only a
few quotations behincl them. Pāt]ini was followed by a Taumber of grammar-
ians who wrote popular treatiScs On grammar, bascd, no doubt, ora P:it?ini's
grammar, some of which, in their turn came to havc auxiliary w, rkS,
glosses and explanatory cQmtme ntarics. These differ९nt trcatiscs, writtcn by
Sarvavarman, Candragomin, Devanandin, P:ilyakirti S:ikatःiya11a, Hermacan-
dra, Kramadi$vara, Ju maranandin, Supad{na and others with thcir auxi-
liary wOrkS and cOmmentaries, came to bc looked upon as different syStcmS
of grammar. These treatises prescnt two kindS of t reatmer1t : Some of
thcm are arrangcd in St tras in thc sarmc rmanner as the Asgādhyāyi Of
Pāraini which treatS One afer another theseveral grammatical clements Such
as technical terms, padas of roots, case-relations, compOund wOrds, krt
affixes, taddhita, affixes, substitutes, acccnts and cuphonic change'S ; while
others giwe a topic-Wise treatment following in , that respect the ancicnt
gramtmariams befOre Patini such as Indra, Vedic Sāka!ंayana and OtherS whO
treated one after another the differcnt topics of grammar such as the eu-
phonic changes, declension, conjugation,compound formation, nouns derived
frOm rOOts, nouns derived from nouns and the like. The special featurc of
all these gramimarS was that they cntircly omitted the Vedic peculiariticS
and accents.
Sanskrit Grammar as a Science
The $ubject ofSanskrit grammar was first treated as a seience by the two
epoch-making grammarians, first by Kātyāyana a few centuries aftef Pānini,



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-011.png}}}}}}

Xi
and then by Patafijali, the exponent of Kātyāyana who lived in the secOnd
century B. C. It was carried to perfection by the stalwart grammarian
Bhartrhari of the seventh century A. " ID. Later grammarians, prominent
among whom were.Jayāditya, Vamana, Kaiyata, Haradatta, Bhattoji, KOf!-
पैabhatta and NāgeŚa, developed by their substantial contributions, the wOrk
of Pāmini as a science to such an extent that the number Of Smaller and
greater works well nigh rOse to eight hundred and that of the authOrS tO
four hundred. The grammar of Pataini, which is looked upon as the
standard one at present gives about a hundred technical terms, more than
twO hundred suffixes, about two thousand primary roOts and more than
five thOusand special wOrds arranged in more than twO hundred arad fifty
claSSes according to the special grammatical peculiarities shown by each
claSs- The number of independent primary words, besideS these five
thousand special words, if roughly estimated, may exceed even twenty-five
thousand. Besides these primary roots, primary nOuns, affixes and tech-
nical terms in the different Shastras, there is a vast number of SecOndary
rOOtS and secondary nouns, which is rather impossible even to be apprO-
ximately determined.
Nature and Scope of this Dictionary
The preparatiotn of a comprehensive dictionary of San$krit Gramtmar,
a Subject which has been developed fully by Sanskrit Grammarians for the
laSt two thousand years, is certainly a sf upendous work which can Only be
done by a band of grammarians who have got a sound footing in the sub-
ject. In the light of wha t has been said above, the present dictionary is Only
an hOnest and humble attempt in that direction, rmade by the cOmpiler whO
waS inspired tO undertake this rather arduous venture by his c!oSe study Of
the subject for more than sixty years according to the traditional method of
the East, combined with the critical and comparative tmethod of the West•
A$ the work was done single-handed, and finished within a limited
time with a view to rmaking it available to students and scholars of Sans-
krit at aS early a date as possible, the number of bookS consulted was a
limited one. The nutrāber of emtries is more than four thouSand Out Of
which the important Ones are in the form of short articles Supplying very
briefiy the necessary information frotm the different sources with quota-
tiOns frOm Or references to the original works. All the standard workS in
grammar have beera carefully consulted including the available Prātiśā-
khya wQrks, the Mahābhāsya, the Kāśikā, the, Vakyapadiya, the Siddhānta-
Kaumudi and others. The Kātantra, the Sāl5atāyana, the Jainendra, the
Haima and other grammars, as also the different Paribhā$a works have
been cOnSulted at important places. Minor works and commentaries are
nOt cOnsulted as the important words and topicS Occurring therein have
been mOStly included here on account of their occurrence in the major
wOrkS. Attention is, of course, paid to grammatical importance and
significance, and only such such words and Such senses of them as have a
grammatical significance, have been included in the present dictionary
along with affixes, augments, substitutes and technical terms mostly given



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-012.png}}}}}}

xii
in Pātjini's grammar. Names of authors and bookS, printed as, well as
found in a manuscript form, have been included aS fār as pragticabl६ in
the present work. A $crupulouS atteration has beeh Paid tO the Prātiśākhya
works, the Mahābhāgya and the Kā$ikā which are lo9ked upon, as Supr€rne:
ly authoritative in thié field of Sanskrit grammar., It tपूरे॒ust be adrप्itted
that the scholarly index works of Dr. BÔthlingk and Dr., RenOu were found
very useful in providing references tO standaऐंd grainrmar workS•
Th6 abbreviations ^ for the titles of bookS COnSulted and thOse Of gra-
mmatical terms are given separately at the beginning Of the Present
* Dictionary of Sanskrit Grammar.' Names of bOokS and authOr$ have
been sometimes given in the Roman script and SOrmetimes in th e Deva-
māgari Script.
Conclusion
Acknowledgerments are due to Mr. M. N. Chapekar, AryaSaraskriti
Mudranalaya, Poona, who has givera armple cO-OperatiOn in getting this
IDictionary printed in the shortest possible time. For facility Of prir1ting,
accents of Vedic passages and words are not shOwn, nor italics have been
used for Sanskrit terms written in the Rorman Script nOr the breaking of
a word at the end of a line is done scrupulOusly at the end Of a syllable Or
a eonstituent part. In spite of all pOssible care, SOme slipS have crept in
for which the indulgence of the reader is craved. It is cxpected that
Samskrit scholars will make full use of this work and offer their valuable
suggestions for future undertakings of this type.
A sincere sense of gratitude must be conveyed tO Dr. Bhogilal J•
Sandesara, the Director of the Oriental Institute, Baroda, at whose initia-
tiwe the project of this * Dictionary of Sanskrit Grammar,? undertaken
some years ago, but postponed from time to time, was not only purSued
with vigour, but completed and turned into a volurne in the Gaekwad
Oriental Series.
601-2 Sadashiv Peth,
Laxmi Road, Poona 2.
Varshapratipada, Shaké 1883.
|17-3-61.
K. V- A1BHYANKAB-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-013.png}}}}}}

HINTS FOR THE USE OF THIS DICTIONARY
l• Words in this dictionary are arranged in the $erial order of the
Sanskrit alphabet which is current ' everywhere, viz. the fourteen wowels
beginning With अ and ending with औ, and then the thirtythree consonants
.consisting of the five guttural, the five palatal, the five cerebral, the five den-
tal and the five labial consonants and then the four semi-wowels and the
four ईjants, क्ष्त् is taken as a combination of क् and ष्, and श्त् as one of
जूं and ञ्म् .
2. Words are given in their noun-base ( प्रातिपादेक ) such as अकर्मक,
अकार, अक्षर etc., without the addition of any case affix.
3• At places of option where any one of the anusvāra and the
parasavarna could be used, the anusvāra is consistently used, and a place
after the vowels and before the consonants is assigned to it in the alpha-
betical order. For example, the words containing anusvāra such as संकर्ष, संक्रम,
संचय, संशा, संतान, संधि, संप्रसारण, संयेोग, संवरण, सेसर्ग, संहिता etc., are all placed after स
and before सक्, सकर्मक etc.
4. Each word entered, has got only one paragraph asSigned to it,
although the explanation of the word may cover sometimes a full page
OI' 1mOI'6>.•.
5. The meaning or meanings of a word are giwen immediately
after it, and th.erefore no capital letter is used at the beginning of the word
with which each meaning begins. →
6. The various senses of a word are given one after another with
serial numbers placed before them. The several senses of a Word are
arrangcd as far as possible in their chronological order of origin•
7. The various senses are usually illustrated with quotations from
standard authors with full references as far as possible. FrOrm among the
Prātiśākhya works, the Rkprātiśākhya is generally quoted, while from among
the numerous grammar works, the Mahābhā5ya and the Kà$ikā are
quoted profusely.
8. The first figure in references, which is gencrally the Roman
one, refers to the main section Such as the adhyāya or the Kārida or the
Patala, while the next one refers to the subordinate Sections, such as the
stahza or the Stitra or the like. When there are three figures they refer to
the adhyāya, the pada and the Stitra in the case of Pānini, and to the
Matर्षुala,...the Sükta and the stanza in the casc of the Rksathhitā.
9. ' When a particular form is illustrated, the illustration begins
with the abbreviation *e, g.'; while usually, when the sen$e given; is illustra-
ted, the explanation or the quotation in Sanskrit begins with the abbrevia•
tion *cf*.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-014.png}}}}}}

xiv
10. pach of the different senses of a wOrd or of the uses of a word
in different ways, begins with a scparate. number .(l), (2), (3), etc.; when
however, the samc sense is givcm with different shades of it, by words which
are practically synonymous, no Separate numbcrS arc given, the shades of
sens6s being separated by a Colon, Or by a Comma•
1 1. As the senscs given in Such dictiOnarieS are more or less
technical or conventional, thc literal Or thc uSual scnse of thc words is givem
only when it is a]lied to the conventional Sensc•
12.
Sat;skrit words are generally given in the IDevanāgari script;
when, however, the Roman script is used, the diacritical markS which are
in current use at present, are employed•
LIST OF' WORKS AND AUTHORS CONSULTED
( In order of abbreviations used )
A. Pr.= Atharvaveda Prāti$ākhya.
Ast:ādhyāyī =Pānini's A$ंādhyāyÎ.
|Bhi.. Vr. = Bh१g?ivrtti of Puru$Ottarma-
deva• →
Bhār. Siks =|Bhāradvāja Sik$ā.
C. Vy., Cān. Vy. = Cāndra Vyāka-
1rai0a-
Dhātuvrtti = Mādhaviyā Dhātuvrtti.
Durgācārya = Durgacārya's commen-
tary on the Nirukta.
IDurgasirihha=Durgasirihha's Kātantra-
Stitravptti. →
|Durgh. Vr = |DurghataVFtti of Sara-
nadewa. →
Hem.=Hemacandra's SabdānuŚāsana.
Hem. Pari.=Hemacandra's Paribhā-
$āpagha as given by Hemaharihsa-
gatii•
Jain., Jain. Vy.=.jainendra Vyāka-
rar)a by Püjyapāda Devanandin.
Jain. Pari. =.Jainendra Paribhā$āvrtti
by K. VY. Abhyankar.
Kaiy., Kaiyata न्ल्= Kaiyata's
bhā5yapradipa.
Kālāpa -|Kālāpa-Vyākaranastitra.
|Kāś.=Kāśikā ofJayāditya and Vām-
anaः
Mahā-
Kās. viv. = Kã$ikāvivaraऐapaijikā,
known by the natme Nyāsa.
Kāt. = Katantra Vyākarat}a Stitra..
ां Kāt. Pari. Durg.== Kātantra Paribhā-
5āvFtti by Durgasimha.
Kàv. Prak.= Kāvyaprakā$a of Marn-
mata.
Laghumaऐjt!$श्a =
Nāge$a.
M. Bh. = Mahābhāgya of Pataiijali
on the Stitras of Pānini (lDr.
|Kiclhorn's edition ).
|Mahābhā$ya Vol. VII =The Volume
of the introduction in Marāthi to
the Pātafijala Mahābhāsya, wtitten
by K. V• Abhyankar and publi-
shed by the 33. E. Society, Poona.
Mahābhã$yadtpikā = commentary on
the Mahābhāsya by Bhartrhari.
Muktāvali = Nyāyamuktāvali of
Vi$vanāthapaficānana.
Laghumaप्रेjuऽष्ā of
| Nandikeśvara=Nandikeśvarakārikā.
Nir. =|Nirukta of Yāska..
ाँश्er•3० ~ -372a5*b-ठ¢7$ → →→→ →
| Nyāsa=KãŚikāvivarataapafंjikā, a corm-
iaentary, or३ .the Kāśikāvptti by
.Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa.
P., Pān=Pāmini's Asहुंādhyayi.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-015.png}}}}}}

Padamafंjari = Padamafijarाँ, a com-
mentary on the Kāśikāvपूtti by
Haradatta.
Pān. Sik.=Sikgā of Panini.
Par. Bhās. = Paribhasābhāskara of
Haribhāskara Agnihotri.
Par. Sek. = |Paribhāsenduśekhara of
Nageśa.
Paramalaghumaऐठॆjti$ष्ā = Paramala-
ghumaऐठॆjti$ā of Nage$abhattः१.
Pari. Sang. = Paribha3āsariagraha by
K. V. Abhyankar.
Phij.. Stitra.=Sāntanava's Phijstitra.
Pradipa = Kaiyata?'s Mahābhāgyapra-
dipa.
Puru$otta m=Purusottamadeva?s Pari-
bhāgāvrtti. →
R. Pr. ==RgvedaprātiŚākhya by Sau-
naka ( Samskrit Sahityapari$ad
|Edition, Calcutta.)
R..T. = bktantra PrātiŚākhya.
R. V.•, Rgveda, Rk. Satihh =Rgveda-
, sarihhitā. r
SabdakauStubha =न्= Sabdakaustubha
, of Bhattoji Dik$ita.
Sāk. =Sākajāyana's Sabdānuśāsana.
Sak. Pari = Sākatāyana Paribhā$ā-
pātha.
S. K. Sid.Kau. =Siddhāntakaumudi.
Siradeva, Sirradeva's Paribhāga-
wrtti.
$iva Stitra = Māheśvarastitras.
xv
Sठैring-Prak. = Sringāraprakāśa
Bhoja.
T. Pr. =Taittiriya PrātiŚākhya.
Tait. Safnh.=Taittiriya Safihhitā.
Tattwabodh. = Tattvabodhini
JfiānendraSaraSwati.
Tattvacintāma|)i = Tattvacintāmani
of Gaihgeśopādhyāya.
Tribhāgyaratna = commentary on
the Taittiriya Prāti$ākhya.
Uddyota Mahābhāgya-Pradipod-
dyota by Nāgeśa.
Un. Stitra =Utādistitrapaficapādi.
Un. Sutravr. = Unādisütravrtti
Ujjwaladatta.
Upa manyu = Nandikeśvarakārikā-
bhāsya by Upamanyu •
Uvvata = Uvvata's Bhāsya on the
|Prāti$akhya workS. →
V. Pr. = Vājasaneyi PrātiŚākhya.
Vaidikābharataa, = commentary on
the Taittirīya Prāti$ākhya.
Vaiyākaranabhuigaraa=KOndabhatta*s
Vaiyākarat]1abhü$āए?1asāra.
Vāk. Pad. = Vākyapadiya of Bhartp-
hari.
Vāk. Pad. tikā = Commentary on
Bhartrhari's Vakyapadiya.
V.-, Vart. न्= Vārttikas on the Suitras
of Pānini as given in the Mahā-
bhā$ya (Dr. Kielhorn's edition.)
Vyādi=Vyāपुंiparibhasāsücana..
of
by
by
 



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-016.png}}}}}}

ABBREVIAT[ONS USED.
abl. ablatiwe caSe.
abowe a reference tO Some preced-
ing word, not neceSSarily on the
Same page•
acc. accuSative case.
adj. adjective.
adw. adverb.
Ahn• Ahnika
Mahābhā$ya.
aor. aorist.
Atm. or Atmanep. Ātmanepada.
cauS. cauSal.
cf. confer, compare.
com. commentary.
cOmp• COmpOund.
cond. COnditional.
cOrij• cOrjugatiOn.
dat. dative case.
desid* desiderative.
dual. dual number.
ed.• edition.
e•g• 6xermpli gratia, for example.
etc• et cctera, and other8.
f, fem• feminine.
freq. frequentative.
fut. future.
gen. genitive case.
gend.• gender.
gr. grammar,
i.e. id est, that is.
imperf. imperfect.
irmpera• imperative.
of the Patafंjala
! ind. indeclinable.
inf. infinitiwe.
ins•, inst• instrumental case.
kपू't. k[t (affix).
lit. literally.
|loc. · locative case.
maSc. masculine gender.
rmS. manuscript.
|ncut. neuter gender.
nOm. nOminative case.
Pan. Pajini.
p•p.p. past paSsive participle.
ParaSrmai. ParaSmaipada.
pari. paribhāsā.
part. participle.
paSS• paSSive voice.
perf. perfect.
perS. person.
pl. plural.
preS. present tense.
|prOr1• prOnoun.
SeC• SecOnd.
sing• singular.
Subj. Subjunctive.
Suf. Suffix.
tad• taddhita affix.
Vart. Vārttika (on
Pānini).
Wed. Wedic.
vide see
v• l• varia !ecfio, another reading-
the Sutra of
wOC. wOcative case.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-017.png}}}}}}

A D}ictioi1ary 0ाँ Sanskrit Gram1miar.
अ (1)_the first letter of the alphabet
in Sanskrit and its derived langua-
geS, rCpreSenting the SOund a (अ) ;
(2) the v0wel a (अ} representing in
grammatical treatises, except when
prescribed as an affix or an atug-
ment Qr a Substitute,all its eighteen
varietieS caused by accentuation
or nasalisation or lengthening; (3)
perSQnal ending a (अ) of the perf.
sec.pl.and firSt and third pers.sing.;
(4) kपु't affix ८a (अ) prescribed espe-
cially after the denominative ānd
Secondary rOOtS in the sense of the
yerbal activity e. g. बुभुश्क्षंीं, चिन्त[,
ईश्क्षीं, चचाँ etc.cf. अ प्रत्ययात् etc. (P.III.
3.l02-106); (5) sign of the aorist
mentioned 8S af? (अङ्) or caiळे (चङ्)
by Panini in P. III ].48 to 59 e.g.
अ॒गमत्, अर्चीकरत्; (6) conjugational
$ign fnentंiQued a8 ś:rg (श्शप्) or $a (श)
by Panini in P. III.1.68, 77. e. g.
भवति, तुदति etc.; (7) augment ai;
(अम्) as prescribed by P. VI.1.58;
e• g• द्रष्टा, द्रक्ष्यति ; (8X augment c7¢
(अद्) prefixed to a root in the im-
perf. and aorist tenses and in the
cOnditional mood e. g. अभवत्, अभूत्,
अभाविष्यत् cf. P. VI.4.71 ; (8) Ā7;
श्affix a (अ) prescribed as अंङ्, अवृ,अञ्जु,
अणु, अन्, अप्, क, ख, घ, ञ, ट, ड, ण, etc.
in the third Adhyāya of Pāhini's
A$[ādhyāyi; (9) tad. affix a (अ)
mentioned by Pānini as अच्, अञ्ज्ञ, |'
अणू, अ etc. in the fourth and the
fifth chapterS of the Agadhyayī of
Pamini; (10) the samā$āntaaffix a
(अ), aS alsO Statcd in the form of
the SamāSanta affixes (डच्च, अचु,
टश्,ष्र्च्ं, ष्र, अ॒पू, and अञ्श्ञ् ) by Paninii
in V.4. 73 to 12l ; (1 1) substitutc a
(अश) accentcd grawe for इदम
before case-affixes beginning with
the inS. case; (12) remnant (अ)
of the negative particle नश् afीer
the e:lision of the consOnant
fa (न्) by नलेोपो नञ्ञः P. vi. 3.73.
र्मे ( '-) nasal utterance called अनुस्वार
and written aS a, dot above the
vowel preceding it. cf. स्वरमनु संर्लीनं
शव्द्यते इति; it is pronounced after a
wowel as immersed in it. The
anuSwāra iS considered (1X aS Only
a, naSalization of the preceding
vowel being in a way completely
amalgamated with it. cf. T. Pr. V•
|1 1,3 l ; XV. 1; XXIÎ. 14 ; (2) as
a maSal addition to the preceding
wowel, many timeS preScribed in
grammar aS *1at¢ (नुट्.|) Or ?it¢11t (नुम् )
which is changed into anuSvāra in
which case it is looked upOn aS a
Sort of a, voWel, while, it iS looked
upon as a consOnant when it is
changed into a cognate , of the
following consonant (परसवर्ण) or re-
tained as ?? (न्). cf. P. VIII.4.58;
(3) as a kiiad CfcOnSOnant Of the
type of nasalized half & (ग्ं) aS des-
cribed in some treatises of the
Yajurveda Prātiśakhya; cf also R.
Pr,.1.22 V. Pr.14.148-9. The vowel
element of the anuSwāra became
more prevalent later on in Pali,
Prakrit, ApabhralihŚa and in the
spoken modern kanguagcS while
the consonantal element became
more predominant in claSSical
Sanskrit.
अंशिसमास the same as एकदेशिसमास or
अवयवसमास or अवयवघ्ष्षृष्टीतत्पुरुप prescrib-
ed by the rule पूर्वापराधरोत्तरंमकदेशिनैका-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-018.png}}}}}}

→
अंशुठुrग्Î, also अंश्वादिगण a claSS Of WOrds
अ: ( : ) visarga callcd visarjaniy:३ in
अशुगणा 2
धिकरोण P. ÎI.2.1 and the following
|P. [I.2.2 and 3; c. g. पूर्वेकयि:,
अपरकाश्यः, अर्धपिप्पली etc.
hcaded by अंशु which have their
last vowel accentcd acute whcn
thcy stand at the cnd Of a tat-
puru३$a, corrapound with thc wOrd
भ्रति as the first mermbcr. Cf. P.
W7[. 2. 193.
ancient Works and shaOWn in Writing
by twO dots, Onc bclow the Othcr,
exactly of the Same size, like the
pair ofbreasts of a maiden aS jOcu-
|larly expressed by Durgasirihha.
cf. अः इति विसर्जनीयः । अकार इह उच्चार-
णार्थः । कुश्ारीस्तनयुगाकृतिर्दणेीं विसजर्नीयसंज्ञेा
भवति॒ि ( दुर्गसिंह on कातन्त्र !.1.16).
विसर्ग iS always a, dependcnt letter
included among the Ayogavāha
letterS and it is lookcd upon as a
WoWel whcn it forms a part of thc
preccding vowel; while it is lookcd
upOn aS a ConSOnant When it is
changed into the .Jihvāmtiliya or
the Upadhmānīya letter.
< क् (॰<) ञ्जिह्वामूर्लीय, represented by a
sign like the वज्रं in Writing, as Stated
by DurgaSifhha whO remarkS वज्रा-
कृतिर्वर्णेाँ जिह्वामूलीयसंज्ञेो भवति. Thc .jihvā-
mtilya iS only a woiceleSS breath
folloWing the utterance of a wOWel
and preceding the utterance of
the gutteral letter क् or ख्व्.. It is
looked upon as a letter (वर्ण), but
dependent upon the following
consonant and hencc looked upon ']
as a consOnant. e. g. विष्णु >< करोति.
< पू (<) Upadhmāniya represented
by a sign like the temple of an ele-
|phantaS Statedby Durgasitihha who
remarkS ** गजकुम्भाकृतिर्वर्ण उपध्मानीयसंज्ञेो
भचति.** Kāt.I. It is a vciceless breath
follOWing the utterance ofa vowel
and preceding the utterance of the
labial letter £? ( प् ) or £h ( फ ). It
अकथित
is lookcd upon aS a lctter ( वर्ण ),
but dcpendent upOn tiae following
cOriSOnaःnt and hence lookcd upon
aS a cOı1SOnant.
अञ्:व्*र name givcn to the ?tont. caSc
iih the Taritlfrj:y¢¢ Pr?7#iŚंikh:yd.cfअ:कार
इति प्रथमाविभक्तेंतंरपलक्षणम् T. Pr. I. 23.
अछ्र् ( ! ) condcnscd expression
(प्रत्याश्छ्टुार ) reprcscnting the letters
अ, इ, उ, ऋतं and ल in P':ānini's
Gramrnar cf. P. VI. ! . 12, 101;
VII. 4. '2. ( 2 ) sign (र्थिक्ररण) of thc
benedictive in Vedic ILiterature in
th c casc of thc rOot दृश् c. g. धितरं च
दृशेiर्थे i'. III. l . 86 V 2;' ( ४ ) remn-
ant of thc tcrnnination अश्क्रुचू P. V.
3. 71 ; ( 4 ) substitute (अादेश) अकङ्
for thc last wowel of thc word
मुधा g ( l?'. IV. 1. 97 ) e. g. सोधातकिः.
अक (1) afijx अकतं substituted for the
afiix चु givcn in }'ध्ānini's Grammaar
as- प्रञ्छुञ्छ् as in अाश्शि*,!, शiथिका (P.1II.
3. l l 1); ण्ठुट् as it1 कार्श्क:, भेीजंकंीं व्रज्ञति,
धिचाश्चक्रा (P. III. 1. 133, III. 3.
10, 108); ह्युच् as in उपक्र: (b?.V.3.80);
वुश्ञ् as in न्न्दिश्कः, राजश्कम्, भालबश्क: ( IP.
III. 2. 146, IV. 2. 39, 5:8 ctc. );
दुन् as iia प्रश्चकः, संरश्कi: ; *hमक:, पदक:.
III.1. 149, IV. 2. 6l ctc.
अकङ् substitute ( अादेश ) for the last
letter of the word मुधादृनृ prcscribcd
along with thc tad. aflix इव्म् by P.
IV. 1. 97. c. g. सीधात*िफे:
अकच् affix prescribcd before thc last
Syllable of !?ronounS and indcclin-
|ables without any specific scnse
for it (P. V.3.71) c. g. सर्वकः, उच्चकैः
6टैtc.
अकथित not mcntioncd by any other
caSc-relation such as अपादान, संग्रदान
and अधिकरण; statcd with respcct
tO thc indircct object, governed
by rootS pOSScSsing •two objects
Such as दुहूँ, यान्क्ष् and others, which
in thc paSSive woice is put in
the mominative case. The in-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-019.png}}}}}}

अकम्पित
अभकालव्क
direct object is called akathita
because in SOme caSeS there
exists no othcr caSe-relation as,
for example, in पीरवं गां याचते or
भिक्षते, or माणवकतं पन्थानं पृच्छति; while,
in the other caSes, the other
case-relations (with the activity
expressed by the verb) are wil-
fully suppressed Or ignored al-
though they exist, aS for instance
in गां दोग्धि पयः, अन्ववरुणद्धि गां व्रजम्ः see
अकथितं न्च P. 1. 4.5l and the Mahā-
bhāsya thereon.
अकम्पित not shaken; tremulous: said
with respect to vowels in Vedic
utterance, kampa being looked
upon as a fault of utterance., cf
अकाग्पतान् । कम्पनं नाम स्वराश्रितपाठदेघिः
प्रायेण दाक्षिणात्यानां भवति । तमुपलश्य स वज्यै:।
R.. Pr... ]III. 31.
अकर्तृ a case-relation excepting that
of the subject to the verbal acti-
vity. cf. अकतीर च कारके संज्ञायाम् P.
III. 3.I9.
अकर्मक intransitive, without any ob-
ject, (said with regard to rootS
which cannot pOSSeS$ an object Or
whose object is SuppreSSed Or
ignored). The reasOns for SuppreS-
sion are briefiy given in the well-
known stanza ; धातोरर्थान्तरे वृत्तघीत्वर्थे-
नेोपसंग्रहात् । प्रसिद्धरविवक्षातः कर्मणेोऽ कर्मिका-
क्रिया |ll In the case of intransitive
roots, the verbal activity and itS
· fruit are centred in one and the
same individual wiz. the agent Or
कर्ताcf. फलब्यापारयोरेकानष्टतायामकर्मक: Vak.
Pad.
अकाण्डताण्डन्च name of the comrnen-
tary by Harinatha On the Pari-
bha$enduśekhara ( परिभाषेन्दुशेखर ) Of
Nageśabhatta.
अकाम ( अकामसंधि ) an invariable (नित्य)
' euphonic change ( संधि ) such as
the dropping Of thc conSOmant ?°
( र ) whem followed by r. cf. R. Pr.
IV. 9. ' रेफोदयेो ळुष्प्यते द्राधितॊपधा ह्रस्वस्या- t
कामनियता उभाविमी । c. g. युवेा रजांसि,
सुयमासो अश्वा रथ: R. V. I. 180.1.
अक,[र thc lettcr d, ( अ{ ) inc!|usive of
all itS eighteen kinds caused by
ShOrtneSS, length, protraction,
accentuation and nasalization in
|Pānini's grammar, in cases where
॰aटं (अ) is nOt actually preScribed as a
termination or an augment or a
substitute. cf. अणुदित्सवर्णस्य न्वाप्रत्ययः P.
|I• 1.73. The letter is generally
given as the first letter of the
alphabet ( वर्णसमाम्नाय ) in all Pra-
tisākhya and grammar works
except in the alphabet termed
VarnopadeŚa, as mentioned in thc
Rk Tantra cf. ए ओो ऐ औो अा ऋ लछ्ट्र
ई ऊ ऋ ल इ उ अाः । रयवलाः । ङञणनमाः ।
→ → → → → → → →अ॒: *< क > पाः । हुं कुं ख्जुं शुं धुं अं
अां एवमुपदेशे etc. R. T.Î. 4.
अकारक not causing any verbal
activity; difierent from the kàra-
kas or instruments of action such
aS the agent, the object, the
instrument, the recipient ( संप्रदान ),
the Separated ( अपादान ) and 1he
location, ( अधिकरण ) cf. M. Bh. on
I.4.23, 29 and 5l and on II.5.1.
अकायै not a grammatical pcsitive
operation: e. g. elision (लोप.) cf.
ननु च लेीप एवेत्कायै स्यात् । अकार्य लेोपः l
M. Bh. on I.3.2.
अकालक (1) not limited by any time-
factors for its study Such aS cer-
tain periods of the day or the
year. (2) not characterizcd by any*
technical terms expreSsive of
time such as ddyata¢mi, £ar0h'&ंi
०ccurring in the ancient Prāti-
śākhya and grammar workS. The
term akfit tkd is uscd by thc
writers of the Kāśikप्āvjrtti in cOn-
nection with the grammar Of'
|Pathini. cf. **पाणिन्युपज्ञमकालकं व्याकरणम्'
IKās. on P. II.4.2l explaincd by
the writer of the Padamafijari a5



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-020.png}}}}}}

अकलठपक
पूर्वाणि व्याकरणानि अद्यतनाादेकालपरिभाष्प्रा-
|युक्तानि तद्रहितम्पृ, !
अकालाप्ञ्क differernt from thc Kãl:àpa !
or the revised Kātantra Gra m-
mar cf. पाणिन्युपज्ञमकालापकं व्याकरणम् Kā$.
on P. II.4.2!.
अार्वकेत् not maarked by the m ute
letter kः ( क्रू ) ar:d hencc not dis-
allowing guha, or v[ddhi Stub-
stitutes for the preceding vowel, cf. ;
स्सृजिदृशोर्झल्यमकिति P. VI. 1.58; दीघ्रेॉऽ-
क्रित: P. VII. 4.83.
अछृ॒त् lit. non-kJ'tः an afÎix applied
to a root, but different from thc
conjugational affixeS. cf. अकृत्र्तीर्व-
धातुक्रयेादाँर्ध: P. VII. 4.25.
अछृत not established; Said of a
grammatical Operation which haS
not taken place e. g. अकृतसंधिकार्यम्
M. Bh. on V. 2.100, W. 3.84. alsO
कृताकृतप्रसाङ्गेि नित्यम् M. Bh. on Vi.
4.62.
अकृतकारि doing or accomplishing
what is not done Cr acCompli-
shed; the expreSSion is uSed in
connection with gratm:matical
operations like ह्रस्वक्ररण or दर्धिकरण
only in cases where it is ncceSsary
i, e. where already thcrcः is mo
|hraSva Or dirgha cf. अकृतकारि खल्श्चपि
शास्त्रमाग्निवत् l तद्यथा t अग्नियैददग्श्धं तद्दहति ।
|M. Bh. on VI. 1.127. Thc rules
of Grammar, like fire, are applied
tO placeS where they producc a
change.
अकृतव्यूह short expression for the
grammatical maxim अकृतव्यूहूाः पाणेि-
नीयाः which means **the follðwers of
Pāmini do not insist on the taking
effect of a rule when its cause
or causcs disappear.'* See Par.
$ek. Pair. 56.
अकृतसध word or expreSSion With-
out the n6ceSSary euphonic chan-
geS cf वरुणtदनां च तृर्तायात् स च
अकृतंसंधीँनाम् P. V. 3.84 vārt. 1.
4
अक्रियाज
|| अकृतसंहित words cndi1]g with a
| breatluing C)r visarg:u, which are
| 1:Ot lO(}kgCl t!pO11 aS placgd iImimc-
|| diatcky bÇfUrc the ncxt Word and
| |hcnce which have no combination
|| with the following vowcl c. g. एष्त्र
|| देट्टैवे॒ौ अम्ल्यैः R. V. I &.3.1.
|| अष्ट्रत्रिम non-tccl:nical; not formcd
ं Or r1Ot arriv'cd at b,y granamatical
Opcratio11S St३ch aS thc applica-
tioI1 of affiixcS tO crudg bascs
a nd SO Qn ; natt1r*tl; aSSigncd otnly
}»y a CCidctnt|. cf: th&: gram. maxim
कृत्रि«iià.त्रैिस्येोः श्रृं,त्रिभ कीर्श्वरंसंग्रत्ययः which
imc:anS ** i]1 c:३$t!ँs ( )ँ!' ५lt)ul)t whcthcr
an C?pcr:utiot1 rcfटे:rs to that cx-
prcSScd by {!he tcchnicāl scnse or
to {hat which is cxpressed by the
ordii18ःry 8gn$c: of a tcrm, thc
Opcration rcf**1'S {o whaut iS cxpre-
, SScd by thc tccl1mic::ul 8ct1S«*.'* Par.
|! $ek. P:ar.'9 also M. Bh. on I. 1.28.
; अष्ट्र॒त्स्न-अछृ.त्रुनt, an epitl1et applicd to
thc pro1nunciat.tiora of Vcda, words
itmprOpcrly which df)cS 11ot
scrv'c any tuScft३l pttrp(}Se. cf.
अछृ,त्रनl अप्रश्थेीं:ंiना इत्यर्थः Uv:a!a o1n R.
|iPr. XIV. 68.
^\ →
अांकुंत् not posscssing tlic mu{cः l५;ttcr
fः (क्) or {:ः (ग्!) or ?? ( छ्* ) a11d hencc
not prevCr1ting thc gu'}a and
v!'ddhi SubstitutcS for thc prcccding
vowel, if thcy occur. e. g. {gजंरकॄि-
त्मु ग्रल्यय'धुं मृद्भिiप्रसंक्षे मााञ्र्ध्नि: स{:धुर्भव॑ति ।
|M.Bh. on३ P. Î.I.I. Vār't.1t).
अवल्त dcfinitc, known or spccified
dcfinitely. cf. अक्ष्तपरिमाणानामर्थानां
वाचकt भवान्ति य Uते संर&याशब्दाः qरिमाण्-
शव्दाश्च M. fBh. I.1.72.
अक्रियाज not a rcsult of a verbal acti-
vity ; thc cxpre8SiOn is uscd in con-
|mcction with qualiticS ( ¢)n a sub-
Star1Cc) श्aS opp0S6d to thc activitic8
found in it. cf. अाधयश्चाक्रियान्नश्च सेीऽ
सल्वप्रकृातैर्गुणः M. Bh. on IV. 1.44,



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-021.png}}}}}}

अक्षद्यूतादिगण
अक्षच्छूतादिगाण्ा a claSS of wOrds headed
by अक्षद्यूत which take thc tad. affix
#hak ( इक) in the Sci}se c\f *re$ulting
from' e. g. अाक्षद्यूतिकं वैरम्, जानुप्रहृतिकम्,
गातागार्तकम् etc. cf. P IV.4.19.
अक्षर a letter of the alphabet, such
aS• cz (अ) Or ? {इ) or ih (ह) or 3y (श्यू) or
the like• The wOrd was originally
applied in the Prātiśākhya works
tO vOwels (long, short as also pro-
tracted), to consonants and the
ayogavāha letters which were tied
down tO them as their appendages.
Hernce अक्षर came later on to mean
a syllable i. e. a vowel with a cor2-
Sonant or cOnsonants preceding or
following it, or without any con-
SOnant.at all. cf. ओोजा हृस्वा: सप्तय्मान्ता:
स्वराणामन्ये दीघ उभये अक्षराणि R Pr. I 17-19
Cf.एकाक्षरा, व्यक्षरा etc. The term akśa-
ra waS alsO applied to any letter
(वर्ण), bc it a ' vowel or a conso-
nant. cf. the terms एकाक्षर, सन्ध्यक्षर,
समानाक्षर used by Patajिali as also by
the earlier writers. IFor the etymo-
logy Of thc term see Mahābhā5ya
अक्षरं न क्षरं विद्यात्, अश्क्षेोतेव सरोऽश्क्षरम् । ' वर्णे
वाहुः पूर्वसूत्रे । M. Bh. Āhnika 2 end.
वक्त name given to the
dvipādā virāj vcrses ' divided into |
padas of five syllables. cf विराजो
द्विपदाः केचित् सर्वा अाहुश्चतुष्पदाः । कृत्वा
पञ्चाक्षरान्पादांस्तास्तथाऽक्षरपङ्क्तयः R. Pr.
XVII. 50.
अक्षरसमाम्नाय aiphabet; traditional
enutmeration of phonetically inde-
penent letters generally begin-
ning with the vowel d (अ). Al-
though the number of letters and
the order in which they are stat-
ed differ in differcnt treatiseS,
still, qualitativgly they are much
the same. The Sivastitras, on which
Panini*s grammar is based, enu-
merate 9 vOwels, 4 semi-vowels,
twenty five clasS-cOnsonants and 4 |
sibilants. The. nine vowels are five
अक्षरसमानाय
simple vowels or monOthOngS (सम-
नाक्षर) as th6y are callcd in ancient
treatiseS, ar} d the lot{r diplhthongs,
( सन्*यक्षर ). The four semi-vOwels
3', c', r; ', ( यु बुञ् र् छ् ) Or aratasthā-
warna, the twenty fiwe claSS-conso-
nar2tS Or mutcS callcd sparŚa, and
thc fot1r tीgman letterS Ś, $, S and h
( इा धूं सू ह् ) are the same in all the
PrātiSākhya and grammar works
although in thc Prāti$ākhya works
the semi-vowels are mentionedafter
the class consonants.The difierence
in numbers, as noticed, for exam-
ple in the maximum t]umber which
reaches 65 in the Vājasaneyi-
Prāti$ākhya, is due to the separate
mention of thte long and protract-
ed vowels as also tO the inclusion
of the Ayogavāha letters, and their
nutmber. The Ayogawaha letters
are anusvāra, viSarjaniya;.jihvāmti-
liya, upadhmāniya, nãSikya, four
yamas and Svarabhakti. The Rk
Prātiśākhya does not mention l (ल),
but adding long a (अा) ? (ई) ti (ऊ)
and F (ऋ) to the short vowels,
mentionS 12 wowels, and mention-
ing 3 Ayogavāhas (2< क्रू, 5< प् and अ)
lays down 48 letters. The Rk
Tantra PrātiŚākhya adds the
vowel ¢ (ल) (short as also long)
and mentions 14 vowels, 4 semi-
wowcls, 25 mutes, 4 sibilants and
by adding 10 ayogavāhas viz.
4 yamas, nāsikya, visarjanīya
jihvamttlya, upadhmāniya and two
kinds of'anusvāra, and thus brings
the total number to 57. The Rk
Tantra makes a separate enume-
ration by putting diphthongS first,
long vOWlcS afterWards and short
vowels still afीerwards, and puts
semi-VOWcls first before mutes, for
purpOses of frarning brief terms or
pratyāhāraS. This enumeration is
called varnopadeśa in contrast



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-022.png}}}}}}

अक्षराङ्ग
with the other One which is called
varhoddeŚa. 'f'he Taittiriya Pr:i-
ti$āklhya, addS protracted vOwclS
and layS down 60 letter8 ; Thc
Sikक्ष्ā 6f Panini lays down 63 Or
64 lette; s, while the Vàjasa-
neyi-PrātiŚākhya gives 65 letterS.
cf. V. Pr. VIIı. 1-25. Thc
alphabet of the modern fndian
ILanguageS iS baSScd on the
Varnasamāmràya given in thc
Vājasaneyi-Prāti$ākhya. The Pra-
tiŚākhyas call this ciaurr1eration by !
the mame Vart]a-samā1mnāya.
The Rk.tantra uscS the terrmS Akक्ष्:a- ||
and Brahmarā$i !
|rasamāmnāya
which are picked up latcr on by
|Patafंjali.cf. सेोयमक्षरसमाम्नायेो वाक्ष्सस्माश्नाय: !
पुष्पितः फलितश्चन्द्रतारकवत् प्रतिमण्डितो वेदि- !
तव्यो ब्रह्मराशिः 1 सर्ववेदपुण्यफलावाातिश्चास्य ज्ञाने !
भवति । मातापितरौ चास्य स्वर्गे लेोके महीयेते । ;
|M. Bh. Ahnika.2-end.
अक्षराङ्ग forming a part of a sy- |!
llyble .just as the anuswāra ( ma5a]
utterance ) Or Svarabhakti (vowcl-
|part) which forms a, part of thc
|preceding syllable. cf. अनुस्वारे
व्यञ्जनं चाक्षुराङ्गम् R. Pr. I.22, also
स्वरभक्तिः पूर्वभागक्षराङ्गम् R. Pr. I.32.
अखण्डशाब्दबेाध unitary import; the
meaning Of a Sentence collectivcly
underStood.
अगाति (1) absence of	any oth6r re-
* cOurSe Or alternative. cf. अगत्या हि
खलु परिभाष्प्राश्रयिते. Puruऽśottamadcva-
Pari. vrtti Pari.1 19; (2) which is rnot
a wOrd termed gati. cf. चनचिदिवगोत्रा-
दितद्धिताप्रेडितेष्वगतेः P. V[ i[.1.57.
अगामकत्वे |nOn-communicativeness,
* inability tO communicate adc-
quàtely the intended meaning. cf.
सविशेष्ञणानां वृत्तिस्तर्हि कस्मीन्न भेवति !
अगमक्रत्बात् M. Bh on II. 1.1 ; cf. also
- अगामक: निर्देश: अनिर्देशः !
अगुण non-seconday, principal; cf.
' · ध्रुवचेष्टितयुक्तिषु चाप्यगुणे तदनेल्पमतेर्बच्चेन्नं स्मरत
M. Bh. on I. 4.51.,
अग्र्टृहीत t1ncomprchcnded, uninclud-
ed cf.नाण्हीतविशेपणा शक्तिर्विश्ट्रेो'यमुपसंक्रामति ।
cf. alSo *नाल्ञ्चत्त्रैी इत्यत्र अशृहीतसंवणनिामचां
ग्रह्टुणम् b*adanaafijari o1n Kā* VIII.
3.57.
अाश्रे a tern in the Katantra grammar
for a word cnding in ? ( इ ) or ?८
( उ ) cf: इदुदञ्भि: Kāt. II. 1 *8, अझेरमेऽ
क,ार: Kāt. jं I. 1.50.
अश्निपदादिगण a clasS of words headcd
by the word अग्रिपद to which the
ta d. affix अणु is addcd in the
Scr18cS Qf * givcn thcre ? or * done
thgre ? e. g. अग्निपदम. cf. अणुप्रकरणे
अग्निपदादिभ्य उपरसंर&यानम् P. V.i.97
Vārt. 1.
^~、 *>•
अट्टश्य् an aihcicnt wrjter' of Vcdic
grarmrmar mcntiOrhed ंn the
Taittiriya Prंiti$ākhya. cf. कपवर्गपरश्च
(धिसर्ग:) अग्ग्नेिर्वेश्यघाल्मीक्येीं: ( मत्तन ऊप्माणं न
अापध्ग्रते ) T.Pr. IX. 4.
writer of
Vcdic gra1ntmar, mc ntioncd in the
Taittirjya Prāti:*ākhya. cf. न्{ाग्मिर्देधंश्या-
यन्नृस्य ( मते उदटा॒स॑पर:	रुवरितपशे वा अनुदात्तः
स्वरितं नापध्रते छ्ट्रति न) Tait. Pr. XIV.32.
अग्नौकरवााणिन्याय analogy convcycd by
thc exprcSsion अर्मेीं करवाणि implying
|perrmissiOn tO thc agent to d6
ccrtain Other•thingS in a Sacrificial
8cSsiort when, aS a. rmattcr of fact,
hC is Only permitted to work as ari
ageभूat at , the , Sacrificial action
( अश्मिर्न्नौकरण ), by virtue of thc rcply
* अ॒टु?श्र ' tO lhiS	rcqucst madc in the
Scntcncc अग्ग्रैी करेवा?ि]. cf. अर्ग्रीश्करवाणि-
न्यार्थेन भधिंप्यति M. Pश्र्h. on. II. 2.24.
अग्र the Original Sarihlhita tcxt as ०ppo-
$cd tO pratपृmma ( प्रमृण्ण ) or pada-
pātha, (पदपाट्ट) which is thc recital of
Scparate words.
अग्रवाल (VāSudcva-Sarataa Agravāla),
a. mQderra Scholar of Sanskrit
$ratmmar, the author of **India a8
|known to Pānini**. •



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-023.png}}}}}}

अग्रहण्ा
अग्रहण non-inclusion, nOn-cOmpre-
hensipn. cf. विभक्तौ लिङ्कविशिष्टाग्रहणम्
Par. Sekh. Par. 72, M. Bh. Vi I.
[•1 Vārt. 13.
अग्लोप elision of the vowcl d,
#, a¢, ?° Or { ( अ, इ, उ, च* Or लठ ) which
preventS Sanvadbhāva cf. सन्वह्श्र्छुनि
चङ्परेऽनग्लंॉपे P. VII. 4*93, as also
नाग्लेोपिशास्द्धृादितासू VīI. 4.2 where thc
elision prevents the shortening of
the penultimate vowel if it is lorag.
अघोष unvoiced, rnerely breathed;
a term applied to the Surd consO-
nants, Ś, $ s, and प्र्?fsarga which are
uttered by mere breathing and
which do not prOduce any SOnant
effect. cf. T. Pr. I. 12; R. Pr.L. l 1.
The term jit ( जित् ) is uscd for
these letterS as also for the firSt
tWO cOnSOnantS Qf a claSS in the
Vājasaneyi-PratiŚākhya. cf. द्वैौ द्वौ
प्रथमैो जित्; ऊष्माणश्च हवजैम् V. Pr.
1. 50.51.
अङ्क The wikarapa before luà affixes,
Substitutej for the affix cwi ( च्वि )
in the case of the roots mentioned
by Pānini in Stātras III. 1.52-59;:(2)
the Wikaranapratyaya in Vedic
ILiterature before the benedictive
affixes prescribed by Pānini in Stitra
III. 1*86; (3) krt affix in the
feminine gender showing verbal
activity applied to rOotS marked
· with the mute letter ष्घ् and the
roots भिद्, छिद् and otherS. P. III. 3
104-106. e.g. जरा, त्रपा, भिदा, छिद[ etc.
अङित् not marked with the mute
letter i% { ङ् ) signifying the absence
of the prohibition of the gurतूa Or
the wrddhi substitute. cf. अङिति
गुणप्रतिषेधः ( वक्तव्यः ) M. Bh. III. 3•83
Vart. 2. In the case of the preposi-
tion aटं ( अा ) unmarked with h (ङ् ),
it signifies a sentence or remembr-
ance of something cf. वाक्यस्मरणयोरङित्
e. g. अा एवं नु मन्यसे, अा एर्वे किल तत् cf.
M. Bh. on I. l*14.
7
|,
अचिकेित्स्य
~-*"
अङ्ग (l) the crude base of a noun or
a verb to which affixes are added;
a technical term in Pānini's
grammar for the crude base after
which a? affix is prescribed e. g.
उप्णु in औोपगव,or छ॒ः in करिष्यति etc. cf.
यस्र्भात् प्रत्ययविश्धेिरुतदादि प्रत्ययेऽङ्गम् P.I.4* ]3 ;
(2) Subordinate part. constituerat
part cf. पराङ्गवद् in सुबान्नान्त्रते पराङ्गवत्स्वरे
P. II, 1. 2, also विध्यङ्ग्भूतानां परिभाषाणां
Par. Sek. Par. 93*10; (3) auxiliary.
for an operation, e. g. अन्तरङ्ग, बहिरङ्गं
etc. cf. अत्राङ्गशब्देन शव्दरूपं निमित्तमेव गृह्यते
Par. Sek. Par. 50; (4) element of a,
wCr d , Or Of an expression cf.
अङ्गव्यवाये चाङ्कपरः R. T. '190, अङ्गे च
क्रूम्द्भ्यादौ |R.T. 127. व्यञ्ध्जनंं स्वराङ्गम् T.
Pr. 2] • ]!.
`अजै considered as auxiliary or part?
Of another e. g. पूर्वाङ्कवद्भावः, पराङ्गवद्भावः;
Cf. सुबामन्त्रिते परोङ्कवत्स्वरे P. II. 1*2 and
the Vārtika, thereon ** परमपि
च्छन्दसि पूर्वस्याङ्गवद् भवतीति वक्तव्यम्.''
अङ्गवृच्त an operation prescribed in
the Section named aihgādhikāra,:
cormprising the fourth quarter of
the sixth book and the whole of the
seventh book of Patāini.
अङ्गाधिकार a large section of Pānini's
Asंgādhyāyi cOvering five quarters
(VI. 4• 1 to the end of VII) in
which the variouS operationS
undergone by crude bases before
various affixes etc. are prescribed.
अङ्गुल्यादिगण claSS of words headed
by अङ्गुलि to which the tad. affix ठक्
( इक ) is added in the sense of
comparison ( इवार्थे ); e. g- अङ्गुल्ठीव
अाङ्गुलिकः cf. Kās. on P. V. 3. 108.
अच् the short term or pratyāhāra in
Pātini's Grammar repreSenting a
vowe], e.g. अजन्त (ending with a
vowcl), अच्संधि (vowcl coalescence or
combination).
अचिकित्स्य impossible to amend, not
to be discussed. cf. एवं च *पूजितेो यः



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-024.png}}}}}}

अजाादिगण 8
सुरैरपि' इति अचिक्रित्स्यः अपश्ट्रादृद:; Pada-
mafijari on P. II. 2* 12.
अजोदेिगाण class of words headed by अञ्ज
to which the fem.affix अा is added,
SOmettimes inspite of the a.ffix
ई being applicable by other ruleS
such aS जातेरस्त्रीविष्घयात० P. IV,
1,63 and other rules in the
section. e. अजl, एडकाः त्रिप्फला,
उष्णिहा, जेटा, दंट्रा. cf P. I V. 1. 4.
अजितसेन author of thc Cfrit?rIi;'¢7!t'i?-
£r'd kāśikaटं a gloSS On Cf nffii};'(?A8)', the
well knOwn cOm ir1cntary by Yakga-
varman on the Sabdānti$āSana of
Sakatāyana. Ajitasena was thc
grand pupil of Abhayadeva ; hc
lived in the 12th century A.D.
अार्जरादिगण class o[ words headed by
the wOrd अजिर which dO not allow
lengthening of the final vowel by
|P. VI. 3 I 19. although they form
technical terms e. g. अञ्जिरवती, पुलिन-
वती etc. cf. Kās on P. VI, 3. 1 19.
अज्भत्ति See under स्वर्भत्ति.
अञ् (1) tad. afiix a ( अ ) with the
mute letter ii ( ञ् ), prcScribed (i)
after the Words उत्स and otherS in
wariouS senSeS like progeny, dyed
in, produced in, COme frOm ctc.P.
TV 1*86, (ii) after the worऽàs विद and
others in the SenSc of grandson
and other deScendents.P. IW.1.l04.
For other cases see P. IW. l. 141,
161; IV. 2.12, 14 etc. IW. 3.7 etc.
[V. 4.49. The feminine is torrmcd
by adding ? ( ई ) to words ending
with this affix अश्ट्र, which have the
wrddhi vowel Substituted for thcir
initial vowel which gets thc acute
. accent also e.g. औील्स:, औोत्सी,औीदपानः,
बैद:, बैदी.
अप्ं (1) token term standing for vowels
and Semi-vOwcls excepting ¢ ( लछ् )
specially mentioned as not intcrः-
fering with the substitution of ??
$ठं•
अए
→\
( एश् ) for ?r ( न् ) c.g- गिरिणा, अार्थेण,
खर्वेण ctc. Sec P. VIII. 4*2; (2) aug-
mcnt a (अ[ट्) with a1n acutc acccnt,
which is prefixcd to verbal forrms in
the impcrfect and the aorist tenscS
and the COnditional mood. c.g.
अभवत्, अभूत्, अभविप्यत् Scc P.{V.4.71;
(3) augment ८2 ( अट् ) prcScribcd in
the Casc Of th C roots रुद्, स्त्रष्प्य् etc.
beforc a S:irvadhंituka, afÎix begin-
rning with any consotnant except ॐy
( श्यूं ), c.g. अरोदत्, अस्वपत्, अजश्क्षत्, अादत्
ctC-; See f'. VII.3, 99, 100 ;(4) aug-
rmCr1t 6t ( ॐiट ) ]prefixcd Somctimes
in Vekiic I.it.c:?':aturc to afीixcs of
the Vcdic St1!:jt३}ncti\*e ( 'श्ठ्ट ) c.g.
तारिश्ऋत्, मन्दिपत् etc. sec P. II I. 4•94.
अठच्ं taध्iं. afiix अट prcscribed aftcr
the wOrd कभैन् !by thc rulc कर्मण्!ि धटेोऽ
टच् cf कर्मर्ष्णि धटत श्कर्मट: पुरु,'प्रः Kā$. on
p. W. 2. 35.
अडच्य् tad. affix अड applied in the
SenSC Of pitiable or poor to a.
wOrd prccedcd by thc word उप
wh Cn the wh1olc word after उप i:;
drOPped. c. g उपड ( उपेन्द्रदर्t ±- अट्ट )
see. p. V. 3. 80.
अ५ (l) tokcn tt;rn1 ( प्रयिाहार ) f)r :॥i1
vQwcls and sctmivowcls whicll,
whe1YprcsCribed for :arn oper:41iori,
include all Sucli Of th cir $ub-divi-
sions.as arC Caused by lcmgth, prc9-
traCtiOf1, aCcent or naSali%ation.
cf अणुदित्सवर्णस्य चाग्रत्ययः P. I. 1. 69;(2)
tok&n tcrm for thc vowels अं, ई
ànd ॐ in,all P':itiini's rulcs except
in thc 'पुंlc !- l. 69 given abovc c.g.
see ?ट्टश्रे|धे धू:र्वभ्य दी|धr:: ]*. VI. 3.
l l I , क्रे6ग्रं: P'. VII. 4. 13. and ऽणेीऽ
प्रर्गृछृास्य. P'. VIII. 4. 57; (3) tad,
affix,* ( अ ), prcScribcd gctherally
in thc variou$ $cnscS ' such a$
*thc Of[$pring,? *dycd in,? *bclortg-
ing to ' ctc. cxccpt in cascs whcre
othcr$p९cificaffixes are prescribcdt
cf प्राग्दीव्यतोऽश्णू P. IV. 1.83; (4) kg.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-025.png}}}}}}

अणादि
9
अतसुच्
afiix a ( अ ), applied, in the
sense of an agent, tO a root with
an antecedent word (उपपद) stand-
ing as its object. e. g• कुम्भकार:, See
P.III. 2.1; काण्डलावः, see P.III.3.12.
अणादि-a term applied to all taddhita
suffीxes collectively aS they begin
with अण् cf. P. IV. 1. 83.
अणु the minimum standard of the
quantity of sound, which is not
perceived by the senses, being
equal to one-fourth of a Mātrā; cf.
अणेोस्तु तत्प्रमाणं स्यात् मात्रा तु चतुराणवात्॥| see
T. Pr. 2I. 3, V. Pr. 1. 60, A. Pr.
III• 65. Rk. tantra, however, defi-
nes अणु as hal-िa-mātrā. cf. अर्धमणु
( R.T. 1. 41 ).
अणुदिच्छाख्त्र- the rule prescribing
cognateness ( सावप्यै ) of letters. The
term refers to Panini's stitra
अणुदित्सवर्णस्य चाप्रत्ययः P. I. 1. 69. The
terms ग्रहणकशास्त्र and सवर्णशास्त्र are used
in the same sense.
अण्णैयाचार्य author of लिङ्गनिर्णयभूक्षण,
who was a Tamil Brahmana by
CaSte•
अत्(1) tech. term in Panini*s grammar
for short अ, cf तपरस्तत्कालस्य P. I. 1.
70; ओदङ् गुणः P. l. 1. 2; (2)
personal ending अ for इ ( इट् ) of
the lst pers. sing. Atm• in the
Potential, P III. 4. 106; (3) case-
affix in the case of युष्मद् and
अस्मद् for abl. sing. and pl. P. V'II.
1.3I, 32; (4) tad-affix अत् (अ)
prescribed after क्रिम् in the sense
of the loc. case before which किम्
is changed to कु, क्र being the
tad. formation; cf. P. V. 3.12 and
VII.2.105;(5) substitute अत्(शतृ) for
लट् forming the present and future
participles in the Parasmaipada..
active voice cf. लटः शतृशानचौ० P.III.
2.124 and लूटृटः सद्वा P. III. 3.14.
२
अतङ् non-Atmanepadin verbal affixes
ति, तः...मस्. P. III.4.78, Can. I.4.I I,
Sāk. 1.4.101.
अतत्काल not taking that much time
only which is shown by the letter
(wowel) uttered, but twice Or
thrice, as required by itS long Or
protracted utterance ; the expres-
sion is used in connection with
vowels in Pānini's alphabet, which,
when used in Panini's rules, ex-
cept when prescribed or followed
by the letter त्, includes their long,
protracted and nasalized utter-
amces; cf. अणुदित्सवर्णस्य चाप्रत्ययः I.1. 69.
अतदनुबन्धक not having the same
mute significatory letter, but
hawing one or two additional oneS,
cf. तदनुबन्धकग्रहणे नातदनुवन्धकस्य ग्रहणसु
(Par. S6k. Pari. 84.)
अतद्धित an afiix which is not a tad-
dhita affix. cf. लशक्रतद्धिते P.1.3.8;
M. Bh. I.3.4, V.3.1 etc.
अतन्त्र implying nO specific purpOSe;
not intended to teach anything,
अविवक्षित; e.g. ह्रस्वग्रहणमतन्त्रम् Kāś. and
Si. Kau. on तस्याादित उदात्तमधेहृस्वम्
P.1.2.32; cf. also अतन्त्रं तरानिर्देश:
( the use of तरप् does not neces-
sarily convey the sense of the
comparative degree in Pānimi's
rules) M. Bh. on P. I.2.33• This
statement has been given aS a
distinct Paribhā$ंa by Vyādi and
Sākatāyana. The author of the
Mahābhāśya appears tO have quo-
ted it from the writings of Vyādi
and the earlier grammarians• See
also M. Bh. on अल्पाच्तरम् P. II.2.34.
अतसुच् ( अतस् ) tad. aff. अतस् applied
tothe words दक्षिण, उत्तर, ' पर and
अवर;e.g.दक्षिणतेो वसति; उत्तरत अागतः, परतेो
रमणीयम्, परस्ताद्रमणीयम्,	अव॒रत , अागतः
अवरस्ताद्वेसति. cf. P. V• 2. 28, 29.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-026.png}}}}}}

अ॒तादूप्यातिदेश
अताद्रूप्यातिदेश conveyance of Only the
properties of one to another withOut
cOnveying the actual forrm, deS-
. cribed as the significance Of an-*
tādivadbhāva. cf. न वा अताद्रूप्याति-
देशात् M. Bh. oa P. VI.1.85 Vārt.
26. 'See ताद्रूप्यातिदेश below.
अताम् persomal affix of the third pcrS.
pl. Ātm. in the Imperative (लेट्)ि. cf.
P. ]III. 4. 90.
अतिक्रम passing over a word in the
क्रमपाठ without repeating it; paSSing
beyond, cf. अतिक्रम्य परिग्रहः R. Pr.
X.7, which means catching a
word for repetition by coming
back after pasSing Over it, e. g•
इन्द्राश्मी अपात् t इन्द्रामी इति इन्द्राग्नी ॥ or
अनु दक्षि । दक्षि दावने ॥ दक्षीति दक्षि ।
अतिजगती one of the varieties of-in
fact, the first variety of- the Atic-
chandas metre, which see above;
this Atijagati consists of 52 sylla-
bles.. e. g. तमिन्द्रं जेीहृवीमि मघवानमुग्रम्
|Rk. Sarांhh.8.97.13 cf. प्रथमातिजगत्यासां
सा द्विपञ्चाशदक्षरा R. Pr. XWI.80.
अतिदेश extended applicatiOn; trans-
fer Or cOnveyance or application
of the character or qualities or
attributes of one thing to another.
Atide$a in Sanskrit grammar is a,
very cOmmon feature prescribed
by Pār?ini generally by affixing
the tad. affix मत् or वत् to the word
whOSe attributes are conveyed to
another. e. g. लेोटेो लङ्वत् P. III.
4.85. In Some cases the atide$a,
is noticed even without the afiix
मतूं 9rवत्, e..g:गाङ्कुटादिभ्येोऽञ्णिन् ङित P.
I.2.1 • Atide$a is generally secn' in
all grammatical terms which end
with * vadbhāva * e. g- स्थानिवद्भाव
(P. I.1.56-59), सन्वद्भाव (P.VII.4.93),
अ॒न्तुादि॒िवद्भाव (P. VI. 1.85), अभूततद्भद्रावं
(P.IV.60) and others. Out of these
atidcŚas, the स्थानिवद्भाव is the most
10
अतिानचूत्ः
important onc, by virtue of which
sometimes thcre iS a full rcpre-
sentation i. c. substitution Of
the origina1 form callcd Sthānin
in thc place of the secOndary
form called ādc$a. This full
rcpresentation is called रूपातिदेशा aS
diferent frorm the usual onc which
is called कायीतिदेश, cf. , M. Bh.,
VIII. 1.90 Vār*t. ] and VIi|I.1.95.
Vārt.3. Regarding the use of अतिदेश
there is laid down a general
dictum सामान्यातिदेशे विशेष्प्रानतिदेशः --
when an opcration dcpcnding
On thc gcncral propCrtics of a
thing could be taken by cxtcndcd
application, an opcration dcpcnd-
ing On spccial propertieS shOuld
|not be taken by wirtue of the
Same ; e. g. भूतवत् in P. III. 3. 132
meanS as in the caSc of thc genc-
ral past tcnsc and not in the CaSc
of any special past tcnse likc thc
imperfect ( अनद्यतन ) , or the pcrfect
( परोक्ष ). Sce Par. Sck. Pari. 101,
M. Bh. orn P. III. 3. 132- Thcre
is also a general dictutm अाति-
देशिकमानेत्यम्-- whatever iS transfcr-
red by an cxtended application,
|necd not , be rnccessarily takerh•
See Par. Sck. 93.6 as also M. !3h.
on P.I.1.123 `Wārt.4, I.2.1 Vārt. 3,
II.3.69 Vārt. 2 ctc.•, Kaiya!a Ora II.
1 .2 and VI. 4.22 and Nyāsa o1h P.
1.1.56 and P. I.2.58 Vārt. 8. Thc
dictum अातिदेशिकमान्स्यम् is given as
a Paribhā:ॐ by Nāgc$a cf. Pari.
Sek. 93. 6.
अातेधृाते ome of thc varieties ०f Atic-
chandas con$istitlg of 76 Syllabl¢s.
६. g. सं हि शर्धेीं न मारुतं तृधिं'वणिः Kk.
$arfih. I.127.6.
अतिानेछृत् a varicty of' thc G:iyatri
metre , consisting of 20 syllablcs,
cf. R. ]Pr. XVI.22,



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-027.png}}}}}}

अतेिपत्ति
अातिपत्ति absence of any possibility ;
Sec क्रियतिपात. cf. P. III.3.139
Cān. 1.3.107.
अतिप्रयत्न intense effort; characteri-
stic effort as required for uttering
a %yowel with विक्रमस्वरित.
अतिप्रसङ्ग over-application of a de-
finition which is looked upon as
a serious fault; e. g. अतिप्रसङ्गो व्रश्चा-
दिषु P. VI.1.66 Vart, 3.
अातेबहु too much, rather unnecessary;
e. g. इदं चाप्यद्यत्वे अतिबहु क्रियते, M. Bh.
on I.1.38, इदमतिबहु क्रियते Ā4. Î}h. on
I.4.63, VI.1.145; ` नातिबहु प्रयोक्तव्यम्
'M. Bh. on VIII.1.4.
अतिारत surplus, redundarat; cf. Nir.
' IV.20; see Kaiyata on M. Bh. V.
1.18l.
अतिव्यच्त quite distinct; used with
· respect to pronunciation नातिव्यत्तं
न चाव्यक्तमेवं वणनुिदीरयेत् । cf. T. Pr.
XVII.8. →
अतिव्यस्त quite apart, used with
: respect to lips which are widely
'. apart ( विाश्ठष्टैठौ ) in the utterance
. of long अा and ओो|; cf. T. Pr.
II. 12, 13.
अतिव्याप्ति the same as अतिप्रसङ्ग, which
· · see abowe. Extensive application
with respect to a rule which
* applies to places where it shOuld
'. not apply. See Par. Sekh on Pari.
{ 28,|Pari. 85; also Padamafंj. on Kā$.
•* II. l. 32. →
अतिशव्र्करी a variety of Aticchandas
metre consisting of 60 syllables.
e. g. सुषुमा यातमद्रिाभे: Rk. Sarihh. I.
137. 1.• cf. ]R.. ]Pr. XVI.82.
अातशाय excess or excellence as shOwn
by the affixes तर and तम cf. तरतम-
येोश्चाातेशये V. Pr. V. 2; क्रियाप्रधानमाख्यातं
तस्मादतेिशये तरत्रुत्पद्यते M. Bh. on VI.
2.139, VIII.1.71 ; (2) desire as
shown by the affix क्यञ्जू in Pāraini's
grammar; cf. यश्च अतिशये R. T. 126. |
1I
अतुस्न्
अतिशायन्न excellence, surpassing; the
Same as अतिशय iद्वa V. Pr., V. 2 cf.
अतिशायन्न{ तमबिष्टनौ P. V. 3:55, also cf.
भूमानेन्दाप्रशंसासु नित्ययोगेऽतिशायने । संसर्गेऽ
स्तिावेवक्षायां भवन्ति मतुबादयः M. Bh. on
W . 2.94, where अतिशायंन means
•अतिशय्. Patafंjali, cormmenting On
|P. V. 3.55 clearly remarkS that for
अतिशय, or for अतिशयन्न, the old
grammarians, out of fancy only,
used the term अतिशायन as it was a
current terrn in popular usage; cf.
देश्याः सूत्रनिबन्धा: क्रियन्ते यावद् ब्रूयात् प्रकर्षे
अतिशय इति तावदतिशायन इति M. Bh. on ,
|P.. V. 3.. 55.
अतैिस्पर्श excess of contact, which to
a certain extent spoils the pro-
nunciation and leads to., a fault.
' अतिस्पर्श is the same as दुःस्पर्श, the
· letter ळ being called " दुःस्पृष्ट on
account of exceSS of contact. This
exeess of contact ( अतिस्पर्श ) in the
case of the utterance of the letter र्
r eSults into a fault as it practically
borders on stammering; cf. अतिस्पशाँ
बबैरता च रेफे. R. Pr. XIV. 26.
अतिस्वार्य ( अतिल्वार also ) name of the
seventh musical note in the sing-
ing of Sāman. cf.क्रुष्टप्रथमद्वितीयतृतीय-
चतुथैमन्द्रातिस्वार्यी: T. Pr. XXIII. 13.
→、 →
| अातेहार transfer of a consonant in a
Stobha. See पुष्पसूत्र.
अलु short term used by Pānini to sig-
nify together the five affixes चतवतु,
ड्वतुप्, ड्मतुप्, मतुप् and वतुप् ;cf.अत्वसन्तस्य
न्चाधातोः P. VI.4.14. 、	*
अतुल्यबल not kaving the sarme force;
nOt belonging tO the Sarme type
out of the four typeS Of rules viz.
पर, नित्य, अन्तरङ्ग and अपवाद. cf. अतुल्य-
बलयेाः स्पधेाँ न भवति.Jaincndra Pari. 66.
अतुस् personal ending of perf. lst
pers. dual. cf. प२स्मैपदानां णलतुसुस्थलथु-
सणल्वमाः P. HII.4,82.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-028.png}}}}}}

अत्तृन्
12
अदर्शन
अत्तृन् kपूt afiix अत् applied to the root
जू in the sense of past time. cf
जैीर्यतेरतृन् P. III.2.104.
अते pcrsonal cnding of prcS. 3rd
per. pl. substituted for झ ( अन्न्त ),
the अ of झ ( अन्त ) being changed
into ए and न् being omitted; see
झेान्तः (P.VII.1.3) अदभ्यस्तात् (P. VII.
1.4) and टित अात्मनपदानां `टर (P. III.
4.79).
अत्यन्तगति complete contact of the
verbal activity ( क्रिया ); cf.P. V.4.4.
अत्यन्तसंयोग constant contact ; cOm-
plete contact, uninterrupted cOn-
tact. cf. अत्यन्तसंयेोगे च P. II. 1.29;
|II. 3.5.
अत्यन्तापह्वव complete or absolute
denial or concealment of facts; cf.
परोक्षे लिट् । अत्यन्तापह्नव च । 3.2.115,
Vārt. 1•
अत्यय past happening, cf. अ॒त्ययो
भूतत्वमर्तिक्रमः । अतीतानि हिमानि निर्हिमम् ।
निःशीतम् । Kaś. on P. II. 1.6.
अत्यल्प rather too little, an expreS-
sion used by Patafंjali idiometi-
cally cf. अत्यल्पमिदमुच्यते M. Bh. on
|I. 1.69 etc.
अत्यल्पस्पृष्ट having a very slight con-
tact (with the organ producing
sound),as in the case of the utter-
ance of a voWel.
अत्याष्टेःa variety of Aticchandas metre
consisting of 68 Syllables. e. g.
अथा रुचा हरिण्या पुनानः Rk. Saria.
8.111.1.
अत्यादिगण the group of prepositions
headed by अति which are com-
pounded with a noun in the acc.
case ; cf. अत्यादयः क्रान्ताद्यर्थे द्वितीयया
M. ]Bh. on ]P. II. 2.I8.
अत्युच्चनीच characterized by a sharp
utterance; a name of the grave
aCcent:
अत्युपसंहृत wery closely uttered,
uttered with close lips and jaws,
|! (said in conncction with the
|| utterancc of the woWel अ ); cf. T.
| Pr II. 12. See अतिसंश्लिष्ट.
अत्व alsO अत्रच changc of a voWcl into
Short अ.
अत्वत् pOSsessing or hawing a $hort अ
vOWel in it; archaic form used by
Pānini in उपदेशेऽत्वत: (P. VII. 2.62)
instead of अद्वत् the corrcct one; cf.
छन्देावत्सूत्राणि भवन्ति M. Bh. on I. 1. 1
and I. 4. 3.
अथ Unādi affix अथ prescribed in
Unādi Sutras 393-396 e.g. scc शपथ,
अवभृथ, अावसथ ctc.
अथर्वप्रातिशाख्य the Prati$akhya work
of the Atharva veda bclievcd to
have been written by Saunaka.
It consistS of four Adhyāyas and
is also called शैौोनकोया चतुरंध्यांयिका.
अथुच् krt. affix अथु with उ acccntcd,
applied tO roots markcd by Panini
with the mute syllable ट्ट in the
Sense of verbal activity; c. g. धेपथु:
श्वयथुः; cf ङ्कृतोथुच्च P. ]III. 3.89.
अथुस् corप्jugational affix of perf. 2nd
|perS. dual ParaSmai. Substitutcd
for the personal cnding थर,.cf. P.
III. 4.82.
अदन्त ending with the short vowel
अः cf. P. VIII. 4.7 ; a term appli-
ed to nouns of that kind, and
rOOtS of the tenth conjugation
which are given with the letter
अमँ at their end which is not lookcd
upOn aS mute (इत्) e.. g. क्रथ,गण. etc.
Mark also thc root पिव described
by पतञ्जलि as अदन्त cf. पिधिरदन्त: M.
Bh. on I.1.56., M. Bh. on II. 4.43.
अदर्शन a tcrm in ancient grammarS
and Prāti$àkhyas meaning non-
appearance of a phonetic mcmber
वणैस्यादर्शनं लोपः (V. Pr 1. 141),cxplain-
ed aS अनुपलàिध by अव्श्वट. I,ater on,
the idea of non-appearance came
to be associated with the idea of
expectation and the .. definition of
i



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-029.png}}}}}}

→-、
अदाांदे
लेोप given by Panini in the words
अदर्शनं लोप: (as based ewidently on
the Prātiśākhya definition) was
explained as non-appearance of
a letter or a group of letterS wh €re
it wa$ expected to have been
present. See M. Bh. on I. l.60
Vārt. 4 and Kaiyaśa thereOn•
अददि name giwen to the clasS of
roots belonging to the second
conjugation, as the rOOtS therein
begin with the root अद्घ. The word
अदिप्रभृति is also used in the satme
sense; cf. अदिप्रभ्रुतिभ्य्ः शाप॒ः, p., II.
4.72; cf.also अदाद्यंनदाद्योरनदादरेव given
by Hemacandra, as a Paribhāga
corresponding to the maxim
लुग्विकरणालुग्विकरणयोरलुटुग्विक्ररणस्य Hem.
Pari. 61.
अदि Utadi afiix अदि e. g. शरद्, दरद् ;
cf. द्दृदृभ्:सेोऽदिः Un. 127;
अदिप्रभृति See अदादि abowe.
अदुक् aug. अद् added , to the , word
एकं before the negative particle न;
* e.g. एकान्नर्विशतिः, एकांन्नत्रिंशत॒त् cf. P.' VI
3.76.
अदृष्ट not seen properly; doubtful; in-
distinct;said with respect to a letfer
which is raot distinctly deciphered
in the Sarhhitāpātha ; e.ष्g. तन्नः
( R. Sarih. I. 107. 3 ); the last
letter त् of तत् is deciphered in the
|Pada-pāईha which is given aS तत्-
नः cf. अदृष्टवर्णे प्रथमे चोदक: स्यात् प्रदर्शकः
|R. Pr. X. 15.
अदोष absence of fault;
of inconwenience.
सेोप्यदेोषेो भवति often occurs in the
Mahābhāśya; cf. MBh. on I. 3.62;
I. 4.108, etc.
substitute for case affixes सु
and अम् added to words ending
with the affixes डतर and डतम and to
the words अन्य, अन्यतर and इतर. cf.
P, VII. 1.25. →
absence
13
The expression '
अद्वद्युपसर्ग
अद्यतनी tech. te rm of ancient gram-
marianS signifying in general
the present time of the day in
qucstion, the Occurrence of the
immediate past or future everats in
which is generally expressed
by the aOrist (ळुङ्) or the simple
future ( लूटृट्); the other two corres-
ponding " tenSeS imperfect and
first future (viz• लङ् and लुट्) being
used in connection with past and
future events respectively, provid-
ed the evemts do not pertain to
that day which is in question; cf.
* वा च्चाद्यतन्याम् ? M.Bh. P.III. 2.102
V£r'.6, वादृतन्याम् P. VI. 4.114. Vārt.
3; {2) term fQr the tense showing
immediate past time called ळुङ्क
in Pānirai*s grammar e. g. मायोगे
अद्यतनी । मा कार्षीत् िKat. III. 1.22,
|]Hem. III. 3.11•
अद्रव्यवााचेन् not expressive of any
substance which forms a place of
residence (ofqualities and actions);
cf. तथा व्याकरणे विप्रातिधिट्द्धं चानधिकरण-
व्वा|ाञ्वि ( P. II. 4. 13 ); इत्यद्रव्यवाचींति
गाम्यते t M.Bh. on II. l.i.
अद्वियेनि lit. not made up of two
elemehtS, and hence, produced
with a Single effort, an expression
used for simple wOwels ( समानाक्षर )
Such as अ, इ, उ, ऋ, ल; and simple
consOnantS कु, ख्, गृ etc. as
distinguished from diphthongS
( सन्ध्यक्षर ) such as ए, ऐ, ओ, औौ and
conjunct consonants छ, धै . etc.
which appear to have " been
termed द्वियोनि cf. अपृक्तमेकाक्षरम|द्वयोनि
यत् R. Pr. XI.3.
अद्वद्युपसर्ग not preceded by C two or
|more) prepositions; i. e. preceded
by only one preposition. cf.
छादेर्धेऽद्वद्युपसर्गस्य P. WI. 4.96 prescrib-
ing short अ for the long अा of the
root छाद् before the krt. affीx घ.
e:g. प्रच्छद:. → → • • .. • ?



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-030.png}}}}}}

अधेिक, 14.
अधिकारसूत्र
समासान्ता: P. V. 4.68, whilc on some
अधिक (1) additional or surplus açtं- ||
vity which a rulc in grammar
somctitmeS ShowS; अधिक: कार: Or
अधिकं कार्यम्; cf. M. Bh. on I. 3.1Î,
Kāś. on III. 2.124, Bh. Vg. on
IIL. 4.72 ; ( 2 } Surplus Subject
matter e. g. अथाख्याः समाम्नायाधिका:
प्राग्रिफ्तिात् (V. Pr. I.33.)
अधिकरण (1) support; a grammati-
cal relation of the nature of a
|location ; place of wcrbal acti-
vity. cf. अाधारोऽधिकरणम् P. Ï. 4.45;
(2) one of the Six or seveta KārakaS
or functionaries of werbal actiWjty
shown by the locative case. cf.
सप्तम्यधिकरणे च P.If.4.36;(3)Substance,
*dravya? cf. अनधिकरणवााच अद्रव्यवाचि
इति गम्यते M.Bh. on II. 1.1.
अधिकार governing rule consisting of
a word (e.g. प्रत्ययः, घातोः, समासान्त!:
etc.) or words (e.g. ङश्याप्प्रातिपदेिकात्,
संर्वस्यं द्वेetc.)which followS or is taken
as understood in every following
rule upto a particular limit. The
meaning of the word अधिकार iS
discuSSed at length by Patafjali in
his Mahābhāgya on II. i. 1, where
he has given the difference bet-
ween अाधकार and परिभाष्प्रा; cf. अधिकार:
प्रतियोगं तस्यानिर्दशार्थ इति योगेI येोगे उपतिष्ठते।
परिभाषापुनेस्कदशस्था सती सर्वे शास्त्रमभिज्वलयति
प्रदीपवत् । See alsO Mahābhasya on
I.3.11, I. 4.49 and IV. H.83. The
wÖrd or Wording which iS to
repeat in..the SubSequent ruleS is
believed to be shown by Pāthini by
characterizing it with a peculiarity
. of utterance known as स्वरितोच्चार or
स्वरितत्वेन उच्चारणम्. The word which
is repeated in the following Stitras
is stated to be अंधिकृत. TheSabda
, Kaustubha defines adhikāra, as
एकंत्रेपात्तस्यान्यत्र ळयापारः अधिकारः S:ab.
.KauS. on P. 1.2.65. Sometimes thc
whOle rule iS repeated e. g. प्रत्ययः
P. III. 1.1, अङ्गस्य P, VI. 4.1, [
occasioinS a. part Only of it
is Scen repcatcd. Thc repeti-
tion goeS On upto a, particular
limit Which is statcd aS im
अाश्तद्धवदत्राभात् P. Vf. 4.22, प्राग्रीश्वरान्लि-
पाता: P. I. 4.56. Many timcs thc
limit is not stated by the author of
the Sütras but it is underStOod by
vjrtue of a counteracting Word
occurring later on. On still Othcr
occaSions, thc limit iS dcfincd by
the ancient traditional itntcrprctcrS
by riaeanS of a sort of convention
Which iS ca!led रेद्वृरित्तत्ध!ँ:तेि३ा. This
अधिकार or gQwernaincc haS its in-
fiuence of thrce kindS : ( l ) by
being valid or preScnt in all thc
rules which comc undcr itS sphere
of influence, c, g. स्िंअंयाम् or अङ्गस्य;
( 2) by showing additional prO-
perties e. g. the word अपादान being
applied to cascS wh crc thcrc is
no actual Separation as in सांकाश्थ-
केभ्यः पाटलिपुत्रका अभिरूपतराः ; (3) by
showing additional forcc Such as
sctting aside cvcn subScC!uemt rules
if oppOsing• TheSc tharec types Of
the influencc which a w()rd ri1arked
with स्श्रित arhd hcncc t५:rtncd अधिश्कार
poSSeSScs arc callcd respectivcly
अधिकारगति, अधिश्क श्क्ायै and अधिश्क कार.
For detaiiS see M.B};1. on I.3.i I.
This अधिकार Or governing rulc
exerts itS influence in thrcc wayS:
(1) generally by prOceeding ahcad
in SubScqucnt rules like thc $trcam
of a rivcr, (2)sOInctiimcs by jumps
like a frog omitting a rule ' or
more, and (:8)rarcly by procccding
backward with a lion's g!lancc; cf.
fसिंहावलोकितं चैब मण्डूकप्ञ्छ्ट्टतमेव ग्व t ग1ङ्याप्रधा-
, हुवच्चापि अधिकारास्त्रिधा मताः ।
अधेिकारसूत्र a supcrintending aphori-
Srim, which giwes mO mcaning of itSclf
where it is mentioned, but givcs
its meaning ira thc numbcr' Qf



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-031.png}}}}}}

अधिस्पशैम्
aphorisms that follOw; e• g• the
rules प्रत्ययः, परश्च ar1d अादुटु॑दाच्तश्च P.
|III. 1.• 1, 2, 3 or सह सुपा. P. II.l.4.
अधिस्पशैम् incompletely pronOuraced,
referring to a letter So pronOun-
ced.
अधुना tad. affix applied to thc pro-
nioun इदम् which is changed into
इ before the affix and then elided
by P. VI.4.148, or changed into
अ in which case धुना or अधुना could
be looked upon aS a tad• affix•
अध्यचसाय determination to begin
an activity with a wiew tO get
the fruit.	cf. य एष् मनुष्यः प्रेक्षापूर्व-
कारी स बुद्धट्या कंचिदर्थे संपश्यति, संद्देष्टं
, प्रार्थना, प्रार्थेिते अध्यवसायः, अध्यवसायॆ अारम्भः,
अारम्भे निर्वृतिः, निर्वृत्तैौ फलावातिः cf. M.
Bh. on I. 3 14 and I. 4. 32.
अध्यात्मादि mame of a class of words
headed by the word अध्यात्मन् to
which the tad. affix ठञ्म् is added
in the sense of * तत्र भवः * i.e. found
therein, or existing therein. e. g.
अाध्यात्मिकम्, अाधिदैविकम्, etc.cf. M.Bh.
ora IV. 3. 60.
अध्यस् Superimposition : a relation
betWeen a Word and itS Sense ac-
cOrding to the grammarianS ; cf.
Vāk. Pad. II.240. (2) appendage;
cf. अाहुस्त्वेकपदा अन्ये अध्यासानेकपातिनः R.
. Pr. XVII. 43.
अध्यइट्टर Supplying the necesSary ele-
ment. cf. गम्यमानार्थस्य वाक्यस्य स्वरूपेणोपा-
दानं वाक्यस्याध्याहारः Kāś. om P. VI. 1.
139., cf.also Nir. I. 1. 13 and M.
Bh. on Siva Sutra l Vārtः !4.
अध्यै, अध्यैन् |krt affixes Substituted in
the place of तुम् of the infinitive in
Vedic Literature (P. III. 4. 9.),
e. g. पिबध्यैः when अध्यैनुं is substi-
tuted, the initial vowel of the
word becomes उदात्त. e. g. कर्मप्युपा-
• चरध्यै ।
15
अन्
अन् tad. affix अ ( अन् ) (i) added to
the word नींली in {he sense of
*dyed in', to form the word नील,cf.
P. IV.2. 2. Vārt. 2.; (2) added to
the word अषाढा in the sense of
*produced in? cf अष्श्राढाः उपदधाति M.
Bh. on IV. 3. 34 Vārt. 2; (3) add-
ed after the affix तीय in the Same
sense as तयि e. g. द्वितीयो भागः, तृतीयेों
भागः cf. पूरणाद् भागे तीयादन् P. V. 3.48.
अन substitute for the afiix यु ( युच्.
एयुट् ल्युट्, ल्यु, टद्यु, टट्द्धुल् and others of
which only युं remains), cf. युवेो-
रनाकी P. VII. 1• 1. e. g. कारणा, हारणा,
करणम्, हरणम्, नन्दनः, सायेतनम् etc.
अनङ् (1) substitute अन् as Samāsānta
at the end of a Bahuvrihi comp.
in the feminine for the last letter of
the word ऊधस् and for that of धनुस्
in all genders e.g• कुण्डेोर्ध्नी (by apply-
ing ई to कुण्डोधन्), शाङ्गधन्वा, अधिज्यधन्वा;
cf. P V. 4. 131, 132; (2) substitute
अन् for the last letter of the words
अस्थि, दधि etc. before the affixes of
the instrumental and the foilow-
ing caseS beginning with a wowel
e. g. अस्श्चा, दश्ना, अक्षणा etc. cf. P. VII.•
I. 75; हूँ(3) substitute अन् for the
last letter of the word साख, of
words ending in ऋ, as also of उशनस्
a nd others before the mominatiwe
sing. affix सुं. e. g. सखा, कतीँ, उशना;
cf. P. VII. 1. 93, 94. ,८* A
अनच्क possessing. no अच् or vowel in
it. cf इन्द्रे द्वौ अचौ, एको यस्येतिलेॉपेनापहृतो-
ऽपर एकादेशेन ततः अनच्कः इन्द्रशब्दः संपन्नः
cf. Par. Sek. on Par. 52.; M.Bh.
on Î. 4.2 Vārt. 22.
अनञ्र् a word without thc negative
particle ( नञ् ) before it, e. g. धेनु-
रनञ्ञि कमुत्पादयति, a Stātra in Api$ali's
grammar quoted in M. Bh. on
|IV.2.45 see also P. II. 1. 60, VII.
|1. 37.
अनत uncerebralized; , mot changed
into a cerebral ( मूर्धन्य ) ietter. " cf.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-032.png}}}}}}

अनतिदिष्ट
दन्त्यस्य मूर्धन्यापातिर्नतिः Uvata on R.
|Pr. IV.34. -
अनातेिदिष्ट not resulting from any ex-
tended application or अतिदेश, cf.
प्रकृत्याश्रयं अनतिदिष्टं भवति M.Bh. on IV•
|l . I51.
अनत्यन्तगतेि absence of the verbal
activity in all ways or respects; in-
complete activity ; e. g. श्छिन्नकप्म् not
completely cut, cf. अनत्यन्तगतौ क्तात्
P. V. 4.4.
अनद्यातन period of time not pertain-
ing to the day in question; uScd in
conmection with past time, tO
express which the imperfect is
generally used; alsO in connection
with the future time, to express
which the first future is
generally used e g- ह्यः अपचत्, श्ध: कत
etc. cf. P. III. 2.111, 113; III.
3.15, 135; V. 3.21.
अननुबन्ध्क without any mute signi-
ficatory letter attached;अननुबन्धकपरि-
भाषा is the short name given to the
maxim-*अननुबन्धकग्रहणे न सानुबन्धकस्य
ग्रहणम् ? See M.Bh. on I. 3.1; V. 2.9.
There is a reading in the Par. Sek.
निरनुबन्धकग्रहणे for अननुबन्धकग्रहणे, in
which case the परिभाषा is called
निरनुबन्धकपरिभाषा. See Par. Sek. Pari.
81. “
अन्न्तर (1) immediate, contiguous
अव्यवहित. cf. हलेीनन्तराः संयेोगः P.1. 1.7,
also गतिरनन्तरः P. VI. 2.49; cf.
अनन्तरं संयेोग: V. Pr. I. 48. ; ( 2 )
ncareSt, aS cOmpared with othcrs
of the same type: cf. अथवा
अ॒नन्तरा या प्राप्तिः स॒ा प्रतिपिध्यृते M.Bh. on
I• 1-43; cf. Pari. Sek. अनन्तरस्य
विधिर्वा भवति प्रतिषेधो वा, which means
that a prescriptive or prohibitivc
rule applies tO the nearest and not
tothe distant one.Par.$ek, 61,Cān.
Par. 30.
अन्न्त्य non-final cf. अनन्त्यधिकोरे अन्त्यस-
देशस्य when achange does not con-
16
अनभिाहित
cern a final lcttcr then it concerns
that which immcdiatcly pr7cedes
the final, Par. Sck. Pari 95. cf.
also M. Bh. V|I. I . l3 Vārt 5.
अनन्य nof different, the Same; cf.
एकदेदश्ट्राधिकृतमनन्यवत् that which has
got a changc regarding one of its
partS is by, no mcans Somcthing
else; Par. Sek. P:ari. 37.
अनन्यवद्भाव being tlae s:amc, being
looked upon a8 not different. See
अनन्य abowe.
अनभिधान inability to cxprcSS thc
mcaning dcsircd. Thc cxprcssion
न वा अनभिधानान्द् frcqucntly occurs in
the Mahabhásya referring to such
words or phrases as cOuld bc form-
ed by rules Of grammar or could
be used accOrdir,g to rulcs but,arc
not found in Current usc recogniz-
cd by lcarncd perSOnS or scholars;
cf. तच्ट्चानभिधानं यत्रा*रुन्तं तत्रैश्ध, अन्यत्र तु
यथालक्षणं भवत्यब ! Padarmaij. on III.
2.1; also cf. अनाभधानाद् व्यधिकरणानां
वहुत्रीहिर्न भविष्यति ! यत्र त्वाँभधानमस्ति तत्र
वैयेधिकरण्येपि भवत्येव समासः, कणेष्ठकाल इतिः
Nyāsa On II. 2.24; for examples of
अनभिधान, scc also M.Bh.अभिधानलक्षणl:
कृत्तद्धितसमासा: अनभिधानान्न भश्चिrप्यन्ति
M. Bh. on III. 3.19. also on III.
2.1• V• 5, IV. 2.l - Scc Kā$. on
III, l.22, III. 3. 158.
अनभिनिर्वृत्त that which is not applicd;
lit. (an operation or vidhi) ' which
|haS nOt takcn place or which
|has not bccn effcctive; cf. प्रसन्कस्य
अनभिनिर्वृच्तस्य प्रातपेधेन निवृस्ति: शाक्या श्कतुं
नानभिनिर्वृत्तस्य M. Bh. on I. 1.5; IV.
1•37•. Cf* also न चानभिानेर्वृक्षे बहिरङ्गे
अन्तरङ्गं प्राप्नेाति। तत्र नि!मेत्स्तमेव ॰धहिरङ्कमन्तरङ्गस्य
M.Bh. on VI. 4.22; VI II. 3.15.
अनभिहित not cOnvcyed or expresscd
by anothcr i.e. by any onc' of the
|| f9भूr factQr$ viz. ' verbal afiix, krt
|| affix,taddhita afiix and cOmpound.
The rule अनभिाहते (P. II. 3.1) and



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-033.png}}}}}}

अन्`भ्यस्
17
अनवगतसंस्कार
the following rules lay down
the difींerent case afाँfixes in the
sense of the different KārakaS Or
auxiliaries of the verbal activity,
provided they are not Shown Or
indicated in any one of the abOve-
mentioned four ways; e. g. See the
acc. case itn कटं करोति, the inst. Case
in दाँत्रण लुनाति, the dat. case in देवद-
चताय गां ददाति, the abl. case in ग्रामाद-ि
गच्छति, or the ioc.case in स्थाल्यां पचति.
अनभ्यास a wording which does not
contain any reduplicatiwe Syllable;
an epithet applied to such rootS
as are nOt to be reduplicated a
second time before affixes of the
perfect, as they are already re-
duplicated; cf. लिटि ध्वातेारनभ्यासस्य P.
VI. 1.8.
अनर्थक (1) without any signification;lit.
having no meaning of themselves,
i.e.•poSSesSing a, meaning only when
used in company with other words
or parts of words which bear an
independent Sense;(the word is used
generally in cOmraection with pre-
positions);e.g. अधिपरी अनर्थको P.I.4.93,
cf. अनर्थौन्तरवाचेिनावनर्थकौ । धातुनोक्तां क्रिया-
माहतुः । तदविाशष्टं भवति यथा शङ्के पयः ।
M. Bh. on P. I. 4.93; cf. न निबैद्धा
उपसर्गा अर्थान्निराद्दुरिति, शाकटायनः Nir, I.
1.3; cf. alsoअनथैको अनथान्तरवाचिनैा
|Kā$. on I. 4.93, explained as अनथी-
न्तरवाचित्वादनर्थकावित्युक्तम् न त्वथीभावादिति
दर्शयति by न्यासकार; (2) meaningless,
purposeless; Çf. प्रमाणभूत अाचायेाँ दर्भप-
वित्रपाणेि: महता यत्नेन सूत्रं प्रणयति स्म !| तत्राशक्यं
वणेनाप्यनर्थकेन भावेतुं किं पुनरियता सूत्रणM.Bh.
on I. I.l, aS also सामथ्र्ययेोगान्न हि किंच्चिद-
स्मिन् पश्यामि शास्रेत्रे यदनर्थकं स्यात् M.Bh. ora
|P. WI. l 77. See for details M.Bh.
on I. 2.45 Vārt. 12; III.1.77 Vārt.
2 and Kaiya{ःa and Uddyota
thereOn ; (3) poSSCSScd of no sense
absolutely aS Some nip6tas केचन
निपाताः सार्थकाः, केचन च निरेर्थक[ः Uv.
38
on R, Pr. XII. 9; निपातस्यानर्थकस्यापि
प्रातिपदिकत्वम् P. I. 2.45 Vārt. 12 cf.
also जन्या इति निपातनानर्थक्यं P. IV•
4.82. Vārt. 1, एकागारान्निपातनानथैक्यं P•
V. 1.l 13 Vārt. 1, also 114 Vart•1•
अनथन्तरम् synonym, synonymOuS,
conveying nO different SenSe, e• g•
सङ्घः समूहः समुदाय इत्यनर्थान्तरम् । M.Bh.
on P. V. 1.59; अपि च बुाद्ध:ः संप्रत्यय
इत्यनर्थाीन्तरम् M. Bh. on P. I. 1.56•
अनथन्तरवाचिनः not conveying any
different sense, अनर्थान्तरवाचिनौ अनर्थकौ
M.Bh. on I. 4.93.
अनाल्विधेि opp. of अल्विधि; an opera-
tion not concerning a, Single
letter, e•g• स्थानिवदादेशोऽनल्विधौ P. I.
1.56 and M... Bh. thereon;	cf.
स्थानिवदादेशो ह्यवर्णविधौ Kāt. Pari. 39.
अनवकाशा having rao occasion or ScOpe
of application; used in cOnnection
with 'a rule the whole of WhoSe
province of application is cOwered
by a general rule, and hence which
|becomes technically useleSS, unleSS
it is allowed to set aside the general
rule; cf. अनवकाशा हि विधयेो बाधका भवन्ति-
rules which have no oppOrtunity
of taking efect ( withOut, setting
aside other rules ) superSede those
g'ules; M.Bh. ora V. 4.154, also Par•
$ek. 6n Pari. 64.
अनवकाशत्व absence of any opportunity
of taking effect, scopeleSSmeSSः cQn-
sidered in the case of a partiCular
rule, as a criterion for setting aside
that general rule which.depriveS it
of thāt opportuhityः cf. अनवकाशत्वं
निरवक्राश्शत्वं वै बाधकत्वे बोजम्. This अन-
वकाशत्व is slightly different frOrià अप्-
बादत्व or particular memtion which is
definedusually by the wOrds स्iमान्य*
विाधेरुत्सर्ग : । विश्शष्प्रविधिरपवाद : l
अनवrातसंस्कार (a word) whOSe forma-
tion and accents have not been eञ्x<-*
plained; cf. Nir• IV. 1 ; V. 2.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-034.png}}}}}}

अनवयव 18
अनानुपूव्र्यैसंहिता
अनवयव lit. having no parts; impar-
tite; without any concern with the
individual component parts ; appli-
cation in totality ; cf. सिद्धं तु धर्मोपदशने
| अनवयवविज्ञानाद्यथा लैौक्रिकवैदिकेषु P. VI.
1.84Vārt 5 and the Bhāsya thereon ;
अस्मिञ्ज्ञ् शास्रे अनवयवेन शास्त्रार्थसंप्रत्यय : स्यात्।
a rule in grammar applieS tO all
cases where its application is pOsSi-
ble; it cannot be said to hawe itS
|puorpOse served by applying tO a,
few cases only.
अनवस्था fault of having nO end; end-
leSSneSS; cf. एवमप्य्नवस्था स्याद्याँ मूलक्षुय॒-
कारिणी Kāv. Pr.; cf.अवश्यं ह्यनेन अथनिादि-
|शता केनचिच्छब्देन निर्देशुः कर्तव्यः स्यात् ! तस्य
च तावत्केन कृतो येनासौ क्रियते । अथ तस्य
केनचित्कृतस्तस्य केन कृत इत्यनवस्था । M.
Bh. on II. 1.1.
अनवस्थान indefinitenegs; gf. उच्चनीच- !
स्यानवस्थानात्संज्ञाया अप्रसिद्धि: M. Bh. om |
I. 2.30 Vart 1.
अनवस्थित undetermined, indefinite;
See M.Bh. qucted above on अनवस्थान;
cf. also अार्घधातुकीयाः सामान्येन भवन्ति
अनवस्थितेषु प्रत्ययेषु । M. Bh. on I. 1.56;
III. 1.4, VII. 2.10, VII. 4.9. The |
SubstituteS cauSed by an ardhadhā-
tuka affix are, in fact, effected by
virtue of the prOspective applica* |
tion of the ardhadhātuka affix be-
fore its actual application.
`अनह्वं tech. term used by the writcrs |!
of the PrātiŚakhya works for fre-
quentative f9rmations such as रीरिघः,
चाघ्क्रुपत् etc.; cf. A. Pr. 4.86.
अनाकाङ्कूहैं not depending on another
for the completiora of its sense; cf.
न यद्यनाकाङ्क्षे P. III. 4.23, and Nyasa
thereon which explains अ॒नाकङ्के 8aS
न विद्यते अंीकाङ्ङ्क्ष्क्षा अपेक्षा यस्य तस्मिन्. '
अनाकृति not capable of preSenting
(on its mere utterance) any tangible ||
form or figure; thc word is used in
connection with a technical term
(संज्ञाशव्द) which presents its scnse by
a definition actually laid down or
given in the treatise; cf. अनाकृति:
संज्ञा | अाकृातमन्तः संज्ञिनः M. Bh. on
I. l -l .
अन्नादर absence of consideration; dis-
|regard; cf. ष्षष्ठीं चानादर P. II. 3 .38.
अनादि non-initial: e. g. अनादेश्च म॒ड्वचनम्
P. III. 4.102, Vārt. 4; also M. Bh.
on VII. !. 3.
अनाादिष्ट not |replaccd aS a SubStitutc ;
e. g. यः अनादिष्टIदन्च: धूधस्तन्ल्धं f*धंधिं प्रति
स्थानिवद्भावः M.Bh. on I. l.57 V:irt. l,
III. • 2.3 Vart. 2, and VI. 1.12
Vārt.. 10.
अनादेश (1) original, not Such as is sub-
stituted; e. g. थुष्मदस्मदोरनादेश्ा P.VII.
2.86; (2) abScnce of Statermcnt, अनि-
देश e. g. कर्तरि कृद्वच्चनमनादेशे स्वार्थविञ्३ा|ानात्
P. III. 4.67, Vārt. 1; cf. thc I*:urj.
अनिर्दिष्टार्थाः प्रत्यया: स्वार्थे भवन्ति | Par. Sck.
|Pari. 113.
अनानन्तर्य not a closc relation ; tlis-
tance; cf. छ्कञ्चििचंच्न्व संन्पिातकृत्नमान्ान्zतर्थे श्ट्रा|ास्भ्र-
कृतमनानन्र्तेर्य श्क्रच्धिच्थ्च्च नैव् रंनिापात्{कृतं न|!पिं
|शास्त्रकृतम् l M. Bh. om VII I. 3.13.
अनानुपूव्र्यसंहिता that $atihhit:à tc*xt
which has an order of' words in it,
Which iS diflercrht fr(yrti what
obtains in the Pada-pāth:३, :ः11ad
which appcarS appropriatc accor-
ding to thc semsc intendcd in the
paSSage. There arc thrcc placcS of
Such Combinations of words whicll
are nOt accOrding to the $ttccc8sion
of wOrds in thc Pada-pfttha, quOt-
ed in the R.Pr. शुनश्चिच्छपं न्ििदत ग्हस्रात्
Rk. Sarih. V.2.7, नरा वा शंसं पृ'qगगमगं-
ह्यम् Rk. Satih. X. 64.3; नरा च शंसं
देव्यम् Rk. Satihh. IX. 86. 42. cf. tgता
अनानुपूव्र्यैसंीहताः । न ह्येतेषां त्रयाणां पदानृपूव्र्यंण
संहितास्ति Uvvata on R.. Pr. II.78.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-035.png}}}}}}

अनान्तर्य
19
→、
अन्त्य
अनान्तर्य absence of |proximity, ab-
Sence of cognateness; cf. इह तहिं
खटूबूश्र्यो म॒ालदूर्यं इति दीर्घवचनादकारो न, अना-
न्तर्यादेकारौकारौ न | M. Bh. on Siva
Suitras 3-4.
अनाप्य having or possessing no āpya
or objegt; :ं intransitive (root}; cf.
चालशव्दार्थाद् अंनाप्याद् युच् Cāndra I.2 97
standing for चलनशव्दार्थेॉंद् अकर्मकाद् युच्
P. III. 2.l48.
अनार्ष	(1) non-vedic; not proceeding
frotjn any Rsं, or Vedic Seer, cf.
संबुद्धौ शाकल्यस्र्येतौ अनार्षे P. I. 1.16; alsO
|Kāś. on the same; cf. केिमिदमुपस्थितं
. नाम l अनार्ष इतिकरणःM.Bh.on VI.1.129;
(2) pertaining to the Padapātha
which is looked upon as अनार्षं i. e.
not proceeding from any Vedic
Seer ; cf. अनार्ष " इतिकरणः । स च व्र्यक्षर
अाह्युदाच्तश्च, Uvvata on R. Pr. II l . 23:
cf. alsO A. Pr. III. 1.3.
अन्नेि k!t affix in the sense of curse,
e.g. अजीवनिस्ते शठ भूयात्; cf.अाक्रोशे नञ्नि
अनिः P. III. 3.] 12. ' This afiीx अनि
getS its न् changed into पृण् after ऋ
or रेफ of the preceding preposition
as in अप्रयीणेिः;cf KāŚ. on WIII.4.29.
अनिच्च॒ samāsānta affix after the word
धर्म and some othcr ¢words pre-
scribed by P. V. 4. 124~-6, e. g.
कल्याणधर्मा, सुजम्भा, दक्षिणेमाँ.
अनिट् (1) not admitting the augment
इट् to be prefixed to it; the term is
strictly to be applied to ārdhadhā-
tuka affixes placed after such roots
as havé' their vowel characterized
by a grave accent ( अनुदात्तस्वर ); the
term अनिट् being explained as
· अनिडादि qualifying the अार्घधातुक affix;
(2X in a secondary way, it has be-
come customary to call $uch rOots
अनिट् as_do not allow the augment
इट् to be prefixed to an ārdhadhā-
tuka affix placed after them. Such
roots are termed अनुदात्त verily be-
cauSe they ar€ pOSSeSSed of an
anudatta vowel. e. g. कृ, भृ, जेि, गाम् ,
हन्, etc. as against भु, धू, तृ, श्वि, दृ, वद्,
फछ्, चष्छ्, etc. which have their
wowel characterized by an acute
( उदात्त ) accent. For a complete list
Of such roots see the well-known
stanzas given in the Siddhānta-
|kaumudi inciderntally on अात्मनेपदेप्व-
नतः P. VII. 1.5. ऊदूदन्तैयैीतिरुक्ष्युशैीङ्स्नु-
→ → → → → →निहताः स्मृताः !! १ ॥ शङ्कृ॒पञ्च॒मुचि-
रिञ्व्वञ्झ्विञ्ञ्व्. •.• • ••••धातवेो व्र्द्यधिकं " शतम् |
aS also Some listS by ancient gram-
marians given in the Mahābhā$ya,
on एकान्च उपदेशेनुदात्तात्. P. VII. 2.10
Or in the Kā$ika on the same rule
P. VII. 2.10.
अनिट्कारिका (1) name given to Stanzas
giving ar complete list of Such
rOOts aS do not allow the aug-
ment इ ( इट् ) to be prefixed to
an ārdhadhātuka affix placed
after them. For such Kārikās
see Sid. Kaum. on VII. 1.5 as
also Kāśikā on VII. 2.10; ( 2 ) a,
short treatise enumerating in l 1
werseS the rootS which do not
' admit the augment इट् before the
ārdhadhātuka, affixes. The work
iS anonymouS, and not printed so
far, pOSSibly composed by a jain
writer .The work possibly belongs
tO the Kātantra system and has got
short glosses called व्याख्यान, अवचूरि,
विवरण, टोका, टिप्पणी and the like
which are all anonymous.
. अनिट्कारिकाविवरण a, Short commen-
tary by K$amāimānikya on the
work Anitkarika, which see above.
अनिङ्गय not Separable into two padas
or words by means of avagraha;
cf. संध्य ऊष्माप्यनिङ्गर्देय; R. Pr. V. 41 ; cf.
also R. Pr. IX. 25, XIII. 30. See
इङ्म्य below.
अनित्य (1) not nitya or obligatory;
optional; (Said of a rule or pari-
[ bhā$a whOSe application is volun-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-036.png}}}}}}

अनिदंप्रथम
20
tary). Regarding the case and COfभ्:
jugational affixes it can be said
that those afiixes can, in a Way;
be looked up७n as nitya or obliga-
tory, as they have to be affixed to
a crude nominal baSe Or a rOO!;
there being a dictum that n१O crude
base without an affix can be used,
as also, no affix alone without a
base can be used. On the Other
hand, the taddhita amd krt affixCS
as also compounds are vcluntary
as, instead of them an independent
word or a phrase can be uSed tO
convey the sense. For a list Of
such nitya affixes see M. Bh. On V•
4.7; (2) the word अनित्य is alsO
used in the sense of nOt-nitya, the
word नित्य being taken to mean
कृताकृतप्रसाङ्गoccurring before aS Well aS
after another rule haS bcen appli-
ed, the latter being looked upOn as
अनित्य Which does not do So. ThiS
*nityatva' has got a number Of ex-
ceptions and limitations which are
mentioned in Paribhā$क्ष्as 43-49 in
the Paribhāgendu$ekhara.
अनिर्दप्रथम an underived word; an
ancient term uscd by WriterS Of
the Prāti$ākhyas to signify *originat'
words which cannot be Subjectcd
to निर्वचन.
अनिपात्य not necessary to be specifi-
cally or implicitly statcd, as it can
be brought about or accomplished
in the uSual way; e. g. द्वन्द्वम् l लिद्भम-
शिष्यं लेीकाश्रयत्वाल्लिङ्गस्य । तत्र नपुंसकत्वमनि-
पात्यम् M. Bh. on VIII. 1.15. See
also M. Bh. on VIT. 2.27 and VI.
1.207.
अनिमित्त not serving as a cause, not
poSSesSing a causal relation; e. g.
संनिपातलक्षणेो विधिरनिमित्तं तद्विघातस्य Par.
Sek. Pari. 85. See also M. Bh. on
]I. 1.39.
अनीयर्
अनियत not subjcct to any limitatiom:;
cf. प्रत्यय| निथंता:, अर्था अ|*निथत|:, अर्था
निथताः, प्रत्यया अlनेयतl: M1. ]Bh. oI। |IL.
3.50. ftn tlhc ca8c Of नियमश्वेिधेि (a rcs-
trictive rt1le or Sta.temcnt ) a limi-
tatio1n is put olm onc ()r morc of thc
constitucnt elc'rmcntS Or factorS of
that rule, the limitcd clcment bcing
called नियत, thc other one being
termcd अर्नियन; also scc Kfi$. on
|II. 2. 30.
अनियतपुंस्क whosc Scx-especially
whether i{ is a m:ulc or a fcrmale-is
not dcfi1}itely knoWn from itS mere
sight ; SIm:all iी।1Se'ctS which arc So.
The tcr;t। श्रृं:!| in !'. IV.1. 131 is
expl:ait1cdl ir} thc MahābhāSya as
क्षुद्रा ना:{ अानैयंjग्धता अश्◌हीना वा M. Bh.
on P. I V. l. 131.
अनिर्दिष्टार्थ	whoSc Sc:msc haS not bccn
specifically statccl ; tl1c word is
u$ed with rcfcrcln('c t() StIch affixcS
as are not prcScribcd In {uny Spcci-
fic sensc Or scr18cS a.1nd l1cn(*{> :१S arc
|looked upon aS pO$S('SSing tl1 (: ScnSc
which thc basc {1ftcr whicl॥ thcy
are prcscribcd h:as got: cf. अनिटैिथ्ट[थ्र्थी:
प्रत्यया: स्वार्थे भधा*ित-afiixcs, to which
no meaning lh:us bcctn assigncd,
convey thc mcar1ing of thc bascS tO
ywhich thcy arc addcd!|; cf. Par-
Sek. IPari. 1 13; cf. :als(» M. tBh. on
III. 2.4, III, 2.67, I [I. 3°. 19, II I.
4.9, VI. ].162.
अनिष्ट an undcsircd conscÇuः1cncc Qr
result; cf. अनिष्टं -धं प्राग्ग्मेाति इ? व्च न स्सिं?यति
M. Bh. on I. 3.l ; al5o cf. नानिष्टlथाँ
|शास्त्रप्रवृच्तिः M. Bh. on VI. |1.2.
अनिष्टिज्ञ ignorant or inattcntivc to
what the Gr:ammari:arn intcnds or
desires to say. cf. तश्र *ौंर्यभगथतें|ात्त्तम्--
अनिटिज्ञेीं वाञ्डधः पठतेि l इष्यत Uश्च न्चतुमीत्रः
प्ळुतः M. Bh. on VIII. 2.106.
अनीयर् kg't afiix, termed कृत्य also
forming thc pot. pass. part. of a



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-037.png}}}}}}

21
अनुदाच्त
root; cf. तव्यत्तव्यानीयर: P.III.1.96. e.g.
see the forms करणीयं, हरणfियं, th1c mute
र् showing the acute accent on the
penultimate vOWel.
अनुकरण (1) imitation; a word utter-
ed in imitatiom of another; an imi-
tative name; cf. अनुकरणं चानितिपरम्
P. I.4.62; अनुकर्णं हि शिष्टाशिष्टाप्रतिविद्धेषु
यथा लौकिकवैदिकेषु, Siva sutra 2 Vārt 1 ;
cf. also प्रकृतिवद् अनुकरणं भवति an imi-
tative name is like its original Par.
Sek. Pari. 36; also M.Bh, on WIII.
2.46; (2) imitative word, onorma-
topoetic word; cf. एवं ह्याहुः ,कुक्छुटाः
कुक्कुड् इति । नैवं त अाहुः । अनुकेरणमेतरेiधा॒म्
M. Bh. on I.3.48. " cf also दुन्दुभिः
इति शब्दानुकरणम् Nir. IX. 12.
अनुकर्षण dragging (from the preced-
ing rule) to the following rule tak-
ing the previous rule or a part of
it a$ understood in the following
rule or rules in Order; the Same as
अनुवृत्ति; cf. अनुकर्षणार्थश्चकारः Kās. on II.
4. I8, III. 2.26, VII. 1.48; cf. also
the Paribhāgā चानुकृष्टं नेोत्तरत्र-that
which is attracted from a preced-
ing rule by the particle च is not
yalid in the rule that follows; Par.
Sek. Pari. 78.
अनुकृष्ट attracted from a previous
rule as is frequently done in Pāni-
ni?s rules. See the word अनुक्रर्षण
above.
अनुत्त not actually stated or expressed
in a rule; cf. चकारोऽनुक्तसमुच्चयार्थ:
KāŚ. on II. 4.18, III. 2. 26, VII.
1. 48; also cf. Nyāsa on P. II. 2.9
अनुक्रम right or regular order in a
Wedic rccital, called क्रम. e. g. वायवः
स्थ.
अनुक्रमण enumeration (in the right
order aS,.oppOScd tO व्युत्क्रम ); e. g.
अथ किमर्थमुत्तरत्र एवमांदि ओनुक्रमणं क्रियते
M. Bh. on II. l. 58; also on IV.
2.70; verbal forms of the root क्रम्
with अनु occur in this sense very
| frequently; e.g. यदित ऊर्ध्वं अनुक्रमेिष्याम:;
| So alsO the p. p. p. अनुक्रान्तं occurs
frequently in the Same Sense.
अनुत्तन्त्र lit. that which follows Tantra
i.e.Sāstra which means the original
|ruleS ofa Sàstra; technical term for
Vartika used by Bhartrhari; cf. सूत्राणां
सानुतन्त्राणां भाष्याणां च प्रणेतृभिः Vak. Pad.
I.23, where the word अनुतन्त्र is ex-
plaiEied as Vārtika by the com-
mentator.
अनुठुच्तम other tham उत्तम or the first
person; cf. विभाषितं सेोपसर्गमनुत्तमम् P.
VIiI 1.53 and Kā$ikā thereon.
अनुत्पात non-production of an ele-
iment of a word Such as an affix or
an augment or the like; cf. वावचने
चानुत्पच्यर्थम् P. III. 1.2 Vārt. 7, तत्रेीा-
त्पत्तिवाँ प्रसङ्क यथा ताद्वते P. III. 1. 94
Vārt. 2, also कृष्यादिषु चानुत्पात्तिः (णिचः )
P. 1II. 1.26, Vart. 3.
अनुदाच्त non-udātta, absence of the
acute accent; one of the Babyapra-
yatnas or external efforts to pro-
duce SOund. This Sense poSsibly
refers to a Stage or a time when
only one accent, the acute or उदात्त
was recognized .juSt as in English
and Othcr languages at present,
This udātta was given to only one
voWel in a single wOrd (simple or
compound) and all the other
vowels were uttered accentless.i.e.
अनुदाच्त. Possibly with this idea.in
view, the standard rule *अनुदाच्तं पदमे-
कवर्जम् * was laid down by Panini.
P. VI. 1.158. As, however, the
syllable, just preceding the accent-
ed ( उदात्त ) syllable, Was uttered
with a wery loW tone, it Was call-
ed अनुदात्ततर, while if the syllables
Succeeding the accented syllable
showed a gradual fall in case they
happened tO be consecutive and
more than tWo, the Syllable suc-
ceeding the उदात्त WaS given a
mid-Way tone, called स्वरित; cf.
9



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-038.png}}}}}}

अनुदाच्ततर
22 अनुनाद
उदात्तादनुदात्तस्य स्वरित:. Thu$, in the
utterahice of Vedic hymnS the
practice of three toneS उद[रत, अनुदlन्तं
and स्वरित catne in vOgue and
according!y they are found defined
in all the Prāti$ākhya.and grammar
works;cf. उच्चैरुदात्तः, नीचैरनुदात्तः समाहारः
स्वरितः P. I. 2. 29-31, T.Pr. I. 38-40,
W. Pr. ]i. 108-1 10. Amuadātta, is
defined by the author of the Ka$i-
kavपृtti as यस्मिन्नुच्न्वार्यमाणे गात्राणामन्ववखगेीं
नाम शिथिलीभवनं भवति, स्वरस्य मृदुता, कण्ट-
विवरस्य उरुता च सः अनुद्ाच्तः cf. अन्ववसर्गो
मार्दवमुरुता खसेयति नेीिचै:कराागि शध्दस्य
M. Bh. on I. 2. 29,30. Cf. also
उदात्तश्चानुदात्तश्च स्वरितश्च ऋयः स्वरा: | अायाम-
विश्रम्भाक्षपैस्त उच्यन्तऽक्षराश्रया: |l R. Pr.
III. l . The term anudātta is tranS-
lated by the word *grave' as oppO-
sed to *acute? (udātta,) and *circu-
mflex' (Svarita}; (2) a term appli-
ed to Suach rootS as have their
vOwel अनुदाच्त or gravc, the chief
characteristic of Such roots being
the nOn-admission of the augment
इ before an ardhadhātuka, affix
placed after them. ( See अनिट्, ).
अनुदाच्ततर quite a low tone, comple-
tely grave; generally applied tO
the tone Of that gःrave or anudātta
vOwel which is immediately follow-
ed by an actute ( उदात्त ) vowel.
When the three Vedic accents
*Were Sub-divided into seven tones
wiz. उदात्तु, उ॒दात्ततर, अनुदात्त, अनुदात्ततर,
स्वरित, स्वरितस्र्थेोदात्त and `एकश्रुति corres-
|pOnding tO the Seven musical notes,
the अनुदाच्ततर was the name given
tO the lowest of them all. अनुदात्ततर
was termed सन्नतर also; cf. उदाच्तस्चरित-
परस्य सन्नतरः P. I. 2.40; cf. aiso M. Bh.
on I.• 2.33.
अनुदाच्त्ता a term meaning * having a
grave accent,* used by ancient
grammarians._Cf. किामयमेकश्रुतिरुदात्ता
, उत अनुदात्ता M. Bh.on I. 2.33.
अनुदात्तेत् lit. one whose mute signifi-
catory lcttcr is uttered with a grave
acccnt; a tcrm applied to a root
claaracterized by an indicatOry
mute vowel acccntcd grave, the
chief feature of Such a rOot being
that it takes Only the Atmanepada
afiixes; c. g. अारुंत, वस्त, etc. ; cf.
अनुदात्तङित अात्मनेनपदम् P. I. 3.12; such
a rOot, in forming a derivatiwe
word in thc Scnsc of habit, takcS
the affix युञ्य् e. g. धर्त्तनः, वर्धनः ctc.
provided the root bcgir1S with a
cornsor1ant ; cf. 3नुद्रारेनश्च छ्ट्लादे: P.
II[E. 2.149.
अनुदाच्तेोपदेशा (a root) pronounccd ori-
ginally i. C. prOnOurnCcd in thc
IDhātupatha with a grave accent;
see thc word ट्!नुदातं abQve; cf.
अनुदात्तेोपदेशाचनार्तितनोत्यादीनाभभु॒नासिकलेापेो
इझलि द्विङ्कति P. VI. 4.37. Sce also the
%word अनिट् above.
अनुदेश (!) rcfcrenccः, meration, state-
ment refcrring to :t prcccding cle-
ment. cf. यथाग्सं**श्यमनुर्देटश: रसमान्नाम् P. I.
3.10; cf. अfितद्धधचनात् *िद्धिमििभेति चेयद् उत्सगै-
ल<{ण्[ानामनुदेश्ठI: M. B!३. I. 1.57, V:irt. 3.
(2) declaration, prescriptioin ; thc
Same aS अतिदेश्ट्रॉ. cf. रुथान्यादेशपृथक्त्वादादेश
स्थानिधद् अनुदर्शेा गुरुंधट्ट् गुरुपुत्रा इतिं यथा P.
I.l.56 Vārt. 1; (3) a grammatical
Operation cf.. यथान्भं*<श्यमनुद्रेश्ठा: रमानाम् 1
रमसंश्रन्धीं धिंधिथैथासँर:यं स्याàंत् Sid. Katu.
on l?.I. 8.10. Scc thc w{yrd अभूद्देश
itI thiS Sense cf. संग्श्ष्ट्यात्तानामभृहंंंंंशेीं श्यथा-
संख्यम् V, Pr. I.143.
अनुनाद a forc-sc»und : a prcccdirng
additiomal sound which is looked
upOn aS a fःault; e. g• इह्नयामि
whcn pronounccd aS अह्रयामि. This
SOund is uttercd bcoिre am initial
SOnant consonant. It is aksO utter-
cd bcfOrc initial aspiratcS or vi:क्ष्arga.•
cf. धोधवताम्नुनादः पुरस्ताद् अादिस्थानां, क्रियते
धारणं वा ! सोप्मेाष्मणामनुनांदोप्यनाद : R. Pr.
XIV.18,19.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-039.png}}}}}}

अनुनासिक
23
अनुप्रदान
अनुनासिक (a letter) uttered through
the nose and mouth both, as difier-
ent from anusvāra which is uttered
only through the mose. cf. मुखनासिका-
वचनेानुनासिकः P.I.1.8, and M. Bh.
thereon. The anunāsika or nasal
letters are thefifth lettersof thefive
claSSes ( i.e. ङ्,श्, णु, न् , म् ) as alsO
woWels अ, इ, उ and semiwowels
when so pronounced, as ordinarily
they are uttered through the
mOuth only; ( e. g. ॐं, अाँ, etc.
or य्र्यें, ळेर्वे, ल्र्ले etc. in सय्यंन्ता, सब्र्वेत्सरः,
सैल्लीनः etc. ) The अनुनासिक or
nasalized vowels are named रङ्गवर्ण
and they are said to be con-
sisting of three mātras. cf. अष्टौ
अाद्यानवसानेऽप्रगृह्यान् अाच्चार्या अाहुरनुना-
सिकान् स्वरान् । तात्त्रामात्रे शाकला दर्शयन्ति
R. Pr. I. 63. 64; cf. also अप्रग्रहाः
समानाक्षराणि अनुनासिकानि एवेकषाम् T. Pr
XV.6. Trivikrama, a commentator
on the Kāt. Stitras, explains अनुनासिक
as अनु पश्चात् नासिकास्थानं उच्चारणं एषां
इत्यनुनींसिकाः. । ' पूर्व मुखस्थानमुच्चारणं पश्चा-
व्नासिकास्थानमुच्चांरणामेित्यर्थः । अनुग्रहणात्कवल-
नासिकास्थानोच्चारणस्य! अनुस्वाररू॒य नेन॒यं संज्ञा !
and remarks further पूर्वाचार्यप्रासिद्धसेञ्ज्ञे-
यमन्वर्था । Com. by Tr. on Kat. I
1.13. WoWels which are uttered
nasalized by Panini in his works
viz. सूत्रपाठ, धातुपाठ, गणपाठ etC. are
silent ones i. e. they are not actu-
ally found in use. They are put by
him only for the sake of a com-
plete utterance, their nasalized
nature being made out only by
means of traditional convention.
e. g• एध, स्पर्ध etc. cf. उपदेशेाऽजनुनासिक
इत् P. I. 3.2; cf also प्रातज्ञानुनासिक्याः
पाणिनीयाः Kas' on I.8.2.
अनुन्यास a commentary on न्यास ( काशि-
काविवणरपञ्जिका by जिनेन्द्रबुाद्ध). The work
is believed to have been written by
इन्दुमित्र. It is not available at pre-
sent except in the form of refer-
ences to it Which are numerOuS
especially in Siradcva's Paribhā-
-$ंawptti.
अनुपपात discord, absence of validity,
incorrect interpretation; cfप्रथमानुपप-
च्तिस्तु M.Bh on I. 4.9.
अनुपपद्यमाना impossibility of being
explained; cf. तत्र सिद्धायां अनुपपद्यमा-
नायां इतरथा उपपादयिषेत्, Nir II.2.
अनुपपन्न impossible to be explained,
not consistent ; cf. अथाप्यनुपपन्नार्था
भवन्ति । ओोषधे त्रायस्वैनम् । Nir. I. 15.
अनुपरिपाद्य (संहिता) the Pada text of
the Vedic Sanihhitā.
अनुपसर्जन not Subordinated in word-
relātion, principal member; cf. अनु-
पसर्जनात् P. IV. 'I. 14 and M. Bhi.
thereon; cf. also Par. Sek Pari. 26.
अनुप्रदान an effort outside the mouth
in the prOduction of Sound at
the different wocal Organs such
aS कण्ठ, ताळु etc. which is looked
upon aS an external efiort or
bahyaprayatna.अनुप्रदान is one of the
three main factors in the produc-
tion of SOund which are ( 1 ) स्थान,
( 2 ) करण or अाभ्यन्तरप्रयत्न and ( 3 )
अनुप्रदान or बाह्यप्रयत्न; cf. स्थाकरणप्रयत्नभ्येा
वण जायन्ते Cān. The commentator
on T. Pr. describes अनुप्रदान as the
मूलकारण or उपादानकारण, the main
cause in the production of articu-
late sound; cf. अनुप्रदीयते अनेन वर्ण: इति
अनुप्रदानम्: cf. also " अनुप्रदीयते इत्यनुप्रदानं
प्रयत्न इत्यर्थः ; Uvvaga on R. Pr. XIII.
1. Generally tWo main varieties
of बाह्यप्रयत्न are termed अनुप्रदान which
are mentioned as (i) श्वासानुप्रदान
(emiSSion of breath) and नादानुप्रदान
(reSomance), the other warieties of
it such as विवार, संवार, घोष्प्र, अघेोष,
अल्पप्राण, महाप्र[ण, उदात्त, अनुदाच्त and
स्वरित being called merely as
बाह्यप्रयत्न.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-040.png}}}}}}

अनुप्रयोग
अनुप्रयोग subsequent utterance; ltt.
post-position, as in thc case of the
foots कृ, भू.and अफ़् in the periphँ à-
stic perfect forms; cf. अाम्प्रत्यूयवत् |ट्टैंi[s
नुप्र॒योगैस्य, P. ı. 3. 63; यथाविध्यनुश्रयेोगः
पूर्वस्मिन् III 4. 4.
अनुबन्ध a letter or letters added to a
word before or after it, Oraly tO
signify some specific purpOSe Suc!1
as (a) the addition of an affix
(e. g. केित्र, अथुछ्, अड् etc.) Or (b) the
substitution of गुण, वृद्धि Or सँश्प्रस्तार?{
wowelor (c) sometimes their prcvcn-
tion. These anubandha letterS arC
termed इत् (lit. going or disappcar-
ing) by Panini (cf. उठेपदेशेजनुनासिक
इत् etc. I.3.2 to 9), and they dO
not form an esSential part of the
word to which they are attachcd,
the word in usage being alwayS
found without the इत् letter. For
technical pUrpOseS in grammar,
however, such as अादित्व or अन्तत्व of
affixes which are charactcrized
by इत् letters, they are lookCd
upon as essential factOrs, cf.
अनेकान्ता अनुबन्धाः, एकान्ताः, etc, Par.
Sek. Pari. 4 to 8. Although पाiिोनि
has invariably used the tcrm इत्
for अनुबन्ध letters in his Sütras,
Patafंjali and other reputed Writers
on Pānini's grammar right on upto
Nāgeśa of the 18th century have
used the term अनुबन्ध of ancient
grammarianS in their writingS in
the place of इत्. The term अनुवन्ध
was chosen for mute significatory
letterS by ancient grammariarjS
probably On account of the ana-
logy of the अनुबन्ध्य पशु, tied down
at Sacrifices to thc pOst and
subSequently slaughtered.
अनुभूतेिस्वरूपाचार्य a writer of the
twelfth century who wrote a. work
on grammar called सरस्वतीं-प्रक्रिया
or सारस्वतप्रक्रिया. He has also written
24
अनुविधि
ध। तुपाठ and अाश्ङ्क्ष्यातप्रक्रिश्या. Tlic gram-
m}ar is a short onc and ãS Studied
in 8omc partS of India•
अनुष्म् not aj|lowing thc addition of thc
augrnent नुम् (i.e. lcttcr न् ) after
the last voWel; Thc tcrm iS uscd,
in connection with the prcSent part.
affix, by P.iI]i|1hi in his rulc श्ट्ानुरनुमेो
२ट्र ज्ञादट्री V'í. 1 .l 73.
अनुभान inference,	Suggestiop, cf.
अशक्यi क्रिया iि"I ठी५भूता f•iदश्ििश्धेलुम् l
र{|स[ नंशुभfनग्[म्था M. Bh• On I . 3. 1 .
अनुलोम in the natural order (opp.
to प्रतेिळे,*{ ), cf. तेऽ-च:नर्श्वंधश्येीशु?श्रेॉभा: in
|R.. Pr. II. 8. अंjळे[भं*iधि is " a term
applied to Satी 1dhis with a vowcl
first and a CO11SOr1ant afterwards.
अनुलोमसाँधे combination accOrding
to the alphabctical { }rdlcr ; {t kind of
euphonic alteratiot1 ( संधि ) wh{:rc
the vowcl cO;mc3 firSt. ५:.g- छ्ट्रॐश्थधा|ट्+
अद्भिः whcrc दृट् is ch:a.1ngcd tO श्ट्;tगू!{:
देवं:=:पूर्थं देश्च: cf. lR. l?r. II. :8. (Sce
अनुळे[म ).
अनुवतैन Continuatioth Or recurretnce
Of a word from t!1c prccc*diihg to
thc SucCccding rulc ; thc S:tt11c aS
anuvg't!i; cf. अनुथुर्तन्ते,नी+ विधयः ! न
चानुवर्तनांदव भवन्ति | किं रुतांष्र्ट् 1 यत्•tा.<:{न्तीतिं
M. Bh. on I. l . 3.
अनुबत्र्य to be obscrvcd, to bc ०bcyed:
cf. न लश्क्षjjन पदकारा अन्रुवंत्यीँ: l पदकॉरैनीँम
लश्क्षणमनुधत्र्यम् M. Bh. 6n l 1[. 1. 109.
अनुवाद rcpctition of a rule :ulrca¢iy
laid down or ofa. Statctincnt airc:{tdy
made; cf. प्रमाणान्तग्[श्वग्tतस्य अर्थस्य शश्दन
संकीर्तनमात्रमनुवादः Kā$. on II. 4.3.
अनुविधि ()?pcration in conforimity with
what is found. Thc expression
श्छ्न्दग्ति दृध्टानुविधिः is oftc m fout1d in thc
Mahābhā::y:a; cf. M. Bh. on t. l .5,
I. l .6, I. 1.21, {|II. l.9, II I. 1.1:8,
VI. 1.6, VI. 1.77, VI. 1.79, VI.
4.128,VI. 4.141, VIII. 2.108.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-041.png}}}}}}

अनुवृत्ति
25
अनेकार्थ
अनुवृत्ति repetition or recurrence of a
word from the previous to the subं-
sequent rule or rules, which is
neceSIary for the Sake of the intend-
ed interpretation. The word is of
commrlon use in b0okS on Panini's
graminar. This recurrence is gene-
rally continuous like the stream of
a riध्rer ( गङ्गास्नोतोवत् ); s०mctirmes
howe'rer, when it is not required in |
an in*ermediate rule, although it |
prOceeds furthcr, it is named
मण्ड्रकष्ट्ट्टत्यानुट्टरित. In rare cases it is
takena backWards in a stitra work
from a subsequent rule to a pre-
viou3 rule when it is called अपक्रध्र्घ.
अनुशासन्ह traditionalinstruction; treat- 1
men% O|Í a topic; e.g. अथ श्झ*दानुशासनम्
|M. Bh. I. ].l where the word js
explained as अनुशिप्यते संरिक्रयन्ते व्युत्पा-
द्यन्त अनेन इति अनुशाएलन्नम्.
अनुषङ्ग (|!) lit.attaching, afÎixing; aug-
ment, अनुषज्यते असौ अनुषङ्गः; (2) a term
for the naSal letter attached to the
following consonant whi£h is the
last, ६lSed.by ancient gratmmarians;
cf. अ*Fयात्यूर्वो मस्जेरनुषङ्क्षसंयेगिादिलेपार्थम् cf.
P.I. l,47 Wart. 2 and M.Bh. there-
on: c*. थफान्तानां चानुषङ्गिणाम् Ka t. IV.
1•13._The term अनुषङ्ङ्गं is defined ja
the Katantra grammar as व्यञ्जनान्न :
अनुष्अङ्ग*. The terrm is applied to the
nasal COnsOnant न्म् preceding the
last k:tter Of a noun base or a root
base; penultimate nasal of a root
or noun base; Kāt. II.|!|.12.
अनुसंद्दार independent mention, a
second time, of a thing already
mer३ttioned,for another purpose; cf.
* अ॒लेन्त्यस्य ? इति स्थान विज्ञातस्यानुसंहार :
P.I.1.53 Vairt. 1.
अनुसंद्वितं aCCOrding to the Saihhitā
t८xt of the Vedas; cf.एतानि नेोहं `गान्व्.छ्रन्ति
अध्रिगो अनुसंहितम् Bhartgihari's Mahā-
bhāśyadipiki p. 9; cf. also lR. Pr.
XT• 31, also XV. 33, where thऽ
4
word is explained as संहिताक्रमेण by
Uvata.
अनुस्वार see above under अं.
अ:नूत said afterwards, gcnerally in
imitation; cf. अनूत्तवान् अनूचानः । अनू-
स्तभित्येवान्यत्र M.Bh.on III. 2.109.
~、 →
अनूच्र्ते statennent with reference to
what has been already said; the
Same as anvāde$a.
अनूद्देश statetघ्inent or mention itmme-
diately aftcrwards; thc same as
the word अनुदेश used by Pānini in
|I.3.10, cf. संख्यातानामङ्केद्देद्दशेा यथास्रंग्ट्यम् ।
अ-द्धेद्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्दश : पश्चादुद्दश: Uvaga on V. Pr.
|H. 143.
अनेकशेष having no cka$esa topic in it;
a terrn applied to the Daiva Grarn-
mar which does not discuss the
ekaśega topic to which Panini has
dewoted ten rules from I. 2.64
tO 73.
अनेकस्यर hawing many wOWels or
syllables in it; the same as अनेकाच्
of Pānini; cf. Hem. III. 4.46
अनेकाक्षर having many syllables in it;
cf. अनेकाक्षरयेास्त्वसंयोगाद्यवौ Kāt. Ii.2.59.
अनेकाच्द्भ् having many vowels (two or
more) in it; opp. tO एकाछ् ; a term
frequently used in Pāmini's gram-
mar meaning thc same as अनेकस्वर
or अनेकाक्षर, which see abowe; cf. P.
VI. 3.42,VI. 4.82
अनेकान्त (1) not forming an integral
part, the Samc .as अनव्बुयव; cf. अनेन-
कान्ता: अनवयवा इत्यर्थः Par. Sek. Pari 4.
(2) absence of any definite view
cf. अनकान्तत्वाच्च । येषां चाप्यारभ्यते तेषामप्यने-
कान्तः l . . मामहान उक्थपा|न्नाम् | ममहान इति
न्च l M. Bh. on VI. l. 7
अनेकार्थ (1) poSSessed of a plural
sense: referring tO many thingS.
cf. अनेकार्थे युप्मदस्मदी M. Bh. o8n b'.II.
2. 98 also " अनेकार्थाश्रथश्च पुनरकश्शषः P. I.
2.64 Vārt. 15; (2) poSscssed of



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-042.png}}}}}}

अनैकाळुट् 26 अन्तरङ्ग
many senses, cf. अनेकार्था अपि धातवो
भवान्त M. Bh, on P.IHI. 2.48; alSO
cf. यान्यनेकाथनि एकशश्दानि तान्यतेीनु-
|क्रमिध्याम: Nir. IV. k .
अनेकाल्छ् possessed of many letters;
|lit. possessed of not One letter, Cf.
अनेकाछ्शित् सर्वस्य P. I. 1.55.
अनेजन्त not ending in a diphth9pg;
cf नानुबन्धकृतमनेजन्तत्वम् Par • Sck.
Par. 7
अनैकान्तिक undetermined, indefinite*
एतदप्यनैकान्तिकं यदल्पप्राणस्य सवेचैिस्तन्महा-
प्राणस्य सर्वनीचै: M. Bh.on I. 2.30, also
|M. Bh. om VI. i.37; mot invar i-
able, cf. अनैकान्तिकं ज्ञापकम् M. Bh.
on VII. 2.102, VIII. 3.34
अनैमित्तिक not possessed of any defi-
nite cause; अनैमिातको ह्यनुबन्धलेापः M.
Bh. on I. 1.20 also on I. 1.59
and I. 2.64.
अन्त final, phonetically last element
remaining, of course, after the
mute significatory letters have
been dropped. cf. अनुत्तरलक्षणोन्तः M.
Bh. on I. 1.21 Vārt, 6.
अन्तकरण lit. bringing about as the
final: an affix (which is generally
put at the end); ancient term for
an affixः cf.एत: कारितं च यकारादिं चान्त-
tकूष्म् ! अस्तः शुद्धं च सकाराादिं न्च । Njr. I.
अन्तःकार्य lit. interior Operation; an
operation inSide a, word in its
oिrrmation-stage , which naturally
becomes afataraf7g.¢ as contrasted
with an operation depending on
twO cOmplete words after ' their
formation which is looked upon as
bah?r*ai?ga.
अन्त:पदम् inside a word; explained |
as प॒द्रुस्य मुध्ये by उब्त्रट; cf. नुश्चान्त:पदऽरेफे
V• Pr. IV. 2 cf. also अन्तःपदं वेिवृस्तयः
|R. Pr.II. 13.
अन्त:पात ंinsertion of a lettcr or pho-
netic element such as the letter क्
between ङ् and a Sibilant, or
* the lct tcr ट् bctwccn ए॒ण् and a
sibilant ; cf. प्रल्यङ्क् स विश्वा, वाभ्रंञ्छ् चु
|छ्रथिहि; cf. Pān. VIII. 3.28, 29, 30,
31; cf. तेऽन्त:पाता: अकृतसंहितानाम् R.
|iPr.. [W. 20)
अरन्त: पादम् inside the foot of a verse
explained as पादएय 3[क्षेचे by Uvva{a ;
cf. प्रकृत्याऽन्तःपादम६यर्योर. i'. VI.1. l 13.
अन्त:स्थ, अन्त:स्थ #., als०) writctm as
अन्तस्थ, अान्तस्था .f'., Scmivowcl; cf.
अथान्तस्थां: { थितेि रेिनि लिति श्क्षेिर्नि; V. Pr.
VIiंI. 14-15; cf. चतद्धेॉन्त:श्था: cx-
plained by उव्वट as रुपश्शंi'+{'Jtl|+{न्तः
मये तिष्ठन्तीति अन्तःस्ट्थीं: |R. l?r. I. 9,
also परशश्रधतट्ट्रेलेीन्तरुस्था: T. lPr'. I. 8. Tlac
ancient tcrtm appcarS tO bc ॐ{*तःरुथा
.f. used in thc Priti*śākhya workS.
The word अन्त:स्थानाम् occurS twicc
in the Mahābh:ः:ष्ya from whicla it
cannot bc Said whether tl1c WOrd
there is अन्त:स्थ ?)?. Or ॐ{*तं:म्था f.
Th c terrm अन्तस्थ or अभ्:तथi is ex-
|plaincd by thc coImmcratk1t orS O}n
Kātantra as स्वस्य स्वस्य स्थi*iश्:ध{ ॐ{न्ते
तिष्ठन्तीति |
अन्हतर interval betweer] t w() p!hornctic
elcmcnts whcn ti1ey ar५: 11t{crcd
One after anothc:r ; hi:atus, j):६tt$c: ;
वण॒न्तृिरं परमाणु, R. T. 34 ; al${) *ि{रामे[
वर्णियेार्मध्यप्यणुकत्िंलाान्यरंस्युतं Vy:is:1$ik:ā ; ('?)
Spacc bctwccn twO pl1or 1ctic (:lc-
rmcntS. C. g. स्वरान्तर cxpl:tiracd :{S
स्वरयेीरन्तर (betwcen two v(»wcls) by
Uvvata cf. अन्तस्थान्तरेीापलिट्{fी धिभा-
प्रितगुणः Nir X.17.
अन्तरङ्ग a highly tcchmical {crtn in
Pārāini's grarrirmar applicd in a
variety of WayS to rule$ which
thereby can Superscdc other
rulcs. The tcrrm iS not uscd
by P'àt?ini himsclf. The V'ārti-
kakāra has uScd the tcrrm thrice
( Sec I. 4. 2 Vart.. 8, VI. 1. l U6
Vart. 10 arad V 1II. 2. 6 Vārt. l)
ewidently in thc sense of *imme-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-043.png}}}}}}

अन्तरङ्ग
27
अन्तर्गण
diate', *urgent', *of earlier occur-
rence' or thc like. The word is
usually explained as a Bahuvrihi
compound meaning * अन्तः अङ्गानि
निमित्तानि यस्य * (a rule or operation
which has got the causes of its
application within thOSe of another
rule or operation Which consequ-
ently is termed बहिरङ्गा ). अन्तरङ्ग, in
short, iS a rule whOse causes of
operation occur earlier in the
wording of the form, or in the pro-
cess of formation. As an अन्तरङ्ग
rule occurs to the mind earlier, as
seen above, it is looked upon as
stronger than any other rule, barr-
ing of courSe अपवाद rules or excep-
tions, if the other rule presents
itself simultaneously. The Vārtika-
kāra, hence, in giving preference to
अन्तरङ्ग rules, uses generally the
wording अन्तरङ्गबलीयस्त्वात् which is
paraphrased by अन्तरंङ्गं बहिरङ्गाद् बलीश्यः
which is looked upon as a pari-
bhāgā. Grammarians, succeeding
the Vārtikakāra, not only looked
upon the बहिरङ्ग operation as weaker
than अन्तरङ्ग, but they looked upon
it as inwalid or invisible before the
अन्तरङ्ग operation had taken place.
They laid down the Paribhāsञ्a
असिद्धं बहिरङ्गमन्तरङ्गे which has been
thoroughly discussed by NagcŚa in
his Paribhāgenduśekhara.. The
अन्तरङ्गत्व is taken in a variety of
ways by Grammarians : (1) having
cauSeS of application within or
bcfore thOSe of another e. g. स्येोनः
frOm the root सिबू (सि + उ +न) where
the यण् substitute for इ is अन्तरड्छूङ्गं be-
ing caused by उ as compared tO
guraa for उ which is caused by न,
(2) having causes of application
occurring before those of another
in the wording of the form, (3)
|hawing a Smaller number of causes,
(4) Occurring earlier in the order |
अन्तरङ्गलक्षण characterized by
Of $cveral operations which take
place in arriving at the complete
forn1 Of a word, (5) not having संज्ञा
(technical term) as a cause of its
application, ( 6 ) not depending
upon twO words or padas, (7) de-
pending upon a cauSe or cauSe$ Of a
general nature (सामान्यापेक्ष) as oppos-
ed tO One which depends on causes
of a specific nature ( विदेशषापक्ष ).
अन्तरङ्गपरिभाषा the phrase is used
generally for the परिभाषा * असिद्धं बहि-
रङ्गमन्तरङ्गे * described above. See the
word अन्तरङ्ग. The परिभाषा has got a
very wide field of application and
is used seweral times in setting
aside difiiculties which present
themselves in the formation of a
word. Like many other paribhā$ās
this paribhāsंā is not a paribhā|ंā
of universal application.
अन्तरङ्गबलीयस्त्व the strength which
an ar1ttarahga rule Or operation
possesses by virtue of which it
Supersedes all other rules or opc-
rations,cxcepting an apawada rule,
when or if they occur simultane-
ously in thc formation of a word.
the
nature ofan arttaraiig.¢ operation
which givcs that rule a special
strength to set aside other rules
occurring togcther with it.
अन्तरतम very close or very cognate;
being characterized (]) by the
$ame place of utterance, or (2) by
poSSeSSing the Same ScnSe, Or (3) by
possessing the same qualities, Or (4)
by poSScssing the Same dimension ;
cf स्थानेन्तरतमः P. I. l.50 and Kāś.
thereon अान्तर्य स्थानार्थगुण॒प्रमाणतः l स्थानतः
दण्डाग्रम्, अर्थतः वतण्डी चासौ युवतिश्च वातण्ङय-
युवति॒िः । गुणतः पाकः, त्यागः, रागः । प्रमाणतः
अमुष्मं अमूभ्याम् ॥
अन्तर्गण a group of words mentioned
inside another group of wOrds (गण);



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-044.png}}}}}}

अन्तभव
cf. पुषादिदैिवाद्यन्तर्गणेो गृह्यते, न्1 भ्वादिक्र८ा- ||
दृद्यन्तर्गण्;ः द्वैÇङ्क्ष्:ś on 1ii. i.53 ; al$O ं
बकाण्वाा६धर्माद्यन्तग्lि|: Kà५ o:1 i V.2. i j 1 .
अन्तर्भीव्च inclusion of an elemerःt (of
sense) ira what has bes in acttlal!y
assigt1ed. c. g. दे:क्ष्र्दूक्ष्तमुपर+ति 1 उपर{श्य-
तीति '' यावत् { अन्तभवितँश्वश्थेॉत्र २भिं: śS ãt$
on P. I.3.&:4, अन्ःतभ्र्भीश्ञ्थिताँश्य{र्थेीं युधिं:
सकर्मकेi भवति ! राजंयुध्व्वा iK ई5 O1n P.à { ! .
2. 95.
अन्तर्हित Separated by a dissi!रे॒ai!ar
clemcn{ ; cf. यूनि च1भ्ंतर्हितैं अ:ा िः P.fv'.
4.93 Vārt. 5. ' व्यञ्जनान्तईिर्तेtपि उद्र!<.iपर्ः
अनुदात्तः स्वरितश्iiपद्यते T. Pr. 2X1V. ॐ0;
cf. also iR. |Pr. !IH.9.
अन्तवद्भाव supp¢xscd condit icy1n Oj bc- |ं
ing at the er!d obt श्āiiacçं by thC
single Substitutc(प्,कंॉंद्रे:श्ां) for thc fir):al
of the preceditng a hd t!te it}iti:al
of the succeeding word. cf. ॐ:तींदेि-
वच्च i येोयमेकादेशः स पूर्वरैयान्तद्रत् परत्थंदिद्रेश्वत्]
स्यत् ि!| Sid. kau. on अन्तादिवन्टनघ् |ं*. V !.
1.84.
अत्तरूथ .f. also अन्तस्थः seriii-v'ow'el;
see under अन्'ल:स्थ.
अन्तादिवद्भाच cOndition, attributcd to
a single Substitute for the final of
the prcceding and initial of tlac
Succeeding word, of bcitig lookcd
upOi1 cf#h'er' aS tb१c fimal of the {
preccdiag word or as thc iraitial ;
of the Succeeding word but racycr
|aS bOth (thc fit1al as weःli as tihcः
initial) at onc and thc same tirac;
cf. उभयत अाश्रये नान्तादिश्धत्तूञ् Sir. Parj
39 also M. Bh. on I.2,48.
अन्ताम् affग़x of the impera. 3rd pers.
plur• Atm., SubStituted for " thc
Original affix इझ, e. g. एधन्ताम्.
अन्ति afiix of the pres. 3rd perS. pl.
Paras, Substituted for the original
affix झि, e• g. कुर्वन्ति, भधन्ति.
28
अन्तु affix of the impera. 3rd pers. pl.
Paras,..substituted for, the origitial
|affix ईित. e. g. भवन्तु, कुर्वन्तु.
→• → →→ → → →-~ → → →→→
अन्ते affix of tltc pres. 3:rd pe :3. pl.
A{J11. 8t:!»8!iः ६1{५:c!ं f* }r' {hc (! :ाँ!:gii}:al
a fii`< इंग्, &: g• t',श्-ंरेंंंं, <र्न-शैं.
अन्तेक्ष्रश्ं aः w, 6};'(i \w śt!1 itS l:tSt ?:) wC:l
acc€ः ;} {¢:d{ a ct! te. |RGO!s, Crutd : faOun
lg:aseः$ :३?१d c{}:द्वेmpott 1३d wordS 5{&:rnc-
ra!!y h:: ve 1}:cir iः१st vowcl : .c(*५*11{-
cÇ! :३&२; {cः ; cf. 'ि;,3: ( दृा|ा*ि? दिं:श्कस्य )
ॐi॰त ठद्वट्]न्लं: र्श्य्ात्तू i?i1iं; $ ' { f r.२ः !-|l ;
धाते: { :*. V' f. i.] {$:?} ऽ!-ंत ठश्व{ :"; : २ यात्ः
8 1ग्:jःjभ् थ् { Î?.V' {. ! .2:?:}) अ•त्i ?श्:1?ं,ः: * श्छात्j !
अन्त्य ( { ) fī!१:tl l(:t ईंcr'; 3:;न्ते 31°;क्ष्:•त्”ि.भ्र;, ! (४)
fir1:३! cO}१sk}|n?३;:{ 6!' {*:१(`!1 (?f {!¥:{: fiv'(;
gः'Qut jभS r•!' C(911::C r::i t 11:s w }}ic*,ः iS :३
nasa! ॐ:न्त्र्थें;:ii?ि!*क: }५. 'f'. 17.
अन्यत्संश्र्त्त: optionally' ; li{. i 11 : :1{ *tl1¢*r
९९'ay ; cf. àग्र्ग्र. : 3धं ऽ,•-थ्riर: !: V'. !'.'*' . ] 5.
अन्भ्यतरस्यास्श् o])tio11:aily': li{. j 11 *:l1C {}1cr
way. 'f'it{; {(:r1}३ i$ \'{: i y' C'0ti1iो}(ajh ir1
rule५ ()f Pāi11i, w'}:('Î'(: tl:¢: { {'r th}S
व{ atjd f {urcः ;३!8{) t1s५:'(! i;} tl1c,
*िधंभ्iग्*!
*j3-i**%!
S8t iIद्वे{6 SC*r1862.
अन्यपदार्थ an6{h(?r sc118(', &c11S५: {!jff'r'-
ent from what l1{३$ bce:In (:xj)r('88(:'{l
by {hc wordi11g giv'c!1 ; C:f'. <:रेी*{,+{-य-
पदार्थे i'. J [.2.४:ाँ; " :also ॐ{न्ध {ग्;ार्थः{धा|नेा
बहुर्ध्नी ि,: M{. l}l१. o1} l 1. l .ँti.
अन्"यथुक्त connectc(i wi{h t!1{: w'{}rd अन्यः
cC)1:incct{.d with a ti*)t}1५: r ; e.{: 2{•र्थे!
गवां श्न्ामीति |...ग[ इ%त्र 3!iर्थे|न्श्टुं {न्{िI|: l *1.ग्:iा:: !
सूझ:क्षे:ी. Mँ!.i}8l1. (}n ]?.!{!.8.४४.
|; अन्यसदृशाधिकरण्{ at} object wliich is
diflk'rgt1t froria what is ria&:1!ti{}r!¢:d,
yct sitrīilar tO» it; cf. न7ि{<ध्युक्रतभ-य' [ध्gश्l!-
धि*करणे तथा ह्यर्थगतिं, ! , अध्र६ि:'J!भ्Hा|•र्थे*शृक्षे
श्रोंध्{णि*iदृश्ट्रा अान्ीियते 1 नारीं ठंॉ :+il•श्qि jर्तीं
भश्वति ! M. l8h. 6n l'. II I. l. 1'2
अन्य्ायय irrcgular; cf. ग्र्?र्यश्िंश्रामा भूमिरि-
त्श्श्श्रेभ्{ााàकं प्रश्थो*!*{न्याश्थर्मेभश्च म-यन्ते; Kā&. on
P. V.'I I.3.34.
अन्यार्थ (1) lt *tvirng ar1Oth¢r pt}rpQs¢; or
signification; cf. अन्यार्थ ' प्रकृर्न अ*यार्थे
भधति M. Bh. o1h l.1.2:} ; (2) anot}{cr
ScnSc which i$ difigremt frcytm what
|is expresscd; cf. अन्यार्थेीं श्धहुत्रीहिः C:ān.
II.2.46.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-045.png}}}}}}

अन्योन्यसंश्रय 29
अन्योन्यसंश्रय reciprocally dependent |
and hence serving no purpose; |
same as इतरतराश्रय which is lookcd
upon as a fault. cf. अन्ये|ान्य:तंश्रयं त्वेतत् {
रूत्रीकृतः शव्दः श्ाव्दकृतं च स्त्रीत्यम् M.Bh. on
|fV.1.3.
अन्वक्षरसधि a combination of lctterS
according to the order of the
lcttcrs in the Alphabct; a saiindhi
or cuphonic cot?nbinatioth of a
woWel and a consonant, called
अन्वक्षर-अनुलेामसंधि where a vowel
preccdeS a consonant; and अन्व- [
क्षरप्रतिलोभसंधि whcre a consonant pre-
cedes a woWel, the consonant in
that case being changed into the
third of i's class ; एष स्य श्त च स्वराश्च पूर्वे
भवति ब्यञ्जनमुत्तरं यदभ्यः ।तेन्वक्षरसेधयेानुलेमिाः
प्रातेलेोमाश्च विपथैये त एव । R Pr. IÎ.8.9
e. g. एष देव:, स देव: and others are
instances of अन्चक्षरानुलेीमरुंधि where
विसर्ग after the vowel is dropped;
while हत्यवाड् अद्भिः is an instance of
अन्वक्षरप्रतिलेॉमसंधि Where thc conSO-
nant ट् preccdeS the woWcl अ.
अन्वय (!) construing, construction;
arrangement Of words accOrding
to their mutual relationship based |
upon the sense conveyed by them,
शव्दानां परस्परमर्थानुगमनम् । (2) ६ontinu-
ance, continuation;cf.घृतघटस्तैलघट इति |
निषिक्ते घृते तैले या अन्वयाद्विशेप्वणं भवति अये
घृतघट:, अयं तैलधट इति M. Bh. on P.II.
1• 1.
अन्वर्थक given in accordance with the
SenSe; generally applied to a tech-
nical term which is found in ac-
cordance with the sense conweyed
by the cOnStituent partS of it; e. g.
सर्वनामसंज्ञा, cf. महत्याः संज्ञायाः करोण एतत्
प्रयेोजनमन्वर्थसंज्ञा यथा धिज्ञायेत M. Bh. on
P. I.1.23.
अन्वर्थसंज्ञा A technical term used in
accordance with the sense Of its
constituent parts; e. g. सर्वनाम, संख्या,
अव्यय उपसर्जन, कारक, कर्मप्रवचनीय, अव्ययी- .
अप्
→\
भाव, प्रत्यय, उपपद etc. All these terms
are picked up from ancicnt gram-
1narians by Pānimi; cf. तत्र महत्याः संशाया
एतत् प्रयेाजनम् | अन्वर्थसंज्ञा यथा विज्ञायेत l
संख्यायति अनया संरंंंंंंंंयति |l cf. M. Bh. on
|!.1,23; also cf. M.Bh.on I.l.27,1.
1.38,I.2.43, I.4.83, II.1.5, III. 1.1,
III.1.92 etc.
अन्ववसर्ग Felaxation or wide opening
of the Sound-producing organs as
done for uttering a vowel of grave
acccnt. cf. अन्वर्वेसर्गः गात्राणां विस्तृतता
Tait. Pr. X?ÇII.10.
अन्वाश्कर्षक a word attracting a previ-
ous word such as the wOrd च, in
the Sutra texts.
अन्वाच्वय aggregation of a secondary
eiement along with the primary
one; यत्रैकस्य प्राधान्यमितरदप्रधानं तदनुरोधे-
नान्वाचीयम:ानता अन्वाचयः Nyāsa on P.II
2.29. Cne of the four senses of च,
e.g.भिक्षामट गां चानय; cf. प्लक्षश्चेत्युक्ते गम्यत
एतत्सापेक्षेीयं प्रथुज्यत इति ।
→、 →
अन्वादेशा (1) lit. reference to the ante-
rior word or expression; cf.अन्वादशेा-
न्त्यस्य {नि:शव्दस्य in T.Pr.VII.3, अकारस्य
in V-8} T. Pr. I.58; (2) reference
again to what has been stated pre-
viously; cf. इदमोन्वादेशेशनुदात्तस्तृतीयादौ
अन्वादेश्ट्राश्च क्रथितानुकथनमात्रम् P. II. 4.32
and Vārt. 2 thereon; एकस्यैवाभिधेयस्य
पूर्वे शब्दन प्रतिपादितस्य द्वितीयं प्रतिपादनमन्वा-
देश: KãŚ on the abowe.
|! अन्वादेशक a word capable of attract-
ing a word or words from previous
statements; cf. चापीत्यन्वादशकौ T , Pr.
XXII.5; 5amr:ः as अन्वाकर्षक.
अप् (1) kपूt affix अ, in the sense of
werbal actiwity (भाव) or any werbal
relation (कारक) ¢%ce£?ti/tg that of an
agent, (कर्तृ) applied fo roots ending
in ऋ or उ and the rootsग्रह्, वृ, दृ etc.
|mentioned in P. III.3.58 'and the
following rules in preference to the
usual affix घञ्न. e. g. करः, गरः, शरः,
यवः, लव:, पव:, ग्रह:, स्वन: etc. cf, P.III.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-046.png}}}}}}

अपकर्ष
30
अपादान
3.57-87 ; (2) cotmpou nd-ending अप्प्द्
applied to Baluuvrilhi compounds
in the feminimc gender ending with
a Ptiraha, affix aS alSo to l8ahuwrihi
compounds ending with लेॉस्मन्
preceded by अन्त,or बहिर् e. g.
कल्याणीपञ्चमा रात्रयः, अन्तलेॉमः, बहिलॉस्मः पटः.
cf. P. V. 4.|! i6, 1 i7.
अपकर्ष (1)deteriOration of the place or
instrument Of the production of
Sound reSulting in the faulr called
निरस्त; cf. स्थानकरणयेारपकर्षैण निरस्तं नाम
देोष्त्र उत्पद्यते, R. Pr. XIV.2; (2) draw-
ing back a word or words from a
Succeeding rule of grammar to
the preccding one; cf. °वक्ष्यति तस्यार्ये
पुरस्तादपकर्षः, M. Bh. on II.2.8. (3)
inferiority (in the case of qualiries)
न च द्रव्यस्य प्रकर्षीपकर्षैीं स्तः |
अपत्य a deScendent, male or female,
frOm the SOn Or daughter onwards
पूpt9. any.generation; cf तस्यापल्यम्
P. IW. 1.92.
अपभ्रंश degraded utterance of
standard_correct forms or words;
cOrrupt form ; c. g. गार्वी, गोणीं and
the like, of the word गे[, cf. गाँी:
इल्यरुय श्व्दिस्य गार्वीं गेाणी गेाता गेाद्येोतलिका
इत्येवमादयः अपभ्रंशाः M. Bh. on I. 1.l ;
cf. शव्दूसंस्कारर्हींनेो_ ये॒ो गैँौरैिति॒ि प्रयुयु|िक्षते | |
तूमपभ्रंश॒मि॒िष्ठंछ्श्ति .विशिट्ट[र्थनिवेशिनम् " Vāk.
Faç I.149; सर्वरू॒य॒ हि अपभ्रंशस्ये साधुरेव
प्रकृतिः com. on Wak. Pad I. 149.
अपवगों achievemer?t; cf, फलप्रार्माँ सृत्यां !
क्रिये॒ापरि॒िसभiतिः अपवगैः sec Ka$, on अपबर्गे ;
तृतयिां P. II.3.6.
अपवणै a letter which is phOnctically
badly or WrOngly proriounced. cf.
ईड्र्ट्रर्तथादागर्तं दग्धमपवर्णीं च भक्षितम् । न तस्य पाटे
मेक्षिोस्त पापाहेरिव किाश्धयात् Pān. Sk.50.
अपवद् a spccial rule which sets !
āside the general rule; a rule ||
forming an exception to the gcne- !
ral rule. e. g. अातोनुपसर्गे कः III.2. 2 ;
which i$ an exception of the general j
rule कर्मण्यण् III, 2. ] ; cf. येर्न नाध्राप्तो ||
येीं श्विधिरारभ्यते स तस्य वाधृकेी भवति, तदपवा-
दंॉश्यं येागॆ|ीं भयतिः; Pari. Sckh. Pari 57;
for dct:uilS 8ce Pari. Sckh. Pari.
57-65; cf. न्यायैर्भिश्रानपश्वादान् प्रतीयात् !
न्याया उत्रुंáर्गी: महाश्विधयः । अपवादा अल्पे-
श्ष्ष्रिथ॒ा: श्विधयः । तानुत्लगै0[ भि|श्रानकीकृताङ्
जiiन॒ीयात्तू | अपश्बीदाàयश्यं मुक्त्वा उत्ग्सगःि
प्रवर्तन्त इत्यर्थः । i& . Pr. I. 23 and
COtm. thercon ; (2) fault ; cf. शास्त्रा-
पत्रादात् प्रतिपांस्तभदात्... R. Pr. XIV.
30 On which उठवट rctmarkS शास्त्राणाम-
पवा|दा दे'य[ः रैतन्ति पुनरुक्तता अविग्पष्टार्थता,
अपवां३न्य{य thc convcn[ion {lbat a
|rulc layi11‘: down :an cxception
SuperScdcs the generःal rul6; cf. सिद्धं
त्वपवादन्धार्थेन l?. [.ॐ.9} V'ārt. 7
अपवादवलीयस्त्व thc convention that
a Spccial rulc iS alwayS Stronger
than the gencra! rtuic.
अपवादविप्रतिषेध a coI1flict with a spe-
cial rulc, whct1 thc Spccial rule
St!धृ?crScdeS thc gcngra] rule; cf.
*अलेान्त्यस्य' इतिं उत्य्तर्ग: ! तम्य *अाद्रेट्र: परस्य?
*अने॒क्षुश्छ्श्|िल्तश्ररु॒' इत्यपवा|र्द्राँ अपधादaिप्रातिपेधातु
सश्रदिंशं|' भविष्यति ! M. j}h. on I.1.54
V{ईrt. ] .
अपवृत्तं that which has already
happcr1cd Or tatken pl:ace; cf. *याश्या
लेपां भृत्तश्कालत[ 1 कुतः । ॐाध्!य*ध*ीिँतॄ । अादेि-
र॑त्र[पवृं*त: [ ti:प,न्] ना+{ न्याश्यें! भूतकाश्छेीं थत्र
किंचिद:पठ्ठभ्रुतं दृश्ट्रयर्तेंi M.Bh. (}th II I.2.102
अ'पशञ्श्ददं corrupt fर}rm ()f :३ c9rrect
wOrd, callcd म्लष्थ्४ also; cf. मश्ठ°:छेो ह
वीं tपि शृदग्पश*दः M. i|8jh. o}l I. 1.1.
अस्तु ,धापि तररुतभ्माद ना|धश्[६देीं भश्धेिrयतेि |
áविक्रश्रेत्प्रर्थेी'क्तः॰र्येीं श्धाधश्कश्रेत्प्रथु:यताभ्म् ॥| M.
Bh. o1n V. 8. 55.
अपाणिनीय 1u¢9t in conf{)rimity with
thc rta{cS Qँf f'it]ini's gratmtnar; cf.
*िध्यलैंथॆवं+{पा{fi[नश्थिं तुं भधति 'M. Bh.' on
f. l|. l.
अपदान्न detachmcnt, $gparation, {ubla-
tion ; technical terrm for अ{पादानकारक
which i$ dcfincd as ध्रुवमपायेऽपादानम्



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-047.png}}}}}}

अपाय
3l
अप्रध्न
in P. I. 4.24 and subseque1ht rules
25 to 31 and which is put in the
ablative case; cf. अपादाने पश्चमी P.
II. 3.28.
अपाय (1) point of departure, s6para-
tion; cf. ध्रुवमपायेपादानम् P. I. 4.24; (2)
disappearance; cf. संनियेागशिष्टानाग्मन्यत-
रापाये उभयेोरप्यपायः॥ तद्यथा देवदत्तयज्ञदत्ताभ्या-
मिदं कर्म कर्तव्यम् । देवदत्तापाय यज्ञदत्तेोपि न
करोति M. Bh. on IV.1.36.
अपार्थक without any purpose or
Object, useless; cf. ततोनिष्टादर्शनादपार्थक-
मेतत् Nyasa on P. I. 4.80.
अपि also, in addition to; अपि is used
SOmetimeS to mean abSolute of or
unqualified by any condition; cf.
अन्येभ्योपि दृश्यते । अपिशव्दः सर्वेॉपाधिव्यभि-
चंॉरंार्थः ! निरुपपदादपि भवति । धीवा पविा ।
KāŚ. on P. III. 2.75, III. 2.101,
VII. 1.38; cf. अपिग्रहणं व्याभिचारार्थम् ।
IDurgasirihha on Kāt. II. 3. 64.
अपित् not marked with the mute
letter पू. A Sārvadhātuka, affix not
marked with mute पुप् is looked
Uupon aS marked with ड् and hence
it prevents the guT?a or vpddhi
Sub$titution for the preceding
vOwe1 or for the penultimate vowel
if it be अ. e. g. कुरुतः तनुत:, कुवीन्ति
Where nU guna takes place for the
vpwgl उ cf. सार्वधातुकमापित्. P. I. 2.4.
अ'वे (1) not existing before; cf.
अागमश्च नाम अपूर्वः शब्देोपजनः M. Bh. on
I• 1•20, I. 1.46; (2) not preceded by
any_|letter or so, cf. अर्पूर्वलक्षण अादिः
M. Bh. on I. 1.४1; (3) a rule pres-
Cribing sOmething not prescribed
b&fore; cf. तत्रं . अभूर्वो विधिरस्तु नियमेोस्तु
इति अपूर्वं एव विधिर्भविष्येति न नियमः M.Bh.
on I. 4.3., III. 1. 46, 1II. 2. 127,
|III. 3. 19.
अपृत lit. unmixed with any (letter);
a technical term for an affix consist-
ing of one phonetic element, i.e. of
a single letter. cf. अपृक्त एकाळुप्रत्ययः
P. 1. 2.41.
अपेक्षा |relation of dependance; cf.
अयुक्तैवं बहुनेोपेक्षा M. Bh. on IV. 2.92.
अपोद्धार disintegration of the consti-
tuent elements of a, word; analysis;
अपेीद्धारः पृथकरणम् com. ora Vak. Pad.
II. 449; cf. अपेोद्धारपदार्था ये ये चार्था:
स्थितलक्षण्ा: Vāk. Pad. ]i.24.
अप्पयदीक्षेत, अप्पदीक्षित A famous ver-
Satile writer of the sixteenth cen-
tury A. D. ( 1530-1600 ), son of
रङ्गराजाध्वरीन्द्र a, Dravid Brāhmataa.
He Wrote more than 60 Smaller
or greater treatises mainly on
Vedanta, MimārihSa, Dharma and
A!atiakara $āstras ; many of his
works are yet in manuscript form.
The Kaumudi-prakāŚa and Timan-
taśe5asarihgraha are the two pro-
minent grammatical workS written
by him. Pandit Jagannātha spoke
very despisingly of him.
व् rāon-retention of the ori-
ginal word accents; cf. तत्र यस्य गतर-
प्रकृतिस्वरत्वं तस्मादन्तेादात्वं प्रामेाति M. Bh.
on WI.2.49. See the word प्रकृतिस्वरत्व.
अप्रातिपाति (1) impossibility to obtain
the correct form; (2) absence or
want of apprehension, cf शब्दानां
चाप्रतिपतिः प्राप्नोति M. Bh. on I. 1.1,
I. 1. 44 Vārt. 8.
अप्रतिषेध useless prohibition; unneces-
sary prohibition; cf. अनर्थकः प्रतिषेधः
अप्रतिषेधः M. Bh. on I. I.6; I. I. 20.
I. 1. 22 etc.
अश्प्रत्यय ( 1)lit. absence of any affix; ara
affix such as क्रिप्म् or क्रिन् which
wholly wanishes; cf. पिपठिषतेः अप्रत्ययः
पिपठीः M.Bh• on I. 1.6. कण्डूयतेरप्रत्ययः
अ
कण्ड्रः M. Bh. on I. 1.58; (2) that
which is not an affix. cf. अप्रत्ययस्यैताः
संज्ञा मा भूवन् M. Bh. on I. 1. 61,
I. 1.69; (3) that which is not pre- "
Scribed, अश्चेिधोयमान,अप्रत्याय्यमान;M.Bh.
om I. l. 69. →
अश्प्रध्यान (I) non-principal, subordi-
* nate, Secondary, cf. अप्रधानमुपसर्जन-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-048.png}}}}}}

अप्रयुक्ततं
मेिति, Mf. Hh. on f. 2.43; (2) 1}' }n-
essential, non-predOmin ent, cf.
सह्युक्तेऽप्रधाने P. If. 2.19 and the
instance पुत्रेण सहागतः पिता l Ka$. On३
II. 2.19.
अप्रयुक्त not found in popular Qr cur-
rent use, e.g. the words ऊप, तेर, *ष्क्न्कं
etc. यद्यव्यग्रयुक्ता अवश्ये दीर्घसत्त्रवल्छक्षणनानु-
विधयाः M. Bh. on Î. 1. 1. also
यथालक्षणमप्रयुक्त M. Bh. On I. l. 24
अप्रयेोगा (1) non-cmployment of a word
in spite of the meaning being
available; cf. संभावनेनलमिीत भेत्तिद्धाप्रयोर्गे
P. III.3. 154; (2) non-emplo.y'mc1it
cf.उक्ताथानैनामप्रयोग: a standard dictutm
of gratmmar not allowing superflu-
ouS words which is given in M.!8!}.
on P.I.1.4 ·j| Wārt. 16 and statcd ita
Cāndra and other gram:mars aS a
Paribhāsa.
अप्रयोगिन् not-found in actual usc
among the people although mcn-
tioned in the $āstra-texts; a mute
indicatory letter or letterS. cf.
अप्रयेोगी इत् Sak. I. 1.5 Hem I. 1.37
Jain. I.2.3 and M.Bh. Pradipa on
III. 8. 31.
अप्रसङ्ग non-application of a rule ot'
grammar or of a technical tcrm;
cf. अन्यत्र्ञ्ा सहवचनात् समुदाये संज्ञाऽप्रसङ्गःM.
Bh. on P. I. 1. l Vārt. 11 .
अप्रासद्ध Not well-known; secondary'
(used in connection with ScnSe)
६f.. एवं चाप्रतिद्धत्वं गौणलाक्षाणिकत्वं चात्रा
गैौणत्वम् Par. Sek Parī. 15
→\	→
अप्रासिद्धि absence of clear sense or
interpretation; cf. इतरतराश्रयत्वादप्रसिश्द्धि:
M. Bh. on I. 1.l. Vārt. 8, I. 1. 38 !
Vārt. 4.
अप्राप्तविकल्प same as अग्रातश्धिभाषा onc of !
32 ॐभ:{प्त
I. 3. 43. हृक्रेीरन्यतरभ्याम् 1 अभिवादथति गुरुं
माणवकन पिता । अप्रा{श्चिकट्'±त्व1रृतीयैव Kās.
otn H. 1.53. विभाषा रiधूàस्य '1 स्थूत्ठपति ;
स्थूलपत्नीं ! अ:वtतविभा'पथसयश्रसंयेागत्श्रात् 1
अप्राप्तष्विध्यान prcscription of a new
thing. cf. तत्र{प्राता?श्रेधानेन प्रांāप्रति-{धः M.
Bi;. on VI. 4.] 7 l W':irt. :2.
अप्राप्तविधि prgscribing an operation
w]hich otlic1`\wisc ca11not bc lhad.
अग्रा|ादिष्वप्र[भक्षिधे: रसमाग्स:अàिं 4ध: P. III.
4, 24 V:hrt l .
अप्राप्तविभाष{ sCc :ubov'c अध्र[ःiा*कत्न्प.
अप्राप्ति ( l ) }no11-Occurre inc"e r?t' no11-
rcalization of :t !gt':t ti11}1atic:ul
o|pcration Or rulc `-- ॐiग्र्llाँ iiः*धे: M.
|Bl।. on l. 1 576 V'{it't. 8; (:?) prO-
hibition of tl1c Occurrc:1hcc: {)f a
rulc or OpcratiOn, cf. `ः1पाद्दे{क्ष ।
अथवानन्तरा या प्रi1ि: *+I प्रतिविध्यंत M.
|Bh. on |I i . •f:3, I. 1. 63.
अप्लुठत non-protractcd vowel cf. अतेा
रौरष्ट्छ्नादप्लुते P. VI. 1. l 18.
अवाधक not coming it॥ thc vvay of
rules othcrwisc applicable; .thc
word iS uScd in cOnncctio1t with
निपातन i. c. Corhslitutcd or annOunc-
cd formS Or $pccially f}rn।1cd
words which are Said to bc अथाधः'{;
i. c. not cOrmithg in tl1c way of
forms which could bc arrivt:d at
by applicatioth Of tluc regtular rulcS.
Siradcva has laid dowrh thc ıP:trj-
blnāष्à अबtधश्कान्यपि निपातन्ञ्ानि भश्थ*िति
defending thc form पुरातन in sp)itc
of Pāijini's spccific mcntiot1 of thc
word पुराण in thc rule पुराष्Jप्रेाचेकपु०
IV. 3.. 105.
|!| अभत्त 1uot-forming an integral part
of anotl1cr; quitc i11dcpcI}dt:I1t
the three kinds of optional appli- ! C uscd in conhcction .. with aug-
cation of a rule; cf. त्रिंासंशयास्तु भवन्ति ाँ rmcnts ). cf. किं पुनरयं 'थू:र्थीन्त अाट्टे:ास्धित्
प्राप्त अप्राप्ते उभयत्रा चेवति । M. Bh, on P. !
I. 1.44 Vārt.. 20; optional appli-
cation of a rule prescribing an
|| परादिराहेश्धिट्ट अमका: M. H8h. o11 I. l.
| 47, 1.1.51. ए,धं राह्यंभनत: करिप्यते M1.
|| Bhi. on VI. 1.71, VI. 1.135, and
operation; e.g. ऊर्णेतेिर्विभाषा. अनुपसर्गाद्वा | VII. 2.82.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-049.png}}}}}}

अभयचन्द्र
33
अभिनिधान
अभयचन्द्र a Jain grammariara • whO
wrote प्रक्रियासंग्रह, based on the Sabdāं-
पूnuŚāsana Vyākarataa of the Jain
Sakatāyana.His possible date is the
twelfth cer[tury A. ID.
अभयतिलक a. Jain writer of the
thirteenth century whÇ? wrOte a
commentary On the Sabdānu$ā-
sana Grammar of Hemacandra.•
अभयन्नान्दन् a reputed jain Gramma-
rian of the eighth century whO
wrote an extensive glosS On the
जैनेन्द्रव्याकरण. The glosS is krnOwr३ aS
जैनेन्द्रव्याकरणमहावृत्ति ðf which बृहजैजैने-
न्द्रव्याकरण appears tO be another
h183i16टे•
अभाव absence; absence of any
following letter which is technically
called avasana. cf. विरासोऽवसानम् !
वर्णीनाम्भावेोऽवसानसंज्ञः स्यात् S. K. on P.
|]I . 4.|l |10.
अभाषितपुंस्क that which does not
convey a masculine sense ; a wOrd
which is not declined in the
masculine gender; a word pOSS€SS-
ing only the feminine gender e.g-
खट्टुा, लता etc.cf. अभाषितपुंस्काच्च P. VII.
3.• 48.
अभिकृति a wariety of long metres
called अतिच्छन्दस्ः it consists, of 100
sy]Ilables. cf. ` अभिकृतिः-देवा अग्निः
स्विष्टकृत् R. Pr. XVI. 60.
अभिक्रम the first of the two utter-
ances of a we9rd which chara-
cterise the krama methOd of
recital; e. g. in the krama reCital
of प्रण इन्देो etc. प्र णः । न इन्दें । the first
reci{al प्र णः is called अभिक्रम, or प्रथम-
वच्चन while न इन्दे is called द्वितीयवचनः
cf. अभिक्रमे पूर्वविधानमाचरेत् पुनर्बुवंस्तूत्तरकारितं
क्रमे |R. Pr. XI.21.
अभिघात depression or sinking of
the woice as required for the
utterance of a circumflex vOwel.
5
अभिधान designation, denotation, ex-
|pression of Sense by a word which
is looked upon as the very nature
of a word. The expression अभिधानं
पुनः स्वाभाविकम् ( denotation Of Sense
is only a natural characteristiC of
a word ) frequently occurs in the
Mahabhāgya ; cf. M. Bh. On I.2.64
Vart 93, II. 1.1, cf. नपुंसकं यदूष्मान्तं
तस्य बह्नुभिधानजः ( R. Pr. XIII.7 )
where the Word बह्वभिधान meanS
बहुवचन.
अभिधेय object or thing denoted by
a WOrd ; sense of a word; cf. अभि-
धेयवाश्छ्ङ्गवचनानि भवन्ति M. Bh. on
II. 2.. 29.
अभिनेिधान lit. that which is placed
|near Or before; the first of
the doubled claSS consonan ts ;
a mute Or spar$a consO-
nant arising from doubling and
insertcd before a rmute; cf. अघेा-
ष्ञादूष्मणः परः प्रथमः अभिनिधानः स्पशैपरात्तस्य
सस्थोनः ( T. Pr. XIV. 9. ) explain-
ecl by त्रिभाष्यरत्न as स्पर्शपरादधेाष्भ्रंीदूष्मण:
पर: प्रथम अागमस्तस्य स्पर्शस्य समानस्थानः
अभिनिधानेो भवति । अभिानधीयते इत्यभि-
निधान: अारेापणीयः इत्यथैः । यथा यः क्कामयेत
अश्म्मत्रूर्जम् । यः प्पाप्मना । The Rk.
Prāti$ākhya explains the term
अभिनिधान Somewhat differently ; cf.
अभिनिधानं कृतसंहितानां स्पशन्तिःस्थानामघवाद्य
`रेफम् । संधारणं सं|त्रंरणं श्रुतेश्च स्पर्शेौदयानामपि
चावसॉन R. Pr. VI. 5, explained by
उब्वट as स्पश्र्शपराणां स्पशीँनां 'रेफीं वर्जयित्वा
अन्तःस्थानां च वर्णीनां कृतसंहितानां च सतां
संधारणं वणैश्रुतेश्च संवरणं भवति । तदेतद् अभि-
निधानं नाम । यथा उप मा षड् द्वा द्वा । ऋ.
सं ८।६८। १४ इह षड् इत्यत्र अाभेनिधानम् |!
अभिनिधान possibly according to
उव्वट here means the first of the
doubled letter Which, although the
second letter is attached to it, is
separately uttered with a slight
pause after it. अभिनिधानं means, ir३
short, something like *suppression.'



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-050.png}}}}}}

अभिनिर्वृत्ति
34
→→-~ → →-→→→→ अभेदान्वय
The Rk. Tantra takes a still wider ||
view and cxplains अभिभिधान as the |
first of a doubled goaSonai}t. cf. !
अभिनिधानः । क्रमर्ज च पूर्बञ्न्ततस्वरं भवति । ||
R. T. 21 .
अभिनिवृते developmcnt of an actj- ||
vity; manifestātion; cf. :àछेश्धु कर्म-
चेार्दनायां द्वयेोरेकस्यााभनिर्वृस्तिर्भवति M. iBh. !
on VI. l .84. !
अभिानविष्ट that which l1as already
entered otn functio1ning Or bcgu n t.O
functiora; cf. श्चभावतं [एँहेत'त्रंां शूाश्व्ट्ांन्iां
एतेष्वर्थेषु अभिनिविघृानां भिभित्तत्वेन अन्ञ्ाश्ट्:श्या|नं |
क्रियत । M. Bh. oia II. i .1• cf. पूर्वमपवादा
अभिनिाविशन्ते , पश्चादुंसर्गाः, M. Bh. on
|II. 3.46; Pari. Sek. Pari. 62. ||
अभिानेष्टान Resonance (of a wiSarga |!
utteramce). ।
||
अभिनिहित used in connectio}) with ||
a सन्धि or euphonic cO:mbination !
in which the wowcl अ, aS a first or |
a second member, is abSOrbcd |
into the other mctmber. c. g. रथेश्यः ||
+अमे = रथेभ्येiऽमे also दाछ्रृघ्रेऽझे, whcrc |
अ of अझे is absorbcd or mcrgcd in ||
ओो of रथेभ्यः Qr ए of ,दाशुष्}; cf. अथा- !
भिानिहित: संधिरेतैः प्राकृतवैकृतै: । एकीभवति ;
पादादिरकाररस्तेत्र संधिजंाः; R. Pr. II. 13 |!
to25; cf.एड्ङ: पदान्तादति P. VI. 1. 109. !
अभिनिद्देितस्वार namc given to {he
circumflex vOwel whāich i $ thc :
resulta1॥t of thc अभिानिनोद्द्ट्रेिततंधि.
अभिप्राय C1) अभिप्रायसंश्वेि a kind of '
euphonic combinatior1 where the !
nasal letter न् is dropped a१ad the ;
preceding vowel ( अÎ ) is nasa- !
|lised e. g. दधन्वा* यः । स्ववा * याट्तु ! :
(2) vicw, purpOSg, int:ntion; cf. ;
तद् व्यक्तमाचार्यस्याभिप्रायीं गम्येत, इदं न !
भवतीतिः M. Bh. on .I.1.27 ; cf. also ं
स्वँरितञितः कर्त्रभिप्राये क्रियाफछे P.Î.3.72.' |
अभिविधि inclusive extension to a par- ||
ticular limit; inclusive limit; cf. !
अाहूं मूर्यूदंभूिक्षूिश्येोः P. ![,!.13, ' अ|ाङ् |
मयदाभिविध्येोरितिं वक्तव्यम् M. |Bla. on
I.4.89; (2) full or Complete exten-
siota cf. अभिविधौ भाव इनुण, l अभिधिधिर-
भिव्र्यातिः । सांर्रा६िJjं वर्तते Kās. on P. I II.
3.4*i.
अभेिव्यादन् ab3orption of a VO wel whch
t९yO loing vowcls Of the Sainc ki11d
com1e toge{laer c. g. ता अ'य: = तlपः ,
ॐवसां अ[ न्= ४नंदंह्त:, the 1 cSultar1t vOW'cl
|being prc'i३ou! 1nccdl $i2cci.aliy lothg
c©1asisti;ng of o1३t: tī३Orc finitrं, which
is cvideratly, :: fault Of prO11u 11cia-
tio:1. c[. ॐi[क्ष्|र्नें अ|!|९**{: ; धिं'j*ठं *ि{श्ट्र!िश्ठं वा
ॐiदन्तुं व्य!श्क्ष्:1न्i:! |!| `:{भिठथ{ः'1 3{भिभूंंंंंं 6श्itद:iद!
ट्{भि1ऽथiद!ं|*,भू ५_J vvata On !R• !'r. XIV.
27.
अभिव्श्श्रछ्र cxpr४ssiob1; cf. यदेवं ग्५;नेि पादे
२{श्मानभिञ्ऽयiह्रे $श्चति त भ्ञीं6ि{ भ<तेि l त्ट्रैिर.fiन्q-
रूपः स हिरण्यस्सुंट्टके Nir ^. !6.
अभिसाारैरेाणी 1namc Çf a n1ctrc itn whicl1
two f:g{ havg t{:tn Syll:ablc$ :{ t1d
the o' her twO h:ave t wU:!v C Sy •
llables; cf. द्वैरा±ज़्ागतैॉ: पादैर्थेीं °{ार्घेःश्य*िॉ-
रंत|रिणी |R. Pr, *xVI. ‘43.
अभिस्वरित providcd with a 8varit:t ()r
circumflex acccnt.
अभिहित् cxprcS8cd (uSc(l in comncctit)tn
with the 8en8e of a word) 1!र्तेनैध!ग्iिा:ि;
सूत्रण M. l8h. otn I.2.(} !ः, 1.3. ! ; cx-
prgSSe\l actual!y by {t, w()r'(l ¢)r p:urt
of a w{)rd, Satme aS श्क2ियां M. l%l1.
On I.4.5 l .
;-४अभूततद्भाव bcing whatt it, wa8 1१७)t
bcforc, cf. न्ःि/विर्धीं अभृत्तंतद्भद्राश्धग्रह्मि*{. l'.
V.4.5{) Vãींp't. ].
、 →	→	→
अभेदक not bringing :about a, «liffष्ट्:r-
cncc; raot rmaking di[Fcr¢rht ; 1}on-
discritninant;cf. ५jJ[ां अभे{दश्क!|: I?:ar.Sck.
P:ari. 109 cf. भनु च भूर्भे{ ॐ{र्भे{दका अधिं घ्
गुणा ट्टश्य्ते M. Bh* on I. 1.1 .
{ 、 » → → →
→ अभेदसंसर्ग a cOmtncction Of utlity, {१$
noticed bctwccm thc 1noImimatiwc
case afiix of thc Subjcct artd thc
cnding र्ति of a vcrb, which prO-
duccs tl1c ScnSc.
अभेदान्वय |rclation of no)11-difi:rct1cc
as stated by the Vaiyàkaralhas



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-051.png}}}}}}

अभ्यन्तर
between an adjcctive and the
SubStantive qualifig'Ç! !,?y ईंt. c. g.
नलिभुत्पलम् iS explaiiaed as नीलाभिन्नं-
मुत्पलम्.
अभ्यन्तर interior; contained in, held
in; cf. अभ्यन्तरे॒श्च सभुदाये अवयवः | तद्यथा
वृक्षः प्रचलन्सहावयवैः प्रचलति M. Bh. on
I. 1.56.
अभ्यंकर ( BHASKARASHASTRI
*à.bhyankar 1785-1870 A. D. )
a n eminent Scholar of Sar1skrit
Grammar whO preparcd a num-
. ber Of Sanskrit scholars ira Gram-
|mar at Sātārā. He has also
written a glOSS On the Paribhā-
Śendu$ekhara and another one o1}
the f /aghu-Sabdenduśekhara.
(VASUDEVA SHASTRI Abhyat:-
kar 18*63-1942 A. D.) a sta!wai {
Sanskrit Pandit, who, besides
writing several learr1ed conarinen-
taries On bookS in several Sar१s-
krit ShaStras, has writtera a com-
mentary mamed * Tattvādar$a ?
On the Paribhi$endu$ekhara and
anOther named *GtiÓhārthaprakāśa?
On the Laghu$abdcndu$ckhara.
( KASHINATH VASUDEVA
Abhyainkar, 1890 -) a S{u1derat of
Sanskrit Gra"3n mar w!ao baas
ywritten महाभाष्यप्रस्तावना --खण्ड, and
जैनेन्द्रपरिभाषावृत्ति and compile.l the
परिभाघ्षारूंग्रछ् and the prcsent Dic-
tiOraary Of Sa1hskrit Gram rmar.
अभ्यम् Substitute for dat. and abl. pl.
affix भ्यस् after the words युष्मद् and
अस्मद् ; cf भसेाऽभ्यम् P. VII.1.30.
अभ्यस्त repeated, redoubled word or
wOrding or part of a word. The
term अभ्यख्त is applied to the whole
dOubled exprcssion in Pat]ंniś
grammar, cf. उभे अभ्यस्तम् P. VI. 1.6:
(2) the six roots with जश्न placed
at the head viz. जक्ष् , जागृ, " दरिद्रा ,
चकास्, शास्र, दीधी at1d वेवी which in fact
are reduplicated forms of धसू , गृ, द्र[,
कासूर् , शसू , धी and वी.
35 अश्
अभ्याछूटृार्रते inclination towards an
actiO1]; tendency {O é!o an a ct ; cf.
संर&यायाः क्रियाभ्यावृत्तिगणने कृत्वसुच् । P. V.
4.17 अभिमुग्ठ्ती ग्रवृत्तिरभ्यावृतिः {M. Bh.
O:n V.4.19) is the cxplanation in
the Mahābhāgya,while पौनः पुन्यमभ्या-
वृत्तिः (Kā$. on V.4.17} is the one
given in Ka$ikā .
अभ्य्{श्ल् Iit, doubling or reduplica-
tion ; technically the word refers
to the first portion of the redupli-
cation, which is called the redu-
plicative Syllable as Opposcd tO the
SecOnd part which is called the
reduplicated syllable; cf. पूर्वोभ्यःस:
P. V I. 1.4. (2) Rcpctition, the
Sccond part which iS repeated; cf.
देोऽभ्यासे(R.:T. ]65) explaincd aS दक[र:
अभ्यासे लुप्यते ! पटत्पटेति । |द्रसद्,सेति ।; (3)
repeated action : cf. अभ्यास: पुंन्नः पुन:
करणमावृक्ष्तिः Kā$. oa P. Î-3. 1.
अभ्यात्तं ormission of aI1y $ouamd; a
fष्ट्रैault of utter:ance.
अम् (1)a technical brief tertn ita Pānitai's
grammar iracluding vow'**ls, Scrni-
vow els, the letter हूं an¢t r1asals; (2) a
sig nifंcant term fyr the accusative
case showitng ch.1nge Or SubStittation
or modificatio;1; cf. अनं विका|रएय T. Pr.
|I.४:} cxplained as अमिति शाब्दो विन्कार-
स्ष्याश्ट्य, भवंति ! अमिति द्वितीय श्चिंभनेतेरुपळक्षणाम्
(3) augtmern t अ applicd tO the
pentaltimate vowcl of सृज्ञ्ं & दृश्ट्र् (P.
VI. 1.58, 59 and VII.1.99) (4) sub-
stitute tor 1st pers. sing. affix भिपूप् ,
by P. III.4 10 ! (5) Acc. sing. case
affix अम् .
अमर calied अमरसिंह , an ancient
grammariai1 m cnti9ned in the
कावेकल्पद्रुम by बोपदेव. Hc is
believd to have Writtc:m Some
works On gramtrभ्ar, Such as शृिद्दृार-
|श्कन्ठश्क्षण his {a1mouS existimg wOrk,
however , bcing , thc AmarakO$a Or
Nāmnalihgānu$āsana.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-052.png}}}}}}

अमरचन्द्र
36
अरिफित
अमरचन्द्र a jain grammarian whO
is believed to be the Writer of
स्यादिशब्दसमुच्चंक्ष्य, परिमल etc.
अमु tad. afiix अम् applicd iia VediC
Literature to किम्, words ending
in ए, indeclinables and the affixcS
तर and तम; e. g. प्रतरं नयाम: प्रतरं वस्यः
cf. अभु च श्ळ्छन्दसि P. V. 4. !2.
अमृतभारर्ती a grammarian whO is
belie\ ed to have writtera सुबोधिका,
a gloss on the सारस्वतव्याकरण.
अमृतस्मृति called also अमृतळुति, a cOm-
mentary ora the प्रक्रियेाक्रौमुदी Of
रामचन्द्रश्ाष्ष.
अमोघवर्ष A Jain grammarian of
the ninth century who wrote
the glpss known as अमेोश्वावृास्त on
the SabdanuŚāsana of S:ंikatā-
yama; the वृत्ति is quoted by माधव
in his धातुद्वृति.
अमोघा also अमेौश्चावृत्ति, a gloss on {he
grammar of Sika[āyana. See अमोध-
व्र्ष above.
अम्बाकत्राँ a commentary on Nāgc$a?'s
Paribhāgenduśekhara named so, as
it commenceS with the words अम्वा
कत्रींाँ etc.
अम्बूटत utterance (of words) accom-
panied by water drops coriaing
Out Of the mouth ; a fault of
utt€range Or pronunciation; मुग्वात्
विष्नुष्ञो निर्गमनम् • It is explained diffe-
rently in the Rk. PrātiŚākhya; cf.
ओोष्ठाभ्यां नद्धं अम्बूकृतम् (R. Pr. XIV.2.)
|held tight between the lips which of
C9urSe is a fault of pronunciation;
cf.ग्रस्तं निरस्तमावलाम्धतं निर्हतं अम्वृवृ तं १मात:
मथेा विकम्पितम्. MBh• I. 1. पस्पशाह्निक.
अय्र् (1) substitute for the causal sign
णैि before अाम्, अन्त, अालु etc. by
P'. VI. 4.55 (2) substitute for ए
before a vowel by P. VT. 1. 78.
अयङ् the substitute अय् for the final
ई of the root शी'by P. WIT. 4.22.
अयच्बू tad. affix अ॒थ sübStitutcd op-
tiðnally ft)}r तश्च aft & r द्वि' at1d न्>ि by l?.
V.2.43. e.::. *ट्टथः;:, दूतश्यम्j.; >श्यम्. >ितयम्.
अयाच्छ्,अयाद् St1bst1{ u{cs for i118t. sing
a{fx टा in V cdic l ziteraturc• c• g.
स्वप्रया, नबियl.
अयावन्न 1non-1mixturc Of w'OrdS wherc
tlac previOuS word is iih 1.O w:ay
thc cauSc Cf (a r1y Cl1:t ri{५५.* iI}} tl1C
next word. अन्यl<र्न अग्मिश्रT:म् Uv'. On
|R.. Pr. XI. 1 '? e. g, ॐ1?ि{+fी%y wlacrc
the क्रमपाठ is अग्निं ईà% 1
अयुञ्ज्ञ् a tcrm applicd {o thgः odtl fcçt
of' a stan%a ; cf' ग्छुग्मा*त्रं jट12:*,ां 'धं{द|ा*$क्षु मैंi|ां
द्वादञ्छ्ााट्क्षरैा ! २ iा र{तेiश्श्रृंह्नीं •]iर्भH lR. l'r.
XV7].. 39.
अयोगवाह thc lc{ {crS or plhonctic clc-
1ments अनुग्धार, रििधश्१ fí, ञ्iिः:ाभृ*ठंीाय, उप*मानीय
and यम callgd SQ,aS tl;.('y are: alw:tyS
uttercd Only in combit1:ation writlh
ario{her phonc{ic c:lctinC'1]t ()r lcttcr
such aS अीं {)r thc likc, {1t1d rः1(*ver
indcpendcntly; cf. अश्कार्fदिन्i! *र्णमम[-
म्र्नाथेन संहिताः स*तः थे धटु*ित अ{श्मश्लाभं ते
अयेागवाहाःUvvatःt O11 V'{āj. Î'r.V'|I II. ]8.
Thesc अयोंग्[त्रछ् lette`rS p()SS(*s$ tl३c
charact५ristics (yf'ly{)th, th16 v'{)w¢:l$ a$
well as conson:untS:cf'. अश्प्रंीग!श्बंी|ट्ा*itमटमृ
उपदशः कर्त॰यः ग्री*धं प्रयंीं ननभृ. ! श्{ँर्षु ज'भाश्धं •र्तेथं
प्रयोंजन्नभ्म् l M. l3h. ot३ श्*िग्पृश्न हय*{रटृ.
अर a tcchnicai t¢rin ft}r Ar(!h:t{lhi-
tuka affixes in thc Mfug(lhab¢)dha
grammar.
अरक्तसन्धि a word, the coalcscencc
of which is n6ot n:aSali%{:d, {ts thc
word अI in मन्छ्मां धरण्यम्. as corhtrast-
cd with अभ्र अीं अपः; c:f. R. Pr.
Xाँ* 18.
अरड्ट् a Vis:arga which is not rh¢otaciz-
cd; thc term अरिfिiते is uScd in thc
S3ii162 S6:1'1Se.
अरिफित not rhotacized; not turned
into the lctter र; cf. धिसर्जनींयेाऽरिफितेी
दीर्घपूर्वः स्वरोदयः अाकारम् 1 R. Pr II. 9.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-053.png}}}}}}

अरीदृण्मादि 37
अर्थ
अरीहणादि a grOup of wOrds given in
P. IV• 2.80 which get the taddhita
affix बुञ्न् ( अक ) added to them aS
a Caturarthika affix e. g. अारीहणक्रम्,
द्रौधणकम् etc.see Kāśikā on P.IV.2.80.
अर्क the StrOng blowing of air from
the mouth at the time of the utte-
rance, of the Surd consonants; cf
Vāj. Sik$ā. 280.
अर्थ (1) lit.signification,conveyed sense
or object. The sense iS sometimes
|looked upon aS a deterrninant of
the foot of a verse; cf. प्रायोर्थो वृत्तमित्येते
पादज्ञानख्य हेतवः |R.. Pr. XVII 16.
|it is generally looked upon as
the determinant of a word ( पद ).
A unit or element of a Word
which is pos$essed of an indepen-
dent ScnSe is looked upon as a
Pada in the old Grammar treatise8;
cf. अर्थः पदमिति ऐन्द्रे; cf. also अर्थः पदम्
V•Pr. III.2, explained by उब्वट as
अथाँभिधायि पदम् । पैद्यते गम्यते ' ज्ञायतेऽर्थे-
नेनेति पदम्, t There is no difference
of Opinion regarding the fact that,
out of the four standard kinds of
wordS नाम, अाख्यात, उपसगै and निपात,
the first two kinds नाम and अाख्यात
do poSSeSS an independent sense
Of their Own. Regarding posseSsion
of sense and the manner in which
the sense is conveyed, by the other
twO viz. the Upasargas (prepOsi-
tions) amd NipātaS (particles) there
is a Striking difference of opinion
amOng scholars of grammar. Al-
thOugh Panini has given the actual
designation पद to words ending
with either the case or the conju-
gational affixes, he has looked
upon the different units or ele-
mentS Of a Pada such as the base,
the affix, the augment and the
like aS pOSSesSed of individually
separate senses. There is practi-
cally nOthing in Pataini*s stitraS to |!
prove that Nipātas and Upasargas
do not possess an independent Sense.
|Re: Nipātas, the rule चादयोऽसले,
which meanS that च and other
indeclinables are called Nipātas
when they do not mean सत्व, pre-
sents a riddle as to the meaning
which च and the like should
convey if they do not mean
सत्त्व or द्रव्य् i. e. a substance. The
|Nipātas cannot mean भाव or verbal
activity and if they do not mean सत्ब
or द्रव्य, too, they Will have to be call-
ed अनथैक (absolutely meaningless)
and in that case they would not be
termed Prष्atipadika, and no case-
affix would be applied to them.
To avoid this difficulty, the Vārti-
|kakāra had to make an efाँort and
he wrote a Vār tika निपातस्य अनर्थकस्य
प्रातिपदिकत्वम् | P. I.2.45 Var. 12. As
a matter of fact the Nipātas च, वा
and otherS do pOSSeSS a Sense aS
shown by their presence and ab-
sence (अन्वय and व्यतिरेक). The sense,
however, is conweyed rather in a
different mamner as the word समूह,
or समुदाय, which is the meaning
conveyed by च in रामः कृष्णश्च, cannot
be Substituted for श्च aS itS Synonym
in the sentence रामः कृष्णश्च. ILooking
to the different wayS in which
their sense is conweyed by nouns
and werbS on the one hand, and
by affixes, prepositions and inde-
clinables on the other hand, Bhar-
tghart, possibly following Yāska
and Vyādi, has developed the
theory of द्येातकत्व as contrasted with
वाचकत्व and laid down the dictum
that indeclinable५, affixes and
|prepositions (उपसर्गs) do not direct-
|ly convey any specific Sense as
their owm, but they are mere signs
to show Some specific property or
excellence Of the sense conveyed
by the word to which they are



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-054.png}}}}}}

अर्थगति	38 अर्धविसर्ग
अर्धक a fault in thc tt tterancc of a
attached; cf.alSO thc Statcmcnt
* न निर्वद्धा उपसञ्ज्ञ अथáिरiछुरिति शाश्वट्टायन्i:
नामाख्यातयोंस्तु करंङ्गैॉपसंयेोगद्येतिका भव*ित l
|Nir I.3. The GramtnarianS, juSt
}ike the rhetoricianS have stated
that the connection bctwccn wOrds
and their senSeS is a pcrmanent
one ( नित्य ), the Only difference in
their'views being that th e rhctOri-
cians state that wOrds arC rclated,
no doubt permanet३tly, tO thcir
sense by mcanS of संकेत or conwcn-
tion which solely depends On thc
wil1of God, while the Grammarians
say that the expreSSion of Sen$e
is only a natural fungtion.९fwords;
cf. * अंभिधाने पुनः रुवाभाविकम् 'Vārttika
No.33. on P. I.2.64. For द्येोतकत्च see
Vakyapadīya of Bhart!ँhari II •
165-206.
अर्थगति comprehension .of sense ; cf.
अर्थगत्यर्थ: शव्दप्रयोगः अर्थ संप्रत्यायथिष्या-
मीति शब्दः प्रयुज्यते l M. Bh. on P. I.
1.44, HII.l .7 ctc.
अर्थग्रहण use of thc word * अर्थ ?; cf.
अर्थध्रहणं करोति तज्क्ष्ांपयत्याचायै: M. P8h.
On I.1• l 1.
अर्थनिर्देश mention or specification of
sense. cf. अवश्यमुत्तरार्थमर्थनिर्देशः कर्तव्यः
M. B!:].. iW.1.92.
अर्थवद्ग्रद्दणपरिभाषा a Wcll known
maxim or É'aribhāga of gramma-
|rians fully stated as अर्थवट्ग्रहपेण नान्नर्थ-
कस्य ग्रहणम्, deduced from the phrasc
अर्थवट्ग्रहणात् frequently used by the
Vārttikakāra. The Paribhāsā, lays
doWn that *when a combination
of letters employcd in Grammar,
is possesScd of a sense, it has to be
taken as pOSScSSed ofsei1sc and not
such an one as is dewoid of scnsc.?
अथभिधान conveyance or exprcssiom
of sense, cf. अर्थाभिधानं पुनः स्त्रैाभाार्वकम्
P. I.2.64 Vārt. 33. It is only a
nature of words that they conwey
their senSe.
vOwcl Cf thc kir1d of abridg111cnt
of a long uttcrancc. अर्धहृरधम् ex-
|plaincd as ह्छ्स्वस्याधम्-half thc utter-
ance Of thc short vowcl; cfतस्याादित
उदात्तम॒र्धह्रस्वम् P. I.2.32. cf, also
तस्याादिरुचैस्तरामुदाच्तादनन्तरंी| यावदद्धं हृस्वस्य
Tai. Pr. ]I.44.
अर्धजरतीय a quc&r cOmbination of
half thc charactcr of onc and half
Cf anOthcr, which iS lookcd upon
as a fault: cf. न चेदानीमर्धन्नरतीयं लठभ्यं
बृद्धिर्भे भविप्यति र॑वरो नेति { तश्यथा ] अर्धे
जेरत्याः कामयते अर्ध नेति ; M.Bh. orn IV.
1.78; cf. also अर्धं जरत्या: पाश्काय अर्धे च
प्रसवाय l
अधैमात्रा half of a mātra or * mora '•,
cf. अर्धमात्रालाधवेन पुत्रेोत्सवं मन्यन्ते धैयाकरणा:
Par. Sekh. Pari. 122, signifying
that not a Siihglc clcmetat of uttcr-
ancc in Panini'S gramrmar is
SupcrfluOuS. In O*her wOrds, the
wording Of thc SiिtraS of iP:athini is
thc bricfest possiblc, not being
Capablc Of rcduction by cv'en l॥alf
3३. fi१Ora3.•
अर्धमtत्रि क {aking for itS tittcrance t!ic
time rmcaSured by thc u1tt५:r:uncc Of
half a mātri ()r rm()rः३ ; a c¢ytmso-
nant, aS it rc¢!utircS f )r its uttc-
rar1c¢ that timc wl1ic!1 i$ me:asurcd
by half a m:ंitrā (tmātri beiing thc
tiinc reqtiir¢d f*?r the utter:tncc
of Sllort अ ); cf. R. Pr. I.|!6, T.
Pr.i.37, V. iPr. I.59.
&
ल्० → →
'धैच्वादि a grQup of words given in
|P. II. 4.3l which arc dcciincd in
bOth-thc rmasculinc and the rucu--
t cr gcnders; c.g. अर्धर्चः, अधैन्र्धमू : थूथः,
|थूथम्;ं ग्ह्: गृहम्, ctc.; cf अर्धचःि पुंसिं 'च
P. II. 4.31.
अर्धविसर्ग a tcrm uscd for the Jihvā-
rmtiliya and Upadhmāriiya into
which a visarga is changed when
followed by the letters क्, स्, and
thc letterS पू , फू rcspectively.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-055.png}}}}}}

अर्धह्रस्वोदाच्त
39
अल्पचट्तर
अर्धह्रस्वोदात्त the acute (उदात्तं) accent
which becomes specially उदात्त or
उदात्ततर when the vowel, whickः
pOSSe;ISes it, forms the first half
of a रवरित wow{'el.
अर्शअादि a claSS of Words which
take the taddhita affix अन्वृञ् (अ) in
the sense of the affix मतुप्म् i. e..in
the sense of possession; cf. अश्र्शदित
अस्य विद्यन्ते अर्शसः । उरसः । अाकृतिगणश्च[-
यमू यत्राभिन्नरूपेण शर्वेदन तद्वतोभिधानं तत्
सर्वमिह द्रष्टब्यम् Kaś. on P. V. 2.127.
अछ् a प्रत्याहार or a short terrm signifying
any letter in the alphabet of Panini
which consists of 9 vowels, 4 semi-
vOwels, 25 class- consonants, and
4 sibilants.
अलक्षण that which is not a proper
लक्षण i. e. Stitra; a Stitra which does
not teach definitely ; a Stitra which
cannot be properly applied being
ambiguOuS in sense. cf. व्याख्यानतो
विशेषप्रतिपत्तिर्नहि संदहादलक्षणम् Par. Sek.
|Pari.. I.
अलाक्षाणिक (1) not used in a Secondary }
scnse; (2) not accotnplished by the
regular application of a grammar
rule; cf.निपातनैः सह निर्देशादत्रापि किंचिदला-
क्षणिकं कार्यमस्ति Kāś. on !II.2.59.
अलिङ्ग (1) not possessed of a definite
gender; cf. अलिङ्गमासंख्यमव्ययसंज्ञं भवति M.
|Bh. on I.1.38; II.4.82;(2)अाॐञ्ञ्ङ्गे हुष्म- ||
दस्मदी (Sid. Kau. on P.VII. 2.90)
अलिङ्गवचन not possessed of a definitc
gender and number; a term gene- ||
rally *uSed in connection with
अव्ययS or indeclinables.
अलुक् absence of clision or omi-
SS1OIm..
अलुक्समास a compound in which
the caSe-affixeS are not drop-
ped. The Aluk compoundS are
treated by Pānini in' VI.3.I
VI.3.24.
{go
|i अलोन्त्यविधेि au operation, which, on
the 5trength of its being enjoined
by means of the genitive case,
applies to the last letter of the
wording put in the genitiVc; cf.
नानर्थकेलेोन्त्यवैिधिरनभ्यासविकोरे M. Bh. on
I.1.65; cf. अलोन्त्यस्य l पष्ठीनिर्देिटेोन्त्यस्या-
देश: स्यात् S.ंK. on P. I. 1.52.
अलोप absence of clision of an affix
etc. cf. सुपः अलोप: भवति वाक्ये । राज्ञः
पुरुष् इीत । M. Bh. on II.1.].
अलौोकेकविश्रह the dissolution of a
cOmpOund not im the usual popu-
lar manner. e. g. राजपुरुष्प्रः dissolved
as राज्न् डस् पुरुष्ष सु, as contrasted with
the लौकिकविग्रंह viz. राज्ञ: पुरुष: । see also
अधिहरि dissolved as हरि डि. in the
अलौंकिकविग्रह.
अल्ग्रहण (1) the word अल् actually
used in Pamini's rule e. g. अपृक्तः
एकाछ् प्रत्ययः P.I.2.41. (2) the wording
as अछ्, or wording by mention of a
single letter; e.g. अचि क्षुधातुभ्रुवांय्वोः P.
WI.4.77.
अल्पतर feebler effÖrt required in the
production of SOund Qr in the
utterance of a letter cf. तैरेीव्यञ्जनपाद_
वृत्तयोरल्पतरः (प्रयत्न: ) Tait. Pr.XX.12.
अल्पप्रयोग not of frequent Occurence in
the spoken language or literature
the term is used in connection
with such words as are not fre-
quently used; cfसन्त्यल्पप्रयोगाः कृतोप्यैक-
|| पदिकाः । त्रंततिर्दम्नाः जाटय अाट्णारो जागरूको
| दर्वैिहोमीति Nir I.14.
| अल्पप्राण ( 1) non-aspirate letters; let-
| ters requiring little breath from the
mouth for their utterance as oppo-
sed tO mahāpràr)la; (2) non-aspira-
tion; one of the external articulate
effortS characterizing the utterance
of non-aspirate letterS.
अल्पाच्तर having a Smaller number of
vowels in it; such a word is gene-
rally placed first ira a Dvandva
compound; cf. अल्पाच्तरम्, P.II.2.34.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-056.png}}}}}}

अल्पापेक्ष
अल्पाच्तरं पूर्वै भवति प्लक्षन्यग्रोधौं|; अ॒ल्पृiन्ञ्व्तर .. is
the same as अल्पाच्क used in the
प्रक्रियाकौमुदी or अल्पस्वरतर in K:àtantra
(Kāt, II. 5.12).
अल्पापेक्ष an operation requi! ing a
smaIler number of CauSeS, which
merely on that accOunt Can not bC
looked upon as अन्तरक्षं• Thc a mta-
ranga operation |has itS causes
occuirring earlier than thOSe of
another operation which is.tcrmed
बाहरङ्ग cf. बहिरङ्गान्तरङ्गशव्दाभ्यां बह्पश्क्षत्वाल्ट्प!-
पेक्षत्वयेोः शत्र्दमयाँदयाऽलाभाच्च l तथा .,सति
असिद्धं बह्वपेक्षमल्पोपक्ष इत्यव वदेत् ll Par.Sck•
|Pari. 50.
अल्लोप elision or Omission Of a single
phonetic element Or lctter; Cf.
अहूट्रेोपोऽन: |P. VI.4.134.
अाल्वाधि an operation prcscribcd with
reference to one single letter; cf.
स्थानिवदादशेोऽ नल्विधीं P. I.1.56.
अवकाशा occasion; poSSibility Of appli-
cation ; cf. इको गुणवृद्धी इत्यस्यावकाश्श: l
न्चयनं चायकः लवनं लावक: इतिlइहोभयं प्राग्नोतिं ।
मेद्यति । माष्ठॉति । M. Bh. on I.l.3.
Vārt. 6.
अवग्रह C1) separation of a compound
word into its component elemcnts
as shown in the Pada-Pa!ha Of thc
Wedic Sarihhitās. In the Pada-
pagha, individual words are shown
separately if they are cOmbined by
Sarihdhi rules or by the formation
of a compound in the Safihhitā-
patha; e.g. पुरोहितम् in the Sal!nhitā-
pātha is read as पुर:ऽहितम्- In writ-
ing, there is observed the practice
of placing the sign ( ऽ) betwcen
the two parts,about which nothing
can be Said aS to when and
how it originated. Thc Atharva-
PrātiŚakhya, defines अवग्रह as thc
Separation of two padaS join cd in
Sarihhitā. (A. Pr. II. 3.25; II. 4,5).
In the recital of the pada-pāgha,
when the Word-elememts are utter-
40
अवग्रहविराम
ed scparatCly', ti1{:rc iS :1 !n()1nc n-
tary pause measuring Onc rnātrā
or thc time requircd for thc u{ ter-
ance of' a shOrt vOWel. (Scc for de-
tails Vāj. Prāt. Adh'iy:१ 5). (2) The
word अश्रग्रह i8 als0 uScd in thc Sense
ofthe first Out of thc two wOrds or
mcmbcrs th:ut are cr)mpOumdcd to-
gether. Scc Kā:$iki on l?.V'III.4.26;
cf. also तस्य ( इ:{यरय ) पूपदमःधग्रहः यथा
देव[यत इति देदव-न्या. T';ai. l'r. I. 49. The
terun अत्रग्रह is cxplaincd in thc
Mahābhā$ya as * scp:aration, or
splitting up of' a co1nnpound word
into itS conStitt1c nt parts; cf.
न्छन्दस्यानडेाश्त्रग्रहीं ठश्र्येत पितामट् छ्ट्रर्तित l (M.
Bh. on IV. 2.8(X); als() cf. ययश्वमवग्रह:
प्राम्रैाति ! न न्ठश्क्षेणन पदश्कारा अनु<{त्य:ि |
पदकारैनमि त्ठक्षण!|मशु>वत्यन्[. । यथान्ठक्षणं पदे
क्रर्तव्यम् (M. IBh. on I I I. l . ]09)
whcrc the I8hii:y{ukāra h:us dcfinite-
ly stat cd that thc writcrs of' thc
Padapā!lha havc to Split up a word
according to thc ruleS Of'Gr{tmrnar.
{3) In rcccnt { i11l(*s, h()wcw('r, thc
word अत्रग्रह् is uSctl i11 tl16 S(:n$c of
the Sign (<) showing t]1c cO:alc:-
scence of अ (sh(}rt ()r long) with
thc prcccding अ (sl|1(9r't ()r long ) or
with thc prcccding t ', or ओl.c.g .fश्<ार्श्वेी3
च्र्य:, अत्राऽऽगच्z. (4) 'Î'l1c wordl is :ulso
used in thc Sctnse of a p:ttiSc, ()r an
intcrval of timc whcn thc consti-
tucnt elcmcntS Ofa compound ward
are showin Separatcly; cf. समामेश्रग्रहेो
हृट्टस्वसमश्काल: (V. b°r. V.1). (5) Thc
word is also uscd in tl1e 5cnsc of
the absencc of S;1ndlni whcrn thc
Sarndhi is adrrniSSiblc.
अवग्रहचिराम thc itutcrval ()r pausc
after' thc ut{cr:anc(c c)f' thc first
rmcrnbcr of a cormpOtar1(l word
whcn thc m५:!mlycr's :hrc u{tcrcd
scparat¢:ly. Tlhis in'{erval i$ c(ual
to two moraS according to Tःuit.
Pr. whilc, it iS equal to onc mora
according to the othcr Prāti$ākhyas.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-057.png}}}}}}

अवंड्हूं
41
अविघातार्थ
अवङ् substitute अव॒च् for the final ओौ of
the word गो; cf. अवङ् स्फोटायनस्य,
P. WI. 1.123, I24.
अवचन something which need not be
specifically preScribed or stated,
being already awailable or valid;
cf तृतीयासमास अथैग्रहणमनर्थकं अर्थगतिर्हि
अवचनात् P. II. 1.30 V. 1.
अवच्चूरि a, short glOSS Or commentary
on a standard work.
अवच्छेद exact limitation; cf. उपेदशत्वा-
वच्छेदेन एकाजित्यथीँच्च, Par.Sek. 120.3.
अवधारणा restriction; limitation; cf.
अवधारणमियत्तापरिच्छेदः l श्यावदमत्रं ब्राह्मणा•ना-
मन्त्रयस्व Ka$. on P. II. 1.8.
अवधि limit,which is either exclusive
or inclusive of the particular rt7le
or w9rd which characterizes it;
cf. सर्वश्च हृछ् तं तमवधिंप्रति अन्त्येो भवति M.
Bh. on I. 3.3.
अवधिमत् object of limit; cf. दूरे चेदव-
धिमान् अवधभैवति Kaś. on P.V.3.37.
अघयव member or portion, as oppo-
sed to the total or collection
(समुदाय).ँwhich is galled अव॒य॒विन् ; cf.
अवयवप्रसिद्धे: समुदायप्रसिद्विबैलीयसीं Par.Sek.
|Pari. 98. Th€ conwentional SenSe
is more powerful than the deriva-
tive sense.
अवयवषष्ठी the genitive case Signif)'-
ing or showing a part; cf. वक्ष्यत्यादे-
शुक्योरिल्यवयवषष्टी एव M.Bh. on I.
.21.
अवर्ण the letter अ; the first letter of
the Sanskrit alphabet, comprising
all itS warieties caused by grades,
( ह्रस्व, दीर्घ, प्लुत ) or accents or nasa-
lization. The word वर्ण is used in
the neuter gender in the Mahā-
bhāgya; cf. ' सर्वमुखस्थानमवर्णम् M. Bh.
I.1.9, मा कदाचिदवर्ण भूत् M.Bh. I.1.48
Vārt. 1; cf, also M. Bh. om I.1.50
Vārt. 18 and I.1.51 Vārt. 2; cf.
also ह्रस्वमवर्ण प्रयोगे संवृतम् Siradeva
IPari. 17.
6
अवशंगम name of a Sathdhi when a
clasS consonant, followed by any
COnSOnant is not changed, but
retainedas it is;cfःस्पशीँः पूर्वे व्यञ्जनान्युत्त-
स्तणि अास्थापितानां अवशंगमं तत् R.Pr.IV.
1; e g. अरैक् पन्थाम् R.V. I. 113.16,
वषट् ते (R,.V. VII.99.7) अजानन् पुत्रः
(R. V. X.85.14).
अवशिष्टालेिङ्ग (v.l. अविशिष्टालिङ्ग ) a term
Occurrjng in the Lingã|nu$ãsana
meaning*pOSSeSSed of Such genders
aS have not been mentioned already
either singly or by combination?
i.e. poSSe5Sed of a]l genders.Under
अवशिष्टलिङ्ग are mentioned indeclin-
ables, numerals ending in धूञ् or न् ,
adjectives, words ending ' with
k['tya affixes i. e. potential passive
participles, prOnouns, wOrds
ending with the affीx अन in the
$enSe ofan instrument or a location
and the words कति and युष्मद्. (See
पाणिनीय-लिङ्क,ानुशासन Stitras |182-188).
अवश्यम् , necessarily; the expression
अवश्यं चैतदेवं विज्ञेयम् is very frequently
used in the Mahābhāśya when the
Same statement iS to be empha-
Sized.
अवसान paT1se, cessation, termination ;
cf. विरामेोऽवंसानम् । वणीँनामभावः अवसान-
संज्ञः स्यात् S. K. on P. 1. 4. 110.
अचस्था stage, condition; stage in the
formation of a Word; e, g. उप-
देशावस्था, लावस्था, etc.
अचस्थित of a uniform nature; cf. सिद्धं
त्ववस्थिता वर्णाः, वक्तुश्चिराचिरवचनाद् वृत्तर्यो
विशिष्यन्ते, M. Bh. I. 1.70 V. 5.
अवाक्षर deficient in one or more
syllables. The word is moStly used
in connection with a Wedic Mantra.
अवाग्योगविद् one who is not conver-
sant with the proper use of lang-
uage; cf. अथ येोऽवाग्येागविद् विज्ञानं तस्य
शरणम्: M. Bh. 1.1.1.
अविघातार्थ meant for not preventing
the application (of a particular



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-058.png}}}}}}

अविचालिन् 4:2
term) to others where it ShO uld
apply. The word is frequently
used in the Kā$ikā; cf अञ्जीद्यतष्टाप्य् !
टकारः सामान्यग्रहणाविघातार्थः । Kã$. on P'.
|IV. I.4, also see Kā$. on III. l•
133; III. 2.67, 73; IV. 1.78.
अविचालिन् immutable. The terrn iS
used frequently in the Mahābhā-
$ya , in connection with letterS
of the alphabet which are " COmsi-
dered *nitya? by Grammariah$;
अवृत्ति
shows the actual application of an
affix to Sormcthing allied to, or
similar to the base, and not to the
actual base as iS SOmetimes found
in popular usc.cf. द्वयोः इ॒ाब्दयो: समानार्थ-
येोरेकैन' विग्रहेोऽपरस्मादुत्प॒क्षिर्भीश्वध्यात अविर-
विकन्यायेन्न ! तद्यथा अर्वेमसमिति विगृह्य अविक-
शध्दादुत्पत्तिर्भवति अाविकमिति । M. Bh.
on " IV. l. 88; cf. alsO M.
Bh. on IV. 1. 89 ; IV. 2. 60;
I[V. 3.131, V. 1.7 , 28; VI. 2. l 1.
cf. नित्येषु च' शछेदपु' कूटस्थैरविचालिभिर्वर्णैर्भ- अविलम्वित name of a fault in pro-
क्षितब्यमनपायोपजानविकारिभिः M. Bh. I.
1. Āhm 2; cf. also नित्यपर्यायवाची सिद्ध-
|शब्दः । यत्कूटस्थेष्चविचालिषु भावेषु वर्तते M.
Bh. on I. 1.1.
अविाध non-application, n९n-pr€$-
cription ( अवैिधान); cf. अङ्गवृत्त पुंनर्वृत्तौ
अ॒विधिर्निष्ठितस्य M. Bh. on VII. I. 30 ;
|Par. Sek. Pari. 92.
अविभत्तिक without the application
of a case termination.The term is
uSed frequently in connection with
Such Words as are found used by
Pānini without any case-affix
in his Sütras; sometimes, such
uSage iS explained by commenta-
t0rS aS an archaiC uSage; cf. अवि-
भक्तिको निर्देशः l कृप उः रः ल; | M. Bh. I
l. Ahn. 2; also M. Bh. on I. 1.3 ;
III. 1.36, VII. 1.3 etc.
अविभागपक्ष a view of grammarians
according to whicla therc arc
wOrds which are lookcd upon as
not Susceptible to derivation. The
terms अखण्डपक्ष and अन्युत्पन्नपक्ष are
nouncing a word where thcre is the
absence of a propऽr connection of
the breath with thc placc of uttcr-
ance; * अधिलाम्श्धितः वर्णान्तराग्संभिन्न: ? Pra-
dipa on M.Bh 1.I.1. Thcre is the
word अधलाष्चित which is also uSed
in the same senSc; cf ग्रस्तं निरस्लमव•
लान्वितं निर्हतम्० M. Bh on I. 1. 1.
अविवक्षा non-intcntion; connivatncc;
cf. सतेाप्यविवक्षा भवति ! अलॉार्भका प्टइश्क्रा ।
अनुदरा कन्या ! also cf. प्राभिद्वेरधिश्वश्र्क्षातः
कर्मणेोऽकार्मिका क्रिया.
अविवक्षित (1) not taken tcchtnically
into consideration, mot mca tht; cf.
अधिबाष्क्षेिते कर्मणि प्र:ठी भ<ानि M.l8h om II.3.
52; (2) unncccsS:ary; supcrflttOt:$;
the word is cspccially uScd in
conncction with a word in :a $t1tra
which could as wcll bc rc:ad with-
out that word. Thc word अतंॉन्त्रं i$
sometimcs used similarly.
अविशेाष absence of spccification; cf.
गामादाग्रहणेष्वाश्वशेषःM.Bh.I.1.20 Vārt 1:
Par. Sek. Pari. 106.
al$O uSed in the Same sense. अविशेषित not spccified, mcntioned
अविरधिकन्याय a maxim |menti'2ncd
by Patafïjali in connection with
the Word अाधिक्र where the taddhita
without any spccific attribute; cf.
एवमपेि प्रयत्नः अविशेििप्रेतः भवतिं M.Bh. on
I. 1.9; cf. also Kitan. WI.l.63.
affix ठक् (इक), although prescribed | अवृात absencc of,or prohibition of, a
aftcr the word अधिि in the sense of
*flesh of sheep' (अवेः मांसम्), is actu-
ally put alwayS after thc base अवेिक
and newer after अवि. The maxim
vrtti or composite expression: mon-
formation of a composite cxpress-
ion: cfसमानाधिकरणानां सर्धत्रावृतिरयेोगादेकेन
M.Bh. on III. 1. 8.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-059.png}}}}}}

अवृद्ध
अदृचुद्ध lit.not beginning with the vowel
अा, ऐ or औो; a word which haS got
no अा or ऐण् or औी as its first vowel,
as for example ग्लुचुक, अहिचुम्बक etc.
इरावती, नर्मदा यमुना etc; cf. प्राचामवृद्धात्
फिन् बहुलम् P. IV. !. 160. al$Q
अवृद्धाभ्येीं नदीमानुषीभ्यल्तन्नामिकाभ्यः P. IV.
1.113.
अव्यच्त ( 1 ) indistinct; inarticulate;
cf. अब्यक्तानुकरणस्यात इतौ P. VÎ. 1.98
also P. V. 4. 57; अव्यक्तं अपरिस्फुटवर्णम्
|Kāś. on P. VI. 1.98; (2) a fault of
pronunciation; cf. नातिव्र्येत्ततं न चाव्यक्त-
मेवं वर्णीनुदीरयेत् । →
अव्यपवृत्त unseparated, undivided,
inseparable, mixed; cf. नाव्यपवृक्तस्य
अवयवे तद्विधिः यथां द्रद्रेयषु M. Bh. on
Siwa-sutra 4, W. 9 whereon Kai-
yata remarkS व्यपवृत्ततं भेदः । अव्यपवृक्तं
अभिन्नचुाद्धेविषयमेकत्वालम्बनज्ञानग्राह्यं समुदा-
यरूपम् l
अव्यय indeelinable, lit. invariant, not
undergOing a change. Pānini has
uSed the word aS a technical term
and includes in it all Such words
as स्वर्, अन्तर् , प्रातर् ete, or composite
expresSions like अव्ययीभावसमास, or
such taddhitānta words as do
not take all case affixes as alsO
krdanta words ending in म् or ए,
ऐ, ओो, औो. He gives such words in a
long list of Sutras P. I..1. 37 to
41; ' cf. सदृशं त्रिषु लिङ्गेषु सर्वसु च विभ-
क्तिषु । वचनेषु च सर्वेषु यन्न द्वेयति तदव्ययम्
|Kā$. on P. I. 1. 37.
अव्ययसंग्रह name of a treatise on,ind-
. eclinable words attributed tO Saka-
tāyana.
९
अव्ययार्थनिरूपण a work on the mean-
ingS of indeclinable words written
in the sixteenth century A. D. by
Vitghala,Sesa, grandsOn of Rāma-
candra Se8a the author of the Pra-
kriyā Kaumudi.
अव्ययीभाव name of a compound so
·.. called on.account of the words for-
43 अव्युत्पात्तिपक्ष
|ming the compound, being similar
to indeclinables; e. g. निमक्षिकम् ,
अधिहरि, यथामति, यावञ्जविम् etc.; cf. अन-
व्ययं अव्ययं भवतीत्यव्ययीभावः M. Bh. on
II. l . 5. The peculia1 ity of the
avyayibhāva, compound is that the
first member of the compound
playS the rg!e of the principal
word; cf. पूर्वपदार्थप्रधानोऽब्ययीभावः M.
Bh. on II. 1.6.
अब्यव्ध absence of interwermtion
between twO thingS by sOmething
diSSimilar; close $equence; Cf.
अतज्जातीयकं हि लॉके व्यवधायकं भवति M.
Bh. on I.1.7. Vārt. 8; cf. also
येन नाव्यवधानं तेन व्यवहितपि वचनप्रामाण्यात्
M. Bh. on VII. 3. 44, V]II 3.$4,
VII. 4. 1, VII. 4. 93. The term
अव्यवाय is used in the same $emse.
अव्यवस्था absence of proper disposal;
abSence of a prOper method regard-
ing the application of a rule; cf.
पुनर्कच्छिभावः पुनराडिति चक्रकमव्यवस्था प्राप्नेिित
M. Bh. om I. 3. 60 V. 5.
अव्याप्ति insufficient extension, as
oppOsed to अतिव्याप्ति or 9wer’ applica-
tioh; cf:सवाँपाधिव्यभिचाराथैम् 1 अव्याप्त्यति-
व्याप्त्यसंभवादिदेोषपरिहारार्थम्। Padatmafहूँjari
on II. 1.32.
अव्याप्य an intransitive root; a techni-
cal term in the Cāndra Vyākarana
( C. Vy. I. 4. 70 ) as also in
Hemacandra's S'abdānuŚāsama; cf.
अव्याप्यस्य मुचेमाँगु वटा॒ ! मुचेरकर्मकस्य सकारादौ
सनि परे मेो|क् इत्ययमादेशो वा स्यात् ! न चास्य
द्विः l मेोक्षति मुमुक्षति चैत्रः । मोक्षते मुमुक्षत
वा वत्सः स्वयमेव Hem. IW. 1.19.
अव्युत्पत्तिपक्ष the view held gener{tlly
by grammarians that all words are
not necessarily SuSceptible to ana-
lysis or derivatiOn, an alternative
view opposed tO the view of the
etymologists or Nairuktas that ewery
word is derivable; cf. पाणिनस्त्वव्युत्पीति-
पक्ष एऐंवेति शब्देन्दुशेखर निरूपितम् Pari.
Sekh. Pari. 22; वाचक उपादानः स्वरूप-
वानिति अन्युत्पत्तिपक्षे Vyāài's Sariāgraha.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-060.png}}}}}}

अक्ष्युत्पन्न
अव्युत्पन्न underived, unanalySable; cf.
उणादयेोऽछ्युत्पन्नानि प्रीतिपादेिकानि M. Bh. I.
].61 Wārt.. 4; Par. Sek. Pari. 22.
अव्युत्पन्नपक्ष same as अव्युत्पत्तिपक्ष. See
abowe the word अश्युत्पत्तिपक्ष.
अश (1) Pratyahāra or a brief term
stamding for all vOwels, semi-
wowels, and the fifth, fourth and
third of the claSS-consonantS; all
letters excepting the Surds and sibi-
|lants; {2) substitute अ for thc word
इदम् before affixes of cases beginn-
ing with the instrumental, and
for एतद् before the tad. affixes त्र
and तस॒स्; see P. II. 4.32 and 33;
(3) Substitute अ for the gen. sing.
case-affix ङस् after the words युग्मद्
and अस्मद्; see P. VII.1.27.
अशात्ति incapacity to pronounce
words correctly ; cf. अशक्त्या कयाचिद् !
श्रुाह्मप्या ऋन्तक इति प्रयेोक्तव्ये लतक इति प्रयुक्तम्
M.Bh. on Siwa-Sutra 2.
अशिोष्य unnecesSary to be prcscribed
or laid down.; cf.तदशिष्यं संज्ञाप्रमाणत्वात्
P. I.2. 53; alsO लिङ्कङ्गं अशिप्यं लेोकाश्रयत्वा-
हिछङ्गस्य M.Bh. on II. 1. 36.
अइमादि a class of words headed by
the word अश्मन् to which the taddh-
ita affix र is applied in thc four
Senses specified in P. IV. 2. 67 to
70; e.g• अश्मरः. ऊष्षरम् , नगरम् , पामरः
गह्वरम् etc. cf. P.IV. 2.80.
अश्वघासादि compounds like अश्वधास
which cannot be strictly correct as
चतुथींाँसमास, but can be प्रष्टीसमास jf the
word तदर्थ in the rule चतुर्थाँ तदर्थार्थ-
बलिर्हितसुखरक्षितैः be understood in thc
Sense of *meant for* a particular
thing which is to be formed out ०f
it; cf. विकृतिः प्रकृत्येति चेचदश्वधासादीनामुपसं-
ख्यानम् M.Bh. on II. 1. 36.
अश्वपत्यादि a class of words headed
by अश्चपति to which the taddhita
affix अणु (अ) is added in thc senses
|mentioned in rules before the rule
तेन दीव्यति० P. IV.4. 2. which are
44
अष्टाध्यायी
technically called the Prāgdivya-
tiya senses. c g. ॐā[श्वपतम्भ॒. , 3iीणपतम् .
गार्हपतम् etc.
अ28त्४रश्यगृ a c:;rmtmentatOr who
wrote a gloSS on Pānini's A$±ā-
dhyayi in thc T:1mil languagc.
अश्घादि (1) a claSS of wOrds hcaded
by thc word अश्च to which the affix
फञ्च॒म् (अायन) is added in thc scnsc of
गोत्र्(grandchildrcn etc.) ;e.g.अाश्चायन:
जातायेन:, औोत्:ायन: etc.; cf. lP. IV. 1.
1 10; (2) a, claSS Of wordS l1caded
by the wOrd अश्च tO which the
taddhita afiix यत् is addcd in the
sensc of a cauSc Of thc type Of a
mecting or an accider1tal circum-
stance; c.g. अ|श्विकम् अाश्मि{श्क्रभू cf. P.
V. 1.39.
अष्टक another mamc for th{: fatmOuS
work of P:il)i1hi populःarly called
the Aँ:{ंādhyiiyi; cf. अष्ट्राश्व*यायाः परि-
माणमस्य सूत्रस्य अष्टकं ५ाfि}ीनीश्थम् ! दश्ट्रीश्कं र्देàया-
घ्रपदीयम् } त्रिकं क्राश्ट्राकृत्स्नम! Kā$ On I'. V•
1. 58; ' ( 2 ) studcrits of iँ'.itaini's
gramimar, c. g. अश्टकां: पाJिiन्र्नेयाः ; cf.
सूत्राच्च व्केॉपधात् । Kā$. On P.i!V. 2. 65.
अष्टम a tcrm uscd by anciclht gratm-
|marians for thic vocative Casc•
अष्टमङ्गल namc of a commerltary Qn
the Kātantra Vyfikaratha by Rām-
aki$oracakrawartin.
अष्ट{ध्यायी name popularly given to thc
Sप्itrapāgha ८f *āiyini cOnSisting of
cight books (adhyāyas) corataithing
in all398l Stitras,aS found in th८ tra-
ditional rccital, current at thc time
of the atāthors of the Kā$ikā. Ouat of
thesc 3981 Stitras, sev¢n arc found
given as Vārtikas in thc Mahābhā-
5ya and two are found in Ganapā-
!!ha.Thc author of thc Mahābhā. ya
has commented upon only 1228 of
these 3981 stitras. CXriginally there
were a very few d!fierences of read-
ings also, as obscrved by Patafjali
( see Mbh on I.4.1 ); but the text



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-061.png}}}}}}

अष्टाक्षरा
was fixed by Patafंjali which, with
a feW additionS made by the auth-
ors of the Kā$ikā,as obSerwed above,
has traditionally corne down to the
|present day. The A$àdhyayi iS
believed to be one of the six Wed-
ānga works which are cOmmitted tO
memory by the reciterS Of रेgveda.
The text of the A$ंtādhyāyÎ is recited
without accents. The word अष्टाध्यायीं
was current in Patafंjali's time; cf.
शिष्टज्ञानार्था अश्टाध्यायो M. Bh• on VI.
3.109.
अष्टाक्षरा a metre having eight Sylla-
bles in a foot;cf:गायत्रीं सा चतुर्वैिशत्यक्षरा l
· अष्टाक्षराख्त्रयः पादाः चत्वारो वा षडक्षराः R.
Pr. XVI. 9.	→
अष्टि name of a metre of four feet
consisting of 64 syllables in all, 12
syllables in the odd feet and 20 in
the even feet; e.. g• त्रिकटुकेषु महिषः
etc. R.V. II. 22. l•
अस्म् (1) case affix of the nominative
and accusative plural and the ab-
lative and genitive singular (जसुत् ,
शम्, ङसेि and ङस् ); (2) taddhita affix
असि॒ ( असि ) added to पूर्व, अधर and
अवर, by P. V.3.39; (3) compound-
ending असूं ( असिच् ) applied tO the
words प्रजा and मेघा standing at the
end of a Bahuvrihi cOmpOund
( P. W.4. 122 ); (4) Uhādi affix अस्
prescribed by the rule सर्वधातुभ्येोऽमुन्
and subsequent rules (648-678) tO
form words such as मनमुत्, सरट् etc,(5)
ending syllable अग्यू, with Or with-
out sense, of words in connection
with which special operationS are
given in grammar; cf P.WI..4.14;
cf. also अनिनस्मन्ग्रहणान्यथैवता चानथैकेन न्व
तदन्तविधिं प्रयेोजयन्ति Par.Sek. Pari. 16.
अस affix अस mentioned in the Niru-
|kta in the word अवस ( अय् +अस )
cfअसेी नामकरणःl तस्मान्नावग्गृह्णन्ति NirI.17.
असंरव्य not possessing any notion Of
number; the word is used in COn-
45
असमर्थ
nection with avyayas or indeclina-
bles; यथैव द्द्ट्टेि अालि:द्भमश्व्ययमेवमसंख्यमपि
|M. Bh. on II. 4. 82.
असंज्ञक a term used for the C'āndra
Grammar,aS r1O Sathjfंās or techni-
" ca! terms are used therein; cf.चान्द्रं
चासंज्ञकं स्मृतम्.
अस्र्सज्ञा not used as a technical term Or
narme Qf a thing; cf. पूर्वैपरावरदक्षिणेोच्त-
रा॒प॒राधपूटृाणि व्यवस्थायामसंज्ञायामुं P.I.1.34.
असंनिकर्ष (; ) SeparatednesS as in the
. case of two distinct words; ( 2 )
abSence Of cO-alescence preven-
ti?g the Sandhi; cf. R.T. 68,70.
असंनेिधान the same as असंनिकर्ष; see
above; e. g. भरा इन्द्र; तमु अभिप्रगायत.
अस्संप्रत्यय failure to understand the
senSe; cf. इतरथा ह्यसंप्रत्ययोऽकृात्रिमत्वाद्यथा
लेोके M. Bh. on I.1.23 Vār t. 3.
असंभच Impossibility of occurrence
(uSed in Connection with an
OperatiOn) ; cf. नावश्यं द्विकार्ययोग एव
विप्रतिषेध : | किं तर्हि । असंभवेपि || M.
Bh. I.1•t2 Vārt. 3; (2) impossibi-
lity Of a statement, mention, act
etc. cf. असंभव: खल्वपि अर्थादेशनस्य M.
Bh. on II. 1.1.
असंयोगा absence of the conjunction
of consonants; cf. असंयोगाल्लिट् कित्
P. I. 2.5.
असंहिता absence of juxta-position,
|absence of connectedness; cf.
यदि तावत्सांहतया निर्देशः क्रियते भ्वादय इति
भचितव्यम् | अथासंहितया भू अादय इति
भवितव्यम् M. Bh. on I. 3.1.
असत्व (1) absence of सत्त्व or entity;
(2) other than a Substance i. e.
property, attribute, etc. cf. प्रादयः
असत्त्ववचना निपातसंज्ञा भवन्ति M. Bh. I.
4. 59; cf. also सोऽसत्त्वप्रकृतिर्गुणः M.
Bh. on IV. 1.44. cf. also चादयोऽ
सत्वे P. I. 4,. 57.
असमर्थ (1) Syntactically not con-
nected, e. g.. राशि: and पुरुष्ष: in the
sentence भार्या राज्ञः पुरुषेो देवदत्तस्य । (2)



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-062.png}}}}}}

अस्समथस्मास्
46
→、
अांसद्ध
unable to enter into a cOrr]pound
word, the term is used in cOn-
nection with a wOrd which car1-
not be cormpounded with anOther
word, although related in SenSe
to it, and connectcd with it by
apposftion or by a suitable ca$e
affix, the reason being that it is
connected more closely	with ar¥-
other word; cf. सापेक्षमसमर्थे भवति M.
Bh. II. 1. l.: e. g. the words कष्टं
and श्रितः: iri the sentence अीं|हूंत्ं
कष्टं श्रेित:.
असमर्थसमास a compound of twO
words, which ordinarily iS in-
admissible, one of the two words
being more closely cOnnected
with a third word, but which
takes place on the authority Of
usage, there being mO Obstacle
in the way of understarading the
sense to, be conveyed;.e. g. देवदत्तस्य
गुरुकुलम् । देवदत्तस्य॒ दासभार्या | असूयैपश्यानि
मुखानि, अश्राद्धभेोजी श्राह्मणः M. Bh. on
II. 1.] •
अस्समस्त not compOundcd, not en-
tered into a compound with an-
other word; cf. समासे असमस्तस्य Hem.
|]I[E. 3.13.
असमास (1X absence of a compound.
उपसगदसमासेपि णोपदेशस्य B'. VIII. 4.14;
(2) an expreSSion cOnveying the
sense of a compound word al-
though standing in the form	of
separate words; चार्थे द्वन्द्ववचने अस्स॒मासपि
चार्थसंप्रत्ययादनिष्टं प्राप्नोतेि | अहरहर्नयमानेो
गामश्वं पुरुषं पशुम् M. Bh. on II.2.29.
असरूप not having the same out-
ward form or appearance; e. g.
the affixes अणु, अचू, ण, अञ्जु, अ, and
the like which are, in fact, सरूप as
they have the same outward form
viz. the affix अ. अण् and यत्
" fó असरूप; cf. वाऽसरूपेोऽख्रित्रयाम् P. III.
.94.
असवैविभत्ति not admitting all case-
affixeS to be attached " to it ; cf.
तद्धितश्चासर्वविभच्ति: P. I. 1. 38; यस्मान्न
सर्बविभत्तरुत्पास्त: सेोसर्वविभक्तिः । ततः: यतः; तत्र
यत्र l Kā$. on I. I.38.
असामथ्र्य absence of a syntactical con-
nectiOp; cf. दश्वा पट्टे: 1 घृर्तेन पट्टः !
असामथ्र्यादत्र न समासो न भवि॒िप्यर्ति । कर्थम-
सामर्थ्यंम् । स॒ोपेक्षमुसमर्थ .भवतीति॒ि ! न हि दद्भ्नः
पटुन् सामथ्यैम् ! केन तर्हि ! भुजिना । दद्भ्ना
भुङ्ते पट्टरिति `ो M. Bh. on II. 1.30,
असास्रूष्य dissimilarity in apparent
form (although the rcal wording in
existencc might be the sarme) c. g.
ढं? ड्डं[पुं, चlप्र॒म्; cf. नानुबन्धकृतमसारूप्यम् ।
Pār. Sek. Pari. 8.
^\
अाँस्स (]) Upādi afiीx असुत् ; (2) tad.
àffix अस्. Sec above the`word असू.
अास्तच्य् samāsa-ending affix अस्. See
abOve the word अम्.
असिद्ध invalid; of suspended validity
for the time bcing; not functiOning
for the timc being. Thc term is
frequently used in Pārnini?s systcm
of grammar in connection with
rules or operations Which are
prevermted, Or hcld in Suspemse, in
connectiora with their application
in the prOceSS of the formation of
a word. The tcrm (अासिद्ध) is also
used in connection with ruleS
that have applicd or operations
that havc taken place, which are,
in ccrtain cases, madc imvalid or
inwjsible as far as their cfiect is
concerned and other rules are
applied or other Coperations are
allowed to take place, which
ordinarily have beem prewented
by those rules which are made
invalid had they not been inva-
lidated. Pāifiini haS laid down
this invalidity on three different
occasions (!) invalidity by the
rule पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् VIII. 2.1. which
makes , a rule or operatiora ira the



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-063.png}}}}}}

असिद्ध
47
अस्थ
secOnd, third and fourth quarters
of the eighth chapter of the
A$वृंādhyāyi invalid when any pre-
ceding rule is to be applied, (2)
invalidity by the rule असिद्धवदत्राभात्
which enjoins mutual invalidity
in the case of operations prescrib-
ed in the Abhiya section begin-
ning with the rule असिद्धवत्राभात् (VI.
4.22.) amd going on upto the end
of the Pāda (VI.4.175), (3) invali-
dity of the single substitute for two
letters, that has already taken
place, when षूञ् is tO be substituted
for सु, or the letter त् is to
be prefixed, cf. षत्वतुकोरास्सद्धः
CVI. 1.86). Although Panini laid
down the general rule that a
Subsequent rule or operation, in
case of conflict, supersedes the
preceding rule, in many cases it
became necesSary for him to set.
that rule aside, which he did by
means of the stratagem of inva-
|lidity given abOve. Subsequent
grammarians found out a number
of additional cases where it be-
came neceSSary to SuperSede the
subsequent rule which they did
by laying down a dictum of in-
validity similar to that of Pānini.
The author of the Wārttikas,
hence, laid down the doctrine
that rules which are nitya Or
antarahga Or apavāda, are StrOng-
er than, and hence supersede,
the anitya, bahirahga and utSarga
ruleS respectively. Later gratm '
marians have laid down in general,
the invalidity of the bahiraihga rule
when the antarahga rule occurS
along with it or subSequent to it.
For details see Vol. 7 of Vyāka-
rana Mahābhāsya (D. E., Society's
edition) pages 217-220. See also
Pari. $ek. Pari. 50.
असिद्धत्व invalidity of a rule or ope-
|ration on account of the warious
considerations sketched above.
See अासिद्ध.
अस्सिद्धपरिभाषा the same as Antaranga
Paribhāंa or the doctrine of the
invalidity of the bahirafiga ope-
ration. See the Word असिद्ध abowe.
For details see the Paribhaक्षुā
** asiddham , bahirahgam anta-
rahge ** Par. Sek. Pari. 50 and the
discussion thereon. Some gram-
marians have given the name
असिद्धपरिभाषा to the Paribhāśā असिद्धं
बहिरङ्गमन्तरङ्गे as contrasted with
अन्तरङ्गं बहिरङ्गाद् वलीयः which they
have named as बहिरङ्गपरिभाषा.
असुक् the augment असुस् seen in Vedic
Literature added to the nom. pl.
case-affix जसु following a noun-
base ending in अ; e.g, जनास:, देवास:
etc. cf अाजसेरसुक् P. VII. 1.50, 51.
असुङ् substitute असू for the last letter
of the word पुंस् before the सर्वनाम-
स्थान affixeS i. e. before the first
five case afiixes,e.g. पुमान् पुमांसौ etc.;
cf. पुंसेोऽसुङ् P. VII. 1. 89
असुन् Unādi affix अस् ( असुन् ) by सर्व-
धातुभ्येोऽसुन् वत्तव्यः Un. St].628; cf. न
वेत्तीति नश्वदाः । वेत्तिरसुन्प्रत्ययान्तः. Kāś. on
|]P.. WI. 3. 75.
असे |kपृt affix in the sense of the infini-
tive (तुमर्थे) in Vedic ILiterature,e.g-
जीवसे: cf. तुमर्थे सेसेनसे० P. III. 4. 9
अस्ताति tad. affix अस्तात् in the sense
of the base itself, but called विभाक्ति,
prescribed after words in the sense
of * direction ', e. g. पुरस्तात्, अधस्तात्
etc. cf. दिक्शब्देभ्यः ' सप्तर्मापञ्चर्माप्रथमाभ्येा
दिग्देशकालेषु अस्तातिः P. V. 3. 27.
अस्थ अ, अा and अा३. This term is
’ used in Rk Tantra, cf. अस्थनाभिनी
सन्ध्यम् R. T. 94*. अस्थ possibly means
* belonging to, अ i. e. all the three
grades हृस्व, दीर्घ and प्ळुत of अ *.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-064.png}}}}}}

अस्पष्ट॒ठ
48
अस्पष्ट less in contact with tlae VOcal
organ than the Semi-vOw els; thc
term occurs in Hemacandra'S
Grammar (Hem. I. 3. 25) and iS
explained by the cOmtnentator
as' ईषत्स्पृष्टतरौ | प्रत्यासत्तेर्यकारवकारौ. अस्पष्ट
stands for the letters य and व which
are substituted for the vowelS एएँ
ऐ and ओी औौ when followed by a
wowel; cf. alsO Sāk I. l . 154.
अस्पृष्ट not in contact with any vocal
orgःan; the term is used in cOnnec-
tion with the effort required for
the utterane of vowels, अनुस्वार and
sibilants when no specific contact
with a vocal organ is necesSary;
cf. स्वरानुस्वारेराष्मणामख्पृष्टं धरिर्णे स्थितम् R.
Pr. XIII. 3.
अस्सद् first perSon; the term is used in
the sense of the first person in the
grammarS Qf Hemacandra. and
Sākatāyana. cf. त्रीणि ऋीण्यन्ययुष्मदस्मदि
( Hem. III. 3. 17 );
अस्वपदविग्रह a term used for thosc
compounds, the disSolution of
which can not be shown by the
members of the compound; c. g.
सुमुखी; cf. भवति॒ि वै कश्चिदस्र्वपदधिग्रहेोपि बहुं-
नीहि: I तद्यथा l शेाभनं मुरवमस्याः सुमुखीति 1
M.Bh. on W. 4. 5.
अस्वयंदृष्ट A term used for the per-
fect tense; cf. कृ चकारमस्वयंदृष्टे (R.T.
191).
अस्व not homogeneous; asavart?a. cf.
इव॒र्णीदेः अखे स्वरे यवरलम् Hem. I. 2.21,
also अस्वे Sāk. I. 1.73.
अस्व्र untoned; a word without
an accent, aS different from a
Word Which haS an accent,but whi-
ch is not uttered with that accent ;'
cf. अक्रियमाणे हुपदेशिवद्भावे...अान्तर्यत अादेशां
अस्वरकाणामस्वरकाः स्युः |M.Bh. on VII.
I.2, WII. 1. 89.
अा (1) the long form of the vOwel अ
called दीर्ध,co1hsisting of twO rnātrās,
in contrast with (1) the Short अ
which consists of one mātr and the
protracted अा३ which consistS of
three mātrष्ās; (2) Substitute अा
of two rmātrās whcn prcsCribed by
the word दीर्घ or वृ|ा|द्धे for thc
short vOwcl अ; (3) upaSarga. अा
( अाङ् ) in the scnsc of limit c. g. अा
कडारादेका संज्ञा (P. I. 4.l.) अ{क्षुमारं श्यशा:
पाणेिन: Kā:$. on II. 1.13. अI उदश्कान्तात्
(M. Bh. On I. 1•14.); (4) indcclin-
able अा in thc ScnSe Of rermcm-
brancc e. g. अां एवं नु मन्यरंभं: cf.
ईषदर्थे क्रियायेोगे मर्यीदाभिविधौ च यः 1 एतमातं
ङितं धिद्याद्वाक्यस्मरणयेोरईित् M. Bh. on
I.1.14:; (5) augment अा ( अाक॒ ) as
scen in चराचर, घदावद etc. cf. M.
Bh. VI. 1.12 Vārt. 6; (6) augment
अा ( अाट् ) prefixed to roots in the
tenses ळुङ्, लङ् and तृट्टछ् : (7) substi-
tute अा prcScribc(l for the last
letter of pronouns bcforc thcः tad.
afiixc8 दृञ्क्,दृश्ट्र[, दृक्ष and धत्, :aS ii) त्t{दृकॄ,
तादृश्ट्रा ctc. ; (8) fctmirhithc afiix अ! (ट!ाय्,
डIप, or चाप् ) addcd to nOt1ns crak1-
ing in अा; (9) Substitt1 tc अ|ा ( अा
or अात्, or डा Or अाग्छ् ) for ca$'c
afiixes in Vedic literature उभा यन्तारौ,
नाभा पृथिव्या: etc.
&८ • →
अभेाँ indeclinable अा pronournccd nasa-
lized, e. g- अभ्र अीं अप: M. Bh.
I. 3.2.
अाक् see above thc word अा sense (5).
अाकम् thc substitutc अ|ाकम् for साभ, of
thc gen. pl. aft6r thc words युष्मदृट्
and अस्मदृद् c. g• छ्यु'माकं, अस्माश्क्रम् cf.
P.. VfI. 1.33.
अाकर्षक ( {t wOrd ) a{tr:acting {६no-
thcr word statcd previously in
the contcxt e. g. the word च in
the rules of Pārāini.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-065.png}}}}}}

अाकर्षादि 49
अाकर्षौदि a class of words headed by
the word अाकर्ष to which the tadd-
hita affix कन् (क) is applied in the
sense Of c!ever Or €xpert; e. g.
अाकर्षैक:, त्सरुक:, शकुनिक: etc.; cf. P.
अाकर्घादिभ्यः कन् P. W.2.64.
अाकपूंङ्क (Or साकाङ्क alSo) expectant of
another word in the context, e. g.
कूज and व्याहर in अङ्ग कूज ३,अङ्ग व्याहर ३
इदानीं ज्ञास्यसि जाल्म Kāś. on अङ्गयुक्तं
तिङाकाङ्कुम् (P.VIII. 2.96).
अारल्य
cf. also यत्तर्हि तद् भिन्नेष्वभिन्नं छिन्नेष्वच्छिन्नं
सामान्यभूतं स शब्दः | नेत्याह । अाकृतिनमि सा.
M. Bh. I. 1.Ahn.1 ; ( 4 ) a, metre
consisting of 88 letters; cf. R. Prāt.
XVI. 56, 57.
अाकृतिगण a class or group of words
in which SOme words are actually
|mentioned and room is left to
include others which are found
undergoing the same opera-
tion; cf. श्रेण्यादयः कृतादिभिः | श्रेण्यादयः
पठ्चन्ते कृतादिराकृतिगणः M. Bh. on
II.I• 59. Haradatta defines the
WOrd as प्रयेोगदर्शनेन अाकृतिग्राह्येो गणाः
अाकृतिगणः | अत्र अादिशब्दः प्रकारे | अाकृति-
गणेपि उदाहरणरूपेण कतिपयान् पठति कृत · मत
इत्यादि Padamafंjarī on II.I. 59 ; cf.
Pradipa of Kaiyaja also on II. 1.
59.Some of the garjas mentioned by
|Fahini are āk'tigataas, e.g. अर्श-
अ॒ादिगण, मूलविभुजादिगण, स्नात्ल्यादिगण,
शिवादिगण, पचादिगण, and others.
अाक्षरसमाम्नायिक directly or expressly
mentioned in the fourteen Pratya-
hāra Stitras of Pāt]ini; a letter
actually mentioned by Patभूini in
his alphabet * अइउणुश्',* ऋलक् * etc.
अाक्षेिप्त (1) taken as understood, being
required tO complete the sense; cf.
क्रिबपि अाक्षिप्तो भवति M. Bh. on III.2.
178;(2) a term uSedfor the circum-
flex accent or स्वरित् aS it iS uttered
by a zig-zag'{ motion of the organ
अाकङ्घ्ङ्का expectancy with regard to
Sense-COmpletion, generally in
compounds such as साकाङ्क, निराकाङ्कृ
etc. cf. अस्त्यस्मिन्नाकाङ्क इत्यतः साकङ्कम्
|M. Bh. on III. 2. I14.
आकाङ्कृ a word for which -there is
expectaney of another word for
the completion of sense.
अाकार the letter अा; cf. अकारस्य विवृतोप-
देश अाकारग्रहणार्थः | M. Bh. I. 1 Āhn.
2.
अाकेिनिच् tad. aff. अाकिन् affixed to
the wOrd एक in the sense of
* single,' *alone'; cf. एकादाकेिनिच्चासहाये
P. W. 3.52.
अाङस्र्मीय a group of 43 roots of the
चुरादि claSS of roots beginning
with the root चित् and ending
with कुरुम् which are Atmanepadin
only. in the mouth caused by fhe air
अाङ्कति jit.{&rपू:_ihर्षुंvंdधूal thingः.cf. | िँँँँँँ*ि वैँ ई'ो,नु
प्य्कस्या अाकृतेतश्चरितः प्रयोगो द्वितीयस्यालेतृतीय-
स स्वरितः Utrvata on R• Pr. III. 1.
अाक्षेप a zig-zag motion of the organs
producing , Sound caused by the
air; see अाक्षिप्त above.
अारल्य designation, conventional
स्यांश्चि न भवति M. Bh. on III. 1.40
Vārt. 6. The , word is derived as
अाक्रियत सा अाकृतिः and explained as
संस्थानम्; cf. अाक्रियत व्यज्यते अनया इति
अाकृति: संस्थानमुच्यते Nyāsa on IV.1.63;
(2) general form which, in a way,
is equivalent to the generic nðtion
Or gentuS; cf. अाकृत्युपदेशात्सिद्भम् । अवर्णा-
कृतिरुपदिष्टा सर्वमवर्णकुलं ग्रहीष्यति M. Bh.
• 1. Ahn. 1; (3) notion of gents; |
7	→
name; cf. देवदत्तेो मुण्डश्यपि जट्यपि श्वामा-
ख्यां न जहाति M. Bh. on I.1.1 ; cf.
also स्वमज्ञातिधनाख्यायाम् |P. f. 1.35; cf.
also वर्णः कारोत्तरो वणख्यिा Tai. Prāt. I.
|16.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-066.png}}}}}}

अारल्यात
50
अागन्तुक
अारठयात werbal form, verb;
I.1; चत्वारि पदजातानि नामाख्यातोपसर्गनि-
पाताश्च M. Bh. I.1. Āhmika 1 ; alSo
A.Prāt. XII. 5, अाकार अाख्यात
पदादिश्च M. Bh. I. 2.37 Vārt. 2,
अाख्यातमारव्यातन क्रियासातत्ये Sid. Kau.
on II. i. 72, क्रियावान्वकमाख्यात V.
|Pr. V.1 ; cf. भारद्वाजकमाख्यातं भार्गत्रं नाम
भाष्यत l भारद्वाजेन दृष्टत्वादारट्यातं भारद्वजं-
गेोत्रम् V. Prat. VIII. 52; cf. also
Athar. Prāt. I. l. 12, 18; l. 3. 3,6;
|II. 2. 5 where ākhyāta, meanS wer-
bal form. The word alsO mea!nt in
ancient days the root also, as difeिr-
entiated from a werb or a Werbal
form as is showra by the lines तन्नाम
येनाभिदधाति सत्वं, तदारब्यार्तयेन भावं स धातुः
R. Pr. XII. 5 Where * अाख्यात ? and
*धातु? are uSed as synonyms. AS the
root form Such aS कृ, भृ etc. as di$-
tinct from the werbal form, is mewer
found in actual use, it is immater-
ial Whether the word means root or
verb.In the paSSageS quoted above
from the Nirukta and thc Mahāी-
bhā$ya rpferring to thc four kinds
of words, the word ākhyāta could
be taken to mean root ( धातु ) or
werb (क्रियापद). The ākhyāta or verb
is chiefly concerned with the
|prOcesS Of being and bccoming
while nOuns (नामानेि) have sattva or
eSSence, Or $tatic elemcnt, as their
meaning. VerbS and nounS are
cOncerncd not merely with the acti-
wities and thingS in this world but
wjth every proceSs and entity; cf.
पूर्वापूर्गुभूतं भार्वमाख्यातेनाचष्ट Njr. I.; अस्ति-
भबतिविद्यतींनामर्थः सत्ता | अनेककालस्थायि-
नीति कालगतपौर्वापर्येण क्रमवतीति तस्याः क्रिया-
त्वमू l Laghumafijti$श्ā. When a kt.
affix is added to a root, thc static
element predominates and hence
a Word ending with a kपृt. affix in
the sense ofbhava or verbal acti-
wity is treated as a noun and regu-
cf. |['
भावप्रधानमाख्यातं सत्त्वप्रधानानि नामानि Nir• |;
larly declined;cf. कृदभिहितेी भावेो द्रत्
भवति M.Bh. on II. 2. 19 and III..
l.67, where the words गति, व्रज्या, पाक
and OthcrS are giwcn as instances,
|Regarding indeclinable words end-
ing with k!t. affixcs such as कर्तु,
कृत्वा, and Others, thc modern gram.
|marianS hold that in their case the
verbal actiwity is not shadowed
by the Static element and hence
they Can be,in a way, looked upon
as akhyātas; cf. अब्ययकृतेो भार्श्वे Vaiyā-
kara;ोabhti$ama.
अाख्यातप्रक्रिया a work dcaling with
Verbs, writtcn by Anubhtitisvartipā-
cārya on the Sārasvata Vyākarat]a.
अाख्यातविवेक a work dc:uling with
verbs arād their activity by Krक्ष्na-
Shāstri Araर्तृe a great Nāiyāyika of
the 18th century.
अरठयतव्यक्रपणा a trcatise on verbs
discuSSing wcrbal forms by Vaiga-
86ठेiaa•
अगन्तुक lit. adwentitiouS, an addi-
tiOnal WOrding gcncrally at th1c
end of roots to Show distinctly
thcir form c.g. श्चदेि, एधििधे, सर्ति ctc.;
cf. इ*िधभवरीिभ्यां न्च P I. 2. 6; cf.
.als५? भव॒लक्षुणॆ स्र्थ्णुकृश्ट्य॒दिरिद्दृताभेिननि-
भ्यस्तेtमुन्म् P. III. 4.16, ग्ंधिःधृदे[. *कम्सु•म् P.
III• 4. 17 and a number of other
StutraS whcre इ ()r तिं is addcd to)
the rootः cf. इक्श्तिर्गीं धातुर्निर्देद्दे, वणीँ-
त्कारः, रादेि*क: P. III. 3.108 Vārt. 2.3.
4• whcrc Such appcradages fo be
added to the roots or lettcrs are
giwem. Thc word अाग्iन्तु ig an oid
wOrd uScd in thc Nirukta, but thc
term अागन्तुक्र appears to bc uscd
for the first time for such forms
by Haradatta; cf. ह्ररारंति हृ कीथ्ल्येि,
8
अागन्तुकेकोरे गुणेन निर्देश:Padamāfijari on
VII. 2. 31. In thc {raditional oral
explanations the second part of a
|reduplicated word is termcd
अागन्तुक which is placed 8econd



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-067.png}}}}}}

अम
' 51
अाङ्ग
i. e. after the original by vir-
tue of the convention अागन्तू-
नामन्ते निवेशः, although in fact, it
is said to pOSSess the sense of
the root in contrast with the
first which is called abhyāsa.A nice
. distinction can, however be draWn
between the four kinds of adwenti-
· tiouS wOrdingS found in grammar
viz.अागन्तु, इत्, अभ्यास anऽàअागम which
can be briefiy stated as follows ;
The former two do not form a
regular part Of the wOrd and are
not found in the actual use of the
word; besides, they do not poSSesS
any senSe, while the latter two are
found in actual use and they are
pOSSeSSed of SenSe. Again the
agantu word is Simply used for
facility of understanding exactly |
and correctly the previQus , word |
which is really wanted; the इत् |
wording, besides serving this pur-
pOse, is of uSe in causing some
grammatical operations. अभ्यास, i3
the first part of the wording which
iS wholly repeated and it pOSSesses
no sense by itself, while, āgama
which iS added to the Word either
' at the beginning or at the end or
inSerted in the middle, formS a
* part of the Word and poSSesSes the
sense of the word.
अगाम augment, accrement, a word
element which is added to the
primitive or basic word during the
process of the formation of a, com-
plete word or- pada. The agama
is an adventitious word element
and hence differS from ādeśa, the
substitute which wholly takes the
place of the original or ( अादशिन् ).
' Out of the sewerai āgamaS men-
tioned by Panini, those that are
marked with mute ट् are prefixed,
· those, marked with क्, are affxed,
while those, marked with म्, are
placed immediately after the last
wowel of the Word. The aug-
merats become a part and parcel
of the Word to which they are
added, and the characteristicS of
which they possess;cf.यदागमास्तद्गुणी-
भूतास्तदुग्रहणेन गृह्यन्ते, also अागमानां अागमि-
धार्मेवैशिष्टयम् Par. Sek. Pari.1 1. Those
grammarians, who hold the wiew
that words are unproduced and
eternal, explain the addition of an
augment as only the Substitution
of a, Word with an augment in the
place Of a Word withOut an aug-
|ment; cf. अादशांस्तर्हॉमे भविष्यन्ति अनाग-
मकानां सागमका: M. Bh. on I. 1.20;
I. 1.46. The term agama is defined
as अन्यत्र विद्यमानस्तु येो वर्णः श्रूयतेधिकः t
अागम्यमानतुल्यत्वात्स अागम इति स्मृतः Com.
orn Tait. Prāt.I. 23.
अागमिन् a base to which an augment
is added; cf. एवमपि पञ्च अागमास्त्रय
अागमिनः MLBh. I.1. Ahnika 2.
अागार्वाँय a class of roots forming a
subdivision of the Curādigana or
the tenth conjugation beginning
with पद् and ending with गर्बु whigh
are only atmanepadin; e. g. पदयते,
मृगयते, अर्थयते, गर्बयेत.
अागास्त्य name of an ancient writer of
Vedic grammar and Prātiśakhya
works; cf. R• Pr. I.2•
अाग्रायण्ा an ancient Scholar Of
Nirukta quoted by .Yaska; .cf.
अक्षि ओष्टः | अनक्तेरिति अाग्रायणः Nir.
]I. 9.
अाङ् the preposition अा. · See the
word अा abowe• →
अाङ्ग an operation presgribed in tbe
section, called aiagādhikāra, in the
the Asādhāyi of Pāt}ini, made up
of fivé Pādas consisting of the
' fourth quarter of the 6th adhyāya
and all the four quarters ..of the
seventh adhyāya. अना॒ङ्गतूिं धूर्वै विक॒रणी
. एष्तिव्याः M. Bh• on ][. 3.60 Vārt.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-068.png}}}}}}

अच्
*\
5; cf. also वार्णादाङ्गं बलीयो॒ भवुतेि Par•
Sek. Pari 55; also M. Bh. on
III.2.3.
अाच् tad. affix अा applied to the
word दक्षिणा and उत्तराः cf.P.V. 3.36,
38. e. g. दक्षिणा वसति, उत्तरा स्मर्णीयम्,
|Kā$. on W.3. 36, 38.
अाचार (1) custormary usage of putting
or employing WOrds in rules; cf.
अान्चायचिारात्संज्ञाासेिद्धिः, P.I,1.1, Vārt. 4.
(2) behaviour;cf. उपमानादाच्चिवोरे P.III.
1.10; cf. also निवासत अान्धारतश्चM.Bh.
on VI. 3.109.
अाचाराकिप् denom. affix क्रिप् applied
to any prष्ātipadika or noun in the
sense of behaviour; cf. सर्वप्रातिपदिकेभ्य
. अाचारे क्रिबू वच्तव्यः अश्वति गर्दभति इत्येवमर्थम्
M. Bh. on III. 1., 11; cf. हलन्तेभ्य
अाचाराष्केबभावाच्च Par. Sek. on Pari.52.
अाचार्य preceptor, teacher; a designa-
tion usually given to Pānini by
Patafijali in the Mahābhā$ya; cf.
the usual expression तज्ज्ञापयतेि अाचार्यः
as also अाचार्थप्रवृत्तिज्ञीपयति; alsO cf.
नेदानीमाचार्याः सूत्राणि कृत्वा निवर्तयन्तिः cf.
al5o , the pOpular dcfinition of
अाचायै given " as ** निशम्य यद्रिरं प्राज्ञा
अविचार्यैव तत्क्षणम् । संभावयानत शिरसा
तमाचार्ये प्रचक्षते ।''
अाचार्यदेशीय a partisan of the precep-
tor Pānini or the Stitrakāra who is
|looked upon aS having approx-ि
mately the same authority as the
. Stitrakāra; cf. अाचायैदेशीय अाह- न
वक्तव्य इति 1 Kaiyaर्भृa on I. 4. 105,
Vārt. 2.
अाचार्यसंपद् necesSary qualification to
teach the Veda with all its pāghas
having the necessary knowledge
of accents, mātrās and the like.Cf.
पदकमविभागज्ञेो वर्णक्रमविचक्षणः स्वरमात्राiाविशे-
षज्ञेो गच्चेष्छदाच्चार्यैसंपदम् R. Prāt.I.8.
अाचितादि a class of words headed by
the word अाचित which do not have
• their final wowel accented acute.
52
तेिदेशेिाक
by P. VI. 2. 146 when they are
preceded by thc prepositions प्र, परा
etc. although thcy arc used as
proper nouns. c. g. अाचितम् , निरुत्तम् ,
प्रश्लिष्टम्; cf. Kā$ikā on P. VI.2.146.
अाट (1) augment अt prefixed tO rOQts
beginning with a vowel in the
imperfect, aorist and conditional,
which is always acccnted ( उदात्त);
cf. P. VI. 4. 72; (४) augment अा
prefixed t० the impcrativc first
person terminations, c.g• .|श्करवाणि,
केरौधै ctc.; cf. P. III. 4.92: (3) aug-
mcnt अा to bc prcfixcd tO caSc-
afiीxes which are ट्टित् aftcr nouns
callcd nadi; e.g. कुमार्ये; cf P• VII•
3.112.
अाटच tad. affix (अाट) in thc sefरे॒se of
possession added to thc word वाञ्छ्व्;
e.g. वाचाट: cf. P.V.2. 125.
अात् (1) long अा as differcnt fr Orn short
or protracted अ॒ prcscribcd by the
wofd वृद्धि or दीर्ध in thc case of अ,
or by the word अात् whcn substitu-
ted for anothcr wOwcl, aS for exam-
plc in thc rule अादेच उपदेझेऽशिति and
thc following; cf. P. VI. 1.45, 57;
(2) substitutc for thc ablativc affix
डङ्ग्स् after words cnding in अ; cf. P.
Wi[.1.12; (3) substitutc अात् for a
casc affix in Vcdic I,iterature, c.g.
न ताद् ब्राह्मणाद् निन्दामि Kā$. on VII.
1.39.
अाताम्Atmancpada thirdpcrson dual
ending, tcchnically subxititutcd for
लकार by P. III. 4.78
अाति tad. afiix अात् applicd to उत्तर,
अधर and दक्षिण by P.V.3.34.
अातिदेशिाक applied by extcnsion or
transfer of epithct as oppOscd to
औीपदेशिक. Sce the word अतिदेश; the
term is oftem uscd in conncction
with rules or opcrations which do
not apply or occur by the direct
expression of thc gramrmarian; cf.
यदेिं अातिदशिकेन कित्त्वैन औोपदेशिकं क्रित्त्वं



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-069.png}}}}}}

अातिशायिक
53
अादिवृद्धि
बाध्यत॒. M. Bh. on I.2.1.; cf. also
अातिदेशिकमनित्यम् Par.Sck. Pari. 93.6.
अाातिशायिक a tad-afiix in the sense
of excellence; a term applied tO
the afiixcs तम and इष्ठ aS alsO तर् and
ईयसू prescribed by Panini by the
rules अतिशायनेन तमबिष्ठनौ and द्विवचन-
विभज्येोपपद तरबीयसुनैौ cf. P.V. 3.55, 57.
This superlative affix is seen doub-
ly applied Sopmetimes in Vedic Lit.
e g.श्रेष्ठतमाय क्रमैणे Yaj. Satm. I.1; cf.
' also तदन्ताच्च स्वार्थे छन्दसि दशैने श्रेष्टतमायेति
|P.V.3.55 Vārt. 3.
अाातशायिकान्त a word ending with an
ātisāyika affix; cf. अातिशायिकान्तात्स्वार्थे
छन्दसि अातिशाथिको दृश्यत M. Bh. on V.
3.55.
अत्त्व the substitution of long अा
prescribed by the term अात् as in
अादच उपदेशेाऽशिति and the following;
cf. P. VI.1.45 etc.
अtत्मन् agent or Kaptg as in the terms
अात्मनेपद or अात्मनेभाष्प्रा, cf. सुप अात्मन:
कयच् III. 1.8.
अात्मनेनपद a technical term for the
affixeS called तङ् (त, अाताम् etc.) and
the affix अान C शानच् , चानशु, कानच्व् ),
called sO possibly because, the
. fruit of · the activity is such as
generally goes to the agent (अात्मने)
when these afiixes are used. Con-
trast this term (Atmanepada)
with the term Parasmaipada when
, the fruit is meant for another. For
an explanation of the terms see P.
. VI.3.7 and 8.
अात्मनेपदिन् a root Which always takes
the Atmanepada affixes. (See
abowe).
अात्मनेभाष a technical term used for
* such rootS as speak for the agent
|himself; the term अात्मनेभाष means
, the same as the term अात्मनेपदिन्.
The term अात्मनेनभाष is not mention-
ed by .]Pataini; but the writer of the
Vārtikas explains it, cf. अात्मने-
भाषपरसैमैभाषयेोरुपसंख्यानम् P. VI. 3.7 and
8 Vart. 1; cf. also अात्मनेपदिनश्च धातवेीं
वैयाकरणैरात्मनभाषशन्देन व्यवह्नियन्ते,Kaiyata
on VI.3.7.The term is found in the
Atharva-Prāti$ākhya. III. 4.7. It
cannot be said whether the term
came in use after Patini or,although
earlier, it belonged to Some SchOol
other than that of Pānini or,Pānini
put into use the terms Atmane-
pada and ParaSmaipada for the
affixes as the ancient termsAtman-
ebhāsa and Parasmaibhāsa were in
use for th3 roots.
अात्व the substitution of अा; e.g.तादृञ्क्,
भवादृक्, अन्यादृक्र cf आ सर्वनाम्नंः P.VI.3.
90.
अात्वत् possessed of the vowel अा;
containing thg vQwel अाः e.g. पुटा॒कुः,
दायः etc. cf. कष्र्षील्वतो घञ्ञ्जेान्त उदात्तःP.VI.
1.159.
अादादिक belonging to the second con-
jugation or claSS of rootS which
begins with the root अद्ः cf. दैवादि-
कस्यैव ग्रहणं भविष्यति नादादिकस्य Pur.Pari.
67.
अादि (1) commencement, initial; cf.
अपूर्वलश्क्षण अादिः M.Bh. on I.1.21, (2)
of the kind of, similar; एवंप्रकारः.
अादेिकर्मन् commencementofan action;
cf. अादिभूतः क्रियाक्षण: अादिकमै Kāś . on
अादिकर्मणि 'क्त: कर्तरि च । P.III. 4.71.
अादित् possessed of the mute indica-
tory letter अा signifying the non-
application of the augment इ Cइट्)
to the past- paSS. part. term क्त. e.
g. क्षिवप्ण्र्ण from the root ञ्ञिक्ष्विदाः simi-
larly खिन्न, भिन्न etc.cf. अादितश्च P.VII.
2.16.
अादिवृाद्द्द्धेि the Vrddhi substitute pres-
cribed for the firSt wowel of a word
to which a tad-affix, marked with
the mute letter ञ,णु, or कु is added;
e-g- औौपगव, दााक्षि etc.; cf. तद्धितष्वचामादेः
|P.VII.2.117, 118.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-070.png}}}}}}

अादिष्ट 54
अादिध् (1) prescribed for substitution;
Specified for an {)peration ; cf. सिंद्धं
तु अादिष्टस्य युड्वच्चनात् M.Bh. on VI.1.
155; cf. also M. Bh. ora VI. !.I58
Vārt. 3; M. Bh. on IV.3.28 Vār.
5; cf. also अादिश्टाचैवाचः पूर्वः M. Bh.
on I.l.57; (2) indicated or stated;
अादिष्टा इभे बर्णाः.
अtदेश (1) substitute as oppOsed tO
sthānin, the original. Ira Panini's
gram mar there is a very general
maxim, possessed of a number of
exceptions, no doubt, that ** the
Substitute behawes like the origंi-
nal** (स्थानिवदादेशः अनल्विधौ P.I.1.56.);
the application of this maxim is
called स्थानिवद्भाव; for purposes of
thiS स्था|ानेवद्भाव्च the elision (लेप) of a
phonetic elernent is looked upora
as a sort of Substitute;cf. उपधालेापस्य
स्थानिवत्वात् Kāś. on P. I.1.58. Gram-
marians many times look upon a,
complete Word or a word-base aS
a Substitute for another Onc, alth-
Ough only a letter or a syllable in
the wOrd is changed into another,
as also when a letter or syllable is
added to or dropped in a word;
cf. पचतु, पच्चन्तु ... इर्मेध्यादेशाः | कथम् !
अादिश्यत यः स अादशः | इमे चाप्यादिश्यन्त' |
M. Bh.• On I.1.56; cf, also सर्वे सर्व-
पदादेशा दाक्षीपुत्रस्य पाणिनेः M.Bh. on P.
I•I.20; cf. also अनागमकानां सागमका
अदिशा: M. Bh. on I.1.20; (2) indi-
cation, assignment;' cf. येीर्ये स्वरादेश;
अन्तेदिात्तं, वधेराद्युदात्तत्वं, स्वः स्वरितमिति
अांदेशः R.Pr.|I.30-32; cf. also अादेशः
उपदेश: cOm. on Tai.-Prāt. IL.20:
cf. also अनादेशे अविकारः V.Pr.IV.131,
० where Uvvata remarks यत्र उदात्तादीनां
स्व॒राणां सन्धौ अ॒र्देशेो न क्रियते तत्र अधिंकीरः
प्रत्येतञ्यः l cf. also एकारेरौ विभक्तयादेशः
छन्दसि A.Pr. II. 1. 2, where ए is prcs-
cribed as a Substitute for a 8ase-
affix and ले and अरुंम are cited as
exarmples where the acute acent is
also prcscribed.for the substitute ए. |!
अाडुटुदात्त
अादेशिन् {|hat for which a Substitute
is prescribed; thg Original, sthā-
niià; cf. अोदशिनामादेश्ाा: cf. alsO M.
Bh. on P.I.1.56.
अाद्य (1) premicr; cf. इदम॒ाद्यै पदस्थानं
( व्याकरणनींम्ाकं ) स्तिाद्वसोपानपवणाम् Vāk.
Pad. I.16; (2) prcceding, aS OppO-
sed to succeeding (उच्तर ); cf. सहाद्यै-
व्यैङ्कुञ्जनैः V.Pr.I.100; (3) original; cf.
अाद्यग्रकृति: परमप्रकृति: (origitmal base)
Bhāंā Vrtti. IV. i .93; . (4) first,
prcccdimg, अाद्ये योगे न व्यवश्य तिङ: स्युः
]M.Bh.. orn ]II{I.1-9j .
रव अाद्यन्तवद्भाव, comsidcration
of a single Or sOlitary lctter as the
initial or the firaal Onc according
to rcquircmentS for opcrationS
prescribed for thc initi:al or for
the final. Both thcse notionS --the
initial and thc final-arc rclative
notiOns, and becauSc thcy rcquire
thc prescncc of an additional lctter
or letters for tlae sake of bcing
called initial or final it bccomcs
|ncceSSary tO prcscribc अाश्यन्तधद्भद्राधि im.
the Case Of a singlc lcttcr; cf.अाद्यन्त-
बदेकस्मिन् l अादीं इश्च अन्त इव एकस्मिन्नपि
कार्व् भवति.! यथा कर्तव्यमित्यत्र प्रत्ययाट्टदात्तत्धं
भवति एवमपिग्ावमित्यत्रापि यथा स्यात् | Kā$.
on P.I.1.21 ; cf. alSo अान्ध्रन्तधश्च |
अपृक्तस्य अाादेवदन्तवश्च कार्ये भधति !| T. Pr.
I.55. This अाद्यन्तधद्भद्रान्ध of Pātaini is,
in fact, a Specific application of
the gcncral maxim kr1Own as
wyapade$ivadbhāiva by virtue of
which **an operation which affects
SOmething on account of some
Special dcsignatiorn, which for
certain rcasons attaches to the
lettcr, af1ccts likcwise that which
stands alonc;?' cf. Pari.Sck. Pari.
30.
अद्युदच्ति a word bcgiraning with an
acute-aCcent i.e. which has got the
first vowcl accented acute; 'words
in the vocative casc and words
४*.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-071.png}}}}}}

अाद्युदात्तनिपातन
55
अनेि
iormed with an affix marked with
a, mute ञ्छू or न् areādyudātta; cf.P.
VI.1.197, 198; for illustrations in
detail see P. VI.1.189-216.
अाद्युदाच्तनिपातन specific mention of a,
word with the accent u tdātta. or
acute on the first syllable; cf.
अाद्युदात्तनिपातनं करिष्यते M.Bh. on I.1.
56, VI. 1.12.
अाधार receptacle or abode of an
action;cf.अाध्रियन्ते अस्मिन् क्रिया: इल्याधारः:
Kāś. on P. I.4.45 also M. Bha. on
III. 3.121; the Prakriyā Kaumudī
mentions four kinds of ādhāras; cf.
औौपश्लेठेषिकः सामीपिको विष्षयेो व्याप्त इत्याधारश्च-
तुर्घौ Prak. Kau. on II.3.36.
अाधाराधेयभाव a non-differential rela-
tion (अभेदसंसर्ग) between the perso-
nal endings तिप् , तस॒ etc. and the
noun in the nominative case
which is the subject of the verbal
activity ;relation of a, thing and its
substratum; cf. निपातातिरिक्तनामार्थ-
धात्वर्थयोर्भेदान्वयस्य अव्युत्पन्नत्वात्.
अाधिवक्य superfluity, Superiority,
notion of ' surplus; cf. यदत्राधिक्यं
ऋाक्यार्थः स:M. Bh. on II. 3.46, II.3.
50.
अाधृर्षीय a sub-division of roots belon-
ging to the चुरादिगण or tenth cOnju-
gation beginning with श्रुञ्ज्ञ् and end-
ing with धृषूञ् which take the Vika-
|rama, णिच् optionally i.e- which are
also conjugated like rOOtS Of the
first conjugation; e.g. योजयति,येोजयते,
" योजतिः साहयति-ते, सहति.
अाधेय a thing placed in another or
depending upon another, aS oppO-
sed to adhāra or the container ; cf.
अाधेयश्चाक्रियाजश्च सेासत्त्वप्रकृतिर्गुणः M. Bh.
on ]P.IV.1.44.
अ[न (1) kपृ't.affix (शानचु,or चानशु) substi-
tuted for the lakāra, लट् and appli-
ed to atmanepadi rootS forming
the present participle; (2) kपू't. affix
कानचू applied to atmanepadi rootS
in the sense of past time forming
the perfect participle; cf. लिटः
व्कानज्वा P.1II. 2. 106- →
अानङ् substituteअान् in the place of'the
last letter (ऋ) of the first member
of dvandva compounds of words
meaning deities or of WOrds show-
ing blood-relationship which end'
with the vowel ऋ; e.g. होतापोतारौ,
मातापितरौ cf. P.VI.3.25, 26.
अानन्तयै ( 1 ) close prOximity; absence
of any intermediary element
generally of the $ame mature;
अनन्तरस्य ' भाव: अानन्तर्यम्.; cf. नाजानन्तर्ये
बहिष्ट्वप्रकूलतिः M. Bh. I.4.2. Vārt. 21 ;
Par. Sek. Pari. 51 . This close proxi-
mity of one letter or syllable or so,
with anOther, is actually i.e.phone-
tically required and generally so
found Out alsO, but sometimes such
prOximity is theoretically not
existing as the letter required
for prOxirmity is technically not
present there by the rule पूर्वत्रासिध्दम्.
|Iın Such cases, a technical absence
is not looked upon as a fault. cf.
दृक्रचिच्च सँन्निपातकृतमानन्तयै शास्त्रकृतमनानन्तर्यै
यथ[ ष्टुत्वे, व्कचिच्च नैव संनिपातकृतं नापि
शास्त्रकृतं यथा जभूत्ञ्च । यत्र कुतश्चिदेवानन्तर्य
तदाश्रयिष्यामः |M. Bh. on VIII. 3. 13.
( 2 ) clOSe COnnection by mention
together at a cOmmon place etc.;cf.
सर्वाद्यानन्तर्यं कार्यार्थम् M. Bh. on I.1. 27. ·
अानन्ददच्त name of a Buddhist
grammarian, the author of the
work named Cāndra-Vyakarana
Paddhati.
अानर्थक्य absence of aray utility;
superfluity ; abSence of any object
or purpOse; cf. स्थानिवद्वचनानर्थक्यं शास्त्रा-
सिद्धत्वात् । M. Bh. on P. VI. 1.86
Vart. 5 cf. also P. VI. 1. 158 Wārt.
4; VT. 1• 161 Vart. 1, WI. ]. 166
Vārt. 1, VI.1. 167 Vārt.. 3.
अानि imp. 1st per. sing affix नि with
the augment अा prefixed, which



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-072.png}}}}}}

अानुक्
has got its न् changed intO 'गृ. by P.
VIII. 4.16.
अानुक् the augment अान् , added to the
words इन्द्र, वरुण, भव and otherS
|before the fem. affix ई; e. g. इन्द्राणी,
वरुणानी cf. इन्द्रवरुणभवशर्वरुद्र... अानुक् P.
|IV.1.49.
अानुनासिक्य nasalization; 'utterance
through the nose, an additional
property possessed by vowels and
the fifth letters of the 5 claSScs (ङ्,
श्, ण्, न्, म् ) cf. अानुनासिक्यं तेषामधिकीं
गुणः M.Bh. on I.l.9.
अानुपूर्वाँ serial order, successive order
of grammatical operationS or the
rules prescribing them as they
occur; cf. अानुपूव्र्यीँ सिद्धमेतत् M.Bh. oh
V. 3: 5;.. cf. alSO ययैव चानुपूब्र्या अर्थानां
प्रादुभाँवस्तयैव शब्दानामपि t तद्वत् कार्येरपि
भवितव्यम् M.Bh. on. P. I. I.57.
अानुपूव्यै SucceSsive order, as prescri-
bed by traditiOn or by the "'writer;
cf. ऋतुन॒क्षुत्राणामानुपूत्र्येण समानाक्षराणां पूर्वनि-
पातः ॥`शिशिरवसन्तौ 'उदगयनस्थैौ | कृतिका-
रेहिप्ष्यिः । M.Bh. II. 2.34Vārt. 8; also
वर्णानामानुपूर्व्येण। व्राह्मणक्षत्त्रियधिट्यूद्राः M.Bh.
on II. 2.34 Vārt. 6; cf. पदानुपूर्व्येण॒
प्रश्लिष्टान् संधीन् कुर्यात् । इन्द्र अा इहि | औादौ
इन्द्र अा इत्येतयेो:; न तु अा इहि इत्येतयाः
R. Pr. II. 2; cf. also अानुपूद्भ्यॉंत् सिद्धम्
Sira. Pari. 6.
अानुपूव्र्यसंहिता the Samhitā-pātha or
recital of the running Vedic text
in aCCordance with the constituent
words; e. g. शुनः शेपे चित् निदितम् or
नरा शसं वीं पूषणम्, as opposed to the
र्नेहिता which isactually found
in the traditional recital e. g.
शुनश्चिच्छेपं निदितम् Rk satihh. V 2. 7 ðr
नरा वा शंसं पूष्णम् Rk sarihh. X. 64.3.
. See R. Prāt. II 43.
अानुमानिक obtained or madc out by
inference such,as Paribhāg'ā rule$
aS opposed tO Srauta rules such as
theःStitras 9f Pānini; cf. अानुमनिकं
स्थानित्वमवयवयोः Kaś. on VI. 1.85;
56
अापचिित
also cf. अानुमानिकस्थान्यादेशभावकल्नेपि
श्रौतस्थान्यादेशभावस्य न त्यागः Par. Sek.
on Pari. 11; cf. also किं च पूर्वत्रेत्यस्य
प्रत्यक्षत्वेन अानुमानिक्या अस्या बाध एवेोचितः
Pari. Sek. on Pari. 50.
अान्तरतम्य closcst affinity; cf. अष्टन्-
जनादिपथिमथ्यात्वेपु अान्तरतम्यादनुनाासेिकप्रसङ्गः
|M.Bh. on WII. 2.84, as alSO अान्तर-
तम्याच्च सिद्धम् M. Bh. on VII 1• 96
Vārt. 6.
अान्तयै prOxitmity; clOSc affinity ; close
relationship. There are fOur kinds
of such prOximity aS far aS wOrds
in gratmmar are conccrncd * !R.e: the
organs of spcech (स्थानत:)aS in .दण्डा-
ग्रमु, regarding the mcaning(अर्थतः)aS
in वातण्ङययुवतिः, rcgarding thc quality
(गुण) as in पाकः राग्tः, and regarding
thc , prOsodial valuc (प्रमाण|) as iपू
अमुष्मै, अमूभ्याम्; cf. अनेनकश्चिधं अान्तयै
स्थानाथैगुण्प्रर्मेाणकृर्तेम् Par. S'ck. Pari.13.
cf. also KaŚ. on I. 1.50.
अान्पद word ending with अान् which
has the consonant droppcd and
the preceding अाि maSalizcd; e. g.
सगी* इव सृजतम् Rk.Sarii. VIII. 35. 20,
महाँ इन्द्र: b2k Satia VI.19.] ; cf. दीधदटि
समानपाद, अातेीाऽटि नित्थम् P. VIII. 3.9,
VI II. 3.3; cf. also हन्त दधंीं इति चैधता
अान्-पदा: पदश्वृत्तयः |R. Pr. IV. 26, 27.
अाप् (1) common term for thc fem.
cndingS टाम्, डाप् and चाप् given b y
Pāmini in Adhy. IV, Pāda l ; cf.
अव्ययादाप्सुपः P. II. 4.82. P. IV. 1.I.-;
P. VI. 1.68; cf. also P. VI. 3. 63.
|P. VII. 3. 44; P. VII. 3. 106,
116; P. VII. 4.15. etc.; (2) a.
brief term for case-affixes beginn-
ing with thc inst. Sing and ending
with thc loc. pl. cf. अनाप्यकः P.
VII. 2.112.
अापत्ति (1) production; rcsulting of
sQmething ,ंintO amother:; change;
cf. दन्त्यस्य॒ सूर्धन्याप॒न्तिंः नतेिः मूर्धन्यापातिः मुंंर्ध-
न्यभावः V.' Prāt. I. 42 and Uvatā's
cOm• thereon; cf. also यमापत्तिं



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-073.png}}}}}}

अपत्य
57
अाभीयप्रकरप्ण
explained as यमभार्वे R. Pr., VI. 9.
(2) modification ; cf. अापद्यते श्चासतां
नादतां वा R. Pr. XIII. 1.; (3) con-
tingency, undesired result.
अापत्य patronymic affix such as अणुश्
and others. The term अापत्य, which
is the Same as the uSual term
अपत्य in तस्यापत्यम् P. IV. I , is
found sometimes used in the
Vārttikas and in the Mahabhāgya ;
cf अायत्याज्जीवद्वंश्यात्स्वार्थे द्वितीयेा युवसंज्ञः
P. IV. 1.163 Vart 6.
अापदेव son of अनन्तदेव, the author of
SphOtanirtipaगृha (17th cent. A.D.).
(1) a work of अापिशलि, possi-
bly his grammar ; cf. अापिशलमधीते
M. Bh. on IV. 1. 14; (2) a student
of Api$ali's grammar; अापिशलमधीते
अापेिश्ाला ब्राह्मणी M. Bh. on IV 1 .14;
अापिशलपाणिनीयद्भ्याञ्डीयगैीतमीया; M. Bh:
On VI . 2. 36. ; cf. तथा चापिशलाः
पाणिनीयाः पठन्ति-ञ्अागमेोनुपघाते॒न विकार-
|श्चेापूमर्दनूात्	। अदिदास्तु " प्रसङ्गेन लेाप:
सवांपकष्भ्रंणात्.
अापिशलि an ancient grammarian
mentioned by Pānini and his
c9mrmentatOrs like Pataiंjali, Helā-
rंja and others; cf. वा सुप्यापिशलेः P.
IV. 3.98; तथ[ चापिशलेर्वेिधि: M. Bh.
on IV. 2.45. " •
अपुक्र् augment , अापू added to the
wOrds सत्य, अर्थ ahd वेद before the
अ
affix णिञ्व्ः cf. M. Bh. on III. 1.25 |
and Vãrt. |l. and 2 thereotn; e. g.
सत्यापयति, अर्थापयति, वेदापयति.
अपु augment ( अाम् ) suggested in
the, place of अापुंक् by Patafjali
ई9 be prefixed to the afiix णिच॒;cf.
M• Bh. on III. I. 25.
अाष्य to be obtained by an activity;
(the same as vyāpya). The term
S used in connection with the
Object of a verb which is to be
obtained by the verbal activity.
The wOrd अाप्य is found used in
the sense of Karman or object in
8
the grammars ofJainendra, Saka-
[ayana, C'āndra and Hemacamdra;
cf. C'āndra II 1. 43; Jainendra I.
2. 119; Sāk. IV. 3. 120; Hem.
|III. 3. 31. Hence, the term साप्य
is used for a, transitive root ira
theSe grammarS.
अाबन्त ending with the fem. affix
अ॒! ( टापू, डाप् .or चापू ); cf. वाबन्तः P.
II. 4. 30 Vārt. 3.
अाब्वाथ (1) similarity of one phone-
tic element, for instance, in the
case of`ऐ, with अा resulting from
Sarihdhi; e. g. प्रजाया अरातिं	निर्ऋत्या
अकः where प्रजाया and निरृत्या stand
for प्रजायै and निर्बनत्यैः cf. ऐण्कारान्तानि
अाकाराबाधे Ath. Pr. II. 1. 4; (2) Simi-
|larity of accent of words in the
Sarihhitāpatha and Padapatha; (3)
followed by; cf. A. Pr. II. 1.14 ; (4)
distress; cf. अाश्वाधे च, P. VIII. 1.i0.
अभीच्छख्त्रिं a, rule given in the Sec-
tion called अाभीयप्रकरण exterading
from P. VI. 4. 22 to VI. 4. 175,
wherein one rule or operation is
|looked upon aS inwalid to another ;
cf. असिद्धवदत्राभात् P. VI. 4. 22 and
|M. Bh. thereon; cf. alsO यावता
अनिदितां हलः इत्यपि अाभाच्छास्त्रम् Wyādi
Pari- 38.
अाभीक्ष्ण्य |repetition Of an action; cf.
पौनःधुन्यं अाभीक्ष्ण्यप्म् Kā$. on III. 4.22;
cf. M. Bh. III. 4.24; VIII. 1. 4;
V]III. 1.• 12.
अाभीयकायै an operation prescribed by
a rule in the section called अाभीय-
प्रकरण. See अIभाच्छास्त्र above.
अाभीयप्रकरण a section of Pānini's
grammar from VI. 4. ८2 to VI.
4. 129, called अार्भोय्, aS it extemdS
to । he rule भस्य VI. 4. 129, in-
cluding it; but as the gOverning
rule भस्य is valid in ewery rule
upto the end of the Pāda, the



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-074.png}}}}}}

अाभीयाासेिद्धत्व
58 अाभ्रेडित
अाभीयप्रकरण also extends upto the
end of the Pàda.
abOve.
अाभीयाासिद्धत्व invalidity or supposed
invisibility of onc rule with
respect to anOthcr, in the SectiOn
called अाभीयप्रकरण. See अाभच्क्ष्छि|स्त्र
abOwe.
अाभ्यन्तरप्रयत्न internal cfiort rimade
in producing a SOund, aS co1}-
trasted with the external Ome
called बाह्यप्रयत्न. There are four
kinds of internal efior tS described
in the Kā$ikāv[tti.; cf. चत्वार अाभ्य-
. न्तरप्रयत्ना: सवर्णसंछ्नायामाश्रीयन्ते --- स्पृष्टता,
ईषत्स्पृष्ट्रता, संवृतता, विवृतता चेचति । Kās.
on P. 1. 1. 9. See also यत्नो द्विधा !
अाभ्यन्तरो बाह्यश्च etc. Si. Kau. On
I. l.9.
अभ्यस्स changes preScribed in com-
nection with the अभ्यास or redu-
['.licative syllable; cf. अभ्यासंधिकार
अाभ्यसि: M. Bh. ora III. 1.6.
अाम् ( 1) augment ' अा prescribed in
connectंora with thc words चतुर्
and अनट्टह् before the case-affixes
called सर्वनामस्थान; cf. चतुरनडुहेाराम्
उदात्त: P. V1I. 1. 98; (2) the "affix
अाम् added beforc लिट् Or a perfcct
tertो?nination by rules कास्प्रत्यथादाम्
अमन्त्रे लिटि and the following (P.
|III !. 35-39), as for instancc, in
कासांन्वक्रे, ऊहांचक्रे, दयांचक्रे, जागरांचकार
श्वेिभञ्थांचकार eटtc.; (3) gcni. pl. casc-
affix अाम् as in दृषदाम्, शरदाम्, with
न्म् prefixed in राग्माणाम् ctc., and
with स् prefixed in सर्वेषाम् ete.; (4)
'ि sing• शृं aर्भू अाम् Substituted
or इ ( ङि ); cf. डेराम् नद्याम्नीभ्यः
P. VI. 4. 1 16, नद्याम्ः
अामन्त्रणा (1) calling out frorm a dis-
`tance;(2) an invitation which may
or may not be acceptedः cf. विधि-
निमन्त्रणामन्त्रणाधीष्टसंप्रश्क्षप्रार्थनेषु लिङ् P. III.
3.l6 1 whereon M. Bh- remarks अथ
निमन्त्रणामन्त्रणयोः को विशेष: । अथ संनिहितेन
See अ[भाच्ठेछ्रास्त्र |•
^→、.
निमन्त्रणं भबति असंनिहितेन अामन्त्रणम् ॥ नैषोस्ति
विशेष्त्रः | असंनिहितनापि निमन्त्रणं भवति संनि-
हितनापि न्चामन्त्रणम् | एवं तहिं यान्नियोगत:
कर्तव्यं तन्निमन्त्रणम् | अामन्त्रणे कामचारः !
|M. Bh. on P. III.3.161.
अामन्त्रित (1) a word in the vocative
sing. cf. सा[मान्त्रितम् P. II.3.48; a tech.
term in Pध्ārini*s gram rnar, the
|pecu!iar featurcs of which are
परराङ्कवद्भ्द्राव (cf. P.II.i.2), अविद्यमानवद्भद्राव
(cf. ]P.VIII.1.72), द्वित्व (cf. P.VIII.
1.8), अाटुटु॑दात्तत्व (cf. P. VI.1.198),
सवीँनुदात्तत्व (cf. P. VIII.1.19), splitt-
ing Cof ए into अा and इ, c. g. अमे
into अग्मा ३ इ (cf. P. VIII.2.107
Vã|rt. 3); (2) Vocative case, cf.
ओोश्कार अामंन्त्रितज: प्रग्गृह्य: Rk. Prit. I.28;
Vāj. Pr. III.139; I I.! 7 ; II.24 VI.1.
अामन्त्रितकारक a word connccted with
thc verbal actiwity pOSsesSed by
अामन्त्रित e. g. कुण्डन in दु,ण्डेनाटन् ; cf.
अामन्त्रिते या धातुवाच्यां क्रिया तस्याः कारकम्
Kaiya¢a, on P. II. 1.2.
'| अामन्त्र्य a w ord in thc vocative casc;
lit. a word posses$cd of the sensc
of invOcatioi} ; cf: अामन्त्र्यमाणेर्थ धर्तमानः
|इट्रव्द अामन्त्र्य: Sāk. I.3-88; cf. {also
अामन्त्र्यते यत्तदामन्व्यम् com. oin Hcrm.
|II. l .25.
अामिनच् tad. affix अाभिन् in tlac sc11Se
of poSSession, applicd to thc wOrd
स्ङ्ख्च; cf. स्ध्iामेिर्देनश्वर्थे P. W.2.1:26.
अामिश्र complctcly mixed; cf. अ|ामिश्र-
स्यायम॒ादेश उच्यते स नैधु पूर्वग्रहणेन॒ गृह्यते॒, नापि
पूरग्रह्णै॒न । तद्यथा क्षीरोदकं संपृक्ते अामिश्रत्व[-
दैनव क्षौस्ग्रट्णेन गृह्येते नाप्ट्थुदकग्रहणेन M. Bh.
On VI. 1.85; similarly अामिश्रत्ध,
अामिश्रीभूत etc.
अामु tad. affix (अासू ) added to the
affixes घ i. e. तर arid तम which are
plaCed after indeclinables; c. g.
/ किंतराम्, पचतितराम् etc. cf. P. V.4.1 1.
अाभ्रेत्रेडित ( l ) itcrative; a repcatcd
word, defined as द्विरुक्तं पदम्
cf. द्विरुक्तमाम्रेडितं पदम् e; g. यज्ञायज्ञा



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-075.png}}}}}}

अात्रेडितसमास
59
अार्धधातुक
वो अग्नये Vāj. Prāt. I. 146; (2).
the second or latter portion, of
a repeated wOrd according to
Pānini; c1. तस्य (द्विरुक्तस्य) परमाम्रोडेतमु P.
VIII.l.2. The Amredita, word gets
the grave accent and has itS last
wowel protracted when it implies
censure; cf. P. WIII.1.3 and VIII.
2.95.Haradatta has tried to explain
how the term अाम्रडित means the
first member; cf. ननु अाम्रेडितशव्दे।
निघण्टुषु प्रसिद्धः अाम्रेडितं द्विख्रित्ररुत्तमिति ।
सत्यमर्थे प्रासिद्धः इह तु शुठेदे परिभाष्यते । महा-
संज्ञाकरणं पूर्वाचार्यीनुरोधेन Padamafंj. on
VIII.1.2.
अात्रेडितसमास an iterative com-
pound; cf. अाम्रेडितसमासे तु । A. Prāt.
III. 1. 5.
अाय् the Substitute अायुय् for ऐ before a
· vQwel; e. g. चायकः for चै+अकः cf.
एचेायवायावः P. VI.1.78.
अाय (I) the affix अाय applied to the
rOotS गुJं , .. धूपू and others ending
with which they are looked upon
as roots; cf. P. III. ! .28; P. III.1.
32. The affix is applied optionally
when an ārdhadhātuka affix is to
follow. e.g. गोपाायेता, गोप्ता; cf. P. III.
1•31 ; (2) augment; cf. असतो बर्णस्य
उपजनः R. Prāt. XIV. 1 Uvata.
अायाम tension of the limbs or organs
producing Sound, which is noticed
in the utterance of a, vowel which
is accented acute ( उदात्त ) अायामो
गात्राणां दैध्र्यमाकर्षणं वा; corn. on Tait.
Prāt.XXII. 9; cf. ऊध्र्वगमनं गात्राणाम्
वायुनिमित्तं Uv. on R. Prāt. III.1 ; cf.
also ऊर्ध्वगमनं शरीरस्य com. on Wāj.
Prदे॒t. पू. 31 ; cf. also अ|ायामो दारुण्यमणुता
ल्ङ्कुःकरानि शब्दस्य |M.Bh. on P..
*2.29.
अय्य krt. affix अाय्य before which णि|
(causal इ) is changed into अय् ;cf,
अयू अामन्ताल्वाय्येत्न्विष्णुषु P. VI. 4.55.
e.g. स्पृहयाय्यः.
अार $ubstitute अार for ऋ in the Words
पितृ arad मातृ; e.g. पितरामातरा; cf. P.
VI.3.83.
अारक् tad. ,affix ( अर ) applied tO
the word गेोधा in the sense of of-
spring according to th६ Northern
Grammarians ; ' e. g. गौधार:, (op-
tiona] forms गौधेय and गैोधेर acc. to
others); cf. P. IV. 1.129, 130.
अारकन्म् tad. affix applied tO the
words शुङ्ग and वृन्द, e. g• शृङ्कारकं॒:,
वृन्दारकः ;cf P. शुङ्कवृन्दाभ्यामारकन्, P.V.
2.122 Vārt. 3.
अारडे KRISHNASHASTRI a re-
puted Naiyāyika of BanaraS .of
the nineteenth century, wh0
wrote, besides many treatiseS On
Nyāya, a short gloss on the StitraS
of Pānini, called Pānini-sütra-VFtti.
अारि tad. afiix applied to the word
पूर्वतर when the whgle word refers
tð a year, e.g.परारि in the last year ;-
cf B. V. 3.22 Vārt. 2.
अारु |krt. affix applied to thc roots द्दृ .
and वन्द् in the'sense of habituatéd
etc. e.टै. शरारुः, वन्दारुः. cf. P. III.
2.173.
अारोप attribution or imputatiOn Of
properties which leada to , the
secondary sense of a wOrd; cf.
अप्रसिद्धश्च संज्ञादिरीप तद्गुणारोपादेव बुध्यतॆPar.
Sek. on Pari. !5.
अारोपणीय same as अभिनिधान; see above
अाभेनिधान.
अार्थ resultant from sense; made up
of ser1se; अर्थस्य अयम् अार्थ; gf. तदा-
दितदन्तत्वमार्थसमाजग्रस्तम् Par. Sek. on
|Pari. 37.
अार्थस्समाज combination of the mean-
ings (of the base and affix); $€e the
word अार्थ above.
अाधैधातुक a term used in contrast
to the term सार्वधातुक्र for Such ver-
bal and krt affixes, aS are not
personal endings of verbs nor



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-076.png}}}}}}

अार्धधातुका
60
→ → → → अााशिस्
|ाँ "
marked With the mute let{er शू, ं
cf. तिङ्शित् रसार्वधातुक्रम् । अIधधातुकं
शेष्षः l P. III. 4.. 113 and 1 14.
The perSonal endingS of Verbs in
the perfect tense and the benedic- |!
tive rnood are termcd ārdhadhā-
tuka, cf. P. III. 4.! !5, 116; while
both the terms are promiscuously
found utilised in the Vedic Litera-
ture; cf. P. III. 4. 117. The 1main
utility of the ārdhadhātuka tcrm |
is the augment इ ( इट् ) to bc
prefixed, to the ārdhadhātuka
afiixes. The terin अ|ावैधातुका was
in use in works of tl1e old Vaiyā-
karanas; cf. ,अथवा अार्धधातुकामु इति
वश्यामिं कामु अार्धधातुकासु । उक्तिषु युक्तिषु
रूद्विपु प्रतीतिषु श्रुतिक्षु संज्ञामु M.'Bh. oti
II. 4,35. It cannot be said }low
the term ārdhadh'।ttuka originat..
ed. Probably such affixcs or pra-
tyayas, like the k't affix६s genc-
rally, aS could be placed after cer-
tain roots only Were c ।lled ārdha-
dhatuka, aS COntrasted wi|I|h thc
verbal and the prescnt participle
affixॐS which Wcre termed sārva-
dhātuka On account of their
being found in use aftcr every
rOOt.
अार्धधातुका o!d term for अार्धधातुक; see
अार्धधातुक्र.
अाधधातुकाधिकार thc topic or section
in Pātaini's grammar wherc opc-
rations, caused by the presence
of an ārdhatuka affix ahead, are
cnumerated, beginning with the
rule अार्धधातुंक VI. 4. 46 and ending
with न ल्यपि VI. 4. 69. Such opera-
tiQn$ are Summed up in the stanza
अतेो लेोपो यलेोपश्च णिलेोपश्च'प्रयोजनम् । अाल्छेोप
इत्वमेत्वं च चिण्वद्भावश्च सीयुटि; M. Bb. as
alsO KāŚ, on WI. 4. 46.
अाषै derived from the holy Sages;
founded on Sacred tradition, stich
aS the Wcdāhgas;cf. कृत्स्नं च वेदाङ्कमनि-
न्द्यमा|र्घम् R. Prāt. XIV $0. The word
is explः॥ined aS स्ष्दग्ग्रंपाठ l)y thc com.
on Vàj Prāt. IX.2l , and as V':aidika
sarihdhi om X. 1$. Patanjali llas
lookcd upon thc pada-patha\, Or
Pada-text of the SatihhitãS of the
Vcdas, as anārष्a, as contrastcd
with the sarांhl1iti text which is
ārक्ष्a; cf. अाप्यीम् in thc scnsc *fद्दितुायाम्
|R. Prāt. II. 27; cf also पदकारैनीँम
लश्क्षणम्नुवत्यैम॒म् M.tBh. on III. l . 109.
अार्हाँय tad-aflixcs टक्, टञ् ctc. aS alsO
the senscs in which tl1c :1llix('s are
applicd, given in thc sCc'ti()n of
P:ā1jinis g! att}tl1ar l?. V'. 1. . 9-7 1.
अाल्ट् case afiix i11 Vo'(;ic litcr:uturc
c.g. वग्{न्riा यन्ङ्गन KiS. ()n V'I !. ]. 39.
अालच् tad-aftix { अ|['छ् ) applic(t t() tlug
word श्रीनु in thc set}Scः of' *t:tlkativ'c'
oः. g. धाचाल: ; cf P. V.2. |12.1.
अालुट्ट tad. afiix in thc S(:rhs(: * तल •fने '
e. g. शीताश्छ्:, उण्णा|ठु: !'. V. ?. ]22.
अालुछ् kg't. affix ( अाठु ) appli('d tO
thc rootS रपृट्,, गृट् 'पत, ctC.(8.५. #पृ::श्था %;.
गृह्याथ्छुः, भि:ाछु: ctc. cf I' I!I. ५'158.
अावचन it1cormplctc pr(yt॥u11{:i,utiO11, cf.
ईधद श्वचनम् M.Bh. ()n I. l|. 8.
अावत् tad-affix applicd {o thc word
२Jम, cf. समा*iद् <वँरसति M. Bh. o11
V. 4.30.
अाचश्यक nccessary notion or thing:
cf. ओ{राश्रश्यके l अत्रंश्यंभाश्च अाधश्यकम् Kai$.
on III. 1. 125, III. 3. 170.
अाविष्टलिङ्ग having at fixcd gen-
der as opposcd tO अनाश्विटलि:
possessed of all genders; cf. अाश्विश्ट-
लिङ्गा जातिः । याईछ्:गमुपादाय प्रवर्तते न
,तल्छिङ्गं जहाति M. Bh. on I.2. 52ः
/^' e. g. the word प्रमाण in प्रमाणं वेदाः.
अावृत्ति repctitiUn, c. g- पदावृतिः; Scc
com. on Vāj. Prāt. IV. 2l ; cf. also
अावृतितः सप्तदशत्थं भवति M. Bh. I. 1.
Ahn. 2.
अाशिस् the benedictiwe mood; cf.
केिदाशिष्षि P. III. 4. 104, called
regularly as अाशीार्लछ्.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-077.png}}}}}}

अाशुबोध
61
अाहिताग्न्यााद
अाशुबोध (1) raame of a work on
grammar written by Tarānātha
called Tarka-wācaspati, a reput-
ed Sanskrit Scholar of Bengal Of
the 19th century A... D. whO
compiled the great Sanskrit
Dictionary named वाचस्पत्यकेाश and
wrote commentarieS Om many
Sanskrit Shastraic and claSSical
works. The grammar called अाशुवेाध
is very useful for beginners; (2)
name of an elementary grammar
in aphorisms written by रामकिंकर-
सरस्वती, which iS based on the
Mugdhabodha of Bopadeva.
अाश्रय (1) relation of dependence;
cf. अाश्रयात्सिद्धत्वं भविष्यति M. Bh.
I. i.12 Wārt. 4; (2) Substratum,
place of residence; cf. गुणवचनानां
शब्दानामाश्रयतेो लिङ्गवचनानि भवन्ति | शुश्छं
वस्त्रम् l शुश्छ्ठा शाटी l शुश्ङ्ग्: कम्बलः l M.
Bh. II. 2. 29.
अाश्वलायनप्रतिशाख्य an authoritative
f?rātiśākhya work attributed to
Saunaka the teacher ofĀśvalāyana,
belonging prominently tO the Sak-
ala and the Bā$kala Sakhās of the
Rgveda. It is widely known by the
|riame Rk-PrātiŚākhya. Ît is a,
rnetrical composition divided intO |.
18 chapte1s called Patalas, giving
special directionS for the proper
prOnunciation, recitatiOn and pre-
servation of the Rksatinbitā by lay-
ing dOWn general ruleS on accentS
and euphonic combinations and
mentioning phonetic and metrical
peculiarities. It has got a rnasterly
commentary writt6n by Uvvata.
अासन्न nearest, most proximate; cf.
विकाररौ यथासन्नम् V., Pr. I.142; cf. also
the stitra अासन्न: Sak.I.l.7, explain-
ed as स्थानगुणप्रमाणीादिभिर्यथास्वमासन्नः; cf.
also अासन्नः Hem. WII.4.120.
अासत्ति close proximity of a word
with another; cf. णौ इत्यस्य अासत्तिवशात्
कृंत U,वं रं*<वँन्ध: ! Pari. Bhaskar Pari.
97.
अास्तारपङ्ति a variety of पङ्ति metre
of 40 letterS with 8 letters in the
first and SecOnd quarterS Or padas
and 12 letters in the third and
fourth qnarters; cf. अास्तारपङ्त्तिरा-
देितः R.Pr. XVI. 40. For instances
of अास्तारपङ्क्ति sce रैिgveda Stikta 21,
Mandala X.
अास्थापित (l) placed after, following,
which follow; cf. अास्थाधितानामनन्तरो-
क्तानाम् Uvvata on R. Pr. IV. ].
(2) properly placed at the end
e.g. सिष्यद इति सिप्यदे.
अस्य (1) place of ar ticulation, the
r?nouth, cf. अस्यन्त्यनन बणीँन् इति अास्यम्
|M. Bh. on I.1.9; (2) found in
the plaee of articulation; e g. the
effort ti1ade for the utter-
ar?ce of wOrds; cf.अासेय भवमास्यम् M.
Bh. on I.1.9, also सूपृष्टादिप्रयत्नपञ्चक-
मास्यम् ILaghuv!tti on Sāk. I.1.6.
अास्वदीय a $ub-division of the चुरादि
(Xth cOnj•) rOOts, beginning with
the root ग्रस् and ending with the
r oOt स्वद्, which take the Vikarana
णिचु i.e. which are conjugated like
rOOtS of the tenth conjugation,
only if they are transitive jn
Se1aSeटे •
अाद्दृश्र् tad-affix (अाह्) in the general'
Saisika SenseS, e.g. belonging to,
produced in, etc., added to the
word उत्तर्, e.g. औौत्तराह cf. उत्तरादाहञ्न्
वक्तव्यः ।; M.Bh. on IV.2.104.
अद्दि tad-affix added to the word
दक्षिण in the general sense of direc-
tion but when distance is specially
meant; e.g. दक्षिणाहि वसति, ' दक्षिणाहि
र॒म॒णीयम्..See Kaś. on अाहि च दूरे P.
V. 3.37.
अहिक name of Pānini. cf.पााणेनिश्चाहिको
दाक्षीपुत्रः.
अहिताग्न्यादि a class of compound
WOrds headed by the word अाद्दिताग्नि



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-078.png}}}}}}

62
in which the past paSS. part• - is
optionally pla6ed first.e.g:ॐहिताग्ःि;
अम्याहितः; जातपुत्रः, पुत्रजातः. The glaSS
अाहिताप्झयादि !s $tatcd to be अi|कृतिगण,
cf. Kā$.on P.[I.2.37.
इ
इ (1) the vowel इ, representing all its
eighteen forms wiz. shOrt,ः long
protracted, agute, grave, circutी-
flex, pure and naSali$Çdः, €:g. इंn
यत्येर्ति'च P.WI.4. 128;(2) Unādi affix
इ (3)tad-afiix ३चु(इ)applied to Bahu-
' ihi compounतैs in the SenSe ofex-
changeof action Qr aSSeen in words
]like द्विदण्डि e. g. केशाक्रेशि, दण्डादाfडि,
द्विमुसलि etc. cf. इचु कर्मव्यतिहारे P.V.4.
127,also V.4,128ः (4) krt. affix केि
(इ) cf. उपसर्गे घोः केिः P.!II.3.92: (5)
augment इट् (इ); Sce इट्रे: (6) con-
|jugational affix इट् of the lst perS.
sing. Atm.
इक् (1) short wording.(प्रत्याहार्) for the
wðwels इ, उ, ऋ and लछ्टुं; cf. इको यणचि
|P. VI.1.77; एच इग्ध्रस्वादेद्देश P. I.1.48;
इको गुणवृद्वीं P. I.1.3; इंग्यणः संप्रसार॒ण॒म् P.
I.1.45, इकोऽसवर्णे शाकल्यस्य ह्लस्ड्श्च P.VI.
1.127,' इकेो हृस्बोऽङयेो गालवस्य P. VI.3.
61 ; (2) krt. affix इश्क् (इ) appl*ed tO
the root form to cite .a rOot e• g.
वदि, जनि etc. cf. इक्रश्तिपौ धातुनिर्देशे P.
|III.3.108 Vart. 2; (3) kपृt. affix इक्
applied to the rogts कृष्ञ् àःnd otherS
in the sense of werbal ' activity
e.g. कृधिः, क्रिरिः, गिरिः cf. इक् कृष्यादिभ्यः
P.III. 3.108 Vārt.8.
इक्परिभाषा the Paribhāgā rule इकेीं
गुणवृद्धी |P.I.l.3; cf. गुणश्रुत्या इक्परिभाषेा-
पस्थानात् इक एव स्थाने गुणेां यथा स्यात् Sira-
dewa. Pari.93.
इक (1) substitute for the affix ठ given
as ठक्, ठञ्जु or ञ्ञिठ by Pānini; cf.
ठस्येकः P.VII.3.50; (2) taddhita
affix इककू, इकन्, धिक्रन् mentioned in •
the Vārtikas on P.IV.2.60; (3) krt.
इङ्गछ्
affix इक applied tO खन् e.g. अाखानेकः
cf. इकी वक्तव्यः P.III.3.125 Vart. 3.
इकक् the same,,affix as ठक् mention-
ed by the वार्तिककार in the V'ārtikas
orm P. [W. 2.60.
इकन् tad. affix इक applied to com-
pound words with पद aS the latter
member e.g. पूर्वपादिक; cf. इकन्पदोत्तर-
पदात् P.TV.2.60 Vārt.
इकबक kt. affix applied tO खन् e. g.
अाखनिकबकः cf. इकबकेो वक्तव्यः P. II[,
3.125 Vārt. 4.
इकार the lettcr इ with all its 18
warieties (इ +-कार).
इक्पदोपस्थिति the presence ofthc word
इक् (vowcls इ, उ, ऋ and ल) in a
rule, where the operationS गुण and
वृद्वि are prescribed by putting the
`wgrds गुण and वृद्धि; e.g. सिचि वृद्विः
परस्मैपदेषु " P.VII.2.l; cf. इको गुणवृद्वी
|P.I.1.3.
इग्लक्षणवृद्धि the substitution of the
wowel called वृद्वि i.e. the vowel अा,
ऐ or औौ prescribed Specifically for
the vowels called इक i. c. इ, उ, ऋ
and लछ्रु, e.g. तस्मादिग्लक्षणा वृद्विः P.I.1.3.
Vārt. 11; cf.also इग्लक्षणवृद्विप्रतिषेधस्तावत्
Siradeva Pari.2.
ईङ्ग the same as छ्ङ्गछ्य. See below. The
word इङ्ग is used for इर्भूनंश्य in the
Atharwa Prāti$àkhya cf. नीहारादिष्वनेि-
ङ्गेधूत्तरपदे दीर्ध इद्भेबु च A.Pr. III. 3.12.
इङ्कश्य a Separable word as oppoged to
अनिङ्ग्श्य; part of a compound word
which iS separated or may be
separated from the remaining part
when the word iS split 1tp into its
constituent partS. Gcnerally the
word is applied to the first part of
a COmpOund word when it is split
up in the recital of the padapātha.
The *ihgya? word is shown by a
pause or awagraha, after it which
is shown in writing by thc sign (ऽ);
cf. इङ्गयैत विभागेन चाल्यते इति इङ्गयम् ।
इङ्गयमिति विभागपदस्य संशा com.on Tait.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-079.png}}}}}}

इच्छ्
Prāt. 1. 48. सावग्रहं पदमिङ्गयम् Com.on
T.Pr. I.48.
इच् (1) short wording or pratyāhāra
for vowels except अ. cf. इजोंदश्च*
गुरुमतेोऽनृच्छः P.III. 1.36; cf, also VI.
I.104, VÎ. 3.68. VIII.4.31,32; (2)
Samāsānta affix इ after Bahuwrihi
compounds showing a mutual ex-
change of actions.: e.g. केशाकेशि,'
दण्डादण्डि; cf. इचु कर्मव्यतिहारे P.V.4.
127 alsO 128.
इञ् (1) krt. affix (इ), in the sense of
werbal activity applied to any root,
the word so formed being used in
the fem. gender and in connection
With narration or in interrogation;
e.g. कां त्वं कारिमकाष्Sॉ: l सवंीं कारिमकाषैम्
cf. Panini III.3.1 10; (2) kt. affix
in the sense of verbal activity
applied tO the roots वपु and others
e.-g. वापिः, वासिः etc. cf.' P.III.3.108
Wārt. 7;(3) tad-afflx इ in the sense
of ofi$pring applied to a noun
ending iu अ; e.g. दाक्षिः cf. P.IV. 1.
95-7, 153.
इद् (l) augment इ eprfixed,in general |
in the case of all roots barr-
ing a few roots ending in vowels
except ऊ and ऋ and roots शक्, पञ्च,
etc•, tO Sधch affixeS of non-conंjuga-
tional tenSes and moods as begin
with any copasonant except ह्amd यु;
cf. अार्धधातुकस्येड् वलादेः P.WII.2.35 to
78 and its exceptions P.VII.2.8 to
34: (2) personal ending of the
third person sing. Ātm.
एण् (1) short wording or pratyahara
for all vowels except अ and the
gOrn$Qhants ड्, यु, व्, र्, छ्; cf. इणः ष;
|P. VIII.3.39,also P.' VIII.3.57,78
(2) krt. affix इ applied to roots
Such aS अज् अत् etc. in the sense of
verbal activity.e.g अाजिः,अातिः, अादि;
cf.इणजादिभ्यः P. III.3,108, Vārt.6.
इत् (1) a letter or a group of letters
attached to a Word which is mot
63
इत्
Seen in actual use in the spoken
language; cf. अप्रयोगीँ इत्, $ak.'I.l .5,
Hem.l.1.37. The इत् letterS are
applied ¢o a word before it, or
after it, and they have gOt each of
them a purpOse in gramtnar viz.
cauSing or preventing certain
grammatical operations in the
formation of the complete Word.
Pahini has not given any defini-
tion of the word इत् , but he has
|rmentioned when and where the
vowels and consOnants atta.ghed to
words are to be under8tood aS इत्;
(cf. उपदेशेजनुनासिक इत् । हलन्त्यम् । etc.
|P. I. 3.2 to 8) and Stated that
these letters are to be dropped in
actual use; cf. P.I. 3.9. It appears
that grammarians before Paraini
had alsO employed such इत् letters,
aS iS clear from some paSsages in
the Mahābhā5ya as also from
their use in other systems of
grammar aS also in the Unādi list
of affixes, for purposes similar to
those fouimd served in Pānini*s
grammar. AlmOst all vOWels and
cot1SoinantS are used as इत् for
diferent purposes and the इत्letters
are applied to rootS in the Dhā-
tupātha, nouns in the Ganapatha,
' as alSO to afiixes, augmcnts and
substitutes prescribed in grammar.
Only at a few places they are
attached to give facility of pronun-
ciation. Sometimes the इत् letters,
especially wOwels, which are said
to be इत्,when uttered as nasalized
by Pāmini, are recognised only by
conwention; cf. प्रतिशानुनासेिक्या: ' पाणि-
नीयाः(S.K.on P.I.3.2).The word इत्,
which literally means going away
or disappearing, can be explained
as a mute indicatory -letter. In
Pānini's grammar, the mute vowel
अ applied to rootS indicates the
. placing of the Atmanepada affixes



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-080.png}}}}}}

इत् 64
after them, if it be uttered aS anu-
dàtta and of affixes of both the
padas if uttered Swarita; cf. P.Î.3.
12, 72. The mute vowel अा signi-
fieS the prewention of इडागम before
the past par t. afiixes; cf. P. VII.
2. l6.Similarly, the mute vow el इ
signfies the augment न् after the last
vowel of the root; cf.P.VII.1.58; ई
signifies the prevention of the aug-
ment इ before the past part.affixes
cf.P.VII.2.14;उ signifies theinclu-
sion Of cognate letters; cf.P.I.1.69,
and the optional addition of the
augment इ before त्वा; cf. P. VII.2.
56; ऊ signifies the optional appli-
cation of the augment इट्;cf.P.VII.
2.44; क्र signifies the prevention of
छ्स्व tO the woWel of a root before
the causal affix, cf.VII.4.2; ल sig-
nifies the Vikarana अङ् in the Aorist
cf. P.III.l.55; ए signifies the pre-
Vention OfVrddhi in the Aorist,cf.
|P.VII.2.55; ओो signifies the stpbsti-
tution of न् for त् of the past part.
cf. P'. WIII.2.45; क् signifies the
preVention of गुण and वृद्वि, cf. P, I.
l•5; खुं signifies the addition of the
aपूgment मुम्(म्)and the shortening
of the preceding vowel; cf.P.VI.3.
65-66; शु signifies the prevention of
गुण and वृद्धैि,.cf.P. I.1.5; ब्रु signifies
कुंव, cf. P.WII.3.62; ङ्, applied to
affixes, signifies the prevértion of
र्गु"ण and वृद्वि; cf. P.I.1.5; it causes
`रेासैप्रसारणादेश in the case of certain
root&, cfः P. VI.1.16 and signifies
अात्मनेपद if applied to roots; f.P. I.
3.l2, and their substituti.7n for the
last letter if applied to substitutes.
cf. P'. I.l• 53. च् signifies the acute
accent Of the last vowel; cf.P.VI.1.
l59; अ Signifies उभयपद i.e. the plac-
ing of the afiixes of both the p0das
aftcr thc root to which it has'been
affixed;cf.P.I.3.72; ट् in the case of
an augmentsignifies itsapplication
इतच्
to the Word at the beginning: cf.B'
I. l.64, While applied to a nominal
base or an affiX ShoWS the addition
of the fem. affix ई (ङीप्), cf.P.IV.1.
1 5 ;ड् signifies the clision of the last
syllable; cf. P.VI.4.142; 'णु signifies
वृद्वि, cf.P.VII.2.1 15;त् signifies रवरित
accent, cf. WI.l.l8l, as also that
variety of the vowel ( हृस्व, दीर्घ or
प्लुट्त) to which it has been applied
cf. P.I.1.70; न् signifies अाद्युदात्त्, cf.
P.VI.1.193:प significs अनुदात्त acccnt
cf. अनुदात्तैौ मुप्पितीं P. III. 1.4. as
also उदात्त for the wowel bcfore the
affix marked with पुम् cf. P.VI.1.192;
म् significs in the case of an aug-
ment its addition aftcr the final
wowel.cf.P.I-l.47,while in the casc
of a root, the shortening of its
wOWel bcfore thc cauSal afiix णि,cf.
P.VI.4.92; र् significs the acute
accent for thc pcmultimatc wowcl
cf:P.VI.1.2!17; छ्.significS the acute
accerrt for thc vowcl prcccding
thc affix markcd with छ्; cf.P,VI.
|l93; शु implies in thc casc of an
affix its सार्वेधातुकत्यः cf. P. II1.4.113,
While in the casc of substitutcs,
their Substitution for thc whole
स्थानेिन् cf. P.I.1.55; प् significs the
additi9n of the fem. àffix ई ( ङी५)
cf.P.LV.1.4l ;र् in thc casc ()fafÎixe$
signifies पदरुं*ज्ञा to thc basc bcfore
them, cf. P.I.4.16. Somctimcs even
without the actual addition of thc
mute letter, affixes arc dirccted to
be looked upon as possesscd of that
mute letter for the sake of a gram-
भ्atical op&ration e.g. सार्वधातुक्रमपित्
P.I.2-4; असंयेागाार्छिट कित् P. I•2.5; गेीतों
णित् P.VII. I.90 etc. (2) thc $hort
vowel इ as a substitute; cf. शास
इदङ्हलेी: P. VI. 4. 34.
ईत tad. affix इत in thc senlse of
*found' or *produced in', which is
affixed to words तारका,पुष्पं, मुकुल and



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-081.png}}}}}}

、
इतरतर
65
इनि
' others; é. g. तारकित, मुकुलित, · सुात्रित,
दुःखित etc.; cf. तदस्य संजातं तारकाादेभ्य
इतञ्व् P. V. 2. 36.
^ इतरेतर possessed of interdepende-
nce; depending	upon each
other; cf. इतरेतरं कार्यमसद्वेर्ते Cāndra
Pari. 5 +. Grammatical operations
are of no awail if the rules Stating
them are mutually depending
on each other. The word इतरेतर
has the sense of इतरेतराश्रय here.
इतरेतरयोग mutual relationship with
each other. Out of the,.four senses
of the indeclinable च wiz. समुञ्चय,
अन्वाचय, इतरतरयोग and समाहरि, the
|)vandva coimpound is formed of
Words connected in the laSt twO
Ways and not in the first tWo
ways. The instances of द्वन्द्व in
the sense of इतरतरयोग are धवख-
दिरपल[शा:, प्लक्षन्यग्रेोधौ etc ; cf. Kāś. on
|P. II. 2.29; cf. also प्त्रृक्षश्च न्यग्रेधश्चत्युक्ते
गम्यत एतत्रृक्षेाधि न्यग्रोधसहाये[ न्यग्रोधौपि
प्ठ्छ्क्षसहाय इति M. Bh. on II. 2. 29; cf.
a!|$o इतरेतरयेगिः स यदा उद्रिक्तावयवभेदीं
भवतेि Siradewa Pari. 16.
इतरेतराश्रय depending upon each
other; cf. इतरेतराश्रयाणि च कायणि न
प्रकल्पन्ते | तद्यथा | नैौनीँधि बद्व नेतर-
तरत्राणाय भवति | M. Bh. on I.1.1. |,
See इतरेतर abowe.
इत्कार्य a grammatical operation caus-
ed by इत् i. e. by a mute letter
which is purely indicatory ; cf. एवं
तर्हि इत्कार्याभावादत्र इत्संज्ञा न भविष्यति M.
Bh. I. 3.2. See इत् above.
इत्त्व the substitution of short इ by
स्याध्वोरिच P. I. 2.17, शास इदङ्हलेाः P.
VI. 4. 34, etc.
,X इत्थंभूतलक्षण characterization; indi-
cation by a mark; e. g. जटा[भ-
रूतापसः cf. इत्थंभूतलक्षणे च ( तृतीया ) P.
II. 3.21.
इटुंkrt affix mentioned by Panini in
VI.4.55 as causing the substitution
9
. Of अयु for णि before it; e. g गदयित्नुः,
स्तनयित्नुः M.Bh. on VI. 4.55.
ईन्न k{t affix, added to the roots ऋ,
९ष्ट्रे ; धू etc. in . the sense of instru-
rnent; cf. अर्तिळूधूसूखनसहचर इत्रः P. III.
2. 184-6. e. g. अरित्रम् , लवित्रम् खनित्रम्
etc. The words ending in इत्र have
gOt the acute accent on the last
Syllable; cf. P. VI, 2. 144,
इत्संज्ञक a letter which is terrned इत्;
See इत् abowe.
इथुञ्कर्, augment इभू , e. g. यावतिथः, ताव-
तिथः; cf. वतेोरिथुक् P. V. 2. 53.
इदित् pOSSeSSed of the mute indicatory
letter इ; e. g the roots नदि, विदि
and the like, in whose case the
augment नुम् ( न् ) is affixed to the
last vowel; cf इदितेो नुम् धातेा:ं' P.
VII. ! . 58. ।
ईन्न ( I ) krt affix इ applied to the
roots कृ, हृ; ग्रह, and भृ when they
are preceded by certain words like
स्तम्ब etC. in certain senses; e. g.
स्तम्बकरैि:, फलेग्रहिः, अात्मंभरिः; cf. P. III.
2. 24-7;(2) k!t affix इन् (णिनि) pres-
cribed by P. III. 3.170 e. g. अवश्यं-
कारी, शतंदायी.
इन ( l ) Substitute for the inst. ca&e
ending in अा (ट) after bases ending
in अ ; cf. टाङसिङसामिनात्स्याः P. VII. 1.
12ः (2.) tad,aff. इन affixed to पूर्व e.
g. पथिभिः पूर्विणैः cf. P. IV. 4. 133.
इनङ् $ubstitutc इन् for the last, vowel
of the words कल्याणी, सुभगा, दुभैगा and
others before the afiix ढ i. e. एय
preSeribed after these Wordsi n the
sense of Ofispring e. g. काल्यााणिनेयः,
साँभाागेनेयः, कौलटिनेयः etc.;cf.कल्याण्यादोना-
मिनङ् P. IV. !. 126, 127.
इनच tad. affix इन्न in the sense of poss-
eSSion applied to the word नि which
is changed into चिक, e. g. चिकिनः;cf.
इनञ् पिटचु चिकाचि च P.V. 2. 33.
इनि ( 1 ) krt affix इन् applied to the
roots क्री with धि, जु with प्र, and the



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-082.png}}}}}}

इनुण्
roots जि, दृ, क्षि and otherS,) e• ś•
सेोमविक्रयी, प्रजवी, जयी etc. cf. P'. III. "
2. 93 and III. 2. 156-157; (2) tad.
affix इन् affixed to the word पाण्डुकम्बलं
in the sense of *covered with' ( cf.
|P. I V.2.11), in the sense Of collec-
tion to the word खल e. g. खलिनी cf.
|P. [V. 2. 51, to the word अनुब्राह्मण
in sense * student of* e. g• अनुब्राह्मणी
cf. P. IV. 2. 62, to the words कर्मन्द
and कृशाश्व cf. P. IV. 3.! l l, to the
word चूर्ण cf P.IV. 4. 23 and to the
word श्राद्ध cf. P.W. 2. 85 and साक्षात्
cf. P. V. 2. 91 in specified SenseS
and in the general Sense of pOSSe-
ssion to words ending in अ, cf. P.
W.2.1]5-117 and to certain other
words cf6 P. V. 2. 128-37.
इनुण् krt affix इन्. by ]'. III. 3. 44
folloWed inwariably by the tad.
affix अण् by P. V. 4. 15, e. g, सांरा-
विणम्, सांकूटिनम्.
इान्दिरापाति author of *परीक्षा' a com-
गुmentary on the Paribhāgendu-
Sekhara of Nāge$abhatta.
इन्दुामित्र author of अनुन्यास, a ॰ com-
mentary on Nyasa, the well-known
commentary on the *Kāsikāw['tti' by
' Jinendrabuddhi. Many quotations
from the Anunyāsa ate found in
the Paribhāgāvptti of Siradeva.
The word इन्दु is often used for
इन्दुमित्र; cf. एतस्मिन् वाक्ये इन्दुमैत्रेययेोः
|शाश्वतिके विरोधः Sira. Pari. 36.
इन्डुप्रकाशा author of a commentary
on the Paribhāgenduśekhara.
इन्द्र name of a great grammarian who
is beliewed to have written an ex-
haustive treatise on grammar
before P'ãnini; cf. the famous werse
of Bopadeva, at the commence-
memt Of his Dhātupatha इन्द्रश्चन्द्रः
काशकृत्स्नापिशलीं शाश्क्रटायनः । पाणिन्यमरजैनेन्द्रा
जयन्त्यष्टादिशाब्दिकाः | No work of
Indra is available at present.
He is nowhere quoted by
66 इमन्
|Pānini. Many quotations believ-
ed to hawe been taken from his
work are found Scattered in gram-
mar works, from Which it appears
that there was an ancient System
prevalerat in the eastern part Of
India at the time of Pāhini which
could be named ऐन्द्रव्याकरणपद्धति,
to which Parhini possibly refers by
the word प्राचाम्. From references, it
appears that the grammar was of
the type of प्रक्रिया, discussing vari-
ous topiCS Of grammar Such as
alphabet, CoaleScence, declension,
context, compounds , derivatives
from nouns and rOotS, conjuga-
tion, and changeS in the base.
The treatment was later On follow-
ed by Sāka{ःāyana and writers of
the Kātantra school.For details see
Mahābhāsya ed. by D. E. Society,
Poona, Vol. VII pages |124-127.
इन्द्रदच्त author of the * Gtidhaphakki-
kāprakāśa', a gloSS On thc c!ifficult
passages in the Mahabhāśya.
इप् a technical term for द्वितीया (aécu-
$ative case ) in the Jainendra
grammar; cf. श्कर्मणीप् Jain. I.4.2.
ईप्	a technical term in the Jainen-
dra Vyākarna for सप्तमीं (the loca-
tiwe case).
इफ tad. affix applied to र { letter र् )
in the sense of the co nsonant र्; e. '
g. रेफः; cf. रादिफः P. III. 3. 108
Vart. 4.
इम् augment इ added to thc base तृणह्,
after the last vowel, e. g. तृणेदि; cf.
तृणह इम् P.VII. 3. 92.
इमन् or इमनिच् tad. affix इमन् applied
to the words पृथु, मृदु, महत्, लञ्चु, गुरु,
words showing colour and words
Such as दृढ, परिवृढ, भृश, शीत, उष्ण etc.
in the Sense of *quality' or *attri-
bute?; cf. Pān. V. 1.122, 123. For
changeS in the base ' before the
| affix इमन् see P. VI.4.154-]63.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-083.png}}}}}}

इमप्
इमपू krt. affix इम applied to words
Showing भाव or verbal activity;
e.g. पााकेमम् , लयागिमम्;cf. भावप्रत्ययान्तादि-
मब्वच्तव्य: KāŚ. on P. IV.4.20.
इय tad afiix ( घन्) in the sense of
*pity*; e. g. देविय:, यज्ञियः ; cf. P. IV.
2. 79.
इयङ्ं substitute for the last इ
before a vowel generally in the
Case Of moraOsyllabic rOOts end-
ing in इ and the word स्त्री;
e. g• चिक्षियुः, नियौ नियः, स्त्रियौ स्त्रियः;
cf. अचि क्षुधातुभ्रुवां य्वोरियङुवङौ P. VI.
4. 77-80.
३य case-ending for inst. Sing. in
Vedic Literature; e. g. उर्विया,
दार्विया; cf. P. VII. ! .39. amid Vart. ]
thereon.
इर् mu{e indicatory ending of roots, !
signifying the application of the |
aorist sign अ_( अङ् ) optionally ;e g.
अ॒भिदत् or अमैत्सीत् from the' root !
भिद् ( भिदिर् in iDhatupātha); cf.
alsð अच्छ्रिद्त्,अच्छैत्सीत॒ from छिद्(छिदिर्);
cf. P. III. 1.57. `
इरञ्च् tad. affix C इर ) in the sense of
poSSeSSion applied in Vedic ILite-
rature to रथ e. g. रथिरः; cf. P. V. |
2. ]09 Wārt.. 3.
इरन tad. affix ( इर ) in the sense of
pOSSeSSion applied in Vedic Lite-
rature; tO मेधां e. g. cf. P. मेधिरः
W. 2.109 Wārt.. 3,
इरित् a root ending with mute indi-
catary ending इर्. See इर्.
इरे ( ईरेक्ष् ) substitute for the perfect
3rd pers• • pl. Ātm. affix झः e. g.
चक्रिरे, ऊचिर etc. ; cf. P. III. 4.81.
इल tad. afiix applied to the words
काश, अश्चत्थ, पलाश and others in the
four senses prescribed in P. IV.
2.67-70;	e. g.. काशिलः, अश्वत्थिलः,
पलााश्र्शल:; cf. P. IV. 2.80.
इलच् (l) tad. affix इल (इलञ्चु) in the
Sense of pity; e. g. देवियः, यज्ञिलः; cf.
67
, इष्ठ
|P.IV.2.79. The tad.affix घन् i ; also
affixed in the same sense. See इय.
(2) tad. affix इल {इलञ्च॒) in the sense
Of p७ssessiOn, presCribed after the
words फेन, लेामन् कपि, सिकता, शर्करा,
तुन्द, उदर, घट, यव etc.; e. g. फेनिल,
लोमिल, कपिल, सिकतिल तुन्दिल	etc. cf.
|P. V. 2.99, 100, 105, 117.
इश substitute for इदम् before an
affix called *vibhakti'; e. g. इह; cfः
P. V. 3.3.
इध्ट a word frequently used in
the WārttikaS and the Mahābh-
a$ya and other treatises in the
senses Of · (I) a desired object,
(2) a desired purpose, (3) a,
desired Statement, (4) a desired
form i. e. the correct form ; cf.
इष्ट्रान्वाख्याने खल्वपि भवतिः M. Bh. I. 1.
Ahn. 1. योगविभागादिष्टसिद्धिः Pari. Sek.
Pari. 114,
इंट्ट*न्व्यक्रप a Short traeatise on
grammar ascribed to .Jayadeva.
इष्टादि a class of words · headed by
the Word इष्ट to which the taddhita
affix इन् ( इनि ) is added in the
sense of अनन i. e. * by him* i. e.
by the agent of the activity de-
noted by the pa$t pass. participles
इष्ट and othersः cf. इष्टी यज्ञे, पूताँ श्राद्धे
etc. Kāś. on P. V. 2. 88.
इष्टि a word generally used in the
' statements made in the Mahā-
bhā3ya, similar to those of the
Stitrakāra and the Varttikakāras,
which are *desired ones' with a
wiew tO arriwe at the correct
forrms of words; cf. प्रातिज्ञेो देवानां-
ष्ट्रियो न त्विष्टि॒िक्षुः, , इष्यत एतद् रूपमिति
M. Bh. on II. 4.56.
इष्ठ the superlative tad. affix इष्ठन् in
the sense of अतिशायन or अतिशय
( excellence ). The commentators,
hoWever, Say that the taddhita
affixes तम and इष्ट,like all the tadd-
hita afiixcS $howing case-relations,



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-084.png}}}}}}

इष्ठन्
are applied without any specific
sense of themselves, the affixes
showing the sense of the base itself
( स्वार्थे ); e. g गुरुतमः, गरिष्ठः; पट्टतमः,
पठिष्ठ:: पञ्चतितमाम्, कर्तृतमः, करिष्ट: etc.; cf.
P. V.3. 55-64.: The affixes ईयस् and
इष्ठ are applied only tO such subst-
antives which denote quality ; cf.
P. V. 3. 58.
इष्टन the same as इष्ठ. See इष्ट्र.
इध्ठञ्चद्भाव possessiora of the same pro-
|perties for causing grammatical
Operations as the tad. affix इष्ठन्
|p0SSeSSeS, as for instance, the elision
of the syllable begintning with the
last vowel ( टिलेीप ), substitution of
the maSc. base for the fem. base
( पुंवद्भाव ) etc., before the denom.
||
68
affix णिच्; e, g. एतयति in the sense
of एनीं अाचष्ट; sirnilarly प्रथयति, पटयाति, |
दवयर्ति; cf. M. Bh. on. P. VI 4.:
155 Vārt. 1.
इष्णुगृ k!t affix इष्णुच् applied,in the sense
of * posSeSSed of habitual behavi-
our, action, Or splendid accomp-
lishment,? to the roots अलंकृः, निराकृ,
प्रज॒न्, उत्पूत् etc. e. g अलंकरिष्णुः,उत्पतिष्णुः,
सहिष्णुः,च्वरिष्णुः etc.; cf.P.III 2.1 ?6-138.
|ktaffix in Vedic ILiterature in the
sense 9?f the infinitive, e. g. रेfहिष्यै,
अव्यथिष्यै; cf P. III. 4.i0.
इस ( l ) Substitute इस॒स् for the vowel
of th e roots, मी, मा, दा, धा, रभुश्, पत् etc.
before the des'derative aiोfix सन्;
e. g. मित्सति, दित्सति, अारिप्सत etc. cf.P.
VII. 4.54; ( 2 ) utjādi affix इस्म् e. g.
सर्पिस॒.
२
इस्टुच्, alternatiwe affix mentioned in
the Mahābhāgya in the place of
इष्युच्छ्; cf M. Bh. on III. 2.'57. See
इष्णुच् •
、
इं
ई the long vowel ई which is techni-
cally included
1n the , vowel	→
&
इट
इ in Pā']ini's alphabet being
thc long tone of that vowe!; (2)
substit tite ई for the vowe] अा of
th e rOOts |ध्रा amd ४मा bcfore the
frequentative sign यङ् as for ex-
ample in जे|ध्रीयत, देथ्मीयते, cf. P. VII.
4.3l ; (3) substitute ई for the
voWel अ before the affixes च्वि and
क्यल्दं as, for instance, in शुछ्रीभवति,
पुत्रीयति et c.; cf., P. VII. 4.32, 33;
(4) substitute ई for the vowel अां
at the end of reduplicatcd bascs
aS al$o for the wowel अI of bascs
ending in the conjugational sign
ना, e. g. मिमीश्वे, लुट्रैनीतः etc. ; cf. P.VI.
4. i 13; (5) substitu1te ई for the
|loc. caS6 affix इ ( ङि ) im Vedic
Literature, e.g. सरसी for सरसि in दृतिं
न शृश्कं सरसी शयानम्,; cf. Kā$. on P.
VII. 1.ॐ9; (6) t:1d. afiix ई in the
Scrase of poSSession in W'cdic lLitera-
ture as for instance in रथी:,मुमङ्गलीः,
cf. K6Ś on. P. V. 2. l09; (7) the
fem. afiix ई ( ङीपू , ङीथ् or ङीन् ); cf.
P. IV. 1.5 8, 15-39, IV. 1.40-65,
|IV. 1.13.
ईक tad. affix ईश्कक added to शश्कि
and यष्टि c. g. शाक्तीकः fetm. शानीकी;
याष्टीकः; cf. P. IV. · 4.59; (2) tad. afiीx
|ईक added to कर्क and लेष्ट्रेित in the
sense of comparison, e. g. काकॉकः,
लैीहितीकः C इफटिकः ), cf. Ka$. ०n P. V:
3.110; (3) tad. affix ईकक added t०
बृहिग्र्ञ्, e. g• बाहीकः ; cf. बहिषटिळेापेा यश्च,
ईकक्च P. IV.1.85. Vārt. 4-5; (4) tad:
affix इकञ्जु in Vedic Litcraturc added
to ब्रहिस् e.g. बाहीकः cf. Kā$.on P. IV.
1.85,Vàrt.6; (5) tad. a[fix ईकन् addcd
to खांरी e. g. द्विखारीर्कम् ; cf. P. V.
1.33.	→
इदैद् augment ई prefixed to a Sarvad-
hātuka (strong) affix beginning
with a consonant after the root$
ई, रु,. स्तु, and other$ e. g. अन्नवीतू,
रोरवीति, स्तवीति, अकाष्ॉत्, अवदिीत् ctc;
cf. P. VII. 3.93-98.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-085.png}}}}}}

ईत्
ईत् long vowel ई as different fro'n
इ or ई३ prescribed as a substitute;
cf. P. VI.3.27, VT.3.97.
ईदेित् ( a root ) pO8SeSSed of long ई as
a mute indicatory ending meant
. for prOhibiting the addition of the
augment इ tO the past part. ter- |.
minationS त amd तवत् ; e. g. लमः,
दीतः etc.; cf. P WII. 2. 14,
ईप्सित a desired Object, which, in con-
' nection with trapsitive roots, gets
the designation कर्म,when the agent
has a keen desire for it; cf. केर्तुरी-
प्सिततमं कर्म P. I. 4. 49.
ईमसच् tad. affix ईमस added to the
wOrd मल in sense of possession;
e. g. मलीमसः, cf. P. V. 2.114.
ईय substitute for the tad. afiix छ; e.g•
शालीयः, मालीयः etc; cf P. VII." 1.2
and IW. 2. ] 14.
ईयङ् affix ईय added to the root ऋत्,
ड्हूं " shOwing the application of the
Atraarāepada affixes ; e. g. ऋतीयत;
cf. P. III. 1. 29
ईयस् tad-affix ईयसुन् , showing superi-
Ority 'or excellence of one indivi-
dual Over another in respect of a
qप्uality, added tO a substantive ex-
presive of quality; when the subst-
antive ends in the affix तृ, that affix
तृ is reri३0ved; e-g. पटीयान्, लऔीयान्,
गरयिान्, देोर्होयसी (धेनुः); cf.P.V.3.57-64.
ईयसुन् the same as ईयस् which see
abowe.
ईरच् tad-affix added to the word अण्ड
in	the sense Of pos5ession; e.g.
अण्डीरः;cf. काण्डाण्डादीरन्नीरचौ P.W,'.2.11].
ईशश् substitute ई for इदम् before the
tad-affixes दृक्रू, दृशु and वतु; e.g. ईदृब्
ईदृश: also ईदृष्क्षः; cf. P.VI.3.90.
ईश्वरकान्त author of *Dhātumālā?, a
ShOrt metrical treatise on root8.
ईश्वरानन्द author of (1) a gloSS on
Kaiyata*s
2
Mahābhāgya-pradipa, |,
69 ऽउ
and (2)an independent treatise Sāb-
dabodhatarangirai. He is believed tO
have been a, pupil of सत्यानन्द an d
iived in the latter part of the 16th
century A.D.
चव्छूीस an external effort ( बाह्य-प्रयत्न)
in the productiotn of sound charac-
torized by the emission of breath,
when the cavity made by the cords
of the throat is kept wide apart,
as found in the utterance of the
consOnants शु, घ्घ्घ्घ्घ्घ्घ्घ्घ् and स.
ईषत्स्पृष्ट an external effort ( बाह्यप्रयत्न)
in the production of sound charac-
torized by only a slight contact of
the cOrds of the throat, made in the
utteranee of semi-vowels; cf:ईषत्स्पृष्ट-
मन्त:स्थानाम् S.K. on P.I.1.9.
ईषदसमाप्ति stage of the quality of a
thing or of an undertaking which is
almQSt cOmplete,to show which,the
tad-affixes कल्प, देश्य and देशीय are
applied to a word:e.g. पटुकल्पः,पटुदेश्य.:
पटुदेशीयः, पचतिकल्पम्, जल्पतिकल्पम्; cf. P,
V.3.67.
ईषन्नाद an external effort characteri•
zed by slight resOnance or sound-
ing of throat cords when they
slightly tOuch one another."
ईद्दा effort made for the production of
sound; cf. अापद्यते श्वासतां नादतां वा .
वक्त्रीहायां उभये वान्तरोभभैी । ईहायाम् चेष्टायाम्
|R..B'r.XIII.1. → * →
उ ·
उ (1) labial vowel standing for the
longऊ and protracted ऊ३ inB'āmini's
gramma r unless the consonant त् is
afiixed to it, उत् standing for the
short उ only; (2) Wikarataa affix उ
of the 8th conjugation ( तनादिगण )
and the roots धिन्व् and कृण्व्;cf.P.III.
1.79-80; (3) substitute (उ) for the
vowel अ of कृ,e.g. कुरुतः, कृर्वन्ति before
weak Sārvadhātuka affixes, cfP,V[.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-086.png}}}}}}

70
उक्
उग्रभूति
4.1 10; (4) kFt. affix उ added to
bases ending in सन् and the roots
अार्शम्स्, भिक्षु, विद्, इष् as also t9 bases
ending in' क्यच् in the Vedic Litera-
ture,e.g. चिकीर्षुः भिक्षुः, विन्दुः,इच्छु:,सुम्नयु;
cf. P. IIf. 2.168-170; (5) Unādi
affix उ C उणुश् ) e.g, कारुः, वायुः, साधुः,
etc.; cf. Unādi I.1 ; (6) mute vowel
उ added to the first letters of a
claSS of consonants in Pamini's
grammar to show the whole class
of the five letterS; e.g. कुः, चु, दु, तु, पु
Which stand for the Guttural, the
pal.utal the lingual, the dental and
the labial classes respectively; cf.
alsO ष्टुना ष्टुः P.VIII.4.41;(7X उ added
to न् showing the consonant न् as
nasalized n; cf, नुः V.Pr. III.133.
उवृक् short term (प्रत्याहार) for the vowels
उ, ऋ and ल; e.g. उगिदचां सर्वनामस्थानेऽ
धातोः P.VII.1.80, also श्-ञ्युक; किति P
VII.2, 1 ], इसुसुकूतान्तान् तः " P.VII.3,
: 5b.
उक (1) the kgt. affix उकञ्म् applied to
the roots लञ्, पत्, पद् and others,e.g.
लाष्ठुक:, कामुकः etc. with udātta accent
on the first syllable; cf,P.III.2.154;
(2) tad.affix उक ( उकञ्म्) added to
the wOrd कर्मन् e.g. कार्मुकं धनुः; cf.
Kā$. on P.W.I.103,
उकञ् the same as उक. See उक.
उक्त prescribed, taught, lit, said (al-
ready)• उच्तं वा is a familiar expres-
siOn in the Mahābhāsya and the
Vārttikas referri ng usually to
SOmething already expressed.Some-
times this expression in the Ma-
hābhā$ya, referring to something
which is not already expressed,
but which could be found sub-
Sequently expreSsed, leads to thc
conclusion that the Mahābhā-'
$yakāra had something like a
*Laghubhāsya? before him at the
time of teaehing the Mahābhāsya.
Sce Kielhorn's Kātyāyana ānd |
Patafijali, also Mahābhāsya D.E.
S.Ed. Vol. VII, pages 71, 72.
उत्तपुंस्क a word with its meaning (in
the neuter gender) unchanged
whem used in the masculinegender;
generally an adjectival word; cf.
Cāndra Vyāk. I.4.30.
उत्तार्थ a word or expression whose
sense has been already expreSSed.
The expression उत्तार्थीनामप्रयेोगः is
frequently used in the Mahā-
bhāsya and the Varttikas and cited
as a Paribhagā or a Salutary con-
ventional maxim against repetition
of words in the Paribhagapāthas
of Vyādi (Par. 51), Candragomtn
(Par 28) and Katantra (Par. 46)
and Kālapa (Par. 46) grammarS.
उत्ताप्रयोग see उत्तार्थ.
उातेिपद, उत्तिपदानि a short anonymous
treatise on case-relations, com-
pOunds etc. written mostly in
Gujarāti.
उत्तिरत्नाकर a short grammar work,
written by साधुसुन्दर, explaining
declension, caSes and their mean-
ingS, compounds, ctc. and giving
a list of Prākrta words with their
Sanskrit equivalents.
उक्थादि a class of words headed by
the wordउक्थ to which the taddhita
affix इश्क ( ठक् ) is applied ira the
sense of *one who studies and
understands'; cf. उक्थमधीते वेद वा
औौक्थिकः, similarly लीकायतेिकः KaŚ. on
|P. IV. 2.60.
उरठ्य a writer on Vedic phonetics
and euphony quoted in the Tait-
tirīya PrātiŚākhya; cf. उख्यस्य सपूवै:
Tai. Prā. WIII. 22.
उागेत् characterized by the mute
indicatory letter उ, ऋ or ल; see उक्.
or उग्राचार्य writer of a gloss on
the Nirukta, called *Niruktabhāya'



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-087.png}}}}}}

उङ्
beliewed to have liwed in the 18th
century A. D; wriier also of a,
'rammatical wOrk Sisyahitāvएtti or
i$yahitānyasa, which was sent to
|kāshmir and made popular with
a large Sum of money spent upon
it, by his pupil Ānanadpāla.
उङ् a technical , term for उपधा, the
|penultimr1ate letter in the Jai-
nendra Vyākarama; cf. इदुदुङ:ः Jain.
V. 4.28.
उच्च the higher tone also called उदाच्त
or acute; cf. नीचमुच्ल्चात् R. T. 55,
also एते स्वराः प्रकम्पन्ते यत्रेोच्चस्वरितेदयाः
|R. Pr. III. 19; cf. also the termS
उच्चश्रुति R. T. 61, एकेाच्च R. T. 62,
अाद्युच्च, अन्तेाच्च्चक. etc.
$\
उचैः उच्च or acute; see उच्च above;
cf. उच्चैवस्तरां वा वषट्कारः P. 1.2.35.
उच्चरित pronounced or uttered; the
phrase उच्चरितप्रध्वंसिनः is used in
connection with the mute indica-
tory letters termed इत् in Pānini's
grammar, as these letters are not
actually found in uSe in the lan-
guage and aretherefore SuppOsed to
vanish immediately after their pur-
pose has been served. The phrase
*उच्ञ्चरितप्रध्वंसेिनोऽनुबन्धा: * has been
given as a Paribhāक्ष्र्श्a by Vyādi
(Pari.l 1), in the Candra Vyāka-
rar?a ( Par. 14), in the Kātantra
Vyākarana (Pari.54) and also in |
the Kalāpa Vyākarana ( Par.
7i). Patafijali has used the ex-
|pression उच्चरितप्रध्वंसिनः in connec-
tion with ordinary letters of a,
word, which have existence for a
moment and which also vanish
immediately after they have been
uttered; cf. उच्चरितप्रध्वंसिनः खल्वपि वणीँ:
...न वणेौ वर्णस्य सहायः M. Bh. on I.4.
109.
उञ्चरितप्रध्वंसिन् vanishing immediate-
|ly after utterance. . See उच्चरित.
71
उच्चारण pronunciation,
उञ्छ्
enunciation
(in the Sāstra). The phrase उच्चारण-
सामथ्यीँत् is often found used in
the Mahābhāgya and else-
where in connection with the
words of Pātjini, everyone of which
is believed tO , have a purpose
or use in the Sāstra, which pur-
pOse, if nOt clearly rnanifest, is
assigned tO it On the strength (सामथ्र्य)
of its utterance; cf. उच्चारणसामथ्यीँदत्र
( हिन्येाः ) उत्वं न भविष्यति M.Bh. on
|III.4.89 V. 2; cf. also M.Bh. on
IV.4.59, VI.4. 163, VII.1.12, 50,
VII.2.84. In a few cases, a letter
is found uSed by Pānini which
cannot be aSSigned any purpOse but
which has been put there for faci-
|lity of the uSe of other letters.
Such letters are said to be उच्चारणाथै;
cf. जग्धिः | इकार उच्चारणार्थः। नानुबन्धः
Kāś. on II 4.36.च्लि लुटुडि.| इकार उच्चार-
णार्थः; चकारः स्वरार्थः । Kāś, on III.1.
43. The expressiOns मुखसुखार्थ: and
श्रवणार्थ: in the Mahābhāsya, mean
the same as उच्चारणार्थः.
उच्चावच diverse; cf. उच्चावचेष्वर्थेबु भवन्ति
निपाताः Nir. I.3.4.
उचैस्तरां Specially accented; उदात्ततर;
cf. उचैस्तरां वा वैषट्कार, P. I.'2.35.
उज्ज्वलदतं the famous commentator
On,.the Upadi sütras. His work .is
called Unadistātravपूtti, which '|is
a_ Scholarly commentory on the
Ujरे॒àdisütrapātha, consisting of five
Pãda,S. Ujjvaldatta is belived to
hawe iiyed in the I5th century
A.•_D. He quotes Vrttinyāsa, Anu-
nyãsa, BhāgavFtti etc. He is also
known by the namejājali.
`उञ् C l ) shOrt term ( प्रत्याहार ) for
vOwels excepting अ and इ, semi-
wOWels, masal cOnsonants and the
Çansonants हु, इंञ्छ् and भू.; cf मय उञ्जेा
वेो व{ P. VIII.3. 33; (2) the par-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-088.png}}}}}}

उव्ञ्छादि 72
ticle उ; cf. उाञ्ञि च पदे P. VIII•3.21•
also उञ्ञ: P. 1. I.17.
उञ्छ[दि a class of words headed by
the word उञ्छ which have their
final vowel accented acute (उदात) ;
cf. उव्छः म्लेच्छा, जल्पः l एत घञ्न्ल्ता इति
ञ्ञित्स्वरः प्रातः } Kā$. on P. VI. l • 160.
उदट् augment उ affixed to the roots ट्ट
ānd तृ before the krt affix तृ; cf.
तृरुतृतरूतृवरुतृ वरूतृवरूत्रीरिति तरेतेट्टर्दृङवृत्रेनांश्च
तृाच उट् ऊट् इत्येतावाग निपात्यते Kā5. Ora
]P. VII.2.34.
उण् the affix उण्, causing वृद्धि On ac-
count of the mute letter ण • pre-
scribed after the roots कृ, वा, पा[, ञ्जि,
मि, स्वट्ट, साध् and अशू by the , rule
कृवापाजिमिस्वदिसाध्यःशृभ्य उणुश् which is the
first rule (or Stitra) of a series of
rules presbribing various affixes
which are called unādi afilxces,
' the affix उणु heing the first of them.
. e. g. कारुः, वेायु , स्वादु, साधु ctc•; cf.
Upādi I, 1. →
उणदि affixcs headed by the affix उणुश्,
which are similar to krt affixeS Of
Pānini, giving derivation mOStly of
such words as are not derived by
rules of Pāhini. No particular
. sense such as agent, object etc. is
mentioned in connection with
these affixes, but, as Pānini has
stated in **ताभ्यामन्यत्रेाणादय: *' P. III.
-4.75, the various Unādi affixes are
applied to the various rootS as
prescribed in any Kāraka sense,
except the संप्रदान and the अपादानः
in other words, any one of the
senses, agent, object, instrument
and abode, is assigned tO the
Unādi affix as Suits the meaning
of the word. Although some
scholars believe that the Unādi
affixes are given by a grammarian
later than Panini as there are
words like ताम्बूल, दीनार and others
included in the list of Unādi
उणादि
words and that there are rnany
interpolated Stitras, still the Urjad
collection must be looked upon
as an old onc which is definitely
mentioned by P'āए]ini in two
different rules; cf. Pānini उणादयेो
वहुलम् P. III. 3.1 and ताभ्यामन्यत्रो-
णोदयः III. 4. 75. Patafijali has
given a, very interesting discuS-
sion about these Urऐādi affixes
and stated on the Strength of the
Vārttika, तत्रीणादिप्रतिषेधः, that these
affixes and the Words given in
the Unādi collection should not
be considered as genuitiely de-
rived.The derivation is not a very
systematic and logically correct one
and therefore for practical pur-
poses, the wOrds derivcd by the
application of the affixes उणू and
others should be lookcd . upon
as underived; cf. उणादयेाऽव्युत्पन्नानि
प्रातिपदिकानि. M. Bh. on. P. I. 1.16,
III. 4. 77, IV. 1. 1, VI. 1. 62,
VI1. 1. 2, WII. 2. 8 etc. There is
a counterstatement alsO seen in
the Mahābhāgya उणादयो व्युत्पन्नानि,
representing tlue other view pre-
vailing at the timc; cf. M. Bh.
on III. l. 133; but not much
importancc seems to be attached
to it. The different systcms of
grammar havc different collect-
ions of such words which are also
known by the term Unādi.Out of
the collections bclonging to Pāni-
ni's System, three collections arc
available at present, the collection
into fi're pādas given in the prin-
ted edition of the Siddhānta
Kaumudi, the collection into ten
Pādas given in the printed edi-
tion of the Prakriyā-Kaumudi amd
the collection in the Sarasvati-
kaththibharana of Bhoja forming
|Pādas !, 2 and 3 of the second
Adhyāya of the work.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-089.png}}}}}}

उणादेिकोश
73
उच्तर्मे
उणादिकोश a metrical work explain-
ing the उणादि words referfed to
|abOve, with meanings assigned
tO them. There are two such
compOsitions one by Rāmatar-
kavāgॉ$a or RāmaŚarmā and the
other by Rāmacandra Dīksंita.
उणादिप्रतिपदिक Word form or crude
base, ending with an affx of
the u' class, which is looked
upOn aS practically underived,
the affixes uऐ] and others not be-
ing looked upon as standard
affixes applied with regular mean-
ingS attached to them and
capable of causing operations to
the preceding base as prescribed
by rules of gramदृnar; cf. ऊँणींदयेोऽ
व्युत्पन्नानि प्रातिपदिकानि । व्युत्पन्नानीति शाक-
ट्टाय्न॒रीत्य॒ा । पाणिनेस्त्व॒क्ष्युपोिपक्ष एवेति शब्देन्दु-
शेखरे निरूपितम्. Pari. Sek. on Parाँ-
bhaंā 22.
· उणादिस्सूत्र, उणादिस्सूत्रपाठ the text of
the Stitras which begins with
the Stitra prescribing the affix
उण् after the roots कृ, वा, पा, जि, स्वद्,
साध्ञ् and अश्; cf. Unādi Sütra 1. [ .
For the different versions of the
text See उणादि. Similar Stitras in
Kātantra, Āpiśali, Sakatāyana and
other Systems of grammar are also
called Unādi Stātras.
उणादिसूत्रदशपादी the text of the
Unadi Stitras divided into ten
chapters believed to have been
written by शाकटायन. It is printed
at the end of the Prakriyā Kau-
mudÎ and Separately also, and is
alsO available in manuscripts
with a few differences. Patafjali
in hiS Bhā$ya on P.III.3.1, seems to
have mentioned $ākatāyafia aS the
author of the Unādi Stitras al-
thOugh it cannot be stated defi-
nitely whether there was
at that time, a wersion of
10
the stātras in five chapters
Or in ten chapterS Qr ome, com-
pletely different from these, as
ScholarS beliewe that there are
many interpolationS and changes
in the wersions of Unadi suitraS
available at present. A critical
Study of the various wersionS is
extremely desirable.
उणादिस्सूत्रपव्प्चपादीं the text oftheUnādi
Suitras divided into five chapters
which is possessed of a scholarly
cOmm entary written by Ujjvala-
datta. There is a commentary On
it by Bhattoji Dīk$ita a]so.
उणादिस्सूत्रवृत्ति a gloss on the Unādi
Stitras iःn the differerht versions.
Out of the several glosses on the
Ut]adi Stitras, the important ones
are those written by Ujjvaladatta,
Govardhana, Puru$ottamadeva,
|Rāmacandra Dik$ita and Hari-
datta. There is also a glosS called
Ut?ष्aजैistitrodghātana by Miśra.
There is a gloSS by Durgasirihha,
on the Kātamtra wersion of the
Umādi Stitras.
उत् (1) Short vowel उ in Pāraini's
terminology; cf, P.I.1.70, I,2.21.
|IV.1.44, V.1.1 1l ; (2) tad-affix उत्
applied to पूर्वे and पूवैतर for which
पर् is Substituted; e. g. परुत्. See P.
V. 3.22 Vārt.
उत्करादि a class of words headed by
the word उत्कर, to which the tad-
dhita affix छ is added in the four
Senses, the affix being pOpularly
|known as चातुरार्थिकः cf. उत्क्ररीयम्,
शफरीयम् etc.; Ka$. on P. iंV. 2.90.
उत्क्रम a variety of the Krama des-
cribed in the Prāti$akhya works.
उच्तम (1) the best,the highest,the last;
(2) the last letter of the consonant-
clasSes, the naSal; cf, A.Pr.II.4.14;
R.Pr. IV.3; cf. also अनुरुतम meaning
|non-nasal; (3) the उत्तमपुरुष or the



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-090.png}}}}}}

उदय
उच्तर 74
premier or the first perSOn भट्ट or भट्टोत्पल, the famouS astrologer
6onstituting the affixes मि, वस॒ | of the tenth century-
and मम॒त् and their substitutes, cf.
|P.I.4.107.
उच्तर (1) following, subsequent, e. g•
उच्तरपद, the latter part of a COm-
pound word; (2) end of a wOrd,
पदान्त; cf. उत्तरे पदान्त वर्तमानः Corm. On
T. Pr. III.1.
उच्तरकालम् subsequently, then, after-
wards; cf. तत् उत्तरकालामिदं दृष्टम् M.Bh.
on I.l•1•
उच्तरत्र in subsequent rules; cf. उत्तर-
त्रानुवर्तिष्यते M. Bh. on I.1.23.
उच्तरपद the latter member or portion
of a compound word as contrast-
ed with पूर्वपद; cf. पतिरुत्तरपदमाद्दुटा॒दात्तम्
A. Pr. II. 3. 11; cf. also अलुगुत्तरपदे
|P. VI. 3.1.•
उतररूप ulterior forrm.
उच्तरार्थ serving a purpOSe in SubSe-
quent rules; of use in a SubSe-
quent rule; cf. योगविभाग उत्तरार्थः,
तवाग्रहणमुत्तरार्थम् M. Bh. on I.2.22.
उतथ elewation Of tone.
उत्पत्ति (1) production; cf. वर्णोत्पत्तिः
prOduction Of a phonetic element
T. Pr. 23.1 ; (2) production of
a grammatical element such as
the application of an affix or
additiorn Of an augment or sub-
stitution of a letter or letters
during the prOcess of word-for-
mation; cf. गतिकारकेापपदानां कृद्भिः सह
समासवचनं प्राक् सुबुत्परेतः Pari. Sek. Par.
75; M. Bh. II. 2.19. Wārt, 4.
उत्पद् to be produced, to be placed
after; tO be annexed; (caus.) to
prOduce, tO get annexed, to add ;
cf. धेनुरनञ्नि कमुत्पादयति Apiśali?s Vārt.
quoted in M: Bh. om P.IV.2.45.
उत्पलं , authQr of a commentary on
Pānini*s LihgānuŚāsana. It is doubt-
ful whetherhe was the same asउत्पल-
उत्वत् possessed of short उ; cf. नोत्वद्वर्ध-
बिल्वात् P.IV.3.15|1.
उत्सर्ग a general rule as contrasted
with a special rule which is called
अपवाद or exception ; cf: उत्सगीँपवादयेो-
रपवादेो बलीयान् Hen३a. Pari.56; प्रक्रल्प्य
वापवादविषयं तत उत्सर्गेीभिनिविशते Par.Sek.
|Pari.63, Sira. Pari.97; cf. also उत्सर्ग-
समानदेशां अपवादाः. For the बाध्यवाधकभाव
relation between उत्सर्ग and अपवाद
and its details See NāgeŚa's Pari-
bhasenduśekhara On Paribhāsās 57
to 65: cf. also न्यायैर्मिश्रान् अपवादान्ग्रतीयात्
explained by the cOmmentator as
न्याया उत्सगाँ महाधिष्प्रया विधयः अपवादा अल्प-
विषया विधयः । तान् उत्सर्गेण भिश्रानेनकीकृतान्
जानीयात् । अपवादविष्प्रयं मुक्त्वा उत्सगर्गः
प्रवर्तन्ते इत्यर्थ: R. Pr. I.23.
उत्ससूत्र not consistent with, what is
taught in rules of a, Sāstra; cf.
अनुत्सूत्रपदन्यासा सद्वृत्तिः सन्निबन्धना | शव्द-
विद्यैव नेो भाति राजनीतिरपस्पशा Siśupāla-
wadha II.
उत्सङ्गादि a class of words headed by
the wOrd उत्सङग, tO which the tadd-
hita affix इकू ( ट ) is addcd in the
sense of' तेने हरति (takes away by
means of); cf. हरतिर्देशान्तरप्रापणे वर्तते ।
उत्सङ्गेन हराति औौत्साईगकः । औडुपिकः । Kā$.
* on P IV.4.15. `
उत्सादि a class of words headed by
the wOrd उत्स to which the tadd-
hita affix अञ्ञ्, instead of the usual
affixes अणु and others, is added in
the sense Of an Offspring; cf. अौत्सः,
औदपानः etc. Kā$. onP.IV.1.86.
उदय that which follows; a term fre-
quently used in the PrātiŚākhya
wOrkS in the sense of *following? or
पर; .cf. उदयस्वराादिसस्थानेो हकार एकेषाम्
explained by the commentator as
अात्मन उपरिस्वराादिसस्थानः T.Pr.II.47; cf.
alsO ऋकार उदये कप्ट्यैौ explained ' by
the commentator as ऋकारे उदये परभूत



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-091.png}}}}}}

उदयंकर . 75
सति R.Pr.II.11 ;cf. also नेादाच्तस्वरिते|ादयं
]P.V]III.4.67.
उदयैकर surnamed Paghaka who wrote
a commentary on the L,aghuŚab-
demduśekhara mamed JyOtsmā and
a very critical work on Paribhāśās
similar to Siradeva?s Paribhāśāvftti;
the work is incomplete.
उदयकीर्ति author of a treatise giving
rules for the determinatibn Of the
pada or padas of roOts; the trea•
tise is named पदव्यवस्थास्त्रकारिकाटीँक्रा.
|He was a Jain grammarian, and
one of the pupils ofSādhusundara.
उदाच्त the acute accent defined by
Pānini in the words उचैरुदात्तः P.I.2.
29. The word उचै: is explained by
Patafंjali in the words * अायामेो दारुण्यं
अणुता खस्य इति उचैःकराणि शब्दस्य' where
अायाम ( गात्रनिग्रह restriction of the
Organs), दारुण्य (रूक्षता rudeness ) and
खस्य अणुता ( कण्ठस्य संवृतता closure of
the glottis) are given as specific
characteristics of the acute accent.
The acute is the prominent accent
in a wOrd-a simple wOrd as also a
cOmpOund Word-and When a wOWel
in a word is possessed of the acute |
accent, the remaining Vowels haWe
the अनुदात्त or the grave accent.
Accent is a property of vowels
and cOnSOnantS do not possess any
independent accent. They posscss
the accent Of the adjoining vowel
connected With it. The acute
accer t cOrresponds to what is
termed *accent' in English and
other languages.
उदात्ततर rajsed acute, a tone slightly
higher than the acute tone which
is mentioned in connection with the
first half of a circumflex vowel; cf.
तस्योदात्ततरेरोदात्तादर्धमात्रार्धमेव वाR.P.III.2.
उदात्तनिर्देश conventional understand-
ing about a particular vowel in
the wording of a stātra being
marked acute Or udātta, when
ordinarily it should not have
been so, to imply that a Pari-
bhaघ्ंa is to be , applied for the
interpretation of that Sutra;' cf.
उदात्तनिर्देशात्सिद्धम् P.VI.1.13 Vārt.14,
also Sira. Pari. 112.
उदाच्तमय an accent made up Of
Udātta, i. e. an accent which is a
reduced udātta.It is called alsO
प्रचय. It is mentioned in connection
with an acute voWel following इति
in the Padapātha, accOrding tO
Kanva's view ;cf. उदात्तमयेोन्यत्र नीच ए,व
अन्तेादान्तमध्येीदात्तयेाः पर्वणेोरंन्यत्र इति कार-
णात् परो नीच उदात्तमय एव भवति प्रचित एव
भवतीत्यथैः com. on V. Pr, I.150
उदात्तश्रुति the same as एकश्रुति, accent-
less fone, mention{ d in cOnnection
with the latter half of a circumflex
vowel as alsO with a grave vOwel Or
vowels, if nQt followed by aप्other
acute or circumflex vOWel; cf.
नोदाच्तस्वरितोदयं० P.VIII.4.67.
उदाच्तसम similar to udatta although
not exactly acute, which character-
izes the ]atter half of the circum-
fdex vowel; cf. उदात्तसमशेषि:T.Pr.I•4:2•
उदाहरण a grammatical example, in
explanation of .an interpretation;
cf.'नैकमुदाहरणमसवर्णग्रहणं प्रयेोजयति P.VI•
|1.11.
उदित् characterized by short उ .as a
mute indicatory vOwel, by virtue
of which the word कु, oिr instance*
signifies along with क् its, cognate
consonants खु, गुण्, घूम् and_ईं also3
cf. अणुदित्सवणस्यै चाप्रत्ययः P. I. 1• 69•
Roots marked with उ aS mute get
the augment इ optionally added
before " the kपृ't affix क्त्वा; e• g•
शभित्वा and शान्त्वा from the root
शम् ( शमु ) by virtue of the rule
उदितो वा P.VII.2.56,
उदुपधत्व possession of short उ as the
penultimate letter, e• g• इदुदृग्१धस्य
चाप्रत्ययस्य P.WII.3.41•



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-092.png}}}}}}

उद्भात्रादि
76 उद्द्योतनप्रभा
उद्भात्रादि a class Of words headed by
the word उद्भातृ to which the tadd-
hita affix अञ्जु is added in the sense
of *nature? " or *profession*; cf.
उद्ट्रातुभीँव: कमे वा औौद्भात्रम् t Similarly
अौनैनत्रम् Kāś. on P. V. 1.129.
उद्ग्राह alleviation, ease, relief: name
given to a Sarihdhi in the Prāti$à-
khya workS when a visarga and a
short vOwel अ preceding it are
changed into short अ, (e. g. यः +
इन्द्र: = य इन्द्र:), as also when the
vowel एप् or ओी is changed into अ
being folloWed by a disSimilar
vOwel; e. g. अमे -+ इन्द्रः = अग्म इन्द्र:;
cf. R,.Pr*.II.]0.
उद्ग्राहपदवृत्ति name given in the Rk.
PrātiŚākhya to the Udgrāhasarihdhi
where the vowel अ iS follow-
ed by a long vowel; e.g, कः ईष्ष्रते =क्र
. ईषते R..Pr.II.10.
name given to a sarihdhi
in the Rk. Prātīśākhya when the
vowel अ Or अा is changed into अ
e. g. प्र ऋभुभ्यः=प्रन्क्र्नभुभ्य: also मधुना +
ऋतस्य=मधुन ऋतस्य cf. R. Pr. II. 11.
उद्धत्तीं elevation; mamed also उच्चीभाव.
उञ्द्धरं (1) elision, a term used in the
serise of * lopa ? in the ancient gra-
mmar workS; (2) name of a com-
rmentary On the Haima-lingā-
|iat]S8aSai1a..
उद्देश description; mention of quali-
ties; cf. गुणैः प्रापणम् M. Bh. ðn I..
3.2; the word is used in contrast
with उपदे श or direct mention; ef. कः
पुनूरुद्देशोपदेश्शुये॒ोर्विशेषः l प्रत्यक्षमाख्यानमुपदेशेो
गुणैः प्रापणमुद्देशः ! प्रत्यक्षं तावदाख्यानमुपदेशः
तद्यथा l अगोज्ञाय कश्चिद्भां सक्थनि कर्णे वा
गृहीत्वेोपदिशति । अयं गौरिति । स प्रत्यक्षमा-
ख्यातम्ह ॥ उपदिष्टो मे गैौरि॒ति । शु,णै:
श्रुापणमुद्देश॒ः l तद्यूथ॒ा । कश्चित्कंचिदाह ।
मे भुवानुद्दिशतु इति । स इहस्थः
पूष्द्यूष्छ्ठुत्रस्र्थं देबूदत्तमुद्दिश्शुति । अङ्गदी, कुण्डली
क्रिरीटी...ईदृशॆदेव॒दत्त इति । सं गुणैःप्राप्य-
माणमाह ॥ उद्दिष्टो मे देवदत्त इति । M. Bh.
on I. 3.2; (2) spOt, place, paSSage
of occurrence; उद्देश · ञ्उपदशदेश: ; cf.
यथेोद्देद्द्श्शं संशापरिभाष्प्रम् Pari.Sek. Pari. 2.
उद्देश्य referred to; pointed out, sub-
ject, as contrasted with the pre-
dicate मानान्तरप्राप्तमुद्देश्यम् ; cf. उद्द्६श्यप्र-
तिनिर्दिश्यमानयोरैक्यमापादयत् सर्वनाम पयोयेण
तत्ताश्छेिङ्कभाक् । तद्यथा । शैत्यं हि यत्सा प्रकृति-
जैलस्य, शैत्यं हि य यत्तत्प्रकृप्तिजैलस्य वा l उद्देश्य
in grartnmar refers tO the Subject-
part Of a sentence aS OppQSed tO
the predicate-part. I n the sen-
tence वृद्धिराँदच् the case is strikingly
an opposite One and the cxplana-
tion given by Patafंjali , is very
interesting:c{.तदतदेकं म्ङ्गलार्थ अाच्द[र्यस्य
मृष्यताम् । माङ्गालिक अाचार्यः मह्तः शास्त्रौघस्य
मङ्गलार्थ वृद्धिशेव्दमादितः प्रयुङ्ते, M, Bh.
On I. 1.1.
उद्देश्यविधेयभाव relationship betwccn
the Subject and the predicate
where generally thc subject is
placed first in a, sentence; cf.
उद्देश्यवचनं पूर्वं विधयत्वं ततः परम् । cf. also
तादात्म्यसंसर्गकस्थले धिश्शष्प्यत्वमव उदेश्यं धिशेा-
षणत्वमेव विधेयम् Padavākyaratnākara.
उद्द्योत the word always rcfers
in grammar to thc famOus com-
|mentary by Nageśabhatta writtem
in the first decade of the 18th
century A. D. ohm the Mahābhā-
$yapradipa Of Kaiya!ःa. The
UddyOta appears to be one of the
earlier wOrks Of NÊge$a. It is
|alsO called Vivarana. The com-
mentary is a scholarly one and is
lOOked upon as a final word re :
the expOsition Of the Mahābhāgya.
Ít is_believed that Nāgeśa wrote
12 UddyOtas and 12 " Sekharas
which form some authoritative
gOmmentaries om prominent works
in the different Sāstras.
、.
name Of a commentary
On the *Tantrapradipa* of Mai-
treya Rak$ita,which latter is a com-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-093.png}}}}}}

7
उप्
7
उपजन
mentary on Jinendrabuddhi's
Nyāsa which itSelf is a cotr1men-
tary on Jayāditya's Kāśika.
उ''प्ं a technical term in theJainendra
Grammar for the terms ळुय् and लुछ्क्;
cf. अन्तरङ्गानपि विधीन् बहिरङ्ग उप् बाधते.
Jain. Pari. 85, प्रकृतिग्रहणे यडुबन्तस्यापि
ग्रहणम्,.Jain Pari. 20.
उपकादि a clasS of words headed by
the wOrd उपक after which the
taddhita affix, added in the sense
of गोत्र ( grand-children etc. ) is
optionally elided, provided the
word is to be used in the plural
number; cf. उपकलमकाः भ्रष्टककपिष्टलाः:
. also उपका:, औौपकायनाः; लमका:, लाम-
क:यना ; भ्त्रश्टका: भ्राष्टव्कयः l Kā$. on P..
II. 4. 69.
उपगीत a fault in the pronunciation
Of letters, noticed sometimes in
the utterance of a letter adjoin-
ing Such a letter as is coloured
with a musical tone on account
of the proximity of the adjacent
letter which is uttered in a musical
note and Which therefore is called
* प्रगीत * ; cf. . प्रगीतः सामवदुच्चारित: ।
उपगीतः समीपवणान्तिरगत्यिानुरतः।Kaiyata*s
Pradipa on M.-Bh. I. Āhnika 1.
उपग्रह a term used by the ancient
grammarians in the sense of the
^ Parasmaipada and the Ātmane-
pada affixes. The word is not
found in Parpini*s Asgādhyāyī.
The Wārttikakāra has used the
word in his Vārttika उपग्रहप्रतिषेधश्च
on P. II[. 2.127 evidently in the
sense of Pada affixes referring to
the Atmanepada as explained by
Kaiyata in the words उपग्रहस्य अात्मने-
पदसंज्ञाया इत्यर्थः । The word occurs
in theSlokavarttika सुतिडुपग्रहलिङ्गनराणां*
' quoted by Pata?jali in his Mahā-
bhā$ya on व्यत्ययो बहुलम् P. [II.
1.85, where Nageśa writes लादेश-
व्यङ्गथं स्वाथैत्वादि । इह तव्प्रतीतिनिमित्ते परस्मै-
पदात्मनेपदे उपग्रहशव्देन लक्षणये|ोच्व्येते । The
word is found in the sense of
Pada in the Mahābhāgya on P.
IHI. 1.40. The commemtator on
Puspasütra explains the word as
उपगृह्यते समीपे पठ्त्रते इति उपग्रहः. The
author of the Kā$ikā on P. WI.
2.134 has cited the reading
चूर्णादीन्यप्राष्युपग्रहात् instead of चूर्णादी-
न्यप्राणिषष्ठया: and made the remark
तत्रेीपग्रह इति षष्ठयन्तमेव पूर्वाचार्योपचारेण गृह्यते.
This remark shoWs that in an-
cient times उपग्रह meant षष्ठयन्त i. e.
a word in the genitive case. This
SenSe gawe rise to, or was based
upon, an allied Ser:se, wjz. the
meaning of *षष्ठी' i. e. possession.
Possibly the sense * possession '
further developed into the further
sense *pOSSeSSion of the fruit or
result for self or others? referring
to the तिङ् affixes which possessed
that sense. The old sense *षष्ठयन्त'
of the word *उपग्रह? having gone
out of use, and the SenSe *पद'
|having cOme in wogue, the word
*षष्ठी' muSt hawe been Substituted
for the word *उपग्रह' by some
grammarians before the time of
the Kāśikākāras. As Patafijali
has dropped the Stitra (VI. 2.134),
it cannot be said definitely
whether the change of reading
took place before Patafंjali or
afीer him.
उपचार (l) taking a secondary sense;
implication; lit. moving for a sense
which is near about; the same as
लक्षणा. The word अाचार is explained
as उपचार, employment or current
uSage, by PatafÎjali; cf. अाचारात् ।
पचारात् । M. Bh. L. 1. 1.
Wārt. 4; ( 2 ) substitution of the
letteर॒' सुं for विसर्ग ; cf. प्रत्ययग्रहणेापच्चोरेषु
च्च, P.IV.1.1 Vart. 7.
उपजन् lit. origin; one that originates,
augment, उपजायते असौ उपजनः I Th6



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-094.png}}}}}}

उपर्जीव्य
78
उपन्यस्स
word is used in the sense Of *addi-
tional phonetic eleiment ? ;, cf.
उपजन अागम: M. Bh. on Siva-
siitra 5; cf. also वर्णव्यत्ययापायेोपजनविका-
रेष्वर्थदर्शनात् । Siva, Sutra 5 Vart• 15.
The Rk PrātiŚākhya gives सूम् in
पुरुश्चन्द्र as an instance of. उपजन cf.
R. Pr. IV. 37. In the Nirukta
उपजन is given as the sen{ie of the
prefix *उप' ; cfउपेत्युपजनम्ः The com.
on the Nirukta explainS the wOrd
उपजन as अाधिक्य.
उपर्जोव्य a term used by later gramm-
arians in connection with Such a
rule on which another rule depends
gf. उपजीव्यादन्तरङ्काच्न्च प्रधानं प्रबलमू Pari.
$ekh. on Pari. 97, as also M. Bh.
on हेतुमति च P. III. 1.26.	The
relationship known as उपजीव्येोपजी-
वकभाव occurS Sewerश्रal times in gra-
mmar which states the inferiority
of the dependent aS noticed in
the World.
उपदेश instruction; original enuncia-
tion; first or original preceptS Or
teaching; cf. उपदश अाद्येीचंचारगम् S•
K. on " the rule उपदेशेजनुनासिक इत्
P. I. 3. 2. cf. वर्णानामुपदेशः कर्तव्यः; M.
Bh. on Ahn. 1. Vārt. l5. For difं-
erence between उपदेश and उद्देश See
उद्देश; cf. also उपदिश्यतेननत्युपदश: । शास्त्र-
वाक्यानि, सूत्रपाठः खिलपाठश्च Kāśikā on P.
I. 3.2; cf. also Vyādi. Pari. 5; (2)
ermployment (of a wOrd) for others
cf. उपदेशः परार्थः प्रयेोग्म: l स्वयमेच तु बुद्धया
यदा परामृशति तदा नास्त्युपदेशः Kà$.' on
अदेनुपदेशेा P. I. 4. 70.
उपदेशिन् Such a word as is found in
the original instruction.
उपदेशिवद्भाव occurrence in the Origi-
nal Statement before the applica-
tion of any affixes etc.•, cf. एवमप्युप-
देशिवद्भार्वेो वक्तव्य:, M. Bh. on P.'I.
1.56, Vārt. 23.
उपदेशिवद्वचन statement to the effect
that a word should be looked
upon as occurring in the Original
instruction although it iS not
there. See उपदेश.cf. नुभ्विधाड्चुपदेशिवद्वचनं
प्रत्ययविध्यर्थम् P. VII. 1 58. Vārt. 1.
उपद्रुत namg of a saiihdhi which is
described as उद्ग्राहवत् in R.Pr; e. g.
न ऋते. See उद्ग्राह.
उपधा penultimate !etter,. as defned
in the rule अलोन्त्यात्पूर्वं उपधा P. I.
1. 65, e. g. see हृस्वेोपध, दीघाँपध, लघूपध,
अकारोपध etc.; lit. उपधयिते निधीयते सा
that which is placed near the last
letter.
उपधालोपिन् a word or a noun which
|has got the penultimate letter
omitted; cf. अन उपधालेपिनेोन्यतरस्याम्
|P. ]IV. 1. 28.
उपध्मानीय a letter or a phonetic elem-
ent substituted for a visarga foll-
owed by the first or the second
letter of the labial claSS. Visarga is
simply letting the breath out of
the mouth. Where the visarga is
followed by the first or thc second
letter of the labial c]aSs, its pronun-
ciation iS coloured by labial
utterance. This coloured utterarace
cannot be made independently;
hence this utterance called * उपध्मा-
नीय ? ( similar tO a. sound blown
from the mouth ) is not put in, as
an independent letter, in thc वर्ण-
समाम्नाय attributed to महेश्वर. Patafij-
ali, however, has referred to Such
dependent utterances by the term
अयेोगाव{हवर्ण. See अयेागवाह; cf. ५क इति
जिह्वामूलीयः । जिह्वामूलेन जन्यत्वात् । * प इत्युप-
ध्मानीयः । उपथ्माानेन जुन्यत्वात्. आ॒येागवाह is
also called अर्घविसर्ग. See अर्धीविसर्ग.
उपन्यास proposition, statement. The
remark *विषम उपन्यास:? is of frequ-
ent occurrence in the Vyākarat?a
Mahabhāsya in connection with
statements that are defective and
have to be refuted or corrected; cf.
M.Bh. on P.1.1.21,46,50; I.2.5 etc.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-095.png}}}}}}

उपपद
79
उपमन्यु
उपपद lit.a word placed near; an adjo-
ining word. In Pānini's grammar, |
the term उपपद is applied to such |
words as are put in the locative
case by Pāmini in his rules prescri-
bing kपृt affixes in ruleS from l II.
1, 90 to III. 4 end; cf. तत्रोपपदं
सप्तमीस्थम् P. III. 1. 92; e. g. कर्मणि in
कर्मण्यण् P. III. 2.1. The word is also |
used in the sense of an adjoining
word COnnected in Sense. e• g-
ष्मद्युपपदेo as also प्रहासे च मन्येोपपृदे०
P. I. 4. 105, 106; cf. also क्रियार्थायां
क्रियायामुपपदे धातोर्भविष्यति काले तुमुन्ण्वुलैौ
भवतः Kāś. on P. III. 3.10; cf. alsO
इतरेतरान्येोन्येापपदाच्च P.Î.3.10, मिथ्येोपपदात्
कृजेाभ्यासे P. I. 3.71, as also उपपदमतिङ्
P. II 2. 19; and गतिकारकेापपदात्कृत् P.
VI. 2. 139. Kaiyata on P. III. 1•
92 Vart. 2 explains the word उपपद
as उपेोच्चारि or उपेाच्चारितं पदं उपपदम्..
The word उपपद is found used in ]
the Prāti$ākhya, literature Where
it means a word Standing near amd
effecting some change; cf. च वा ह
अह एव एतानि चप्रभ्रृतीनि यान्युपपदानि उत्तानि
अाख्यातस्य विकाररीणि० Uvaईa on V. Pr.
VI. 23.
उपपदविधि a grammatical operation
caused by a word which is near;
cf. उपपदविधौ भयाद्व्यादिग्रहणै P. I. 1. 72
Vart 9, also अतिप्रसङ्क उपपदविधौ P. IV
1. 1• Vart. 8 where rules such aS
* कर्मण्यण् ' and the following are
referred to as उपपदविधि, the Words
कर्मणि, स्तम्ब, कर्ण, etc. bing called उपपद
by the rufe तत्रोपपदं सप्तमीँस्थम्; P. III. |
1. 92.
उपपदविभक्ति a caSe termination add-
ed to a Word on account Of the
presence of another word requir-
ing the addition; cf. the well-known
Paribhasā, उपपदविभत्तः कारकावभाक्तिर्बली-
यसी. Par. Sek. Pari. 94; and M.Bh.
on I.4. 96 stating the posSession of
greater force in the case of a kāra-
kavibhakti than in the case of an
upapadavibhakti.
उपपदसमास the compound of a word,
technically termed as उपपद by
Panini according to his definition
of the word in III. 1. 92., with
another word which is a verbal
derivative; cf. कुम्भकारः, नगरकार:•
Here technically the compound of
the words कुम्भ, नगर etc. which are
upapadas is formed with कार,before
a case-termination is added to the
nominal base कार; cf. गतिकारकोपपदानां
कृद्भिद्रः सह समासवचने प्राक् सुबुत्पचेतः Par. Sek.
|Pari. 75.
उपबन्ध् a technical term used in the
Prātiśākhya works in the sense of
words which proceed from a rule
to the following rules upto a par-
ticular stated limit; cf. उपबन्धस्तु
देशाय नित्यम् T. Pr I. 59 explained
by the commentator as उपबध्यते इति
उपबन्धः l एतस्मिन्नित्यधिकरणरूपः संख्यानविषयः
प्रदशश्च उपबन्ध उच्यते_ । उपबन्धे यदुक्तं
तदन्यत्र न भवतीति तुशब्दार्थः ।
उपब्दिमत् the fourth out of the seven
stages Or places in the production
of articulate speech, upārihŚu being
the first stage; cf. सशब्दमुपद्विमत्
Tait. Pr. 23.9 explained by the
commentator as: सशब्दं परश्राव्यशब्दसहि-
तम्॥ यत्र प्रयुज्यमानः शब्दः परैरक्षरव्यञ्जनविवेकवर्ज
श्रूयते तदुपद्विमत्संज्ञं भवति ।
उपमन्यु (1) the famOuscommentator on
the grammatical werses attributed
to Nandikeśvara which are known
by the name नन्दिकेश्वरकारिका and
which form a kind of a comment-
ary on the sutraS of Maheśwara;
(2) a cOmparatively modern gra-
mmarian possibly belonging to the
nineteenth century who is also
named Upamanyu and who has
Written a commentory on the fam-
ouS KāŚikāvपूtti by Jayaditya and
Vamana. Some believe that Upa-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-096.png}}}}}}

उपम
80
उपस्संहृत
manyu WaS an ancient Sage whO
wrote a nirukta or etymological
wOrk atRd whOse pupil carne to be
|known as औपमन्यव.
उपमा a well-known term in Rhetorics
meaning the figure of speech
* simile * or * comparison *. The
word is Often found in the Nii ukta
in the Same Sense; cf. अथात उपमाः ।
*यत् अतत् तत्सट्टशम्'इति गाग्यैः | Nir III.13.
Gcnerally an inferior thing is com-
|pared tO another that is superior
in quality.
उपमान standard of comparison. The
WOrd iS found in the Pātोjnistitra
उपमानानि सामान्यवचनैः P.II.I.55 where
the	Kāśikāv!tti explains it as
उपमीयतेऽनेनेत्युपमानम् |
उपमित an object which is compared.
The WOrd iS found in Pāriinistitra
उपमितं व्याघ्रादिभिः P.II. 1.56, where
the Kā$ikā paraphrases it by the
wOrd उपमेय and illustrates it by the
wOrd पुरुष in पुरुषव्याघ्र.
' उपमेय an object which is to be com-
pared. See उपामेत.
उपलक्षण implication, indication; a
thing indicatory Of another thing.
The term is very frequently found
in cOmmentary works in connec-
tion with a word which signifies
SOmething beyond it which is
Similar tO it; the indication is
generally incluSive; cf. Kāsikā on
भीस्म्योर्हेतुभये P.I.3.68 भयग्रहृणमुपलक्षणार्थे
विस्मयोपि तत एव l as also मन्त्रग्रहणं तु च्छन्दस
उपलक्षणार्थम् Kāś. on II. 4.80. The
verbalforms ofलक्षु and उपलक्षु as also
the wOrds लक्षयितुम्, लक्षणीय, लक्षित etc.
pOSseSS the sense of *expressing
the meaning nOt primarify, but
SecOndarily by indication or
implication*.
`उपलिङ्गिन् a substituted word element 3
cf. देशवः इति सुखनाम । शिध्यतेः वकारः नाम5
क्रूरणः अन्तस्र्थ॒ान्त॒रोपलिङ्गी विभाधितगुणः ।
शिवम् Nir. X. I7.
उपवर्ष an ancient grammarian and
MimārihSaka believed tO hawe been
the brother of War$a and the
preceptor of Parऐini. He is refer-
red to, many timeS aS an ancient
writer of some V'! ttigranthas.
उपश्लेष immediate contact, as for
instance, of one word with another;
: cf. शब्दस्य च शव्देन व्केीन्येाभिसंबन्धो भवितु-
jं मर्हति अन्यदत उपश्ठप्रात् । M.Bh. on VI.
ं_1.72. Thc wOrd उपाश्लिष्ट is also
"found in the Mahabhāsya in the
Sa.m e COimtext,•
उपसंख्यान mcntion, generally of the
type of the annexation of some
wOrds tO WOrdS alrcady givcn, or
of SOme limiting C()nditions or
additions tO what has bcen already
Stated. The wOrd iS oftcn found
at the end Of thc statements made
by the Vārttikakār:u on thc stitras
of Pārjini.; cf. P.L. 1.29 Vārt.. 1;
I.1.36 Vart. 3 ctc. The words
वाच्य and चत्तव्य are also similarly
used.,The wOrd is found similarly
üScd in thc Mahābh:igya also vcry
frequently.
उपसंग्रह iriclusion ofSOmcthing, which
is_ not dircctly mcrationed; cf.
प्रसिद्धद्द्युपसंग्रहार्थमेतत्Kā$.on P.I.3.48,also)
इतिकरणं एर्वेविधानामप्यन्येधामुपसंग्रइार्थम् iKi$.
On P. VII[.4.65.
उपस्सँयोग् (!)union; cf.नामारध्यातयोस्तु कर्मोप-
संयोगद्येोतका भवन्ति preposition$ are
SignS tO shOW that such a umion
with anOthcr sensc has occurred
in the casc Of the nOun or werb to
which they are prefixed, Nir. I.3.;
(2) additiOn ; cf. अक्रियमाणे हि संशाग्रहणे
गरीयानुपसंयोगः कर्तव्यः स्यात् M.Bh. on P.
IW. 2 21.Wārt, 2.
उपसंहृत drawn close; cf.ओोष्टी दूपसंहृततरौ
T. Pr• II.14. The ro¢)t उपसंहृ is
पूsed jn,thg, $ense of finishing in
thae Māhābhāgya; cf. येनैव यत्नैर्नेश्कं
वर्ण उचार्यते विच्छिंने वर्ण उपसंहृत्यै तमन्यमुर्पा



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-097.png}}}}}}

उपस्समस्त
81
&
उपस्
दाय द्वितीयः प्रयुज्यते तथा तृतीयस्तथा चतुर्थः ।
M.l*h. on P.I.4. 109 Vārt. 6.
उपस्समस्त compounded together,join-
ed together by Speciai grammatical
connection called समास; cf. न केवल;
पथिशब्दः स्त्रियां बर्तते । उपसमस्तस्तर्हि वर्तते
M. Bh. ora VHI.1.1. Vārt. i18.
उपसर्ग prepOsition, prefix. The
word उसपर्ग Origirially tmean t
only * a prefixed word ?; cf. सेोपसर्गेषु
नामसु R. Pr. XWi. 38. '|! he word
becatme technically applied by
ancient Sanskrit Gratmrmarians to
the wOrdS प्र, परा, अप, सम् etc.
which are always used along
with a verb or a verbal deriva-
tive Or a nOun showing a werbal
activity ; cf. उपसगाँ: क्रियायेोगे P. I.
4.59. ?'hese prefixes arc necessari-~
iy compounded with the follow-
ing word unleSS the latter is a,
werbal form; cf. कुगतिप्रादयः P. II.
2.l8. Although they are not
compoumded with a werbal form,
these prepositions are used in
juxtaposition with it; sometimes
they are fonnd detached from the
werbal form eve1h wi{h the inter-
vention Of Orae vvord or more.
The prefixeS are inStrumental in
changing the meaning 9f the root.
Some Scholars like Sākatayana
hold the view that separated from
the roots, prefixes do not cxpress
any specific sense as ordinary
wOrds expreSS, while scholars
like Gargya hold the view that
prefixes do express a sense e. g.
प्र means beginning or प्रारम्भ; cf.
न निर्बद्धा उ॒पसगां अर्थान्निराहुरेिति शाकटायनः ।
नामाख्यातयोस्तु कर्मोपसंयेोगद्येोतका भवन्ति ।
उच्चावचाः पदार्था भवन्तीति गाग्र्यः । तद्य एषु
पदार्थः तं नामाख्यातयोरर्थविकरणम्
Nir. I. 8. It is doubtful, however,
which wiew Pāmini himself held.
In his Atmanepada tOpic, he haS
mentioned some specific roots
|11
as posSeSSing Some Specific senses
when preceded by some specific
prefixes (see P. I. 3.20, 24, 25,
40, 4], 46, 52, 56, etc.), which
implies possibly that roots thf2m-
Selves possess warious senses, while
|prefixeS are simply instrumental
in indicating or showing them.
On the other hand, in the topic
of the KarmapravacaniyaS,the same
words प्र, परा etc. which, however,
are not termed Upasargas for the
time being, althOugh they are
cailed NipātaS, are actuaally aSSign-
ed SOme specific senses by Pānini.
The Vārttikakara has defined
उपसर्ग as क्रियाविद्देट्रे'श्रक उपसर्ग: P. I.
3. I. Vart 7, leaving it doubtfuI
whethcr the उपसर्ग or prefix posses-
Ses an independent sense which
modifies the sense of the root,
or without pOSSeSSing any inde-
pendent sense, it shOws oraly the
modified sense of the root which
also is poS8esSed by the root.
Bhart!rhari, Kaiyata, and their
folloWerS including NāgeŚa havs
emphatically giwen the wiew that
not Only prefixes but Nipā tas,
whi lh include प्र, परा and others
aS Upasargas as well as Karma-
pravacaniyaS, do not denote any
Sense, but they indicate it; they
are in fact द्योतक and not व्चाच्चश्क.
For details see Nir. I. 3, Vākya-
|padtya II. 190, Mahābhāśya on
' Î. 3.1• Vart. 7 and Pradipā' and
Uddyota thereon. The Rk Prā-
tiśakhya has discussed the ques-
tion in XII. 6-9 where, as
explained by the commentator,
it is stated that prefixes express a
sense along with rootS or nouns
to which they are attached. It
is not clcar whether they convey
the sense by denotation or indi-
cation, the words चीचक in stanza



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-098.png}}}}}}

उपसर्गद्योत्यता 82
6 and विशेषकृत् in stanza, 8 being in
favour of the former and thट्रे
latter views respectively:; cf उपसग्ाीं
र्विशतिरर्थवाचकाः सहेलराभ्यामितरे निपाता: ;
क्रियावाच्चकभाख्यातमुपसर्गे विशेष्षकृत्, सत्त्वाभि-
धायकं नाम निपातः पादपूरणः R. Pr. XII.
st. 6 and 8. For the list of upa-
sargas see R. Pr. XII. 6, T.
|Pr. I. 15, W. Pr. VI.24, and S.
K. on P. I. 4.60.
उपसर्गद्योत्यता the view or doctrine
that prefixes, by themselves, dO
not posSess any SenSe, but they
indicate the sense of the verb or
noun with which they are conne--
cted. For details See Wakyapadीya
II. 165-206; also vol. VII. pages
370-372 of Vyākarana Mahābhā-
इya ed. by the D. E. Society,
Poorha.
उपसर्गयोग connection with a prefix;
joining of the prefix. Some
scholars Of grammar hold the view
that the Upasarga is prefixed tO
the root and then the werbal
form is arrived at by placing the
desired terminations after the
root, while others hold the oppo-
site view; cf. पूर्वं ध|ठा॒तुः साधनेनोपयुल्यते॒
पश्चादुपसर्गेण । अन्ये तु पूर्वं धातुरुपसर्गेण युज्यते
पश्चात्साधनेनेत्याद्दुः Siradeva's Paribhā-
sāvgtti Pari. 131, !32; cf. alsO
wol. VII. Mahābhāgya edited by
the D. E. Society, Poona, pages
871-372.
उपसर्गवाद a treatise on upaSargaS, by
Harikrः$na.
उपसर्गविचार a treatise on upaSargaS
by Gadādhara Cakrawartin..
उपसर्गविवरण a short anonymOuS work
on the nature of upasargas or
prepOsitiOns explaining their mean-
ingS with illuStrations.
[रेत a treatise Orn upasargas by
|Bharatamalla in the ' Sixteenth
Century A.D.
उपसर्जन (I)
उपास्थित
adjective, SubOrdinate
member which does not get the
treatment of the principal mem-
ber, e. g. गोस्त्रियेोरुपसर्जनस्य P. I.2.48, '
अनुपसर्जनात् P.IV.1.14 संज्ञेोपसर्जनीभूतास्तु न
सवॉदयः S. K. on P. I. 1.29, also
|P.I.1.27 Vart.2;(2) a word referred
to by the wOrd which iS put in the
mominative case in rules of Pānini
|prescribing compounds, e. g. क्रष्ट
(in the compound कष्टश्रितः) which is
referred to by the word द्वितीया in
the rule द्वितीया श्रितातीत० P.II.I.24
which prescribes the Acc. Tat-
puru$a compound. ThcSc wOrds
are given the first place in a com-
pound; cf. प्रथमानिर्दिष्टं समास उपसर्जनम्
P.I.2.43, उपसर्जनं पूर्वम् ]P.II.2.30; (3) a
word which has one and the Same
case whera a compound in thc
different cases is $hown aS diSSolw-
ed, e. g. the word कोश!म्बी in the
cOrmpound निष्क्रोशाम्बिः which kceps
itS ablative casc when , the com-
pounds , निष्क्रीशाम्विम्, .. निष्क्रीशाम्विना,
निष्कौशाम्बये etc. are ' dissolved; cf.
एकविभक्ति चापूर्वैनिपाते P.I.2.44.
उपस्सृश्ट attended with a prcfix, gene-
rally uscd in connectior1 with
roots; e.g. क्रुधद्रुहोरुपस्सृष्टयेोः कर्म P.I.4.38
where the Kā$iki has explaincd
the word as उपसर्गसंश्चद्ध.
उपस्&कार introduction of the neccsSary
changes in the wording of the
ba$e, such as eliSion, or addition
Or Substitution of a letter or letterS
aS caused by the addition of
suffixes.
उपस्थान occurrence; presence by wir-
tue of anuvrtti i. e. recurrence or
continuation of a word in the
|rules that follow; cf. शब्देन चाप्यधिकृतेन
कोन्यो व्यापारः शक्येावगन्तुमन्यदतो योगे येोग
उपस्थानात् M.Bh. on 1.3.1 J. Vārt. '1.
उपस्थित a word used rather techni-
cally in the sense of the word इति



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-099.png}}}}}}

उपहित
83
उभयगाति
which is used in the Krama and
Other recitals When Wedic reciters
ShOw separately the two words
compOunded togcther by uttering
the compound Word first, then
the Word इति and then the two
cOmpound words, e.g. सुश्लोक ३ इति
सु-श्ठेाक । विभावसो इति विभा-वसो. The
Kāśikā defines the word उपस्थित as
समुदायादवच्छिद्य पदंयेन स्वरूपे अवस्थाप्यते तद्
उपस्थितम् । इतिशब्दः । Kāś..on VI.1.129.
The Rk-PrātiŚākhya explains the
word rather differently, but in the
Same cOntext.The wordafter which
इति is placed is called upasthita e.g.
the word बाहू in बाहू इति or विभावसो
in विभावसो इति as contrasted with
स्थित i. e. the word without इति e.g.
ई or विभावसो, as also contrasted
with स्थितेोपस्थित i. e. the whole word
विभावसो इति विभाऽवसेो which is also
called संहित or मिलित; (2) occurring,
prgsent; cf कायैकालं संज्ञापरिभाषम् । यत्र
कायै तत्रोपास्थितं द्रष्टव्यम् । Pār, Sek. Pāri.3.
उपहित (1) with, preceded by; e. g-
, दीर्घोपहित, ह्रस्वेोपहित; (2) sticking tð,
* connected with, *उपश्लेषित'; cf.IDurga
on Nir.V.12;(3) coming to be'plac-
ed near Or in.juxtaposition with the
preceding word; cf. अावेोन्तोपहितात् सतः
|R. Pr. II.15.
उपांशुठ lit. inaudible. The word is
explained in the technical sense
as the first place or stage in the
utterance of speech where it is
perfectly inaudible although pro-
" duced; cf. उपांशु इति प्रथमं वाच्चः स्थानम्
Com. on T. Pr. XXIII. 5.
उपाचरित (1) sibilation; substitution
of a sibilant letter for a visarga.;
cf. प्ळुतोपाचरिंते च R. Pr. XI.19; (2)
name of the Sarihdhi in which a
visarga ' is changed into a sibilant
letter; cf. सर्वत्रैवोपाचरितः स संधिः R.
Pr• IV.14 which corresponds to
Pamini WIII. 3.18 and 19.
| उपाचार change of Visarga into s (स्);
sibilation of Visarga, e. g. ब्रह्मणः
पतिः = ब्रह्मणस्पति:. The words उ५न्चार
and उपाचरित are found used in the
same sense by ancient Grammari-
ams. See उपन्चार; cf. समापाद्यं नाम वदन्ति
घत्वं, तथा णत्वं सामवशांश्च सन्धीन् ।...उपाचारं
लक्षणतश्च सिद्धम्, अाचायीँ व्यालिशाकल्यगाग्यीँः
R.. Pr. VIII.12.
उपादान hypothesis,
acceptance.
उपाव् |lit. near the first; second.
उप्राधि condition, limitation, determi-
<८ nant, qualification: e.g. न हि उपाधे-
रुपाधिर्भवति, विशेषणस्य वा विशेषणम् M.Bh.
on I.3.2 as alSO on W.1.16; cf. also
इह येो विशेष उपाधिर्वेौंपादीयते द्योत्ये तरिंमस्तन
भवितब्यम् l M.Bh. on III.1.7.
उपान्त lit. near the last; penultimate.
The word is generally found used
in the Cāndra Vyākaratna.
उपtन्त्य see उपान्त; the word is gene-
rally found used in the grammars
of Sākatayana and Hemacandra.
उपोच्तम lit.ome near or before the last*
the term iS generally used in con-
nection with wOrds having two or
more syllables, where it means
the vowel before the last (vowel);
cf. उपेोत्तमं रिति P. WI.1. 217 and
योपधाद्गुरूपोत्तमाद्वुञ् P.V.1.132 where
the writer of the Kaśikद्वे explains it
as त्रिप्रभृतीनामन्त्यमुत्तमं तस्य समीपमुपोत्तमम् ।
giving रमणीय and वसनीय asexamples
where the long ई is upottama; " cf.
alsoT.Pr. XI.3. andNir.I.19 where
the word refers to the third out of
the four feet of the werse.
उपेोद्वलक a supporting assertion or
statement;cf. तस्यैवेोपेोद्वलकमेतत् M.Bh.•
on T.2.64. Vārt. 38-39.
उभयगति both the alternatives; both
the senses; double signification; cf.
उ॒भयगतिरिह भवति P.I.1.23,Vārt.4,E'ari.
\ Sek, Par. 9 where the word ubhaya
presumptiOn,



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-100.png}}}}}}

उभयतस्पाशा
84
उरुत
refers to both the senses-the ordi-
nary one ( अकृत्रिम } and the techni-
cal one ( बृंकृत्रेिम्)--~- e.g. the riःeat1ings
( i ) nurmeral, and ( ii ) ९VOrds वहु, ग[ण
etc. of the word संस्,.या.
उभयतश्पाशा presentir1g a difÎद्वculty in
both the ways; cf' सैष्धा उभयतश्पाशा
रज्ञ्जुर्भवति M.Bh. on VH.1.68.
उभयतेोभाष lit. Speaking Or shO wing
bOth the padas or voices; possess-
ed Of both the padas viz. the
ParaSmaipada aiad the Ātmane-
pada• The wOrd is found cOrmmon-
ly used in the Dhātupātha of
Painini.
उभयत्र im both the wayS lit. in both
the places; cf. उभयत्र च P. I. }. 44
W* rt. 22, The Word उभयत्रविभाष्प्रा is
`used in grammar referring to the
option ( विभाष्ञा) which is प्राप्ति as also
अप्राप्त; cf.M.Bh.on P.i| .l.26 Vārt.22.
उभयथा in both the ways (in the case
Of an option, Of cOurse) ; cf. छन्दस्थु-
भयथा P.III.4.117 Where the word
ubhayathā refers to both the alter-
native uS€S e.g. S:àirvadhāttuka and
Ārdhadhātuka ;so also vidhiliià] and
ā$irlih; cf. KāŚikā on P.III. 4.] 17.
The term ubhayathā is described
aS Synonym0uS with *bahulam? or
*anyatarasyārih' or *vā* orः *ekcxām?;
cf. बहुलमन्यतरस्यामुभयथा वा एकेष्त्रामिति M.
Bh. On P.I. l .44; Vārt. 19; cf. also
अध्यूथ्यूतेधूभयृथ॒ा स्मरन्ति R.Pr.XV.8.
उभयदीघों a . hiatus or a stop which
occurS between two long-vOwelled
syllables; the terrm उभयदीधीँ is a
cQnventiOnal term in the Prāti-
śa]khya literaturc. The term उभय-
ङेस्वा is Similarly used in conncction
with short vowels.
उभयनियम a restriction understood in
both the ways; cf. सिद्धं तूभथनियमात्!
उभयनिथमोयम् { प्रकृतिपर एव प्रत्ययेः प्रयेोच्तव्यः,
प्रत्ययपरैव च प्रकृतिरिति । M. Bh. on P.
III.1.2, Vart. 11; cf. also M, Bh.
on WI.2.148.
उभयपद (1 ) double vOice--the Paras-
maipada aā w'cll aS th1e At mane-
pada ; (2) botl1 the wOrds Or
rभ्१e:mberS (in a compOund}; cf.
उभयपदाथैप्रधानेा द्वन्द्वः Kā$ ora P.I.2.57.
उभयपदिन् a root comjugated in both
the Padas; a root tO which
both, the Parasmaipada and the
Atmanepada terriainatiOns are
affixed ; e.g. roOts कॄ., भी, भुन्ट् et C•
उभयप्राप्तेि a case or a a}attcr in which
both the alternatives OcCtur, as for
instance, the genit iv'c casc for thc
subject and the objcct Of a verbal
derivative noun (कृदन्त); cf. उभयप्रातैौी
कर्मणि । उभ्:थेः: प्र{तिः यरििश्मन्म् कॄति सेiश्यभुभय-
प्रiाति: तत्र कर्मप्रेंञ्थव प्टी स्यात्तू न्[ कर्तरि ।
अाश्रयंीं गवां देहः अशेी५i*zक्रेन्{ K:i :. On P.
|II. 3. 66.•
उभयवत् posscssed Cgf bot}1 the kinds
of propcrt1cs ; cf. य इदानीमृभय*धिान् स
तृतीयामार:यां लभते स्वरित इति M.l8la. on
P.1.2.8 i ; cf. alsO उभश्यश्धान् र॑ं ¢रित: V.
Pr.I. [ i 0.
उम् thc augment उ affixcd {O the
last vQwel of' धन्व् by P.VIl.*4.४0;
C•$ठं* अर्श्वे;यत्.
उरष्स्रु tad-affix उर, with u¢{:itta accent
oh thc last vOwcl, :tffixcd to thc
word दन्त whct1 it rcferS tO prQtu-
beratat tecth; cf. t*.V.2.66; c.g.
दन्तुरः t
उरःप्रभृतेि a class of words headed by
the word उ२स॒त् tO whlch the sarma-
sānta afiix क (कपृ ) is addcd, whcrn
thcse wOrds stand at theः cnd of
|Bahuvrihi compourads; cf. व्थूढमुरोस्य
व्थूढोरस्कः:similarly श्रेियसंर्पिष्क्रः, Kāś. on
|i*.V. I. 151-
उरस्य produccd at thc brcast; cf-केन्वि-
देता उरस्यैी R.!'r.I.18, explained b
the c9jभ्1jhentator as श्रेकञ्धिदान्धाथीः एः
ह t,tरवेिसर्जनीर्येी उर:स्थार्नी इच्छन्ति 1
उरुता opcning (of the hole of the
throat); the words , उरुता स्ञ्जस्य are



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-101.png}}}}}}

उरोबृहती 85
used in the sense of *opening of
the glottis? which is described as
a characteristic condition of thc
utterance of a wowel accente(l
grave or अनुदात्त; cf. अायामेो दारुण्यमणुत{
खस्येत्युच्चै; कराणि शब्दस्य | अन्ववसर्गेौ मादैव •
मुरुता खस्येति नीचैःकराणि शब्दस्य M.Bh.
on नीचैरनुदात्तः P. I. 2.30; cf. T. Pr.
on XXII. 9, 10.
उरोबृहती a variety of the Vedic metre
बृहती in which the first pāda com-
sists of twelve syllables and the
|rest of eight syllables; cf. R. Pr.
XWI. 33.
उव् ( उवङ् ) substitute for the voWc!
उ belonging. tO the Vikarafa ॐ, tO
roots and to the noun भ्रू unde1'
certain gonditions; cf अन्चि श्रुधातुभ्रुवां
य्वोरियङ्कुदङौ P. VI. 4.77.
उवट also ऊव्श्ञ्ट or ऊअट a reputcd
Kaā$mirian scholar and writer who
waS the Son ofWajra!a. He w rote
many learned comamentaries, some
of which are known as Bhā$yas.
Some of his iimportant wOrks are
RkpratiŚākhyabha$ya, Vājasaneyi.
pratisākhyabhā$ya, V*jaSaneyisa-
rihhitabhā$ya, Vcdārthadip1kā etc.
उष्णिह्	(उष्णिक्) name of the second of
the main 'severa Vedic metres
which are knOWn by the name
प्रजापतिच्छन्दस्. The U$hik metre corl-
sists of 28 syllables divided into
three pādas of 8, 8 and 12 sylla •
bles. Iit has got rmany varieties
such as पुरज्उष्णिहूं, ककुभ्रुक्ष and Others;
for details see R. Pr. XVI 20-26.
उस् (1) substitute for झि,ending of the
third perS.plu., in the perfect tense
and in the present tense in the
2as6 of the roots विद् and ब्रूञ्, e.g.
विदुः and अाहुः cf. P. II1. 4. 82-84 ;
(2) substitute जुस् (उस्) for झि in the
potential a1ad " the benedictive
moodS, aS also after the aOrist
sigra सु and after roots of the third
ऊत्
conjugation, rootS ending in अI
and the root विदु, e. g. पचेयुः भूयासुः
अकार्षुः, अविभयुः अंदु;, अञ्चिदुः, etc.; cf.
Kã$. on III.4.l08-1l2.
उस्सि Unādi afiix उसू applied to the
root जन् to form जनुसू; cf. जनेनरुसिः Ut?.
stitra. 272.
उ
ऊ long vOWel ऊ, उ being the short
vowel.
ऊक् augment ऊ added to the अभ्यास or
the reduplicative syllable ofthe root
पट् which is doubled before the
afflx क which is used instead of घ
( घञ्ञर्थे कः ); e.g. पाटूपट:ः.
ऊक krt affix ऊक added to the root
जाग्गृ to form the word जागरूक; cf.
जागुरूक; P. III.2.165.
ऊडू fern• affix ऊ prescribed after
masculine nouns ending in the
vOwelऊ and denoting a human be-
ing as alsO after some other specific
masculine bases; cf. ऊडुतः P. IV.
l.66 and the following stātras. e.g-
कुरूः, पंङ्पू:, श्वश्रूः, करभेारूः, भद्रबाहूः etc-
ऊट् also उट् āgama ऊ and उ prescrib-
ed after the rcotS तृ and वृ before
the affix तृन् or तृच्च e. g. तरुतारं तरूतारं
बा रथानाम्ः वरुतारं वरूंतारं वरूत्रीः ; cf KāŚ.
on P. VII,2.$4.
ऊष्ट्छ् (1) sarंhprasārana vowel ऊ sub-
stituted for the व् of वाह् umder cer-
tain conditions e.g., ऊढः, cf. वाह
ऊँट् P. VI. 4.132; (2) substitute ऊ
for बृ before certain affixes; e. g.
द्रूतः, ' द्यूत्वा, जīर्तिः, तूर्तिः etc. cf. च्छ्वोः
शूडनुनासिके च P. VI.4.19, 20.
उiत (l) long wOWel ऊ which cannot
be combined by rules of safiadhi
with the following vowel when it
comes at the end of the forms of the
dual number; e. g. साधू अत्र etc.; cf.
ईदूदेद्विवचनं प्रग्ह्यम् P. I.1.1-1; as · श्also



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-102.png}}}}}}

उत्व 86
ऋतत्तन्त्रं
इद्द्दूतौ च सप्तम्यर्थे I.1.19; . (2), long
vðwel ऊ substituted for the short उ
of the root गोह् before an affix be-
ginning with a vowel e. g• निग्गूहति ;
cf. ऊदुपधाया गोहः P. VI.4.89.
उnत्व substitution ofthe long wowel ऊ;
see M. Bh. on P. I.1.12, VI.! .85.
ऊदित् marked with the mute indica-
tory letter ऊ; cf. स्वरतिसूतिसूयतिधूङ्ख्छूदितो
वा । prescribing the addition of the
augment इ optionally in the caSe
of ऊदित् roots P. VII. 2.44.
ऊन deficient, wanting; often in com-
pQunds e. g.,पादोन, द्यून, एकोन; cf. |!
व्यूहैः संपत्सर्मीक्ष्येोने R. Pr. VIII. 28; |
एकेद्यूनाधिकुा, सैव नित्र॒दूनाधिका भुरिक् R.
Pr. XVII. I•
ऊध्वैबृहती ( विराज्ञ ) a variety of the
metre Bfhati which haS three
pādas of twelve syllables each; cf.
त्रैयेो द्वादशका यस्याः सा होर्ध्वबृहती विराट् R.
|Pr.. XVI[.33.
ऊष्मसध name of a cOmbination or
संधि where a visarga iS changed
into a breatlaing ( ऊष्मन् ). It has
got twO varieties faamed व्यापन्न
where the visarga is chariged into a
breathing as for instance in यस्ककुभः,
while it is called विक्रiन्त (passed
over) where it remains unchanged
as for instance in य: ककुभः, य: पञ्च;
cf. R. Pr. IV. 1 l.
ऊह modification of a Word, in a
Vedic Mantra, so aS to suit the
context in which the mantra is to
be utilised, generally by change of
case affixes; adaptation Of a rman-
tra; cf. ऊहः , खल्वपि । न सर्वेर्लिङ्र्गैर्न च
सवाँभिविंभक्तिभिर्वेदे मन्त्रा निगदिताः। ' ते च
अवश्यं यज्ञगतेन यथायथं विपरिणमयितव्याः ।
M. Bh. On P. 1.1 Ahnika l.
ऋ
ऊयदि a class of words headed by ! ऋरं fourth v9wel in Pafini's alphabet;
the wo:rds ऊरी उररी etc. ending in
the taddhita affix च्ञ्वि, which are
given the designation गति provided
they are related to a verbal acti-
wity, and as a reSult, which can be
compounded with kFdanta words
ending in त्वं', तुम्, ctc. cf ऊरीकृत्य,
ऊरीकृतम् etc.; Kā$ on P, I.4.61.
ऊल tad. affix applied to the words
pOssesSed Of long and protracted
varieties and lookcd upon as
cognate ( सवर्ण ) with लठ which has
no long type in the grammar of
Pātभूini; cf. R..Pr.I,9; V.Pr.V]III. 3.
(2) uraidi suffix ऋ applicd to the
root स्था to form •the word स्थू;
e. g. सव्येष्टा सारथिः ; cf. सन्ये स्थश्छन्दसि
Um Sü, II. 101.
वात arad बल in the sense of *unable | ऋकार the ietter क्र with its 18 varieties
to bear'; e. g- वादूलः, बळूळ; see Kāś.
on V. 2.122.
उष्मन् aspiration letters, spirants call-
ed breathings also: the narme is
given tO letters Or sOunds produced
with unintonated breath through
an open pOsision of the mouth; cf.
विवृतमूष्मणाम् M. Bh, on P. I. i.10
|rmade up of thc ह्रस्व, दीर्ध, प्ट्छ्त, and
सानुनासिक varicties and characteriz-
ed by the thrce accents. ऋ and ल
are lOOked upon as cQgnate in
Paraini?s grammar and hence, ऋ
CQuld be lookcd upora as possessed
Of 30 varietics including 12 varic-
ties of लठ.
Vārt, 3• The wOrd refers to the !| ऋच्तन्त्र a work consisting of five chap-
letters शु, क्षु, सु, हूं, visarga, jihvāmtā-
lÎya, upadhmāniya and anusvāra;
cf ऊष्मा वायुस्तत्प्रधाना वण ऊष्माणः R.. Pr.
':!.12: cf. also T. Pr. I.10.
terS containing in all 287 stitras. It
COvers the same topics as the Prāt-
i$ākhya wOrks and is lOoked upon
as one of the Prātiśākhya works of



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-103.png}}}}}}

ऋकप्रातिशाख्य
87
ऋ
the Sāma Veda. Its authorship is
attributed toSākagāyana according
to Nageśa, while औोदेित्राज is held as
itS author by Some, and कात्यायन by
others. It bearS a remarkable
similarity to Panini's A$ं[ādhyāyi
especially in topics concerning cO-
alescence and changes of सू and न्
to ष्ञ् and ण् respectively. It cannot
be definitely said whether it pre-
ceded or followed Pānini's work. .
ऋक्प्रातिशाख्य one of the Pratiśākhya
works belonging to the Āśvalāyana
Sākhā of the'Rgट्रेVeda. The work
available at present, appears to be
not a very old one,possibly written
a century or so after Pānini's time.
It is pOSSible that the wOrk, which
is available, is based upon a few
ancient Prātiśākhya works which
are lost., Its authorship is attribu-
ted to Saunaka.
metrical one and consits of three
bookS or Adhyayas, each Adhyāya
, being made up Of six Patalas or
chapters. It is written, just as the
other Pratiśākhya works, with a
view to give directions for the
proper recitation of the Veda. It
has gOt a Scholarly commentary
written by Uwata and another one
by Kumāra who is also called
Vi$numitra. See अाश्वलायनप्रातिशाख्य.
ऋगयनादि a class of words headed
by ऋग्गयन to which the taddhita
afiix अण॒ ( अ ) is afiixed in the
sense of'* produced therein * ( तत्र
भव: ), or * explanatory of * ( तस्य
व्याख्यानः ); cf. ऋगयन भवः, ऋगयनस्य
व्याख्यानेो वा अार्गयनः पादव्याख्यानः,
औपनिषदः, शैक्ष: etc. Ka$. on P. IV.
3.73.
ऋग्विराम verSe-pauSe cqual to 3
mātrākālas or three mātrā units.
cf. ऋग्विराम: पदविरामो विवृत्तिविरामस्समान-
पदविवृात्तिविरामः त्रिमात्रेो द्विमात्र एकमात्रोर्धमात्र
The work is a |
अानुपूब्र्येण T. Pr. XXII. 13. Accord-
ing to Kk. Tantra it consists of
twO 1mट्टātr3,S.
ऋत् short vowel ऋ. before which the
preceding wowel is optionally left
as it is, i. e. without coalescence
and shortened also if long; cf.
ऋत्यक: P. VI. 1.128.
ऋत्वत् possessed of short ऋ; cf. रीगृत्वतः
संयेोगार्थम् P. VII. 4.90. Vārt. 1.
→、 → →
ऋदेित् possessed of the mute indica-
tory lettcr ऋ, signifying in the
Grammar of Panini the preven-
tion of the shortening of the long
vowel in the reduplicated syllable
of the Causal Aorist form of
roots which are marked with it;
e. g. अशशासत् अबबाधत्, अययाचत्
85•
etc. cf. नाग्लोपिशास्वृादिताम् P. VII.4.2.
ऋश्यादि a class of words headed by
the word ऋन्ट्य to which the tad-
dhita affix क is added in the four
senses prescribed in the rules IV.
2.67-70; e. g. ऋश्यकः, न्यग्रोधकः etc.
cf. P. IV. 2.80.
ऋषिच्छन्दस् the metre of the Vcdic
seers. The seven metres-गायत्री,
उष्णिक्, अनुष्टुप्, बृहती, पङ्त्ति, त्रिष्टुप् and
जगती consisting respectively ' of 24,
28, 32, 36, 40, 44 and 48 syllables
are narned त्र्*षिच्छन्दसू as contrasted
with the metres दैव, प्राजापत्य and
अासुर्, which, when combiraed to-
gether, make the metres of the
Vedic Seers. For details see R.
|Pr. XVI. 1.5.
ऋष्यप्णु taddhita affix अण् in the sense
Of *descendant' applied to names
of ancient sages, by the rule
ऋष्यन्धकवृष्णिकुरुभ्यश्च P. IV. 1.114;
e. g. वासिष्ठ:, वैश्वामित्रः.
|नष्ठ
ऋ long wariety of the vowel ऋ.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-104.png}}}}}}

ऋदन्त
ऋदन्त (roots) eneवँing in ध्छ् िwhich
have the wowel ऋछ् changed intO
इर् by the rule ऋत इद्धातेाः P. VII.
1.100; e. g. क्रिरति, गिलति.
लठ
लठ short wOwel ल taken to be a
cognate of ऋ, and deScribed aS a
wocalic form of the letter ल.
लट्रदित् (roots) marked with the mute
indicatory letter ल, which take
the substitute अ ( अङ् ) for च्लि, the
. Wikarat]a of the aorist; e. g.
अपत॒त्, अशकत् cf. पुषादिद्युताद्य॒लदितः
परस्मैपदेधु P. III. 1.55.
ए
प्ष् diphthong vowel ए made up of अ
and इ, and hence having कण्ठताळु-
स्यान as itS place of origin. It has
mO shOrt form according to Pānini.
In cases where a short vowel as a
Substitute is prescribed for it in
grammar, the vowel इ is looked
पृpora as itS short form. Patafijali
in his Mahābhāgya has observed
that fÓllowers of the Satyamurgrj
and Rāraāyamīya branches of the
Sārmaveda have short ए ( ऐएँ ) in
their Samaveda recital and has
given सुजाते अश्वसूनुते, अध्वर्यो अद्रिभिः
सुतम् as illustratiohs; cf. M. Bh. on
I. I•48; as also the article on.
एष्क (1) Singular number, ekavacana:
cf. नो नौ मे मदर्थे त्रिद्येकेषु. V. Pr. II.3;
the term is found ' used in thi$
sense of singular number in the
Jainendra, Sākatāyana and Haina
grammarS; ( 2 X single ( vowel )
Substitute (एकादेश) for two (vowels);
cf एकः पूर्वपरयोः P.'VI. 1. 84; अथैकमुर्भे
T. Pr X. 1; ( 3 ) many, a certain
number; (used in pl. in this sense),
१2
53j
88 एकद्रव्य
cf. इह न्चेत्येके मन्यते M. Bh. on P. I.
4.2 { •
एककर्मक transitive verbs having one
object, as contrasted with द्विकर्मक;
cf kātantra IV. 6. 62
एकतिड् possessed of One verb; given
aS a, definition of a sentence; cf.
एकतिङ् P.II.1 • l. Vंirt 10, explained
by Patafījali as एकतिङ् वाक्यसञ्ज्ञं भवतीति
वत्तब्यम् । ब्रूहि ब्रूहि ।
एकदिक् in the same directiori, given
as the sense of thc tad. affix तस्म् by
|Panini; cf. तेनैकदिक् l तसिश्च । P. IV.
? 3. 1 12, 1 13.
एकदेश a |part or a pOrtion of the
whole;cf. एकदशविकृतमनन्यवत् Pari-Sek.
|Pari 37; also M. Bh. Siwa-Stitra 2
Vārt 4; एकदेशेानुवर्तते M.Bh. 9n P.VI.
1 - 93 Vart. 5; cf. als० पदेकदशानपि
तान् प्रतीयात् R.Pr. IX. 16.
एकदेशिन् ( a thing or a substance )
composed of partS; cf thc tcrm
एकदेशिसमास or एकदशितत्पुरुष्प्र, used in
connection with compoumds of
words such as पूर्व, पर and others
with words showing the constituted
whole ( एकदेशिन् ) prescribed by the
rule पूर्वपराधरोत्तरोमकदेशिनैकाधिकरणे P. II.
2. 1 ; (2) a partisan; cf. the word
सिद्धान्त्येकदेशिन् uscd often by com-
rmentatOrS.-
एकदेशविकृतन्याय the maxim that * a
thing iS callcd or takcn as that
very thing although it is lacking
in a part,' stated, bricfly as एकदश-
विकृतमनन्यवत् Pari. Sek. Pari. 37. The
maxim is given in all the,different
SchOOls of grammar; cf. Sak Pari.
I7 ; Candra Pari. l5, Kat. Par. Vr.
l, Jai!a. Par.Vj'.1 1, Hem.Pari.7 etc.
、
एकदेशानुमति consent to a part of the
whole, admission of one part as
cOrrec2t.
क्भ्व्श्य One and the samae individual
Substance; cf the words एकद्रव्यसम-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-105.png}}}}}}

एकपद
89
एकवाक्य
वायित्व M. Bh. on P. I. 4. 23, एक-
द्रव्याभिधान on P.WIII.1. 51, एकद्रव्येोप-
निवेशिनी given as a definition of संज्ञा
M. Bh. on P. I. 4. 1.
एकपद made up of one word; con-
sisting of one word; cf.' अथवा सन्त्ये-
कपदान्यप्यवधारणाानि । यथा अब्भक्षेो वायुभक्षः ।
अप एव भक्षयति वायुमेव भक्षयति । M.Bh.
first Ahnika; (2) a continuous
word paraphrased as अखण्डपद and
समानपद by commentators; cf.
तेनानन्तरा षष्ठयेकपदवत् V.Pr.II. 18; (3)
ewery individual word: cf. बहु
क्रमेत तस्यैकपदानि निःसृजन् R.Pr.XI.18.
एकपदा made up of a single word; cf.
भवति चैतदकस्मिन्नपि एकवर्ण पदम् एकपदा
ऋक् एकर्च सूत्तमिति । M. Bh. on P.I.
1.21 Vārt. 5; (2) made up of one
foot ( चरण or पाद ); cf. एक एकपदैतेषां०
(R.Pr.XVII.24) explained by the
cornmentator as तेषां चतुणीं पादाना-
मष्टाक्षरादीनां एकः पादः यस्या:सा एण्कपदा ऋन्क्
इत्युच्यते । .
एकपातिन् combined together; cf. R.
Pr. com. एकपातिनः एकीभूतस्य अक्षरस्य
क्रमे ध्रुवमार्षीाँ ळुष्प्यतेः R. Pr. XI. 25, also
XVII.26.
एकभाविन् (vowels) combined by rules
of Sarihdhi; cf. दैक्षप्रवणैकभाविनाम् R. Pr.
VII.22.
एकमात्रिक (1) possessed of one mātra
or rnora; (2) a term used for a
short voWel which measures one
mātrā or mora; cf. एकमात्रेो ह्वस्व:
व्यञ्जनानि च । Ath.Pr.1.60.
एकमुनिपक्ष a view or doctrine pro-
pounded by one of the many
ancient sages or munis who are
believed to be the founders of
a Sāstra; a view propounded
only by Panini, to the exclusion
of Katyāyana and Patafijali;
cf. एकमुनि"क्षे तु अचो ञ्णितीत्यत्राच इति
योर्ग विभज्य...व्यवरिथतविभाष्प्रात्रोत्ता Dur-
ghata-Vrtti I.1.5; see also I.4.24,
II.3.18.
I2
एकयोगा (1) combinatiom of twoStitras
intoone;cf.अथवा एकयेोगः करिष्यते वृद्धिरादै-
जदेङ्गुण इति M.Bh.P.I.1.3,I.4.59,V.2.
25; (2) one and the same Stitra;cf.
एकयेागृनिर्दिष्टानां सह वा प्रवृत्ति:सह वा निवृत्तिः
Pari.Sck.Pari.17; cf.also एकयोगनिर्दि-
ष्टानामप्येकदेशानुवृात्तिर्भवाति P. IV. 1. 27,
Vārt. 2, Pari. Sek. Pari. 39.
एकयोगलक्षण characterized by i.e.
merationed in one and the same
rule; cf. एकयोगलक्षणे तुग्दीधैत्वे M.Bh.
on P. I. 1. 62. Vārt. 10. See also
|M. Bh.on P. VI.1.37.
5वकवचन singular number; affix of
the singular number in Panini's gra-
mmar applied to nOun-bases ( प्राति-
पदिक) and roots when the sense of
the singular number is tO be conw-
eyed; the singular sense can be of
the forrm of an individual or colle-
ction or genus. The word एकवचन
in the technical sense of singular
mumber is found uSed in the
|Prāti$ākhyas and Nirukta alsO.
एकवत्त्व Or एकवद्भाव use or treatment
of the plural sense as if it is singu-
lar; cf. एकवद्भावेोऽनर्थकः । समाहारैकत्वात्
|M.Bh. on II. 4.12. Vārt. 5.
एकवणै (a pada) made up of a single
letter; " cf. एकवर्ण पदम् अा, उ इति;
commentary on R.Pr. X.2; cf.
also V.Pr.IV. 144-145 where एकवर्ण
is defined as एकप्रयत्ननिर्वत्र्य capable
of being produced with a single
effort. Panini gives the term अप्टक्त
to an afiix made up of one single
letter; cf.अपृक्त एकाळु प्रत्ययः P.T.2.41.
एकवाक्य an expression giving one
idea, either asingle or a composite
one. A positive statement and its
negation, SO alsO, a general rule
and its exception are looked upon
as making a singlc sentence on
account of their mutual expectancy
| even though they be sometimes
| detached from each other; cf.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-106.png}}}}}}

एकविभाते
90
एकशेष
विदशस्थमपि सदेकवाक्यं भवति M. Bh• Of]
II I. 4. 67; cf. also निष्वधव्ाक्यानामपि
निषेध्यविशेषाकाङक्षत्वाद्विध्येकवाक्यतयैव अन्वयःl
तत्रैकवाक्यता पर्युदासन्यायेन l संश॒शाख्त्रंरृंय तु
कार्यकालपक्षे न पृथेग्वाक्याथैबांध: l Par. Sek•
on Pari. 3. Such sentences are, in
fact, two sentenceS, but, tO awoid
the'fault of गैौरव, caused by वाचयर्भेद,
grammarians hiold them tO be
cornposite single sentences.
एकविभाति a pada having the Same
case in the various disSolutionS of
the compound wOrd; e• g. the
word कौशाम्बी in the compOu nd
word निष्कौशाभ्यिः, which Stands Only
in the ablative case कौशाम्ब्या:, alth-
ough the word निष्क्रान्त, Which Stands
for the word निसू, could be used in
many cases. The wOrd नियतश्विभक्तिक
is also used in the Same SemSe•
single vपृtti or gloSS On the
Vedic as well as classical portiOnS
of grammar. Puru$ottamadeva has
used this term in his Bhāंāv[tti
to contrast his Vrtti (भाष्प्रावृत्ति) with
the Kaśikāv[tti and the Bhāgav!tti
which deal wjth both the pOrtionS;
cf.अनार्ष इट्रेयकवृत्तावुपयुक्तम् Bhā$āv!tti 9n
I. 1. { 6, cf. also Bhāंāv!tti On III.
4. 99, IV. 3.22 and VI.3.20.एकवृस्ति
is possibly used by Puru$Ottama-
deva ॰ in the sense of मुख्यवृति or साधा-
रणवृत्ति i. e. the common chief gloSS
on both the portions.
एकशाब्द a, word having one sense
only, as oppOsed to अनेकशव्द many
words hawing the Same sense or
synonyms which are given in निध॒ण्टु
as also im अमरकोष्प्र; cf. अथ यान्यनेकार्थौनि
८एकशब्दानि तान्यतेोनुक्रमिष्यामः Nir. IV.1.
एकशेष a kind of composite formation
in which only one of the two or
|more words cOmpounded together
subsists, the others being elided;
cf. एकः शिष्यते इतरे निवर्तन्ते, वृक्षुश्च वृक्षश्च
वृक्षौ । Kāśika on सरूपाणामेकशेष्त्र एक- !
विभक्तौ P. I.2.64; cf. also स॒रूपसमुदा-
अधााद्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्वे विभत्तियी विधीयते । एकस्तत्रार्थवान् सिद्धः
समुदायस्य वाचकः ॥| Bhāsāv!tti on P. I.
2.64. There is a dictum of gra- .
mmarians that every individual
object requireS a separate ex-
pression to convey its presence.
Hence, when there is a dual sense,
the word has to be repeated, aS
also the word haS tO be multiplied
when there is a plural sense. In
current spoken language, hOwevcr,
in Such caseS the wOrd iS used
only once. To justify this
single utterance for cOnveying the
sense Of p!urahity, Papini has laid
dow1n a general rulc सरूपाणामेकशेप्प्र
एकविभक्ती and many other similar
rules tO cOwer caScs of plurality not
of one and the S arme objcct, but
plurality ca६used by many Objects,
such aS plurality cauSed by ideaS
going in pairS Or relationS Such
as parents, brothers and sistcrs,
grand-father and grand-sOn, male
and female• For example, see the
words वृक्षश्च वृक्षश्च वृश्क्षी; ईंimiilarly वृश्क्षाः
for mar३y. trees, ' पितरौ , for मातां च
पिता च; देवैौ forदेवी च॒ देवश्रु; cf. als9
the words श्धश्शृरौं, भ्रातर्रi, गाग्र्याँ (for गाग्र्य
and गाग्ययिण),अाश्वाम् (for त्वं च अहं च), यीं
(for स न्च यश्च) and गा|ष्यः fem. अजां fcm.
अश्चाः rmasc. irrespcctive Of thc indi-
widuals bcing some males and
some females. Pāp)ini has dcwoted
10 Stitras to this topic of Fka-
$ega. The Daiva grammar has
completely igtnored this topic.
|Pataiंjali has very critically amd
exhaustivcly discuSSed this topic.
Some critics hold that the topic
of एय्कशेष्भ्र did not exist in the ori-
ginal A${id',yāyi of Pāriini but it
waS interpolated later on, and ad-
duce the long discussion in the
Mahabhāgya especially the Ptirva-
|pakंga thereim, in support of their



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-107.png}}}}}}

एकशेषनिर्देशा 91
एकादैश
argument. Whatever the caSe be,
thc Wārttikakāra has commented
upon it at length; hence, the
addition must have been made
immediately after Pānini, if at alI
there was any. For details see
Mahābhā$ya om I. 1.64 to 73 as al-
sO,Introduetion p. l66-167, Vol.7
of the Mahābhagya published by
the D. E. Society, Poona.
एकशेषनिर्देश statement by subsistence of
one word out of many. The phrase
is wery often used in the Mahā-
bhāsya where the omission of an
individual thing is explained by
Saying that the expression used is
a composite one including the
omitted thing along with the thing
already expressed; cf. एकशेाघनिर्देशेो-
यम् । सर्वादीनि च सर्वादीनि च सर्वादीनि !
M• Bh. On I. l. 27, on I. 1. 59,
I, 2.39, as alsO on I.3.l Vārt. 5,I.4.
10l Vart. 3, II. 1.1. Wãrt. 19 etc.
एकश्रुतेि that which has gOt the Same
accent Or tOne ; uttarance in the
Same tone; monotone. The word
is applied to the utterance of the
vocative noun Or phrase calling a
man from a distance, as also to
that of the vowels or syllables
following a Svarita vowel in the
. Sarihhitā i.e. the continuous utter-
ance 9f Vedic sentences; cf. एकश्रुति
दूरात्संबुद्धौ and the foll. P. I.2.33-40
and the Mahābhāsya thereon. In
|his discussion on I. 2.33 Patafंjali
has given three alternative views
abOut the accent of Ekaśruti sylla-
bles : (a) they pOssesS an ac-
cent between the उदात्त (acute)
and अनुदात्त (grave), (b) they are !
in the Same accent as is posses- !
sed by the preceding vowel, (c)
|Ekaśruti is looked upon as the
sewenth of thc sewen accents;
cf. सैषा ज्ञापकाभ्यामुदात्तानुदात्तयेोर्मध्यमेकश्रुति-
रन्तरालं ह्रियते ।...सत स्वरा भवन्ति l उदत्त:;
उदात्ततरः, अनुदात्तः, अनुदात्ततरः, स्वरितः
स्वरिते य उदात्तः सेोन्येन विशिष्टः, एकश्रुतिः
· सनम: | M. Bh. On P. I. 2.33.
एकस्वर possessed of one vowel,mono-
syllabic; a, term used by Hema-
candra in his grammar for the
term एकाच्छ् of Pānini; cf. अाद्योंश
एकस्वरे Hem.IV.1.2,' which means
the same as एकाचेा द्वे प्रथमस्यP.VI.1.1.
एकहलादि having a single consonarat
at the beginning; " cf. एकहलादौ
पूरायितब्यऽन्यतरस्याम् P. VI.3. 59.
एकहल्मध्य (a vowel) placed between
two single cOnsonants; e.g• the
vowel अ in पच्, रम्, रण्, etc.
एकाक्षर consisting of one single Sylla-
ble ; e.g. स्व, भू, वाञ्च् ट्रैtc.; cf. एकाक्षरा-
त्कृतेो जातेः सप्तम्यां च न तौ स्मृतौ M.Bh.
on P.V.2.115, as also on VI.l .168,
VI.4.161.
एकाच् possessed of a single vowel,
' mofiosyllabic; cf. एकाचेा द्वे प्रथमस्य P.
VI. 1. 1 . →
एकाच्पाद name given by Siradeva
and other grammarians tO the
first p3da of the sixth adhyāya , cf
Pāpirii's Aईंādhyāyī, as it begins
with the 'stitra एकाच्चेो द्वे प्रथमस्य
V][. 1.1 .
एकादेशा a single substitute in the place
of two original unitS; e.g. ए, in the
place of अ and इ,or ओो in the place
6f अ and उ. The āde$aS or Substitu-
tes named पूर्वरूप and पररूप are_lOoked
upon as ekādeśas in Pāhini's
grammar although instead of
them, the omission of the.. latter
and former vowels respectively, is
prescribed in some PrātiŚākhya
works. गुण and वृद्धि are	Sometiraes
single substitutes for single origi•
nals, while they are SOmetimes
ekādeśas for two original vOWel$
e.g. तवेदम्, व्रह्मैौदन:, उपैति, प्राच्र्छति, गाम्,
सीमन्तः etc.; see P.VI•1.87 tO 11 l,•
cf. also A.B'r.II 3.6•



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-108.png}}}}}}

एकादंशास्वर
、 → 92 एणीकृत
एकादेशस्वर an accent prescribed for समर्थ; cr. सुप्सुपा एकार्थम् ( समस्यत ) C.
the single substitute,as, for instance,
by rules like उदात्तस्वरितयोर्यणः स्वरितेो-
नुदाच्तस्य and the following rules P.
VI.2.4, 5 and 6.
एकान्त part, portion. Augments or
Agamas in the Vyākarana Sāstra
are_lOoked upon as forming a. part
||
of the word to which they " are |
attached; cf. अथ यस्यानुबन्ध अासज्यते,
किं स तस्य एकान्तो भवति अाहेस्विदनेकान्तः |
ए॒कान्तस्तत्रैापळुबेधः । M. Bh. on I.3.9,
Vart. •9; cf. also एकान्ताः Par. Sek.
Pari. 5.
एकान्तर separated or intervened by
One single thing, a letter or a |
wOrd; e. g. अां पचासि देवदत्त, where
देवदत्त followS अाम् with one word
पचसि intervening; cf. अाम एकान्तरमाम-
न्त्रितमनन्तिके P.VIII. 1. 55.
एकार the letter ए; looked upon as a
diphthong ( संध्यक्षर ) made up of
the letters अ and इ. The combina-
tion of the two constituent parts
is 5O cOmplete as cannot aIlow any
Qf the two	partS to be indepen:
dently working for sarhdhi or " any
9ther operation with its, adjoinipg | 'यड्हूँ
letter; cf. नाव्यपवृत्तस्य अवयवे तद्विधिर्यथा
द्रव्येषु M. Bh. Siva Stitra 3 Vārt. 9.
एकाथै (1) pOSSeSSed Of one sense as
cOntrasted with बह्वर्थ, द्वयर्थ etc; (2)
Synonym, cf. बहबेो हि शब्दा एकार्था
भुवृन्ति॒ित् !| तद्यथा_इन्द्रः शक्रः पुरुहूतः पुरंदरः ।
M. Bh.. on I. 2. 45 Vart. 9; (3)
POSseSsed of a.. cOmposite sense;
cf. समासे पुनरकार्थानि M. Bh. on II:
1• l Vārt l. The words ऐकाथ्र्य
and एकार्थत्व derived from the word
एकार्थं are often found used in the
sense of *pos$ession of a compo-
' site sense' एकार्थस्य भावः एकार्थता,ऐएकीथ्यै
एकाथैत्वं वा; cf. समासस्यैकार्थत्वत्सिंज्ञाया
, अप्रसिद्धिः M. Bh. on P. I. 2.42
Vārt• 1; cf. also the word एकार्थाँ-
भाव; (4) potent to be connected;
Vy. II. 2.l; (5) analogous समाना-
धिकरण cf. एकार्थे चानकं च l एक: समानः
अर्थ: अधिकरणं यस्य तदेकार्थ समानाधिकरणम्
Herm. Vy. III. 1.22; cf. also एकार्थे
च । Sāk. II. 1.4.
एकाथाँभाव union of meanings; one
of the two ways in which the
word सामथ्र्य is explained; cf. एकार्थीॉ-
भाबो वा सामर्थ्यं स्याद् व्यपेक्षा बा । M. Bh.
on II. 1.1.
एकाल्छ् possessed of one single pho-
metic element or letter; cf. अपृक्त
एकाल् प्रत्ययः P. I. 2.41.
एकीभाव fusion, mixturc, union, com-
bination (of 2 or more letters}; cf.
उदात्तवति एकीभाव उदात्तं सन्ध्यमक्षरम्, R.
Pr.III.6.एकीभाव iS said to be result-
ing from the coalescence called
अभिनिहितसन्धि, cf. R. B'r. II. 16, 17.
एगेर्लिग् ( Eggeling ) a Well-known
German Scholar Of Sanskrit
Grammar who flourished in the
l9th century and who edited
the Kātantra Vyākarana with the
commentary Of Durgasirihha and
many appendices in 1876.
ई a brief term ( प्रत्याहार ) for the
twO diphthong letters ए and ओो;
cf. एङ्ह्रस्वात्संबुद्धे: P. VI. 1. 69, एङः
पदान्तादति VI. 1.109. etc.
एच् a $hort term (प्रत्याहुार) in Pānini's
grammar standing.for diphthongs
or letters ए,ऐ,ओा, औौ; e.g. ऐचोयवायावः
P. VI. 1.78, एच इग् हृस्वादेशे p.I.1.48.
एजटैन् [Edgerton, Dr. Franklin] an
American Sanskrit scholar and
author of *Buddhist Hybrid Sans-
krit Grammar and Dictionary.'
एप्र्णीकृत A fault in pronunciation
when the voice is indistinct, and
the word pronounced is not dis-
tinctly heard; cf. एणीकृतः अविशिष्ट: ।
किमयमेीकारः अथौकार इति यत्र संदेहः Pradipa
on M.Bh.I.l.1,explained asअविशिष्ट:
सेश्लिष्टः संदिग्ध इति यावत् by Nāgeśa in



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-109.png}}}}}}

एण्य
93
ऐ
his Uddyota. .
एण्य tad. affix एण्य applied to the
word प्रावृथ् in the general शैधिक
senses; cf. ' प्रावृष एण्यः l प्रावृष्भ्रेण्यः बलाहकः
|Kāś. orn P. IV. 3.1 7.
एत् the vowel ए; cf. ईदूदेद्द्विवचनं प्रगृह्यम्
|P. I. 1.11.
एतावत्त्व limitation of the kind; * such
and such * (words etc.); cf A. Pr.I.
एय्स्व the $ubstitution of ए; cf. बहुव॒चने
झल्येत् (P. VII. 3.103) इति एच्त्वं प्राप्नेीति
M.Bh. on P.V.3.10.
एत्य tad. affix applied to the in-
declinable दूर्; e. g. दूरेत्यः पथिकः । cf.
दूरॊदत्यः दूरेत्यः Kāś. on P.IV.2.104; cf.
. ālso दूरॊर्देत्येा वक्तव्यः । दूरेत्यः M.Bh. on
|P. IV. 2.104.
एदित् marked by the mute indicatory
letter एण्. RootS rnarked with indi-
catory ए, do not allow वृद्धेि for
their vOwel in the aorist; e. g.
अरगीत्, अलगीत्; cf. P. VII.2.5.
एद्यवि tad. affix एद्यवि applied to the |
pronoun पर when the word refers
to a day;cf. परास्मिन्नहनि परेद्यवि Kāś, on
P.V. 3.22.
पट्द्युसच् tad. affäx एट्टुस॒ applied to the
pronouns पूर्व, ॐन्य, ' अन्यतर, इतर,
अपर, अध्वर्र्, उभय and उच्तर when the
words,SO formed refer to a day ;
e. g. पूर्वेद्य॒ः, अन्यद्युः etc.; cf. P. V.3.22.
एधाच् tad. afix एधा substituted for the
tad.• affix धा optionally,when appli-
ed tQ the words द्वि and त्रि. e.g.द्विधा,
द्वेधा, द्वैधम्, त्रिधा, त्रेधा, त्रैधम्; cf. Kāś. ori
एधाच्च P. V. 3.46.
एनप् tad. affix एन applied to उत्तर, अधर,
and दक्षिण optionally instead of the
tad. affix अाति in the senses of दिक्,
' देश and काल, e.g. उत्तरण, उत्तरतः उत्तरात्.
Words with this एन at the end
govern the acc. case of the word
syntactically connected with them.
e. g. तत्रागारं धनपतिगृहान् उच्तरेण KālidāSa:
Meghadüta;cf.एनपा द्वितीया P.1I.3.31.
|i
| एप् a term used in the Jainendra
Vyākarana for the term गुण of
Pānini standing for the vowels
अ, प्र्, and ओो; cf. ऋतः समादेरेपू ,Jain.
Vy. V.2.122.
एफ ending added to the consonant र
when a mention of it is to be
made; cf. T.Pr.I.19; e.g. रेफः.
एरालिम (1) krt. afiix वे e.g. पचेलिमा
* म[षाः cf. P. III. 1.96 Vārt. 1; (2)
Unādi affix एलिमच् applied to पञ्चै॒
cf. पन्च एलिमच्चु Un. S.IV.37.
एलुट्ठ tad-affix चेळु in the sense of'unable
tO bear, found in Vedic Literature
Only; e.-g. हिमेळु: cf. हिमाचेळुवैत्तव्यः ।
P.WY.2.122 Vārt.. 7.
एव (1) a particle in the sense of re-
gulation (नियम) ; cf. एवकारः किमर्थः
नियमार्थ: M. Bh. on V. 3.58; ' (2) .
determinant indeclinable; cf. एव
इत्यवधारोणेः cf. इश्ट्रतेीवधारणार्थस्तर्हि । यथैर्वे
विश्ज्ञायेत । अजादी गुणवचनादेवेति M. Bh.
on V. 3.58.
एवकारकरणा use of the word एव; cf.
उत्तममैवाव्ययन इत्यत्र एवकारकरणस्य · प्रयेो-
जनम्० M. Bh. on P. III. 4.24. , ,
एश्य (1) the substitute ए for the per-
fect affix त, substituted for the
whole त by reason of the indica-
tory letter शु attached to, ए; cf.
लिटस्तझयेोरेशेिरेच् and अनेकाळुशित्सर्वस्य P.
|III. 4.81 and I. 1.55; (४) afiix ए
applied to the root चक्षु in Vedic
|Literature; cf. नावचक्षे । नावख्यातव्य-
मित्यर्थः Kāś. on P. III.4.15.
एषितव्य necessary to be sought;
necesSary to be prescribed; cf.
तस्मान्मृजेरिग्लक्षणा वृद्धिरेषितव्या M. Bh. on
I, 1.3. Vārt. 8.
ऐ
ऐ diphthong vowel ऐ ; composite
form of अा and ए, also terrmed वृद्धि
in Pājini's grammar. l ' .



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-110.png}}}}}}

ऐकपदिक 94
ऐकपदिक given in the group of ekà- ||
padas " or solitarily stated ,wOrds
ās contrasted with anekapadaS Or
、
एन्द्र
द्विस्वर w9wels in the Rk PrātiŚā-
khya. Sakatāyana SayS they are
द्विग्मात्र.
synonyms. See एकपद abOve. ऐत् the vowel ऐ; cf. एत ऐदित्यैत्ल्वं M.Bh.
ऐकपद्य treatment as one single word
on P. III. 4.93.
especially found in the case of ऐत्त्व the substitution of ऐ for ए by the
· c6mpoufid words , ( सामासिकपद )
which, as a result Of Such treat-
ment, have Only Or1e.. accent
(acute), and one case affix after
the whole word; cf. अयं खल्ट्वपि
ru!e एत ऐ prescribing the SubStitu-
tion of the vowel ऐ for ए, in the
case of the imperative first perSOn
terrminations; cf P. III. 4.93.
बुहुत्रीहिरस्त्येव प्राथमकृष्टिपकुः यल्मिनैकपद्यमैकेस्व- |ऐन्द्र name of an ancient school of
र्यमैकविभक्तित्वं च M. Bh.on P. I. ] .29.
, See एकप्द.
ऐकश्रुत्य possession of the sathe tOne
o accent; uniformity Of tOne Or
accent. See the word एकश्रुन्नि abOve;
also see P. I. 2.39 Vārt. l,2; VIII.
1.55 Wārt. 1•
ऐकस्वर्य having only one principal
accent (Udātta or Svarita) for the
whole compound wOrd which is
made up of two Or mOre indivi-
dual words; cf. M. Bh. On P.
, ]I. 1.29.
ऐकाथ्यै possession of a single com-
posite sense (by all wQrds tO-
gether in a gompoünd); gf. संघातस्य
ऎकाथ्र्यात् सुबभावेो वणीँत् M. Bh. on I.
2.45 Vārt 10; cf. also M. Bh. on
|II. 2.29 Wārt. 7; cf. also नाम
नाम्नैकाथ्यै समासेो बहुलम् Hem. III. 1.18
where the commentator explains
ऐकाथ्र्यं as एकार्थाँभाव; In the cOm.
on Hem. III 2.8 ऐकाथ्र्य is explain-
ed asऐण्कपद्य..
ऐच् short term ( प्रत्याहार ) standing for
.'`the two diphthong vowels ऐ and
औौ; cf. न य्वाभ्यां पदान्ताभ्यां पूर्वैीं तु ताभ्यामैचु
P. VII. 3.4; cf. ऐचोश्चोत्तरभूयस्त्घात्
|M. Bh. on P. I. 1.48, The short
substitutes of ऐं and औौ are इ and
उ when prescribed; cf. P. I. l .48;
$o also, the protracted forms of
' ऐएँ and औौ are protracted इ and उ;
cf. P. III. 2.106. They are called
grammar and of the treatise also,
belonging to that school, believed
to havc been written under
instructions of Indra. The wOrk is
not available. Pataiàjali mentions
that Bhaspati instructed Indra for
one thousand celestial years and
still did not finish hiS *instructions
in words?; (M. Bh. ] . 1. l ). The
Taittiriya Sarihhitā mentions the
Same. Pānini haS referred to Some
ancient grammarians ofthe East by
the word प्राचाम् without mention-
ing their names, and ScholarS like
Burnell think that the grammar
assigned to Indra is to bc referred
to by the word प्राचाम्. The Brhat-
kathārmafjari r emarkS that P'ār]i-
ni's gramrmar threw irhto the back-
ground the Aindra Grammar.
Some scholars believe that Kalapa
grammar which is available today
is based uponAindra,juSt as Cāndra
is bश्ased upon P:tnini's grammar.
ReferenceS to Aindra Grammar
are found in the cormmentary on
the Sārasvata Vyākarana, in the
Kavikalpadruma of Bopadeva as
|also in the commentary upon the
Mahābhārata by Dcvabodha.Quo-
tations, although very few, are
given by some writers from the
work. All these facts prove that
there wa8 an ancient pre-Pātainian
treatise on Grammar assigned tO



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-111.png}}}}}}

ऐपू
95 · ओष्ठय
इन्द्र which was called Aindra-Vyā-
karana.For details see Dr.Burnell's
*Aindra School of Sanskrit Gram-
marians' as also Vol. VII pages j|
124-126 of Vyākarana Mahā-
bhāgya, edited by the D. E.Society, !
Poona.
ऐप् a term used in the Jainendra |
Grammar instead of the term ञ्वृद्धि
of Panini which stands for अा, ऐ,
and औौ; cf. P. I. 1- 1.
ऐरक् taddhita aftix ऐर applied to the
word चटका in the sense of ofाँ$pring
to form the word चाटकैरः cf चटकाया
ऐरक् P. IV. 1. 128.
दि a class of words headed
by the word ऐण्षुकारि to which the
taddhita afiix भक्त is added in the
sense of * place of residence *; e. g.
ऐषुकारिभक्तम्, चान्द्रायणभक्तम्; cf. Kāś.
on P.IV.2.54.
ऐस् substitute for the case afiix भिम्
after words ending in अ; cf. अतेो
भिस ऐस्. P. VII. I. 9 to 11.
ओो
ओो (1) diphthong vowel made up of
the woWels अ and उ, termed as
guna in Pāt)ini's grammar and
prescribed SOmetimes in the place
of the vowel उ; ( 2 ) affix ओो app-
|lied to the root गम् or गा to form
,a noun; cf. ओोकारो नामकरणः Nir.II.5.
औोंकार the syllable ओों called by the
term प्रणव and generally recited at
the beginning of Vedic works.
Patafंjali has commented upon
the word briefiy as follows; पादस्य वा
अर्धचस्य वा अन्त्यमक्षरमुपसंहृत्य तदाद्यक्षरेदेशषस्य
स्थाने त्रिमात्रर्मोकारं त्रिमात्रमोकारं वा विदधतेि
तं प्रणव इत्याचक्षते M.Bh. on VIII.2. 89.
ओोत् the vowel ओो; cf. ओोत् PI.1.15,16
prescribing- प्रगृह्यसंज्ञा for Nipātas
like अाहो, उताहेा and others with a
wiew that the wÓwel at their end
should not coaleSce with the
following vowel. The Prātiśākhya,
works prohibit the coalescence of
ओा in many cases with the Succeed-
ing wowel; cf. R. Pr. I. 7o; V. Pr.
I.94.
| ओोदित् marked with the indicatory
letter ओो; roots marked with the
mute letter ओा have the Ni$Éhā
afiix त or तवत् changed to न or नवत्;
e. g- लमः, लमवान् ; दीनः, दनवान् etc•
cf. ओोदितश्च P VIII, 2. 45; cf. alSo
स्वादय ओोदितः इत्युक्तम् । सूनः सूनवान्; दूनः
ी दूनवृान् Si. Kau. on P. VIII. 2. 45.
ओोप्पेई [Gustav Oppert 1836-1908 ]
a 'German scholar of Sanskrit
who edited the SabdānuŚāsana of
Sãkatāyana.
ओोम् See ओंकार above-. ओोम् consists of
2¥ mātras, cf. अर्धतृतीयमात्र एवेक ब्रुवते T.
Pr 18. ]; शैत्यायन says that ओोम् has
any one of the three accemts,
while कौण्डिन्य says it has प्रचय or
एकश्रुति i. e. absence of any accent•
ओोरंभट्ट a scholar of grammar of the
|nineteenth century who wrote a
Virtti on Pānini sutras called पाणिभि-
सूञ्त्रवृाति. Hehas written many works
?n the Ptirvamimāhsā and other\
Sastras.
ओोष्ठ ]it. lip; the place of Origin
( स्थान ) of the labial letters called
उपध्मानीय वर्ण i, e the vOWels उ, ऊ,
the consonants पुप्, फू, बुब्, भुं, म्..and
the उपध्मानीय letter; 'cf. ऊपूपध्मानीयान्ा-
मेोष्टौ Sid. Kau. on तुल्यास्यप्रेयत्नं सवर्णम्
|P.I.1.9, also उवेोपोपध्मा ओोष्ठ V. Pr •
]I.70.
ओोष्टय lit. produced upon the lip; a
letter of the labial claSS;letterS उ;ऊ;
ओो, औौ, पुप्, फ़्, व्, भूम्,म् andव् are given
as ओोष्ठय letters in. the Rk Prāti$-
ākhya, cf. R. Pr. I. 20. See the
Word ओोष्ठ above. For the utterance
of the letter बुव् tips of the teeth. are
also employed; hence the letter व्



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-112.png}}}}}}

*\. S\ --__-、
अांस्न् • 96 अपश्ठेषिक
is said to have दन्तौष्ठ as itS स्थान.•
ओोस्म् the case affix ओोसूत् of the gen•
and the loc, dual.
*\
अ
औौ ( ] ) the vowel औी; diphthong
vowel made up of अा and ओो; ( 2 )
the substitute औौ for the final letter
उ of the word मनु before the fem ,
affix ई; cf मनेोः स्त्री मनायी, मनावी,मनु:
|Kās. on P. IV. 1. 38; ( 3 ) caSe
ending of the nom. and acc. dual
called औौङ् alsO.
औौङ्	a term used by ancient gramm-
aians for the affix औौ of the nOm.
and the acc. dual. The vOwel ई (शी}
is substituted for औौ in the case of
nouns of the feminine and neu-
, ter genders; cf. औौङः शी P. VII.
1. 18, 19.
the case ending औौ of the acc.
dual; cf. P. IV. l . 2.
· औणादिक an afiix mentioned in the
class of afiixes called उणादि in
treatises of Paraini and _ other
grammarians; cfनमुचिः | मुचेरौणादिकः
किंप्रत्ययःKāś.on P. VI. 3. 75; फिडाफेिडुौ
औौणाादिकौ प्रत्ययौ M.Bh. on Siva Stitra
2. See the word उणादि above.
· औणादिकपदाणैव a collection of words
called औणादिक; a name given to
his work by पेदुभट्ट of the 18th
century.
औत् (1) the letter औौ included in the
वृद्धि wowels अा, ऐ and औौ, and
|hence called वृद्धि in Pārini's gra-
mmar, (2) Substitute for the case*
ending इ ( ङि ) in Pār]ini's gra•
mmar; cf. P. VII. 3.118, 119.
pertaining to the ulte-
rior member of a compound; cf.
औौत्तरपदिके हृस्वत्व (B'. VI. 3.61) कृते
तुक् प्राप्नोति M. Bh. on I. 1.62.	→
औत्व the substitution of the vowel
°. औौ; cf. P. VII. 3.117-119. |!
अौत्सार्गक an affix or an Operation
resulting from the general rule
( उत्सर्ग ); cf. अपत्ये कुत्सिते मूढे मनौरो-
त्सार्गेकः स्मृतः M.. Bh. on IV. 1.161 ;
cf. also एवमप्यौत्सार्गेकाणां तद्विषयता न
प्राप्नेति M. Bh- on I[V- 2.66.
औदव्रजि	an ancient Sage and Scholar
of Vedic Grammar who is beliey-
ed to have revised the original
text of the ऋत्तन्त्रप्रातिशाख्य of the
Sāma-Veda. cf. Sab. Kaus. I. 1.8.
औदुम्वरायण an ancient Sage whoSe
doctrine of * evanescence of
wOrds * (lit. existence as long as
its cognition is had by the sense
orgams) iS Secn quoted in the
Nirukta; cf. इन्ट्रियनित्यं वच्चनमैीदुम्बरा-
यणस्तत्र चतुष्ट्वं नोपपद्यते Nir. I. 1.
औौद्देशिक enumerated ; actually stated;
उद्देशतः प्रेोत्तम् औॉद्देशिकम् cf. न तु
औौद्रेशिकंामेव Nir. I. 4.
औपचारिक resulting from उपचार or
लक्षणा ; metonytmical.
औपदेशिक mentioned in the Original
statement; cf. अन्तग्रहणं औोपदेशिकार्थम् ।
|Ka$. on ध्णान्ता घट् P. I. 1.24; cf.
also औोपद्रेश्शिक्रप्रायोगिकयोरैौीपदेशिकसैयव ग्रह-
णम् Par. Sek. Pari. 120.
औौपमन्यव name of an ancient etymo--
logist referred to by Yàska in his
Nirukta pOSsibly as a commenta-
tor on निघण्टु: cf. निगन्तव एव सन्तो
निगमनान्निघण्टव · उच्यन्ते इत्यैीपमन्यवः Nir.
I. |l. line 4.
औपमिक figurative; metaphorical ap-
plication Or statement; cf. ( विराट् X
पिपीलिकमध्या इत्यैापमिक्रम् Nir. VII. 13.
औपश्लेषिक resulting from immediate
contact; immediately or closely
cOnnected|; one of the three type8
of अधिकरण or location which is
given as the sense of the locative
case:; cf. अधिकरर्णे नाम त्रिप्रकारं-व्यापकम्
औोपश्क्षेठाधिकम्, वैषयिकमिति ... इको यणाश्च ।
अाचि उपाश्क्ष्ठिष्टस्येति l M. Bh. VI. 1.72.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-113.png}}}}}}

औपसंख्यानिक
97
eथ्9
औौपसंख्यानिक $tbsequently stated by
Way of additiom or modificatiojh
६& done by the Varttikakāras; gf.
औौपसंख्यानिकस्य णस्यापवार्दः | अारंण्र्यकेो
मनुष्यः Kāś. on P. IV. 2. ]29; cf.
है also Kāś. on V.I.29 and VI.3.41.
औरस produced from the chest ; the
VisarjanÎya and h (हकार्) are look-
ed upon as औरस and riot क्रप्ठ्य by
SOmट्रेancient phoneticia:ns; cf. केाचि-
· दाचार्यौः एतैौ हकॉरेविसर्जनीयौ उर:श्थानांविच्छ-
न्ति	cOm. ?n R, Pr. I. 18; cf. also
हृकारं र्वितःि संयुतम्, । उरस्यं
तं विजार्नीयात्कण्ठ्त्रमाहरसं ।| Pān.
Sik$ā. 16. हुरसंयुतम्
और्स्य prOduced from the chest. See
अरस. →
औौश् substitute औ for the nom. and
acC• case endingS applied to the
tषूjeral अष्टन् ; cf. अष्टाभ्य औश् P. VII.
|2}
औौषिणहु beginning with a stanza of
the U$'jih metre; cf. उष्णिहापूर्वः सतो-
घृहत्यन्तुः प्रगाथुः औष्णिह इत्युच्यते | येथा.यमा-
दित्यासो अद्रुहः Uvata on R.Pr.XVIIi.5.
` -- ( अनुस्वार )
-- अनुस्वार or nasal (1) looked upon
as a phonetic element, indepen-
9left, no doubt, but incapable of
being pronounced without a vowel
|preceding it." Hence, it is shown
in writing with अ alth6ughits form
in writing is Only a dot above the
line;.cf. अं इत्यनुस्वारः । अकार इह उच्चारणार्थ
' इति बिन्दुमात्रो वणेाँनुस्वारसंज्ञो भवेति Kāt.
Vyak. f:!.19; (2) anusvāra,showing
Or signifying Vikāra i.e. अागम and
used aS a technical term for the
second विभक्ति Or the accusativecase.
See the word अं abowe on page 1.
: (विसर्ग )
: विसर्जनीय or विसर्ग; lit. letting out
I13
breath from the mouth; soumd or
utterance Caused by breath escap-
ing from the mouth; breathing.
The Visarjanīya, just like the
anuSvāra, is incapable of being
independently uttered. Hence, it
is written for convenience as अः
althOugh its form for writing pur-
poSes is only two dots after the
vOwel preceding it; cf. अः इति
विसर्जनीयः ! अकार इह उच्चारणार्थः इति कुमारी-
स्तनयुगाकृतिर्वणेाँ विसर्जनीयसंज्ञेो भवति । 'Kāt.
Vyāk. I. 1.16. See अः abowe on
page 2: →、
X ( जिह्वामूलीय )
X जिह्वामूलीय, a phonetical element
or uihit called Jihvāmtiliya, pro-
duced at the root of the tongue,
Which is optionally substituted
in the place of the Visarga (left
Out breath) directly preceding the
utterance of the letter क् or, ख्व्
and hence shoWn as `< क्. See
अ ><क् abowe on page 2.
C9 ( उपध्मानीय )
९? उपध्मानीय lit. blowing; a term
applied to the wisarga when
folloWed by the consonant प्प् or फ़्.
The upadhmāniya is looked upon
aS a letter Or phonetic element,
Which is alwayS connected with
the preceding wowel. As the
upadhmānīya iS an optional sub-
stitute for the visarga, before the
letter पू Or फू, when, in Writing,
it is to be shoWn instead of
the wisarga, it iS shown as
९2, or as ० , or even as xjust as the
Jihvāmtiliya; cf. उपध्मायत शब्दायते इति,
उप सर्मीपे ध्मायते शब्द्यत इति वा com. on
Kāt. I: ; cf. also कपाभ्यां प्रागर्धविसर्गसदृशौ
जिह्वामूलीयोपध्मानीयौःS.K.on P.VIII.2.1.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-114.png}}}}}}

क
७/ ( नासिक्य )
* नासिक्य, a nasal letter or utterance
included among the अयेोगवाह letters
analogous to anusvāra and yama
letters. It is mentioned in the
' Vàjasaneyi Prātiśākhya as हुं इति
२नासिक्य: on which Uvva¢a makeS
the remark अयमृकूश्शाखायां प्रसिद्ध:. The
|Rk-Prātiśākhya mentions नासिक्य,
यम and अनुस्वार as नासिक्य Or naSal
letters, while Uvvata defines नासिक्य
· as a letter produced only by the
mose; cf. केवलनासिकया उच्चार्यमाणेो वर्णोाँ
नासिक्य: Uvvata on R. Pr. I. 20.
The Taittiriya Prāti$ākhya calls
the letter इ as nāsikya when it is
followed by the consonant न् or एणू
or म् and gives अह्नाम् , अपराह्ने and
न्ङ्गह्म as instances. The Pāरे॒ंiniya
Sik$a does not mention नासिक्य as
a letter. The Mahābhāgya द्वmen-
tionS नासिक्य as one of the Six
ayogavāha letters; cf. के पुनरयो-
.गवाहाः ! विसर्जनीयजिह्वामूलीयेोपध्मानंयानु-
रवारानुनासिक्ययमाः M. Bh. on Siwa-
sfitra, 5 Wārt. 5, where Some
manuscripts read नाासक्य for अानुना-
सिक्य while in some other manus-
criptS there is neither the word
अानुनाासैक्य nor 'ना|ासेिक्य. It is likcly
that the anunāsika-colouring given
tO the vOWel preceding the conso-
nant सू Substituted for the conso-
nants म, न्म् and others by P. VIII.
3.2. tO 12, was looked upon as a,
separate phonetic unit and called
नासेक्य as for instance in संस्कत, मा
हिसंीः, संशिशाधि etc.
`थ्5 ( यम )
`चै< यम, a letter called यम which is
uttered partly thrOugh the nose.
A class consonant excepting the
fifth, when followed by the fifth
viz. ङ्क, च्छ्, प्णू , न्म् or म् ; gets doubled
in the Vedic recital, when the
second Of the doubled cOnsonant
which iS colot;red by the follow-
ing nasal cOnsOnant iS Called यम.
This यम letter is not independent.
It necessarily depends upon the
foilowing naSal conSOnant and
hence it is called अयोगवाह. The
nasalization is shown in script as
-< followed by the consonant; e.
g. पलिकू *न्ीि, अग्पूं*शे, etc. The pro-
nunciation of this yatma or twin
letter is seen in the Vedic recital
omly; cf. पलिक्क्नी .... कष्श्चगधेभ्यः परे
तत्सदृशा एव यमाः S. K. on P. VIII.
2. 1. cf. कुं ऐंर्बु र्गु धुं इति यमाः विंशति-
संख्याका भव्रन्ति V- Pr. VfII. 24.
क
(l) the consonant क्; the first con•
SOrnant of the cOnsOrnant grOup as
also of the guttural grOup; (2)
$ubstitute क् for cOnsOnants ए॒म् and दूद्
before the consonant सुत् ;cf.V.P.2.41.
For the clision ( त्ळेीप ) of क्रू on ac-
cOunt Of its being termcd इत् see
P.I.3.3 and 8.
क.(1) tad.affix क applicd to the words
Of the ऋन्श्य group in the four senses
Called चातुरर्थिक c. g. ऋश्यक:, अनद्दृत्क:,
वेणुकः etc., cf. P.IV. 2.80; (2) tad.
affix क applied to noums in the
sense of diminution, censur¢°, pity
ctc. c. g. अश्वकः, उट्रकः, पुत्रकः, cf. P.V.
3.70-87; (3) tad. afiix के in the very
sensc of the word itself ( स्वार्थे ) e.g.
अविक्रः, यावक्र:, कालकः; cf. P.V. 4.28-*
33; (4ः) Uraidi afiix क e-g. कर्क, वृक,
राका, एक, भक, काक, पाक, शल्क etc. by
Unādi st!tras III. 40-48 before
which the angment इट् is prohibit-
ed by P. VII. 2.9; (5) krt affix क
( अ ) where क् is dropped by P. I.
3.8, applied, in the scnse ०f agent,
tO certain roots mentioned in
P.III.1.135, 136, 144, III. 2.3 to



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-115.png}}}}}}

ककार
99
कUठय
||
7, III.2.77 and III.3,83 e.g. बुधः, |
प्रस्थः, गृहम्, कम्बलद:ः, द्विपः, मूलविभुजः,
सामग*, सुराप: etc.; (6) .substitute क
1or the word किम् before a case affix,
cf. P.VII.2.103; (7) the Samāsānta
affix कप् ( क ) at the end Of Bahu-
vrihi eompounds as prescribed by
. P. V. 4.151-160.
ककार the consonant क; cf. वर्णात्कारः P.
|III.3.108 Vārt.. 3.
कंसाविजयगणि a Jain gratmmarian whO
wrote a commentary by name
|शंब्दचन्द्रिकोद्धार on the सारस्वतव्याकरण.
कवक्यौदि a class of words headed by
the word ककाँ, the word प्रस्थ after
which in a cOmpound, d0es not
|hawe the acute accent on itS first
vowel. e. g. ककॉप्रस्थः; cf. P. VI.2.87.
कच्छादि a class of words headed by
कच्छ to which the taddhita affix अणु
is added in the miScellaneous
( शैषिक ) senscs, prOwidcd the Word,
to which the affix अणू is to
be added, is the name of a
country ; e.g. ऋषिकेषु जातः अाार्घेिक:;
similarly माहिषिक:, ऐक्ष्वाक:; cf. Kā$.
on P.]IV.2.133.
tad. cāturarthika affix क (1) by P.
|IV. 2.80 after words headed by
वराह, e. g. वराहकः, पलाशक:; (2) by
|P.IV.4.21, after the word अपमित्य
e.g. अापमित्यक:
कञ्म् krt, affix ( अ ) affixcd to the root
दृशु preceded by त्यद्, तद् etc. by P.
|IV. 2.60 e.g. तादृशः, यादृश: etc., fem.
तादृशी by P. IV.1.15.
कटच् , tad.affix कट affixed to सं, प्र, उद्
and अव by P.V.2.29, 30; e.g. संकट,
|प्रकट etC.
कटयच् tad. affix कटय affixed to the
word रथ in the sense of collection
by P.IV.2.5l e.g. रथकटया,.
कडारादि a class of words headed by
the word कडार which, although adje-
! *•/ctàval,are optionally placedfirst in
the Karmadhāraya compound, e.g.
कडारजैमिनिः जैभिनिकञ्डारः ; cf. Kāś. on
II.2.38.
कर्णादि (1) a claSS of WOrds headed
by कर्ण to which the taddhita affix
अायन ( फिञ्ञ्म् ) is applied in the four
senses given in P. IV.2.67-70; e.g.
कार्णायनिः वाासिष्ठायनिः etc.; cf Kāś. on
|P. IV.2.80; (2) a class of words
headed by कर्ण to which the taddhita
affix जाह (जाहञ्क्ष) is added in the
sense of a *root' e.g. कर्णजाहम् ; cf.
Kāś. on P.V.2.24.
कण्टकोद्धार name of a cOmmentary on
NageŚa's Paribhagenduśekhara by
Mannudeva, known alsO as Mantu-
deva or Manyudeva, who Was a
pupil of Pāyagunde in the latter
halfof the 18th century.
कण्ठ glottis; cavity in the throat
hOlding vocal cords; the place Of
the production of the SOunds अ, अा
and ह; cf. अहविसर्जनीयाः कण्ठे V, Pr.I.
71 ; cf, also कण्ठयोऽकारः प्रथमपञ्चमौ च
|R.Pr.I.18.
कण्ठतालव्य gutturo-palatal. The diph-
thongs ए andऐ are called|Kangha-
tālavya, as they are prOduced in
the Kapghatālu-sthāna. →
कण्ठोक्त formally mentioned; directly
mentioned.
、 、 →
कण्ठोष्टय, कण्ठोष्टच्य gutturo-labial, the
diphthongs ओो and औौ are called
Kanghosthya as they are produc-
ed at both the Kantha and the
Os¢ha Sthānas. ॥ :
कण्ठञ्य produced at the throat or at
the glottis; ' the vowel अ, visarga
and the cOnsonant दुद् are called
कण्ठश्यं in the Prātiśākhyas, while
later grammarians include the
guttural consonantS क्, रट्बू, ग्[, धूं and
ड् among the Kanthya letterS; cf.
अकुहविसर्जनीयानां. कण्ठः Sid. Kau• .on
तुल्यास्यप्रयत्नं सवणैम् P. I. 1. 9. .See
व्ध्टठ. →



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-116.png}}}}}}

|100
कण्डुादि
करए
कण्डूादि a group of words which are
headed by the word कण्डू and whieh
are either nouns or rOotS Or both,
to which the affix यश्छ् is added to
arrive at the secondary rO9tS• e; ईं•
कण्डूयति, कण्डूयते; हृणीयति, हृjीियते, महीयते
cf.' धार्तुप्रकरंणैाद्धातुः कस्य , चासड्नlदुपि॒ि,l
अाह चायमिमें दर्ध मन्ये धातुर्विभाषितःll Kà$.
on P. III.1.27.
of Bahuvrihi compounds e.g• व्यूढेो-
रस्कः, वद्दुदण्डिका, बहुंक्रुमुारी|कः, बडुकंर्दृकं:,
cf. P. V.4.! 51-154.' For itS prOhibi-
tion, see P. V.4.1 55-160•
कमोपपाद name given by Siradeva
and other grammarianS tO the
second pāda of the third adhyaya
of Pathini*s A$र्भूādhyāyi,.. which
begir३S with the suitra कर्मण्यणु P..
|][II- 2.l •
कण्वादि a class of words forming a कमुल्ठ् krt. affix अम् in Vcdig Litera-
portion of the claSS Of words call-
6d मगीँदि, and headed by the
word कण्व, to the derivativeS .of
which, formed by the affix यञ्ञ् by
fuire in thc sense of thc, inीिinitive,
e. g. धिभाजं in अग्िं वै ,देबा धिभाञ्जं
नाशक्नुवन् ; cf. P.III.1. 12.
the rule गगीँदिभ्येीं यञ् (P.IV• 1.105), कम्प vibration of th?2 laryr1x which
the affix अण् is added in the miSce-
produces thc SOtt nd•
llaneous senses; e.g. क्राण्|बंl: श्छत्रि{:; कस्पन् a, fault in uttcring ah aCCcnt-•
similarly गौकक्षाः, शाकलाः, अगस्तयः;
कुण्डिनाः etc; cf. P.IV.2.1i 1 , and II.
4.70.	→
कत्र्यादि a class of words hcaded by
the word श्कत्रेि to which the tad.
affix एयक (ढकञ्ट्) is applied in the
miscellaneous senses; e.g. कात्रेयक:;
ed vowel espccially a vOwCl with
the circumflex accent which iS nOt
properly uttered by thg Souther-
iaers as rcrmarked by Uvvata ; cf.
व्कम्पन्नं नाम स्वराश्रितपाटदेाप्: ! स च प्रायेण
दाक्षिणात्यानां भवति ! स च धञ्र्यः । Uvwata
on R. Pr. III.18.
ग्रामेयक;, कौलेयकः (from कुट्या)|; cf. P.. कमिपत the same as श्कम्पन. Scc कम्पन
IW.2.75.
abo९ye.
कथादि a claSS of wordS headed by कम्बोजादि a claSS of words headed
the word कथा to which the affix इक
(ठकू) is added in the sense of
*good therein' (तत्र साधुः:); e.g.
कीथिकः, वैतण्डिकः, गााणिक:, अायुर्वेदिकः;
cf. P.IW. 4.102.
कध्यै, कध्यैन् |kपृt affix अधैय of the
by the word श्कम्श्रेोन, the afiिx अञ्
placed after which iS clided, prO-
९yided the words कम्र्त्रेीज and others
are names of cou1ntries ; c.g- क्रम्श्रेीजः
न्चेालः, केरल:, शकः, यश्वन: ctc. cf. P.
I[V. 1. i75.
iffinitive in Vedic Literature: cf. | **"" (1) lit. instrumcnt; the term
तुमर्थे सेरेस...कध्यैकध्यैन् ..तश्वनः P.III.4.9.
कन् (1) unādi affix as in the words
एक, भेक, शल्क etc; (2) tad.affix क as
given by Panini sऐ tras IV.2.13|l,
IV,3.32, 65, 147, IV.4.21; V.] .22,
23, 51, 90, V.2. 64, 65, 66, 68-75,
77-82, V.3.51, 52, 75,81,82,87, 95,
96, 97. V.4.3,4,6, 29-38.
कप्म् (1) krt affix क prescribed after
the root दुह् e. g- कामदुघ!; cf. P.III.2.
70;(2) the Samāsānta अ at the end
signifies the most cfficient rncans
for accomplishing , an act; cf.
क्रियासिद्धीं यत् प्रकृष्टोपकारकं धिबक्षितं
तत्साधकतभ कारकं करणसंज्ञं भवति, Kās.
on साधकतमं बकरणम् P. I. 4.42,
e. g. दात्रेण itn दात्रेण ळुनाति; (2) effort
inside the mouth ( अाभ्यन्तर-प्रयत्न )
to produce sound; e. g• touching
of the particular place ( स्थान )
inside the mOuth for uttering
consonants; cf. स्पृष्टं स्पश्र्शानां करणम् M.
Bh. on P, 1. 1.10 Vārt,. 3; (3)



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-117.png}}}}}}

करविणी i01
disposition of the organ whlch
produces the sound; cf. श्चासनादो-
भयानां विशेषः करणमित्युच्यते । एतच्च पाणिनि-
संमताभ्यन्तरप्रयत्न इति भाति l Com. on R..
Pr, XIII.3; cf also स्थानकरणानुप्रदानानि
|M. Bh. on I. 2. 32; cf. alsO
अनुप्रदानात्संसगीँत् स्थानात् करणविन्ययात् l
जायते वर्णवैशेष्यं परीमाणाच्च पञ्चमात् T. }'r.
XXI!I. 2 where karat]a is desCrib-
ed to be of five kinds अनुप्रदान (i. e.
नाद or resonance), संसर्ग (cOntact),
स्थान, करणविन्यय and परिमाण; cf. अक्रारस्य
तावत्-अनुप्रदानं नादः, संसर्गः कण्ठे, स्थानं
हनू, करणवि॒न्ययः ओोष्ट्रैौ, परिमगुणुं मात्राक्रूल्ङ्ख्ः !
अनुप्रदानाादिभिः पञ्चभिः ' करणैवैणीनां वैशेष्यं |
कर्तृस्थभावक
produces the fruit or result of an
action without depending on any
other instrument; cf. स्वतन्त्रः कर्ता P.
I. 4.54, explaincd as अगुणीभूतेो यः
क्रियाप्रसिद्धौ स्वातन्त्रेयण विवक्ष्यते तत्कारकं ' कर्तृ-
संज्ञं भवति in the Kā$ika on P. I.
4. 54. This agent, or rather, the
word standing for the agent, is
put in the nominative case in the
active voice (cf. P. I.4.54), in the
instrumental case in the passive
voice (cf P. II. 3.l8), and in the
genitive case when it is connected
with a noun of action or verbal
derivative noun, (cf. P. II. 3.65).
जायते Com. on Tai. Pr. XXIII. 2. कर्तृयक् the affix य of the passive
The Vājasaneyi PrātiSakhya men-
tions two karanas संवृत and विवृत;
cf. द्वे करणे संवृतविवृताख्ये बायेोर्भवतः W.
|Pr. I. 11; (4) use of a word e. g.
इतिकरणं, वत्करणम्; cf. किमुपस्थितं नाम l
अनार्षे इतिकरणः M.Bh.om. P.VI.1.129.
करविणी or कर्विणी name of a svara-
voice where the object functions
as the subject: e. g. र्युकं॒ in लूयते
केदारः स्वयमेव; cf. अचः कर्तृयकेि P. VT.
l.95 and the Kā$ika thereon.
कर्तृवेदना experience (of SOmething)
by the agent himself; cf. सुखादिभ्यः
कर्तृवेदनायाम् P. III. 1.18.
bhakti - i. e. behawiour like the कर्तृसाधन (an affix) applied in the
wowel ल, noticed in the case of |
the consonant छ् When followed
by the sibilant ह्; cf. करेणू रहयोर्योगे |
sense of the agent of an activity;
भवतीति भावः । कर्तृसाधनश्चायं प्रत्ययः M.
Bh. on P. I, 3.1. Wārt. 7.
→、 • ॥ =2£arrfी → ९
कर्विणी ळुङ्क्ष्ह्कारयेठॆः । हॆर॒िणी रशसान्तुं,च हारिता | कर्तृस्थक्रिय (a root) whose activity is
लशकारयेोः ॥ करेणुः बर्हिः । कार्वणी मलहाः
Com. on T. Pr. XXI. 15. See
स्वरभक्ति.
करिणी name of a svarabhakti i. e.
behaviour like the vowel ऋ
noticed in the case of the cons0-
nant र्. when it is followed by हूं
e. g. बर्हिः. करिणी is named करेणु also.
करिष्यत् करिष्यन्ती ancient technical
terms for the future tense:the Word
करिष्यन्ती is more frequently used.
कर्णमूलीय produced at the root of
found functioning in the subject;cf.
यत्र क्रियाकृतविशेषदर्शनं कर्तरि Kaiyāta on
|P. III. l. 87 Vārt. 3. Such roots,
, althOugh transitive do not have
any Karmakartari construction by
the rule कर्मवत्कर्मणा तुल्यक्रियः P. IIÎ.
1.87. as e.g. ग्रामं गच्छति देवदत्तः has no
कर्मकर्तरि construction; cf. कर्मस्थभाव-
|कानां कर्मस्थक्रियाणां वा कर्ता कृर्मवद् भवतीति
वत्तव्यम् । कर्तृस्थभावकानां कर्तृस्थक्रियाणां वा
कर्ता कर्मवन्मा भूदिति M. Bh. on III.
1.87. Vārt. 3. →
the ear; the utterance of a cir- कर्तृस्थभावक (a ro0t) Wh0Se action or
cumflex woWel is deScribed as
Karnamuiliya.
कर्तृ agent of an action, subject;
name of a karaka or instrument
in general, of an action, which
happening is noticed functioning
in the Subject; e.g. the root स्मृ. cf.
कर्तस्थभावकश्चायं ( स्मरतिः ) M. Bh. om
I. 3.67, कर्तृस्थभावकश्च शेतिः (शीधातुः)
M. Bh. on V. 3.55. · r* ’. ': ,: • .:::::



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-118.png}}}}}}

कर्चभिप्राय |102
कर्मन्
कत्रैभिप्राय meant for the agent Of
the action. The word is used
in connection with the fruit Or
resuit of an action; when the
resuit is for the agent, roOtS
having both the Padas get the
Ātmanepada terminations; cf.
स्वरितञ्नितः: कर्त्रभिप्राये क्रियाफले P. I. 3.72.
कमैकर्तृ object of the transitive verb
which functions as the Subject
when there is a marked facility
of action; e.g.ओोदन is karr1akartari-
object, functionirag aS subject,
in,' पुच्यते ओदनः स्वयमेव॒. The word
कर्मकर्तृ is used also for the कर्मकर्तरि
प्रयेोग where the object, On which
the werb--activity is found, iS
turned into a subject and the
verb which is transitive is turned
into intransitive as a reSult.
कमैधारय name technically given to
a compound-formation of two
words in apposition i. e. u$ed in
the same case, technically called
समानाधिकरण showing the same sub-
stratutta; cf. तत्पुरुषः समानाधिकरणः कर्म-
धारयः I 2.42. The karmadhāraya
compound is looked upon as a.
variety of the tatpuru5a com-
pound. There is no $atisfactory
· explanation of the reason why
Such a, compound iS termed कर्म-
धारय. Sākatāyana defines Karma-
dhāraya as विशेष्प्रणं व्यभिचारि एकाथै
कर्मधारयश्च where the word विशेषण is
explained as व्यावर्तक or भदक (distin-
guishing attribute) showing that
the word कर्म may mean भेदकक्रिया.
The word कर्मधारय in that case
could mean *कर्म भदकक्रिया, तां धारयति
असैौ कर्मधारयः* a compounपुं which
gives a specification of the thing
in hand.
कर्मन् (l) object of a transitive verb,
defined as *something which the
ageम्nt or the doer ofan actiora wants
primarily to achieve. The main
feature of कर्मन् is that it is put in
the accusative case ; cf. कर्तुरीप्सिततमं
कमै, कर्मणि द्वितीया; P. I. 4.49; II.3.2.
Pānini has made कर्म a technical
term and called all Such words
*karman* as are connected with a
verbal activity and used in the
accusative case; cf. कर्तुरीप्सिततमे
कर्म; तथायुक्तं चानीप्सितम्; अकाथतं च and
गतिबुद्धिप्रत्यवसानार्थशब्दकमीकर्मकाणामणि कत
स र्णेौ P.I.4.49-52;cf.. also यत् क्रियत तत्
|कर्म Kāt. II.4.13, कत्रीँष्यम्.,Jain I. 2.
120 and कर्तुद्धर्थीप्यं कर्म Hcm. II. 2. 3.
SometimcS a kàraka, rclated to
the activity ( क्रिया) as Satihpradāna,
apādāna or adhikarat३a iS :1lSO treat-
ed as karma, if it is not meant or
desired as apādāma,Satihpradāma etc.
It is terrmed अकथितकर्म in scuh cascs;
cf. अपादानादिविशेष्प्रकथाभिरविवक्षितमकथितम्
Kāś. on I.4.5i. See the word
अकथित above. Karman or object
iS to be achieved by an activity or
क्रिय; it is always Syntactically con-
nectcvl with a, verb or a verbal deri-
wative.When connected with vcrbs
or verbal dcrivatives indcclinabl-
eS or words ending with the affixes
उक, त, क्तवतु, तृन्म्, ctc, it iS put in
thc accuSativc ca$c. ft is put in
the getiitiv6 ca$e whcn it is con-
nccted with aflixcs othcr than th6»se
mentioned ab()we; cf. P. II. 3.65,
69. When, howcver, the karrman
is expressed ( अभिहित ) b?y a vcrbal
termination ( तिङ् ), or a verbal
nOun terrminatiora (कृत्), or a noun-
affix ( तद्धित ), or a compound, it is
put in thc nOmitaative caSe. e.g.
कटः क्रियते, श्कट: कृतः, शत्यः, प्राप्तोदकः ग्रामः
etc. It is called अभिद्दित in 8uch
case8;cf*P.II.3.1.Sec the word अन-
भिहित abOve.The objcct Or Karman
which is ईप्सिततम is described to be
of three kinds with referenceट to
the way in which it is obrtained



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-119.png}}}}}}

I03
कर्मव्यतिहार
कमैनामन्
from the activity. It is called विकायै ||
when a transformation Or a change |
iS noticed in the object aS a result
of the verbal activity, e. g. काष्ठानि
भस्मीकरोति, घटं भिनत्ति ete. It is called
प्राप्य when no change iS seen tO
result from the action, the object
Only coming into contact with the
subject, e. g. ग्रामं गच्छति, अादित्यं पश्यति
etc. It is caliedनिवैत्र्यwhen the object |
is brought into being under a
' specific name; e.g. घटं करोति, ओोदनं
पचति; cf. निवैत्यै च " विकायै च प्राप्यं चेति
' त्रिधा मतम् l तत्रेप्सिततमम् Padamafंjari
on I. 4. 49; cf. also Vakyapadiya
III.7.45 as also Nyāsa on |1-4.49.
The object which is not ईप्सिततम
is also subdiwided into four kinds
e. g. (a) अनीप्सित (ग्रामं गच्छन् ) व्याघ्रं
पश्यति, (b) औदासीन्येन प्राप्य or इतरत्
or अनुभय e. g, ( ग्रामं गच्छन् ) वृक्षमूलानि
उपसर्पतेि, ( c ) अनाख्यात or अकथित e.g.
बलिं in बलिं याचते वसुधाम् (d) अन्यपूर्वक
e.g अक्षान् दोन्यति, ग्राममभिनिविशते; cf.
Padamafijarī on I.4 49. The com-
mentator Abhayanandin on Jain-
endra Vyākarat1a mentions seven
kinds प्राप्य, विषयभूत, निधैत्र्य, विक्रियात्मक,
ईप्सित, अनीष्सित and इतरत्, defining
कमै as कर्त्रा क्रियया यद् अाप्यं तत् कारकं
कर्म; cf. कत्रीप्यम् Jain. Vy. I.2.t20
and com. thereon. जैॉनन्द्रमधीते is
given therein as an in$tance of
वेिषयभूत. (2) The word कर्मन् is also
used in the sense of क्रियंा or verbal
' activity; cf. उदेोनूध्र्र्वकर्मणि P. I. 3.24;
अदिकर्मणि क्तः कर्तरि च P.III.4.71, कर्तरेि
कर्मव्यतिहोरे P. I.3.t4. (3) It is' also
used in the sense of activity in
general, as for instance,the sense of
a word; e. g. नामाख्यातयेोस्तु कर्मोपसंयेोग-
द्येोतका भवन्ति Nir. I. 3.4, where Dur-
( अर्थ ).
gacārya explains karman as *sense' ||
कमैनामन् lit. noun shOWing action, |
participle.
कर्मप्रवचनीय a technical term used in
|].
connection with a preposition
which showed a verbal activity
formerly, although for the present
time it does not ShoW it; the
word is used as a technical term
in grammar in connection with
prefixes or उपसर्गs which are not us-
ed along,.with a root, but without
, it; cf. कर्म प्रेोक्तवन्तः कर्मप्रवचनीयाः इति
M.Bh. on P. I. 4.83; e.g. शाकल्यस्य
संहितामनु प्रावर्षत्, अन्वर्जुनं येोद्धार:, अा कुमारं
यशः पाणिनेः:; cf. KāŚ. on P. I.4.83
to 98.
कर्मवद्भाव the activity of the agent or
|kartā of an action represented as
object or karman of that very ac-
tion, for the sake of grammatical
operations; e. g. भिद्यते काष्ठं स्वयमेव;.
करिष्यते कट: स्वयमेव. To Show facility
of a verbal actiwity on the object,
when the agcnt or kartā is dispen-
sed with, and the object iS loOked
upon aS the agent, and uSed also
as an agent, the verbal termina-.
tions ति, तः etc. are not applied im'
the sense of an agठnt, but they
are applied in the sense of an ob-
ject; consequently the sign of the
voice is not अ (शप्), but य ( यक् )
and the trerbal terminations are त,
अाताम् etc. ( तङ् ) instead of ति,
तसुस् etc. In popular language the
use of an expression of this type
is called Karmakartari-Prayoga.
For details see M. Bh. on कर्मवत्कर्मणा /
तुल्यक्रियः P. III. 1.87. C9nly such
roots as are कर्मस्थक्रियक or कर्मस्थभावक
i. e. roots whose verbal activity
is noticed in the object and not
in the subject can hawe this Kar-
makartari-Prayoga.
कर्मव्यतिहार exchange Of verbal acti-
vity; reciprocity of action; कर्मब्यति-
हार means क्रियाव्यातिहार or क्रियाविनिमय;
cf. कर्तरि कर्मव्यातेहारे P. I. 3.14.; also
कर्मव्यतिहारे णच् स्त्रियाम् । व्यावक्रोशी,
व्यात्युक्षी Kā$. on P. III. 3.43.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-120.png}}}}}}

कर्मसाधन्नं
The roots ha wiing tt: eir age:}1tS
characterized by a reciprocity of
action take the Atmanepada ter-
minations; cf. P. I. 3.l4•
कर्मसाधन prescribed in the Setase Of
an object:; a term used in the
|Mahābhāsya, in the Sense Of
affixes used in the sensc Of
*object? as contrasted with कर्तृसाधन
or भावसाधनः; e. g. the afiिx किं in the
word विधि, explained as क्षिधीँयते इति
विधिः or in the word भाव explained
as भाव्यते यः स भावः; cf. क्रियां चैव हि
भान्यते, स्वभावसिद्धं तु द्रव्यम् M.Bh. on P.
|I. 3.1. See similarly the WordS
समाहार M.Bh. on II. 1.51 and उपाधि
|M.Bh. on V. i1.13.
कर्मस्थक्रिय (roots) having their verbal
actiwity situated in the object; e.g.
' the root अव + रुधूथ् in अवरूणद्धि गाम् or
, the root कृ in करोति कटम्; cf. कर्मस्थभा-
वकानां कर्मस्थक्रियाणां न्च P. III. 1.87
. Vart. 3.
कमैस्थभावक (roots) having their verbal
action or happening noticed in the
object; e. g. the rOot अासू and शी in
बालमासयति शाययति Wherc the function
of the root bears effect in the
object boy and not in the mowe-
ments of the Object as in the
sentence बालभबरुणद्धि. See कर्मस्थक्रिय
abowe as also M.Bh. on III. 1.87
. and Kaiyata On the same.
कर्मादि lit. karman and others; a term
often used in the Mahābhāgya for
kārakas Or Words connected with
a verbal actiwity which hawe the
object Or karrmakāraka mentioncd
first; सुपां कर्मादयोप्यर्थाः संख्या चैव तथा
तिङाम् M.Bh, on I. 4.21.
कमपदिष्ट QperationS prescribed speci-
fically for objects i. e. prescribed
in the case of objects which are
described tO be functioning as the
subject to show facility " of the
verbal action; e. g. the vikarapa,
|104
कलाापन्नं
श्यकॢ or the affix च्न्ग॒ि; cf. कश्मीँपदिष्टा विधय;
कर्मस्थभावकानां कर्मस्थक्रियाणां वा भवन्ति |
कर्तृस्थभावकाश्च दीपादयः M.Bh.on I.1.44.
कर्विणी A kind of svarabhakti. See
करविणी.
कर्षण extension; protraction, defined
as kālaviprakar$a by commentators;
a, peculiarity in the recital as
noticed in the pronunciatioin of ट्र
when followcd by चु , or ड् wheā
followed by ज् e. g. ष्ट्यै; षइजात. cf.
Nār. Sik. I.7.19.
क९ a, fault of pronunciation conse-
' quent upon directing the tongue
to a place in the mOuth which is
not the propcr One, for the utte-
rance Of a vOwc]; a vOw&l so pro-
nounced; cf. संधृतः कळेो ध्मातः... रेरामश
इति । cf.also निवृत्तकलादिकामवर्णस्य प्रत्यापातिं
वश्यामि M.b8h. Ahnika, 1.
कलाप (कलाप-व्याकरण) alternative narme
given tO the trcatise on grammar
written by Sarvavarman who) is
believd tO have lived in the days
of the Sātavāhana king8. The trea-
tise is popularly known by the
namc K६itantr:a Vy*tkarana. The
availab!e trgatiSc,viz. Kal:ःpastttras,
is much similar to thc Kitantra
Stitrष्as having a fcw changcs atnd
additions only here at1(l thcre.It is
rathgr risky to say that Kalipa
waS an athcieht Systern of grammar
which is rcferred tO irh the Patīini
Stitra कलापिनेोष्ण॒ P. IV. 3. 108. For
details see कातन्त्र.
कलपरत्न a commentary on the kāraka
portion Of the Kalápa grammar as-
cribed to thc famouS commentator
Durgasitihha.
कलापसंग्रद्द a commentary on the
Kalāpa Stitras.
कलापिन् the author of the work re-
ferred tO as Kālapa in the Mahā-
bhāgya which perhaps was a work
on grammar aS the word कालाप is
→-~ -~→



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-121.png}}}}}}

कल्प 105
mentioned with the word
in the Mahābhāsya, cf. M.Bh. on
कलापिनेोऽणू P. IV. 3. 108. Kalāpin is
|mentioned as a pupil of Vai$am-
pàyana , in . the Mahābhāsya; gf.
वैशम्पायनान्तवासी कलापी M.Bh. on P.
IW.3. 104.
कल्प the tad. affix कल्पप् added to any
Substantive in the sense of slightly
inferior, Or almOst complete; e. g.
पटुकल्प:, मृदुकल्पः; cf. P. V. 3. 67 and
|Kā$ikā thercon.
कल्पन, कल्पना suppOsitioh, assumption;
cf. गुणकल्ट्पनया च भिक्षुनटसूत्रयोश्छन्दस्त्वम्
|Kāś. on P. IV.3. l |10; cf. also अनेक-
ह्निङ्क्ष्टकल्पनापेक्षया' अस्या उचितत्वात् Pari.Sek.
on. Pari. 94.
कल्पनालाघव brevity of thought; bre-
wity of expression; minimum
asSumption. See the word लाघव.
कल्पप् tad. affix कल्प. See कल्प.
कल्पलता name of a commentary on
Bhaftoji's Prauएँंhamanoramā ' by
Krध्namiśra. ·
क्ल्मन् the Same as karman or
Object of an action especially
When it is not fully entitled to be
called karman, but looked upon
aS karman only for the sake of
being used in the accusative case;
SubOrdinate karman, asfor instance
the cow in गां पयो दोग्धि. The terrm
WaS uSed by ancient grammarians;
gfविपरीतं तु यत्क॒र्म तत् कल्म कवयो विदुः
M.Bh. on P.:I. 4. 51. See कर्मन्.
कल्याणामल्ळु author of the c9mmentary
Sabdaratnadipa on the Sabdaratna
of Hari Dīkgita.
कल्याणसरस्वती author of the Laghus-
āraSvata, a Small grammar work.
He lived in the 18th century
A. D.	→
कल्याणसागर author ofthe Haimalihga-
nuŚasana-vivarana, a commentary
on the LihigānuŚāsana chapter of|
14
कसुन्
Hernacandra's grammar. He lived
in the 16 th century A. D.
कल्याण्यादि a class of words headed
by the Word कल्याणी to which the
taddhita affix एय (ढकू) is add-
ed, in the sense of * ofाँspring ?
and, side by side, the ending इन्
( इनङ् ) is substituted for the last
letter Of those words ; e. g. काल्या-
णिनेनयः, सौभागिनेयः; cf. Kaś. on P. IV.
1.I126.
कवर्ग the class of guttural conSOnants
क
COnsisting of the five consonants
कू, स्ट्, श, घ्घ्घ्घ्घ्घ्घ्घ्घ्घ्. ङ्. →
ल्पदुम a treatise on roots wrj-
tten by Bopadeva, the son ofKe$-
ava and the pupil of DhaneŚa who
lived in the time of Hemādri, the
Yādava King of Devagiri in the
thirteenth century. He has written
a short gramtmar work named
Mugdhabodha, which has been
wery popular in 'Bengal being
Studied in many Tols or Pāthaś-
ālās.
कविकल्पदुमटीका a commentary on the
|Kavikalpadruma, written by the
author ( बोपदेव ) himself. It is kno-
wn by the name Kāvyakāmad-
henu; ( 2 ) a cOmmcntary on
Kavikalpadruma by Rāmatarka-
wāgॉŚa.	→
कविचन्द्र author of a Small treatise on
grammar called Sārasatvari. He
lived in the seventeenth century
A.ID. He was a resident ofDarbha-
ihgā. Jayakरृंha is alsO giwem as the
name of the author of the Sārasa-
tvari grammar and it is pOSSible
that Jayakपृsna was given the title,
or another mame, Kavicandra.
कश्यप name of a Writer on the
Cāndra Wyākarana.
कसुन् krt affix अस् found in Vedic
ILiterature, in the sense of the
infinitive; e. g. ईश्चरो विलिखः ( विलि-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-122.png}}}}}}

106
कसेन् कातन्त्र
खितुम्) cf. P. III. 4.13, 17• The declensiQn, synta*,, cOmp9u nds
word ending in this करु॑सुन् beCOmeS noun-affixes ( taddhita affixes )
an indeclinable; cf. कंत्वातेोसुन्कसुन: cornjugation, vOice, and verbal
|P. I. 1.40.
कसेन् krt affix असे in the sense of
the infinitive in Vedic ILiterature ;
e. g. प्रेषे, श्रियसे; cf. Kāś. orn P. III.
4.• 9.•
कस्कादि a class of compound-words
|headed by कस्क in which the
visarga occurring at the end of
the first member is noticed aS
changed into सु against the uSual
rules;' e. g. केस्कः, क्रौतस्कुतः भ्रातुष्पुत्रः,
सद्यस्कालः, धनुष्कपालम् and others;	cf.
|]P. 'VIII. 3.48. AS this कस्का|ादिगण
is Said to be अाकृतिगण, similar
words can be said to be in the
कस्कादिगण although they are not
actually mentioned in the गणपाठ.
का a technical term used' in the
Jainemdra Vyākarana for the term
पञ्चमी used ira Parini?s grammar,
काण्ड tad. affix काण्ड prescribed after
words like दूर्वा, तृणे, कर्म in the
sense of समूह; cf. दूर्वादिभ्यः (v. l.
पूर्वादिभ्यः) काण्डः; Kaś. oh P.IV. 2.51.
काण्डमायन्न name ofan ancient Writcr
of a Prāti$ākhya work who held
that Visarga before the consonant
सू is dropped only when स् is
followed by a, Surd consonant; cf6
Tai.Pr. IX. 1.
कातन्त्र name of an important small
treatise om grammar which
appearS like a systematic abridg-
ment of the A$रृंādhyayi of P६raini.
It ignores rmany unimportant
rules of Pānini, adjusts many,
and altogether omits the Vedic
|portion and the accent chapter of
Parini. It lays down the Sti{ras
in an order different from that oyf
Panini diwiding the work into |!
four adhyāyaS dealing with
technical terms, sarihdhi rules,
derivatives in an Ordcr. The total
number of rulcS is 1412 Supple-
rmented by many SubOrdinate
rules or VarttikaS. The treatise
is believcd to have been written
by Sarvavarman, called Sarvavar-
man or Sarva, Or Sarva, who is
said to have lived in the rcign
of ti1c Sātavāhana kings. The
belief that Pānini referS to a wOr]k
of Kalāpin in his rulcs IV.
3.108 and IV. 3.48 a nd that
|Pataiंjali's w*ords - कात्ठापम् and
माहावार्तिकम् Support it, haS not
much strength. The wOrk was
very popular eSpccially armOng
those who wanted tO study $poken
Sanskrit with eaSe and attained
for seweral ycar;} a wery .prOmi-
nent place amOng tcxt-bOokS On
grammar especially in Bchar,
Bengal and Gujarat. It has gOt
a, large numbcr of glOSScs and
comimentary wOrks, many of
which are in a manuscript form at
present. ItS laSt chapter ( Catur-
tha-Adhyāya) iS aScribcd tO Vara-
ruci. AS thc arrangement of
topics is entircly different from
Pãnini's order, inspite of c¢ynsi-
derable rcscmblanace C७f Stitras and
their wording, it is probable that:
the work was based orh Pā'irni
but composcd on the modcls of
ancicnt gramrmarianS viz. Indra,
Sāka¢ष्āyana and othcrs whose
works,althOugh not available now,
were available to the author-
Thc grammar Kātantra is also
called Kālāpa. A comparison of
the Kātantr:!, Si{ras श्रand the
Kālāpa Stitras shows that the
one is a diferent vcrsion of
the other. The Kātauntra Gram-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-123.png}}}}}}

कातन्त्रकौमुदीं 107
mar is also called Kau māra aS it
is said that the original 1nstruc-
tions for the grammar were re-
ceived by the author from
Kumāra or Karttikeya. For de-
tails see Vol. VII Patafंjala
Mahābhāsya published by the
|ID. P: Society, Poona, page 375.
कातन्त्रकौमुदी (i) a commentary on
the Kātantra Stitras written by
GOvardhana in the I2th century.
A• D. ; (2) a commentary on the
Katantra Sütras ascribed to Gah-
geŚaśarman.
कातन्त्रचन्द्रिका a gloSS on the cOm-
mentary ofVararuci on the कातन्त्रसूत्र
ascribed to Hari IDīk$ंita of the
17th century if this Hari Dīkśंita
js the Same as the author of the
Sabdaratna.
कतिन्त्रधातुवृच्ति ascribed to Durga-
siriaha, the famous commentator
Of the Kātantra Sütras who ]ived
in the nineth Or the tenth centur y.
कातन्त्रधातुवृतिटीका a cOmmentary
aScribed to Ramāmātha and call-
ed Manoramā on the Kātantra-
dhāt uvयृ'tti of Durgasirihha. See
कातन्त्रधातुवृत्ति above.
कातन्त्रपञ्जिका a name uSually given to
a cOmpendium Of the type of'Viva-
rama or gloSS w ritten on the Kā-
tantra Stitras. The gloss written by
T9urgasirihha On the famous com-
|mentary on the Kātantra Stitras by
Durgasirihha ( the same as the
the famouS Durgasirhha or
anOther Of, , the same name )
|known as दौर्गसिंही वृत्ति is called
|Kātantra Pafंjika or Kātantra-
vivarana.• A scholar of Katantra
grammar by name KuŚala- . has
written a Pafर्र्jikā on दुर्गसिंह's वृत्ति
which is named प्रदीप. Another
Scholar, Trivikrama has written a
gloss named Uddyota.
||
कातन्त्रपरिभाषापाठ name given to a
text consisting of Paribhāśāstitras,
beliewed to hawe been Written by
the Stātrakara himSelf as a, Supple-
|mentary portion tO the main
grammar. Many Such lists Of Pari-
bhasāstī tras are available, mOStly
in manuscript form, containing
more than a, hundred Stitras diwi-
ded into twO main grOtaps-the
Paribhā$āsütras and the Balābala-
sऐitras. See परिभाषासंग्रह ed. by B. O.
R. I. Pooma.
कातन्त्रपरिभाषावृत्ति (1) name of a gloss
on the Paribhā$āpatha written
by Bhāvamiśra, probably a Mai-
thila Pandit whose date is mot
|known. He has explained { 2 Pari-
bhāsās deriving many of them frorra
the Kātantra Stitras. The work
seems to be based on the Paribhāśā
works by Vyādi and others on the
system of Pār]ini, suitable changes
having been made by the writer
with a view to present the work as
belonging tO the Kātantra school;
(2) nanae of a glOSS on the Pari-
bhasāpātha of the Katantra schOOl
explaining 65 Paribhāśās. No name
of the author is found in the Poona
manuscript. The India Office
Library copy haS given Durgasitihha,
as the authOr's name; but it is
doubtful whether Durgasirihha, was
the author of it. See परिभाषासंग्रह ed.
by B. O. R. I. Poona.
कातन्त्रपरिशिाघ्ष्ट ascribed to Sripatidatta,
whose date is not known ; from ā
number of gloSses written on this
work, it appears that the wOrk
was ' once very popular among
students of the Kātantra School.
कातन्त्रपरिशिष्टचन्द्रिका a gloss on the
Katantra-Pari$i$ं¢a ascribed tO a
scholar mamed Rāmadāsa-cakra-
vartin who ha& written another...



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-124.png}}}}}}

कातन्त्रपरोिशिष्टटीका
|ाँ08
कातन्त्रोच्तर
work also named Kãtantrawyā-
khyasāra.
कातन्त्रपरिशिाष्टटीका a gloss on the
|Kātantra-PariŚigja written by a
Kātantra, scholar Put!र्तुंarikàkक्ष्a.
कातन्त्रपारीशेष्टप्रद्योत a gloss on the
Kātantrapariśi$ंॉa by Goyicandra
in the twelfth century.
कातन्त्रपरिशि॒िष्टसिद्धान्तरत्नाङ्कुर a gloss
on the Kātantra-pariŚi$ंta by Siva-
rāmendra, who is believed to have
Written a gloSS on the StitraS Of
|Panini also.
कातन्त्रप्रक्रिया a name given to the Ka-
tantra SütraS which were written
in the original form as a Pra-
|kriyāgrantha Or a work discuSSing
the wariouS topicS Such aS alpha-
bet, euphOnic rules, declension,
derivatives from nouns, syntax,
conjugation derivatives from roots
etC- etc.
कातन्त्रऽप्रदीप a grammar work written
by a Scholar named Kuśala on the
Kātantrastitravrtti by Durgasihpha.
See कातन्त्रपाञ्जका.
कातन्त्रबालबोधिनी a short explanatory
gloSS on the Katantra Stitras by
Jagaddhara of Kashmir who lived
in the fourteenth century and who
WrOte a work on grammar called
ApaŚabdanirākarana.
āन्नरट्ठस्य a Work on the ]Kātantra
Sütras asCribed to Ramānātha
Widyāwacaspati of the sixteenth
century A. D.
कातन्त्ररूपमाला a work, explaining the
various forms of nouns and verbs
accOrding to the rules of the
Kātantra grammar, ascribed to
Bhāvasena of the fifteenth century.
कातन्त्रलघुवृाप्ति a short gloss on the
Kātantra Sütras ascribed to a
scholar named Chucchukabhatta.
कातन्त्रविघरण a commentary on the
Kātantrawistara Of Vardhamāna
by P!thvidhara who lived in the
fifteenth century A. D.
कातन्त्रविस्तर a famOus work on the
Kātantra Grammar written by
Vardhamāna a Jain Scholar of the
twelfth century who is believed to
be the same as the author of the
well-known work GaT]aratna-
mahOdadhi.
कातन्त्रवृाति name of the earliest com-
mentary On the Kātantra Sti tras
ascribed to IDurgaSirihha. The
commentary waS once very popu-
lar as iS shOwn by a number Of
explanatory cornrmentaricS writtcn
upon it, one Of which iS bclieved to
have been writfen by IXurgasifinha
|himself. See IDurgaSirihha.
कातन्त्रवृत्तिटिप्पणी a gloss on दौर्गसिंहवृाप्ते
written by Guraakirti in the four-
teenth century A.D.
कातन्त्रवृत्तिटीका a cOmmentary Om
Durgasirihha?s Kātantravjrt ti by
Mok$eśvara in the fifteenth cen-
tury A.D.
कातन्त्रवृत्तिव्याख्या named A$±amafi-
galā on Durgasirihha?s Kātantra-
vptti written by Rāmakiśora Cakr-
awartin who is bclieved to have
writtem a grammatical work शाव्दद्मेो-
धप्रकाशिका.-
कातन्त्रव्याख्यासार a work of the type
of a summary written by Rārma-
dāsa Cakrawartin of the twelfth
century.
कातन्त्रसूत्रवृत्ति an old Wrtti on the
Kātantra Stitras ascribed to Vara-
ruci wh० is, of course, different
from Vararuci Kātyāyana. The
Vपृtti appears to have been occu-
pying a position similar to that Of
Durgasirihha.
कातन्त्रोच्तर a treatise on the Kātantra
Grammar believed to have been
written by Vidyānanda.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-125.png}}}}}}

कात्थकय 1
09 कारक
वत्थब्य an ancient writer of Nirukta
quoted by Yaska in his Nirukta.
कत्य (l) another name sometimes
given to Kātyāyana to whom is
aScribed the composition of the
Wārttikas on Pārimi-sütras; (2) am
ancient writer Kātya quoted as
a lexicographer by K$ंiraSvāmin,
Hemacandra and other writers.
कlत्यायनाँ the well-known author of the
Vārttikas on the stitras of Panini.
He is also believed to be the
author of the Vājasaneyi Prāti-
$àkhya and many sütra workS
named after him. He iS be!|iटved
to be a resident of South India On
the strength of the remark प्रियतद्धिता
दाक्षिणात्याः made by Pataप्रेर्ष्णंjali in
comnection with the statement *यथा
लौकिकवैदिकेषु'which is looked upon as
Kātyāyana's Vārttika. Sorne Schol-
ars say thatVararuci was alsO anO-
ther mame given to him, in which
case the Wārttikakāra Wararuci
Kātyayana has to be looked upon
as different from the 8ubSequent
writer named Wararuci to whOm
some works on Prakrit and Kātan-
tra grammar are ascribed. For
details see Mahābhā$ya Vol. VII.
pages 193-223 published by the D.
|E.Society, Poona.See also वार्तिकपाठ
below.
कानच् affix अ॒ान॒ forming perfect parti-
ciples which are mostly $een in
Vedic ILiterature. The affix कीनञ्छ्व्
is technically a substItute for the
लिट् affix. Nouns ending in क्रूान॒च्
gowern the accusative case of the
niouns connected with them; c.g•
सोमं सुषुवाणः; cf. |]P. III. 3.106 and
P. ]II. 3.69.
काम् augment अाम् applied tO दूष्णीम्
just.as अकञ्क्ष is applied, e:gः?
किल तूष्णीकाम् M. Bh. on V.3.72.
कामचार option; permission to do as
desired; liberty of applying any of
the rules of grammar that present
themselves; cf. तत्र कामचारो गृह्यमाणेन
वा विभाक्तं विशेषाश्येतुं अङ्केन वा M. Bh. on
]P.I.1.27 Vār t.. 6.
कामधेनु abridgment of काव्यकामधेनु of
Bopadeva; the word js' also used
aS a short form for काव्यकामधेनु.
कामधेनुसुधारस a commentary on the
Kàvyakāmadhenu by Ananta, son
Of CintāmaTi who lived in the
sixteenth century A. D.
कमम् optionally; at will; cf. काममति-
दिश्यतां व्रा M. Bh. on I,.1.57.
काम्यचु affix in the sense of * desirjng
for Oneself * applied to nouns t6
form denominative roots; e.
पुत्रकाम्यति; cf. काम्यच्च P. III, 1. 9.
कार an affix, given in the Prātiśākhya
works and,by Kātyāyan3a also in his
Vārtlika, which is added to a letter
or a phonetic element for conve-
nience of rnention; e.g. इकारः, उकारः ;
cf. बर्ण: कारोच्तरो वणख्या; वर्णकारौ 'निर्देशकौ
Tai. Pra.I. 16; XXII.4.;cf. also W.
Pr. 1.37. It is also applied to sylla-
|bles or words in a similar way to
indicate the phonetic element of'
the word as apart from the sense
of the word; ' e. g.' यत एवकारस्ततो-
न्यत्रावधारणम् Vyāk. Paribhāsā ; cf.
also the words चकारः, हिंकारः: (2)
additional purpose served by a
word Such as an adhikāra word;
cf. अधिकः कारः । पूर्वविप्रतिषेधा न पठितव्या '
भवन्ति M. Bh. on P. I. 3.1l.
कारक iit. doer of an action. The
-टद्रword is used in the technical $ense '
1 of *instrument of action'; cf कारक-
शब्दश्च निभित्तपर्यायः । कारकं हेतुरिति नार्था-
न्तरम् । कस्य हेतुः l क्रियायाः Kāś. on, P. I.
4.23; cf: also कारक इति संज्ञानिर्देशः ।
साधकं निर्वर्तकं कारकसंज्ञं भवति t M.Bh. on
|P. I. 4.23. The word *kāraka' in
short, means *the capacity in which
a thing becomes instrumental' in



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-126.png}}}}}}

→«、 110
करककांरोका
bringing about an action '. This
capacity is looked upOn as the
sense of the caSe-affixes which
express it. There are six kārakas
given in all ठुrammar tr६atises,
अपादान, संप्रदान, अधिकरण, करण , कर्मेन् amd
कर्तृ to expresS which the case affixes
or Vibhaktis पञ्चमी, चतुर्थीाँ, सतनी, तृतीया,
द्वितीया and प्रथमा are respectively
used which, hence, are called
Kārakawibhaktis as contrasted With
Upapadavibhaktis, which show a
relation between two substantives
and hence are looked upon as
weaker than the Kārakavibhaktis;
cf. उपपदविभक्तेः कारकविभच्तिर्वलीयसी Parj.
Sek. Pari.94. The topic explaining
Kārakawibhaktis is looked upon as
a wery important and difficuit
chapter in treatiSes of grammar
and there are several smail com-
pendiums Written by ScholarS deal-
ing with kārakas only. For the
' topic of Kārakas see P. I. 4.23 to
55, Kat. II. 4.8-42, Vyākarana
Mahābhāgya Vol. VII. pp.262-264
published by the D. E. Society,
Poona.
कारककारिका pOSSibly another name
for the treatise on Kārakas known
as कारकचक्र written by Purugotta-
madeva the reputed grammarian
of Bengal who lived in the latter
half of the twelfth century A. D.
See कारकन्चंक्र.
कारककौमुदी a Work on the Katantra
grammar discuSsing the Kāraka
portion.
करकरवप्ण्डनमपण्डन् also calbed षट्कुार॒क- ||
खण्डनमण्डन which is a portion of the
author*$ bigger work namcd त्रिलेा-
चनचान्द्रक्रा. The work is a discourse
ora the six karakas writteru by
Mataikamtha, a grammarian of the
Kātantra SchOol. He has a!so
written another treatise narned
Kārakavicāra,.
करकवा
कारकचक्र (1) written by Purusotta.
ma.deva a reputed grarramariar
Of Betngal who wrote many work*
on gratmmar of which the Bhaga.
V!tti, the Paribhāśāvपूtti andJfंā.
pakasarm uecCya deserve a specia]
|mention. The verse portiðn oj
the Kàrakacakra of which the
prOSe pOrtion appears like a
commCntary might be bearing
the name Kārakakaumudi. →
कारकटीका a work on Kārakas as-
cribed to Bhairava..
कारकृतत्व a treatise on the topic of
KãrakaS written by Cākrāpani-
śe$a, belonging to the famous
Seśa family of grammarians, who
lived in the seventeenth century
A. D.
कारकनिर्णय a work disCuSSing the
various Kārakas from the
Naiyāyika, view-point written by
the well-known Naiyayika, Gadā-
dhara Chakravartin of Bengal,
who was a pupil of JagadiŚa and
wh0 flourished in the 16th cen-
tury A. D. He is looked upon as
One Of the greateSt Scholars of
NyāyaŚāstra.. His main literary
work was in the field of Nyāya-
$ãstra On which he has written
Sewcral treatiScs.
कारकपरिच्छेद a work dealing with
Kārakas ascribed to Rudrabhattःa,
कारकपाद name given by Sivadeva
and Othcr grammarians to the
fourth pāda of the first adhyāya
of Pānini's A$jādhyāyi which be-
gins with the Stitra कारके I. 4. 1
and which dcals with the Kāra-
, kaS or aux!liaries of action.
कारकवाद (1) a treatise discussing the
Several Kārakas, written by
Kfः$na$āstri Arade a famous .Nai-
; yāyika of Benares who lived in
{ the eighteenth century A. D; (2)



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-127.png}}}}}}

कारकवेिचार 111
कायै
a treatise on syntax written by |
Jayaramabhattacārya which is
called कारकविवेक also, which See
संक्षित्तसूत्रबह्वथैसूचकः श्लोकः कारिका Pada-
vyavasthāstitrakārikā of Udaya-
kirti.
beloW. कारित (1) ancient term for the
कारकविचार a work on Kārakas as-
cribed to Manikantha. See Kāra-
|kakhatरे॒danamanऐंàana above.
कारकविभक्ति case affix governed by
a verb or verbal derivative as
contrasted with उपपदावेभाक्ति a case
afiix gOwerned by a noun, not
poSSessing any verbal activity.
See the word कारक abowe. See
alsO the word उपपदविभक्ति.
causal Vikarat]a, ( णिञ्च in Pānini's
grammar and इन् in Kātantra);
(2) Causal or cauSative as applied
to roots ending in णिच्च or words
derived from Such root8 called
also *nyanta' by the followers of
Pānini's grammar; cf. इग्नू कारितं
धात्वर्थे Kāt. III. 2.9, explained as
धात्वर्थक्रियानाम्न इन् परो भवति ' धात्वर्थे स च
कारितसंज्ञक्र; l
कारकविभक्तिबलोयस्त्व the dictum that कार्तकौजपादि a clasS of Words headed
a Kāraka case is stronger than
an Upapada case,' e. g. the accu-
Satiwe case as required by the
Word नमस्कृत्य,Which iS stronger than
the dative caSe as required by the
word नमः. Hence the word भुनित्रये
has to be used in the sentence |
मुनित्रयं नमस्कृत्य and mot the word
मुनित्रया॒य cf. जूट्रपपदविभक्तः , कारकविभक्ति-
र्बलीयसी Pari. Sek. Pari. 94.
कारकावेिलास an anonymous elemen-
tary work on syntax explaining
the nature and function of the
six Kārakas.
कारकविवेक known as कारकवाद also;
a short work on the meaning and
relation of words written by Jaya-
rāmabhatjācārya who lived in the
beginning of the eighteenth cen-
tury. ' The work forms the con-
cluding portion of a larger work
called कारकविवेक which was written
by · शिरोमणिभट्टाच्चार्य.. The work
कारकवाद has a short commentaiy
written by the author himself.
कारकव्याख्या the same as कारकवादव्याख्या
written by जयरामभट्टाचार्य. See कारक-
कारिका a verse or a line or lines in
metrical form giving the gist of
the explanation of a topic; cf.
by the word कार्तकौजप, which are
all dvatmdva compounds, and
Which hawe their first member
retaining its own accent; e. g.
कार्तकौजपौ, अावन्त्यश्मकाः etc. cf. Kāś.
on P. VI. 2.37.
कार्तिकेय the Original instructor of the
Kātantra Or Kālāpa Grammar,
tO S'arvavarman who composed
the Stitras according to inspira-
tion receiwed by him. The Kā-
tantra, hence, has alsO got the
r1ame Kaumāra Vyākarana.
कार्मनामिक the word is found used in
Yāska's Nirukta as an adjective to
the word संस्कार where it means
*belonging to nouns derived from
roofs (कर्मनाम)'like पाचक,कधैक etc.The
changeS undergone by the roots in
the formation of such words i. e.
Words shOwing action are termed
कार्मनामिकसंस्कार; cf. कर्मकृतं नाम कर्मनाम।
तस्मिन् भवः कार्मनामेिकः Durgavrtti on
Nir. I.13.
(1) brQught , into €xistence by
activity (क्रियया निर्वृत्तं कार्यम् ) as oppo*
sed to नित्य .eternal; cf. एके वर्णाञ्जु
शाश्वतिकान् न कार्यीन् R.Pr... XIII.4; cf
also ननु च यस्यापि कायाँ: ( शब्दाः ) तस्यापि
पूजार्थम् M. Bh. on I. 1. 44 Wart.
17;(2) which should be done, used



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-128.png}}}}}}

कार्यकाल 12
काशाकृत्स्न
in connection with a grammatical
operation; cf. कार्य एत्वे स॒यमीकारमाहु : l
अभैष्म इत्येतस्य स्थाने अभयीष्मेति { R. ' Pr.
XIV,16; cf. also विप्रातषेधे परं कार्यम् |P.
I.4.2; (3) a gram matical Opera-
tion as for instance in the phraSeS
द्विकार्ययोगे, त्रिकार्ययेागे etc. ; cf. alsO
गौणमुख्ययेोर्मुख्ये कायैसप्रत्यय्ः Par. Sek.
Pari. 15; (4) object of a transitive
verb; cf. शेष्श्रः कार्ये Sāk.
कार्यकाल along wi h the operation; cf.
कार्यकालं संज्ञापरिभा 3म् , ruleS laying
down technical termS and regulat-
ing rules are to be interpreted
along with the rules that preSCribe
or enjoin operations ( prOvided
the technical terrns Occur in thOSe
rules, or, the regulating ruleS cOn-
cern those rules). See Pari. Sek•
. Pari 3.•
कार्यकालपरिभाषा one of the important
Paribhāgās, regarding the applica-
tion of the Paribhāga rules. See
कायैकाल. For details see Par. Sek.
|Pari. 3.
कायतिदेशा looking upon the substi-
tute as the very original for the
sake of operations that are	Caused
by the presence of the Original;the
word is used in contrast with रूपातिदेश्ा
where actually the original iS re-
stored in the place of the Substitute
on certain conditionS. For details
see Mahābhāsya on द्विर्वचनेच्चि P.
1.l.59.
कार्यिन् the word or wording that
undergoes the operation ; cf. सतो हि
कार्यिणः कार्येण भवितव्यम् M. Bh. on I.1.
l.,Vārt. 7, also कार्यम्नुभवन् .हि कार्याँ
निमित्ततयां नाश्रीयते Par. Sek. Pari. 10.
काल notion of time created by difier-
ent contacts made by a thing with
other things one after another.
Time required for the utterance of
a short woWel is taken as a unit of
time Which is called मात्रा or
कालमात्रा, lit. measurement of time;
(2) degree of a vowel, the vowels
being looked upon as possessed of
three degrees हृस्व,दीधै,& प्ळुत measur-
ed respectively by one, two and
three mātrās; ' cf. ऊकालेाऽञ्चस्वदीधैप्ळुतः
|P.ाँ• 2.27; (3) time notion in gene-
|ral, expresSed in connection with
an activity in three ways past
( भूत), present ( वर्तमान ), and future
K भविष्य॒त् ) to show which the terms
भूता, वर्तमाना and भविष्यन्ती were used
by ancient grammarians; cf. the
words पूर्वकाल, उत्तरकाल; also cf. पाणि-
न्युपज्ञमकालकं व्याकरणम् Kāś. on P. II.
4.21 ; (4) place of recital ( पाटदश )
dep3nding On the time of recital,
cf. न परकालः पूर्यकाले पुनः (V.Pr.III. 3)
a dicturn siriāilar to Panini's पूर्वत्रा-
सिद्धम् P. VIII. 2.1.
कालदुष्ट a wOrd not sanctioned by
rules Of grammar. The word pro-
bably referS to the corruption tak-
ing place in cOnnection with the
use of a word on accOunt of lapse
of time; cf. कालदुष्टा अपशब्दाः Durgh.
Vr. on II.2.6.
कालनिद्दर्शक signifying time; cf. काल-
निदर्शकाः प्रत्यया एत लुट् लिट् लट् इत्यादयः.
कालभेद difference in the time of
utterance; cf.. किमुच्यते विवारभेदाद्विति !
न पुनः कालभेदादपि । M. Bh. on Siva
Stitra 1•
कलठव्यवय interval of tiime; cf. अान्य-
भान्यं तु कालशब्दव्यवायात् । , कालव्यवायात् ।
दण्ड अग्रम् ! M. Bh. on Siva Stātra 1.
कालसामान्य time in generai; unspeci•
fied_time; cf. वर्तमाने लडुक्तः कालसामान्ये
न प्रiमेोति Kāś. on P.III,3.142.
धेल name of the comm-
entary by Bopadewa on his own
work कधिकल्पद्रुम. See कविकल्पद्रुम.
काशकृत्स्न (1):an ancient grammarian
and philosopher referred to in the
Mahābhāgya; (2) the work on
grammar by Ka$akrtsna; cf.पाणिनिना



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-129.png}}}}}}

काशादि
113
केि
प्रेोत्ततं पाणिनीयम् } अापिशलम् ! काशकृत्स्रम् ।
M.Bh. on I.1. Ahnika 1.
काशादि a class of words headed by
the word काश to which the taddhita,
affix इल is affixed in the four senses
stated in P.IV.2.67-70 e.g. काशिलम्,
कर्दमिलम् etc.; cf. Kāś. on P.IV.2.80.
काशिका (1)name given to the reputed
· gloSS (वृत्ति) on the Stitras of Pānini
written by the joint authors Jayā-
ditya and Vamana in the 7th
century A.D.Nothing definitely can
be Said aS to which portion was
written by.Jayaditya and which by
Vamana, or the whole work was
jointiy written. Sorne scholars
believe that the work was called
Kā$ikā as it was written in the
city Of Kāśi and that the gloss
on the first five Adhyayas was
written by Jayāditya and that on
the last three by Vamana. Although
it is Written in a scholarly way,
the w^rk forms an excellent help
to beginners to understand the
sense of the pithy Stitras of Pānini.
The work has not only deserved
but Obtained and maintained a,
wery prominent pOsition among Stu- ||
dents and scholars of Panini's gram-
mar in spite of other workS like the
Bhāgavrtti, the Prakriyā Kaumudi,
the Siddhānta Kaumudi and otherS
written by equally learned scholars.
|Its wording is based almost on the
Mahābhā3ya which it has followed,
avoiding, Of course, the Scholarly
disquisitions occurring here and
there in the MahābhāSya. It ap-
pears that many commentary
workS were written on it, the well-
known among them being the Kāśi-
kāvivaramapajिikā or Nyāsa written
by Jinendrabuddhi and the Pada-
maशेjari by Haradatta. For details
seeVyākaranamahābhāśyaVol.VII
pp 286-87 published by the ID. E.
15
Society, Poona. ( 2 ) The name
Kāślika is sometimes found given
to their commentaries on sta-
ndard workS Of Sanskrit Grammar
by scholars, as possibly they were
written at KāŚीं; as for instance,
(a) Kāsikā on Vaiyakaranabhü|sana-
Sāra by Hari Dīk$ita, and ( b )
|Kāsikā on Paribhāgenduśekhara by
Vaidyanātha Pāyagut?de.
काशिकााविवरणपञ्जिका also called Nyāsa,
the well-knoWn commentary
written by Jinendrabuddhi on the
Kā$ikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana.
See Kāśikā above.
काशिकावृत्तिसार a commentary on the
Kāśikāvपृtti named अमृतसूति by
VāranawateŚa-śãstrin.
काश्यप name of an ancient gramma-
rian quoted by Panini, possibly an
author of some PrātiŚākhya work
nOW loSt.
काश्यपीवृत्ति name of a gloss on the
Cāndra Vyākarana.
काश्यादि a class of words headed by
the words काशि, चेचदि and others tO
which the taddhita affixes ठञ्ञ्जुम् and
ञ्ञिठ are added in the miscellaneous
senses; e- g. काशिकी, काशिका; वैदिकी,
वैदिका etc-; cf. Kāś. on P. IV. 2.116.
The fem. afiix ई is applied when
the affix ठञ्च॒म् is added to the word
काशि; cf. P. IV. 1.15.
काष्ठादेि a class of words headed by
the word काष्ठ after which a, word
Standing as a second member in a
compound gets the grave accent
for it,e. g. काष्ठाध्यापकः, परमाध्यापक: etC.
cf. ]P. VIII. H.67.
कि (1) kपूt affix इ prescribed after घु
roots with a prefix attached;e•g.प्रदिः
प्रधिः cf. P.III.3.92, 93; (2) krt affix इ
looked upon as a perfect termina-
tion and, hence, causing reduplica-
tion and accusative case of the
noun connected, found in Vedic



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-130.png}}}}}}

28`<
114
कु
Literature added to rootS ending in
अा, the root ऋ, and the rOOts गाम्७
हन् and जन्;e. g• पपिः सोग्मं, जगुरिः, जग्मिः
etc., cf. P. III. 2. 171; (2) a term
uSed in the Jainendra Vyākara t?a
for thc term संचुद्वि.
किंवृत्त a form derived from thc pro-
ngun किम्; cf. क्रिमो वृत्तं किंवृत॒म् !| |ार्कवृत्त-
ग्रहणेन तद्विभक्त्यन्तं प्रतीयाङ्कुतरडतर्मौ च । Kāś. |
on P. VIII 1.48. ||
mute कू cause the Vrddhi substi-
tu te for the first vowel in the word
to which the;y are added.
कित्करण marking with the mute letter
|क्, or looking upon aS marked
with mute , क् for purposes men-
tioned abOwe; ( see कित् abowe ).
THe word is often used in the
Mahabhā$ya; see M.Bh. on I. 1.
3, 5, 46; I. 2. 5. etc.
किंशुलकादेि a class of words headed | किन् kपृt affix इ prescribed along with
कित् (1) marked with the mute letter
· The affixes of the first type are for |
by the wOrd किंञ्छ्ठलक, which get their |
final wowel lengthcned when the |
word गिरि is placed after them as
a second member of a compound,
prOwided the word so formed js |
uSed as a prOper nOun ; e. g. किंशुल-
कागिरि:, अञ्जनागिरि:ः; cf. Kāś.	on " P.
VI. 3.I17,
क् which is applied by Pataini to
affixeS, for preventing guna and
V[ddhi substitutes to the pre-
ceding इक् vowel (इ, उ, ऋ or लठ) ;
cf.क्ङिति च, Pan. I.1.5; (2) con-
sidered Or looked upon as markcd
with, mute indicatory क् for pre-
wenting guna; cf. असंयोगााष्श्श्र्ट् ' कित्
and the following P. I. 2.5 etc.
instance वत, क्त्वा, वितन् ahd others. |
The affixes of the second type are
given mainly in the second pāda of |
the first Adhyāya by Panihi.. Be-
sides.the prevention of guna and |
vपृष्ddhi, affixes_ marked with क् or
affixes called कैित्, cause Sarinprasa-
raप्3a (see P. VT. 1.15,16), elision
of the penultimate न् (P. WI.4.24),
elision of the penuitimate vowéi
(P. VI. 4.98,100), |lengthening of
the vOwel (VI. 4.15), substitütion
ofऊ (VI. 4.19.21), elision of thc
final nasal (VI. 4.37), substitution
of अा (VI.4.42). The taddhita
afiixes which ' are marked with
कि
क्रि. See क्रि above. The affix किन्
causes the acute acccnt On the
first vOwel Of the word ending
with it, while the affix ki ( इ ) has
itSelf the acute accent on its
vowel इ.
रादि a class of roots headed by the
rOOt कृ, viz. the five roots दृ*, ', दृ,
धृटं and प्रच्छ् after which the dé$idera-
tive sign, i.e. the affix सन्, gets the
augment इ ( इट् ); e. g. चिकरिषति,
पिप्रच्छिष्प्रति; cf. Kā$. on P.VTI.2.75.
किशारादि, किसरादि a class of words
headed by किसर meaning some kind
of scent, which get thc taddhita
affix इक ( ष्टन् ) applied tO them
when thc word so formcd mcams
* a dealer of that thing; * c. g.
किशरिक:, किशरिको; cf; Kāś. on P.
]IW. 4. 53.
कील्ट्होंर्न Kielhorn F., a sound scholar
ofSanskrit Grammar who brought
out excellent editions of the Pātaiij-
ala Mahābhāsya and the Paribhās-
enduŠekhara and wrote an cssay
on the Varttikas of Kātyayana. For
details see Patafijala Mahabhā$ya
Vol VII.p.40, D. E society edition,
Poona..
उ5 (1) guttural clasS of consonants,
ंi..e• the CQnSomants इक्, शून, गु, धूञ् ,ङ्.
The vowel उ addcd to क्, signifies
the class of कू. e. g. चजेाः कु धिण्यतेोा,
VII. 3. 52, कुहोश्रुः VII. 4.62, चोः कु:



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-131.png}}}}}}

कुक्
115
कुमुदाद्धिं
VITI.2.30,.क्रिन्प्रत्ययस्य कुः; VIII.2.62;
cf. अणुदित्सर्वर्णस्य चाप्रत्ययः P.I.1• 69; (2)
substitute कु for क्रिम् cf. P. W'II• 2.
104.
कुक् augment क् ( 1 ) added to ङ्,,àt
the end of a word before a, sibi-
|lant letter; e. g प्राङ्कूशेते; cf. P.VIII.
3. 28; ( 2 ) added`ंto the words वात
and अतीसार before the afiix इन्म् , cf.
P. V. 2. 129; ( 3 ) added to words |·
of the नड group ' before the tad.
afiix छ ( ईय ), e.'g. नडकीयम्, प्श्क्षक्रीयम्;
cf. P. ]IV. 2. 91.
कुङ्कुमविकाश a commentary by Siva-
bhatta, on Jinendrabuddhi?s Kāśi-
kavivaraँ3apafjikā which is known
popularly ās NyāSa.
कुव्ञ्प्चिक ( 1 ) a commentary on
|Nāgeśa's Laghtimafijüईंā by KFsr?a-
mi$'ra; ( 2 ) a commentary On
|Nāgeśa?s Paribhāgendu$ekhara by
|Durbalacārya.
कुञ्जादि a class of words headed by कुञ्ज
to whtch the taddhita affx अायन
(च्फञ्जु) is applied in the sense ofगेोत्र
i. e. grandchildren etc• c• g• कौञ्जा-
:; cf. Kāś. on P. IV. l• 9 '.
कुटादि a group of roots headed by the
^T root कुट्oftheVIth conjugatipn afer
which an affix which is neither ञ्ञित्
nor णित् becomes ङित्,and aS a reSult
prevents the substitution of गुण or
वृद्द्द्वेि for the preceding wQWel; . e.: g•
कुटिता, कुटितुम् icf. गाङ्कुटादिभ्योऽञ्णिन्ङित्
I. 2. l•
कुटादिपाद् name given by Siradcwa
and later grammarians tO the Sec-
ond pada of the first adhyāya of
|Pāpifii's A$fādhyāyं, a3 thc pāda
begins with the Stātra गाड्कुटादिभ्येी
ञ्णिन्ङित् P. I. 2. 1•
→ट°* :***t
कुंटारच् tad. affix कुटटा॒र् added to अव,
e. g.' अवकुटारम् ; cf. P. V. 2. 80.
कुणप् tad. affix कुण added t9 words
- 'of पीलु group in the sense of *ripen-
ed condition';e.g.पीळुछुण:=पीछूनां पाकः ;
cf. P.V.2.24.
कुण्ाञ्श्वाडव्च name of an ancient gram-
mnarian who lived poSSibly after
Pārāni and before Patafjali and
who is referred to in the Mahà-
bhāsya as giving an , alternative
forrà for the starādard form Of cer-
tain words; cf. कुणरवाडवस्त्वाह् नैष॒ा शैक्रिरा
इंग्रैष्ञ्ा M.Bh. o1a'III. 2.14 ; cf. alsO
कुणरवाडवसुत्वुाह नैष वृर्हीन॒र॒ः ! कस्तर्हि । विर्द्दीनर
ऐष्ब; M. Bh. on VII.3.1.'
कुग्गेि name of an angient Vrttikārā °n
the Stitras of Pārāini, mentioned in
their works by Kaiya!.a and Hara-
datta; cf. Kaiyata's Pradipa 0n P•
[.1.74, also Padāmafjari On I.I•1•
कुत्व substitution of the consonants of
the कू class or guttural cOnsonant$•
कुप्पुशाख्रिन् a famous grarmmarian ' Of
he eighteenth century Who wr9ँt&
some works on grarnmar of which
the परिभाषाभास्क्रर is an independent
treatise on Paribhā$àS.
कुमत् a word cQntaining a .śपूर्पूurãl
leter in it;.cf. कुमति च P. VIII. 4•
|13.
कुमार (1) Kārtikeya wh9 is bgliéved
to havegivera inspiration tO théKāt-
antra-stātrakāra to write the Kātarà-
tra-Stātras; (2) mamed Vistaumitra
, who wrote a commentary on the
ऋक्प्रातिशाख्य.
कुमारीस्तनयुगाकृति॒ि a phrase uSed in
the glos5 om the कातन्त्र .by Dutgश्ā"
sirhha to give along with the défई-
fiition of र्वेिसर्जनीय or विसर्ग a graphic
description of it as shoWn in script;
cf. Kāt, I.1.16 cOIn• <-*
कुमुदादि a class of words (!) cOnsistingटं
of कुमुद, शर्करा, न्यग्रोध etc. to which the
taddhita affix ठञ्च is applied iià th°
jतै९ोrsenses given in P.TV.2.67-79;
e.g.कुमुदिकम्,ईशर्करिकम् etc•;(2) consist-
· ing:6f कुमुद गोमय, रथकार etC• to which



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-132.png}}}}}}

कुम्भपद्यादि
116
कृत
the taddhita affix इक ( ठक् ) is || कृञ् (I) ropt कृ in the general sense
applied in the senses referred to
in (I); e.g. कौमुदिकम् , राथकाारकम् etc.;
cf Kā$,. on P.IV.2.80.
कुम्भपद्यादि a class of words headed
by कुम्भपदी in which the word पाद
at the end of the compound is
changed intO पाद् and further chan-
ged into पद् before the feminine
affix ई; e.g. कुम्भपदी, शतपदी, द्रुपदीं,
पञ्चपदी etc.; cf. Kā$. on P. V.4. i38,
139.
कुरच् krt. affix उर applied to the roots
विड्, भिद् and छिद्; e.g. विदुर: । भिदुरम् ।
छिदुरम् । cf. KāŚ. on P.III.2.162.
कुर्वत् a term found in the Brāhmatha
workS and used by ancient gram-
Tmarians for *the present tcnse?.
कुर्वदूप effective or efficient, as oppo-
Sed tO dormant, as applied toनिमित्त
(cause); cf.निमित्तशब्देायमस्ति येोग्यतामात्रे ।
कुंसूलंथष्वपि बीजेषु वक्तारो भव ति अङ्कुरनि-
भित्तान्येतानीति । अंस्ति च कुर्वद्रूपे । Pāda-
mafijarÎ on P.VII.2.36.
कुर्वदि a clasS of wOrds headed by the
Word कुरु to which the taddhita
affix य ( ण्य ) is added in the sense
of ॐपत्य or descendant; e.g. कीरव्यः
गाग्र्यः etc.; cf. Kā$, on P.IV.1.। 51.
कुर्विणी a kind of svarabhakti; see
कविंणी.
ङलालादि a class of words headed by
the wOrd कुलाल to which the tadd-
hita affix अक ( बुश्म्) is applied in
the Sense Of *made by*, " provided
the WOrd sO formed is used as a
proper noun; e g.कौलालकम् , वारुडकम्;
cf. KāŚ. on P.IW.3.118.
कुव्यवाय intervention by a letter of'
th& हूंuttural claSS;.cf. कुव्यवाये हादेशेषु
प्रतिषधेो व्कूत॒ढ्यः । , प्रयॆौज॒नं ' वृत्रघ्नः, ' स्रुघ्नः
प्राघानीति, P.VIII.4,2 Vārt.'4,5.
कुशल name of a grammarian who
Wrote a cOmmentary on the Kāta-
ntra Vyākaraha; see कातन्त्रपञ्जिका.
ðf activity ; (2) pratyālhāra or short
forfm for the threc roOtS कृ, भूम् and
अस॒, cf. कृञ् चानुप्रयुज्यते लिटि, P.IJ!.1.40.
कृत् lit, actiwity ; a tcrm u$ed in the
grammars Of Paithini and others for
affixes applicd to rOotS to form
verbal derivatives; cf. कृदतिङ् । धातेी:
( ३।१।९१ ) इत्यधिकारे तिङ्वार्जितः प्रेत्ययः कृत्
स्यात् ॥ Ka$. on III.1.93, The k!rt
affixes are given exhaustively by
Pārंini in Stitras III.1.91 to III.4.
l 17. कृत् and तद्धित appear to be the
ancient Pre-Pāninian tcrms used
in the Nirukta and the Prāti$ākhya
workS in thc respcctive senses of
rOOt-bOrn and nOun-born words
( कृदन्त and तद्धितान्त according to
Pāttऐंini's terminology), and not in
the sense Of mere affixes; cf.
सन्त्यल्पप्रयेोगाः कृतेोप्यैकपदिकाः Nir.' I.14;
अथापि भाष्र्भिकेभ्यो धातुभ्येो नैगमाः कृतेो भाष्यन्ते
Nir. II,2; तिङ्कृत्तद्धितसमासाः शव्दमयम्
V.Pr. I.27; also cf. V.Pr. VI.4.
Patafijali and later grammarians
|have uscd the wOrd कृत् in the sense
of कृदन्त; cf. गतिकारकेापपदान्नृां कृद्भिः सह
समासवचनं प्राक् सुबुत्पत्तेः:Pari.Sck.Pari.75.
The krt affixes are given by Panini
in the senScs of the difierent Kāra-
kas अपादान, संप्रदान, करण, अधिकरण, कर्म
and कर्तृ, stating in general terms
that if nO other sense is assigned to
a krt afiix it should be understood
that कताँ or the agent of the verbal
activity is the scnse; cf. कर्तरि कृत् l
येष्वथैनिर्देशो नास्ति तत्रेदमुपतिष्ठते Kāś. " on
III.4.67. Thc activity element
pOSSeSSed by the root lies gcnerally
dormant in the verbal dcriwative
nounS; cf. कृदभिहितो भावो द्रव्यवद्भवति,
क्रियावदपि । M.Bh.on W.4.19 and VI,
2.]39.
छ्टत C1X a term used by ancient
grammarians in the sense of *past
tense';C2)effected, done. The word



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-133.png}}}}}}

कृताकृतप्रसाङ्गे
117
कृदाभेिहित
is rmostly used in this sense in
śग्rammar,workS;e.g. किं,तेन कृतं स्यात्;
नानुबन्धकृतमनेकाल्त्वम् Par. Sek.Pari. 6.
दृटताकृतप्रसङ्गि a definition of the tern
नित्य in the sense of a rule which
OCcurS after certain another ruale
is applied, as well as before
that rule is applied; cf. कृताकृतप्रुसङ्गि
नित्यम् I तद्विपरीतमनित्यम् । Pari. Se.
Pari. 42; cf. also कथं पुनरयं नित्यः |
कूहूलूश्साङ्गत्वात् l M. Bh. on VI.
• 62. →
छतादि a class of wordssuch as कृत, मित,
*मंत, भूतं, उत्ंतिं and others with whicb
the, words श्रेणेि, एक, पूग, कुण्ड, रा|ाशि
attd 9thers.are compoürided, prO-
vided both the w6rds forming
jhe CompOur d are in the samc
case; .é•.g: श्रेणिकृताः, एककृताः, कुण्डभूताः
etc. cf. Kāś. on P. II. 1.59.
छतार्थ lit• which has got its purpose
$erwed; a term used in cornection
with a rule that has been pOSsible
to be applied (without cla$h with
another rule) in the case of cer-
tain instances, although it comes
into conflict in the casé of other
iरे॒stances cf. तत्र कृतार्थत्वाद् दिक्शब्दपक्षे
परेण ठञ्ञतौ स्याताम् Kās.' 6n 'P.. V
3• 5• The word चरितार्थ is used
almOst in the same sense. →
टय lit- that which should be done *
the Word कृत्य is used as a tech:
मnical term in grammar in the
5énse of krt affixes which possess
the SenSe' * should be 'done.?
Pānini has not defined the term
ईत्य,.but he,has introduced a topic
( ॐधिक॒ार ) by the name कृत्य (P.
III.• 1•95), and mentioned kपू't
affixes therein which are to be
called कृत्य right on upto the men-
tion.of the afiix ण्वुल्छ्. in P. III.
!• 133; cf. कृत्याः प्राङ् एबुलः P. III.
!•.95• The ktya affixes, common-
ly found in use, are तव्य, अनीय and
य ( यत्, क्यप् and एयत् ).
छृत्रिम artificial; technica], as opposed
to deriwative. In grammar, the
term कृत्रिम meanS *technical Sense', -'
as contraSted with अकृत्रिम * ordi-
nary sense' ; cf. कृत्रिमाकृत्रिमयेोः कृत्रिमे
कार्यसंप्रत्ययः Par. Sek. Pari. 9.
कृत्रिमाकृत्रिमपरिभ्{ाषा a term popular-
ly uSed by grammarians for the
परिभiषा or maxim that out of the
two senses, the technical and the
derived ones, the technical sense
$hould be preferred; in rare cases,
the Ç?ther too, is preferred; cf.
Pari. Sek. Pari.9.
कृत्वसुच्ज्ञ् tad. affix कृत्वस॒ applied to
rāu merals to convgy the sense of
repetitiOn, e. g. र्पञ्चकृत्वः दशकृत्वः cf.
संरूयायाः क्रियाभ्या वृच्तिगण्नेन कृत्वसुच्क्ष् P. V.
4.•l7.
कृत्वे form of the tad. afiix कृत्वस् in
Vedic Literature. See कृत्वसुच्व्.
छत्स्वर the same as कृदुत्तरपदप्रकृतिस्वर, the
retention Of its accent by the
second member of a tatpuruga
compound, if the first member is a
word termed Gati or Kāraka, by
the rule गतिकारकोपपदात् कृत् P.VI.2.
|139; cf. अव्ययस्वरस्य कृत्स्वरः M.Bh, on
VI.2.52; cf.विभक्तीषत्स्वरात्कृत्स्वरः M.Bh.
WI.2.52 Vārt, 6.
कृदन्त the word ending with a k£t
affix ; the term कृत् is found used in
the sप्dtras of Pānini for कृदन्त; cf.
बृत्तद्वितसमासाश्च P. I.2.46. The term
कृदन्त for root-nouns, or nouns deri-
wed from roots, is found in the
Atharvapratisākhya (I.1.10, II.3.8,
II1.2.4), the Mahābhā$ya and all
the later works on grammar. See
the word कृत्.
कृदभिहित expressed by a |krt affix;cf.
कृदभिहितो भावो द्रव्यवद्भवति Mi.Bh. on P.
II.2.19, III.1.67, IV.13, VI.2.139,



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-134.png}}}}}}

कृद्ग्रहण
दृटद्ग्रहणा mention of a kg't j.e. of a
WOrd ending with a k! t affix. The
WOrd mainly OccurS in the Parj-
bhā$ā कृद्ग्रहणे गतिकारकपूवैस्यापि ग्रहणम्
which Occurs first as ah expressiora
Of the Vārttikakāra (P.I.4.13 Vārt.
9) and has been later on given as
|a Paribhā$ā by later grammarians
(Pari. Sek.: Pafi.28).The Paribhāधूā
. iS referred to as कृद्ग्रहणपरिभाषा in later
grammar wOrkS especially comme-
ntary works.
कृद्ग्रहणपारिभाषा a Short term used
by the grammarians for the maxirm
कृद्ध्ग्रहणे गतिकारकपूर्वस्यापि ग्रहणम्. Par. Sek.
Pari. 28. See कृद्ग्रहण.
२
छं॒द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्वृाते a short treatise by a gramma-
rian named मोक्षेश्चर who lived in the
fifteenth century. The work deals
. with verbaI dcrivatives.
टल्लुठञ्र् the elision of a krt affix ; the
· wOrd is fOund used along with the
word$ प्रकृतिप्रत्याप्प॒प्तिः, and प्रकृतिवत् कारकं
भवति in the Vārttika अाख्यानात्कृतस्त-
· दाचटे इति कृत्स्ळुक् प्रकृतिप्रत्यापतिः प्रकृतिवच
· कारकम् by means of which · the
|phrase कंसं घातयति is formed for the
S:टेntence कंसवधमान्चट.
कृल्लेोप the drOpping Or removal of the
verbal nOun(कृदन्त)after the words |प्र,
पर[ etc:* wher they are cornpound-
' ६d with the following noun; e.g.
the dropping of गात from the
expreSsion निर्गतः कौशाम्ब्याः when it
is Çomp9unded into निष्कोशाम्बिः। cf..
· कृल्श्रेपे निष्कौशाम्विः, निर्वाराणसिः M.Bh.or
P.I.4.1.• Vārt. 18.
कृशाश्वादि a class of words headed
' by the wOrd कृशाश्च to which the
c taddhita affix ईय ( छणुं ) is applied
·" in the four Senses given in P.iV.2.
~ 67-70• €:g. कार्शीश्चीयः, अाारष्टयः; cf.
Kā$. ora P.IV.2.80. ,
देटध्टं alsO क्रुष्ट the foremost of the seven
,' Yarप्र्रे॒as; ,cfः ,कुष्ट॒ट्प्रथम॒द्वित॒ीयतृतीयचतुर्थ-
.:,.मन्द्राति स्वायाँः Tai.'Pr...XXIII.14.
118 केन्
कृष्णकिंकरप्राश्लेया an alterrःative name
for thg wcll-known grammar-work
प्र॒कैियाक्रौमुदी written by Rāmacandra
Se$a. See प्रक्रियाकौमुदीं. →
छष्णपिण्डिंत called also ञ्शेषकृष्ण, a scho-
lar Of Sanskrit Vyākarana who
wrOte प्रगूढभावविवृति,a. cOmmentary on
the Prakriyā-Kau mudi of Rāma-
candra Sega.
छष्णमित्र a scholar of graimmar and
nyàya Of the 17th century A.D.
wh9 wrote many comri?entary
wOrkS SOme of which are (1) a
cOfmmcratary Called Ratmārnava on
the Siddhānta- Kaumudi, (2) a
99rnm€रेtary named Kalpalata on
Bhat±0ji's Prauर्षुंhamanorāmā, (3)
a CQरु॑àmentary narmed Bhāvad]pa
On Bhattoji's Sabdakaustubha, (4)
3 commentary on Nagojibhatta's
ILaghumafंjप्i$ā by name ' Kuf6ika
and (5) a commentary on Vaiyā-
karanabhi$ana.
कृष्णमिश्र an alternative name of कृष्ण-
मित्र. See कृष्णमित्र.
कृष्णमौनिन् SOn Of Govardhana. and
Surnamed MaunÎ, who wrote a
Corramentary named सुबोधिनी on the
Siddhānta-Kaumudi at the end of
the 17 th cehatury A.D.
कृष्णलीलाशुकमुनि authOr Of a commen-
|tary named Püru$akāra on Bhoja?s
SaraSvatikanghābharana..
कृष्णशास्त्रिन् ( अारडे ) a famous gram-
marian and logician of the 18th
Century whO Wrotc Akhyātaviveka
and Kārakavāda. See अारडे.
कृष्णशेष a famOuS grammarian of the
Sc$a family who wrote a commen-
tary named the Gtidhabhāvavivjrti
On the Prakriya Kaumudi ofRārma-
candra Se8a.1See कृष्णपाण्डित.
केन् kft. affix ए in the sense 6f कृत्य
(pot.pass.part.) found in Vedic



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-135.png}}}}}}

केन्य →
、
119 काण्डभट्ट
ILiterature; e.g. नावगाहे = नावगांार्हतव्यम्
cf. Kā$. on P.III.4.14.
केन्य krt. affix एन्य in the sense Of कृत्ं
in Vedic ILiterature; e.g. दिदृक्षेण्य: l
,. शुश्रूषेण्यः; cf. Kāś. on P.III.4.14.
केलिमर् krt. afाँix एदैिलम in the senSe
of कृत्य; e. g. पचेलिमा माषाः; cf. केलिमर
' उपसंख्यानम् P. III. I. 96 Vārt.
केवल i ed;a term applied to a letter
or a WOrd When it is not combirped
' with another letter or another
word in a, compound; cf. धमीदनिञ्च
केवलात् ॥ केवलान्न "' पदसमुदायात् Kāś. on
* P. V. 4.I24; (2) simple (wgrd)
" without an affix added; cf. अर्थवत्ता
' नोपपद्यते केवलेन अवचनात् । P. I, 2.45
Vart. 7, also कृच्तद्धितान्तं चैवार्थवत् | न
केवलाः कृतस्तद्धिता बा M.Bh.on P.I.4.14.
केशव writer of a COmmentary named
प्रकाश on the Sik$a of Pāपूini. He
. liwed in the 17th century.
केशावदच्त writer of the commentary
, named दुर्घटोद्धाट on the grammar
. संक्षिप्तसार written by Goyicandra..
कै krt afiix ऐ used in Vedic Litera-
, ture as noticed in the forms प्रयै
रोहिष्यै and अव्यथिष्यै; cf. P. III.4.10.
केमर्थक्य iit. position of questioning
the utility ; absence of any appa-
rent utility; cf. कैमथैक्यान्नियमो	भवति
विधेर्ये नास्तीति कृत्वा M. Bh. on I.
4.3, III. 1.46; III. 2.127, III.
· 3.19; VI. 4.49, VII. 2.26, and
; VIII. 4.32.
कैयट name of the renowned com-
mentator ora " the Mahābhā$ya,
who lived in the 1lth century.
|He was a resident of Kashmir
, and his father's name waS Jaiya¢a.
The commentary on the Mahā-
bhagya was named महाभाष्यप्रदीप॒ by
him, which is believed by later
grammarians to have really acted
ās प्रदीप or light, as withOut .it,
the Mahābhāgya of Patafijali
e~\1०+
3→、-7*、→→→
wOuld have remained unlit, that
is unintelligible, at several places.
|Later grammarianS attached to
प्रदीप alrmOst the Same importance
as they did tO the Mahabhāgya
and the expression तदुक्तं भाष्च-
कैयटयेाः has been often used by com-
mentators. Many conàmentary
workS were written on the Pradpa
Out of which Nāgeśa's Uddyota
is the moSt popular. The word
कैयट came to be used for the word
महाभाष्यप्रदोप which was the work of
Kaiyatःa.For details See Vyākarana.
Mahābhāsya published by the D.
E. Society, Poona, Vol. VII. pp.
389-390,. →
कैयटप्रकाश a commentary on the
Mahābhasyapradipa of Kaiyata
written by Nilakatर्गृtha of the Dra-
vida country. Nilakantha lived in .
the 17th century and Wrote work8
on variouS SubjectS.
कैयटप्रकाशिका a commentary on the
Mahābhā3yapradipa of Kaiyata
written by Pravartakopādhyāya.
कैयटविवरण (1) a commentary on the
Mahabhasyapradipa of Kaiyata
written by Iśvarānanda, in the
16th century; (2) a commentary
on Kaiyata?s Pradipa by Rāma•
candra-Saraswati, Who liwed in the
16th century.
कोटरादि a class of words headed by
the word केोटर which get their final
vowel lengthened when the Word
वन is placed after them aS a second.
mermber of a cOmpound, prOvided
the word so formed is uSed aS
a proper noun; e.g. केीटरा॒वणम् * .
भिश्रकावणम्. cf. Kāś. on P, VI. 3.117.
कोण्डभट्ट a reputed grammarian who
wrote an extemsive explanatory
gloss by nameVaiyakarataabhti$ana
on the Vaiyākaranasiddhāntakā-
rikā of Bhattoji Dīk$ंita. Another



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-136.png}}}}}}

केोदण्डराम
120
→、
केितच
work Vaiyākaranabhti$a'?as3 ra.
which is in a way an abridgment
of the Bhti$ana, was alsO Written
by him. Kondabhat!a lived in
thie beginning of the 17th century.
|He was the sOn Of RahgQji and
nephew of Bhattoji Dik$ita. He
was orhe of the few writerS On the
Arthavicāra in the Vyākarat]aŚāstra
and his BhtāsaT}asāra rankS next tO
the Vākyapadiya of Bhartrhari.
Besides the ]Bhtigama and Bhti$atāa-
sāra, Kondabhatta wrote twO
independent works viz. Vaiyāka-
ranasiddhāntadipikā and SphOta-
vāda.
केोदण्डराम a scholar of Sanskrit Vyā-
|karana who composed शव्दसिद्धान्त-
मञ्जरी a small treatise dealing with
the declension Of nounS.
कौण्डिन्य an ancient grammarian
referred to in the Taittirfya
Pratiśākhya (T. Pr. V. 38) and
Paninj's A$ंjādhyayi. (P.II.4.70). ~'
कौमार, कौमारव्याकरण (1)an alternative |
name of the Katantra Vyākarar]a
given to it on the strength of the
traditional belief that the original
inspiration for Writing it was
received by Sarvavarman from
Kumāra or Kārtikeya; (2) small
treatises bearing the name Kau-
māravyākararha written by Muni-
puhgava and Bhāvasena.. The
latter has written Katantrartāpa-
mālā also.
S8\ →→、 → →
कोहलपुत्र an ancient grammarian
referred to in the Taittirīya Prष्ati-
śākhya; cf. T.Pr. XVIII.2.
घक्त krt affix त in warious senses, call-
ed by the name निष्ठा in Papini*s
grammar along with the affix
cf. क्तक्तवत् निष्ठा P.I.1.26.The various
senses in which क्त is prescribed
can be noticed below : (1) the
general semse of something done
in the past time as past paSS.parti-
ciple e. g. कृतः, भुक्तम् ctc.; cf. P.
III. 2.102; (2) the sense of the
beginning of an activity when it is
used actively; e. g. प्रकृतः व्कर्ट देवदत्तः,
cf. P. III.2.102 Vārt. 3; (3) the
sense of activity of the present
tense applied to rootS marked
withe mute ञ्ज्ञ as alsO to roots in
the sense of desire, knowledge and
worship ; e.g. मिन्न:ः, श्विण्ण:, धृष्ट: as
also राज्ञां मतः, राज्ञामिष्टः, राज्ञां बुद्धः; cf.
|P.III.2.187, 88; (4) the sense of
mere verbal activity ( भाव ) e. g.
हसितम्, सहितम् , जल्पितम् , (used always
in the neuter gender); cf. P.III.3.
114; (5) the sense of benediction
when the Word ending in क्त is
used as a technical term, e.g.देवदत्तः
in the sense देवा एनं देयासुः. The kFt
affix क्तिन् is also used similarly
e.g. सातिः भूतिः मन्तिः; cf. Kāś. on P.
III.3.174.
4 च्तवतु |kपृt affix तवत् which also is call-
ed निष्ठा. It is prcscribed in the
active sense of somebody whO has
done a thing sometime in the past.
A word ending in it is equivalent
to the past active participlc; e.g•
भुत्तवान् व्राह्मणः; cf. P.I.1.26. The fem.
affix ङीप् ( ई ) is added to nouns
ending in क्तवतु to form feminine
bases; cf. P. IV. 1.6.
कतान्त a noun base ending in the krt
affix क्त; past passive participle;
cf. क्षेप सप्तम्यन्तं क्तान्तेन सह समस्यते l
अवतप्तनकुलस्थितं त एतत् M. Bh.on II.2.
47.
क्तार्थ sense of क्त i.c. scnse of the past
pass. participle; cf. उपसगां: चतार्थे,
प्रादयः क्तार्थे ( समस्यन्ते ), P. II. 2. l8,
Vārt. 4.
क्तिच् krt affix ति added t० roots in
the benedictive sensc to forrm संज्ञाशब्द
or nouns in a technical Sense; c.g•
तन्तिः in the sense of तनुतात्; cf. Kāś.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-137.png}}}}}}

→、
क्तन् 12
' on III.3.174. क्त is also added in
the same way. See क्त.
केितन् krt affix ति added to roots to
form nounS in the sense of verb- ||
action; e.g. कृतिः, स्थितिः, मतिः etc.;cf.
P.III.,3.94-97.
केित्र krt affix त्रि added to the roots
rmarkcd with the syllable डु by Pap-
ini in his Dhatupātha; after this
affix त्रि, the tad. affix म ( मपू ) in
the sense of निर्वृत्तम् (accomplished)
is necesSarily added, e. g. पक्त्रिमम्,
कृत्रिमम्; cf. P. 1II. 3.88. and P. IV.
4.20.
बक्त्वा krt. affix त्वा added to roots (1) in
the sense of prohibition conveyed
by the word अलं or खळु preceding
the rOot, e.g. अलं कृत्वा, खळु कृत्वाः cf.
|P. III. 4.18; (2) in the sense of
exchange in the caSe of the root मा, |
e. g. अपमित्य याचतेः ; cf. P. III. 4. 19;
(3) to shoW an activity of the past
time along With a werb or noun
of action shOWing comparatively
a later time, prowided the agent
of the former and the latter activi-
ties is the same;e.g. भुक्त्वा व्रजति, स्नात्वा
पीत्वा भुक्त्वा ब्रजति; cf. P. III. 4. 21.
This krt affix is alwayS added to i
roots when they are without any
prefix; when there is a prefix the i
indeclinable, ending in त्वा, is always |
compounded with the prefix and |
त्वा is changed into य ( ल्यप्ं), e.g. प्रकृत्य,
प्रहृत्य; cf. समासेऽनत्र्पूर्वे क्त्वो ल्यप् P. VII.
1.37. The substitution of य is at
will in Vedic ILiterature; e. g. कृष्णं
वासो यजमानं परिधापयित्वा ( instead of
परिधाप्य ), cf. P. VII. 1.38, while
sometimes, य is added after त्वा
as an augment e. g. दत्वाय सविता
धियः cf. P. VII. l. 47, as also
sometimes त्वो or त्वीनम् is Substi-
tuted for त्वा e. g. इश्ट्वीनं देवान् , रुनाल्वी
मलाादिव, cf. P. VII. l.48, 49.
|1 कयप्र
of a werbal root which does not
leave its verbal nature on the one
hand although it takes the form of
a Substantiwc on the other hand.
कनु krt affix नु added to the roots त्रस्,
गृध्, धृष् and क्षिप् in the sense of
habituated etc. as giwen in the rule
अावेरतच्छीलतद्धर्मतत्साधुकीरिषु P.III.2.134;
e.g. त्रस्तुः, गृध्नुः etc. cf. P. III. 2.140.
बक्मरञ्व्ं kFt affix मर added in the sense
of habituated etc. tO the roots सृ,
वस् and अद्; e• g• सृमरः, घस्मरः, अद्मर:
cf. P.III. 2.]34 and 160.
| कय comtnon term for the Vikaramas
क्यञ्च् , क्यङ् and क्यञ् ; cf. नः क्ये P. T.
4.15, also cf. P. III. 2.170, VI. '
>4. 50.
कयड्ं affixय taking Atmanepada termi•
nationS after it, added in the sense
of Similar behaviour to a substan-
tंve. The substantive to which
this affix य is added, bccomes a
denominative rOot; e. g. काक: २येना-
यते, कुमुदे पुष्करायते, cf. KāŚ. on P. III.
1.1l-12, also on P. III, l.14-18.
कयच् denominative affix ( विकरण ) in
the sense of desiring for oneself,
added tO nounS to form denormi-
tive roOts; e.g. पुत्रीयतिः क्यच् is also
added to nounS that are upamā-
nas or standards of comparison in
the sense of (similar) behaviour;
e.g. पुत्रीयति चछत्रम्ः cf. Kaś. on P.
|III.1.8, 10. It is also added in the
sense of * doing ' to the words
नमसू, वरिवस् and चित्र ;e. g. नमस्यति
देवान्, वरिवस्यति गुरून् , चित्रीयत; cf. Kāś.
on P. III. 1.19.
कयप् krt affix य applied to the rOots
ब्रञ्ज्ञं and यज्ञ in the sense of * verbal
activity ? and to the roots अज्
with सम्, षद् with नि etc. to form
proper nouns e. g• नज्या, इज्यl,
समञ्ज्या,निश्रद्या etc.,cf. P. III. 3.98 and
99; (2) ktya affix य in the sense
→→
क्त्वान्त gerund; a mid-Way derivative
16
of *should be done' applied to the



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-138.png}}}}}}

कयष्
*\
roots वद्, भू and हन् (when preceded
by certain words put as upapada.),
as also to roots with penultimate
ऋ and the roots मृज्, इ, स्तु and
Others; e. g. ब्रह्मेोद्यम् , ब्रह्मभ्रुयम् , इत्यम् ,
स्तुत्यम् ete. cf. Kā$. on P. III. 1.
106, 121.
क्यष् affix य added to certain nouns
|like लेहित and others to form
den0minative roots after which
terminations of both the padas
are placed e. g. लेाहिायति, लेोहितायते;
cf. Kā$. on P. ]III. 1.13.
क्यु, क्युन् Urष्ādi affीxes अन.
क्रत्वादि a class of words headed by
the word क्रतु, Which hawe their first
wOWel accented acute in a Ba!|uu-
wrihi dompound, prOvided the first
member of the compound is the
word सु; e.g. सुक्रुतुः, सुप्रपूर्तिः etc.: cf.
Kāś. on P. VI.2.118.
नम (l) Serial order or succession
as contraSted with यौगपद्य or simul-
taneity.The difference between क्रम
and यैौगपद्य is given by भर्वृहरि in the
line क्रमे विभिद्यंते रूपं यौगपद्ये न भिद्यते
Wāk. Pad. II. 470. In order to
form a word by the application of
several ruleS Of grammar, a parti-
cular Order is generally followcd in
ac2Ordance with the gemeral prin-
ciple laid doWn in the Paribhā$ā
पूर्वपरनित्यान्तरङ्गापवादानामुत्तरोत्तरं बलीयः, ās
alsO aCcording to what is stated
in the stitras असिद्धवदत्राभात्, पूर्वत्रासिद्धम्
etc.; (2) Succession, or ' being
placed after, specifically with re-
ference tO indcclinables like एव,
च etc• which are placed after
a noum with which they are
connected. When an indc-
c!inable is not so connected,
it is called भिन्नक्रम; cf. प्ररिपन्थं न्च
तिष्ठति (P. IV. 4.36), चकारो भिन्नक्रमः
प्रत्ययार्थ समुच्चिनोति, Kāś, on P. IV.
4.36; also ईडजनेोध्र्वै च । चशब्देो भिन्नक्रमः
122
क्रमपाठं
ईशेः (VII. 2.77) अनुकर्षणार्थो विज्ञायते
Kāś.on P.IV.2.78; (3) succeSSion of
the same consOnant brought
about ; doubling; reduplication ;
|क्रम is used in this way in the Rk
|Pratiśākhya, as a synonym Of
dvitva prescribed by Pat]ini; e. g.
अा त्वा रथं becomeS अा स्वा रथम् ;
सोमानं स्वरणम् becomes सोमानं स्स्वरणम्;
cf. स्वरानुस्वारोपहितेीं द्विरुच्यत संयोगादि: स
क्रमोऽधिक्रमे सन् । etc, R. Pr. VI. l
to 4; cf. also स एष द्विर्भावरूपो विधिः
|क्रमसंज्ञेो वेदितव्यः Uvvata orI R. Pr.
VI. 1. The root क्रम् IA. is
several times used in the Prāti-
śakhya works for द्विभैवन, cf. also T.
Pr.XXI.5; XXIV. 5; (4) repetition
of a word in the recital of Vedic
pasSages, the recital by Such a
repetition being called क्रमपाठ,
which is lcarnt and taught with a
view to understanding the original
forms of words cOmbined in the
Sarihhitā by euphonic rules,
Substitution of letters such as that
of णुश् for न् , or of क्षु for सूम् , as
also the Separate words of a cOm-
pound word ( सामासिश्कशव्द ); e. g.
पर्जन्याय प्र ! प्र गायत । गायत दिवः ! दिव-
स्फुत्राय॒ । पुत्राय मीळ्हुषे , l मीळ्हुंष इति
मीळ्हुष्धे । cf. क्रमेी द्वाभ्यमितिऋम्य॒ प्रत्यादायो-
|च्तरं तयेो: उत्तेरणेोपसंदध्यात् तथार्द्धर्च समापयेत् 1!
|R. Pr- X. 1. IFor details and
special features, cf. R. Pr. ch. X
and XI; cf. also V. Pr. IV. 182-
190; T. Pr. XXIII. 20, XXIV. 6.
|क्रमण doubling. Irregular doubling is
looked upon as a fault; cf. क्रमणे
वा अयथेाक्तम् R. Pr. XIV. 25.
क्रमदश्वर author of a grammar named
संक्षिप्तसार who liwed at the end
of the 13 th century.
|नमपटठ recital of the Vedic Sariahitā
by meanS Ofseparate groups of tWO
words, repcating each word ex-
cept the first of the Vedic verse-
lime; see क्रम abowe. The various



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-139.png}}}}}}

|क्रमादि
123
क्रियावचन'.
ruleS and exceptions are given in
detail in Patalas ten and eleven
of the Rk PrātiŚākhya. The
Vedic Sarihhitā or Sarihhitāpājha
is supposed to be the Original One
and the Padapatha prepared later
· on, with a view tÐ preserving the
Vedic text without any change
· or modification of a letter, or
accent; cf. न लक्षणेन पदकारा अनुवत्यः 1
, पदकारैनीँम लक्षणमनुवत्र्यम् M. Bh. on
III. 1.109, VI. 1.207 and VIII.
2.16, where Patafijali clearly says
that grammar- rules are not to
follow the Padapātha, but, the
writer of the Padapātha is to
' follow the rules already laid down.
The Jaर्भृapātha, the Ghanapātha
' and the other recitals are later
developments of the Padapātha as
' they are not mentioned in the
Pratisākhya workS.
क्रमादि a class of words headed by
the word क्रम to which the tad-
dhita affix अक (बुञ् ) is added in
· the sense of *one Who studies and
understands'; e. g. क्रमक:, पदकः,
" मीमांसकः, शिक्षकः etc. cf. KāŚ. on
' ]IV. 2.61.
|क्रम्य a consonant which is subjected
to : doubling cf. क्रम्येो वर्णः पूर्वमक्षरं:
· भजते R. Pr. XVIII. 18.
क्रिया action, verbal activity; cf. क्रिया-
वत्चनो धातुः M. Bh. on I. 3.1 ; cf.
also क्रियावाचकमाख्यातम् R. Pr. XII.
8. quoted by Uvvata in his Bhā$ya
on W. Pr. WIII. 50; cf. also
उपसर्गाः क्रियायेोगे P. I. 4.59, लक्षणहेत्वेाः
क्रियाया: P. III. 2.126; cf. also यत्तर्हि
तदिद्भिते चेष्टितं निमिषितं स शब्द: l नेनत्याह
. क्रिया नाम सा M. Bh. Āhnika 1.
. The word भाव many times is uSed
in the same sense as kriya Or
. verbal actiwity in the stātras of
; .. Panini. cf. P.I.2.21 ; I.3.13; III. l .
· :. 66.etc;cf. also कृदभिहितेो भावेो द्रव्यवद्भवति
|!,
a statement made frequently ' by
the Mahābhā$yakāra. Some SchO-
|lars draw a, mice distinction bet-
ween क्रिया and भाव, क्रिया meaning
dynamic activity andं भाव mean-
ing static activity; cf. अपरिस्पन्दन-
साधनसाध्येो धात्वर्थेी भावः l सपरिस्पन्दन-
साधनसाध्क्ष्यस्तु क्रिया Kaiyata?s Pradipa
on M. Bh. III. 1.87. Philosophi-
· cally क्रिया is defined as सत्तीं
appearing in temporal sequence
in various things. When सत्ता dOes
|not so appear it is called सत्व.
क्रियाकलाप a grammatical. work on
the comjugation of rootS written .
by Vijayānanda. →→
क्रियागुप्तक a grammar work quoted
by वर्धमान in his गणरत्नमहोदधि.
क्रियातिपत्ति lit. over-extension or.
excess of action; the WOrd is,
however, used in grammar in the
sense of non-happening Of an
expected action especially when .
it forms a condition of the con-
ditional mood ( छूङ् ); cf. कुताश्चे-
द्वैगुण्यादनभिनिर्वृत्तिः क्रियायाः क्रियातिपाच्तः.
|Kā$. on P. III. 3.139; cf. also
नान्तरेण साधनं क्रियायाः प्रवृत्तिरस्तीति साधना-
तिपातेिश्चेत्क्रियाातपातिरपि भवति M. Bh.
on III. 3.139. →
क्रियाफल intended fruit of a verbal
activity; cf. स्वरितञ्नितः कत्रैभिप्राये क्रियाफले:
]P.I.3.72.
क्रियायोगा association with a verbal
activity; cf उपसर्गाः क्रियायोगे P.I.4.59.
क्रियार्थ (adj. to क्रिया) lit. meant or in-
tended for another action ; e• g•
भेाक्तुं ब्रजति where गमनक्रिया is , intend-
ed for भेोजनक्रिया; cf. तुमुन्ण्बुलैौ क्रियायां
क्रियार्थायाम् P.III.3. 10. .3
क्रियावचन meaning or expressing a
verbal activity ; a, term generally
· applied to dhātus Qr rQots,or evefa to
verbs. The term is alsO applied tO
denominative , affixeS like क्यञ्च्
which produce a sort of verbal,



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-140.png}}}}}}

क्रियाविशेषण 124
केिन्
activity in the noun to which they
are added; cf. क्रियावचनाः क्यज1दय:
|M.Bh. on III.1. 19.
क्रियाविशेषण determinant or modifier
of a verbal activity; cf. क्रियाविशेाप्क्ष्णं
चेति वक्तव्यम्। सुष्ठु पचति दुष्ठु पचतिM.Bh.On
|II.1.1 ;nouns used as Kriyāviśe$8-!िa
are put in the taeuter gender, and
in the nom. or the acc. case in the
sing. number; cf. क्रियाविशेषणानां कर्मत्वं
* नपुंसकलिङ्कता च Pari. Bhāśkara Pa ri.56.
क्रियासमभिहार repetition or intensity
of a verbal activity ; cf. समभिहरि:
पौनः पुन्यं भृशार्थो वा, Kāś. on P.I.4.2.
k!t affix रु applied to the rOOt भी,
e.g. भीरुः, cf. P.III.2. 174.
क्रुकन् krt affix रुक;e.g. भीरुकः:; cf(भियः)
क्रुक्रन्नपि वक्तव्यः P.III.2.!74 Varttika.
क्रैयादिक a root belonging tO the
class of roots which are headed by
क्रीं and which are popularly knOwn
as roots of the ninth conjugatiOn;
cf. यथा तु वार्तिकं तथा क्रैयादिक्रस्याप्यत्र
ग्रहणमिष्यते Padamafjari on VII.2.48.
क्रोडादि a class of words headed by
the word क्रेाड to which the tadd-
|hita affix य ( ध्यङ् ) is added in the
· Scnse of a female deScendant; e.g.
|क्रीङया, अापिशल्या, गौकक्ष्या etc. ; cf. Kā$.
orn P.IV. 1.80.
क्रोष्ट्रय an ancient School of gramma-
riar1S who are believed to have
' written ruleS or Warttikas on Some
. rules of Pāऐini to modify them;
· the क्रोष्ट्रैोय School is quoted in the
. Mahābhā$ya; cf. परिभाषान्तरमिति च
मत्वा क्रोष्ट्रीयाः पठन्ति । M. Bh. on P.
|I.l,3.
क्रौङयादि a claSS of words headed by
the word क्रैौडि which do not take
the feminine affix ई when they
· stand at the end of a compound;
{ e.g. कल्याणक्रोडा, सुभगा, पृथुजघना etc.;
cf. Kā$. on P.IV.].56,
श्कच्यादिगण a class of roots headed by
the root क्री ( डुक्रीञ्ज् ) to which the
conjugational sign नीं ( श्ना ) is
added; roots of the ninth comjuga-
tion.
इकीबत्व a Word uscd in the $enSe of
*neuter gender* by grammarians
|later than पतञ्जालेि and the Vārtti-
kakāra.; cf. समभागे ह्रठीबलिङ्कमर्धमेकदे-
शिान्ना समस्यते Bhāंष्a Vr. On P.II.2.2;
पक्षे हि ह्रीबत्वम् Kaiyata*s Pr. On II. l .
5] ; समाहारद्वन्द्वे ह्रीबत्वप्रसङ्गात् Durgh.Vr.
on P.II.4. l 7.
व्क्लुकन्न् krt affix लुटुक added to the root
भी; e.g. भीळुक, cf. P. III.2. 174.
द्वकनिप् krt affix वन् in the sense of
agent added to (l) a rOOt preced-
ed by an Upasarga Or a Subanta
Upapada or Sometimes even with-
out any preceding word;e.g.प्रतरित्वा,
धीवा, पीवा; (2) to the root दृशु, pre-
ceded by an Upapada which iS the
object of the root दृशु, e.g. पारदृश्वा;
(3) to roots युध् and कृछ्म् having राजन्
as their object, e.g. राजयुध्वा, राजकृत्वा ;
cf. Pānini III.2.94-96.
चरप् k!rt affix वर, taking the affix ई
( ङीपुप् ) in thc ferminine gender,
added to the roots इ, नश्, जि ctc.;
इत्वरी, नश्वरः, जित्वरी, गत्वरी; cf. P.III.
2. l63-]64.
व्क्व पुंठ k!टुंt affix वसु, taking the fem.
affix ई (ङीप्) in the ferminine gender,
prescsibed in the sense of perfect.
tense,which is mostly found in Vedic
|ILiterature and addcd to 8ome
roots only such as सद्, वस्, श्रु etc.. in
the spoken language; e. g. अक्षिवान्
पापिवान् उपसेदिवान् कौत्सः पाणिनिम्; cf.Kāś.
on P.III.2.107-109.
कि a common term to signify krt
affixes क्रिन् and द्द्वेि both; cf. P. III.
2.134, VI. 3.1 15, VI.4.40; VIII.3.
25, VI.4.15, VI.4.97.
केिन् k!t zero affix, i.e. an affix of
which every letter is dropped and
nothing rermains, added tothe root&



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-141.png}}}}}}

किप्
स्पृश्, यज़्, स्सृज्ञ्, दृशु , etc. under certain
conditions; e.g. घृतस्पृक्, कंत्विक्, यादृछ्,
तादृक्; cf. Kāś. on P.III.2.58-60.
किप् ( 1) |kft affix zero, added to th e
rootS सद्, सू, द्विषू amd Others with a
preceding wOrd aS upapada or
with a preāिx or sometimes even
without any Word, as also to the
· rOOt हन् preceded by the words
ब्रह्मन्, श्ण and वृत्र, and to the root कृ
preceded by सु, कर्मन् etc., and to the
rOOtS सु; and चि under certain con-
· ditions e.•g. उपसत्, सू:, प्रसूः, पर्णध्वत्,
ब्रह्महा, वृत्रहा, सोमसुत् , अाग्निन्वित्; cf.P.III.
2.61,.76, 77, 87-92; 177-179; (2)
the denOminative affix zero appli-
ed tO any Substantive in the sense
of behaviour अश्वति, गार्दभति etc.; cf.
|M.Bh. and KāŚ, on P.III.1.11.
घेिकबन्त a Substantive ending with the
· kfःt affix द्विकप् (zero affix) added to a
rOOt tO form a noun in the sense of
· the verbal action (भाव). The words
* ending with this affix having got
the sense Of verbal activity in them
quite Suppressed, get the noun ·
terminations सु, औौ, जस॒म् etc. and
not ति, त: etc. placed after them;
cf. कृदभिार्हतो भावेों द्रव्यवद् भवति. How-
* ewer, at the same time, theSe
* words undergO certain operations
peculiar to rOots simply because
the kFt affix entirely disappears
and the word formed, appearS
· like a root; cf. क्रिबन्ता धातुत्र्वे न जहति.
, Kaiyata's Prad. on VII. 1.70.
क a .Jain grammarian quOted in
. the well-known stश्anza धन्वन्तरि:
:. क्षपणकोमरसिंहशङ्कुo which entimerates
the seven gems of the court of
, Vikramāditya, on the strength Of
{ which some ScholarS believe that
· he was a famous grammarian of
the first century B.C.
क्षमामाणिक्ग्य a Jain grammarian who
, wrote a small grammar work
|knawa as Anikārikāvivarataa•
125
श्रुभ्नादि
क्षितीशाचन्द्र (चक्रवार्तेन्) or K. C. CHAT-
TERJI a scholar of Sanskrit
gramrnar wh० has written a wOrk
on tech nical terrmS in Sanskrit, whO
has edited several grammar wOrkS
and is at pr€sent editing the
Cāndra Vyākarana and conduct-
ing the Sanskrit journal named
Mafijti$a at Calcutta.
क्षिप्र lit. rapid, accelerated, a short;
name given in the a Pratiśākhya
works to a. Sarihdhi or euphonic
combination of the wowels इ, उ, ऋ,;
ल with a following dissimilar
vOwel; cf. Uvvata Bhā5ya On R..Pr•
III.10; cf. also इको यणवि P.VI.1.77.
The name K3ंipra is given to this '
Sarihdhi possibly because the vOwel,
short or long, which is turned intO
a Consonant by this sarihdhi be-
comes very short (i.e. shorter than
a short vowel i.e. a semi-vowel).
The word क्षैप्र is also used in this
Sense referring to the K$iprasarihdhi.
क्षीरतरङ्गिपीि a kind of commentary
on the Dhātupātha of Pāraini
written by K$irasvāmin.
क्षीरतराङ्गेणीसंकेत an abridgment of
क्षीरतरर्ङ्गिणी by the author hitmselfं
See क्षीरतराङ्घ्रिणी..
क्षीरस्वामिन् a grammarian of Kashmir*
of the 8th . century who wrote the '
famous commentary क्षीरतरद्भिणी oia'
the AmarakOŚa and a commentary
cyn the Nirukta of Yāska.
श्रुभ्नादि a claSS of wordingS Such aS
क्षुभ्ना, तृप्नु and the like in which the
consonant न् is not changed into
णु although the consonant न् .ās
preceded by ऋ, ऋ, र्र् or क्षु and int-
· ervened by letters which are
admissible; e. g. क्षुश्नाति, तृष्नोति,नृनमन$
etc. cf. Kāś. on P. VIII. 4,.39.
Thi$ class ( क्षुभ्नादिगण ) is styled as
अाकृतिगण, .



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-142.png}}}}}}

→、 ♚
क्षमकर
क्षेमंकर author of a commentary on
सारस्वतप्रक्रिया.
क्षैप्र	(1) another name of the क्षिप्रसंधि•
See the word क्षिप्र abOve; (2) 1.ame !
given 1o the Svarita accent bOrne
by the vowel following the Semi-
vowel which results from the Ksipra-
" sa findhi; cf R. Pr. II. 8; III. 7,10;
WIII. 22; cf. इवर्णेॉकारयेोयैवकारभावे ' क्षैप्र
उदात्तयोः V. Pr. XX. 1 ; cf. also युवर्णैाँ
. यवौ क्षैप्रः V. Pr I. 115; उदात्तस्वरितयेोर्यण:
स्वरितोनुदात्तस्य P. VIII. 2. 4.
क्ष्वेडन , hiSsing or whizzing SOuhd
' given aS a fault in the utterance
' of sibilants; cf. क्ष्चेडनमधिको वर्णस्य सरूपेो
श्बनिः ! com. on R. Pr. XIW. 6.
बस (1) aorist wikarama affix Sub-
·' stituted for च्लि; cf. P. III. 1. 45, 46;
e. g. अदृक्षत्, अाश्लिक्षत्, अधुक्षत् cf. Kā$.
on P. III. 1. 45, 46; (2) k!t affix स
applied to the root दृशु preceded by
a pronoun such as स्यद्, तद् etc. e.g•
. यादृक्षः, तादृक्षः etc. (°f. दृशेः क्सश्च वक्तव्यः
* P. III. 2. 60 Vārttika. (3) affix स
|app[ied to the root गाह् Or ख्या Or कष्ञ्
to form the noun कक्ष; cf. कक्षेो गाहतः
क्स इति भ्नामकरणः ख्यातवीं क,षतेर्वा Nir.
II. 2.
क्सरन् Unādi affix सर; cf. तन्यृष्भ्यिां
क्सरन् Unādi III. 75.
विस Urādi affix सि; cf.
' क्सिः Unādi III, 155.
क्से krt afiix से in the sense of तुमुन्
५ . in Vedic ILiterature; e. g.प्रेषे (भगाय)
' Kā$. on III. 4. 9.
कुष्ठुिषिभ्यः
&०
रव
स् Second consonant of the guttural
.'claSS of consonants possessed of
श्वासानुप्रदान, अघेोष and विवार qualities.
ख tad. affix, always , changed into
ईन, (l) applied to the word कुल
८· · in, the sense of a descendant, e. g-
कुलीनः, अाद्व्यकुलीनः; cf. P. IW. 1.139; |t
126 *
~\
(2) applied to the words अवार, पार,
पारावार and अवारपार in ' the Sai$ika
senses, e. g. अवारीणः, पारीण: etc.; cf.
|P. IV.2.93 and VārttikaS 2, 3 on
it; (3) applicd to words ending in
the word वर्ग ( which does not
mean *sound* or *lctter* ) in the
sense of * present there, * e. g.
वासुदेववर्गीणः, युधिष्टिरवर्गीणः; cf. P. IV.
3.64; (4) applied lo the . words
सर्वधुर and एएँकधुर in the sense of
*bearing,? and to ओोजसू , वेशोभग,
यशेोभग " and पूर्व, c. g. ओोजसीँनः
etc., cf. P. IV. 4.78, 79, 130, 132,
133; (5) applied in the sense of
*favoura.ble to? to the words अात्मन् ,
विश्वजन, etc. (P. V. 1.9), to विंशातिक,
(32) to अाट्टक, अााचित, पात्र and others
{53-55), to समा (85-86), to राात्रि,
अहन् , संवत्सर and वर्ष ( 87-88,)
and संवत्सर and परिवत्सर (92); e. .gं.
अ॒ात्मनीनः, अाढकीनः पात्रीणः, समीनः, संव॒त्स-
रीण: etc.; (6) to the words सर्बचर्मन् ,
यथामुख etc. e. g. सर्वच्चमाँण: cf. P. V.
2.5 to l7; (7) to the words अष्षडक्ष,
अशितंगु etc. cf. P. V. 4.7, 8. e. g.
अषडक्षीणः. (8) ख is also a technical
term in the sense of elision or
लेीप in the Jainendra Grammar
cf. Jain I. l.61• (9) The word ख
is used in the scnse of *glottis' or
the hole of the throat ( गलविल X)
in the ancient Prātiक्ष्ākhya works.
स्कर the consonant ख्रं ; sec ख.
खच् kgt , affix अ in the sense of
*agent' applied to the roots वद्,
तापू , and · यम् when preceded by
certain उपपद words standing aS
objects. Bcfore this affix खच्, the
augrment मुम् ( म् ) is added tO the
preceding उपपद if it is not ' an
indeclinable. e. g. प्रियेवद:, वर्शवदः,
द्विर्घतपः परंतपः वाच्चंयमः etc. cf. P. III.
2.38-47.
खञ्जम् tad. affix ईन, applied to महाकुल
· in the sense of a descendarat; e. g.
माहाकुलीनः cf. P. IV• .1.141, to .ाम



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-143.png}}}}}}

'रंवणड
127
रिवलपाठ
(P.. IV. 2.94), to युष्मद् and अ॒स्मद् | खल् kम्t afiix अ added to any root
in the Saisंika senses CP.' IV. 3.1), |
to प्रतिजन, इदेयुग etc. (P. IV. 4.99),
to माणव and चरक (P. W..|1.11), to
ऋत्विज् (P. IV. 3.7 1), to मास (P. IV.
3.81), to words meaning corn in
the sense of * a field producing
corn' (P.V.2.1), to सर्वचर्मन्(P.V.2.5),
and tO the words गोष्ट, अश्ध, शाला etc.
in SOme specified senses (P. V.
3.18-23}. A w!rddhi vowel ( अा, ऐं
or औौ ) is substituted for the first
WOWel of the word to which this
, affix खश् is applied, as व्यू is the
mute letter applied in the affix खञ्चू.
खण्ड tad. affix applied to कमल, अम्भोज
etc. in the $ense of समूह, e. g•
कमलखण्डम्, अम्भोजखण्डम्, alsð to the
words दृक्ष and its synonyms, e. g.
वृक्षखण्डः, तरुखण्डः etc.; cf. KaŚ on P.
IV. 2.38, 51.
खण्डिकादि a class of words headed
by the Word खण्डिका to which the
affix अञ् is added in the sense of
Collection ; e. g• खाण्डिकम्, वाडवम्,
भैक्षुकम् ; cf. Kāś. on P. IV. 2.45.
खमुञ्म् kFt affix अम् applied to the
rOOt कृ When preceded by a w0rd
standing as the object of the root,
provided an abuse is meant, e. g.
चेोरंकारं अाकेोशति; cf. P. III. 4.25.
खय् the pratyāhāra खयू standing for
the first and second consonants
of the five classes; cf. शर्पूर्वाः खयः
|P. VII. 4.6; also cf. P. VIII. 3.6,
VIII. 4.54.
खर् the pratyāhāra खर् standing for
hard consonants wiz. the first and
second letters of the fiwe clas$eS
and the sibilants, before which, सू
at the end of a word becomes
विसर्ग, and soft consonants i. e.
the third and fourth consonants of
the fiwe clasSes become hard; cf.
खरवसानयोर्विसर्जनीयः P. VIII. 3.15,
and खरि च P. WIII. 4.55.
preceded by the word ईषड्, दुस् Or
सु, and to the roots भू and कृ pre-
ceded by an upadada word form-
ing either the Subject or the
object of the roots, e. g. ईषत्करः
क्रटेो भवता, ईषदाढश्यंभवं भवता; cf. P. III.
3.126, 127.
स्वञ्श्श् krt afiix added to the roots यज्ञ
(cauSal), ध्मा,धे, रुज़्, वह्, लिह, पच्., दृश्छ् ,
तप्, मन् etc. preceded by certain
specified upapada words. The
rOot undergOes all the operations
Such aS the addition of the con-
jugational sign etc. before this
ख्त्रशू.on account of the mute letter
श्. which makes खश्य॒ a Sārvadhā-
tuka afiix, and the augment म्
is added to the preceding उपपद if
it is not an indeclinable on
account of the mute lettcr ख्बू;
e. g• जनमेजयः, स्तनंधयः, नार्डिधमः, असूयै.
पश्यः पण्डितंमन्यः etc,; cf. Pan. III-
2.28-37, 83.
खित् characterized by the mute letter
ख, applied tO kFt affixes which,
by reasOn of their being खित् ,
Cause (a) the addition of the aug-
ment मुम् ( मु ) to the preceding
words अरुसू , द्विषद् and words end-
ing in a vOWel,and (b) the shorten-
ing Of the long vowel of the
preceding Word if it is not an
indeclinable; cf. P. WI. 3.66-68.
खिलपाठ a supplementary recital : or
enunciation which is taken along
with the original enunciation or
upadeśa generally in the form of
the $titras.The Word is used in the
KāŚikā in the senseofone ofthe texts
forming a part of the original
text which is called upadeśa; cf.
Kāśikā उपदिश्यते अनेनेत्युपदेश: शास्त्रवाक्यानि
सूत्रपाठ: खिलपाठश्च (on P.I.3.2); cf. also
खिलपाठेो धातुपाठः प्रातिपदिकपाठेों वाक्यपाठश्च
Padamafijari on . KàŚikā.I. 3.2."



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-144.png}}}}}}

प
`~27 `\
खिष्णुच् kमृt affix इष्णु in the sense of|
an agent added tO the roQt *भुं ?
e. g. अ,द्वयंभविष्णुः, स्थूलंभविष्णुः; cf. P.
III. 2.57.
‘खुकञ्म् kt afiix उक॒ in the sense of
an' agent added tO the rOot भू,
e. g." अाढ्यैभात्रुकः, सुभगंभाबुक:; cf. P.
III. 2.57. Sce खिष्णुच्-
ख्युन् kgt afiix अन applied to the
foot कृ in the sense of an instru-
ment wh<n preceded by the words
अाढ्य, सुभग, स्थूल etc. prOvided the
whole word iS Similar in SenSe
to cwi-formation ( च्द्रयर्थ ), e. g. अाढथॆ
करणम् , सुभर्गेश्करणम् ; cf. P. III. 2.56;
fem. अाढ्येकरणी, cf. नञ्स्नञ्ञीक्रक्ख्र्युस्तरुण-
तळुनानामुपसंख्यानमृ P.IV.1.15.Vārttika.
म् third letter of the guttपूral.claSS
of consonants, poSseS$ed of the
properties घोष, संवृत, नाद and अल्पप्राणः
some grammarians look upOn the
word क्डित् (P.I.1.5) as made up of
कू , गु and इ and say that the Guraa
and Wrddhi substitutes do not take
place in the vowels इ, उ, ऋ, and ल
if an affix or so, marked by the
mute letter ग[ follows.
गङ्गाधर [GANGADHARA SHASTRI
TELANG] (1) a stalwart gramm-
arian and Sanskrit scholar Of
repute who was a pupil of Bāla-
sarasvati of VārānaŚi and prepared
in the last century a host of Sans-
krit scholars in Banaras amOng
whom a spccial mention could be
made of Dr. Thebaut, IDr. VeniS
and Dr. Gaimgānātha Jhā. He was
given by Government of India the
titles Mahāmahopādhyāya and C.
I.E.His surname was Mānavalli but !
he was often known as गङ्गाधरशास्त्री
तेलङ्ग. For details, see Mahābhāईंya,
1४8 गाणापाठ
(2)an old scholar ofVyākarana who
is believed to have written a com-
mentar y on Viktavalli of Vyādi;
(3) a comparatively mOdern scho-
lar who is Said to hawe Written a
commcntary mamed Induprakāśa
on the Sabdemdu$ekhara;(4) author
of the Vyfikaraग्]1adipaprabhā, a
short commentary on the Vyāka-
rana work of Cidrtipā$ramin. See
चिद्रूपााश्रमिन्.
गङ्गेशशाम writer of Kātantra-kaumudi
pOSSibly different from the reput-
cd GahgcŚa, Upādhyāa who is
looked upon as the founder of the
Nawyanyāya school of modern
Naiyàyikas, and who lived in the
twelfih century A. D.
गजकुम्भाकृति a graphic description of
the Jihvāmuilrya letter as found
in Script, given by Durgasitihha;
cf. गजकुम्भाकृतिर्वर्णै उपध्मानीयसंज्ञेो भवति
Durgasirihha?s com. om Kāt. I.l.
|18. see &9 ( उपधानीय ).
गाण a class of words, as found in the
stitras of Pānini by the mention
of the first word followed by the
word इति; .. c.g. .स्वरादि, सर्वादि, ऊयीदि,
भभ्घादि, अदादि, गगीदि etc. Thc ten
ganas or claSSeS of rOOtS givcn by
|Pānini in hiS dhātupà!ha are given
the name IDaśagat]i by later
grammariatnS.
गणपाठ the mention individually of
the several words forming a class
or gana, named after the first word
said to have becn written by Pāmini
himselfas a supplementary work
tohis great gramrmār called A$taka
or Astādhyāyi, the Sikक्ष्a,the Dhātu-
patha and the Lingānu$asana being
the other ones.Other grammarians
such as शाकटायन, अापिशालेि and others
have their own ganapāthās. The
gat1apatha is traditionally asCrib-
ID.E. Socācty Ed.Poona p.p.33, 34; |! ed to Pānini; the isSue is question-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-145.png}}}}}}

गणरत्नमहोदधि
ed, however, by modern scholarS.
The text of the ganapātha is
metrically arranged by SOme
scholars. The most Scholarly and
authoritative treatise on gaf]apā-
tha jS the Gaf1aratnamahodadhi
of Vardhamāna.
गणरत्नमहोदाधेि a grammar work,consi-
sting of a metrical enumeration
of the words in the Ganapātha of
Pānini, written by Vardhamāna, a
Jain grammarian of the 12th
century, who is beliewed to bhave
been one of the six gems at
the court of Lak$manasena of
Bengal. Vardhamāna has written
a commentary also, on his Gar]a-
ratnamahodadhi. Besides Wardha-
māna's commentary, there are
other commentaries written by
गोवर्धन and गङ्गाधर.
गणरत्नमहोदधिटोका also called गणरत्न-
महोदधिवृत्ति, a commentary on
the गणरत्नमहोदधि of Wardhamana
Written by the author himself. See
गणरत्नमहोदधि.
、 →
गणरत्नमहोदध्यवचूरि .a metrical com-
mentary on Wardhamāna's Gatha-
ratnamahodadhi. The name ofthe |
author is not available•
गाणस्सूत्र a statement of the type of a
Stitra in the Ganapātha of Pāpini
where mention of a Word or Words
in the Ganapātha is made along
with certain cOnditions; e. g.
पूर्वप॒रावर०, स्वमज्ञातिधनाख्यायाम् , in the
सवदिगण, and क्त्वातेासुन्कसुनः, तसिलादयः
प्राक्पाशपः in the स्वरादिगण. Some of
the garla$ऐitras are found incOrpO-
rated in the Stitrapa!gha itSelf.
Many later grammarians have
appended their own gat?apātha to
their Stitrapātha.
गणस्सूत्रविचार a commentary on the
Gamapātha of Pānini Written by
17
129
गत्यर्थ
Mannudewa who flourished in the
|nineteenth century.
गति (1) lit. motion; stretching out,
lengthening ofa syllable,The Word
is explained in the Prātiśakhya
works which define it as the
lengthening ofaStobha vowel With
the utterance of the woWel इ or उ
afीer it, e.g. हाइ or हायि for हा; simi-
larly अा -- इ or अा -यि ; (2) a tech-
nical term used by Pānini in con-
nection with prefixes and certain
indeclinables which are called गति,
cf. P.I.4.60-79. The Words called
gati can be compounde.d with the
following word provided the latter
is not a verb, the compound being
named tatpuru$a e.g, प्रकृतम्, ऊरीकृत्य
cf. P.II.2.18; the word गति is uSed
by P'ānini in the masculine gender
as seen in the Stitra, गतिरनन्तरः P.WI•
2.49 and hence explained as form-
ed by the addition of the affix क्तिलू
to गम्, the word being used a$ a
technical term by the rule क्तिच्क्तौ च
संज्ञायाम् P.III.3.174; (3) realization,
understanding; cf उभयगतिरिह भवृति
Par. Sek. Pari.9;सांप्रतिकाभावे भूतपूर्वगतिः
Par. Sek. Pari 76; अगत्या हि परिभाषा
अाश्रीयते Puru$ottamadewa Pari.
Pāgha 119.
गतिकारकपरिभाषा a popular , name
given to the maxim गतिकारकेौपपदानां
कृद्भिः स॒ह स॒मासवचनं प्राक् सुबुत्परेतः: cf. Par•
Sek. Pari.. 75.
गतिनिघात the grave ( अनुदात्त ) accent
of the गति word before a werb With
an acute ( उदात्त ) accent; cf. तिङि
चेोदात्तवति P. WIII.1.71.
गातेिसमास a compound With the prece-
ding gati word prescribed by the
rulc कुगतिप्रादयः P.II. 2.18; cf. गति-
समास ं निष्कैौशााम्बिः, निर्वाराणसिः M.Bh.
om II. 4. 26.
|गत्यूर्धू a root denoting motion; the
| word frequently occurs in the



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-146.png}}}}}}

Stitras of Papimi and the Mahabhā-
sya in connection with sOme special
6perations prescribed for rOOtS
which are गत्यर्थ. There is also a
conventional expression सर्वे गत्यर्था
ज्ञानार्थाः meaning	* rOOtS denOting
rnotion denote alsO knOwledge'; cf.
Hema. Pari. 12l .
गदा a popular name gंiven tO the |
scholarly commentary written by
Vaidyanatha Payagur?de on the
|ParibhagenduŚckhara. The cOmm-
entary is called काशिका also, as it
was written in the town 0f Kā$ीं
(Vārāt]asi).
गादाधरचञ्क्रवार्तिन् the rep"uted Naiyā-
' yika who wrote numerOus works
on the Navyanyaya ; he has written
a few works like व्युत्पत्तिवाद, उपसर्ग-
विचार, कारकनिर्णय, सर्वनामवेिचार, प्रत्ययविचार
on Vyākarara themes although the
treatment, " as alsO the style, is
logical.
न्तव्य that which should be urader-
stood; the word is used in the
sense of अवगन्तब्य; cf. तत्र संवन्धादेतद्भ-
न्तव्यम् M. Bh. on I. l .9.
.गामक capable of conveying the sense;
intelligible; the word is often used
in grammatical works; cf. सपिक्षत्वेवपि
गमकत्वात्समासः ;cf. also अवश्ट्रयं कस्यचिन्नञ्व्स-
मासस्य असमर्थसमास्स॒स्य गमकस्य साधुत्वं
वंक्तव्यम् । असूर्यपश्याानि मुखानि M. Bh. 6n
|II. 1. 1.
गाम्य tO be understood,not expressed;
cf. यस्यार्थो गम्यते न च शब्दः प्रयुज्यते स गम्यः।
cOm. On Hema• II. 2. 62.
गाम्यादि a class of words headed by
the wOrd गमीं which are formed
by the application of utप्ādi affixes
in the sense of future time; e. g.
गर्मी ग्रामम् , अागामी, प्रस्थायी etc. cf.
Kāś. on P. III. 3. 3.
गरीयस् involving a special effort.The
word is frequently used by the
Vārttikakāra and old gramimari-
गलत्पद
ans in connection with
thing, which invOlves greater
effort and longer expreSSion
and, hence, not commendable
in ruleS of the Sbastra workS
where brevity is the soul of *wit ';
cf. पदगैौरवाद्येोगवैिभागो गरीयान् Par. Sek.
Pari. 121. The word गुरु is also
sometimes used in a sirmilar sense;
cf. तद् गुरु भवति M. Bh. Î.1 Ahn. 1
Vaprt.. 2.
गरीयस्त्व greater effort or prolixity of
expression which is looked upon
aS a fault in connection with
grammar-wOrks of the suitra, ty pe
where every care is taken to make
the expression as brief as possible;
cf. अर्धमात्रालाघवेन पुत्रोत्सर्वे मन्यन्ते वैयाकर्णाः
· Par. Sck. Pari. i22. The word गौरव
iS often used for गरीयस्त्व.
गगदिगण a claSS of words headed
by गर्ग to which the affix यञ्ऋ, C य )
causing Vrddhi to the first vowel
of the word, is added in the sense
of a descendant barring thc son
or daughtcr; cf. गगीदिभ्यो यञ्छू P. IV.
1 105 " and the instances गाग्यैः,
वात्स्यः, वैयाघ्रपद्य:,' पौलस्यः cf. Kās. on
|]iP. i[V.. 1. ]05.
गर्भवत् lit. just like a foctus. The
word is used in connection with
affixes that arc placed like a foetuS
in the midst of a word in spite
of the rule that affixes are to be
placed after; cf. परश्च P. III. l . 2.
The affixes अकच्चू , टाप् etc. are of
this kind; cf. गर्भवट्टाबादयेो भवन्ति { यथा
मध्क्ष्ये गर्भस्तथा टाबादयः स्त्रीप्रत्ययाः प्रातिपदि-
कस्वाद्योर्मध्क्षेये भवन्ति Siradewa Par. Vr.
]Pari. 9l .
भालत्पद् the word occurs in the Prāti$-
ākhya works in connection with
the definition of संक्रम,in the krama-
pātha. The word संक्रम means bring-
ing together twO words when they
are combined according to rules
SO116ञ्टे-*



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-147.png}}}}}}

गवादि
131
गुण.
of Sarihdhi. (See the word संक्रम).
In the Kramapātha, where
each word occurs twice by repeti-
tion, a word occurring tWice in a
hymn or a sentence is not to be
repeated for Kramapātha, but it
is to be passed over. The word
which is passed over in the
Kramapātha is called गलत्पद; e. g.
दिशां च पतये नमेो नमेो वृक्षेभ्येो हरिकेशेभ्यः
पशूनां पतये नमो नमः सस्पिञ्जराय त्विषीमते
" पथीनां पतये नमः । In the Kramapā-
tha पतये नमः and नम: are passed
· over and पशूनां is to be connected
· with सस्पिञ्जराय. The words पतये नमः
* and नमः are called galatpada ;
cf. गलत्पदमतिक्रम्य अगलता सह संधानं संक्रम;
V. Pr. IV. 197. There is no
गलत्पद in पदपाठ.
गवादि a class of words headed by
' the word गो to which the afiix
यत् is affixed in the senses men-
tioned in rules from P. V. 1, 5.
to V. 1. 36; e. g. गव्यम् , हविष्यम्
“ युग्यम् , मेध्यम् etc.; cf. Kās. on P.
V. 1,2.
गवाश्वप्रभृति the dvandva compound
' words गवाश्च, गवाविक गवैडक, अंजाविक,
कुब्जमाणवक, पुत्रपौत्र मांसशोणित and
' others which are to be declincd
' im the neuter gender and singular
number; cf P. II. 4.11.
गहादि a class of words headed by
" " the word गह to which the tad-
dhita affix ईय (छ) is added in the
' Sai$ika or miscellaneOuS SenSes;
e. g. गहीयम् , अन्तस्थीयम्; this class
called *gahiya' is looked upon
, as अाकृातगण, and hence the
`.' words वैणुकीयंम् वैत्रकीयम् and the
' , like could be explained as correct;
' * cf. Kāś. on P. IV. 2.138.
गाग्र्य an ancient reputed grammarian
. and possibly a writer of a Niru-
. kta work, whose views, especially
|in,.8ohncctioja with accents are
}
given im the Prātiśākhya wOrks,
the Nirukta and Pāt)lini's A$jā-
dhyāyi. Although belonging tO
the Nirukta school, he upheld the
view of the Vaiyākaran1as that all
words cannot be derived, but
only some of them; cf. Nir• I•
l2.3. cf. also V. Pr. IW. 167, Nir.
I. 3.5, III. 14.22; R.. Pr. I. 13;
XIII. 12; P. VII. 3.99, VIII.
3.20, VIII. 4.69.
गालव an ancient grammarian and
niruktakāra quoted by Pāfini;
cf. P. VT 3.60, VII. I.74, VII.
3,99, VIII. 4.67, cf. also Nir-
|IV. 3.
गाच a technical term for the term
अाङ्ग (pertaining to the base in the
gramimar of Pāhini); cf. वाणत् िगावे
बलीयः Kāt. Pari. 72.
a conventional term for उपसर्ग in
the jeinendra VyākaraT]a.
गित् marked with the mute letter गृ;
afiixes that are गित् prevent gut?a
or w[ddhi in the preceding word;
cf. क्क्ङिति च P. I. 1.5; cf. also M.
Bh. I. 3.10; III. 2.I39; cf. also
गकारोप्यत्र चत्र्वभूतो निर्दिश्यते Kāś. on
P. ]I. 1.5.
गिरिधर writer of विभतयर्थनिर्णय, a work
On Syntax.
गीर्वाणपदमञ्जरी a grammatical work
written by वरदराज, pupil of Bha-
ttoji Dikgita in the 17th century
who wrote many workS Qn gram-
mar such as मध्यकौमुदी, लघुकौमुदी etc.
गुडादि a class of words headed by.the
word गुड to which the taddhita
afiix ' इकं ( ठञ्छ्म् ) is added in, the
sense of 'good therein'; e.g. गौडिक्रः
इक्षुः, कौल्माषिकेीं मुद्गः; cf. Kāś. on P,.
IV. 4.103.
गुण (1) degree of a vOwel; , voÇalic
degree, the second out of the three
degrees of a voWel viz• primary
गि



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-148.png}}}}}}

&
गुणकमन्
132
गुरु
degree, guna degree and vfddhi
degre€ e.g. इ, ए, and ऐण्, Or उ; औो
and औौ. अ is given aS ā gutaa Of अः
but regarding अ alsO,three degreeS
can be stated अ, अ and अा• In the
Prātiśākhya and Nirukta एय्, is
called गुण or even गुणागम but no
definitiðn is given ;	cf. गुणागमांदतन-
* भावि चेतन R.Pr.XI.6; शेीवम् इति विभाषि-
तगुणः । शेवमित्यपि भवति Nir.X.17; (2)
the properties of phonetic elemgntS
or ietters such as श्चास,नाद etc• ; Cf:R•
Pr- Ch.XIII; (3) secondary, Sub-
ordinate; cf. शेषः,अङ्गं, गुणः इति समानार्थाः
|Durgācārya on Nir. I. 12:ः (4) prO-
perties residing in a Substance just
as whiteness, etc. in a garment
which are different from the Sub-
stance ( द्रव्य )- The wOrd गुण is
explained by quotatiOnS	frOfia
ancient grammarians i] the Mahā-•
bhāsya ās सत्वे निविशते॒ऽपैति पृथूग्जूातिषु
दृश्यत ] अाधेयश्चाक्रियाजश्च सेीऽसल्वप्रकृàर्गुणः ।1
अपर अाह|उपैत्यन्यञ्जहात्यन्यद् दृष्टो द्रव्यान्तरेष्वपि
वाचकः सर्वरिठङ्गानां द्रव्यादन्येो गुणः स्मृतः ;
|M. Bh. on IV.1.44;cf. also शब्दस्पर्श-
रूपरसगन्धा गुणास्ततोन्यद् द्रव्यम् ,M.Bh. on
V.1.119; (5) properties of letters
|like उदात्तत्व, अनुदाच्त्तत्व, स्वरितत्व, हृस्व-
त्व, दीधैत्व, प्ळुतत्व, अानुनासिक्य etc.; cf.
भेदकल्वाद् गुणस्य 1 अानुनासिक्यं नाम गुणः
|M. Bh. on I.1.1•. Vartं. 13; (6)
determinantः cfभवति बहुत्रीहौ तद्गुणसंवि-
ज्ञानमपैि M. Bh. on P. I. 1.27; (7)
technical term ira Panini's grarn-
गुणे । गुणे गुणकर्मणि । cf. also गुणकर्मीण
लेलीदिविधि: सपरे M.Bh. On I. 4.51.
गुणाकोर्ति a Jain writer of the thir-
teenth century who wrOte a com-
mentary naimed कातन्त्रवृस्तिटिष्प्पणी on
दुर्गसिंहवृत्ति.
गुप्णभाविन् a vowel, liable to take the
guna substitute e. g• इ, उ, ऋ, लठ
and the penultimate अ; cf. यत्र
क्ङित्यनन्तरो गुणभाव्यस्ति तत्रैव स्यात् l चितम् ।
स्तुतम् । इह तु न स्यााद्भिन्नः भिन्नबानिति ।
M. Bh. on I. 1.5.
गुणभेद difference in properties; cf.
एकेायमात्मा उदकं नाम तस्य गुणभेदादन्यत्वं
भवति | अन्यदिदं शीतमन्यदिदमुष्णामेति ! M.
Bh. on I, 1.2.
गुणावचन ]it. expressing Guality ; words
expreSSing quality such as शुछ्रठं,
नील, etc.; cf. गुणवच्चनब्राह्मणादिभ्यः कर्मणि च
P.V.1.124. See page 369 Vyāka-
rat?a Mahābhāsya Vol. VII. D.E.
Society edition, Poona.
गुणादि a class of words headed by
the wOrd गुण, which, when pre-
ceded by the word बद्दु in a
Bahuvrihi cOmpOund, do not have
their last vowel acute; e. g. बद्दुगुणा
रज्जु: ; बह्वक्षरं पदम् , etc. This claSS
of गुणादि words iS considered as
अाकृतिगण; cf. Kāś. on P. VI. 2.t76.
गुणिन् pOSSesSed of a quality ; cf इह
कदाचिद् गुणेो गुणिविशेपको भवति । तद्यथा
पट: शुङ्ग्छ्रइति 1 कदाचिच्च गुणिना गुणो व्यपदिश्यते ।
mar standing for the vowels अ, ए,
and ओो, cf. अदेङ्गुणः P.I.1•2. For the
various shades of the rmeaning of |!
the wOrd गुण, see , Mahābhāgya on
V.1.119. ** गुणशब्दोयं बह्वर्थः ' अरत्येव
समेष्ववयवेषु वर्तते 1 ...... चचगुणांश्च 1
९^
गुणाकमन् a terrm used by the an-
cient grammarians for the गोणकर्मन्
or imdirect object of a verb
|l
पटस्य शुछ् इति | M. Bh. on I.4.21.
→、 Subordinate, lit. which has
become Subordinated, which has
become Submerged, arad therefore
has formed an integral part of
anOther; e. g. an augment ( अागम )
with respect to the word to which
it has been added;cf.
भूतास्तद्घग्रहणेन गृह्यन्ते । M. Bh. I.
Vārt. 5; Par. Sek. Pari. 1 1.
`ं20
|haxing , two object$. The word | गुरु (1) posse$ष्sed of a special effort
is found quoted in the Mahābhā-
१ya; cf. कथिते लादयश्चेत्स्युः षष्ठीं कुर्यीत्तदा
|as opposed , tO लश्चु; cf. तद् गुरु भवति
M• Bha• Ahnika 1• (2) heāvy, a



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-149.png}}}}}}

गुरुमत्
133 गोनदाँय
technical term including दीर्घ
Clong) vowel as also a हृस्व (short) |!
vowel when it is followed by a !
cOnjungt consonant, (cf. संयेोगे
गुरु l दीर्वै च । P. I. 4.11, 12) or a
cOnsOnant after which the word
terrminates or when it (the vowel)
is nasalized; cf. Tai. Pr. XXII.
14, cf. also R. Pr. I. 5.
श्गुम a worर्तुं containing a गुरु vowel
in it; cf. इजादेश्च गुरुमतोनृच्छेः P.ाँII.1.36.
गुश्ख्लधुत consideration of prolixity
and brevity of expression; cf.
तञ्त्र॒lप्य॒यं नावश्यं गुरुलघुतामेवोपलक्षायेतुमर्हति ।
M. Bh. on I. '1.1.
गुस्दलाघव the same as गुरुलघुता which
se9 abQve; cf. पर्यायशव्दानां गुरुलाघवच्चचीं
नाद्रियते Siradeva Pari. 125.
** held up or caught between two
wOrds with which it is connected;
e*.g• the Word असि in इयं ते राट् यन्ता
असि ' यमनः भ्रुवः धरुणः । cf. V. Pr.
|I[V.. 176.
गृढफकैिकटा॒प्रकाश a ShOrt gloSS on the
Siddhāntakaumaudī "of Bhattoji
Dfk$ita, by Indradatta,
गूढभाववृत्ति a cOmmentary on Rāma-
candra's Prakriyā Kaumudi , by
Kभ॒श्$naśe3a of the famous Seञ्a
family of grammarians. The
date of this Kj$thaśe$a is the
middle of the sixteenth century.
|For , details about Krष्क्ष्thaśesa and
the Seंa family see introduction to
|Prakriyakaumudi P8. S. S. No. 78.
गूढार्थदीपिनी a commentary ( वृाति ) on | *
the stitras of Pānini by Sadāśiva
Miśra who lived in the seven-
teenth century.
गृढार्थप्रकाश a commentary on the
LaghuŚabdenduśekhara by M. M.
Vasudeva Shastri Abhyankar
• (1863-1942). →
गृष्टयादि a class of words .headed by
the word गूध् िto which the taddhita
afiीx एय (ढञ्) is affixed in the sense
of *an offspring' ( अपत्य); e g. गाष्टैयः,
हालेयः etc.; cf. Kāś. on P. IV.1.136.
गृद्दीत included; .. cf. भ्राजादिसूत्र एव
गृहीतत्वात् Kāś. on_P. III. 2.178.
गोणिकापुत्र a grammarian whose wiew
` in connection with the correct-
nesS of the expressions नेताश्वस्य स्रुघ्नं
and नेताश्वस्य स्रुघ्नस्य is given by thie
Mahābhagyakāra in the words
*both expressions are justified'
( उभयथा गेोणिकापुत्रः ). Nageśa has
observed that गेोणिकापुत्र is nobody
else but the Mahābhāsyakara
himself; cf. गेोणिकापुत्रः भाष्यकार इत्याहुः ।
NāgeŚa's Uddyota on Mahābhiā-
$yapradipa on P. I. 4.5I.
गोत्र lit. family. The word is. used
by Pānini in the technical sense
of a descendant except the son
or a daughter; cf. अपत्थं पौत्रप्रभृति
गेोत्रम् P. IV. 1.162. The word
गेोत्रापत्य is also used in the same
sense. The afiix, which is found
many times in the sense of gotra,
barring the usual अणू , is यञ्जू ; cf.
गर्गादिभ्यो यञ् P. IV. 1.105.
गोत्रप्रत्यय afiix in the sense of गेोत्र;
cf. यश्चासौ गोत्रप्रत्ययः प्रामेोति स एक: स्यात्
M. Bh. on IV. 1.93.
गोनर्दाँय lit. inhabitant of Gonarda
which was the name of a district.
in the prowince of Oudh in the
days of the Mahābhasyakara
according to Some Scholars. Others
belteve that Gonarda was the
name of the district named
Gonda at present. The expression
गेोनदाँय अाह occurs four times in the
Mahābhāsya where it refers to a
scholar of grammar in Patafंjali?s
time; cf. M.Bh. on I. l.2l ; I. t.29;
III. } .92; VII. 2. 101. As Kaiyata
paraphrases the words गेोनदाँयस्त्वाह
as भाष्यकारस्स्वाह, scholars say that
गोनदयि was the name taken by the



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-150.png}}}}}}

गोपवनादि
Mahabhāsyakāra himself who waS a
resident of Gonarda. Hari, Dik$ंita,
however. holds that गोनदाँय waS the
term धsed for the author Of the .
Vārttikas; cf. Brhacchabdarafna.
गोपवनादि a claSS of eight words head-
ed by the word गोपवन, the taddhita
affix in the sense of गेात्र ( i. e. a
· descendant excepting a SOn Or a
, daughter) such as the affix यञ्म् or
· अञ्चू after which, is not elided in
the plural number; c. g• गैौपवनाः,
शैग्रवाः · etc.; cf. Kāj$. on P. II. 4.67.
गोपाल (देव ) known more by the
* nickname of मलुदेव or मन्तुदेव who
' lived in the eighte enth century
anर्तं wrote several cOmmentary
works on well-known grammatical
treatises Such aS the Waiyākarat]a-
bhtiga'?asāra, LaghuŚabdenduŚe-
, khara, Paribhāgenduśekhara etc. He
?, is believed , to have Written a
, treatise on Ganasü traS also; (2)
. a grammaria n different from the
, abowe मन्नुदेव who haS written an
explanatory work on the Prāti-
śākhiyas;. (3) a Scholar Of grammar,
, different from the above who is
* 't$elieved to have written a, gloss
ria¢ined 'Vi$amārtha3ींpikā on the
Saraswata Vyākara'३a at the ethd of
* the $ixtee.1th century.
गेपीचन्द्र known also by the name
· गेीयींच्वàद्र who .haS written several
'. co'mmentary work$ on thc gram-
}
:
: m atical treatise$ Of the Satihkgंip- |.
|; tāsāra or Jaumāra schQol of Vyā-
[ kara'१a foünded by KramdŚिvara
: .and .jumaranandin in the 12th
,century, the well-known among
': them being the संक्षितसारटीका, सांक्षेत-
: सारर्परिभात्रासूत्रटीका and तद्धितपरिशिष्टटीका.
|! He is believed to hāve lived in
the thirteenth .century A. D.
गोपीनाथ,.a Bengali scholar of, Kātan-
9.tra,.Gramrnaar • .who .is believed to
134
गोष्ठच्
|have written Kātantrapariśis±a-
praddyOta.
गोयीचन्द्र see गोयीचन्द्र.
गोयुगक् a taà. affix applied tO nouns
like अश्व, उट्र, etc. in the sense of a
pair e. g. 'उष्ट्रगोयुगमुप्, अश्वयोयुगम॒; cf.
द्वित्वे गेोयुगच् Kā$. on P. V. 2.29.
गोल्ड्स्ट्यूकर a well known German
Scholar wh » made a. sound ' study
Of Pātini's Sanskrit Vyākarana and
wrote a, very informative trea-.
tise entitled *Pārini, his place in
Sanskrit Literature.* He lived in
the latter half Of the 19th century.
गोवर्धन a grammarian who has writ-
ten a Work on Kātantra Grammar
called कातन्त्रकौमुदो and also a com-
tmentary On the Ganaratnamaho-
dadhi of Vardhamāna. A gloss on
fhe Urjādistitras is also assigned to
Govardhana who is likely' to be
the Same aS abowe.'
गोविन्द writcr of a commentary known ॥
as अम्वा कत्रींाँ by reason of that work'
bcgin1aing with the Stanza अम्बा
कत्राँ०, on the Paribhā5enduśekhara
of Nàge$a. → ' · •-'
गोविन्द ( चक्रवर्तिन्) writer of Samāsa-
vāda, a, short treatise On the sense
conveyed by compoun l words.
गोविन्दराम writer of *$abdadipikā,' a
commentary on the Mugdha-
bodha Vyākaraऐ1a of Bopadewa..
गोषदादि a class of words to which
' the taddhita affix अक ( बुन् ) is
added in the sense of possession
provided the word so formcd refers
tO a chapter ( अध्याय )' or a section
( अनुवाक ); c. दैवामुर:, वैमुक्तः etc.; cf.
· Kā$. on P. V. 2.62. , ' '८?
गोष्ठच्	a tad.affix applied to words like
गो and others in the sense of *a pla-
, ce'; cf. गेष्ठिजादयः स्थानादिषु पशुनाम! प॒शुना-
j माादिभ्य उपसंख्य॒ानम् l गवां `स्थानं मोगेोष्ठ॒म्,
{. अश्ध॒गाँष्टम्; महिश्रीगोष्ठम् Kāर्य्. on Ê.V.2.29:



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-151.png}}}}}}

गण
135
ग्रास्
It is very likely that words like
* गेष्ट, दघ्न and others were treated as |
' pratyayas by Pāऐini and kātyayana
* " who followed Pāriini, because they
were found always aSSociated with
a nOun preceding them and never
independently.
मैौण (l) a. wOrd Subordinate in syntax
or $ense t9 another; adjectival;
उपसजेनीर्भूतः (2) p०ssessing a ' second-
. ary SenSe, e. g. the Word गा in the
.. sehse Of*a dull tman';cf.गैौणमुख्ययेार्मुख्ये
|ः कार्येसंप्रत्ययः, M. Bh. on I.1.15, I.4.
|!08, VI. 3. 46. See also Par.
. Sek. Pari. l5; (3) secOndary, as
'. OppOsed to primary; cf. गैोणे कर्मणि
दुह्यादेः प्रधाने नीहृकृष्वहाम् ।.
गौणमुख्यन्याय the maxim that the
· primary Sense.occurs to the mind
= earlier than the secondary sense,
and hence words used in the pri-
mary senSe shOuld be always
taken for grammatical operations
in preference tO words in a secon-
dary sense. See the word गैौण. '
यातम an ancient sage referred to in
the Prātiśākhya works as a Prāti-
śakhyakāra; cf. .T.Pr. V.38.
गौरव greatness of effort; prolixity as
oppQsed to ला|घुव; cf.., पर्यायशब्दानां
लाघवगेारवचचीं नाद्रियत Par.Sek.Par.115;
¢f. also पदगौरवाद्येोगविभागो गरीयान् Par.
Sek. 'Pari. 121.
गौरादि a claSS of words to which the
affix ई ( ङीषू ) is added to form the
feminine ba$e; e.g. गैौरी, मत्सी, ' हर्यो,
हरिणी; the class contains a large
number of words exceeding 150;
for details s3e Kāśtkā on P.IV.l.
41; (2) a small clasS of elewen
words, headed by the word गौर
which do not have the acute
accent on the last syllable in a
tatpurusa compound when they are
placed after the preposition उप; cf.
P. VI.2.194.
ग्मिन् tad. affix in the sense of posses-
sion; cf. वाचो ग्मिनिः। वाग्मी । P.I.2.124.
श्रप्रस्त a, fault of pronunciation due to
the utterance of a letter hindered
or held back at the throat; cf.
जिह्नामूलनिग्रहे ग्रल्तमेतत् R.Pr.XIV.3; cf.
also ग्रेल्तं निरस्तमवलम्बितम् । ग्रस्तः " जिह्नामूले
गृहीतः । अब्यत्त इत्यपरे । Pradipa on
M. Bh. Ahnika 1.
| ग्रहण (1) technical term for a word
or प्रातिपदिक in Veda; cf. ग्रहणस्य च ।
· गृह्यते इति ग्रहणं वेदस्थः शब्दः । तत् त्रिविधम् |
कार्यभा|कु, निमित्तम्, उपबन्ध इति । तस्यापि
स्वरूपपूर्वकः अकारः अाख्या भवति । Com. on
T.Pr.I.22; |(2) citing, quoting; cf.
ग्रहणवता प्रातिपादिकेन न तदन्तावेधिः Par.Sek.
Pari. 3l ; cf. also गृह्नन्तीति ग्रहणााने
Com. on T.Pr.I.24. (3) mention,
inclusion; (4) employment in a
*rule of grammar; cf. ,प्रातिपादकग्रहणे
लिङ्गविशिष्टस्यापि ग्रहणम्. Par.Sek.Pari.71.
अहणाक citing or instructing the inclu-
sion ( ग्रहण) of certain other things
by the mention of a particular
thing; e. g. the rule अणुदित्सवर्णस्य
चाप्रल्ययः is a ग्रहणक rule as it adwises
that the citing Of the letters अ, इ,
उ, ऋद etc. includes the .. long and
prOtracted forms of अ, इ, उ etc; cf.
also ग्रहणकशाख्त्रस्य सावण्र्यविधिनिषधाभ्यां
प्रागनिष्पत्तः. Sid. Kau. on अकः सवर्णे दीर्घः
V1. 1. 101.
ग्रहणवत् specifically mentioned in a
rule, indiwidually mentioned; " cf.
ग्रहणवता प्रातिपादिकेन तदन्तविधिनौस्ति ।	Par.
Sek.Pari.31. See the word ग्रहण.
ग्रहाादि a class of roots headed by the
root ग्रहू to which the affix इन् (णिनि),
causing vrddhi to the preceding
vowel of the root, is added in the
sense of an agent; e.g. ग्राही. उत्साही,
स्थायी, मन्त्री etc.; cf. Kāś. on P.III.
1.134.
ग्रास a fault in the utterance of a
letter which makeS it indistinct' by
being held up at the:thrOat.Sceग्रंस्त.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-152.png}}}}}}

ग्स्नु
136
→ →»→ →_→ →_→ धित्
गस्नु krt affix स्नु applied to the roots
ग्लै, जि and स्था in the sense of an
agent; cf. ग्लाजिस्थश्च क्स्नुः P.III.1.139.
घ
घृ (1) fourth consonant of the gut-
tural class of consonants havंng
the properties कण्ठसंवृतत्व, वोष,
नादानुप्रदानत्व and महाप्राणत्त्र; (2)the cOn-
sOnant घ at the beginning Of a
tad. afflx which is alwayS chang-
ed into इय्; cf. P. VII. 1. 9; (3)
substitute for ह् at the end of roots
beginning with द्,as also ofthe rOot
नद्दु under certain conditions; cf.
P.'VIII.2.32,33,34: (4) substitute
for the consonant व् of मतुच् placed
after the pronouns क्रिम् and इदम्
which again is changed intO इश्य् by
VII.1.9; e.g. क्रियान्म्, इयान् ; cf. P.V.
2.40.
घ' (1) consOnant घु, अ being added at
the end for facility of pronuncia-
tion; cfTai. Pr.I.2l;' (2) technical
term for the tad. affixes तरपुप् and
तमप्, cf. P.I.1.22, causing the short-
ening of ई at , the end of bases
before it, under certain conditions,
cf P. WI. 3.43-45, and liable to
be changed into तराम् and तमाम्
after किम्, verbs ending in ए, and
indeclinables; cf. P.V.4.11; (3)
tad. affix घ ( इय) in the sense of *a
descendant' applied to क्षत्र, and in
the Sense of *having that as a
deity' applied to अपेोनप्तृ, अपांनप्तृ and
also to महन्ट्र and to the words रा|ट्र
etc., e.g. क्षत्रियः, अपोनष्त्रियः, अपांनप्त्रियः,
महेन्द्रियम्,राष्ट्रियः etc.; cf. P. IV.1.t38,
|IV.2.27, 29, 93; (4) tad. affix घ,
applied to अग्र, समुद्र and अभ्र in the
sense of *present there', to सहस्र in
the sense of *possession', to, नक्षत्र
without amy change of sense, and
to यश and ऋत्विजु in the sense of
*deserving'; cf. P.IV.4.117,118,135,
136,l41, V.1. 7l ; (5) kgt affix अ
when the word to which it has
been applied becomes a proper
nOun i.e.a noun in a Specific sense
Or a technical term; cf. III.3. 1 18,
1J9,125.
घकार the consonant घ; see घुघ्.
घच्ञ्5 tad. affix इय, as found in the
word क्षेत्रिय; cf. क्षेत्रियचु परक्षेत्रे चिाकेित्स्यः
P.V.2.92 and Kāśikā 'thereon.
घञ्म् kFt affix अ causing the substitu-
tion Of vrddhi for the preceding
vOwel applied in various senses as
specified in P.III.3. 16-42, III.3.
45-55,III.3.I20-125, e.g. पादः, रोगः,
अाय:, भावः, अवग्राहः प्रावारः, अवतारः, लेखः
रा: etC-
घन् tad. affix अ applied to the words
शुक्र, तुग्र, पात्र, and to multisyllabic
words in specified senses, causing
the acute accent On the first vowel
Of the wOrd sO formed; cf.IV.2.26,
|IV.4. 1 15, V.1.68, V.3.79, 80.
घन a variety of the क्रमपाठ or recitalof
the Vedic hymns tO show the serial
Order Of WOrds there; one of the
eight vikrtis Of the padapāgha.
घस्र tad. affix इय, occurring in Vedic
Literature.applied to thc word ऋतु,
e.g. अयं ते येोनिर्ऋत्वियः; cf. KāŚ. on P.
V.1.106,
धि (1) a tech. term applied to noun
bases Or Prātipadikas ending in इ
and `उ excepting the words सखि
and पति and those which are term-
ed नदी; cf. P. I. 4.79; (2) a conven-
tiOnal term for लघु ( a, short vowel)
found uscd in thc Jainendra
Vyākarana.
धित् affixes having the mute letter घु,
aS for instance, घशु घ, घचु etc.which
cause the substitution of a guttu-
ral in the place of the palatal
letter चु or जुञ् before it; e.g. त्याग:
राग: cf. P.VII.3.52.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-153.png}}}}}}

धिनुण्
घिनुण्श् krt afiix इन् causing the su!- s-
titution of Vrddhi for the preced-
ing vowel, as also to the penulti-
mate vowel अ, applied to the eight
roots शम्,तम्, दम् etc., as also toसंपृचू,
अनुरुधु etc. and कसु, लष्थ् लप्, etc.. e. g.
|शमी,तमीं, दमी, संपकॉ, संज्वारी, प्रलापी etc.:;
cf. P. III.2.141-145.
घिसंज्ञ (noun bases or Prātipadikas)
called or termed वि. See धि.
३ं a tech. term applied to the roots
द and धा, as alsO to those like दे or
देो which becoome दा by the substi-
tution of अा for the final diphthong
vOwel, barring the root दापू (to
cut) and दैप् (to purify); cf.` दाधा
ध्वदापू P.I. 1.20.
धुट् a conventional term for the
first five case-affixes; cf. घुटि च Kāt.
II. 1.68. The term घुट् is used in
the Katantra Vyākaratāa and cor-
responds to the term सर्वनामस्थान of
Pār?ini.
घुरच् kFt affix उर applied to the
rQQts भञ्ज्ञ् ;भास् and भिदू ंin the sense
of habit; e.g. भङ्गुरं काष्ठम्, भासुरं ज्योतिः,
मेदुर: पशुः; cf. Kāś. on P.III.2.161.
घोष an external effort in the pronun-
ciatiom of a sonant or a Soft con-
sonant which causes depth Of the
tone; cf. अन्ये तु घेोषाः स्युः संवृताः etc.,
Sid.• Kau. on VIII. 2. ! .
घोषवत् a consonant characterized by
the property घोष्त्र at the time of its
utterance; cf. तृतीयचतुर्थाः संवृतकण्ठाः
नादानुप्रदाना घोषवन्तः M.Bh. on P.I.1.9.
उः
ङ्ं (1) fifth letter of the guttural class
of consonants hawing the properties
कण्ठसंवृतत्व, घोष, नादानुप्रदान, अल्पप्राणत्व
and अानुनासिक्य; (2) the consonant ड्
getting the letter कं as an aug-
18
137
ङि
ment added to it, if standing at
the end of a word and followed
by a sibilant, e. g. प्राङ्कूशेत cf. ङ्णोः
कुकू टुक् शरि P. VIII. 3. 28; (3) the
consonant ङ् which, standing at
the end of a word and preceded
by a short vowel, causes the vOwel
following it to get the augment
ङ् prefixed to it; e. g, प्रत्यङ्ङास्ते; cf.
ङमेो हृस्वादचि ङमुणू नित्यम् P. VI1 I.3.32.
ङ* (1) fifth consonant of the guttural
class of consonants which is a
nasal ( अनुनाासक ) consOnarnt; the
vowel अ being added at the end
for facility of pronunciation ; cf. T.
|Pr. I.21; (2) a conventional term
used for all the raasal consonantS
in the Jainendra Vyākarat!a.
ङञ्य् a short term or Pratyāhāra
standing for the letterS ड्, ए॒, न् ;
इम् , and भू , casually mentioned in
the Mahābhā$ya; cf. एतदप्यस्तु ञक्रॉरेण
ङञ्ञो हृस्वादचि ङञ्जुपिनत्यमिति । M. Bh. on
Māheśvara SutraS 8, 9.
ङम् a short terrm or Pratyāhāra for the
consonants ङ्, शु, and न्. See ङ् (3).
डङ्ग्मुद् augment ङम् i. e. ङ्, ण् or न्,.
prefixed to a vowel at the beginra-
ing of a word provided that vowel
is preceded by ङ, पृण॒ or न् Standing
at the end of the preceding WOrd.
See ङ् (3).
ङस् ending of the genitive case sing-
ülar; स्य is substituted for डसु after
bases ending in अ; cf. P. IV• l • 2
and VII. 1. 12.
ङसि case-ending of the ablative
case, changed into अात् after bases
ending in अ and into स्मात् after
pronouns; cf.P.IV.1.2,VII.1.12,15.
ङि case-ending of the locative case,
changed into (a) अाम् after bases
termedNadi,fem. bases endirg ira अा
and the wofd नी, (b) into औौ " after
bases ending in इ and उ, amd (c)
into स्मिन् after bases of pronouns;cf.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-154.png}}}}}}

ङित् → i38 , च्
P.TV. 1. 2, vII. 3. 116, 1 17, 118, | words headed by गैौर, as also to
|ाँ 19 and VII. 1. !5, 16. noun bases ending in affixes
ङित् (1) affixes with the mute letter marked with.. mute षू, as alsO to
. ङ् attached to them either before words mentioned in the class
or after, with a view to preventing headed by, बहु;. cf. P.IV.1.4l-46.rt
the guf!a and v!rddhi SubstituteS is.also added in, the sense of * wife
for the preceding इ, उ, ऋ, or of * to any WOrd dehoting a male
ल, as for example, the affixeS person; cf. P. IV. 1. 48, and
चङ्, अङ् and others; (2) affixes con- together with the augment अानुक्
ventionally called ङित् after certain (अान्) to thट् words इन्द्र, वरुण.etc,e.g.
bases under certain conditions; | इन्द्राणी, वरुणनी, ,युञ्बनानीं méaningटुं * the
cf. गाङ्ककुटादिभ्येो ञ्णिन्ङित् P. I. 2. 1-4; Script of the Yavanas * cf. P. I'V.
(3) roðg marked with the muté | l •43.• It. is alsO àdded ,tO w9rds
letter ङ् signifying the application ending in क्रीत and words ending
* of the Ātmanepada terminationS tO in त्तु, and als9.to,words ,eश्pressive
them; (4) substitutes marked with | of * !irnbs ९f.the b9dy.' पूàder
mute ङ् which are put in the place certaita conditior1s; cf. P. IV. 1.
of the last letter of the word for 50-59 amd IV. l .61--65.
which they are prescribed as sub- | डुप्ट augment ङ् mentiOned as डुटु, in
* stitutes; (5) case affixes marked KāŚika, added to the vowel follow-
with mute letter ङ् which cause the ing the consonant ङ् at the end of
substitution of guma to the laSt a word. See ङमुट्.
wowel इ or उ of words termed वि• | डे dative case termination changed .
ङ common term for the fem. affix ई, into य after bases ending in short
mentioned as ङीपु, ङीश् or ङीन् by अ amd intO स्मै after pronouns; cf.
Bānini; cf. P. IV. 1. 5-8; IW. 1. |P. IV. 1.2, VII. 1.13, i4.
l5-39, 40-65 and IW. 1. 73. ' | डश्यन्त noun baseS ending with the
डीन् fem. affix ई added to words in fem. affix ङी ( ङीप्, ङीग्रु, or ङीन् ); cf.
the ctass headed by शार्ङ्गरव; cf. P. | ङश्यन्तादित्येवं भविष्यति M:Bh. On P. I. .
IV. 1. 73. Words ending with this | 1.89 Vārt. 16.
affix ङीन्न् have their firSt vOwel | ङच्याप्पाद a popular name given by
accented acute. grammarians to the first pāda of
ङीप् fem. affix ई which is anudatta the_f?urth adhyāya of Pānini's
(grave) added (a) tO words ending Asंतूंādhyāyi as the pāda begins
ii the'vowel ऋ' 6r the consonarाँ | with the rule ङयाप्प्रातिपदेिकात् IV•
न्, (cf.P.tV•I.5), (b) to words ending | f-1•	→
' with affश्x&$ arked with mute उ, क्रैतं | ङ्वनिप् kgt afiix वन् in the sense of
?r ल; gईP'jV•l.6, (c) t9.w9rds end-| ` श्an agent referrmg to an activity
ing with affई&es marked with mute | of paśt time, added to.the roots सु
ट् as alsO ending with the affixes ढ्ठं, and यज्; e. g. सुत्वा, सुत्वानैौ;यज्वा यज्वानौ
अणु,अञ्,द्वयसंछ् दघ्नचु,मात्रञ्च॒,तयप्, ठक्, ठञ्च्, cf. P. 1II 2.103.
कञ् and घक्ररप् (cf. P.IV.1.15) and to
certain other words under certain
conditions; cf. P. IW. 1.16-24.
ङीष् feभू1. श्affix ई,, which, is udātta, च् first consonant of the palatal
aPPlied to Words in the class of | `class of consonants, possésed of



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-155.png}}}}}}

139
चङ्गुदास.·
]
the prOperties, श्वास, अघेोष, अल्पप्राण | चकनशाम a grammarian who is said
and कण्ठविवृतत्व. च् at the beginning
Of an affix is mute e. g. च्फञ्जु, cf.
चुट्ट P. I. 3.7; words, having ' the
mute letter चूञ् (dropped), have
their last vowel accented acute
e. g. भङ्गुरम् l भासुरम् । cf. चितः VI.
1.163.
च (1) the letter चु, the vowel अ
being added for facility of utter-
ance, cf. T. Pr. I. 21; (2) a, B*a-
tyāhāra or short term standing
for the palatal class of consonants
ंवँ, छ्, ज्ञ, झ and ञ्ञ्जू ; cf इचशेयास्तालैी V.
Pr. I. 66; (3) indeclinable च call-
ed Nipāta by Papini; cf. चादयोऽसत्त्वे
P.. I. 4.57. च possesses four senses
समुच्चय, अन्वाचय, इतरेतरयोग and समाहार
cf. Kāś. on II. 2.29. See also
|M. Bh. on II. 2.29 Vārt. !5 for a
detailed cxplanation of the four
' senses. The indeclimable च is
sometimes used in the sense of
*a determined mention' or awa-
dhāraf)a; cf. Kaś. on II. 1.48 and
72. It is also used for the pur-
pose of अनुवृत्ति or अनुकर्षण ' i. e.
. drawing a word from the previous
. rule to the next rule; (cf. M. Bh.
on P. WI. 1.90) with a cor१ventiott
that a Word drawn thus, doeS not
proceed to the mext rule; · cf.
चानुकृष्टं नोत्तरत्र Par. Sek Pari. 78; (4)
a conventional term for अभ्यास
(reduplicative syllable} used in
the .jainendra Vyākarat?a; cf.
चविकारेषु अपवादा उत्सगाँन्न बाधन्ते Kāt.
 ि· Pari, 75. →
चकार the consonant च् , the vowel अ
. being added for facility of utter-
ance and कार as an affix tO show
that only the consonant च is
meant there; cf. T. Pr. I. l6, 2l.
चकोर a.. grammarian who , wrote a
commentary on the * Sabdalih-
... g?ārthacandrikā' of Sujanapandita.| ..
to hawe written a work named
|Dhātusarihgग्raha.
चक्रक a kind of fault in ' the appli-
cation of operations, reSulting in
confusion; a fault in which one
returns to the same place not
immediately as in Anavasthā but
after several steps; cf. पुनर्ऋच्छिभावः
पुन॒राद् इति॒ चक्रुक्रुम॒व्यवस्थ[ प्राप्नेोति । M.
Bh. ðra 1. 3.60 Vārt 5.•
चक्रकारक known by the name कारक-
चक्र also, a small work on syntax
attributed to वररुचि.
चक्रपाणि ( शेष ) a grammarian of
the Se$a family of the latter half
of the 17th century who held
wiews again$t Bhatt0ji Dīk$ita *
and wrote प्रौढमनोरमाखण्डन, कारकतत्व
and कारकविचार..
चक्रिन् a grammarian who has
written a small disquisition on "
the correctness of the form जाग्रहीता.'
See जाग्रहीतेतिवाद.
चङ् a Vikaratāa afiix of the aorist
substituted for च्लि after roots
ending in the causal Sign णि,. as'
alsO after the rootS श्रेि, द्रु and
others; this:चङ् causes reduplication
of the preceding root form; cf. P.
III 1.48-50. e. g. अचूचुरत्, अशिश्रियत्;
cf. also P. WII. 4.93.
चङ्गदस्स a, grammariam who has
written a, work on the topic of
the five vFttis. The work is named
चङ्गवृत्ति.
चङ्गत्रुात a short treatise written by
चङ्कदास, dealing with the tOpic . of
· the five cornpagt expressions .or
Vrttis viz. कृत्, तद्धित, समास, एकशेष॒,
amd सनादिधातु• →
चङ्गुदास or चाड्गुदास a scholar of
ट्टrammar whohas written am inde-
pendent w९rk on Sanskrit Vyāka-
· fanacalled वैयाकरणजीवातु. The trea-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-156.png}}}}}}

चण् 140 चय्
tise is also known as न्वाङ्गुसूत्र or | टि, घु are found. There is no
चाङ्गु-व्याकरण.
चण् the indeclinable च (with ण् as a
mute letter added tO it which
of course disappears) pOSSeSSing
the sense ofचेवत् Or cOndition. e. g.
अर्ये न्च मरिष्यति cf. Kā$. on P. WIHI.
1.30.
चणापू tad. afiix न्चण in the sense of
वित्त (known by) applied to a word
which refers to that thing by which
a person is known. e. g. विद्याचणः•
केशचणः; cf. P. V. 2.26.
चण्डपाण्डित writer of a Prākrta gram-
mar.He was known alsO as चन्द्र and
hence identified by sOme with
CandragOmin.
a term used by ancient gram-
marians for the fourth co»tnsonants
which are sonant aspirate$, termed
झष् by Pānini; cf. R. Pr. IV. 2. T.
Pr. I. 18, V. Pr. 1 54. R. T. 176.
चतुर्थाँ a term used by ancient gra-
mmarians for the datiwe case;
cf. उतो त्वस्मै तन्वं विसखे इति चतुथ्यीँम्;
Nir. I. 9.3.
चतुर्थीाँसमास the tatpuru5a cOmpOund
with the first word in the dative
case in its dissolution; cf. चतुर्थाँसमासे
सति पूर्वपद.कृतिस्वरत्वेन भवितव्यम् M. Bh.
on II. 1.36.
चतुर्मात्र consisting of four mātrās or
moras, a short wowel cOnsisting
of one mātra, a long vowel of two
mātrās, and a protracted vowel ofT
three matras; cf. अान्तर्यतस्त्रिमात्र-
चतुर्मात्राणां स्थानिनां त्रिमात्रचतुमीँत्रा अादशा
मा भूवनिति l M. Bh. on Siva sütra
3.4.
चन्द्र a famous Buddhist Sanskrit
grammarian whose grammar
existing in the Tibetan script,
is noW available in the Devanā-
gari script. The work consists of
six chapters or Adhyayas in which
* rao technical terms or sariājfंas like
section on Vedic Grammar and
accentS. The Work is based om
Pānini's grammar and is believed
to have been Written by Candra
or Candragomin in the 5th cen-
tmry A. D. Bhartrhari in his
Vakyapadiya refers to him; cf.
स नीतेो ' बहुशाखत्वं चन्द्राचायीँदिभिः पुनः
Vakyapadiya II. 489. A summary
9f thc wOrk is found in the Agni-
purat?a, ch. 448-258.
चन्द्रकला, called also कला, a well-
known commentary on Nageśa's
Laghu$abdenduŚekhara by Bhai-
ravamiŚra who lived in the latter
half of the l8th century and the
first half of the nineteenth century.
चन्द्रकीर्ति a Jain grammarian of the
twelfth century A.D. who has
written a co1mmentary named
Subodhini on the Sārasvata Vyā-
karaपृ]a.. →
चन्द्रगोमिन् named also चन्द्र, a Bud-
dhist Scholar who has written an
easy Sanskrit Grammar based on
the A$¢ādhyayi of Pānini. He is
belie\7ed to have lived in North
|India in the fifth century A.D.
See चन्द्र.
चन्द्राचार्य a grammarian mentioned
by Bhart!hari in his Vākyapadāya
as one who took a leading part in
restoring the traditional explana-
tion of Pānini's Vyākaratha which,
by the spread of rival easy trea-
tises on grammar, had become
almost lost; cf. यः पतञ्जालिशिष्येभ्यो भ्रष्टो
व्याकरणागमः । काले स दाक्षिणात्येषु ग्रन्थमात्रे
व्यवास्थतः । पर्वतादागमं लब्ध्वा भाष्यबीजानुसा-
रीिभः । स नीतो बहुशाखत्वं चन्द्राच्वार्यादिभिः
पुनः ॥ Vākyapadiya II. 488-489.
See चन्द्र and चन्द्रगोमिन्. →
चय् a short term (Pratyāhāra) for
the first letters ( व्छ्६ , चू , ट् त्, and पू)
of the five classes. Sometimes, as



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-157.png}}}}}}

चर्
141
चचौ
}
Opined by पौष्करसादि, second letters !
are Substituted for these if a, sibi- ;
lant follows them, e. g,
अफ्सरा॒ः, !
वथ्सरः	cf. चयेा द्वितीयाः शरि पौीप्करसादे.. !
रिति वाच्यम् cf. S.K. on इणेोः कुक्टुक् शरि !
|P. VIII.3.28.
चर् a short term (Pratyāhāra) for the
|hard tanaspirated surds and शु, ष्ञ्,
सुं- The change of the second, third |
and fourth letters into the first is
called चत्र्व; cf. अभ्यासे चर्च | खरि ं
च l वावसाने ! Pāpa. VII I.4.54-56.
च्वरप्ट tad. affix चर in tne sense of ;
'being (SO and so) in the past?,
e.g. अ॒!धंच॒र्!ः, fem. अाद्व्यचरी; cf. भूतयूर्वे
चरट् P.V.3.53.
च्रण explained as a synonym of the
wOrd शाखा which means ā branch or
a SchOol ofVedic Learning; cf. चरण-
शब्दाः कठकलापादयः Kāś. on P.IV.2.46.
चरिताक्रिय having kriyā or verb-
activity hidden in it. The ternm
is used by Bhartghari in connec-
tion with a solitary noun-word or
a Substantive having the force of a
Sentence, and hence which can be
termed a Sentence On account of
the verbal activity dormant in it.
e.g- पिण्डीम् ; cf. वाक्यं तदपि मन्यन्ते यत्पदं
चरितक्रियम् Vākyapad.II. 326, and
चरिता गर्भकृता अाख्यातक्रिया यस्य तद्भभॉकृतक्रि-
यापदं नामपदं वाक्यं प्रयुञ्जते ! Com. on
Vakyapadiya II.326.
चरितार्थ which has got already a
SCOpe of application ; the term is
used by commentatorS in connec-
tion with a rule or a word forming
a part Of a rule which applies in
the case of some instances and
hence which camnot be Said to be
व्यर्थ (superfluous) or without any |
utility and as a result cannot be
said to be capable Ofallowing SOrme
conclusion to be drawm from it ac-
cording to the dictum ब्यर्थे सज्ज्ञापयति ।
cf. . अपवादेो , यद्यन्यत्र चरितार्थस्तर्ह्यन्तरङ्गेण
बाध्यते Pag'. Sek. Pari. 65.
चर्करीत a term used by the ancient
grammarians in connection with a
secondary root in the sense of
frequency; the term यङ्ङ्क्ष्टुगन्त is used
by comparatively modern gramm-
arians in the same sense. The न्वकं-
रीत rootS are treated as roots of the
adādi class Or Second conjugation
and hence the general Vikarana
अ ( शपुम्) is Omitted after them.The
word is based on the 3rd pers.
sing form चर्करीति from .the root कृ
in thae Sense Of frequency ; e.g.
चर्करीति, चर्कर्ति, बाभवीति बेोभेाति; cf. न्वर्क-
रीतं च a gat३a-stitra in the gana
named *adādi' given by Paraini in
connection with अदिप्रभृतिभ्यः शप:
|Pan. II.4.72; cf. also चर्करीतमिति
यङ्लुटुकः प्रान्वां संज्ञा Bhāgā Vr. on P. II.
4.72. The word चेवक्रोयेित is sirmi-
larly used for the frequentative
when the sign Of the " frequen-
tative viz. य ( यड् ) is not elided.
See चेचक्रीीयेित.
च्वर्करीतवृत्त a form of the frequenta-
tive or intensive. e.g. अापनीफणत्,
चेोष्कूयमाणः । cf. अापनीफणादेिति फणतेश्चर्करी-
त॒वृत्तम् । Nir. II. 28; चोष्कूयमाण इति
चेोष्कूयतश्चकंरोतवृच्तम् Nir.VI.22. See the
word न्चर्वर्करी
चच (1 ) splitting up of a word into
itS component parts, which is gen-
erally shOwn in the Padapātha by
अवग्रह (S). The word, hence means
पदपाठ Or recital by showing separa-
tely the constitutent words of the
Sarihhitā or the running text of the
Weda. The word is used almost im.
the same sense in the Mahabhāgya
in respect Of showing the words of
a stitra separately; cf. न केबलानि
चर्चीपदानि व्याख्यानं वृाद्धेः अात् ऐजिति ।
किं तर्हि । , उदाहरणं प्रत्युदाहरणं वाक्याध्याहारः
इत्येतत्समुदितं व्याख्यानं भवति M.Bh. on
Māhe$vara Stitra 1 Vārt. 6l ; {2) a*
→



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-158.png}}}}}}

चचर्वागुण
142
चाप्
repeated word; gf. इतिकरणात् पुरतो यत्
पुनः प॒दवचनं तत् चचीँशब्देनोच्यते. Uvvata
On V. Pr. III.20; (3) a discussion
Or a debate where consideration is
given tO each single word; cf.
पृर्यायशब्दानां लाघवगौरवचची नाद्रियते 'Par.
Sek. Pari. ! 15.
चचौगुण repetition of a word in the
पदपाठ, क्रमपाठ, जटापाष्ठ etc. where the
several Pa!ghaS appear to be called
चर्चा.In theपदपाठ āword in a comp-
Ound iS repeated twice, in the
|क्रमपाठ ewery word is repeated twice,
in the जटापाठ, six times.
चचौपद COmponent words of a, runn-
jng text or Of a compound word.
चत्वै substitution of a hard consonant
or शु; 5; सू, for soft consonants and
āspirates. See the word चर्.
चर्मशिरस् name of a Nirukta, writer
quoted by Yaska; cf. Nir.III.!5.
चवर्ग the group of consonants of the
pàlatal clasS,.viz. चु, छु, जु, झ and ञ्जु.
The word च is used im `the sarne
" sense in the Prātiश्akhya works.See
, the.word च.
चाक्रवर्मण an ancient grammarian
, whOSe view is quoted by Panini in
his Stitra ई 3 चाक्रवर्मणस्य P.VI.1.130.
चाङ्गुदास्स the same as चङ्गु or चाङ्गु or
चङ्गुदास, a grammarian who compo-
sed a.. gomperadium on grammar
calledवैयाकरणजीवातु and als6 a com-
mentary on it.
चाङ्कस्त्र a treatise on the grammar
written by चाङगुदास in the Stitra
forप्n,which was namedवैयाकरणजीवातु
by him.
चाङ्गुव्याकरण the same as चाङ्गसूत्र.
७<X
चातुःस्वार्य the view that there are
four accents-the udātta, the
anudātta, the svarita and the
· Pragaya-ंheld by the Khānंlikiya
. and the Aukhiya Schools.
चातुरथै a tad• affix prescribed in the
four senses--तदस्मिन्नस्ति, तेन निर्वृत्तम्,
तस्य निवासः and अदूरभवः mentioneर्तें
by Pafरे॒ंini in IV.2.67-70; cf.अपत्यादि-
भ्यश्चातुरर्थपर्यन्तेभ्यः येन्येर्थाः स शेषः M.Bh.
on IW.2.92.
चातुरथैिक the affixes preScribed in
the four Senses mentioned in P.
|IV.2.67-70. These taddhita affixes
are given in the Sप्रेtras IW.2.71 to
|IV.2.9l• The term चातुरर्थिक is
used for these affixes by commen-
tatOrS On Panini stitras.
चातुर्वण्र्यादि words mentioned in · the
claSS headed by चातुर्वण्र्य where the
tad. affix ष्यञ्जु i$ applied although
the WOrds चतुंर्वर्ण, चतुर्वेद and others
are mOt गुणवचन words to which
ध्युञ्ंत् is regularly applied by P.
V• l • I24• cf. ब्राह्मणाादेषु चेातुर्वण्र्यादीनामुप-
संख्यानम् P. V. 1. 124 Vart.. 1.
चादि a class of words headed by च
which are termed निपात by Pāfjjni
e• g• च,.वा, ह एवम् नूनम्, चेत्, माङ्
etc. ; cf. ची|दयोऽसत्व. , P. I.4.57. For
the meaning Of the word असत्त्व see
p.370 Vyakaranamahābhāgya. Vol.
VII. published by the ' D. E.
Society, Poona.
चानश् k[t affix अान applied to a root,
tO signify habit, age or strength;
e. g• अात्मानं भूष्प्रयमाणाः l कवचं बिभ्राणाः !
शत्रून्निघ्नानाः। cf. P. III. 2. 129.
चन्द्र name of a treatise on grammar
written by Candra, who is believed
tO have been the same as Can-
dragOmin• The Grammar is based
upon that Of Pārऐini, but it does
not treat Vedic forms and accents.
See the word चन्द्र above. For
detail$ $ee pp. 375- 376 Pataळेjali
Mahābhāgya." Vol. VIr, D.' E.
Society's Edition.
चान्द्रव्याकरणपद्धातेि name of a com-
mentary on the चान्द्रव्याकरण written
by अानन्ददत्त. →~
च5 the fem. affix अा, applied , to



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-159.png}}}}}}

चारायण
143
चिन्तामणि
' words ending in the tad. afiixes
, डूङ् and, ष्य॒ङ्क; e. g. कौस॒ल्या, वाराह्या,
१ गोकक्ष्या; cf. Kāś. on P. TV. 1. 74.
च्य'ण an ancient grammarian re-
ferred to by Patafjali in the Ma-
hābhā$ya as a scholar who had a
line of pupils named after him ;
ई, कुवलचारायाीयाः M. Bh. on P. I..
चारिताथ्र्य fulfilment of the object or
the Purpose. The word is ised in
9°nnegtion with a rule of grammar.
See चरितार्थ.
the meaning Of the indeclinable
ं.tष्? Conwey,, which, as existing in
different individuals, the dvandva
9Orn Pound is prescribed.Out of the
fछ्प्पr $enses pOSSessed by the inde-
clinable च, the Dvaridva · com-
’ P9und is prescribed in two senses
Viz..इतरेतरयोग and समाहार out of the
four समुचय, अन्वाचय, ' इतरेतरयोग and
समाहार; cf. |क्ः पुनश्चेन कृतेार्थः । समुच्चयो-
न्वाचय इतरेतरयेोगः समाहार इति M. Bh.
9f' _F• II.2.29; cf. ' also Cāndra
Vyakarana II.2.48.
च्छ् tad. affix ( अाळु ) applied to the
word हृदय, in the sense of posses-
sion, optionally along with the
affixes वत् इन् and इक. e.. g. हृदयाळुः,
हृदयवान् , हृदयी and हृदयिक:; cf. Kāś:
on W.2. 122.
चिकीर्षित desiderative formation; a
terrm uSed by ancient grammarians
for the term सन्नन्त of Pānini on the
analogy of the terms भवन्ती, वर्तमाना
' etc. cf. अा इत्याकांर उपसर्गः पुरस्तात्, चिकॉ-
उत्तरः, अाशु शेाचयतीति अाशुशुक्षणिः
Nir. VI. ].
चिकीर्षितज in the sense of the
desiderative; cf. चिकीर्षितादर्थीज्जातः
सन्नन्तादित्यर्थः Durgācārya on Nir.
WI.1.
चिच्चन्द्रिका name of a commentary
on the Paribhāgenduśekhara writ-
ren by Vishnu Sha9tri Bhat, in
reply to the treatise named दूषकरदो-
देद्भद. See विष्णुशाास्त्रन्. For details see
pp. 39, 40 of Vyakarana Mahā-
bhāsya Vol. VII. published by
the D. E.Society, Poona.
चिण् substitute इ causing v]rddhi, in
the place of the aorist wikarata
affix चिल, prescribed in the case of
all roots in the passive voice and
in the case of the roots पद्, दीप्, जन्
etc. in the active woice before ' the
affix त of the third pers. sing. in
the Atmanepada, which in its
turn is elided by P. VI. 4. 104.
cf P. III. 1,60-66.
चित् affixes or substitutes or bases
marked with the mute letter चू sig-
nifying the acute accent for ' the
last wOwel; e. g. अथुच्, धुरच्, कुाडिनन्व्
etc. cf. P. VI. 1. 163, 164.
चित्करण marking with the mute letter
छ्, signifying the acute accent of
the last wOWel; cf. चापि चित्करणसाम-
थ्यीदन्तेोदात्तत्वं भविष्यति; M. Bh. on P.
|III. 1.3 Vārt. 16. →*
चित्प्रभा name of a commentary
on the Paribhāgenduśekhara by
ब्रह्मानन्दसरस्वती.
चिदस्थिमाला name of a commentary
on the LaghuŚabdenduśekhara by
Vaidyanātha Pāyagunde,one of the
distinguished disciples of Nāgeśa-
bhaर्भृta..
चिद्रूपाश्रय mamed also चिद्रूपाश्रम who
wrote a learned commentary
named विषमी on the Paribhāgen-
duśekhara, of Nāgeśabhatta
चिन्ता (1) view; theory. e.g- बाध्यसामान्य-
चिन्ता, , बाध्यावेशेषचिन्त॒ा cf. इयमेव बाध्य-
सामान्याचिन्तेति व्यबाह्नियते Par. Sek. Pari.
58; (2) a matter of scrutiny on a
suspicion; cf. चिन्ता च-मयतरिदन्य-
तरस्याम् इत्यतेोन्यतरस्यांग्रहणस्य सिंहावलेीकन-
न्यायादनुवृत्तेः IDurghata Vr. on VI.4.69.
चिन्तामणि name of a commentary



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-160.png}}}}}}

चिन्तामणिप्रकााशैिोका
on the Suitras of the Sākaईंāyama
Vyākarana written by यक्षवर्मन्. It is
also called लधुवृति.
चिन्तामाणप्रकाशिाका a commentary on
the चिन्तामणेि of यक्षवर्मन्, written by
अाजितसेन in the twelfth century. See
न्चििवन्तामणि.
चिन्त्य questionable; contestable;
which cannot be easily admitted•
The word is used in connectiOn
with a staternent made by a SOund
scholar which cannot be easily
brushed aside; cf. एतन यत्कैयटेट केाच-
दित्यादिना अस्यैव वाग्रहणस्य , तदनित्यत्वज्ञ[प-
' कतोक्ता सापि चिन्त्या. Par. Sekh. Pari.
93. 5.
चु the group of palatal consonants
vi%. चु, इछ्, ज्, इम् and अम्; cf. चुट्टट्रं P.
I. 3. 7, 'चेोः " कुः WIII. 2. 30, कुहोक्षुः
VII. 4 62.
चुव्र्ञ्चुपुप् , tad. affix ळुञ्ञ्जु_applied to a
word in thc Sense of * well-known
by ?; e. g. विद्याचुत्र्चुः; cf. P. W. 2. 26.
a class or grOup of roOts
headed by the rOOt चुर्, fatmiliarly
|known as the tenth cOnjugation•
चुल्लिभट्टि a grammarian whQ is Suppo-
sed to hawe written a glOSS ( वृत्ति )
on the Stitras of Panini; cf. तत्र च
वृत्तिः पाणिनिप्रणीतानां सूत्राण॒ां विवरणं चुहि॒िट्ठभट्टि-
नेल्ट्ररादि- ( V. 1. नि*ट्रैरादि-) विरचितम्,
Nyasa, on the benedictory verse Of
|Kāśikāः वृत्तौ भाष्ये तथा घातुनामपारायणा-
दिषु at the very beginning.
च्चूर्णेि a gloss on the Stitras of,Pāthini
referred to by Itsing and Sripati-
datta.. Some ScholarS beliewe that
Patajjali's Mahābhāsya is referred
to here by the word चूर्णेि, as it fully
discusses all the knotty points.
Others believe that चूर्णि,stands for
the Vrtti of चुाल्छंभट्टि. In Jain Reli-
· gious Literature there are some
briefcomments on the Stitras which
are called चूर्णि and there possibly
144
j
9、
चारदद्
was a similar चूर्णेि on the stitras of
Pānini.
चेक्रीयित the sign य ( यङ् of Panini )
of the frequentative or intensive.
The word is mostly used in the
Kātantra Grammar works; cf.
धातेर्यिशब्दश्चक्रीयितं क्रियासमभिहारे, Kāt.
III. 2. l4. The wordचेत्रक्रीयित is used
in the Mahābhā$ya in the sense of
यङन्त where Kaiyatःa remarks यङ:ः
पूर्वाचार्यसंज्ञा चेक्रीयितमिति cf. प्रदीप on
M.Bh. on P. IV.1.78 Wārtika.. The
" wOrd चेचक्रोयितान्त rmeans यङन्त in
|Pāraini's terminology meaning a
Sccondary root derived from the
primary rOOt in the sense of in-
tensity. The word चर्करीतान्त is used
for the frequentative bases in which
य, the Sign of the frequentative, is
→、
Omitted. See	→
चेलु tad• affix एळु applied to the word
हिम in the sense of * unable to
bear * e. g. हिमेळुः, cf. P. V. 2. 122
Vārt.. 7.•
चोकनाथ a southern grammarian of
the Sewenteenth century who has
cOmpoSed in 430 Stanzas a, short
list of the important roots with
their meaning. The work is called
धातुरत्नावली.
चोदक (1) an objector; thc word is co-
mmon in the Cormmentary Litera- '
ture where likely objections to a,
particular statement are raised,
without specific reference to any
individual objector, and replies are
giwen, Simply with a. wiew to mak-
ing matterS clear; (2) repetition
of a word with इति interposed; cf.
चेीदकः परिग्रहः इत्यनर्थान्तरम्. See अदृष्टवर्ण
and qरिग्रह.
चोरदद् the crude form of the word चेार
with the mute consonant ट् added
to Signify the addition of ङीपु to
form thé feminine base e. g. चैौरीं;
cf. P. ]IV. 1. 15.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-161.png}}}}}}

चौरादिक
145
छपू
चौरादिक a rOOt belonging to the tenth
cOnंjugation of roots ( चुरादिगण ) ; cf.
अामः इति चौरादिकस्य णिचि वृद्धौ सत्यां भवति ।
Kāś. on P. VII. 8. 34.
the consonant छ् with च॒ prfiexed,
for which शू is substituted by च्छ्रुोः
शूडनुनासिके च P. VI. 4. 19.
च्फञ् tad. affix अायन causing a vpddhi
Substitute for the first vowel of the
Word tO which it is added. The
affix ( च्फञ् ) is added in the sense
Of * a descendant except the direct
son or daughter' to words कुञ्ज and
others; cf. P.. IV. I. 98.
च्लि the sign of the aorist ( लुङ् ) for
which generally सिच् and अङ्, क्स, चङ्
and चिण् are substituted in $pecified
cases; cf. P. III. i . 43-66.
च्वि tad. affix ( Of which nothing re-
mains X tO signify the taking place
Of SOmething which was not so
before; after the word ending in
च्वि the forms of the root कृ, भू or
असुस् have to be placed|; e. g. शुह्री-
करोति; cf. P. V. 4. 50
च्व्यथै possessing the sense of च्वि. See
चिव cf. P. III. 2. 56 also P. III.
3. 127 Vārt,. 1.
ठछ
व्छ् the second consonant of the
palatal claSS Of cOnSOnants ( चवर्ग ),
which is posseSSed of the properties
श्वास, अघेोष, महाप्राण and कण्ठविवृतकारित्व.
छ् , placed at the beginning of
affixes, is mute; while ईय् is substi-
tuted for छ् standing at the begi-
mning of taddhita affixes; cf. P. I.
3.7 and VII. 1.2. छ् at the end
of roots has gOt षूञ् substituted for
it; cf. P. VIII. 2.36.
छ tad. affix ईय, added C l ) to the
words स्वस्सृ, भ्रातृ and tO words end-
ing with the tad. affix फिञ्जू; cf. P.
19 . →
|IV. 1.143,144 and 149; (2) to the
dvandva compound of words
mearming constellations,to the words
अपेानसृ, अपांनप्तृ, महन्द्र, द्यावापृथिवी, शुनासीर
etc. aS alsO to शर्करा, उत्कर , नड etc. in
certain specified senses, cf. P. IV.
2.6, 28, 29, 32, 48, 84, 90 &91 ;(3)
to words beginning with the vowel
*called Vrddhi (अा,ऐएँ or औौ),to words
ending with गर्त, ' to words of the
गह class, and tO युष्मदूट् and अस्मद् in
the शैष्षिक senses, cf. 'P. IV. 3.1|14,
137-45 and IV. 3.1 ; (4) to the
words जिह्वामूल, अङ्गुलि, as also to
words ending in वर्ग in the sense of
* present there * ; cf. P.IV.3.62-64;
(5) to the words शिशुक्रन्द, यमसभ,
dvandwa compounds, इन्द्रजनन and
others in the sense of * a book
composed in respect Of', cf. P.IV.
3.88; (6)to words meaning warrior
tribes, to words रैवतिक etc, as also
अायुध, and अग्र, in Some specifi-
ed senses; cf P.IV. 3.91, 131, TV.
4.14, 117; (7) to all words barring
those given as exceptions in the
general senses mentioned in the
sec. V.I.l-37; (8) to the words पुत्र,
कडङ्कर, दक्षिण, words ending in वत्सर्,
अनुप्रवचन etc. होत्रा, अभ्यमित्र and कुशाग्र
in specified senses; cf. P. V. 1• 40,
69,70,91,92, 111,112,135, V. 2.17,
V.3.105; (9) to compound words
in the sense of इव; e. g. काकतालीयम् ,
अजा|कृ,पार्णीयम् etc. cf. V. 3. 106;and
(10) to words ending in जाति and
स्थान in specified senses; cf. P. V.4,
9,10. →
छकार the letter छ, the word कार being
|looked upon as an affix added
tO the consonant श्छ् which, by the
addition of अ, is made a complete
syllable; cf. T. Pr. I. 16, 21.
छण् tad. afiix ईय causing the vjrddhi
substitute for the first vowel of the
word to which it is added. छणु is
added (1) to the words पितृप्वस्सृ, and



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-162.png}}}}}}

f
छन्दस्
मातृप्वसृ in the sense of अपत्य; cf. P*
IV. 1.132, 134; (2) to the word*
कृशाश्व,अरिष्ट and others aS a चातुरर्थिक
affix; cf. P. IV. 2.80; (3) to the
words तित्तिरि, बरतन्तु, खण्डिक and उख
im the sense of *instructed by?, cf.
|P.IW.3.102; and (4) to the word
शलातुर in the sense Of *being a
|national of* or *having as a, domi-
cile.* e. g. शालातुरीयः; cf. P. IV. 3.94,
छन्दस् (1) Vedic Literature in general
as found in the rule बद्दुलं छन्दसि
which has occurred Seweral times
in the Stitrās of Parini, cf. छन्देी-
वत्सूत्राणि भवन्ति M. Bh. on I. 1.1, and
|I.4.3; cf. also V. Pr. I. 1, 4; (2)
Wedic Sarihhitā textS aS contrasted
with the Brāhmar1a texts; cf. छन्दो-
ब्राह्मणानि च तद्विषयाणि P, IV.2.66; (:७)
metre, metrical portion of the
Veda..
छन्दोभाषा Vedic language as contrast-
ed with भाषा (Ordinary language in
uSe); cf.  िगुरुत्वं ळुत्रुत॒ा साम्युं ह्रस्वदीधैष्ट्ळुतानि
च.. .एतत्सर्वे तु ावैज्ञेयं छन्देोभाषां विजेीनता
T. Pr. XXIV. 5.
छपाद a popular nanae given by gra-
mmarians to the first pada of the
fifth_ Adhyaya of Patjini's Asga.
dhyayi as the pāda begins with
the rule प्राक् क्रीताच्छः P. V. 1.1.
a shOrt terrm Or Pratyāhāra stand-
ing for छ्:_ट् ? श्, च् , ट् and त्; cf.
नश्छव्यप्रशान् P. VIII.3.7.
छस् tad. affix ईय added to the word
भवत् in the general शैषिक senses,
e. g. भवदीयः; cf. P. IV.2.115. The
mute letter सू.. has been attached to
thé affix छस् $9 that the base भवत्
before it could be termed pada
(cf. सिति च P, I.4.l6) and ās a
r€$ült have the c9hsonant त् chang-
ed into द् by P. VIII.2.39.
छन्दुस found in the Vedic Literature;
Vedi&;_Ç:f, श्छान्दसुा अपैि कचिद् भाषायां
146
प्रयुज्यन्ते Bhā$āvrtti on P. TV.'4.[43; j
जग् व्थ
cf. also छान्दसमेतत् । दृष्टानुविधिश्च चञ्छन्दसि
भवति; M. Bh. on I, 1.5.
व्छाया a learned commentary on Na-
geŚa's Mahabhā$yapradipoddyota
written by his pupil बाळेभट्ट (possibly
the same as, or the Son of, वैद्यनार्थ
पायगुण्डे) who lived in the eighteenth
century.
छुच्छुकभट्ट a grammarian who wrote
a short gloSS called कातन्त्रलघुद्धृाति on
the Kãtantrastitras.
ज
जत् third consOnant of the palatal class
of COnsOnantS, possessed of the
|propertiCS नाद, घेोष्प्र, अल्पप्राण and कण्ठ-
संवृत्तकारित्व. जुत्ता at the beginning of
affixes iS mute in Pānini?s grammar.
ज the consonant जू with अ added to
it for facility of pronunciation; cf.
T. Pr. I..21. See जु.
जगाद्धर a poet and grammarian of
Ka$mira of the fourteenth century
who wrote a commentary named
ब्रालबेधिनी on ..the Kā tantra Sütras.
जगान्नाथ (1) the well-known pOet and
Scholar ofVyākarat]1a and Alarih-
|kāra who wrote many excellent
poetical works. Hc li'red in the
sixteenth century. He was a pupil
of कृष्णशेष्त्र and he severely criticised
the vieWS of Appaya Dik$ita and
|BhattQji Dik$ita. He wrote a Sort
of refutation of Bhattoji's commen-
tary Praudha-ManOramā On the
Siddhānta Kaumudi, which he
named प्रैौढमनेारमाखण्डन but which is
popularly termed मनेोरमाकुचमर्दन. His
famOuS work iS the RaSagahgā-
dhara on Alahkāraśāstra; (2)
writer of a commentary on the
* Rk-Prātiśākhya by mame Varna-
kramalak$ataā; (3) writer of Sāra-
pradipikā, a commentary on the
Sārasvata Vyākaratna. →



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-163.png}}}}}}

ऽट
147 जहत्स्वाथौ
जट a kind of Vedic recital wherein
each word is repeated six times.
जटा is called Orne of the 8 kinds
( अष्टविकृति) Of the Kramapagha,
which in its turn is based on the
Padapagha; cf. जटा माला शिखा रेखा
ध्वजेो दण्डो रथेा घनः । अष्टैौ विकृतयः प्रेोत्ताः
क्रमपूर्वा मनीषिभिः । जटा is defined as
अनुलेीमविलोमाभ्यां त्रिवारं हि पठेत् क्रमम् |
विलोमे पदबत्संधिः अनुलेोमे यथाक्रमम् । The
recital of ओोषधयः संवदन्ते सोमेन can be
illustrated as ओाषधयः सं, समोषधयः,
ओोषधयः सं, सं वदन्त, वदन्ते सं, संवदन्ते,
वदन्ते सोमेन, सेोमेन वदन्त, वदन्ते सोमेन |
जयकृष्प a, famous grammarian of the
Maumi family who lived in Vara-
|taasi in the seventeenth century.
|He wrote विभक्त्यर्थनिर्णय, स्फेीटच्वन्द्रिका, a
commentary on the Siddhānta-
kaumudi called सुबोधिनी and a
commentary On the Madhya Kau-
mudi named वेिलास. He wrote a |:
commentary On the Laghukau-
mudi alsO.
、 → 8
जयदंव a grammarian, ( of course १
well-known ! '
· difierent froim the
poet), to whom a small treatise on
grammar by name इष्टतन्त्रब्याकरण is
attributed.
जयन्त (1) author of तत्वच्चन्द्र a commen-
tary on पाणिनिसूत्रवृत्ति written by
Vitthala; (2) writer of a commen-
tary named Vadighatamudgara on
the Sārasvataprakriyā.
a famous Bengalee
scholar Of Wyākarata and Nyāya
who has Written a Small treatise
. dealing with syntax. *'The treatise
is named कारकवाद.
जयादित्य one of the famous joint
authors ( जयादित्य and वामन ) of the
well-known gloss ( वृत्ति ) on the
Stitras of Panini, popularly Called
. As the काशिकावृत्ति is men-
tioned by It-sing, who " has also
mentioned Bhartrhari?s Vakya-
padiya, as a grammar treatise
छ्written some 40 ' years before his
visit, the time of काशिकावृच्ति is fixed
as the middle of the 7th century
A.D. Some scholars believe that
जयादित्य was the same as जयापीड a
|king of Kaśmira and वामन wa$ his
minister. For details, see pp. 386-
388 of the Vyākarana Mahābhā$ya
Vol. VII published by the D.E.
Society, Poona. See काशिकां-
जयानन्द a Jain grammarian Of the
fourteenth century whO wrOte a
cormmentary named उद्धार On the
लिङ्गानुशासन of Hemacan.dra•
जश a short terria ( प्रत्याह्ार ) signifying
the soft inaspirate clasS consOnants
जू, बुम्, गुण् ; ड् and दद्.
जशत्व substitution of a जशु consOnant
prescribed by Pānini for any con-
sonant excepting a semi-vOwel Or
a nasal, if followed by any fOurth
or third cOnSOnant out of the claSS
consonants, or if it is at the end of
a pāda; cf. P.VIII. 2.39, VIII.4.
53.
`जश्भाव the same as जश्त्व, which see
above. →
जस्म् case termination अस् o1 the nom.
plural; cf.P. IV. 1.2.
जासे case termination अस् of the
nom. plural mentioned as जसू by
Panini in IV. 1.2, but referred to
as जसि by him; cf. P.IV.1.3B and
XWII.1.50.
जहत्स्वार्था ( वृात्ति ) a composite ex-
pression where the constituent
fnermbers give up their individual
sense. In compound wOrds Such
as राजपुरुष in the sentence राजभुरुषमा-
नय the word राजन् gives up itS
sense inasrnuch as he; the king,-'
is not brought ; पुरुष alsO giveS up
its sense as every mam is not
brought. It is, of gourse to be
noted that although the sense is
{
1



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-164.png}}}}}}

जहद्धमैत्व 148
जात्य
given,up.by each word, it is n९t
completely given up; cf. जहदप्यसैौ
स्वार्थं " नात्यन्ताय जहाति; M. Bh. on P.
II. 1.1. Wārt. 2. For detailed
explanation see Mahābhāgya on
P. II. I. I. Vārt,. 2.
जहद्धर्मत्व abandonment or giving up
of properties in the case of a
word included in a वृत्ति or comapo-
site expression; cf. जहद्धर्मत्वाच्छब्दप्रवृत्तेः
Durghata Vrtti on P. II. 2.6.
जाग्रहीतेतिवाद a short disguisition On
the correctness of the word जाग्रहीता,
written by a grammarian named
|!
1
1
||
|!
||
||
Cakrin; cf. भट्टोजिदीक्षितग्राहग्रस्तं माधव- !
दिग्गजम्। अमूमुचत्सत्यवयश्चक्री चक्रिप्रसादभाकू,
colophon.
जात born or produced there or then ;
one of the senses in which the
tad. afiixes, called जातार्थक, are
prescribed by Par)ini in the stitra
तत्र जातः and the following; cf. P.
]IV. 3.25-37.
जातबहिरङ्गासिद्धत्व inwalidity of a Ba-
|hirahga Operation that has al-
ready taken place by virtue of
the Antaraihga-paribhāsā-असिद्धं
बहिरङ्गमन्तरङ्गे- that which is * bahi-
. rahga' is_ . regarded as not having
taken cffect when that which is
*antarahga' is to.. take effect. For
details see Par. Sek. Paribhāड्ā 50.
जाताभीयासिद्धत्व invalidity of a gra-
mmatical operation prescribed by
a rule in the अाभीोय section (P. VI.
4. 22 uptO the end of the fourth
pada ) which, although it has taken
place, iS tO be looked upon as not
having taken place when any ०ther
Operation in the same section is
to take effect. See अाभीयासिद्ध..
जाातेि genuS; claSS;universal;the notion
Qf generality which is present in
the several individual objects of'the
Same kind• The biggest or widest
* notion of the universal or genus is
सत्ता which, according to the gra-
mmarianS, exisrs in every object
or SubStance, and hence, it is the
denOtation or denoted sense of
every substantive or Pratipadika,
althOugh on many an occasion
wyakti Or an individual object is
required for daily affairs and is
actually referred to in ordinary
talkS. In the Mahābhāgya a
learned discussion is held regard-
ing whether जाति is the denotation
Or व्यक्ति is the denotation. The
word जाति is defined in the Mahā-
bhā$ya as follows :- अाकृतिग्रहणा
जता॒तिर्लिङ्गानां च न सर्वभाक् । सकृदाख्यातनि-
गर्गाह्या . गेोत्रं च चरणैः सह |॥ अपर अाह ।
प्र॒ादुभीवविन्ना॒शाभ्यां स॒त्त्वस्य युगपद्गुणैः । असर्व-
लिङ्कां बह्वर्था तां जातिं कवयेो विदुः M. Bh.
on IV. 1.63. For details see
Bhartrhari's Vākyapadīya.
जातिपक्ष the wiew that जाति, or genus
Only, is the denotation of every
wOrd. Thc VieW Was first advo-
Cated by Vājapyāyana which was
later on held by many, the Mima-
rihSakas being the chief supporters
of the view. See Mahābhāsya
on P. I. 2.64. See Par. Sek. Pari.
40.
जातिपदार्थवाद see जातिपक्ष.
जातिस्वर the acute accent for the
last vowc] of a word ending with
चत Of the p.•p.p. denoting a genus;
cf. P. VI. 2.170.
जातीयग्र् tad. affix जातीय in the sense
of प्रकार or variety; e. g. पटुजातीयः,
मृदुजातीयः; cf. Kāś. on P. V. 3.69.
Originally जातीय was possibly an
independent Word, but as its use,
especially aS a nOun, was found
|restricted, it came to be looked
upon as an affix om the analogy
of the affixes कल्प, देश्य, देशीय and
others.
जात्य name of a variety of the Sva-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-165.png}}}}}}

जामि
rita or circumflex accent; the |
original swarita accent as contra- ||
sted with the Svarita for the grave |
Which folloWS upon an acute
as prescribed by P. in VIII. 4.67,
and Which is found in the words
इन्द्र:, होता etc. The jatya Svarita is
noticed in the words स्वः, घ्क्र, न्यकृ,
कुन्या etc.; .cf. उदात्तपूर्वं स्वरितमनुदात्तं |
प्दे॒दक्षरम् । अतेान्यत् खुरितं लेवारं जात्यमान्च॒क्षते॒ |
पदे । जात्या स्वभावेनैव उदात्तानुदात्तसंगतिं |
विना जातो जात्यः । तं जात्यमाचक्षते व्यााडेप्रभृतयः
|R. Pr. and com. III. 4.
जामि tautologous, unnecessarily
repeated; the word is defined and
illustrated by Yaska as;-तद्यत्समान्या- !
मृचि समानाभिव्याहारं भवति तञ्जामि भवतीत्येकं |
मधुमन्तं म॒धुश्रुतमिति यथा Nir.X.16.2. For |
Other definitions of the word जामि
99nveying practically the same
idea, cf. Nir.X. 16. 3 and 4.
जाहच् tad. affix added in the sense
of'*a root' to the wÓrds कर्ण, अक्षि, नख,
मुख and others; e. g. कर्णजाहम् cf. P.
V.2.24.
जेि a conventional term for संप्रसारण
used in the Jainendra Vyākarana..
जित् (1) lit. affix marked with the
mute letter ज्; e. g. जसू, जसि, जुस॒.
the word जित् is not however found
used in this sense; (2) a word
supposed to be marked with the
mute indicatory letter ज्ञ.The word
is used in this sense by the Wārtti-
kakāra Saying that such a word
does not denote itself but its syno-
nyms; cf. जित् पर्यायवचनस्यैव राजांद्यर्थम्
P.I.1.68 Vart. 7. In the Stitra, सभा
राजामनुष्यपूर्वा P.II. 4. 23, the word
राजन् is Supposed to be जित् and
hence it denotes इन, ईश्वर etc.; but
not the word राजन् itself; (3) In the
PrātiŚakhya works जित् means the
first tWo consonants of each clasS
(वर्ग); e.g. क्, ख्, ज्ञ, छ्. etc. which are
.the same as खय् letters in Pātjini's
149
जुमरनन्दिन्
terminology; cf. द्वौ द्वौ प्रथमी जित्. V*
Pr.I.50;III.]3.
जिनचन्द्र author of'theSiddhāntaratna*
a commentary on the SāraSvata
Stitras,
जिनेन्द्रबुाद्धे a reputed Buddhist Gra-
mmarian of the eighth · century
who wrote a scholarly comment-
ary on the Kaśikāvगृ'tti ofJayaditya
and Vāmana. The commentary is
called न्यास or काशिकाविवरणपञ्जिका and
the writer is referred to as न्यासक्रiर
in many later grammar works•
Some scholars identify him _with
पूज्यपाददेवनन्दिन् the writer ofthe जैनन्द्र-
व्याकरण, but this is not possible as
पूज्यपाददेवनन्दिन् was a Jain Gramma-
rian who flourished much earlier•
जिान्निर्देशा mention as जित्; cf. जिान्नेर्देशः
कर्तब्यः M.Bh. on I.1.68 Wārt. 7.See
जित्.
जिह्वा used in the sense of जिह्वाग्र, the
tip of the tongue.
जिह्वामूलस्थान (1)having the root of the
tongue as the place of its produc-
tion;the phOnetic element or letter
called जिह्वामूलीय; (2) name given to
that phonetic element into which
a visarga is changed when follow-
ed by क् or ख ; cf >< क इति जिह्वामूलीयः
v.Pr.VIII.19. The जिह्वामूलीय letter
is called जिह्वश्य also; See Nyāsa on I.
1.9. The Rk. Prātiśakhya lookS
upon ऋ, ल, जिह्वामूलीय, and the gut-
tural letters as जिह्वामूलस्थान.
जिह्वामूलीय produced at the root of
the tongue; the same as जिह्वामूलस्थान,
which see abowe.	-"
जुक् augment ज् added to the root वा
before the causal sign णिच् when
the root means shaking;cf.र्वो विधूनने
जुक् P. VII. 3.38.
जुमरनन्दिन् a grammarian of the
fourteenth century A. D. who '
revised and rewrote the .. grammar
1 t संक्षितसार and the commentary named



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-166.png}}}}}}

जुस् →→→→→
रसवती on it, which were composed
by क्रमदीश्वर in the thirteenth
, century. The work of जुमरनन्दिन् is
|known as जैौमारव्याकरण.
जुस्त् verbal termination उस् Substitut-
ed for the originai! झि of the third
ers. pl, in certain cases mentioned
inP.III.4.108,109,110,111, and 112.
जुस्भाव the transformation of झि into
जुसू ; the substitution of जुस् for ईि.
The term is often uSed in the
|Mahabhā$ya; cf. M. Bh. on I.
1.57, I.1. 63, III.1.43 etc. See जुम्.
、 the claSS of roots headed
by हु after which the vikafat?aśap
is eश्रided and the root is reduplica-
ted in the four conjugational tenses;
third conjugation of rOOtS.
न्द्रव्याकरप्ण name of a grammar
work written by Püjyapāda Deva-
mandin, also called Siddhanandin,
in the fifth century A.D. The
grammar is based on the A${ādh-
yāyi of Panini,the section on Vedic
. accent and the rules ©f Pārini exp-
laining Vedic forms being,of course,
neglected. The grammar is called
Jainendra Vyākarama or Jainendra
.SabdānuŚāsana. The wOrk is avail-
able in twO versions, one consisting
of 3000 suitras atad the other of3700
sütras. It haS gOt many COmment-
aries, of which the Mahāvपृtti
written by Abhayanandin is the
principal One. 'For details see
Jainendra Vyakarana, introduction
published by the Bhāratīya Jfiāna-
pītha Vārāऐ]asi.
जैनेन्द्रव्याकरणमहावृच्ति name Of a com-
mentary On the Jainendra Vyāka-
raraa, Written by Abhayanandin in
;,. the ninth century A. D. see जैनेनन्द्र-
व्याकरण abowe.
|:जौमार ( व्याकरण ) a treatise on vya-
':karataa writtem by Jumaranandin.
、
|j50
|See लुमरनन्दिन्, abowe. The,Jaumāra ||
इञ्पक
Vyākarataa has nO Vedic section
dealing with Vedic forms or ac-
cents,but it has added a section on
Prākjita just as the Haima Vya-
|karaf]a.
जौमारपरिशिष्ट a supplement to the
Jau māra Vyākarana writtera by
Goyicandra. See गोयीचन्द्र.
जौमारसैस्करण the revis ed version by
Jumऐं!:ranandin of the Original
grammar treatise in VerSe called
संक्षिप्तसार written by KramadiSvara.
Thc Jaumārasarihskarat?a is the
samc as.jaumāra Vyākarana, which
Sce abOve.
जौहोत्यादिक a root belongंing to the
जुहोत्यादिगण or the third conjugation.
ज्ञानदीपिका name of a commentary on
Amarasitimhā*s AmarakO$a written
by Sripati (Chakravartim) in the
|14th century.
ज्ञापक lit. indirect or implicit revealer;
a word wery commonly used in
the sense of an indicatory state-
ment. The St३ंtras, especially thOse
of Pāitiini, are very ]aconic and it is
believed that not a, single wOrd in
the Sütras is devoid of purpose.
|ंf it is claimed that a particular
word is without any purposc, the
object of it being achievcd in
somc other way, the commenta-
torS always try to assign SOmc pur-
pose or the other for the use of the
word in the Stitra. Such a word
or words or sometimes ewen the
whole Stitra is called शापक or indi-
cator of a particular thing. The
Paribhāsश्ās or rules of interpreta-
tion are mostly derived by indica-
tion(शापकसिद्ध) from a, word or wordS
in a Stitra which apparently appear
tO be व्यर्थे or without purpose, and
which are shown as साथैक after the
particular indication ( ज्ञापन ) is
drawn from them. The शापक is



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-167.png}}}}}}

ज्ञापकसमुच्चय
151
ज्वलिति
shown to be constituted of four|
parts, वैयर्थ्य, ज्ञापन॒, स्वस्मिञ्चारिताथ्र्य्|
and अन्यत्रफल. For the instances of |
Jfiāpakas, see Paribhāgenduśekhara.
Puru$ottamadewa in his .Jfiāpaka-
samuccaya haS draWn numerous
conclusions of the type of ज्ञ!|पन
from the wording of Panini Suitras.
The word ज्ञापक and ज्ञापन are
used many times as Synonytns
although ज्ञापन sometimes refers to
the conclusions drawn from a
wording which is ज्ञापक or indica-
tor. For instances of ज्ञापक, cf.M.Bh.
on Maheśvara Stitras 1, 3, 5, P. I.1.
3, 1 1, 18, 23, 51 etc. The word ऊट्ट्र
in the rule वाह ऊट् is a wellknown
ज्ञापक of the अन्तरङ्गपरिभाष्प्रा. The
earliest use of ihe word ज्ञापक in the
senSe giwen abowe, is found in the
|Paribha$āsticana of Vyādi. The
Paribhā&ā works on other systems
of grammar Such aS the Kātantra,
the Jainendra and OtherS have
drawn similar Jफ़ेapakas from the
wording of the Stitras in their
systemS. Sometimes a Jfंāpaka is
not regularly constituted of the
four partS given abowe;it is a mere
indicator and is called बोधक instead
of ज्ञापक.
ज्ञापकसमुच्चय a work giving a collec- ||
tion of about 400 Jfiāpakas or
indicatory wordings found in the
Stitras of Pānini and the conclu-
sions drawn from them. It was
written by Puru$ottamadeva, a
|Buddhist scholar of Pānini's gram-
mar in the tWelfth century A. D.,
WhO WaS probably the same as the
famous great Vaiyākarana, patron-
ized by L-ak5manasena.See पुरुषेाच्तम-
देव.
ज्ञापकस्साध्य realizable, or possible to |
be draWn, from a wording in the
Sütra of Panini in the manner
shoWn abowe. See ज्ञापक.
ज्ञापकसिद्ध realized from the ज्ञापक
Wording; the conclusion drawn
frOm an indicatOry. word in the
form of Paribhā$āS and the like.
Such conclusionS are not said to
be universally walid; cf. ज्ञापकसिद्धं न
सर्वत्र Par. Sek. Pari, I!0.7.
ज्ञापन a conclusion or inference,
drawn from a Word or words in a
Stitra, with a view to assign a
purpose to that or to those words
which otherwise wOIuld have been
without a purpose. Th5 word is
sometimes used in the sense of
3ज्ञापक्र, and refers to the word or
words supposed to be without any
purp>se and therefore looked upon
as a reasOn Or हेतु for the desired
conclusion to be drawn. The
words किमेतस्य शापन प्रयेोजनम् occur
very frequently in the Mahābhāgya;
cf, M.Bh. on P. I. 1. 1|l, 14,19, 55,
68, I. 2.4l etc. etc•
ज्ञापित concluded or prowed by means
of a शापक wOrd or Wording; cf. हन्तेः
पूर्वेविप्रतिषेधेो वार्तिकेनैब ज्ञापितः M.Bh. or:
]III. 4. 37 Vārt.. 3.
इज्ञाप्य a conclusion or formula to be
drawn from a jप्रेर्नेāpaka word or
words; cf. the usual expression
यावता विनानुपपत्तिस्तावतो ज्ञाप्यत्वम् stating
that only so much, as is absolutely
necesSary, is to be inferred.
ज्ञाप्यमान indicated or suggested; cf.
उत्पातेन ज्ञाप्यमान ( चतुर्थाँ वाच्या )l वाताय
कपिला विद्युत् etc. M.Bh. on II. 3.13
Wārt.. 3.
ज्योत्स्ना (1) name of a commentary
by Rāmacandra possibly belong-
irag to the 18th century on the
Vājasaneyi Prāti$akhya; (2) name
Of a commentary on Nāgeśa?'s
'Laghu$abdenduŚekhara by Uda-
yamrakara Paghaka of Vārānasi in
the 18th century.
.| ज्वलिति standing for ज्वलादि, name of



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-168.png}}}}}}

इम् 152
अम्
a class of 30 roots headed by the झष् a short term ( प्रत्याहार) for the
root ज्वल दींतौ and given as चल कम्पने,
जलु_घातनै etc; cf. उवलितिकसन्तेभ्ये णः P.
|]II[1. 1.140.
इझ
इञ्म् fourth , consonant of the palatal
claSS of consonants pOSSeSSed of the
properties नादानुप्रदान, घेोष, संवृतकण्ठत्व,
and महाप्राणत्व; इंञ्म् at the beginning Of'
an affix in Paraini Sऐitras iS mute;
e. g. the affixes झि, झ etc.; cf. चुट्रे P.
I. 3.7.
इ a verbal ending of the 3rd perS.
fourth ( इझ, भ, घ, ढ and ध ) of the
class consonants; cf. P.VIII. 2.37,
40.•
झि (1) verb-ending of the 3rd pers.
pl• ParaSmaipada, Substituted for
the लक्रार of the ten lakāras, chang-
ed tO जुस in the potential and the
ber]edictive moods, and ०ptionaIly
SO in the imperfect and after the
sign स् Of the aOrist ; cf.P,III. 4. 82,
83, 84, 108, 109, l 10, 11 1, 112; (2)
a COnventional term for अव्यय (in-
declinablc) used in the Jainendra
Vyākara|]a.
Ātm. for ल ( i.e. लकार ); cf P. III.4. | झित् a term,ऐmeaरे॒ing *having इम् as इत्'
78; for the letter इम्, अन्त् is substitu-
ted; cf. झेोन्तः P. VIII. 1.3, but इंरे in
the perfect tense; cf. P. III. 4.81
and रन् in the potential and bene-
dictive moods; cf. P. III. 4.85.
झच्	wording of the affix झ (see above)
staggeSted by the Vārttikakāra to
|hawe the last wowel of अन्त acute,
by चित: (P.VI.1.163) the property
चित्त्व being transferred from the
original झ to अन्त; cf. Kaś. तथा च
झचश्चित्करणमर्थवद् भवति on P.VII.1.3.
used by the Vātrttikakira in con.
ncction with thOsc words in the
rules Of Panini which themselves
as well as wOrds referring to their
Special kinds, are liable to under-
gO the preSCribed operation; cf.
झित् तक्ष्य च तद्विशेष्ध्राणां च मत्स्याद्यर्थम् ।
पक्षिमत्स्यमृगान् हन्ति | माात्स्यिकःl तद्विशेषाणाम्
शा*फरिकः शाछुलिक: । M.Bh.on P.I. 1.
68 Vārt.. 8.
ज्ञ
झय् a short term C प्रत्याहार ) for the व्ञ्ं (1)the nasal (fifth consonant)of the
fourth, third, Second and first con-
sonantS Of the five classes, after
which ह्, is changed into the cog-
nate of the preceding consonant
while शु is changed into छ् option-
ally ; cf. P. VIII. 4.62, 63.
झश् a short term ( प्रत्याहार ) for any
consonant	exCept Sermi-vowels,
nasals and ई; cf. P. VIII.4.65.
झछ् a short term ( प्रत्याहार ) for conso-
nantS excepting semi-vowels and
nasals; cf. P.I.2.9, VI.1.58, VI.4.
palatal clasS Of consonants possess-
ed Of the propertics नादानुप्रदान, घोष,
कण्टसंवृतत्व, अल्पप्राण and अानुनाासेक्य; (2)
mute letter, characterized by which
an affix signifies वृद्धि for the pre-
ceding woWel; अय् of'a taddhita affix,
hOwever, signifies बृाद्धे for the first
vOwel Of the word to which the affix
iS added; (3) a mute letter added
tO a rOot at the end to signify that
the rOOt takes verb-endings of both
the padas.
15, VII. l . 60, VIII. 2.39, and | ञ tad. affix अ; cf. P, IV. 2. 58, 106,
VIII.4.53.
107 arad ]IV.4.129.
ई a short term C प्रत्याहार ) for the | ञ्ञम् a short term ( प्रत्याहार ) for the
fourth and the third of the class
consonamts; cf. P. VIII. 4.53, 54.
five raasal consonants ङ् , ञ्ञ्न्_, ण् , न्,
and म् •



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-169.png}}}}}}

ञ्नि 153
ञ्युद्
ञ्नि a mute syllable prefixed to a
root in the Dhātupātha of Panini*
signifying the addition of the
affix त (त्त) to the root, in the sense
of the present time; e. g. श्विण्णः, धृष्टः
etc.; cf. Kā$. on P. III. 2.187.
ञ्निठ tad. affix इक added to words
|headed by काशीं as also to wOrds
meaning a village in the Vahika
country optionally with the affix
ठंञ्जु im the SaiŚika $enses;e.g. क्राशिका,
काशिकी, बैादिका, ' बैदिकी, शाकलिकंा, शाक-
लिकी. The afiixes ठञ्म् and ञ्ञिठ are
added , to the word ' काल preceded
by अापद् as ' also by Some other
words; e. g. अापत्कालिका, अापत्कालिकीो
तात्कालिका, तात्कालिकी etc. ; cf. P. IV.2.
116, 117,118 and Vārttika on IV.
· 2.1 16.-
ञ्मित् (i) an affix marked with the
mute letter ञ्ज; causing the substi-
tution of v|Fddhi for the• preceding
vowel amd acute accent for the first
vowel of the word to which it is
added, but, causing vrddhi for the
first vowel of the Word to which it
is added in case the affix is a, tad.
affix; cf. P.VII.2, 115, l 16, 117;
(2) a, rOot marked with the conso-
nant ञ्जू , taking verb-endings of
both the Parasmaipada ānd the
Atmanepada kinds ; e.g. करोति, कुरुते,
बिभर्ति, बिभृत, क्रीणाति, क्रीणीते elc.; cf.
the word गम्भीर and अब्ययीभाव cOm-
pounds in the sense of *preSent
there', e.g. गाम्भीयैम् , पारिमुख्यम् etc.
cf P.IYV.3.58, 59; (3) to the word
विदूर् e.g. बैदुर्य; cf. P. IV.3.84;,(4).to
the words headed by शाण्डक in the
sense of *domicile of', e.g. शाण्डिक्यः ;
cf. P. IV.3.92; (5) to the words
छन्देोग, औौक्थिक, नट , etc. in . the
sense of duty (धर्म) or Sgripture
C अाम्नाय ) ‘e. g. छान्दोग्यम् , औौक्थिक्यम्
नाट्यम् etc.; cf. P. IV. ' 3.129;
(6} to the word गृहपतेि in the SenSe
of *associated with'; e.g. गार्हपत्यः
(अमिः);cf.P.IV.4.90;(7) to the words
ऋषभ and उपानह् ; cf. P. V.1.14; .(8)
to the words ओनन्त, अावसथ etc.,cf. P.
V.4.23; (9) to the word अतिथि; cf.
P.V.4.26; and (10) to the words
in the sense of पूग(wandering tribes
for earning money), as also to
the words maeaning न्नात (kinds Of
tribes) as also to wOrds ending
with the affix च्क्ष्फञ्श् under certain
conditions; cf. P.V.3.i 12, 1 13.
* tad. affix in the sense of *a des"
cendant' added to wOrds beginn-
ing with अा, ऐण्, औौ or 'ending with इ,
as also to the words वकेासल and
अजाद provided they mean a Çour1-
try and `a K$atriya too; e.g. सौवीर्यः,
अावन्त्यः, कीन्त्यः कौसल्यः, अाजाद्यः; cf. P.
]IV.b.171.
स्वरैितअितः कर्त्रभिप्रायै क्रियाफले P.i,.ã72.' | व्यंहूँ tad. affix य .causing वृद्धेि to, the
ञीत् a root marked with the mute
syllable ञ्नि prefixed to it, signifying
the addition of the affix त्त in the
० present tense. See ञ्ञि.
ञ्य taddhita affix य sigmifying the
SubStitution of w['ddhi aS also
* the acute accent ' for the first
vowel of the word • to which
· it" is added.: It is added · (1) to
wOrds headed by प्रगदेिन् in the
four senses termed न्चतुरर्थं e.g.प्रागृद्यम्, .
': शारद्यम्. etc.:ॐ:cf.P.IV.. 2.80; (2). to
20 →»
fiist wowel of the word · to which
it is added and the addition of ई
( ङप॒ ) in the sense of feminine
gender, added to words meaning
warrior tribes Of the Vāhika cOun-
try but not Brahmभुaraas Or K5atri-
yas. e.g. क्षैीद्रक्यः, क्षौद्रकी etc.; cf. P.
? V. 3.• 114.
kgt affix added to the root वद् in
Vedic .Literature preceded by the
: words कव्य, पुरीष, पुरीष्य or हव्य. e.g.
. कव्यवाहनः, पुरीषवाहनः, हव्यचाहनः ; cf. P.
III,2.65, 66.. .	→



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-170.png}}}}}}

154
टीटच्
दृं the first consonant of the lingual
class ( टवर्ग ) pOssessed Of the prO-
perties श्वासानुप्रदान, अघेोष्ञ, विवृतकण्ठत्व
and अल्पप्राणत्व. When prefixed Or
affixed to an affix as an indica-
tory letter, it signifieS the addition
of the fem. afiix ङीप् ( ई ); cf. P. IV.
1.15. When added to the comju-
gational affixeS C लञ्क्रार ) it shOwS
that in the Atmanepada. the vowel
of the last syllable is changed tO
ए. cf. P. HII. 4.79. When added
to an augment ( अागम ), it showS
that the augment marked with it
is to be prefixed and not to be
affixed; e.. g.. नुट्, तुट् etc.; cf. P. I.
1.46. →
दट (1) the cOnSOnant इट्, the vowel
अ being added for facility of
utterance; cf. अकारो व्यञ्जनानाम्, T.
|Pr. I. 21 ; (2) short term, {प्रत्याहार)
standing for टवर्गीं or the lingual
claSS Of cOnSOnantS, found uSed
mostly in * the Prati$ākhya
workS; c!. RT. 13, W. Pr. I. 64,
T. Pr. I. 27 ; (3) tad. affix ( अ )
added to the word फल्गुनी im the
sense * तत्र जातः ? e. g. फल्गुनी, cf. P.
IV. 3.34, Vārt. 2; (4) kगु't affix
( अ ) addf d to the root चर्, सृ and
कृ under certain conditionS; e. g.
कुरुचरः, अग्रेसुरः, यशस्करी ( विद्या ) दिवाकरंः,
वैिभाकर: कर्मकरः etc. ; · cf. P. III.
2.16--23.
टक्र् kJ't affix अ, not admitting गुण or
बृंद्धि to the preceding vowel ' and
causing ङीप् in the femainine ( by
P.IW. 1.l5), added to the roots गा,
पा and हृन् under certain condi-
tionS; e. g. सामगः, सुरापः, पतिघ्नीं etc.;
cf. P. IV. 2.8, 52, 53, 54, 55.
टकार the consonant ट्, कार being
added for facility of utterance;
cf. वर्णात्कारः P. III. 3.108 Viirt. 3;
cf. alsO V. Pr, I.17.
दच् the samāsānta afiix अ added to
certain specified words at the end
of the tatpurusa and Other com-
pounds. e.g. राजसखः, पञ्चगवम्, महानसम्,
समक्षम्, अध्यात्मम् etc. cf P.V.4.9 1-112.
टवर्ग the class of |lingual consOnants;
the samae as टु in Par?ini.
ट case ending of the third case
(तृतीया) sing. number; cf. P. IV.1.2,
टाङ् sho1 t term for affixes beginning
with टाप् in P. IV. 1.4 and ending
with ष्यङ् in P. IV. 1.78; cf. टाङिति
प्रत्याहारग्रहणम् । टापः प्रभ्रुति अा ष्यङो ङकारात्
|M. Bh. on I. 2.48 V. 2.
टापू fetminine affix अा added to mas-
culine nouns ending in अ by the
rule अजाद्यतष्टाप् IV. 1.4 excepting
thOSe nouns where any other affix
presCribed by Subsequent rules
becomes applicable.
टि the final syllable beginning with
a wOwel|; part of a word consisting
of the final vowel in a word and
the cOnsOnants following the final
vowel; cf अचे[न्त्यादि टि P. I. 1.64.
टिठन् (1) tad. affix इश्क added to the
words श्राणा, मांस and ओोदन in the
sense Of * Sotncthing given as
wages' e. g. श्राणिकः श्राणिकी; cf. P.
|IV. 4.67; (2) tad. afiix इश्क added
to कंस and शूर्षे in the अाहाँय senses
e. g. कंसिकः, कंसेिकी; cf. P. V.1.25,26.
दित् marked or characterized by the
mute letter ट्. For the signifi-
cance Of the addition of ट्, see दृट्.
टिलोप deletion or elision of the finak
syllable beginning with a vOwel,
as prescribed by Pānini in
certain rules ; cf. भस्य टेलेपः VII•
1.88, टेः P. VI, 4.143, 155 नस्तद्धिते
P. VI. 4.144 and अह्नटखेोरेव P. VI.
4.145,
टीटच् tad. affix टीट added to the
preposition अव in the sense of



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-171.png}}}}}}

दुट्टै
दुटु
डक् augment ट् added to that in
देण्यण् tad. affix एण्य addcd to the
व्यपूएँ, tad. affix य, causing वृद्धि for the
दश्र्यु tad. affix अन to which the aug-
टयुल्य्ट् tad. affix added jn the same
टञ्ज
ळ
155
ठक्
*lowering of the nose' ( नासिकायाः
नतम् ) e. g. अवटीटम् ; cf. P. V. 2.31.
(!) mute syllable टु prefixed to
rOOts to signify the addition of
the affix अथुच्चू in the sense of ver-
bal activity; e. g- वेपथुः, श्वयथुः; cf.
P.III. 3.89; (2) the class of limgual
COnsOraants ट्, ट्र, ड्, दू and पुण्; cf
चुटू P. I. 3.7.
cohnection with which it is pres-
Cribed; it is prescribed in connec- '
ti9 with ङ् and णू followed by a
sibilant, &. g. सुगण् +षष्ठः = सुगणुट्ष्ष॑ष्टः;
cf P, WIII. 3.28.
wOrd दृक्र meaning * a warrior
tribe not of a Brahmana nor of a
K3atriya caste' in the sense of the
word ( वृक ) itself; e. g. वार्केण्यः, cf.
P. V. 3.j ] 5
initial vowel and the additiop of
the fem. affix ई, _applied to the
WOrd सोम in the sense of * having
that aS a deity,' e. g. सौम्यं हविः,
सैौमी ऋकू; cf. P.1V. 2.30.
ment त् is prefixed, making the
affix तन, applicable ' to the words
सायं, चिरं, प्रोह्व, प्रगे ,and indeclinable
wOrds in the Saisika or rmisce-
llaneOus senses; e. g. सायंतनः, चिरंतनः
दिवातनम् etc.; cf. P. IV. 3.23, 24.
Way aS ट्थु abOve, making only a
difference in the accent. When
the affix टट्युल्छ् is added, the acute
accent is'given to the last vowel
of the wordँpreceding the affix.
* tad. affix ल, causing vFddhi for
the initial vowel of the word to
which it is added and also the
addition Of the fem.affix ई,applied
to the word शमी in the ' sense |
of * विकार,' e. g. शामीलीं स्रुक्; cf,
Kāś. on P. IV. 3.142.
ट्टित् having टु as इत्; roots, that
hawe टु aS इत् or mute, take the
affix अथुच् in the sense of verbal
activity. See दुटु.
ठ
दट् the second consonant of the ling-
ual class pOSSessed of the proper-
ties श्वासानुप्रदान, अधेीष्ष, विवृतकण्टत्व aad
महाप्राणल्व. For the syllable ठ at
the beginning of taddhita afilxes,
the syllable इक is substituted; if
hOwever the affix (beginning with
ठ ) followS upQn a w ord ending
in इस॒, उसुम् , उ, ऋ, लठ and त् then क
is added instead of इक; e. g.
धानुष्क्रः, औौदश्चित्कः etc.; cf. टस्येकः,
इसुसुतःन्तात् कः, P. VII. 3.50, 51.
Some Scholars say that इक् and क्
are substituted for ठ् by the sütras
quoted above ; cf.' Kā$. on VII.
3.50.
ठ (1) tad. affix ठ; See ट् above for the
Substitution Of इंक and क for ठ.
ठ stands aS a cOmmOn term for
ठकू , ठन्म् , ठञ्, and टव् aS also for
ष्ठळु,ष्टन् , and ष्ठञ्च; (2) the COnsOnant
ठ, the vowel अ being added for
facitity of pronunciation, cf. T.
Pr. I.21.
ठक् a. very common tad. affix इक,
ðor क ira case it iS added to words
ending in इस् , उस्र्ं , उ, ऋ, त्ग्छ् and
त् according " to P. VII. 3. 5] ,
causing the substitution of v!rddhi
for the first wowel of the Word to
which it is added. ठक् is added
to ( 1) रेवती and other words in the
sense of descendant ( अपत्य ) e. g.
रैवतिकः, दाण्डग्राहिकः, गार्गिकः, भागविच्तिक:
यामुन्दायनिकः, cf. P. IV. 1.146-149;
(2) to the words लाक्षा,रेाचना etc.
in the sense of *dyed in', e• g.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-172.png}}}}}}

ठक्
लाक्षिश्कम्, रौचानिकम् ; cf. P. IV. 2.2; (3)
to the words दधि and उदश्चेित् in the
sense of सँस्कृत *. made bctter ', e. g•
, दाधिकम् , औौदश्चित्कम् ( क instcad of इक्र
substituted for टक् ), cf. P. IV..2.
|]8, 19; (4) to the words. अाग्रहाय्गी,
अश्वत्थ etc. ; cf. P. IV. 2. 22, 23; (5)
to words expre{8sive of inanimate
objects, to the words हस्ति and धेनु,
as also to the words केश and अश्च
in the sense of * multitude * ; cf. P.
IV. 2. 47, 48; *6) to the words
क्रतु, उक्थ and' words ending itn सूत्र,
वसन्त etc., in the sense of * stuadents
of* ( तदधीते तद्वेद ), cf. P. IV. 2.59,
60, 63; (7) to the words कुभुद and
OtherS as also tO शर्करा as a चातुरर्थिक
affix; cf. P. IV. 2.80, 84; (8) to
the words कन्था, भवत् and वष्र्षााँ in the
Saisंika senses; cf. P. IV. 2.102,
1 15, IV. 3.18; (9) to the words
उपजानु and others ' in the sense
' * generally present *; cf. P. IV. 3.
40; (10) to the words consisting of
two syllables, and the words ऋक्,
ब्राह्मण etc.in the sense of*explanatory
literary work?; cf. P. IV.3.72; (l 1')
to words meaning? * sources of in-
COme * in the sense .of * accruing
from ?; cf. P. IV. 3.75; (12) to
wOrds denOting inanimate things
excepting wOrds showing time or
place, in the sense of * भक्ति ?, cf*
|P. IV. 8.96; and (13) to the words
हल and सीर in the sense of *belong-
ing to', cf. P. IV. 3.124. The tad.
affix टक् is added as a general
fermination, excepting in such
Cas8S where Other affixes are pre-
scribed, in specified senses like
* तेन दीव्यति, * .* तेन खनति, * *तेन संस्कृतम्'
etc-; cf. P. IV. 4.1-75, as also to
words हल, सीर, कथा, विकथा, वितण्डा etc.
in specified serases, cf. P. IV. 4. 81,
l02• ठक् is also added as a general
tad. affix or अधिकारविहितप्रत्यय, in
varigous specified senses, as pre-
156' ँ
ठञ्म्
scribed by P. V.l. l9-63,and to the
words उदर, अयःशूल,दण्ड, अञ्जिन, अङ्कगुली,
मण्डल, etc. atad to thc word एकशाला,
in thc prescribed senscs; cf. P. V.
2.ó7,76, V. 3.108,109 ; while, with-
Out making any change it;, Sense
it is addegं to अनुगादिन् , विनय, समय,
उपाय ( औौपयिक. being the word
forrरे॒ed), अकरमांतृ, कथंचित्; (cf.अाकस्मिक
काथंचित्क), समूह,विशेष्, अत्यय and others,
and tO fhe word वात्रुक् in the sense of
*expressed* ; cf. P. V. 4.13, 84, 35.
The fem. affix ङीप् ( ई ) is added to
wOrds erading in the a ffix ठक् to
form fetm. bascs.
ठञ्क्पद a popular mame given to the
fourth pāda Of the fourth adhyāya
Of Pāmi1;i's A$र्वुःādhyāyi.The pāda be-
gins with the rule प्राग्वद्दतष्ठकूP.IV.4.1
prescribing the taddhita afiix टकू
in the Senses prescribed in rules be- .
giríning with the next rule * तेन
दींव्यति खनति जयति जितम् ' and ending
with the rule *निकटे वसति? P.IW.4.73.
ठच्व' tad. affix इक or क (by P.VII.3.51)
with the vOwel अ accented acute
applied tO (1) कुमुद atad Others as a
Cāturarthika affix; cf. P.' IV.2.80;
(2) tO multiSyllabic words and
words begimraing with उप which
are prOper notrns for persons; cf.
P. W.3.78, 80; and (3) to the word
एकशाला in the sense of इव; cf. P.
V.3.109. The base, to which टञ्च॒ is
added, retains gencrally two sylla-
bles or Sometimes thrce, the rest
bei1ag. elided before the afiix ठञ्व्
e. g. देविक:, वायुकः, पितृक: शेवलिक: etc.
fron] the words देधदत्त, धायुदत्त, पितृ-
दत्त, शेवलदत्त etc.; cf. P. V,3.83, 84.
ठञ्र् tad. affix इक or क (by P.VII.3.51)
causing Vfddhi and acute accent
for the first vowel of thc word to
which it is added, applied ( 1) to
महाराज, प्रेीष्ठपद and कवचिन् in , the
. specified.8en8es, cf. P- IV.2.35, 41



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-173.png}}}}}}

ठन्
e• g. माहारााजेक, प्रैौष्ठपदिक etc. ; (2) tO
words काशि, चेचदि, संज्ञा arad others,
along with ञ्निट, e. g. काञ्शिकी, काशिका,
also with ञ्ञिठ to words denoting
villages in the Vāhika country e.g.
|शाकलिकी शाकलिका; as alSo to words
ending in उ formirag names of
countries in all the Saisika senseS
cf. P. IV.2.1 16-120; (3) to . com-
|pound words having a word show-
ing direction as their firSt member,
to words denoting time, aS alSO tO
the words शरद्, निशा and प्रदोष in the
Saisika senses; cf. P. 1V.3.6, 7, 11-
15; (4) to the words वष्र्घी (1n Vedic
Literature), and to हेमन्त and वसन्त
in the Sai$ंika senses; cf. P.IV.3.19-
21; (5) to संवत्सर, अाग्रहायणी, words
having अन्तः as the first member,
to the word ग्राम preceded by परेि or
अनु, to multisyllabic wOrds having
their last vowel accented acute, tO
words denoting sacrifices, to words
forming names Of sages, tO wordS
ending in ऋ and to the word महाराज
in the specific senseS which are
mentioned; cf. P. IV.3.50, 60, 61,
67, 68, 69, 78, 79, 97; (6) to the
words गोपुच्छ, श्वगण, अाक्रन्द, लवण, परश्वध,
compOund wOrds having a multi-
Syllabic words as their first mem-
ber, and to the words गुड etc. in
the specified senses;cf.P.IV.4.6,] l,
38, 52, 58, 64, 103;(7) to any word
as a general tad. affix (अधिकारविहित),
unleSS any other affix has been
specified in the specified senses
* तेन क्रीतम् * * तस्य निमित्तम्' ... * तदर्हम् ?
mentioned in the section of sütras
V. 1• i8. tO l 17; (8) to the words
अयःशूल, दण्ड, अजिन, compound words |"
|having एक.or गेा as their first mem-
ber as also tp the words निष्कशत
and निष्कसहस्र; cf. P.V.2.76, 118,119.
ठन् tad. affix इक or क (according to
]P. VII.3.5|!), causing the addition
of अा, anad. not . ई,..for. forming the |
157
ड्हें
feminine base, applied (1) tO the
word नौ arad wcrds with twO
sy]lables in the sense of *croSsing?
or *swimrraing* Over ; cf. P.IV.4. 7;
e.g. •नाविकः नाविका, बाहुकः बाहुका; (2)
to the words वस्र, ऋय, and विक्रय and
optionally with छ to अायुध in the
sense of mairataining (तेन जीवति) ; cf.
|P. IV. 4.13, 14 ; (3) to the word
|प्रतिपथ, words ending with अगार,
to the word शत, to words shOwing
completiQn ( पूरणवाच्चिन् ), tO the
words अर्ध, भाग, वरुन, द्रव्य, षण्मास and•
श्राद्ध in specified senses; cf. P. IV
4.42, 70, V. !.21 , 48, 49, 51, 84,
V. 2, 85, and 109; (4) to words
ending in अ as also to the words
headed by ब्रीहि, and optionally with
' the affीx इलचु to तुन्द and with the
affix व to केशin the sense of मतुप्ञ्(pos-
session); cf. P..V. 2. 115, 116, l 17
and 109.
ठित् marked with the mute letter छ्.
There is no affix or word marked
with mute ट्छ् (at the end) in Pāni-
ni's grammar, but to avoid cer-
tain technica1 difficulties, the
|Mahābhasyakāra has proposed
|rnute टू instead of 'ट् in the 'case of
the affix इट्of the first pers. sing-
perf. Atrn. and ऊट् p *esCribed as
. Sarihprasārapā substitute by P. VI.
4:132 e: g. प्रंष्ठौहः, प्रष्ठैौहा; cf. M.Bh.
orn ]III.4.79 and VI.4.19.
उ
ड् ( 1 ) third letter of the lingual
*\
class of consonantS pOSsessed of the
properties नादानुप्रदान, घेोष, संवृतकण्ठत्व,
and अल्पप्राण; (2) mute · letter ap-
plied to affixes by Pānini to show
the elision of the टि part (cf. ]P. 1•
1.64.) of the preceding word viz.
the penultimate vowel and the
consonant or consonants follow-
ing it; cf. टे:ः ; ( लेोपः डिति प्रत्यये परे )



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-174.png}}}}}}

ड
उट
डच samāsānta, (अ) added to a Bahu-
डण् tad. affix अ, causing v!rddhi and
डतमच् tad. afiix अतम in the sense of
डतरच् tad. affix अतर in the sense of
डतरादि a class of words headed by
158
VI.4.143. The syllable ति of विंश्ट्राति ||
is aiso elided before a n affix mark-
with the mute letter ङे. {
(1X kपृ't afiix अ applied to the rOOt
गम् preceded by अन्त, अत्यन्त, अध्वन्
etc., as also to the r oots हन् and
जन् under certain conditions; cf.
P. III.2,48,49, 50, 97-101 and tO
the root क्रम् to form the word नऋ,
cf. P. VI. 3.75 ; (2) tad. affix अ
श्applied to words ending in दश्शन्*
words ending in शत् and the word
विंशति irm the serase of *nncore than*
e.g. एकादशं शतम्, एकत्रिंशम्, एकार्वेिशम्, cf
P.V.2.45, 46.
vrīhi compOund meaning a, nurme-
ral e.g. उपदशाः उपबिंशीाः cf. P.V.4.74.
tad. affix अ in the sense of पूरण
श्applied to a nutmeral tO form an
ordinal numeral; e. g• tयूकदिश्ा:,
त्रयेोदशः, cf. P.V.2.48.
टेिलेाप, applied to त्रिंशत् and चत्वारिंशत्
to show the परिमाण i.e. measure-
|ment or extent of a Brāhmataa
work; e. g. त्रैशानि ब्राह्मणानि, चात्वारिंशानि
cf, P. V. 1.62.
determination or selection of onc
out Of many, applied to the pro-
nOuns किं, यत् arnd तत्; e,g. कतमः ; cf.
|P.V.3.93,as alsO tO एक according to
Bastern Grammarians; e.g- एकतमो
भवतां देवदत्तः:; cf. P.V.3.94.
*selection out of twO' applied to
the words क्रितं, यत् and तत् as also to
the word एक; e. g. कतरेा भवतेीः पटुः
cf. P. V. 3.92, एकतरेो भवतेर्देवदत्त; cf.
]P. W. 3.94.
the word डतर Which stands for
डतरान्त i.e. words ending with the
afiix डतर; similarly the word डतम
which follows डतर stands for डतमान्त.
डाच्
ThiS claSS डतरादि is a subdivision of
the bigger clasS called सवदि, and
it comSiStS Of Only fiv'c wOrds viz.
डतरान्त, डतमान्त, अन्य, अन्यतर and इत्ारः
c f' P. V|II.1.25 and I.1.27.
डाति tad. affix अति afiixed to the
wOrd क्रिम् to show number or'
|measurement ; e.g. कति ब्राह्मणाः, cf.
|P.V.2.41 . The words ending with
the affix डति are termed संख्या and षट्
for purposeS of declension etc. ; cf.
|P.I.1.23,25.
डर krt affix अर added to the root खन्
in the SenSc of *instrument? or
*location? e.g. अाखरः, cf. P. III. 3.
125 Vart tika.
डस् affix असू applicd to the word
श्वेतवाह and' others at the end of a
|pada. i.e. when the word श्चतवाह
has gOt the पदसंशा. e. g. श्धतवा: इन्द्र: ।
|श्चेतबेीभ्याम् cf P.III.2.71Vart.1 and 2.
ड (l) verb-ending अा,causing elision
Of the penultimate vowel as also
Of the follOwing consonant,
substituted for the 3rd pers. sing.
affix तिप् of the first future; e.g.
कत्तीँ ; cf. P.II.4.85 ; (2) case ending
अा Substituted in Vedic Literature
for any case affix as noticed in
Vedic uSages; e.g. नाभा पृथिव्याम् ; cf.
|P.. VII. 1.39.
डाच् tad. affix अ1 applied tO dissylla-
bic words, used as imitation of
sOunds, or used as onOmatOpoe-
tic, when connected with the root
कृ or भू or अग्म्. The word to which
डाच् is applied becomes generally
doublcd; c. g पटपटाकरोाति, पटपटाभवति
पटपटास्यात्; cf. IP.V.4.57. The affix
डाच् is also applied { ० द्वितीय, तृतीय,
to compound w ords fortmed of a
numeral and the word गुण, as also
t० the words सपत्र, निष्पत्र, सुख, प्रिच्य etc•
when these words are connected
with the root कृ;e.g. द्वितीयाकरेति,तृतीया-
करोति, द्विगुणाकरोति, सपत्राकरोति, सुखाकरोति
etc.; cf. P.W.4. 58 to 67.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-175.png}}}}}}

डाप
159
ब्रुन्
डाप् fem. affix अा added optionally to
words ending in मन् amd tO Bahu-
wrihi compouthds ending in अन् tO
show feminine gender, the wordS
|remaining as they are when the
optional affix डाप् is not applied;
e.g. दामा, सीमा, सुपर्वे; cf. P. IV. 1, l 1,
12, 13.
· डामहच् tad. afiix अामह added to the
Words मातृ and पितृ in the sense of
*father'; e.g. मातामहः, पितामहः; cf. P.
|IV. 2.36 Wārt.. 2.
डित् possessed of the mute letter ड्
added for the purpose of the eli-
sion Of टि (last vowel and the conso-
nant or conSonant8 after it) 0f the
preceding wOrd. See ड.
डिनि (1) tad. afiix applied to अवान्तर-
दीक्षा, तिलव्रत etc. in the sense of चरति
(observing); e.g. तिलत्रती, cf. P. V. 1.
94 Vārt 3; (2) applied in the sense
of *having as measurement'applied
tO numeral words ending in शत् or
शिन् and the wOrd र्विशति; e.g. त्रिंशिनो
मासाः, विंशिनेोङ्गिरसः ; cf. M. Bh. on P.
W. 2.37.
डिमच् tad. affix इम applied to the
wOrds अग्र, अादि, पश्चात् · and अन्त in
the Sai$ika SenSes; e.g. अग्रिमम्, अादि-
म॒म् ,पश्चिमम् , अन्तिम्म॒; cf. M. Bh. on
]P..IV.3.23. -
डियाच् case affix इया for Inst.sing.seen
in Vedic Literature; e.g. सुक्षेत्रिया,
सुगात्रिया; cf. Kāś. on P.VII.1.39.
डुपच् tad affix उप added to the word
कुं in the se1lSe of diminutive; e.g.
कुतुभ: a Small oil-pot ( कुतू ); cf. V.3.
89.
डुम्सुन् Unādi affix उम्स् added to the
root पा to form the word पुंसू; cf. पाते
डैम्सुन् Unādi Stītra IV.177.
डुलच् tad. affix उल in the sense of | *
*brother* applied to the word मातृ;
e.g. मातुलः; cf. P. IV. 2. 36 Vārt 1.
ङ्कतुप् tad. affix मत् as a चातुरर्थिक affix
applied to the words छुमुद, नड afd
वेतेतं; e.g. कुमुद्वान्, नड्वान्, त्रेतत्वान्; cf.P'.
IW. 2.87.
ङय tad. afiix य (1) added in the
sensc of * Sāma introduced by>'
( दृष्टं साम ) to the word वामदेव; e• g•
वामदेव्यं साम; cf P. IV. 2.9; (2)
added to the word स्रोत्रू 9ptionally
with यत् in the sense of * present
there * ( तत्र भबः ); e. g. खेीतस्यः, cf.
P. IV.. 4.|I 13.
{| ङयणु tad. afiix य added to the words
पाथस् and नदी in the sense of * pre-
Sent thére * ( तत्र भवः ), e. g. पथ्यिः
नाद्यः; cf. P. IV. 4.111.
ङयत् tad. affix य added along with
ङेय to the same words to which
the affix डय is added as alsO in the
same sense, the vowel अ of ङञ्यत्
being स्वारित. See the word ङब्ध
ab0We.
ड्ज्या case affix या seen in Wedic I,ite-
rature e. g. अनुष्ठया उच्च्यावयतात् cf. S.
K. on P. VII. H.39.
ड्रट् k!t affix र with fem. affix ई
aglded tO it, applied to the root
रु॒यै. e.g. स्त्री cf. संस्त्याने स्त्यायतेर्ड्ट् स्त्री M.
Bh. on IV. 1.3.
लच् tad.affix वल, in the four senses,
added to the words नड and
शांद्;	e. g. नड्वलम्, शाद्वलम्; cf. P.
IV. 2.88.
ङ्घैित् a rOot marked with the mute
Syllable डुं (at the beginning) to
Signify the application of the kgt
affix त्रि Which is invariably follow-
ed by the addition of म ( मप्प् ), in
the sense of * achieved by * " e. .
पकिंत्रमम् ; कृत्रिमम्; cf. P. III. 3.88 '
and IV. 4.20.
र्बुः tad. affix अक added to the
wOrds र्विशति and त्रिंशत् in the tetrad
of tad. senses; e. g. र्वेिशकः, त्रिंशक:
cf. P. W. 1.24.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-176.png}}}}}}

160
ढशु
लुट्ट'
द्वे (1) fourth corasonant of the lingual
claSs of conSonantS poSSeSSed
of the properties नादानुप्रदान, घेोष,
संवृतक्रण्ठत्व and महाप्राणात्व; (2) the
consonant दूद् which is elided when
followed by'दूट्ट् and the preceditag
vowel is lengthened; e. g. गाढा,
cf. P. VIII. 3.13 and VI. 3.1 l l ;
(3) substitute दू for द्दृ at the end
of a पद, or, if followed by any
cOnSOnant excepting a semivOwel
Or a nasal excepting in the Cases
Of rQotS beginning with द् or the
rOOts द्रुह्, मुहूं etc. as also वड् and
अाहृ cf.' P. VIII. 2.31, 32, 33, 34;
(4) दूहूं at the beginning of a tad.
affix which has got, एयु substituted
for it; cf. गाङ्गेयः, वैनतयः ; cf. P. V.
3.102.
ढ' tad. affix ढ (1) applied to the word
सभा in the sense of *fit for* ( तत्र
साधुः ) in Vcिdic literature;• e. g.
सभयः ; cf. IV. 4.106; (2) applied to
' the word शिला in the sense of इव;
e. g. शिलेयं दधेि; cf. P. V. 3.102; (3)
common term ( ढ X for, the affixes
ढक्, ढञ् and ढ alsO, after the
application of which the affix ङीप्
(ई ) is , added in the sense of
feminine* gender; cf. P. IW. 1.1 5. ,'
ढघ्ञ्कं tad. affix एय causing the substitu-
· tiom ðf wrddhiं for the fiist vowel
of the word to which it' is'added.
ढक् is added ina the sense of’अपत्य'
(descendant) (I) tO words ending
in feminine affixes, tO words end-
ing in the.vowel इ, excepting इ of
the tad. afाँix इञ्, to words of the
class heagled by शुभ्र,
मण्डूक, द्वैिकर्ण, कुषीतक, भ्रू , .कुलटा and to
words headed by कश्येाणी " which get
न $gtbstituted.fo{ its !ast vow&l:६;g.
:, दात्तयूः शैोभ्रर्येi, मूांण्डूकेयः, वैकर्णेयैश्%
कैौषीतकेयः,. भ्रौवेयंः,..कौलटयः, काल्याणिनेयः
etc:; df. KāŠ óh P. IV.. 1*! 19-127;
2 → → →
to words |'
(2) to the words पितृष्वसृ and मातृध्वसु,
with the vowel ऋ elided and to
the wOrd , दुष्कुल, पितृष्वसेयः,
मातृष्वसेयः, दौष्ंकुर्लेयः, cf. Kā$. on P.
|IV. 1.133, 134, 142; (3) to the
word कलि in the sense of Sāma,
to the wOrd अग्मेि in the sense of
*dedicated to a deity* ( सास्य देवता )
as also to the words नदी, मही,
बृाराणसी, श्रावस्तीँ and others in the
Saiśika senseS ; e. g. कालेयं साम,
अाङ्गेमयः, नादयम् माहयम् etc. cf. Kāś. on
P. IV. 2.8, 33, 97; (4) to the
words तूदी, धुर् , कपि, ज्ञाति, ब्रीहि and
शालि in the specified senses; cf.
P. IV. 3.9 4, IV. 4.77, V. I.127,
V. 2.2.
6.- $टं•
ढकश्छ् tad. affix एयक्र applied (1) to
the word कुल optionally •along
with यत् and ख, when it is not a
member of a compounid;. *e. g.
कौलेयकः, कुल्यः, कुलीनः ; cf. P.'TV: 1.
140; (2) to the words कत्त्रि and
others in the Saiśika Senses 'as alSO
to the words' कुळ, कुश्क्षि and ग्रीवा, if
the words formied with the affix
added, respectively mean dog,
Sword and ornament ; e. g. क्रात्त्रेयकः
कौलेयक: (श्वा), व्र्कोत्रेक्षयक: (अास्त:), ग्रैवेयकः
(अलंकारः)}; cf.Kāś. on P.IV 2.95,96.
ढञ्म् tad. affix एय causing Vंrddhi
j »'
substituted for the first vowel ofthe
base arnd the addition Of the fem.•
,afiix ङीप् (इ), applied (1) to words
maea ming' .quadrupeds and words
in the class of words headed by ग्rष्टि
in the sense of• अपत्य; e. g• क्रामण्ड-
लेयः, गाष्र्टयः, हालेयः, बालयः etc; cf- P-
|IV.1.135,136; (2) to the word क्षीर,
words ०f the class headed . by साख,
the words कोश, दृति, कुक्षि, कळशि, अस्ति,
अहि,ग्रीवा,वर्मती,एणी,पाथि,ओतिथि,वसति,स्वपति,
पुरुष, छदिम्, उपधि, बलि, परिखा; and
वस्ति in the various Serises mention-
ed in connection with these wOrds;
→ 6¢ g*.क्षेरेयः, ..साखेमम्, कौशेष्मम्.७ ,दार्तृयम् ,



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-177.png}}}}}}

→、
ाढेनुक्
161
tणा
कौक्षेयम् etc, cf. Kā$'. on P. HV. 2.
20, 80, IV. 3. 42, 56, 57, 94, 159,
, IV.4.} 04, V.1.10,13,17, V.3.I01.
ढिनुक् tad. afiix एयिन् applied to the
WOrd छगलिन् in the sense of * stude-
ntS, following the text of * e. g.
छागलेठयिन: in the sense छगलिना प्रेोत्त-
मधीयते तेः cf. Kā$. on P. IV.3.109.
àश्रे tad. affix एर ( एयुय् + र ) applied in
the sense of off$pring to the word
गेोधा and optionally with ढक् to
wOrds meaning persOns having a
bodily.élefect or a low social status;
e- g. गौधेरः, काणेर: दासेर:; काणेयः, दोसयः,
cf. Kā$. on P. IV. 1. 129, 131.
एणा
"एँ (l) fifth consonant of the lingual
clasS of consonants possessed of
the properties, नादानुप्रदान, धेोष, संवृतक-
ण्ठत्व, अल्पप्राण and अानुनाासिक्यः (2) the
mute letter ण् indicating the substi-
tution Of vrddhi ( cf. P. VII. 2.
|l l5-117) when attached to afiixes;
(3) the consonant णू at the beginn•
ing of rOots which is changed into
न्,; the rOots, having ए॒ण् at the begi-
mning changeable to न् , being call-
ed णेोपदेश; (4) ए॒ण् as a substitute for
न्, following the letters ऋ, ऋ, र्, and
क्षुं directly, or with the intervention
Of cOnsOnants of the guttural and
labial classes, but occurrimg in the
Same wOrd. Such a substitutiom of
ए॒श् for न् is called णत्व; cf. P.VIII.4.
1-39. For णत्व in Vedic i,iterature;
cf. R. Pr.V.20-28, T.Pr.WII.1-12.
V.Pr.III.84-88;(5) the consonant ए॒ग्
added as an augment to a vowel
at the beginning of a word when
" it follows the consonant ए॒ण् at the
end of the previous word; cf. P.
VIHI. 3. 32. In the Vedic Prātiśā-
khyas this augment एण् is added to
the preceding ण् and looked upon
as a part of the prewious worad.
21
(1) krt affix अ, added optionally to
the roots headed by ज्ञ्वछ् and end-
ing with कस् in the first conjuga-
tio]n (see ज्वलिति above) in the sense
of agent, and necesSarihy to the
root ३यै, roots ending with अा and
पुंंंंhe roots व्यध्, अाखु, संस्रु, इ wjith अति,
सो with अव, हृ with अव, लिह्, श्लिष्ं
and श्वसू, to the roots दु and 3ी `with-
Out any prefix and optionally tO
ग्रह्; e. g. ज्वाल: or ज्वल:, अवश्यायः, दायः,
धायः, व्याधः, अाख्दीवः, संरुद्भवि:, अत्यायः,
अवसायः, अवहार:, लेह:, श्लेठष:, श्चासः, दाव:,
नाय:, ग्रहः or ग्राह: ; in the case of the
rOot ग्रद् the affix ण is applied by
व्यवस्थितविभाषा, the word ग्रहः meaning
a planet and the word ग्राहः
meaning a crocodile; cf. Kā$.
On P. III. ] . 140-143; (2) kgrt affix
अ in the sense of verbal activity
( भाव ) applied along with the affix
अपुप् to the root अद् with नि; e.g.न्यादः
निघस:; cf. P. III.3.60; (3) kपू't affix
ण prescribed by th e Vārttikakāra
after the roots तन्, शीछ्. काम, भश्क्षू and
चर् with अा; cf. P.III.1.140 Vārt 1,
' and III. 2.1 Vārt. 7 ; (4) tad. affix
अ in the sense of अपत्य added along
with टक् also, to a. word referring to
a female descendant (गेोत्रस्त्री) if the
reSultant word indicates censure ;
e. g. गाग्र्यः गार्गेिक:; cf. P. IV.! .147,
|150; (5) tad. affix अ in the sense
of अपत्य added also with the affix
फिञ्ज्, to the word फॉण्ष्ट्प्1हृति; (6) tad.
affix अ in the sense of *a game'
added to a word meaning *an
instrument in the gāग्me'; e.g-
दाण्डा, मौष्टा; cf. P. IV.2.57; {7) tad.
affix अ added to the word छत्त्र
and others in the sense of *habi-
tuated to' e.g. छात्रः, शैक्षः, पौरोहः चौर::
cf. P.IV. 4.62; (8) tad. affix अ
added to the words अन्न, भक्त, सुवै,
पथिन्, यथाकथाच, प्रज्ञा, श्रद्धा, अंचीँ, वृत्तिं
amd अरण्य in the senseS specified
with respect to each ; e•g• अन्नि:



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-178.png}}}}}}

णाचू
162 ऐिा
· (मनुष्यः) भात्तः ( शालिः ), सार्वै ( सर्वस्मै
हितम् ), पान्थः, याथाकथाचं (कायैम्), प्राज्ञः
or प्रज्ञावान् , श्राद्ध: or श्रद्धावान् , अांचै: or
अचीँवान्म् , व्धार्त्तः or घृच्तिमान् and अारण्याः
( सुमनस; ); cf. Kaś. on P.IV. 4.85,
100, V.1.10, 76, 98, V.2.101 and
|IV.2.104 Vārttika.
एणच् krt affix अ in the sense of reci-
procal action, added to any root;
the affix णञ्व् is to get necessarily
the affix अञ् added to it followed
by the ferh. affix ई e.g. व्यावक्रोशी,
व्यावहासी; cf. K*$. on P.III.3.43 and
]P. V. 4.14. →
एणात्व cerebralization; lingualization ;
" the Substitution of णु for न् under
certain conditions; cf. P. VIII.4.
l|-39.• See ण.
पणात्वपाद a popular name given by
gratmmarians to the fourth pāda cf.
Paraini's A$fādhyāyi, as the pāda be-
ginS With the rule रष्त्राभ्यां नो णः समानपदे
and mainly gives rules about
णत्व i. e. the substitution of the
consonant णु for न्.
णमुछ् kFt , affix अम्, causing v]rddhi
tO the final vowel or to .the penul-
timate अ, (!) added tO any root in
the Sense of the infirlitive in Vedic
Literature when the connected root
is श|क्; e. g. अाग्यं वै देवा विभाजं नाशक्नुवन;
cf. Kā$. on P. III. 4.14; ' (2)
|added to any root to show
frequency of a past actior;,
when the root form ending with
णमुञ्छ् iS repeated to convey the
serāse Of frequency ; e.g. भोजं भोजे
म्रजति, पाग्क्षायं व्रजति, cf. Kāś. on P. III.
4.22; (3) added to a root showing
past action a nd preceded by the
word अग्रे, प्रथम or पूर्व, optionally
|alopg with, the kt affix क्त्वा; e.g.
अग्रेभेोजं or अग्रे भुक्त्वेा ब्रजति; cf Kāś.
On P.III.4.24;(4) addcd in general
to a root specified in P.III.4.25 to
64, ShOwing a subordinatc action
and ha ving the same subject as the
root shOwing the main .action,
provided the root to which णमुल्छ् is
added iS preceded by an antecedent
or connected wOrd, Such as स्वादुम्
or अन्यथा Or एबम् Or any other given
in Pānini's rules; cf. P. III.4.26 to
|III.4.6±; e.g• स्वादुंकारं भुङ्ते, अन्यथाकारं
भुङ्ते, एर्वेक्रूारं भुङ्ते, ब्राह्मणेवद भेोजयति,
येार्वेज्जी|बुमधीते, समूलकाषे कष्षति, समूलघातं
हन्ति, तैलपेषं पिनष्टैि, अजकनाशं , नष्टः etc.;
cf. KāŚ. on P.III.4.26-64. When
णमुछ् is added tO the roots कष्धु, पिषु, हन्
amd otherS mentioned in P. III. 4.
34 tO 45, the Same root is repeat-
ed to shOw the principal action.
The word ending in णमुछ् has the
acute aCCent (उदात्त) on the first
vowe1 (cf. P.VI.1.194) or on the
vowcl preceding the affix; cf. P.
`VI.1.193.
एामुल्तत्पुरुष a term used in connec-
tion with the cOmpound of the
णमुलन्त with itS उपपद which precedes;
c. g. अग्रेभोजम् , मूलकोपदंशम् : cf. P. II.
2.20, 2].
एणल् personal ending अ Substituted for
तैिप् and मिपुप् in लिट् Qr the perfect,
and in the'case of विद् and ब्रू in लट्
or the pres. tcnse Optionally ; cf. P.
III, 4. 82, 83, 8+. The affix णल्छ्,
on account of being marked by
the mute letter णु causes vjrddhi to
the preceding vowel; the V!rddhi
is, however, optioraal in thc case of
the 1st pers. (मिपू; ) cf. P. VII.1.9 1.
औौ is substituted for णलूछ् after roots
ending in अ{; cf. P. VII .1.34.
णस्र् tad. ,affix असुं applied to theं'
word पश्र्यू in the sense of collection.
The original Vārttika is पश्र्धीः सण्
|P. IV. 2. 43 Vart- 3. Some scho-
lars read णम् in the place of सणू in
the Vārttika which is read as पश्चाँ
णम् वक्तव्यः by them.
णि common term for णिङ् ( sighifंing
*Atmanepada ) and णेिचू; cf. ऐणरणैौ



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-179.png}}}}}}

णिङ्
j 63 → णिान
यस्कमै० P. I. 3.67, ऐणरनिटि VI. 4.51 ;
cf alSo P. I. 3.86, I. 4.52, II.4.46,
51; III. 2.137; WI. 1.31, 48, 54,
VI. 4.90; VII. 2.26, VII. 3.36;
WII.4.1, WIII. 4.80. ,
णिङ् affix इ causing vrddhi, prescribed
after the root कम् , the base end-
ing in इ i. e. कामि being called a
root; cf. P. III. 1.30, 32. The
mute letter ङ् signifies that the root
कामि is to take only the Atmanepada
affixes e. g. कामयते, अचीकमत.
णिच्	affix इ causing v|rddhi (1)
applied to roots of the tenth conju-
gation ( चुरादिगण ) such as चुर् , चित्
etc. e. g- चेोरयति, चोरयते; cf. P. III. |
1.25; (2) applied to any root to !
form a causal base from it, e. g.
भावयति from भू, गमयति from गम् ; cf.
हेतुमति च P. III. 1.26; (3) applied
tO the words मुण्ड, मिश्र etc, in the
SenSe of making, doing, practising
etc. ( करण ); e. g. मुण्डं करोति मुण्डयति,
क्रतयति (eatS SOmething or avoids it
aS an ObSerwance), हलं गृहुह्णाति हलयति
etc. ; cf. P. III. 1.21 ; (4) applied
tO the words सत्य, पाश, रूप, वीणा, तूल,
श्लेोक, सेना, लोमन, त्वञ्च॒, वर्मन्, वर्ण and चूर्ण
in the various senses given by the
Vārttikakāra to form denominative
rOOts ending in इ; e. g. सत्यापयति,
पाशयति etc; cf. P. III.1.25; (5)
applied tO Suitable words in the
sense of composing, e. g. सूत्रं करोति |'
सूत्रयति, etc.; (6) applied to a verbal |
noun ( कृदन्त ) in the sense of *nar-
rating' with the omission of the
|krt affix and the kāraka of the
verbal activity put in a suitable '
caSe; e. g. कंसं घातयति for the serh-
tence कंसवधमाच्चष्टे or बलिं बन्धयति for
बलिबन्धुमाचष्टे,or रात्रिं वियासयति, सूर्यमुद्भमयन्ति,
पुष्येण योजयति etc.; cf. Ka$. on P. II I.
1•26• RootS ending in णिच् (णिजन्त)
take the conjugational endings of
both the Parasmaipada and the,
Atmanepada; cf. णिचश्च P. I. 3.74.
They have perfect forms by the
addition of अाम् with a suitable
form of the perfect " tense of the'
rOOt कृः, भू or असू placed after अाम्,
the word ending with अाम् and the
verbal form after it being looked
upon as separate words e. g. कारयां
चकार कारयां चक्रे etc.; cf. P. III.1.35,
40. They have the aorist form,
with the substitution of the Vika-
rafरे॒a चङ् C अ X for च्लि before which
the root iS reduplicated; e. g.
अचीकरत्, अबीभवत् etc. ; cf. P.III.1.48,
VI.1.1 1 as also VII.4.93-97.
णिजन्त roots ending in णिच् ; the term
is generally applied to causal bases
of roots. See णिच्च.
पिगत् (1) an afiix with the mute con-
.sOnant णू added to it to signify the
substitution of vpddhi for the pre-
ceding vowel or for the penulti-
mate अ or for the first woWel of
the word if the affix applied is a
taddhita affix; cf. P. VII.2.1 15-
|l 17; e. g• अण्, ण, उण्, णि etc.; (2) an
affix not actually marked with the
mute lette:' णुश् but looked upon as
such for the purpose of vFddhi;
e. g. the Sarvanāmasthāna affixes
after the words गो and सखि, cf. P.
VII.1.90, 92.
णित्त्व possession of णु as a mute lctter
for the purpose of vFddhi. See the
word णित् . →
णिनि kgt affix इन् signifying vrddhi
(1) applied tO the roots headed by
प्रहु ( i. e. thc rQots ग्रह्, उद्वस्, स्था etc. )
" in the Sen$e of an agent; e. g. ग्राही,
उद्वासी, स्थायी. cf. P. III.1.134; (2}
applied to the root हृन् preceded by
the word कुमार or शीषै as उपपद; e. g.
कुमारघाती, शीषैघाती, cf. P. III.2.51; (3)
applied to any root preceded by
a Substantive as upapada in the
, sense of habit, or when compari-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-180.png}}}}}}

णिनि
164
एण्य
son or vow or fीrequency of action
is conveyed, or to the root मन्, with |
a substantiँ,'e as उपपद e. g- उग्णभेोजी,
शीतभेोजी, उट्रकॊशी, ध्वाङ्क्षरा|वी॒ीः स्थ;ण्डलटूा|वी,
अश्राद्धभे|ाजी:' क्षीरपायिण'` उशीनरा: ; सौवीर-
पायिणे|ा वाह्रीकाः ; दर्शनीयमानी, शेोभनीयमiनी,
cf. P. III.2.78-82; (4) applied tO
the root यज् preceded by a wOrd
referring to the करण of यागफल as alSO
to the root हन् preccded_by a wOrd
forming the object ( क्रमैन् ) of the
root हन् , the words So formed re-
ferring to the past tense: e. g.
अग्ःि2ः .याजी, पि शृश्यघाती, cf. P. III 2.85,
86; (5) applied to a root when the
word so formed referS to a kind of
ne2e:sary activi'y or to a debtor;
cf. अवश्यंकारी, शतंदायी, सहग्ंनंदायी cf. P.
|III.4. 169-170; (6) tad-affix इन् ,
causing vFddhi for the first vowel,
applied to the words काश्यप and
कौंशिक referring to ancient Sages
|named So, as al$O to Words which
are the names of the pupils of
कलार्पि or of वैशम्पायन, as also to the
words शुनक, वाजसनेनय etc. in the
sense of * students learning what
|has been traditionally spoken by
those sages' e. g. काश्यपिनः, ताण्डिनः,
हारिद्रविण: शोनकिन:, वाजसनेयिन: etc.; cf
P. IV.3, 103 · 10 k, 106; (7) applied
to words forming the names of
3ncient sages who are thc speakcrs
of ancient Brihtmaf}a works in
the sense of * pupils studying
those WOrks' aS also tO Words fortm-
ing the names of Sages who com-
posed old Kalpa W0rks in the
sense Of those कृल्प works; e. g.
भाल्ट्छ्रविनः, ऐएतरयिणः । पैङ्गी कल्प: अरुणपराजी
कल्पः; cf. Kā$. on P. IV. 3,105; (8)
applied tO the words पाराशयैand शिला-
लिन् in the sense of *students read-
ing the Bhikgustitras (of पाराशर्य) and
the Nata sütras ( of शिलालिन् )' res-
|pectively; e. g. पाराशरिणो Iभक्षव:, शैाला-
लिनेो नटाः; cf. Kā$. on P. IV.3.110.
]
| णिलोप elision of the affix णि (णिचू.or णिङ्
see above ) before an :irdhadliā-
tuka affix withou' tl1c :tugr11cnt इ
( इट् ) prefixed to it ; cf. ग्रेरनिटि P.
VI. 4.51, and V'|I.4.52, 53, 54 also.
एगुट् augmen{ एण्, prefixed to the ini-
{ial vOWe! Whcn it followS up0n
the co11Sonat।॥t ण् a t thc end of the
preceding word; c. g. सुगणणूीशाः for
सुगण्ग् + ईश: cf. P. VIII. 3.32.
एणोपदेश a root mentioned in the
Dhitupātha by P:inini as beginn-
ing with णू which Subscquent!y is
changed to न् ( by P. W'|I. l.65)
in all the forms derived from thie
ro०t ; e. g. thc roots णम्, णीं and
othe rs.
In the case of these roots
the initial न् is agait1 changed into
ण् aftcr a prefix like प्र or परा
having the lctter र् in it and
|having a vowel or a cOnsomant of
the guttural Or labial clasS inter-
vening between tlac lctter र् and
the letter न्; e. g. प्रणमतिं, प्राणायकः etc.
cf. Kà$. on P. V I II. 4.14.
णौपाद 3 popular n:tmc given tO the
fourth pāda of tl1e sevcnth Adhyā-
ya ०f P:inini's Astādhy*ंyi, which
begins with the ' rulc णीं चङयुपधायीं
हृस्त्र: P. VII. 4.1.
ण्य tad.affix य (l) applicd in the sense
of *descendant'as also in a fcw other
senses, mentioncd in rulcs frOm
TV. 1. 92 to IV.3.168, applied to
the words दिति, अदिति, अादित्य
and word; with पति as the उत्त९पद
in a compound, c. g. दैत्यः, अादित्यः,
प्राजापत्यम् etc. cf.Kfig.on P. IV.l 84;
(2) applicd in the sense of a descen-
dant ( अपत्य ) applied to the wOrds
कुरु,, गर्ग, रथ॒कार, कथि, मति, दर्भे etc., e:g-
केौरव्यः, गाग्र्यः etc. cf. Kā$. on P. IV.
I.151 ; (3) applied in the sense of
अपत्य or descendant to words end-
ing in सेना|,to the word लक्षण and tO
words in the sense of artisans, e.g•



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-181.png}}}}}}

Ü यत्
णयत् kट्र् tya afiix य
कारिषेण्यः, लाक्षण्यः, तान्तुवाय्यः, कौम्भकार्यः;
cf. Kā$. on P.IV.1.152; {4) applied
in the Cātuararthika senses to the
words संकाश, की|ाम्पल्य, कश्मीर etc., e.g.
साङ्काश्यम्, काभ्पिल्यम् etc. ; cf. Kāś. on
|P. IV. 2.80; (5) applied t.o the
word परिषद् and optionally with
the affix ठेक्रु to the word सेना in
the specified senses; e. g. परिष्प्रदं
सूमवैति, पूर॒िषूदि साधुवाँ वाष॒िद्यः, सेनं समुं|र्वृति
सैन्यः सनिके वा; cf. Kāś. on P. IV.
44. 45, l01 ; (6) applied as a tad.
affix called * tadr:ंja *, to the word
कुरु and words beginning with न
e. g. कौरब्यः नैषध्यः ; cf, K१ś. on P.
IV. 1.172; कुरवः, नि3धाः etc. are the
mom. p]. forms.
which cauSes
v!rddhi and which has the cir-
curnflex accent (1) applied to a
|root ending with ऋ or any con-
SOnarat tO for m the pot. paSS.parti-
ciple; e. g. कायैम्, हायैमु , वाक्यम् etc.
cf. Kāś. on P. IV. ' 1.124; (2)
applied to a root ending in उ if a
neceSSity of the activity is to be
indicated, e. g. अवश्यलाव्यम्, अवश्य-
पा|ब्यम् cf. Kāś. on P. IV. 1, 125;
(3) tad. affix य applied to the word
षण्मास Optionally with यपू and ठञ्शु
afiixeS; e. g. ष्प्राण्मास्यः, ष्ञ्ण्मास्यः, ष्ाष्Jमा-
सिक:; cf. Kā$. on P. V. 1.84.
ण्युट्द् k!ँ t affix अन in the sense of
* skilled agent * applied (l ) to the
root गै to sing. e.' g. गायनः, गायनी,
cf. Kāś. on P. III ] .147, also
गाथकः, गाथिका by P. III. !.146; (2)
to the root ह (III. P. and III.A.
al3o) if * rice * or * time * be the
senSe conveyed: e. g. हायना व्रीहयः,
हायनः संवत्सरः • cf. Kā$. on P. III.
I1.148.	→
ण्वि k!rt. afiix ण्वि i. e. 2erO, causing
v[ddhi, applied to the root भजूत्
and to सुह् and वह् in V*edic Lite-
rature if the root is preceded by
165
त् the fārst
त्
aray preposition ( उपसर्ग ) Or a
, substantive as the upapada ; e. g•
अर्द्धभा|क्, प्रभा|क्, तुराघाट्, दित्यवाट्; cf. KaŚ.
on P. ' III, 2.62, 63, 64.
ण्विन् k!'t afiix बृञ् or zerO, seen applied
ira Vedic i.,iterature to the root
वह् preceded by श्वत, to र्शसू preced-
ed by उक्थ, to दाशु preceded by
पुरस॒म् and tO यञ्ज्ञ् preceded by अव•
e. g. श्वतवा इन्द्र:, उश्ध्थशा यञ्जस्मान:, पुरोडाः,
अवश्याः; cf Kāः$. on P. HHI. 2.7 ] , 72.
एण्बुच्छ् k! t affix अश्क seen always with
the fem. affix अा applied to a root
when the sense conweyed is * a
turr; * or * a deserving thing ? or
* debt * or * Occurrence;' e. g.
भवतः शायिका, अर्हति भवान् इक्षुभक्षिकाम्,
ओीदनभेजिकां धारयसि, इक्षुभक्षिका उदपादि;
cf KāŚ. on P. III. 3.1 1 1.
ण्वुल्छ् (1) a very general k!t affix
अक, causing V['ddhi and acute
accent to the vowel preceding the
affix, applied tO a rOot Optionally
with तृ (i. e. ट्र्च् ) in the sense 9f
an agent e. g. केारकः हारक; also कर्ता,
हताँ ; cf. P. III. 1. { 33; (2) |krt. affix
अक applied optionally w ith the
affix तुम् to a root when it refers
to an actiOra for which anOther
action is mentioned by the princi-
pal verb; e. g. भोजकेीं निजति .or भेीाक्तुं
व्रजतिः cf. KāŚ. on तुमुन्प्वुलॉ क्रियायां
क्रियाथयिाम्*; P. III. 3.I0; (3) k!rt
affix अक, necessarily accompanied
by the fem. affix अा added to it,
applied to a root if the sense
given by the wo; d so formed is
the name of a disease or a proper
noun Or a narration or a query ;
e. g. प्रवाहिका, प्रच्छार्दिका, शालभञ्जिका,
तालभञ्जिकÎ, कारिका, cf. KaŚ. on' P.
III. 3.108, .09, 1!0.
त
consonant of: , the



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-182.png}}}}}}

166
dental class of conSOnantS which
has got the propertieS श्वासानुग्रदान,
अघेोष, विवृतकण्ठत्व and अल्पप्राणत्व. When
uscd as a. mute letter by Pamini, त्
signifies the Svarita accent of the
wowel of that affix or So, which is
marked with it; e. g. कार्यम्, हार्यम्,
पयस्यम् cf. P. VI.1.185. When appi-
ed to a vowel at its end, त् signifi-
is only the wOwel of that grade
only, possessed by such of its vari-
eties which reguire the same time
for their utterance aS the vowel
marked wtih त् , e. g. अांत् Stands
for अा with any of the thf'ee accentS
as also pure or naSalised; अात् does
not include अं or अ 3 cf. तपरस्तत्कालस्य
|P. I. 1.• 70. T'he use of the itadi-
catory mute त् for the above
purpose is Seen. alsO in the PrātiŚ
ākhya, works; cf. V. Pr. I. 114
|R. T. 234.
त (1) persona1 ending of the [hird
pers. sing. Atm; cf. P. III. 4..78,
which is changed to ते in the per-
fect tense and omitted after the
substitute चिणु for चिल in the aorist;
cf. P.VI.4.!04; (2) personal ending
substituted for the affix थ of the
ParaS. 2nd perS. pl. in the im-
perative, itmperfect, potential,
benedictive, aOrist and condition-
al for which, तात्, तन \and थन are
SubStituted ir1 Vedic Literature,
arad alsO for हेिं in c3se a repetitioh
of an action is meant ; cf. 'P. III.
' 4. 85, 10l as also VII. 1. 44, 45
and III. 4*. 2-5. cf. P. III. 4. 85
and III. 4• 10! ; (3) tad. affीx त
applied to the Words कम् and शम्
e. g. श्कन्तः, शान्तः, cf. P. V. 2. 138;
(4) tad. afiix त applied to दशत्
when दशत् is changed to श; cf.
दशानां दशतां शभावः तश्च प्रत्ययः । दश दशतः
परिमाणमस्य संघस्य शतम्, Kāś. on P. V.
l. 59; (5) .general term for , the
āffix च्त of the past 'pass. part. in |
तपगृ
तप
`>\
popular use; (6) a technical term
for the past participle affixes (त) त
and तवत् ( क्तवतु ) called निष्ठा by
Pāhini; cf. P. I.1.26; the term त is
used for निष्ठ]I in the.jainendra Vyā-
kararna.•
तकार the consonant त्, the vowel अ
and the word कार being placed af-
ter it for facitity in understanding;
cf. T. Pr. I. 17, 2!.
तक्षशिलादि a class of words headed
by तक्षशिला to which the taddhita
aftix अ ( अञ्छ् ) is added in the
SenSe Of *a native place or a domi-
cile'. The word so formed has the
act!te accent on its firSt vowel];
e. g. ताक्षाश्शिलः वात्सोद्वरणः; cf. Kāś. on
P. IV. 3.93.
तङ्ं (l ) a short term uscd for the nine
perSOnal endings Of the Atmane-
pada viz. त,अाताम्.•.माहड् which are
themSelveS termed Atmanepada;
cf. तङानौ अात्मनेपदम् |P. 1. 4. 100; (2)
the personal-ending त of the 2nd
pers. pl. (SubstitUrted for थ by III.4
101 ) looked upota as तङ् sometimes,
when it is lengthencd in the Vedic
Literature; cf. तङिति थोंदशस्य ङित्त्वपक्षे
ग्रहणम् । भरता जातवेदसम् Ka$. on P.
VI. 3. 133.
तच्छीलादि the triad of senses तच्छील,
तद्धर्म and तत्साधुकारिन् ;p9ssessed by
the agent of an action, im cOnncc-
tion with which the afiixes तृन् ,
इष्णुच् etc. are prescribed (cf P.III.
2. 184 etc.) which (affixes) hence
are callcd ताच्छीलिक; cf. अयं तच्छंीला-
दिष्वर्थेषु तृन् विधीयते, M. Bh. on P. III.
2.146, e. g. कतीँ कटान्.
ए ancient term for संज्ञा and छन्दस्
used by thc Vārtikakāra; cf. बहुलं
तृणीति वक्तव्यम् । क्रिमिद तणीति | र्शछन्दौ:
श्रैहणम् , M. Bh. on P. II. 4.54 Vart.
1l; III. 2.8 Vārt. 2; IV. 1.52. Vārt.
3.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-183.png}}}}}}

तंत्काल 167
तत्कल requiring the same time for
ut¢erance as for example one
mātrā for short vowels, two for
long Ones and three for protracted
Omes, althOugh those wowels are
nasalised Or pure, or acute, grave
or circumflex. See the word तपर.
तत्कालप्राप्तिक ०ccurring or |presenting
itself at the same time or sigmul-
taneously.
दतत्त्वचन्द्र name of a commentary on
Rāmacandra*s Prakriyākau mudt.
तत्त्वबोधिनी name of the well-known
commentary on Bhattoji?'s Sidd-
|hānta Kaumudi written by his
pupil Jग्रेiānendrasaraswati at Be-
nares. Out of the several commne-
tarieS on the Siddhāntakaumudi,
the Tattvabodhini is looked upon
as the mOSt authoritative and at
the Same time very scholarly.
तत्त्वविमर्शिनी name ०f a cOmmentary
on the KāŚikāv['tti by a gramrma-
|rian named Upamanyu in the
beginning of the nineteenth cen-
tury A, D.
तत्त्वादर्श	name of a commentary on
the Paribhāgenduśekhara written
by M. M. VaSudew Shastri Abh-
yankar in }889 A. D. The com-
mentary iS more critical than ex-
planatory,wherein the auothor has
given the purpose and the gist of
the important Paribhā$ās and has
brought out clearly the differences
between the school of BhattQji and
the school of Nāge$a in seweral
important matters.
तत्पुरुष mame of an important kind of
compound Words similar to the
cOmpOund wOrd तत्पुरुष i.e. ( तस्य
पुरुष्षः ), and hence chosen as the
name of Such compounds by anci-
ent grammarians before Pātini.
Pātini has mot defined the term
with a view to including .such
compounds aS wOuld be cowered
by the definition. He has mention-
ed the term तत्पुरुष in II. l.22 aS
Adhikāra and on itS Strength dire-
cted that a!l compoundS mention-
ed or prescribed thereafter upto
Stitra II.2.22 be called तत्पुरुष. No
definite number of the sub-divi-
sions of तत्पुरुष is given;but from the
nature of cOnr1pOunds included in
the तत्पुरुष्प्र-अधिकार, the sub-divisions ’
विभक्तितत्पुरुष cf. P.II.1. 24 to 48,
समानाधिकरणतत्पुरुष cf. P. II.1.49 to 72
(called by the name कर्मधारय; acc.to
|P.I. 2. 42), संख्यातत्पुरुष (called द्विगु by
|P.II.1.52), अवयवतत्धुरुष्ञ or एकदेशितत्पुरुष्ंत्र
cf. P.II.2.1-3, व्यधिकरणतत्पुरुष cf. P.
II 2.5, नञ्तत्पुरुष्ध cf. P.II.2.6, उपप-
दतत्पुरुष cf. P. II.2.19, प्रादितत्पुरुष cf.
|P.II.2 18 and णमुत्न्तत्युरुष cf.P.II.2.20
are found mentioned in the com-:
mentary literature On standard
claSsical workS. Besides these, a,
peculiar tatpuru$a compound
mentiOned by' Pāràini in II.1.72, is
popularly called मयूरव्यंसकादिसमास.
Pātमे॒ini has defined only two out
· Qf these_varieties viz. द्विगु as संख्यापूर्वो
द्विगुः P.II. I.23, and केर्मधारय as
तत्पुरुष्ष: समानाधिकरणः कर्मधारयः P. I.2.42.
TheMahābha$yakāra has described
तत्पुरुष as उत्तरपदार्थप्रधानस्तत्पुरुषः; cf.
M.Bh. on II.1.6, II.1.20, II.].49,
etC.; ar1d aS a consequence it
followS that the gender of the
tatpuru$a COfmpOund word is that
Of the last Ti१ember of the compo-
und; cf. परवाश्छेङ्गं द्वन्द्वतत्पुरुषयेाः P. Ii.4.
26; cf. also तत्पुरुष॒श्चापि कः परवल्छिङ्गं
प्रयेजयति l यः पूर्वपदार्थप्रधानः एकदशिसमासः
अर्धपिप्पलीति । येो ह्युत्तरपदार्थप्रधानेो दैवकृतं
तस्य परवछिङ्गम्, M. Bh. on II.4.26.
SometirmeS, the compouud gets a
gender dififerent from that of the
last WOrd; cf. P.II.4.19-31, The
tatpuru3a COmpOund iS optional as
geraerally all -compOunds are,



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-184.png}}}}}}

तदन्तावोधे
depending as they do). uPOn the
de$ire of' the speaker. SOme tat-
puru5a compOunds Such as the
प्रैादितत्पुरुष or उपपदतत्पुरुष are .called
नित्य and hence their cOnstituterat
words, with the case afflxes appli-
ed to them, are nOt nOticed Sepa-
rately ; cf. P.II.2.18,19.• In S9frie
cases अ as a, cormpOund-endingटं
( समासान्त ) is added; e.g. राजचुरा;
नान्दीपुरम् ; cf. P. V.4.74; in s9fग्me
cases अच् ( अ ) is added; cf. P.V•4•
75 to 87; w hile in some Other
cases ठछ्घ् { अ ) is added, the mute
letter ट्signifying the addition, of
ङीपू ( ई ) ih the fetainine getीder;
cf.TP.V.*{. 91-1 12. For detailS See
p.p. 270-273 Mahābhāya Vol.:VII
published by the D. E. Society,
|Pooraa.-
तदन्तविाधे a peculiar feature , in the
interpretation of the rules	Of
|Pathini, laid down by the authOr
of the Stātras himself by virtue of
which an adjectival wOrd, quali-
fying its priracipal wOrd, does nOt
denote itself, but sOm ething end-
ing with it alsc१; cf. यन विधिस्तदन्तस्य
|P.I.1.72.This feature is principally
noticed in the case of general
words or adhikāraS which are put in
a particular rule, but Which OcCur
in a large number Of Subsequent
rules; fञ्or instance, the word प्राति-
पादिकात्, put in P.IV.1.1, is valid in
every rule upto the end of
chapter V and the words अत:,
उतः, यञ्न: etc. mean अदन्ताद् , उदन्तात् ,
यञ्ञन्तात् etc. Similarly the words
धातेोः (P.III.1.91) and अङ्गस्य (P.VI.
4.1 ) occurring in a mumber Of
subsequent rules have the adjecti-
val words to them, which are
mentioned in subsequent rules,
denoting not Gnly thOSe wOrds,but
words ending with them. In a
|large number of cases this feature
of तदन्तविधि is not desirable, as it,
goes against arriving at the desired
forms, and exceptionS deduced
from Pārpini's rules are laid down
by theVārttikakāra,and later gram-
marंans; cf. Par. Sek. Pari. 16,23,
31 ; also Mahābhāgya on P.I.1.72.
तदाादिवेिाधे a convention similar tO the’
तदन्तविधि of Pāi]ini,laid down by the
Vārttikakāra laying down that in
case an operation is prescribed for
something followed by a single
1etter, that single letter should be
taken to mean a word beginning
with that single letter; cf. यस्मिन्विधि-
सूतदादावल्ग्रहणे P.I.1.72 Vārt. 29; Par.
Sek. Pari. 33.
तद्गुणसंविज्ञान |lit. connection with
what is denoted by the constituent
members; the word referS tO ' a
|kind of Bahuvrihi compOund
where the object denoted by the'
compound includes also what iS
denoted by the constituent
metnbers of the compOund; e• g-
the compound word ' सर्वादि in the '
rule सवीँदीनि सवेनामा|ानि includeS the
word सर्व among the words विश्ध,' उभ्य
and others, which alone form the
अन्यपदाथै or the external thing and
not merely the external Object aS
mentioned in Pānini's rule अनेकमन्य्-
मपदार्थे (P.II. 2. 24); cf. भवति बहुत्रीहैी
तद्गुणसंविज्ञानमपि । तद्यथा । चित्रबाससमानूय_
लेोर्हितोष्णीषा ऋत्विजः प्रचरन्ति । तद्गुण अ॒lन्नी॒यते
तद्गुणाश्च प्रचरन्ति M.Bh. on I.1.:27:Fgr
details cf. Mahābhasya on P.I.t•27
as also Par. Sek. Pari. 77.
तद्गुणीभूत iit. made subordinated to
(he principal factor); completely
included s6 as to form a portion.•
The wor\{ is used in connection with
augments which, whera added to.a
word are completely included in
that word, and, in fact, form .a
part of .the Word; cf. यदागमास्तद्गुणी-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-185.png}}}}}}

तद्धित
भूतास्तद्ग्रहणेन गृह्यन्ते Pa r. Sek. Pari. 11.
तद्धित a term of the ancient pre-
Pa ninian grammarians used by
Pā'?ini just Iike सर्वनामन् or अव्यय
without giving arāy specific defini-
tion of it. The term occurS in the
Nirukta of Yaska and the Wãja-
Sarneyi-Pratisākhya ; , cf. . अथ ताद्धि-
तसमासेषु एकपवैसु चानेकपर्वसु पूर्वे पूर्वमपरमप॒रं
प्रविभज्य नित्रूयात् । दण्डयः " पुरुषेः | दण्डमर्ह-
तीति वा, दएँडेन संपद्यते इति वीं Njr. II.2;
also cf. तिङ्कृत्तद्धितचतुट्टयसमासाः शब्दमयम्
Vāj. Prāti.I. 27. It is to be noted
that the word तद्धित is used by the
ancient grammarianS in the SenSe
of a word deriwed from a Substan-
tive ( प्रातिपादिक } by the application
of suffixes like अ, यत् etc., and not
in the sense of words deriv'ed from
roots by affixes like अन, ति etc. which
were termed नामकरण, as possibly
contrasted with the word ताद्धित
used by Yaska in II. 5. Pahini has
uSed the word तद्धित not for words,
but for the sufiixes which are add-
ed to form such words at all
|places Ce. g. in I. 1.38, IV. 1.17,
76, WI.1.6l etc.). In fact, he has
begun the enumeration of taddhita
affixes with the rule तद्विता: (P.IV.1.
76) by putting the terrn तद्धित fश्)or
afiixes such as ति, ष्यङ्, अण् gtc.
which are mentioned `thereafter.
In his rule कृत्तद्धितसमासाश्च and in the
Vārttika समासकृत्तद्धिताव्यय०(I.4.1Vārt.
41) which are similar toV.Pr.1. 27
quoted above, the word तद्धित
appearS tO be actually uSed for
words derived from nouns by
secOndary affixes, along with the
word कृत् which also means words
derived from roots, although com-
mentators have explained there
the terms कृत् and तद्धित for कृदन्त and
तद्धितान्त. The term तद्धित॒ is evidently
echOed in the Suitra तस्मै हितम् which,
although it is not the first Stitra
22
169
तद्भावित
of the taddhiःa section, may imply
that there were possibly long lists
of secondary nouns with the senses
of secor3dary suffixes, and तद्धित waS
perhaps,the first sense given there•
The nuinber of taddhita Suffixes
mentioned by Paraini iS quite
a large one; there are in fact
|lll0 rules given in the taddhita
section covering almiOst two
Adhyāyas viz. from P. IV. 1.76
to the end of the fifth Adhyāya.
The main sttb-divisions of taddhita
affixes mentioned by commentators
are, Apatyadyarthaka (IV. 1.92 to
178), Raktādyarthaka (IV.2.1 to
9|1 ), Saisika {IV.2. 92 to IV.४.133),
Prāgdivyatiya (IV. 3 134 to 168),
Prāg vahatiya (IV.4.1 to IV.4.74),
Prāgghitiya (IV.4.75 to IV.4.109),
Arhiya (V. l •.l to 71),Thafiadhikāra-
stha (V. 1.72 to V. l •1 14), Bhāva-
karmārthaka, (V. 1.115 to V. 1.136),
Pāiिcamika (V. 2.l to V. 2.93),
Matvarthiya, (V. 2.94 to V. 2.
140), Vibhaktisariीj ऐंaka (V. 3.1 to
V. 3.26) and Svārthika (V. 3.27 to
V. 4.160). The Samāsānta, affixes
(V.4.68 to V.4.160) can be includ-
ed in the Svārthika affixes.
तद्धितकोश a work on the taddhita
section written by Siromat]i Bhatjā-
cārya, whO has also written
तिङन्तशिरोमणि.
तद्भचि the eSSence, also called तच्छ्त्व; cf.
यस्य गुणान्तरेष्वपि प्रादुभैवत्सु तत्त्वं न विहन्यते
तद् द्रव्यम् ॥ किं पुनस्तत्त्वम् ॥ तद्भावस्तत्त्वम् M.
Bh. on P.V.1.1 19.
तद्भाावित prOduced Or brOught into
being by SOme grammatical opera-
tion such as the wOwel अा in दाक्षि,
कारक, अकाष्त्राँतैत् etc. by the substitu*
tion Of वृद्धि, aS cOntrasted with the
Original अा in ग्राम, विधान शाला, माला
etc.; cf. केि पुनरिदं तद्भद्रा॒वित॒ग्रहणं वृद्धिरित्येवं
ये अाक्ररैकारैकारा भाव्यन्ते तेःप्रां ग्रहणमाहेो-
स्विदादैज्ञ्मात्रस्य M.Bh. on I. 1.1.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-186.png}}}}}}

तद्राज
170 तपरकरण
तद्राज the taddhita affixes अञ्,अणु,ञ्यङ्,
एय, a$ als9 इश्, छ्, ञ्युट्, एय्,टेण्यृणुं and
यशु giwen in the rules of Pānini IV.
1.168-174 and V.3. 112-1 19. They
are called तद्रज as thcy are applied
to Such Word$ as mean both the
country and the warrior race or
clan ( क्षत्त्रिय ); cf. तद्राञ्जमाचक्षाणः तद्राजः
S. K. on P. IV.!.!68. The pecu-
iiar feature of these tadrāja affixes
is that they are omitted when the
word to which they have been app-
lied i$ used in the plural number;
e.. g. ऐक्ष्वाकः, ऐक्ष्वाकौ, इक्ष्वाकवः; simi-
larly इक्ष्वाकूणाम्; cf. P.II.4.62.
तत् (1) as above, similarly;the words
शेर्षे तद्वत् (the rest as abowe) are fre-
quently Seen uSed by commenta-
torS; (2) the tad. afix वत् in the
Sense Of pOSSeSSion and not in the
Sense of tmeaSure etc. cf. तद्वति तद्धित
न्यायसंहितं चेत् W.Pr.V.8,
तद्वदतिदेश treatment of SOmething as
that which is not that e. g. the
treatment Of affixes not marked
with mute fi Or Tऐ as marked with
h even though they are not actual-
ly marked that way, cf. P. I. 2.1-
4; alsO cf. तद्वदतिदेशेऽकिद्विधिप्रसङ्गः P. I.
2.i Wart 4.
न् (1) perSonal ending for त of the
$ष्टंcOf३d perS..pl. Parasmaipada in
the imperative in Vedic Litera-
tUr६ं é..g• ड्चुञ्जुष्टन for जुषत cf. Kā$.
on P'. WII. 1.:45; (2) ऐंad. afiixes
टट्युं and टयुछ् i.e- अन which, with the
augment तू, in efiect becomes
तैं: e॒- g: सायतन, चिरंतन, etc.; cf. P.
IW. 3.23.
तन्न५ perSOnal ending for त of the
seCOnd pers.. pl. e. g. दधातन for
घेच्त• cf Kā$. on P. VII. 1.45. See
न्.
**. à word frequently used in the
Mahābhà$ya in the $ense ' of' * if.
tended ' Or विवक्षित. The word is
पूSed alwayS in the neuter gender
like प्रमाणम्; cf. तन्त्रं तरनिर्देशः M. Bh.
On P.. I. 2.33, II. 2.34, नात्र निर्दे-
शस्तन्त्रम् .on P. I. 2.39, III.3.38, III..
4.2I,IV•l.92 etc. The word is also
explained in the sense of * impor-
tant'.
तन्त्रप्रदीप name of the learned com-
r?nentary written by मैत्रेयरक्षित, a
famouS Buddhist grammarian of
the 12th century A. D. on the
कृशैिकावि॒िवृरण्]पञ्ज॒िक॒ा ( न्यास ) of Jinen-
drabuddhi. The work is avāilable
àt Preseft , Only in a manuscript
f9rm, and that toO in fragments.
Many later Scholars have c6pious:
ly quOted from this work. ' The
name Of the work viz. तन्त्रप्रदीप is
rarely mentioned; but the name
9f the author ं३ mentioned as राक्षत,
मैत्रेय or even मैत्रेयराक्षत. There ar
twO commentaries on the तन्त्रप्रदीप
napmed उद्द्येातनप्रभा and अालेाक.
तनादेि a class of roots headed by the
rQot तन्; which is popularly' call-
ed a$ the eighth conjugation to
whigh the conjggatiopnal sign उ
j$ added;é. g:तनोति॒ि, करोति, कुरुतै; cf.
|P. II. 4.79; IEI. 1.79.
तनोत्यादि a claSS of words which is
the same as तनादि; cf. P. VI. 4.37.
See तनादेि.
तन्नामिकाण् the tad. affix अण् prescrib-
ed by. the rule अवृद्धाभ्यो'नदीमानुषी-
भ्यस्तन्नामिकाभ्यः P. IV- 1.113; cf. M.
Bh. on P. IV. 1.1I4.
त5 (l) tad. affix त added to the
words पर्वन् and मरुत् to form the
words पर्वतः and मरुत्तः; cf. P. V.
2.122 Wãrt. 10; (2) personal end-
ing in Vedic Literature substitut-
ed for त of the impera. sec. pers.
pl. e. g. श्ट्रणेोत ग्रावाणः cf. Kāś. on
P. WII. 1.45.
'पररण addition of the mute letter
त् after a vowel to signify the in-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-187.png}}}}}}

तम्
clusion of only such varieties Of
the vowel as take the Same time
for their utterance as the vowel
marked with त्; cf. P. I. 1.70.
See त्.
तम् personal ending तम् substituted
for थस् in the impera. imperf.
potential, benedictive, aOrist and
conditional; cf. P. III. 4.85, 101.
तम common term for the tad. affixeS
तमट् and तमप्.
तमद tad. affix तम added optionally
with the affix डट् ( अ ) to विंशति,
त्रिंशत् etc., as also to words ending
171
with them, irn the sense Of पूरण
(cOmpletion), and necesSarily (नित्यं}
to the words शत, सहख्त्र, षश्टि, सतति etc.
e. g. एकविंशतितमः एकविंशः, त्रिंशत्तमः,
त्रिंशः, शततमः, प्रिष्टितमः, र्वेिशी, त्रिंशी etc. ;
cf. Kāś. on W. 2.56-58.
तमप् tad. affix तम added without a
Change of sense, i. e, in the sense
Of the base itself to noun •bases
pOSSeSSing the sense of excellence,
as alsO to verbal formas showing
· excellence; e. g. अाढश्यतमः, दर्शनीयतमः,
श्रेष्ठतमः, पचतितमाम् cf. Kāś. 'on P. V:
3.55-56. The affix तमप् is termed
ध also; cf. P. I. 1.22.
तय tad• affix तयपू applied to a nu-
" meral C संख्या ) in " the sense of
अवयविन् Or * possessed of parts';
e. g• पञ्च अवयवा अस्य पञ्चतयम्, दशतयम्,
चतुञ्ट्यी; cf. Kāś. on P. V. 2.42. अय
is " substituted for तय optionally
atter the mu merals द्वि and त्रि and
necesSarily after उभ; cf. P. V.
2.43-44.
तयप्	tad. affix तय. See तय.
दतर tad.• affix तरपू added to F ases
showing excellence ( अतिशायन )
when the excellence shown is
between twO persons; e. g. अनयोः
सुकुमारतरः , सुकुंमारतरा, पचतितराम्; cf.
Kàś. 9n P. V:3.57. The affix'तरप् is
£alled घ just like तमप्; cf. P.I. 1.22.|
तव्यत्
तरप् tad. affix तर. See तर.
तल्छ् tad. affix त (1) added in the
$ense of collection ( समूह ) to the
words ग्राम, जन, बन्धु and सहाय and
गज also, e. g. ग्रामता, जनता etC•; (2)
added in the sense of *the nature
of a thing? ( भाव ) along with , the
affix त्व optionally, as als0 Option-
ally along with the affixes इमन्, ष्यञ्ट्ं
etc. given in P. V. 1.122 tO 1136 ;
e, g. अश्वत्वम्, अश्वता; अपतित्वम् ,
अपतिता ; पृथुत्वम्,' पृश्रुता, प्रथिमा ; शुग्र्छंठंता;
शुक्रुत्वम्, शौक्ल्यम् , शुश्लेिमा|; etc•, cf. KāŚ•
on P.. V. ].119 to 136. Word$ end-
ing with the affix तछ् are always
declined in the feminine gender
with the fem. affix अा ( ट{प् ) add-
ed t© thert, ; ( f. तलन्तः (शब्द:, स्त्रियाम् ),
ILingānu$asana 17.
तवर्ग the class of dental consonants
viz. त्, थ्, द्, ध् and न्; cf. विभत्तौ
तवर्गप्रतिधधींऽतद्धिते 'P.I 3,4 Vart. 1 .
तवेङ् krt affix तबे for the infinitive
affix तुम् in Vedic Literature; e.g•
दशमे मा|ास सूतवे; cf. P.III 4.9.
तवेन् krt affix तवं for the infinitive affix
तुम् in Vedic ILiterature; e-g. गन्तव,
कतैवे, हतैवे; cf. P.III. 4.9.
तवै (1) kFt affix तवै for the infinitive
affix तुम् in Vedic ILiterature. The
affix तवै haS a peculiarity of accent,
namely that the word ending in तवै
|haS gOt both the initial and end-
ing vOwels accented acute (उदाच्त );
e- g. सोममिन्द्राय पातवै, हर्षसे दातवा उ; cf.
P.III.4.9; and VI. 1.200; (2)
kF tya afiix in Vedic Literature,
e. g. परिधातवै for परिधातव्यम्; cf. Kaś.
ora P. ]I[II. 4.14.
तव्य krtya affix applied to a root to
form the pot.paSS. part. e.g. कर्तर्द्वयम्;
cf. ]Kāś. on P.III.1.96.
दतव्यत् krtya affix तव्य applied to a
rOOt tO form the pot. pass. part.;
the aftix तब्यत् has the circumflex



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-188.png}}}}}}

तस्त्
172 .
ताातेिल्
accenīt on the laSt Syllable; e.g.
कतैव्यम् cf. Kāś. on P. III. ! . 96.
तस्न् (1) personal ending of the third
pers. dual ParaSmaipada Substitu-
ted technically for छ् (लकार); cf P.
III.4.78; (2) tad. affix तस॒ ( तासि or
तसिछ् ). See तसि and तसिळु.
तसि (1) tad. affixतस् showing direction
by means Of a thing c.g. वृश्क्षम्लतः,
हिमवत्तः; cf. Kāś. on P.IV.3.1 14,: 15;
(2) tad. affix तस् applied in !he Sense
of the abl. case and $ubstituted for
the abl. case affix; e g. ग्रामतः अाग-
च्छति, चेोरतो विभेति;sornetimes the affix
iSappliedinstead of the instrumen-
tal or the śenitive case also. e. g.
वृत्तूतः न व्यथते for वृक्तन न व्यथते; देवा
. अर्जुनतः अभवन् , for ओर्जुनस्य पक्षे अभवन् cf.
Kā$. on P.W.4,44-49.
तसेिल् (1) tad. affix तस् added to pr o-
nouns from सवै upto द्वि, to ' the
pronoun क्रिम् and after परि and अभि;
e.g. कुतः; यतः, ततः, अभितः ; cf. Kāś.on
|P.V.3.. 7 to 9.
तसिलादि a class of taddhita afiीxes
|headed by the affix तसु ( तसिछ्) as
given by Panini in his siātra$ ' frorn
प॒ञ्चम्यास्तासैश्छ् P. V.3. 7. upto संख्यायाः
क्रियाभ्यावृत्तिगणने कृत्वसुचू V.3.17; cf. P.
VI•3.35. The words ending with
the affixes ीिrorm तासिछ् in P.V.3.7
upt0 पृाशप् in P.V.3.47 (excluding
पु!श्छ्पुप्) become indeclinables; cf.
Kā$. on P.I.1.38.
ता (I) a technical term for the genitive
9ase affix used in the Jainendra
Vyākara3a; (2) · the tad. affix तल्छ्
which is popularly called ता as
the houns ending in तछ् i. e. त are
declined in the fem. gehder with
the fem. affix अा added to them,
दच्छष्श्द्य (l) use of a word for that
Word (of which the sense has been
' cOnweyed); the expression तादथ्यी-
च्ताच्छब्द्यम् is often used by gramma-
· ians just iike a Paribhāङ्क्ष्ā; cf. अस्ति
त॒ादुथ्र्यात्ताच्छव्द्यम् । बहुत्रीह्यर्थानि पदानि बहुत्रीहि-
रितेि M. Bh. on P. I.1.29; simiॉarly
तृतीयासमासः for तृतीयाथनि पदानि M.Bh.
on P.I.1.30 or समास|ार्थे शास्त्रं समासः
M. Bh. on P.I. 2.43; (2) use of a
WOrd for that Word of which there
iS the wicinity; cf. अथवा साहचर्यात्
ताच्छब्द्यं भविष्यति । कालसहचरितो वर्णः वर्णेपि
कलि एव; M. Bh. on P. I.2.27 where
the l€tter उ is taken in the sense
Of time required for its utterance,
the reaSOn being that sound and
time gO together;cf also M.Bh. on
P.I.2. 70, IV. 3. 48, V. 2. 79; (3)
uSe Of a Word for that which resi-
des there; cf. तात्स्थ्यात्ताच्व्ट्छ्रत्र्ढंद्यं भविष्यति
|M.Bh. o:n W, 4,50 Vārt. '3. At all
the abOve places, the use of one
wOrd for another is by Lakgaएप्ā.
ताच्छीलिक preScribed in the sense of
*habituated' ; a term used in con-
nection with all affixes prescribed
in the triad of senses wiz. ताच्छील्य,
तद्धिम्यै, तत्साधुकारित्व in Sü tras from P:
III.2. 134 to 180; cf. त|च्छीलिकेषु
व॒सरूपविधिनीस्ति P. III.2.146 Vārt. 3,
Par. Sek. Pari. 67.
तातू (1) the same as तातङ् substituted
fOr तु and हि of the imperative sec.
and third Sing. Parasmaipada; cf.
|P. VII. l .35; (2) substitute तात् for
त of the itmperative 2nd pl. in
Vedic Literature; e.g. गात्रं गात्रमस्यानूनं
कृणुतात् cf. Kāś. on P. VII.1.44.
तातङ् the affix तात्. See तात् (1).
तातिल्छ् tad. affix ताति in the very
Sense of the word to which it is
applied occurring in Vedic Litera-
ture after the words सर्व and देव, as
also after शिव, शम् and अरिश्ट in the
sense of *bringing about' and in
th3 sense of भाव (presence) after
the same words शिव, शम् and अरिष्ट;
e.g. सर्वतातिः, देवतातिः, शिवतातिः etc. cfः
P.IV.4.142-144,: →



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-189.png}}}}}}

तात्पयै
I
तात्पर्य (1) repetition of action; cf. !
तात्पर्यमiभीश्रुप॒ष्यं पैौनःपुन्यमरेसवा Kā$.O1n II I. !
2.8i also तात्पयंमासवा ! द्रब्य व्यािितं:; !
क्रियायामासेवा l (2)foretaost considera- !
tio;8"र्चतुर्धैर्हणै ' सतैि ' तात्पर्येण ' स्यन्दिः |
संनिधापितो भवति Kāś. on P.WII.2.59; |ं
(3) purport {of a sentepce), signi- ||
ficahce,' intention; cf. स॒र्वशास्त्रेोपकरिक- ||
मिति तत्तात्पर्यम् Par. Sek. Pari. 2, 3. |
ताथाभाव्य name given to the grave ||
(अनुदात्त) vowel which iS अवग्रह i.e. |
which occurs at the end Of the |
first member Of a cOmpOund and |
which is placed between twO acute i
`vowels i.e. is preceded by and
followed by an acute vowel; e.g.
तनूऽनप्त्रे, तनूऽनप'त्ः cf. उदाद्यन्तेो न्यवग्र-
हस्ताथाभाव्यः l V.Pr.I.120. The tāth-
ābhāvya vowel is recited aS a
|kampa ( कम्प ) ; cf. तथा चेोच्तमौ- !
ज्जिहायनकैर्माध्यन्दिनमतानुसारिभिः- * अवग्रहे
यदा नीँच उच्चयेीर्मध्यतः द्वकञ्चित् । ताथाभाब्येी
भवेत्कम्पस्तनूनप्त्रे निदर्शनम् ?. Some Vedic
scholars hold the view that the
ताथभान्न्य vOwel is not a grave
( अनुदाच्त ) vowel, but it is a kind of
स्वरित or circumfiex vowel. Strictly
according to Pāhini **an anudātta
following upon an udātta becomes
Svarita?'; cf. P.VIII. 4 66, V.Pr.
|IV. 1.138; cf. also R..Pr.III. 16.
तादथ्र्य (1) the nature of being meant
for another ; cf. चतुथाँविधाने तादथ्र्य
उपसंख्यानम् । यूपाय दारु M. Bh. on P.
II.3.13; (2) meant for another; cf,
तदथै एबू तादथ्यैम् ! चातुर्वण्यादित्वात् ष्यञ्जुम् ।
नेटैत्< इदम् अग्मिदेवत्यम् । तादथ्यै यत् ।
cf. Kāś. on P. V. 4.24; (3) being
posseSsed of the satme sense; cf.
तादथ्यात्ताच्छब्द्यम्. See तान्व्छब्द्य.
तादात्म्य. possession of the same naturc;
तत्स्वभावता;; cf. सुबामन्त्रिते पराङ्गवत्स्वरे |
तादात्म्यातिदेशेोयम् Kaś. on P.II. 1.2.
ताद्धम्यै being possessed of the same
property; cf. चतुार्भेः प्रकारैरतस्मिन्स इत्ये-. | •
173
तद्भवति तात्स्थ्य्ात्ताद्धम्याँक्तत्सामप्यिात्तत्साहचर्या-
तारानाथ
दिति । M. Bh. on IV. 1.48 Vãrt• 3•
ताद्वष्प्य rcstoration to, or rcsumption of
ौhe ' $atme form by the ] ule _9f
S:hā nivadbhāva, prescribed in P•I:
1.56, callcd रूपाार्तिदेश as cOntrāsted
with, कार्यातिदेश; cf. नेह ताद्रूप्यमतिदिश्यते
M. Bh. on VI. 1.85 Vārt. 26•
त्ान one unif9:rria accent Or tOf1C*
एकश्रुति, as observed at thé tim६ of'
sacrifices in the case of the recital
of the hymns; cf. तानलक्षणमेकं स्वरमर्दुि-
यैज्ञकर्मणि V. Pr. I.130; cf alsO P. I•
2.34.
तान्ाादक	a root of the tanādi claSS
of roots (8th conjugation)-
ताम् personal ending substituted for
तस् of the 3rd perS. dual in the
imperative, imperfect, potential,
benedictive, aorist and COndi-
tional; cf. P. III.4.85, 10|l •
तार (1) elevated, high ; a place for
the production of words; cf. T.Pr.
XVII. I 1 ; (2) recital in a, high
tone which is recommended in
the evening time; cf. तारं तु विद्यात्सवने
तृतीये, शिरोगतं तत्र सदा प्रयेोज्यम् com. on
T. Pr,. XX[HI. 12.
तारकादि a class of words headed by
the wOrd तारका and cOntaining
prominently the words पुष्प, कण्टक,
मुकुल, कुसुम, पल्ट्छ्व, बुभुक्षा, ज्वर and
many Others numbering more than
rainety, tO which the taddhita affix
इत (इतच्) is added in the sense of
*cOrataining'• AS thiS claSS, called
तारकादि, is lOoked tapon as अाकृतिगण,
nouns with इत added at their end,
|are Supposed tO be included in it;
cf. ]P. V. 2.36.
तारानाथ called तर्कवाचस्पति; a Bengali
mOdern Sanskrit $cholar and gra-
mmarian of the nineteenth century
wh9 haS written a commentary
called Saralā On the Siddhāntā.
Kaumudi. He has edited many



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-190.png}}}}}}

तलठव्य
|174
४、	९'
तेडश्थ
important Sanskrit workS consist-
ing of many kO$as.
तालव्य lit. produced from तालु the
part below the tongue; the vOwel
इं, चवगै, य and शू are called तालव्य,
palatal letters; cf, इचशेयास्तालौ V.Pr.
I. 66. These letterS are formed
upon the palate by the middle
part of the tongue; cf. R.Pr. 1.42,
R..Pr. HI.36.
तालादि a small class of eight words to |
which the affix अ ( अणूश् ) is added
in the sens3 of *a product' or *a
part? e.g. तालै धनु:, बार्हिणम्, etc.;
→ cf. KāŚ, on P. IW. 3. 152.
तलु palate; cf. तालुशब्दन जिह्वाया अधस्तन-
प्रदश उच्यते । स इवर्णस्य स्थानम् । जिह्वामध्यं
करणम् । cf. T. Pr. II. 22.
तास् conjugational sign or Vikarana
(तासि) added to a root in the first
future before the personal endings
which become accented grave
(अनुदात्त); cf. P.VI.1.186; it has the
augment इ prefixed, if the root, to
which it is added, is सेट्. cf. P. VI.
4- 62.
तसि the Wikaraha ताम्. See तास्.
तेि (1) personal ending तिपू of the 3rd
perS. sing.; (2) common term for
the kपृ't affixes क्तिन् and त्तिञ्चु as
also for the utīādi affix ति; ' see
क्तिन् and क्तिच्; (3) fem. affix ति
added to the word युवन्,. e. g.
युवतिः cf. P. IW. 1.77; (4) tad. affix
ति as found in the words पङ्ति and
विंशति cf. Kāś. on P.V.1.59; (5) tad.
affix added to the word पक्ष in the
SenSe of *a root,? and to the words
कम् and शम् in the sense of posses-
sion (मत्वर्थे ); e.g. पक्षतिः, कन्तिः, शान्तः,
cf. Kāś. on P. V.2.25, 138; (6) a
technical terin for the term गति in
. Pānini's grammar, cf. उपसर्गाः क्रिया-
योगे; गतिश्च P. 1.4.59, 60. The terrm
ति for गति is used in the Jainendra
.: Wyākarana.	→
|!
तिककेितवादि a class of compound
w0rds headed by the dvandva
compound तिकक्रितव in which the
taddhita affixeS added to the con-
Stitutnt memberS of the com-
pound are dropped when the
dvandwa eOmpound is to be used
in the plural number; तैकायनयश्च कैत-
वायनयश्च तिककितवाः; cf. Kāś. on P. II.
4.68.
तिकन् tad. affix तिक added to the
wOrd मृद् in the sense of the word '
itself ( स्वंोर्थे ) e. g. मृत्तिका cf.; P. V.
4.39.
तिकादि a clasS of words headed by
the words तिक, क्रितव, संज्ञा and others
tO Which the taddhita affix अायनि
(फिछ्) causing the substitution of
wfddhi is added in the sense of
* a descendant '; e. g. तैकायनिः, कैत-
वायनिः; cf. Kā$. on P. IW.l.154.
तिङ्ं (1) a brief term (प्रत्याहार) for the 18
perSOnal endings. Out of these
eighteen perSonal endings, which
are cOtmmOn for all temses and
moods, the first nine तिपुप् , तस॒ etc.
all called Parasmaipada, while
the Other nine त, अाताम् etc. are
named Atmanepada and तङ् also;
cf. तङानावात्मनेपदम्; (2) a verbal form
called alsO अाख्यातक; cf. तिङ् खळु
अाख्यातका भवन्ति | पचति पठति W.Pr.I.27.
तेिङम्त (1) a word ending in तिङ्ः a
एyerb; (2) a, popular name given
to the section which dealS with
verbs in bookS oa grammar aS
contrasted with the term सुबन्त
which is used for the sectipn deal-
ing with nOunS.
तिङन्तशिरोमाणि a work dealing with
verbal forms written by शिरोमणि-
भट्टाचार्य.
तिङर्थ senses possessed by the perSon-
al endings of verbs, viz. कारकं ( कर्ता
or कमै ) संख्या and काल. For details
see Vaiyākaranabhti$anasāra..



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-191.png}}}}}}

तिङ्निघात
तिङ्निघात the gravg accent for the
whole word" ( सर्वनिघ्ध॒ात॒ ) generally
possessed by a verbal form whéh it
is preceded by a word form which
« js hot a verb; cf. तिङतिङ:ः |P. VIII•
1.28.
तित् an affix to which the rmute
indicatory letter त् is added signi-
fying the circumflex	accent of
that affix; e. g. the affixes यत्, ण्यत्
etc.; cf. P. VI. 1.185. →
तित्स्वर the circumflex accent possesS-
ed by an affix marked with the
mute letter त्. See तित्.
तिथुक् the augment तिथ् added to the
words बहु, पूप, गण and संघ when
they are followed by the tad.
affix अ ( ड ) e, g. बहुतिथः; cf. P.
'V. 2.52.
तिप् the personal ending of the 3rd
pers. sing. substituted for ल (लकार)
in the Parasmaipada, For sub-
stitutes for तिप् in special cases, see
P. VI. 1 68, III. 4.82, 83, 84.
तिमण्णा a southern grammarian who
Wrote a short treatise on the
pratyāhāraS like अग्गू , इणू etc. in
the grammar of Panini.
तिरुमल्ल a southern writer of the
cotmmentary named सुमनेोरमा on
the Siddhānta Kaumudi of Bhat-
tQji Dīk$ita. →
तिल्छ् tad. affix ति added in Vedic
|ILiterature tO the word वृक when
superior quality , iS meant, e. g.
वृकतिः cf. ]P. V. 4.41.
तिष्ठङ्गुप्रभृति compound words headed
by the word तिष्ठद्भु which are
termed' aS avyayibhāva com-
pOunds and treated as indeclin-
ables; e. g. तिष्ठद्भु, असंप्रति,
पुं!ःहूंःश्र्दूि ,ीं.i, प्राह्वम्
तीक्ष्ण utterance with a Sharp tone
characterizing the pronuniciation
of the Abhinihita kind of circum-
→
175
तुक्
flex vowel as Opposed tO the
utterance which iS called मृदु when
the circumflex, called पादद्धृच्त, is
pronounced; ९f. सर्वृतीक्ष्णोऽभिनिहितः
प्रैश्ठिष्टस्तदन्नुन्तरम् , ततेो मृदुतरौ स्वारौ, जात्यक्षै-
प्रावुभौ स्मृतैौ । र्ततेो मृदुतरः स्वारस्तैरोव्यञ्जन
उच्यते । पादवृत्तेो मृदुतमस्त्वेतत्स्वारबलाबलम्
Uvvat.a on V. Pr. I. 125.
तीय tad. affix तांय in the sense of "
पूरण added to the words द्वि and त्रि
bafore which त्रि is changed into
तृ. e, g. द्वितीयः, तृतीयः cf. P. V.
2.54, 55; the tad. affix अन् ( अ ) is
added to the words ending in तीय
to mean a section e. g. द्वितीयेा भागः
cf. Kās. on P. V. 3.48.
तीव्रतर extreme sharpnesS of the
nasalization at the time of prO-
mouncing the anuSvāra and the
fifth ietters recommended by Sai-
tyāyana. e. g. अमीश्*रप्सुष्त्रद:, वञ्चत
परिवञ्चते. cf. T. Pr. XWII. l. →
तु (1) short term ( प्रत्याहार ) for the
dental consonantS त्, थु, द्, धु and
न् cf. P. I. 1.69; (2) per$onal-end-
ing substituted for ति in the 2nd
perS. imper. sing. Parasmaipada.
cf. P. III, 4.86; (3) tad. affix तु
in the SenSe of pOSSeSSion added
in Vedic ILiterature to कम् and
शम् e. g. क्रन्तुः, शन्तुः cf. P. V. 2.138;
(4) unādi affix तु ( तुन्) prescribed
by the rule सितनिगमिमसिसच्यविधाञ्क्रुशि-
भ्यस्तुन् ( Unādi Suitra I.69 ), before
Which the augment इ is not added
e. g. सेतुः सक्तुः etc. cf. P. VII.
तुक् augment त् added (1) to the root
चि in the form चित्य, the pot. pass.
part. Of चि cf. P. III. 1.132; (2) to
the short vowel at the end of a
root before a krt affix marked
with the mute letter पु e. g. अग्मिाञ्चित्,
प्रहृत्य cf. P. VI. 1.71; (3) to a short
vowel before छ् if there be close
prOximity ( संहिता ) between the



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-192.png}}}}}}

तुग्विधि
two e. g. इच्छति, गञ्व्छति; cf. f*. VI.
l.73; (4) to the indeclinables अा
and मा aS also tO a long vOWel
before छ, e. g. अच्= अादयति, विचाच्ट्टछ्ाद्यतेः
cf P. WI. l.74, 75; (5) to a long |
wOwel optionally, if it is at the
end of a word, e. g. लक्ष्मीच्छाया,
लक्ष्मीछाया, cf. P. VI. 1.76; (7) to the
letter न् at the end of a word
before शू, e.g. भवाञ्च्छेते, cf. P. VIII.
3.31.
तुग्विधि a rule prescribing the addi- ||
tiOn of the augment त् ; e. g. नलेापः
सुप्स्वरसंज्ञातुग्विधिषु कृति P. VIII. 2. 2 |
See तुक्•
roOts Such as the root तुञ्जू and
the like, which have their wowel
of the reduplicative syllable |leng-
thened as seen mOstly in Vedic
Literature; e. g. तुतुजानः, मामहानः,
दधार etc.; cf. Kā$. on P. VI.1.7.
इतुद augment त् (1) added to the afiix
अन Substituted for the यु of टट्यु and
टथुछ् ; e. g. चिरतनः, सायंतनः, cf. P.
IV. 3.23; (2) added to the tad.
affix इक (ट्रक्) applied to the word
श्वम् in the Sai$ikā $enses; e.g. शौव-
स्तिकः cf. P. IW. 3 15.
तुदादि a class of roots headed by the
rOot तुद् which take the conjuga-
tional Sign अ ( श ) and which are
popularly called rOots of the sixth
conjugation; cf. P. III.1.77.
तृन् uऐadi affix तु, added ·to the roots
सि, तन् , गम् etc. See तु (4).
तुन्दादि a, wery Small claSs .of words
headed by the word तुन्द to which
the taddhita affix इल ( इल व् ) is
added in the sense of possession
( मस्वर्थ ). The affix इल . is' optional
and the other affixes इन्, इक and
मर्तुं are alsO added; e.g. तुन्दिल', तुन्दी,
· तुन्दिकः, तुन्दवान् ; similatly उदरिल;
* etc.; cf. Kāś. on P,V.2.117.
तुम्.kt affix तुम् of the infinitive (1)
added to a root optionally with
176
||
||
तृच्
एड्चुछ् when the root refers to an
action for the purpose of which
another action is mentioned by the
principal verb ; e.g. भेोक्तुं व्रजर्ति or
भठॆजक्रेीं |नजति; cf. Kaš. on P.III.3.1t;
(2) added fO a root connected with *
another root in the sense of desire
prOwided both have the same &ub-
ject; e•g.• इच्छति भोक्तुम् ; cf. P. III.
3• l58; (3) added to a root connec-
ted with the words काल, समय or वेला;
€.g. काळैलोँ॒ भेोक्तुम् etc. c.f. P.III.3.167;
C4) added to any root which i5
COnnected with the roots 3क्, धृषु,
शा, लै, घट्, रभ्, लम्, क्रम् , सद्दृ, अहूँāfid और्र्
or itS SynOnym, as also'with
49
' 9rjitS $ynonym : e.g. शक्नेोति भोक्तुम्,
भबूति भोद्धूतुम्, वेला भॊक्तुम् , अ॒लै भोक्तुम्
पर्यातः कर्तुम्ःcf. Kā$.'ðf P. iÎहैं?'
65, 66.
उल्टंय_similar in articulation; savarna;
cf. R, T. 168.
तुल्याधिकरण having got the same sub-
stratuftà; denOting ultimately the
Sarne object; expreSSed in the $ame
9aSe; the Same aS Samānādhikarata
in the grammnr of Panini, cf,
Kāt. II.5.5.
ट (1) Substitute prescribed for the
last vQWel of the word अर्वन् so as
tO 1nake it declinable like words
rmarked with the mute letter ऋ;
C2) cOm mOn term for the kपूt
affixes तृन् and तृचू prescribed in the
Sense of the agent of a verbal
activity; the tad. affixes ईयसु, and
इष्ठ are Seen placed after words
ending in तृ in Vedic Literature
before which the affix तृ is elided;
e.. g• करिष्ठः, दोहीयसी; cf. Kāś. on P.
V. 3.59.
ढ्ट tad., affix तृ, taking the fem.
affix ई ( ङीप् ), (1) 'added ' to
à r१ot optionally with अक ( एबुछ् )
in the sense of the agent of a
verbál activity, the word so form-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-193.png}}}}}}

तृजन्त
ed having the last vowel acute;
e. g. कतीं कारकः; हर्ता हारकः ; cf. P.. III•
|].133; (2) prescribed in the sense
of *deserving one' optionally along
with the pot. pass. part• affixes; €•g•
भवान् खलु केन्यायंा बोढा, भवान् कन्यां वहेत्,
भवता खलु कन्या बोढव्या, वाह्या, बहनीयां वl;
cf Kāś. on P. IHI. 3.169.
तृटजन्त a word ending in the affix तृच्छ्
and hence getting the gut1a vOwel
(i. e. अ ) substituted for the final
vowel ऋ before the Sarwana-
masthāna (i. e. the first five) case
affixes; cf. तृजन्त अादेशेो भविष्यति, M.
Bh. orn VII. 1.96.
तृज्वद्भव treatment of a word as
ending with the affix तृच् although,
in fact, it does not sO 'end; e. g.
the word क्रोष्टु ; cf. तृज्वत्क्रोष्टुः, P. VII.
|1.95 ; cf. als© तृज्वद्भावस्यावकाश; |क्रेोश्ट्रा
क्रोष्टुना; M.Bh, on VII. 1 .95 Vārt.
|10.
तृणादि a class of words to which the
taddhita affix श is added in the
four senses given in P. IV. 2.67 to
70; e. g. तृणशः, नडश्ट्राः, पर्णशः etc.; cf.
Kā$. on P. IV. 3.80.
तृतीय the third consonants out of
the claSS conSomants; वर्गतृतीय; viz.
गु, ज्, ड्, दूं and ३ब्र्; cf. यथा तृतीयास्तथा
पञ्चमा अानुनास्ि म् M. Bh. on P. I.
1.9.
त्दृतीया the third case; affixes of the
third case ( instrumental case or
तृतीयाविभक्ति ) which are placed (1)
after nouns in the sense of an ins-
trument or an agent provided the
agent is not expressed by the
per&onal-ending of the root;e. g.
देवदतेन कृतम् , परशुना छिनत्तिः cf. P. IIi.
3.18; (2) after nouns connected
with सई, nouns meaning defective
limbs, nOuns forming the object of
. शा with सुम् as also , nouns meaning
हैतु or a thing capable of produc*
ंing a result; e. g. पुतेत्रेण सहागतः, अक्ष्णा
23
177
तृन्
काणः, मात्रा संजानीते, विद्यया यशः; cf. Kà$•
on '|P. IT.3.19,23; (3) OptiOnally
with the ablative after r1OunS
meaning quality, and Optionally
with the genitive after prOnOuns
in the sense of हेतु, when the wQrd
हेतु is actually üsed &. g. पाण्डित्येन
मुतः or पाण्डित्यान्मुक्तः; केन हेतुना Or
कस्य हेतोर्वसति; it is observed by the
Varttikakāra that when the wOrd
हेतु or its synonym is used in a sen-
tence, a pronoun is put ira any
case in apposition tO that wQrd
i.e. . हेतु ०r ' its synonym e,.gः, केन
निमित्तेन, किं निमित्तम् etc. ; cf. Kā$. On
|P. II. 3. 25, 27 ; (4) optionally
after. nouns connected with the
words पृथक्, विना, नाना,after the wQrds
स्तोक्र, अल्प, ' as alsO after दूर्,	अन्तिक्र
and their SynonymS; e.g- थे॒थूग्देवृदत्तन
etc. स्तेोकेन मुक्तः, दूरेण ग्रामस्य, केशैः प्रसितः;
cf. Ka$.om P.II.3. 32, 33,35, 44; (5)
optionally with the lOcative case
after nouns meaning constellatiOn
when the tad. affix after them haS
een elided; e.g. पुप्येण स्र्*प्रयातोस्मि श्रवणे
पुनरागतः Mahābhārata: cf. P.II.3.45;
(6) optionally with the genitive
case after words connected with
तुल्य Qr its Synonyms;e.g.तुल्येो देवदतेन,
तुल्येा देवदत्तस्य; cf. P. II.3.72.
तृतीयासमास called also तृतीयातत्पुरुषसमास
as prescribed by P. II. 1. 30-35;
e.g. तृतीयासमासे P.I. 1-30 and the
|Mahābhasya thereon.
त्तृन् (1) kपू't affix तृ with the acute
accent on the first wowel of the
word formed by itS application,
applied tO any rOOt in the sense Of
*an agent? provided the agent is
habituated to do a thing, or has his
nature to do it, Or does it well; e.g.
वदिता जनापवादान् , मुण्डयितारः श्राविष्ठायना
-भवन्ति वधूमूढाम्, कती कटम्; cf. KāŚ. on
P. III.2.135; words ending with
तृन्, gOvern the noun 'co1anected
With them in the accusative case;



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-194.png}}}}}}

तैत्तिरीयप्रातिशाख्य
(2) the term तृन् , used aS a short
terrm ( प्रत्याष्इार ) standing for kपूt
afiixes begināing with those prटूs-
cribed by the rule लटः शतृशानचौ०
(P.III.2.124) and ending with the
affix तृन् (in P.III.3.69); cf. Kāś. on
P.J|II.4.69.
तैत्तिरीयप्रातिशाख्य called also कृष्णयजुः:-
प्रातिशाख्य and hence representing
posgibly all the different branches
or Sākhās of the कृष्णयजुर्वेद, which is
not attributed definitely to a parti-
cular author but is SuppOSed to
have been revised from time to
time and taught by various ācāryaS
who were the followers of the
Taittiriya Sakhā.The work is divid-
ed into twO main parts, each of
which is further diwided into twelve
SectionS called adhyāyas, and
discusses thc various topics such as
letterS and their properties, accen-
tS, euphonic changes and the like,
just as the other P'ràtiŚākhya
Work8. It is beliewed that Wararuci,
Māhi$eya and Atreya wrote Bhāg-
|yas on the Taittiriya Prātiśākhya,
but at preSent,only two important
cOmm३ntary W0rkS on it are avai-
lable- (a) the *Tribhagyaratna?,
baSed upon the three Bhasyas
mentioned abowe as the titleshows,
written by Somayārya and (b) the
* Vaidikābharat]a * written by
Gopālayajvam. For details see
Introduction to * Taittiriya
Prष्ati$ākhya ' ed. Gowt Oriental
ILibrary Series, Mysore.
तैरोविराम a kind of स्वरित, or a vowel
With a circumflex accent which
folloWS an acute-accented wowel
characterized by avagraha i. e.
cOming at the end of the first
meiraber 9f a compQund; e. g गेाप-
ताविति गेोऽपतैी यज्ञपतिमिति यज्ञऽपतिं.Here
the woWcl अ of प following upon
178
त्नप्
*\
the avagraha is called तैरोोावेिरामस्वरित;
&f. उदवग्रहस्तैरोविराम: V. Pr. I. 1 18,
तैरोव्यञ्जन a kind of svarita or circum-
flex-accented vOwel which follows
an acute-accented wOWel, with the
intervention of a consonant
between the acute accented vowel
and the circumflex vowel which
(vOwel) originally was grave. e. g.
इडे, रन्ते, हब्ये, काम्ये; here the vowél
ए, is तैरोव्यञ्जनस्वरितः cf. स्वरो व्यञ्जनयुतस्तैरो-
व्यञ्जनः, V. Pr. I. 117.
तैलच् tad. affix तैल applied in the
Sense of oil to a word meaning the
Substance from which oil is extra-
cted;.e. g. तिलतैलं सर्षपतैलम् ; cf. विकोरे
स्नेनहने तैलचू , Kaś. on P. V. 2. 29.
तोलण्पदीक्षित a southern grammarian
whO has written a glosS called
प्रकशि on the Siddhāntakaumudi
Of Bhattoji Dik$ंita.
तोसुन् kt affix तोसू in the sen$e of
the infinitive ( तुंम्) seen in Vedie
Literature; e. g. ईश्चरोभिचरितोः. The
word ending with तोसुन् becomes
an indeclinable.
`&__--८~、
तदाँदक a root belonging to the तुदादि
claSS Of rOOtS ( sixth cOrajugation )
which take the vikarana अ ( श )
Causing nO guपूa or vrddhi substi-
ता tute for the wowel of the root.
तौदवल्यादि a class of words headed
by the word तौल्वलि, the taddhita
affix in the sense of युबन् ( gramd-
child ) placed after which is not
elideर्तुं by P. II. 4. 60; e. g. तौल्वलिः
पिता, तौल्ट्वलायनः पुत्रः; cf. KaŚ.on P.II.
4.61.•
त्न tad. affix त्न added · to the words
चिर, परुंत् and परारि showing time, as
also to the word प्रग in Vedic
ILiterature; e. g- चिरत्नम्, परुत्नम् ,
परारित्नम्, प्रत्नम् ( where ग is elided );
cf. Kāś. om P. IV. 3.. 23.
त्नपू tad. affix त्न, added to the word
' नव optionally with the affixes तनषु



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-195.png}}}}}}

य 179
त्रिपद
and ख before which नव is changed
to नू :e. g. नृत्नम् , नूतनम्, नवीनम् ; cf:
|P. V. 4, 30 Vārf.6.
त्य (1) tad. affix ल्य standing for त्यकू
and त्यप् which see below; (2)
a technical term for प्रत्यय ( a
suffix or a termination ) in the
Jainendra Vyākara r?a-
त्यव्क् tad. affix त्य added in the
Saisika senses to the words दक्षिणा,
प॒श्चात् and पुरसू; e. g. दाक्षिणात्यः,पाश्चात्यः,
पैारस्त्यः, दाक्षिणायिका cf. P. IV 2. 98.
त्यवन् tad. affix त्यक added to the
words उप and अधि in the senses
*near' and *above' respectively;
cf. पर्वतस्यासन्नमुपत्यका, तलैयैंबरूिढमधित्यकंा,
cf. Kāś. on P. V. 2.34.
त्यदादि a term used for the class of
pronouns headed by त्यद् which
are cight viz. त्यदू,तद्, यद्, एतद्, अदसू,
इदम् , एक and द्वि; cf.P.I.1.74,I.2.72,
IIÎ. 2. 60, VII. 2. 102.
त्यदादिविधि a Specific Operation pres-
Cribed for the pronouns hearded
by त्यद् e. g. the substitution of अ
for the final letter; cf. त्यदादिविधौ च
|प्रयेोजनम्, M. Bh. on P. I. 1. 27
Vārt. 6.
त्यप्र् tad. affix त्य (1) added to a few
specified indeclinables in the Saisi-
ka SenseS; e. g. अमात्यः,ञ्इहत्यः etc.; cf.
Kāś. on IV. 2. 104; (2) added to
the,indeclinables ऐषमस्, ह्यस् and श्वसू
• optionally along with टट्द्यु ānd ठन् ;
eःg. श्वस्त्यम्, श्व॒स्तनम्, शौवस्तिकम्; cf.
Kaś. ora P. IV. 2.. 'i 05.
श्त्र a common term for the krt affixes
|ष्ट्रन् arād इत्र (P.III. 2. 181-186) in
case the vowel इ of इत्र is look-
ed upon as equivalent to an aug-
म्met, as al5O for the uपूadi affix ष्ट्रन्
and the tad. affixes त्र and त्रछ् (P.
|IV• 2.51 and V.3.10);the tad. affix
त्र is added in the sense of समूह or
cgllectio|a _to the word गेो,"e.g.
गोत्रा; cf. Kāś. on P.IV.2.51.
i
त्रळुठ् tad. affix termed Vibhakti added
to pronouns excepting द्वि àrhd
others, and to the words बहु andक्रिम्
when they end with the loc• Case
termination; e.g. कुत्र, तत्र, बहुत्र etC• ;
cf. Kā$. on P.V. 1.10, 14.
श्ञ्त्रा tad. affix ऋा in the sense of SOme-
thing donated, as alsO t9? the
words देव, मनुष्य, पुरुष्,पुरु and मत्यै end-
ing in the accusative Or the lOCa-
tive case; e. g. व्राह्मणत्रा करेति, देवत्रा
बसतिः cf. Kā$. on P. V.4.55,56.
There is avagraha before the tad•
affix त्रा. देवत्रेति देवऽत्रा;cf. V.Pr. V.9.
त्रि ( 1) k t affx केिञ्त्र, always having the
tad. affix मपू C म ) added tO it,
applied to the roots marked with
the mute syllable डु prefixed tO
thern in the IDhātupātha ; e. g•
कृात्रेमम् , पक्त्रिमम् ; (2) a terrm Signify-
ing the plural mumber; cf. ' ना नौ
मे मदर्थे त्रिद्वयेकेषु V.Pr,II.3.
त्रिक lit. triad; a term used in the
Mahābhāsya in connection with
the Vibhakti affixes i.e. case end-
ings and perSOnal endingS which
are in groups of three; cf. त्रिंकतं
पुनर्विभक्तिसंश॒म् M.Bh. on P.I.1,38; cf.
also कस्यचिदव त्रिकस्य प्रथमसंज्ञा स्यात् M.
Bh. om P.I.4.101 ; cf. a!sO M. Bh.
on IÎ.2.23, V.1.52, V.1.58.
त्रिपथगा name of a commentary on
the Paribhā$enduśekhara, written
by Rāghavendrācārya Gajendra-
gadkar, a resident Of Sātārā. and a
pupil of Nilakatatha$astri Thatte.
|He lived in the second half of the
eighteenth and first half of the
nineteenth century and wrote com-
entaries On important grammar
Works.
त्रेिपद made up of a collection of three
padas or words; the word is used
in connection with a Rk or a por•
tion of the kramapatha; cf. यथेात्तं
पुनरुत्तं त्रिपदप्रभृति T.Pr.I.61. The word



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-196.png}}}}}}

त्रिपादी
180
त्र्यश्श्कः
is found used in connection with a
bahuwrihi compound rmade up Of
three words; cf. the term त्रिपद-
त्रिपादीं a term usually used in COrane-
ction with the last three Pādas (ch,
VIII. 2, VII t, 3 and VIII. 4} of
]Panini's Agjādhyāy], the ruleS in
which are not walid by conwention
to rules in the first Seven chapterS
and a quarter, as alsO a later rule
in which (the Tripādi) is, not valid
to an earlier ome; cf, पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् P.
VIII.2.1; (2) name of a critical
treatise on Pāmini's grammar (**Thc
Tripādi?*) written by Dr. H. E.
Buiskool recently.
त्रिभाष्यरत्न name of a commentary on
the Taittirjya Pratiśākhya written
by Somayārya. Thc commentary
is Said to have been based 0n the
three Bhāsya works attributed to
the three anciemt Wedic Scholar$-
Vararuci, Māhi$eya and Atreya.
त्रिमात्र consisting of three moras or
' mātrās. The protracted or प्ळुत
woWels are said to consist of three
mātrāS as contrasted with the
short and long vowels which
respectively consist of one and two
mātras; cf. Kā$. on P.I.2.27.
~« ~\
ांत्रेमुंन (1) the famous three ancient
grammarians Panini (the author of
the Suitras), Kātyāyana (the author
of the Varttikas), and Pataऐjali
(the author of the Mahābhāsya;)
(2) fhe grammar of Panini, called
SO, being the contribution of the
reputed triad of Grammarians.
त्रिरुत्त repeated thrice, occurring
' thrice; a term uSed in the Prāti-
$ākhya workS in respect of a word
which is repeated in the krama
and other artificial recitations.
त्रिलोकनाथ son of Vaidyanātha , who
{,; Wrot६ a Small treatise on kārakas | "
called घट्कारकनिरूपण.
त्रिलोन्व्बन a scholar of grammar who
has written a Small work named
अव्ययशब्दवृति on the uSeS of indeclin-
ableS.
त्रिविक्रम pupil of Vardhamāna who
wrote a gloss called * पञ्जिकोद्दयोत ?.
on the Kātantra-v[ tti
त्रिशिरवा name of a commentary on'
the Paribhā$enduśekhara written
by Lak$minrsirihha in the 18th
century.
त्रैकाल्य all the three times, paSt, pre-
sent and future; cf. त्रयः कालाः
समाहृताः त्रिकालम्, त्रिकालमेव त्रैकाल्यम् ।
स्वार्थे ष्यञ्ञ्जू Uvvatabhā$ya on V. Pr.
|i.. ]I5.
त्रैपादिक a rule or an Operation preS-
cribed by Pānini in the last three
quarters of his A$jādhyāyi. See
त्रिपादी abowe.
त्रैशब्द्य a collection of three words
(to express the same sense); cf.
अपि च त्रैशब्द्यं न प्रकल्पते | अस्पृक्षत् अस्पाक्षींर्दैत्
अस्प्राक्षीदिति M. Bh. on III. l.44;
cf. also M. Bh. on P.' I. 4,74, IV.
1. 88, IV. 2.60 etc.
त्रैस्वयै (1) use of the three accents
acute, grave and circumflex at the
time of the recital of the Weda;
त्रयः स्वरा एव त्रैस्वयैम्; cf. चातुर्वृण्र्यादीनां
स्वार्थे उपसंख्यानम् i त्रैलेीवयम्, त्रैस्येर्यम् Kāś,
on P. V. 1. 124. cf. also यद्येवै त्रैस्वयै
न प्रकल्पते तत्र केी दोषः l त्रैस्वर्येणाधीमहे इत्ये-
तन्नोपपद्यते । M. Bh. on P. I. 2.3l.
त्र्यक्षर (a word) having three vowels
or syllables in it; त्र्यच् or त्र्यच्क; cf.
द्वद्यक्षरत्र्यक्षरेभ्य इति वक्तव्यम् cf. M. Bh.
on WIII 4.6.
त्र्यम्बक a grammarian of the nine-
teemth century, who resided at
Wai in Sātārā District and wrote
ā commentary on the Paribhāgen-
duśekhara which is named त्र्यम्बकी
'|after.the writer.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-197.png}}}}}}

त्र्यम्बकी 181
थ
त्र्यम्वकी a commentary on the Pari-
, bhāgenduśekhae by म्बव्यक: see
अयम्वक.
त्व tad. afiix त्व in the sense of duty,
nature or esSence, preSCribed
optionally with the affix तळु ( तl );
e. g. अश्वत्वम्, गेीत्वम्, अश्चंता, गेतिा; cf.
तस्य भावस्त्वतलैो P. V. 1.1 19, alsO cf.
त्वतलेार्गुणवचनस्य P. VJ. 3. 35 Vart.lo.
त्वत् kpt affix त्व in the sense of the
potential pass. part. in Vedic
Î,iterature;'e. g. कत्र्वे हविः l कर्तव्यम्;
also cf. Ka$. on P.III. 4.14;cf. als0
कृतानि या च कत्वीँ R. V. 1X. 47.2.
त्वन tad.• affix त्व before which there
is observed the caesura or aWa-
graha in the recital Of the Pada-
pā[ha. e: g. देवत्वमिति देवऽत्वम् l cf.
V. Pr. V. 9.
शथ्
शू (!) second consonant of the dental
claSS of consonants posSessed Of
the properties श्वासानुप्रदान, अघेोष, विवृत-
कण्ठत्व and महाप्राणत्व; (2) augment
श्भ्रू ( थुक् ) added to the words षष्ञ् ,
' कति, कतिपय and च्चतुर् before the
Ptāraraa affix डट्. e. g. षण्णां पूरणः षष्ठः,
कतिथः, चतुर्थः; cf. Kāś. on .. P. V.
2.51 ; (3) substitute for the con-
" sonant ह् of अाह् before any con-
' SOnant exCcpt a nasal, and a
SemivOWel as also for the conSo-
nant स् of स्था preceded by the
' preposition उद्; cf. P, VIII. 2.35,
VfII. 4.61.
श्थु (1) personal-ending of the 2nd
: perS. pl. Parasmaipada,substituted
·.· for the लुछ् of the ten lakāra affixes;
(2) substitute ( थछ् ) for the 2nd
.pers• sing• persOnal ending सिप् in.
the perfect tense; (3) uhādi १ffix
( थक् ) added to the roots पा, र्वृ? दे॒तुंद्
etc• e. g• पीथः, तीर्थः, etc.; cf. धitaadi
· $tātra II. 7; (4) unādi afiix ( क्थन् ) |
added to' the roंQts हन्, कुद् : न्तीं etg:;
e. g. हथः, कुष्ठं, नीथः etc. cf.. uhãdi
sद्वे tra ' II. 2: (5) unādi affix (थन्)
added to the roots उध्, कुष्ञ्, गा and
ऋ. e. g. ओी|ष्ठः, केोष्टम् etc. cf utऐādi
stātra " II. 4; (6) a technical term
for the terrm अभ्यरुत or the redu-
plicated wording of Pārini ( Çf.
उभे अभ्यस्तम् ) P. VI. 1. 5, uSed in
the Jainendra Vyākarataa.
थक k!'t affix थक added tO the rOOt
गै * to sing,? in the sense of agent
provided he is skilled; e. g. गाथकः ;
cf. P. III. 1.146.
थद् tad. affix थ added to numerals'
ending in न् in Vedic Literature;
e. g. ' पञ्वथः, सप्तथः, पर्णमयानि पञ्चथानि
भवन्ति; cf. P. V. 2.50.
थन persOnal-ending . थन substituted
for त of the 2nd pers. pl. of the
imperative Parasmaipada in Vedi¢ः '
Literature, e. g. यदिष्ठन for यदिच्छथ;
cf. Kā$. on P. VII. 1.45.
श्थमु tad. affix थस् in the sense of
प्रकार (m3nner) added to the pro-
nOu ns इदम्, and किम्, the words
ending in थम् becoming indeclina-
bles; e. g. इत्थम्, कथम्ः cf. P. V.
3.24, 25. → →
थछ् perSonai.. ending थ substituted
for सिप्म् of the 2nd pers. sing. Paras-
rmaipada in the perfect tense as
also in the present tense in speci-
fic cases; cf. P. III. 4.82, 83,84.
थस्ंंंंंं personal etading of the 2nd
perS. dual Parasmaipada, whichi
is_Substituted for छ् of the lakara
affixes; cf. P. III 4.78.
था (1) tad. affix था in the sense of'
question Or reason ( हेतु ) added , to
the prOnOun ाकिम् in Vedic ILitera-
ture; e.g. कथा देवा अासन् ; cf. Kaś.
on P.V.3.26; (2) tad. affix था (थाळु
acCOrding to Panini) which gets
caeSura or awagraha after प्रत्न,'. पूर्व,
वैिश्व, इम and ऋतु; e.gः प्रल्नथेर्तिः. प्रत्नऽथेा,



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-198.png}}}}}}

थाल्
पूर्वथेति पूर्वऽथा etc.; cf. Vāj. Pr.V.12; ||
(3) tad. affix थाछ् in thc sense of
इव added to the words प्रत्न, पूर्व, विश्च
and इम in Wcdic |Literature, e.g.
तं प्रत्नथा पूर्वथा विश्वथेमथा; cf. Ka$, on P.
V.3.11 1; (4) tad. affix थालू in the
sense of mannar ( प्रकार) added to
किन्, prOnouns excepting those
headed by द्वि, and the word बहु;
e.g. सर्वथा, cf. P V.3.23.
थाल्ट् tad. afiix थाल्छ्. See था.
थास् personal ending of the 2nd
pers. sing. Ātmanepada, substitut-
ed for लृट् of the lakāra affixes.
थीम (THIEME, PAUL) a sound
scholar of the present day, well
wersed in Sanskrit Grammar and
Vedic Literature, who has written
a critical treatise named **Pānini
and the Weda,''
थुक् (1) augment अ॒थ् added to the
words षषू, कति, कतिपय and चतुर्; see
थ् above; (2) augment थ् added to
theroot अस्त् ofthe fourth conjugati-
on Paras. before the affixes of the
aorist. e.g. अास्थत्; cf. P.VII.4.17.
थ्यन् tad. affix थ्य in the sense of
*favourable for* ( तस्मै हितम् ) added'
to the · words अज and अवि; e.g.
-अजथ्या यूथिः । अावेथ्या । cf. Kāś. on P.
V.1.8.
द
द् third consonant of the dental class
ofconsonants pOSSessed of the pro-
perties नादानुप्रदान, घोष, संवृतकण्ठत्व and
अल्पप्राणता;(2) consonant द्substituted
for the final letter of nouns ending
with the affix वस् as also for the final
letter of स्र्नंस्, ध्वंस् and अनडुह् providcd
the final letter is at the end of
a pada; e.g. विद्वद्भयाम् etc.; cf. Kā$.
on P, VIII. 2.72; (3) consonant द्
182
substituted for the final सू of roots
,excepting the root असु, before the
दन्तेोष्ठय
personal ending तिपू of the third
pers. sing-; e. g. अचकाद् भवान् ; cf.
P. WIHi.. 3.93.
द (1) the consonant द्, the vowel अ
being added for facility of utter-
ance or uSe; (2) a technical term
used in the Jainemdra Vyakarana
for the term अात्मनेपद in the gram-
mar of Pānini.
दग्ध्च a fault of pronunciation where
the letters are uttered indistinct
( अस्पष्ट ).
दझच् tad. affix दघ्न prescribed optiona-
lly with द्वयस and मात्र in the sense
of measure ( प्रमाणे ), with ङीप् ( ई )
to be adde.H further to form the
fem. base, e. g. जानुदन्नमु, जानुद्वयसम्,
जानुमात्रम् , जातुदघ्नी, cf. P. V. 2.37 and
|lV.1.15; दघ्नच् is added optionally
along with अणु as also with द्वयस
and मात्र to the words पुरुष and हस्तिन्,
e.g. पुरुषद्वयसम्, पौरुषम् पुरुषदन्नम्, पुरुषमात्रम्;
cf. P. V. 2.38.
दण्ड one of the eight artificial Vedia
recitations.
दण्डादि a class of words headed by
the word दण्ड to which the taddhita
affix य, is added in the sense of
*deserving'; cf. दण्डमर्हति दण्डश्यः Kāś.
on P. V. 1.66
दधिपयञ्अादि a class of compound
words headed by the word दधिपयस्
which are not compounded as
समाहारद्वन्द्व which ends in the neuter
gender and singular number; e.g•
दधिपयसी, शिववैश्रवणौ, श्रद्धातपसी etc.; cf.
|Kā$. on P.II. 4.14.
दन्त place where the utterance of
dental letters originates;cf. लतुलसानां
दन्त{: S. K. on P. I. 1.9.
दन्तमूलीय the letters त्, थू द्, ध् and न्;
cf. दन्तमूलीयस्तु तकारवर्गः |R. Pr. I. 19.
The Rk. Prāti$ākhya calls र् ( रेफ )
also as दन्तमूलीय.
दन्तोष्ठय also दन्त्योष्ठय · or : दन्त्यैौष्ठय the



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-199.png}}}}}}

दन्त्य
183
दानीम्
dentolabial letter इब्; cf. ओोष्ट्]न्तlभ्यां
दन्तैर्वैकोर ॥ दन्तैरिाते स्थानेनिर्देशः l ओोष्ठान्ता-
भ्याम् इति करणनिर्देशः Com. on T•Pr.II•
43.
दन्त्य produced at the teeth, dental;
formied at the teeth by the tip of
the tongue; e.g- the letterS ल छ्, स्ं,
and तवर्ग; cf. लठलसिता दन्त V.Pr.I.69. |1
According to Panini's grammar |
लछ् (long) does not exist. Accord-
ing to Taittirंya Prātišākhya र्
is partly dental and partly lingual;
cf. T.Pr.II.41, while |व् is partly
dental and partly labial; cf. T.Pr.
II.43; cf. दन्त्या जिह्लाग्रकरणाः ,V. Pr.I. |
76; cf. ळुग्वा दु नेपदे दन्त्ये |
|P. VII. 3..73.
दयानन्दसरस्व ती a briIliant Vedic
Scholar Of the nineteenth century
belonging to North India who
established on a sound footing the
study of the Wedas andYyākaraए)!a
and encouraged the study of
Kāśikāvपूtti. He has written many
books on Wedic studies.
दयापाल a.Jain writer who wrote a
treatiSe named रूपसिाद्धे.
दयारत्न a Jain scholar who has written
a grammar treatise on the Sāras-
wata Grammar called सारस्वतपरिभाषा.
दयाराम writer of a commentary on
the Mugdhabodha Vyākarana
of Bopadewa.
'ण name of a cOmmentary on
Kofdabhatta?s Vaiyākaranabhti$a-
मृ?asāra, written by a grammarian
named Harivallabha.
दर्पणा name of a commentary on the
Sabdakaustubha, written by
Mannudewa or Mantudewa of the
nineteenth century.
२क a name given to the treatise on
grammar written by व्याघ्रपाद which
9Onsisted Of I0 chapters; cf. दशकं !
वैयाघ्रपदीयम् Kāś. on P, V. 1.58. The
word also means student$ reading
the work दशक; cf. दशका वैयाघ्रपदीया:,
Ka$. on P. IV.2.65.
दशगणी (1) a section of grammatical
treatises dealing with the ten
conjugations of rOotS. e-g• the
first section of the second pa1t
( उच्तरार्ध ) of the Siddhānta Kau-
mudi; (2) name of the dhātupātha
of Pānini which gives ten classes
of roots; cf. भूवादयेो दशगणीपरिपठिता
गृह्यन्ते Nyāsa on I.3.1.
दशाधुष्करणा the ten classes or conjuga-
tions of roots; धुध् was a term for
धातु (root) in Some ancient gram-
mar works.
दशबलकारिका a short treatise on the
roots belonging to more than one
conjugation; the name of the
author is not given.
द tad. affix named *vibhakti* app-
|lied to the words सर्व, एक, अन्य, किं,
यत्,तत् and इदम् in the locative case;
e.g. सर्वदा, एकदा, कदा; cf. Kāś. on
P. V. 3.15,19,20,21.
दाक्षायण name, by which व्याडि, the
author Of the grammar work संग्रह
is referred to. The word दाक्षायण
indicates that व्याडि was a
descendant of दक्ष, and, as Pārini
is called दाक्षीपुत्र, critics say
that Pānini and Vyadi were
relatives; cf. शेोभना खलु दाक्षायणस्य
दाक्षायणेन वा संग्रहस्य कृतिः M. Bh. on P.
II.3.66.
दाक्षपुत्र lit. son of a female descen-
dant of दक्ष; name given to Panini
who was the son of दाक्षी a female
descendant of दक्ष; cf.,शंकरः शांकरीं
प्रादाद्दाक्षीपुत्राय धीमते Pān. Sik. 56; cf.
also सर्वे सर्वपदादेशा दाक्षीपुत्रस्य पाणिनेः
M.Bh. on P. I. 1.20; VII.1.27.
दानवेिजय a Jain grammarian, who
wrote a Small grammar treatise
named शब्दभूषण. →
दानम् िtad. affix called विभक्ति, applied



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-200.png}}}}}}

दामन्यादि
184
दुःश्लिष्ट
to तद् and इदमू in the sense Of the
locative case. e.g- तदानीम्, इदानीम्;
cf. P. V.3.18, 19.
दामन्यादि a class of words headed by
the word दामनि to which the tadd-
|hita affix छ is added without any
change ofsense; e.g.दामनीयः, औौलपीयः
cf. Kāś. on P. V, 3.116.
दरूण्य explained by the commentatorS
on the PrātiŚakhya works as दृढत्व
(firmness) or कठिनता (hardnes$,) and
given as a characteristic of the acute
or उदात्त tone; cf. अायामेो दारुण्यमणुता
खस्येत्युचैःकरापि शब्दस्य, T. Pr. XXII.9,
quoted in the Mahābhāśya on P.I.
2.29, where दारुण्य is explained as
स्वरस्य दरुणता रूक्षता |
दासंाभारादि a claSs of words headed
by the word दासीभार Which,although
they are tatpurusक्ष्a compounds,
retain the accents of the first
member of the compound; cf. P.
WI.2.42.
दि a technicai term in the Jainen-
dra Vyākaratha for the term प्रगृह्य
used by. Pānini.
दिक्शब्द a WQrd denoting a direction
Such as पूर्वै, उत्तर ānd the like, used
as a Substantive, e. g. पूर्वो ग्रामात् , or
shOWing the direction of another
thing being its adjective, e. g.
इयमस्याः पूर्वा; "cf. Kāś. on P. II.3.29.
दिक्समास the bahuwrihi compound
prescribedby the rule दिङ्नामान्यन्तरोल,
e.g- पूर्वोत्तरा (north-east) or उत्तरपाश्चमा
(north-west); cf. दिक्समासः दिगुपदिष्टः
समासः, Kā$. on P.I. 1,28.
दिगादि a class of words headed by
the word दिक् to which the tad. affix
य ( यत् ) is added in the $ense of
*produced therein* ( तत्र भवः ), e.g.
ादोशे भवं दिश्यम्, similarly वग्र्यमु, गण्यः
etc.; cf. Kā$. on P.IV.3.54.
दिनण् tad. affix added to the word
, मध्य, before which . मध्य is changed
to मध्यम्; e. g. माध्यन्दिन उद्भायति;cf. मध्य
मध्ये दिनणू चास्मात् M.Bh. on IV. 3.60.
दिवादि a class of roots of the fourth
conjugation, headed by the rOot
दिव् ( दीव्यति ), called alsO दीँब्यत्यादि
cf. P. I. 2.27.
दो a technical term in the Jainendra
Vyākarana for दीर्घ (long vowel)
in Pānini's grammar.
दीपप्रभा a commentary on बाररुचसंग्रह
by नारायण.
दप्ति explained as स्फूर्ति or throbbing
in) utterance. Out of the sewen
svaras or yamas क्रुष्ट, प्रथम, द्वितीय,
तृतीय, चतुर्थ, मन्द्र and · अार्तल्वायं, the
throbbing ई( दीति ) of the latter
and latter tone leads to the per-
ception of the former'and former
one; cf. तेषां दीोतेिजेोपलब्धिः T. Pr.
XXIII. 15.
दीर्घ long; a term used in connec-
tion with the lengthened tone of
a woWel described to be dwimātra
as contrasted with हृस्व having one
|mātrā and प्ळुत hawing three mā=
tras; cf. द्विस्तावान् दीर्घः V. Pr. I. 35,
W. Pr. I. 57, also ऊकालोज्ञ्चस्वदीर्घप्ठुतः
P, I.2.27.
९& v、 →
दीधैविधि a grammatical operation
Where a, short wowel is turned
into a long one; a rule of gram-
mar preScribing the lengthening
of a short vowel.
दु a technical term in the Jainendra
Vyākaratha for the term वृद्ध which
is used in Pānini's grammar and
which is defined by Pānini in the
rule वृद्धिर्यस्याचामादिस्तद् वृद्धम् P. I. 1.73.
दुःश्लिष्ट a Word, or words WhOSe caSe
affixes can be syntactically con-
nected only with some difficulty;
cf.बहुत्रीहौ सक्थ्यक्ष्णेोः स्वाङ्गात् षच् । स्वाङ्गव॒च्वी
यः सक्थिशब्दः अक्षिशब्दश्च तदन्तोद् बहुनोहेः
षचू भवति । सूत्रे तु दुःश्लिष्टविभक्तीनि पदनि
|Kā$. on P. V. 4.l 13. ,



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-201.png}}}}}}

दुःस्पृष्ट
B85
दूषण
दुःस्पृष्ट produced by a.n incomplete
" contact of the करण: the t€rm iS
applied to the phonetic element
ळुं which is due to the incQmplete
contact of the organ at the prO-
duction of the letter छ्; cf. दु:स्पृष्ट-
श्रेचेति विज्ञेयः; Pār?. Sik$ā 5.
दुर्गसिंह the farmouS commentator Of
the Kātantra sütras, whOse V£tti
on the stitras is the mOst popular
one. It is cailed , क!तन्त्रसूत्रवृाप्ति or
कातन्तवृत्ति or दौर्गसिंहीवृत्ति , also. A
work on Paribhāgās named परिभाषा-
बृत्ति, in which Paribhāsās are ex-
plained and established aS based
on the Kātantra Vyākarata
stitras, is attributed to Durga-
sirihha. It is doubtful whether
this commentator }Durgasi:iaha is
the same aS Durgācārya, the
famous commentatOr of Yaska?s
Nirukta. There is a legend that
IDurgasirihha was the brother of
Vikramāditya, the founder of the
Vikrama Era. Besi:des the gloss
On the Kātantra stitras, sOme gra-
mmar wOrkS Such aS a gloss on
the ut?ādi stātras, a gloss ( वृन्ति ) ora
|Kālāpa-Vyākarataa Sütras, a com-
mentary on Kārakas named षट्का-
रकरत्न, NāmalihgānuŚāsana and
|Paribhagāv!rtti are ascribed to
Durgasiriaha. Some schtolars be-
|lieve that the term अमरसिंह was
Only a title given tO Durgasirihha
for his prOfound scholarship, and
it waS IDurgasir?nha who was the
authOr Of the well-known work
AmarakO$a.
दुगीदास a grammarian who wrote
(a) a gloSS on Bopadeva's Mug-
¢ihabodha, (b) a gloss named धातु-
दीपिकृा on , Kavikalpadruma and
(c) Sabdāraavakoga.
दुर्गेत्तम a grammarian who wrote
a work on , genders called लिङ्कानु-
शासन and also a commentary on it.
24
| दुर्घटवृत्ति name of a gratmmaf wOtk
explaini},g words which are difficult
to' derive according tO rules 9f
|Panini. The work ' is written in
the style of a, running COnamerà-
tary on select sütraS of Pāऎini,
devoted mainly to explain difficult
formations. The author Of it,
Saranadeva, was an eastern gra-
mmarian who, as is evident frOm
the number of quotations in his
work, was a great Scholar Of the
|12th or the 13th century.
दुर्घटवृत्तिसंस्करण a grammar wOrk
the formation of difficult
60i३
words attributed to शवैराक्षत Or
सर्वराक्षत.
दुर्घटोद्धार name,of a commentary by
Ke$avadatta-Sarman On the gra-
mmar work named संक्षिप्तसार.
&
दुर्बलाचार्य a grammarian whO wrote
a treatise on grammar दुर्बलीयव्याकरण,
mamed after him. BesideS thiS
treatise, he has written cOrnmien-
taries on Nage$a*s I,aghumafंjü$a
and Paribhāgendu$pkhara.
दुस्स्पृष्ट see दुःस्पृष्ट.
→、、
name crf a commentary,
on the Paribhāgenduśekhara of
NāgeŚa, believed to have been
written by Gopà1āca#ya Karhādkar,
a grammarian of the 19th century
and attributed to Bhimacārya.
This commentary, which was
written to criticize the comment-
ary written by Vi5tauŚāstrī Bhat,
waS again criticized in reply by
VigrauŚāstrī Bhat in his Ciccamdrikā
. ( चिच्चन्द्रिका ). See विष्णुशास्त्री भट.
दूषण fault, objection; the word
is used in connection with a fault
found with, or objection raised
against an argument advanced by,
a writer, by his Opponent or by
the writer himself who replies it to
make his argument well establis-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-202.png}}}}}}

देवानन्दिन्
· hed; cf.नित्यवादी कार्यपक्षे दूषणमाह-कार्येष्विति
• Mahā. Prad. on P.I. 1.44 Wãrt.!6.
दूस tad. affix prescribed .after , the
word अवि in the sense of milk(दुग्ध)
along with the affixes सेढि and मरीस
optionally, by the Varttikakāra ;
e. g. अविदूसम् । अ॒विसोढम् 1 अविमरीसम्;
cf. Kā$, on M. Bh. IW. 2. 36.
दृढादि a class of words headed by दृढ
word ending in the dual number,
and (b) that both the words retain
their original accents. e. g. इन्द्रासेोमैौ,
सेोमापूषणा, अमीषोमाभ्यां, मित्रावरुणाभ्याम्; fof
changes, cf. P. VI.3.25-31; for
accent, cf. देवत[द्वन्द्वानि चानामन्त्रितानि
(द्विरुदात्तानि) l इन्द्रार्बृहस्पतिभ्याम्, इन्द्राबृहस्पती
इति ऋीणि V. Pr. I{.48, 49; cf. " also
देबताद्वन्द्वे च P. VI. 2.141.
to which the tad. affix य ( ष्यञ्जूञ् ) देवनन्दिन् called also पूज्यपाद or पूज्यपाद-
or इमन् ( इमनिच् ) is added in the
sense of na:ure ( भाव ); त्व and तछ्
( ता ) can, of cour $e, be added
optionally; e. g. दाढर्यम्, द्रढिमा दृढत्वम्,
दृढता.See also लावण्य दैशत्य, औौष्ण्य, जाङय,
पाण्डित्य, मौ७र्य etc.; cf. Kāś. on
P. V. 1• 123.
इट्ठष्टं seen in use im W'edic ILiterature,
or CtaSsical Literature, or in the
talk of cultured peOple ; $aid iri
connection with Words Which a
grammarian trieS to explain; cf.
दृष्टानुविधिश्ठन्दसि भवति’ Wyādi Pari.
Patha 68.
दृष्टानुावोधि taking place of an opera-
देवनन्दिन् beliewed to hawe liwed in
the fifth century A. D. and written
the treatise On grammar, of course
based on Pānini Stitras, which is
|known as जैनेन्द्र-व्याक्ररण or जैनेन्द्र-
शव्दानुशासन. The writer of this gram-
mar is poSsibly mentioned as जैनेन्द्र
in the uSually quoted verse of
Bopadeva :- इन्द्रश्चन्द्रः काशकृत्स्राापिशली
|शाकटायनः पाणिन्यमरजैनेन्द्रा जयन्त्यष्टादिशा-
ब्दिकाः.देवनन्दिन् was a great.Jain saint
and Scholar who wrote many
workS on Jain Agamas of which
सर्वार्थसिद्धि, the commentary on the
तत्त्वार्थाधिगमसूत्र, is well-known.
tion, or application of a rule of देवपथादि a class of words headed by
grammar in accordance with the
Words seen in use. See दृष्ट.
दृष्टान्त similar instahce,generally quot-
ed tO explain effectively some rules
Or cOnventions laid down; cf. ननु
चायमप्यस्ति दृश्ट्रान्तः समुदाये वाक्यपरिसमाति-
the wordदेवपथ, the affix कन् applied
to which in the sense of a statue,
or applied for the formation of a
proper noun, is dropped देवपथः,
हंसपथः, शिव:, विष्णुः etc.; cf.Kāś. on P.
V. 3.100.
रिति । तद्यथा गर्गीः शतं दण्ङयन्तामिति M.Bh. | देवशर्मन् a grammarian who has writ-
on P.I. 1. 7.
इढष्टापच्ञर discrepant, characterized
by disCrepancy; cf. यद्यपि तावदयं
पराशब्दो दृष्टापचार उपसर्गश्चानुपसर्गश्च अयं तु
खलु विशब्देाऽदृष्टापचार उपसर्ग एवः M, Bh.
ten a disquisition on the philoSO-
phy of Vyākarana in verse, and
added a commentary of hiS OWm
on it which he has named aS
समन्वयप्रदीपसंकेत.
on ]P. l. 3. 19. देवानन्दिन् a Jain grammarian of the
देवताद्धन्द्ध a compound word called
द्वन्द्ध Wh0se memberS are names of
deities ; the peculiarities of this
Dvandva cOmpound are (a) that
generally there are changes at the
· end Of the first member, by virtue
of which it appears similar to a
eighth century who is believed to
have written a grammar work,
called सिद्धान्तसारस्वत-शब्दानुशासन. It is
likely that देवानन्दिन् is the same as
देवनान्दि-पूज्यपाद and the grammar
work is'the same as जैनेन्द्रशब्दानुशासन
for which see देवनान्दन्..



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-203.png}}}}}}

देविकापाद
देविकापाद a popular name given tO
the third pāda of the seventh
२ adhyaya of Pārःini?s A$ंādhyāyi aS
the pāda begins , with the Sutra
देविकाशिंशपाादत्यवाट्दीर्घसत्त्रश्रेयसामात् P.VII
3. l•
देवीदीन a mo3lern grammarian Of the
19th century who haS written a
gloss on the A$ंādhyāyi Of Pataini.
देवेन्द्र a Jain grammarian of the l3th
century who has written a cOm-
mentary named लघुन्यास on the
शब्दानुशासन of Hemacandra. He
has written many works on the
Jain Agamas, of which a commen-
tary On the Uttarādhyanastitra can
be specially mentioned. He is
called देवेन्द्रसूरेि also.
देश lit. place; (1) original place of
articulatiOn; cf. अदेशे वा वन्वने व्यञ्ज-
नस्य, R. Pr. XIV. 5 ; (2) place of
Origin ; उच्चारणस्थान; (3) place of
inferential establishment of a
Paribhāgā etc. परिभाषादेशः उद्देशः Par.
Sek. pari. 2,3; (4) passage Of the
Sarihhitā text, cf..T. Pr. I. 59.
देशीयर् tad. affix देशीय in the sense
of slightly lesS, or almost similar,
optionally prescribed with the
affixes कड्प and देश्य e. g. मृदुकल्पः,
मृदुदेश्यः. मृदुदेशीयः cf.Kāś, on P.V.3.67.
देश्य (l) tad. affix in the sense of
|almOst Similar; see देशीयर् above;
(2) (wOrds) current in popular use
Or language, although not sanction-
ed by rules of grammar; cf. देश्याः
सूत्रनेिबन्धाः क्रियन्त ' M.Bh. on P. V.
3.55; cf. देश्या देध्टव्या: साधुत्वेन प्रतिपाद्याः,
Kaiyata On V. 3.55; probably
Kaiyata had a difficulty in ex-
plaining the word देश्य in the old
way meaning * current in use', as
many wOrds called bad words,
intrOduced from other languages
Were current at his fimae wriich bae
was eluctant to term as देश्य.
187
द्युतादि
दैव	name of a systetm of grammaf' 9r
a work on grammar the peculi-
arity of which is the 9mission of
the एकश्शष topic; cf. अनेकशेर्षे दैवं स्यात्•
दैवादिक a, root belonging tO the
fourth conjugation of rOots . ( दिव्-
दिगण ); cf.जसु ताडन इति चुरादैो पठ्चते
तस्यदं ग्रहणं, न दैवादिकस्य, Ka5. On P• II
3.56-
दैवेन्द्र name givera to a wOrk On
grammar, presurnably the Sarme as
जैनेद्र-शब्दानुशासन written by पूज्यपाद-
देवनान्दन्. See जेनन्द्रब्याकरण.
दोष (1) a fault of pronunciation ;	cf.
एताः स्वरदेोषभावनांः अतेीन्ये व्यत्र्जनदेोष्श्राः
M.Bh. on I. 1. 1 Vārt.18; (2) defect
shown in connection with an ex-
pression or explanation.
देोषोद्धरण name of a commentary on
|Nageśa's Paribhāgenduśekhara wri-
tten by मत्रुदेव of the eighteenth
century.
दोषोद्धार name Of a comfmentary on
|NageŚa's LaghuŚabdenduśekhara
written by मत्रुदेव of the eighteenth
century•
द्य tad. affix द्द्य, applid to इदम् in the
sense of * a day *, when इदम् iS
changed intO अ ( अशु ) ; e. g• अद्य,
cf. P.V. 3.22 Vārt. 5.
द्यस् tad. affix द्यसू, applied to the
word समान when समान is changed
into स; e.g. सद्यः, cf. सद्य: परुत्परार्येष्प्रम: P.
V.3.22; cf. also समानस्य सभावेो द्यश्चाहनि
|P. V. 3.• 22.• Wārt.. 1
डु a technical ternià in the Jainendra
Vyākarana, for the term उत्तरपद (the
ıatter or the second member of-a,
compound word ) which is used in
|Panini's grammar.
द्युतादि a class of roots headed by
the root टुत्, the aorist sign चिळ
after which gets ( अ ) अङ् substi-
tuted for it ; e.g. अद्दुद्युतत् , अश्धिंतत्; . cf.
Kā$. on P. III.1.55. and I.3.91•



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-204.png}}}}}}

इटं&
、3
*\
188 द्रुत
द्युस् tad. affix दुद्युस॒ applied to the word
उभय in the · sense of a day; e.g.
उभयद्युः cf. P. V. 3.22 Vart. 7.
दृद्येोतक indicative, suggestive; nOt
directly capable of expressing the
$ense by denotation; the nipātaS
and upasargas are sā'd tO be *dyO•
taka? and not *wãcaka' by stand-
ard grammarians headed by the
Varttikakāra; cf. निपातस्यानर्थकस्यापि
प्रातिपदिकत्वम् P.I.2.45 Varttika 12; cf.
Kaiyata also on the above; cf. a!sO
निपाता द्योतकाः केचित्पृथगथांभिधायिनः Vak-
yapadiya II. 194;, गतिवाचकत्वमपि तस्य
( स्थाधातेोः ) व्यवस्थाप्यते, उपसर्गस्तु तद्दयेो-
तक एब com. on Vākyapadiyā II.
190; cf. पश्चाच्छ्रोतुबोंधाय द्यैीतंकेापसर्गसंबन्धः
Par. Sek. on Pari. 50; cf also इह
स्वरादयों बाचका: चादयेो द्येोतका इति भेदः
|Bhā$a V¥. om P.I.1.37.The Karma-
pravacanīyas are definitely laid
doWn aS dyotaka, cf. क्रियाया द्योतको
नार्ये न संबन्धस्य वाचकः । नापि क्रियापदाक्षेपी
संबन्धस्य तु भेदकः Vākyapadiya II.206;
the case affixes are said to be
any way, *vācaka? or *dyotaka?; cf.
वाचिका द्येोतिका वा स्युर्द्वित्वादीनां विभच्तयः
Vakyapadiya II. 165.
द्योतन cOnveyance of sense indirectly
9r by suggestion, and not directly.
See द्येोतक above.
द्येोत्य (SenSe) COnveyed by suggestipn
indirectly and not directly ex-
preSSed, aS in the case of karma-
prawacanīya$, the k't affixes and
the tad. afiixes; cf. अनुशव्दो लक्षणे
द्योत्ये कर्मप्रवचनीयसंज्ञो,. भवति ँ Kāś. on
P.. ]I. 4.84.
द्रव्य Substance, as opposed to गुण pro-
perty and क्रिया action which exist
on drawya. The word सल्व is used
by Yāska, Patini and other gram-
rmarians in a very general 'sense
as SOmething in cOmpleted forma-
tiQn or existence as opposed to
*bhāva? or kriya or werbal activity,
and the wOrd द्रब्य iS uSed by old
grammarianS aS Synonymous with '
सत्त्व; cf. चादयेऽसत्वे । चादयो निपातसंज्ञा
भबन्ति न चेत्सत्त्वे वर्तन्ते, cf. Kā$ orn P.
|I. 4.57; cf. S..K. also on P. I. 4.57.
(2)The word द्र6य iS also found used
in the sense of an individual
object, aS OppOsed tO the genus or
generic notion ( अाकृति ); cf. द्रव्याभि-
धानं व्याडिः, M. Bh. on P. I. 2. 64.
Mart. 45. (3)The word द्रव्य is found
used in thc sense of Sadhana or
means in Tait. Prāti. cf. तत्र शन्द-
|द्रब्याण्युदाहरिष्याम: । शव्दरूपाणि साधनानि वर्ण-
यिष्याम: Tai, Pr. XXII. 8.
|द्रव्यपदार्थिक a grammarian who main-
tair.s that *dravya' or *individual
object' is the sense of words; cf.
न ह्याकृतिपदार्थिकश्य द्रव्यै न पदार्थो, द्रब्य-
पदार्थिकस्य वाकृतिर्न पदार्थ: । M. Bh. on
I.2.64 Vārt. 53. See द्रव्य.•
द्रव्यवचन expressive of substance as
their sense as opposed to गुणवचन;
cf. उभयवचना ह्येते शुश्छ्रादयः द्रव्यं चाहुर्गुणं च !
|M. Bh. ora P. V.1.119.
द्रव्यवद्भाव behaviour like a dravya as
noticed in the case of the bhāwa or
kriya found in a root after a krt
afiix is added to it; cf. कृदभिहितो
भावो द्रव्यवद्भवति. M. Bh. on II.2.19,
|III.1.67 etc.
द्रव्याभिधान denotation of द्रब्य or indi-
vidual object as the sense of wOrds
as opposed to अाकृत्यभिधान i. e.
denotation of the general form
pOSsessed by objectS of the Same
class; of द्रव्याभिधानं व्याडिः P. I.2.64
Vārt. 45. See द्रव्य. →
दुत lit. rapid; the vice of rapidity in
utterance;a fault of speech especi-
ally in connection With the uttera-
nce ofvowel$ in Vedic recital when
on accOurat of haste the utteramce
of letters becomes indistinct. cf.
संदृष्टमेणीकृतमर्धकं द्रुतं विकीणैमताः स्वरदोषभा-
वनाः । M. Bh. Ahnika 1 Vārt. 18.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-205.png}}}}}}

、
द्रुतबोध
189
द्वि ९&
、 → *
दुतबोध्य name of a treatise on grarr1- ||
mar written for beginnerS by
|Bharatasena or Bharatamalla Of
|Bengal in the sixteenth century•
दुता one of the three V!'ttis or styles
of utterance mentioned in the
|Prātiśākhya works and quoted in
thg Mahābhāsya; cf.तिखेो दृत्तीरुपदिशन्तुि
वाच्चेो विलम्बितां मध्यमां च द्रुतां च । अभ्यासार्थे
द्रुत॒ां वृक्तिं प्र॒येोगार्थे तु, मध्यमाम् । शिष्याणा-
र्मुपदशार्थे कुयीद् बृत्ति विलम्विताम् l R. Pr.
XIII. 18, 19; cf. ये हि द्रुतायां वृत्तैो वर्णा-
स्त्रिभागाधिकास्ते मध्यमायां, " ये ' मध्यमायां
वर्णास्त्रिभागाधिकास्ते विलाग्बितायाम् [ M. Bh.
on P. I.1.70, Vārt. 4. The utte-
rance Of a letter takes ई rd time
more in the मध्यमबृाति than in the
द्रुतवृत्ति, while in the विलभ्वितवृति it
takes हूँ rd more than in the
मध्यमवृत्ति. In short, the utterance of
the same letter takes in the
three w!ttis, Druta, Vilambita and
Madhyama the quantity of time
in the proportion of 9: 12:16 res-
pectively.
**\ → →	→
द्रोणिका a kind of the position of the
tongue at rhe time Of prOnounc-
ing the letter षू,.
व्द्वन् name of a compound, formed o F
two or rraore words used in the
Sarme case, showing their collection
together; cf. चार्थे द्वन्द्वः P. II.2.29.
Out of the four meanings of the
indeclinable *च, wiz.
अन्वाचय, इतरेतरयोगा and समाहार, the
dvat.dva compound is sanctioned
in the last two senses only called
इतरेतरद्वन्द्व (as in प्लक्षन्यग्रोधौ etc.) and
समाहारद्वन्द्व (as in वाक्त्वचम् etc.) respec-
tively• For details see Mahābhasya
On II.2.29. The dvandva compo-
und takes place only when the
speaker intends mentioning the
Several objects together i.e• when
there is, in short, सहविवक्षा orयुगपदधि-
करणवचनता; cf. अनुस्यूतव भेदाभ्यां एका
||
प्ररट्येापजायते ! यस्यां सहविवक्षां तामाहुर्द्वन्द्वै-
कशेष्बयेोः |!| Sr. Pr. II. The gendér of
a word in the द्वन्द्वसमास is that Of the
last word in the case of the इतरेत-
रद्वन्द्व, while it is the neuter gender
im the case of the समाहारद्वन्द्व.
द्वयसच् tad. affix द्वयस, in the sense of
measure, prescribed optionally
along with the affixes दद्भ्न and मात्र;
cf. ऊरू; प्रमाणमस्य ऊरुद्वयसम्; Ka$. on P.
V. 2.37; fem. ऊरुद्वयसी, cf.B'.IV. 1.15.
द्वारादि a class of words headed by
the word द्वार् which get the , aug-
ment ऐ च् (i.e. ऐ, or औौ ) placed
before the letter य or व in them,
instead of the substitution of
vpddhi, when a taddhita affीx mark-
ed with the mute letter ञ्छ्, णु Or कू
is added , to them; e. g. दौवारिकः
सौवास्तिकः, शैौवम्, शैौवनम् etc.; cf. Kaś.
on P. WII .3.4.
द्वि a term used for the dual number
in the Prātiśākhya works; cf. नेो नौ
मे मदर्थे त्रिट्टेकेषु V. Pr. II. 3 where
Uvvata has explained the words
त्रि, द्वि and एक as बहुवचन, द्विवचन and
एकवच्वन respectively.
द्वि: doubled; the term is used in
connection with reduplication in
the Kātantra and Haima gram-
|mars cl. Hem. IV.1.1, Kat.III 8.
10.
! द्विःप्रयोग doubling, putting a word or
समुच्चय, |
wOrd element twice;the words द्वित्व
and द्विर्बचन are used in the same
S6ilS62• •
द्विःस्पृष्ट a word used many times
synonymOusly with दुःस्पृष्ट; the
letterS छ्,ङ्क्ष्ल्डू, and upadhmānīya(टश्*म्)
are termed द्वि:स्पृष्ट or दु:स्पृष्ट.
द्विकर्मक a term used in connection
with rOOtS gOverning two objects
or twO wOrd$ in the accusative
case, e-टू. दुड् in, गां दोग्धि , पयः; the
term कर्मे accOrding to the strict



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-206.png}}}}}}

कायैयोग
190
द्वित्व
definition gf the term कर्तुरीप्सिततमं कर्म
or अाप्यं कर्म .applies, t9 one of the
two, which iS called the प्रधानकमं or
the direct Object, the other one,
which, in fact, is related to the ver-
bal activity by relation ofany other
kāraka or instrument is taken as
|karmakāraka and hence put in
the accusative case.
see Mahābhāsya and KaŚikā on
P.I.4.51. Some roots in their
causal formation govern twO
objects out of which one object is
the actual one while the other is
the subject of the primitive root.
e.g. गमयति माणवकं ग्रामम्; वोधयति माणवकं
धर्मम्; cf. Kāś. on P.I.4.52. See for
details Mahābhāsya on P. I. 4.52.
कार्ययोग simultaneous occurrence of
two grammaticaloperations result-
ing into a conflict and creating a
doubt as to which of the two
should take place first; cf.द्विकार्ययेगी
हि विप्रतिषधः M.Bh. on P.I.1.3 Wart.
6; I.1.12; etc. The term विप्रतिभ्रेध
occurring in the rule विप्रतिभ्रेधे परं
क,र्यम् P. I.4.2 is evidently defined
in this way by the word द्विकार्ययोग
in the Mahābhāsya.
द्विखण्ड a compound exprcssion or
word Separated into two by ava-
graha in the Padapātha; the word
i$ misstated as दुखण्ड by sorne
Wedic rcciters.
द्विगु name of a cOmpound with a
numeral as the first member. The
compound iS looked upon as a
Subdivision of the Tatpuruga com-
pOund• The dvIgu compound,
having collection as its general
Sense, is declined in the ' neuter
gender and Singular number;
when it ends in अ the fetn. afiix
ङ is added generally, e. g. पञ्चपात्रम्,
त्रिभुवनम्, पञ्चमूली. The Dvigu com
pound al$o takes place ' when a ;
|For details |
karmadharaya cOmpound, having
a Word denoting a direction or a
numeral as its first member, (a)
has a tad. affix added to it e.'g.
पञ्चकपालः (पुरोडाशः), or (b) has got a
WOrd placcd after it in a com-
pOund e. g. पञ्चगवधनः or (c) has a
Collective sense e. g. पञ्चपूली; cf. ताद्धे-
ताथोंर्त्ततरपदसमाहारे चं ( P. II. 1.51 ) also
cf. Kāś. and S. K. on P.II.1.51,52.
द्विगुपाद a popular name given by
grammarians to the fourth quar.
ter of the second Adhyāya of
Pāरे॒ini's Asādhyāyi which begins
with the stātra द्विगुरेकवचनम् II. 4.1.
द्वितीय the second consonant in the
five groups of consonants, •surd
aspirate, cf. T. Pr. I. 11; V. Pr. I.
54, R. Pr. VI. 15; it is called
द्वितीयत्पर्श also.
द्वितीयद्विर्वचन the reduplication of a
rOot b8ginning with a vowel
prescribed by the rule अजादेर्द्वितीायस्य
P. VI. 1.2,
द्वितीया the second caSe; the accusa-
tive case, mainly prescribed for a
Word which is related as a. karma-
|kāraka tO the activity in the sen-
tence; cf. P. II. 3.2 to 5,
द्वित्व doubling, reduplication pres-
cribed for (l) a rOot in the 'per-
fect tense excepting the cases
where the affix अाम् is added to
the rOot before the personal end-
ing; e. g• बभूव, चकार, ऊर्गुनाव etC.
cf. P• VI. l , l, 2; (2) a root before
the, Vikarana affixes स॒न्, यङ्, श्ळु
at३d चङ् e. g. बुभूषति, चेक्रीयत, चर्करीति,
जुहोति, अचीकरत् etc. cf. P. VI. 1.9--
l l ; (3) a word ending in अम्.
( णमुळुट् ) in the sense of repetition,
e. g• स्मारं स्मारं वक्ष्ये, भोजं भोजं व्रजति cf.
अाभीक्ष्णेये द्वे भवतः P. VIII. 1.12 Vart.
7; (4) any word (a) in the sense of
constant Or frequent action, (b) in
thc scnse of repetition,(c) showing



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-207.png}}}}}}

2、
द्विदण्ङयादि
reproach, or Scorn, Or quality in
the sense of its incomplete pOSSeSS-
ion, or (d} in the vocative case at j
the beginning ofa sentence in SOrme
specified senses ; reduplication is
|also prescribed for the prepositions
परि, प्र, सम्, उप, उद्, उपरि, अधि, अधसू
in some specified senses cf.
|P.. VIII,. 1.1 to l5. A letter' ex-
cepting हूं and रर्, is also repeated,
if so desired, when (a) it occurS
after the letter ह् or र् which is pre-
ceded by a vowel e g. अर्कः अर्द्धम्
etc. cf. VIII. 4.46; or when (b) it
is preceded by a vowel and follow-
ed by a consonant e. g. दद्धत्यत्र,
मद्भुवत्र cf. P. VIII. 4,47. ' For
details see Kāś. on V]III. 4.46-52.
The word द्वित्व is sometimes uSed
in the sense of the dual number ;
cf. Ka$. on P. I.2.51. The words
द्वित्व, द्विवैचन and द्विरुत्त are generally
uSed as synonyms. Pānini generally
uses the Word द्वे. For द्वित्व in Wedic
ILiterature cf. R.. Pr. VI. 1.4; T.
Pr. XIW. 1-8 V. Pr. IW. 10i-118.
द्विदणङयादि a, class of words, which
are headed by the word द्विदण्डि
and which are all bahuwr tihi com-
pounds, to which the affix इ is
found added as a Samāsānta affix
e- g- द्विदण्डिः, सपदि etc.; cf. Kāś. on
P. W. 4.128.
द्विरुक्ति repetition of a word, or of a
letter or of a root. See द्वित्व.
द्धेरुच्चारणा phonemic utterance a
Second time; see द्विल्व.
द्विरूपवत् phonetmically repeated; see
द्वत्व्
र्मूि repetitiOn, reduplication. See
3.
द्विर्वचन see द्वित्व and द्विरुक्ति; the word
iS wery frequently used in the
Mahābhā$ya instead of द्वित्व. cf.
M. Bh. 9n I. l . Ahnika 1, I. 1.7,
l0, 57, 59. etc. etc.
191
द्विहल्
द्विवचन a case affix of the dual num-
ber; dual mumber; a word in the
dual number; cf. M. Bh • .9fपू I•
1.11, T. 4.21 etc.; cf. द्वयोरथैयेर्वैचनं
द्विवचनम् KāŚ. on P. V. 3.57•
द्विवचस् a word in the dual number ;
cf. घष्टादयश्च द्विवचेोन्तभाजः R. Pr. I• 28
where the word द्विवचस्त् is explain-
ed as द्विवचनाभिधायिनः by Uvvata•
द्विवत् a syllable consisting of two
consonants; cf. R• T. 245.
द्विवर्ण ( 1) a repeated consonant; cf.
द्विवर्णमेकवर्णवत्, V. Pr. IV. l 44; (2)
doubling, ' repetition; cf. ह्रस्वपूर्वोाँ
ङकारो द्विवर्णम् T. Pr. 1X. 18; cf. alsO
T. Pr. XIV. 1. R. Pr. IX. 18.
द्विस् double, reduplicated; the word
is fीrequently used in connection
with doubling of cOnsOnants Or
words in the Prāti$ākhya Litera-
ture as also in	the Katantra,
Sãkajāyana and Haima grammars
cf. R.. Pr. VI. 1, XV. 5, V. Pr.
IV. 101, R, T. 264; cf. also Kat.
III. 8.10, Sāk. IW. 1.43; Hem.
|IV. 1. 1.
द्विसन्धि a kind of विवृत्ति or intervaI of
time in the pronunciation of two
consecutive wowels, which as a
result Of twO euphonic changes
has a wOwel preceded by a vowel
and followed also by a vowel;
e. g. अभूदुभा उ ॐशवे, R. Pr. II. 44.
pOSSeSSed of two voWels, dis-
syllabic; cf. न पदे द्विस्वरे नित्यम् T.
Pr. XVI. 17.
द्विस्स्पृष्ट a. term use:d for an
upadhmāniya letter or a phonetic
clément reSulting from a visarga
followed by the letter पुप् or फू.
See उपध्मानीय.The word is also used
sOrnetimeS for the pronunciation ळु
of ड्, amd व्ञ्ङ्घ्ड् of द्व. See दुःस्पृष्ट. '`ञ्S、,
poSSeSSed Of twO \ consecutive
cOrā$Onants; cfतस्मात्रुड़् द्विहलः, P. VII..
4• 7l ; cf. alsO M. Bh. on VI. 1.68.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-208.png}}}}}}

द्वैधम्
j92
(&_.*\ r~«ते
धमंकांते
द्वैधम् used adverbially f@r द्विधा
in`the sense of *optionally' Or * ंin
two ways'; cf. द्वैधं शब्दानामप्रतिपत्तिः
M. Bh. on P. I. 1. 44 Wārt• 15•
द्वैपद् group of two words; an expreSS-
ion consisting of tWo words; cf. प्र
वेीच्चं नः सुमना द्वैपदाश्च R.. Pr. VIII. 2.
10; X. 3; XI. 37 etc.
दृद्यच्व् a word possessed of twO
vowels in it; disSyllabic wOrds; the
word is frequently used in Pār?ini*s
A$ंādhyāyi and Pataऐठॆjali's Mahā-
bhāgya, Kaśikā VFtti and Other
works on Pārini's grammar.
इद्यादेि a clasS of pronouns headed
by the pronoun द्वि tO which the
taddhita affixes called विभक्ति, as
prescribed by the rules of Pātaini
in the rule पञ्चम्यास्तासेल् and the
following ones, are not added• cf.
P. V. 3. 2.
द्वयूष्मन् name of a, Sarihdhi made up
of two spirants, or resulting in the
presence of two spirants or U$man
letters e. g. निष्षिध्वरीः, स्वस्साता; cf. R.
Pr. XI. 22.
ध
ध् (l) fourth letter of the dental
claSS(तवर्ग) possessed of the proper-
ties नादानुप्रदान, घेोष, कण्ठसंवृतत्व and
महाष्ाण; (2) substitute ध्रुध् for the ह् of
नहूं before a * jhal ? consonant " or
at the end of a word e. g. नद्धम्,
उपानत्; cf. P. VIII. 2. 34; (3)
substitute ध्रुघ् for the letters त् and अ॒थ्
placed after a fourth letter, e. g:
लब्धुम्, देोग्धा etc. cf. P. VIII. 2. 40.
ध a technical term in the jainen-
dra Vyakarāna for the term सर्व-
नीमस्थान of':Pārini used for the first
five ca$e affixes सु, औौ, असू, अम्, औौ
and इ (nOm.. and acc. pl.' neuter
gender); cf. P. I. 1. 42, 43.
धनजित् name of the author ofa short
met rical treatise On rOotS named
धातुकल्पलतिका.
ध्मुञ्म् tad. affix optionally substitu-
ted in the place of the :tad. affix धा
after the words द्वि and त्रि; e. g.
द्विधा, द्वैधम्, त्रिधा, त्रैधम् ; cf. P. V. 3.45.
धरप्र्णीधर a grammarian of the six-
teenth century at the court of
Udayasifimha who Wrote a commen-
tary on the stitras of Panini which
was named वैयाकरणस॒र्वस्व as also a
commentary On the Sik$a of Pānini.
धमै defined as ऋषिसंप्रदाय, the tradi-
tional practices laid down by the
sages for posterity ; cf.केवलमृधिसंप्रदायेो
धर्म इति कृत्वा याज्ञिकाः शास्रेण अनुविदधते M.
Bh. I. 1. Ahnika I ; cf. alsO धर्मशास्त्रं
in एर्वे च कृत्वा धर्मशास्त्रं प्रवृत्तम्, M. Bh.
9n P. I. 2. 64, as also धर्मसूत्रकाराः in
नैवेश्वर् अाज्ञ!पयति नापि धर्भसूत्रकीराः पठन्ति
अपवाँदैरुत्सगी बाध्यन्तामिति Mī. Bh. on I.
l.47; (2} religious merit, cf. धमाँपदे-
शनमिदे शास्त्रमास्मन्ननवयवेन शास्त्राथ: संप्रतीयत,
M. Bh. on P. WK. l. 84, cf also
ज्ञाने धमै इति चेचच्तथाऽधर्मः M. Bh. I. 1.
Ahnika l ; ' 3) property possessed
by a thing or a letter or a word.
e. g. वर्णधर्म; cf. Kāś. on P.
' I. 2.29; cf. alsO Kāś. on P. II. 1,
55, II. 3.33, WIII. 1. 4. cf. also
|R. Pr. III. 8, 13 XIV. I etc.;
( 4 ) the characteristic of being
in a SubStatace; in the phrase अयं
घट: the dharma, viz.घटत्व is predica-
ted of this (इदम्) or, in other words
the designation pot ( घटसंज्ञा ) is the
predication; the explanation in
short, can be given as घटत्ववान् इदं-
पदाथैः or घटाभिन्नः इदंपदाथैः
धर्मकीर्ति a Jain scholar called by .
the name कीर्तेि also, who was the
author of धातुप्रत्ययपञ्जिका and रूपावतार
a well-known treatise On rootS;
cf. बेापदेवमहाग्राहग्रस्तो वामनदिग्गजः । कींर्तरेव
प्रसङ्गेन माधवेन समुद्धृतः|॥| He is believed



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-209.png}}}}}}

धर्मिन् 193 ,
धातु
to have been the first grammarian
who arranged the stitras of Pānini
accOrding to the Subject matter•
धर्मिन् (1)a thing possessed of proper-
ties, द्रव्यः cf. धर्मशब्देन धमाँ भण्यते Kāś.
on P.III.3.77;cf. also the cOmrmon
expression धर्मिग्राहकमानात् |Par• Sek.
on Pari. 55, 66, 79, 82; (2) the
same as dharma in rare cases
accOrding to the dictum धमैधर्मिणेो-
रभेदोपचारः e. g. वर्णैकं देहि, पुराणैकं देहिः
cf. Durghaga Vr. on P, II. 1. 49.
धा tad.affix (1) applied to a nu meral
in the sense of a kind ( प्रकार ) or a
division of time, e.g.एकधा, द्विधा, त्रिधा
etc.; cf. P.V.3.42, 43; (2) applied
to बहु to shOw divisions of a short
time;e.g. बहुधा दिवसस्य भुङ्तेत and बहुधा
मासस्य भुइड्तेतं;cf. Kāś. on P.V.4.20.
धातु a root; the basic word of a
verbal form,defined by the Bhā3ya-
|kāra as क्रियावचनो धातुः or even
as भाववचनेा धातुः, a word denoting
a verbal activity. Pānini has
not defined the term as such,
but he has given a long list of
rOञ्7ts under ten groups, named
da$agati, which includes about
2200 roots which can be called
primary roots as contrasted with
secondary roots. The secondary
rOOtS can be divided into
two main groups ( l ) roots
derived from roots ( धातुजधातवः )
and (2) rootS derived from nouns
( नामधातव: ). The roots derived
from rootS can further be classified
intO .three main subdivisions : (a)
causative roots or णिजन्त, (b) desi-
derative rOots or सन्नन्त, (c) inten-
siv६, roots or यङन्त . and यङ्ळुगन्त;
while roots derived from nouns or !
denOrriinative roots can further be
divided into क्यजन्त, काम्यजन्त, क्यङन्त,
क्यषन्त, णिङन्त, किबन्त and the misce-
llaneOuS ones ( प्रकीर्ण ) as derived
from nouns like कण्डू ( कर्पूबृंादि ) by'
25
the application of the affix यक्.or
from nouns like सत्य,वेद, पाश, मुण्ड,मिश्र,
etc. by the application of the
affix णिच्. Besides these,	there are
a few roots formed by the applica-
tion of the afiix अाय and ईय (ईयङ्)•
AIl these roots can further be
classified into Parasmaipadin or
Parasrnaibhāga, Atmanepadin Or
Ātmanebhāsa and Ubhayapadin•
|Roots possessed of a mu{e grave
( अनुदात्त ) vowel or of the mute
consonant ङ् added to the root in
the Dhātupātha or ending in the
affixes यङ्, कयङ् etc. as alsO rOOts
in the passive vroice are termed
Atmanepadin; while roots ending
with the affix णेिच् as also' roots
possessed of a mute circumflex
vowel or a mute consonant ञ् appl-
ied to them are termed Ubhaya-
padin. All the rest are termed
|Parasmaipadin. There are some
other mute letters or syllables
applied by Pānini to the roots in
his Dhātupātha for specific purpo-
ses; e.g. ए, at the end to signify
prohibition of vp'ddhi to the penu-
ltimate अ in the aorist, e.g. अकखीत्
cf. P. VII.2.5; इर् to signify the
Optional substitution of अ or अङ्
for the affix च्लि of the aorist, e.g.
अभिदत्, अभैत्सत् ि; cf. P.III. l .57; उ
tO signify the optional application
of the augment इ ( इट् ) before क्त्वा
e.g. शमित्वा, शान्त्वा; cf. P.VII. 2. 56,
ऊ to sigmify the optional applica-
tion of the augment इ ( इट् ) e.g.
गेोता, गेोपिता, cf. P.VII.2.44; ' अा to
signify the prohibition of the aug-
ment इट् in the case of the past
pass• part. e.g• क्ष्विण्णः, स्विन्न:, cf. P.
VII.2.16; इ to signify the addition
of a raasal after the last भ्रrowel e. g.
निन्दति from निदि, cf. P. VII.1.58; ऋत
tO signify the prohibition of हृस्व to
the penultimate long wowel before



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-210.png}}}}}}

णित्रु, e. g. अश्शासत्, cf. P..WII. 4.2;ल
tosigniyि the substitution of अहूं
for च्र्लि in the aorist, e.g• अगमत्, cf.
P. III.1.55; ओो to signify the Sub-
stitution of न् for त् of the past
pass.part. e.g. लग्नः, अापीँन्:, सूत:*.|र्दून:
etc.;' cf. P. VIII. 2.45. Besides
these,the mute syllablesञ्ञि, दु and ड
are prefixed for specific purpOse$;
cf. P. III.2.187, III.3.89 ' and III.
3,88. The term धातु iS a Suffici-
ently old one which is taken by
|Painini from ancient grammarianS
and which is found used in the
Nirukta and the Prātiśākhya
works, signifying the *elemental
(radical)base' for nouns whichare
āll derivable frotn roots accOrding
to the writers of the Nirukta wOrkS
and the gratmmarian Sākaर्धुāyana;
cf. नाम च धातुजमाह निरुते व्याक्ररणे शकटस्य
च तोक्रम् M. Bh. on P. III.3.1. Some
scholars have divided rOOtS intO
six categories; cf. तत्र धात्वः षोढा
(a) परिपाठिताः भूवादयः, (b) अपरिपठिता
अान्देीळयत्यादयः, (c) परिपठितानरिपीठता:
( सूत्रपठितः ) खुकुरुकम्भस्तम्भेत्यादयः, (d)
प्रत्ययधातवः सनाद्यन्ता:, (e) नामधातवः
कणूङ्कुादयः, (f) , प्रत्ययन॒ामधातवः हेोडगल्भुह्री-
बप्रर्घृतय:; cf. Srihgāra Prak. I. For
details see M.Bh. on P.I.3.1 as
also pp 255, 256 Vol. VII Vyā-
kara'1a-Mahābhष्a5ya published by
the D.E. Society, Poona.
धातुकल्पलतिका a short treatise on the
roots of the different conंjugations
written by a grammarian named
|Dhanafंjaya.
|धातुकारिकावली a grammatical work in
verse written by Varadarāja, the
pupil of Bhaर्भृ¢Qji Dik$ंita who iived
in the 17th century. Besides
Kārikāwali, Varadaràja wrote
लघुकौमुदी and मध्यकौमुदीं also.
धातुदीपिका (1) name of a comment-
ary on the Kavikalpadruma of
194
धातुप्रदप .
|Bopadeva by Rāmālarihkāra; (2)
name of a commentary on the
Kavikalpadruma by Durgādāsa
who wrote a commentary on
the Mugdhabodha also.
ध्ातुपाठ ( 1) name given in general to
the Several collectionS of roots
given generally with their mean-
ingS by grammarianS belonging
to the wariouS differemt $chools of
grammar. These collectionS are
given as neceSSary appendices
named खिल to their grammars by
the well known grammarian9 of
Sanskrit such as 'Pānini, Sākatā-
yana, and Others; (2) a Srnall trea-
tise Gn roots written by Bhimasena
of the 14th century.
धातुपाठवृत्ति a commentary Un the
JDhatupajtha by Nage$a.
धातुपारायण a grammatical treatise
dealing with rOOtS written as a su
pplementary WOrk by Jumaranan-
din to his grammar Work called
RaSawati,Which itSelf waS a, thorou-
ghly revised and enlarged edition
of the रसवती a commentary Written
by Kramadi$vara on hiS OWn gram-
mar named संक्षितिसार.•Jumaranandin
is beliewed to have been a Jain
writer who liwed in the fifteenth
century A.D.
धातुष्प्रकाश a work dealing with roots
Written aS a Supplementary W0rk
by Balarāma-Paficānana to his
own grammar named Prabodha-
Prakā$a.
धातुप्रत्ययपञ्जिका a, work dealing with
verbal forms written by Dharma••
kirti, a Jain gramimarian of the
eighth century.
धातुप्रदीप a work dealing with verbal
forms written by Maitreya Rak-
$ंita, a Buddhist writer atnd a
famous grammarian belonging tO
the eastern part of India whO



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-211.png}}}}}}

धातुमञ्जरी
lived in the middle of the t welfth
century. He is b <lieved to have
written many scholarly works in
connection with Pānini's graimmar
out of which the Tantrapradīpa is
the most important One. The
work Dhātupradipa is quoted by
Saraरे॒adeva, who was a contem१-
porary of Maitreya, R.akंita, in his
|Durghatःavj tti on P. II. 4• 52.
धातुमञ्जरी called also धातुसँग्रह attribut-
ed to a gramrmarian namcd Kāśi-
natha.
धातुमाला a work on rootS in verse-
form att!ibuted to a grammarian
named I$warak3nta..
धातुरत्नमञ्जरी a treatise dealing with
roots believed tO have been written*
by Rāmasiऽंiahavarman.
धातुरत्नाकर a work dealing with roots
beliewed to hawe been Written by
Nārayaraa who was given the title
वन्द्य. He lived in the seventeenth
century ; a work named सारावलि-
ब्याकरण is also believed to hawe been
written by him.
a short list of the impor-
tant roots from the IDhātup3tha of
Pānini, given in verse by चेोंऋन[थ a
grammarian of the 17th century.
धातुलोप an elision of a portion of a
root; cf. न धातुलेोप अार्धधातुके, P.I.1 4.
धातुवृत्ति a general term applied to a
treatise discussing roots, but speci-
fically used in connection with the
Scholarly cOmmentary written by
Mādhavācārya, the reptuted scholar
and politician at the court of the
Vijayānagara kings in the four-
teenth century, on the Dhātupātha
of Patimi. The work is generally
referred to as माधवीया-धातुवृक्षि to
distinguish it from ordinary com-
rmentary works called also धातुवृच्ति
written by grammarians like
Vijayānanda and others.
t95
ध्ान्यपाद
धातुव्याकरण a grammar dealing with
verbs believed to have been written
by VahgaSena•
धातुसैबन्धपाद conventional name givén
t6 the fourth pāda of Panini's
Asādhyāyī which begins with the
Stitra धातुसंबन्धे प्रत्ययाः P. III.4.l
धात्तूपदश enumeration or recital of *
ro०ts in the IDhātupātha ;cf. प्रकृत्युप-
पदे!पाधयश्चेापदिष्टाः| क्र धातूंपदेशे प्रातेिपादिको-
पदेशेश व्व | M. Bh. on P. III. l. l.
धात्वथै lit. meaning of a root, the
verbal activity, named' क्रिया or भावः .
cf. धात्वर्थः क्रिया; M. Bh. on III.2.
84, III.2. 115. The verbal activity
is described generally to be made
up of a series Of continuous Sub-
ordinate activities carried on by
the different k3rakaS Or agentS
and instruments of verbal activity
helping the procesS of the main
activity,. When the proceSS of the
verbal activity is complete, the
completed activity is looked upon
aS a Substantive or drawya and a,
word denoting it, such aS पाक,or यागा
doeS not get cOnjugatiOnal affixes,
but it iS regularly declined like a
noun. Just as स्वार्थ, द्रव्य, लिङ्गं, संख्या,
and कारक are given as प्रातिपदिकार्थ,
in the same manner क्रिया, काल, पुरुष,
वचन Or संख्या, and कारक are given as
घात्वर्थ, as they are shown by 'a
verbal form, although strictly
speaking verbal activity (क्रियाor भाव)
alone is the sense of a root, as
stated in the Mahābhāgya. FQr
details see Vaiyāk.Bh.Sāra, where
it is said that fruit ( फल) and effort
( व्यापार X are expresSed by a root,
cf. फलव्यापारयेोधतुः. The five senses
given above are in fact comveyed
not by a rOot, but by a verb · or
अाख्यात or तिङन्त.
' धान्यपाद् a popular name given to the



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-212.png}}}}}}

धरण
196
ध्यै
second pāda of the fifth adhyāya
of Pataini?s Aईंjādhyāyi possibly
because the pāda begins with the
Stitra धान्यानां भवने क्षेत्रे खञ्जु, P. V.2.1•
धारण (1) suppression of a consonant,
out of twO successive cOnSOnantS
which is looked upon aS a
fault of recital; e.g. ह्वयामि when
recited as वयाामि; ef. धारणमनुपलब्धिः
Uvvata on R.Pr.XIV. 6; (2) repe-
tition of a consonant which iS alSo
a fault; e.g. ज्ञ्येातिष्कृत् for ज्योतिष्कृत्:
cf. Uvvata on XIV.6;cf. alsoधारयन्त;
परक्रमे etc. explained by Uvvata as
विलम्बमानाः परक्रमं कुर्वन्ति where धारयन्तः
means *lengthening' or*prolonging'
cf. R.Pr. on XIV.23; (3) the pecu-
llar position of the mouth (मुखसं-
धारण्गम् ) by which a double conSO-
narat is recited as a single one, cf.
द्विवणैमेकवर्णवत् ( एकप्रयत्ननिर्वत्यै ) धारणात्
e.g• व्यात्तम्, कुक्कुटः, cf. V.Pr. IV.144.
धि (1)a technical term used for sonant
consonants in the Prātiśākhya and
old grammar works; cf. धि शेषः V.
Pr:I.53, explained by Uvvata, aS
वगांणां उत्तरास्त्रयः यरलवहकाराश्च धिः V.Pr.
I.53; the term धि corresponds to
हश्छ् Of Pānini; (2) personal ending
धि substituted for .हि of the impera.
2nd sing. e.g. जुहुधि, छिन्द्धि, भिन्द्धि,
श्रुधि, रारन्धि etc.; cfP.V.4.101-103.
& a technical term in the jainendra
Vyākarat}a for धातु (a root) which
ंis used freely by the ancient gra-
rmnraarians and Pānini.
ई (1|Xthe augment धू prefixed to the
cOrasonant सु following upon the
conSOnant ड् or न् Occurring at the
end	of a word;e.g. श्वलिटूत्सोये,
महान्त्साये etc.; cf. P. VIII.3.29; (2)
technical short term for धातु (root);
the technical term is धुष्, 'but the
मnOtm. sing. used is धुट्ट्रं; (3) a
technigal terrra standing for con-
SonantS excepting Semi-vOwels and
nasals; cf. धुटश्च धुटि Kàt. III.6.51.
The term is used in the Kātantra
Vyakarar]a. It corresponds to the
term झर् of Panini.
धुना tad. affix called Vibhakti tad.
affix, applied to the , word
when इदम् is changed into अ; cf.
इदमः अश्भावः धुना च प्रत्ययः Kāś. on P.
V. 3.17.
धुष् a short term for धातु or root.See धुट्.
a class of words headed by
the word धूम to which the tad.affix
अक ( बुञ् ) is added in the misc€lla-
neous ( शैषिक ) senses; e. g. घौमकः
खाण्डक: etc.; cf KaŚ. on P.IV.2.l27.
धृत or धृतप्रचय a kind of original
gravevowel turned intO a circum-
flex one which is called प्रचय umleSS
followed by another aCute or
circumflex vowel. The Taittiriya
Prātiśākhya has mentioned seven
varieties of this *pracaya' Out of
which धृतप्रचय or धृत is one. For
details see Bhā5ya Ora धृतः प्रचयः
कौण्डिन्यस्य, T.Pr.XVIII.3.
`धय tad. affix धेय applied to the words
भाग, रूप and नाम in the Same senSe
as those words possess;e.g•भागधेयम् ,
cf. Kā$. on P. V.4.25.
धमात name of a fault in the prOnun-
ciatiom of a wowel when on
account of fullness of breath it
appears aS uttered long ( दीर्घ ),
aithough really it is shOrt; cf.
श्वासभूयिष्ठतया हृस्वोपि दीर्घ इव लक्ष्यते,
Kaiyata on I• 1• Ahnika ' 1• Vārt•
|18.
ध्यम् tad. affix ध्यमुञ्जुम् substituted for
धा optionally after the wOrd एक
e. g. ऐकध्यम्, एकधा; cf. P. V• 3•44.
ध्यै krt afiix ध्यै seen in Vedic Lite-
rature, substituted for त्या Option-
ally; e, g. साढयै, साढ्वा; cf. P. V•
3.113.	॥	→



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-213.png}}}}}}

श्घुव
भुटुच (1) fixed,stationary, as contrasted
with mowing (ध्रुव) which is termed
अपादान and hence put in the abla-
tive case; cf. श्रुवमपायेऽपादानम् P. I.
4.24; (2) repeated sound ( नाद )
of a third or a fourth consOnant
of the class consOnants when it
occurs at the end of the first
word of a split up compound
word; cf. R. Pr. VI. l ! and
XI. 24.
ध्रौव्य fixed; of a stationary nature;
of त्तेोऽधिकरणे च ध्रौव्यग्ाांतिप्रत्यवसानार्थेभ्यः
P. III. 4.76. 85
ध्वनि (1) sound; cf. ध्वनिं कुर्वन्नेवमुच्यत-
शब्दं कुरु शव्दं मा कार्षाँः M. Bh. I. 1.
Āhnika l ; cf. also Vāk. Pad. I.
77|; cf. also स्फेोट: शव्दः, ध्वनिः शब्दगुणः,
M.Bh. on I. 1.70 Vārt. 5.. ध्वनि ' or
SOund is Said to be the indicator
(सूचक or व्यञ्जक) of स्फेोँट the eternal
SOund.
ध्वनित Suggested, as opposed to उत्त
expreSSed; the word is found fre-
quently used in the Paribhāgen-
duśekhara and other works in
cOnnection with such dictums as
are not actually made, but indi-
cated in the Mahābhāsya.
'ध्वम् personal-ending of the sec.
PerS• pl. Atmanepada, substituted
for छ् of the 10 lakāras.
'ध्चत् persOnal-ending in Vedic
I.iterature, substituted for ध्वम् of
the sec• pers. pl. Atmanepaतेa;
e: g•, वारयध्वात् for वारयध्वम् cf. P.
VII. 1.42.
*वन्न the second out of the seven
Positions of voice in the Veda
recital which are-उपांशु, ध्वान, निमद,
उपार्वदमत्, मन्द्र, मध्यम and तार.
ध्वे personal-ending of the sec.. pers.
Pl• Atmanepadā in the present
and perfect tenses.
197 न
न् fifth consonant of the dental class
of consonants Which is possessed
of the properties घेोष, नादानुप्रदान,
अल्पप्राणत्व, संवृतकण्ठत्त्र and अानुनासिक्य. In
Panini's grammar the nasal consO-
nant न् (a)ंis added aS an augment
prescribed'चै\नुट् or नुम् which
originally n aS न्, but after-
wards chāngd into अनुस्वार or
परसवर्ण as rejईred, as for example
in पयांसि, यर्शाँसैि, निन्दति, वन्दति etc.;
cf. P. VII. 1.58-73, VII. 1.79-
83; V'III. 3.24; (b) is changed
into ए॒ण् when it directly follows
upon ऋ, ऋ, र् or ष्थ् or even
intervened by a vowel, a
7 semivowel except छ् , a guttural
cOnSOnant, a labial consonant
Or an anusvāra; cf. ]P. VIII.
4.1•1-3l. (c) is substituted for the
final म् of a rOot, e. g. प्रशान्, प्रतान्
cf. P. VIII. 2.64, 65.
न (1) the consonant न् (see न् above)
With the wowel added to it for'
facility of utterance, cf. T. Pr.
I. 2l ; (2) tad• affix न added to
words headed by पामन् in the sense
Of pOssessiOn; e. g. पामनः, हेमनः etc.,
cf. P•V• 2.100; (3) tad. affix न as
found in the word ज्येात्स्ना derived
from ज्येोतिधु, cf P. V. 2.1I4; (4)
ufष्ādi affix न as found in ' thé
wQrdस्येोनः; cf. Kāś. on P. VI.4.19;
(5) th६ kमृ॒t .affix नङ् as also नन्
preScribed after the roots यज्ञ, याच्च,
यत्, विच्छ्, प्रच्छ्, रक्षु and स्वपू , e $ट• य:,०
याच्ञ्ञा, प्रश्नः etc:, cf. P. III. 3.90, 91;
(6) the,ग्n5gative particle न givefi
by Paऐini as नञ्न् and referred'fo in
the sarne way, which (i.e. न.) when
compoप्unded with a following
W9rd, i$ Çhanged into अ or अन् or
retained in rare cases as for in-
*tàर्मु६:६.in न॒श्त्र्राट्, नासत्यौ, नक्षत्रम् etc.
cf.P.WI.3,73-75;(7) tad.affix ने (नञ्)



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-214.png}}}}}}

नकरे
applied to the words खुत्रीं and र्धुस्
in senses giv&n frpm P. IV. 1.92 to
V. 2.1 e. g. खैत्रैणं, पॉस्नम् cf. IV. 1-87.
नकार the consonant न to which the
vowel अ and the affix क्रार are
added for fः cility of utterance;
e. g. तथा नकार उदय नकारे R. Pr.
IV. - ; cf. V. Pr. I. 17, 2l.
नङ् kpt afiix न applied to the roots
येजु, याच्, यत् and others in the sense
of verbal actiwity; e. g. यज्ञ; याच्ञ्ञ्ञां,
यत्नः etc. cf. P. 1II. 3.90, 9i. See
न (5).
नजिङ् kFt. affix नज्ञं applied to the
roots स्वप्प्, तृष् and धृञ्जू in the sense
of * habituated' e. g. स्वप्नक् धृष्ण|छ्;
See Kā$. on P. HII. 2.172.
नश्म् the negative particle ( नञ्चू )
which pOSSeSses the six senses
which are sketched as सादृश्यं तदभावश्च
तदन्यत्वं तदल्पता l अप्राशस्त्यं विरोधश्च नञर्था;
षट् प्रकीर्तिताः and which are res-
pectively illuStrated by the
examples अनिक्षु: शरः, भूतले घटेीं नास्ति,
अघट: पट:, अनुदरमुदरं तरुण्याः, अब्राह्मणो
वार्धुत्रिकः and असुर: दैत्यः । See न (6).
नञ्तत्पुरुष a compound with न as its
first member which is changed into
अ Or अन्म्, or remains unchanged,
the indeclinable न (नञ्य् ) possessing
any One of the six senses given
above under न्नं (6); e. g अब्राह्मणः,
अनश्वः, नमुचेिः etc.; cf. P. VI. 3:
73-77,
नञ्समास a compound with न ( नञ् )
aS itS first member; the term is
found used in the Mahābhāsya
for both the नञ्तत्पुरुष as well as the
नञ्बहुत्रहि c9mpounds; cf. M. Bh. on
|P.I.4.1 Vārt, l9, also on P. II.1.1.
नञ्स्वरबलीयस्त्व the superiority, or
strength of the accent caused by
नञ्समास which sets' . aside the
accent caused by the case afix;
cf. विभक्तिस्वरान्नञ्स्वरो बलीयान् P. VI,
2.158 Vārt. 13,
198
नदी
नडादि (l) a class of words headed by
the word नड tO which the tad. affix
अायन ( फक् ) is added in the sense
of गोत्र ( grandchild and further
descendants); e. g, नाडायनः, चारायणः;
cf. Kā$. on P. IV.1. 99; (2) a class
of words headed by नड to which
the affix ईय (छ) is added, together
with the augment क placed after
the word and before the affix, in
the four senseS preScribed in P.
IV.2. 67-70; e.g. नडकीयम् , प्ठ्छ्क्षकीयम्;
cf. Kā$. on P. IV. 2. 91*
नत cerebralized '; changed into ए॒ण्.
The change of the consOnant नेन्
into ए॒ण् is called नति in the old
|Prātiśākhya works; cf. स्पशै वेोष्मणि
चानते R. Pr. IV. 1l.
नति lit. inclination, bending down;the
word is used generally in. the tec-
|hmicalsense Of *cerebralization* but
applied to the change Of न्, intO णुण्
as also that of रम् into षूञ्ः cf. दन्त्यस्य
मूर्धन्यापत्तिर्नतिः, V. Pr.I. 42. The root
नम् is used in the sense of * cere-
bralizing ' or * being cerebraliz-
ed ? very frequently in the Prātiśā-
khya works; e. g• the word नम्यते
is used in the sense of * is cerebra-
lized '; नमयति in the sense of
*cerebralizes' and नामिंन् in the
sense of * causing cerebralization ';
cf. ऋकारादयो दश नामिनः स्वराः, पूर्वो
नन्ता नंतिषु नम्यमुत्तरम् R.- Pr. I. 27.
नदोa technical term applied in Pānini's
gratmmar to words in the feminine
gender ending in ई and ऊ excep-
ting a few like स्त्री,श्री, भ्रू and otherS;
it is optionally applied to words
ending in इ and उ, of course in
the fem. gender, before case affix-
es of the dative, ablative, genitive
and locative sing. The term was
probably in use before'Pānini and
was taken from the fem. word नदी
which was taken as a model. Very



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-215.png}}}}}}

नद्ध
i99
नरेन्द्रस्सूरेि
probably there was a l९ng, lंst of
words fike नद ( नदट्) चेोर ( चेोरट् )
etc. which were giveh as epding
in ट् and to which the affix ई (ङीप्म्)
wa$ added for forming the femi-
nine base;the first word नदी S9
formed, was taken as a model and
a11 words in the list an d sitmilar
others were called नदी; cf. P• I•
4. 3-6.
नद्ध a fault of pronuraciation wh en a
letter, although distinctly prOnO-
unced inside the mouth, dOeS not
become audible, being h eld up
( बद्ध ) by the lips or the like. 3'he
aिult is $imilar to अम्बूकृत; cf. ओोष्ठा-
भ्यामम्बूकृतमाह नद्धम् R.Pr.XIV.2. "
नद्यादि a class of words headed by नदी,
मही and other fem. nouns to which
the taddhita affix एय (दृक्) is added
in the miscellaneous ( शैष्त्रिक ) senses;
e.g. नादेयम्, माहेयम्, वाराणसेयम्, श्रावलेतयम्,
etc.; cf. Kāś. on P.IV.2.97.
नन् kFt affix न applied to the root स्वपू
to show verbal actiwity ; e.g• स्वप्न*
cf.P.III.8.91.
नन्तृ one that causes cerebralization;
cf. पूर्वेौ नन्ता नतिषु नम्यमुत्तरम् R.Pr.I.27.
See नति.
नन्दसुन्दर a Jain grammarian who
wrote a gloss (अवचूर) on the हैमशब्दा-
नुशासनवृत्ति.
नन्दिकेश्वर an ancient grammarian who
haS written a short work in werseS
on grammar in general, which is
named नन्दिकेश्वरकारिकासूत्र. There is
a scholarly commentary upon it
written by उपमन्यु.	→
नन्दिकेश्वरकारिका a short treatise of 28
stanzas, attributed to an ancient
grammarian नन्दिकश्वर, which gives
a philosophical interpretation of
the fourteen stātras attributed to
God Siva. The authorship of the
treatise is assigned traditionally to
the Divine Bull of God Siva. See
नन्दिकेश्वर. The treatise is alsO na.med
नन्दिद्रेकश्वरकारिकासूत्र.
नन्दिकेश्वरकारिकावेिवरण called also
नन्दिकेश्वरकारिकाटीका a glOSS written
by Upamanyu on नन्दिकेश्वरकारिका.See
नान्दिकेश्धुरकारिका.
. नन्द्यदि name giver3 to the clasS
of roots beginning with the rOot
नन्द्, which includes the roots,वाश्,
मद् , दूत्रु बृध॒थ् ; शुभ॒ं and other$ aS given
inth6 Gaपूapā;र्ष्टha.These rootS have
the affix ल्युi.e. अन added to them
in the sense of agent• €.g• न्i*ट्ठ:?
वाशन:, मदनः, वर्धनः शैीिभनः, रमणः, दुर्पण:,
जनादर्नः, यबनः etc.; cf. P.III.1.134•
नपुंसक lit. a word which is neither in
the rnasculine nor in the ferminine
gender; a wQrd in th€ eut€r
gender; cf. R.Pr.XIII.:7,V• Pr. I[]I..
ॐ2; III.138; cf. P. VI.3.75, on
whi«-h the Siddhānta Kaumudi
' observes न स्त्री पुमान् नपुंसकम् l स्त्रीपुंसयोः
धुसक्रभावो निपातनात् t
नपुंसकस्वर the special accent viz. the
acute accent for the firSt vOwel
for nouns in the neuter gender
excepting those that end in इम्, as
pres6ribed by, नव्विषय्स्यानिसन्तल्य
Phitsप्रे tra 1 l ; cf. नपुंसकस्वरो मा भूत्
M,Bh. on P.VII.1.77. →
नम्य capable of being cerebralized.
See नति.
नर person ; persOnal ending; the term
is used in connection with (the
affixes of) the three perSons प्रथम,
मध्यम्, and उत्तम which are promisc-
||
uously seen SOmetimes in the
Vedic ILiterature; cf. सुतिङ्कपग्रह-
लिङ्कनराणां ... व्यत्ययमिच्छति ... M. Bh.
on III.1.85.
नरेन्द्रस्सूरि an old grammarian believed
to have been the original writer of
the SāraSvata Vyākarat?a, on the
strength of references to him in



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-216.png}}}}}}

नरेन्द्राचार्य
200
*\
नागशा
the commentary On the `3àra.Sva.ta
Vyākaraha written by क्षेमेन्द्र as alsO
references in the cOmmentary On
the Prakriyākautmudt by Vittha-
1eśa. He is believed tO have lived
in the tenth ceratury A;D.
नरेन्द्राचायै the same as नेरन्द्रसूरि. See
नलोप elision of न्, which in Pānini's
grammar is sometimes taken as
valid for certain grammatical
operations,and otherwise for other
operations; cf. नलेोपः सुप्स्वरसंज्ञातुग्विाधेिषु
कृति P.VIII.2.2.
नवगणी a term used in connection
with the first nine gat?as or conंju-
gations given by Panini in his
IDhātupatha, the tenth conjuga-
tion being looked upon aS a secOn-'
dary conंjugation•
नवाह्निकी name given to the first nine
Ahnikas or lessons of the Mahā-
bhāgya which are written in expla-
. nation of only the first pāda of the
first Adhyāya ofPaaini's A$र्तॄādhyāyr
and which contain almost all the
important theories, Statements and
problems newly introduced by
Patañjali.
नंव्यमत a terma used for the difieren-
tiation in wiews and explanations
held by the comparatively new ||!
school of Bhat¢oji Dikgita, as con-
trasted with those held by Kāśikā-
kāra and Kaiyata; the term is
sometimes applied to the differ-
ences of opinion expresSed by
|Nageśabhatta in contrast with
|Bhaftojीं Dik$ंita... For details see
p.p. 23-24 Vol.VII of the Pātafi-
jala Mahābhā$ya ed. D.E. Society,
Poona•
नष्ट elided or dropped; a term used
as a synonym of *lupta'in SOme .
commentarieS•
नष्टरूपा name , given to an anusgup
verse which has nine, ten and
eleven syllables respectively for the
first, second and third feet; e.g.
विपृच्छामि पाक्यान् देवान् R..V.I.120.4;cf.
R..Pr. XVI. 29. The verse has got
32 syllables, but it has only three
feet instead of four.
न (1) tad. affix ना as also नाञ्च् pres-
cribed respectively after ' वि and
नञ् (negative particle न ) in the
sense Of separation; e. g. विना,
नाना; (2) case ending ना substituted
for the inS. sing. affix टंा (called
alsO अाई in ancient grammars) in
the maSculine gender after words
called धि i. e. words ending in इ or
उ excepting Such as are called नदीं.
नागेश the most |reputed modern
Scholar of Pàऐini*s grammar, who
waS well-wersed in other Sāstras
alsO, who liwed in Benares in the
latter half Of the seventeenth and
the first half of the eighteenth
century. He wrote many master-
ly commentaries known by the
wOrds शेखर . and उद्दयेात on the
authoritative old works in the
different Sāstras, the total list of
his small and big works together
well nigh exceeding a hundred.
|He was a bright pupil of Hari
Dik$ita, the grandson of Bhattoji
Dīkgita. He was a renowned
teacher also, and many of the
famous scholars of grammar in
Benares and outside at present
are his spiritual descendants. He
was a Mahārāstriya Brāhmana of
Tष्asgaon in Satārā IDistrict, who
receiwed his education in BemareS.
For sOrne years he stayed under
the patronage of Rāma, the king
of Sringibera at his time. He was
very clever in leading debates in
the various Sāstras and won the



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-217.png}}}}}}

नंाञ्छंंंंंंं
→、
201
नामन
title of Sabhāpati. Out Of his
numerous works, the Uddyota On
|Kaiyata's Mahābhāज्ञेyapradipa, the
|T,aghuśabdenduśekhara Om	the
Siddhānta Kaumudi and the Pari-
bhāsenduśekhara are quite Well-
|known and studied by ewery One
who wishes to get proficiency in
Pānini's grammar. For details
see pp. 21-24 and 401-403, Vol.
VII	of the Pātafijala Mahābhā-
sya ed. D. E. Society, Poona.
नाञ्ञ्म् see ना.
नाटच्व् tad. afiix नाट applied to the
prटेfix अव optionally with the
affixes र्टीटव् and भ्रटच्छ्; e• g• अवनlट्टईं•
अवटीटम्, अवभ्रटम्; cf. Kaś. on P. V•
2.31.
नाद् (1) voice; resonance; tone; the
sound caused by the vibration Of
the vocal chords in the open
glottis when the air pasSes thrOugh
them; cf. वर्णोत्पत्त्यनन्रारभावी अनुरणनरूप:
शब्दः नादः Uddyota on M. Bh. on
|P. I. 1.9; cf. also संवृत कणेठ यः शब्दः
क्रियते स नादसंज्ञेो भवति T. Pr. II. 4; (2)
sound, articulate sound generally
without sense, which is momen-
tary; (3) the highest sound. See परा.
नादानुप्रदान having voice ( नाद ) as
their main cause; a term used in
coranection with vowels and so-
nant conSOnantS which are caused
by नादः cf. नादः अनुप्रदानं स्वरधेोष्प्रवत्सु 1
अनुप्रदीयते अनेन वर्णः इति अनुप्रदानं म्ल-
कारणम्, com. on T. Pr, II. 8.
नादि (a root) beginning with न् in
the Dhātupāं!ha as contrasted with
oāe beginning with ण् ( णादि )
whOse णू is, of course, changed into
न्म् when conjugational and other
fश्)orms are arrived at; cf. सर्वे नादयेो
णोपदेशा नृतिनान्दिनार्दिनक्रिनााष्टनाभृनाधृनु॒वर्जम्
M.Bh. on VI. 1.65. 8
नादिन् pOSSeSSed of नद; sonorous,
resonant," See नाद.
26
नानापद different words as opposed
to समानपद or a single word;cf.V•Fr•
III. 80; T.Pr. XXIV. 3, XX. 3.
नान्तरीयक absolutely neceSSary; being,
in a way, inseparable; cf. कश्चि-
दन्नाथाँ शालिकलापं सतुष्त्रं सपलालमाहरति
नान्तरीयकत्वात् M. Bh. on P. III.
3.18 on which Kaiyata observes
अन्तरशब्दे विनार्थे । अन्तर भवमन्तरीयम् ॥
तत्र नञ्समासे कृते पृष्षेोदरादित्वाद्भाष्यकारवचन-
प्रामाण्याद्वा नलेापाभाव: l
नापुंसक the same as नपुंस॒कालैङ्ग or neut&r
gender; cf. नापुंसकं भवेत्तास्मिन् t नपुंसके
भर्वं नापुंसकम् M. Bh. on IV. 1.3.
नाम् thc genitive afiix अाम् together
with the augment न् prefixed to
it; cf. नामि P. VI. 4. 3.
नामज a word Qr noun derived from
a noun, as opposed tO धातुज a word
derived from a rOot.
नामधातु a denominative root; the
term सुब्धातु is alsO used for नमिधातुः
cf. सुठधातुनीमधातुरभिधीयते Nyāsa on P.
VI. 1.3. See the word धातु.
नामन् noun, substantive; one of the
four categories of words given in
the Nirukta and other ancient
grammer works; cf. चत्वारि पदजातानि
नेामाख्यात चेोपसर्गनिपाताश्च, Nir. I.1• The
word is defined as सत्त्वप्रधानानि नामानि
by stand.ard grammarians ; cf.
Nir. I. 1.; cf. also सत्त्वााभधायकं नाम,
|R. Pr. XTII.8; V. Pr. VIII. 49
and cOm. thereOn. Pat}ini divides
words into two categories only,
viz. सुबन्त and तिङन्त and includes
नामन् ,,उपसर्ग and निपात under सुवन्त.
The Srngāraprakā$a defines नामन्,
as follows-अनपेक्षितशब्दव्युत्पत्तीनि सत्त्व-
भूतार्थाभिधायीनि नामानि । तानि द्विविधानि ।
अाविश्ठलिङ्गानि अनाधेिश्टलिङ्गानेि च । The
word नंामन् at the end of a ३a5ःhi-
tatpurusa compound signifies a
name or Sarihjश्नā e. g. सर्वनामन्, दिङ्-
नामन्, छन्देनामन्; cf. also. Bhāśā-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-218.png}}}}}}

नामलेिङ्गानुशासन
202
निगम
|4
vgtti on संज्ञायां कन्थेाशोनरेपु P. II.4• 20
and संज्ञायां भृतु ० P. III. 2.46 where
the author' of the work explains
the word संज्ञायां as नाम्नि. The wOrd
is used in the sense of *a Collection
of words' in the Nirukta, cf. अन्त-
रिक्षनामानि, अपत्यनामानि, ईश्वरनामानि,
उदकनामानि, etc.
नामलिङ्गानुशासन a treatise in which
· words with their genderS are given •
The term is tasually uSed in COn-
nection with the great dictionary
by अमरसिंह which is called नामलिङ्गानु-
शासन or अमरकेोष्ष.
नामिन् (vowels) which cause Cere-
bralization; the ten vowels ऋ, ऋ,
इं, ई, उ, अ, ए,, ओो, ऐ, औौ; cf. ऋकारा-
दयेो दश नामिन: स्वराः R. Pr. I. 27. cf.
also R.T. 94. See .the word नति.
The word भाविन् is used for नाभिन्
in the Vājasaneyi Prātis'ākhya ; cf.
अकण्ठश्येो भावी W. Pr. I. 46; cf. also
नामिपरो रम् Kāt. I.5.12.
॰नारायण् (1) mame of a grammarian
who wrote a commentary on the
Mahābhāsya-Pradipa ; (2) a gratm-
marian who is Said to, ha ve
written a glosS named Sabda-
bhugana on the Stātras of Pā'?ini
aS alsO Some minOr WOrkS named
शब्दमञ्जरी, शब्दभेदनिरूपण, etc.
नारायणवन्द्य a grammarian of the
sewenteenth century Who Wrote a
treatise on grammar named Sārā-
vali, and a treatise On rOotS named
|Dhātupārāyana.
नाव्यवधान mecessary intervention; cf.
येन नान्यवधानं तेन व्यवहितेपि वचनप्रामाण्यात्,
a statement which is looked upon ]
as a general statement of the '
nature Of Paribhā3ā occurring ;
ita the Mahābhāgश्र्ya on P. VII. 2.3.
नाश elision, the word is used in !
grammar as a synonym of *lopa.? !
नाासिकास्थान a place in the nose where|
a nasal letter Such as ङ्, श्, णु, न्	f!|
म् and anuSvāra get a tinge of
nasalization while paSsing through
it. The yama le{terS e.g. the nasal
क्रू, सूव्, ग्म् ८ ध्रुञ् get nasalizatio n in the
utterance of the words पलिक्क्निः,
न्वख्रष्ट्नतुः, अग्मिः, ध्श्नन्ति; cf. यमेा नाम
वर्णः प्रातिशारब्ये प्रसिद्धः S,K. on P. VIII.
2. 1. cf. alsO यमानुस्वारनासिक्यानां नासिके
V. Pr. I. 74, R. T. ं2.
नास्सिवय letters or phonetic elements
produced in the moSe; cf. नासिकायां
यमानुस्वारनासिक्याः R. T. 12. See ४
( नासिक्य ).
नि (1) personal ending substituted for
मि (मिपू ) of the 1st pers. sing. in the
imperative; (2) a techraical term
in the .Jainendra Vyākarana for
the term निपात of Pānini.
निःसंख्य not poSSessed of any number-
sense; the term is used in connec-
tion with indeclinables; cf. अव्यय-
भ्यस्तु निःसंख्येभ्यः सामान्यविंहिताः स्वादयो
विद्यन्त एव Kā$. on P.I. 4.21.
निःसेधेि deprived of Sarhdhi; without
any euphonic combination or eu-
phonic change.
निक् augment नि as seen in the re-
duplicated syllable कानि of the
aorist fट्रेrm कनिक्रद्त् of the root क्रन्दू;
cf. क्रन्दडैटैाङ च्लेरङादेशो द्विर्वचनमभ्यासस्ये
चुत्वाभावेो निगागमश्च निपात्यते । अक्रन्दीदिति
भाष्त्रायाम्; Kāś. on P.VII.4.65.
नेिगम a statement in the Vedic
|passage; a Vedic passage ; Sacred
tradition or Vedic Literature in
genera1; cf. the frequent expressiora
इंत्यपि निगमेा भवति where निगमं means
*a vedic word, given as am
instance' ; if alsO means *Veda'; cf.
निगम एव यथा स्यात् । M. Bh. Ori
VII. 2. 64. Durgacarya says that
the word it also used in the SenSe
of' *mearaing?;cf. तत्र खले इत्येतस्य निगमा
भवन्ति Nir. III.9. Durgācārya has
also explained the word as गमयन्र्तिं
मन्त्रार्थीन् ज्ञापयन्ति इति निगम[:, thOSe



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-219.png}}}}}}

203 नित्य
निगार
that make the hidden meaning of
the Mantras very clear.
निगार a kind of sound which appa-
दूनाधिका भुरिक् R.Pr.XVII.l.
नित् an afiix possessed of the mute
indicatory letter न्, the word cha-
rently is made up of a Combina-
tion of three phonetic elementS
हुट् , म् and नासिक्य. It is a peculiar
sound through both the mouth and
the nose, althOugh no specific
place of produgtion is asषूंigned to
it; cf अविशेष्स्थानौ संस्वांदनिगारौ । हकार-
मकारनाासिक्या वा निगारे R.T.11.
निघण्ट्ट a name given to a collection
of words which are mainly Vedic.
In ancient times such collections
were possibly very general and
numerOus and the works or trea-
tises On derivation such as the
Nirukta ofYāska were based upon |
them; cf. निघण्टव: कस्मात् । निगमा इम
भवन्ति । छन्दोभ्यः समाहृत्य समाहृत्यसमाम्नातासेत
निगन्तव एव सन्तो निगमनान्निघण्टव उच्यन्ते
इत्यौपमन्यवः । अपि वा अाहननादव स्युः ।
समाहता भवन्ति । यद्वा समाहृता भवन्ति
(Nir.I•l) where the word is deri-
ved frOm गम्,or हन् or हृ. The word
निघण्ड is taken as synonymous with
निगम by Durgācārya.
निघात toning down; the grave accent:
the root निहन् in its various forms is
ध्jsed in the sense of toning down
the vOice and the word निघात is
uScd in the sense of the grave
accent {अनुदात्तस्वर) in the Vyākarana |!
and PrātiŚākhya works; ' cf. also
the Words शेषनिघात, सर्वनिघात, etc.; cf.
समानवाक्ये निघातयुष्मदस्मदोदशाः P. viII.
1.18 Vart. 5.
निङ् Substitute नि for the last ]letter of
the wOrd जाया at the end of a
. bahuvrihi compound; cf. युवजानिः, |
" कृद्धजानिः Kā$. or P.V. 4.134.
निचूत् less by one syllable; the word
is used as an adjective to the
*narne of a Vedic metre which has
8Ot one syllable less than the
. normal; cf. एकद्वयूनाधिकः सैव निवृ- ||
racterized by which has the acute
accent on the vowel of the first
syllable; e. g. गाग्र्यः, वात्स्यः, cf. KaŚ.
on ]P,VI.1.197.
नित्य (1X eternal, as applied to word
or $abda in contrast with sOund
or dhvani which is ewanescent
(कायै ). The Sound with meaning or
without meaning,made by men and
animals is impermament; but the
sense or idea awakened in the mind
by the evanescent audible words
on reaching the mind is of a per-
manent or eternal nature; cf. स्फेाटः
शब्दो ध्वनिस्तस्य व्यायामादुपजायते; cf. also
व्या|ातिमत्त्वाञ्जु शव्दस्य Nir.I.1 ; (2) cons-
tant; not liable to be set aside by
ai]other; cf. उपबन्धस्तु देशाय नित्यम् , न
रुन्धे नित्यम् । नित्यशव्दः प्राप्त्यन्तरानिषेधार्थः
T.Pr.I.59, IV.14; (3) original as
constrasted with one introduced
anew Such as an augment; cf.T.
Pr. VI.14; (4) permanently func-
tioraing, as opposed to tentatively
doing so; cf. नित्यविरते द्विमात्रम् R.
T:37; (5) unchang€able, perma-
|nent, imperishable; cf. अयं नित्यशब्दो-
स्त्येव कूटस्थेष्वविचालिषु भावेषु वर्तते M.Bh.
On P. VIII. l .4; (6) always or
invariably applying, as opposed
to optional: the word in this
SenSe is used in connection with
ruleS Or' operations that do not
optionally apply ; cf. उपपदसमासेो
नित्य्समासः, षष्ठीसमासः पुनार्वेभाषा; M. Bh.
on P.II.2.19; (7) constant,as appli-
ed tO a rule which applies if
another sihmultaneously applying
rule were to have taken effect, as
well as when that other rule does
not take effect; cf. कञ्चित्कृताकृतप्रसङ्गमा-
त्रेणापि नित्यता Par. SeR. Pari 46.
The 9perations which are mitya
according tO this Paribhāsश्ā tak०



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-220.png}}}}}}

नित्यबलीयस्त्व 204
निपात
efiect in preference to others which
are not *nitya', although they may
even ,be ‘para'; cf. परान्नित्यं बलवत्
Par. Sek. Pari. 42.
नित्यबलीयस्त्व possession of greater
* force; the word is used in cOnnec-
tion with rules that are called निल्य.
See नित्य (7).
नित्यसमास
an invariably effective
compound; the term is explained |
as अस्वपदविग्रहेीं नित्यसमासः i. e. a cOm-
pound whose disSolution cannOt |
be shown by its component wOrds
as such; e. g. the dissolution of
कुम्भकारः cannot be , shown as कुभ्मै
कारः, but it must be shown as कुम्भं
करोति सः । The upapadasamāsa, the
gatisamāsa and the dative tat-
" puru3a with the wOrd अर्थ are
" examples of नित्यसमास.
नित्यानन्दपर्वतीय a scholar of Sanskrit
Grammar Who Wrote glosses on
the Mahābhii$yapradipa, on the
Laghuśabdendu$ekhara and on
j the Paribhāgenduśekhara. He
was a resident of Benares where
he coached mamy pupilsin Sanskrit
Grammar. He lived in the first
- halfof the nineteenth century.
निदर्शन illustration; cf. पर्याप्तो ह्येकः पुलाकः
स्थाल्या निदर्शनाय M.Bh. on I. 4. 23
Vart. 15; cf. also इला साल्हा चात्र
निदर्शनानि R. Pr. I. 22.
नेिपात a particle which pOSSeSSes no
gender and number, and the case
termination after which is dropped
Or elided. Nipāta is given as one |
* of the four categQries of words viz
· नामन् , अाख्यात, उपसर्ग amd निपात by ai1
the ancient writers of Prātiśākhya,
·VyākaraT]a and Nirukta works; cf.
Nir. I. 4, M.Bh. on I. 1. Āhnika
1, R. Pr. XII. 8 etc. The word is
derived from the root पत् with नि
by Yaska who has mentioned three
$ubdivisions of Nipātas उपसार्थे,
कर्मोपसंग्रहार्थे and पदपूरोणे; cf. अथ निपाताःl
उच्चावचेष्वर्थेषु निपतन्ति l अप्युपमार्थे । अपि
कर्मोपसंग्रहार्थे । अपि पदपूरणा: । Nir. I. 4.
The Nipātās are looked upon as
poSSeSsed of no senSe; cf. निपातः
पादपूरणः |R. Pr. XII. 8, V. Pr. VIII.
50, ( com. by Uvvata ). Pānini has
not given any definition of the
.word निपात, but he has enumerated
them as forming a claSS with च at
their head in the rule चादयोऽसत्त्वे
where the word असत्रेच conveys anँ
impression that they possess no
sense, the sense being of two
kinds सत्त्व and भाव, and the Nipātās
not posSesssing any one of the two.
The impression is made rather
firm by the statement of the
Vārttikakāra-** निपातस्यानर्थकस्य प्राति-
पदिकत्वम् ?' P. I. 2. 45 Vārt. 12.
Thus, the question Whether the
Nipatas pOSseSS any Sense by them-
selweS or not, becomes a difficult
one to be ansWered. Although the
|Rkprātiśākhya in XII.8 lays down
that the Nipātas are expletive, still
in the next werse it says that some
of them do possess sense; cf. निपाता- .
नामथवैशान्निपातनादनर्थकानाामेतरे च सार्थकाःon'
which Uvvata remarks केचन निपाताः
सार्थकाः, केचन ' निरर्थकाः । The remark
ofUvvata appears to be a sOund
one as based on actual obserwa-
tion, and the conflicting wiewS haWe
to be reconciled. This is done by
Bhartrhari who lays down that
Nipatas never directly convey the
sense but they indicate the SenSe.
Regarding the sense indicated by'
the Nipātas, it is said that the senSe
is newer Sattwa or Dravya or Sub-
stance as remarked by Pānini; it is,
a certain kind of relation and that?
too, is not directly expressed by
thetn but it is indicated- Bhoja in
his Srngāraprakāśa gives a very
. comprehensive definition of Nipāta



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-221.png}}}}}}

निपातद्योतकत्व
205
निमिच्तापायपरिभाषा
a$:-जात्यादिप्रवृत्तिनिमित्तानुपग्राहित्वेनासत्त्वभूता-
र्थाभिधायिनः अलिङ्गसंख्याशत्तय उच्चावचेष्वर्थेयु
निपतन्तीत्यव्ययविशेष्त्रा एव न्वादयेों निपाताः ।
He gives six varieties of the m, viz.
विध्यर्थ, अर्थवादार्थ, अनुवादार्थ, निष्षधाथै,
विधिनिषेधार्थ and अविधिनिषेधार्थ, and
mentions more than a thousand Of
them. For details see Bhartrhari's
Vākyapadiya II. 189-206.
निपातद्योतकत्व the view that the
· nipatas and the u pasargas too,
as contrasted with nOuns,pronouns
' and other indeclinables, Only
, indicate the sense and do not de-
nOte it; this view, as grammarians
say, was implied in the Mahābhā--
$ya and was prominently given in
. the Vākyapadiya by Bhartrhari
which was followed by almost all
later grammarians. See निपात.
न्निपातन a word given, as it appears,
` withOut trying for its derivation,in
• authoritative works of ancient gra-
' mmarianS especially Patभूini;cf.दाण्डि-
नायनहास्तिनायन० P. VI.4.174, as also
' अचतुरविचतुर० V.4.77 etc. etc. The
. phrase निातनात्सिद्धम् is very frequen-
tly uSed by Patafंjali to show ' that
* SOme technical difficulties in the
formatiOra of a word are not sorne-
tirmes tO be taken into considera-
tion, the wOrd given by Pānini
being the COrrect One; cf. M.Bh.on
· I.1•*, III.1.22 etC. etc.; cf. also
' the uSual expression बाधकान्येव निपात-
नीनि. The derivation of the word
` fr9fn पत् with नि causal, is suggest-
* .ed in the Rk Prātiśākhya where it
is Stated that Nipātas are laid down
Or preSented as such in manifold
· senses; cf. R. Pr.XII.9; cf. also
' धातुसाधनकाञ्श्लानां प्राप्त्यर्थ नियमस्य च |
अनुबन्घविक्राराणां रूद्ध्यर्थ च निपातनम् M.
Bh• Pradipa on P. V.1.114; cf.also
M. Bh. on II.1.27.
निपातनस्वर the.accent, with which the
Nipatana word is expressed in the
Stitra, which is said to prevail Over
the accerht which ordinarily ShOuld
be possess ed by the wOrd ; cf. स
निपातनस्वरः प्रकृातस्वरस्य बाधको भविष्यति
|M.Bh. on P.I. 1.56 Vārt. 23;*cf.
also M.Bh. on I.3.3, VI.1.123 etc. .
निपातानर्थकत्व the view prominently
expressed by the Varttikakāra that
nipātas do not pOSSeSS any SenSe,
which was modified by BhartFhari
who stated that they do possesS
sense which, of course, is indicated
and not expressed. See निपात.
निपाताव्ययोपसर्गवृच्ति a short treatise'
explaining and illt1strating the use
of indeclinables, written by a
grammarian named तिलक whO
|probably lived in KaŚmira-
निमद a mode of utterance Of words at
the performance of a sacrifice-
Seven such modes are given in the
Taittiriya Prātiśākhya; cf. उपांशुध्वान-
निमदेोपव्दिमन्मन्द्रमध्यमतारााणिT.Pr.XXI1I.
5
निमिच्त C1) the formal cause of a, gra-
|mmatical operation; cf. निमित्तांभावे
नैमिारीकस्याप्यभावः given as a Pari-
bhāंक्ष्a by many gramrmarians like
Vyāंāi, Siradeva, and others; cf.
also प्रकृत्युपपदेोपाधयो निमित्तं प्रत्ययेा निामेित्त
M.Bh. on III.1.1 Vart. 2; (2)
distinguishing sign यः प्रेक्षापूर्वकारी भवतेि
सः अध्रुवेण निमित्तेन ध्रुवं निमित्तमुपीदत्ते वेदिकां
पुण्डरीकं बा, M.Bh. on I.1.26 Vart.5.
निमित्तसप्तर्मी locative case, used fn the
SenSe of a cauSe as prescribed by
निामत्तात्कर्मसंयेोगे, P. II.3 36 Vārt. 6
and illustrated by the uSually
quoted verse चर्मणि द्वीपिनं हन्ति दन्तयोहन्ति,
कुञ्जरम् । केशषु चमरीं हन्ति सीम्रि पुष्कलकेो हतः
M.Bh.on II.3.36 Vārt. 6, also cf.
|Kā$. ora P. I.1.57.
निमित्तापायपरिभाषा a popular name
given by grammarians to the
· tmaxim निमित्तापाये नैमित्तिकस्याप्यपायः,. a



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-222.png}}}}}}

नेमचिितन्
206
निरनुबन्धक
thing, which is brought into exist-
ence by a cause, disappearS On
the disappearance of the cause•
The maxim is mOt, Of COurSe;
universally applicable. F'or d६tailS
see Par. Sek.' Pari. 56, Sira. Pari•
99.
निमित्तिन् an affix or am augment Or a
substitute taking place on account
of certain formal causeS Or nimi-
ttas; cf. निर्ज्ञातार्थो निामत्तमनिश्र्ज्ञातार्थेौ
निमित्ती, इह चं प्रत्ययोऽनिर्ज्ञातः प्रकृत्युपपदो-
पाधयो निज्ञीँताः M. Bh. Orः III• l • l
Vārt. 2.•
नियत (1)regulated in size or number;
definitely fixed; the wOrd नियत , is
used in grammar in connection with
the mimitta or nimittin im a gram-
rmatical operation presCribed by a
rule, which, or a part of which, is
· shown to be superfluOus unleSS
· there is laid down a regulation; cf.
देशषप्रहणै कर्तव्यम् । शेषनियमाथैम् । प्रकृत्यर्थीं
, नियतौ प्रत्यया अनियत॒ास्ते शेषैपि प्राप्तुवन्ति
M.Bh. on I.3.12 Wārt. 6; (2) The
· grave accent; cf. उदात्तपूर्वं नियतं. • •
स्वयैते RPr.III.9.
नियतस्वर (1) an affix whose accent is
definitely given by an indicatory
· mute letter applied to it; cf. M.Bh.
, on I.1.3; (2) the grave accent; a
syllable with a grawe accent; grave
vowel; cf. नियतस्वरोदये R.Pr.XH.25;
(3) name of a Sarhdhi when a
visarga is changed into रेफ and
then omitted and the preceding
vowel is lengthened; cf. छुखस्याकाम-
नियता उभाविमौ R.Pr. IV.9; cf. also
P. VIII.3.14 and VI.१.1 11.
नियम (1) restriction; regulation; bind-
· ing; the terfm is very frequently
used by griammarians in connec-
tion with a restriction laid down
with · reference to the applica-
tiona of a grammatical rule gene-
rālly onā the strength of that rule,
or a part Of it, liable to become
superfluous if the restriction has
mot been laid dOWn ; cf. M.Bh. on
I. 1. 3, KaŚ. on I. 3.63, VI. 4.11;
cf. alsO the frequently quoted
dictum अनियमे नियमकारिणी परिभाषा; (2)
limitation as contrasted with विकल्प
or कामचार; cf. अनेकप्राप्तावेकस्य नियमो
भवति शेषेष्वानियम; पटुमृदुशुश्ह्राः पटुशुष्छ्रमृदव
इतिः M. Bh. on II. 2. 34 Vārt. 2;
(3) a, regulating rule; a restrictive
rule, corresponding tO the Parisarांh-
|khyā statement of the Mīmārhsakas,
e. g. the rule अनुदात्तङित अात्मनेपदम्
|P. I.3.12; the grammarians gene-
rally take a rule aS a pOsitive in-
junction avoiding a restrictive sense
as far as possible; cf, the	dictum
विधिनियमसंभवे विधिरव ज्यायान्,. Par. Sek.
Pari. 100; the commentators hawe
given variOus kinds of restrictions,.
such as प्रयोगनियम,अभिधयनियम,अथैनियम, '
प्रत्ययनियम, प्रकृतिनियम, संज्ञानियम etc.etc.;
(4) grave accent or anudātta; cf.
उदात्तपूर्व नियतम् R. Pr. III. 9; see
नियत (2).
नियामक limiting; limitative; cf. तुः
क्रियते । स नियामको भविष्यति । अमेवेापञ्चम्याः
इति M. Bh, on II. 4.83; cf. also
लोके निमित्तं द्विविधं दृश्टृम् । कार्यस्थितौ नियामकं
तदनियामकं च Par. Sek. Pari. 56.
नियोग an obligatory order or
command, such as_that of a pre-
ceptor, as contrasted with स्वभाक्षु;
cfधातोः परः अकारोऽकशव्दो वा नियेोगतःकतीरं
ब्रुवन्कृत्संज्ञश्च भवति ...... ... स्वभावतः कर्तीरं
ब्रुवन्कृत्संज्ञश्च भवति etc. M. Bh.. on P.
iII. 4.67 Vārt. 8 where Kaiyaर्भृa
explains नियोग as अाचार्यनियोग.
निरनुनाासिक pure, unnasalized, a$
opposed to सानुनाासक nasalized. cf.
सन्ति हि यणः सानुनासिका निरनुनासिकाश्च l
M.Bh. on I. l • Ahnika 1.
निरनुबन्धक possessed of no mute
iiidicatory letter ; not possessed of
any mute indicatory letter;ः Çf. कृ;



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-223.png}}}}}}

नेिरनुवन्धकपरिभाषा
पुनरयं (अाकारः) सानुवन्धकः द्वक निरनुबन्धक:l
|M.Bh.. on I. 1• 14. →
निरनुबन्धकपरिभाषा a short term uSed
for the maxim निरनुबन्धकग्रहणे
सानुवन्धकस्य ग्रहणम् Par. Sek. Pari. 8} -
निरवकाशा possessed of no scope of, or
occasion for, application ; the wOrd
अनवकाश is also used in this senSe.
The nirawakā$a rules alwayS Set
aside the general rules which a re
always present wherever they i. e•
the niravakāsa rules are pOSsible tO
be applied. NiravakaŚatva is loOked
upon as One of the two criteria for
बाध or sublation, the other one
being सामान्याविशेधभाव as illustrated
b?y , the uSual maxim, knOWn aS
तक्रकौण्डिन्यन्याय. See तक्रकोण्डेिन्यन्याय; cf.
also अनवकाशा हि विधयो बाधका भवन्ति
|Par. Sek. on Pari. 64.
निरस्त a fault of pronunciation when
a vowel is harshly pronounced
and hence is not properly audible;
cf. निरस्तं निष्ठुरम् Pradipa on M.Bh. I.
l. Ahn. 1. " The fault occurs when
the place and the means of utter-
ance are preSSed and drawn in;cf.
निरस्तं स्थानकरणापकर्धे R. Pr. XIV. 2.
निराकृत (1) set aside; answered; the
word is frequently uSed in conn€c-
tion with faults which are stated
to occur or present themselves if
a particular explanation is given ;
(2) prevailed over by another; cf.
तदा न रूपं लभते निराकृतम् R. Pr. XI.
30, where Uvwata paraphrases
निराकृत aS विस्मृत. →
निरुत्त name of a class of w०rks which
were composed to explain the
collections of Vedic words by
means of propOsing derivations of
thOSe words' from roots as would
suit the SenSe. The Nirukta works
are looked upOn aS supplementary
tO grammar WOrkS and there must
have been a gOod rnany works of
207 निरुदकादि
this kind in ancient times as
shown by references to th6 writerS
of these viz. Upamanyu, Saka!āy-
ana,Sākapप्a एpi,Sakaptirti and Others*
but, out 'of thetm oraly One wOrk
composed by Yāska has Survived;
the word, hence has been applied
by scholars to the Nirukta of
Yāska which is believed to hawe
been w ritten in the sewenth Or the
eighth century B. C. i. e. a century
or two before Pātini. The Nirukta
works were looked upon aS Subsidi-
ary to the study of the Ved as
along with wOrkS On phOnetiGs
( शिक्षा ), rituals ( क्रल्प ), grammar
(व्याकरण) prosody (छन्दसू) and astrO--
nomy(ज्योतिष)and a mention of them
is found made in the Chāndogyo-
pani$ad. AS many of the derivati-
ons in the Nirukta appear to be
forced and fanciftrl, it is doubtful
whether the Nirukta, Works could
be called scientific treatises. The
work of Yaska, hOwever, has got
its Own importance and place
amOng wOrkS subsidiary to the
Veda, being a very old work of
that kind and quoted by later
commentators. There were some
glosses and commentary works
written upon Yāska's Nirukta out
of which the one by IDurgācarya is
a scholarly one.It is doubtftil %whe-
ther Durgācārya is the same as
Durgasirihha, ' who wrote a Vrtti
Or glOSS On the Kātantra Vyaikar-
ana.. The Word निरुत्त js 'found in
the Prāti$ākhya works in the sense
•Of *explained'and not ih the sense
of derived; cf. R. Pr. XV 6; V.Pr.
IW. 19, 195.
निरुत्तभाष्य a gloss on Yāska's Nirukta
written by a modern scholar of
gramrmar named Ugrācārya in the
eighteenth century A. D.
निरुदकादि a clasS of cOmpOurad words



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-224.png}}}}}}

. नेिरूढलक्षणा
208
headed by the word निरुदक which
have their last vowel accented
acute; e. g निरुदक्रम्, निरुपलम्,? निर्मक्षिकम्
etc.; éf. Kāś. on P. VI. 2• ]84.
निरूढलक्षणा potentiality of itmplica-
tion which gives the meaning 9f a
word which is based upon implica-
tion; e. g. रथेो गच्छति•
निरूढोपध्य a word, the pemultimate
vowel in which is picked up and
taken back, as for instance the
penultimate अ of हनू in th& word
ॐहस् cf. अ॒ह॒तिश्च अ॒हश्च॒ अंहुश्च हन्तेर्निरूढोपधा-
द्विपरीतात् Nir. IV. 25.
निर्दिश्यमानपरिभाषा a short fभू'm for the
maxim निर्दिश्यमानस्यादेशा भवन्ति which
means ‘substitutes take the place
of that or its part which has been
actually stated or enunciateà in
the rule (of grammar)' Par• $ek•
|Pari. 12. For details See Par• $ek.
, Pari. 12.
' निर्दिष्ट exhibited, enunciated; cf.
तस्मिन्निति निर्दिष्टे पूर्वस्य P.I.1.66; V.Pr.I•
134*.
निर्दिष्टपरिभाषा a popular name of the
|Paribhāgā तस्मिान्नैति निर्दिष्टे पूर्वस्य_। cfः
किं चेह र्निर्दिष्टपरिभाषाप्रवृत्तिर्दुर्वचा | Pari.
Bhāskara Pari. 97.
· निर्देश mention, actual statement; the
word is often used in the Mahābh-
āśya in sentences like स तथा निर्देशः
कर्तन्यः, निर्देशं कुरुते etc.; cf. alsO V.Pr.
I. 36; cf. also the maxim तस्मिन्निति
निर्दिष्टे पूर्वस्य P. I.1. 66 and V. Pr. I.
134; cf. also अवश्यं कयाचिाद्वभक्त्या वेकन-
चिद्वच्चनेन निर्देशः कर्तब्यः M.Bh. on P. I.
2. 39 Vārt. i. Sometimes the men-
tion or exhibition made by a wOrd
shows the particular type of word;
cf. Durghata V[ tti on P. I. 2. 6
and VII. 4. 73 as also Kaś. on
]P. TV. 3. 11 and V 2. 20.
निधरण (1)selection ofone or some out
of many ; cf. जाति॒गुणाक्रियााभिः समुदायादे-
कदेशस्य पृथकरणं निर्धारणम् ॥ मनुष्याणां मृनुष्येषु
वा क्षत्रियः शूरतमः Kāś. on P. II.2.10
as also om II.3.4 l ; (2) determined
or definite sense to the exclusion
of another, generally On the
strength of the indeclinable एव
which is expreSSed or understood,
The word निधौरण is used for अवधारण
in this sense; cf. यत एवकारस्ततोन्यत्राव-
धारणम् a maxim used as a Paribhद्वे$ā
by some grammarians; cf. also
४वातोस्तान्निामेित्तस्यैव l धात्ववधारणं यथा स्यात्तन्नि-
मित्तावधारणं मा भूदिति Kāś. om P. VI.
1.81.
निर्बद्ध separated,diSSociated, di$conne-
cted;',cf. न निर्बद्वा उपसर्गा अर्थान्निराहुरिति
शाकटायनः Nir. I.3.
निर्भुनुज a mame for the Samhitapātha;
cf. निर्भुजं संहिताध्ययनमुच्यते R. Pr.I. 3.
निर्मलदर्पण name of a commentary on
the Prakriyā-Kaumudi.
निलैट्रेर name of a grammarian who i$
believed to have written a gloS$
( वृाति ) on the Sप्ātra$ of Pënini 0n
the strength of a reference tO , him
in the Nyāsa of Jinendrabuddhi;
cf. वृतिः पांणिनीयसूत्राणां विवरणं चुल्लिभट्टिनिछै-
रादिप्रणीतम् Nyāsa On I.1•1•
निवैचन interpretation by meanS of
etymology as found in the Nirukta
w6rks; {he act Of fully uttering the
meaning hidden in words that are
partially or , wholly	uhintelligible
in respect of their derivation, by
separating a word int9 its cQiiभ्po"
mént letters; cf. निष्कृष्य विग्गृह्य निर्वच्चंनम्,
Durgavrtti on Nir. II. 1.For details
see Nirukta II•1•
निवैर्तक (1) productive, as opp9$ed to'
" expressiwe; cf. किं पुनरिदं ' न्न॒िर्वतैकम्'l
अन्तैरतमा अनेन निवैत्यैन्र्ते । अाहेोस्वित्प्रति-
पादकम् । अन्यन निर्वृत्तानामनेन प्रतिपतिः.
M.Bh. on P.I.1.50 Vārt. 1; (2)
productive of activity; cf. साधुरृं
निवैर्तकं कारकसंज्ञं भवतीति '' वत्तद्भ्यम्; M..
Bh. on I.4.23.
निवैत्र्य orae of the many kinds of kar*



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-225.png}}}}}}

निर्वृत्ति
man or object gOverned by a
transitive verb or root, which haS
got the nature of being prOduced
or brought into existence ‘2r.,ंinto a
new shape; cf. त्रिविधं कर्म निर्वत्र्यं विकार्य
|प्राप्यं चेचति ! निर्वैत्यै तावत् कुम्भकारः नगारकारःl
The word निवैत्यै is explained aS
यदसज्जन्यते यद्वा प्रकाश्यते.तन्निर्वत्र्यम् । कर्तव्यः
कट: |t उच्चाथैः शब्दः Sr. Prakāśa; cf.
also Vakyapadtya III.7.78; cf. alsO
इह हि तण्डुलानोदनं पच्वतीोति द्वयर्थः पचिः l
तण्डुलान्पच्चन्नोदनं निवैर्तयति । M. Bh. on
I.4.49. For details see the word
कर्मन्; also see M.Bh. on I.4.49.
production of the effect; prO-
duction of the activity by the
agents or insfru ments of activity
called Kārakas ; cf. साधने हि क्रियां
निवैतयति ताभुपसगाँ विशिनष्टि M.Bh. on
|II. 2.19 Vārt. 2.
निहैत a fault of pronunciation by
which a letter is uttered harsh or
rude; cf. निर्हतो रूक्षः Kaiyata on M.
Bh.I.1. Āhnika 1 .
निह्वस (1) abridgment, diminution ;
cf.सर्ववचनं प्र॒कृतिनिह्नासाथैम् ! निह्वीसः अपचयः
अल्पत्वमित्यर्थः । Kaiyata on M.Bh. on
IV.3.100; (2) being turned into a
short (vowel): cf. स्पशीन्तस्थाप्रत्ययौ
निर्हृसेते R.Pr.IV.39.
निवर्तक lit. expeller, excluding other
forms which are otherwise, that is,
incorrect; cf, समाने चार्थे शास्त्रान्वितः
अ॒शास्त्रान्वितस्य निवर्तको भवति । M.Bh. on
I.l. Siva Stātra 2.
निवत्यै that which should not procced
tO the next rule; cf. तच्चावश्यं निवत्र्यम्
M.Bh. On III.2.68, V.1.16, etc.
See the word निवृत्ति.
SOmetimes used for निघात or
the grave accent.
निवृत्ति (1) cessation of recurrence of
a word Or wOrds from a rule to a
Subsequent rule Or rules; non-appli-
cation of a rule cQnsequent tipon
the cesSation Of recurrence' or
27
209
→、、
नांष्ठत,
anuvptti cf; न ज्ञायते केनाभिप्रायेण प्रसजति
केन निवृर्त्ति करोति M. Bh. on P. 1-1 •44
vart. 8. cf. also एकयेोगनिर्दिष्टानां_ स॒ह
वा प्रवृच्ति: सह वा निवृत्तिः Kāt. Par• Vr•
Pari. 9; (2) cessation Or rermOval;
cf. न च संज्ञाया निवृत्तिरु॒ङ्क्ष्यते | स्वभावतः
संज्ञा संज्ञिन; प्रत्याय्य निवर्तन्त । तेन अनु-
बन्धानामपि निवृत्तिर्भविष्यति M. Bh• on
I. 1.1. Vart. 7; cf. also M. Bh• Oh
I. !. 3 etc. ; cf. alsO the usual
word उदात्तनिवृत्तिस्वरः. →
निवृत्तिस्थान places where the sub-
stitutes गुण and वृद्धि do nOt apply ;
weak terminations; kit Or hit
affixes in Paraini's grammar; cf.
अथाप्यस्तेर्निवृत्तिस्थानेनष्वादिलेापो भवति , l स्तः
सन्तीति | Nir. II. 1. The word
संक्रम is alsO used in this Sense by
ancient gram marianS.
निषेध negation; prohibition; cf निषे-
धपञ्चसूत्रीयं स्वरार्था , Bhāgāvftti On P.
II. 2.16; cf. निषेधाश्च बलीयांसः Par.
. Sek. Pari. 112. The word प्रतिषेध
is used frequently in thiS Sense in
old gratmmar works such as the
Mahābhāsya, the word निभ्रध be-
ing comparatively a modern One.
नेिष्कादि a class of words headed by
thé word निष्क to which the affix
इक ( ठक् ) is added, provided these
words are not members of a'
Compound; e. g. नैष्किकम्, पादिकम्,
मार्घिकम् etc. ; cf. Kaś. on P. V. 1.20.
निष्कृष्ट separated; taken out from a
thing; existing Only in concep-
tion or idea; cf. इह केचिद्रुष्Jiाः शब्देन
द्रव्यान्निष्कृष्टा एव प्रत्याय्यन्ते न तु द्रव्यस्येों-
परञ्जक्रत्वेन | यथा चन्दनस्य गन्धः इति ।
Kaiy. on P, II. 2. 8.
निष्ठा the afiixes त्त and च्तवत् in
|Pārhini*s Grammar; cf. च्तत्तवत् निष्ठा
.P. I. 1.26.
निष्टित also निःष्टित completed, accom-
plished; used in connection with
a grammatically forrmed word by
applying affixes tO the bases; cf.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-226.png}}}}}}

^、 2I10
नंहत
अङ्गवृत्ते पुनर्वृत्तावविधिर्निष्ठितस्य Siradeva
|Pari. 94, ' where Siradeva haS
explained the word निष्ठित as
प्रयेोगार्ह-अङ्ग.
निहत struck down in tone, grawe,
posSessed of a grawe accent ; cf.
W. ]Pr. ]iV. 138.
निद्दित separated with the interven-
tion of a conSonant. The word iS
used in connection with the de-
tached first part of a compound
Word mot followed immediately
by a vowel; cf. अनिहितं अव्यवहितम्
Uvvata on V. Pr. V. 30.
नीक् atपूgment नी aftixed to the re-
duplicative Syllables of the roots
फण्, वञ्च् , स्त्रस,ध्वंम्, भ्रंस् कसू, पत्, पद्and
स्कन्द् in the intensive; c. g- अापनी-
फणत्, वनीवच्यते etc. cf. P. V1I. 4.65
arad 84.
नीच a term used for the grave
accent or for the wowel, accented
grave; cf. स्वरितयोर्मध्ये , यत्र नीचं स्यात्
T. Pr. XIX. 1. उन्नीवे मे नीचमुच्चात्
|R. T. 54, 55 cf, also W. Pr. I. l 11.
नीचैःकर cOnstituting the grave
a£cent, features of the grave
accent; cf. अन्ववसर्गो मार्दबमुरुता खस्येति
नीचैःकराणि शब्दस्य M.Bh. on I. 2.30.
नीलकण्ठ author of वैयाकरणसिद्धान्तरहस्य a
COmmentary On the Siddhānta
Kaumudi of BhattःQji Diksita.
नीलकण्ठदीक्षित a famous grammarian
of the 5eventeemth century who
Wrote an independent work on
the Paribhās3ंs in Vyākarata
named Paribhā$āvrtti. This vrtti
ं$ referred tQ iरे॒.the Paribhāgen-
duśekhara by Nāge$abhatta and
the views expressed in ''it are
severely criticised in the com. गादा.
नीलकण्ठमखिन् nephew of Appaya
Dik$ita whO has written a'6offa-
rmentary On Kaiyata*s Mahābhā-
$yapradipa.
नुद्
ठञ्र्र् augment न् (l) affixed to the
words अन्तर्वत् and पतिवत् before the
feminine, affiँठ्ट्रं ङीप्	e. g. अन्तर्वत्नी,
पतिवत्नीं, cf. P. IV. 1.32; (2) afiixed
to the rOot ली before the causal
affix णिच् , e. g. विलीनयति, cf. P.
WII. 3.39; (3) affixed to the re-
duplicative Syllable of roots end-
ing in a nasal consonant and
|having the penultimate अ as als6
of the rOOts जपर्, जभू , दह् , दछ्, भञ्ज्ञ्,
पश्शू, चर्, aad फञ्छ् in the intensive;
e. g.. जङ्गम्यत, तन्तन्यते, यंयमीति, जङ्कमीति,
जञ्जप्यत, दुन्दह्यते, दन्दर्शीति. चञ्चूर्यत, पम्फु:
लेीित cf. P. VII 4.85, 86, 87.
मु augment न् prefixed (1 ) to the
gem• pl. ending in अाम् after a'crude
base ending in a short vowel, or in
ई Or ऊ of feminine bases térmed
raa.di, Or in अा Of the feminine affix
( द्यूप्, डापू 9r चाप् ); e. g. वृक्षाणाम्,
अग्यानाम्, कतूणाम्, कुमारीणाम् , मालानाम्
etc.; cf. P. VII. 1.54; (2) to the
afiix अाम् after numerals term-
ed षट् and the numeral चतुर् as also
after the Words श्री, ग्रामणी and गेो in
, Vedic Literature, e. g. षण्णाम् ,
पृञ्चानाम्, ता चुतुर्णाम॒, श्रीणाम्, " ग्रामणीनामु,
गेानाम्: cf. P. VII.1.55,'56, 57; (3)
to the part of a rOot possessed of
twO cOmSOnamts, aS also of the
rOOt अश् of the fifth conjugation
after the reduplicative syllable
ending in अा, which is substituted
for अ; e.g. अानञ्ज, व्यानशे; cf. P.VII.4.
71,72; (4) श्to the affix मतुप् after a
|base ending in अन् as also to the
afiixes तरपूप् and तमपू after a base
ending in न् in Vedic Literature,
e.g. मूर्धन्वतीं, अक्षण्वन्तः, सुपथिन्तरः etc.;cf.
|P. VIII. 2.16, 17; (5) to the initial
vOwel of the second member of a
9ompOund having अ of नञ् as the
first member; e. g. अनघः, cf. P.VI.
3.74; (6) to any vowel after न्
which is preceded by a short vowel



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-227.png}}}}}}

2b 1
नुम्
and which is at the end of a wOrd
e.g. कुर्वन्नास्त, cf. P. VIII• 3.32•
नुम् augrment न् inserted after the jast
vowel (1) of a root given in the
IDhātupātha as ending with fmu te
इ; e.g.'निन्दति, क्रन्दति, चिन्तयति, जिन्वति
etc.; cf. P VII.1.58; (2)-of rOOtS मुच्
and others before the conjugational
sign अ ( श ); e. g. मुञ्चति, छुम्पति; cf.
P, VII.1.59; (3) of the roots मस्ज्ञ,
नश्शू, रध्, जभू and लभ्म् under certain
specified conditions, e.g.मड्क्त्वा, नेश्टा,
, रन्धयति, जम्भयति, लम्भयति, अालम्भ्य: etc.
cf. P.VII. 1.60-69; (4) of declin-
able bases marked with the rmute
indicatory letter उ, ऋ or ल as also
of the declinable wording अञ्चू
from the root अञ्च् and युज्, e.g.भवान्,
श्रेयान् , प्राङ्, युङ्, cf. Ka$. on P. VII.1.
70, 71; (5) of the declinable base
in the neuter gender, erःding with
a wowel or with any consonant
excepting a semivowel or a nasal,
before a case-ending termed Sar-
vanāmasthāna; e.g. यशांसि, वनानि,
जतून etc., cf. E<āś. on VII.1.72; (6)
of the declinable base in the neuter
gender, ending with इ, उ,*ऋ or ल
bcfore a case-ending beginning
with a vowel; e.g. मधुन, शुचिने etc.,
cf. Kaś. on P. VII.1.7%; (7) of the
affix शतृ ( अत् of the pres. part.)
under certain conditions याती यान्ती;
पचन्र्ती, सीव्यन्ती, cf. i! .VII.78-8 ; (8)
of the word अनडुह् before the nom.
and vOC. sing. affix सु;e.g. अनड्वान् ,
हे अनड्वन्, cf. P. VII.i. 82; (9) ðf
the words दृक्रू, स्ववस् and स्वतवसूत्
before the nom. amd voc.sing.affix
सु in Vedic Literature, e. g. " यादृङ्,
स्ववान् , स्वतवान्, cf. P.VII.[.83.
उठमगाम augment न् inserted after the
* last vOwel of a root or a noun-base
in specified cases. See नुम्.
छ्टृच्वक्ष name of the second Yama
? letter,	• →
नेमस्पृष्ट partiy touched, half touched;
semicontacted; a term used fOr
sibilants and hissing SOu nds•
नैकाच् multisyllabic,pOssesSed Ofmamy
syIIables, as contrasted with प्ण्श्कॉं•
नैगम(1) belonging to the Veda,Vediष्ट्
as' cpposed to लौकिक or_ भाषिक ; 9f
नैघण्टुकैीनि नैगमानीहेह Nir.I. 20; .(2)
namie given to Kāndas 4, 5 and 6
of the Nirukta ofYāska; cf. अनवुगत-
संस्कारा जहादयो यस्मिन्निगम्यन्ते तनैगामं
|Durga V. on Nir IV.1•
नैघण्टुक mentioned as secondary ; lit•
निष्र्घण्टुकाण्डे वर्तमानानि पदानि; the terrra is
applied to the first three KandaS
or sections of the Nirukta•
नैपातिक accessory; accidental; निपातात्
अागतानि.
नैमेिच्तिक effect; one that is cauSed; cf.
निमित्ताभावे नैमित्तिकस्याप्यभावः ā. Pari-
bhāga given by Vyadi, Stradeva
and Others.
नैरुत्त ( 1) obtained by derivation, ety-
mological; (2) etymologist, writer
ofa Nirukta work.
नैर्देशिक matter of communication;
statement made for cOmmunica-
tion. Uddyota, explains the word
as निर्देशः बोधः प्रयेोजनमस्य नैर्देशिक: | cf.
एएँत खञ्इट्वपि नैर्देशिकानां वार्ततरका भवन्ति ये
सर्बनाम्ना निर्देशा|: क्रियन्ते M. Bh. on
P.. ]I[.1.67.
नैवासिक tad. affixes अग्श् and others
added in the sense of * तस्य निवासः ?
(P. IV. 2. 69), as in words like शैब
meaning the place of residence of
the Sibis.
न्यक् a technical term in the Jainen]-
dra Vyākarar?a for the term उपसर्जन
defined by Pātaini in the rules
प्रथमानिीदैष्टं समास उपसर्जनम् and एक-
विभक्ति चा पूर्वानेिपाते P.I.2.43, 44.
न्यङ्कुसारिणी a kind of बृहती metre in
whichr the secomad foot has twelve
syllables, while the rest hiave



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-228.png}}}}}}

न्यङ्कादि
eight syllables each;
न्यङ्कुसारिणी R.Pr.XVI.32.
न्यङ्कादि a claSS of words headed by
the word न्यङ्कु, which are formed
by means of the Substitution of a
guttural conSOnant in the place of
a cOnSonant of any other claSS
belonging to the root from which
these wOrds are formed; e. g. न्यङ्कुः
मद्गुः, भ्रुगुः etc.; cf. Kaś. on P.VII.3.
53.
न्यच् going lower, subordinate, the
word is used in the sense of upa-
Sarjana aS a technical term in the
Jainendra V%ākarafःa, cf. वोक्तं न्यक्
Jain. Vy.J.1.93.
न्यवग्रह also नीच्वावग्रह, the vowel at the
अव्ग्रह Or erad Of th 2 fjrst r?hermbe;*
Of a COmpOund word which has
got a grave accent; e. g. the vowel
ऊ Of नू in तनूनप्त्रे; cf. उदाद्यन्तो न्यवग्रह-
स्ताथाभाव्यः W. Pr. I. 120. See ताथा-
3भ्iश्8यं. •
न्यस्त name given to अनुदात्त or the
grave tone ; cf. मात्रा न्यस्ततरैकेधामुभे
व्यfिलेि: समस्वरे R. Pr. III. 17 where
Uvvata explains न्यस्ततरा as अनुदाच्ततरा.
न्याय maxim, a familiar or patent
instance qः1Oted to explain simi-
lar cases; cf. the words अर्ग्रौकरवाणि-
न्याय M. Bh. on P. II 2.24, अपवाद-
न्याय M. Bh. on P. I. 3. 9, अविरवि-
कुन्याय् M. Bh, .on P. IV. 1. 88, 89,
IV. 2.60, IV.3.131, V. !.7, 28,* vI
2. 1 l ; कुम्भीधान्यन्याय M.Bh. on | P. I.
3.7, कूपखानक्रन्याय M.Bh. I. l. Āhnika
1, दण्डिन्याय M.Bh. on P. VIII.2.83,
नष्टाश्वदग्धरथन्याय M. Bh. on P. I.1.50,
प्रधान॒lप्प्रधानन्याय M.Bh.on P.II.1.69,VI.
8. 82, प्रासादवासिन्याय M. Bh. on P. I.
1.8,मांसुकण्टकन्या॒य॒M.Bh. on P.I.2.39,
लट्बानुकर्षणन्याय M.Bh. on $iva Stātrā
2 Vārt. 5, शालिपलालन्याय M.Bh. on P.
1.2.39,सूत्रशाटकन्याय M.Bh. on P. I.3.
12• The word came , to be used
,. in the general.sens6 of Paribhaङ्क्ष्चs
cf. द्वितीये
212
न्यय्य
or rules of interpretation many of
which were based upon popular
maximS as stated in the word
लेोकन्यायसिद्ध by Nāgeśa. Hemacan-
dra has used the word न्याय for
Paribhāgā-vacana.The word is also
uSed ita the sense of a general rule
which	haS gOt SOrme exceptions,
cf. न्यायैर्मिश्रानपवादान् प्रतीयात् R. Pr.
which lays down the direction
that *one should interpret the rule
laying down an exception along
with the general rule*.
न्यायरत्नमव्जूषा a work dealing with
Vyākaratāa Paribhāgर्नेs or maxims
as fOund in Hemacandra's system
Of gratmmar, written bv Hema-
hatiीSagat?in, a pupil of Ratna-
. $ekhara, in 1451 . The author has
writ{en a commentary also on the
wOrk, named Nyāsa.
न्यायसंग्रह a work enurmerating the
Paribhā$ãS in Hemacandra*s gram-
mar, numbering 140 nyāyas out
Of w hich 57 nyayas are said to
have been given by Hermacandra
himself at the,end of his comment
बृहद्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्वृति On his SabdānuŚāsama. The
work is written by हेमहंसगणि who
|haS added a commentary to it
Called Nyāyārthamafju$a by him,
which is also known by the name
न्यायररन्नमञ्जूष्ा which see above.
त्यायसंहित combined euphonically ac-
Cording tO rules of grammar; cf.
तद्वति ताद्धतेत् न्यायसंहितं चेत् "explained as
व्याक॒रणशास्त्रेोक्तसंीधमत् V. Pr.'V. 8 com.
न्यायासैद्ध established by a maxim;with
full justification ; cf. न्यायासेिद्धमेवैतत् M.
Bh.on W.1.19.The word is used as
9pp0$ed to ज्ञापकासिद्ध by Nāgeśa; cf.
Par. Sek. Pari. ].
न्यायार्थमव्ञ्ञ्जूषा a name given to न्याय-
रत्नमञ्जूष्वा. See न्यायरत्नमञ्जूष्वा.
न्यायय proper; fully justified न्यायादन-
पेतम्cf. P.IV.4.92; correct; regular;



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-229.png}}}}}}

न्यास
2]3 पक्ष
cf. यञ्ञञ्भ्यामुक्तत्वादर्थस्य न्याय्योत्पत्तिर्न भवि-
ष्यति M. Bh. on II.3.1 where Kai-
yata hOwever, explains the word
differently. Kaiyata states that
न्याय्य tmeans a general rule; cf.उत्सर्गः
पूर्वाच्त्रार्थप्रसिद्धष्या न्याय्य उच्यते Kaiyata on
P. II. 3.1. By Ptirvācārya he pos-
sibly refers to the writers of the
Prāti$akhyas and other similar
works by ancient grammarians,
where the word nyāya is used in
the sense of * a general rule *. See
the word न्याय above.
न्यास (1) lit. position, placing; a word
used in the sense of actual ex-
preSsion or wording especially in
the stitras; cf. the usual expression
क्रियते एतन्न्यास एव in the Mahabhāsya,
cf. M. Bh. on I. ].11, 1.l.47 etc.;
(2) a name given by the writers
Or readers to works of the type of
learned and Scholarly comme-
ntaries on Vritti-type:'WorkS on
standard Stitras in a Sastra; e. g.
the name Nyāsa is given to the
|learned commentaries or! the
Vrtti on Hemacandra's Sabdā-
nuśasana as also on the .Pari-
bhā3ंāvFtti by Hemaharhsagatai.
Similarly the commentary by
Devanandin .on Jainendra gratn-
mar and that by Prabhācandra on
the Amoghāvगृtti on Sākaईंāyana
grammar are named Nyāsa. In
the same way, the learned com-
mentary on the KāśikāvFtti by
Jinendrabuddhi, named Kāśi-
kāvivaranapafijikāby the author, is
very widely known by the name
Nyasa. This commentary Nyāsa
'was written in theeighth century by
the Buddhist grammarian Jinen-
drabuddhi, who belonged to the
easternSchool ofPanini's Grammar.
This Nyāsa has a learned co-
mmentary written on it by
|Maitreya Rak$ंita in the twelfth
century named Tantrapradipa
which is very largely quoted by
st1bsequent grammarians, but
which unfortunately is available
only in a fragmentary state at
present. Haradatta, a well-knOwn
southern scholar of grammar has
drawn considerably from Nyāsa
in his Padamafijari, which also is
wrell-known as a scholarly work.
न्यासोद्दद्येोत a learned commentary On
Jinendrabuddhi's Nyāsa written
by Mallinātha, the standard com-
mentator of prominent Sanskrit
classics.
न्यून incomplete in sensc or wordinटुं
as opposed to Ptirtaa; cf. अयवावे न्यूने
( पादे ने संनिकृष्येते ) R. T. 76.
प
प् (1) first consonant of the labial
class of consonantS pO$sessed Of
the properties श्वासानुप्रदान, अघेाष, and
कण्टविवृतत्व; ( 2 ) पू applied as a
mute letter to a suffix, making
the Suffix accented grave (अनुदात्त).
प, पकार the consonant पुप्, the vowel
अ and the affix कार being added
for facility of understanding and
pronunciation ; cf. T.Pr. I. 17, 21 ;
प is also used as a short term for
consonants of the fifth class (पवर्ग);
cf. T. Pr. 1.27; V. Pr. I. 64 and
R. T. 13.
पक्ष alternative view or explanation
presented by, or on behalf of, a
party ; One of the twO or more
way$ of presenting a matter. The
usual termS for the tWo wieWS are
पूर्वपक्ष and उत्तरपक्ष, when the wiews
are in conflict. The wiews, if
not in conflict, and if stated as
alternative views, can be many
in number, e. g. there are seven `
alternative wieW$ or Pakक्ष्as re ::



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-230.png}}}}}}

पक्षादि
214
पणिडत
the interpretation of the rule इकॊ
गुणवृद्धी; cf.'M. Bh. 9n P. I. I.3; cf.
also सर्वेषु पक्षेत्रु उपसंख्यानं कतैब्यम् M•
Bh. on P. I. 2.64.
पक्षादि a class of words headed by
the word पक्ष to which the tad-
dhita affix अायन ( फक् ) causing
vगृrddhi is added in the four senses
given in P. IV. 2.67-70;, e. g•
पाक्षायणः, अाश्मायनः etc.; cf. KaŚ. On
P. IV. 2.80.
पचादि a class of roots headed by the
root पच् to which the krt. affix अ
( अचुञ् ) is added in the $ense, of
*an agent'; e. g. श्वपन्वः, चोरः, देवः
etc, The clasS पचादि is described
as अाकृतिगण and it is uSual with
commentators tO rnake a remark
पचाद्यचू when a krt affix अ is seen
after a root without causing the
vrddhi substitute to the preced-
ing vowel or to the pemultimate
vowel अ. cf. अज्विधिः सर्वधातुभ्यः पठयन्ते
|च पच्चादयः । अण्बाधनार्थमेवे स्यात् सिध्यन्ति
श्वपन्चादयः Kà$. on P. III. 1.134.
पव्घ्चपदी a term used in the Atharva-
Prātiśākhya for the strong case
affixes viz. the nominatiwe case
affixeS and the accuSative sing.
and dual affixes; cf. चत्वारि क्षैप्रञ्न्व
पत्र्चपद्यामन्तोदात्तादीनि यत् A. Pr. I.
3.14, The term corresponds to
the Sarvanāmasthāna of Patini,
which iS also termed सुट् ; cf. सुडन-
पुंसकस्य P. I. 1.43.
पञ्ग्च्वम the fifth consonant of the fiwe
claSSeS of consonants; the nasal
consOnant, called also वर्गपञ्चम; cf.
यथा तृतीयास्तथा पञ्चमा अानुनासिक्यवर्जम् M.
Bh. on P. I. 1.9 Vart. 2.
पव्घ्वमी (1) the fifth case;ending of the
fifth or ablative case as prescrib-
ed by rules of Pàt?ini cf. अपादने
^ पश्चमी, P. II. 3-7, 10, etc. (2) the
imperative mood; cf. Kāt.III.1.18.
पंञ्चमीनिर्देश statement by the abla-
tive case, cf. ङः सि धुट् P. VIII.
3.29; cf. उभयनिर्देशे पञ्चमीनिर्देशेो बलीयान्
e. g. ङमेो हृस्वादचि ङमुण्नित्यम् |P. VIII.
3.32, Par. Sek. Pari. 70; cf. also
उभञ्यानिर्देशे विप्रतिषेधात्पञ्चमीनिर्देशः M. Bh.
on P. !. 1.67 Vārt. 3.
पव्प्चालपदवृच्ति the usage or the me-
thod of the Paficālas; the eastern
tmethod of euphonic cOrmbimations,
viz. the retention of the wOwel अ
after the preceding vowel ओो
which is substituted for the
Visarga; e. g. येो असैमै; cf. R. Pr.
II. 12; T. Pr. XT. 19. This
vowel अ which is retained, iS prO-
nounced like a short ओो or अर्ध-
ओोकार by the followerS of the
Satyamugri and Rāraāyaniya bran-
ches of the SāmavedinS; cf. cOm-
mentary on T. Pr. XI. I9 as alsO
|M. Bh. Ahnika l .
पञ्जिका a popular name given to
critical commentaries by ScholarS;
cf, काशिकाविवरणपञ्जिका by Jinendra-
buddhi which is popularly known
by the name न्यास.
पटच् tad. affix पट in the sense of
extent ( विस्तार ) added to the word
अवि; e. g. अविपटम् cf. विस्तारे पटज्वक्तव्यः.
P.. V, 2.29 Vārt. 2.
पठन oral recital, the word is uSed
in connectiom with the uSe of
words by the author himself in
|his text which he is SuppOSed to
|have handed over orally to his
disciples, as was the case with
the ancient Vedic and Stitra
works; cf. the words पठित, पठिष्यते,
पठ्यते and the like, frequently used
in the Mahābhāsya, in connection
with the mention of words in the
Sütras of Pārini.
पणिडत writer of Citprabhā, a com-
mentary on the Paribhāgendu-
śekhara. A commentary on the
· ' Laghuśabdendtiśekhara is also a5r



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-231.png}}}}}}

पतञ्जाले
215
पतञ्जलि
cribed to him. He was a Gauda
Brāhmana whose native place was
Kurukgetra.. He lived' in the
beginning of the nineteenth cen-
tury.
पतञ्जाले the reputed author of the
Mahābhāsya, known as the Pātafj-
ala Mahābhasya after him. His
date is determined definitely as the
secOnd century B.C3. on the streng-
th of the internal evidence suppli-
ed by the text of the Mahābhāsya
itself. "The words Gonardiya and
Gonikāputra which are found in
the Mahābhāsya are believed to
be referring to the author himself
and, on their strength he is said
to have been the son of Gonikà
and a resident of the country
called Gonarda in his days.
On the strength of the internal
ewidence supplied by the Mahā-
bhā$ya, it can be said that
Pataग्रेींjali received his education at
Tak:$aŚilā and that he was,just like
Parini, very familfar with villages
and townS in and near Vahika and
Gandhāra countries. Nothing can
definitely be said ab9ut his birth-
place, and although it might be
believed that his native place was
Gonarda,its exact situation has not
been defined So far. About his
parentage too,no definite informa-
tion is awailable. Tradition says
that he was the foSter-son of a,
childless woman named GOfikā to
whom he was handed over by a
sage of Gonarda, in whOse hands
he fell down from the sky in the
evening at the time of the offering
of water-handfuls to the Sun in
the west; cf.पतत् *+ अञ्जलि, the deriva-
tion of the word given by the
commentators.. Apart frOm an-
ecdotes and legendary informa-
tion, it can be said with certain-
ty that Patafँjali was a thOrOugh
scholar of Sanskrit Grammar
who had studied the awailable
texts of the Vedic ILiterature and
Grammar and availed himself of
information gathered persOnally
by visiting the variouS SchoolS of
Sanskrit Grammar and observing
the methods of explanations given
by teachers there. His Mahābhā-
&ya supplies an invaluable fund Of
information on the ways in which
the Gramamar rules of Pārini were
explained in those days in the
variOuS gratmmar Schools. This in-
formation is Supplied by him in
the Vārttikas which he has
exhaustively given and explained.
|He had a remarkable mastery
ower Sanskrit Language which
waS a spoken one at his time and
it can be safely said that in res-
|pect of style, the Mahābhāgya
excels all the other Bhāsyas in the
different branches of learning out
of which two, those of Sabarāswā-
min and Sankaracārya,are selected
for comparisom. It is believed by
schOlars that he was equally cqrav-
ersant with other $āstras, especi-
|ally Yoga and Vaidyaka, on which
he has written learned treatises.
He is said to be the author of the
Yogasuitras which,hence are called
Pātafंjala Yogasप्tras, and the
redactor of the Carakasafíahitā.
There are scholars who believe
that he wrote the Mahābhāgya
only, and nOt the other two. They
base their argument mainly on the
suppOsitiOn that it is impossible
for a scholar to have an equally
unmatching mastery over three
difierent $āstras at a time. The
argument has no strength, especi-
ally in India,where there are many
instances of Scholars possessing



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-232.png}}}}}}

पद
_ →→ → → → "
sound scholarship in different
branches of learning. Apart from
legends and statements of Cakrād-
hara, Nageśa and others, about his
being the author Qf three , workS
on three different $āstra$, there is
a direct reference to Patafijali's
proficiency in Grammār, ¥9ga ाँ
ānd Medicine in the wOrk of King
Bhoja of the eleventh gehtury
and an indirect one in the Vākya-
padtya of Bhartrhari .of the
$everith century A. D. There is a
work on the ' life of Pataमेjali,
written by a scholar of grammar
of the South,named Raāmabhadra,
which gives many stories and incॉं-
dents of his life out of which it is
difficult to find out the grains of
true incidents frOm the legendary
|husk with which they are cOvered•
P'or details,see Pātaमेतंjala Mahābhā-
$ya D.E.S6ciety's edition Vol.,VII
pages 349 to 374. See also;•the
Word महाभाष्य•
पद a word; a unit forming a part
of a sentence; a unit made up of a
letter or of letters, poSSessed of
sense; cf. अक्षरसमुदायः पदम् ! अक्षरं वा l
V.Pr. VIII. 46, 47. The word
originally was applied tO the indi-
vidual words which constituted the
Vedic Sarihhitā; cf. पदप्रकृतिः संहिता
Nir.I.17. Accordingly, it is defin-
ed in the Vājasaneyi Prāti$ākhya
as * अर्थः पदम् ' (V. Pr. III. 2) as
contrastcd with * वणीँनामेकप्राणयोगः
संहिता * (V.Pr.I.158). The definition
* अर्थः पदम् ? is attributed to the
ancient grammarian *Indra', who
is beliewed to hawe been the first
Grammarian of India. Pathini has
defined the term पद as * सुप्तिङन्तं
पदम् * P.I.4. 14. His definition is
applicable to complete noun-forms
and verb-forms and also to prefixes
atad indeclinables Where a case-
216
→→ पद्
afiix is placed and elided accord-
ing to him; cf. अव्ययादाप्सुपः P. II. 4.
82. The noun-bases before case
affixes and tad. affixes, mentioned
in rules upto the end of the fifth
adhyaya, which bcgin with a con-:
sonant excepting श्य् are also tcrmed
पद by Panini tO include parts of
words before the case affixes भ्याम्,
भिस॒, सु etc. as alsO before the tad..
affixes मत्, वत् etc. which are given
as separate padas rmany times in the
pada-pāgha of the Vedas; cf. स्वादि-
ध्वसर्वनामस्थाने P. I. 4. 17. See for
details the word पदपाठ. There are
given four kinds of padas .or_words
Çiz. नाम, अाख्यात, उपसर्ग and निपात in
the Nirukta and Prāti$ākhya wOrks;
cf. also पदमर्थे प्रयुज्यते, विभक्त्यन्तं च पदम्
M. Bh. on P. I. 2. 64 Vārt. 19,
वर्णसमुदायः पदम् M.Bh. on I.1.21 Vārt.
5, पूर्वपरग्रेोरर्थोपळुब्धौ पदम् Kāt. I. 1. 20,
पर्दशद्वेदेनार्थ उच्यते Kaiyata On P.I.2. 42
Vārt. 2; cf. also पद्यते गम्यते अर्थः
अनेनेति पदमित्यन्वथैसंज्ञा Nyāsa on P.III.
1.92. The werb endingS or affixS ति,
तस् and others are also called
पद. The word पद in this sense
is never used alone, but with
the word परस्मै or अात्मने preceding
it. The term परसैमैपद stands for
the nine affixes तिप्, तसु, ••.मस्,while
the term अात्मनेपद ' $tands for the
nine affixes त, अाताम् ••• मीहङ्. cf. ल:
परमैपदम्, तङानावात्मनेपदम्. It is poSsible
to say that in the terms' परस्मैपद
and अात्मनेपद	also, the term पद
could be taken to mean a
word, and it is very likely that
the words : परस्मैपद ' and अात्मनेपद
were originally used in the senSe
of *words referring to something
meant for another ? and *refer-
ring to something meant for
self * respectively. Such words,
of course, referred to werbal forms,
roughly corresponding to the



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-233.png}}}}}}

पदकाण्ड
217
पदचन्द्रिका
द्कण्ड (l) a term used in connection
verbS in the active voice and
verbs in the passive voice. There
are Some modern sch०lars of gra-
rmmar, especially linguists, who
Iike tO translate परस्मैपद as *active
voice' and अात्मनेपद as * passive
voice'• Pāम्ini appears, however,
tO have adapted the sense of the
terms परस्मैपद and अात्मनेपद and taken
· them tO mean mere affixes just as
|he has done in the case of the
terms कृत् and तद्धित. Presumably in
ancient times, words current in
uSe Were grouped into four classes
by the authors of the Nirukta
WOrkS, wiz. (a) कृत् (words derived
frOm rOOts)such as कती, कारकः, भवनम्
etc.•, (b) तद्धित (words derived from
mOunS ) Such as गाग्र्यः, काष्षायम् , etc.,
(c) Parasmaipada words viz. verbs
such as भवति, पचति, and (d) Ātma-
nepada words i.e. verbs like एधते,
वधैते. etÇ.Verbs करोति and कुरुते or हरति
and हरते were looked upon as both
परमैपद words and अात्मनेपद words.
The question Of simple words, as
they are called by the followers of
Pãnini, such as नर्, तद् , गेो, अश्व, and
a number of similar underived
wOrds, did nOt Occur to the authors
of the Nirukta as they believed
that every noun was derivable,
and hence could be included ' in
the krt words.
with the first section of the Vākya-
padya natmed ब्रह्मकाण्इ also, which
deals with padas, as contrast-
ed with the second section
which deals with Vākyas; (2)
a $ection of the A$र्भुādhyayi of
Parini, which gives 'rules ābout
changes and modifications applic-
able to the pada, or the forimed
word, as contrasted with the base
(अङ्ग) and the suffixes. The section
is called पदाधिकार which begins with
28
the ruie पदस्य P.VIII.1.16. and ends
with the rule इडाया व्वा VIII. 3. 54.
पदकार lit. one who has diwided the
Sarांhhitā text of the Wedas into the
Pada-text. The term is applied tO
ancient Vedic scholars शाकल्य, अात्रेय,
कात्यायन and others who wrote the
Padapāरृha of the Vedic Safiahitās.
The term is applied possibly
through misunderstanding by some
scholars to the Mahābhāsyakāra
who has not divided any Wedic Sarih-
hitā,but has, in fact, poitated out
a few errors of the Padakāras
and stated categOrically that gra-
mmarians need not follow the Pada-
pātha, but, rather, the writerS Of
the Padapātha should have follow-
ed the rules of grammar. Patafi-
jali, in fact, refers by the term
पदकार to Kātyāyana, who wrote
the Padapāgha and the PrātiŚākhya
of the Vājasaneyi-Sarihhitā in the
following statement--न लठ्रक्षणेन पदकारा
अनुवत्र्याःlपदकारैनीम लक्षणमनुवत्र्यम्। यथालक्षणं,
पदं कर्तव्यम् M. Bh. on P. III.1. 109;
WI. 1. 207; VIII. 2.16; cf. also
अदीधयुरिति पदकारस्य प्रत्याख्यानपक्षे उदाह-
रणमुपपन्नं भवति ( परिभाषास्सृवन of व्याडि
Pari. 42 ) where Vyādi clearly
refers to the Vartika of Kātya-
yana * दीधीवब्येाश्छन्दोविष्घयत्वात्० *
P. I. 1.6 Vārt. I. The misunder-,
standing is due tO paSSages in the
commentary of स्कन्दस्वामिन् on
the Nirukta passage I. 3, उब्वट-
टका on ऋनकप्रातिशाख्य XIII. 19
and others where the statements
referred to as those ofPataऐjali are,
in fact, quotations frOm the Prā-
tiŚākhya works and it is the writers
of the Prātiśakhya works who are
referred to as padakāras by Pataर्थे-
jali in the Mahābhā$ंya. -2
पदचन्द्रिका a grammar work on the
nature of words written by कृष्णशेष
of the sixteenth century. →



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-234.png}}}}}}

पदपक्ष 218 पदविाघै
पदपक्ष the same as पदसंस्कारपक्ष. See and the Benares SchOol of Gram-
-९ →、t →
पदसंस्कारपक्ष-
पदपाठ the recital of the Veda text
pronouncing	or $howing each
word separately as detached,from
the adj6ining word. It is believed
that the Veda texts were recited
originally as running texts.by the
inspired' sages, and as $uch, theX
wefe preserved by pe9ple by oral
tradition. Later on after several
centuries, their individually dis-
tinct words were shown by £ratm-
marians who were called Pada-
kāras. The पदपाठ later On had
many modificationS Or artificial
recitations Such as क्रम, जट, त्रनं etC.
in which each word waS repeated
twice or more times, being uttered
connectedly with the preceding
or the following wOrd, Or with
both. These artificial recitationS
were of eight kinds, which came
to be known by the term अञ्टविकृतय:•
पदप्रकृति a term used in connection
with the Sarihhitā text Or संहितापाठ
which is beliewed to have been
based upom words ( पदानि प्रकृतिः
थस्याः सा ) or Which forms the basis
of words or word-text or the pada-
pāgha (पदानां प्रकृतिः); cf पदप्रकृतिः संाहिता
Nir.I.l7.
पद्प्रभेद lit. divisions of words: parts
of speech. There are four parts of'
speech wiz,नामन् , अाख्यात, उपसर्ग and
निपात given by anicient gramma-
rians and the authorS of the
Prātiśākhya works, while there are
given Only two, सुबन्त and तिङन्त by
Pārini. For details see pp. 145,
146 Vol. VII. Mahābhagya D. E.
Society*s edition.
पद्मञ्जरी the learned COm mentary by
Haradatta On the काशिकावृत्ति. Haia-
datta was a, very learned gram-
mariatn of the Southern School,
mariains follow पदमञ्जरी more than
the equally learned another com-
mentary काशिकाविवरणपञ्जिक्रा or न्यास.
|In the Padamanjari Haradatta is
said to have given everything
of importance frotm the Mahā-
bhāsya ; cf. अधीते हि महाभाष्ये व्यर्था सा
पदमञ्जरी. For details see Mahābhā3ya
D. E. S. Ed. Vol. VII P. 390-391.
पदवावम्यरत्नाकर a disquisition on
gratmmar dealing with the differ-
ent ways in which the sense of
words is conveyed. The work
consistS of a running cOmmentary
on hiS oWn w'erseS by the author
Gokulanātha Miśra who, from
internal evidcnce, appearS to have
fiourished before Kondabhatta and
after Kaiyata.
पदवाद or पदवादिपक्ष view that words
are real arhd have ara existence
and individuality of their own.
The wiew is advocated by the
followers of both the Mimārihsā
schools and the logicians who
beliewe that words have a r eal
existence. GrammarianS admit the
view for practical purposes, while
they advocate that the अखण्डवाक्य-
स्फेोट alone is the real sense. cf.
Vākyapadiya II.90 and the foll.
पदविधि an operation prescribed in
connection with words ending'
with case or verbal afiixes and mot
in connection with noun-bases or
|rOot-bases or with single letterS or
syllables. पदविधि is in this way con-
trasted with अङ्गविधि ( including
प्रातिपदिकविधि and धातुविधेि ), वर्णविधि and
अक्षराविधि, Such Padavidhis are given
in Pā'ini's grammar in Adhyāya2,
P'adas l and 2 as also in VI.1.158,
and ibn VIII.1.16 to VI[II.3.54 and
include rule$ in connectiom with
compounds, aCcents and euphonic



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-235.png}}}}}}

पदविराम
2B9
पदान्त
combinations. When, however, an ||
operation is prescribed for two Or |
more padas, it is necesSary that |
the two padas or words must be !
syntactically connectible; cf. समथैः !
पदविधिः P. II.1.1. →
पदविरराम pause between twD words
measuring twO matrās, or equal to
the time required for the utter-
ance of a ]ong vOwel; e. g. in इषे
त्वोर्जे त्वा, the pause between इषे and
त्वा is measured by two mātrās; cf.
पदविरामो द्विमात्रः T. Pr. XXII.13.Some
Prātiśākhya texts declare that the
pause between twO wOrds is of !
one mātra as at avagraha' cf. R
|Pr. II.1 a.rad R.. T. 35 -38.
पदव्यवस्थास्सूत्रकारिका a metrical work
on the determination of the
pada or padas of the rOOfS attri-
buted to Vimalakirti. I
पदव्यवस्थास्सूत्रकारिकाटीका a short gloss
9n the पदब्यवस्थासूत्रकारिकI written by
Udayakirti, a Jain grammarian
पदसंस्कारपक्ष an alternative view with
वाक्यसंस्कारपक्ष regarding the forma-
tion of words by the application
of affixes to crude bases. Ac-
cording tO the Padasarihskāra al-
ternative, every word is formed
independently, and after forma-
tion the words are syntactically
connected and uSed in a sentence.
The Sense of the sentence too, is
understood after the sense 6f every
wOrd haS been umderstood; cf.
सुविचार्य पदस्यार्थ वाक्यं गृह्णन्ति सूरयः Sira.
on Pari. 22. According ' to the
other . alternative wiz. वाक्यसंस्कारपक्ष,
a whole sentence is brought before
the mind and then the constitu-
ent individual words are formed
e.g. राम +सु, गम् + अ + ति | Both the
views have got some advantages
and some defects; cf. Par. Sek.
Pari. 56.
पदस्फोट expression of the sense by
the whoie word without aiay COn-
sideration showra to its division
into a. base and an affix. For inst-
ance, the word रामेण means * by
Rama? irrespective of any consider-
ation whether न is the affix Or इन
is the afiix which could be any
of the two, or even one, different
from the two; cf. उपायाः शिक्षमाणानीं
वालानामपलापनाः Vākyapadīya. II.240.
पदादि (1) beginni1ag of a wOrd, the
first letterof a word; cf. सात्पदाद्योः
|P. VI II.3.11 1; cf. also स्वरितो वानुदाचेत
पदादौ P. VIII.2.6. Patafijali, for the
sake of argument has only Once ex-
plained पदादि as पदादादिः.cf. M.Bh.On
i. 1. 63 Vārt. 6; (2) a class of wOrds
headed by {he word पद् which is
$ubstituted for पद in all caSeS ex-
cept the nom. and the acc• $inँ-
gular and dual; this clas$, called
पदादि, contains the substituteS पद् *
दत्, नस॒ etc. respectively for प्रादु,
दन्तं, नासिका etc. cf. Kāś. on P. VI•
1.63; (3) the words in the class,
called ' पदादि, constiting of the
words पद्, दत्, नस्, मस् हृत् and निश्
only, which have the case afश्x
after them accented acute; cf. P•
VI. 1.17l•
पदादिविधि a grammatical operation
specifically prescribed for the ini-
tial letter of a wOrd.
पदााधेिकार the topic concerning padas
i.e- words which are regularly
formed, as contrasted with wOrds
in formation. Several grammatical
operations, such as accents or
euphonic combinations, are speci-
fically prescribed together by
|]Pānini at places which are said
to be in the Padādhikāra formed
by stitras VIII.1.16 to V III.3.54.
पदान्त final letter of a, word; cf. P.
VI.1.76, 109; VII.3.3, 9; VIII.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-236.png}}}}}}

पदार्थ
220
पर्रकार्यत्व
4.35,37, 42, 59. At one place,
Pataऐjali for purposes Of argu-
ment has explained the word as
final in a word; cfनैर्वे विज्ञायते पदस्यान्त:
पदान्तः पदान्तादिति । कथं तर्हि । पदे अन्त:
पदान्तः पदान्तादिति M. Bh. on VIII.
|4.35.
पदार्थ meaning of a wOrd, Significa-
tion of a word; that which
corresponds to the meaning of a
word; sense of a word. Gram-
· marians look upon both-the
generic notion and the individual
object as Padārtha or meaning
of a word, and support their view
by quoting the sütras of Par]ini
जात्याख्यायामेकस्मिन् बहुवचनमन्यतरस्याम् I.
2.58 and सश्क्ष्पाणामेकशेष एकविभक्तौ I.
2.64; cf. किं पुनराकृतिः पदार्थ अाहेोस्विद्
|द्रब्यम् ! उभयमित्याह 1 कथं ज्ञायते | उभयथा
ह्माचार्येण सूत्राणि प्रणीतानि । अाकृतिं पदार्थे |
मत्वा जात्याख्यायामित्युच्यते | द्रव्यं पदाथै मत्वा
सरूपाणामित्येकशेष अारभ्यते, M. Bh.. in
I. 1. first Ahnika. In rules of
grammar the meaning of a word
is generally the wocal elememt or
the wording, as the science of
grammar deals with words and
their formation: cf. श्वं रूपं शब्दस्याशब्द-
" संज्ञा, P. I. 1• 68. The pOssession of
wocal element aS the sense is
technically termed शव्दपदार्थकता as
opposed to अर्थपदार्थकता; cf. सोसौ
गो॒ोशब्दः रूवस्मात्पदार्थात्_प्रच्युतेों यासौ अर्थपदा-
`र्थकता तस्याः शब्दपदाथैक: संपद्यते M. Bh.
I. 1.44 V. 3. The word पदाथै
meanS alSO the categories or the
predicāments in connection with
the diferent Sāstr 1s or lores as
for instance, the 25 categories in
the Sāfhkhyaśāstra or 7 in the
Vai$e$ंika System or 16 in the
Nyayaśāstra. The Vyakarat2aśa-
stra, in this way to state, has Only
oue category the Akhandavākyas-
pho{a or .the radical , meaniing
given by the sentence
stroke.
in one
पइंनभ a grammarian who wrote a
treatise On gramrraar known as
the Supadma VyākaraT?a. He is
believed to hawe been an inhabi-
tant of Bengal whO lived in the
fourteenth century A. D. Some
Say that he waS a resident of
Māthilā.
पद्य forming a part of a word or
pada; cf. उपेोत्तमं नानुदात्तं न पद्यम् R.
Pr. I. 29; cf. alsO पूबैपद्यः R. Pr.' I.
30. The wwcord is used in this
sense ( पदावयव ) mostly in the
Prātiśākhya workS. The word is
used in the SenSe of पादसंपन्न, made
up of the feet. (of verses), in the
|Rk , PratiŚakhya in contrast with
अक्षर्य, made up of syllables. In
this sense the word is derived
frofm the word पाद; cf. पद्याक्षर्ये स
उत्थितः R.. Pr, XVIII. 3.
पर (l) subsequent,as opposed to पूर्व or
priOr; the word is frequently üsed
in grammar in cOnrnection with a
rule Or an Operation prescribed
later On irn a gram mar treatise; cf.
विप्रतिषेधे परं कार्यम् P. I. 4. 2; ( 2 )
OCcurring after ( something ) ; cf.
प्रत्थयः परश्च P. III. l. ] and ' 2; cf,.
alsO तत् परस्वरम् T.Pr. XXI.2. (3)The
wOrd पर is sometimes explained
in the sense of इष्ट or desired,
pOssibly On the analogy of the
meaning श्रेष्ठ pOSSessed by the word.
This sense is given to the word
पर in the rule विप्रतिप्रेधे परं कार्ये with
a view tO apply it to earlier rules
ir cases of emergency; cf. विप्रतिषेधे
परं यदिष्टं तद्भवति M.Bh. 6h I. 1.8.Vart,
6; परशब्दः इष्टवाच्ची M.Bh. on I. 2.5,
|I• 4*.2. Vart, 7; II. I.69 etc.
→ ९ → १^ →
प्रयत्व Or परंकार्थेत्वपक्ष the view that
the SubSequent संज्ञा or technicai
term $hould be preferred to the



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-237.png}}}}}}

परनकम
221
पररूप
prior one, when b०th happen to
apply simultaneously to a ' word.
The wOrd is frequently used in the
Mahābhāsya as referring to the
reading अा काडारात् परं कार्यम् which is
believed to have been an alterna-
tive का reading to the reading अा
कडारादेका संज्ञा; cf. ननु च यस्यापि परैकार्यत्वं
तेनापि परग्रहणं कर्तव्यम्; M. Bh. on I. 4.
1; also भवेदेकसंज्ञाधिकारे सिद्धम् । परंकार्यत्वे
तु न सिद्धयति; M.Bh. on II. 1.20, II.
2.24.
परक्रम a term used in the Prāti$ākhya
workS for *doubling'of a consonant.; |
cf. सान्तःस्थादौ धारयन्तः परक्रमम् । R. Pr.
XIV. 23.
परग्रहण the use of the word पर;inser-
tion of the Word पर in a rulc; cf.
तेनापि परग्रहणं कतैब्यम्; M.Bh. on I.4.1;
cf. also परग्रहणमनथैकम् M.Bh. on III.
1.2.
परत्व posteriority ;mention afterwards;
the word is frequently uscd in
works on gratmmar in connection
with a rule Which is mentioned in
the treatise after another rule; the
posterior rule is looked upon as
Stronger than the prior One, and is
given priority in application when
the two rules come in conflict
although technically they are
equally strong; cf. परत्वादद्द्ल्श्रेोपः ; M.
Bh. on I. l.4 Vart 7; 'परत्वाच्छीभाव:
- I. 1.1 [ etc.
परत्वन्याय application of the later
rule before the former one, accord-
* ing to the dictutm laid down by
|Panini in the rule विप्रतिषेधे परं कायैम्
· P. I. 4.2; cf. परत्वन्यायो 'न लङ्घितो भवति
Sira. Pari.. 84,
परनिपात lit. placing after; the placing
of a word in a compound after
another as contrasted with पूर्वनिपात.
A subordinate word is generally
placed first in a compound, cf.
उपसर्जनं पूर्वम्; in some exceptional
* cases however, this general rule is
परनिमिच्तक
not observed as in the cases of
राजदन्त and the like, where the
subordir;ate word iS placed after
the principa1 word, and which
cases, hence, are taken aS caSeS
of परनिपात. The words पूर्व and पर are
relative, and hence, the caSeS Of
परनिपात with respect to the sub-
ordinate word ( उपसर्जन ) such as
राजदन्त, प्रात्नजीविक etc. can be called
cases of पूर्वनिपात with rcspect to the
principal word ( प्रधान ) cf. परश्शता:
राजदन्तादित्वात्परनिपात: KāŚ. on P. II•
1.39.
→→、
caused by Something
which follows; the term is used in
grammar in connection v\ ith some-
thing caused by what followS; cf.
परनिमित्तकोजादेश: पूर्वविधिं प्रति॒ि न स्थानिवत्
S. K.. on अच्वः परस्मिन्पूर्वविधौP.I.1.57.
परमप्रकृति the most original base; the
original Of the Original base; the
word is used in connection with a
base which is not a direct base to
which an afiix is added, but whichi
is a remote base;cf. अापत्यो वा गेोत्रम् ॥
परमप्रकृतेश्च अापत्यः । M. Bh. on P.IW.1.
89; cf. also M. Bh. on IV.1.93,98,
163.
परमाणु a time-unit equal to one-half
of the unit called अणु, which forms
otne-half of the unit called मात्रा
which is required for the purpose
of the utterance of a consonamt;
cf. परमाणु अर्धाणुमात्रा V. Pr.I.61. परमाणु,
in short, is the duration of very
infinitesimal time equal to the
pause between two indiwidual
continuous sounds. The interval
between the utteranceS .of tWo
consecutive consOnants is given to
be equivalent to one Paramanu ;
cf. वणन्तरं परमाणु R.T.34. →
पररूप the form of the subsequent
letter (परस्य रूपम्). The word is used
in gramtmar When the resultant of
' the two coalescing vowels ( एकादेशां



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-238.png}}}}}}

परवाश्लेिङ्गता 222
---------→ "~ "" 2 "
is the latter vowel itSelf, as for |!
iistanice एँ in प्रेजते ( प्र + एजते ); cf*
एङि. पररूपम् P.VI.1 .9±.
परवल्लिङ्गता posSession of the gender cf
thnिāl member of a compound
word, which, in tatpurusa COr*'P°"
unds, is the second of the twO '°f
the last out of many; cf. परवष्छिईं
द्वन्द्वतत्पुरुषयेोः (P. II.4 26).इति परवाश्ठिङ्कता
यथा स्यौत् M. Bh. on P. V. 4.68•
परविप्रतिषेध the conf{ict between two
rules (by occurrence togeth€r)
when the latter prevails OVer the
former and takes place by. Virtue
of the dictnm विप्रतिषेधे पंर कार्यम् P. I.
4.2; cf. ऋथं ये परविप्रतिषेधाः M.Bh• on
I.4.2.
परसप्तमी a locative case in the Sense
of *what follows', as contrasted
with विषयसतमी,अधिकरणसतमी and the
like; cf. ळुकीतिनैषा परसतमीं शक्या विशार्तुं
न हि'लुका पौर्वापथैमस्ति । का तर्हि । सत्सतमी
M.Bh. on P.I.2. 49.
परसवर्ण cognate of the latter vowel
पर
मि, वः and म:, while the term
अात्मनेपद is used in connection with
thc next nine त, अाताम् etc-; cf. परस्मै
परोद्देशार्थफलकं पदम् VaC. Koga. The
term परस्मैपद is explained by SOme
as representing the Active Voice
as contrasted with the PaSSive
Voice which nccesSarily is charac-
terized by the Atmanepada aftixeS.
The terrm परस्मैभाष्प्र in the sense of
परस्मैपद was used by ancient gra-
mmarians and is alsO found in the
Varttika अात्मनेभाघपरस्मैभाषयोरुपसंख्यानम्
P. VI. 3.8 Vārt. 1. The term
परस्मैभाष्त्र as applied tO roots, cOuld
be explained as परस्मै क्रियां (orक्रियाफलं)
भाषन्ते इति परस्मैभाषाः and originally
such roots as had their activity
meant for another, uSed to take
the परस्मैपद affixes, while the rest
which had the activity meant for
self, took the अात्मनेपद affixes. ROots
hawing activity for both, took both
the terminations and were termed
उभयपदिनः.
or consonant. The word is fre- ! परस्मैभाष lit. speaking the activity or
quently used in grammar in cor३n-
ectionwith a substitute or अादेश
which is specified to be cognate
( सवर्ण ) of the succeeding vowel or
consonant; cf. अनुस्वारस्य यथि परसवर्ण:
P.VIII. 4. 58.
परस्परव्यपेक्षा mutual expectancy
possessed by two words, which is
called सामथ्र्य in grammar. Such an
expcctancy is necessary between
the two or more words which form
a compound; cf. परस्परव्यपेक्षां सामथ्र्यमेके
P.II.1.1, V.4; cf. also इह राज्ञः पुरुष्त्र
इत्युक्ते , राजा पुरुषमपेक्षते ममायमिति पुरुबोपि
राजानमपेक्षते अहमस्य इति l M.Bh. on II.
l.l.
परस्मैपद a term used in grammar
with reference to thepersonal affixs
ति, त: etc. applied to roots. The
term परस्मैपद is ' given to the first
nine afiiश्xes ति, तः, अन्ति, सि, थः, श्थ,
क्रिया for another; a term of ancient
grammarians for rOOtS taking the
first nine personal affixes only viz.
ति, तः... मसे॒ं. The term परस्मैपदिन् was
substituted for परस्मैभाष्त्र later On,more
commonly. See परस्मैपद above. The
term परस्मैभ्ाष along with अात्मनेभाष is
found almost invariably used in the
Dhatupātha attributed to f'āग्भ्ini;
cf. भू सत्तायाम् । उदात्तः परस्मैभाषः । एधादय
उदात्तां अनुदारेतत अात्मनेभाषा: Dhātu-
pātha.
परा the higitc5। eternal voice or
word, the highest and the most
lofty of th।e Iour divisions of
language (च|नैh), viz. परा,पश्यन्ती, मध्यमा
and वैखरी, which, (परा), philo3ophi-
cally is identificd with नाद ( व्रह्म )
or शब्दव्रह्म. It is described as वर्णादि-
विशेषरहिताचेचतनमिश्रा सृष्टयुपयोगिनेा जगदुपा॒दा-
नभूता कुण्डलिनीरूपेण प्रार्णिनां मूलाधारे वर्तते ।



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-239.png}}}}}}

पंर
223
परिभाषा
कुण्डलिन्याः प्राणवायुसयोगे परा व्यज्यते l इयं
नि:ष्पन्दा पश्यन्त्यादयः सस्पन्दा अस्या विवैर्तः l
इयमेव सूक्ष्मस्फोट इत्युच्यते ।
पराङ्गवद्भाव behaviour as having be-
come a part and parcel of another ;
treatment of a word as a part Of
another. The term is used by
Pānini in connection with a word
followed by and connected with a
word in the wocative case of which
it is looked upon as a part for
purposes ofaccent, e. g. बुणेडनाटन् ,
मद्राणां राजन् etc. Here the words अटन्
and राजन् , being in the vocative
· case, are अाद्दुद्युदात्त, i.e. अ ( at the
beginning of अटन्) and अा (in राजन्)
are acute and as a result all the
other vowels in कुण्डेनाटन् and मद्राणां
राजन् becOme अनुदात्त or grave; cf.
सुबामन्त्रित पराङ्कवत्स्वरे P.II. 1.2.
परादि initial or first of the next or
sugceeding wo'd; cf. किं पुनरयं पूर्वान्त
अाहेोस्वित्परादि: अाहेस्त्रिदभत्तः M.Bh.. on
|P. I. l.47 Vārt. 3; cf. also M. Bh.
on IW.1.87, IV.2, 91.
परादिसस्वर a consonant belonging to
the succeeding vowel in syilabica-
tion; cf. R.Pr.I.15.
परार्थ (l) the sense of another word;
* cf. पराथीभधानं वृत्तिः इत्याहुः । M.Bh. on
II.1.1,Vārt.2; (2) for the sake of,or
being of use in,the next (सूत्र);cf.परार्थे
मम भविष्यति सन्यत इद्भवतीति, M. Bh. on
I.1.59 Vārt.. 8.
परिकृष्ट dragged to the latter; cf.
Pu$pastitra III. 114; the word परि
starads for पर here.
परिक्रम the same as परकम; doubling
(द्वित्व ) of a subsequent consonant
as fQr example the doubling of स्
in शर्मन् स्स्याम;	cf. सान्त:स्था|दौ	धारयन्तः
परक्रमं (v. l. परिक्रमं) R.Pr. XIV. 23.
परिगणन lit. enumeration. The word
is used in grammar treatises in the
sense of . *a definite or complete |
enumeration? with a wiew to ex-
clude those that are not included
in the enumeration ; cf परिगणर्न
|कर्तव्यम् ! यङ्यक्यवलेोपे प्रतेिषेधः M.Bh. on
I.1.4 Vart. 1.
परिग्रह also परिग्रहण. (1) acceptance, in-
clusion; cf.' केि प्रयेोजनम् । प्रत्ययार्थ
परिग्रहार्थम् M.Bh. on P.I II.26.1 ; C2)
repetition of a Sarihhitā word in the
Pada recital, technically named
वेष्टक also; repetition of a word with
इति iraterposed; e. g. सुप्राव्या इति सुप्रऽ
अव्याः Rg. Veda II.13.9, अलला भवन्ती-
रित्यललाऽभवन्ती: Rg. IV.18.6; cf. परिग्रहे
त्वनार्षान्तात् तेन वैकाश्क्षरीकृतात् । परेषां न्यास-
माच्चारं व्यालिस्तैौ चेत्स्वरौ परौ; R. Pr. III.
14. cf. also, R.Pr.XI.32,36,42.
परिनिष्ठित completely formed; with
the formation completely achieved;
स्वार्थे प्प॒रिपूर्णम् ; cf पुरिनिष्ठित॒स्य .पदान्तर॒संबन्धे
हि गौर्वाहीके इत्यादैौ गैौगृत्वप्रतीतिनै तु प्रातिपदि-
|कसंस्कारेवेलायाम् Par. Sek. on Pari. 15.
परिपन्न a kind of Sarhdhi or coale-
scence characterized by the change
of the consonant म् into an anu-
svāra, as by मेोनुस्वारः P. VIII.: 3.23,
before a sibilant or before रेफ; cf.
रेफेोष्मणोरुदययोर्मकारः अनुस्वारं तत् परिपन्नमाहुः
R.Pr.IV.5; cf. also सम्राट्शब्दः परिसं-
पन्नापवादः R.Pr.IW.7.
परिभाषा an authoritative statementor
dictum, helping (!) the correct
interpretation Of the rules (stitras)
of grammar, or (2) the remowal of
conflict between two rules which
OCcur SimultaneOu8ly in the process
of the formation of words, (पदसिाद्ध),
Or (3) the formation of correct
words. Various definitions of the
word परिभाष्ञा are given by commen-
tators, the prOminent ones being-
परितो व्यापृतां भाषां परिभाघां प्रचक्षते(न्यास);or,
परितो भाष्यते या सा परिभाषा प्रकीर्तिता. The
word is also defined as विधौ नियामक-
रिणी परिभाषा ( दुर्गसिंहृवृाक्ति ). परिभाषा can
alsO be briefiy defined as the



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-240.png}}}}}}

परैिभाषा
convention Of a standard authOr•
Puru$ottamadeva applies thae wOrd
परिभाषा to the maxims of standard
writers, cf. परिभाष्बा हि न पाणिनीँयीाने
वचनानि; Puru. Pari. 1 l9 ; while
Haribhāskara at the end of his
' treatise परिभाषाभास्कर, states that
Vyadi was the first writer On
Paribhāsās. The rules तस्मिन्निति निर्दिष्टे
पूर्वस्य, तस्मादित्युत्तरस्य and otherS are in
fact Paribhā$ā rules laid down by
|]Panini. For the difiterence between
परिभाषा and अधेिकार, See Mahabhā$ya
on II.1.1. Many times the writers
of Suitras lay down certain cOnven-
tions for the proper interpretation
of their rules, to .which additions
are made in course Of time accOr-
ding to necessitieS that arise, by
commentators. In the different
systems of grammar there are
difierent collections of Paribha$as.
In Pat]ini's system, apart from
commentaries thereOn, there are
independent collections of Pari-
bha$as by Vyādi, Bhojadeva,
|Puru$ottamadeva, $iradeva, Nila-
|kantha, Haribhāskara, Nāge$a and
a few others. 'There are inde-
|pendent collections of Pari-
bhaक्ष्ās in the Kātantra, Cānd-
ra, Sakatayana,.Jainendra and He-
macandra Systems Of grammar.It is
a noticeable fact that many Pari-
? bhāgās are common, with their
wordings quite similar or some-
times identical in the difierent
systems. Generally the collections
of Faribhāgंās have got scholiums
Or commentaries by recognised
grammarians, which in their turn
|have sometimes other glosses or
commentaries upon them. The
Paribhāsenduśekhara of Nageśa is
am authoritative work of an out-
standing merit in the system of
· Famini's Grammar, which is com-
224
mented upOn by more than
twentyfive Scholars during the last
twO Or thretटै centurics. The total
number of Paribha$as in the differ-
· ent systems Of gramrmar may well-
|nigh exceed 500. See परिभाषासंग्रह,
परिभाषाप्रकाश an independent trea-
tise explaining the various Parj-
bhāgās in the system of Panini?s
grammar, written by VisnuŚe&a of
the famous Se$a family. →
परिभाषाप्रदीपाचिंस् a scholarly inde-
pendeht treatise on Vyākarana
Paribhāsās written by Udayarih-
kara Pathaka, called also Nānā
Pathaka, a Nāgara Brahmat]a,
whCo lived at Benares in thé
middle of the 18th century A. D.
He has alsO writter] commenta-
rieS On the twO Sekharas of
Nāgeśa.
परिभाषाभास्कर (1) a treatise on the
'z.Paribhāsās in Pāraini*s grarmmar
ट्रं Written by Haribhāskara Agni-
* hotr, $On 9f Appājibhatta Agni-
|hOtri, whO liध्red in the seventeenth
century : (2) a treatise ora Pār]ini-
paribhāsās, as arranged by Sira-
deva, written by Se$ādri$uddhi.'
परिभाषार्थसंग्रह a treatise on the Pari-
bhāsaS in the system of Panimi's
ईrammar written by Vaidyanātha
S:āstrin.
परिभाषावृच्ति a general name given to
an explanatory independent work
on Paribhā$ās of the type of a
glOSS On a collection of Pari-
bha$ās, irrespective of the system
Of grammar, whether it be that
Of Pārini, or of Kātantra, or of
Jainendra Or Of Hemacandra. The
treatises of Vyādi (Pāmini systerm),
IDurgasirihha and Bhāvamiśra
(Kātantra system), Purugottama-
deva and Siradeva (Pānimi system),



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-241.png}}}}}}

परिभाषावृत्तिटिप्पणी 225
परिभाषेन्दुशेखर
Abhyankar (.Jainendra system)
and others are all known by the
mame Paribhā$awritti.
परिभाषावृत्तिाटेिप्पणी a very brief comrm-
entary on the Paribha$āv[tti of
Siradeva written by Srimāna$ariman
Of CampāhattT.
परिभाषावृत्तिटीका 'a commentary on
the Paribhā$āv[tti of Siradeva
written by Rāmabhadra Diksita
wh`o liwed in the sewenteenth
century A. D.
परिभाषासंग्रह a work containing a
collection of independent works on
Paribhāsās in the several systems
of Sanskrit Grammar, compiled
by M. M. K. V. Abhyankar.
The collectlon consists of the
folloWinःg works (i) परिभाषासूचन con-
taining 93 Paribhā$ās with a
cOmmentary by Vyadi, an ancient
grammarian who liwed before
|Patafjali; ( ii ) व्याडीयपरिभाष्प्रापाठ, a
bare text of 140 Paribhāsās be-
|longing to the School of Vyādi*
(iii) शाकटायनपरिभाषास्त्र a text of 98
|Paribhā$ā aphorisms, attributed
to the ancient grammarian Sāka-
£āyana,or belonging to that school;
[iv) चान्द्रपरिभाषामूत्र a text of 86
Paribhāgā aphorisms given at the
end of his grammar work by Can-
dragomin; (v) कातन्त्रपरिभाषासूत्रवृत्ति a
gloss on 65 Paribhā$ā aphorisms of
the Kātantra schoolby Durgasitihha;
(vi) कातन्त्रपरिभाषासूत्रवृति a short gloss
on 62 Paribhāsā aphorisms of the
|Kātantra school by Bhāvamiśra;
(vii) कातन्त्रपरिभाषासूत्र a text of 96
|Paribha$ā rules belonging to the
|Katantra School without any
author's name aSSociated with it;
(viii) कालापपरिभाषासूत्र a text of
1 18 Paribhāsa rules belonging
to the.Kālāpa school without any
author's name asSOciated wi'h it;
(ix) जैनेनन्द्रपारिभाषावृात्त a gloss written
29
by M. M. K. V. Abhyankar ( the
compiler of the collection), on 108
Paribhāśās or maxims npticeable in
the Mahāv!rtti ofAbhayanandin on
theJainendra Vyākarana of Ptijya-
pāda Devanandin ; (x) भेोजदवकृतपरि-
भाषासूत्र a text of 118 Paribhāgā rules
given by BhQja in the second pāda
of the first adhyāya of his grammar
work named Sarasvatikat?thābha-
rar3a; (xi) न्यायसंग्रह a barc text of
140 paribhāsās(which are called by
the name nyāya) given by Hema-
harihsagafi in his paribhāsā •work
narned न्यायसंग्रह; (xii) लघुपरिभाषावृत्ति
a glcss on l20 Paribhāsās of the
Pānini school written by Puruso-
ttamadeva; (xiii) बृहत्परिभाषावृत्ति con-
taining 130 Paribhāśās with a
commentary by Siradeva and a
very short, gloss on the commen-
tary by Srimāmaśarman; ( xiv )
परिभाषावृत्ति a short gloss on 140 Pari-
bhāsas of the Panint School written
by Nilakattha; (xw) परिभाषाभास्कर a
collection of 132 Paribhasās with
a commentary by Haribhāskara
Agnihotri; (xvi) bare text of Pari-
bhāśās given and explained by
Nāge$abhatta. in his Paribhāgendu-
$ekhara. The total number of
Paribhāsās mentioned and treated
in the whole collection exceeds
five hundred.
परिभाषास्सूचन an old Work on the
|Paribhā$ās in the system of
Pānini's Grammar, believed to
have been written by Vyādi, who
lived after Kātyāyana and before
Patafijali. The work is written '
in the old style of the Mahābhā-
$ya and consistS of a, short com-
mentary on 93 Paribha$ās.
परिभाषेन्दुशेखर the reputed authori-
tative work on the Paribhāsās in
the System of Panini's grammar
written by NāgeŚabhatta in the



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-242.png}}}}}}

परिमल
226
→、
पररांक्ष
beginning of the 18th century
A. D. at Benares. The wOrk iS
studied very widely and haS got
nraorcठ than 25 cOmmentarieS
written by pupils in the spiritual
1ine of Nāgeśa. Well-known amOng
these commentaries are thOse
written by Vaidyanātha Paya-
gutjde ( called गदा ), by Bhaira-
wamiśra ( called मिश्री), by R.āgha-
vendrācārya Gajendragadakara
( called त्रिपथगा ), by Govindā-
carya A$;aputre of Poona in the
beginning of the , nineteenth cer1-
tury (called भावार्थदीपिका), by Bhā-
· skaraśastri Abhyankar of Sātārā
(called भास्क्ररी ), and by M. M.
Vāsudevaśastri Abhyamkar of
Poona (called तत्त्वादर्श ). BesideS
these, there are commentarieS
written by Tātya Śastri Pata-
wardhana, Ganapati śāstri MO-
kāte, Jayadeva Mi$ra, Vi$tau-
$āstri Bhat, Wishwanātha Dar1-
dibhatta, Harinātha Dwiwedं
Gopālacārya Karhadkar, Hari-
shastri Bhāgawata,Govinda Shastri
|Bhāradwaja, Nārāyamिa Shastri
Galagali, Wetimādhawa Shukla,
Brahmānanda Saraswati, Maniष्Śiśe-
$aŚarma, Manyudeva, Sarihkara-
bha±तूंa, Indirāpati, Bhimācārya
Galagali, Mādhavacārya Waikar,
Cidrtipāśraya, BhTmabhatta, Lak-
$minfsirihha and a few others.
Some of these workS are named by
their authors as Tikās, others as
Vyàkhyās and still others as
TippatiS or Viv!rtis.
परिमल a work on Grammar attri-
buted to Amaracaradra..
परिमाण a word used by Panini in
तदस्य परिमाणम् V. J.l9 and explained
by Patafijali as सर्वतो मानम्.Sārhkhya
( number ) is also said to be
a parimat}a.. Parimana is of two
kinds- नियत or definite as in the
case Of Khārī, drot?a etc; and अानेयत,
as in the Case of Gat]a, Sarihgha,
Ptiga, Sārtha, Senā etc. The term
परिमाण, in cc9nnection with the
utterance Of letters, is uSed in the
sense of मात्राकाल or one mora.
परिलोप elision ofa phonetic meomber;
the Same aS lopa in the Grammar
of Pāmini. The term परिलेप and
the verbal forms_of the root परिळुय्
are found in the Pr ātiŚākhya work$;
cf. उष्मा परिलुटुप्यत त्रयाणाम् |R. Pr. II. 4.
परिवर्तन reversion in the order of
words aS found În the recital of
the Vcda at the time of the recital
Of जटा, घन and Other artificial types
of recitatioms.
परिसंख्यान ]it. enumeration; enuncia-
tion ; mention ; the word is found
generally used by Kātyayana and
Other Vārttikakāras at the end of
their Vārttikas. The words वक्तव्यम्,
वाच्यम्, and the like, are sirmilarly
uSed.
परिसमाप्ति application of the complete
senSe; the wOrd is found used in
the three alternative views about
the application of the full sense of
a Sentence,- collectively, in-
dividually Or in both the ways, to
the individuals concerned ; cf.प्रत्येकं
वाक्यपरिसमाति:, समुदाय वाक्यपरिसमातिः,
उभयथा वीक्यपरिसमाप्तिः ; cf. M. Bh. I.
l.l Vart• 12; ( 2 ) completion ; cf.
वृत्करणं ल्वादीनां प्वादीनां च परिसमाप्त्यर्थमिति
Kā$. on WII. 3.80.
परिहार (1) removal of a difficulty, cf.
अन्यथा कृत्वा चोदितमन्यथा कृत्वा परिहारं: M.
Bh. on P. IV. 1.7. Vart. 3; (2)
repetitiOn in the Padapāgha, Kra-
mapātha etc. e. g अकरित्यकः. In
this sense the word is found in the
neuter gender ; cf. रेफपरिहाराभि A. Pr.
III. 1.1.
परोक्ष used as an adjective of the
wOrd भूतँ meaning *past tense'; lit.
g *p



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-243.png}}}}}}

परोक्षा
227
पश्वौदि
behind the eyes, unnoticed by the
eyes. The word is generally used in
the sense of remote or long (past)
Or *perfect'. For the alternative
explanation of the word परोक्ष, cf.
कथंजातीयकं,पुनः परोक्षं नाम । केाचित्तावदाहुः
वर्षुशत॒ष्र्वृत्तं परोक्षमिति । अप॒र अाहुः क्रटान्तरितं
प॒रो॒क्षुमिति । अप्प॒र अाहुद्वर्ग्रहृवृत्तं त्र्यैहंवृत्ते चेति ! |
M.Bh. on परोक्षे लिट्ट्रं P. III.2.1 15.
परोक्षा lit. behind the eyes; remote; |
the term is found used by ancient
grammarians and also referred to
in the Mahābhāsya aS referring to
the , perfect tense called लिट् in
Paraini's grammar; cf. ज्ञापकात्परोक्षाश्यां
( लिटि ) न भविष्यति । M.Bh. on P. I.
2.28: cf. also न व्यथते: परोक्षायाम् Kāt.
III.4.2!.
पर्जन्यवल्छुक्षणप्रवृत्ति the application of
a grammatical rule or operation
like the rains which occuron dry
land as also on the sea surface; cf.
कृत॒क्रि खल्वपि, शास्त्रं पर्जन्यवत् । तद्यथ] ।
पर्जन्यो युावदूनं पूर्ण च सर्वमभिवर्षति । M.Bh.
on P.I. l.29 ; VI. ].127; cf. also
यथा पृर्जन्य॒ः. यावदूनं पूर्ण वाभिवर्षति एर्वे
लुक्षण॒म॒पेि दीँर्घस्य दीर्घत्वम् | चिचीषति, बुभूषति।
Vyāएँंi. Pari. 58, cf. कृतकारि ' शास्त्रं
भूत् न चाकृतकारि दहनवत् Puru3o. Pari.
6.
पपदि a class of words headed by
the word पधै to which thःe tad.
affix इक (ष्ठन्) is added in the sense
Of *rnOving by' Or *eating along
with* ( तेन चरति ); e.g. पर्पिक:, पर्पिकी;
अश्चिकः:, अश्विकी etc.; cf. Kā$. on P.
|IV.4.10.
पयौय (1) serial order or succession as
oppOsed tO simultaniety ; the word
iS used in grammar in connection
with a rule which, as the objector
for the sake of argument, would
like tO hold and would apply by
' Succession with respect to the rule
in confiict, either before it or
after it i.e. alternatively ; cf. पयॉंयः
पर्यायवचन
प्रसज्येत often found used in the
|Mahābhāsya as for example 9n
I.4.1 etc:; cf. also तृजादयः पर्यायेण
भवन्ति M.Bh. on P. I. 4.2. Vārt. 3;
( 2 ) alternative word,. syमृ]onym;
cf. अभिज्ञावचने लूट् । वचनग्रहंणुं पयंयार्थेम् l
अभेजानासि स्मरौसे बुध्यसे चेतयसे इति l
Kā$. on P. III.2.1 12.
synonym, synonymOuS
word; cf. ञ्जित् पयीयवचनस्यैव राजाद्यर्थम् l
इनसभम् । ईश्वरसभम् M.Bh. on I.1.68;
cf. al$o यदयं कस्यन्चित्पयौयवचनस्य ग्रहणं
व्क्ररोति । अधिपतिदायादति M. Bh• On
II. 3.9.
पर्युदास (1) exclusion; negation with a
view to exclude; or1e of the twO
senses ( प्रसज्यप्रतिषेध and पयुदास ) of
the negative particle नञ्, generally '
found in cases when the particle
नञ् is compounded with a nOun,
and not used independently with
a verbal form or a verbal activity ;
e. g. अव्राह्मणः ; अनचि च; cf. अन-
पुंसकात् । नायं प्रसउयप्रतिषेधेो नपुंसकस्य नेति !
किं ताहैं । पर्युदासोयं यदन्यन्नपुंसकीदिति । M.
Bh. on I. 1-43; cf. also प्रसज्यप्रतिषेध:
स्यात् ाक्रयया सह यत्र नञ्जुम् । पर्युदासः स
विज्ञेयेो यत्रेोत्तरपदेन नञ्छ् ॥ ' (2) removal
in general, not by the use of a
negative particle; cf. पाठात्पर्युदासः
कर्तव्यः | शुद्धानां पटितानां संज्ञा · क्रर्तब्या ।
M. Bh.. ora ]I. 1.27 Vārt. 3.
पवैन् word, pada; lit. member of a
sentence; the word is found used
in the sense of पद in the old Pra-
tiśākhya, Literature; cf. अन्तरेण पवैणीं !
पर्वशब्दन पदमुच्यते | · पदयोर्मध्ये अागमेो
भवति ! यथा प्राङ्सोमः, प्राड्क्सोमः। Uvvata
on V• Pr. I. I138.
पश्र्वादि a class of words headed by
the word पशुं tO which the tad.
affix अ ( अण् ) is added without
any change of Sense provided the
words पञ्ईटुं and others, to which
the affix अ is to be added mean
fighting clans; e. g. पाशैव, अासुर:,



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-244.png}}}}}}

पलद्यादि
राक्षसः, दाशार्हः etc.
W. 3.117.
पलद्यादि a class of words headed
by the word पलदी to which the
tād. affix अण् is applied in the
miscellaneous'( शैषिक ) senses; e• g-
पालदः, पारिषदः, रौमकः; पाटचरः etc. cf.
|Kā$. on P. IV. 2.110.
· पलाशादि a class of words headed by
the word पलाश to which the affix
अ (अञ्ज्ञ् ) is added in the $ense of
*a, product of* or *a part Of;' e:g•
पालशः, खादिरः, वैकङ्कतः etc. cf. Kā$.
om P. [V. 3.14:1•
पश्यन्ती name of the second out of
the four successive stages in the
origination or utterance Of a
word from the mouth. Accord-
ing to the ancient writerS On
Phoneties, sound or Word ( वाक् )
which " is constituted of air ( वायु )
originates at the Mtiladhāracakra
where it is called परा. It then
springs up and it is called पश्यन्ती
in the second stage. Thence it
comeS up and is called मध्यमां in
the third stage; rising up from the
third Stage when the air Starikes
against the vocal chords in the
glottis and comeS in contact with
the different parts of the mouth,
it becomes articulate and is heard
in the form of different sounds.
when it is called वैखरी; cf. वैखय
मध्यमायाश्च पश्यन्त्याश्चैतदद्भुतम् । अनेकतीथै-
भेदायास्त्रय्या वाचः परं पदम् Vākyapadtya
|I. 144, and also cf. पश्यन्ती तु सा
चलाच्वलीप्रतिबद्धसमाधाना संनिवेिष्टज्ञेयाकारा
प्रतिलनाकारा निराकारा च परिच्छिन्नार्थप्रत्यव-
भासा संसृष्टार्थप्रत्यवभासा च प्रशान्तसर्वीर्थ-
प्रत्यवभासा चेचत्यपरिमितभेदा । पश्यन्त्या रूप-
मनपभ्रंशमसंकीर्ण लेीकव्यवहारातीतम् । conn.
on Vakyapadya I. 144. cf. also
तत्र श्रोत्रविषया वैखरी । मध्यमा हृदयदशेस्था
पदप्रत्यक्षानुपपत्त्या व्यवहारकारणम् । पश्यन्ती
· तु लोकव्यवहारातीता । योगिनां तु तत्रीपि
cf. Kāś. on
228
पाठ
प्रकृतिप्रत्ययविभागावगतिरस्ति । परायां तु न इति
त्रय्या इत्युक्तम् । Uddyota on चत्वारि
वाक्परिमिता पदानि० M. Bh. Ahnika 1.
पस्पशा called alsO पस्पशाह्निक; name
given to the first Or introductory
chapter ( अाह्विक ) of the Mahā-
bhāgya of Patafँjali. The word
occurS first in the Si$upālavadha of
Māgha. The word is derived from
पस्पशू , the frequentative base of स्पश्छ्र,
tO touch or tO See (ancient use).
Possibly it may be explained as
derived from स्पश॒त् with अप; cf. शब्द.
विद्येव नो भाति राजनीतिरपस्पशा Si$.II. 1 12.
Mallinātha haS underStoOd the
word पस्पश m. and explained it as
introduction tO a Sāstra treatise;
cf. पस्पश: शास्त्रारम्भसमर्थक उपोद्वातसंदर्भग्रन्थःl
Malliriātha on SiŚ. ]II.] 12.
पाकवती a word used in the Sikśā
wOrkS for a kind Of pause or hiatuS,
पाक्षिक alternative; Occurring option-
ally or alternatively; cf. पाक्षिक एष
देोष: M. Bh. on II.3.46 Vārt. 8;VI.
1.61 .Vārt. 4; cf. also पाक्षिक ऐकश्रुत्य-
विधिर्भवति Kā$. on P. I.2.36.
पाञ्चमिक lit. pertaining to the fifth;
name given to thc affixes prescrib-
ed in the fifth Adhyāya of Panini's
A$वृंādhyāyi, especially in Stitras
V.2.1 tO V.2.93.
पाठ (1) recital of a sacred Vedic
or Sश्āstra work; the originai reci-
tal of an authoritative text;(2) the
wariouS artificial ways or methods
of such a recital ; c.g. पदपाट, क्रमपाठ
etc. in the case of Vedic ILiterature;
(3) an Original recital such as the
सूत्रपाठ, धातुपाठ, गणपाठ, वार्तिकपाठ and
परिभाषापाट in the case of the several
systemS of Sanskrit Grammar; the
five Pāthas are called पश्चपाटी; (4)
recitation; cf. नान्तरेण पाठं स्वरा अनुबन्धा
वा शक्या विज्ञातुम् M. Bh. on P.I.3.1
Vart. 13; (5) reading, variant; cf•



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-245.png}}}}}}

पठक
चूर्णीदीनि अप्राण्युपग्रहादिति सूत्रस्य पाठान्तरम्
229
पाणिनेि
Kāś. on P.V.2.134.
पठक or उदयंकरपाठक name of a scholar
of Sanskrit Grammar who wrote
an independent work on Pari-
bhā5ās and commentaries on the
Paribhā$enduśekhara and Laghu-
$abdenduśekhara. See उदयंकर and
परिभाषाप्रदीपााचंस॒स्.
पाठकी name popularly given to the
पाणिनेि the iIlustrjous ancient
cOmmentaries written byउदयंकरपाठक.
See पाठक.
gra-
mmarian of India who is well-
known by his magnum opus, the
A$Éaka or A$ंtādhyāyi which has
maintained its position as a unique
work on Sanskrit grammar un-
paralleled upto the present day by
any other Work on grammar, not
only of the Sanskrit language, but
of any other language, classical as
Well as spoken. His mighty inte-
lligence grasped, studied and
digested not Only the niceties of
accentuation and formation of
Wedic words, scattered in the vast
Vedic ILiterature of his time, but
thOse of classical words in the
classical literature and the spoken
Sanskrit language of his time in
all its different aspects andshades,
noticeable in the various provin-
ces and districts of the vast coun-
try. The result of his careful study
of the Wedic ILiterature and close
obSerwation of.the classical Sans-
krit,Which was a Spoken language in
his days, waS the production of the
Wonderful and monumental work,
the A&tādhyāyÎ,which gives an auth-
oritative description of the Sanskrit
language, to have a complete ex-
position of which,several life times
have to be spent,in spite of several
commentaries upon it, written
]
1
I
i
||
1
from timc to time by several dis-
tinguished Scholars. Thc work is a
|linguist's and not a language
teacher*s. Some Western scholars
have described it as a wonderful
spccimen Of human intelligence,or
as a notable manifestation of
human intelliger1ce. Very little is
known unfortunatcly about his
native place,parentage or personal
history. The account given about
these in the Kathāsaritsāgara and
other bookS is Only legendary and
hence, it has very little historical
value. The internal evidence,
supplied by his work shows that
he lived in the sixth or the seventh
century B. C., if not earlier,
in the north western province of
|India of those days. Jinendra-
buddhi, the author of the
Kāśikavivarat?apafijikā or Nyāsa,
has Stated that the Word शलातुर्
|mentioned by him in his stitra
( IV. 3.94 ) refers to his mative
place and the wOrd शालातुरीय deriv-
ed :by him from the word शलातुर
by that stātra was, in fact his own
name, ba$ed upon the name of
the town which forrned his native
place. Pa nini has shown in his
work his close knowledge of, and
familiarity with, the names of
towns, villages, districts, rivers and
mountains in and near Wāhika,
the north-western Punjab of the
present day, and it is very likely
that hc was educated at the
ancient University of Tak$aśilā.
Apart from the authors of the
Prātiśākhya Works, which in a way
could be styled as grammar works,
there wcre Scholars of grammar
as such, who preceded him and
out of whom he has , mentioned
ten viz., ApiŚali,	Sāka¢āyana,
Gārgya, Sākalya, Kāśyapa, Bhā- .



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-246.png}}}}}}

पाणेिनेस्सूत्र
radvāja, Gālava, Cākravarmaरे॒a,
Senaka ' and Sphojāyana, The
grammarian Indra haS not beeभ्
mentioned by Pārini, altllOugh
tradition says that he was the first
grammariam of the , Sanskrit
language. It is '7ery likely that
Paini had no gramrnar wOrk Of
Indra before him, but at tर्क्षhe same
time it can be Said that the wOrkS
of some grammariaras , mentioned
by Panini such as " Sakat.āyana,
Apiśali, Gargya and OtherS had
been based on the wOrk Of Ir1dra•
The mention of seweral ganaS aS
also the exhaustive enumeration
of all the twO thousand and tw'O
hundred rOOts in the Dhatupātha
can very well testify to the ex-
istence of systematiC grammatical
works before Parāini of which he
has made a t!uorough study and a,
careful use in the composition Of
his Gataapatha and Dhātupātha.
|His exhauStive grammar of a richa
|language like Sanskrit has nOt
only remained Superb in spite of
several other grammarS of the
language written SubSequently,
but itS careful study is felt as a
supreme neceSSity by scholarS of
philology and linguistics of the
present day for doing any real
work in th 3 vast field of linguistic
research. FOr detai}s see pp. 15|l-
154 Vol. VII of Pātanjala Mahā..
bhā$ya, ID. E. Society*s Edition.
पाणिनिस्सूत्र called also by the name
अष्टक or पIाणिनीय-अश्टक; name given to
the Sütras Of Pānini comprising
eight adhyāyaS or books. The total
number of Sütras as commented
' upOn by the writers of the Kā$ikā
and the Siddhāntakaumudi is 3983.
AS mine stitras out of these are
described as Vārttikas and two as
. Ga'?asप्ātras by Patafijali, it is
230 पााणेनिस्सूत्रवार्तिक
ewident that there were 3972
Stītras in the A$íःaka of Pānini
according tO Patafंjali. A verse
Current amOng Vaiyākarana
schoolS States the number to be
3996; cf. त्रीणि सूत्रसहखाणि तथा नव शतानि
च ! घण्प्णवतिश्च सूत्राणां पाणिनिः कृतवान्
स्वयम् । The traditional recital by
Veda SchOlarS whO look upon the
A$ईādhyāyi as a Vedāhga, comsists
of 3983 Stitras which are accepted
and cOr१mented upOn by all later
grammarians and commentators.
TheStitras of Panini, which mainly
aim at the correct formation of
words, discuSS declenSiOn, conjuga-
tion, euphOnic changes, verbal
derivatives, noun derivatives and
accents. For details see Vol.VII,
Vyakarana Mahabhāsya, D. E.
Society*s edition pp. 152-162.
पााणोनिस्सूत्रवार्तिक name given to the
collection of explanatory pithy
paotes of the type of Stitras written .
mainly by Kātyayana. The Var-
ttikaS are generally written in the
style of the Stitras, buf sOmetimes
they are written in Verse also.
The totak rhurmber Of Vārttikas is
well-nigh above 5000, including
Varttikas in Verse.There are three
kinds ofVārttikas; cf.उत्तानुक्तदुरुत्तुानां
चिन्ता यत्र प्रवर्तते । तं ग्रन्थं वाार्तकं प्राहुर्वौार्तकज्ञा
मनीष्षिणः 1 NāgeŚa, appears to have
divided Vārttikas into two claSses
as shown by his definition * सूत्रेऽ
नुक्तदुरुक्ताचिन्ताकरत्वं वार्तिकत्वम् ?. If this
definition be followed, many of the
Varttikas given in the Mahābhā5ya
as explaining and commenting
• upon the Suitras will not strictly
be termed as Wārttikas, and their
tOtal number which is givcn as
exceeding 5000, will be reduced
tO about 1400 or so. There are
SOriae manuScript copies which
give this reduced number, and it



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-247.png}}}}}}

पाणिनिसूत्रवृत्ति
231 पात्रेसमितादेि
may besaid that only these Vārtti- j
kas were written by Katyāyana.
while the others were added by
learned grammarians after Katyā- !
yana- In the Mahabhasya there are |
seera more thara 5000 statements
of the type of Varttikas out of
which Dr. Kielhorn has marked
about 4200 as Vārttikas. At Some
places the Mahābhasyakāra has
quOted the names Of the authorS
of SOme Vārttikas or their Schools,
in words such as केा|ट्रीयाः पठन्ति, |
भारद्वाजीयाः पठन्ति, सौनागाः ' qठान्ति. etc.
Many of the Varttikas given in the
Mahābhasya are not seen in the
KaŚikāvपूtti, while some more are
seen in the Kaśikā-vपृtti, which,
evidently are composed by scholars
who fiourished after Pataiàjali,
as they have not been noticed by
the Mahabhāsyakāra. It is very |
difficult to show separately the
statements of the Bhāgyakāra popu-
larly named *i$ंंंंंंंंंंis' from the Vārtti-
kas of Katyayana and others. For
details see Vol. VII Mahabhāgya,
ID.E. Society*s edition pp. 193-224.
पाणिनिसूत्रवृच्ति a gjosS on the gram-
mar rules of Pāhini. Many glosses
were written from time to time on
the Suitras of Panini, out of which
the mOst important and the oldest
one is the one named Kāśikāv[{ti,
written by the joint authors Jayā-
ditya and Vamana in the 7th
century A.D. It is believed that
the Kā$ikāvपू'tti was based upon
some old Vपृttis said to have been
written by' कुणि, निट्रैर चुाल्श्ञ्, श्वोभूति
वररुचि and others.Besides|Kā$ika,the
famous Vrtti, and thOse of कुणि,निट्रैिर |
and others which are only report-
ed, there are other Vrttis which
are comparatively rmodern. Some
of them have been printed, while
others have remained only in
manuscript form. Some of these
are : the Bhāsāv!tti by Puruso-
ttamadewa, VyākarahिaSudhānidhi
by Viśveśvara, Gtidharthadipini
by SadaŚivamiśra, Stitravपृtti by
Annatnbhtta, Vaiyākarataasarvasva
by PXharatīउँihara, Sabdabhü5a?िa
by Nāraya'?a Pandita, Pārंini-
sü travपृtti by Ratmacandrabhatta
Tāre and Vyākararaadipika by
Orambhat¢a. There are extracts
available from a Stitrawrtti called
Bhagavपूtti which is ascribed to
Bhartrhari, but, which is ewident•
ly written by a, later writer
( विमलमति according to Some scho-
lars) as there are found verses from
Bhāravi and Māgha quoted in it as
noticed by Siradeva in his v|Ftti on
Pari.76. Glosses based upon Pānini
Stātras, but having a topical arran-
gement are alSO awailable, the
famous ones among these being
the Prakriyākaumudi by Rārma-
candra Seक्ष्a and the Siddhānta-
kaumudाँ by BhattQji Dik$ita. The
मध्यमकौमुदी amd the लञ्चुकैौमुदी can also
be noted here although they are
the abridgments of the Siddhānta
|Kautmudi. There are Vrttis in
other languageS also, written in
|modern times, Out of which thoSe
written by Bðhtlingk, Basu and
|Renou are well-known.
पााणेनीयशिक्षा a, short work on phone-
tics which is taken as a Vedahga
work and believed to have been
written by Pāraini. Sorme say that
the work was written by Pihgala.
पाणिनीयशिक्षादका name of a commen-
tary on the Sik$ā of Pānini by
धरणीधर as ordered by king उत्पलसिंह.
पातञ्जलमहाभाष्य the Same as महाभाष्य.
See महाभाष्य.
पात्रेसमितादि a class of irregular com-
|poधnd words headed by the com-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-248.png}}}}}}

tाद
232
पारिशेष्य ·
pound word पात्रेसमित, which .àre
taken correct as they are. ThiS
class of words consistS mostly of
words forrming a tatpuru$a Corm-
pound which cannot be explained
by regular rules. The claSs, iS
called अाकृतिगण and hence similar
irregular words are included in it;
e. g. पात्रेसमिता:, गेहेशूरः क्रूपमण्डूक: etC•
cf. Kā$. on P. II.1.48.
पाद iit. foot; the term is applied tO a
fourth part of a section Such ,aS
अध्याय, or of a werse which is divisi-
ble into four parts or lineS; cf.
प्रकृत्यान्तःपादमव्यपरे P. VI.1.115, also
गोः पादान्ते P. WII. l.57.
पादपूरण completion of the fourth part
or Pāda of a stanza, or ver8e; cf.
सोचि लेपे चेत् पादपूरणम् P. VI.1.134,
also प्रसमुपोदः पादपूरणे VIII. 1.6. AS
many times sOme particles, nOt
with any specific or required Sense,
were uSed for the completion of a
Pada, such particles were called
; cf. सत्त्वाभिधायकं नाम निपातः
पादपूरणः R.Pr.XII.7; also निपातस्त्वर्थी-
संभवे पादपूरणेो भवति V. Pr. VIII.50
Uwwata.
पामादि a class of words headed by
the word पामन् to which the tad.
affix न is added optionally with मतुप्म्
in the sense of *pOssession', e. g.
पामनः, पामवान् ; वामनः, वामवान् etc.? cf.
Kāś. on V.2.100.
पायगुण्ड, पायगुण्डे A learned pupil of
Nāgeśabhatta who lived in Vārā-
nasi in the latter half of the 18th
century A.D. He was a renowned
teacher of Grammar and is believ-
ed to have written commentaries
on many works of Nāge$a, the
famous among which are the
*Ka$ikā? called also *Gadā' on the
Paribhāgenduśekhara,the*Cidasthi-
māla* on the ILaghu$abdenduŚek-
hara and the *Chāyā' on the Udd-
yota• Bālarihbhatta Pāyagunde, who
पारस्करादिगप्ण or
has written a, COmmentary on the
Mitāksara (the famOuS commen-
tary on the Yajfiavalkyasmrti), is
believed by SOme aS the same as
Vaidyanātha ; while Others say that
Balarihbhatta waS the Son of
Vaidyanātha.
पारणा the same aS पारायण, recital of the
Veda in any of the various artifi-
cial wayS presCribed, Such as
|krama, jat.a,..ghana, etc. ; cf. ऋन्ते न
च द्वैपदसंहितास्वरौ प्रसिध्यतः पारणकर्म चेोत्तमम्
|R..B'r.XI.37.•
पारस्करप्रभृति, words
headed by the word पारस्कर which
have gश्ot Some irregularity, espe-
cially the insertion of स॒त् between
the constituent words. For details
see पारस्करप्रभृतीनि च संज्ञायाम् P. VI.
1.153 and the commentary there-
Oi1•
पारायण oral recital of a sacred work.
See पारण.
पाराथ्यै lit. Serving the purpose of
another like the Paribhā$ā and the
Adhikāra rules in Grammar which
have got no utility as far as they
themselves are concerned, but
which are of use in the interpreta-
tion Qf other rules; cf. अधिकारशब्देन
पाराथ्यत् परिभाषाप्युच्यते. Par. Sek. Pari.
2, 3.
पारिभाषिक (1) technical, aS OppOsed
to literal; Conventional; e. g. the
words संबुद्धि, हेतु etc. cf. शब्देरर्थाभिधानं
स्वाभाविकम् l न पारिभाषिकमशक्यत्वात् }
लोकत एवार्थावगतेः । Kāś on P. I. 2.56;
cf. किामेदं प[रिभाधिक्याः संबुद्धेर्ग्रहणमेकवचनं
संबुद्धिराहोस्विदन्वर्थग्रहणं संवोधनं संबुद्धिरिति l
|M. Bh. on P. I. 2.33; (2) derived
on the strength of a Paribhā$ā
cf. पारिभाषिकं द्वक्रन्विदनित्यं स्यात् Kāt.
Par. vr. Pari. 58.
पारिशेष्य residual mature; the law or
rule of elimination; the remain-
ing alternative after full consi-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-249.png}}}}}}

पारिषद
dcration of all the other alterna-
tives; cf. विभाष्प्रा कुरुयुगन्धराभ्याम् |
पारिशेष्याद्दुटुगन्धरार्था विभाषा " Kāś. on P.
|IV. 2.1$0; cf. also पारिशेष्यादञ्जन्तादेव
यत् सिद्धः Sira. Pari. 37.
पारिषद !it. belonging to the aSSem-
bly; the term पारिषद referS to the
reSultS of the diScussions held at
the aSSemblies of specially
prominent scholars or learned
persons ; cf. सवैवदपारिवदं हीदं इ[ास्त्रं
(ब्याकरणम्) तत्र नैक: पन्था: शक्य अास्थातुम् !
M. Bh. on II. 1. 58; VI. 3.14.
पारोक्ष्य remoteness; lit. being out of
sight; in grammar, पारोश्य is a con-
dition for the use of the ~ perfect
tense ( लिट् ). See परोश्क्ष.
पाषैद प*दि भर्वे पार्षदम्, lit. the inter-
pretation or thcory discuSSed and
settled at the assembly of the
learned. The word is used iia
the sense oh' works On Nirukti or
derivation of Words aS also works
of the type of the Prāti$ākhyas;
cf. पदप्रकृतीनि सर्वचरणानां पार्षदानि Nir.
I. !7 and the com. of दुर्गीचार्य; cf.
aiso पार्षदकृातरेया तत्रभवतां नैव लेॉक्र नान्य-
स्मिन्वेदे अर्ध एकारः अर्ध ओोकारो वास्ति M.
Bh. on I. 1. 48; see also pp. 104, |!
105 V०l. VII Mahābhāsya D. E.
Society's edition. See पारिंषद.
पाषैदव्याख्या name given to the com-
mentary written by विष्णुमित्र on
the Rk Prāti$akhya.
पार्षदस्सूत्रवृत्ति name giwen to the works
of the type of commentaries
written by उद्भ्ञ्वट On the Old Prā-
tiśākhya books.
पाशाादि a cla$s of words headed by
the Word पा|श to Which the taddhita
affix य is added in the sense of
collection; e.g. पश्यि[, तृण्या, वात्या etc,
cf. Kā$. on P. IV. 2.49.
पिङ्गलाचार्य an ancient scholar who is
beliewed to be the first Writer on
30
233
पित्
PrOsody, his work being known as
छन्दःशास्त्र of पिङ्गल. Some ScholarS
beliewe that he Wrote a WOrk On
Phonetics which is noW popularly
called पााणिनीयाशिक्षा.
पिच्छादि a class of words headed by
the word पिच्छ to which the
taddhita afiix इल ( इलञ्च॒ ) is added
optionally with मत् ( मतुम्), in the
sense of * possessed of''; e.g. iपोच्छल;
पिच्छवान्, उरसिल: उरस्वान् etc.; cf. Ka$.
on V. 2. 100.
पिञ्ज a tad. affix applied tO the
word तिल in the sense of fruitless,
useless; cf. ति ठान्निप्“कव्ठात् पित्र्ञ्जपेञ्जौ IV.
2.36 Vंrt. 6; cf. also निष्फलास्तठ :तिल-
पित्र्ज: तिठपेज: | |Kā$. on P. IV. 2.36.
पिटव् a tad. afiix applied to the
word नि in the sense of the depre-
ssion of the nose, the word चि
b5ing su'- stituted for नि; e.g. चिपिट:;
cf. इनच् पिटच् चिक चि च P. V: 2.33
पित् marked with the mute le{ter प्रप्
which is indicatiws of a graVe
accent in the case of aftixes
marked with it, aS for example,
the affixes तिम्, सिम् and Iमप्प् ; cf.
अनुदात्तौ सुप्पितौ P. III. 1.4. A S.irva-
dhātuka affix, marked with the
mute · consonant पू , in Pāniऐi's
Grammar has been described as
instrumental in cauSing many
operations Such as (a) the Substitu-
tion of gua; (cf. P. VII. 3 84,9l).
(b) the prewention of guna in the
case of a reduplicative syllable
as also in the case of the roots भू
and सू ( cf. P. VII. 3.87, 88 ); (c)
the substitution of Vrddhi, (cf. P.
VII. 3.89, 90 ), (d) the augments
इ and ई in the case of the rOots तृह्
and ब्रू respectively ( cf. P. VII.
3.92, 93, 94 ), and (e) acute accent
for the vowel preceding the affix
in the case of the rootS भर्मी, ह्रीं,
भृ
and others ( cf. P. VI. 1.192 ). A



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-250.png}}}}}}

पित्करण
234
पुञ्जराज
short vowel (of a root) getS त् add-
ed to it when followed by a kFt
affix marked with प्; e. g• विजित्य,
प्रकृत्य, etc.; (cf. P. VI• l.7 l ).
पित्करण marking an affix with fhe
mute consonant पृप् for several
grammaatical purposes; See पित्; cf-
पित्करणानर्थक्यं चानच्कत्वात् P. III. l. 33
Vart.5. See पित्.
पित्कृत a grammatical operation caus-
ed by an affix marked wi'h the
mute consonaut प्: cf. यद्दुतु खठु भिति
ङिस्कृतं प्राप्नोादेि ङिति च पित्कृतं केन तन्न स्यात्,
M. Bh. on III. 1.*-3 Wart. 7. For
details see पित्.
पित्त्व the same as पित्करण.
and पित्.
पिपीलिकमध्या, पिपीलिकमध्यमा
given to a starrza of त्रिटुम् or जगती
or बृहती type consisting of three
feet, the middle foot consisting of
six or seven or eight Syllables only;
e. g. RgVeda X. 105, 2 and 7;
IX. 110.l, VIII, 46.14; cf. उाष्णेक्
पिपीलिकामध्या हरीयस्येति दृश्यते R.. Pr.
XVI. 25, 28, 36.
पिशे छ् [ PISCHELL, RICHARD ]
a famOuS European Grammarian
of the nineteenth century who
wrote many articles on grammati-
cal Subjects and Wrote a wor:k en-
titled* * Prakrit Grammar. ?
पीडन compression; a fault in the
pronunciation of vOwels and con- |!
sonantS caused by the compression [
or contraction of the place of utte-
rance; cf. विहारसंहारयेाव्याँसपीडने । स्यान-
करणयेार्विस्तारे व्यासेा नाम दोषः, संहोरे संकेाचन
पीडनं नाम l R. Pr. XIV. 2; cf. also
व्यञ्जनानामतिप्रयत्नेनेोच्चारणं पाडन R.. Pr.
XIV. 5.
पील्वादि a clasS of words headed by
the word पठुि to which the taddhitā
affix कुण ( कुणप् ) is added in th<
sensc of * decoction ' ( पाक ). e. g.
पळुिकुण:: cf. Kā$. on P. V.2.24.
See पित्करण
j
name |
[
पु, short term for the labial consonants
पू, फु, व्,भ्म् and मु as prescribed by
P. I.1.61 e. g. ओोः पुयण्ज्यपरे (P. VII.
4.80 ).
पुवद्भाव restoration of the masculine
form in the place of the feminine
One aS noticed in cOmpound words,
. formed generally by the Karma-
dhāraya and the Bahuvrihi com-
pounds, where the first member is
declinable in all the three gendcrs;
e. g. दर्घिजङ्घ:. This restoration t6
the masculine form is also noticed
before the tad. affixes तस्, तर, तम,
रूप्य, पाश, त्व as also bsfore क्यङ् and
the word मानिन्,. For details, see P.
VI, 3.34 to 42 and commentaries
thereon. See also page 334, Vol.
VII of the Pātafंjala Mahābhāsya
|D. E. Society's edition.
पुंस् masculine; a word used in gra-
mmar in the पुंलिङ्ग or the masculine
gender; cf. स्त्रीपुंनपुंसकषु Bp. Dev. I.
40. cf.also असरूपाणां युवस्थविरस्त्रपुसानां
विशेषश्चाविवक्षितः सामान्यं च विवक्षितम् ।
M. Bh. on P. I. 2.68 Vart. 1; cf.
पुंस्प्रवाद. and पोंरुनानि नामाान.
पुंस्क maSculine nature, hence mascu-
line gender. The word is generally
found as a part of the word भाषित-
पुंस्क which means a word which is
declined in the masculine and the
feminine gender or in the neuter
and the masculine gender in the
same sense. For details see M. Bh,
on P. VI.3.34.
पुऋ६ the augment पुप् added to the roots
ऋ, ह्री, क्नूयं etc. as also to all roots
ending in अा before the causal
sign णिचू ( इ ); e. g. अर्पयति, ह्णेपयति,
क्नेोपयति, दापयति, etc.; cf. अर्तिह्णीन्लीरी- "
क्नूयीक्ष्माथ्यातां पुङ् णैौ P. VII.3.36.
पुञ्जराज a famous grammarian of the
|12th century who Wrote a learned
commentaty on a part of the Vāky-
apadiya of Bhartrhari in which



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-251.png}}}}}}

पुण्डरीकाक्ष 235
पुरस्तात्
he has quoted passages frorn famous
writers and grammaria ms such as
भामह, कुन्तक, वामन, हेमचन्द्र and others.
The name is fल्9und written as
पुण्यराज also.
पुण्डरीकाक्ष a grammarian of the four-
teenth century who wrote a com-
mentary named कातन्त्रपरिशिष्ठटीका on
the कातन्त्रब्याकरण.
पुण्यनन्दन a famous grammaria n, who
wrote a grammar Work, named
रूपमाला.
पुण्यराज see पुञ्जराज.
पुण्यसुन्दरगाणेि a Jain grammarian who
haS written a commentary work |
on the धातुपाठ ofहेमचन्द्र.
पुत्रव्ं (1) the word पुत्र as given in the
ancient list of masculine words
r1arked with the mute letter ट् to
signify the addition of the fem.
affix इं ( ङीप् ); cf. P. IV.1.15; (2)
the Substitute पुत्रट् ( i. e. पुत्री ) for
the word दुहितृ optionally prescrib-
ed after,the words सूत, उग्र, राज, भेोज,
कुल andमेरु in the simple sense of
* girl' and not * daughter * e. g.
राजपुत्री, सूतपुत्री; cf. P.VI,3.70 Vārt. 9.
पुनःप्रसङ्गविज्ञान occurrence or possibi-
lity of the application of a preced-
ing grammatical rule Or operation
a second time again, after once it
has been Set aside by a Subsequent
opposing rule or rules in conflict;
cf. पुनः:प्रसङ्गविज्ञानात् सिद्धम् Par. Sek.
Pari. 39; cf. M. Bh. on P. I. 4.2
Vārt. 7; cf5also Puru. Pari. 40.
पुनःप्रसव the same as प्रातिप्रसव counter-
exception; cf. Cāndra,Vyāk. VI.4.
49.
पुनरुत्त a passage which is repeated in
the क्रमपाठ and the other Pāthas or
recitals; the word is also used in
thesense of the conventional repc-
tition of a word at the end of a
chapter. The word पुनर्वचन is used
also in the same sense; cf. यथेोत्ततं
पुनरुक्तं त्रिपदप्रभृति त्रिपदप्रभृति । T.Pr.I.61;
cf. also R. Pr. X.8 and 10.
recital of a word again in
the Krama and other Pāthas for a
specia! purpOSe, although Such a
recital after three times is gener-
ally discouraged|; cf. एवमर्थविशेषात्
पुनरुत्तस्य ग्रहणं भवति ... Uv. Bhā5ya on
V. Pr. IV. 177.
पुनर्वचन use of the same word or
expression, which, if noticed in the
writing of the Stitrakāra, is indi-
cative of something in the mind of
the Stitrakāra; cf. अणः पुनर्वचनमपवाद-
विषये अनिवृत्त्यथैम् M. Bh. oji P. I1I. 3.
12 Vart.1; cf also पुनर्वचनमनित्यत्वज्ञा-
पनार्थम् । Kā$. on P. I. 41*
पुनर्विधान prescribing the same affix
or operation again, which gene-
ally is attended with SOme pur-
pose; cf. ए॒वुलः क्रियार्थेीपपदस्य पुनर्विधानं
तृजादिप्रतिधेधार्थम्, P.III. 3.10. Vārt. l;
cf. also पुनविं ीदध्यधैपूर्वद्विगेाट्टैळुङ् न,
Kāś. on P. V.1.57.
पुनर्वृच्ति occurrence of the same ope-
ration again after it has Once Occ-
urred and has been SuperSeded;
cf. अङ्कवृत्ते पुन्र्वृत्तावविधिः, M.Bh. on VI.
4.160; VII. l.30 etc.
पुम् or पुंस् masculine. It appearS
that both पुभ्म्, and र्भुस्म् were current
terms meaning * masculine ' in
ancient days. cf. पुम: खय्यम्परे P.VIII.
3.12. and पुंसोसुङ् P. VII. 1.89. Al-
though पुभ्म् 1s change:d to पुंसत् before
a word beginning with a hard
consonant, still पुंस्म् is given as an
independent word derived from the
root पा cf. पातेर्डम्सुन् Upādi S* IV,
177; cf. also the expressions पुंवचन,
पुंलिञ्ञ्ङ्ग and पुंयोग. →
पुरस्तात् occurring beforehand, pre-
ceding; cf. पुरस्तादपवादुा अनन्तरान् विधीन्
बाघन्ते , नोत्तरान् Par. Sek. Pari. 59,
' also M.[Bh. on VII. 2. 100; cf.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-252.png}}}}}}

पुराण
236
पूजार्थ
also the expression पुरस्तादृपकर्ष which
means the same as अपकर्घ which is
opposed tO अनुवृत्ति.
पुराण old; the word is used in the
sense of old or ancient; cf. पुराणप्रोक्तेषु
ब्राह्मणकल्पेषु. P. IV. 3.105. It is alsO
used in the sense of old mythO-
logical works; cf. इतिहास: पुराणं वैद्यबतं
M.Bh. on Ahnika, 1 Wãrt. 5.
पुरुष a grammatical term in the
sense of *person;* cf. करोतिः पन्चादीनां
सर्वान् कालान् सर्वान् पुरुषान्सवीँणि वचनान्यनु-
वर्तते, भवतिः पुनर्वर्तमानकालं चैकत्वं च.
Thgse personS or Puru $aS are
described to be three प्रथम, मध्यम and
उत्तम correspondiing to the third
second and first persons respec-
tively in English Gramtmar ; cf.
also Nir. WIH. 1 and 2.
रि name of a commentary
on the Sarasvatikar?ईhābharana
of Bhoja by Kंà$taalilāśukamuni.
पुरुषसंज्ञा the term पुरुष or person viz.
the first, the second and the
third; the rule prescribii1g the
term पुरुध is तिङस्त्रीणेि त्रीणि प्रथम्मध्यमो-
त्तमाः P. I. 4. 101; cf. परस्मैपदसंज्ञां
पुरुषसंज्ञा बाधेत M. Bh. on P. I. 4. 1
Vārt. 8.- →
पुरुषोत्तमदेव a famous grammarian
believed to have been a Buddhist,
whO flourished in the reign of
ILak$maऐasena in the latter half
of the twelfth century in Bengal.
Many workS on grammar are
aScribed to him, the · prominent
OncS amOng which are the Bhā-
$āvrtti and the Paribhāsāvg tti,
the Gaf3avFtti and the jfiapaka-
Safmuccaya and a commentary on
the Mahābhāsya called Prāna-
parोष्ā of which only a fragment
is available. Besides these works
on grammar, he has written $orme
lexicographical works of which |
Hārāvali, Trikāndaśe&a, Dvirtipa-- |
ko:क्ष्a, and Ekfik$arako$a are {he
prominerat Ones. The Bhā $āvptti
|haS gOt a lucid COtmmerःtary otn it
written by S! $रृidhara.
पुरुषोत्तमवेिद्यावागीश a famous gram-
mariah Of Bengal, who wrote the
gra mmar WOrk Prayogaratnamāla
in the fifteenth century. The work
betrayS a deep Study and scholar-
ship of the writer in the Man-
traśāstra.
→、
देि a class of words headed
by the word पुरोहित to which the
taddhita affix यक् is added in the
$5pse of * duly * or *na ture'; e. g.
पीरेोहित्यम् , राज्यम् , बाल्यम् , मान्द्यम् ete.;
cf. Kāś. on P. V. 1. 128.
पुषtदि a class of reots headed by the
root पुश्म् of the four th conjugation
whOSe peculiarity is the substitu-
tion_ Of the aOrist sign अ ( अङ् )
for ञ्न्छ्;ि e.. g. अपुष्प्रत्, अशुष्प्रतू, अनुप्रेत्
gtç. gf.पुष्त्रादिद्युतादश्य्लदितः परस्मैपदेषु " P.
|III. 1,55.
पुष्करण a popular term used for the
treatise on gram:'mar by an ancient
gram marian Āpाँ$ali. cf. अापिशलं
पुष्क्ररणम् Kāś. on P. IV. 3. 15. It
was• called Pu$karaT?a probably
becauSe it WaS Very extensive and
widely read before Pāmini. For
the reading दुष्करण for पुष्करण, and
other details see Mahābhāgya Vol.
VII. pp. 132-133, D. E. Society's
edition.
पुष्करादि a class of words headed by
the wOrd पुष्कर, to which the tadd-
hita affix इन् ( इनि ) is added pro-
vided the word ending with the
afifx forms the name of a district.
e. g. पुष्करिणी, पद्मिनी etc. cf. Kāś. on
|P.. W. 2.135.
पूजाथै |lit. for the sake of paying
|reSpect. The word is used by
cOmmentators in connection with
referenCes to ancient grammarians



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-253.png}}}}}}

पूज्यपाद
by Pānini in his sutras, where the
commentators usually say that the
stitraS citing the views of ancient
grammarians imply merely an
Option, the name being quoted
rnerely to show respect to the
grarnmarian; cf. अापिशलिग्रहणं पूजार्थम्
S.K. on P.VI.1.92.
पूज्यपाद originally a title, but mostly
used in cOnnection with the famous
Jain. grammarian देवनन्दिन् whose |
work on grammar called जैनेन्द्र-
व्याकरण is well-known; see देवनन्दिन्.
पूरण an ordinal numeral; lit. the
word means completion of a
particular number ( संख्या ); cf. येन
संख्या संख्यानं पूर्यते संपद्यते स तस्याः पूरणः ।
एकादंशानां पूरण': एकादशः । Kāś, on P.V.
2.48. The word is used also in the
SenSe of an affix by the applica-
tion of which the particular
mumber ( संख्या ) referring to an
object, is shown as complete; cf.
यस्मिञ्जुप॒संजाते अन्या संख्या संपद्यते स
प्रत्ययार्थः Kāś. on P. V.2.48. These
Ptirana pratyayas are given in
P. V. 2. 48-58; cf. पूरणं नामार्थः ।
तमाह :तीयशब्दः । अतः पूरणम् M. Bh. on
P.II.2.3. The word also means *an
ordinal number'; cf. पूरणगुणसुहितार्थ-
सदन्ययतव्यसमानाधिकरणेन P.II.2.11.
पूरणप्रत्यय a tad. affix showing the
completion of the particular
number ( संख्या ) shown by the
word to which the affix is applied;
cf. . अर्धपूर्वपदश्च पूरण्पृप्र॒त्ययान्तः संख्याशब्दते
भवतीति वेत्तव्यम् । अर्धपञ्चमः । M. Bh.on
P.I.1.23 Vart. 7. These afixes are
mentioned by Panini in V.2. 48 to
58.
पूरणान्त ending with an ordinal afiix;
the same, as पूरणप्रत्ययान्त; cf. योसौ
पूणान्तात् स्वार्थे अन् सोपि पूरणमेव M. Bh.on
|P. II. 2.3.
पूर्व (1) ancient, old; (2) belonging
237
पूर्वनिपात
is frequently used as qualifying the
w'ord अाचार्य wherc it means ancient.
पूवैत्राासेिद्धवचन the dictum of Panini
about rules in his secOnd, third
an:d fourth quarters (Pádas) of
the eigh th Adhyàya being invalid
to (viz. not seen by) all the previ-
ous rules in the first seven chapters
and the first quarter of the eighth
aS laid down by him in the rule
पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् VIII.2.1. The rule पूर्व-
ऋtसिद्धम् is taken also as a governing
|rule i.e. अधिक्र!ार laying down that
in the last three quarters also of
|his grammar, a Subsequent rule is
invalid to the preceding rule. The
purpose of this dictum is to prohi-
bit the application of the rules in
the last three quarters as also that
of a subsequent rule in the last
three quarters, before all such
preceding rules, aS are applicable
in the formation of a W0rd, haVe
been given effect to; cf. एवमिहापि
पर्वत्राासिद्धवचनं अादेशालक्षणप्रतिषेधार्थमुत्सर्ग-
लक्षणभावार्थ च M.Bh. on P. VIII.2.1
Vārt.. 8.
पूर्वत्रासिद्धैाय an operation prescribed
in the province of the rule पूर्वेत्रा-
सिद्धभ्म् i.e. in the last thrce qt!arters
of the eighth book of Pānini's
grammar.
पूवैनिघात the grave accent for the
preceding acute wowel as a result
of the following woWel made acute,
and the preceding , as a result,
turned into grave by wirtue of the
rule अनुदात्तं पदमेकवजैम् VI.1.198; cf.
मतुब्विभतयुदात्तत्वं पूर्वनिघातस्यानिमित्तं स्यात् ।
अमिमान् । वायुमान् । M. Bh. on P.I.1.39
Vārt. 16.•
पूर्वनिपात placing first (in a compo-
und); priority of a word in a com- '
pound, aS in the case of an adjec-
to the Eastern districts. The word
tival word. For special instructions



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-254.png}}}}}}

'& |238
पूर्वेपक्ष
पूर्वस्थानिक
in grammar abOut priority See
|P. II.2.30 to 38.
पूर्वपक्ष ]it. the view placed first fer
6oisideration which generalt¥ is
he yiew of the objector and is
generally refuted by the author's
Çiew calied उत्तरपक्ष or सिद्धान्त•
पूर्वपद् anterior member, the firsf out
of'the two members of a cornP°-"
und, as contrasted with the next
meffīber which is उत्तरपद; cf* पूर्व-
पदेच्तरपदयोरेकोदशः पूर्वपदल्यान्तवद्भवति, M•
|Bh. on P.VI.1.85 Vārt• 4•
पूर्वपदप्रकृतिस्वर retention of the;ं ori-
ginal acute accent of the first
member in a compound aS às
generally noticed in the bahuvrihi
compound and in special cases in
other compounds; cf. बहुत्रीहौ प्रकृत्या
पूर्वपदम् and the following rules P.
W1. 2.1 to 63.
पूर्वेपदाथैप्राधान्य importance in Sense
possessed by the first member of a
6ompound aS noticed generally in
the 6ase of the awyayibhāva coff१-
p9und, which henÇe.i$ defined a$
पुंर्वपदार्थप्रध॒ानो॒ज्ञ्ययो॒ीभ॒ावृः M.Bh. on |P.II.
|Î.6, II.1.20, II. 1.49.
substiturion of the former letter
in the place of the twO viz• the
former ānd the latter, as a reSult
of the coalescence of the two; cf.
अमि पूर्वः and the following rules P.
`VI. ].107-1 l0.
पूर्वविाधेि (1) an operation_ or kārya
for the anterior; cf. P. I. 1.57; cf.
also Mahābhāsya on P. I. 1.57; cf
also एकादशः पूर्वविधी स्थानिवत् M.Bh. On
I.2.4 Vārt. 2 and II. 4.62 Vārt• 4;
(2) am operation Or a rule cited
eaflier in'the order of stitras; cf.
पूर्बविधुिमुत्तरो वि॒धिर्बाधते M. Bh. on P. I.
l.44 Vārt. l3.
प्रतिषेध confiict of two rules
where the preceding rule Super- !
sedes the latter rule, aS the arrival
at the correct form requires it.
Generally the dicturn is that a
subsequent rule should Supersede
the preceding one; cf. विप्रतिषेधे परं
कार्यम् P. I. 4. 2; but sometimes the
previous rule has !O Supersed& the
subsequent .9ne in Spite of the
dictum विप्रतिषेधे परम्. The authOr of
the Mahābhā$ya haS brought these
cases of the पूर्वविप्रतिषेध, which are,
in fact, numerous, under the rule
विप्रतिषेधे परं कार्यम् by taking the word
पर in the sense of इष्ट * what is de-
sired ?; cf. इष्टवाची परशब्दः । विप्रातेषेधे
परं यदिष्टं तद्भवतीति ! M. Bh. on I. 1.3;
I.2, 5; I. 4,2; II., 1.69, IV.1.85etg:ः
cf. also पूर्वविप्रतिषेधो न॒ाम अयं र्विप्रतिषेधे
परामेत्यत्र परशेब्दस्य इष्टवाचित्वाक्ष्छब्घः सूत्रार्थः
परिभाषारूंपण पठ्यते Puru. Pari 108; for
detail& see page 217 Vol.• VII
Mahābhagya D. E. Society's edi-
tion.
पूर्वसवर्णदीर्घ substitution of the long
oिrm ðf the previouS wOwel in the
place of two vowels as a resuit of
their coalescence, presCribed by
Pānini in VI. ;: •102• .
पूवैस्सूत्र |lit. previous rule; a rule cited
earlier ia a treatise. The word iS,
however, frequently used in the
Mahābhàिsya in the scnse of...*a
rule 1aid''down by an .earlier
grammarian'; cf..वणै वाहु' पूर्वसूत्रे M.
Bh., Āhnika 1, पूर्वसूत्रे गोत्रस्य वृद्धमिति
संज्ञा क्रियते M. Bh. on I. 2. 68; cf.
also M.Bh. on P.IV.1.14 Vãrt•.3,
Vi.1.163 Vārt. ], VII.1.18, VIII.
4.7.
९ → →
a variety of antarahgश्atv*
mentioned by NāgcŚa in th° |Pari-
bhāgenduśekhara, where an operà;
tion, affecting a part 9f a word
whi6h precedes that portion of the
Word 'which is ' affected .b'
the other operation, * looked



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-255.png}}}}}}

पूर्वान्त 239
पैलादि
upOn as antarafiga ; e. g- the टिश्ठेोप
in स्रजिष्ठ ( खाग्विन् + इष्ठ ) is looked
upon as अन्तरङ्ग with respect to the
elision of विन् which is वहिरङ्ग. This
kind of antarahgatva is, of course,
not admitted by Nāgeśa althopgh
mentioned by him; cf. Par. Sek.
|Pari. 50,
i
पूर्वान्त end of the previous. The word j
is used in connection with a vowei
which is Substitutedfor two vowels
( एकादेश.). Such a. substitute is look-
ed upon as the ending vowel of
the preceding word or the initial
vowel of the succeeding word; it
cannot be lOoked upor1 as both at
one and the same time; cf.
अन्तादिवच्च P. VI. 1. 85 and उभयत
अाश्रयेण नान्तादिवत् Stra. Pari. 60; cf.
also.. किं पुनरयं पूर्वान्तः अहेोस्वित् पराादि:
अाहोस्विदभत्तः M.' Bh. on I. 1. 47
Vārt. 3.
belonging to the prewious
vowel in Syllabicatiori; e. g. a con-
Sonant at the end of a word or
the first in a consonant group
( संयेोग ).
name given to the second
|pāda of the second adhyāya of
Pānini's A$ंंंंंंādhyāyi which beहूंins
with the Stitra पूर्वापराधरोत्तरमेकदेशिनैका-
धिकरणे P. II. 2.1.
पृच्त lit. mixcd. The term is used in
the Prātiśākhya works in connec-
tion with the vowel ऋ or लठु which
is looked upon as a पृक्तस्वर being
mixed with the consonant , र् or ळु;
cf. पृक्तस्वरो नाम ऋकारः लकारश्च रेफलकारसं-
पृत्तत्वात् com. on T.Pr.XIII.16.
पृथक् separately as far as hearing is
concerned; distinctly separate
from another; cf. सप्त स्वरा ये यमास्ते
पृथग्वा R.. Pr. XIII. 17.
पृथग्योगकरण framing a separate rule
for a thing instead of mentioning
it along with other things.. in the j
same context, which implies Some
purpose in the mind Of the author
such as anuwrtti in SubSequent
rules, Option, and sO on; cf. पृथग्यो-
गाकरणमस्य विधेरानित्यत्वज्ञापनार्थम् Kaś. on P.
I.3-7 ; cf. also Kāś. on I.3.33, I. 3.
84, I.4.58, III.1.56, IV.1.16, WII.
4.33, VIII.1.52, VIII.1.74.
पृथ्वादि a class of words headed by
the Word पृथु to which the taddhita
affix इमन् ( इमानेञ्च् ) iS added option-
ally with the other usual affixes
अण्, त्व and तळू in the sense of
*nāture'; e. g. प्रथिमा, पार्थवम् , पृथुत्वम्,
पृथुता; similarly म्रदिमा, मादंवम् मृदुत्वम्,
मृदुता पटिमा पीटबम्, पटुता पटुत्वम्; cf.
Kāś. om P.V.1.122.
पृथ्वीधराचार्य a grammarian of the
|Eastern School who wrote the
treatise कातन्त्रविवरण on Kātantra
Grammar.
पृषोदरादि a group of words, with irre-
gularity in the cOalesCence of the
two constituent memberS, collect-
ed together by Pātini and men-
tioned together with the word
पृष्घेोदर at the head; cf. पृष्घेोदरादीनि
यथेापदिष्टम् P..VI. 3. 109; cf. also
येषु लेपागमवणैावकाराः शास्रेत्रण न विहिताः,
दृश्यन्त च तानि, यथेोपदिष्टानि साधूनि
भ॒वन्ति । त पृषोदरम् , बलाहकः, जीमूतंः,
पिशाचः, वृसी, मयूर्ः, प॒योप॒वस॒न॒ानाम्, दूढ्यः
etc. Kā$. on P.WI. 3.109.
पेज tad. affix added to the word तिल
optionally with the affix पिञ्ज; e. g.
तिलपेज:. See पिञ्ज.
पेदुभट्ट a grammarian.who has written
a treatise named औौणादिकपदार्णव on
the Unष्ādi stitras.
पैलादि a class of wOrds headed by
the word पैल, the tad. affix in the
sense of युवन् applied to which
(words) is elided; e.g. पैलः पिता, पैल:
पुत्रः; for details see Kāś. om P.II.4.
59.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-256.png}}}}}}

पौनःपुन्य 240 प्रकषैण
पौनःपुन्य frequency; repetition ; a | प्रकम्प depreSstOn Qf the voice after
serise in which the frequentative
affix यङ् and in SOme case$, the
imperative mood are prcSCribed;
cf.'पैौन:पुन्यं भृशार्थश्च क्रियासुमभिद्दूारः,S. K•
on P.fII. 1.22; cf. also S. K• On
P.III.4.2.
पैारस्त्यवयाकरण a grammarian of the
eastern school which is believed tO
have been started by जिनन्द्रबुद्धि the
writer of the glosS called न्यास On
the Kāśikāvपूtti. The Sch9ol practi-
cally tcrminated with पुरुर्षेीत्तमदव and
सीरोदेव at the end of the twelfth
century A.D. Such a school exist-
ed also at the time of Panini and
|Patāfijali, a reference to which is
found māde in प्राचां ष्फ ताश्द्वतः P. IV•
1.17 and प्राचामवृद्भूात्किन् बहुलम् IV.1.
· i160 and प्राचामुपादेरडज्बुन्चैौ ``च V.3.80
where the word is explained aS
प्राच्चामाचायणां by the writer of the
Kā$ikā.
पौर्वापर्यं (1) a relation between two
operations or rules based upon
their anterior and ulterior posi-
tions, Which iS many timeS taken
into consideration for deciding
their relative Strength ; (2) the
order of words; cf. शर्वेदेनाथीँन्वाच्यान्
दृष्ट्वा बुद्धौ कुर्यात् पौवापैर्यम् M. Bh.on P.
|1.4.109 Vart. 10; cf. also पौर्वापर्यमका-
लब्यपेतं संहिता, P. I. 4.109 Vārt. 8.
पौष्करसादि an ancient grammarian
who belonged to the dynasty of
पुष्करसद्, who8e wiews are quoted by
the Wārttikakāra and the writers
of the PrātiŚākhya works; cf चयेो
द्वितीयाः शरि पोष्करसादेः P. VIII. 4.48
Vārt. 3; cf. alsO व्यञ्जनपरः पौष्करसादेर्न
पूर्वश्च ञकारम् T. Pr. V; cf. also T. Pr.
XIII. 16; XIV. 2, XVII. 6.
प्र a conventional term for हृस्व (short)
generally applied to vowels in the
Jainendra Vyākarana.
raising it as nOticed in connection
with the utterance of the svarita
vOWelS in certain cases and in
certain Vedic Schools with a view
tO ShOW the Swarita mature of the
vOwel distinctly, in spite of the
fact that such a depression is
generally looked upon as a , fault;
cf. असन्द्ग्धिान् स्वरान् ब्रूयादविकृष्टा॒नकंाग्पत्तुान्
R. Pr. III.18 as also जात्योभिानेहितश्चैव
क्षैप्रः प्राश्लिष्ट एव च । एत स्वराः प्रकम्पन्ते
यत्रेाञ्चस्वरितेोदयाः R. Pr. III. 19.
प्रकरण topic; context; a Section
wherein a particular subject is
treated; cf. अर्थीत् प्रकरणाद्वा लोके कृत्रि-
माकृत्रिमयोः कृत्रिमे संप्रत्यये भवति M.Bh.
on I. 1. 23; cf. alsO सामान्यशब्दाश्च
नान्तरण विशेाष्षं प्रकरणं वा विशेष्{ष्धवातिष्ठन्ते M.
Bha. on I. 2.43 Vart 9.
प्रकरणग्रन्थ literary works in which the
treatment is given in the form of
topicS by arranging the original
Sप्àtras Or rules differently so that
all Such ruleS as relate to a
particular topic are found !toge-
ther; the Prakriyākaumudi, the
Siddhāntakumudi and others are
called प्रक्ररणप्रन्थS. Such workS are
generally known by the name
प्राक्रयाग्रन्थ as opposed to वृातग्रन्थ.
प्रकर्ष eminence; excellence of a parti-
cular quality ; cf. श्कर्थे पुनरन्यस्य प्रकर्षैण
अन्यस्य प्रकर्षः स्यात्; cf. also यद्यपि द्रव्यस्य
स्वतः प्रकर्षो नास्ति तथापि गुणक्रियास्थः प्रकर्षोाँ
द्रव्ये उपच्वर्यते, Kāś on P. V. 4.! l•
प्रकर्षगति preferetatial treatment, spe-
cial consideration ; cf. तत्र प्रकर्षगतिर्वेि-
ज्ञास्यते साधीयः यः अ&िचधिः इति, M.Bh.on
P.I. 1.56; cf. also M. Bh. On III•
1.94 Vart. 6.•
प्रकर्षण keeping wide the two parts
of the chin which causes a fault
in pronunciation called विह्निट्टे; cf.
प्रकर्षणे तदु विह्निङ्क्ष्टमाहुः ॥ हन्वेोः प्रकर्षणे सर्वे-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-257.png}}}}}}

प्रकल्पक 241 प्रकृातेिप्रत्ययावेभागा
तश्चलने विह्निष्टमसंयुक्तं नाम दोष्षो भवति ;
Uvvata on R. Pr. XIV.-3.
प्रकरूपक (fem. प्रकल्पिका ) a word or ex-
preSSion causing a change in the
nature of another word or exट्-
preSSion which has to be taken as
changed accOrdingly; cf. प्रकल्पक्र-
मिति चेन्नियमाभावः P. I. 1.68 Vārt. 15;
प्रत्ययविधिरयं न च प्रत्ययविधौ पञ्चम्यः प्रकल्पिका
भवन्ति M.Bh. on P.I.1.27 Vārt.1,I.1.
62 Vārt.7; II.2.3 Vārt.1, IV. 1.60;
cf. alsO रुधादिभ्य: इत्येषा पञ्चमी शप्र॒ञ् इति
प्रथमायाः षष्ठीं प्रकल्पयिष्यति, M. Bh. on
II 2.3. Wart. 1, III.1.33.
प्रकल्पक्रिय a word in which a verbal
activity haS tO be conjectured, as
for example, the words गैोः, अश्वः
etc. Words which are not actually
derived by rules of grammar are
called प्रकल्पक्रिय as contrasted with
प्रत्यक्षक्रिय.
प्रकर (1) attribute, attribute which
differentiates, manner, difference;
differentiating description; cf. कंाचे-
स्प्रकारं प्राप्तः इत्थंभूतः Kāś. on P.II.3.2|। ;
(2) resemblance, similarity of one
thijg with another with slight
gleficiency; cf. प्रकारे गुणवचनस्य । प्रकारो
भेद् सादृश्यं च । तदिह सादृश्ये प्रक्ारो गृह्यते ।
वर्तमानस्य गुणवृचनशूब्दस्य द्वे भवतः ।
पट्टुपटुः मृदुमृदुः l अपरिपूर्णगुण इत्यर्थः । परेि-
पूघ्ं न्यूनगुणस्य उपमाने सत्यर्वे प्रयुज्यते
KaŚ- On P. VIII.1.12; (%) differen-
tiating attribute; cf. प्रकारवचने |थाळु
V. 3.23, प्रकारवचने जातीयर् V. 3. 69,
स्थूलादिभ्यः प्रकारवचने कन् V- 4.3 where
KaŚikā defines the , word प्रकार as
सामान्यस्य भेभदक विशेाष; प्रकारः Kaś, on V.
3.23 and 69; (4) type, cf. इतिशब्दः
प्रकारार्थः |Kāś. on V. 2.93; cf. also
अादिशब्दः प्रकारे Kāś. on देवपथाादेभ्यश्च
P.,V.3.100; cf. also अादिशब्दः प्रकरे
वर्तते । देवदत्तादय अाद्व्याः । देवदत्तप्रकारा
इत्यर्थः M.Bh. on I.3.l Vārt. 1].
· प्रकाश॒ rnariae Of COrmmentary on Bhar-
t!harf's Vakyapadiya by'Pufjarāja.
31
प्रकीर्णकाण्ड name given to the thir d
Kanöंa or book of BhartFhar *s
Vakyapadiya wher e miscellaneou s
topics are treated. The third
Kānda consists of 14 sectionS called
by the name SamuddeŚa. For de-
tails see pp. 381-382 Mahābhasya
Vol. VII. D. E. Society's edition.
प्रकृत (1) in context, in question ; the
word is frequently used in connec-
tion with words in the preceding
rules which are draWn on to the
following rules by anuv[tti or con-
tinuation; cf. प्रकृतं गुणवृद्धिग्रहणमनुवर्तते,
M.Bh. on I.1.3 Wārt. 2: (2) found
or available in a large quantity;
cf. तत्प्रकृतवचने मयट् । प्राचुर्येण प्रस्तुतं
प्रकृतम् ॥ Kāś. on P. V. 4.21.
प्रकृाति (1) material cause; cf.. तदथै
विकृतः · प्रकृतौ ! प्रकृातेरुपादानकारणं तस्यैव
उत्तरमवस्थान्तरं विकृतिः Kāś.on P.V.1.12;
(2) original, as oppOsed tO *mOdifi-
ed? ( विकृति ); the original base of a
word which iS used in language by
the addition of affixes. There are
mentioned three kinds of Such
original words in grammar, rOotS
( धातु ), noun bases ( प्रातिपदिक ) and
affixes (प्रत्यय). प्रकृति is defined as
* शास्त्रप्रक्रियाव्यवहरे प्रकृतिप्रत्ययविभागकल्पनय
शब्दार्थभावनायां प्रत्ययात् प्रथममुपादानकारणामिव
या उपादीयते तां प्रकृतिरिति व्यपदिशन्ति ?
in the Sringāraprakāsa; cf. अपशब्दो
ह्यस्य प्रकृतिः । न चापशब्द: प्रकृतिः । न
ह्यपशव्दा उपदिश्यन्ते न चानुपदिष्टा प्रकृतिरस्ति ।
M.Bh. on Siva Stitra 2; cf. also
कृत्प्रकृतिधतुः M.Bh. on P. VI. 2. 139
Vārt. 2; पदप्रकृतिः संहिता l पदप्रकृतोनि सर्व-
चरणानां पाषैदानि Nir. I.17.
प्रकृतिनेियम restriction regarding the
base, as contrasted with प्रत्ययनियम,
cf. क्रिमयं प्रत्ययनियम: प्रकृतेिपर एव प्रत्ययः
प्रयेोक्तव्यः अप्रकृतिपरो नेति | अाहोस्वित् प्रकृति-
नियमः । प्रत्ययपरैव प्रकृति: प्रयेाश्क्तव्या अप्रत्यय-
परा नेति | M.Bh. on P.III. 1.2.
प्रकृतिप्रत्ययविभागा division of a word



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-258.png}}}}}}

प्रकृतिप्रत्यापच्ति
42
प्रक्रियाप्रकाश
.(in use in a language) into thé
''base arad the afiix, which iS looked
upon as the main function of
grammar.
प्रकृतेप्रत्यापति restoration tO the Ori-
ginal word from the substitgted
word; e. g. the restoration of thé
' root हन् in कंसवधमाचटे कंसं घातयति;.cf.
अाख्यातेात्कृदन्ताण्णिज्वत्तब्यस्त॒दाचष्ट . इत्येत-
स्मिन्नर्थे ! कृश्ड्ठुक् प्रकृतिप्रत्यापत्तिः प्रकृतिवच्च कारकं
भवतति वत्तब्थम् , M.Bh. on III. 1 • 2ठे
* Vart. 6.
... > *& * →
प्रकृातेभाव phonetical maintenance Of
a wording without allowing any
euphonic modificationS as found in
the case of a dual form ending in
ई, ऊ or ए.,as also in other specified
· cases; cf. ईहूंद्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्ववचनं प्रगृह्यम् and the
following rules P. I. 1.l !	tp 19,
' as also छ्ळुतप्रगृह्या अचि नित्यम् VI.1.125.
प्रकृतिस्वर the accent i.e. the acute
. accent ( उदात्त ) poSS€SSed by the
original word as contrasted with
the accent of the afiix { प्रत्ययस्वर )
which (latter) is looked upon , as
more powerful; cf. (बद्दुत्रीहौ) पूर्वपदं
प्रकृातेस्वरं भवति M.Bh, on II.1.24, II.
2.29 Vārt. l7. See Pātīini Stitras
WI.2.1 to 63.
प्रकृत्यत्तर difference in the radical
base; a different radical base; cf.
' कथमुपबर्हणम् l वृहिः प्रकृत्यन्तरम् M. Bh.
: on I• l• 4; cf. alsO प्रत्ययार्थस्याब्यति- ·
रेकात्प्रकृत्यन्तरेषु मन्यामहे धातो॒रव क्रियामाहेति
|M.Bh. on P.I. 3.1. 、 →
` प्रकृत्यर्थनियम restriction regarding the
* ` Sense of the ' radical base; cf.
प्रकृत्यर्थनियमे अन्येञां प्रत्ययानामभाव: । अनुदाच्त-
.,? ङितस्तृजादयेो न प्राप्नुवन्ति M.Bh. on P. I.
, 3.12 Vārt. 5. →
. प्रकृत्या intact, without any change by
: rules of euphony, accent etc.;cf.P.
. :VI. 2.1 etc. VI.2.137, VI.3.74 at:ā
VI,4.163. *
प्रछ्ध्ट $uperior, excellent; cfमध्यमश्च शुक्रु-
शब्दः पूर्वैमपेक्ष्यप्रकृष्टः परमपेक्ष्यं न्यूनः नं च न्र्युर्नः
|प्रक्रियाप्रकाश namc
प्रवर्तते ; M.Bh. on P. V.3.55 Wārt,. 3.
प्रक्रम (l) the place Of articulation, the
place Of the production Of sound,
Such as thrOat, chest, palate and
the like; cf. प्रक्रम्यन्ते अश्मिन्वर्णा इति प्रक्रमः
स्थानमुच्यते M. Bh. Pradipa on सिद्धं तु
समानप्रक्रमवन्रनात् P. I.2.30 Vārt. 2; (2)
recital of Veda, deScribed aS क्रमपाठ
cf. उभयथा च प्रक्रमे देोधेो भवति M.Bh. on
P. VIII. 4.28; cf. also ** अश्छ्सु प्रक्रमेषु
दीर्घेीं भवति **quoted in the Mahābhā-
gya on P.VI. 1. 172; (3) regularity
in the position Of words, regular
order of words.
प्रक्रियाकौमुदी a well-known work on
Sanskrit Grammar by रामचन्द्रशेञ of
the !5th century, in which the
subject matter Ofthe eight chapters
of Panini?s grammar , is arranged
into Seweral different sections form-
ing the different topics of gram-
mar. It is similar to, and pOSsibly .
the predecesSor of the Siddhānta
Kauimudi which has a, similar
arrangement.. The work was very
popular before the Siddhānta
Kaumudi was written. It has got
many commentaries numbering
about a do४en wiz. प्रक्रियाप्रसाद,
प्रक्रियाप्रकाश, प्रक्रियाप्रदीप, अमृतस्तुति,
प्रक्रियाव्रयाकृति,निर्मलदर्पण,तत्वचन्द्र, प्रक्रियारञ्जन,
प्रक्रियाचिवरण and others of which the
Prasāda of Vitthale$a and the
Prakāśa of Srikr$na arc the Well-
knOWn OneS.
प्रक्रियार्कीमुदीवृत्ति called also प्रक्रियाक्रौ-
मुदीव्याख्या or even कृष्णपण्डिता ( वृत्ति )
written by a learncd grammarian
named Kr$napandita belonging to
the famous Sesa family of gra-
mmarians.
प्रक्रियाकौमुदीसार a commentary on
Ramacandra's Prakriyākaumudi by
a grammarian named Kà$inàtha•
of the learned
commentary on the प्रक्रियाकौमुदीं,



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-259.png}}}}}}

प्रक्रियाप्रदीप
243
प्रणयन
gailed also प्रक्रियाकौमुदीप्रकाश, by
Kँ$ंr1aŚe$a, the son of Nं!siriahaśesd,
which is, in a v४'ay an impro we-
ment upon the commentary Pra-
sāda Of Vitthaleśa.
प्रक्रियाप्रदीप mame of a cOmmentary
On the प्रक्रियाकौमुदी, written by
चक्रपाणिदत्त.
प्रक्रियाप्रसाद् name of the scholarly com-
mentary On Rāmacandra's Prakri-
yākaumud, written by Vittghale$a,
the grandson of Rāmacandra.
प्रक्रियासंग्रह a work on grammar by
Abhayacandra in which the Sप्धे tras
of Sākaर्भूāyana*s Sabdānuśasana are
arranged in the form of different
sections dealing with the different
" tOpicS of grammar.
प्रगाद्यादि a class of words headed by
the word प्रगदिन् to which the tad.
affix य ( ञ्य ) is added in the four
senses prescribed in P. IV.2.67-70;
· e.g. प्रागद्यम् , शारद्यम् कौविदार्यम् etc.; cf.
|Kā$. on P. IV.2.80. .
प्रगाथ a couple of ' Vedic hymns
divided into three hymns for pur-
poses of singing as Sāman; cf. यत्र
द्वे ऋचौ प्रग्रथनेन तिस्त्रः क्रियन्ते स प्रगीथनात्
प्रकष्र्घग्गानाद्वा प्रगाथ इत्युच्यते Kās.· on P.IV
2.55.
प्रगीत a fault of utterance or recita]
· where a sitmple word in conversa-
· tion or recital iS uttered in a tone
proper for Singing Or in a manner
suitable for singing; cf प्रगीतः
सामवदुच्चारितः Kaiy. on M.Bh.Āhni.1.
प्रगृहीत.lit. held as it is, uncormbin •
. able by euphonic rules; the same .
as 9iपृट्ठ•
प्रगृहीतपदा a description of the Sarih-
hita text of the Veda, in which a,
pragrhya vowel preceding another
vowel is held up ( प्रग्गृह्य ) i.e. kept
. as it is, without any euphonic
combination; cf. सहोदयास्ताः प्रगृहीतपदा:
सर्वत्रैव त्र्यक्षरान्तास्तु नैव R. Pr. II. 27.
प्रगृह्य a terrm 1sed in the Prष्āti$akhya
workS and by Pātāंini, in the Sense
of a vowel which is not combined
with the following vowel by ru!eS
of euphony; e. g. सुजाते अश्वसूनृते, अमी ,
अत्र etc; cf. R. Pr. I. 28 and 29;'
P. I. 1.11-19 and WI.1.125.
प्रञ्ग्रह absence of euphonic change; the..
terrm is frequently used in the '
Taittirīya Prātiśākhya; cf. T. Pr•
I.60, IV.1.{ --54. →
प्रघट्टक namegiven to the subdiwisions
of chapters or sections in certain
books.
प्रचय (1) a specific feature or quality
( धर्म ) Of the. grave (अनुदात्त) accent
when a vowel, accented grave,. :is
preceded by a स्वरित (circumflex .
vowel) and is followed upon by
another grave-accented wowel.
These grave vowels in succession,
i.e. the grave vowels which are ncफ़t
followed by atn acute or a cir- '
cumflex vowel are uttered neither
distinctly circumflex nor distirictly
grave; cf. also R. Pr, III.! !-14.
They are uttered like the acute,
but slightly SO; e. g.' the vðwels,
after मे and before ति in इमं मे गङ्गे '
यमुने सरस्वति; cf. स्वरितात्संहितायामनुद[त्तानां
प्रच्वय उदात्तश्रुतिः T. Pr. XXI.10, 1 1
al8o cf. P.I.2.39, where the term
एकश्रुति is used for the word प्रचय;
(2) " the connection of one word
with many words; e.g. 'राज्ञेा गोश्चाश्वश्च
पुरुषश्च where राज्ञः is connected with
गौ, अश्च and_पुरुष; cf. प्र॒चये स॒म॒ास॒प्रतिषेधो*-
वक्त्तव्यः M. Bh. on II.1.1 'Wārt, 6.
प्रज्ञादि a class of words headed by the..
word प्रज्ञ to which the tad. affix अं*
(अण् ) is added withOut any change
of sense; e.g. प्राज्ञः, वाणिजः etc:; 'cf.
प्रज्ञ एय प्राज्ञः । प्राज्ञी स्त्री . यस्यास्तु प्रेज्ञ
' वेिद्यते सा प्राज्ञा भवति | Kāś. on , P.V.::::
4. 38. → →
प्रपायत्त composition ( of the origināl
-→



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-260.png}}}}}}

Sutra work); cf. द्वयमपि चैतत् प्रमाणम् ।
उभयथा सूत्रप्रणयनात् Kās, on P. IV.2.
117; cf. also Kaś. on P.V.1.94 and
V.4.2l •
प्रण्यस्त silent; cf. अनादेशेश प्रण्यस्ता जिह्वा T.
Pr. II.20 explained by Uvvata as
अनादेशे अनुपदेशे जिह्वा प्रण्यस्ता तूष्णींभूता भवति|।
प्रतिकण्ठम् (1) vocally, pronouncedly,
expressly without any attention tO
the derivation or the formation of
the word; ( 2 ) irregular forma-
tion; c.. सर्वशास्त्रार्थ प्रतिकण्ठमुक्तम् where
प्रतिकण्ठ is explained as निपातन by
Uvvata; cf. प्रतिक्रण्ठं निपातनम् : उत्सर्गवि-
धिभिः ' साधयितुमशक्या अपि प्रयोगविशेषा
निपात्यन्ते शास्त्रसंपूर्तये. Uvvaja on R. Pr.
I.23•
प्रतिञ्क्रम recital in the reverse order as
in some of the artificial recitations
of the Sarihhita text Such as जटा, घन
etC.•
प्रतिजनादि a class of words headed by
the Word प्रतिजन to Which the tad.
āffix ईन ( खञ्ञ्जुम् ) is added in the
sense of *good at' ( तत्र साधुः ); cf.
|प्रतिजन साधुः प्रातिजनीनः, जनेन जने साधुरित्यर्थः
Kas. on P. IV.4.99.
प्रतिज्ञा प्रतिज्ञान ālso; hypothesis, express
tenet in a Sās[ra Or convention; cf.
अाङः स्थः प्रातज्ञान इति वक्तव्यम् । अस्ति
सकार्माातष्ठते । अागमैौ गुणवृद्धी अातिष्ठते ।
विकारौ गुणवृद्धी अाति॒िष्ठते M.Bh. on P.I.3.
22; cf also प्रतिज्ञानुनासिक्याः पााणिनीयाः
Kāś. on P.I.3.2,VII.1.l• प्रतेिज्ञास्वरिताः
पाणिनीयाः Kās.on P.I.3.11.
प्रातेद्वन्द्वभाविन् 9pponent, Opposing:;
अन्तरङ्गं बहिरङ्गमिति प्रातद्वन्द्वाभाविनैी एतौ
तः पूक्षौ । M.Bh. on P. VIII.3.15.
प्रर्तिनिर्दिश्यमान predicate, aS opposed
tg the Subjegt; cf. उद्देश्यप्रातेानिर्दिश्यमान-
पर्यायेण तत्तल्छिङ्गभाक् M.
hि.,Pradipa.
→ knowledge, understanding;
cf. तस्मादनभ्युपायः शब्दानां प्रातपत्तौ प्रतिपद-
.प्र॒ाठ्:,.l M.Bh. on Ahn. 1 ; also cf.
M.Bh. on P. I: 1. 20. Vārt.5, I. 1.
244
44,46 etc. →
प्रतिपत्तिगरीयस्त्व difficulty in under-
Standing; requiring an effort to
uraderstand the sense; cf. योगाविभागे
तु प्रतियोगं भिन्नबुद्धत्रुयुदयाद् व्यक्तं प्रतिपत्तिगरीय-
स्त्वम् Puru. Pari. 98-
प्रतिपत्तिगौरव difficulty in understand-
ing; requiring a lOnger time in un-
derstanding the SenSe; cf. एवं हि प्रति-
पाच्तगैौीरवं स्यात् Sira. Pari. 50. See
|प्रतिपत्तिगारीायस्त्व.
प्रतिपच्तिलाघव facility of understand-
ing; cf. प्रतिपातिलाघबार्थ ज्ञाजनेोजीँ इति
दीघीँन्तादेशविधानम् Sira. Pari. 9l.
प्रतिपदपाठ (1)recital ofeach and every
word; (2) enumeration of every
word|; cf. किं शब्दानां प्रतिपत्तैी प्रतिपदपाठः
कर्तव्यः, M. Bh. on Ahn. 1.
प्रतिपदविधान express statement by a
definite wording; cf. एवं ताहैिं उभयमनेन
क्रियते अपवादविषये चानिवृत्तिः उत्सर्गविषये च
प्रतिपदविधानम् ! M. Bh. on III 3. 12.
Vārt.1; cf. also प्रतिपदविधाना च षष्ठी न
समस्यत । कृा पुनः षष्ठी प्रतिपदविधाना का
कृद्येागा । सर्वा षष्ठी प्रतिपदविधाना शेघलक्षणां
वर्जयित्वा । कर्तृकर्मणेा: कृति इति या ष्त्रष्ठी स[
कृद्येागा; M. Bh. on P. II. 2.8 and
II.2.10.
प्रतिपदविधि an injunction or opera-
tion stating expressly the word Or
words for which it is meant; cf.
यं विधि॑ि प्रति उप॒देशोन॒र्थैकः .स विध॒िर्बाध्यते .।
दत्वं प्रति नुमः प्रतिपदविधिरनर्थकः, रोः पुनर्नि-
मित्तर्मेव. | M.Bh. on P.. VIII. 2.72.
प्रतिपदोन्त expressly stated as opposed
to implied or suggested; cf. लक्षण-
प्रतिपदोक्तयोः प्रतिपदोक्तस्यैव प्र॒हुणम्, Par.
Sek.B'ari.105; cf. also विशेषेण प्रतिपादितं
प्रतिपदोक्तं Puru. Pari. 3.
प्रतिप्रसव lit. bringing into life again;
the term is used im the sense of a
counter-exception; cf. याजकादिभिश्चति
पुनः कारकषष्ठीसमासप्रतिप्रसवाद् ब्राह्मणयाजकादि-
षु उत्तरपदप्रकृतिस्बर एव । Bhāक्षुāvrtti om
II.2.16*



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-261.png}}}}}}

ग्रतियोगिन्
245
प्रतीतार्थ
}
प्रतियोगिन् negative counterpart ; cf. न |
चा*तरेण प्रतियेगिने स्पर्धा भावति M. Bh. on |
II. 1.69. Wārt. 6; also M.Bh. on|
VIII. 8.4 Vart. 8; corresponding
term; ct. प्रथमग्रहणं च तियेाग्यपेक्षत्वान्नो-
पयुज्यते Kas. on V. 3.1.
प्रतिरूपक similar in appearance; cf.
उपसर्गविभाक्तिस्वरप्रातरूपकाश्च " निपाता भवन्ति
M. Bh. on P. II. 2.24 Vart. 22, as ||
also on P. III. 4.2; cf. उपसर्गप्रतिरूपका
निपाताः, तिङन्तप्रातरूपका निपाता:; cf. also
अस्ति च समासप्रतिरूपकेो रूढिशब्दः स्वतन्त्र इति
Nyāsa on P. I. 4.54.
प्रतिलोम ]it. regressive; a kind of
Satiadhi or euphonic combination,
in which the consonant precedes
and the vowel comes after it; e. g.
हव्यवाडग्*ि; cf. प्रतिलोमसंधिषु व्यञ्जनानि पूर्वाणि
स्वरा_उत्तेर; Uvwata on R. Pr. I. 4:
प्रतिवर्ण for every letter ; corresponding
to every letter; cf. अनर्थकाश्तु वर्णाः
प्रतिवर्णमर्थानुपलब्धेः M. Bh. on Ahnika
2, Siva stitra 5.
प्रतिविधान counteraction ; Solving a
difficulty by taking the neceSSary
action; cf. अयमिदानीं स प्रतिविधानकालः
M. Bh. on P. V1I. 4.60 Vart. 4; |
cf. also तत्र प्रतिविधानं द्विर्वचननिमिचेते
अचीत्युच्यते, Kāś. on P. VI. 1.2; cf. |
alsO the usual expression प्रति|ावेधेयं
दोषेषु M. Bh. on I. 1.39, I. 3.10,
4.1.l etc,
प्रतिषिद्ध a rule or operation which is
prohibited or prevented from
application by a specific negation
of it by another rule or operatiora
laid down to prohibit it. Gene-
rally the prohibited rule does not
apply_again; cf. सकृद्भतौ विप्रतिषेधे यद्वाधितं
तद्वाधितमेव Par, Sek.Pari. 40; cf.नेोत्सहते
प्रातिषिद्धा सती बाधितुम् | M.Bh. on P. I,
1.43. The Word प्रातेिषेिद्ध which is
generally used in ancient works
appears to be an earlier word as |
cómpared with निषिद्ध which is used |
by later grammarians. ||
प्रतिषेध prohibition, negation, prohibi-
tion of a rule or operation:
generally प्रातिषेध or प्रसज्यप्रतिषेध is laid
down by the use of the negative
particle ( नञ् ) connected With a
werbal activity, and not With a
nOun in a cOmpOund in Whiclh
case the negatiOn is named पर्युदास ;
cf. प्रद्रसज्ञ्यप्रतिषेधेा यः क्रियया सह यत्र नञ् ।
पर्युदासः स विज्ञेयः थत्रोत्तरपदेन नञ्म् |
प्रतिषेधक a word expressing a prohibi-
tion, e. g. the negatiwe particle न
(नञ्); cf. नेति प्रतिषेधक: T. Pr.XXII.8.
प्रतिषेधबलीयस्त्व the priority of consi-
deration given to rules laying
down a prohibition, for instance,
the prohibition of guna or vrddhi
by the rule ङ्किति च P. I. 1.5 after
giving due consideration to which,
the injunctions i• e. the guna and
vidhi rules are to bçः applied; cf.
निषेधाश्च बलीयांसः Par. Sek.' Pari. l12;
cf. also. एवमप्युभयेोः सावकाशायेोः प्रति-
षेधबलीयस्त्वात्प्रतिषेधः प्राप्नोति, M.Bh. P. on
III.• 1.30.
प्रतिषध्य what is prohibited, as oppos-
ed to विधय ; cf. औौत्त्वं च प्रतिषेध्यम् ;
M.Bh. on P. I. 1.47, I.1.51.
प्रतिसंस्करण editing with improve-
ment, with an attempt to restore
the correct version or the original
text in the place of the corrupt
one; SOmetimes suitable additions
and improvements are also made;
e. g. चरकप्रातेसंस्करण attributed to
|Patafंjali.
प्रतिहार excessive contact with the
SOund-producing Organ which is
|lOoked upon aS a fault; cf. वर्गेषु
जिह्नुाप्रथ्नं चतुर्षु ग्रासो मुख्ये प्रतिहारश्चतुर्थे |
चतुर्थे वर्गे ( तवर्गे ) प्रतिहारः अतिप्रयत्नो नाम
देोषो,भवति । Uvwata on R. Pr.XIW.7.
प्रतीताथै whose sense is clear and
which hence does not require any
further explanation; cf. यथा चापि
प्रतीतार्थीनि स्युस्तथैनान्याचक्षीरन् । Nir. I.13.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-262.png}}}}}}

246 प्रत्ययविधेि
according to the maxim सर्वे गत्यथ
प्रतृण्णा
प्रतृण्ण lit. broken or split up; the
प्रत्यय
separated words of the Sarihhitद्वे of
the Vedas i. e. the Padapātha ; the
recitation of the Padapātha.: cf.
शौद्धाक्षरोच्चारणं च प्रतृण्णम् R. Pr. I. 3.
प्रत्यक्षक्रिय a word in which the verbal
a2tivity js actually noticed, aS for
instance, verbs and k! t formations;
· the term iS uSed as an antOnym of
प्रकल्पाक्रय..
affix, Suffix, a termination,
as contrasted with प्रकृति the base;
cf. प्रत्याय्यते अर्थः ओनन इति प्रत्ययः; cf. also
अथै संप्रत्याययति स प्रत्ययः M.Bh. on III.
1.l Wart. 8; The word प्रत्यय is used
in the Prātiśākhya works in the
sense Of * following ? or *that which
follows', e. g. स्पर्शे चेोषः प्रत्यये पूर्वपद्यः
|R. Pr. I. 30 which is explained
by Uvwata as उष्प्रः इत्ययं ( शब्दः )
पूर्वपदावयवः सन् स्पर्शे प्रत्यये परभूते इति यावत्ः
रेभिसंज्ञेो भवति; Uvwata on R. Pr. I.30;
cf. प्रत्येति पश्चादागच्छति इति प्रत्ययः पर: T.
Pr. V. 7; cf also V. Pr, III. 8.
Pratyaya or the suffix is generally
placed after the base; cf. प्रत्ययः,
परश्च P. III. 1. 1,2; but sometimes
it is placed before the base; e. g.
बहुपडुः;..cf. विभाषा सुपो बहुच् पुरस्ताहुतु P.
V. 3.68. The conjugatiorial signs
( शप् , श्यन्ं etc.), the Signs Of tenses
and tmOOds ( न्ळ्लि, सिच् , स्य, ताम् etc.)
and the cOmpound endings(समासान्त)
|are all Called pratyayas according
· fo Pānini's grammar, as they are
all given in the jurisdiction(अधिकार)
of the rule प्रत्ययः III.1.1, which
extends upto the end of the fifth
chapter ( अथ्याय ). There are six
main kinds of affixes given in
grammar सुप्प्रत्यय, तिङ्प्रत्यय, कृत्प्रत्यय ,
तद्धितष्प्रल्यय,.धातुप्रत्यय (e.g. in the roots
चिकीर्ष, कण्डूय etc.) and स्त्रीप्रत्यय. The
Word प्रत्यय is used in the sense of
realization, in which case the root
इ in the word त्यय means*knowing' |!
ज्ञानार्थाः; cf. मन्त्रार्थप्रत्ययाय Nir. I.15.
प्रत्ययग्रष्टुणापरिभाषा the guiding rule
that when an affix ( र्ग्रत्ययं ) is
given in a rule as a निमित्त (causing
Something), the affix denotes ā
word-form Which beginS with that
to which that affix has been added
and ends with the affix itself; cf.
प्रत्ययग्रहणे यस्मात् स विहितस्तदादेस्तदन्तस्य च
ग्रहणम् Par. Sek. Pari. 23. The rule
यञ्नियेोश्च, which prescribes the afiix
फक् (अायन), has the word यञ् and इञ्न्
which respectiwcly mean यञ्ञन्त and
इञन्त; in the wOrd परमगािग्यीयण frohn
परमगाग्र्य the word गाग्र्य is looked
upon as यञ्ञन्तं to which फक् (अायन) is
affixed and hence the word परमगाग्यीँ-
यण is arrived at and not पारमगाग्र्य.
प्रत्ययध्ातु a term applied to secondary
roots which are formed by adding
affixes like णिन्छ्घ्घ्घ्घ्घ् , सन् , यङ् etc. " to
· primary roots or by the addition
of affixes like क्रिप्प॒ , क्यच् , कायञ्च् etc.
to nouns; e. g. ' कामय, हारय, चिकीर्ष,
जिहीर्ष, जेध्रीय, चेक्रीय, गङ्गीय, राजाय, पुत्रकाग्य्
etc. ; cf. सनाद्यन्ता धातवः P.1II.. 1.32;
cf. also प्रत्ययधातु । गेोपायति, धूपायति,
ऋतीयते M. Bh. on VI. 1.162 Vārt.3.
प्रत्ययपाद a conventional name given
to the first pāda Of the " third
adhyāya of Pāpini?s A$ंādhyayi
which begins with the rule प्रत्ययः
]III.1.l .
प्रत्ययलक्षणा an operation caused by an
affix which tश्३kes place even though
the affix is elided; e.g. the term षद
is applied to अग्मिाञ्चित्, सेामसुत् etc.
on accOunt of the words ending
with a case affix although the
affix of the raorn. sing. has been
elided; cf. प्रत्ययलापे प्रत्ययलक्षणम्. P.I.1.
62 and Kā$. thereon. → →
प्रत्ययविधि a rule prescribing the addi-
. tion of a suffix; cf. यस्मात्प्रत्ययवेिधि-
स्तददि त् ययेङ्गम्, P.I.3.13.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-263.png}}}}}}

$प्रत्ययंस्व्र
247
प्रत्यासच्ति
प्रत्ययस्वर an accemt caused by virtue
of the affix ९which is added; cf.
यथैव हि निपातनम्वरः प्रकृतिस्बरं बाधत एवं
प्रत्ययस्वरमपि बाधेत ॥ लतिशिटत्वाप्रत्थयम्वरो
भविध्यति | M. Bh. on P. I.I 56 Vārt.
23.
प्रत्ययान्त ( प्रकृति ) a base ending in an
affix; a secondary base as oppOSed
to the original base, which is deS-
cribed to be of six kindS. सुप्प्रत्ययांन्ता
(प्रकृतिः) as in अहंयुः, सार्येतनश्म् etc. ;
तिङ्प्रत्ययान्ता as in पचातितरान्म् , अास्तिक:,
पच्वतभृज्जता etc.; कृत्प्रत्ययान्ता as in कृत्रिमम्
सांराविणम् etc.; ताद्धितप्रत्ययान्ता as in
गाग्यीँयणः, तत्रत्यः etc.; धातुसंज्ञाप्रत्ययान्ता as
in चिकीर्षा, कण्डूया etc-; स्त्रीप्रत्ययान्ता as ina
गाङ्गेय*, गैौरेयः, काद्रवेयः etc.
the meaning of an, affix.
Generally rmeanings are assigned
to affixes when they are prescribed.
When the meanings are not assign-
ed, the affix is supposed to bear
the sense of the b3se; cf. अनिर्दिष्टार्थाः
प्रत्ययाः स्वार्थे Par. Sek. on Pari. 113.
'The sense given by a word in
language is the compOsite sense of
the base and the affix together ; cf.
प्रकृतिप्रत्ययैौ सुहाथै ब्रूतः । न केवला प्रकृतिः
प्रयोक्तव्या, न केवलः 'प्रत्ययः l M. Bh. on
|P.I.2.64 Vārt. 5.
प्रत्यवमर्श reference (made to some-
thing) by a word; cf. ताभ्यामेिति
संप्रदानार्थ प्रत्यवमशैः Kā$.on P. III.4.75;
' cf.alsO तन्नामिकाभ्य इति सर्वनाम्ना प्रत्ययप्रकृतेः
प्रत्यवमशैः Kāś. on P.IV.1.113.
प्रत्याख्यान rejection of a rule or a
word or words in a, rule shown as
redundant, their purpOse being
shown as served otherwise; cf. लुपि
युक्तवद् व्यक्तिवचने इति पूर्वाचार्याणामेवेदं सूत्रम् !
तथा न्वास्य प्रत्याख्यानं भविष्यति । तदशिष्यं
संज्ञ[प्रमाणत्वादिति । Kāś. on I.2.51.
प्रत्यारठयानपक्ष an alternative which
proposes the rejection of something
Such as a rule or its part; cf. यदि
प्रत्याख्यान पक्षः इदमपि प्रत्याख्यायते M. Bh.
on Siva Stātra 4; cf. alsO अदीवयुरिति
पदकारस्य प्रत्याख्यानपक्षे उदाहरणमुपपन्नं भवति
Vyādi Pari. 42.
प्रत्याख्यानवादिन् one who advocates the
rejection of something, an OppO-
nent, ara Objector; cf. प्रत्याख्यानवाद
अाह-नास्ल्यत्र विशेञ इतिं Kaiy. Ora M. Bh.
om P. VI.4.22 Vārt. 15.
प्रत्यादान lit. taking again; uttering a
word already utttered in the
Krama and other recitationS of
the V'edas; cf. क्रमो द्वाभ्यामतिक्रम्य प्रत्या-
दाथोत्तरं तयेो: । प्रत्यादाय पुनर्गृहीत्वा Uvvata
on R. Pr. X-1.
प्रत्यापत्ति restitution, restoration to the
previous wording; cf. प्रातिपदिकस्य च
प्रत्यापत्तिवैक्तव्या M. Bh. on P. WI.3.34
Vārt.2; restoration to the previous
nature; cf. अकारस्य प्रत्यापत्तैो दीर्घप्रातिषेधः ।
खट्वा,माला । M.Bh. on P. VIII.4.68.
प्रत्याश्त्रंाय literally, repetition in a con-
trary way; in the Prātiśākhya
|literature, the word refers to the
repetition of a Vedic pasSage;
repetition by pupils after hearing
from the preceptor ; cf. प्रत्याम्रायः
पुनचचनं Uvvata on R. Pr. XV. 9.
प्रत्यारम्भ: (1) statement after prohibi-
tion lit. cOmmencing again; in-
ducing a person to do ' somethiag
after he has refused to do it by
|repeating the order or request for
generalky by beginning the appeal
with the word नह; e.g. नह भेाक्ष्यसे ? नह
अध्येप्यसे; cf. नह प्रत्यारम्भे P. VIII. 1.31
amd Kāśikā and Nyāsa thereon.
(2) commencement or laying down
again in spite of previous mention;
cf. शेषवचनाक्षु योसौ प्रत्यारम्भात्कृतो बहुव्रीहिः
M. Bh. on P. VI-3.46.
प्रत्यसङ्ग cloSe contact or association;
तरतमयेाश्च अतिशये अदक्षिणप्रत्यासङ्के । प्रत्यासङ्ग:
प्रत्यासन्नता V. Pr. V. 2.
प्रत्यासात immediate proximity; close
contact; the satme as प्रत्यासङ्ग which



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-264.png}}}}}}

प्रत्यासच्तिन्याय
248
प्रथम
see above; cf. हेतुमण्णिचो विधिः प्रतिषेधोपि
प्रत्यासत्तेस्तस्यैव न्याय्यः Kāś. on P. I 3.88.
cf also KāŚ. on WII.l.95.
प्रत्यासत्तिन्याय or प्रत्यासत्तिवचन a dictum
that a word should, as far aS pOSSi-
ble, be construed with the nearest
word; cf. अनन्तरस्य विधिः प्रातिषेधो वेत्यर्थ:
प्रतिपत्तिन्यायलभ्य: Sira. Pari. 48.
प्रत्याहार lit. bringing together; bring-
ing together of several letterS ( or
words in a few caseS, Such aS rOOtS
or nouns ) by mentioning the first
and the last only for the sake of
brevity; the term प्रत्याहार is gene-
rally used in connection with brief
terms $uch as अण्, अव्क् , अच् , हछ् and
the like, created by Patāini in his
grammar by taking any particular
letter and aSSOciating it With any
mute final letter ( अनुबन्ध ) of the
fourteen Sivastitras, with a view tO
include all letters beginning with
the letter uttered and ending with
the letter which precedes the
( mute ) letter. The practice of
using such abbreviations was in
existence before Pāmini, pOSsibly in
the grammar attributed to Indra.
The term प्रत्याहार is not actually us-
ed by Pār]ini; it is found in the Rk.
Tantra; cf. प्रत्याहारार्थो वर्णेीनुबन्धे व्यञ्जनम्
R.T.I.3. The term appears to have
come intO use after Panini. Pataimi
has not given any definition of
the term प्रत्याहार. He has simply
given the method of forming
the Pratyāhāras and he has
profusely used them; cf. अादिरन्त्येन
सहेता P. I. 1.7I. The word कृञ्म्
in P. III.1.40 and तृन् in P. II.
3.69 are used as Pratyāhāras. For
a list of the Pratyāhāras which
are uSed by Pāmini see Kāśika on
the Māhe$wara StitraS.
प्रत्य्jद्दिरस्त्र a term for the fourteen
$iva Sitras which are utilized for
the formation of Pratyāhāras.
प्रत्याहारस्सूत्रविचार a ShOrt treatise ex-
plaining.th६ pratyāhāras अ॒णू, अट्,
अश्ा etc.. in the gramrmar of Pānini;
one Such wOrk is written by a sou-
thern grammarian named तिमण्णा.
प्रत्याहाराह्निक name given tO the second
Āhnika of the Mahābhāgya which
explains the Siva Sutras अइउणु,
ऋलक्, etc•, and hence naturally dis-
cuSSes the Pratyāhāras.
प्रत्युच्चार repetition especially of what
has been recited by the preceptor;
cf. प्रत्युच्चार्यैतद्वचनं परस्य शिष्यस्य स्याद् भैो इति
चोदना वा, R. Pr. XV. 8.
प्रत्युज्जीवन bringing to life again; the
term is uSed in the senSe of प्रतिप्रसव
Or cOunter exception.
प्रत्युदाहड्रणा cOunter instance. In
Order to explain the wording of
a grammatical rule clearly, it is
cuStOmary tO give along with the '
instances of the rule (where the
rule has been effectively employ-
ed), a few wOrds which would
|have resulted into other faulty
words by the application of the
|particular rule in case that rule
had not been Stated or a word or
more of it had been omitted; cf.
न केवलानि चचाँपदानि व्याख्यानं वृाद्धेः अात्
ऐच् इति ! किं , तर्हि l उदाहरणं प्रत्युदाहरणं
वाक्याध्याहार: इत्येतत् समुदितं व्याख्यानं
भवति ! M. Bh. in Ahnika 1•
प्रथम lit. premier, first; the word is
used in connection with the per-
$onal affixeS तिपू , तस्, झि ( अन्ति ) of
verbal forms. .See the word पुरुष
above; cf.अस्तिर्भवन्तीपरः प्रथमपुरुषः अप्रेयु-
ज्यमानेाप्यस्तैिित | वृक्षः प्लक्षः | M. Bh.
on P. II. 3.l and 4. The word
प्रथम is used in the Prātiśākhya
WorkS in the sense of the firSt
consonamtS of the five vargas Or
groups of consonants; cf. प्रथमैर्द्विती-
`यास्तृतीयैश्चतुर्थाः V. Pr. ' IV. 1 10 cf.
प्रथमतृतीयादीनामादेशादित्वादेत्वाभावः, M.|Bh.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-265.png}}}}}}

5प्रथम
249
प्रधाना३ोष्ट
on P. VI. 4.120 Vārt 3, also cf.
Kātantra I. 4.1 and Hem. I. 3.35.
The word is also used (in the
feminine gender) in the sense of
the case affixes ' सु ( स् ), औौ, जस॒
( अस् ) of the norminative case.
The word is also used in the
sense of the premier accent उदात्त
(acute ); cf. प्रथमभाविनः उदात्तभाविनः
Uvvata on R. Pr. II I. 8.
प्रथमाँ the nominative case; case afींीx-
es of the nominative case. cf.
प्रातिधदिकार्थलिङ्कपरिमाणवचनमात्रे प्रथमा P.II.
3.46.
प्रदशैन illustrātioph ; cf. विदांकुर्वन्तु इति ।
इतिकरणः प्र॒द॒र्शनार्थः न केवलं प्रथमपुरुषवहुवचनं
किं तर्हि सवण्येव लीड्वचनान्यनुप्रयुज्यन्ते । Kāś.
on P. III.l.41; cf. also क्रिमर्थो येोग-
विभाग1: । प्रदर्शनार्थः । Kā$. on P.I.2.59.
प्रदन्न mode of articulation, the same
aS 3करण. →
प्रर्दीप popular name of the famous
cQfm mentary on the Mahābhāsya
Of Patafijali wr itten by the reptit-
ed grammarian Kaiyata in ' the
eleventh century A. D. The corm-
mentary is a. very scholarly and
Critical one and really does justice
tO the well-known compliment
given to it, viz. that the Pradipa
has kept the Mahābhāsya alive
which otherwise wOuld have re-
mained unintelligible and conse-
quently become lost. The commen-
tary प्रदीप is based on the commen-
tary महाभाष्यदीपिका,or°प्रदीपिका written
by Bhartrhari, which is available
at present Only in a fragmentary
form. The Pradipa is to this day
|loOked upOn as the single com-
mentary on the Mahābhā&ya in |
spite of the presence of a few other
COmmentaries on it which are all
thrown into the back-ground by it. |
प्रदीपकार Kaiyatabhatta, the author
of the fatmous 'commentary प्रदीप
32
on the Mahābhā$ya, which See
above.
प्रदीपविवरण called also उद्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्योत written
by the well-known grammarian
NāgeŚabhatta of Vārānasi who
flourished in the first half of the
eighteenth century.
प्रदेशा lit. district; sphere of applica-
tion, place of the application Of
a rule. The word is frequently
used in this sense in the Kāśikā
Vritti; cf. प्रत्ययप्रदेशाः प्रत्ययलेोपे प्रत्यय-
लक्षणमित्येवमादयः KāŚ. on P. III.1.] :.
cf. also अनुदात्तप्रदेशाः अनुदात्तौ सुप्पितौ
इत्यादय: Ka$- on P. I. 2.30. The
wOrd प्रदेश is also used in the sense
of the place of use or utility; cf.
संज्ञाशास्त्रस्य तु कायंकालपक्षे न पृथग्वाक्याथैवोधः
किं तु प्रदेशवाक्येन ,सहैव । ... कायैज्ञानं च
प्रदेशदेश एव Par. Sek. Pari. 3.
प्रदेशशाख्त्र a rule, laying down a
pOsitive original injunction a$
opposed to the अपवादशास्त्र; cf. यैः अर्थाः
प्रदिश्यन्त तानि प्रदशशास्त्राणि com. on
R.. Pr. XI.35.
प्र'श्यान (1) the principal thing as OppO-
sed to the subcordinate one; some-
thing which has got an indepen-
dent purpOse of its own and is not
meant for another; प्रधानमुपसर्जनमिति
च संबन्धिशब्दावेतौ M.Bh. on P. I.2.43
V.5; cf. als9 प्रधानाप्रधानयेोः प्रधाने कार्य-
संप्रत्ययः Par. Sek. Pari. 97; (2) pre- '
dQminantः of main impOrtance; cf•
पूर्वपदार्थप्रधानेाव्ययीभावः etc. M. Bh. on
II. 1.6, 20, 49 II.2.6 etc; (3) pri-
mary as .opposed to secondary ;
cf. गैौणे कर्मणि दुह्यादेः प्रधाने नीहृकृष्व॒हाम् ।
cf. also प्रधानकर्मण्याख्येये लादीनाद्दुर्द्विकर्मणाम्।
अप्रधाने दुहादीनाम् M.Bh.on I.4.51
प्रधानशिष्ट prominently mentionटूd as
opposed to अन्वाचयशिष्टः cf. . कतुंः कुयङ्
सलेॉपश्च । प्रधानशिटः क्यङ् अन्वाचयशिष्ट: सलेोपः
M. Bh. on III.1. ll; cf. alsO प्रधाना-
न्वाचयशिष्टयेोः प्रधाने संप्रत्ययः Vyādi Pari.
67.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-266.png}}}}}}

प्रध्वासेन्
250
प्रयोगनियम
प्रध्वंसिन् disappearing; cf. उष्व्चरितप्रध्र्व-
सिनोनुबन्धा: Vyādi Pari. l l.
प्रपत्र्ञ्च amplification, further expla-
nation,' clarification. The expreS-
sion पूर्वस्यैवायं प्रपञ्चः or त॒स्यैव्यं प्रुप॒वृँः,ंs
very ffequently used in the Kāśikā
vgrtti; cf. Kā$. on P.II. 1.33,37, 41,
58, II.4.28, III.2.6l etc.
प्रपाठक a term used for a division of
a work by an ancient writer, aS for
instarace in the case of the Athar-
vaprātiśākhya.
प्रभा (l), name of a commentary on
the Sabdakaustubha by Ragha-
vendrācārya Gajendragadkar; (2)
name of a comtmentary On Kai-
yata's Mahabhāśyapradipa.
प्रभाचन्द्र a .jain grammarjan who
wrote a learned commentary
named Nyāsa on the Amoghāvगृtti
of Amoghawarsa.
प्रभृति a passage or a word at the.com-
rmencement; cf. इरावंतीप्रभृति अा दाधार
T. Pr. IV. 22; ध्ठुतादिप्रभृतीनि च R..
Pr. X. 4 तिठद्गुप्रभृतीनि च P.II.1.17.
प्रभेमद smaller division, sub-division.
प्रमाण (|1) authority; authoritative
proof; cf. लोकः अवश्ये शब्देषु प्रमाणम्
M. Bh. on I. 2.64 Vārt. 29; (2)
meaSurement, measure; cf. प्रमाणे
द्वयसज्दघ्नञ्त्र्मात्रचः P. V. 2.37; प्रमाणतः
अकारो गुणः प्राप्तः KaŚ. on P. I. 1.50.
प्रमाद् inadvertance, megligence; cf.
प्रमादकृतमाचार्यस्य शक्यमकर्तुम् M. Bh. on
P. IV. 2.70; cf. algg अंन्य तु गौरादि-
ष्वेतयेाः प्र॒म॒ादपाठमाहुः Kaiy. on P. I.
1.72. Vārt. 4.
प्रयतन the same as प्रयत्न; see प्रयत्न.
प्रयत्न (1) effort; th3 word is used in
cOnnection with the efort made
for prOducing SOund; cf. तुल्यास्यप्रयत्नं
सवर्णम् P. l.1.9; these efforts are
deScribed tO be of two kinds बाह्य
and अाभ्यन्तर of which the latter
are considered in determining the
cognate nature of letters ( सावण्र्य );
cf.अाभ्यन्तरप्रयत्नाः सवर्णसंज्ञायामाश्रीयन्ते;Kāś.
on P. I. l.9; (2) Specific measure
taken for a particular purpose
such as marking a letter with a
|particular tora e or accent or
dividing a rule, or laying down
a modificatory rule or the like; cf.
सैवाननुवृत्तिः श॒वेदन॒!ख्यायते प्रयत्नाधिक्येन पूर्व-
सूत्रेपि संबन्धार्थम् Ka$. on P. IV. 3.22.
»、
प्रयुक्ताख्यातमञ्जरी a Small treatise on
verbal forms by सारङ्गकवि.
प्रयोग (1) employiment or use of a
word in language and literature
abOut which, laying down rules
is looked upOn as the purpose of
grammar; cf. प्रयेोगमूलत्न्चाद् व्याकरणस्मृते:
Kaiy..on P. V. .l.16, लोकतोर्थप्रयुक्ते
|शब्दप्रयेागे शाखेत्रण धमीनियमीं यथा लौकेिक-
वैदिकेषु M. Bh. Āhnika l . Vārt. 1;
(2) use of speech ; utterance; cf.
मध्यमेन स वाक्प्रयोfा: प्रणवात्मकः कर्तव्यः, T.
Pr.. XWIII. 4.
प्रयोगनियम general rules or principles
laid dOWn regarding the use of
wOrds in iangप्uage and literature
Such aS (l) a wOrd recognised as
correct shOuld a!ways be u ed, cf.
एवमिहापि समानायामर्थगतौ शब्देन चापर्शब्देन
च धर्मनियमः क्रियते शब्दनैवाथाँभिधेयो नाप-
शब्देनेति । एवंक्रियमाणमभ्युदयकारि भवति M.
Bh. on P. I. l• Ahnika. 1, (2)
never a base alone or an affix
alone shOuld be used, but always
a base with the necessary affix
should be used; cf. यावता समयः कृतेो
न केवला प्रकृतिः प्रयेोत्तव्या न केवळ: प्रत्ययः
M. Bh, on P. I. 2.64 Vārt. 8,
also on P. III. 1.94 Vārt. 3; (3)
when the sense is already express-
eऊँl by a wOrd, a word repeating
the Sense should not be used; cf.
उक्तार्थानामप्रयेागः. Besides these, many
minor regulations of the type of
Paribhasās ' are laid down by
grammarianS. For details See
Paribhā3āsafiagraha Introduction.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-267.png}}}}}}

प्रयोगपळुव 251
प्रवर्तना
प्रयेोगपल्छुव a small treatise in werseS
on the cOnjugation of roots,
written by Bhavanātha Miśra, son
Of Ramāpati.
प्रयोगमुखमण्डन known also by the
name प्रयेागविवेक, ara elementary
treatise On syntax, attributed to
वररुाच, who must, of cOurse, have
been different from the anciernt
grammarian वररुाच.
मयॉगरत्नमाला name of a recognised
treatise on grammar written by
पुरुषेोत्तमविद्यावागीश of Bengal in the
fourteenth century. The treatise
explains many wOrds which, al-
thOugh Current in language and
literature, cannot be easily formed
by rules Of gram mar. The author
has tried to forrra them by apply-
ing rul€s of gram mar given in
the grammatical systems of Pānini
and Kātantra. The alphabet given
in this treatise is according to the
System of the Tantra Sā$tra which
shOwS a Scholarship of the author
in · that branch The grammar
was studied much in Bengal and
ASSam.
प्रयोगविधि an elementary work on
the three constructions which has
no name of the author tmentioned.
、. →
प्रयोगविषय sphere or domain of the
धSe of words; the whole Vedic
and classical recognized litera-
the word is used although rarely,
in the sense Of a cause alsO; cf.
इमान्यस्य प्रयेोजनानि अध्येयं व्याकरणम् M.
Bh. Ahnika l. For the adwan-
tages of the study Of Vyākarata,
see M. Bh• Ahnika, 1. See also
Vyākarar]a Mahābhagya Vol. VII
pp.226,227, D.E. Society's edition.
प्रयोज्य that which is employed or
incited or urged; the word which
is the subject in the primitive con-
struction and becomes an object in
the causal construction, and as a re-
Sult, which is put in the accusative
case being.. प्रयेोज्यकर्म. As, hOwever,
the प्रयोज्यकर्म Originally occupies the
place of the subject in the primitive
construction, the term प्रयेाज्यकतीँ
( प्रयेोज्यश्चासौो कती च ) is often uscd in
connection with it, aS contrasted
with the term प्रयेोजककतीँ which is
used with respect to the Subject in
the causal construction; cf. इह च
भेदिका देवदत्तस्य यज्ञदत्तस्य काष्ठानाामेति प्रयेोज्ये
कर्तरि ष्भ्रष्ठी न प्राप्नेीति । M.Bh. on P. III.
|1.26 Vart. 1 ; cf. also Kaiy. on P.
I. 2.65.
प्रवचन (1) recital of Vedic texts; cf.
अथैके प्राद्दुरनुसंहितं तत् पारायणे प्रवचनं प्रशस्तम्
|R. Pr. XV. 16; cf. also इति प्र बाभ्रव्य
उवाच च क्रमं क्रमप्रवत्ता ( बाभ्रब्यः ) प्रथमं
शशंस च, R. Pr. XI. 33; (2) the
reading of the Saiahitā text प्रावचनेो
वा यजुषि । ,प्रवच्चने भवः स्वरः प्रावचनः ।
प्रवच्वनेशब्देनार्षपाठ उच्यते । V. Pr. I. 132.
ture; cf. महान् हि शब्दस्य प्रयेागविषयः l ! प्रवप्ण circumfiex accent; possessed of
सप्तद्वीपा वसुमती त्रयो लोकाः चत्वारो वेदाः
स॒ाङ्गाः सरहस्याः बहुधा विाभिन्नाः, एकशतमथ्व-
र्युशाखाः, सहस्रवत्माँ सामवेद:, एकर्विशतिधा
बाह्र्वृच्यं, नवधा॒ाथर्वणो वेदेा वाकेोवाक्यामेतिहासः
पुरार्णे वैद्यकमित्येतावाञ्शब्दस्य प्रयेोगविष्षयः M.
Bh. Ahnika 1. Vārt. 5.
प्रयोजक causing another tO dO;'
causal agent; cf. कुबणिं प्रयुङ्ते इति
प्रयेोजकः Kā$. on P. I. 4.55.
प्रयेाजन object, motive or purpose
in undertakiag a particular thing;
svarita accent; cf. सुर्वः प्रवण इत्येके ।
प्रकर्षेण वन्येत व्युत्क्षिप्यते इति प्रवणः स्वरितखरः
T. Pr. I. 47; cf. also प्रवणे यष्टव्यम् M.
Bh.. on VI. 2.33.
、
|प्रवतैकेोपाध्याय a grammarian who
wrote an explanatory gloSS named
वैकैयटप्रकााशिका on theमहाभाष्यप्रदाप written
by Kaiyafabhatta.
न incitement or inducement
which is the semse of the *liih?
afiixes in general; cf. प्रवर्तनायां लिङ्क.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-268.png}}}}}}

प्रवाद
प्रवाद a grammatical explanatiQn;
detailed explanation by citing the
gender, number, k!t affix, tad• affix
ānd the like; cf. लिङ्गसंख्यातद्भुितकृतरूप्-
`भदाः प्रवादाः । पाण्याादिशब्दानां प्रवादषु प्रथमो
(original) नकारेी णत्वमाप्नेोति स च प्राकृतः l
T. Pr. XIII. 9. The Word iS ex-
plained as a change in the form
6f a word, as for instance, by the
substitution of सू for विसर्ग where
विसर्ग i5, in fact, expected; gf. कबन्धं
पृथु इत्येतेषां पदानां प्रवादा रूपभेदा उदये
परत्रावस्थिताः दिव इत्येतस्य उपचारं जनयन्ति !
यथा दिवस्कबन्धम् , दिवस्पृथुः Uvvata On
|R. Pr. IV. 22; cf. also प्रवादाः घडितः
परे, R. Pr. IX. 18. In the Nirukta,
the word is used in the sense of
*distinct mention'; cf. एवमन्यासामपि
देवतानामादित्यप्रवादाः स्तुतयेो भवन्ति ( dei-
ties are mentioned under the
name of Aditya) Nir II.13; cf.' also
वैश्वानरोयाः प्रवादाः Nir. VÎI. 23.
प्रवादिनः scholars who explain the
changes ( प्रवादि ) mentioned above;
pOSSibly the Padakāras or writerS
of the पूदपाठ; gf. प्र॒वादिने दूण॒ाशदूद्ध्चदूलभान्
, महुाप्रदेशं स्वधितीव चानेयनुंदच "R: Pr.
XI. 20. Apparently प्रवादिनः ( nom.
sing.) SeemS tO *be the word in the
explanation of Uvvata.
प्रविग्रह separate or distinct utrerance
Of Several words of a sentence
which are joined together by Sarih-
dhi rules in a compound ( समास )
or otherwise, with a very short
pause ( अवग्रह ) after each word.
e.: g- उद् उ एति in$tead of उद्वेति; cf.
प्रविग्रहेण मृद्ववग्रंहण चर्चयेयुः R. Pr. XV.10,
where Uvvata remārks प्रविग्रहषु प्रश्लिर्छ
विश्लिष्टं कुर्यात्_। क्ालाधिक्येन कुर्यात् तथा च
उद् उ एति इति पठेन्न तु उद्वेति.
प्रविभत्त made Separate with their
CO'ponerat partS shown clearly;
Split up into component patrts in
such a way that ' their meaning
also is fully stated; cf, तद्धितसमासै
252
प्रन्लिष्ट
ष्वेकपर्वमु च॒ानकपर्वमु च पूर्वं पूर्वे अपरं अपरं
प्रविभज्य निर्दूयात् । दण्ङयः पुरुषः । दण्डमर्हतीति
वा दण्डेन संपद्यते इति वा ॥ Nir.II.४.
प्रवृच्त्त ( 1 ) complete; cf. अथ ये प्रवृत्ते अर्थे
अमैिताक्षरे॒षु ग्रन्थैषु वाक्य॒पूरणा अ॒ागच्छान्ति पदपू-
रणास्ते, Nir. I. 9; (2) which has pre-
sented itSelf, which has become
applicable; the wOrd is used in
connection With a grammatical
rule or operation ; cf. एर्वे च कृत्वा
धर्मशास्त्रं प्रवृत्तम् ; M. Bh. on P. I. 2.64
Vart.39; सभुदाये व्राह्मणशब्दः प्रवृतेोवयवष्वपि
वर्तते जातिहीने गुणहीने च । M.Bh. on II.
2.6; cf. दर्घिस्यं यण् हृस्व इति प्रवृत्तं, M.
Bh. on P. VI.l.77 ; also cf. यद्यपि
ङिचेत्ययमपवादः ... तातङि मन्थरं प्रवृत्तः परेण
बाध्यते S. K. on P.VII.1.35.
प्रवृत्ति (1) application or presentation
of a rule as opp0sed to निवृत्ति; cf
क्रुचित्प्रवृति; क्रचिदप्रधृतिः क्रचिीद्वभाष्ा कावद-
न्येदवः (2) workin४ ; function; cf. नान्त-
रेण साधन क्रियायाः प्रवृत्तिर्भवति M. Bh. on
P.II.3.7.
प्रवृत्तिनिमिच्त cause of the application
of a Word which is shown by the
word When the afiix त्व or ता is
added to it; cf. तस्य भावस्ल्वतलीं | शब्दस्य
प्रवृत्तिनिमित्तं भावशब्देनोच्यते, Kās. on P.W.
' l • l 19. There are given four such
causeS जाति, गुग्ण, क्रिया and संज्ञा. -
प्रवृत्तिभेद difference regarding the
cau$टं of application;	cf. पूर्वमिति
वर्तमाने पुनः पूर्वग्रहणं प्रवृत्तिभेदेन नियमेप्रति-
पत्यर्थम्; Kāś. on P. VI.2; 174.
प्रवृद्धादि a class of compound words
headed by the word प्रवृद्ध in which
the Second wOrd, which is a past
paSS• part•, has its last vowel
accented acute; cf. प्रवृद्धं यानम्, प्रयुक्त॒ाः
सक्तवः, खट्वारूढः । अाकृर्तिगणश्च प्रवृद्धादिर्द्र-
ष्टव्यः । तन पुनरुत्स्यूतं वासेा देयमित्यादि सिद्धं
भवति Kā$. on P.'VI.2. 147.
प्रश्लिष्ट (1) an additional letter (vowel
Or cOmSOnant) read On splitting up.
a euphonic combination; cf. प्राश्लष्टा.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-269.png}}}}}}

प्रन्लिष्टनिर्देशा
253
प्रासञ्द्ध
|!
वर्णावेतौ M.Bh.on P.I.1.9 Vārt. 2; (2) !
cOntracted combination; narme of !
a Safndhi where two vowels coale-
sce into one single vowel, cf. R.Pr. |
II. 15-19.
प्राश्लिष्टनिर्देश mention ०fa thing in a
cOalescence, which when split up, !
shOWS a phOnetic element or ' a i
letter which could not be known
before the copmponents were sepa-
rated: अनुपसर्जनात् । प्रश्ठिष्टनिदेशेार्यम् ।
अनुपसर्जन अ अ अत् इति । M.Bh. on I.
|l.27 Vãrt. 6; cf. also M. Bh. on
|P.LI.3.69. 1
|प्रश्ठेष (l) coalcscence of two vowels
intQ of!e, as given in R. Pr. II.6,
and 7, 9QrrespOnding to the गुण,
बृंद्वि *nd दीर्घ substitutes prescribed
by.th&,rules अाद्रुणः P.IV: 1.87; अकः
स॒वृर्णे दीर्धः,WI.1.1Ü1; and वृद्धेिरेचि vi|.
l.88 which are stated ünder the
.jurisdiction of the rule एक: पूर्वपरयोः
WI.1•84: (2) finding out the pre-
Sence Ofa letter in addition to'the
letters already present as coalesced,
after Splitting' tlte combination
intO itS different constituent letters.
This , practice of finding out an
additional letter is resorted to by
the COtmmentators only to remove
certain difficulties in ' arriving at
SOrne COrrect forms which other-
wise c9uld not be obtained; e. g.
sce कॢिति च where कू is believed to
ड «S*
be a combination '` of ग् , क्रू and ङ्.
See प्रश्लिष्ट and प्रश्लिष्टनिर्देश.
प्रसंधान Iit. |linking up; joining; re-
* peating a word in the Krarmapātha
" and joining it with the following
word; e. g. thc second words ईळे
पुरोहितम् etc. in अर्मि ईळे । ईळे पुरोहितम् ।
पुरोहितं यज्ञस्य |
प्रसच्त applicable, but not actually
1
applied; thc word is used in con[-|
. nection with a grammatical *rule
applicable, but has not bee aPPlई-
eà: cf. उँल्सर्गस्य प्रसक्तस्यापवादेो बाधको
भवति, Mf. Bh. on P. II.3 32, alsO
प्रसक्तस्यादर्शनं लेठेीपसंज्ञे भवति M. Bh• and
S.K. on P.I.]. 60. The terpm. प्रसत्त
is opposed to the term अभिनैिर्वृत्त.
प्रसङ्ग applicability ; possibility of be-
ing applied; the w Ord is used
with respect to a grammatical
rule or operation which is On the
point of being ८pplied or taking
place; the word प्रति is also used in
the sarn e sense; cf. को हि शव्दस्य प्रसङ्गः
यत्र गम्यते चार्थेाँ न च प्रयुज्यते M.Bh. on
P.I.i .60; cf. also द्वौ प्रसङ्कौ अन्यार्थाँ
एकस्मिन् स विप्रतिषेधः,M1. iBh. on P.I.4.
2; also cf. प्र॒सङ्गे सति सदृशतम अादेशः स्यात्
S.K. on स्थानेन्तरतम: P. I.1.50.
प्रसज्यप्रतिषेध prohibition of the pOSSi-
ble application of a rule, generally
laid down by the use of the nega-
tive particle न, together with, or
connected with, a verbal activity ;
e.g न लुमताङ्गस्य P.I.1.63, ना|ामे P.VI.
4.3, न माङ्योगे VI.4.74 etc. etc; cf.
प्रसज्यप्रतिषेधेोऽयं क्रियया सह यत्र नञ्जु; cf.'also
प्र॒सज्य॒यं क्रियागुणौ ततः पश्चान्निवृतिं करोति
M.Bh. on P.II.2.6. In some cases
the fegative particle in a compo-
und has, alsQ to be taken as stating
a negation by प्रसज्यप्रतिषेधः;cf. M.Bh.
on सुञ्ञ्ङनपुंसक्स्य P.I.1.43, सार्वधातुकमपित्
I.4.2, चादयेोऽसत्वे I. 4. 57.
प्रसाद see प्राक्रयाप्रसाद by Vitरृhaleśa..
प्रसारण a term used by ancient gra-
mmarians for संप्रसारण, i.e, the subs-
titutlom of a cOrresponding vowel
for a semiwOwel; e.g. इ for यू, उ
for चु, ऋ for र् and ल for लु; cf. राकेि
ज्यः प्रसारणम् P.I.1.4. Vart. 6.
प्रसारणिन् that which gets, or is liable
to get the Prasārana or Satihprasā-
rana substitute; · cf. कविधौ ' सर्वत्र
प्रसारणिभ्येो ड: P.III.2.3 Wārt. 1.
प्रसिद्ध (1) established; in existence;
or opcration that has become
cf. क्रमेण नार्थः पदसां६िताविदः पुराऽप्रंसिद्धा-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-270.png}}}}}}

प्रस्ताव
श्रयपूर्वसिद्धिभिः, R. Pr. XI.34 ,where
the Kramapātha is said t9 be 9ne
which was not established before
the Sarihhitapātha ; (2) knowंस्र्à ;
cf. अनिटि प्रसिद्धै क्सेो भविष्यति, M. Bl.
on P. III. 1.45 Vārt. 4, लोक्रत एएँते
|शब्दाः प्रसिद्धाः खत्री पुमान् नपुंसकीमति M.
Bh. on P. TV. " 1.3; (3) brOught
about, accomplished, realized;
तथास्य ' छः प्रसिद्धो 'भवति M. Bh. on P•
|IV. 1.89 Vārt. 2. सर्वत्रैव जश्त्वेन सिद्धं
स्यात् , M. Bh. on P.VIII 2.25-
शप्रस्ताव context, topic, the Same as
प्रकरण which ' see abowe; cf. प्रस्तीवः
प्रकरणम् । यथा भेोजनप्रकरणे सैन्धवमप्नयेति
लवणे प्रतीतिर्गमनप्रकरणे त्वश्वे, Kaiy. on
M. Bh. I. 1.23 Vārt. 4.
प्रस्वार a word or utterance in three
mātrās or moras; cf. स ओोमिति
प्रस्वरति त्रिमात्रः प्रस्वारः स्थाने स भवत्युदात्तः R..
|Pr. XV.3 whereon Uvvata remarks
त्रिमात्रः प्रस्वारः | See the word ओॉकार.
प्राक् before a particular thing in
place, or in recital, or in mention.
The word is used generally to
show the limit upto which a
particular topic extends; cf. तसि-
लादयः प्राक् पाशपः ; cf, also प्राक् कडारा-
त्समासः P. I. 4.l ; cf. also अथ ' अाख्याः
समाम्नाथााधेकाः प्राग्रिफितात् V. Pr. I. 33.
प्रटत (l) original, primary,belonging
tO the Prakfti aS contrasted with
a वैकृत modification or a tmodified
thing ; cf. प्रकृतिः स्वभाब:, तत्संबन्धी प्राकृतः .
com. on T. Pr. XIV. 28; cf.
एतद्विकारा एबान्ये, सर्वे तु प्राकृताः समाः
R• Pr. XVII. 23; cf. also तहन् ि...
पश्श्रृंस्तकारपरः ( नकारः ) सकारं प्राकृतेो नित्ये
T. Pr. VI. 14; (2) natural, which
can be So ordinarily, without
ay specific effort; cf. तस्मात् प्राकृत-
मेवैतत् कर्म यथा कटं करोति, M. Bh. on
P• II• 3.5, cf. also M. Bh, on P.
III 1.5 Vārt. 8, 9.
प्राकृतस्सवैस्व a treatise on the gra-
254 प्राग्देश
mmar of Prākrta Languages attri-
buted to Markat]deya•
प्राक्क्रोर्तीय name given tO a group of
tad. affixes छ, यत् and Others pres-
cribed in the different Senses ( हित
and others) given in rules upto
तेन क्रीतम् P.V. 1.37 frOm तस्मै हितम् P.
W. 1.5.
प्रागिवीय name given to tad. affixes
mentioned in rules from P. W.
3.27 upto P. V. 3.95•
प्राग्घिर्तोय name given to tad. affixes
prescribed by rules beginning
with प्राग्हिताद्यत् P. IV. 4.75 and
ending with सेोदराद्यः P. IV. 4.I09.
प्रग्दिर्शीाय name given to tad. affixes
prescribed in rules from P. W,
3.1 to 25.
प्राग्दीव्यतोय name given to tad. affixes
prescribed by rules beginning
with तस्य विकारः P. IW. 3.134 and
ending with the rule कंसीयपरशब्य-
योर्यञ्ञञ्ञौ ळुक् च P. IV. 3.168.
प्राग्देशा districts of the east especially
districts to the east of Ayodhyā
and Pataliputra, Such as Maga-
dha, Vaihga and otherS; nothing
can definitely be said as to which
districtS were called Eastern by
Pānini and his followers Kātyà-
yana and Pataऐjali. A Varttika
given in the Kāśikā but not
traceable in the Mahābhā$ya
defines PrāgdeŚa as districtS situat-
ed to the east of शरावती (probably
the modern riwer Rawi or a
river near that river ); cf. प्रागुदञ्चौ
विभजते हंसः क्षीरोदके यथा | विदुषां शब्द-
सिद्धश्यथै सा नः पातु शरावती [|I Kaś. on
एङ् प्राचां देश P. I. 1.75. There is a
reading सरस्वती in Some manuS• '
cript copies and सरस्वती is a well-
known river in the Punjab near
Kuruk$etra, which disappears in
the sandy desert to the south; a
reading इरावती is also found and



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-271.png}}}}}}

प्राग्वतीय 255 प्राण्यञ्
इरावती may stand for the river | al5o स पूर्वस्यार्धसदृशमेकेषाम् , T. Pr.
Rāvi. शरावती in Burma is simply |XI.19 and the commentaries
out of consideration. For details
see Vyākarana Mahabhāsya Vol.
VII. pp. 202-204 and 141-142
D. E. Society's Edition.
प्राग्वतीोय name given to tad. affixes
prescribed in rules from P. V.
1.18 to 115.
प्राग्वहतीय name given to tad. affixes
prescribed in rules from P. IV.
4.l to 76.
प्राचीनमत the view or doctrine of the
former or rather older gram-
marians. The word is used in
many commentary books and the
meaning of the word is to be
decided according to the context.
For example in the works of
Rāmacandra, the author of the
Prakriyākaumudi and his follow-
ers, the Word refers tO the wieW
given by the writers of the Kāśi-
|kāvrtti and the commentaries
thereon; in the works of Bhat¢oji
and his pupils, it refers to the
writer of the Prakriyākaumudi
in addition to the writers of the
Kāśika, while in the workS of
Nageśa it refers to the writings
of Bhattoji and his pupils. For
details see Vyākaranिa Mahā-
bhāsya Vol. V1I pp. 23-24 D.
E. Society's Edition.
प्राच्यपदवृत्ति succession of two vowels
where the former vowel, which is
either ए, or ओो remains without
coalescence with the following
vowel अ, ewcn though by
rules it is liable to be changed;
e.g.सुजाते अश्वसूनृते I अध्वर्यो अद्रिभिः सुतम् l
In such cases the wowel अ iS pro-
nounced like ए.. This wiew iS held
by the senior $ākalya (स्थविरशाकल्य);
cf. प्राच्यपञ्चाल-उपधानिभेादयाः शाकल्ष्ट्यस्य
स्थविरस्येतरा स्थितिः, R.Pr. II.44; cf.
thereon; cf. also छन्देोगानां सात्यमुश्रिप्रे-
राणायनीया अर्धमेकारमर्धमोकारं चाधीयत । सुजाँत
ए अश्वसूनृते । अध्यर्यो ओो अद्रिभिः सुतम् । M.
Bh. on Siva Suitra 3, 4 as alsO on
|P.I.1.48.
、S\
प्राच्यवेयाकरण an eastern gratmmarian;
the term प्राच्य (eastern) being a
relative term, the east is to be
taken with respect to the place in
the context. The word प्र:चां occurs
many times in Pāthini's Stitras and
the term प्राक् may refer to countries
east of the river शरावती or सरस्वती in
the Punjab. See प्रागेदश above. प्राच्वां is
understood by some commentators
as referring to time, in which case,
the word may refer to ancient
grarnmarians अ|ापिशलि, शाकटायन, इन्द्र
and others who liwed before
|Paraini; cf. प्राच्चनिवैयाकरणतन्त्रे वाच्चानिकानि
... 'Par. Sek. Pari. 1. The word
प्राचीन is, of courSe, mOStly uSed in
the sense of ancient, rather than
the word प्राचु. For specific peculia-
|rities of the eastern grammarians
see pp. 148-149 Vyakarat]a Mahā-
bhāsya Vol. VII. D. E. Society*s
|Edition.
प्राप्ण air, which is instrumental in pro-
ducing sound; cf. वायुः प्राण: कण्ठ्यमनुप्र-
दानम् R.Pr.XIII.1.
प्राप्णपण a gioss on the Mahābhasya
of Patafijali, written by the famous
eastern grammarian Puru$ottama-
deva of the 12th century A. D., of
which only a fragment of a few
pages is available. As the legend
goes, the name प्राणपणा waS giwen to
the gloSS as it Was accompanied by
an Oath on the part of the author
that his life was at stake if he did
even the slightest injustice to the
author of the Mahābhāgya.
प्राण्यञ् the tad. affix अञ्जु prescribed
by the rule प्रााणेरजतादिभ्योऽञ्म् P. IV.3.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-272.png}}}}}}

प्रातेिपदिक
256
प्रातेिपदिकाथै
154; cf. मयटः प्राण्यञ्छ् विग्रातिषेधेन P.IV.3. |!
156 Wārt. 4.
प्रातिपदिक lit.available in every word.
The term प्रातिपादिक can be explain-
ed as प्रतिपदं गृह्णाति तत् प्रातिपदिकम् cf.
P.I[V. 4. 39. The terrm प्रातिपदिक,
although mentioned in the Brāh-
mar?a works, is not fOund in the
|Prāti$akhya works probably be-
cause those works were COncerned
with formed words which had been
actually in use. The regular
division of a word into the baSe
( प्रकृति ) and the affix ( प्रत्यय ) is
available, first in the grammar Of
|Pānini, who has given two kinds
of bases, the noun-base and the
verb-base. The noun-baSe iS
named Pratipadika by him while
the verb-base is named Dhatu•
The definition of Prātipadika iS
given by him as a wo1d which is
possessed of sense, but which is
heither a, root mor a suffix; cf.
अथैवदधातुरप्रत्ययः प्रातिपदिकम् . P.I. 2.45.
Although his definition includeS,
the kFdanta words,the taddhitānta
words and the compound wOrds,
still, Paiāini has mentioned them
separately in the rule कृत्तद्धितसमासाश्च
. P. I. 2.45 to distinguish them as
secondary noun-bases as compared
with the primary noun-bases which
are mentioned in the rule अर्थवदधातुर-
प्रत्ययः प्रातिपदिकम्. Thus,Pārīini implies
four kinds of Pratipadikas मूलभूत,
कृदन्त, तद्धितान्त and समास. The Wartti-
|kakāra appears to hawe given nine
kinds-गुणवचन, सर्वनाम, अव्यय, तद्धितान्त,
कृदन्त, समास, जाति, संख्या and संज्ञा. See
Wārttikas 39 to 44 om |P., I. 4. 1.
ILater On, Bhojarāja in his Sr ngāra-
Prakāśa has quoted the definition
अर्थवदधातु० given by Panini, and has
given six SubdiwisiOnS. ; cf. नाम्ा-
व्यय॒ानुकरणकृत्तद्धितसमासाः प्रातिपदिकानि Sr.
Pràk. I. page 6. For the sense con-
veyed by a Prātipadika or noun-
base, see प्रातिपदिक[र्थ.
प्रातिपदिकव्ार्य COrrespOnding to अङ्गकार्य
in the Case Of the declinables,
which the Sttrakāra mentions
Specifically with respect to the
noun-base.
प्रातिपदिकग्रष्टुण्ा express mention by
wOrding Of a nOun-base as in
दित्यदित्यादित्य०, सुधातुरकङ् च etc., and
|not by description aS अदन्त in अत
इञ् CP.IV.1.95) Or in a group of
words ( गण ) ; cf. प्रातिपदिकग्रहणे लिङ्ग-
विशिष्टस्यापि ग्रहणम् Par. Sek. Pari. 71,
which recOmmends the feminine
form of the base for an operation,
provided the base is specifically
expreSSed and not merely des-
cribed. e. g: युवतिः. खलतिः युवखलति:,
चटकस्यापत्यं चाटकैरः, वह्नीनां पूरणीं बहुतिथी
etc.
प्रातिपदिकस्वर the general accent of the
Prātipadika viz. the acute ( उदात्त )
for the last vowel as given by the
Phitः stitra, फिष्षः ( प्रातिपदिकस्य ) अन्त
उदात्तः; cf. also प्रातिपदिकस्वरस्यावकाशः ।
अाम्र: | M.• ]Bh.. on P. VI. 1.9t
Vārt. 7.
प्रातिपदिकार्थ denoted sense of a Prati-
padika or a noun-base. Standard
grammarians state that the denota-
tion of _a, pratipadika is five-aold
viz. स्वार्थ, द्रव्य,' लिङ्ग, संख्या and कारक.
The word स्वार्थ refers to the causal
factor of denotation or प्रवृत्तिनिमेित्त
which is of four kinds जाति,' गुण,
क्रिया and संज्ञा as noticed respectively
in the words गौः, शुक्रु:,चलः and डित्थः.
The word द्रन्य refers to the in-
dividual object which sometimes
is directly denoted as in अश्वमानय,
while On some occasions it is in-
directly denoted through the genuS
Or the gerःeral notion as in ब्राह्मणः
पूज्यः. ल्लिङ्ग the gender, सेख्या the mum-
|ber and कोरक the case-relation are



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-273.png}}}}}}

प्रातिलोम्य 257
प्राातेिहत
the denotations of the case-termi-
nations, but sometimes as they
are cOnweyed in the absence of a,
case-affix as in the words पञ्च, दश,
and others, they are stated as the
denoted senses of the Prātipadika,
while the case-affixes are said to
indicate them; cf. बाच्चिका द्येोतिका व!
स्यु: शब्दादीनां विभत्तयः Vakyapadiya.
प्रातिलोम्य in inverse Order, antithesis,
' reverse Sense; e. g. प्र and परा mean
the reverse of अा, or प्रति means the
reverse of अाभि; cf. अा इल्यर्वागर्थे । प्र
परेत्येतस्य प्रातिलोम्यम् etc. Nir. I. 4.
प्रातिशाख्य a work on Vedic grammar
of a specific nature, which is
concerned mainly with the changes,
euphOnic and others, in the Pada
text of the Sarihhitā as compared
with the running text, the Sarihhitā
itSelf. The PrātiŚākhya works are
neither concerned with the sense
of Words, nor with their division
intO bases and affixes, nor with
their etyrnology. They con!ain,
more Or leSS,Vedic passages arrang-
cd from the point of view of
Satihdhi. In the Rk Prātiś3ikhya,
available tO-day, topics of metre,
reci{al, phonetics and the like are
introduced, but it appears that
Originally the Rk PrātiŚākhya, just
like the Atharva PrātiŚakhya, was
cOncerned with euphonic changes,
the other subjects being introduced
later On. The Word प्रातिशाख्य shows
that there were such treatises for
everyOne of the several Sākhās or
branches of each Veda many of
which later on disappeared as the
number of the followers of those
branches dWindled. Out of the
remhaining ones also, many were
cOmbined with others of the same
Veda. At present, only five or six
Prāti$ākhyas are available which !
are the Surviving representatives of
33
}
the ancient ones - the Rk Prāti-
śākhya by Sat'naka, the Taittiriya
Prātiśāikhya, the Vājasaneyi Prāti-
$ākhya by Kātyāyana, the Atharva
Pratiśākhya and the Rk Tantra by
Sakatāyana, which is practically a
PrātiŚakhya of theSāma Veda. The
word पार्घद or पारिषद was also used for
the Prष्āti$akhyas as they were the
outcome of the discussions oflearn-
ed scholars in Wedic assemblies; cf.
परिष्त्रदि भवं पाश्र्वदम्. Although the
Prāti$akhya wOrks in nature, are
prelitninary to works on grammar,
it appears that the existing Prāti-
$ākhyas, which are the rewised and
enlarged cditions of the old ones,
are written after Pānini's grammar,
each one of the present Prāti$ākhyas
representing, of course, seweral
ancient Prāti$ākhyas, which were.
written before Panini. Uwvata, a
learned SSholar of the tWelfth cen-
tury haS Written a brief commenta-
ry om the Rk Prāti$ākhya and ano-
ther one on the Vājasaneyi Prāt6-
$ākhya. The Taittiriya Prā! i$akhya
has gOt twO commentaries -one
by Somay3irya, called Tribhāsya•
ratna and the other called Vaidikā-
bharataa written by Gopālayajvan.
There is a commentary by Ananta
bhatta on the Vājasaneyi Prāti$ā-
khya. These commentaries are
called Bhāsyas also.
प्रातिश्रुत्क places of echo or reverbera-
tion viz.chest and others, of sound
which gets its origin at the navel
but becomes rewerberated at chest,
throat, top of the mOnth, mouth
and nose; cf. तस्य C उत्पत्त्याश्रयस्य
शब्दस्य ) प्रातिश्रुत्कानि भवन्ति उरः कण्ठः शिरो
मुखं नाासैके इति, T. Pr. II. 3.
प्राातिहत name given to the circumflex
vowel, standing at the beginning
of a word amd folloWing the final
vowel of the previous word which



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-274.png}}}}}}

प्राथमकलेिपक
258
प्रामाणेिक
is acute ( उदात्त ); cf. अपि चन्नानापदस्थ-
मुदात्तमथ चेचत्सांहितेन स्वर्यते स प्रातिहतः
T. Pr. XX. 3.
प्राथमकल्पिक of the first type or kind;
primary, as oppOsed tO Secondary;
cf. अयं खल्वपि , बहुत्रीहिरस्त्येव प्राथमकदि॒िष॒का
यस्मिनैकपद्यमैकस्वर्यैमेकविभक्तिकत्वं च, M.Bh.
on P. I. l. 29, I. l. 30; I. 2. 42;
cf. also अथवेह कोच्वित् प्राथमकल्पिकौ प्सृश्क्षन्ग्य-
ग्रोधौ कौचित् क्रियया वा गुणेन वा M. Bh.oa
]P.. II. 2. 29 Vārt. 15.
प्राथम्य first preference; first place;
priority; cf. कुतः पुनः प्राथम्यं किं शब्दतः
अाहोस्विदथैतः l M. Bh. on I. 3. 1.
Vārt.. 11.
प्रादि a group of words beginning
with प्र, which are all prefixes or
upasargaS e. g• प्र, परा, अप etc. cf.
· कुगतिप्रादयः P. II. 2. 18.
प्रादिसमास a compound with प्र and
others prescribed by the rule
कुगतिप्रादयः P. II.2.18 amd explained
in detail by the Vārttikas headed
by the Vārttika, प्रादयेो गताद्यर्थे प्रथमया
|P. II. 2. 18 Wart. 4, which comes
under the general head तत्पुरुत्र ;
the compound is also called प्रादित-
त्पुरुष; cf. कथं प्रभावेो राशः । प्रकृष्टेी भाव इति
प्रादिसमासेो भविष्यति । Kā$. on P. III.
3.24 cf. also प्रान्तः पर्यन्तः । बहुत्रीहिरयं
प्रादिसमासो वा Kā$. orn P.. VI. 2. 180.
प्रादेशिक belonging to the root; the
word प्रदेश has here the peculiar
sense ofa root which has the mean-
ing of the nOum (under discussion).
cf. तद्यत्र स्वरसंस्कारौ समर्थाँ प्रादेशिकन गुणेन
अन्वितौ स्यातां संविज्ञातानि ताानि Nir I. i2.
अाधान्य preponderance, principal
nature aS oppOSed to the Sub-
ordinate One ( विशेाषणत्व ); cf.
यत्र प्राधान्येन अछ् अाश्रीयते तत्रैव प्रतिषेधः स्यात्
M. Bh. on P. I. 1. 56. cf. also
प्राधान्येन व्यपदशा भवन्ति |
प्रापक applying in the usual way; lit.
Ieading to the injunction or विधिशास्त्र;
cf. किं पुनरिदं नियमार्थं अाहोखित् प्रापकम्
|M. Bh. on P. I. l.70; cf. also ·M.
Bh. on P.. III. 4. 1 10.
शप्रापण reaching, arrival; cf. प्रत्यक्षमाख्या-
नमुपदेशो, गुणैः प्रापणमुद्देशः M. Bh. on
|P. I. 3.2.
प्राप्तविभाषा or प्राप्तविकल्पत्व, optional
prcscription of Some Operation or
|rule which otherwise iS obligatory;
cf. लेोपे विभाष्प्रा | प्राप्तविभाषेयम् | किमर्थेन
येोगात् । Kāś. on P. VIII. 1.45; cf.
also हृक्रोरन्यतरस्याम् । प्रातविकल्पत्वाद् द्विती-
यैत्र ! Kāś. on P. I. 4.53.
| प्राप्ति application of a rule, arrival
at a''particular form; incidence,
occurrence of a particular rule; cf.
अनन्तरा या प्राप्तिः सा प्रतिषिध्यते M. Bh. on
|]P. ]I. 1.43.
प्राप्तिज्ञ a person who knows only the
application of a rule and the
realization from it of the form that
can be arrived at, aS oppOSed to
one who knowS the form that is
desired or current; cf. प्रातिशेो देवानां-
प्रियः न त्विष्टिज्ञः इष्यत एतद्रूपमिति । M.
Bh. on II. 4. 56 Vārt. l ; cf. also
किरतिं न्चर्करीतान्तं पच्चतीत्यत्र यो नयेत् । प्रानिञ्ज्ञं
तमहं मन्ये प्रारब्धसेतेन संग्रहः l M. Bh. on
VII. 4.92.
प्र'प्य lit. which is arrived at: an
object which is to be reached;
cf. प्राप्यं कर्म; the word प्राप्य is used
as a word quaiifying ' the word
कर्म, in which case it is called
प्राप्यकर्म, as for example ग्रामं in ग्रामं
गच्छति देवदत्तः or वेदमधीते माणवकः.
The term प्राप्य is defined as क्रियाकृ-
तविशैषानवगतैौ कर्तुः क्रियया अन॥स्थितं अास्थितं
वा यदवाप्यते तत् प्राप्यं कर्म । cf. कर्तुरीप्सितमं
कर्म । ततु त्रिविधं निर्धत्र्य धिकार्य प्राप्यमिति l
यस्य क्रियाकृतानां विशेष्प्राणां सर्वथानुपलद्विधः
लत् प्राप्यम्. Spngāra Prakāśa IV.
प्र[मााणोक authoritative; those that
talk with authority; cf. प्रामाणिकमत-
मेतत्, a phrase often used by com-
1mentatOrS.	→ -•* →



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-275.png}}}}}}

प्रामाण्य
259
S\ →、
प्रदमनरम
प्रामाण्य authority; cf. यथोत्तरं मुन्नीनां |
प्रामाण्यम् S. K. on न वहुत्रीर्हौ P. I.
l.29; cf. alsO the uSual expression
वचनप्रामाण्यात् KaŚ. on P. VII. 2.7.
प्रामादिक faulty, uttered or expressed
with a fault; inaccurate.
प्राय general nature, general public;
cf. प्राय इति लोको व्यपदिश्यते, M. Bh.
on P. V. ]. 16; cf. प्रायेार्थो वृत्तमित्येते
पादज्ञानस्य हेतव: R. Pr. XVII.16; cf.
also, लौकिकी विवक्षा यत्र प्रायस्य सं>त्ययः M.
Bh. on P. V. 1. 16.
प्रगायेिक optional, to be done at plea-
$ure, common, usual; cf. प्रायिकं
चैतत् |
प्रायोवक्त्र belonging to one who speaks
Or says; cf. अस्त्येव प्रायेोक्त्री विवक्षा अस्ति
लौकिकी । M. Bh. on P. V. 1.16.
प्रवचन accentuation, as noticcd in
the	Original Sarihhitāpātha; cf.
प्रावचनेो बा यजुधि । प्रवचनशब्देनं अर्घपाठ
उच्यते l तत्र भवः स्वर: प्रावचनः स च यजुष्त्रि
भवति । तान्ते वा यज्ञकर्मणि । V. Pr.
I. 132.
प्रगश्लिष्ट name of the circumfiex
accent posscssed by a vowel which
|haS resulted from the coalescence
of two similar vowels, as for
example in भिन्द्धीदम् । see प्रश्लिष्ट.
प्रासादवासिन्याय inclusion of a thing |
even though it possesses an addi-
tional factor, or cOnsideration,
other than what is referred to; cf.
प्रासादवासिन्यायेन ग्रहणं भवति । तद्यथा केचित्
प्रासादवासिनः । केचिद्भूमिवासिनः । केचिदुभय-
वासिनः । ये प्रासादवासिनः गृह्यन्ते ते प्रासाद-
वासिग्रहणेन , । ये , भूमिवासिनः गृह्यन्ते ते
भूामेवासिग्रहणेन । ये उभयवासिनः गृह्यन्ते ते
प्रासादवासिग्रहणेन भूभिवासिग्रहणेन 'न्च । M.
Bh. on P. I. 1.8. →
प्रियादि a class of words headed by
the word प्रिया which do not allow
their previous word in a bahu-
vrihi cOmpound to take the mas-
culine , base by the rule स्त्रिया:
पुंवत्.•: P. VI. 3.34; e. g. कल्याणीप्रियः
For details, see Ka$, on P. VI.
3.34.
प्रेक्षा (1) appearance, the being seen
or underStood; cf. दूतेा निर्व्रतत्या इदमा-
जगाम । पञ्चम्यर्थप्रेक्षा वा षष्ठ्यथैप्रेक्षा बा ।
Nir. I. 17; (2) thoughtful consi-
deration, cf. य एव मनुष्यः प्रेक्षापूर्वकारी
भवति सोऽध्रुवेण निमित्तन ध्रुवं निमित्तमुपादत्ते,
M. Bh. on P. I. I.26 Vart, 5,
प्रेक्षादि a class of words to which the
tad. affix इन् is added in the four
senses given in P. IV. 2.67-70;
e. g- प्रेक्षी, भ्रुवकी ; cf. Kāś. on P.
I[V . 2.80.
प्रेप्सु desiderative adjective; a word
formed by adding the affix उ in the
sense Of * an agent ' to a desidera-
tive root by the rule सनाशंसभिक्ष उ:
P.III.2.168. The term प्रेप्सु was used
for Such nouns by ancient gram-
marians.
、 →
प्रेषणी a term used by ancient gra-
mmarians, for the imperative-
mood or लोट् of Panini.
प्रैषादि the senses प्रैष *order to do',
अतिसर्ग *permission to do' and प्राप्तका-
लता *fitness of time', as possessed
by the potential passive partici-
ples; cf. विधीयन्ते प्रैषादिषु लेोडादयः M.
Bh. on P. III. 1.26.
→、
प्रोत्तपुंस्क pOSSesSed of the masculine
gender*
प्रगैढमनेोरमा popularly called मनोरमा
alsO; the famOus commentary on
the Siddhāntakaumudीं of Bha-
ttoji Dikgita written by the author
himself to explain fully in .a
scholarly manner the popular
grammar , written by him; , the
word प्रैौढमनेारमा is used in contrast
with बालमनेोरमा another commen-
tary on the Siddhāntakaumudi
by Vāsudevadik$ita. On account
of the difficult nature of it, it is
ususal to read the प्रैौढमनेारमा ' upto
the end of the Kāraka-prakarapa



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-276.png}}}}}}

S、-- 、
5प्रढिमनरमारवण्डन
260 प्फ्
only in the Sanskrit .Pāthaśālās
before the study of the Sabdendu-
śekhara and the Paribhā$endu-
śekhara is undertaken.
प्रौढमनोरमाखण्डन (1) a grammatical
work written by a grammarian
named Cakrapāpi of the Se$a
family of grammarians. The work
is meant to refute the argumentS
of Bhatईgoji Dikड़ita in his Praudha-
manoramā; (2) a grammar Work
written by the famous poet and
rhetorician Jagannātha in refuta-
tion of the doctrines and expla-
nations given in the Praudhamano-
ramā by the stalwart Gramma-
rian Bhattoji Dīk$ita.. The work is
not a Scholarly one and it haS got
a tone of banter. It was Written
by Jagannātha to show that he
could also write works on Gram-
mar and the bearded pedant
Bhattःoji should not be prOud Ofhis
profound scholarship it॥ Grammar.
The work of Jagannātha was
named मनोरमाकुचमर्दन possibly by his
followers or even by himself.
प्रौढमनोरमाटीका a cOmtmentary on
Bhattoji Dik5ita's Praudhamano-
ramā written by Bhatfoji's grand-
son Hari Dik$ita. The commen-
tary is called लघुशव्दरत्न or simple
शब्दरत्न which is an abridgment of
the author's Work बृहच्छठदरत्न. 'The
ILaghuŚabdaratna is widely studied
along with the Praudhamanoramā
in the Pathaśālas. '
प्लक्षादि a class of words headed by
the wOrd प्लक्ष to which the tad.
affix अण् is added in the sense of
*a fruit' e.g. प्लाक्षम् , cf.KāŚ.
:,र्पूंर्गुं,६ाक्षम्, ऐङ्गुदम्,
३देयिण an ancient Wedic scholar
who presumably wrote a work on
Vedic.grammar (of the type of the
'}'rātiŚākhya works).For adifference
Of view he is quoted in theTaitti-
riya PrātiŚākhya; cf.न प्लाक्षिप्लाक्षायणयेोः
T.Pr.. HX.6.
ष्लाक्षि an ancient writer of a Prāti-
śākhya work quoted in the Taitti-
riya Prāti$ākhya.See प्लाक्षायण above.
The words प्लााक्ष and प्लाक्षायण as
alsO प्लाक्षी ( feminine ) occur in the
Mahābha$ya also, but not in the
Ganapatha of Pānini.
पप्लुठत prOtracted, name given to
vOwels in the protracted grade.
The vOwels in this grade which
are termed protracted vowels are
pOSSeSSed of three mātrās and in
Writing they are marked with the
figure 3 placed after them. In
pronunciation they take a longer
time than the long or दीर्घ vowels;
cf. ऊकालेोज्ड्चस्वदीघप्लुतः P. I.2.27. The
word is derived from प्लु (पु alsO)
I Atmane. to go, and explained as
प्लवते इति. The word प्लवंत is often
found for प्लुटुतो भवति in the Prā! iśā-
khya works; cf. also मात्रा हृस्वस्तावदव-
ग्रहान्तरं, द्वे दीर्घस्तिख्त्रः प्ळुत उच्ध्यते सेवरः । अधः
स्विदासी ३दुपरि स्विदासी३द् अर्थे प्ळुतिभाँस्वि
विन्दती3 त्रि: ll R. Pr. I.16.
प्लुति prolation or protraction of a
vOwel when it is possessed of three
mātrās; cf. R. Pr. I.31. See प्ळुत
abowe; cf. अविद्वांस: प्रत्यभिवादे नाम्नो ये न
प्लुतिं विदुः । कामं तेषु तु विप्रेोष्य स्त्रीष्विवायमहं
वदत् M.Bh. on P.I.1 Ahnika 1.
प्वादि a class of roots headed by the
root पू which get their vowel short-
ened in the four conjugational
tenses as also before the pres. part.
affix; e•g. पुनाति पुनानः, छुनाति, लुनन्
etc.; cf. Kā$. on P.VII.3.80. ,
फ
' hard labial consonant, aspirate
Qf पुप्, possessed of the properties श्चास
घेोष, महाप्राणता, and कण्ठविवृतता.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-277.png}}}}}}

' फ
261
द
फ (1) the letter or sound फ़्,the vowe1
अ being added for facility of pro-
nunciation ;(2) the affix फ for which |
अायन is always substituted as given !
by Pānini in P. VII.1.2.
प्रक्र् (1) tad.affix फ marked with mute
कू for effecting the वृद्धि substitute
for the initial wowel of the word to
which it is applied. The initial
letter फ़् Of all the affixes beginning
with 'फ्र् in Pànini's grammar is al-
wayS changed into अ|ायन्. The tad.
affञ्x 'फ्क् is affixed (1) in the sense
of गेोत्रापत्य grandchild and his issues,
tO the words नञ्ड and others as also
tO the wOr.!S er1ding with the affixes
यञ् and इञ्म् and words शरद्वत्, दर्भ, द्रोण्म
etc. e.g. नाडायन:, शान्ठङ्कायन:, दाक्षायण:
प्ल[श्क्षायणः, द्रोणायनः, वैदः, 'औौर्वैः etc. ; cf.
|P.IV. 1.99-103; (2) as a cāturar-
thika affix in the four senses
|mentioned in P. IV. 2.67-70 to |!
the worgls पक्ष and otherS e. g.
पाक्षायणः, तौषायण:; cf. P.IV. 2.80.
फञ्छ् tad. affix फः marked with ञ् cat::s-
ing the Vrddhi substitute for the
initial vowel of the word, applied
in the sense of grandchildren and
their iSSueS to words अश्च and others,
aS also to the word भर्ग; e.g.अाश्वायन',
अाश्मायन:, भार्गायणः cf. अश्वादिभ्यः फञ्जुंंंं
and भग्र्गात् त्रैगर्ते; cf. P.IV.1.1 10 and
111.
फणादि a class of seven roots headed
by the root फण्, which belong to
the first cOnjugation and which
have optionally their vowel अ
changed intO ए and the reduplica-
tive syllable ( अभ्यास) dropped, in
the forms of the perfect tense
before the affix इथ and weak affixes;
e. g- फेणतुः, फेणुः, फेणिथ फफणतुः, पफणुः,
पफणेिथ etc. cf. P.VI.4.::25.
पील (l) fruit or benefit of an action
which goes to the agent; cf. फलव्या-
|rOot which is given as Ubhaya-
padin in Pā?ini*s Grammar takes
the Atmanepada, affixes whera the
fruit of the activity is meant for
the agent, while otherwise it takes
the Parasmaipada affixes; (2) The
word फ्ळ also rneans the result
Of a gramrmatical operation or
grammatical injunction.
फि a common term for the affixes
फिन् and फेिञ्.
· फिच्छ्र् tad. affix अायनि applied to the
wOrd मिमत in the sense of ofispr ing
e.g. मैमतायनि: ; cf. P.IV.1.150;' it is
alsO added in the samesense of (of-
spring)tO the words तिक and others
as alSO to the word कौसल्य, two-
syllabled wOrds ending with अण्
and to wpr ds वाकिन and others;e.g.
तैकायनिः, कौसल्यायनिः, वाकिनकायनिः ete:;
cf. P.IV. 1.159. →
a Small work on accents
attributed tO Sāntanawa,an ancient
Wedic scholar who lived before
Patafijali if mot before Pāpini, as
the latter haS not referred to him.
There is an anonymous commen-
tary upon it.
फिन् tad. affix अायनि in the sense of
ofiSpring added according to the
Eastern grammarians to Words not
beginning with अा, ऐ or औौ, e.g.
म्लुचुकायनिः,cf. IV.1.160.
फेडगन् [ FADDEGON, BAREND ]
a, Scholar of Sanskrit Grammar,
who has Written a bOok * Studies
in Patnini's Grammar*.
ब
ब् third letter of the labial class
which is soft and inaspirate.
ब or बकार the letter बुब्, the wowel अ
as also the Word कार being added
for facility of utterance; cf. T. Pr.
पारयोधाँतुः Vaiyakaraf]a-bhta$श्ana. A
I. 17.21.: The letter बू , is eQme-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-278.png}}}}}}

बर्नेछ्
times used for वृघ् especially when it
stands at the beginning of a word,
for which scholars use the expre-
ssion ववयेारभेदः.
बर्नेल् [ BURNELL~., Dr.] a European |
Sanskrit Scholar Who has written
a learned booklet * Aindra School
of SanSkrit Grammarians ' which
discusses the problem of the
Aindra grammar. See ऐन्द्र.
बर्बरता a fault in prOnunciation of
the type of roughneSS or barbar-
ousnesS in the utterance of the
letter र् ; cf. बर्बरता असॉकुमायै रेफे
Ujvvata on R.Pr.XIV. 8.
बस्व्र्य (written as बत्स्व्यं or बत्स्र्य possibly
· through mistake in the printed
Calcutta Edition); connected with
the socket of the teeth. As the
utterance of र् proceeds from the .
socket of the teeth, र् is called बस्ब्र्य.
cf. उपसंहृततरे च जिह्वाग्रमृकारकीरछ्कोरेषु
बस्र्वेषूपसंहरति T.Pr.II.18.बस्र्व is explain-
ed here by the commentator as
दन्तपङ्केतरुपरिष्टादुळचप्रदेशेषु ऋकारस्य ऋकारस्य
लठकारस्य च बस्वंीः स्थानम् | The word'
उपरिष्टात् in the explamation given
abOve is questionable;the explana-
tion given by Uvvata in his com-
ment on वत्स्र्यमेके इच्छन्ति रेफम् R. Pr. I.
20.viz. वत्संशब्देन दन्तमूलादुपरिष्टादुच्छूनः प्रदेश
उच्यते appears better althoughappa-
rently वत्सै is written in the text'for'
बस्र्वं or वत्स्र्व.
बलराम writer of a gloss named
धातुप्रकाश On the Dhatupātha of
|Panini. · →
बलादि (1) a class of words headed by
the word बल, to which the tad..
affix .य is added in the four senses'
given by Pānini in IV.2.67-70.
e. g. बल्य: कुल्यम्, तुल्यम् , वन्यम् etc..
cf. Kaś, on'P.IV.2.80; (2) a classः
of words headed by बल which take
the possessive tad. afiix मत् option-
' ally ' with' the regular affix इन्
262
बहिरङ्गासिद्धत्व '
e. g. बलवान् , बली; cf. KāŚ. on P.
V. 2.136.
बलीयस्त्व relative superiority in
strength possessed by rules of
grammar or by operation$ based
on rules of grammar. This Supe-
riority is decided generally On any
one or more of the four reCOgnised
criteria such as परत्व, नित्यत्व, अन्तरङ्गस्व
and अपवादत्व. The phrase अन्तरङ्गबली-
यस्त्वात् very frequently OccurS in
the Wārttikas and in the Mahā-
bhasya; cf. M.Bh. on P. III. 1.67,
VI.i. 17, 85 Vārt. 15, VI. 4.62 and
VII.1. 1.
| बश short term or pratyāhāra for the
consonants from ब to mute श्ट् in
the Māheśvara stitra i. e. the con-
sonantS व्, ग्, ड् and द्•
बहिरङ्ग a rule or operation which is
बहिरङ्ङ्ग (lit. external); the word बहिरङ्ग
is used in grammar in cOnnection
with a rule or operation, the cauSe
( निमित्त )of which occurs later in
place or time than the cause of
the other which is called अन्तरङ्ग. |For
the various kinds of बहिरङ्गत्व See the
word अन्तरङ्ग where the kinds of
अन्तरङ्गत्व are given.
बहिरङ्गपरिभाषा the Paribhāsā or .the
maxim असिद्धं बहिरङ्गमन्तरङ्गे (Par. Sek.
Pari. 50) which cites the com-
parative weakness of the rule Or
operation which iS Bahirahga•
बहिरङ्गलक्षण an operation or rule
which is characterized as बहिरङ्ग; cf.
असिद्धं बहिरङ्गलक्षणमन्तरङ्गलक्षणे M. Bh. on
P. I. 1.57 ; cf. also M.Bh. on P. I.
4.2 Vart. 21•
बहिरङ्गाासेिद्धत्व invalidity i. e. non-
occurrence or non-application of
a bahirahga rule or operation.be-
fore the antarahga operation which
is looked upon as stfonger occurr-
ing earlier to the mind, or in the
wording, as it does. '



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-279.png}}}}}}

बहु
263
बहुत्रीहिप्रकृतिस्वर
बहु plural, many, the wOrd is uSed
in the sense of' abundance alsO; cf.
बहुषु बहुवचनम् P. I.4.21 and बहोर्लोपो भू
|च वहोः WI. 4.158.
बहुच् tad. suffix वहु which is alway$
prefixed to a noun in the sense Of
* almost complete ', * almOst full'*
*to a considerable extent' ;e.g. बहुगुडुा
द्राक्षा; cf. विभाषा सुपो बहुच्व् पुरस्ताञ्जु P. V.
3.68.
वडुप्रकृति (1) consisting of a large
number of verbal parts in deriva-
tion; बह्वयः प्रकृतयेा यत्र; (2) a com-
pound in which the constituent |ाँ
words are allin the plural number,
cf. सर्वो द्वन्द्वो विभाषैकवद्भवति । वहुप्रकृतिरिति
वत्तव्यम् M. Bh. on P.II.4.l2 "Vārt.l ;
(3) a compound word ( पद ) made
up of many constituent words; cf.
बहूनि पदानि यत्र तद् बहुप्रकृति पदम् Vàj.
Prat.. V. 7.
बहुमध्यगत a word which has entered
between two Constituent words of
, a cOmpound by splitting in a way
the compound e. g. the word च in
ईयते नरा च शंसं दैव्यम् Rg. Veda IX.
86.42; cf. एताानि परिगृह्णीयात् बहूमध्यगतानि
च | R.Pr.X.7. explained by Uvvata
as बहूनां पदानां मध्यगतानेि च यानि पदानि
तानि अतिक्रम्य परिगृह्णीयात् ।
बडुल lit. variously applicable; the
word is used in the rules of Pānini
in connection with a grammatical
rule Or affix or the like that is
seen necessarily applied in some
cases, Optionally applied in a fe w
other cases and not at all applied
in the other caseS still. The word
बहुलम् is used by Pānini in all such
cases. See P. II. i.32, 57; II. 3.62;
UI.4.39, 73.76, 84; III. 1.34 etc.;
cf. the usual explanation of बहुलम्
given by grammarians in the lines
कचित्प्रवृत्तिः काचिदप्रवृत्तिः क्रचिाद्विभाषा क्रचि-
दन्यदेव । विधेर्विधानं बहुधा समीक्ष्य चतुर्विधं
· बाहुलकं वदन्ति Com. V. Pr. III.18.
बहुलपाद name given by grammarians
to the third pāda of the third
adhyāya of the A$tādhyāyi.
बहुवचन the plural number; the
affixes of the plunral number
applied tO noun-bases as alsO tO
roots; cf. बहुषु बहुवचनम् P. I. 4.21•
बहुत्रोहि a compouind similar in
meaning to the word बहुत्रीहि ( pos-
sessed of much rice ) " which, in
sense shows quite a distinct object
than those which are shown by
the constituent members of the
compound; a relative or adjective
compound.There are warious kinds
of the Bahuvrihi compound such
as समान॒ाधिकर॒णबहुत्रीहि, व्यधिकरणबहुत्रीहि,
संख्यावद्दुत्रीहि,दिग्बहुंत्रीहि, सहबहुत्रीहि, नञ्बहु-
व्रीहि, ahd अनेकपदवँटुत्रीहि which depend
upon the specific peculiarity notic-
ed in the various cases.Pānini in his'
grammar haS not given any defini-
tion of बहुत्रीहि, but has stated that a
compound Other than those already
given wiz. अन्ययीभाव, द्वन्द्व and तत्पुरुष,
is बहुनीहि and cited under Bahu-
wrihi all cases mentioned above;
cf. शेधीं,.बहुत्रीहिः II. 3.23-28; also cf.
अन्यपदार्थप्रधानो बहुत्रीहिः M. Bh. on P.
II. 1.6; II. 1.20; II. 1.49.
→、- 6^、 conventional term used
for the second pāda of the sixth
adhyāya of Pānini's Asādhyāyi. *
बहुत्रीहिप्रकृतिस्वर the accent peculiar
to, or specifically mentioned in the
case of the Bahuvrihi compound
wiz. the retention of its own
accents by the'· first member, in
spite of the general rule' that a
compound word has the last
wowel acc2nted acute i. e. उदात्त. cf.
बहुत्रीहौ प्रकृत्या पूर्वपदम्. . P. VI. 2.1.
The expression बहुत्रीहिस्वर in . this'
wery sense is used in the Mahā-
bhāsya cf. बहुत्रीहिस्वरं शास्ति समासान्तविधेः
सुकृत् M. Bh. on P. VI. 2.l., · १ ;.!



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-280.png}}}}}}

बह्वच्
264
बालभट्ट
बह्वच् multisyllabled, a. word which
cðntains three, or more than three
vowels; the word occurS	raany
times in the stātras of Pamini• cf.
|P. II. 4.68, IV. 2.73, IV. 2.l09,
IV. 3.67;	V. 3.78, VI. 2.83,
W|1. 3.118.
बह्वपेक्ष lit. deperading On many; the
word is used in the senSe of de-
pending on many causal , factorS
( निभित्तानि ) and given as the defi-
nition of a kind of बहिरङ्ग by sOme
, grammarians; cf. अल्पापेक्षमन्तरङ्गं बह्वपेश्र्क्षे
बहिरङ्कम्. This kind of अन्तरङ्गबहिरङ्गत्व,
cited 'by Kaiyata is, hOwever,
disapprÔved by Nāg5$abhat±a; Çf.
बहिरङ्गान्तरङ्गशब्दाभ्यां बह्वपेक्षत्वाल्पापेक्षत्वयेोः
शब्दमर्यादया अलाभाच्चंच । तथा सति अासिद्धं
बङ्घपेक्षमल्पोपेक्षे इत्येव वदेत् । Par. Sck. on
Pari. 50.
बह्वर्थ lit. the meaning of the word
. There are many Senses of the
wórd बहु out of which *plurality*
is the sense usually Seen. The
word also means *cOllectiOn;' cf.
ग्रामशब्देर्ये बह्वर्थः | अस्त्येव शालासमुदाये
वर्तते | तद्यथा | ग्रामो दग्ध इति M. Bh.
on P. I.• l.8, 2l,
a class of words headed by
बह to which the fem. affix ई ( ङीप्म्)
is added to form the feminine
base; the words ending in अ in |
this class take the fem. affix अा
( टापू) in case ई which is optional,
is not added; Other Words remain !.
as they are, if ई, is not added;
62.• 8• बह्वी, बहुः; पद्धतिः, पद्धर्ती; गतिः, →
गती; चण्डी, चण्डा; etc. cf. Kaś. on
]P.. ]IW. 1.45.
बाध sublation, setting aside; , सामान्य-
शाख्त्रस्य विशेषशाखेत्रेण बाधः Par. Sek. on
|Pari. 51.
बाधक lit. that which $ublates or $ets
aside; generally a special rule which
sets aside a general rulc; cf. येन ना-
प्राप्ते ये विधिरारभ्यत स तस्य बाधकेा भवति,
बा
Pari. Pātha of पुरुषेीत्तमदेव Pari. " 51;
cf. also' नैतज्ज्ञापकसाध्यं अपवादैरुत्सगां
बाध्यन्त इति । बाधकेनानेन भवितव्यं सामान्य-
विहितस्य विशेधविहितन l M.Bh. on P. II.
1.24 Wārt. 5. बाधक iS uSed as a
synonym of, अपवाद. cf. अपवादशब्देत्र
बाधकपरः Par. Sek. Pari. 58.
'धकत्व the same as बाध ; sublation;
setting aside; this Sublation is
described tO be Of twO types--
(1) complete Sublation when the
rule Set aside, iS for ever Set aside
and cannot, by the maxim called
तक्रकौण्डिन्यन्याय, be applied again; cf.
दधि व्राह्मणेभ्यो दीयतां तक्रं कौण्डिन्यार्येति सत्यपि
संभवे दधिदानस्य तक्रदानं निवर्तकं भवति !
cf M. Bh.• on P. I. 1.47; VI. 1.2.
VI. 2.1. etc.: ( 2 ) temporary
sublation when the rule set aside,
can be applied, if pOSsible after
the special rule has been applied;
cf. सर्वथा अनवकाशत्वादेव बाधकत्वे ' स्वस्य
(अन्वकाश॒श॒ाख्त्रस्य) पूर्वफ़्बूर्त्तिरित्ये॒व बाधः । त॒त्र
बाधके प्रवृत्ते यद्युत्सर्गप्राप्तिर्भवति तदा भवत्येव
यथा तत्रैव याडादयः Par.Sek.on Pari.57,
The sublation or बाधकत्व is not
" only in the case of सामान्यविशेषभाव
'बा
and अनचकाशत्व as given above, but
a, rule Or operation which is पर
(cited later), or नित्य, or अन्तरङ्ग setS
aside the rule or operation which
is पूर्व,or अनित्य,or बहिरङ्ग respectively.
This बाध्यबाधकभाव occupies a very
important position in respect of
the application of grammar rules
for arriving at the correct forms
(इष्टरूपसिद्धि) and grammarians have
laid down a mumber of Paribhā-
$ās in the field of बाध्यबाधकभाव.
लंभट्ट ( बाळभट्ट ) Surnamed Pàya-
gunda or Payagunde, whO has
written a commentary On the
commentary Mitāk$arā on the
याज्ञवञ्श्क्यस्मृति. Some scholars Say that
he was also a great grammarian
and identical with वैद्यनाथ पायर्गुडे whO
has written the commentary काशिका



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-281.png}}}}}}

बालबोधिनी 265
बिल्वकादि
or गदा on the Paribhagenduśekhara,
the Cidasthimālā on the LaghuŚab-
denduśekhara and commentaries
on theVaiyākarat?abhtisana,Sabda-
katistubha and Bhā$yapradipodd-
yota. Other scholars believe that
|Bālarihbhatta was the son of
Vaidyanātha and that he wrote
only the comrnentary on Mitā-
k$ara called Balariabhatti after him.
(2) There was alsO a comparative-
ly modern grammarian of Tanjore
who haS written small grammar
works बालबोधिनी and बालरञ्जनी.
बालबेधिनी name of a grammatical
work ascribed to Bālarihbhatta of
Tanjore.
बालमनेोरमा name of a commentary
on the Siddhārata-kaumudi of
|Bhat¢Qjt Dik5ंita by Vāsudeva
Pik$ita, a grammarian of Tanjore.
There is also another commentary
called Bàlamanoraima written by
Anantadeva on the Siddhānta-
|kaumudi.
बालरञ्जनी name of a grammar work
written by Bālarihbhatta of'Tanjore.
See बालंभट्ट (2).
बाडुलक the application of a gramma-
tical rule as a necessity to arrive at
sorme forms in literature especially
in the Vedic Literature as also ir1
the workS ofstandard writers, which
cannot be explained easily by the
regular application of the stated
rules ; cf. सुतिडुपग्रहलि:गनराणां कालहलुच्-
स्वरकर्तृयङां च | ' व्यत्ययामेच्छति शास्त्रकृदेष्भ्रां
सोपि च सिध्यति बाहुलकेन M.Bh. .on P.
|III. 1.85; also cf. बाहुलकं प्र॒कृतेस्तनुदृष्टैः
प्रायसमुच्चयनादपि तेषाम् कायैसशेष्वविधश्च
तदुक्तं नैगमरूढिभवं हि सुसाघु M.Bh. on P.
term is used many times in conne-
ction with the external effort in
the production of articulate SOund,
as different frorn the internal
effort अाभ्यन्तरप्रयत्न. The external
effort is described to be consisting
of l 1 kinds; cf. बाह्यप्रयत्नस्त्वेकादशधा l
विवारः संवारः श्वासो नादे घेोषेोऽधेोषेोऽल्पप्राणो
महाप्राण उदात्तोनुदाच्तः खरितश्चेति S.K.on P.
I.1.9.
बाह्वादि a class of words headed by
the word बाहु to which the tad.
affix इ C इञ् ) is added in the sense
of a descendant; e. g. बाहवि:,
पौष्करसादिः, पाञ्चिः etc. The class called
बाह्वादि is looked upon as अाकृतिगण on
the strength of the word च in the
rule, scy that similar words, not
included in the class, could be
explained; cf. Kāś. om P.IV.1.96.
बिदादि a claSS of words headed by the
word बिद to which the affix अ (अञ्)
is added in the sense of a grand-
child and further descendants;
e.g. बैद:ः, औौर्वः, काश्यपः, कौशिकः etc.
The words in this class are mostly
names of sages. In the case of
Such words as are not names of
sages, the affix अ is added in the
sense of the offspring and not any
descendant. e.g.' पौत्रः, दैौहित्रः etc.;
cf. KāंŚ. om P.IW.|ं.104.
बिन्दु anusvāra, letterpronounced only
thrOugh the nose; a dot to indicate
the nasal phonetic element shown
in writing above or sometimes after
that letter or vowel, after which it
is uttered; cf. अं इत्यनुस्वारः l अकार
इह उच्न्वारणाथैः इति बिन्दुमात्रेो वर्णोनुस्वारसंज्ञो
भवति |॥| Kāt. I.1•19.
III.3.l • In many stitras, Panini has ! बिल्वकादि a class of words headed by
put the word बहुलम् to arrive at
such forms; e. g see. P.II.1.32,57;
II.3.62, II.4. 39, 73, 76, 84 etc.
बाह्य ( प्रयत्न ) external effort; the
34
the word बिल्वक the aftix ईय ( छ )
placed after which is elided when
ānother tad. affix Such as अण् or
the like is placed after them; cf.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-282.png}}}}}}

बिल्वादि . →
विल्वा यस्यां सन्ति विल्घकी तस्यां भवाः बैल्वकाः
|Kā$. on P.VI.4.153.
बिल्वादि a class of words headed by
the WOrd बिल्व, to Which the tad.
affix अ (अण् ) is added
sense of .*a product' or *a part';
e.g. बैल्वः मौद्गः, वैणवः etc.; cf. Kङ्गैŚ. on
|P.. I[W. 3.136.
बुइस्कूल [ BUISKOOL H. E. ) A
European grammarian who has
written an esSay on the last three
Padas of Panini?s Asgādhyāyī (त्रिपादी)
under the title *The Tripādi?.
बुद्धि notion, mental understanding;
mental inclination; cf. बुद्धिः संप्रत्यय |
इत्यन॒र्थान्तरम् । .or अस्तर्भूर्भवतीत्यस्तिबुद्धयां
भवतिञ्चुद्धिं प्रतिपद्यते M. Bh. on P. I.1.56
Vār t. l4; (2) mental inclusion;cf.
यां यां विभत्तिं अाश्रयितुं बुद्धिरुपजायते सा
साश्रयितव्या M.Bh. on P. I. 1. 57 ; cf.
अथ बुद्विः अविशेषात्स्मपुरा हेत्, M. Bh.on
III.2.1 I8 Vārt. 4.
बुद्धेिकर्मन् activity of the mind of the
type of understanding as contrast-
ed with the activity of the sense
organs; cf. इन्द्रियकर्म समासादनं बुद्धिकर्म
व्यवस,य: M. Bh. on P.III. 3.. 133
Vārt.. 8.
बुद्धिसागर writer of a grammar work
who lived in the I 1th century.
बृंहण keeping; preservation ;cf. ऋमादतो-
प्यृग्यञ्जुषां च बृंहुण॒म् ! बृंहणं संधारणम् ;Uvvaga
on R. Pr. XI. 37.
वृद्दच्छब्दरत्न a learned commentary
on the commentary मनोरमा of
भट्टोजीदीक्षित; the commentary was
Written by हरिदीक्षित the grandson of
BhattQji. The work " is called
बृहष्छठदरत्न in contrast with the
लश्चुशब्दर९न of the same author
(हरिदीक्षित) which is generally studied
at the Pajःha$ālās all over the
country. The work बृहच्छब्दरत्न is
only in _a Manuscript form at
present• Some scholars believe
266
in the |*
I
I
बेलवलकर
whO aScribed it to his preceptor
Hari Dik$ita, but the belief is ' not
Correct as proved by a reference
in the Laghu$abdaratna,where the
author himSelf remarkS that he
himself has written the वृहच्छब्दरत्न,
and internal evidences shoW that
लट्त्रुशब्दरत्न is sometimeS a word-for-
word summary of the बृहच्छब्दरत्न.
cfविस्तरस्तु अस्मत्कृते वृहच्छव्दरत्ने मदन्तेवासि-
बृ.तलधुश्[ब्देन्दुशेखेर च द्रष्टव्यः LaghuŚabda-
ratna. For details See Bhandarkar
|Ins. Journal Vol. 32 pp.258-60.
बृहट्टेच्छब्दरत्नटीका called बृहच्छब्दरत्नव्याख्या
written by भवदेव.
बृहती a Wedic metre consisting of
four pādas and 36 syllables. There
are three pādas of eight syllables
and the fourth has twelve
Syllables. It hag got further sub-
divisiOns known as पुरस्ताद्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्द्वृहती, उपरि-
ष्टाड्वृहती, न्यङ्कुसाारिणी or उरोबृहती, ऊध्र्व-
वृहती विष्टारवृहती, पिपीलिकमध्यमा and
विष्प्रमपदा. For details see R.Pr. XWI.
31-37.
॒हंत्स्सइञ्ा the same as महत्संज्ञा or महती
सैशंा; a bigger terminology as con-
trasted with लघुसंज्ञा brief termino-
logy such as टि, चु, भ etc. for which
(latter) Panini is very particular.
The bigger terms such as सवैनाम,
अात्मनेपद, परस्मैपद and others are
evidently borrowed by Pānini
frOm the ancient grammarians
whO liwed before him.
बृहद्दर्पणा name of a commentary on
KOf3dabhatta's Vaiyākaranabhui-
$क्ष्afhasāra by Mannudeva, who was
called also Mantudeva, who lived
in the latter half of the eighteenth
century.
बृहद्याकरणसिद्धान्तमञ्जूषा a grammar
wOrk written by Rāmafiatha
Chobhe.
that it was writtenbyNāgeśabhatta, | बेलवलकर [ SHRIPAD KRISHNA



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-283.png}}}}}}

वेोथार्लिग्क
267
•भ
PEILVALKAR ] a wel!-known
Sanskrit scholar of the pr('sent day
Who has been the Gerheral Bjditor
of the Mahābhiirata published by
the Bhandarkar Oriental Research
Institute, Poona. He has written
a bOok on grammar reviewing
very briefly the various systerms
of Sanskrit grammar, which is
named ** Systems of Sanskrit
Grammar ''.
बोथर्लिग्क [BOHTLINGK, OTTO] a
German Sanskrit scholar ānd
Grammarian ofSt.Petersberg, who
|has written a shortgloss in Germara
On Pātaini's Asतूंādhyāyi under the
title **Pā'?ini's Grarinmatik?*with an
introduct ion and various indexeS
at the end. He has also critically
edited MugdhabodhaःofBopadev a.
बोध्य a technical term for the voca-
tive casc in the .Jainendra Vyāka-
|rat1a•
बेपि [ BOPP, FRANZ ] a German
Sanskrit Scholar who has written
the famous wolumes of **The Com-
|parative Sanskrit Grammar'*.
बोपदेव a great Sanskrit scholar and
grammarian belonging to Deva-
giri in the greater Mahārāsंहुंra
who was supported by Hemācri
of Devagiri. He resided at सार्थग्राम
on the river Varadi in the first
half of the thirteenth century. He
wrote a short treatise on Sanskrit
Grammar, which has a number of
peculiar abbreviations for the usual
well-known grammatical terms.
His grammar had a wide spread
in Bengal and it is today a very
common text on Grammar
Bengal. On this ac^ount some
scholars beliewe that he lived in
|Bengal. He was the son of KeŚava
and pupil of Dhaneśa. He is .also
the author, .of •: the,,. ..well-known !* *-;,
in |1.·
. work कविकल्पद्रुम on which he has
written a commentary named
कामधेनु or काव्यकामधेनु.
ब्रह्मकाण्ड' name given to the first
section or Kāt?da of Bhartrhari's
Vākyapadiya. lt deals with SphOta,
and in a way it contains in a nut-
shell the philosophy of Sanskrit
Grammar.
ब्रह्मरााशे the sacred Sanskrit alphabet
given in the fourteen stitras of Ma-
heśvara, named Ak$arasamāmnāya
which is called त्रह्मराशि as it contains
the basic letters of शव्द which is
Brahma according to Gramma-
rians; cf. सोयमक्षरसमाम्नायो वाक्यसमाम्रायः
पुष्पितः फलितश्चन्द्रतारकवत् प्रतिमण्डितो वेदितव्यो
|व्रह्मराशिः M. Bh. Ahnika 2 end; cf.
also एते पञ्चषष्टिवणाँ व्रह्मराशिरात्मवाच्चः V.
Pr.VIII. 25.
ब्राह्मणादि a class of words headed by
the word ब्राह्मण to which the tad.
affix य ( ष्यञ्श्ञ् ) is added in the
" sense of *nature' Or *duty'; e.' g.
व्राह्मण्यं ( ब्राह्मणस्य भावः कर्म वां ); ef
ब्राह्मणादिराकृतिगणः अादिशव्दः प्रकारवचनः
Kā$. on P. V.1. ।24. → →
भ
भ्म् fourth letter of the labial class
which is poSSessed of the pro-
|perties कण्ठसंवृतता, नादानुप्रदान, घोघ, and
महाप्राणत्व.
भमें (l) the letter or sound भ् with the
" vowel अ added for facility of
utterance; (2) a technical term
in the Grammar. of Pāraini given
to a noun •base before such case
and taddhita affixes as begin with
any vowel or with the consonant
यु. The utility of this designation
of भ to the base is (1) , to pre-
went the substitutes which are
, enjoined for the final vOwel or
;gorasonant,of a pada (a Word: end-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-284.png}}}}}}

व्र
ing with a case-affix Or a baSe
before case and tad. affixes begin-
ning with any conSOnant except*
ing य्) just ' as the substitution of
Visarga, anusvāra, the first Or
third consonant, and otherS given
in P.. WIII. 4.37 and the follow-
ing. For the various changes
and operations for a base termed
भ sec P. VI, 4.129 to 175.•
भकार the consonant	भू with the
vowel अ and the affix ' कार added
|for facility of utterance; cf. T. Pr.
I. 17,21.
भच्त forming a .. part or portion (of
something in connection with
which it has been prescribed as
an augment ) cf. तद्भत्तस्तद्ग्रहणेन गृह्यते
Vyādi Pari. 17; cf. also अामः सुडयं
भत्तः अाम्ग्रहणेन ग्राहिष्यते M. Bh. on ' P.
VII- 1.33.
भत्तल्छ् tad. affix भत्त applied to the
words भैौरिकेि and others in the
sense of *a place of residence;* cf.
P. IV. 2.54.
भक्ति (1) name giwen to two of the
five diwisions of a Sāman which
are प्रस्तावभक्ति, उद्गीथ, प्रतिहार, उपद्रव
and निधानभक्ति; (2) the vowel por-
tion SurrOunding, or placed after,
the cOnsOnant र् or छ् which (con-
sOnant) is believed to be present
in the wowel ऋ or ल respectively
forrming its important ' portion,
|but never separately " noticed
in it. The vowels ऋ and ल
are made up of one mātra
each• It is cOntended by the
grammarians that the consonants
5 and छ् forrning respectively the
portion of ऋ and ल, make up half-
a-mātrā, while the remaining half
is made up of the भाक्ते of the
Yowel Surrounding the consomant
or situated after the consonant.
'he wQrd which i$ generally used.
268
भक्ष्यनियम a
भट्टोजी
for this *bhakti' is *ajbhakti' in-
stead of which the word स्वरभक्ति
is found in fhe Prātiśākhya works;
cf. यच्तद्रफात्परं भत्तेसेतन व्यवहितत्वान्
प्रामेाति ॥ •....•. यच्चात्र रेफात्परं भतेर्न
व्कचिदपि व्यपवृक्ततं दृश्यते । M. Bh. on P..
VIII. 4.1 Vart 2; cf. स्वरभक्तिः
पूर्वभागक्षराङ्गं R. Pr. I. 17; also cf.
रेफात्स्वरेापहिताद् व्यञ्जनेोदयाद् ऋकारवर्णौ स्वरभ-
क्तिरुत्तरा l R. Pr. WI. 13.
भक्षित lit. eaten up; a fault in pro-
|nunciation when a letter is So
hurriedly pronounced that it
appears tO have been dropped.
|restriction regarding
edibles of a particular kii1d. The
word is quoted to illustrate the
नियमविधि or restrictive rule in gra-
mmar. Although the restriction in
the instance पञ्च पञ्चनखा भक्ष्या|ः is of
the kind of परिसंख्या and called
परिसंख्या, and not नियम, by the Mimā-
|rihsakas, the grammarians call it
a niyamawidhi. There is no परि-
संख्याविधि according to grammarians;
they cite only twO kitnds of vidhi
viz. simple vidhi or aptirva vidhi
and niyamawidhi.
भट्टोजी surnamed Dik$ंita; a stalwart ·
grammarian of the Pānini system
who fiourished in the first half of
the seventeenth cet॥tury and wr0te
many independent bookS and com-
mentaries such as the Siddhānta-
kaumudi, the Praudhamanoramā,
the , Vaiyākarathasiddhāntakārikā,
the Sabdakaustubha and otherS.
The most reputed work out of
these, however, is the Siddhānta-
kaumudi which is very popular
even today and which has almOst
set aside other works of its kimd
such as the Prakriyākaumudi amd
others.• Bhattoji was a Telagu
Brāhmarāa, as generally belicved,
and although he belonged to the



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-285.png}}}}}}

भत्व
269
भविष्यन्ती
भरतमईश्र्ठं a grammarian
SOuth, he made Vārāthasi his home
where he prepared a school of
learned Gramtmarians. Although |
he carried On his work silently in
Vāra taasī, he was envied by' the
reputed rhetoriciam of his time
PaT!एँita Jagannātha, who criticised
his wOrk ( Bhaई¢०jiś work ) named
MaraCrarma very severely. See
भैौढमनेोरमा above. ' The Siddhānta-
kaurhudाँ has got maany comme-
|ntaries Of which the Tattvabodhini
written by Bhattoji's pupil Jiāne-
adrasarasvati is ' appreciāted'much
by learned grarmrihariaras.
भत्ष्च the, nature or quality of being
call€d भ which causes imany gram-
मmatical Operations which are given
together by Pānini in VI. 4.1?29 to
175• See the word भ above.
of Bengal
wh9 lived in the sixteenth centtiry
afd whO wrote उपसर्गवृत्ति, द्रुतबोध and
Other wOrks on grammar
भगदि a class of words headed by भर्ग
which , are generally names of
COuntries, the taddhita affixes अणु
and Others added to which are no
Slided; e. g. भार्गी, कैकेयी, काश्मीरीः cf.
KāŚ- on IV. 1.178.
भर्तृहरि a very distinguished Gra-
mmarian who lived in the seventh
century A• D. He was a senior
cOntempOrary of the authors of the
|KāŚikā, who have mentioned his
fam१ou$.work viz. TheVākyapadhya
in the KāŚikā..cf. शब्दार्थसंबन्धांयं प्रकरणम्।
वाक्यपदीयम् Kāś. on P. IV.3.88. Hi&
Vyākarat)a wOrk ** the Vākyapa-
diya'* haS occupied a very proni-
raent pOsition in Grammatical Lite-
rature- The work is divided into
three sections knOwra by the name
* Kāप्ऐda ' and it has discussed so
thorÓughly the problem of the rela-
tion of word' to its sense that sub-.
sequent grammarians have looked
upon his view aS an authOrity.
The work is well-known for ex-
pOunding also the Philosophy of
G:rarrmrmar. His another wrork ** the
Mahabha&ya-IDipikā ** is a scho-
larly commentary on Pataग्रेjali's
Mahābhāsya. The Commentary is
not published as yet, a nd its so]i-
tary manuscript is very carelessly
written. Nothing is known about
the birth-place or nationality of
Bhartrhari. It is also doubtful
whether he was the same person
as, king Bhartrhari who wrote the
* Satakatraya ?.
भवत्. ( भवन्त् ) ancient term for the
pres€nt tense found in the Brha-
ddewatā and other works, The
term * vartamānā * for the present
tense waS also equally common.
The word is found in the Mahā-
bhāsya, the Unādisütravपृtti of
Ujjvaladatta and in the Grammar
of Jainendra cf. P.II.3.1 Vart ] 1,
Unadi III. 50 Jain Vyāk. I.1.471.
' भवदेव a scholar of grammar who has
written a commentary on the
|Brhacchabdaratna of Hari Dīksita.
भवन्ती ancient term for the present
tense or लट् according to Panini cf.
अस्तिर्भवन्तीपरः प्रथम्पुरुषः अप्रयुज्यमानेप्यस्ति
M. Bh. on P. II.3.I . Vārt. 4; cf.
ais© प्रबृच्तस्याविरामे शासितव्या भवन्ती । इहा-
धीमहे { इह वसाम: ॥ इह पुष्यमित्रे याजयामः |
M. Bh. on P. III. 2.123. See भवत्
( भबन्त् ).
भविष्यत् ancient term for the future
tense in general; cf. भविष्यति गम्यादयः |
भविष्यतोद्यनद्यतन उपसंख्यानम् P. III.3.3
Vart.l ; cf.also the words भविप्यत्काल,
भविष्यत्प्रातषेध, भविष्यदधिकार.
भविष्यन्ती ancient term for the future
tense in general; cf. परिदेवने श्वस्तनी
भविष्यन्त्यर्थे P. III.3.15. Vart.1; · cf.
also Kat. III.1•15; Hem.• III. 3:15.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-286.png}}}}}}

भषु
>\
भष् short term ( प्रत्याहृार ) for the con-
$onantS भ ? ध्_ .. दृ ध् ; ( f. ए वiच्ीं ६शेीं
भध्० P. V!II.2.37.
भभव् the substittatiora of the third
consonants respectively for the
fourth consonan tS भु, घु, ढ्ट् and ध्;
cf. P. VI.1.13 Vārt. 13.
भख्त्रादि a class of words headed by
the word भस्त्रा to which the tad.
affix इक ( ष्ठन् ) is added in the
sense of * carrying by * ; e. g.
भस्त्रिक', भस्त्रिकी cfKāś. on P.IV.4.16.
भसञ्ज्ञा the term भ applied to the
noum-base in contrast with the
term पद.f'or detailS see the Word भ.
भागवत हरिशााख्त्री a modern scholar of
grammar whO has written a cOm-
mentary named Vakyārthacandrikā
on the Paribhāgenduśekhara . of
Nāgeśa; he lived in the first half
of the eighteenth century.
भागवृत्ति one of the oldest commen-
taries on the Stitras of · Panini,
which, althOugh not available at
present, has been profusely quoted
by Puru$ottamadeva and other'
Bastern Grammarians of the
twelfth and later centuries. The
authorship of the work is attribut-
ed tO Bhartrhari, but the point is
doubtful a$ Siradeva in his Parj-
bha$aw[tti on Pari. 76 ' has stated
that the author of the Bhāgavपूtti
has quo!ed from . Māghakāvya ; cf.
अत॒ एवे तत्रैव सूत्रे भागवृत्तिः पुरातनमुनेर्मुनिता-
मिति पुरातनीनैर्दरिति च' प्रमादपाठावेर्तौ गतानु-
ग॒तिक्रतया कवयः प्रयुञ्जत न तेषां लक्षणे चक्षुरिति !
SOme Scholars attribute its author-
ship tO Wimalamati. Whosoev6r
be the author,' the glosS ( भागवृत्ति )
was a work of recograised , merit;
cf. काशिनाभागञ्च॒त्त्योश्चेतू सिद्धान्तं वेचुतुमस्ति धीः ।
तदा विचिन्त्यतां भातभीषावृत्तिरियं मेम Bhā-
$awए'tti at the end. स्सुष्टिधर in his
cOmmentary . Oध्रn ' the * Bhāgश्awgtti
· also says ** सा हि द्वयोर्विबरणकर्त्री.'' ·
270
भाव
भाण्डारकर [Sir Ramakrishna Gopal
Bhandarkar 1837-1925 A. D. ] a
well-knOwn scholar of Sanskrit
Grarnmar who has written learned
articleS On mamy grammatical
tOpiCs. He was a distinguished
|PrOfeSSor of Sanskrit in the latter
half of the nineteenth century.
He was one of the pioneers of
Samskrit studies in India.
भरद्धजीं (1) an ancient gratmmarian
quoted by Panini in his rules to
shOw differences of opiniora; cf.क्रन्तो
भारद्वाजस्य WII. 2.63; (2) name of a
country in the days of Pānini cf.
कृकणपणॉद्भारद्वाजे P. IV. 2.145,
भारद्वाजीय scholarS and grammarjans
belonging to or following the Bhā-
|radwāja SchOol of Grammar whose
wieWS are often quoted in the
|Mahābhāsya; भारद्वाजीयाः पठन्ति M.
Bh. on P. I.1.20Vārt. 1, I.1.56
Vārt.11 ; I.2.22 Vārt.3; I.3.67 Vārt.
4, III.}.38 Vārt.1, III 1.48 Vārt.
3; III I.89 Vārt. 1, IV.1.79, VI.4.
47 and WÎ.4.155.
भाव (1) becorming; existence. The
word is used many times in the
sense of धात्वर्थ- the sense of a root
which is * incomplete activity * or
* process of evolving ?; cf. तदाख्यातं
येन भावं स धातुः R. Pr. XII. 5; cf.
also ष्ड् भावां|वेकारा भवन्ति Nir. I. 36;
, · पूर्वापरीभूर्ते भावमाख्याते॒न अाचष्टे व्रजतिपच्चती-
, त्युपक्रमप्रेभ्रृति अपवर्गपर्यन्तम् Nir. I. ] ; (2)
. activity as opposed to instru-
ménts ( साधन, op' कारक ); cf. भाव-
· · गहीँयाम् । धात्वर्थगर्हायाम् KāŚ. on P.
I!I. 1.24; cf. also भावः क्रिया, Kaś.on
`यस्य च भावेन भावलक्षणम् P. II. 3.37; (3)
. .. completed action which is shown,
. not by a verb, but by .a, verbal
derivative noun; cf. धात्वर्थश्च धातु-
नैवोच्यते | यस्तस्य सिद्धता नाम धर्मस्तत्र घञ्ञादयः
_ · प्रत्ययुा, विधीयन्ते Kāś..on * भावे ? P. III.
· 3.18; cf. also कृदभिहितेो भावो द्रव्यबद्भवति



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-287.png}}}}}}

भावकर्तृक 27ı
भावसेन्.
M. Bh. on P. II. 2.}9, III. 1.67,
IV. I.3, V. 4.t9; cf. also भावस्त्वेकः
M. Bh. on P. III. 1.67; (4) the
radical factor for the use of a
word; प्रवृत्तिनिमित्त; cf. भवतो&मादभि-
धानप्रत्ययैा इति भावः । शब्दस्य प्रवृत्तिनिाभेत्तं
भावशब्देनोच्यते । अश्वत्वम् । अश्वता । Kāś.
On P. 5.1.119; (5) thing, object
cf. सिद्धशब्दः कूटस्थेषु भावेष्वविचालिधु वर्तते
M. Bh. I. 1. Āhnika 1; (6) trans-
formation, substitution; change
into the nature of another; cf. तत्र
प्रथमास्तृतीयभावम् R. Pr. II. 4. cf. also
the words मूर्घन्यभाव, अभिनिधानभाव |
etC. {7) possession of the qualities,
|nature; तदर्थस्य भाव: तादथ्र्यम्; M. Bh. j
On P. II. 3.13; (8) relationship; }
cf. नभाव, प्रकृातेिविकृतिभाव etc.
भार्वकर्तृ"f' for its subject a
werbal deriwative in the sense of
the भाव or the root activity. The
wOrd भाववचन is explained as
भावकर्तृक in, the Ka$ikāv[tti. e. g.
the word रोगः in चौरस्य ' रुजति रोगः
|Kās. on P. II. 8. 54; cf. भाववचनानां
भावकर्तृकाणां Kāś. on i* II. 3.54.
भावदोप, name of a commentary on
the Sabdakaustubha by कृष्णमिश्र.
भावदेव a grammarian who has
Written a commentary on the
|BFhacchabdaratna of Hari Dik$ita;
pOSsibly the same as भवदेव.See भवेदव.
भावना effort, activity.
भावप्रकाश name of a commentary
on the शब्दकौस्तुभ byवैद्यनाथ पायगुण्डे.
भावप्रत्यय an affix in the sense of qua-
|lity such as त्व, ता etc.; cf. न ह्यन्तरेण
भावप्रत्ययं गुणप्रधानेो भवति निर्देशः.
भावप्रधान description of a verb or
werbal form in Which activity
playS the main part aS Opposed
to a nOum in which completed
activity ( सत्व ) is predominant.
भावभेद् the different activities such
as igniting a hearth, ' placing a
rice-pot on it, pouring water in
it etc-, which form the difierent
parts of the main activity viz.
cooking; cf. उक्तो भावभेदो भाष्ये M.
Bh. on P. III. 3.19, III. 4.67.
भाववचन (1) expressive ofभाव or the
completed verbal activity; e.g. the
word भाव itself, as also कृती, राग, and
others; (2) having for theirsubject
a verbal derivatiwe in the form of
the verbal activity. See भावकर्तृक.
^、
भावांवेकार kinds of verbal activity
which are described to be six in
number viz. production, existence,
transformation, grOwth, decay and
destruction. These six modes of
existence first mentioned by Vaधृ$-
yāya]i and quoted by Yāska are
explained philosophically by
Bhartrhari as a mere appearance
of the Sabdabrahman or Sattā
when one of its own powers, the
time factor ( कालशक्ति ) is superim-
pOScd upon it, and as a reSult of
that SuperimpOsition, it (i.e. the
Sabdabrahman) appears as a pro-
ceSS; cf. षड् भावाविकारा भवन्ति इति वाष्याँ-
यणिः 1 जायते अस्ति विपरिणमते वर्धते अपक्षीयते
विनश्यति इति । Nir,.I.2; cf. also Vak-
yapadiya III.30.
भावशर्मन् the author of the कातन्त्रपरि-
भाष्घावृति, a work on the Paribhasञ्ās
in grammar which are utilized
in explaining ,the rules of the
कातन्त्रब्याक्ररण by Sarwawarman.
भावसाश्घन (1) a word in the sense of
भाव or completed verbal activity
अस्ति भावसाधनेो विधिशब्दः । विधानं विधिरिति
M. Bh. on P. I.1.57; (2) an affix
applied fQr the formation of a
word in the sense of werbal acti-
vity;, cf. प्रयतनं प्रयत्नः । प्रपूर्वाद्यत्ततेर्भा-
वसाधनो नङ् प्रत्ययः M. Bh. on I.1.9.
भावसेन a grammarian of the Kātan-
tra school WhO Wrote the works
Kātantrarüpamālā and Kaumāra
Vyākarama.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-288.png}}}}}}

भावित
भावेित designated by a tech?t३jछ्al
term ; cf. किं पुन्नरिदं तद्भाावितग्रुहुणं धुद्धिीरत्येत्रुं
ये अाकारैकाररौकारो विहिता भाव्यन्ते तेषां ग्रहणं
अाहोस्विद् अादैज्मात्रस्य, M.Bh.on P.I.l 1 •
भाविन् which is to come intO being;
of future time; cf. भावि कृत्यमोसंीत्
M. Bh. on III. 4. 1; cf. भावेिनः सुट
अादेशेो विधीयते M.Bh. On P• VII• l•
33; cf. also एवं तर्हि भाविनीयं संज्ञा
विज्ञास्यते M.Bh on P. I. ].45•
भावप्रयेाग impe1sonal form of a
sentence when there is nO activity
mentioned on the part of the agent
nor resulting upon the Object,
buat there is a mere mention of
werb-activity.
भाव्य that which is to be pro luced;
cf.jain. Vyāk. I.1.72. See भाव्यमान.
भाव्यमान -lit. which is to be prOduc-
ed; which is prescribed by a rule,
like an affix; hence, an affix or an
augment or a Substitute presCribed
by a rule as contrasted with the
conditions or the original wording
for which something is substituted,
or after which an affix is placed,
or to which an additiom is made,
or which is deleted; cf. भाव्यमानेन
सवगृर्गनां'ग्रहणं न Par. Sek. Pari. 19;
also cf. M.Bh. on P.I. l.50, I.1.
69,VI.1.85, VI.4.160.
भाषा spoken language as opposed to
the archaic Vedic Language; cf.
भाषायां सदवसश्रुवः;P.III2.108;प्रत्यये भाषायां
नित्यम् . P. VIII. 4. 45 Vārt. 1; cf.
also ' R. T. 96, 212; cf. also नेति
प्रतिषेधार्थाँयेो भाषायाम् l उभयमन्वध्यायम् Nir.
I.4.
भाषानुशासन a work on
attributed to यश्शःकवि.
भाषामञ्जरी a small treatise on gram"
mar written by Vyaiakata Subbā-
Shastri.
भाषावृत्ति a $hort gloss on the Asंādh-
yāyi of Pārini in the 12th century
language
272
भाष्य
by Puru $ottamadeva, a reputed
scholar belonging to the Eastern
school of grammarians which
fiourished in Bengal and Behar in
the 10th, 1|lth and 12th centuries.
The gloss is very useful for begi-
nners and it has given a clear
explanation of the different stātras
without going into difficult nice-
ties and discussions. The treatise
does not comment upon Wedic
portions or rules referring to Vedic
Language becauSe, as the legend
gOes, king Lak$maraa Sena, for
whom the gloss was written, was
not qualified tQ understand Vedic
|Language; cf. वैदिकभाषानर्हत्वात् Com.
on Bhāgāvrtti by Srइंidhara.
There is a popular evaluation
of the Bhāंश्āvrtti given " by the
author himself in the stanza
** काशिकाभागवृत्त्योश्चत्सिद्धान्तं बोद्धुमस्ति धीः ।
तदा विचिन्त्यतां भ्रातभीषावृत्तिरेियं मम् *?
at the end ofhis treatise; for de-
tails see पुरुषोत्तमदेव.
भाषावृत्तिटीका a learned commentary
on Puru$ottamadeva*s Bhāsavrtti
by Srstidhara a learned gramma-
|rian of the sixteenth century.
भाषिक belonging to, or used in spoken
language aS contrasted with the
Vedic ILanguage or निगम; cf. अथापि
भाषिकेभ्यो धातुभ्यो नैगमाः कृतेो भाष्यन्ते Nir.
II.2.
भाषितपुंस्क a word or a noun-base
which has the same sense in the
maSculine gender as in the neuter
gender; generally words of quality
Or adjectives like शुाञ्चि, मधु etc. fall
in this category;cf. तृतीयादिषु भाषितपुंस्कं
पुंवद्भालवस्य P. VII. 1. 74; " cf. also
भाषितः पुमान् यस्मिन्नर्थे प्रवृत्तिानेमिचेते स भाषित-
पुंस्कशब्दनेोच्यते । तद्येोगादभिधेयमपि यन्नपुसकं
तदपि भाषितपुंस्कम् ।तस्य प्रातिपादकं यच्छब्दरूपं
तदपि भाषितपुंस्कम् । Kāś- on VII.1.74.
भाष्य a learned commentary on an
original work, of recognised merit



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-289.png}}}}}}

भाष्यकाररं
and scholarship, for which people
|have got a sense of sanctity in
their mind; generally every Sütra
work of' a branch of technical
|learning (or Sāstra) in Sanskrit has
got a Bhā$ya written on it by a
Scholar Of recognised merit. Out
of the various Bhāsya works of the
|kind given above, the Bhā$ya on
the Vyākaratha stitras of Panini is
called the Mahābhāsya, on · the
nature of which possibly the
following definition is b 3sed **सूत्रार्थोाँ
~ वण्र्धुते॒ यत्र पदैः सूत्रानुकारिभिः ) स्वपदानि च
वण्र्यन्ते भाष्यं भोष्यावेिदो विदुः ।''. In
bookS on Sanskrit Grammar the
word भाष्य is used always for the
Mahābhā$ya. The word भाष्य is
SOmetimes used in the Mahābhasya
of Patafjali (cf. उक्तो भावभेदे भाष्ये
III.3.19, IV.4.67) where the
Word may refer to a work like
लश्चुभाष्य which Patahjali 1nay have
Writtcn, Or may have got available
to him as written by somebody
clse, before he wrote the Mahā-
bhā$ya.
भाष्यकार Pataप्रेठॆjali, the author of the
Patafjala Mahābhāsya; the term,
in this sense, frequently occurs in
workS om Grammar. See भाष्'य.
भाष्यस्सूत्र the brief pithy statements in
the Mahābha$ya. of the type of the
Stitras or the Vārttikas. These
aSSertionS Or Statements are named
*i$ji? also.
भाष्येष्टि the brief pithy assertions or
. injunctions of the type of Suitras
given by Pataपेठॆjali in a way to
Supplement the Stitras of Pahini
and the Vārttikas thereon, See the
word इष्टि abowe and the word
भाष्यसूत्र also.
मास्करशााख्ञी surnamed Abhyankar
{l785-l870) a great gramtmarian
in the line of the pupils of Nāgeśa
35
273
भुक्त
who was educated at Poona and
lived at Sātārā. He taught many
pupils, a large number of whom
helped the spread of Vyākara}a
studies even in distant places of
the country, such as Vāranasi and
others. For details see Vyākaraएha
Mahābhā$ya Vol. VII pp. 27-29,
D. E. Society's Edition.
भिक्षादि a class of words headed by
the Word भिक्षा to which the tad.
affix अ ( अणू ) is added in the
sense of collection;e.g. भैक्षम्,यौवतम्,
पादातम् ; cf. Kā$. on P. IV.2.38.
भिदादि a class of roots headed by the
rOot भिद् to which the kपृt affix अ
(alwayS in the fem. gender as अा )
is added in the sense of verbal
activity; e.g. भिद, गुहा, श्रद्धा, मेधा
etc. cf. Kās. on P. III. 3.104.
भिस् affix of the instrumental plural
before which the base is looked
upon aS a Pada and sometimes
Split up in the Padapātha, especi-
ally when the preceding word has
got no change for its last letter or
Syllable.
भीमभट्ट writer Of the commentary,
named भैमी after him, on thie
|Paribhā$enduśekhara of Nāgeśa.
भीमसेन called भीमदास also, who flou-
rished in the fourteenth century
and wrote a treatise on grammar
called भैमव्याकरण.
भीमादि a class of words headed by
the wOrd भीम in which the Utaādi
affixes म and others, as prescribed
by specific Unādi stitras, are found
added in the sense of the *apādāna* '
case-relation; e.g. भीमः in the sense
* बिभेति अस्मात्'. Similarly भीष्मः, भूमिः,
रजः etc. cf. KãŚ. on P.III.4.74.
भुक्त lit. swallowed or eaten up; the
term is used in connection with
letters that are uttered imperfect-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-290.png}}}}}}

भुग्
274
भेद्य
ly on account of the proximity of
similar letters.
||
{|
|!
rgeिrréd.to; cf. बहेोनैञ्वदुत्तरपदभूग्नि P.
VI.2.175.
भुग्न name of a Satihdhi or coalescence | भूमादि the limited senses भूमन् (plu-
given by the writerS
|Prati$ākhya works where the diph-
thong wowels ओो and औी, folloWed
by any vowel which is not labial,
are turnsd respectively into अञ्म्
and अा|व्; e. g. ऋतेन मित्रावरुणावृतावृधुा-
वृतल्पृशा (R. Sarihh.I..2.8); cf. ओोष्ठञ्श्य्येो-
न्योर्भुग्ममनोष्ठये वकारेत्रान्तरागमः l यथा ऋन्तेन
मित्रावरुणावृतावृधाावृतस्पृश!| । अनोष्ठये इति
किम् । वायो " उक्थेभिः " 2.2. (R.Sarhh.
I.2.2). इत्यतः बाय उक्थेभि cf. R.. Pr. !.
|II.1l .
भत lit, what has become or happen-
ed, The word is used in bookS On
grammar in the sense of past
tense in general, which has been
subdiwided into (a) unseen past
(परोक्षभूत or लिट्), (b) past, not of to-
day ( अनद्यतनभूत or लङ् ) and (c)
past in general (सामान्यभूत or ळुङ्),cf.
भूते P.III.2.84, परोक्षे लिट् P.III.2.116
' and अनद्यतन लङ् P.III.2.11 1.
भूतपूर्वगति lit. denotation of some-
thing which formerly Was existing;
a consideration of that form of a
Word which was formerly present.
The word is used frequently by
cOmmentators when they try tO ap-
ply a rule of grammar toa changed
wording under the plea that the |,
wording required by the rule |
?भेदक (1) lit. distinguishing; diffe-
was fQrmgrly there; " cf. भूतपूर्वगत्या
(पकारलेोपे कृतेपि ) दाप् भविष्यति, M.' Bh.
on P.I.l.20 Vārt. 9; cf.
, Par. Sek. Pari.. 76.
भूपाद् name popularly given by
Siradeva and ðther grammarianS
to the third pada of the first | .
Asādhyāyi |
as it begins with the Sutra भूवादयेी '
adhyaya of Pānini's
धातव: P.I.3.1.
भूमन् plurality of the individuals |?
of the !
also M. |1·
Bh. on P.I.1.56, WII.1.9 and VII. |;
3.108; cf. also सांप्रतिकाभावे भूतपूर्वगतिः |
:
}
J
rality) and others in which मतुभ्
and ' other possessive taddhita
affixes shOuld take place,and not in
the generalsense of the 'presence at
one place' as also *the possession by
sOme one individual;' cf. भूमनिन्दा-
प्रशंसासु नित्ययेोगेतिशायने 1 संसर्गेस्तिवेिवक्षायां
भवन्ति मतुबादयः M. Bh. on V. 2.94.
भूवादि lit. headed by भू , or headed
by भू..and वा aS Some Scholars like
to explain ; the term means roo{s;
in gencral, which have भू as the
first root in Pa'ोini?s list of roots;
cf. भूवादयेो धातवः P. I. 3.l ; The
word भूवाादि denoting roots stands
in contrast With the.. Word भ्वादि
Which Stands for the roots of the
first .conjugation. भूवादीनां वकारोर्ये
मङ्गलार्थ: प्रयुज्यते । भुवो वार्थं वदन्तीति भ्वर्था
वा वादयः स्मृताः Kāś. on P. I. 3.1.
भृशादि a class of nouns headed by
भृश to which the denominatiwe
affix य is added in the sense of
* being or becoming what they
were not before;' e. g. अभृशो भृशेो
भवति भृशायते; similarly शीघ्रायते, मन्दायते,
उन्मनायते, दुर्मनायते etc.cf.Kāś.III.1.I3.
、 → → → , →
भे ई difference, differentiation; , cf.
सति भेदे किंन्विंत्समानमिति कृत्वा सवर्णसंज्ञा
भविष्यति M. Bh. on P. I.1.9, Vart. 2.
rentiating; cf भेदकत्वात्स्वरस्य | भेदका
उदात्तादयः l M. Bh. on P. I. 1.U
Vart. 13; (2) adjective; cf. भदकं
विशेषणं भेद्यं विशेष्यम् Kāś. on P. II:
1.57 ; (3) variety; kind; cf. सामान्यस्य
विशेषेो भेदकः प्रकारः Ka$. on P.W. 5.23;
(4) indicating, Suggesting, as con-
trasted with वाचक; cf. संबन्धस्य तु
भेदक: Vākyapadiya.
भेद्य that which is distinguished; the
word which is qualified; cf. भेद्यं
विशष्यम् Kāś. on P. II. 1.57.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-291.png}}}}}}

भैमव्याकरण 275 भ्भ्रष्ठावसर
& ise ! charities and love Of learning.
भमव्याकरण्ा a grammar treatise ; → →
written by भीमसेन in the fourteenth | |He flourished in .the. eleventh
century A. D. ां century A. D. He is said tO have
$\
भैमी name of a commentary on the
Paribhā$enduśekhara of Nāgeśa
written by Bhimabhatta in the
latter half of the eighteenth cen-
tury.
मिश्र one of the reputed gra-
mmarians of the latter haff of the
eighteenth century and the first
half of the mineteenth century who !
wrote com tmentaries on several
prominent works on grammar. He
was the son of भवदेव and his native !
place was Prayāga. He has
written the commentary called
Candrakala on the ILaghu$ab-
dcndu$ekhara, Parik$श्a On the
Vaiyākarathabhüganasāra, Gadā
called alsO Bhairavi or Bhairavi-
gadā on the Paribhā3enduśekhara
and commentaries ( popularly
named Bhairavi) on the Sabda-
ratna and Lingānuśāsana. He is
reported to have visited Poona,
the capital of the Peśawas and
|received magnificent gifts for
exceptional proficiency in Nyaya
and Vyākarana. For details See
pp. 24 and 25 Vol. VI [. Pātaशेतं-
jala Mahābhasya D. E. Society*s
& |Pdition.
भेरवी name given to a comriaentary
in general written by Rhairava-
|miśra, which see above. The
commentary on the Paribhā$en-
duśekhara is more popularly
|known as Bhairavi.
भोगीनर् tad. affix भेोगीनर् suggested
by the Varttikakāra to form
words like राजभोगनि, अाचार्यभेोगीन
which are derived by the rule
अात्मन्विश्वजनभेीगोत्तरपदात् खः P. V. 1.9.
भोज the well-known king of Dhārā
who was very famous for his
got written or himself written
several treatises on wariOuS ŚāstraS.
The work SaraSwatikafीthābhararaa
which is based on the A$ंadhyayÎ
of Panini, but which has included
in ंt the Vārttikas and Paribhasās
also, has become in a way a
Wyākāral]a or a general Work in
grammar and can be Styled as
Bhoja-Vyākara|la. →
भोलानाथ a grammarian who " has
writtera a, ccommentary raamed
Sarihdarbhāmrta on Bopadeva*s
Mugdhabodha.
भौतपूव्र्य the consideration that a
thing was Such and Such a One
formerly, and hence liable to
undergo grammatical operations
on that ground ; cf. कृत एत्त्वे भौत-
पूव्र्यात् । भिस ऐम् । M. Bh. on P.
VI][. 1. 9. **
भौवादिक belonging to the clasS, of
roots headed by भू ; a root of the
frst , conjugation; cf. अक्षूत् व्याप्तौ
भोवादिकः KaŚ. on P. III. !.75.
भ्यस् case-affix of the dativg and
ablative plural; cf. स्वैौजसमौट्० P:'
|IV. 1. 2.
भ्याम् case-affix of the instrumental,
dative and ablative dual; cf.
स्वौजसमौट्० P. IV. 1. 2.
भ्रटच् tad. affix भ्रट applied to the
prefix अव in the sense of depres-
sion of the nOse; e.g• अवभ्रट: पुरुष::
अवभ्रटा नासिका अवभ्रटम् (depression 6f
the nose नासिकाया नतत्वम्);cf. Kāś. on
नत नासिकायाः संज्ञायां टटिञ्छ् नाटञ्जुत् भ्रटचः
P. V. 2.31.
भ्रष्टावसर lit. a person or a thing of
which the2 prOper Occasion · has
passed; thewOrd is used in conne-
ction with; the application- 9f a
rule even though the proper :tiga६



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-292.png}}}}}}

भ्रज
of its application is,goi!e, of, the
analogy of a man who is paid,.his
DakŚina although the pr?per ti१e
has gone ( भ्रष्टावसरन्याये॒न दक्षिणा दीयते);
cf. न च पुनतूंक्शास्त्रं प्रवर्तते भ्रष्टावसरत्वात्
Kāś. ora P. VIh.2.101•
भ्रज stray or spuriouS verSes Or
stanzas whose authorShip cannOt
be traced, but which are common-
ly quoted by ScholarS; cf. भ्राजा
नाम श्लेाकाः M.Bh. on I.1 Ahnika 1;
the word भ्राज is explained as
*composed by Kātyāyana' by
Nāgeśabhatta in his UddyOta.
भूमध्य lit.centre of the brows, or eye-
brows which is described as the
place of air ( which produaces
utterance or speech) at the time
of the evening sOma-preSSing Or
sacrifice; cf. प्रात:सवनमाध्यन्दिनसवनतृती-
यसवनक्रमेण उर:कप्ष्ठभ्रमध्यानि त्रीणि स्थानानि
वायोर्भवन्ति । Vāj. Prāt. I. 30; cf. also
भ्रुवेोर्मध्ये प्राणमावेश्य सम्यक्.
भ्वादिगण the class of roots headed by
भू; the first conंjugation Of roots.
3म
म् (1) fifth letter of the labial class
of consonantS which is possessed
of the properties नादानुप्रदान, घेोष,
कण्ठसंवृतत्व, अल्पप्राणत्व and अानुनासिक्य;
(2) substitute म् ( मञ्शू ) for अम् of
' the 1st. pers- sing. in Vedic litera•.
ture; e.g. वधीं वृत्रम् । cl. अमेो मशु P.
VII. 1.40;
म (l) the cOnSOnant म् with the vowel
अ added for facility of utterance;
cf. T. Pr. I.2.! ; (2) The substi-
tüte म for मस् of the 1st pers.
pl. in the perfect tense' cf.
P परस्मैपदानां ... णल्वमाः III. 4.82
and in the present tense also in
the case of the root विद्; (3) tad.
affix, म added to the word ' मध्य in
the Saiहुंika senses,and to the words
276
मव्जूषा
and द्रु in the sense of possession;
cf. P.IV.3.8,V.2. 108.
मकरन्द (1)name of a commentary by
Rahganātha on the Padamafंjari
of Haradatta: (2) name of a com-
mentary On the Supadma Wyaka-
rat]a by Vistumiśra..
मकार the consonant म् with the vowel
अ and the affix कार added for faci-
lity of use and pronunciation; cf.
T.Pr.I.17 and 21.
मङ्गलार्थ for the sake of auspicious-
neSS at the beginning of a	treatise
or work; cf. भूवादीनां वकारोयं मङ्कलार्थः
प्रयुज्यते M.Bh. on P.I.3.1. ;cf.मङ्कलादीनि
हि शास्त्राणि ! M.Bh. on P.I.1.1.
मट्ट् tad. affix म applied to a numeral,
inOt preceded by another numeral
in the sense of completion; e. g.
पञ्चम:, सतम:; cf. नान्तादसंख्यादेर्मट् Pan.
V.2.49.
मण् tad. affix म, causing vrddhi for
the wOrd मध्य, in the sense of
*preserat therein' ( तत्र भवः ); e.g.
माध्यमः; cf. मण्मीयौ चापि प्रत्ययौ, P.IV.
3.60 Vart. 2.
मण्डूकगति lit.the gait of a frog; jump;
the cOntinuation of a word from a
|preceding Stītra to the following
Stitra or Stātras in the manner of a
frOg by omitting one or more Stitras
in the rmiddle; the word मण्डूकप्ळुति
is alsO used in the same sense espe-
cially by later grammarians; cf.
अथवा, मण्डूकगतयेोधिकाराः । यथा मण्डूका
उत्प्लुत्येोत्प्लुत्ये गच्छन्ति तद्वदधिकाराः । M.
Bh. on P.Î.1.3 Vārt.2, II. 3.32, II.
4.34, VI.1.16, VI.3.49,VII. 2.117.
मण्डूकप्लुति thesame as मण्डूकगति which
$ee above; cf. अथवा मण्डूकप्ळुतयेोधिकाराः
MB.h.• on P. Y.2.4.
मञ्जष a popular name given to the
work परमलधुमञ्जूषा of Nāgeśa on अर्थ-
प्रक्रिया (Science or method of inter-
pretation) in Wyākarana, which i$



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-293.png}}}}}}

मतु
generally read by advanced !
Students. Nāge$a has also written !
a bigger work on the same subject !
लधुमञ्जूषा which sometimes is also !
referred to by the word मञ्जूषा.
मतु the same as मतुप् a tad. affix
shOWing pOSsession; the word is fre-
quently used in Pānini's rules for
मतुपुप्. cf. मतोश्च बह्वजङ्गात् |l P. IV 2.72;
cf. also, P.IV. 4.125, 136; V. 2.59,
VI.1.215, VI.3.118,130; VIII. 2.9;
for the sense of मतु see मतुप् below.
The affix मतु (instead of मतुप् of
P'ānini) is found in the Atharva
Prātiśa]khya.
मतुप् tad. afiीx मत् changed in some
cases to बत् (cf. मादुपधायाश्च मतेार्वेौऽ
यवादिभ्यः P. VIII. 2.9), applied to
any nOun or substantive in the
Sense of * who possesses that,' or
*which contains it,' or in the
Sensc of pOSSeSsion as popularly
expreSSed. The affix is called
pOSSeSsiwe affix also, and is very
cOmmonly found in use; e. g.
गेोमान् , वृक्षवान् , यवमान् , etc. cf. तदस्या-
स्त्यस्मिन्निति मतुप् P. . V. 2.94. The
very general sense of *possession*
is limited to certain kinds of pos-
Session by the Vārttikakāra in the
following , stanza; भूमनिन्दाप्रशंसासु
नित्ययेोगेतिशायने । संसर्गेऽस्तिविवक्षायां भवन्ति
मतुबादयः cf. Kāś. on P. V. 2.94.
There are other tad. affixes pres-
cribed in the same sense as मतुप्म्,
such as the affixes लच् (V. 2.96-
98), इलच् (99, 100, 105, 117), शा
and न (100), ण (101), विनि (102,
121, l22), इनि (102, 115, 116,
128, 129-137), अण् (103, 104), उरच्
(106),. र (107), म (108), व ( 109,
1l0), ईरन् and ईरच् (111), वलञ्चु (112,
113), ठन् (115, 116), ठञ् (118, 119),
यप् (I20). युस् (123, 138, 140),
fग्मनि (124), अालच् and अाटञ्च॒ (125ँ,
अच् (127), and ब, भ, यु, ति, तु, त
277
and यसू each one applied to spe-
मत्वथाँय
cifically stated words. मतुप् is alsO
specially prescribed after , the
words headed by रस (cf. रसादेिभ्यश्च
P. V. 2.95) in supersession of
some of the other affixes men-
tioned abOve Which WOuld take
place in such cases, if मतु५ were
not prescribed by the rule रसा-
दिभ्यश्च. The portion of the A$jādh-
yāyi prescribing the possessive affix-
es is named मतुबधिकार (P. W. 2.92
to 140).
मतुष्पाद a conventional name given
by grammarians to the third
pāda of the eighth Adhyāya of
Pārभ्ini*s Asं:ādhyāyi as the pāda
begins with the stitra मतुवसेीरु संबुद्धौ
दृछन्दसि P. VIII. 3.1.
मतुबथैिक affix in the sense of मतुप्
i. e. in the sense of possession.
For these affixes of which इनि (इन्)
iS very common See the word
म॒तुप् , cf. शैषिक्ान्म॒तुबर्थीयाच्छैषिको मतुब-
र्थिक; l सरूप: प्रत्ययेो नेष्ट: सन्नन्तान्न सनिष्यर्ते |॥
* M. Bh. on III. 1.7; V. 2.94.
मतुबथाँय affix in the sense of मतुप् ;
See मतुबर्थिक.
मतुब्लोप elision of the afiix मतुप् spe-
cially prescribed after words of
quality, or words meaning qua-
|lity, Such as शुह्छ्, कृष्ण which origi-
nally mean the white colour, the
black colour etc. e. g. शुल्ङः पट: cf.
गुणवचनेभ्यो मतुपेो ळुक् P. V. 2. 94
Vārt. 3.• .
मतोन्मजा name of a commentary on
Koradabhatta's Vaiyakaranabhü-
$ana Written by a grammarian
named वनमाालिन्.
मत्वर्थ sense in which the affix मतु
( मतुपू ) .is affixed; the sense of
*pOssession? in general; see the
word मतुप् above.
मत्वर्थीय an affix which has got the
sense of मतु ( मतुप् ). See the words
मतुबर्थिक and मतुबर्थॉय above; '



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-294.png}}}}}}

म४ध्य
278
मध्योदात्त
मध्य lit. middle; middling variety.
The word is used in the sense
of the middling effort between
the open ( विवृत ) and the close
( संवृत ) external efforts which
technically is called हकार; cf. मध्ये
हकारः 1 मध्ये भवः मध्यः । अ सांप्रतिके l
. तदयमर्थः | सांप्रतिके प्रकृतिस्थे कणेठ सति हकारो
नाम बाह्यः प्रयत्नः क्रियते | तेन च व्यञ्जनेषु
घोषेो जायते । T. Pr. Bhā$ya on II.6.
मध्यकैौमुदी called also मध्यमकौमुदी a
work on grammar which is an
abridgment, to a certain extent,
of Bhattoji's Siddhāntakaumudi.
The treatise was written by Vara-
darāja, a pupil of Bha!toji for
facilitating the study of the
Siddhānta-kaumudi.
मध्यपतित lit. fallen in the middle;
the word is used generally in the
sense of an augment which is
inserted in the middle of a Word.
Sometimes an affix too, · like अकञ्क्ष
' or a conjugational sign like श्भम्..
is placed in the middle of a
' word. Such a middling augment
is technically ignored
word together with it is takem as
the original word for gramtmatical
· operations; e. g. उच्चकैः, नचिकै: etc.
cf. तन्मध्यपतितस्तद्ग्रहणेन गृह्यते Par. Sek.
Pari. 89.
मध्यम (1) the middle person ( मध्य-
मपुरुष ), cf. युष्मटुपपदे... मध्यमः P. I.
4.105; cf. also " Nir. W'II. 7; (2)
middling tone or effort. cf. मध्यमेन
स वाक्ययोगः T. Pr. XVIII. 4,
where the commentator explains
the word as उच्चनीचसमाहारविलक्षणः
वाक्प्रयेोगः l the word मध्यमा. is used
in this sense as qualifying a
mode of utterance. वृत्ति; cf.
अभ्यासार्थे द्रुतां वृर्त्ति प्रयोगार्थे तु मध्यमाम् ।
R. Pr. XIII. 19; cf also चतुष्कला
मध्यमायाम् R. T. 32; (3) one of the
$eWÇn raodes of speech or tones.
gf. सप्त_ वाचः स्थानानि भवन्ति । उपांशुध्वान-
निमदेापव्दिमन्मन्द्रमध्यमताराणि T. " Pr.
XXIII.4 and 5 and also कण्ठे मध्यमम्
XVIII.l l where the commen3
tator cxplains मध्य॒म as यत्र कण्ठे स्थाने
प्रयेोग उपलभ्यते तन्म॒ध्यमं नाम षष्ठंवाचस्स्थानम्
(4) One Of the seven musical
notes originating or proceeding
from the Svarita accent cf., स्वारित-
प्रभव[ ह्येत षड्जमध्यमपञ्चमाः Pān Siksā. .
मध्यमकौमुदी (1) name Of a treatise on
grammar by Rāmaśarman; (2)
the same as मध्यकौमुदी.
मध्यमपदलोप lit.. the dropping of the
rniddle word or member ( of a
compound generally) as for inst-
ance in शाकपार्थिक for शाकप्रियपार्थिवः
the word मध्यमपदलेीप is also used
in the sense Of a compound.
The compounds which have
the middle word dropped
are enumerated by the Wārttika-
kāra under the Warttika शाकपाश्र्थिवा-
दीनां मध्यमपदलेापश्च Bh. Vr. II.1.60
Vārt.; cf. also Kāt. II.6.30.
मध्यम or' मध्यमवृत्ति See मध्यम (2).
| मध्यासेद्धान्तकौमुदी. See मध्यकौमुदी.
and a !
मध्येपवाद a rule forming an exception
tO Other general rules being plac-
ed between them, one or many
of which are placed before and the
otherS afterwards. Such a rule sets
aside the previouS rules and not
the Succeeding ones. The state-
|ment laying. down this dictum is
मध्येपवादाः पूर्वान् विधीन् बाधन्ते नेोत्तरान्
Par, Sek.Pari. 60, also M. Bh. on
|P.VI.4.148 Vārt. 5.
मध्येपवादन्याय the maxim of the
middle rule of exception; see
मध्येपवाद. →
मध्योदाच्त the acute or udātta accent
to the मव्य wowel which is neither
the initial ( अादि) nor the final one
( अन्त ) as laid down by the .rule
उपेात्तमं रिति P. VI.1.217; cf. मध्येो-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-295.png}}}}}}

मध्वादि 279
3मेर्यु
*\
दात्तमपि यमिच्छति तत्र रेफमनुबन्धं करोति !
M. Bh. on III.1.3.
मध्वादि a class of words headed by !
the word मधु to which the taddhita !
affix मत् ( मतुप् ) is added as aCātu-
rarthika affix; e. g. मधुमान् , विसमान्
etc.; cf. Kā$. on P.IW. 2.86.
मन् (1) the affix मनिन्,generally found
in Vedic Literature added to
roots ending in अा amd preceded
by a nOun; e.g. सुदामा, अश्धत्थामा; cf.
अ॒ंतो॒...मनि॒नूर्कनुिर्वैन्निर्पश्च , P.Ii!.2.74,75; |
(2) Unādi affix in अोद्म; cf. औौद्म ' इति
उन्देरौणाादके मन्प्रत्यय नलेोपो गुणश्च निपात्यते
Kā$. on P. VI.4.29. I
मनिन् See मन्,.
मनोज्ञादि a clasS of Words headed by
the word मनोज्ञ, to which the tadd-
hita affix अक ( बुञ्) is added in the
sense of *nature' or *duty*; e.g.
मानोशकम् • काल्याणकम्, अाढयकम् etc. cf.
Ka$. on P. V. 1.U33.
मनेोरमा (I) the popular name given to
the commentary प्रौढमनेीरमा on the
Siddhantākaumudi of भट्टोजीदीक्षित
by the author himself; the com-
mentary is a scholarly one and
vcry extensive; and its first portion
only upto the end of Karaka is
bhatईa and a commentary named
दॉत्रॊोद्धरण on Nāgeśa?s Paribhāgendu-
Śekhara.
मन्त्र name given to the Sarांhhitā por-
tion of the Veda works especially
of the Rgveda and the Yajurveda
aS different from the Brahmana,
Aranayaka and other portionS of the
twO Vedas as also from the other
Wedas; cf. मन्त्रशब्द ऋक्शब्दे च यजुःशब्दे च;
M. Bh. on P.I. 1.68 Vārt. 4. The
word मन्त्र occurs several fimes in
the rules of Panini ( cf. P. II. 4.
80, III.2.71, III.3.96, VI. 1. 151,
VI.1.210, VI.3.131, VI.4.53, VI.
4.14l) and a few times in the
Vārttikas. (cf. I. } 1. 68Vart. 4,
IV.3.66 Vārt. 5 and WI. 4. 141
Vart. I). It is, however, doubt-
ful whether the word was used in
the limited sense by Pānini and
Kātyāyana. Later! on, the word
catme to mean any Sacred text or
cwen any mystic formula, which
Was looked upon as sacred. Still
later On, the wOrd came to mean a
Secret counsel. For details see Gold-
Stticker*s Pāthini p. 69, Thieme's
* Pāaini and the Veda ' p. 38.
gene1ally read in the Sanskrit | मन्द्र onc of the three places of the
Paghaśālās;(2) name of a commen-
' tary on the Madhyasiddhānta-
kaumudi by Rāmasarman; (3)
name given to a treatis६ discussing
roots given in the Kātantra Gra-
mmar written by रमानाथशमाँ in the
sixteenth century. The work is
origitaation Of articulate speech
which is described as situated in
पुंhe throat; cf त्रीणि॒ मन्द्रं मध्यममुत्तमं च ।
तेषु मन्द्रमुरसि वर्तते Uvvata on' R. Pr.
XIII• 17; cf. also ' मन्द्रमध्यमताराणि
स्थानानि भवन्ति । T.Pr.XXII.11.
called कातन्त्रधातुवृत्ति also. मन्नुदेव See मन्तुदेव.
९^
मनोरमाकुचमर्दनnamegiven in a banter- | म'5 tad. affix म alwayS added to the
" ing tone to the treatise प्रैोढमनेोरमा-
खण्डन written by जनन्नाथपण्डित.
मन्तुदेव known also as मन्नुदेव, a famous
grammarian of the eighteenth
century who has Written a com-
mentary named दर्पणा on the
.Vaiyākaraग्3abhui$aग्hasāra ofKopda-
krt. affix त्रि ( क्ञ्त्रि) prescribed after
rootS characterized by the mute
syllable ड़; e.g. कृत्रिमम्, पक्त्रिमम् etc.
क्त्रेर्मग्नित्यम् P.IV. 4.20. →
abbreviated term or pratyahāra
for all the cOnSOnants of the five
.classes or Vargas cxceptingः thiध्ठं



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-296.png}}}}}}

र्मेय
280 महाभाष्य '
consonant ञ्जुञ्; cf. मय उञ्जेा वेो वा
|P..WIII.3.33.
मय tad. affix मयट् (1) in the sense of
proceeding therefrom ( तत अागत: P•
IV.3.92) added to words ShOwing
cause or meaning human being;e•g•
सममयम् , देबदत्तमयम् ; (2) in the sense
of product(विकार)or part(अवयव) add-
ed optionally with अणु to.any wçrd,
e.g. अश्ममयम्, अाश्मनम् मूर्वामयम् मौंर्वम्,
and necessarily tO words begirīn-
ing with अा, ए and औौ, words
of the class headed by thE
word शर and the words गेो, पिष्ट, व्रीहि,
तिल and $ome others; cf. P. IW. 3.
143-150; (3) in the sense of pro-
portion, added tO a numeral; e• g.
द्विमयमुदश्चिद्यवानाम् ; cf. P. V. 2.47; (4)
in the sense of *made up of*added
to the thing of which there is a
large quantity; e.g. अन्नमयम्,
अपूपमयम्cf;तत्प्रकृतवचने मयट्P.V.4.21,22.
मयट् see मय.
→ a claSS of compounds
of the type of मयूरव्यंसक which are
somewhat irregular formations and
hence mentioned as they are
fOund in uSe. The cOmpounds are
called simple tatpurusa compo-
unds; e.g. मयूरव्यंसकः हस्तगृह्य, एहिपच्चम्,
उच्चावचम्, खादतमोदता etc.; cf. मयूरव्यं-
सकादयश्च P.II.1.72.
मरीस tad. affix मरीसच् /added to the
word अवि in the sense of milk; e.g.
अविमरीसम् ; cf. अवेर्दुग्धे सेोढदूसमरीसचः P.
W. 2.36 Vārt.. 5.
माल्लेनाथ a reputed commentator on
many classical poetic and dra-
matic WOrkS, who flourished in
the fourteenth century. He was
a, scholar of Gramtmar and is
believed to have, written a com-
mentary on the Sabdenduśekhara
and another named न्यासोद्योत on the
· न्यास of जिनन्द्रबुद्धि.
श् personal ending म् substituted
for अम् in Vedic Literature; e.g.
वधीं वृत्रम् ; cf. अमेो मश्शू,.P. VII. 1.40;
See म्.
मस् personal ending of the first
person ( उत्तमपुरुष ) plural: e. g.
भवाम:, कुमैः; cf. तिप्तस्झिसिप्o III. 4.78.
मसि personal ending formed by
adding इ to मस् of the 1st person
( उत्तमपुरुष ) pl. in Vedic Literature
दीपयामसि, भञ्जयामसि, cf. Kā$. on इदन्तेो
मसि P.WII.1.46.
महादेव a grammarian Of the Kātan-
tra SchOOl who has written a gloss
on the कातन्त्रवृति of दुर्गसिंह.
महानन्द a grammarian of the eigh-
teenth century who has writte a
glOSS On KOndabhatta's "Vaiyaka-
raपृ]abhuganasāra.
महान्यास name of a commentary on
the Kāśikāvivaranapanjikā (popu-
larly named NyāSa), mentioned
by Ujjjvaladatta in his Unādi-
stitravftti.
महाश्प्राण lit. hard breathing, aspirate
characteristic (बाह्यप्रयत्न) of conso-
mantS poSSeSSed by the second and
fourth conSOnants of the five class-
es, and the sibilants शु, ष्ञ् and सू
which letters are also called महाप्राण
On that accOunt.
महाभाष्य lit. the great commentary.
The word is uniformly used by
commentatorS and claSSical Sans-
|krit writers for the reputed com-
mentary on Pārini's Sütras and
the Vārttikas thereon by Patafंjali
in the 2nd century B. C. The
commentary is wery scholarly yet
wery simple in style, and exhaus-
tive althOugh omitting a number
of Pānini's rules. It iS the first and
oldest existing commentary 9n the
Aईंंंंंंंंंंādhyāyā of Pānini, and, in spite
of some other commentaries and
glosses and other compendia,
written later on to explain the



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-297.png}}}}}}

महाभाष्य
281
महाभाष्य
Sप् tras of Pānini, it has rernained
Supremely authoritative and fur-
nishes the last and final word in
all places Of doubt ; cf. the remarks
इति भाष्ये स्थितम्, इत्युक्तं भाष्ये, इत्युक्तमाकेर
etC• Scattered here and there in
Several Vyākarana treatises form-
ing; in fact, the patent words used
|by cormrmenfatOrs when they finish
any chain of arguments. Besides
COmmenting on the
i$sues and after discüssing them
fully_ and thoroughly, given his
cOncluSions which have become
the fimal dicta in those rmatters.
The wOrk, in short, has become
an encyclopaedic one and hence
aptly called खनि or अाकर. The
WOrk is spread over such a wide
field Of grammatical studies that
not a Single grammatical issue
appearS tO have been ieft out.
The authOr appears to have made
a clOSe study Of the method and
explanations of the Stātras of
Pānini given at various academies
all Over the country and incorpo-
rated the gist of those studies
given in the form of Vārttikas at
the .variQus , places, in his great
work• He has tboroughly scruti-
piized and cOmmented upon the
Varttikas many of which ' he has
apprOved, SOme of which he has
rejected, and a few of which he has
Supplemented.Besides the Vārttikas
which are referred to above, he has
quOted stanzas which verily sum
up the arguments in explanation
9f the difficult stātras, composed
by his predecessors. There' is a
gOod reasOn tO believe that there
were Small glosses or corramenta-
|ries On the Stitras of Pataini.,written
by learned teachers at the various
36 →
→ St]itraS of ;
Pāग्ऐÎni, Pataप्रेjali, the author, has |!
raised many Other grammaticaI
academies, and the Vārttikas form-
ed in a way, a, short pithy Summary
of those glosSes or Vgttis.	The
explanation of the word वृत्तैौ साधु
वार्तिक्रम् given by Kaiya¢a may be
quoted in support of this point.
Kaiya¢a has at one place even
Stated that the argument of the
Bha$yakāra is in consonance with
that of Kur?i, his predecessor. The
wCrk is divided into eightyfive
sections which are given the name of
lesson or अाह्निक by the author, pro-
bably because they form the subject
matter of one day*s study each, if
the Student has already made a,
thOrough study of the Subject and
is very sharp in intelligence. cf.
अह्ना निर्वृत्तम् अाह्निकम्, (the explanation
given by the commentatiors).Many
commentary workS were written
On this magnum. OpuS Of Patafंjali
durirag the iong period of twenty
centuries uptO this time under the
names टीका टिप्यणी, दीपिका, प्रकाशिका,
व्याख्या, रत्नावली, स्फूतिं, बृाति, प्रदीप,
व्याण्ष्यान and the like, bu t only .. ome
of them the * Pradipa * of कैयटो-
पाथ्याय, is found complete. The
learned commentary by Bhartपृ-
hari, written a few centuries before
the Pradipa, is available only in a
fragment and that.too, in a, manu-
script form copied down from the
original one from time to time by
the scribes very carelessly. Two
othcr commentaries which are
cOmparatively modern, Written by
Nārāyar?aśesa and Nilakaऐtha are
`available but they are also incom-
plete and in a, manuscript form.
Possibly Kaiyatabtaatta's Pradipa
threw into the background the
comraentaries of his predecessors
and mO grammarian after Kaiyata
dared write a commentary supe-
rior tO Kaiya¢a's Pradīpa or, if he



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-298.png}}}}}}

महाभाष्यदीपिका
began, he had to abandOn his work
in the middle. The commentary of
Kaiyata is such a Scholarly one
and so written tO the point, that
later commentatorS have almOst
identified the original Bhā$ya with
the commentary Pradipa and
many a time expressed the twO
words Bhasya and Kaiya!:a in the
same breath as भाष्यकैयटयोः ( एतदुतम्
or रुपष्टमेतत् ).
महाभाष्यदीपिका a very learned old
commentary on the Mahabhāsya
of Pataग्रेjali written by the reput-
ed grammarian Bharthari Or
|Hari in the seventh century A. D.
The commentary has got only
one imanuscript preserved in Ger-
many available at present, of
which photostat copies or Ordi-
mary copies are foumd here and
there. The firSt page of the
manuscript is missing and it is
imcomplete alsO, the commentary
not going beyOnd the first seven
£Ahnikas. For details see page
383 Vol. WII Vyākarana Maha-
bhāsya PD. E. Society*s edition.
महाभाष्यप्रदीप a very scholarly com-
|mentary on Patafijali's Mahābhā-
$ya written by Kaiyatabhatta in
the eleventh century, The com-
|mentary haS SO micely explained
ewery difficult and obscure poirat
in the Mahābhā$ya, and has sO
thoroughly explained each sen-
tence that the remark of later
grammarians that the torch of
the Mahābhāgya has been kept
burning by the Pradfpa appears
quite apt and justified. Kaiyata?s
commentary has throWn much
additional light on the original
argumentS and Statements in the
Mahābhā$ya. There is a learned
commentary on the Pradipa
written by NāgeŚabhatta which
282
महाभाष्यव्यारव्या
is natmed *vivarat]ोa' by the author
bu ई which is well known by the
name * UddyOta' among students
and teacherS of Wyakaraf]a. For
details see pp. 389, 390 Vol VII,
Patafंjala Mahābhā$ya, D. E. So-
ciety's Edition.
महाभाष्यप्रदीपटीका name given to each
Of the variouS cOmmentaries on the
Pradipa of Kaiyaईa written by gra-
mmarians, out of which the com-
mentaries of चिन्तामणि, रामचन्द्रसरस्वती,
नारायण, नित्यानन्दपर्वतीय and one or
tWO more are awailable in a mah-
uscript form and those too quite
incomplete.
महाभाष्यप्रदीपप्रकाश called also कैयटप्र-
काश, name Of the commentary on
the Pradipa of Kaiyaga by Nilan-
kanthamakhi a versatile writer
of the 17th century.
महाभाष्यप्रदीपविवरण (!) original name
of the learned commentary on
the *Pradipa? of Kaiyata written
by NāgeŚabha¢ta, a stalwart and
epOch-making grammarian of the
|48th century. The commentary
iS known pOpularly by the name
*Uddyota' Or Pradipoddyota; (2)
mame of the commentary on
Kaiyafa's Pradipa by Nityānanda
Parwatiya. The commentary is
alSO known by the name दीपप्रभा.
महाभाष्यलघुāक्ति 1,ame given to the
short gloSS on the Mahābhagya
written by the famous easterm
grammar-Scholar Maitreya-Rak-
$ita of the twelfth century.
महाभाष्यव्याख्या name given to each of
the explanatory glosses on the
Mahābhā$ya written by gram-
marians prominent of whom were
Puru$ottamadeva, Nārāyana Sesa,
Vignu, Nilakat!gha and otherS
wh७se fragmentary works ¢ट्रxist in
a manuscript form.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-299.png}}}}}}

महृामिश्र 283
मात्र
महामिश्र name of a gran:marian whO
wrote a commentary on jinen-
drabuddhi's Nyāsa. The com-
mentary is known by the name
Vyākarat]aprakāśa.
महाविभाषा a rule laying down an
option for several rules in a topic
by being present in every rule; cf.
महाविभाषया वाक्यमपि. विभाषा (P.II.1.1 l )
and समर्थानां प्रथमाद्वा (P. TV.1.82) are
some of the ruleS of this kind.
महासंज्ञा a long term, as contrasted
with the very short terms टि, घु,
भ, इत् and others introduced
by Pānini in his grammar for
the sake of brev ity. These long
terms such as सर्वनाम, अब्यय,
परस्मैपद, अात्मनेपद, and many other$
Were widely in uSe at the ti;me of
|Pā]ini and hence he could not
but pick them up in his grammar
in spite ofhis strenuous attempts at
brevity. The commentators, how-
ever, find out a motive for his
doing this viz. that appropriate
words only could be understood
by thOse terms and not others; cf.
महासंज्ञाकरणेन तदनुगुणान्न॒ामेव अत्र संनिवशात् ।
S. K. on सवीँदीाने सवैनामानि P. I.1.27.
मद्दैिङ् personal ending of the Ātmane-
pada first person (उत्तम्पुरुष ) plural;
cf. तिप्तस्झि ... वहिमहिङ् P. III.4.78.
महिष्यादि a cla3S of words headed by
the word महिषी to which the tad.
affix अ (अण्) is added in the sense
9f *proper for* ( धम्यम्); e.g. माहिषम्
पौरोहितम्, हौत्रम्; cf. Kāś.on P.IV.4.
48.
महीधर a grammarian of the sixteenth
century who, besidऽ`s tmany small
treatises on other Subjects, wrote
a commentary on the Sārasvata-
Prakriyā Wyākarana..
न्दिन्द् a Jain Grammariata who
has written a work on the kāraka
topic of grammar, named षट्कारक.
माक्षव्य name of an ancient writer of
|Pratiśākhya works mentioned in
the Rk Prष्āti5ākhya; Cf. R. Pr. I.2.
माचाकीय an ancient writer of a
in the Taittirīya PrātiŚākhya as
one, holding the view that य and
ब्रुघ् preceded by अ and followed
by " उ and ओो respectively. are
dropped provided they stand , at
the beginning of a Pada ( word )•
माचाकीय, who belonged to the
Yajurveda school, is Said tO have
held this view which is generally
held by the followers of the
|Rgveda;' cf. उकारौकारपरौ ळुप्येते माचा-
कॉयस्य (T. Pr. X.29) on which the
cormmentator adds वहुद्वृच्वानामयं पक्षः.
^*、
माणिष्क्यदेव a jain writer who has
written a gloss on the Uriādistitras
consisting of ten chapterS popu-
|larly called उणादिस्सूत्रदशपादी.
*\
माण्डूकेय name of an ancient writer
of a Pratiśāhhya work referred to
in the Rk Prātiśakhya, cf. R.Pr.I.2.
मातृकावर्ण letters of the alphabet.
See अक्षरसमाम्र्त्राय.
मात्रच् a tad. affix in the $ense .9f
measure applied optionally with
द्वयस and दन to a nOun; e.g. ऊरुमात्रम्
प्रस्थमात्रम् ; cf. प्रमाणे द्वयसज्दघ्नञ्मात्रचः P.
V.2.37 and Kāśikā thaereora which
remarks thai द्वयस and दर्ध्न are
applied in the sense Of height,
while मात्र is applied in the sense of
any measure; cf. प्रथमश्च द्वितीयश्च
ऊध्र्वमाने मतौ मम Kāś. on P. V.2. 37.
मात्रा (1) measure, quantity ; cf. भवति
हि तत्र या च यावती च अथैमात्रा M. Bh.
on P.I.2.45 and II.1•l ; (2) mora,
prosOdial unit of one instarct i.e•
the length of time required to
pronouncg a short vowel; cf. भ्रुयस्मँी
मेात्रा इवर्णेवर्णयेो:, अल्पीयसी अवर्णस्य,M.Bh.
on I.1.48 Vārt. 4; cf. मात्रा हृस्व॒स्तावद-
|वग्रहान्तरं, द्वे दीर्घः,तिस्रः प्र्ञ्छुत उच्यते स्वरः



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-300.png}}}}}}

माधव 284
मेित्
R. Pr.I.16; cf. also R, Pr. I.34, T. | माद्देन्द्र name of a very ancient, pre-
Pr.I.37, V.Pr.I.59, R.T.28:also cf.
अर्धमात्रार्लाघवेन पुत्रोत्स॒वं म॒य॒न्ते,वैयाकरण!:
|Par. Sek. Pari. 132. The inStant iS
taken to be equal to the throbb-
ing of the eye, or a flash of lightr1-
ing, or a note of a wood-cock.
माधव the well-known epoch-making
scholar of the 14th century whO
has written a number of treatiseS
in various $astras. His धातुवृत्ति is
Pārāinian grammar ascribed to इन्द्र
of which sOme references only are
a'yailable. The grammar work is
alsO referred tO aS ऐष्न्द्र; cf. यान्युज्जहार
महेन्द्राद् व्यासो व्याकरणार्णवात् । पदरत्नानि किं
तानेि सन्ति पाणिनिगेाष्पदे Devabodha's
com. on the Mahābhārata. For
details see p. 124-27 Vol. WII
Mahābhàं&ya, D. E. Society's
|Editiom.
' a well-known work in grammar. माहेशासूत्र the fourteen stitras अइउण्,
माधवीया-धातुवृच्ति a learned gloSS on
the धातुपाठ of Pāmini by माधव. See
माधव.
* माधुरीवृाते a gloss not composed by,
but simply explained by an inha-
'bitant of Mathura or Madhurā.
Such a gloss is referred to in the
Mahābhāईya on P.IV.3.101 Vārt.3,
' which pOSSibly might be referring
to an existing gloSS on the Stitras of
ऋलक् etc. which are believed to
hawe been COmpOSed by Siwa and
taught to Pātaini, by means of the
sounds of th6 drum beaten at the
end of the dance ; cf. नृच्तावसाने नट-
राजराजेा ननाद ढकां नवपञ्चवारम् । उद्धर्तुकामः
सनकादिसिद्धानेतद्विमशै शिवसूत्रजालम् Nandi-
keśwara-kārikā 1. For details see
Vol. ViI Vyākarana Mahābhagya,
|D. E. Society's edition.
Pānini, which was being explain- | माहेश्वर६सूत्र the Stitras,the authorship
ed at Mathurā, at the time of
• Patafंjali. The term मधुरा was used
. for मथुरा in ancient times and the
word माथुरी बृत्ति is also used for
. माधुरीं वृत्ति.
मान्न krt affix अान of th< present parti-
of which iS attributed to Siva; the
stitras अइउण् etc. giving the alpha-
bet. See माहशसूत्र.
मि ( मिप् ) pcrsonal ending of the
first person ( उच्तमपुरुष ) singular;
cf. तिप्तस्ड्झि० P.III.4.78.
ciple with the augrnent म् prefixed मित् (1) characterized by the mute
· tO it by अान मुक् P.VII.2.82; e. g.
यूज्म्नः, एधमान:, यचिमानः: etc.
मार्कण्डेय an old grammariau, who
Wrote a grammar of Prāk!ta
languages which is known by the
name प्राकृतसर्वस्व.
मार्दव SOftneSS of the woice characteriz-
ing the prOnunciation of a grave
vowel; cf. मार्दवं स्वरस्य मृदुता स्निग्धता;
al$O cf. अन्ववसर्गो मार्दवमुरुता खस्येति
• नीचैःकरााण शब्दस्य M.Bh. on P.I.2.29,
30; cf. also, T. Pr. XXII.10.
माला a variety of the utterance of
* the Veda-Sarihhita C वेदपाठ); a kind
' , of Krama-Pātha, .one of the eight
'*' artificial recitations.
letter म्; augments SO charक्ष्3acterized
Such as नुम्, अम् and the like, are
inserted afीer the last wowel of a
word to which they are to be
added; cf. मिदचेोन्त्यात् परः P. I. 1.47;
(2) a technical terrm applied to the
fifty-five roots which are headed
by the root घट् and which belong
to the first corjugation, to the
|rootS ज्वछ् etc., aS also to the roots
जन्, जू, क्रस्, रञ्ज्त् and roots ending
in अम्. These roots are not really
characterized by the mute letter
स्म्, but they are giwen the
designation मित्. The use of • the
designation मित् is (a) the shortening



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-301.png}}}}}}

मितवृत्यथैसैग्रह
of the penultimate vowel which :
has been lengtherned by V rddhi ;
before the causal sign मिि, and (b) ;
the optional lengthening of the !
penultimate vowel before the affix i
चिण् and णमुछ्. For a complete list !
of *mit? roots see Dhātupāth a•
मितवृत्त्यथैसैग्रह name of a grarnrnatical →
work on the Stitras of Pā::ंini by
Udayama.
मिताक्षरा name of a commentary on
the Sarasvatasāra, written by Hari-
deva.
मिन् tad. affix in the sense of posses-
sion added to the word गो; e.g.
गोमिन् , cf. ज्योत्स्रातमिख्त्रा ...गोमिन्मलिन-
मलोमसाः P.V.2.i! 14.
मिप्	personal ending मि of the firSt
person ( उत्तमपुरुष ) sing. Parasmai•
pada; cf. तिप्तस्झि...महिङ् P. III.4.78.
मिश्र roots taking personal endingS of
both the Fadas; Ubhayapadin
roots; this term मिश्र is given in
Bopadewa?s grammar.
मेिश्री a popular name given to the
commenitary written ' by भैरवमेिश्र
on the Paribhā5eraduśekhara in
popular use by grammarians.
मीय tad. affix मीय along with म ( मण्य्)
applied to the word मध्य in the
sense of a case-affix ( locative
case-affix) e.g. मध्यमीय; cf. · मप्मीयौ च
प्रत्ययैौ वक्तव्यौ Kaś. on P. IV.3.60.
मुञ्क् augment म् prefixed to the affix
अान (i.e. शानच् , चानश् , and शानन् )
of the pres. part. Atmanepada;
e. g- एधमानः, वर्धमानेः पवम्ानः, यजमानः,
etc.; cf. अाने मुक् P. VII. 2. 82. See
उम.
aperture of the mouth; the main
place of the utterance of a letter.
मुखनासिकावचन definition of अनुनासिक,
a letter which is pronounced
through both-~-the mouth and the | *
285
मुख्यविशेष्य
letter which is uttered only thr-
Ough the nOse ; e.g. ङ्, अनू , ण्, न् , म्
and the nasalized vowels and
|naSalized श्थ् , वृञ् and छ्; cf. मुखनासि-
श्कावचनेीऽनुनासिकः Pan. I. 1.8; cf. also
अनुस्वारोत्तमा अनुन्नाासिकाः (T. Pr. II.30),
Where the fifth letters and the anu-
svāra. are called anunāsika. Accor-
ding tO Bhattoji, however, anu-
Swāra cannot be anunasika as it is
prOnOunced thrOugh the nOSe
alone, and not through both-the
mOuth and the nose. As the anu-
Svara is pronounced something
like a nasalized गु according to the
Taittiriyas it is called a consonant
in thg Taittiriya PrātiŚakhya; cf. "
अनुस्वारोप्युत्तमवध्र्द्यञ्जनमेव अस्मच्छाखायाम् ।
अर्धगकाररूपत्वात् | Com. on T. Pr. LI.
30. →
मुखसुखार्थ a mute letter added to an
affix Or a substitute Çr the like,
which does not really form a
part of the affix etc., but which
$imply facilitates the utterance
of it; cf. अथ मुखसुखार्थस्तकारः दकारोपि t
M. Bh. on I.l.1, WI.1.87; cf. also
|अादिति तकारेो मुखसुखार्थः, न त्वयं तपरः
Kā$. on P. III.2.171.
मुख्य main, . principal, primary
substantive as contrasted with a
qualifyjng Substantivg; cf.र्गेौणमुख्ययो-
र्मुख्ये कार्यसंप्रत्ययः Par. Sek. Pari. 15.
the principal word in a
sentence which comes last in
the technical expression of the
import or शाब्दबोध. " It is described
as primary and not Subordinated
to any other thing ( अन्याविशेषणीभून).
This मुख्यविशेष्य is, in a way,the cru-
cial point in the various theories
of import; e.g. according to the
grammarians the werbal activity is
the principal word while,according
to.:the ·	Mimarihsakas the bhāvāंàā
nose-as contrasted with नासिक्य a J* '
is the principal wordः. and श्ac&ord*



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-302.png}}}}}}

मुग्धबोध
ing to the Naiyāyikas it is the
stybject that is the principal wOrd•
मुग्धबोध lit. ircstructions to the ignO-
rant; a treatise on grammar simi-
|lar to the Astādhyāyī of Panini but
much shorter, written by Bopa-
deva or Vopadeva an inhabitant
of the greater Mahāra$tra in the
Vardhā district, in the thirteenth
century. After the fall of the
Hindu rulers in Bengal, treatiseS
like भाषावृत्ति and otherS written by
eastern grommarians fell into the
back-ground and their place was
taken up by easier treatises written
by Bopadeva and otherS. Many
commentaries were written upon
the Mugdhabodha, of which the
Vidyānivāsa is much known tO
gramtaarians•
→\ a commentary work On
Mugdhabodha;the name is given tO |!
commentaries written by ' Rāma-'
tarkavāgśa (called मुग्धबोधपरिशिष्टं_X,
by Rādhāvallabha (called सुबोधिनी), .
by Gangādhara (called सेतुसैग्रह ),
by Durgādasa, by Dayārāma and
by Rāmānanda.
the substitution of मु for the
syllable beginning wīth द् in certain
cases; cf. अदसोसेदॉंदु दो मः`P. VIII.2.
80.
मुद् a technical term for thgsibilants
श्शुं , ष्श् and सू given in the Vājasane-
yi-Prātiśākhya; cf. मुच्च V. Pr. I.52,
cf. also W. Pr. III.9, III.13,IV.
122.
मुनित्रय the popular and honorific
. term for the three prominent
grammarians of the Pāninian sys-
tem of grammar wiz. पााणेिनि, कात्यायन
and पतञ्जलेि who were the pioneers
of 'hat system; cf. मुनित्रयं नमस्कृत्य
Siddhānta-Kaumudi beginning.
the augment म् inserted imme-
286
मृदु
word for which it is prescribed; cf.
अरुर्द्विषदजन्तस्य मुम् P.VI.3.67; cf. also
|P.III.2.26, V. 4.7 and VI.3.69-72.
मूर्धन् the top of the orifice of the
mouth; the place of utterance
( स्थान ) of the letters ऋ, ऋ, दृट्, छ्, ड्
ढ्द् and ए॒ण्, र् and ष्ञ्ज्ञ्; cf. ऋटुरषाणां
मूर्धा S. K. on P. I. 1.9; cf. also
षटैौ मूर्धनिV.Pr.I.67,R.T.6,R.Pr.I.19,
and T.Pr. II.37 where र् appears
excluded.
मूधैन्य letters pronounced at the place
called मूर्धन् ; cerebral or lingual
letters,the letterS ऋ, ऋ;ट् ,ट्छ् ,ड् ,डू, ण्.
मूल (1) the root of the teeth given as
the place of origin for the letter र्
in the Rk Tantra ; cf. रेफस्तु दन्त्येो
दन्तमूले वा. R. T. 8; (2) the main
inStrutment of the utterance of
letters known as मूलकरण or अनुप्रदान.
मूलप्रकृति the original base of the
word used in lamguage;the root and
, the pratipadika; the word परमप्रकृति ,
is also used in the same sense.
मृत् the crude base of a declinable
word; the pratipadika; the term is
found used in the Jainendra Vya-
|karana; cf. .jain. Vyāk. I..1.5.
म्टडु (1) Soft in utterance; the term is
used in the Vājasaneyi PrātiŚākhya
for the क्षैप्र, प्रश्लिष्ट, तैरोव्यञ्जन, and
पादबृच्त varieties of the circumflex
accent (स्वरित) out ofwhich the पादवृत्त
is the Softest ( मृदुतम ) and conse-
quently alwayS called मृदु, while the
others are called मृदु only with
respect to the preceding one in
the order given above; viz.अभिीनहत,
शैक्षप्र etc.cf.सर्वतीक्ष्णोभिनिहत:प्राश्ठष्टस्तदनन्तरम्।
ततेो मृदुतरौ स्वरैरा जात्यक्षेप्रावुभौ स्मृतौ ।
ततेो मृदुतरः स्वारस्तैरोव्यञ्जन उच्यते | पादवृत्तेो
मृदुतमस्त्वेतत्स्वारबलाबलम् Uvvata onV.Pr.
|I.b25; (2) sOft, as opposed to hard;
the term is used in connection With
the first,third and fifth consonant$
·? diately after the final vowel of the
of the five class¢s.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-303.png}}}}}}

、→ डेोने
、
287 यं
、→
र्मेक्डेोनेल् [MACDONELL,ARTHUR
ANTHONY ] a deep scholar of
Vedic Gram. and Literatuare who
has written an exhaustive Wedic
Grammar; in treatment, at places
|he differs from Parini and follows
a different method,but the rmanner
of thinking and argument is on
original lines.
मेघविजय a Jain grammarian of
the sewenteenth century who haS
written a grammar Work, similar
to the Siddhānta Kaumudi, on the
SabdānuŚāsana of Hemacandra.
The grammar work is called
、 →、
हैमकौमुदी, or चन्द्रप्रभा also-
मैत्रायणीय प्रातिशाख्य a Prātiśākhya or i
|Pār$ada work giving the peculiari- !
ties of Sandhi, accent ' and the |
like, in changing the Maitrāyanya-
Sarihhitāpātha into the Padapātha.
मैत्रेयरक्षित a recognised Scholar of
Panini$ grammar whO belonged
to the Eastern part of India and
flourished in the beginning of the
twelfth century. AS it appearS
from the name Maitreya Raksita
he appears to.have been a Buddhist
grammarian. Subsequent writers
in their works refer to him by the
name Raksita alone, as alsO by the
name Maitreya, but very rarely
by the name Maitreya Rak$ंita..
|He wrote many WorkS on gram-
mar of which the *tantrapradipa?
a learned cOmmentary On Jine-
ndrabuddhi's Nyāsa on Kāśikā was
a reputed one, which, althOugh
available in a fragmentary manu-
script form today, has been
profusely quoted by prominent
grammarians after him.
मोक्षेश्वर a grammarian of the four-
teenth century Who haS Written a
commentary on the Kātantra Vपृtti
of Dnrgasifhha. He has Written
a cOmmentary on the Akhyātav!rtti
of the Katantra School as alSO a
short treatise dealing with the krt
affixes called Krdv[tti.
म्लेच्छ (I) a word although correct,
yet looked upon as incorrect Owing
tO its faulty utterance; (2) a
persOn like the tuncultured people,
who is not able to pronounce
words correctly; cf. मेट्रेठ्च्छ्रा मा भूमेत्यघ्येयं
व्याकरणम् M. Bh. I. 1, Ahnika l.
य
श्य् (1) a consOnant of the palatal
claSS, called semivowel or अन्तः:स्थ
( spelt as अन्तस्थ also ), possessed of
the properties संवृतत्व, नाद, घेोष and
अनुनासेिकत्व in addition; (2) a substi-
tute for म् when that म् is followed
by ङ्घ्द् whlch is followed by य्. e. g.
किर्युह्यः; cf. यवलपरे यवला वा. P. "VIII.
3. 26 Vart.l ; (3) युय् looked upon as
possesSed of a very little effort in
production i. e. which appears as
almost dropped but not comple-•
tely dropped when its elision is
prescribed at the end of a word.
e- g- भोय् अच्युत; cf. व्येालैघुप्रयत्नतर:
|शाकट[यनस्य P. VIII. 3.18.
य (1) the consonant य् with अ added
to it merely for the sake of facility
in pronunciation; यकार is also
used in the same sense; e. g. लिटि
वयेो यः; P.VI.1.38 cf. T.Pr.T; 17,21;
(2) k[t affix (यत्) prescribed as कृत्य
Qr pQtential passive participle; e.g.
चेचम्, गेयम्. शप्यम् , शक्यम्, गद्यम्, अजर्यम्
पण्यम् etc.; cf. अचेा यत्...अजयै संगतम् P.
III. 1.97-105; (3) krt. afiix
which is also an affix called krtya;
e• g- नह्मेद्यम् , भाव्यम् , घात्यम्, स्तुत्यम्,
कल्प्यम् , खेयम् , भूत्य:, भिद्यः, पुष्यः,
also कार्यम् ; cf. P. 1II. 1.106-123;
{4) kपृt affix ण्यत् ( which is also
कृत्य ), e. g. कार्यम् , हार्यम् , वाक्यम् ,
लाव्यम् , कुण्डपाय्यम्. etc.; cf. P. ITI.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-304.png}}}}}}

288
यजादि'
1.124-132; (5) {ad. affix य afiixed
(a) in the sense of collectiQn 1O
पाश, वात etc..., as also to खञ्ल, गेी afd
रथ, e. g. पाश्या, रथ्या etc•* cf, |P. iV.
2. 49, 50: (b) in the चातुरांथक sensCS
to बल, कुल, तुल etc. e. g. बल्यः,कुंड्थुम्*
cf, P: ाँv.2, 80, (c) as a , Sai$ंīka
tad. affix to ग्राम ' श्along with the
· affix खञ्म् e. g. ग्राम्यः, ग्रामीणः;. cf. P:
[V. 2.94; (d) in the sense of * gOOd
therein ? ( तत्र साधुः ) and other
4tated senses afiixed tO सभा: संीदर,
पूर्व, and सेोम; e. g. सभ्यः, पूर्युः; .étg.
ef. P. IV. 4.105, 109, 133, 137,
' 138; (e) in the sense Of * deserving
it * to दण्ड and other WOrds, e• g•
दण्ङय, अध्र्य, मेध्य, मेध्य, etC.; cf. P. V•
1.66; ( f ) in the sense of quality
· or action to सखि e. g. सख्यम् ; cf. P.
V. :.126; (6) tad. affix यत् applied
to (a) राजन् श्चशुर, कुल, मनु in the
sense of ofispring, (b) शूल, उखा, वायु,
क्रतु · and others, under	certain
conditions; cf. P. IV. 2.17, 31,
32, 101, (c) to अर्ध, परार्घ, WOrds in
the class headed by दिश्!, छन्दस् and
others in specific senses; cf. P. IV.
3-46, 54 etc. and (d) in Specific
senses to specific words mentioned
here and there in a nutinber of
st tras from TV.4. 75 to V.4.25; (e)
to शाखा, मुख, जघन and others in the
sense of इव (similar to) e.-g. शाख्यः,
मुख्यः, etc.; cf. P. V. 3. 103; (7)
case-ending य substituted for ङे of
the datiwe Sing; e. g. रामाय ef.
P. VII. 3.102: (8) verb-afiix यञ्क्
applied to the nouns कण्डू and
" others to make them ( denomina-
tive ) roots; e. g. कण्डूय,मन्तूय etc. cf.
कण्डूवादिभ्यो यक् P. III. 1.27; (9) |'
Vikarana य ( यक् ) applied to any
rOot before the Sarvadhātuka, per-
sonal endings to form the base
for the passive voice as also the
base for the * Karmakartari * voice
e. g• क्रियते, भूयते, cf. सार्वधातुके यक् P. |
यङ्लुगान्त a secondary root formed by
III. 1.67; (10) Unādi afiix य ( यक् )
applied to the root हन् to form the
Vedic word अव्न्य; cf. अव्न्यादयश्च;
(! l ) augment य ( यक् ) added to
the affix क्त्वा in Vedic ILiterature;
e. g. दत्वायः cf. क्त्बो यक् िP. VII.1.47;
(12) verb affix यङ् added to a root
to form itS Intensive base ( which
Sornetimes is dropped ) and the
root is doubled. e. g. चेक्रीयते,च्चर्करीति;.
cf. P. III. 1.22,24; (13) short term
( प्रत्याहार ) SuppOSed tO be beginn-
ing with य in the affix यङ् in the
stātra धातेरेकाच्चेो .•. यङ् III. l.22, and
ending with ङ् in the sutra लिङ्कया-
शिष्यङ् III. 1.86, with a view to in-
clude the various verb affixes and
cOnjugational Signs.
यक् the affix य; s6e य (8), (9), (10)
and (11) above.
यक्षवर्मन् author of the commentary
called चिन्तामणि on the Sabdānui-
$āSana OfSakatāyama.
यड् see य (12) and (13) above.
यङन्त a secondary root formed by
adding the affix यङ् in the sense of
repetitiOn and intensity, to roots
|having Olhe Syllable and beginn-
ing with a consonant; cf. धातेोरेकाचेा
हलादः क्रियासमाभहारे यङ् P. III. 1.22,
23,24. See य (12) above.
adding the affix यड् tO roots speci-
fied in P. III. 1.22,23,24, which
affix is sometimes dropped; cf.
यङोचि च; P. II. 4. 74. The yahlu-
ganta rOotS take the parasmaipada
perSonal endings and not the
atmanepada Ones which are appli-
ed to yahanta rOots.
लुगान्तशिरोमाणे a grammar work
dealing with the frequentatiwe
roots written by PanditaSe$akr$ंna.
यजादि roots headed by the root यज्ञ्
which take the sariaprasārataa Sub-
stitute for their semivowel before



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-305.png}}}}}}

यऽ
-\
289
यथालक्षणै
terrninaticyns marked with the
mute letter कू; c.g. इज्यते, इटिः cf.
वचिस्वपियजादीनां किति P.VI.1.15. These
rootS are nine in number, यञ्ञ् , वप् ,
व्नंहूं , वस् and others which are Of
the first conjugation given by
Pā?ini in his Dhātupatha at the end
of the roots of the first conjugation•
यञ्म् (1) short term ( प्रत्याहार ) formed
by the letter य of हयवरट् and the
mute letter ञ्ज of झभञ्म् including
setrai-vow<ls and the third and the
' fourth consonantS excepting घृघ् , ,ढ्द्
and ध् of the five consonant
groups; cf. अतेो दोघेाँ या|ञ्न P. VTI. 3.
l01 ; (2) tad. affीx added (a) in
the sense of गेोत्र (grand-children
and their descendants) to words of
the गर्ग class and some Other words
under specific conditiOns, e.g. गाग्र्यः
वात्स्यः, काप्यः etc., cf. गगीदिभ्यो यञ् and
the following P.IV. 1. 105-108; (b)
in the sense of collection to केदार,
गागिका, केश and अश्च, cf. P.IV.2.40
and the Vārttika,thereon and IV.
2.48; (c) in the Sai$ाँka senses to
the word द्वीप, cf. P.IV.3.10; (d)
tO the word कंसीय e. g. कांस्यम् cf.
|P.IV.3.168, and (e) to the words
अभिजित्, विदभ्न॒त् and others when
they have the tad. affix अण् added
to them · e.g. अाभिजित्य: cf. P. V. 3.
118.
यपू a brief term for letters यु , व॒घ् , र्
and ळु i.e. the semi-vowels; cf. इको
यणाच्द P. VI. 1. 77; cf. also I. 1.45
and VI. 4. 8l.
यण्वत् containing a semi-vowel inside
it; cf. संयोगादरातो धातोर्यण्वतः P. VIII..
2.43.
यत् see य (6).
यत्न (1) effort in the utterance of a
letter; the word which is general-
ly used for such an efiort is प्रयत्न.
This effort is described to be oftwo
|kinds अाभ्यन्तर internal i.e. below the
37
root of the tongue and बाह्य abOve
the root of the tongue i.e. inside
the mouth; cf. यत्नो	द्विधा | अाभ्यन्तरो
बाह्यश्च | S. K. on P. I. i.9; (2) spe-
cific effort, by adding a word tO a
|rule for drawing some inference,
with a wiew to remowing SOme
technical difficulty ; cf. तेन पयो धावती-
त्यादो यत्नान्तरमास्थेयम्Kāś. on P. VIII•
2. 25. The phrase कर्तव्योत्र यत्नः
often occurs in the Mahābhā$ya.•
यत्प्रकरण lit. the topic or the section
of यत्; the section where the tad.
affix यत् is prescribed.This tad. affix
यत् is prescribed in the fifth adhyāya
of Pānimi in a nutmber of rules in
difierent and different senseS ; cf.
यत्प्रकरणे रथाच्च P.V. 1.6 Vārt.1 ; यत्प्रकरणे
व्रह्मवर्चसाच्चंच P.V, 1.39 Vārt. 1.
यथाग्र्टर्हीर्ते as they are actually found
in Vedic recital with some irregu-
larties of euphonic changes,length-
ening of the vowel and the like.
Specitnens of such phrases are
given in R.Pr.II.33 to 39.
यथान्यासं as it is actually put in the
rule or a tt eatise by the author.
The phrase is often used in the
Mahābhā$ya when after a long dis-
cussion, involving further and fur-
ther difficultieS, the author revertS
to the original stand and defends
the writing of the stitra as it stands.
सिध्यत्येवमपाणिनीयं तु भवति or सूत्रं भिद्यत ।
तर्हि यथान्यासमवास्तु is the usual exp-
|ression found in the Mahābhagya;
cf, M.Bh. I.1. Ahnika l, I.1.1, 9,
20, 62, 65 etc.
यथालक्षणं as fortmed according to
rules. The phrase यथालक्षगमप्रयुक्ते is
very often found in the Mahā-
bhāsya as a general guiding re-
mark that noun-forms or word-
forms which are not found in use
in the language of the people or
in literature should be understOod



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-306.png}}}}}}

यय्
as they are derived by Observing
all the rules that are applicable.
यथावत् as it is in the original Safiahi-
tāpāgha without any change Of
gf. नि॒िप॒ातैर्यद्य॒दिहन्तङ्कुविज्ञेचेचण्कृञ्चिद्यत्रयुक्तम्
P. WIII. 1.30; cf. alSo the uSual
expression यद्येोगादनिघात: found in
commentary WOrkS.
accent, etc. when cited in the | यद्वृत्त lit. a word formed from यत्; a
Padapãंtha; the word अव्ययवत् (not
allowing any change or reduction)
is given by Uwvaśa in explanation
of यथावत्; cf. दृश्यते पदं यथावत् R. Pr.
XI.31.
यथाश्रुताथैग्राहिन् one who grasps the
sense as given by the actual word-
ing withoutgoing intO details re: the
*word which contains the pronðun
यत् in it which prewentS sarvānu-
dātta for a verb which follows;
cf. यदस्मिन्वर्तते य॒द्धृत्त॒म् M. Bh. on P.
VIII, !.66; cf. als9. यद्वृत्तेोपपदाच W.
Pr. VI. 14, where Uvvata explains
यद्वृत a$ यदो वृक्तुं युद्वृत्तं सर्वृविँभ॒क्तयंन्तं सर्वप्रत्यया-
न्तं'च गृह्यन्ते | V.'Pr. VI. 14 com.
use or applicश्átion etc.; cf. यथार्श्वेतग्रा- | यम् a short term (प्रत्याहार) for the con-
हिप्रतिपत्त्रपेक्षेॉयं यथोद्देशपक्षः इति कैयटः Par.
Sek. Pari. 2.,
यथासैख्र्य in respective order, the first
for the first, the Second for the
Second, and SO on; when the
sonants which begin with यु ( in
हयवरट् )and end (in अमङणनम्) before
the mute म्र्म् i.e. all SemiwoWel$, and
fifींh consonantS of the five classes;
cf. हलेो यमां यमि लेोपः Pān. VIII.4.64,
futhber of subjects and predicates | यम (1) one of a pair, a twin letter
is the same, they should be conne-
cted in the respective order; cf.
· यथासंख्यमनुदेशः समानाम् P.I.3.10.
、→\
यथोद्देशा ( परिभाषा) a short phrase or
term for the Paribhāgà or guiding
statement यथोद्देशं संज्ञापरिभाषम् : * tech-
nical terms and Paribhā$ās are
to be interpreted at the place
Where they are stated, and not at
fhe place or places of their appli-
cation or utility.?
यदागम ( परिभाषा ) short familiar word-
ing for the dictum or Paribhagā
*यदागमारूतद्गुणीभूतास्तद्ग्रहणेन गृह्यनेत ।' Par.
→
Sek. Pari.• 11.
यद्दच्छाशाब्द lit. a chance-word; Sarh-
.jfià-śabda Or proper noun which is
available in pronunciation be-
fore a nasal letter and similar
to it, when the nasal consonant
is preceded by any One Of the
four consonar.tS Of the five claSSes;
a transitional Sound interwening
between a non-na$al and the
following naSal as a gOunterpart
of the nð,n-nasal; cf. वर्गेष्वाद्यानां चेतुर्णी
पञ्चमे परे मध्ये यमेो नाम पूर्वैसदृशेो वर्णः
प्रातिशाख्ये प्रसिद्धः S.K. on P.WIII. l.1;
(2) name givcn tO the sewen
musical notes, found in , the
singing of Sāman ; cf. मन्द्रमध्यमत्रा-
ख्येषु त्रिषु वाचः, स्थानेषु प्रत्येकं , सत स्वरभेद्रुा
भवन्ति । कुष्टप्रथमद्वितीय॒तृतीयचतुर्थमन्द्रातित्वार्थाः
यमाः । T. Pr. XXIII. 13,14.
given accidentally without any | यमन्वा an obscure term found u$ed
attention to derivation or autho-
|rity; cf. अर्थे , तर्हि यदृच्छाशब्देोऽपरिहार्यः ।
लछ्ठफ़ेिड: लफेिडुः M. Bh.oa Siva Stitra.2.
यद्येोग a connection with the Word
(prOnOun) यत् by its use in the
Same Sentence and context, which
in the Phitः-stitras राजविशेष्त्रस्य यमन्वाचेत्
( अाद्दुद्युदात्तेा भबति ) Phi!-stātra II. 42,
where the word यमन्वा is explained
as वृद्ध by the commentator. For
the meaning Of दृद्ध, See वृद्धियैस्याचा-
मादिस्तद् वृद्धम् P. 1.1.73.
prevent$ the anudātta ( grave ) यय् short term C प्रत्याहार ) for the cor1-
accent for the verb in thesentence;
३onants beginning with य् ( in



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-307.png}}}}}}

、
291
याजकादि
हयवरट् ) and er1ding before the ;
e. afl !
mute letter य॒ ( in कपय् ) i.
conSOnantS excep{ शु, ञ् , सु, and हूँ;
cf. अनुस्वारस्य यश्यि " परसवणैः P.VIII +.
58 by which an at:usvāra is
changed into a cognate letter of
the following which is a letter
included in यय॒.
यर् a short term ( प्रत्याहार ) for any
cOnsonant except ह् ,
Standing at the end of a word is
optionally changed to the nasal
cOraSOnant of its class if followed
by a nasal letter; cf. यरोनुनासिकेनु-
नासिकेा वा P. VIII.4.45; and (2) is
doubled if preceded by ग्र् or ह् as
alsO if preceded by a vowel but
n9t followed by a vowel; e.g.
अर्कः, दद्धत्र्यत्र; cf. अच्वेी रहाभ्यां द्वे; अनञ्चि
च P. VIII.4.{6,47.
यछ् tad. affix य in the sense of posse-
Ssion found in Vedic Literature
added optionally with the affix ख
( ईन )to the words वेश्शेोभगा and यशेोभग;
e..g	वेशेाभभ॒म्यः वैशेाभगीनः यशेोभग्यः,
यशेोभरीानः; cf. P.IV.4.13]. H
यलोप dropping of the consonant युय्
which prevents the validity of a
changed letter ( स्थानिवद्भाव ) ; cf. न
पदान्तद्विर्वचनवरेयलोप......विधिषु P.I.1.58.
यवमध्या lit. having the centre bulging
out like the Yava grain; name
given to a wariety of the Gāyatri
which haS 7 letters in the first amd
thfird (last) feet and 10 letters in
the second i.e. the middle foot;
the name is also given to a Mahā -
bFhati having the first
last feet consisting of 8 letters and
the middle one consisting of 12
syllables; cf. R.Pr.XVI.l8 and 48.
यवर्ग the class of the consonants
|headed by युय् i.e. the seml-vowels
य, व्, र and छ्.
25.*
→
यवादि a class of words headed by
the word यव, the taddhita 'afiix मत्
which, (1) !
after which does not get the con-
sonant म् changed intO व् althOugh
the afॉix मत् be added to a word
ending in म् or अ, or having म् Or
अ as the penultimate letter; e. g.
यवमान् , ऊर्मिमान् , भूमिमान् etc•;, cf.
|Kā$. on P.VIII.2.9. This यवादिगण
is looked upon as अाकृतिगण-
यशा:कवि a grammarian, the author
of a treatise named BhāśānuŚāsana.
यशा:सागर a Jain grammarian, the
author of a work named Samāsa-
$obhā.
यशोवर्मदेव the same as वक्षत्रर्मन् the
author of * चिन्तृामणि ' a commen-
tary on the Sabdānuśāsana of
Sākatāyana.
यस् tad. afiix य with mute स॒त् to indi-
cate the applica.tion of the term
पद to the preceding base as a con-
sequence of which the final म् of
the words कम् and शम्, after which
यस् is prescribed, gets changed
intO anusvāra: eः. g• केयु:, शैयुः; cf.
B.V.2.138.
यस्कादि words headed by the word
यत्क, the afiixes in the sense of *a
descendant' placed after which
are elided and the words are to
be used in the plural number in
the masculine gender; e. g. यस्का:;
cf. ]Kā$. on P. ]II.4.63.
य substitute for a case afiix in Vedic
Literature; e•g. उरुया, धृष्णुया for
उरुणा, धृष्णुना, cf. सुपां सुलुक्o P.VII.
1.39.
| याच् substitute for a case affix found
and the |
in Vedic ILiterature; e. g. साधुयां for
साघु; cf. सुपां सुळुक् . • ...याञ्जालः P. VII.
1. 39.
याजकादि a class of words headed by
the words याजक, पूजक, परिचारक and
others with which a word in the
genitive case iS cOmpounded,in spite
of the prohibition of compounds
with such words, laid down by the



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-308.png}}}}}}

याट्
292
युक्तवद्भाव
rule कतैरि च P. II. 2.16; e.g. श्राह्मण-
याजकः. ब्राह्मणपूजकः etc.:; cf. Kā$. on P.
|II.2.9. These words, याजक and
others standing as the secorad
members of compounds haYe their
last vowel accented acute;cf.P.VI•
2.151.
याद् augment या prefixed to the .case-
affixes marked with the mute letter
ङ् (i.e. the dat. sing. the abl, $ing,
the gen. sing. and the loc• sing.)
after a feminine base ending in अा;
e. g. रमायै, रमाया:, रमायाम्; cf. याड[पः
|]P.VII.3.113-
यावादि a class of words headed by
the word याव to which the taddhita
affix क ( कन् ) is added without
any specific sense aSSigned tO it ;
e.g. यावक्र: मणिक: etc. ; cf. Kaś. on
|P.. V.4.29.
यासुद् augment यास् prefixed to , the
parasmaipada case-ending$ of लिड्
(the potential and the benedictive)
which iS accented acute; e.g.. कुर्यात्,
क्रियात्.
यास्क a reputed ancient Nirukta-
kāra or etymologist, of the 6th
century B.C. Or ewen a feW cen-
turies before that, whose work, the
Nirukta, js looked upon as the
oldest authoritative treatise regard-
ing derivation of Vedic wOrds.
Yāska was preceded by a number
of etymologists Whom he has men-
tioned in hiS WOrk and whose works
he haS utilised. Yāska's Nirukta
threw into the back-ground the
older treatises on etymology, all of
, which diSappeared gradually in
the courSe of time.
यिद् augment यू prefixed to the tad.
affix इष्ठ When it is applied to the
word बहु,in which case बहु is.chang-
ed into भू ; e.g. भूयिष्ट; cf बहेोर्लोपो भू च
*	बहोः ; इष्ठस्य यिट् च; P. VI. 4.158,159.
'यु general wording including the
affixes युच्, युट्, टथुत्, टयुछ् and एयुट् of
which only यु remains as the affix,
which iS changed into अन by the
rule युवोरनाकौ P.VII.1.1.
युक् augment य् (1) added to a verb-
base or a root ending in अा before
the affix चिण् and krt affixes marked
with mute ञ्म् Or णुश्; e.g. अदयि, दायकः;'
cf. अातो युक् चिण्कृतोः, P.VII.3.33; (2)
added to the roQtS शा, ( शो ),
छा ( छेो ), सा ( सेा ), ह्वा ( ह्रे ), व्या ( ळेय ),
|वा ( वै ) and पा ( पा and पै ) before
the causal affix ग्णेिच्;ि e. g. निशाययतेि
पाययति etc. cf. शाच्छासाह्वाव्यावेपां युक्
P. VII.3.37; (3) added in Vedic
Literature to tbe frequentative
base of the root मृज्ञ् of which मर्मृज्य
is the form of perf. !st and 3rd
pers. sing. instead of ममार्ज; cf.
दाधर्ति...मर्मुज्यागनीगन्तीति च P.VII.4.65.
युक्त (1) , proper; appropriate, justi-
fied; the word iS very frequently
used in the Mahābhāsya and olher
gramrnar works; (2) the sense of
the original base Which is connect-
ed with the semSe of the affix; cf.
अथवा युक्तः प्रकृत्यथैः प्रत्ययार्थेन संबद्धः,
Kāś. on P. I. 2.51 ; (3) connected
with; cf. उकारश्चीितकरोगेन युक्तः R. Pr.
|I. 29; तथायुक्तं चानीप्सितम् P. I. 4.50.
युक्तवत् , the sense of the original
base,the affix after which is dropp-
ed by means of the term लुम् aS
contrasted with the terms लोप and
ळुक् which are used in the 8ame
Sense; cf. ळुतवदिति निष्ठाप्रत्ययेन क्तवतुना
प्रकृत्यर्थ उच्यते । स हि प्रत्ययार्थमात्मना युनक्ति '
|Kāś. on P. I. 3.51.
|lit. behaviour like the
original base. The term is uSed
in the sense of posseSSion of, or
getting, the same gender and
number as was pOSseSsed by the
base to which the tad. affix Was
added and subsequently dropped
by a rule of Pānini in which the
word ळुम् is put in the sense of



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-309.png}}}}}}

युक्तारोह्यादि 293
युच्
giropping; e. g. कुरयः देशः Or ॐज्ञैः
देशः in the sense of कुल्ट्ष्णां or ॐईंॉंनाँ
निवासो जनपद: cf. जनपद लुटुप् P. IV.3.81
and लुपि युक्तवद् व्याक्तिवचने P.I.2.5!;cf.
alsO M.Bh. on P. I. 2.51 and 52•
युक्तारोह्यादि a class of compound
words headed by the word युक्तारोही
which have their initial vOwel
accented acute in spite of the ge-
neral dictum that ' a compound
has the capacity Of cOnvey ing the
sense of both पट and घट. PoSSibly
this theory is advocated by grarn-
rnariar1s, Cn the analogy of words
|like पितर्र or मातरौ for मात!पितरौ, द्यावा
for द्यावापृथित्री and sO on ; cf. सिद्धं तु
युगपदधिकरणवचने द्वन्द्ववचनात् P. II 2.29
Vārt. 2. For details see Vyākara-
T}amahābhāgya or३ चार्थे द्वन्द्वः P. II.
2.29.
wOrd except a Bahuvrihi corm- युगपदधिकरणविवक्षा desi1 e to express
pound word, has itS last vowel
accented acute; cf. Ka$. On P. V I•
2.81. •
थै the sense posSeSsed by the
twO or tnore senses simultaneously
(by one word) ; cf. सवर्गणि द्वन्द्वे बह्वर्थीनि |
युगपदधिकरणविवक्षायां द्वन्द्वेी भवति M. Bh.
on P. II.4.62. See युगपदधिकरणवचनता.
original word to which the affix, | युगपद्धच्चन्नता expression of the semses
SubSequently dropped by meanS
of the word लुप॒, was added.
'`»«
युकेित (1) argumentation; reasOning;
(2X current maxim; cf. युातसिद्धमतत्.
of twO words together by one
word; cf. विग्रहे खल्वपि युग॒पद्वचनता दृश्यते l
द्यावा ह क्षामा । द्यावा चिदस्मै पृथिवी नमेत ।
M. Bh. on P. II. 2.29 W'ārt 6.
युगपत्प्रसङ्ग simultaneous possibility of | युग्म (1) lit. pair; the word is used for
the application of two rules or
operations, when in grammar no
option re : their application is
admiSsible as it is a.imissible
according to MÎmarihsa rules re :
two operations enjoined by Vedic
beheStS. In Grammar, only one of
such rules applies, the priority of
application being based upon the
criteria of परत्व, नित्यत्व, अन्तरंङ्कत्व and
अपवादत्व; cf. शव्दपरविप्रतिषेधेो नाम भवति
यत्रेोभयेोर्युगपलध्रसङ्ग: ! M.Bh. on WI.
1.158 Wārt. '12.
युगपदधिकरणवचनता denotation gf
two or more things by one single
the Second and fourth consonants
ख्, व्, छ्, इछ्म् etc. Of the five classes
which, in a way are combinations
of two cons9nants; cf. युग्माः सोष्माणः
R. T. 16; cf. also युग्मौ सेोष्माणौ where
the wOrd सुोष्मन् is explained as उष्म{
बायुत्तेन सह वर्तन्त इति सोष्मेाणः । खघ छझ टढट्रं
थध फभ; cf.also युग्मयोर्द्वितीयचतुर्थयोः; (2)
even, as Opposed to odd, referring
tO the vowels ओीं amd औौ which are
even in the enu meration ए ओो ऐं औौ.
The COnsOnants called युग्म viz. ख,
घ and OtherS which are defined as
युग्म are alsO the even consonants in
their claSSes,
member by wirtue of their being | युच् k[t affix यु changed into अन, (1)
put together in a dvandva com-
pound of two Or rmore words; the
grammarians advocate this doc-
trine stating that in a dvandva
compound such as घटपटौ or घटपटम् ?
the wOrd घट has the capacity of
expressing the sense of both घट and
पट, which in a Sentence घट: पटश्च, it
`doeS not pOSSeSS. Similarly पट also |!
applied in the sense of *a habituat-
ed agent * tO intransitive roots in
the Sense Of mOvement or utter-
ance, t9 Atmanepadi roots beginn-
ing with a cOnsOnant, to the roots
जु, चेक्रम्* स्, शुञ्व्, कुध्, as also to roots
in the sense	of decoration; e.g.
चलन:, शब्दनः; cf. P.III. 2.' 148-151;
(2) applied `tO causal roots, as 'also



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-310.png}}}}}}

युद्
t0 the r00tS अास् श्रन्थ् and 0thers in
the sense of verbal actiwity When
the word So formcd has alwayS the
feminine gender ; e.g. कारणा, हारण|,
अासना, धट्टना, वेदना etc.; cf. P.III.3.107
and the Varttikas thereon; (3) ap-
plied to rOots ending in अा arād pre-
ceded by the indeclinables ईष्प्रद्, दुस्
or सु in the sense of easy or difficult
for obtainment and,wherever Seen
to any root in the Vedic language,
as alsO to SOme other rootS aS
found in actual use in the claSSi-
cal literature; e. g. ईषद्दानौ गौर्भवता,
दुष्गूनः, सुपानः etc. सूपसदनः, दुर्योधनः,
दुर्मर्षणः etc., cf. P.III.3.128-130.
युद augment य् prefixed to the tad.
affix फेिञ्चूं ( अायनि ) after the words
दगु, कोसल, कर्मार्, छाग and वृष; e.g.
दागळ्यायनिः, कौसल्यायनिः, कामीँर्यायणिः,
वाष्यीँयणिः; cf. P. IV. 1.155 Vārt. 1.
युवन् lit. yOung perS0n; masculine;
the WOrd iS giwen as a technical
term in grammar in the sen$e of
one, who is the Son of the grand-
sOn or hiS desceadant, prowided
his father is alive; the term is also
applied tO a nephew, brother, or
a paternal relative of the grand-
SOn or hiS descendant, provided
his elderly relative, if not his
his father, is alive; it is also appli-
ed to the grandSOn, in case respect
is to be shown to him; cf. P. I V.
1.163-167. The affixes prescribed
in the sense of युवन् are always
applied to a word ending with a
tad• affix applied to it in the sense
of an offspring (अपत्य) or grandson
(गोत्र), in spite of the ruling that in
the sense of grandson or his
de8cendant (गोत्र), one affix only इञ्
or अण् or the like is added to the
base; e.g. गाग्र्यस्यापत्यं गाग्यीँयणः, दाक्षेरपत्यं
दाक्षायूणः; गाग्र्ये जीवति तस्य भ्राता. सुपिण्डो वा
गाम्यायैणंः तत्रभवान् गाग्र्यः; गाग्र्यायणेो वा.
294
योग
युवपद a cOnventional term used for
the first pāda Of the Seventh adh-
|yāya which begins with the sutra
युर्वोरनाकौ P.VII.i.1.
युचग्भत्यय tad. affix फक् ( अायन ), फेिञ्जु
( अायनि ) or any other in thésense
Of युवन् which is to be applied to a
base ending with an affix in the '
Sense of ofispring ( अपत्यप्रत्ययान्त ) or
with' an affix in the sense of a
grandSOn ( गोत्रप्रत्ययान्त ). The affix
is not applied When a female ofॉ.
Spring is meant.
युवस्सज्ञ the technical term युवन् which
is given to persOns described or
mentioned in P.IW.1.163 to 167.
युवादि a class of words headed by the
WOrd युवन् which have the taddhita
affix अ ( अण् ) added to them in
the Sense Of *duty' or *nature'; e.g.
यौव॒नम् स्थाविरम्, हौत्रम् etc.; cf. KतंŚ. on
P.V.1.130.
युष्मत्पाद conventiomal name given to
the third pāda of the fourth
adhyāya of Pātjini's A$र्पूādhyāyi
which begins with the sütra
युष्मदस्मदोरन्यतरस्यां खञ् च P. IV. 3.1.
युष्मंश् designatioi३ of the second
person, used in the Jainendra
Vyākarana•
युस् tad. affik यु in the $ense :of possg-
Sष्$ion applied to (I|) the wOrd.ऊणीं;
e.g. ऊर्णौयुः; cf. P. V. 2.123; (2) to
thॐ words कं, शं, अर्हे and शुभमै; e•g•
कंयुः, शंयुः, अहंयुः, शुभर्युः, cf. P.V.2.133-
140.
येननाप्राप्तन्याय a term used by gramma-
rians and commentatorS very fre*
quently for the maxim **ये॒न नाप्राप्ते येी
विधिरारभ्येति॒ स तस्य बाध॒को भवति '' Par.
Sek, on Pari.. 57. The term अपवाद-
*याय is used in the Mahābha$ya
which is the same as येननाप्राप्तन्याय
of later grammarianS.
योग • (1) a rule of grammar; the
word योग in this 5ense is very fre-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-311.png}}}}}}

योगरूढ
295
यौगपद्य
quently found used in the Mahā-
bhã$ya; cf. the.frcquent statementS
अयं येोगः शकंयोऽकर्तुम् M. Bh. on P.I.1.
6, 62, ctc. or क्रान्यस्य योगस्य !,योजनानि
M. Bh. on P. I. 1.31 Wart. 6,
I.1. 57 etc.; (2) grammatical
cOnnection; cf. शास्त्रकृतेीं योगश्च Nir.
|I.2ः cf. also षष्टी स्थानेयेागा P.I.1,49.
योगारूढ a word that cam be derived,
but is always used in a specific
Sense, the derivative sense which
is wider being limited; e.g. पङ्कजम्.
योगवाह a technical term used for
phonetic elements or letters which
are mentioned in the alphabet of
Pānini, wiz., the Māhe$vara sंitras
in contrast with the _term अयेोगवाह
which is used by grammarians for
the phonetic elements अनुस्वार, विसर्ग
and others Which are not men-
tioned. ,See अयेागबाह; cf. also M.
Bh. on Siva stitra 5.
योगविभाग division of a rule which has
been traditionally given as one sin-
gle rule, into two for explaining the
formation of certain Words, which
otherwise are likely to be stamped
as ungrammatical formations. The
writer of the Wārttikas and the
author of the Mahābhāsya have
very frequently taken recourse to
this method of योगत्रिभाग; cf. P.I.I.3
Vārt. 8, I.1.17 Vārt.1,I.1.61, Vārt.
3; I. 4.59 Vārt. 1, II. 4. 2. Vārt.2,
III.1.67 Vārt. 5, III.4.2. Wãrt. 6,
WI.I. l Vārt. 5, VI.1.33 Vārt.1 etc.
Althiough thiS Yogavibhāga is not
a happy method of remowing diffi-
culties and has to be folloWed as a
last recourse, the Wārttikakāra has
suggested it very often, and some-
times a stitra which is diwided by
the Varttikakāra into two,has been
recognised as a couple of stitras in
the Stitrapātha which has come
doWn to uS at present,
योगाङ्ग a part:or portion of the rule
of the gratnmarian; cf. सति च योगाङ्गे
योगविभागः करिष्यत M.Bh. on P.I.1.30,
II.1.4 etc.
योगापेक्ष concerning only that parti-
cglar rule to which it referS. The
word is many times used În conn-
ection with a deduction ( ज्ञापक )
which is not to be applied in gene-
ral, but which is restricted to the
functions of that rule from which
the deduction is drawn; cf. येोगोपक्ष
ज्ञापकम् M.Bh. on P. I.1.23 Wārt.10,
P.HII.1.95 Vārt.2.,B.IV. 1.87 Vart.
2, cf. also M. Bh. on P.I.3.62 and
V.1.1.
योगारम्भ laying down or citing a rule
as done by the writers of stitras;cf.
नैकं प्रयेोजनं योगारम्भं प्रयेोजयति M. Bh. on
P. III.1.67 Vart. 5; P. VII. 1.96
Vārt. 2.•
योंग्यता compatibility of sense; cf.
असत्यपि च गेोहनने तस्य योग्यतया गेोघ्न
इत्यभिधीयते Ka$. on P. III.4.73.
योजक causal instrument or causal
agent; the word is used in the
sense of प्रयेोजक in the Jainendra
grammar; cf...Jain.I.2.125.
योनि place of origin; cf. तपः श्रुतं च
योनिश्च एतद् ब्राह्मणकारणम्, M. Bh. on P.
V.1.115; cf. also M.Bh. on P.IV.1.
48 Vart. 9; cf. also ओोष्ठयेानिरोष्ठयः.
योषा a woman; th5 Word is used in
the sense of feminine as applicable
to gender.
यौगपद्य simultaneity of occurrence;
simultaneous poSSibility of the
application of tWO rules which
evidently cannot apply simulta-
meOusly, but Scope haS to be giwen
to one of the two, the priority
being decided on the criteria of
परत्व, नित्यत्व, अन्तरङ्गत्व and अपवादत्व;cf.
न चास्ति यौगपद्देद्यन संभवः M. Bh. on P.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-312.png}}}}}}

यौगिक
296
रत
I.1.57; cf. also M.Bh. on f. 4.! , I.
4.2, II. l.3 etc.
&^、 →	→
याँांगेश्क based on derivation; etymo-
logical; one of the kinds of wOrds
रूढ, यौगिक, येोगरूढ and यौगिकरूढ; cf.
सैन्धवशव्दो ' लवणे उभयलिङ्कः ! यौगिकस्या-
भिधयवह्निट्ठङ्गम् l Kāś. on P.II.4.31.
र्येौधेयादि a class of nine words headed
V
by the word यौधेय, a taddhita affix
' applied to which is not to be elid-
cd ewen though the Word be uSed
in the plural number.
र'
(1) second letter of the यग्श् claSS
( semi-vowels ) which has got the
properties नादभागित्व, घेोषवत्त्व,' संवृतत्व
and अल्पप्राणतां i. e. it is a sonant,
inaspirate conSOnant. Regarding
itS स्थान or place of prOduction,
therc is a difference of opinion ः
generally the consonant र् is lQoked
upon as a cerebral or lingual letter
(मूर्धन्य); cf. ऋटुरषाणां मूर्धा S.K.also Pan.
Sik$ंā; but it is called by some as
दन्त्य or दन्तमूलीय; cf. रेफल्तु दस्त्ये दन्तमूले
वा RT. 8, by others as दन्तमूलीय and
and by still otherS as वत्क्ष्र्य gingival.
In the Vājasaneyi-Prātiśākhya it is
described as दन्तमूलीय; cf. रो दन्तमूल
|I. 68, while in the Taittiriya Prà-
tiśākhya it is Said to be produced
by the touch of the middle part of
the tip of the tongue just abowe
the root of the teeth;cf. रेफे जिह्वाग्रमध्येन
प्रत्यग्दन्तमूलेभ्य्ः T. Pr. II. 4l; (2) sub-
stitute र्र् ( रेफ ) for the final letter
of the word अहन्, as also for the
. final of अम्र्नसू, ऊधस्, अवस् and भुवस्
optionally with रु, which ( रु_) is
dropped bcfore vowels, and chàng-
ed to ओा before अ and soft conso-
mants, while it is changed into
visarga before hard cOnsonants and
surds. e.g.. अग्नरव, अम्र एवः ऊधरेव, ऊधएव;
cf. Kāś. on P. VIII, 2-70; (3) the
रस्त lit. coloured i.e.
Pàf]ini's grammar ) which is substां-
tuted for the consonant सु and for
the cOnSOnant न् of the word अहन्
when the consonant सुस् or न् stands
at the end of a word. This substi-
tute रु, unlike the Substitute र् is
|liable to be changed into wisarga,or
the cOnSonant य्, or the vowel उ
by P. VIII.3.15, ] 7, VI.1.113, 114.
र (!) the cOnSOnant र, generally cited
as रेफ़्ः; the vowel अ is added to र्
for facility of utterance; cf. T. Pr.' '
I.21 ; (2) short;term ( प्रत्याहार ) for
श्र् and ळु; cf. उरण् रपरः, P. I. 1.51;
(3) kt affix र applied to the roots
नम्, कम्पू etc. in the sense of agent
who is habituated to, or expert in
the action expreSSed by the rootः
e. g, नम्रः, कम्प्रः; cf. नमिकग्पिस्म्यजसकम-
हिंसदीपो रः P. III. 2. 167; (4) tad.
affix र as a, Caturarthika afiix
applied to the words headed by
अश्मन्; e. g. अश्मरः; cf. बुच्छण्० P. IW.
2. 80; (5) tad affix र in the sense
of possession affixed to the words
ऊष, सुषि, मुष्क, मधु, and तमस् with अ of
तमस् changed to इ; e. g. ऊषरम्,
सुषिरम्, मधुरः, तमेिस्रा; cf. KaŚ. on.
P.V. 2.}07 and 114; (6) tad. afiीx र
in the sense of diminution affixed
to the words कुटी, शमी and शुण्डा; e.g.
कुटीरः, शमीरः, शुण्डारः: cf. Kāś. on P.
V. 3. 88; (7) tad. affix रक् which
see below; (8) krt afiix रक् which
see below; (9) a term for द्विगुसमास in
the Jainendra W'yakarana.
रक् (!) tad.afiिxर् proppsedby the'Wār-
ttikakāra instead of अारक् for being
affixed to the word गोधा to forin
the word गौधारः; cf. अारग्बचनमनर्थकं
रका सिद्धत्वात् P.IV.1.130 Vart. 1; (2)
krt affix रक् applied to the root उया;
cf. रकेि ज्यः प्रसारणम् P. I.1.4 Vārt. 6.
coloured by
nasalization; a term used by
ancient grammarians for a masà"
consonant र (technically cálled रु in |! lized letter ( अनुनासिक ); cf. रक्तसंशैो*



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-313.png}}}}}}

रच्तपाद 297
रनु .
नुनाासकः R.Pr.I.! 7on which Uvvata | रप्पू same as रञ् being only a variant•
comrnents :-- अनुनासिको वणेीं	रवत
इत्युच्यते; also cf. अरक्तसंष्येत्यपवाद्यते पदं
R. Pr. XI. 18, where unnaSa-
lized अा is stated as अरक्तसंधि and
illustrated by the commentator !
by quoting the passage मन्द्रमा- ||
बरेण्यम् as contrasted with अभ्र औीं !
अप: b |!
रत्तपाद conventional name given to !
the second pāda of the fourth !
Adhyāya of Pātjini's A$ं±ādhyāyi as j
the Pāda begins with the Stitra तेन !
रक्तं रागात् P. IV. 2.1. →
राक्षित named मैत्रेयराक्षत or मैत्रेय also; a ं
famous grammarian of the Eastern |
School of grammarians which
flourished in Bihar and Bengal in ;
the ninth, terःth, eleventh and |
twelfth centuries, claiming मैत्रेयरक्षित, |
पुरुषेोत्तमदव, सीरदेव and others as pro- !
minent grammar SchQlarS among !
others. See the word मैत्रेयराक्षित. ||
रघुनाथ a grammarian of the seven-
teenth century, who waS a pupil
of Bhattoji Dik$ंita and who wrote
a small gloss ( लघुभiष्य ) on the
topic named * पञ्चसंधि * of the Sidd-
hāntakaumudi.
रङ्ग nasalisation; colouring of a letter
by its nasalisation; cf. रङ्गवर्ण प्रयुञ्जीरन्
नौ ग्रसेत् पूर्वमक्षरम् Pān. Sik$ā, 27.
रङ्गनाथ a grammarian,son'ofनारायणयज्वा,
who wrote a commentary named
मकरन्द on Haradatta's Padamaऐंjati. ||
रजतादि a class of words headed by
the word रजत to which the tadd-
|hita affix अ ( अञ् ) is added in the
sense of * a produgःt * or *a part * ;
e.g. राजतम् , लौहम् , औौदुम्बरम् etc. ; cf.
Kञ्$. on P. IV.3.154. →
रश् tad. affix र causing vgddhi, appli-
ed tp the wOrd अर्ग्रीध् in the sense
of Saratāa i.e. a room or a place;
See रञ्ज.
रत्नपााणे a grammarian of the cight-
' eenth century who wrote a, short
treatise on the Kāraka relationS
named ष्षट्कारकविवरण.
रत्नार्णव name of a commentary on
the Siddhāntakaurnudt written by
Kggnarmitra, a farmous grammarian
and Naiyayika who lived in the
eighteenth century and wrote
many commentary workS On bOoks
jn the Vyākarana and Nyāya
Sāstras.
रत्नेशा a grammarian who wrote a
grammar work named लक्षणसंग्रह.
रथ name of one of the eight kinds Of
recitals of the Veda Sarihhita by
dividimg it into the compOnent
words	( पद ) and reciting the
component words by repeating
them, in their regular Order
and reverse order too.
रदानुश्छ् krt affix रदानु applied, to the
r6ot जीव्; e.g. जीरदानुः;cf. जींवे रदानुक् l
जीरदानुः M. Bh. on Siva Stitra 5,
Vārt.. 5. →
रधादेि a clasS of eight roots headed
by the root रध् which allow the
addition of the augment इ ( इट् )
optionally to the ārdhadhātuka
affix beginning with amy conSOn•
ant exCept यु, placed , after them;
e.g. राधेतां रद्ध, |त्रता . तत्र्ता तार्पेता etc.
cf. P.V[L.2.१5 and VII.2.45.
रन् personal ending रन् substituted f?r
the personat ending झ of the
प्रथमपुरुष (third person) Atmamepada
of *lifi' (potential and benedictive);
cf. झस्य रन् P.t II. 4.105.
रनु [RbNOU,LOUIS] a $Qund Sans-
kfit scholar of France ofthe present
time who has written SOtme trea-
e.g. अाश्मीध्रम् cf. अञ्ग्रीधः शरोण रञ् भे च
|P. ]IV.3.120 Vārt.. 9.
38
tises and many articles on Sanskrit
grammar out of which his wgrks
ðn the Terrninology of Sanskrit



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-314.png}}}}}}

रपंर
298
राजन्याादे
Grammar, Kā$ikà and Durghata-
w!tti require a special mention.
रपर with the letter र inserted after
it; the term is used in conriection
with the gutaa and vणू'ddhi Substi-
tutes for ऋद. These SubstituteS are
|respectively अ and अा, which, by
the addition of र्, always become
अर् and अा|र्:; cf उरण् रपरः P.I. 1. 51,
cf.' ऋकारस्य गुणवृद्वी रेफाशखा अरारावेवेति
cf. als० वृद्धिर्भवतैि गुणेो भवतीति रेफशिरा
गुष्Jवृद्धिसंज्ञकेभिनिर्वर्तत; M.Bh. on P.VI.
4.121, VIII.2.42.
रप्रत्याहाररवtडन a small article show-
· ing that the short term र for the
consonants यस् and छ् need not be
advocated as done by the learned
old grammarian$.The treatise WaS
Written by Vaidyanātha Pāya--
gunde, the prominent pupil Of
Nageśabhatta.
रप्रत्याहारमण्डन an anonymous work,
cOmparatively modern, refuting
the arguments advanced in the
रप्रत्याहारखण्डन by Vaidyanātha, Pāya-
gutade-
रम् augment र inserted after the
wowel अ of the root भ्रस्ज्, when the
letter र् which is already present
in भ्रस्ज़् (before अ) and the penulti-
mate स् are dropped; the result is
that the word भर्जु, in short, be-
cOmeS Substituted in the place of
भ्रस्ज्; cf. भ्रस्जेो रोपधयो रमन्यतरस्याम्P.VI.
. 4.47, and भ्रंस्जेा रोपधयेालेॉप अागमे रम्
विधीयते as Bhāradvājiya Varttika
 िthereOn. →
, रमानाथशाम a grammarian of the
". Kãtantra school who lived in the
fifteenth century and wrote a
. cOmmentary named Manorama
Qn the KātantradhatuvFtti and
, .. Sabdasādhyaprayoga.
, `रस्ट्.a short term ( प्रत्याहार ) used for
, all cQnSomants excepting य् and व्;
' cf. रलो व्युपधाद्धलादेः संश्च, P.I.2.26.
रस् personal ending of the third pers.
( प्रथमपुरुष्र्त्र ) SubStituted for the affix
झि in thśट्रे first future ( ळुट् ); cf. लुट्ट:ः
प्रथमस्य डारैीरसः II.4.85.
रसवती name of a COmrnentary on
his OWh work * Sahk$ंiptasāra Vya-
|karaप्1a' by Kramadiśvara,a souind
Scholar Of grarmrinar in the thir-
teenth century A.D.
रसादि a claSS of words headed by the
word रस which have the tad. afiix
मतुप् added to them in the sense
Of pOSSeSSion in preference to other
affixes !like इन् ; e:gः रसवान् , रूपवान्
' etc.; cf. KāŚ. on P.W. 2.95. →
राघवेन्द्रचार्ये ( गजेन्द्रगडकस् ) a famous
Scholar Of Grammar in 1he nine-
teenth century, whO taught many
pupils and wrote Some commen-
tary workS, the well-known being
प्रभf on the Sabdakaustubha,
विषमपदव्याख्या on the Laghuśabden-
du$ekhara and त्रिपथगा on the
Paribhā$enduśekhara. For details
see p. 27 Vyākarat?a Mahābhāgya
Vol. VII D. E. Society*s Edition.
राजदन्तादि a class of compound words
headed by राजदन्त in which the
ord6r of Words or the constituent
memberS is fixed. 'There are ab0ut
50 words in the class; some of
them are tatpuru$a compounds
such as राजदग्त or अग्रेवण in which
the subordinate word which ought
to hawe been placed first is placed
second. There are Some karmadhā-
raya compounds in which one paf-
ticular word is always placed first
and not any one of the two; c.g.
लितवाासेतम्, सिक्तसंमृष्टम् etc. There are
some dvandwa compounds such as
उछूखलमुसलम्, चित्रास्वाती, भायाँपती etc.
in which a definite order of Word$
is laid down. For details see Kāśikã
on राजदन्तादिषु परम् P. II. 2.31.
राजन्यादि a class of words headed by
the word राजन्य to Which the



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-315.png}}}}}}

राजारामशास्त्री
299 रामचन्द्रभट्ट तारे
taddhita affix अक ( बुच्धुंघ् ) is added
in the sense of * the place , of re-
sidence *; e. g. राजन्यकः, औीदुम्बरकः !
etc. This class mamed राजन्यादि is !
called अाकृोतैगण and similar words |
can be included in this claSs such
as मालव,विराट्, त्रिगतं and others from
which the words माएठ्वकः वैराटक:
त्रैगर्तकः etc. can be arrived at cf.
|Kā$. on P. TW. 2.53.
राजारामशाख्त्री ( कार्लेकर ) a |reputed
Scholar of Sanskrit grammar who
resided at Vārāt1asi and establish-
ed a school of Sanskrit Gramma-
rians there in the nineteenth
century. He wrote a treatise on
grammar nam{.d शव्दद्युत्पत्तिकौमुदी.
राधाकृष्ण ( गोस्वामी ) a grammarian
who wrote two elementary gra-
पूmmar treatises (1) अव्ययाथै and (2)
वैयाकरणसर्वत्वसूची.
राघवछ्भ titled तर्कपञ्चानन, who wrote
a commentary named सुबोधिनीं on
the Mugdhabodha Vyākarana.
२म Or रामभट्ट who wrote a, cOmame-
ntary on the Prakriyākaumudi of
Rāmacandra Se$a.
राम inhabitant of Mithilā who wrote
a commentary by name विद्वत्प्रबोधिनीं
on the Sārasvata Prakriyā.
रामाकैकरसरस्वती a grammarian who
wrote a Small grammar treatise
named अाशुबेोधव्याकरण which is diff-
erent from the well-knowta अाशुबोध
of तारानाथतर्कवाचस्पति.
रामकेिशोर ( चक्रवर्ती ) author of (1)
अष्टमङ्गला a commentar y on the
कातन्त्रवृाति of Durgasirihha, as also of
(2) शाब्दबोधप्रकााशका, a small work on
the import of words.
' रामकृष्ण a grammarian who wrote a
treatise on Karaka relationsknown
by the mame शाब्दबोधप्रक्रिया.
रामकृष्णभट्ट a grammarian of the 17th
century who wrote वैयाकरणसिद्धान्त-
रत्नाकर, a commentary on the diffe-
pre1]lt portions of the Siddh8nta
Kaumudi.
रामकृष्णानन्द writer of a commentary
on the Mahābhāsya which is
available in a fragmentary form•
रामचन्द्र (1) रामचन्द्राचार्य (son of कृष्णाचार्य)
the well-known author of the
Prakriyākaumudi. He belonged to
the Se3a, family and the latter half
of the fifteenth century is aSSigned
as his date. He iS beliewed to hawe
been a resident of Āndhra. His
work, the Prakriyākaumudi, waS a
popular grammar treatise for sOme
tirme before Bhat{ःoji's Siddhānta-
Kaumudi got its hold, and it had
a number ofcorrimentaries written
upon it especiaily by his descen-
dants arad members of his family
which became well-known as the
Se$a famaily of grammariaras. The
Prakriyākaumudi is named कृष्णकिं-
करप्राक्रिया alSO. (2) There Was a gra-
mmarian named Rāmacandra Who
wrote a Small treatise on grammar
:named विदग्धबोध. (3) There was
another grammarian of the same
name who was a pupil of Nāge$a-
bhaर्भृta of the eighteenth century
and who wrote aSmall commentary
called वृत्तिसंग्रह on Pānini?s Asंंंंंंंंādh-
yāyi. (4) There was also another
Rāmacandra who was a $cholar
of Vedic grammar and who wrote
the commentary named ज्येोत्स्ना on
the Vājasaneyi-Prāti$akhya.
रामचन्द्र दीक्षित a grammarian who
wrote (1) Umādiko$a, ( 2 ) Mati-
dipikā, a commentary on the Urā-
distitras, and (3) Sabdabhedanitधुं-
palha.• →
रामचन्द्रभट्ट तारेone of the senior pupils
of Nāgesabhatta who was a teacher
of Vaidyanātha Pāyagurतूde. He
wrote a small gloss on the A$तूंādh-
yāyi which i named पाणिनिसूत्रवृत्ति.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-316.png}}}}}}

रामचन्द्रशेष
He liwed in the first half of the
eighteenth century and taught
several pupils at Vārānasi.
रामचन्द्रशेाष See रामचन्द्र (1).
रामचन्द्रसरस्वती pupil of वासुदेवेन्द्रसरस्वती
of the sixteenth century who has
written a gloss named विवरण on the
Mahābhāsyapradipa of Kaiyata.
रामतर्कवागीश a learned grammarian
who held the titles महामहोपाध्याय and
भट्टाचार्य. He was an advocate of the
Mugdhabodha School and wrote
commentaries on (1) the Mugdha-
bOdha, (2) the Kawikalpadruma,
(3) the Amarako$a and (4) the
Unādi sutras. He also wrote a
short gloSS on case-relationS, his
treatise on the subject being
named कारकीटप्पणी.
रामदास (चक्रवताँ ) a follower of the
Kātantra school of grammar who
wrote (l) चन्द्रिकी1, a commentary
on Kātantrapari$ista and ( 2 )
कातन्त्रव्यारख्यासार,.
रामनाथ ( चक्रवताँ ) who wrote short
glosSeS on the Kātantr*{ and the
Kālāpa Wyākarat?as.
रामनाथ ( चोबे ) a grarnmarian of the
nineteenth century who wrote (l)
शब्दन्दुशेखरटीका,(2) वैयाकरणभूषणटीका and
(3) वैयाकरणसिद्धान्तमञ्जूष्ठाटोका.
· रामनाथ ( विद्यावाचस्पति ) a Sanskrit
Scholar of the 17th century who
studied Vyākarana, Dharma,
Alarhkāra and other Sāstras and
wrote a grammar work कातन्त्ररहस्य,
besides many books on other
Sāstras.
* रामनारायण writer of a commentary on
the Sāraswataprakriyā.
रामभट्ट writer of a commentary on
the Prakriyākaumudi.
· रामभद्र दीक्षित son of यज्ञराम दीक्षित, a
grammarian of Tanjore of the
" '* sewenteenth century whO wrote a
300
राशि
commentary on the Paribhaऽāvtti
of Siradeva named परिभाषावृत्तिव्याख्या.
He has also written the * lieि of
Patafjali' ( पतञ्जलिचरित ) and many
miscellaneOuS works, such as
उणादिमणिदीपिका and others.
रामराम a grammarian who has written
a commentary on the Kavikalpa-
druma of Bopadeva.
रामशर्मा the same as रामतर्कवागीश. See
रामतर्कवागीश.
रामसिंहवर्मा possibly the same king of
Srihgaberapura whO patronised
NāgeŚabhatईa. He is Said to have
written Some Small cOmments on "
the Rārnayana and a small gram-
mar work named धातुरत्नमश्ञ्जरी.
रामनन्द a grammarian of the seven-
teenth century WhO wrote a com-
mentary on Bopadeva's Mugdha•
bodha. He was poSSibly the same
aS Rāmarāma (see abOwe) and
|Rārmānaradatirtha who wrote the
Kātantrasarihgraha, although diffe-
rent from the well-knowti ररामानन्द-
तर्थि of the sixteenth century who
was a Safmnyāsin and who Wrote
|many philosophical and religiou$
booklets.
रामालेकार possibly the same as रामराम
(see above) who wrote Dhātudी-
pikā, a commentary on the Kavi-
kalpadruma Of Bopadeva.
रामाश्रम a grammarian of the seven-
teemth century who wrote a com-
mentary named Siddhāntacandrikā
on the Saraswata Vyākarana.
रामेश्वर a grammarian who wrote a
small compendium On grammar
named शुद्धाशुबोध.
राशिा usually used in the sense of a
collection or a heap or a lunar
constellation ; the word is oftén
used after the word वर्ण when it
means the traditional collection of



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-317.png}}}}}}

tरंकू
301
letters or the alphabet. Thc wOrds रिष्टातिलू tad. afiix रिट्टात् added to ऊर्ध्व;
अक्षरराशि, ब्रह्मराशि and अश्क्षरसम{म्नाय are !
also used in the same senSe.
रिक् an augment added optionally ;
with रुक् and रीक् tO the reduplica- '
tive syllable of the frequentative .
root from a primitive rOot which '
ends in ऋतः or has a penuitim3te ऋट्रं; ई
e. g. च्वरिकर्ति, नरिनर्ति भरिभ्रत् etc.: cf. !
रुग्रिकौ च लुट्ठाकेि, P.VII. 4,91 and क्रतश्च ;
VII.4.92. }
रिड् substitute रि for a verbal basé !
ending in ऋ before श (the sign of !
the 6th conj.} यक् (sign of the paSS. !
woice) and a लिङ् affix beginnif]g ;
with य which is not a Sārvadhātuka
affix; e. g. अाद्रेियत, क्रियेत, क्रियात्; cf. ई स्
रिङ् शयग्लिङ्क्षु P.VII.4.28. ॥
रित् (1) characterized by the mute ;
consonant र् signifying the acute jं
accent for the penultimate vowel;cf. '
उपेोत्तमं रिति P. VI. 1. 217; ( 2 ) :
the same as रिफित or रेफेि, a visarga !
which is changeable into र् wheī३ ;
euphonically combined; cf. |
विसर्जनयेिीं रिफितः V.B'r.I.160; cf. also j
भाद्युपधं च रिद्विसर्जनीयान्तानि रेफेण; V.Pr. !
VIÎ.9. The terms रिाप्ति, रेफेि, and रित् !
|are given in the Padapātha to a पद
or Word Which ends in a Wisarga
which has originated from र् in the |
Sarihhitapatha ; e. g. the Visarga
in कः, प्रातः etc.; cf. R.Pr.I.30 to 32.
रिफित (1) a Visarga in the Padapājha
· which has originated from र् in the
Sarihhitā-pātha; (2) a word or
pada which has got a रिफेित at its
end; cf क:, स्व: प्रात: etc. (which in
the Samhitāpatha are कर् , स्वर् , प्रातर्
etc.;) cf. R.Pr. I.30 to 36 V.Pr.IV.
18.192. |!
रिल्छ् tad. affix रैि added optionally |
with रिष्टात् to the word ऊर्धेवै which
begOmes changed into उप; e.g.उपरि,
उपरिष्टा॒त्; cf. ऊर्ध्वस्य उपभावो रिळुरिष्टातिलौ
* P.W.3.3] Wārt, 1. →
jं रीड् substitute री for the vowel ऋ at
see रिछ्.ि
→ रीक् augment री added optionally with
रुक् and रिक् to the reduplicative syll-
able ( अभ्यास ) of the frequentative
base of roots having ऋ as their
peraultimate vOwel; e.g. वरीवृश्चश्यते
वरीवृश्चीति, नरीनर्ति, चरीकर्ति; cf रीगृदुपधस्य
|न्च B'.VII. 4.90.
the end of a base ( अङ्ग ) before
the afाँix च्चि as also before य which
doeS not belong to a kf t or Sārva-
dhātuka affix; e.g. मात्रीभूतः, मात्रीयते;
cf. रीङ् ऋतः P.VII.4.27.
(1) Substitute र् for the consonant
स् at the end of a word as also for
the घुष् of सञ्जुश्, न् of अहन् and option-
ally with र् for the final स् of अग्नसुस्,
ऊधम् and अवस्_in Veda; e.g. अग्निरत्र,
वाथुरत्र, सजूर्देवेाभः cf. P.VIII.2.66; the
र् of this रु (as contrasted with the
substitute र् which see above) is
further changed iilto उ before a
soft consonant and before the
vowel अ provided it is preceded by
the vowel अ, while र् , prescribed
as substitute र (which See above),
• remains unchanged; e g. शिवेोच्र्य:,
शिवो वन्द्यः as contrasted with अहरत्र,
अहर्गणः; (2) substitute र् for the final
जुञ् of अवयजुं (e. g. अवयाः), for हूं of
श्वतवद् (e.g. श्चतवा:), and for शू Of पुरोडाशु
(e.g. पुगेइाः) before the case affix सु;
cf.P.VIII.4.67;(3)substitute र् (or द्)
for the final स् or द् of a verb-form
ending with the perSonal ending
सिप् of the 2nd pers. sing; cf. P.
VIII.2.74,75;(4)substitute र् for the
final न् of words ending with the
affix मत् or वस् in Veda; e.g. मरुत्वः
हरिवः ; cf. Kāś. on P.VIII.3.1; (5)
substitute र् for the final न् at · the
emd of a word when it is followed
by a छञ्व् letter i,.e. the first or'*a
second consonamt excepting खें and



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-318.png}}}}}}

रुक् 302
रूपमाला
1; 6.g• भवांश्चिनोति; cf. P.VIII. 3.7 ; ! रूटेि convention; uSage; custom. The
(6) substitute र् for the final न् of नून्
before the letter पू as also for the
final न् of स्वतवान् and श्कान् under
certain conditions; cf. P. VIII.3.
10.12.
रुक् augment र्added optionally with
word रूढि is ,given along with योग
( derivation ) as the basis of the
uSe of Words which are described
to be of four kinds; see रूढ abowe.
cf. नैगमरूाढिभवं हि सुसाधु P. III 3. 1.
Vārt. 1. →
रिकू to the reduplicative , syllable; | रूप (1) word-form which is complete
(see रिक् above); e.g• चर्कर्ति, नर्नर्त्ति;
cf P. VII. 4. 91, 92 as also VII.
4.65.
रुक्मन् the primary .Yama letter; a
term used in the Sik$ā treatises.
स्त्द् augment र् , prefixed tO the pers.
ending झ of the प्रथमपुरुष्ध (3rd pers.
plural) after the root शी, विद् and in |
Vedic literature after a few other
roots e.g.शेरंते, संविद्रते,अदुह्व;cf. शीङो रुट्ः
P.VII. 1.6-8. →
रुदादि a term used for the five roots |
headed by the root रुद्,which have
the augment इ added to a Sārva-
dhātuka affix in certain cases; e.g.
with प्रकृति ( the baSe ) and प्रत्यय, i.e.
the affix which is attached to it;
cf. रूपनिर्ग्रहश्च शब्दस्य नान्तरेण लौकिकं प्रयेोगम्
M. Bh. on P. I. I.22 Vārt. 3; cf.
also the usual expression का रूपसिद्धिः
in the Mahābhasya; cf. M. Bh.
on I. i.51, 1.2.58 etc. ; the word
is also used in the sense of a
word-base ( धातु or प्रातिपदिक ); cf. स्वं
रूपं शब्दस्याशव्दसंज्ञा P. I. 1.68; (2) the
word form as characterized by its
derivation .and properties! cf. तस्य
रूपान्यलेच वर्णान्यत्वम् "explained as तस्य
शब्दस्य अनुप्रदानाादिभिः कारणै रूपभेद जन्यमाने
वर्णभेदः संपद्यते T. Pr. XXII. 2.
रौदिति, श्वासिति, अरोदीत्, अस्वपीँत् etc.; cf. | रूपनारायण a grammarian of Bengal
P.VII. 2. 76, WII.3.98.
रुद्रदेव a grammarian whohas written
a cOmmcntary on the Vaiyāka-
ra'ha-Siddhānta-Bhtisana of Kopàa-
bhat¢a.
of the fifteenth century who wrote
short comments on SOme sections
of the Supadma Vyakaratha under
the names सुपद्मषट्कारक and सुपद्मसमास-
संग्रह.
रुधादि a class of roots headed by the | रूपप् tad. affix in the sense of *praise'
root रुध् which take श्नम् ( न् ) as the ||
conjugational sign inserted after
the final vowel, e. g. रुणद्धि ( where
रुध् becomes रुणधु ). These roots are
popularly called roots of the 8th
conjugation.
&à conwentional; traditional; one of
the four senses in which words are
uSed. The senses' are यौोगेिक (deriva-
tive ), रूढ (conventional), योगरूढ and
यौगेकरुंढ; The term रूढ is also used
which is, in fact, possessed by the
word to which the affix रूपप् is
added, without making any
change in the sense of the word,
the affix being called *स्वार्थे* i. e.
an affix in the sense of the base
or प्रकृति cf.स्वार्थिकाः प्रत्ययाः प्रकृत्यर्थविशेषस्य
दृद्येोतका भवन्ति । प्रशस्तोवैयाकरणेोवैयाकरणरूपः ।
याज्ञिकरूप: । प्रकृत्यर्थस्य वैशिष्टये प्रशंसा भवति !
वृष॒लरूपोयं यः पलाण्डुना सुरां पिबति । चेोररूपः ।
Kaś. on P. V. 3.66.
in the sense of * a conventional | रूपमाला (1) an elerrientary work on
→、 →~、 →、
word ' cf. प्रथमाशश्दो विभक्तिविशेषे रूटुः
Kās. on P. VI. 1.102.
रूढt Sarhhitāpātha, as contrasted with
the Padapātha•
Sanskrit grammar composed by
WimalaSaraswati, in . which the
Stātras of Pārini are arranged in
different topics many of which are



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-319.png}}}}}}

रूपासेाईद्वे
303
रोफिन्
called माला, such as अजन्तमाला,
हलन्तमाला, छान्दसमाल, अव्ययमाला and SO
on.(2) the name रूपमाला is also found !
giwen to a work giving collections
of formed words written by Put]-
yanatndanaa.
रूपसिद्धि lit. the formation of words;
the name रूपसिद्वि is given to a Small
|literary work on the formation of
words written by IDayānandasa-
raSwaंi.
रूपातिदेश the actual replacement of
the original in the place of the
Substitute by wirtue of the rule
स्थानिवदादेशेानल्विधौ P. I. 1. 56; one of
the two kinds of स्थानिवद्भाव
Wherein the word-form of the
original ( स्थानी ) is put in the
place of the substitute (अदिश); the
other kind of स्थानिवद्भाव being call-
ed कायीँतिदेश by means of which
grammatical operations caused by
the original ( स्थानीं ) take place
although the substitute (अादेश) has
been actually put in the place of
the original. About the interpre-
tation of the rule द्विर्वचनेचि " P.
I.1.59, the grammarians accept
the view of रूपातिदश; cf. रूपातिदेशश्चायं
नियतकालस्तेन कृते द्विर्वचन पुनः अोदशरूपमे-
वावातष्टते । पपतु: पपुः ॥ अातेा लेोप इटि च
इत्याकारलेोपे कृत तस्य स्थानिवद्भावात् एकाचेो
द्वे० इति द्विर्वचनं भवति KāŚ on P.L.1.59;
cf. also रूपातिदशश्चायम् ! द्विर्वचनेचि इत्य-
ऋास्य भाष्ये पाठात् । Parj. Bhaskara
Pari. 97. For details see Mahābh-
āgya on P.VII.I.95 96.
,.२श्&पांवतर a well-known work on word
formation written by धर्मकीर्ति श्a Jain
grammarian of the twelfth century.
Scholars believe that this work
was the first work of the form of
topicS which was taken as a model
by the authors of' the Prakriyākau-
mudi and the Siddhāntakaumudi.
रूप्य (l) a tad. affix applied to a word
meaning * a cause * or expressing
* a human being ? in the sense of
*proceeding therefrom? e.g. समादागतं
समरूप्यम्ः देवदत्तरूप्यम् ; cf. " हेतुमनुष्ये-
भ्येोन्यतरस्यां रूप्यः P. IV. 3.8} ; (2) a
tad. affix applied to a word in the
genitiwe caSe in the sense of भूतपूर्व,
* formerly belonging to ?; e. g.
देवदत्तस्य भूतपूर्वो गैौः देवदत्तरूप्यः; cf. Kāś.
on ष्रष्ठया रूप्य् न्च P. V. 3.54.
| नै word-form of the ajbhakti or
swarabhakti ( a term used in the
ancient Prāti$ākhya works), where
ऋ is looked upon as the consonant
र् surrounded by, or followed by
the nature of a vowel. ऋ as a
vowel iS possesSed of one mātrā
of which in swarabhakti, the con-
SOnant र् pOSSeSSes half and the
svarabhakti possesses half; cf रेफात्
स्वरोपहिताह्व्द्यञ्जनोदयाद् ऋकारवर्णा स्वरभाक्तरुत्तरा
jR. Pr. WI.13.
रे (रेश्_) pcrsonal ending in Vedic
ILiterature, Substjtuted for त of the
प्रथमपुरुष्त्र ( 3rd pers. ) plural in the
Perfect tense; cf. लिटस्तझयेो रेशु इंरेच्
|P. III. 4. 8 i1. → →
रेखा termed also * लेखा '; one of the
subdivisions of the krama-pāgha.
रेफ the consonant शु; generally the
wordरेफ is used for र and not रकार;
cf. वणत्कारः | रादिफंः P.III.3.108 Vart.
3,4.The consonant र is described as
one pron०unced like the tearing of
a piece of cloth and resembling a
snarl or a growl; cf. रिभयते विपाटश्यते
वख्त्रादिपाटनध्वनिवदुचायैते इति रेफः ।
रेफशिरस् ( the gu!]a or the vjrddhi
substitute for ऋ viz. अर् or अार् )
with the letter र् represented in
script by a sign on the top ; e. g.
अर्कः, अाजैवम्; cf. वृद्धिर्भवति गुणेो भवतीति
रेफशिरा गुणवृद्धिसंज्ञकेोऽभिनिर्वर्तते M.Bh, on
P. VI.4,12l . →
रेफिन्द a term applied(1)to the Visarja-
Snīya letter preceded by any vowel



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-320.png}}}}}}

रे वत्यादि
30*ं
ल
excepting अ and अा; ( 2 ) to the
Visaijaniya preceded by अ in
some specified wOrds Such , as
प्रातः, भाः, अविभः, अाद:, क्र: ctc. under
certain conditions, as also, (3) tO
the Visarjaniya in हैंात:, सानितः etc•
For details see R. Pr. I.30-36.
रेवत्यादि a class of words headed by
the word रेवती to which the affix
ठक् is. added in the sense of * an
ofॉspring ?; e. g. रैवतिकः, अाश्वपालिकः,
द्वारपालिकः; etc.cf.Kā$. om P. IV.1.146.
रैवतिकादि a clas8 of words headed by
रैवातिक to which the taddhita affix
ईय ( छ ) is added in the sense of
* belonging to *; e. g. रैवतिक्रीय:,
औौदवाहीयेः, बैजवापीय: etc, cf. Kaś. Om
|B. ]V. 3.131.
रोमश one of the faults in pronunci-
ation; cf. प्रगीत उपर्गीतः क्ष्क्ण्णेिो रोमश इति
|M. P8h I. 1. Ah. 1.
रौ personal ending Substituted for the
प्रथमपुरुषद्विवचन ( 3rd pers. dual
affix तस॒) in the periphrastic or first
future; e. g. कर्तारैौ; 'cf. लुट; प्रथमस्य
डारौरसः P. II. 4.85.
a term jocularly used with the
word घृत precedigg it, for studटुnts
of a famous scholar named धृतरौदिढे;
cf. ओोदनपाणिनीया: घृतरौढयिा: M. Bh. on
|P. i .I.73.
$\
राँढञ्यादि another name given to the
क्रौङयादि class of words which are
|headed by क्रौडि and which take the
affix ष्यङ् to form their base in the
feminine; e. g. क्रौङया लाङया;.cf. सिद्धं तु
रौ S४ । के पुना रैीद्व्यादयः ाँ
ये क्रौङयादयः M. Bh. on P. IV. 1.79.
、
रोधादिक a root belonging to the
claSS of roots headed by रुध् which
take the conjugational sign न् (श्म्).
See रुधादि abowe.
र्हिल्छ् (l) a tad. affix termed also धिभक्ति
which is applied to the word इदम् in
the sense of the locative case, ईhe
word इदम् being changed into एत;.
||
e. g. ए॒तर्हिः cf. इदमेो_ र्हिछ् P. V. 3.16
and एएँततौ रथेाः P. V. 3.4. (2) tad.
affix applied in Veda to तत् and
other prOnOuns; e.g.तर्हि, कर्हि, यार्ह, cf.
P. V. 3.20, 21.
ल
(1 ) a consOnant Of the dental class
which is a semi-vOwel ( यण् ) with
liquid cOntact in the mouth, and
which is inaSpirate ( अल्पप्राण ),woic-
ed ( घोष ) and both nasalised and
unnasalised ; (2) name in general
( लकार ) given tO the personal
endings applied tO rOots in the
ten tenses and moods which take
difierent subStitutes ति, तः, अन्ति etc.
and have variOus mOdifications and
augments in the difierent tenses
and moods; (3) Substituted as a .
8emi •vowel ( यण् ) for the vowel
ल folloWed by any other wowel
in the euphonic combinations;
(4)applied at the beginning of non-
taddhita affixes as a mute letter
indicating the acute accent for
the vowel preceding the affix;
cf. लिति ; P. VI. 1.193; ( 5 )
substituted for त्, थु, द्, ध्रुञ् or न्
before ळु, cf. P.VIII.4. 60; (6) subs-
tituted under certain conditions for
the ConSOnant र् (a) Of the root कृप्,
(b) of prefixes प्र and परा before the
root अय्, (c) of the root गृ in fre-
quentative forms and optionally
before affixes beginning with a
vowel, and (d ) of the word परि
before घ and अङ्क; cf. P. VIII. 2. 18
to 22. →
ल (1) consonant ळु; see छ् abowe*
(2) a general term usually used
by ancient grammarians to signify-
लेोप (elision or disappearance) of
a letter or a syllable or a word; cf.
सर्वसादेर्द्विगेाश्च ल: । सवाातिंकः, द्वितन्त्रः M.
Bh. on P.IV.2.60; (3) tad. affix



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-321.png}}}}}}

लकार 305 लधुता
|l → → →
ल added to the word श्छेिन्न when ; written a booklet on the six dia-
चिन्छ् and पिञ्छ् are substituted for the | lects, which is named षड्भाषाचन्द्रिका.
word ह्रिछेन्नः e.g, चिल्ङ्क्ष्श्र्ठः, पिल्छ: cf. P. V. लक्ष्मीनृसिंह a grammarian of the
2.33 Vārt 2. eighteenth century who haS
लकंर (1) the consonant लु.; see लुछ् (1) written (l) Siddhāntakaumudi-
above; (2) the personal endings vilasa, a commentary on the
affixed to roots; see ळुि (2). Siddhāntakaumudt and(2)TriŚikhā,
लक्षण (1) a rule or a stitra composed a commentary on Nāge$a's Pari-
by the ancient Stitrakāras; bhā$endu$ekhara.
the word is very frequently used | लक्ष्य lit. target; illustration; example
in this Sense by the Bhāsya- | of a grammatical rule; cf. लक्ष्ये लक्षर्णे
kāra and later commentators; cf. सकृदेव प्रवर्तते Paribhāsंā; also लश्यानुसारि
लश्क्ष्यलक्षणे व्याकरणम् ;cf. also लक्षणं हि नाम | व्याख्यानमेव शरणम् ' Paribhāgendu-
ध्वनति, भ्रमति मुडूर्तमपि नावतिष्ठते M.Bh. on śekhara: cf. also शब्दो लक्ष्यः सूत्रं लक्षणम्
P.I.1.3 Vārt '|10; (2) characteristic M. Bh. on P.I. 1.} Vart. l4.
9t sign;,cf. लश्क्षणेनाभि॒िप्र॒र्तंीं ,अ॒भिमुख्ये॒,.P. | लक्ष्याथै implied sense. See the word
|II. 1• 14; cf. also P.I.4.90 andIII. ठक्षण.
2.12: (3) indiregt w५ay of eभ्रुPrटुं&- | लघु ( 1) a term used in the sense of
sion ; ६f. लश्क्षुणतिपूदोक्क़्योः प्रतिपदोक्तस्यैव | `ाँईट्टैh* or short as contrasted with
ग्रहणम् b'ar. Sek.. Pari.. 105. गुरु meaning heavy Or long, which
लक्षणप्रतिपदोक्त a short term used for | iS applied to vowels like अ, इ etc.
the well-known , Paribhāgā लक्षणप्रति- cf. ह्वस्वं लघु P.I. 4. 10; (?) brevity;
१दोक्तयोः प्रतिपदोक्तसैयैव ग्रहणम् 'Par. Sek. brief expression;cf. लध्वर्थ हि संज्ञाकरणम्
Pari. I05, laying down that M.Bh. on P.I.2,27 Wārt. 6 also संज्ञा
when a question arises as to which हि नाम श्यतेो न लघीयः; (3) small,as qua-
ofthe two words लक्षणोक्त (arrived lifying an effort in Writing Or
at by certain changes or modifica- explaining Something as also in
tions) and प्रतिपदेोत्त, (directly ex- | utterance; cf. व्येलैिघुप्रयत्नतरः शाकटायनस्य'
pressed) be accepted, the latter | P.VIII.3.18.
should be preferred. लघुकौमुदी known as लघुसिद्धान्तकैौमुदी
लक्षणसञ्ग्रह a work on grammar also, an abridged work based
written by a grammarian named upon the Siddhāntakaumudi of
रत्नेश. Bhattoji Dik$ita, written by
लक्षणा implication; potentiality of | BhattQji's pupil Varadarāja. The
implication; this potentiality Uf work is very valuable and helpful
words viz. लक्षणा is not recognised to beginners in grammar. It has
by grammarians as a potentiality got the same topics as the Siddh-
different from the अभिधाशक्ति or the āntakaumudi, but arranged
power of denotation. Later gra- |! differently. The work, named सtर-
mmarians, hoWewer, like the सिद्धान्तकौमुदी is the same as लघुसिद्धान्त-
Alatihkārikas, have used the word कौमुदी.Po3sibly सारसिद्धान्तकौमुदी was the'
in the sense of potentiality of original name given by the author.
implication as difierent from that लघुता smallnesS of effort as contrast-
9fd६n9tatioh;,cf.. अन्त्यशब्द लश्क्षणा न च | `ष्éd with गुरुता;	cf. तत्राप्ययं नावश्यं
Paribhāgenduśekhara. गुरुलघुतामेवोपलक्षयितुमर्हति, M.Bh. on P.
लक्ष्मणसरि a grammarian wh० has l I.1.3 Vāprt.. 7.
39



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-322.png}}}}}}

लघुन्यास 306 लघुशब्देन्दुशेखरव्याख्या
लघुन्यास (I) short wriring, brief Konएँabhatta's Vaiyākaranabhtं-
putting in, brief expression; cf.
. सेोयमर्वे लघुना न्यासेन सिद्धे etc.; (2) the
wOrd is given as a mame to a
grammatical work, written by
देवेन्द्रसूरि on the शव्दानुशासन of Hema-
candra, possibly in contrast with
the बृहन्न्यास written by Hemacamdra,
himself Or ' with Kāśikā vivarana-
pafंjika popularly called न्यास
written by Jinendrabuddhi on the
Kāśikāv['tti ' of Jayāditya and
Vāmana. See न्यास.
लघुपरिभाषावृाक्त an independent work
on Paribhāंās written by Puruso-
, ttafmadeva in the twelfth century
A. D. called लधुपरिभाष्प्राावृश्चित in cori-
trast with the बृहत्परिभाषावृति of सीरोदेव.
The Vitti is natmed ' Lalitā ? also,
by the author.
लघुप्रक्रिया name of a grammaar tre-
atise based on the SabdānuŚāsana
of Hemacandra written by
Vinayawijaya where the stitras 6f
Hemacandra are arranged in
different topics as in the Siddhān-
takaumudi of Bhottoji,
लधुप्रयत्नतर requiring still less effort
fOr utterance than that required
for the uSual utterance; the term
is used in connection with the
utterarace Of the consonant य which
iSSubstituted for Visarga following
upon,lorभुg अा anad followed by any
vowel. In such cases य् i$ not
PrOriOu nced at all according to
Sākalya, while it is somewhat
ã५dibly Pronounged according to
Sakagayana; cf. व्येोर्लघुप्रयत्नतरः शाकटा-
यनस्य Ê'. VII. 3.18.
लधुभूषणकान्ति name of a cormmen-
tary wOrk by Harivallabha on
KOfोdabhatta's Vaiyākaranabhtā-
· $allasāra.•
लघुभूषणदर्पण 69* लघुदर्पणा name ofa
COrmrnentary by Mannudeva on
$anasāra.
लघुमञ्जूषा name of an independent
wOrk On the meaning of words
and their interpretation written by
NāgeŚa of ध्vhich the परमलघुमञ्जुषा is
a popular short extract " by'` the
author himself.
लघुशब्दरत्न nathe of a commentary
On BhattQji's Manoramā by hi$
grandsOn Hari IDik$ंita, which is
generally read together with the
Manorama, by students upto the
emd Of the Kāraka Chapter after
they have completely read and
mastered the Siddhantakaumudi.
The cOtiamentary is called लघु-
शब्दरत्न which dlfferentiates it from
the बृहचंछश्दरत्न written by the same
authOr viz. Hari Dīksita.,
लघुशब्देन्दुशेखर name Of a comtne-
ntary on BhattQji's Siddhānta-
kaumudi written by Nageśa
Bhatta, the stalwart Grammarian
of the eighteenth century. The
work is named लघुशब्देन्दुशेखर which
differentiates it from the author's
another work बृहच्छब्देन्दुशेखर of which
the former is an abridgment. As
the Study of the Laghuśabdendu-
śekhara is very COm rmOn and as the
Brhatśabdenduśekhara is seldom
Studied, it is always the ILaghuŚa-
bdenduśekhara that is understood
by the simple and popular
narme Sekhara.
लघुशब्देन्दुशेखरव्याख्या a commentary
On the Laghuśabdenduśekhara.
There are more than a dozen
cOmrmentary works on the popu-
lar LaghuŚabdenduśekhara called
by the usual mames टीका or व्याख्या
the prOminent among which' are
गदा, " भैरवी and विजया. A few
of them have Special names e. g *
चिदस्थिमाल, चन्द्रक्रला, ज्येोत्स्र, विषमी etc.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-323.png}}}}}}

लघुसारस्वत
307
→、
लठं.
लघुसारस्वत an epitome of the Sāras- !
by क्रल्याणसरस्वर्ती. ;
लघुसिद्धान्तकौमुदी see लचुकौमुदी. !
व्य्ञ्ङं name given to the affixes of the !
imperfect tense; cf. अनद्यतने लङ् P. !
wata Wyākarat]a,
III. 2.111, explained by Bhattoji
as भूतानद्यतन लङ् स्यात् in his Siddhānta-
|Kaumudi.
व्लच्र् tad. affix ल applied optionally
with the affix मतुप् to words ending
in अा and meaning a detachable
Or undetachable part of an animal, !
as alsO tO words mentioned in the
grOup headed by the word सिध्म,as
alsO tO words बत्स and ॐस showing
afiection and Strength respectively ;
e. g. च्चूडालः, सिध्मलः, वत्सल;, etc.; cf.
P. V. 2. 96-98.
लठदं general persorral ending applied
tO roots (l ) to show the present
time for which the personal end-
ingS ति त:.•.महि are substituted for
the formation of verbs and अत्
( शतृ ) amd अान or मान ( शानचुञ् ) for
the formation of the present parti-
ciple; (2) to show past time when
the indecliraablcः स्म is used in the
sentence along With the verbal form
or when the 1ndeclinables ननु, न, नु,
पुरा,थावत्, कदा,कर्हि etc.are used along
with the verbal form under spe-
cific condईंtions; e. g. कटं ' करोति
देवदत्तः, यजति स्म युधिष्ठिर:, अहं नु करोमि,
वसन्तीह पुरा छात्राः, यावद् भुङ्ते etc.; cf.
P. III. 2.118-123, III. 3.4-.9.
लत्व change of र् into छ्. See ल abowe.
ललितावृत्ति name given to the Pari-
bhā$ंāvtti written by Puru$ottama-
deva, a famOuS grarnmarian Of
the Eastern branch of Pārini*s
system which prevailed in Bengal
from the eighth to the end of the
twelfth ceratury A.D. See पुरुष्धेोत्तमदव.
लस् a perSOnal ending sub-
stituted for छ् which in certain
cases gets the grave accent in,
spite of the general rule that
affixes ( which include perSonal
endings ) are acute; cf. तास्यनुदाँच्त्-
न्ङिददुपदेशाल्ट्ठसार्वधातुकमद्दृन्विङोः P. VI.
1. !86. →
लाक्षणिक ( 1 ) secondary; taken Or
understood in th1e secondary SenSe;
(2} stated by a rule ( लक्षण ); cf. एर्वे
तर्हि न लाक्षणिकस्य स्वरस्य प्रातिषेधं शिष्म:
M.BH. orh P. I. 4,2 Vārt. 9.
लाघव brevity of expression ; ex-
pressing in as few words aS pOSSible ;
brevity of thought and conception.•
About brevity ofexpression,ruleS Or
$titras of the ancient StitrakāraS are
noteworthy especially those of the
grammarian Pataini, whose brevity
of expression is aptly extOlled in
the familiar expression अर्ध श्वेन्
पुत्रोत्सर्वे मन्यन्ते वैयाकरणा:Par. Sek. Pari..
]22;, cf. also in contrast पयीँयशब्दानां
लाघवर्गौरवचच नाद्रियते Par.Sek.Pari.115,
लाघवन्याय law of tminimisatiom, par-
simony in the uSe of Words Or
parsimony in expression, folloWed
generally by the Sutra writerS.
लादेश substitutes तिपुप्, तसु झि (अन्ति) सिप्.
. .....महिङ् for ळु, signifying the ten
ळु affixes or lakāras लट्, लिट्, लुट् etc.,
applied to roots in the senses of
the different tenses and moods; cf.
|]P.HI[I.4.78.
लालविहारिन् a grammarian of the
nineteenth century who WrOte a
gloss on NāgeŚa's Paribhāśendu-
$ekhara.
लावस्था the original condition of छ् Or
the persomal endings before the
affixes तिप्, तस् and others are subS-
tituted for them in accordance
with the time or mood, aS also the
person and the number in view;cf.
लेावस्थायामेव स्यादयः, सार्वधातुके इयनादयः
|M. Bh. ora P.III. 1• 33. →
लि a common term used (1) for the
aorist vikarapa afiix च्लि f¢r which



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-324.png}}}}}}

लिङ्
सिञ्च॒, क्स, अङ् etc. are substituted as
prescribed; (2) for लिट् and
लिङ् affixes; e-g. मन्त्रे घसह्वरणशवृदहाद्-
वृच्कृगमिजनिभ्यो ले: P.II.4.80.
लिङ् general term for the affixes call-
cd लिङ् (optatiwe) which includes
the potential ( विधिलिङ् ) amd the
conditional ( अाशीर्लिङ् ) affixes; .cf.
विधिनिमन्त्रणामन्त्रणाधीष्टसंप्रश्नप्राथैनषु लिङ् and
अाशिषि लिड्लेोटौ P. III. 3. 16I ' and
173.
लिङ्ग (1) sign Or characteristic markः
generally the mute letter prefixed
or sufiixed to roots,affixes, or aug-
ments and their substituteS with a
specific purpose; cf. किंचिल्लिङ्घमासज्य
वक्ष्यामि M. Bh.on I.1.l Vārt.7, अवयवे
कृतं लिङ्गं समुदायस्य विशेषकं भवति M. Bh.
on P.I.3.62 Vārt. 5; (2) proof, evi-
dence ( प्रमाण ); the word is often
used in the ParibhāgenduŚ<khara
and other WorkS in connection
With a rule or part of a rule quot-
ed as an evidence to deduce some
general dictum or Paribhā&ā; (3)
" gender; gf. लिङ्गं स्त्रीलिङ्गपुंलिङ्गनपुंसकानि
Kāś. on P. II. 3. 46; cf. " also
प्रातिपादिकग्रहणे लिङ्गविशिष्टस्यापि ग्रहणम्. Par.
Sek.Pari.71.Thegender ofa word in
Sanskrit language does not depend
On any specific properties of a
thing; it simply depends on the
current uSage; cf. लोकाश्रयत्वाल्लिङ्गस्य
which is often quoted in the
Mahābhā$ya; cf. M. Bh. on P.
II. 1.36, II.2.29, II.4.12, IV. 1.3,
V.3.66, V.4.68, VIII.1.15. For
details see Mahābhāsya on P.IV.1.
3.where after a long enlightening
discusSion the definition संस्त्यानप्रसवैाँ
लिङ्गम् is given.
a work on genders by
a SOuthern grammarian अण्णैयाच्वायै.
लिङ्गवाचकप्रत्यय an affix such as अा
, ( टप्प॒,.डापृ, `चाप्ं ) or ई (ङप्, ङीषू, ङीन् )
which is.. added to a masculine
base; cf. P.!V. 1.3 to IV.1.77.
308
_ लिद्
लिङ्गविशिष्टग्रहण inclusion of the femi-
· nine form Of a word when a word
in the masculine gender is used in
a rule, for certain Operations such
as the application Of affixes and
the like;cf. the usual dictum rega-
rding this practice viz. the Pari-
bhāsā,प्रातिपदिकग्रहणे लिङ्कविशिष्टस्यापि ग्रहणम्
Par. Sek. Pari. 71. as also M. Bh.
on P. IW. 1. l Vart. 5 to Vart. 15'
for places of the application of the
dictum and those of its rejection.
लिङ्गविशिष्टपरिभाषा the dictum to
include the feminine form of a
word when in a rule the
Word is used in the masculine
gender : प्रातिपादिकग्रहणे लिङ्गविशिष्टस्यापि
ग्रहणम् Par. Sek. Pari. 71. See लिङ्ग-
विशिष्टग्रहण.
लिङ्गव्यत्यय transpOsition of genders,
aS nOticedOften in Vedic language;
e. g. मधेोर्गह्लाति or मधोस्तृताः for मधुनः;
cf. M.Bh. on P. I. 4.9.
लिङ्गानुशासन lit. science of gender$; a
short cOmprehensive old treatise on
the gender of words attributed to
Pānini as its author. Othcr works
with the same designation are att-
ributed to वामन, दुर्गेॉच्तम and others.
लिङ्गानुशासनटीका name of a commen-
tary On Pānini's लिङ्गानुशासन; some
cOmmentaries of' this kind are the
लिङ्गाथैचन्द्रिका by सुजनपण्डित,लिङ्गार्थ-
चन्द्रिकाप्रकाश by चकेीर, लिङ्गानुशासनटीका by
दुर्गोाँत्तम and लिङ्गानुशासनटीक्रा by तारानाथ.
लिङ्गाथैचन्द्रिका See 1ठडें किा.
लिङ्प्रत्ययार्थ sense of the optative and
the potential moods given or
expressed by affixes under the
common name लिड् prescribed by
P.III.3.161, 164, 173.
an affix of the perfect tense; cf.
परोक्षे लिट् P.III.2.1I5 for which the
specific affixes णळु, अतुस् उस् etc. are
substituted after roots which 'take
Pa1asmaipada affixes. Before- thre lit



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-325.png}}}}}}

लित् 309
लुट्
affixes, a monosyllabic root is
|redtaplicated while dissyllabic roots
and denominative and other
secondary roots, foramed by adding
an affix to an Original root,take the
affix अाम् after which all *litः? per-
the elision by the use of these
letters is the prohibition of any
Such Operation for the preceding
base as is conditioned by the
elided afÎix; cf. प्रत्ययलेप प्रत्ययलक्षणम् |
न लुमताङ्गस्य P.I.1.62,63.
SOnal endings are dropped and the | लुऋर् (i) disappearance (ळुच्यते इति ळुक्);
forms of the roots कृ,भू and असू with
the neceSSary persOnal-endings, are
placed immediately after the word
ending in अाम् , but ofen with the
intervention of a word or more
jn the Vedic language and rarely
in the classical language; cf. तं
पातयां प्रथममास पपात	पश्चlत्; cf. कास्प्रत्यया-
दाममन्त्रे लिटि P.III.l. 35 to 42.
लित् an affix marked with the mute
a term used by Panini for the
diSappearance of an affix or its
part under specified conditions as
prescribed by a grammar rule with
the mention of the word ळुक्; e,g.
प्रत्ययस्य लुक्श्लुलुपः P. I.j .6] ; (2} aug-
|ment छ् added to the root ला in the
sense Of melting (an oily thing); cf.
घृतं विलालयति. See Kāś. on P.VII.3.
39.
94^、
letter छ्Such as ल्युट्, तातिञ्छ्, तळु, तसिळु, लुट्ठांग्वकरण a term used by gramma-
विधञ्छ्, भक्तछ् etc. where the mute ळु
signifies the acute accent for the
. wOWel of the base which imme-
diately precedes the affix; e. g.
: चिकीर्षकंः; ' in which the vowel ई is
acute; cf. लिति WI.1.193.
लित्स्वर the acute accentjfor the vowel
immediately preceding the affix
cauSed by that affix being marked
with the mufe consonant लुछ्. See
लित् abowe; cf. अनुदात्तत्वं क्रियतां लित्स्वर
· इति किमत्र कर्तव्यम् M. Bh. on P. II.
4.33.
लीबिशश् [ LIEBICH, BRUNO ] · a
European grammarian belonging
to Breslau *who lived in the last
quarter of the nineteenth and the
first quarter of the twentieth cen-
tury. He made a critical study of
Sanskrit grammar and edited |
the Cāndra Wyàkarama and the
K$ंiratarangiऐi. →
लु elision of an affix or its part in
|rians especially in the Mahābhāgya;
(cf. M.Bh. on P.I. 2.4, I.2.12, HI.4.
77 etc.) for Such roots as have their
Vikarana (cOnjugational sign) dro-
pped by a rule with the mention
of the word लुक्;e.g. the roots of the ·
SeCOnd corंjugation as contrasted.
with Other roots; cf. लुटुग्विकरणाळु-
ग्विकरणयेोरळुग्विकरणस्य Par.Sek'Pari.90.
लुङ् an affix applied to a root, show-
ing action of imtmediate past time
as contraSted with affixes called
लिट् or लङ्. The affix लुटुङ् is found
used, however, in the sense of the
past time in general, and irrespe-
ctive of time in Vedic ILiterature;
cf. छन्दसि लुङ्लङ्लिट: P. III. 4.6. The
conjugational affixes ति, त:, etc.
are substituted for ळुङ् as for the
lakāras Of other tenses and moods
and the distinguishing sign or
विश्करण is added to a root before
the afiix called लुङ्; cf. च्लि लुङि and
the following P. III. 1.43 etc.
the proceSS of the formation of a | लुदं general name for affixes of the
word as preScribed by the specific
' mention of the words लुकू, श्लु and
अ॒टुप् which have the syllable लु as
common. The specific feature of
first future which are added ' to'
rootS when the future time is · not
the present day, but' the"next and
the succeeding ones; cf, अनद्यतने' छुट्,



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-326.png}}}}}}

लुप्
310
、
लरल
P. III. 3.15. The affixes ति, तः
etc. replace the affix लुट्ट् in accO-
|rdance with the number and
person in view; cf. तिप्तस्झिासप् . . . .
|P.. IIH. 4 78.
लुप्य् disappearance ( लुटुष्प्यत इति ळुप॒प् ); a
लुप्तविकरण a term applied to roots
after which the conjugational sign
is dropped; e. g. rOOts Of the
Second and third cOnंjugations; cf.
न लुतविकरणेभ्येोनुदात्तत्वं भवति, M. Bh. on
|P. VI.1. ]86.
term used by Pàraini with reference | लुट्टमत् ]it. possessed of the syllable or
to th e disappearance of an affix
or itS p ३rt under specified con-
ditions by the express mention of
the word ळुप्. Although after the
disappearance of an affix no ope-
ration for the base before, can
take place as conditioned by the
affix, i. e. * although there is no
प्रत्ययलक्षण, still, when the disappe-
aranee is mentioned as लुट्ठप्. the
base gets the gender and number
of that original form of it which
existed before the afiix, which
has disappeared, was applied; cf.
कुरवः देशः, चञ्चव पुरुषः चञ्चाः cf. छुपि
युक्तवद् व्यक्तिवचने. P. I. 2.6 1 and
Kāśikā thereon.
लुप्त that which has been elided or
dropped during the process of
the forrmation of' words. As elision
or लेाप is looked upon as a kind
of substitute, in short a zer o-
substituté, the convention of
the substitute being looked upon
as the Original one, viz.the sthāni-
wadbhāva, applies to it.
लुप्तनिर्दिष्ट supposed to be mentioned
although not Seen or heard in a
particular rule, for the Sake of
bringing about SOme grammatical
operation with a view to arriving
atsome desired forrms; cf. छ्रान्तस्येत्यत्र
वकारोऽपि॒ि निर्दिश्यते । किं वकारो न श्रूयते ।
लुक्तनिर्दिश्टेो वकारः । M. Bh. on P. I.1.3.
Vart. 10; cf. also M. Bh. on I.3.7,
III. 1.44 etc.; also cf. |िङ्कुति न्च P. I.
· 1.5. where the consonant गू is
, supposed to be , present in the
Word ङ्कृिति.
wording ळु. The wOrd is applied to
the terms लुक्, श्रळु, and ळुप्म् which
contain the letter लु and which all
mean the disappearance of a word-
element; cf. न लुमताङ्गस्य l लुटुश्क् श्लु लुटुप्
एऐत ळुमन्तः S.K. on P. I. 1.63.
common term for the affixes छूट्ट्
( second Future ) and छ्ट्रड् (condi-
tional), the remnant being छूट्ट after
the mute consOnantS ड्ं and ट्hawe
been dropped.
| बृट्रड् general term for the personal
affixes of the conditional, which are
applied to a root tÓ show the hap-
pening Ofan action only if there was
another preceding action, both the
ac1ions being expressed by छूट्रङं or
conditional affixes ; e.g. देवश्चेदवर्षिष्यत्
सुभिक्षमभधिष्यत्ः cf. लिङ्क्षनिमित्ते लृटृङ् क्रियाति-
पत्तैौ P. III.3. 139, 140. छृड् is also
used under certain other condi-
tions when sOme specific particles
are used; cf. P.III.3. 141-146, l5l.
वृट्टट् a general term for the general affix
ळुट्रे of the second future which is
applied in the sense of future time
in general, withoute any specific
conditions, the affixcs ति, त:, अन्ति
being substituted for the छ् िand the
sign (vikarana) स्य being addcd tO
the root; cf. P.III.3.!:3 and III. $.
l33. The terminations अत् and अान
are substituted for the affix छूट्ट्
to form future participles; e.g. भवि-
ष्यत्, एधिष्यमाण, cf. लटः सद्वा P.III.3.14.
लेखा one of the varieties or develop-
ments of the क्रमपाठ or the artificial
recitation of the separate words
[ of the Sarihhitā,
ठ
ट



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-327.png}}}}}}

लेद्
3H1 लेापबलीयस्त्व
लेद a general term for the affixes of
the Vedic 'subjunctive, the usual
perSonal-endings ति, तस् etc. being
substituted for लेट् as in the case
of other tenses and moods. The
augments अट् and अाट् are some-
times prefixed to the लेट् affix and
the sign ( विकरण ) स् ( सिप् ) is some-
times added to the roots. The
forms ofलेट् are to be arrived at as
they.are found actually used in |
Vedic language, even by placing
personal-endings of a perSOn or
number different from What is
actually required.
लेश such a slow or indistinct utter-
amce or pronunciation of the
letter य् or व् preceded by अ,
as shOWS that it is almost
dropped. This indistinct or slurr-
ed utterance of य् or व, which is
described aS advocated by the
Prati$ākhyakāra Vātsapra, corres-
ponds to the utterance of युञ् or व्
with a wery loW tone as mentioned
by Pāt)ini in the rule व्येोलैचुप्रयत्नतर:
शाकटायनस्य; e.g. अाप उन्दन्तु; य[ जाता
ओोष्प्रधयः etc.; cf. लेशेीं वात्सप्रस्य एतयेोः
T.Pr. 10.23; cf.also लेशेन प्रयत्नशैथिल्येन
व्यञ्जनानां वचनमुच्चारणं क्रियत Uvvata on
|R...B'r. XIV.5.
लैङ्ग a grammatical operation or a
· rule of grammar concerning
gender; cf. यदि ताँह कृत्स्न: पदार्थेभिधीयत
लैङ्गाः सांख्याश्च विधयेा न सिध्यन्ति M.Bh.on
P.II.2.24 Vart. 8, 9.
लोक a term used in the Mahā-
bhãSya in contrast With the term
वेद, signifying common people
speaking the language correctly;
the term लेीक is alsO used in contrast
with the term शास्त्र or itS techni-
que; cf. यथा लोके or लोकतः M. Bh.
on P.VII. 1. 9, I.1.44 Vārt. 3;
also cf. न यथा लोके तथा व्याकरोणे M.
Bh. on P.I.1.1 Wārt. 7.
लोकविज्ञान use or understanding of a
word current among the people;
cf. अन्तरेणैव बच्चनं लोकावेिज्ञानात्सिद्धमेतत् M.
Bh. on P. I.1.2! Vārt. 5.
लोकाश्रयत्व dependence upon the peO-
ple for the use.The phrase लोकाश्रयत्वा-
हिट्ठज्ञड्र्स्य, referring to the fixation of
gender depending entirely on the
people's usage, is very common in
the Mahabhasya; cf. M.Bh. on P.
II.1.36, II.2.29, etc.
लोद् a term for the affixes of the impe-
rātive mood or अाज्ञाथै, applied to
roots in the Same sen$e in which
the *ljh' affixes are applied; cfविधि-
निमन्त्रणामन्न्नणाधीष्टसेप्रश्नप्रार्थनेषु लिङ् । लोट् च
P. III.3.161, 162. These ' affixes,
specifically the affixes of the second
person singular and plural,are alsO
applied in the sense offrequency or
collection,tO a root when that root
is repeated tO shOW that frequency;
e.g. लुनीहि लुनीहि इति ळुनाति; भ्राष्ट्रमट
मठमट खैदूरमट इति अटति; cf. KāŚ, on
P. III. 4. 2,3.
लोप disappearance of a word or part
of a word enjoined in grammar for
arriving at the required forms of
a word; cf. अदर्शनेन लेापः P. I.1.52; cf.
अदर्शीनमश्रवणमनुच्चारणमनुपलब्धिरभावेा वर्णवि-
नाश इत्यनर्थान्तरम् । एतैः शब्दैयाँथाँभिधीयते
तस्य लेोप इतीयं संज्ञा भवति Kā$. on P.I.].
52. This disappearance in the
case of an afiix is tantamount to
its notional presence or imaginary
presence, as operations caused by
it do take place although the word
ele1nent has disappeared; cf.
प्रत्ययलेोपे प्रत्ययलक्षणम् । प्रत्यये लुतेपि तद्धेतुकं
कार्ये भघति Kā$. on P. I.1.62.
लोपबलीयस्त्व the superior strength or
superiority of elision as a gramma-
tical operation in cOntrast with
other operations,by wirtue of which
the elisiom, which is prescrib-
ed, takes place first and then



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-328.png}}}}}}

लोमश्य
312
वं
other operations get a Scope for
their application; cf. सर्वविधिभ्यो
· लेोपविधिबैलीयान् Par. Sek. Pari. 93.
लोमश्य the utterance of an aspirate
letter rather harshly, With a streSS
On it, when that utterance iS look-
ed upon as a fault; cf. ऊष्मणां घोषाण्ां
' लेोमश्यमसैौकुमार्य क्षेवेडनम् अधिको वर्णत्य ध्वनिः
Uvvata on R. Pr. XIV.6.
लोमादि a class of words headed by
the word लेोमन् to which the tad.
affix, श, in the sense *possessed of *
is added optionally along with the
usual afiix मत् C मतुप् X; e.g. २i8,
लोमवान्, रेामशः रेामवीन् बभ्रुशः, हरिशः,
कपिशः etc. cf. Kā$. on P. V.2.100.
लोहितादि(1)a class of words headed by
लेोहित to which the affix क्यञ् ( य ) is
added in the sense of *becoming?',
to form a denominative root-base
which gets the verb-endings ofboth
: the padas; e. g. लेोहितायति, लेोहितायते;
निद्रायति, निद्रायते; the class लेोहितादि is
considered aS अाकृतिगण SO that simi-
lar denominatiWe werb-bases could
be explained; cf. Kā$. on P.III.1.
13; (2) a clasS of words headed
by लेोहित, to which the fem. affix
ष्फ ( अायनी ) is added after they
have got the taddhita afHx यञ्म्
added to them in the sense of *a !
. grandchild'; e. g. लौहित्यायनी, कात्या-
यनी etc.; cf. KaŚ, on P. IV. 1.18.
लौकेक Prevalent in cOmmon utter- |;
ance.of the people as contrasted |[;
with वैदिक;cf.यथा लैौकिकवैदिकषु कृतान्तेषु |[ः
M.Bh.on Ahnika 1.See लोक above. !
ल्यप्र् kप॒'t affix य substituted for the |;
gerund termination कत्वा when the
root,to which त्वा has been applied,
is preceded by a prefix with which
it (the rOOt with the affix) is com-
compounded; cf. समासेऽनत्र्यूर्वे क्त्वो
ल्यप् P. VII. I. 37.
ल्य् kft affix यु changed into अन in →
the sense ofan agent applied to the
rOOt नन्दू and others (after which it
is Seen actually used in language);
e.g. नन्दनः, दूषणः, साधनः, रोचनः cf.
नन्दिग्रहिपचादिभ्येो ल्युणिन्यच्वः P.III.1.134.
ल्युट् k[t affix अन in the sense of verbal
activity as alsO in the sense of an
*abode* or *an instrument?; cf. P.
III.3.113,115, 116, 1 17.
ल्वादि a class of roots, headed by the
rOOt छ्, the past. paSS.part. affix त
placed after which becomes
changed intO न; e-g• लट्रन:, लूनवान् ;
जीनः, जीनवान्;, etc. cf. KāŚ.onP.VII.
2.44.
च
व् (1) fourth letter of the clasS of
çonsonants headed by य्, which
are looked upon as semi-vowels;
व् is a dental, Soft, non-aspirate
cOnsonant pronOunced as ब्रूञ् in
some prowinces and written also
$ometime8 like ब्रू, especially when
it stands at the beginning of a
word; (2) Substitute for उ which
is followed by a vowel excepting
उ; e. g. मधु+अरिः = मध्वरि:; cf. इको
यणचि P. VI. 1. 77; (3) thc con-
sonant व्, which is sometimes
uttered with very little effort when
it is at the end of a word and
followed by a vowel or a semi-
vowel, or a fifth, fourth or third
consonant or the consonant ड्.
In such cases it is called लघूळचारणः
cf. यस्येोच्चारणे जिह्वाग्रोपाग्रमध्यमूलानां शैथिल्यं
जायते स लचूञ्जन्वारणः S. K. on P.VIII.3.
18;(4) solitary remnant of the afii-
xes द्विकभ्,क्रिन्, ण्वि and the like, when
the other letters which are mute
are dropped and the affix क्रिप् or
the like becomes a zero affix. This
व् also is finally dropped; cf.
वेरपृक्तस्य P. VI.1.67.
| व (1) the semivowel व्; see व्; (2)



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-329.png}}}}}}

वैशादि
313 वतेि
personal-ending $ubstituted for वस्
in the perfect ( लिट् ) first person
(उत्तमपुरुष), and in the pr¢.Sent tense
in the case of the root, विद्ः
cf. परस्मैपदानां णलतुसुस् ० and विदेो लटेो
वा. P. III. 4.82,83; (3) kFt affix
क्रिप् , श्किन् or वि of whigh only व्घ्
remains; cf. अनिगन्तोञ्चतौ वप्रत्यये P.
VI. 2.52; cf. also विष्वग्देवयोश्च टेरब्ट्द्यञ्चतौ
वप्रत्यये VI.3.92,the affix is mention-
ed as वप्रत्यय by Panini, but, in fact,
it is व्, अ being added for ease in
pronunciation; (4) tad. affix in the
sense of pOSSeSsion added along
with the other affixes इन् , इक, and
वत् to the word केश and to some
other words Such as मणि, हिरण्]य, राजी,
अर्णस् etc. as also to गाण्डी and अजग;
cf. P. V. 2. 109, 110.
वशादि a claSS of words headed by
the word वंश, the word भार placed
after which gets the taddhita,
affixe • added to it, as preScribed
in the senses * takes it', * carries it *
or * produces it '; e.g. वांशभारिकः; cf.
Kās. ora P.V. 1.30. The tad. afiix-
es aS prescribed in the senses
mentioned abowe are added to the
wordS वंश etc. and not to भार
accOrJing tQ some commentators;
e.g.वांशिकः, कौटजिक: etc.; cf. Kāś. on
P. W. 1.50.
वकभर the consonant बु with the vowel
अ and कार being added for facility
of utterance; cf. T. Pr. I. 17, 21,
also वणत्कारः P. III.3.108, Vart. 3.
चक्तव्य that which ought to be stated →
or prescribed; the word is fre-
quently found used by the Vartti-
kakāra when he suggests any
addition to, or modification in
Pāmini's rules. Sometimes,the word
is added by the author of the
Mahābhāsya in the explanation ofa
Vārttika, after stating what is lack-
iag in the Vārttika.
40 ||
ववन्ञ mouth, or orifice of the mouth
which, in general is the place of
utterance for all letters, but espe-
cially for the vowel अ; cf. सर्व-
मुखस्थानमवर्णस्य केचिदिच्छन्ति l
a grammarian who Wrot6 a
grammatical work on verbs named
अर<यतप्रकरण,
वच्वन (l) lit. statement; an authorita-
tive statement made by the authors
of the Stitras and the Wārttikas as
also of the Mahābhā$ya; cf. अस्ति
हूयन्यदतस्य वचन प्रयेोजनम् M. Bh. on
$iva Sutra 1 Vart. 1. The word is
also used predicatively in the sense
of वक्तव्यम् by the Vārttikakāra; cf.
लति ल वावचनम् , ऋति क्र वाबचनम् ; (2)
number, such aS एकवचन, द्विवचन,
बहुवचन etc.; cf. व॒च्चनमेकत्वद्वित्वबहुत्व॒ानि
Kāś.on P.I.2.51 ; cf लुपि युक्तिवद् व्यक्ति-
विन्चने | लुक्रि अभिधयवहिलङ्गवचनानि भवन्ति |
लवणः सूपः । लवणा यवागू:l M.Bh.on P.I.
2.57; " (3) expressive word; cf.
गुण्ग्र्वचनब्राह्मणादिभ्यः कर्मणि च P. V.1.124
where the Kāśikā explains the
word गुणवचन as गुणमुक्तवन्तेा गुणवचनाः;
cf. also the terrns गुणवच्चन, जातिवचन,
क्रियावचन etc. as clasSes of words;
cf. also अभिज्ञावचन छूट् P.III.2.112;
(4) that which is uttered; cf. मुखना-
सिकाबचनेोनुनासिन्क: । मुखसहिता नासिका
मुखनाासिका । तया य उच्चार्यते असौ वर्णः KāŚ.
on P. I.1.8.
वज्राकृति the form of वज्र or thun-
derbolt, in which ( form ) the
Jihvāmüliya ( letter ). is , shown
in writing; cf. वज्राकृतिर्जिह्वामूलीयः Kat.
I.1.17. See जिह्वामूलीय.
वत् substitute for मत् of मतुप्. See मतुपुप्.
वाति (1) tad. affix वत् in the sense of
similar activity or thing; e. g.
राजबद्वर्तते, मथुरावत् स्रुने , प्राकारः; cf. तेन
तुल्यं क्रियां चेद्वतिः | तत्र तस्येव P.V. 1.1 l5,
116; (2) tad. affix वत् in the sense
of deserving;e.g. राजवत् पालंनम् ; cf.
तदहम् P.V.1.117; (3) tad. ' afāिx वत्



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-330.png}}}}}}

वातेिनिर्देशा
314
वररुचि
applied to prefixes inVedic Litera- ||
ture without any sense of itS Own ;
e.g यदुद्वतेा निवतो याति बप्सत् ; cf. उपसगीँ-
च्छन्दसि,.धात्वर्थे P.V. 1. 118.
वातेनिर्देश specific statement by putt-
ing the word वत् for the sake of
extended application ( अतिदेश् ) ;
e.g. ब्राह्मणवदधीते; cf. स तर्हि वतिनिदैशः
कर्तव्यः । न ह्यन्तरेण वतिमतिदेशो गम्यते l
· M.Bh. on P. I.1.23 Vārt. 4.
वतो the posssssive affix वत् ( मतुप्म् )
with fem. ई added; cf. विश्वदेव्यसेोमौ
वत्याम् ( दीर्घमापद्येते ) V.Pr.III.117.
वतु or वतुप्म् tad. affix वत् applied tO
the pronouns यत्, तद्, एतद् , क्रिम् and
इदम् in the sense of measurement;
e.g. यावान् , तावान् , एतावान् , कियान् ; |
इयान् , कीवान् ;cf. यत्तदेतेभ्यः परिमाणे वतुप् ,
क्रिमेिदंभ्यां वो घः P. V. 2.39,40. Words
ending with this affix वतु are
designated संख्या; cf. बहुगणवतुडति
संख्या P.I,•.1.23.
वनमालिन् a grammarian of the
sewenteenth century WhO wrote a
commentary named मतोन्मञ्जा on
Ko'?dabhatta?s Waiyākarat]a-
bhtāsana and a grammar work
named सिद्धान्ततत्ववेिवेक.
वनस्पत्यादि a class of cotnpound words
headed by वनस्पति which retain the
original accent of the members of |
the compound, as for examiple, in |
the compound word वनस्पति both
the words वन and पति have got
their initial vowel अ accented
acute; cf. Kā$.on P.VI.2.140.
वनिप्	kFt affix बन् applied in the
sense of agent in 'Vedic literature
tO a root ending in अा' and in
spoken language to any root where
* forms āre seen;e.g.भूरिदावा, विजावा;cf.
अातेो मनिन्कानेब्वानेपश्च । अन्येभ्योपि दृश्यते P.
III. 2. 74, 75.
वय tad. affix वय applied to the word
टु in the sense of मान (a peculiar
prOduct); e•g- दुवयम्; cf. माने वयः
'P. IV. 3.162.
वग्र or वरन्च॒ krt affix वर applied to the
roots स्थां, ईशु, भास्, पिस् and कस्,as also
to the intensive base of या in the
sense of a habituated agent; e. g.
स्थावर, ईश्वर, यायावर etc. cf. स्थेशभास-
पिसकसो वरच्च॒ । यश्च यङ: P. III. 2. 175,
176.
वरणादि a claSS Of Words headed by
वरण which have the taddhita affix
elided, if it is added to them in
the four Senses mentioned in
P.[V.2.67-70;, cf. बरणानामदूरभवं नगरं
वरणाः । कटुकबदर्या अदूरभवो ग्रामः कट्टकबदरी ।
cf. Kā$. on P.IV.2.82.
वरदराज a scholar of grammar and a
pupil of Bhattoji Diksita who fio-
urished in the end of the seven-
teenth century and wrOte abridg-
ments of the Siddhānta-kaumudi
for beginners in grammar named
लघुसिद्धान्तकौमुदी and मध्यसिद्धान्तकीमुदीं as
also धातुकारिकावली and गीार्वाणपदमञ्जरी.
The work under the name सांर-
सिद्धान्तकौभुदी, which is the shortest
abridgment, is, in fact, the लघु-
सिद्धान्तकैौमुदी itself. It is possible that
the auothcr first preparcd the सार-
सिद्धान्तकौमुदी and then, he himself
or a pupil of his, puf additional
necessary matter and prepared the
ILagluusiddhānta-kaumudi.
वररुचि (1) a reputed ancient gra-
mmarian who is identified with
|Kātyāyana, the prOminent authOr
of the Varttikas on the Stitras of
Pahini. Both the names वररुर्चि and
कात्यायन are mentioned in commen-
tary works in connection with the
Vārttikas on the Stitras of Pānini,
and it is very likely that Vararuci
was the individual name of the
scholar, and Kātyāyana his family
name. The words कात्य and कात्यायन
are found used in Slokavārttikas in
the Mahābhāgya on P.III.2.3 and
III.2.118 where references made
are actually found in , the prose



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-331.png}}}}}}

वररुाचे
Vārttikas (see कविधेो सर्वत्र प्रसाराणैभ्यो
ङ: P.III. 2. 3 Vārt. ! and स्मपुरा
भूतमात्रे न स्मपुराद्यतने P.III.2.118Vārt.
1)indicating th?1t the Slokavārttika-
kāra believed that the Varttikas
were cOmposed by Kātyāyana.
There is no reference at all in the
Mahābhà$ya to Wararuci as a
writer of the Vārttikas; there , is
only one reference which shows
that there was a scholar by natme
Vararuci known to Pataऐjali, but
he was a poet; cf. वाररुचं काव्यं in the
sense , Of • *composed? ( कृत and
nOt प्रेोत्त ) by वररुाचि M. Bh. on
P. [V. 2.4. ( 2 ) बररुचि is also
mentioned as theः *author of the
Prākrta Grammar known by the
name प्राकृतप्रकाश or प्राकृतमञ्जरी. This
वररुाचि, who also was कात्यायन by
GOtra name, was a grammarian
later than Patafijali, who has
been associated with Sarvvarman,
(the author of the first three Adh-
yāyas of the Katantra Stitras), as
the author of the fourth Adhyāya.
Patafjali does not associate वररुाञ्च
with Kātyayana at a]I. His men-
tion of वररुचि as a writer of a Kāvya
is a sufficient testimony for that.
Hence, it appears probable that
ātyāyana, to whom thc author-
ship of the Vājasaneyi Prātiśājkhya
and many other works allied with
Veda has been attributed, was not
asSociated with Vararuci by Pataf- !ि
jali, and it is only the later writers
whO identified the grammarian
Vararuci,who composed the fourth
Adhyàya of the Katantra Grammar |!
and Wrote a Prākrit Grammar and }
' Works, }
Some other grammar
with the ancient revered Kātyā-
yana, the author of Vārttikas, the
Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya and the
Pthspasutra; (3) There was a com-
|paratively modern grammarian
315
वणै.
named वररुचि who wrote a small
treatise on genders of words con-
sisting of about 125 stanzas with a
commentary named Lingavrtti,
possibly written by the author
himself. (4) There was also ano-
ther modern grammarian by
name वररुाचिित्रे who Wrote a work on
syntax named प्रयेोगमुखमण्डन discuss-
· ing the four topics कारक, समास, तद्धित
and कृदन्त.
वरवर्णिनी name of a commentary on
the ParibhāsenduŚekhara written
by Guruprasāda Sàstri, a reputed
grammarian ofthe present cenutry.
वराहादि a class of words headed by
वराह which have the taddhita affix
क ( कक् ) added to them in the
four senses mentioned in P. IV.
2.67-70 e.g. वाराहकम् , पालाशक्रम् etc.;
cf. Kā$. on P. IW, 2.80.
वरी feminine form of the affix वनिप्;
e. g. क्रतावरी, शर्वरी; etc.; cf. वनो र न्य
P. IV. 1.7.
वर्ग name given to the different
classes of consOnants which are
headed by an unaspirate Surd;
e. g. कवर्ग, चवर्ग, टवर्ग, तवर्ग and पवर्ग.
The several consonantS in each
group or class, are, in their serial
6rder, named वगैप्रथम, वर्गद्वितीय etc.
On the analogy of these five
classes, the semivowels are called
by the name यवर्ग and sibilant$, are
called by the name शवगं.
वग्यदि a class of words headed by
the word वग्र्य which' have their
initia] wowel accented acute when
they stand as second members,.of;
a tatpuru$a compound ' other
than the karmadhāraya type of it;
e. g. वासुदेववग्र्यः, अर्जुनपक्ष्यः; cf. 'Kā$ः
on P, VI. 2,131. ' j'
वर्ण phonemic unit; a letter•"'?the
term 'was in* tise iri :ancieiat?timeŠ
|! * and found used generally •iri**the



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-332.png}}}}}}

वर्णमैग्रहण 316
वर्णसमाम्नाय
masculinegender, but Occasionally
in the peutgr gender t9o; .e- g•
उपादष्टा इमे वर्णाः M. Bh. Āhnika, 1.
M. Bh. on Siva Sütra 5; cf. कृतेस्तर्कुः
कसेः सिकताः 1 हिंसेः सिंह: । वर्णव्यत्ययैा नाथै-
व्यत्ययः l M. Bh. on. Siva stitra 5.
also मा कदाचिदवणै भूत् M.Bh. on Siva वर्णसमाम्नाय a collection Of letters or
Stitras 3, 4.
वर्णग्रहण mention of a grammatical
operation concerning a single
letter or caused by a single letter;
cf. न वर्णग्रहणेण्र्षु (एषा अर्थवत्पारेभाषा प्रवर्तते).
Siradeva Par i 10.
वणैपाठ serial mention or enurnera-
tion of letter8 in the fourteen Siva
Sप्itras. The word is also used in
the sense of the alphabet given in
the PratiŚākhya and grammar
works; cf. एवं तर्हि वर्णपाठ एव उपदेशः
करिष्यते M. Bh. on P. I. 1.69.
मकश a minor work upon letters
and their nature by a grammarian
mamed Ghanaśyāma.
वर्णराशि the collection of letters as
mentioned in wOrkS on grammar
and Prātiśākhyas; cf. इति वर्णराशिः
ऋमश्च R- Pr. I[.- ]0.
वर्णविकार change of one letter into
anOther ( in the formation of a
word ) the discussion of which is
|kOOked upon as one of the features
of grammar; cf. लेापागमवर्णविकारज्ञो हि
सम्यग्वेदान्परिपालायेष्यति.M.Bh. Āhnika 1.
वर्णविचाल disappearance of a letter;
cf. वणश्रुिय॒ः प्रत्ययेो वर्णविचालस्यानिमेित्तम् |
दाक्षिः l M. Bh. on. P. I. l. 39 Vart.
10.
वणैाविधि an injunction or operation
conditioned by a single letter ;
लदशेो वर्णविधेर्भवत्यन्तरङ्गतः M. Bh. ori
P. 1.4.2.
वर्णविपर्यय changing the place of
letters; cf. सिंहेा वर्णविपर्ययात् Vārt 20.
वणैविवेकचन्द्रिका a minor grammar
work On the nature of letters by a
grammarian named काशीनाथ.
8 →	→
चणव्धत्यय trapsposition of letters; cf.
" वर्णव्यत्यये चार्थीन्तरगमनात् ( अर्थवन्तो वणः );
alphabet given traditionally. Alt-
hOugh the Sanskrit alphabethas got
everywhere the Same cardinal let-
terS i.e.• vOwels अ, इ etc., consonants
कु, सूव् etC•, · semivowels युय्, र, ळु, व,
sibilants शु क्षु स् हूँ and a few addi-
tioraal phOnetic units such as अनुस्वार,
विसर्ग and Others, still their numbef
and Order differ in the difierent
traditional enumerations. Pānini
has not mentioned them actually
but the fourteen Siva Sütras, on
which he has based his work,
|mention only 9 vowels and 34
consonants, the long vowels being
looked upon as warieties of the
short ones. The Sik$ā of Pānini
|mentions 63 or 64 letters, adding
the letter ळ ( दुःस्पृष्ट ); cf. त्रिषष्टिः
नृत्रतुःषष्टिवाँ वर्णाः शम्भुमते मताः Pāmini
Sik$ā. St.3.The Rk PrātiŚākhya adds
four ( Visarga, Jihvāmuiliya, Up-
adhmāniya and Anusvara ) to the
forty three given in the Siva Stitras
and mentions 47. The Taittiriya
Prāti$ākhya mentions 52 letters
wiz• 16 wowels, 25class cOnsonants,
4 semivOwels, six sibilants (शु, ध्रु॒ञ्, सू,
हूं , >< क्, < पुस् , ) and anusvara. The
Vājasaneyi Prāti$akhya mentions
65 letters 3 varieties of अ, इ, उ, ऋ
and लठ, two varieties of ए, ऐए, ओो,
औौ, 25 class-consonants, four semi-
vowels, four sibilants, and
जिह्वामूलीय, उपध्मानीय, अनुस्वार,
विसर्जनीय, नासिक्य and four यम 1etters;
cf. एते पञ्चषष्टिवणाँ ब्रह्मराशिरात्मवाच: V. Pr.
VIII. 25. The Rk Tantra gives 57
letters wiz. 14 vowels, 25 class
consonants, 4 semivowels, 4 sibi-
|lants, Visarga८ Jihvāmüjiiya, Up-
adhmāniya, Aaunāsika,• 4 yarmas
and two Anusvāras. The Rk



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-333.png}}}}}}

वर्णीनर्थवत्त्व
317
घर्तिन्
Tantra gives two different Serial
orders, the UddeŚa (common) and
the UpadeŚa (traditiOraal)• The
common order or UddeŚa giveS
the 14 vowels beginning with अ,
then the 25 claSS conSOnantS, then
the four semivowels, the four
sibilants amd lastly the eight
ayogavāhas, viz• the visarjanlya
and others. The traditional Order
gंives the diphthongS first, then
long vowels ( अा, ऋ, लछ्, ई and ऊ )
thetn short woWels (क्र, ल, इ, उ, and
|lastly अ ), then $emivowels, then
the five fifth consonants, the fीve
fourths, the five thirds, the five
seconds, the five firsts, then the
four sibilants and then the eight
ayogavāha letters and two AuS-
vāras instead of one anuswara.
Pānini appears to have followed
the traditional order with a few
changeS that are necessary for the
technique of his work.
& →
वर्णोनथैवत्त्व the view that letters do
not pOSSess the sense, as individua-
lly in every letter no separate sense '
is seen; cf. अनर्थकास्तुetc. M. Bh. on
Siva Stitra 5, Vart. 14 and 15.
वणथैवत्त्व the theory or view that indi-
vidual letters are severalfy possess--
ed of different senses. For instance,
the difierence in the meanings of
the words कूप, यूप, and सृप is due to
the difference im their initial letter.
The theory is not acceptable to the
Vaiyākarathas nor the theory वणाँनर्थ-
वत्त्व given above. They follow the
theory of संधातार्थवच्त्व i. e. sense given
by a group of words together. See
M.Bh. onSiva Stātra 5, Vārttikas
9 to 15. ~
a grammatical Operation
depending upon a single letter i.e.
|an operation caused by a letter
sing!y; cf. वणाँश्रये नास्ति प्रत्ययलक्षणम् ।
Par.Sek.Pari.21; cf.also वणश्रियः प्रत्ययेो
वर्णविचालस्यानिमित्तम् l दाक्षिः1 M.Bh.oraP.
]I.1.39 Vārt.10.
वर्णिकुबेरनाथ or वर्णिकुबेरानन्द anold writer
on grammar who haS written a
Work named शब्दविवरण on the mean-
ingS of words. The work forms a
part of hiS bigger work दानभागवत.
|Both the works are incomplete.
The शब्दविवरण is based mostly upon
ancient grammar workS ofPatafंjali
Vararuci, Varttikakāra, Sarvawar-
|man, Bhartrhari and others.
वर्णेकदेशा a part or a pOrtion Of a cOm-
bined letter i.e.संयुक्तस्वरor संयुक्तव्यञ्जन.
The diphthongS or संयुक्तस्वरs are
divisible intO twO Swaras, for inst-
ance ऐष्एँ intO अा and ए, औौ into अा
and ओो. Similarly double conso-
nantS like क्कू, श्च्ञ्स्रुं, क्म्, क्त् etc. are
also divisible. Regarding the point
|raised whether the individual parts
can be looked upQn aS Separate lett-
ers for under going Or causing a gra-
mmatical operation,the decision of
the grammarians is that they can-
not be loOked upOn aS Separate,
when they are completely mixed
as the dipthongs;cf.नाव्यपवृक्तस्यावयवस्य
तद्विधियैथा द्रव्येषु M. Bh. on Siva Stitra
3, 4 Vart. 6.
वतै a term used by ancient gramma-
|rianS and later On by commenta-
torS for compound words; cf. वर्तनं
वर्तः समासः Nyāsa on Kāś. II.4.15.
वर्तमान the present tense; cf. वर्तमाने
लट् P.III.2.123; cf.al$o त्तक्ष्य च वर्तमाने
]P. II 3.67;also वर्तमानसामीप्ये वर्तमानवद्वा
|]P.. III. 3.131. →
वतैमाना a term used by ancient
grammarianS for the present tense,
along with the term वर्तमान also;
cf. यदा हि बुद्धिकर्म तदा वर्तमाना भाविष्यति,
]M.Bh. om P. III.3.133 Vārt.8.
वार्तन् from वर्त which means a com-
pound;see वर्त. (1) The term वर्तिन् or



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-334.png}}}}}}

वत्स्र्य
318 वशंगम
वर्तिपद is used in the sense of a mem-
ber of a compound;cf.वर्तोस्यास्तीति वर्ति
समासावयवभूतम् Nyāsa on P. II• 4.1 5.
(2) The term बर्तिन् is also used for
a syllable ( अक्षरम् ); cf. वर्ति R.T.47,
explained by the commentatOr as
' अकीरादिषु वर्तते व्यञ्जनं वर्ति चाप्यक्षरं भवति ।
cf. alsð गुर्वक्षराणां गुरुवृत्ति सर्वै R. Pr.
XVIII.32.
वत्स्र्य lit. gingival, or produced at the
gums; the letter र् accOrding tO
some scholars who believe that र्
is produced at • the root of the
teeth i.e. at the gums; cf. एके
अाचायीँ रेफं वत्स्र्यीमिच्छन्ति । वत्सै भवो वत्स्र्यः ।
वत्सैशब्देन , दत्तम्लादुपरिष्टादुच्छूनः प्रदेश:
(gums) उच्यते Uvvata on R.Pr.I.20-
वत्स्यैत् future, bclonging tO future ;cf.
वत्स्यैत्प्रवृत्त्या इह कायीँणि क्रियन्त Paribhāंā
87 given by Stradewa.
वधैमान (1) a long WOwel;(2)name of a
famouS.Jain grammarian, diSciple
of Govindastiri, who lived in the
beginning of the twelfth century
A.D.and wrote a metrical work on
gaण्]1as or grOups of wOrds in gra-
mmar, named गणरत्नमहेोदवि, and also
a commentary on it. The work
consistS of8 chapters and has got
some commentaries besides the
well-knOwn one by the author
himself. He alsO wrote two other
works on grammar कातन्त्रविस्तर and |
क्रियागुतक as also a few religious
bookS.
वर्ष name of an ancient scholar of
grammar and Mfmārhsā, cited by
some aS the preceptor of कात्यायन and
Panini. If not of Pāpini, he may
` have been a preceptor of Kātyā-
yana•
वस्व्र्य or वस्र्यं gingival, produced at
the gums; the word वस्र्वं is proba-
. bly the correct word' meaning the
" root of the ' teeth or gums; the
word बसै was also used in the same
|!
sense as वस्र्व frOm which the word
वस्र्य could be derived. बस्ब्र्य and बस्र्य
are Only the variant pronnnciati-
ons of वस्व्यं and वरर्य.The word वत्स्र्य,
with त् inserted between ग्र् and
स् , is given abOve as explained by
Uvvata from वत्र्स. It is very likely
that वत्र्स is wrongly written for
वस्र्वं,or वसै.
वछ् short term (प्रत्याहार) for consonants
excepting युय्; cf. लेीपो व्येावैलि P. VI.
1.66; अार्धधातुकस्यड् वलादेः P. VtI.2.35.
वल (1) tad. cāturarthika affix वलच्
applied to the word शिखा in the
four senses country and Others;e.g.
शिखावलं नगरं देशेा वा Kāś.on P.IV.2.89;
(2) tad. affix वल in the sense of
possession applied to words रजस॒,
कृष्त्रेि and others as also tO दन्त and
शिखा when the Word is u$ed as a
proper n9un ( संज्ञा ) and to the
word ऊर्जस्; e.g. रजस्वला, कृषीवलः,
ऊर्जखलः etc.; cl. रजःकृष्यासुतिपरिषदो वलचु,
दन्तशिखात्संज्ञायाम् and ज्योत्स्ना ... ऊर्जस्वल
..मलीमसाः P. V. 2.112, 113, 114.
वल्लभ named हरिवह्छभ also,who wrote a
commentary on NāgeŚa's Sabd-
enduśekhara.
वश्शू short term ( प्रत्याहार ) for conso•
nants from व in हयवरट् to the mute
3छ् in जवगडदश्छ् i.e. all semi-vowels
excepting य् , and the fifth, the
fourth and the third class conso-
nants; cf. नेड् वशि कृति cf.P.VII.2.8.
वशंीगाम name given in the PrātiŚākhya
works to letter-combinations where
a cOnsOnant gets a change suitable
to th।e neighbouring consonants • as
given in the Rk.PrātiŚākhya in IV.1
to IV.5 including जश्त्व, अनुनासिकादेश,
छत्व, परसवणै, अनुस्वार and others, as
given in P. VIII.2.39, VIII.3.7,
VIII. ४.23, VIII.4.40, 46, 58, 59,
62, 63; cf. भन ह्यत्र अवशंगमसंधाविव अपरि-
णतानि व्यञ्जनानि संयेोगं गच्छन्तिUvvata on
]R.Pr.IV.5.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-335.png}}}}}}

वस्
→S\
319
→、
वाक्यपदाय,.
वस्र (1) pres. participle affix वसु subs-
tituted for शतृ applied to the root
विद्; e.g. विद्वस्, cf. विदे: शतुर्वसुः P.VII.
l.36; (2) perf. part. affix क्रसु Subs-
tituted for the general afÎix लिट्
mostly in Vedic Literature, but in
specific cases in spoken language;
e. g. see सेदिवस्, शुश्रुवस्, उपेयिवस् cf.
P IHI.2. 107-9. See क्रसु.
वसन्तादि a class of words headed by
the word वसन्त, which are mostly
names of seasons, to which the
affix इक ( ठञ्क्) is added in the sense
Of *that which one studies or
knows'; cf. वसन्तसहचारतोयं ग्रन्थेो
वसन्तस्तमधीते वासान्तिक: 1 वाष्र्घेिक: Kā$. on
P. IV. 2.63.
वसुठ the krt. affix कसु which see above.
The word वसु is used for कसु by
the Vārttikakāra; cf. वसुसंप्रसारणमाञ्वधौ
सिद्धे वक्तव्यम् P.VI.4.22 Vart. 9.
ātmanepada perSOnal-ending
Of the first person ( उत्तमपुरुष) dual,
Substituted for the general ह्छ् affix;
cf. तितस्झेि ... महिङ् P.III.4.78.
a term often used in the
Sjitras of Pānini and others,' to
show thc optional application of
a rule; cf. न वेति विभाषा P.I.2.44; cf.
also वा गम:I. 2.l3 etc. See विभाषा.
[WACKERNAGELL], a
German ProfeSSOr and Scholar of
Sanskrit Grammar Who collaborat-
ed in the work Of editing *Altindi-
sch Grammatik'.
वाकिनादि a class of words headed by
the word वाकिन t2 which the tadd-
· hita afiix अायनि ( भिञ्छ् ) is added in
the sense of an *off$pring' when
along with the tad. affix अायनि,the
augment क् ( कुक् ) is added to the
base ( वाफिन or the like ); e. g.
वाकिंनकायनिः; cf.Kāś. on P.IV.1.158.
वाक्य a sentence giving an idea in a
single unit of expression consisting
of the verb with its kārakas or
घ
→
|!
instruments and adverbs; cf,अाख्यातं
साव्य॒यं सकारकं सकारकविशेषणं, :बाक्यसंज्ञं
भवतीति वक्तब्यम् । साब्ययम् । उचैः ' पठति ।
सकारकम् । ओोदनं पचति | M. Bh. on
P. II. l.1. Vart. |10. Regarding
the different theoretical Ways of
the interpretation of a ' Sentence
See the word शाब्दबोध. For details,
See वाक्यग्मदीय II. 2 where the difie-
rent definitions of वाक्य are given
and the अखण्डबाक्यस्तोट is established
3S the SenSe of a sentence.
वावक्यक्राप्ण्ड name given to the second
chapter of Bhartrhari's Vākya-
padiya 1n which problems regard-
ing the interpretation of a senten-
ce are fully discussed.
वबयऋर a term used for a writer
who composes a work in pithy,
brief aSSertionS in the manner of
Stà tras, Such as the Varttikas. The
term is found used in Bhartrhari's
Mahābhāsyadipikā where by con-
trast with the term Bhāgyakāra it
poSSibly refers to the Vārttikakāra'
Katyāyana; cf. एषा भाष्यकारस्य कल्पना
न वाक्यक्रारसूय Bhartrhari Mahā-
bhā3yadipika. cf. also Nageśa's
statement वाक्यकारो वार्तिकमारभते; cf.
also चुळुम्पादयेो वाक्यकारीयाः Mādhavya
Dhātuvftti.
वाक्यपर्दी name of a work on the de-
notation of words in verse-form
with a comentary of his own writ-
ten by a gram'marian named
गङ्गंदिास. The name वाक्यपदी is con-
founded with वाक्यपदीय of Bha-
rtrhari through mistake.
वाक्यपदीय a celebrated work on
meaningS of WOrds and sentences
written by the famOuS grammarian
Bhartrhari ( called also Hari ) of
the seventh century. The work is
looked upon as a • final authority
regarding the grammatical treat-
ment of words and sentences ,f?r
^3
→→



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-336.png}}}}}}

वाक्यपदीयटीका
320 वाक्यसंस्कारपक्ष
their interpretation and Often
quoted by later grammariaras. It
consists of three chapterS the
|Padakātada or Brahmakār]da,
the Vākyakār?àa and the Sarih-
kirmakāt?da, and has got an ex-
cellent commentary written by
Punyarāja and Helārāja.
वाक्यपदीयटीका name of a commen-
tary on Bhartphari's Vākyapadiya
wrंtten by Pumyarāja On the first
and the ' second Kānँएँa. Sorme
scholars hold the view that the
commentary on the first kānda
was written by Bhartrhari himSelf.
वाक्यपदीयप्रकीणैप्रकाशा name given to
the commentary on the third
|Kānda or book of Bhartjrhari's
Vākyapadiya by Helārāja.
वाक्यपारिसमाप्तेि completion of the idea
to be expreSSed in a sentence Or in
a group of sentences by the word-
ing actually giwen, leaving
nothing to be understood as con--
trasted with वाक्यापरिसमााति used in
the Mahābhāya; cf. वाक्यापरिसमातेवf
|P.I.i.10 Vārt. 4 and the Mahā-
bhāśya thereon. There are two
wayS in which such a completion
takes place,sing!ly and collectively;
cf. प्रत्येकं वाक्यपरिसमातिः iIlustrated by
the usual example देवदत्तयज्ञदत्तविष्णु-
मित्रा भोज्यन्ताम् where Pata?ींjali re-
marks प्रत्येकं C प्रत्यवयवं) भुजि: परिंसमाप्यतः
cf. also समुदाये वाक्यपरिसमातिः where
Pataऐठॆjali remarks गगः शतं दण्ड्यन्ताम् l
अर्थिनश्च राजानो हिरण्येन भवन्ति न चे प्रत्येकं
दण्डयन्ति । M. Bh.on P.I.1.1Vārt.12;
’ cf. also M.Bh. on P.I.1.7, I.2.39,
II.2.l etc.
वाक्यप्रकाश a work on the interpreta-
tion of sentences written with a
comumentary upon it by उदयधर्ममुनि
of North Gujarat who lived in the
seventeenth century A.D.
वाक्यप्रदीप a term sometimes seen
(wrongly) applied to the Vākya-
padiya Of Bhartrhari. It may hāve
been the name of the commentary
on the Wakyaprakāśa.
वाक्यभेद |a SeriouS fault Of expressiona
when a Sentence is required to be
divided intO twO sentences for the
Sak& of its proper interpretation;
cf केचिद्वा सुप्यापिशलेरित्यनुवर्तयन्ति तद्वाक्य:
भदेन सुब्धातौ विकल्पं करोति Kaś. onP.VI..
l .94 ; cf. alsO तद्वि ( स्थानेनग्रहणं ) तृतीयया
विपरिणमय्य वाक्यभेदेन स्थानिन: प्रसङ्गे जायमानः
etc. Par. Sek. om Pari. 13.
वाक्यशेष cOrnplement Of a sentence;
SOmething required to be under-
StOOd tO complete the sense of a
sentence generally according to
the cOntext; cf.कल्प्यो हि वाक्यशेष वाक्यं
वक्तर्यधीनं हि t M.Bh. on P. I. 1.57
Vart. 6; cf. कामचारश्च वतिनिर्देशे वाक्यशेष्वं
सम॒थैयितुंम् । तद्यथा ! उशीनरवन्मद्रेषु गावः !
सन्ति न सन्तीति i मातृवदस्या: कला: ! सन्तिं
न सन्तीति ! M.Bh. on P.I.3.62.
वाक्यसंस्कारपक्ष the gratmmarian's
theory that as the individual words
have praCtically no existence as
far as the interpretation or the
expression Of sense is concerned,
the sentence alone being capable of
conveying the sense, the formation
of individual words in a sentence '
is explained by putting thern in a
Sentence and knOwing their mutual
relationship. The word गाम् cannot
be explained singly by showing the
ba$e गेो and the	case ending अम्
unless it is seen in the sentence गाम्
अानय; cf. यथा वाक्यसंस्कारपक्षे कृष्णाादि-
संबुद्धयन्त उपपदे क्रधेः क्तिनि कृते कृष्ण ऋधु
ति इति_ स्श्र्थोित असेिद्धत्वात्पूर्वमाद्गुणे कृते अचो
रहाभ्यामिति.द्वित्वं . . Pari. Bhaskara Pari.
99• The view is put in alternation
with the other view, viz. the
पदसंस्कारपक्ष which bhas to be accept-
ed in connection with the गौणमुख्य-
न्याय; cf. पदरैयैव गौणार्थकत्वस्य ग्रहेण अस्य



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-337.png}}}}}}

वाक्याथै 321
( गौणमुख्यन्यायस्यX पदकार्यविषयत्वेमवेोचितम् ।
अन्यथा वाक्यसंस्कारपक्षे तेषु तदनापाति: Par.
Sek. on Pari. 15. The gramma-
rians usually follow the वाक्यसंकारपक्ष.
वाक्यार्थ the meaning of a Sentence,
which comes as a whole composite
idea whera all the constituent
Words of it are heard; cf. पदानां
सामान्ये वर्तमानानां यद्विशेषेऽवस्थानं स वाक्यार्थः,
M.Bh. On P.I.2.45 Wãrt. 4. Accor-
ding tO later grammarians the
import Or meaning of a Sentence
( वाक्यार्थ ) flashes out suddenly in
the mind of the hearer immediate-
ly after the sentence is completely
uttered, The import is mamed
प्रतिभा by Bhartrhari, cf. Vákya-
padiya II.45 ; cf. also वाक्यार्थश्च
प्रतिभामात्रविष्षयः Laghumaप्रैjti$ā. For
details and the six kinds Uf vakyā-
rtha, see Vakyapadiya II.154.
वाक्यार्थचान्द्रका name of a commen-
tary on the Paribhāsenduśekhara
by Hari Sāstri Bhāgawata..
वाक्यैकदेश part of a sentence which
sometimes, on the strength
of the context, conveys, the
whole meaning; cf. दृश्यन्त हि
वाक्येषु बाक्येकदेशान् ग्रयुञ्जान1: पदेष्ठु च
पदैकदशान् । प्रविश पिण्डीम्। प्रविश तर्पणम्
पदेषु पदैकदशान् देवदत्तेो दत्तः॥ सत्यभामा भामेति
M.Bh. on P.I.1.45 Wart. $.
वाच् (1) expression from the mouth ;
speech; series of SOunds Caused
by expelling the air frOm the lungS
through differently shaped positionS
of the mouth and the thrOat; cf.
स संधातादीन् प्राप्य वाग्भवति Vaj• Pr.I.9;
see the word वाणीो; (2) the Sacred
or divine utterance referring tO
the Veda; cf. त्रय्या वाचः परं पदम् ; (3)
term used for उपपद in the Jainen-
dra Vyākarana; cf. वाग्विभत्ते: कारश्क-
विभाक्तिर्बलीयसा .Jain. Pari. 104•
वाचष्क expressive, as contrasted with
द्येोतक, व्यञ्जक, सूचक and भेदं* which
41
वाजप्यायन
mean Suggestive; the term is used
in COnnection with words which
directly convey their sense by
denotation, as opposed to words
which convey indirectly the sense
9r Suggest it as the prefixes or
Wipātas do.
वाचनिक cxpressly cited by a वचन or a
Statement of the authors of the
Stऐtra, the Vārttika and the Mahā-
bhà$ya, aS contrasted with what
naturally Occurs or is inferred from
their statements; cf. नेदं वाचानेकम-
लिङ्गुता असंरट्यता च ( अव्ययानाम् ) । स्वाभा-
विकमतत् M.Bh. on P.I. 1.38 Wārt.
5 and P. II.2.6; cf. also M.Bh. on
|P.I.2.64 Vart. 53.
वाचनिकी See वाचानेक above; cf. किं
स्वाभाविकी निवृत्तिराहेस्विद्वाच्चानैकी M.Bh.on
|P. II.2.6; cf. also the uSual expres-
sion बाचनिकी एषा with respect to
Some Paribhā3ās or maxims.
वाचिका expressing directly, denoting;
(fem. of वाचक ); cf. तयेोरभिसंबन्धस्य
षष्ठी वाचिका भवति M. Bh. on P.II. ;.1
Vārt. 4.
वाच्य (1)' directly expressed (sense). as
contrasted with व्यङ्गंश्य or ध्वनित; cf.
शर्वेदनार्थान् वाच्यान् दृष्ट्वा बुद्धौ कुर्यात्पौर्वापर्यम् ।
M.Bh. on P. I.4.109 Vārt.. 10; (2)
which should be stated or which de-
serves to be stated. The word वाच्य
is gencrally put in connection with
' the additions or correctioras to the
siitras by the Warttikakāra and the
Mahābhāgyakāra, in their explana-
tions; cf. तत्रैतावद्वाच्व्यम् , M.Bh. on P.
I.4-1 ; cf. also वाच्य ऊर्णेर्गुवद्भावःM.Bh.
on P. III.1. 22 Vārt. 3; III. I. 36
Wārt.. 6.
वाजप्यायन an ancient grammarian
who holds the view that words
denote alvways the jāti i.e• they
always convey the generic Sense and
that the individual object or the
case is understood in Connection



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-338.png}}}}}}

वाजसनेयिप्राातेिशाख्य
322
वायु
with the statement or the word,as
a natural course,when the purpOSe
is not served by taking the generic
sense; cf. अाकृत्यभिधानाद्वा एकं शब्दं
विभक्तौ वाजप्यायन अाचार्येाँ न्याय्यं मन्यते M.
Bh. on P. I.2.64 Vart. 35.
वाजसनेयेिप्रातिशाख्य the Prātiśākhya
work belonging to the Vājasaneyi
branch of the White Yajurveda,
which is the only Prātiśākhya
existimg to-day representing all
the branches of the Sukla Yajur-
weda. Its authorship is attri-
buted to Kātyāyana, and on
account of its striking resem-
blance with Pāhini?s suitras at vari-
ous places, its author Kātyāyana
is likely to be the same as the
Vārttikakāra Kātyāyana. It is quite
reasonable to expect that the
subject matter in this PrātiŚākhya
is based on that in the ancient
Prāti$àkhya Works of the satme
Whiteschool of the Yajurveda.The
work has a lucid commentary
called Bhāgya written by Uvvatःa.
वाडव posSibly the same as Kut?ara-
vādawa; an ancient grammarian
quoted in the Mahābhāsya; cf.
तत्र सौर्यभगवतोक्तमनिष्टिज्ञेो वाडवे: पठति,
|M. Bh. on P. WIII. 2. 106 Vārt 3.
khya workS who believed in the
very feeble utterance ( लघुप्रयत्नतर )
of the consOnantS य and व, when
preceded by अ and Standing at the
end of a word. See लघुप्रयत्न.
वादनक्षञ्ञमाला a work on grammatical
debates etc. by , Appaya Dikgita,
a well-known Scholar and a senior'
contemporary of Jagannātha in
the seventeenth century.
वादि roots headed by वा and similar
to वा. Really there is no class of
roots headed by वा given anywhere
but in the interpretation of the
rule भूवादयेा धातवः it is suggested
that * the roots which are similar
to वा are termed rOOts (धातु)' could
also be the interpretation of the
rule; cf. भ्वादय इति च वादय इति M.Bh.
on P. t. 3. l . Wārt. l l.
वदिचटमुद्भर name of a commentary
on the Sārasvata Vyākarana by a
grammarian Jayanta.
वान the Suffix बन् mentiorःed as वान
in the Atharvaprati$ākhya and
illustrated in the word ऋतावानं; cf.
A.. Pr. III. 24.
वामन name of one of the joint
authorS of the well-known gloss or
वृति upon the Stitras of Panini, who
वाणी speech; utterance; the same as
वाच् which is believed to be of four
|kinds as cited by the grammarians
and explained by Bhartrhari; the
fOur kinds are based upon the
four places of Origin, the three
first places belonging to the in-
articulate speech and the fourth
belonging to the articulate one;
cf.चत्वारि वाक्परिामेता पदानि तानि विदुर्ब्राह्मणीं
ये मनीषिण: । गुहा त्रीणि निहिता नेङ्गयन्र्ति तुरीयं
वाचेो मनुष्या वदन्ति, M. Bh. I Āhnika
1 and the Pradँpa and Uddyota
|lived in the seventh century A. D.
It catanot be aScertained which
portiop of the Kaśikā was written
by Vāmana and which by his
colleague जयादित्य. There was ano-
ther famous scholar of Kashmir by
mame Wāmana Who flourish3d in
the tenth century and who wrote
an independent grammar treatise
विश्रान्तविद्याधर, together with उणादि-
सूत्रवृात and लिङ्गानुशासन.
वायु air Or प्राण, which is believed to
Spring up from thc root of the
thereon.
वत्स् an ancient writer of ]Pratiśā- {
nawel and becOme a cause (even a
material causa according to some
Scholars) of sound of four kinds



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-339.png}}}}}}

वारणावतेशा
323
वाच्र्त्तिककार
produced at four different places,
the last kind beitag audible to us;
cf. प्राणेो वणीनभिव्यज्य वर्णेष्वेवेोपलीयते Vāk-
yapadya [. 1 l6;cf. als9 R.Pr.XIII.
13, V.Pr. I.7-9; T.Pr.II.2; Siksā of
Pārirai st.. 6.
वारणावतेशा a grammarian of the
Sewenteenth century who wrote a
gloSS named अमृतस्रुति on the Pra-
|kriya-kautmudi.
वारस्रूव a work attributed to वररुचि; cf.
वाररुचं काव्यम् M. Bh.on P. IV.8.10l ;
cf. ālso वाररुन्नेो ग्रन्थ: S.K.on P.IV.3.
101• This wOrk pOssibly was not
a grafn mar wOrk alid its auathor'
alsO waS rtOt the same aS the
Varttikakāra Kā tyāyana. See
वरुरु*िवे abOve. The name वाररुच्चव्याकरण
waS given pOssibly to Katyāyana?s
Prakrit Grammar, the author of
which wa3 वररुचि surnamed Katyā-
yana.. For details see p.395 Vyāka-
rana Mahābhāsya Vol. VII. D. E.
Society*s Edition.
वाररुचकारिका an ancient grammar-
wOrk in verse beliew*ed to have
been Written by an ancient scholar
" of gratm mar, who, if not the same
aS Kātyंyana who wrote the
VarttikaS, was his cOntem pOrary
and tO whom the authorship of the
Unādi Stitras is ascribed by some
Scholars. See वररुाञ्च.
वार्त of no use; Serving nO purpoSe;
the wOrd is possibly derived from
वार्ता ( लेीक्रवाती ) meaning people's
goSsip; cf एतच्च वातम् M.Bh.on P.I.2.
64Vārt. 25; alsO on P. II.2.24, II.
4.13 etc.
वार्त्तिक a statement which is as much
authoritative as the original
statement to which it is given
as an addition for purposes
Of correction, cormpletion or ex-
planation. The word is defined
by old writers in' an often-quoted
verse उक्तानुक्तदुरुक्तानां चिन्ता यत्र प्रवर्तते । तं
ग्रन्र्थे वार्तिकं प्राहुर्वार्तिकज्ञा मनीषिणः|This de-
finitiorः fully applies to the vārtiikas
on the Stitras of Pāi?ini. The word
is explained by Kaiyaja as वृत्तौ साधु
वार्त्तिकम् which gives strength to the
SuppOsition that there were gloSSes
orn the Stitras of Pāj?ini of which
the Vārttikas formed a faithful pithy
Summary of the topics discuSsed.
The word vārttika, is used in the
Mahābhasya, at two places only
हन्तेः पूर्वविप्रविषेधीं वार्त्तिकंनैव ज्ञापितः M.Bh.
on P.III. 4.37 and अपर अाह यद्वार्त्तिक
इति M.Bh. on P. II.2.24 Vārt. l8.
In अपर अाह यद्वार्तिक इति the word is
contrasted with the Word वृत्तिसूत्र
which means the original Sitra
(of Panini ) which has been actua-
lly quoted, viz. संख्ययाव्ययासन्नाo II.2.
25. Nāgeśa gives * सूत्रे अनुक्तदुरुक्तचि-
न्ताकरत्वं वार्त्तिक्रत्वम् as the definition* 6f
a Varttika which refers only to two
out of the three features of the
WārttikaS Stated abowe.If the word
उक्त has been omitted with a pur-
pose by Nāgeśa, the definition may
well-nigh lead tO Support the view
that the genuine Vārttikapatha of
Kātyāyana, consisted of a Smaller
number of Vārttikas which along
with a large number of Varttikas
ofother WriterS are quoted in the
Mahābhāgya, without specific
names of WriterS. For details see
pages 193-223 Vol. VII Patafjala
Mahābhasya, D.E,. Society*s Edi-
tion•
वाार्त्तिककार believed to be Kātyayana
to whom the whole bulk of the
Vārttikas quoted in the Mahā-
bhāśya. is attributed by later
grammarians. Patafjali gives , the
word वार्त्तिककार in four places only
(in the Mahābhā$ya on P.I.1.34,
III.1.44; III.2.! 18 and VII.l. 1)
out of which his statement स्यादि-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-340.png}}}}}}

वार्त्तिकपाठ
विाधः पुरान्तः यद्यविशेषण भवति किं वार्त्तिककारः
प्रातिषेधेर्न करोति in cxplanation Of the
Slokavārttika स्यादिविधिः.••इति नुवता
कात्यायनेनह, shows that Pataग्रेjali
gives कात्यायन as the Varttikakara
(of Vārttikas in small prose $tate-
merats) and the Slokavārttika is not
composed by Kātyāyana.. As asser-
tions similar to thOSe made by
other writers are qध्uOted with the
names of their authOrS ( भारद्वाजीया:,
सौनागाः, क्रोष्ट्रयिाः etc.) in the Mahā-
bhāgya, it is evident that the
Vārttikas quoted in the Mahā-
bhāgya- (even excluding	the
Slokawārttikas) did not all belong
to Kātyāyana. For details See pp.
193-200, Vol. VII, Vyakarama
|Mahābh६sya, D. B. Socie'.y*S
Edition.
वार्त्तिकपाठ the text of the Vārttikas
as traditionally handed ower in the
oral recital Or in manuScriptS. AS
observed above(segट वार्त्तिक),althOugh
a large number Of V6rttikaS quot-
ed in the Mahābhāsya are ascrib-
ed to Kātyāyana, the genuine
Vārttikapātha giving such Vārtti-
|kas only, as were definitely com-
posed by him,has not been preser-
ved and Nāge$a has actually gone
tO the length of making a state-
ment like ** वार्त्तिकपाठ: भ्रश्ट:?* ; cf.
. Uddyota on P.I.l.l2 Wārttika 6.
वार्त्तिकवचन a small pithy statement
or aSSertiOn in the manner of th३e
original stātraS which is held as
much authoritative as the Stitra;
cf. न ब्रूमो वृत्तिसूत्रवच्वनप्रामाण्यादिति । किं
तर्हि | वार्तिकवचनप्रामाण्यादिति | M.Bh. on
|P.II..1.1 Vārttika 23.
वार्त्तिकसिद्धान्त categOrical conclusive
statements made by the Vārttika-
kāra many of which were cited
later on as Paribhasas by later
. writers. For details $ee pp. 212-:
324 वासरूपन्याय
220 Vol. VII, Vyākara'na Mahā-
bhā&ya, D. E. Society's edition.
वार्त्तिकस्सूत्र the same as वार्तिकवचन which
see abOve. The Vārttikas are
termed Varttika Stātras on account
of their close similarity with the
Original Sütras, which in contrast
are termed Vपृ'ttistātras.
वाष्ययणि an ancient $टंrammaarian
quOted in the Mahabhāsya and
the Nirukta in cOnnection with
the six-fold diभ्रूrision of bhāva or
verbal activity ; cf. ष्ष्रड् भावाविकारा
भवन्तीति वाप्यीयणि: ] जायते ॐस्ति विपरि-
णमते वर्धते अपक्षीयत विनइयतीति Nir. I. 3.
वावचन citing an option mot specifi-
cally by the particle बा, but by the
termS श्विभ॒ाष्घा, अन्यतरस्याम् and the like;
cf हृक्रेीर्वावचने अभिवादिदृशेारात्मनेपद उप-
संख्यानम् P. I. 453 Vart. ! ; cf. also
M.Bh. on P.I.8.79, II.1.18 etc.
वावेिधि, वाविधान्न also, laying down an
Option regarding a grammatical
Operation; cf. स्वस्तियेोगे चतुथाँ कुशलार्थे-
राशिष्षि वाविधानात् P.II.3.16 Vārt. 1 ; cf.
also अविशेष्त्रेण अयादनिां वाविधिमुक्त्व| सार्व-
धातुके नित्यमिति वक्ष्यामि M.Bh.on P.III.
l.31 Vārt. 2; cf. also M.Bh. on P.
III.1.94.
वासरूपन्याय the dictum 'of applying
Optionally any two or more krt
affixes to a root if they become
applicable at one and the same
time, omly provided that those
affixes are not in the topic of
स्त्रियाम् (P.III.3.94 etc.) and are not
the same in appearance such as ण,
अ, क etc , which are the same wiz.
अ; cf. वासरूपेtऽस्त्रियाम् P.III.1.94; cf.
also वासरूपन्यायन एबुलपि भाविष्यति M.Bh.
on P.III.2.146Vārt.1 ;cfalso M.Bh.
ora ]P..III.2.150 Vārt. 1. The word
वासरूप and वासरूपविधि are also used
in the same sense; cf. ताच्छीलिका
वासरूपेण न भवन्तीति M.Bh. on P.III.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-341.png}}}}}}

वासुदेव
325
विकल्प
2.150 Vārt. 2, a$ also ताच्छीलिकेषु वास-
रूपविधिनस्ति |Par. Sek. Pari. 67.
वासुदेव दीक्षित son of महादेव दीक्षित, the
author of the Bālamanorarnā, a
commentary on the Siddhānta-
kaumudi. Vāsudevadikgita was a
resident of Tanjore who liwed in
the beginning of the eighteenth
century A.D. and wrote a few
works on Pürvamimā:iasā.
वासुदेव ( शास्त्रीं) Surnamed Abhyankar,
who liwed from 1863 to 1942 and
did vigorouS and active work of
teaching pupilS and Writing eSSayS,
.articles, • commentary work$ and
original WorkS On warious ShāstraS
with the same scholarship, zeal
and acutmen for fifty years inPoona.
|He wrote गूढार्थप्रकाश a commentary
on the Laghu$abdenduSekhara and
तत्त्वादर्श a commentary on the Pari-
bhāsenduśekhara in 1889. His
edition of the Pātafijala, Mahā- |•
bhāgya with full translation and
notes in Marāthi can be called his
magnum opuS. See अभ्यंकर.
वि (l) Unādi affix वि quoted by Pānini
in the rule जाग्रेोऽविचिण्णछ्ङिसु VII.
1.85; e:g. जागृविः; cf. जृशृस्तृजाग्एभ्यः
क्रिन् Unādi IV. 54; also वृदृभ्यां विन्
|IV.53; (2) common term for the
affixes विप् , क्रिन् , च्वि, ण्वि, ण्विन्,
विच् and विट्. See व्.
विक् augment वि as seen in the word
दविद्युतत् given as a nipātana in the
sütra दाधातदर्धति ...P. VII.4.65; cf.
दविद्युतदिति द्युतर्यङ्लुगन्तस्य शतरेि अभ्यासस्य
संप्रसारणाभाव: " अत्वं विक् अागमश्च निपाल्यते
Kā$. on P.VII.4.65.
विकम्पित a fault in the prOnunciation
Of vowels, the uttcrance being
३ttended with a kind of tremor;
cf. ग्रस्तं निरस्त...विकभिपतम् । M. Bh. at
the end of Āhnika 1.
.विञ्करण an affix placed between a
|rOot and the personal ending, for
showing the specific tense or mood
or voice to convey which, the
perSonal ending is applied; e. g.
the Conjugational signs शप् , दश्यन् ,
श्रुठ॒, श, श्भम्,' उ, श्भा and यकू, अाम्, as
also स्य, तास् , सिप्फ् ., अाम् and चिञ्ल with
its substitutes. Although the term
विकरण is used by ancient grammari-
anS and freely used by the Mahā-
bhāsyakara in comnection with the
affixes, mentioned in the stitras of
|Pānini, such as शप्प् , श्यन् and
othcr8, the term is not found in
the St tras of Panini. The vika-
ranas are different from the major
|kinds of the regular affixes तिङ्, कृत्य
and other similar oneS. The wika-
|rathaS can be called कृत्; So also, as
they are mentioned in the topic
{अधिक्रार) of affixes or Pratyayas,they
hold the designation * pratyaya ?.
For the use of the word विकरण see
M.Bh. on P. I.3. 12, III, 1.31 and
VI. 1.5. The term विकृरण is found •
in the Yājfiavalkya Sikgā in the
sense of change, ( cf. उपधारञ्जनं
कुयीँन्मनोर्विकरणे सति ) and possibly the
ancient grammarians used it in
that very sense as they found the
root कृ modified as करु or कुरु, or चि
aS चिनु, or भू as भव before the re-
gular personalendings तिम्, तस् etc.
विकर्ष (1)a fault in the utterance of a
vowel with its proper accent
(acute,grave or circumflex) which
results frOm the proper accent
being mixed with another in the
utteramce; cfविकर्षो नामााश्ठष्टता Uvvata '
on R. Pr. III. 18; (2) protraction
of the accent especially of the
circumflex accent.
विकल्प choice or option re :. the
application of a rule as ' stated by
the word वा, विभाषा, अन्यतरस्याम् or the
like; cf. नेति प्रतिषेधो वेति विकल्पः तयोः
प्रतिषेधविकल्पयोः * विभाषा' इति संज्ञा भवति ,



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-342.png}}}}}}

विकाल्पत 326 विगृर्हीत
विभाष्ध|1प्रकरणे प्राति'येधश्चिन्घ्तल्पैी उपतिष्टते ! तत्र Cajied प्रकृतिः cf. प्रकृतिरुपादानकारणं
प्रतिपेधेन समीकृते धिष्ध्रये पश्चाद्विकल्पः प्रवर्तते || श्तस्यैव उत्रुतरमवस्थान्तरं विकृतिः Kāś. on
|Kā$. ora P, I. 1 44. F'. V. 1. 12.
विकल्पित made applicable optionally.
विकार lit. change; modification;
mpdification of a word-base or an
affix, caused generally by the
addition of sufii:xes; cf. प्रकृतेरवख्थान्तरं
विकार: Kāś. on P. IV.3.134; cf. also
लेपागमवर्णविकारज्ञेो हि सम्यग्वेदान् परिपाल-
श्चिष्यति Mahābhāsya Ahraika 1.
विकायै ]it. changeable; that which
gets changed in itS nature ; a
variety or subdivision of क्रर्म or the
object; cf. त्रिविधं कर्म । निर्वत्र्य विकार्य
प्राप्यै चेति } Kāś. on P. II1. 2.i.
The विश्कायैक्रर्म is explained as यस्य
प्रकृत्युच्छेदेों गुष्मान्तरं वीं उत्पद्यते तद्विकायम् !
यथा भुक्त ओोदनः l लृटूयमान: केद[र: | SF n-
gārapraka$a II ; cf. also, Vākya-
padiya III. 7.78.
विकीर्ण a fault in the utterance of a
vowel when one vOwel appears, or
is heard as another; cf.विकीर्णो वर्णान्तरे
प्रस्मृतः ! एकोप्यनेकंनिभीँसीत्यपरे Pradipa
on the Mahābhāsya Āhn. l end.
विकृत mutilated, changed in nature•
e. g. the word ऱाम into राम् in रार्मीं
which is equivalent to राम् +- ओी.
For technical purpOses in grammar
a, wOrd, although mu tilated a ii{t!e
by lOpa, āgama Or var`?avikāra, is
lO ?ked upon as the Original one for
undergoi।..g op६rations; cf. एकदेशवि-
कृतमनन्यवत् Par. Sek, Pari. 37.
विकृतनिर्देश utterance of a word in its
mutilated form with some ०bject
in view; e. g. दीब्यत् for दीव्यति ' in
प्राग्दीव्यतोऽण् P. IV. 1. 8}; cf. किं पुनः
कारणं विश्कृतानर्देशः क्रियत { M. Bh. 6n
|P. IV. 1.83; cf. also कर्घ इति विकृत-
निर्देशः कृ प्रतेर्निवृत्त्यर्थः |Kā$ on !P. VI. 1.
159; cf. also गेोह इति विकृतिकरणं
" धिषयाथैम् Kāś. on P. VI, 4. 89.
वेिकृतेि chatnge, modification as differ-
ent from the original which is
विकृतिवल्ली a wOrk on the modified
|recital of the Veda words, or
पदपाठविकृति, ascribed to Wyādi who
is.believed to have been a pupil of
व्ष्ञ.
विकृतिवल्ट्ठीटका name Of a commen-
tary on विकृतिवल्ट्ठी (which see above)
written by a Vedic scholar गङ्गाधर.
विक्रम (l ) name given to a grave
vOwel placed between two circum-
flcx vOwels, Or between a circum-
flex arad an acute, Or between an
acute and a circumffex; cf.
स्वारतयेोर्मध्ये यत्र नीचं स्यात्, उदच्तयेोव
अन्यतरतो वा उदात्तस्वरितयोः स विक्रमः 'T.Pr.
`XIX. I ; (2) name given to a grave
vOWel between a pracaya vowel amd
an acute or a circumflex v:>wel;
cf. प्रचयपूर्वश्च व्र्की[ण्डन्यस्य T.Pr.XIX.2;
(3) repetition of a word or पद as
in the Krama recita] of the Weda
wOrds; (4) name given to a visar-
janiya which has remained intact,
as for instance in यः प्राणतेीं निमिघतः ;
cf. R..Pr. I.5; VI.1 ; the word विक्रम
iS Sometiti1es taged in the sense of
wiSarja niya in genera]; cf. also
अनिङ्गयन् विक्रममेधु कुर्यात् R.Pr. XIII.[ 1.
विक्रान्त name given to a sarihdhi
where the visarga remains intact
aithough it can • optionally be
changed intO a sibilant consonant;
e.g. यः ककुभ:, यः पञ्च, यो वः शिवतमो
रसः । cf. विक्रान्तसंधिस्तु प्राकृतेापधेो वेदितन्यो
यत्र विसर्गः श्रूयेत R.Pr.I V.1 1.
विह्निछष्ट a fault in the utterance of a
letter when there does not take
place the necesSary contact with
the proper place øf the utterance
Of a word|; cf. हृन्वेोः प्रकषैणे सर्वतश्चलने
विाश्छ्रेश्टं नाम देोष्प्रेो भवति । विश्छेिष्टं नाम असं-
युक्तम् |R.Pr.XIV.3.	→
विगृईीत shown by Separating the com-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-343.png}}}}}}

विग्रह
327
विचिकित्साथॉय
bined elements, for instance, the
two or more words in a compound
or, the base or affix frCom a word
which is a combination of the
base ( प्रकृति ) and the affix (प्रत्ययः);
cf. तदेव सूत्रं विगृहीतं व्याख्य॒ानं भवति M.Bh.
on I.1. Ahnika l, Vart. 11, 14;
also cf. अवारपाराद् विगृहीतादपि P. IV.2.
93 Vārt...b.
विग्रह lit, separation of the two partS
of a thing; th6 term is generally
applied tO the Separation Of the
constituent Words of a compound
word; it is described to be of tWo
|kinds : ( a ) शास्त्रीयविग्रह Or technical
separatiOn ; e. g. राजपुरुष्: ituto राजन्
ङसूं पुरुष सु and ( 2 ) लौकिकविग्रह or
cotmmOn Or p0pular Separation ;
e. g. राजपुरूष्प्र: into राज्ञः पुरुष्त्रः. It is
also divided into two kinds accor-
ding tO the nature of the constitu-
ent words (a) खपदविग्रह separation
by means ' of the , constituent
words, e.g. राजहितम् intO राज्ञ हितम्;(b)
अस्वपदधिग्रह, e. g. राजार्थम् into राज्ञ
इदम् ;Or e.g. सुमुखीithto शोभर्ने मुखं अस्याः
cf. M.Bh. on P.V.4.-7. TThe corrn-
pounds whOse separation intO con-
stituemt wOrds canimot be shown
· by those words (viz. the constitu-
ent words) are popularly termed
nityasamāsa. The term नित्यसमास is
explained as नित्यः समासेो नित्यसमासः ।
यस्य विग्रहेा नारित । M.Bh. on P.II.2.19
Vārt. 4. The upapadasamāsa is
described as नित्यसमास. Sometimes
especially in sOme Dvandva cOm-
pounds each of the two separated
words is capable of giving indivi-
dually the senses of both the words
e.g. the words द्यावा and क्षामा of the
compound द्यावाक्षामा. The word धिग्रह
is found used in the Prāti$ākhya
workS in the sense of the separate
use of a word as contrasted with
the use in a compound; cf. अच्छेति
विग्रहे प्लुतं भवति R...Br.VII.1. धिग्रह
is defined as वृल्यथविबोधकं वाक्यं विग्रहः
in the Siddhāntakalumudi.
विग्रहण enclosure or closure(वेष्टन)by the
use Of the word इति as done in the
Krama, and other Weda-recitals.
विघत immolation.; sacrifice; destru-
ction, aS applicable to a word or
part of a word or a relation Qf
words; cf. अनेकाल्त्वस्य तदाश्रयत्वाद् वर्णा-
देशस्य विघातेो ने भावेिष्यति M.Bh. on P.
I.1.50 Vārt. 15; cf also the famous
|Paribhāgā सुंनिपातलक्षणेो विधिरनिमित्तं तद्वि-
घातस्य Par. Sek. Pari. 85; M.Bh. on
|P.I.1.24 etc.
विघ्म्र्यकृत् impedirnent to an operation
caused by SOmething preceding
on accOunt Of its coming in the
way; a vyavāya or vyavadhāna or
intervention which is not admissi-
blejust as the interruption Of pai:भ्-
tals, linguals, dentals and sibilants
excepting हूं for the change of न्
intoपि॒श् ; cf. अव्यवेतं विग्रहे विघ्नकृद्भिः R.Pr.
V.25.
विच्छ् kgt afiix वि (which also becomes
nil or zero) applied to a root in the
sense of an agent, aS ObSerwed in
Vedic and claSSical use, as also to
the root यज्ञ्त् with उप and roots
ending in अा generally in Vedic
|Literature but SOmetimeS in pOpu-
lar language; cf. विजुपे छन्दसि ।' अंातेो
मनिन्कनेिबूवनिपश्च । अन्येभ्योपि दृश्यन्ते ।
व्कीलालपाः, शुभंया: etC. Kāś. On P. III.
2.73, 74, 75.
विचार विचारणा, examination, queStion
or topic or subject for examina-
tion; cf. कुतः पुनरियं विचारणा l M.Bh.
on P. I. 1.50 Wārt. l,•
विचाल immolation, destruction; cf.
वर्णाश्रयः प्रत्ययेो वर्णविचालस्यानिमित्तम् । दाक्षिः
M.Bh .on, P.I.1.39 Vārt. 10; cf.
also Par. Sek. on Pari. 85.
विविकित्साथाँय the indeclinable नूनम्
called विचिकित्सार्थाँय in the Nirukta;
the word विचिक्रित्सा is explained as



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-344.png}}}}}}

→、→、
iंवचत्र
confirmation after deliberation by
Durgācār ya. cf. भाषायाम् | उभयमन्व-
ध्यायम् । विचिकित्सार्थीयश्च पदपूरणश्च 1 जूनमिति
विचिकित्साथॉय: Nir. I.5.
विचित्र of various or wonderftīl kinds
beyond our ken or comprehension
cf. विचित्रास्तद्धितवृत्तयः M.Bh. on P.HI.
4.32 Vārt. 7; VI. 1. 99 Vārt. 2.
विचेछेद (1) breach or break (in the
Samhitāpāgha); utterance of words
separately by breaking their
coalescence; cf. पदविच्छेदः असंहितः V.
Pr.I.156; (2) doub}ing of a conso-
mant technically called यम ; cf.
अन्त:पदे अपञ्चमः पञ्चर्मेषु विच्छेदम् V.Pr.
|IV.163.
विजयगणिन् a.Jain grammarian of the
sewenteenth century who wrote a
commentary on the Haimalaghu-
prakriyā.
विजया name of a commentary on the
ILaghtn$abdendu$ekhara by Siva-
nārāyat)a.
विजयानन्द् called also विद्यानन्द, a gra-
mmar scholar of the Ktan tra
school who wrote (1) Kātantra-
dhātuvrtti (2) Kātantrottara and
(3) Kriyākalāpa.
विज्ञान specific knowledge or under-
standingः; cf. सिद्धे तु धर्मोपदेशने अनवयव-
विज्ञानाद्यथा लौकिकवैदिकेषु; M. Bh. on P.
VI.1. 84 Vart. 5.
विज्ञेय a matter of special understand-
ing; the phrase अवश्यं चैतद्विज्ञेयम् very
frequently Occurs in the Mahābhā-
$ya; cf. M.Bh. on P.I.1.1, 3, 5, 22,
I.2.47, 48, 64, I.4.23 etc.
विद् krt affix ( वि, व् or nil) applied to
the roots जन् , सन् , खन् , क्रम् and गम्
and tO the rOOt अद् in Special cases
as seen in Vedic Lterature; e.g.
अब्जाः, गेो५ा;, कूपखा:, दधिक्राः, etc.
विट्टल or विश्लेश grandson of रामचन्द्रशेघ
the author of the प्राक्रियाकीमुदी. He
was aTelagu Brāhumat1a of Āndhra
328
' who lived in the beginning of the t
विधि
sixtcenth century and wrote a
commentary nafmed प्रसाद on the
Pr akriyà-Kaumudi and two small
works अव्ययार्थानरूपण and पाणिनिसूत्रवृत्ति.
विडच्य् Or बिडच् tad. affix विड applied
to · the word नि in the sense of
depreSSion of thट nOse. See under
बिडच॒; cf. P. V.2.32.
विद्यानन्द See विजयानन्द.
विद्यानिवास name of a commentary
on Bopadeva's Mugdhabodha.
विद्याविनैोद grandson of Rāmeśvara-
bhag¢a of Pratisthāna who wrote a
grammar of the PrākFta dialects.
विद्धस्प्रबोधिनी name of a commentary
on the Sārasvata-prakriyā by a
grammarian named Rāma..
विधमैक possessed of different phone-
tic prOperties.
विधल्छ् tad. affix विध applied to the
words भौरिकेि and others in the $epse
of *inhabited country'; e.g. भीरिकेि-
विधः, वैपेयविधः; cf. Kaś. On P. · IV.
2.54.
विधा charactcristic feature of an
activity ; cf. संख्याया विधार्थे धा l विधा
प्रकॉरः सर्वक्रियाविभ्रय एव गृह्यत Kāś. on P.
V.3.42.
विध्वान (1) prescription, statement; cf.
लेोपे हि ( प्रत्ययलक्षण-) विधानम् P.I. 1. 62
Vārt. 3; cf. also तत्र बृद्धिविधानम्. P.
VI. 1.85 Vārt. 16; (2) instrument
or cause of an activity ; cf. विधिवि-
धानावेिधिभाजां ऋयाणां संनिधाने तदन्तविधि-
भैवति Siradeva Pari. 13.
विधारण ' mention of a consonant as
intact i.e. without any phonetic
coalescence or संधेि; the same as
अाभेनिधान. The term is used in this
sense in the Prāti$ākhya workS.
विश्धि (l) a prescriptive rule ; cf. तत्र
अ॒पूर्वो धिधिरस्तु नियमेोस्तु इत्यपूर्व एव विधि॒ि-
भैश्धेिप्यति न नियम: M.Bh. on P.I. 4.3;
ct. also समर्थः पदविधि: l विपूर्वाद्धाञ्ञः कर्म-
साधन इकार: । विधीयत विाधरिति M.Bh.on



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-345.png}}}}}}

वधिबलोयस्त्व
329
विन्यय
P.II. 1.!; (2) prescription, State-
ment; injumction; cf. अस्ति भावसा-
धनः । विधानं विधिः l M.Bh. on P. I. 1.
57.
विधिबलीयस्त्व thc superior strength
of an injunctive rule; the term is
very frequently used by ! gramma-
rians in speaking about} the rela-
tive strength of rules; cf. the term
लेोपावाधबलीयस्त्व. M.Bh.. on P.VHI.2.3.
विधिवाक्य an injunctive statement
Or Sentence•
विधेय (1) prcdicate as constrasted
with उदेश्य; cf.समर्थाधिकारस्य विधेयसामाना-
धिकरण्यीिन्नयमेानर्थक: M.Bh. on P.II.l.
1 Vārt. 17; (2) that which should
be prescribed as contrasted with
प्रतिष्षध्य; cf. तिङ् च काश्चिद्विधेयः काश्चेत्
प्रतिषेध्यः M.Bh. on P.I. 2.64 Vārt.9.
विध्यादि the senses headed by विधि as
given in the rule विधिनिमन्त्रणामन्त्रणाधी-
|ष्टसंप्रश्नप्रार्थनेषु लिङ् P. III. 3.16l ; cf.
विथ्यादिषु सप्तमी च Kāt. III.1.20; cf.
also विध्याादिषु क्रियार्थीद्द्छेिङ् भवति Candra
Wyāk. I.3. l21.
विध्येकवाक्यता forming one singlestate-
ment or idea with the prescriptive
statement; union With the prescrip-
tive rule so as to form one rule
with it. The term is used in conn-
ection with प्रातिषेध or prohibitive
assertions which hawe to be ex-
plained in combination with the
prescriptive sentences or vidhi-
vakyas; cf. निषधवाक्यानामपि निधेध्य-
विशेषाकाङ्क्षक्षत्वाद्विद्ध्येकवाक्यतयैवान्वयः Par.
Sek. on Pari. 2, 3.
विन् tad. afiix ( विनी ) in the sense of
possession applied to the words
तपस॒त् , सहस्र, ऊर्जस्, माया, मेधा, खज़् and
words ending in अंसु, as also wher-
ever it is seen ( बहुलं ) in Vedic
literature; e. g. तपस्विन् , ऊर्जस्विन् ,
मायाविन्, स्राग्वन्, पयस्विन् etc.; cf. P. V.
2.102, 114, 121, 122.
विनत cerebralized, turned into a
42
cerebral letter ण् or षू; see the
word नति meaning cerebralization
or Mtirdhanyabhāwa.
विन॒यविजय a.Jain grammarian Who
has Written a gloss on हैमलघुप्राक्रिया.
वि:ायादि a class of words headed by
विनय to which the taddhita affix
, इक ( ठक् ) is applied without any
change of sense;cf.विनय एव त्रैनायेकः |
इसामयिकः । औोपथिकः । Kāś. on P.V.4.34.
विनाम cerebralization; cf. the word
नति; the word was used in ancient
grammar workS in the sense of णत्व
( change of न् into ण् ); cf. अग्रहणं
`चन्नुड्विधिलादेशविनामषु ऋकारग्रहणम्; M.
Bh. on P.VIII.4, 1 Vart.. 2.
विनाशा disappearance, elision; the
word is frequently used in the
sense of lopa; cf. एतच्च नित्यषु शब्देषु
नेापपद्यते यस्सतो नाम विनाशः स्यादसतो व
प्रादुर्भीवः M.Bh. on P. I.1.56Vart.12.
वेनि tad. afiix धिन्. See the word विन्.
विनिग्रहार्थाँय meant to cau}se prohibi-
tion or oppositioI।; cf अह इति च ह
इति च विनिथ्रहार्थीयौ इदं ह करिष्यति । इदं
न करिष्यतीति Nir.I.5.
विनिभित्त caused by different condi-
tions; due to different causes; cf.
बह्वनड्वांहि ब्राह्यणकुलानि विनिमित्तवितौ M.
Bh. on P.VII.1.72 Vart. 3.
विनियोग employment separately of
different persons or things for
different purposes; cf. अहेति विनियोगे
च P.VIII. 1.61;cf. also अह विनियोगे ।
धिनियेागेीा नाम द्वयेा:' पुरुषयेोरेकास्मिन्कमैणि
एकस्य पुरुष्प्रस्य संबन्धः अन्यस्मिन्कर्मणि अपरस्य
V.Pr.. VI.21.
विनिवर्तक lit. sending away; causing
prohibition; cf. . विशेषण , निवर्तयतीति
विनिवर्तकः | त्वथैवेति विनिवर्तकाधिकारकावधा-
रका: T.Pr. XXI[.6.
विन्यय the same as विन्यास; placing or
employment of the instrument of
sound to touch the various places
or sthānas where Sound is produc-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-346.png}}}}}}

विपरेिणाम
330
विभक्ति
ed;cf. अंनुप्रदानात्संसगत् िस्थानात् करणविन्य-
यात् । जायते वर्णवैशेष्यं परीमाणाच्च पञ्चमात् ll
T. Pr. XXIII.2.
विपरिणाम change; cf. कार्यविपरिणामाद्वा
सिद्धम् । कार्यस्य संप्रत्ययस्य विपरिणामः कार्य-
विपरिणामः M.Bh. on I.1.56 Vārt. l4.
The word is very frequently uSed
in connection with a change Of
the case of a. WOrd in a grammar
rule which becomes necesSary for
interpretation; cf. विभक्तिविपरिणामाद्वा
सिद्धम् ās also अर्थीिद्वभत्तिविपीरणामो भवति l
M.Bh. on P.I.3.9,12;V.3.60, VI.J •
4, VII.3.50.
विपरीत (1) in the opposite or reverse
way ; cf. विपरीताचेति वक्तव्यम् l पारावारीण:
M.Bh. on P. IV. 2.93 Vārt. 2; (2)
change of नै* into इ, seen sometimes
in Wedic ILiterature when that ऋते is
preceded or followed by a, palatal
letter; e.g. शृटङ्गे intO ाशिङ्गे (Rk. Sarinh.
V-2.9) बिभृयात् into बिभियात्(Rk.Safmh.
X.X.9) विचूत्त into विचित्त Rg. Veda
II.27.16; cf. अनन्तरे तद्विपरीतमाहुस्तालब्थे
|श्श्रृंङ्के बिभ॒यााद्वचूत्ताः R.Pr,XIV.17.
विपर्यय change in the reverse order ;
reverse transpOsition; interversion;
cf. the usual expression वर्णविपर्यय.cf.
वर्णीगमाद् भवेद्धंसः सिंहो वर्णविपर्ययात् 1 S.K.
on P.VI.3.109. The word व्यत्यय is
used in this sense in the Mahā-
bhāsya; cf. वर्णब्यूत्यये कृतस्तर्कः । हिंसे:
सिंहः ! M.Bh. on Siva Stitra 5 Vārt.
15; cf. also Kā$. on P.VI.3.109 and
Candra W'yàkarana II.2.48.
विप्रकर्ष distance; standing at a dis-
tance; cf. न च कालनक्षत्रयो: संनिकर्षवि-
प्रकर्षोीं स्तः M.Bh. om P.IW.2.3.
विप्रकृष्ट remote; at a distance,with a
word or two intervening; cf.
संनिकृष्टविप्रकृष्टयेाः संनिकृश्टस्य t given like a
|Paribhāsā-Stitra V.Pr.I.144.
विप्रतिपन्न (1) doubtful; a matter of
doubt; cf. विद्याद् विप्रतिपन्नानां पादवृत्ताक्षरै-
ऋर्तचाम् R.Pr.XVII.13; (2) perverted;
cf. तेभ्य एवं विप्रतिपन्नबुाद्वभ्यः अध्येतृभ्यः इदं
शास्त्रमन्वाचष्ट M.Bh. on I.1 Ahmika 1.
विप्राताषिद्ध standing in conflict; con-
flicting; contradictory; cf. परस्परविरुद्धं
विप्रतिषिद्धम् Kāś. on P. II 4. 13.
विप्रतिषेध confiict, OppOsition; oppo-
sitiOn or conflict between " wo
rul6?s Of equal strcngth, which be-
come applicable simultaneously
when Pānini's dictum विप्रतिषेधे परं
कार्यम् applies and the rule mention-
ed later on, or Subsequently, in the
A$रृādhyāyi is allowed to apply; cf.
विघ्प्रतिषेधे परं कायम् P.I.4.2; cf. also
यत्र द्वौ प्रसङ्गौ अन्यार्थीं एकस्मिन्युगपत् प्रानुतः
स तुल्यबलविरोधो विप्रतिषेधः: KāŚ. on P.I.
4.2; cf. also विप्रतिषेध उत्तरं बलवदलेपे
V. Pr. I.159. The dictum of the
application of the subSequent rule
jis adopted only if th e conflicting
rules are of equal strength; hence,
rules which are cither nitya, anta-
raihga or apavada, amOmg which
each SubSequent one is more power-
ful than the preceding Oneः and
which are all more powerful than
the पर or the subsequent rule, set
aside the पर rule. There is another
dictum that when by the dictum
about the subsequent rule being
more powerful, an earlier rule
is set aside by a later rule, the
earlier rule does not apply again
in that instance, barring , a few
exccptional cases; cf. सकृद्भतीं विप्रतिषेधे
यद् वाधितं तदू बाधितमव l पुनःप्रसङ्गविज्ञानात्
सिद्वेम् Par. Sek. Pari. 40, 39.
विप्रयोग use of a word against
the Warrant of experience, i.e.
against what is actually Seen; e. g•
दृश्यत खल्वपि विप्रयेोगः ॥ तद्यथ[ | अक्षीणि मे
दर्शनीयानि, पादा मे सुकुमारतरा: M. Bh.
on P.I.4.21 Vārt.. 1.
विप्रराजेन्द्र a grammarian who has
written पाणिनिसूत्रविवरण, a gloss on the
Stitras of Papaini.
विभत्ति lit. division, separation; sepa-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-347.png}}}}}}

विभत्तेिपाद 331 विभज्यान्वाख्यान
ration of the base i.e. that to a vowel. Such words are look-
factor which showS the * base ed upon,*and are treated as inde-
separately. The wordÇ विभाते is
generally used in the sense of
case affixes ; but in Panini?s gra-
mmar the term विभाति is applied
alsO to personal endings appli-
ed to roots to form werbs; cfविभात्त-
श्च । सुप्तिडैौ विभक्तिसंज्ञैौ स्तः S.K. on Pan.
I.4.104. The term is also applied
tO tad.afiixes which are applied
tO pronouns, किम् and बहू, ending in
the ablative or in the locative case
Or in other cases on rare occasions.
Such affixes are तम् (तसिल्छ् ), त्र, (त्रल्छ्),
ह, अत्, दा, ऋहित्छ्, दानीम्, था ( थाल्छ् ) and
|थम् given in P.V.3.1 to V.3.26.The
caSe affixes are further diwided into
उपपदविभक्ति affixes amd कारकविभक्ति
affixes. For details see P.II.3.1
to 73.
विभतिपाद conventional name given
to the third pāda of the fifth
Adhyaya of Pātaini?'$ A$tādhyāyi, as
it begins with the Stitra प्राग्दिशेा
विभवेितः P.V,.3.1.
विभत्तिप्रतिरूपक a term applied tO
Such words ending with krt affixes
aS appear similar to words ending
with case-affixes; Such words have
no further case affixes put after
them, and hence, they are called
by the term *avyaya* ; e.g. कर्तुम्: cf.
विभकेितप्रतिरूपकमव्ययम् similar to उपसर्ग-
विभक्तिस्वरप्रातरूपकाश्च निपाताः gataasütra
inside the.Cādigana P. I.4.57.
विभत्तिबलीयस्त्व the relative superior
strength poSSesSed by the कारकवि-
भक्ति which takes place in superse-
SSion of the उपपदाश्वेभक्ति when both
becorme applicable at one and the
Same time; e.g. मुनित्रयं नमस्कृत्य and
not मुनित्रयाय नमस्कृत्य; cf. उपपदविभक्तेः
कारकविभक्तिर्बलीयसी Par. $ek. Pari. 94.
विभान्तिस्वरप्रतिरूपक similar in form
' to a word ending in a case-aftix Or
clinables;e.g. शनैः, चिरेण, अस्ति, उ, ए,
etc.; cf.	theत्रै usual expreSsions
तिङन्तप्रतिरूपकमब्यथम् etc. cf. विभक्तिस्वरप्र-
तिरूपकाश्च निपाता भवन्ति M. Bh. ora P.
VIII.3.1; cf. 5also उपसर्गविभक्तिस्वरप्र-
तिरूपकाश्च निपाताः!a gat}astitra inside
the चादिगण mentioned in P.I.4.57.
विभक्त्यर्थ lit. the sense of a case-affix,
as also of a persOnal affix; the
term is applied to the Kāraka
Prakarana or Kāraka chapter or
topic in grammar where senses of
the विभक्ति affixes are fully discuSS-
ed and illustrated; cf. विभक्त्यर्थाः a
chapter in the Sidãhānta-kaumudi
of Bhāttoji Dik$ita.
विभक्त्यर्थनिणैय a general term given
to a chapter on case-affixes as alsO
to treatises discussing the Sense and
relations of case-affixes. There is
a treatise of this name Written by
Giridhara, and another written by
Jayakई$raa MaunÎ.
काशा a work on syntax of
words written by a grammariar1
named Kamalākarabhatta.•
*वभक्त्यर्थप्रधान an indeclinable, which
i$ generally described as having the
serise of a	case afiix aS predomi-
nant in it; e.g. तत्र, अधः, नीचैः etc.;
some indeclinables have the Sense
of a root viz. the verb-activity as
predominant; cf. किंचिद्य॒यं वि॒िभक्रृयर्थ-
प्रधानं किाचित् क्रियाप्रधान्म् M• Bh- On
|]P. I.1.38.
विभज्यान्वारव्यान a method of forrning
a word, or of arriving at the com-
plete förm of a word by puttihg
āll the constituent elements of the
word such as the base, `the affix,
the augment, the modification, th६ .
accent, etc. one after , another and
then arriving at the form instead
of completing the formation stage
वि



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-348.png}}}}}}

विभाग
by stage; e. g• in arrivंng at the
fÓrm खेत्रौघ्नी the wording खैौघ्न + अ +ई
is to be considered as it StandS
and not स्रौघ्न + अ = स्त्रौघ्न and then
स्त्रौघ्न+-ई. The विभज्यान्वाख्यानपक्ष in
connection with the formation of
a word corresponds to the पद-
संस्कारपक्ष in connection with the
formation of a Sentence.
विभाग (1) lit. division, splitting; the
splitting of a sentence into its,con-
stituent parts viz. the words; , the
splitting of a wOrd into itS cOn-
stituent parts viz. the base.ईं the
affix, the augments and theilike;
(2) understanding or taking a
thing Separately frOm a group of
two or more; cf.अवश्यं खल्वपि विभज्येो-
पपदग्रहणं कर्तव्यं ये हि बद्दूनां विभागस्तदर्थम् ।
संाकाश्यकेभ्यश्च पाटलिपुत्रकेभ्यश्च माथुरा अाभ-
रूपतराः, M. Bh. on P.V.3.57; (3)
· splitting of a Samhitā, text of
the Vedas into the Pada text; cf.
अथादाबुत्तरे विभारेगा हृस्वं व्यञ्जनपरः T. Pr.
III.1, where विभाग is explained as
पदविभाग by the commentntor; cf.
also R.Pr.XVII.15; (4) the capa-
city Of the Kārakas (to show the
sense); cf. कारकशाक्तिः विभागः Nyāsa
on Kāś.I.2.44.	→
विभाषा optionally, alternatively; the
wOrd is explained by Pāmini as नवा
in the rule न वेति विभाषा (P.I.1.44)in
consonar.ce with its derivation
frot1 the root भाष्ञ् with वि; cf. नेति
प्रातिषेधे वेति विकल्पस्तेयो; प्रातिषेधविकल्पयो-
र्विभाषेति संज्ञा भवति । विभाषाप्रदेशेषु प्रतिधधवि-
कल्पाबुपतिष्टेते ! तत्र प्रतिषेधेन समीकृते धिषये
प॒श्चाद्विकल्ट्पः प्रवर्तते. The option (विभाषा)
is further divided into three kind$
प्राते विभाषा, अप्राते विभाषा and उभयत्र
विभाष्ष॒ा._For details see Mahabhāsya
on P. I.1.44.
विभाषित (1) stated Or enjoined optio-
' mally; cf. मेध्यः पश्शृार्वैभाषितः । अालळेधव्येो
नालञ्श्धव्य इति M. ]Bh. on P. I.1.. 44
Vārt. 15; cf. also मन्ये धातुर्विभाषित: |
332
विमोक्ष
M. Bh. on P.III.1.27 Vārt.4 ; (2)
rOOtS taking perSomal affixes of
both the Padas.
विमलकीर्ति a Jain grammarian of the
sixteenth century who Wrote a
short metrical work on the padas
of rOots, known by the name
पदव्यवस्थासूत्रकारिश्का.
विमलमति an old grammarian who
is believed to have written a gloss
named भागवृति on |Panini's Sfitras
to which the grammarians
Puru$Ottamadeva, Siradeva and
others of the twelfth century
refer. SoIne Scholars say that
भागवृत्ति was written by भर्तृहरि;
but it is not feasible, aS there is a
refererace to Māghakāvya in
भागबृंति. In books on grammar,.
especially of the Eastern School in
the 11th and the 12th centt:ry,
there are several quotations from
the Bhāgavtti. See भागवृांते.
CX → →
विमलसरस्वती 'a grammarian who
wrote a Small gramrnar work
named रूपमाल|.
विमुक्तादि a class of words headed by
the word विमुक्त to which the tadd-
hita affix अ ( अण॒ ) is added in the
Sense Of * poSsessed of?, provided
the wOrd sO formed, denotes a
chapter or a leSSOn of a sacred
work ; cf.विमुक्तशव्देस्मिन्नस्ति वैमुक्तकोध्यायः
अनुवाको वा । दैवासुरः । Kāś. on P. V.
2.61. →
धिमेक्ष liberation of the last letter
(especially a class cOnsonant) of a
word frorm phoraetic modifications
by coalescence with the initial
letter of the following word, or
liberation of modification of a
consOnant Or vowel standing at the
end of a wer&e or sometimes even
in the middle of a verse; e-g. तत् नेो
मित्रः,सम् यौमि, संमधुमतीर्मधुमतीभिः पृच्यन्ताम्
शुक्रं दुदुह्रे अहृयः; cf. V. Pr.I.90,91.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-349.png}}}}}}

→、
ावराग
→、 → →
वेिरगां omission of a consonant, some-
timeS when it iS preceded and also
followed by another consonant, as
if it were squeezed between the
twO; this is no doubt looked upon
as a fault; e.g. the omission of
the consonant द् in उपमा षट् द्वा द्वा
uttered as उपमा षट् वा द्वाः cf.अन्येान्येन
व्यञ्जनानां विराग;ः |R. Pr.XIV Where
Uvvata explains विराग as लेोप.
विराम an ancient term used in the
Prātiśakhya works for a stop or |
pauSe in general at the end of a
word, or at the end of the first
member of a compound, Which is
shOwn split up in the Padapagha,
Or inside a word, or at the end of a
word, Or at the end of a wowel
when it is followed by another
vowel. Theduration of this wirāina
is different in difierent circum-
staraces; but Sometimps under the
Same circumstances, it is deScrib-
ed differently in the different
Prātiśākhyas. Generally,there iऽno
pause betWeen two consonants as
alSO between a vowel and a conso-
nant preceding or following it.The
Taittiriya PratiŚakhya has given
four kinds of विराम (a) ऋग्विराम,pause
at the end of a foot or a werse of
duration equal to three mātrष्ās or
moras, (b) पदविराम ईpause between
twO words of duration equal to
two mātrās; e. g. इंधे त्बा ऊर्जे त्वा, (c)
pause betWeen two words the pre-
ceding one of which ends in a
vowel and the following begins
with a vowel, the vowels .being
not euphonically copmbined; this
pause has a duration ofone māitrā
e,g• स इधानः, त एनम् , (d) pause bet-
ween two wowels inslde a word
which is a rare occurrence; this
has a duration of half a rnātrā;e.g-
प्रउगम्, तितउः:; cf. ऋग्विरामः पदविरामेो
विवृतिावरामः समानपदविवृत्तिविरामस्त्रिमात्रेो
333 विरोध
द्विमात्र एकमात्रोर्धमात्र इत्यानुपूब्यैण T. Pr.
XXII. 13. The word विवृत्ति is ex-
plained as स्वरयेोरसंधिः. The vivगृtti-.
wiràma is further diwided into
वत्सानुस्āति which has the preceding
vOwel shOrt and the succeeding
|long, बत्सानुसारिणी which has the pre-
ceding vOWel a long one and the
SuCceeding vOwel a short one,
पाकवती Which has both the vowels
shOrt, and पिपीछिका which has got
bQth , the vowels long. This four-
fold division is given in the Sik$ंā
where their duration is given as
one mātrā, one mātrā, three-four-
thS of a mātra and one-fourth of
a mātra respectively. The dura-
tion between the two"words of a
compound word when split up in
the पदपाठ is also equal fo one
mātrā; cf. R.Pr.I.16. The word
वैिराम occurs in Pānini's rule विसमेोऽ
वसानम् P.I. 4.110 where commen-
tatorShave explained it as absence;
cf. वणीँनामभावोवसानसंज्ञः स्यात् S.K.on P.
1.4.l l0; cf. also विरातिावरराम: || विरम्येत
अनेन इति वा विरामः Kaś. on P.I.4.I 10.
According to Kā$ikā ewen in the
Sarhhitā, text, there is a duration of
halfa mātrā betWeen the warious
phonetic elements, ewen between
tWo consonantS or betWeena wowel
and a comsonant, which, however,
is quite imperceptible; cf. परो यः
संनिकर्षो वणनिां अर्धमात्राकालव्यवधानं स
संहितासंज्ञेो भवति Kaś. on P. I.4.I09,
cf. also विरामे मात्रा R.T.35; cf. also
R.Pr.I.16 and 17. For details see
Mahābhāsya on P. I. 4.109 and
I,4.110.
विरीसचु tad. affix विरीस or बिरीस appli-
ed to the word नि in the sense of
flatness of nose. See बिरीस above; cf.
P. V• 2.32..
विरोध opposition or conflict between
two rules where, the rule which
| is subsequently mentioned is



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-350.png}}}}}}

विलमिबत
334
विवृ
regarded as strOnger and given pre-
ference to, as far as its application
is concerned; cf. तुल्यबलयोर्विरोधेीं विप्र-
तिषेधः { विप्रतिषेधे परं कायैम् P. I.4.2; (2)
contradiction where one thing
prevents another; cf. सर्वनामस्थान इति
अनुवर्तमानमपि विरोधादिह न संबध्यते Kāś.on
|P.VII.1.86.
विलम्बित a kind of tone where the
interval between the utterance of
two letters as also the time requir-
ed for the utterance of a letter is
comparatively longer than in the
othट्टैr two kind$, viz: द्रुत and मध्य्;
cf. ये हि द्रुतायां वृत्तैो वर्णाः त्रिभागाधिकालेत
मध्यमायाम्,ये मध्यमायां वणीँस्त्रिभागाधिकास्ते
विलम्बितायाम् M. Bh. on P.I.1.70; cf.
also द्रुतविलम्बितयेोश्चानुपदेशात् P. I.1.69
Vārt. 11•
विलम्बिता वृच्ति -retarding or slow
manner of speech in which the
letters are uttered quite distinctly ;
this kind of speech is followed by
the preceptor while teaching
Veda, to his pupils; cf.. अभ्यासार्थे द्रुतां
वृर्त्ति प्रयेोगार्थे तु मध्यमाम् ! →、 " " →、→
कुयीद् वृत्तिं विलम्बिताम् R. Pr. XIII.
19. cf. also T. Pr. XXIII. 24. See
विलम्बित above.
विलास name of a commentary by
Jayakr$']1a MaunÎ on the Madhya-
siddhānta KaumudÎ of'Varadarāja.
विलिङ्ग (1) a substantive which is
declined in all the three genders
cf. Hemacandra III. 1.142; (2) of
a differenat gender (although in
the same , case); cf. विलिङ्गं हि भवान्
लोके निर्देशं करोति M.Bh. on P. I. 1.44
Vārt 5.
विलेप the same as लोप which see
abowe. The term विलेोप was possi-
bly in use before Panini*s time;
cf उदात्तपूर्वै नियतस्वरोदये परो विलोपोऽनियतेाँ
यदावरः |R. Pr. XI. 26; cf. also |
विलेपो विनाशः Uvvata on R. Pr. !
X1. 28,
、	→ →
विलेोम reverse, in the opposite way;
the same as प्रतिलेीम which see
abowe.
विवक्षा intention or desire, generally
of the speaker with regard to पुंthe
sense to be conveyed by his
words; the words वत्कुर्विवक्षा are
often used by grammarians in
this sense; cf. विवक्षातः कारकाणि (Pari-
bhagā)ँcf. also कथम् lविवक्षातः t M. Bh.
on P.* I.1.66-67, I.2.64 Vārt. 53,
|IV. ई1.3; cf. also विवक्षाधीना
शब्दव्युत्पत्तिः Durgh. Vr. II.2.8; cf.
also इतिकरणेोा विवक्षार्थः KāŠ. on P. II.
2.27, IV. 2.21, IV. 2.55,ँ57, etc.
विवरण critical comment; a raame
given by a writer of commentary
wOrkS to a critical commentary
work written by him; e. g. काशि-
काविवरणपञ्जिका ( न्यास ) by Jinendra-
buddhi, भाव्यप्रदीपविवरण ( उद्ट्ड्द्येोत ) by
Nāgeśa, as alsO लचुशब्देन्दुदेखिरविवरण
by Bhāskara$astri Abhyankar.
विवर्तन transformation; the word is
generally used in the sense of
transformation Of the Padapātha
into the Sarihhitāpāgha.
विवार name given to an external
effort in the production of a
sound when the wocal chords of
the glottis or larynx are extended;
cf. कण्ठबिलस्य विकासः विवारः Uddyota
ora M. Bh.. I. 1.9. cf. also विश्वरणं
कण्ठस्य विस्तरणम् | स एव विवाराख्यः बाह्यः
प्रयत्नः | ताल्मन्सति श्चासेो नाम बाह्यः प्रयत्नः
क्रियत । त॒द्ध्वनिसंसर्गादघेाषेा नाम बाह्यः
प्रयत्नेो जायते ' इति शिक्षायां स्मर्यते Bhā5ya
om T. Pr. II. 5.
विविभक्ति possessed of a different case-
affix; cf. एवमपि विविभत्तीनां न प्राप्नोति !
समर्थीत् समर्थे पदात् पदेद इति M. Bh. on
P. II. 1.1. Vārt 19; cf. also M.
Bh. on P. I. 1.27, VI. 4.1; VII.
2.82.
विवृत name given to an internal
effort (as contrasted with the exter-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-351.png}}}}}}

वेिवृतकण्ठ 335
विशेाषवेिहित
nal effort named विवार ) when the | विशयवत् doubtful;possessed ofa doubt
tip, middle, or root of the tongue
which is inStrutmental in produc-
ing a SOund, is kept apart from
about itself; cf. विशयवत्येा हि वृत्तयेीं
भवन्ति l यथार्थ धिभक्तीः संनमयेत् । · प्रत्तम् ।
अवत्तम् t Nir.II.1.
the .place,.0t sthāna, of the, pr9-| विशिष्ट (1) lit. specific; qualified by,
duction of the sound; cf. तत्रेीत्पत्तेः
प्राग्यदा जिह्वाग्रोपाग्रमध्यमूलानि तत्तद्वर्णोत्धात-
६थानानां ताल्वादीनां दूरतः वर्तन्ते तदा विवृतता,
Tattwabodhini on S. K. on P.I.1.9.
विवृतकण्ठ produced by fully cxtend-
ing the chordS of the throat.
characterized byः cf. चेतन नञ्विशिष्टेट-
नानञ् ;. P. II.1.60; cf. also प्रातिपदि-
कग्रहणे लिङ्गविशिष्टस्यापि ग्रहणम् Par. Sek.
Pari.71 ; (2) different; cf. विशिष्ट-
लिङ्गींानां भिन्नलिङ्गानां शश्दानाँ Kā$. onP.II.
4.7. →
The first and the second claSS- || विशेाष specific nature Causing a differ-
consonantS are described as
विवृतकण्ठ; cf. तत्र वर्गाणां प्रथमद्वितीया
विवृतकण्ठाः श्वासानुप्रदाना अघेोषाः M, Bh.
on P. I. l.9. Vārt. 2.
विवृततर pOSSeSSed of the internal
effort wiz. विवृत which is specially
ence; difference; specific feature;
cf. सामान्यग्रहणे विशेष्ठा॒नतिदेशः(Paribhāgā)
६f. alsO यस्तु प्रयुङ्क्ते कुशलेी विशेषे etc.
M. Bh. in Ahmika l ; cf. also
क्रियावाचकम्म॒ारूयात॒मुपसर्गोाँ विशेषकृत् Uvvata
on V.B'r.VIII.50.
strengthened. The diphthongs hawe विशेषक determining; determinant; cf.
got at the time of their produc-
tiOn the internal effort विवृत spe-
gially strengthened; cf. यदत्रावर्ण,
धिवृततरं तदन्यस्मादवणत् M. Bh. on Stva
अस्त्यत्र विशेष: 1 राजा विशेषकः प्रयुज्यत तेन
विशिष्ट॒स्यानयनं भवति; M. Bh. om P.II.
2.6; cf. अवयवे कृतं लिङ्गं समुदायस्य विशेषकं
भवतेि; M.Bh.on P.I.3.62 Wart.5.
Stitra, 3,4 Vārt. 10. विशेषप्णा attribute; adjectiwe; any
विवृच्त Separated, disjoined; the word
is used in connection with the
Separated elements of a euphonic
'combination; the words विाàट्रेट,
word which qualifies another;
hence, subordinate; cf. विशेषणानां
|न्चाजातेःl जातिर्यद्विशेषणम्, अाहोस्वित् जातेयनि
विशेष्णानि l M.Bh. on P.I.2.52.
अनेकीभूत and पृथग्भूत are used in the विशेषणसमास (1) a tatpuruga compo-
Sai१1€ 8eiaSe०
विवृाति (1) separation of the two
wowels which were euphonically
cOmbined intO one: the hiatuS or
position of two vowels near each
9ther; cf. विवृत्तिः स्वरयेोरसंधिः; (2) the
interwal between two vowels
placed near each other ; cf. स्वरयो-
रनन्तरयेोरन्तरं विवृत्तिः V. Pr. I. 1}9;
und of the type of Mayuiravyarih-
sakādi where both the words
which 3re compounded together
are adjectival; (2) a karmadhāra-
ya compOund where the second
|member is an adjectiwe; a deter-
minative COmpound; cf. गमनं च
`यचिरं च गमनचिरामेति विशेषणसमासोयम् Ka$.
on P.WI.2.6.
ðf āो$) सैहेितीर्याँर्यत्स्वरयैारन्तर्र् तद्वैिबृर्त्तिसैर्जु | विशेषप्रतिपत्ति a clgar understanding,
स्यात् Uvvata on R. Pr. II. 1. This
interval is one mātra according
to the Taittiriya PrātiŚākhya,
while it is only half-a-mātrā
or a determined Sense in a place of
doubt; cf. व्याख्यानतो विशेषप्रतिपातिर्नहि
संदेहादलक्षणम् Par. Sek. Pari. 1; also
M.Bh. in Ahhika 1.
according to the Rktantra and विशेाषविहित SpeCifically preScribed, as
the Rk-Prāti$akhya; cf. T. Pr.
XXII. 13; R. T. 35. See धिरुशम.
contrasted with prescribed in gen-
eral which is set aside; cf. सामान्य-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-352.png}}}}}}

विशेष्य
विहितस्य विशेघविहितेन वiधंः; M.Bh.Qj]
|P.II.1.24; cf. alsO M.Bl}. on P.III.
1.94 Wārt.l0, III. 2.77 €{c.
विशेष्य substantive, aS Opposed tO
विशेार्श्वेण adjective Qr qualifying; 6f.
भेदकं विशेषणम्, भेद्यं विशेष्यम् Kāś. on P.
II 1.57; cf. also विशेजणविशेाप्यभावो
विवक्षाानैबन्धन: KāंŚ. On P. II.1.36.
विश्रम्भ trelaxation, a charactcristic Of
the grave accet1t, aS cOntraSted
with अायाम which characterizeS the
acute accent; cf. उदप्तिश्चानुदासॆश्रधं
स्वरितश्च त्रयः स्वराः 1 अायामविश्रम्भाश्र्क्षेपे*त
उच्यन्ते ऽ क्षराश्रयाः ! र्थिश्रम्भः अद्भेिागमर्भे
गात्राणाम् Uvvata on R.b'r.III.1.विश्रम्भ
is the $ame as अन्ववसर्ग which is ex-
plained in the , Mahईंbhā$ya :५S
अन्ववसर्गो गात्राणां शिथ्ळिता. M. Bh. on.
|P. I.2.29,30,
विश्रान्तविद्याधर mame of a gramn1ar
work of a general type which
once occupied a prOiminent pOsi-
tion and was Studied as a text
book of grammar, rcpresenting am
independent systema. The work is
referred to by Hemacandra and
Harjbhadra.. It is attributcd to
Wāmana who may be the Same as
one of the joint WritcrS of the
KāŚikavgtti. In that case the date
of the work is the 7th century A.
D.;cf. the popular verse परेत्र पा0िनी-
यज्ञा: केावेत्कालापकेविदाः ! एंके विश्रान्तश्वेिश्ग्रा:
स्युरन्ये संाक्षतसारका: quoted ii1 Vol.VII
p. 388 Vyākarana Mahābhã$ya
ID.E. Society's edition.
विश्लेष separation of vowels that arc
in coalescence: showing separatcly
the tWO wowels that arc combincd
together in the Sarihhit:ंi Text.Thc
term is contrasted with प्रश्ले which
is the Same as एकादेश in the termi-
nology of Pamini.
विश्वकर्मशास्त्री name of a gratmmarian
who Wrote a commetatary सत्प्रक्रिया-
व्याकृति on the Prakriyā-kaumudi.
336
विषयसप्तर्मी
चेिश्वन्नाथदण्डिभट्ट . a well-known gra-
mmarian Of the nineteenth century
wkao wrOte several commentary
wOrks Of which the commentarie$
on the twO SekharaS Of Nageśa are
well-know;३ {O Scholars.
विश्वरूप a gratnmarian of the sixteenth
cent ury whO haS written a small
gra in rma r treatiSc Called विश्वरूप-
निश्चन्ध.
-~«、 *\ ^、... Q' →
ांवे2वं2वरत्तथि a grammarian who has
writtcn 8t gl()$S On the Siddhānta-
kautmttdi.
विषमपदव्याण्ठप[ ()r श्विष्प्रमी (1) a critical
cotmtmct1t.ut"y ()1} Nāg५:$a'S Laghu-
$abd५:ndu$(:kh:tr.t writtc11 by Rāg-
|havc11dr:ic:irya G:भुjendragadkar
of Satara Who lived in tl1c first half
of thc 1॥inetcenth century and Wh0
haS alSO Writtc11 a gloSS named
त्रिपथगा ‘on thc Paribhāgenduśe-
khara; (2) name of a commentary
on Nage$a's Paribhā$endu$ekhara
by Cidrttpā$raya: (3) name of a
commentary on Siradeva's Pari-
bhi$ivrtti..
विषमरागाता incorrcct nasalization,
menti0ractl {a$ a fault Of pronun•
ciation; cf. स्{द्रटंत{ धिपमरागता च l R.
Pr. XIV. 4.
विषय domain; province; cf. प्रकल्प्य
चापवाद*िप्यं तत `ठत्एर्गेभिभिश्चिशते 1 Par.
Sck. Pari. (j8.
विषयता being a subject of discussion
of; coming under the domain of,
applicability; thc meaning of
धिषयसप्तमी which is similar to विवक्षा.
विषयावषायभाच rclation between the
object and tl1c Su!}jcct; cf. प्रतिलक्ष्यं
लक्षणभदादस्ति धि'qयधि'¢श्यिभात्रः Kaiyata on
P. VI. 4.. 1(}4 Virt, 2.
विषयसप्तमी locativc case denoting the
do1main or province of a particular
suffix or a substitute or the like,
which could be actually applied
later on; this धिषयसtमी is contrast*



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-353.png}}}}}}

विषयार्थ
337
वेिस्पष्टादि
ed with परसतमी when the thing
|pmentioned in the locative case is
required , tÇ? . be present in front;
cf.'असति पौवाँपर्ये विषयसप्तमी विज्ञास्यते M.
Bh. on P. II. 4.35; cf. also अार्ध-
धातुके इति श्वेिषयसप्तमी Ka$. on P. II.
4.35; cf. also M. Bh. on P. III.
|1.26 and IV. 1.90.
विषयार्थ meant for showing the prO-
vince or domain Of the application
of a particular rule; gf. तत्रग्रहणं
( in तत्रेापपदं सप्तमीस्थम् ) विषयार्थम् M.
Bh. on P. ]III. 1.92 Vārt.6.
2^\ →
विष्णुपाणैडत a grammarian belong-
ing to the famous Se8a family of
grammarians, who haS written a
small treatise on Paribhāsas or
maximS of interpretation which
he has named परिभाषाप्रकाश.
विष्णुभट्ट ( विष्णुशास्त्री भट ) a scholar of
grammar of the latter half of the
nineteenth century who has
written leatrned commentaries on
the works of Nāgeśa Bhatta, two
of which wiz. चिच्चन्द्रिका and विष्णुभट्टी
are well known to scholars.
विष्णुभट्टी name given to the commen-
tary on the Paribhāgenduśekhara
written by Vignubhatta. See विष्णु-
भट्ट abowe.
विष्णुमित्र a Wedic Scholar who wrote
a gloSS on the Rk-Prāti$ākhya
which is know1n as पार्षदव्याख्या.
विष्णुमिश्र a $cholar of the Supadma |,
System of grammar who has
Written a commentary named
मकरन्द on the सुपद्मव्याकरण and also
a commentary on the सुपद्मसमाससंग्रह.
विसर्ग aspiration, leaving off the
breath generally at the comple-
tion of the utterance of a word
when there is a pause; the term
· विसर्जनीय was in use in ancient
times. Although not mentioned
in his alphabet by Panini, this
|phonetic element, visarga, is looked
43
•
i
{
upon as a letter; it is mentipned
aS One of the letters in the Sik$a
and the Prātiśākhya works and
Patafंjali has advised its inclusion
in the alphabet. As visarga
cannot be found in use indepen-
dently of another letter (which is
any wowel after which it occurs)
it is called अयेोगवाह.
विसजैनीय same as विसर्ग which see
above; cf. विसृज्यते पुनर्वर्णैर्न संबध्यते इति
विसर्गः; Durgasirihha on Kat. I. 1.
16. The term विसुष्ट is al8o used
in the Same sense. The wisar-
janīya haS the same position (स्थान)
in the mouth as the wowel after
which it occurs. It is a glottal
Sound; the Rk-Prāti$ākhya SayS
that Some scholars describe wi$ar-
janīya as a chest sound; cf. कण्ठयो-
कारः प्रथमपञ्चमौ च द्वावूष्माणैौ केचिदेत॒ावुर्रूयौ_।
R. Pr. I 18; cf. also उरसि विसर्जनीयों
वा R. T. 3.
विस्सृष्ट the same as Wisarjaniya or
Visarga, which see abowe.
विस्थान belonging to a position of ut-
terance (स्थान) Other than the one
aप्रsigned,or referred to; cf. विस्थान
स्पशै उदये मकारः R. Pr. IW. 3.
विस्पष्ट clear and correct; the term
is used in connection with the
pronunciation ofVedic words; cf
यथेीं एतत् · t अविस्पष्टार्था भवन्तीति Nir.
I. 16.
विस्पष्टादि a class of words headed by
the word विस्पश्ट which retain their
own accents in a compound when
they are the first members of a
compound, provided that any wOrd
of quality is the second member;
e. g. विस्पष्ट्रकटुक्रम् । व्यक्तलवणम् wherg
the words वेिस्पश्ट and व्यक्त are used
in the sense of clear, referring
to the different tastes; cf. Kā$• on
P.. VI. 2. 24.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-354.png}}}}}}

वेिस्वर
-338
चु
→ |]
विस्वर characterized by a faulty or |! चुक्र् (l) augment बु added (a) to the
incorrect accent, which is looked
upon as a fault of pronunciation.
विहार expansion of the pOsition
( &थान ) and the means of utter-
ance ( करण ) of a sound beyond
the necessary extent, which pro-
duceS a fault of pronunciation,
called व्यास; cf. विहारसंहारयेाव्यसपीडने l
' स्थानकरणयोर्विहारे विस्तारे व्यासो नाम देाघेीं
जायते Uvvata on R. Pr. XIVः 2.
विाहित prescribed by a rule; that for
which a vidhi or injunction has
been laid down. The Word is
wery frequently used by gram-
marians with respect to an affix
prescribed after a base.
विहितविशेषण an adjectival word gen-
erally in a different case from that
of the word to which it is applied
as an adjective, and hence, trans-
lated as *prescribed after' and not
aS * belonging to ' cf. विहितविशेषणं
धातुग्रहणम् । धातोयाँ विहित इति । M. Bh.
on P. I. 1.5 Vārt 3; cf. also M.
Bh. on II.4. 74. Vārt 1.
वीप्सा cOmplete application to all
the different parts; comprehensive
inclusion of every part or unit;
desire tO Qccupy completely; cf.
व्याातिवेिशेषविषया प्रयेी|क्तुरिच्छ्रI वप्सिा । नानावा- |ाँ
· चिन[मधिकरणानां क्रियागुण्ण॒ाभ्यां युगपत्प्रयोक्तुब्र्या-
ँट्तुन्र्यीप्तुमिच्छा नानाभूतार्थवााचिनीं शद्वानां यन्यि-
धिकरणानि वाच्यानितेषां क्रियागुणाभ्यां युगपत्प्रयेो-
· कुत॒मेिच्छा वष्स॒ि!ा;e.g. ग्रामेीं ग्राभेा रंमणीयः 1
Kā$. on P.VIII.1.4. For' details
See Mahābhagya on P.VIII. 1.1
,, and 4. . ' ,
उ॑ gerieràl ternभ्a for the augment " बुक्
· and thé affix€s ,बुक्, बुच्, वुञ्म् and बुन्.
After the indicātory letter'has dis`
appeared the remnant बु of the
affixes and nOt Of the augment, is
alway$ changed into अक; cf. युवेो-
P. WII.].].
word भ्रञ्	after i', when the tad.
a ffix ढहूँ ( एय ) in the sense of
अपत्य is affixed to it; cf. भ्रुवेा बुक् च
!'. LV. 1.125; (b) to the root ' भू
before an afiix | begin ning with ā
vOwel in the perfect and the aorist
tenSeS; c.g• बभूर्वं, अभूवन् etc.; cf.
P. VI. 4.88; (c) to the root सू in
the Perfect third pers. sing.; 'e.g.
ससूव, P.VII.4*74; (2) tad. afiix अक
applied to the word श्क्रन्था as seen
in use in the Ba n n u ( वणुं ) dis-
trict; e. g. का|न्थकम् , cf. P.IV.2.103.
चु tad. affix अःक्र applied optionally
with the afhixcs घ and इल to the
prepOsition उप when the whole
word is used aS the name ofa man
e.g. उपक: ; cf. KaŚ. on P. V. 3.80.
बुञ्ं (1) tad. affix अक्र causing vrddhi
to the vowel of the first sylla-
ble of' that wOrd to which it
is added, aS prescribed, (a) to
the words denoting an off$pring
as also to thc words उक्ष, उष्ट्र etc. in
the SenSe	Of *a , group' ; e. g.
औोपगवकम् , औींष्ट्रकभ्म् , कैदारकम्' etc.: cf.
P.IV.४.39, 40; (b) to the words
राजन्य and others in the scnse of
*inhabited cou1ntry' ; e. g. राञ्जन्यक:
देवनाथकः ctc., cf. IP. IV.2.53, (c)
to the words headcd by अरीहण
such as ठुःबण, ग्त्रदिर, भैत्रायण, काशकृत्रुन
etc. in the qu.{druple SenSeS; c, g.
अारीहणकम् , श्राँश्धणकम् , cf. P. IV.2.80,
(d) to the word धन्व meaning a
desert, to words with यूघ् or रं for
thcir penultimate, to words end-
ing in प्रस्थ, पुर् and वह as also to.
words. headed by धूम, नगार, अरण्य्,ँ
· कुरु, थुगान्धर etc., under certain condi-
. tions in thc 1niscellaneous Senscs;
· e. g. सांक|श्यक्रः, पाटलिपुत्रकः, माकन्दक:,
अाङ्गक:, वाङ्गंश्क्रः:, र्धेामकः, नागरक:, अारण्यक:
etc.; cf. P. IV.2.121-130,134,135,
136; (e) to thc words शरद्, अाश्वयुजी,
ग्र6िम, वसन्त, संवत्सर,अाग्रहायणी and others



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-355.png}}}}}}

बुन्
in the specific 8enscs given; cf. P.
|IV. 3.27, 45, 46, 49, 50; (f } to
words der1oting desc6ःhdence or
spirituah relation, words mcanit]g
families and warrior clans, words
कुलाल and Others, words meaning
clans, and Studentslearning a $peci-
fic Vedic branch in specific senses
prescribed ; e. g. अाचायक, मातामहक,
ग्लैीचुकायनक, कालात्ठक, काटक, काळापक
etc. ; cf. P. IV. 3.77, 99, 1 18,
126; (g) to the words शाकळ, उष्ट्र,
उमीं and ऊण in the specially giveia
senses; e.g. शाकल्ठः, संर्धः, औो'टूकः, औीभम्
अाँर्णम्, cf.P.I V.3.188, 157,158; (h) to
words with युय् aS the penultitmate,
and a long vowei precedii)g the
last one, to wordS in the dva11dwa
compound, and to the words अनेiज्ञ,
कल्याण arad others in the sense of
*भूature' 9r *proféssion':e.g.रामणीयकम॒
गौपालपशुपालिका, गार्गिीका, काठिका etc ; cf.
P. Y.1.132,133, 134; (2) k! t affix
अक added to {he roots निन्द् हिंम् and
others, and tO the roots देबू at1d कृञ्छ्श्
with a prefix before,it! the sense of
a habittlated,profession}al or skilled
agent; e.g. | निन्दकः:, परिक्षेपकः, अद्भूयकः,
परिदेवकः, अाक्रेाशकः ; etc. cf. P.III.2.
146, 147.	→
चुन् (1) |kJt.affix अक addcd to the roots
धु, सृ, and (ळू in thc sensc of *a'skill-
ed agent' and to any root in the
Sense Of *an agen t who is blessed' ; |.
e.g. प्रवक:, सरश्कः, लवकः, जीश्चश्कः
( meaning जीवतीत् ) नन्दकः, ( mean-
ing नन्दतात् ); cf. P. III. . 1. 149,
, 150; (2) tad. afÎix अक added {o(a)
the WOrds क्रम and others in , the
sense of * a student of '; e.g, क्रमकः, |,
, वृछुच्त्त (1) arrived at oraccomplished, as
पदक; शिक्षक्रः ममिांसकः:; cf. P... I V.2.6! ;
" (b) the words पूर्वीह्न, अपराह्ण etc. as
|also the words पथिन् and अमा|बास्या inः
the sense of *produccd iri*; e.g.
द्दृर्थं* ?श्क् ,पन्थक, अमांबास्यक; cf. P. IV.3.j|
28, 29, " 30; (c) the , words . कलापि,
339
वृत्त
*debt paid at the time of *, the
wOrds वासुदच aiad अर्जुन ira the sense of
*devoted to',and the dvandva com-
pound8 when the word$ so formed
mean either *enmity* or *nuptial
ties';e.g. कलापकम् (ऋणम्), यवकम् (ऋणम्)
वासुदवकः, अर्जुनकः, काकेाल्ट्रक्रिका, , कुत्सकु-
शिाकिका; cf.P.IV.3.48, 98,125; (d) the.
words गोषद, इष्षत्च etc. in the sense
of**containing* Or *poSSessing', .and
the word पाथिन् in the sense of *ex-
pert? e.g. इंष्षेत्वश्कः, पथकः; cf.P.V.2.62,
63; and (e) the woI ds पाद and शत
preceded by a :numeral, in the
sense of वप्सिा, aS also in the senses
of दाण्ड (fine) and व्यवसर्ग when those
words are prcceded by a nume-
ra!|; e.g. द्विपादिकां ( ददाति ), द्विशतिकां
( ददोति ), द्विपदिकां दाडितः: cf. Kā$. on
P. V,4.l and 2.
वृत् a word signifying the end of a
particular grQup .of words; the
word frequently occurs in the
Dhātupātha of Pāthini but not nece-
sSarily at the end of each clasS .or
group therein; e.g. टुचेIाश्व गतिवृद्धर्यौःl
वृत् । अंयं वदातश्च उद्रातैी परस्मैभाषी | Dhātu-
pā.ha at the end " of the First
Conjugation. Similarly ट्टेत् is used
at the emd of the fourth, fifth, and
sixth conjugations. → •
वृताादि a class of roots headed by	the
root वृत् which take optionally the
Parasmaipada afीिxes when the
vikarana स्य of the future tense and
the conditional mOOd, Or the
desiderative wikaratीa सन् is added
to them; c.g. वत्स्र्यति,,बर्तिष्यत; अ॒वत्स्र्र्युतु,
अवतिंष्यत,; विवृत्संति, वैिवर्तिषते cf. Kāś.
on P.Î. 3.92; cf.also P. WII. 2.59.
a result of'वृत्ति which means a further
grammatical formation from a
noun.or' a verb; resultat from श्a
,vँ!tti;' cf. याबृतां कामन्त्रारो ' बृतस्य,ये
' •--ं-५ {	|! ,लिङ्कसंख्ये ,त |::अतिदेक्ष्यते, न पुन्:{ ः प्राग्वृत्तेर्ये
अ*वेत्थ, यव ànd बुस 'in the sense ðf ९.
M. Bh. on " P.I.2.51; cf. also ंयुक्तं



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-356.png}}}}}}

वृत्ति
पुनयैद् वृत्तनिमित्तको नाम अनुबन्धः स्या॒त्; (2) ||
employment, the same as प्रयोग, cf.
वृत्ताद्वा । वृत्तं प्रयेागः । Pradipa on P. I.
3.9; (3)'behaviour, treatment; cf.
नकारस्योष्मवद् वृत्तं R. Pr. X.13; (4)
manner of Veda Writing, metrical
form, metre; cf. तद् वृत्तं प्राहुश्छन्दसाम्
]R. ]Pr. XVII.22.
वृत्ति (1) treatment, practice of pro-
nunciation; (2) conwersion of one
phonetic element intO another; cf.
R.Pr.I.95;(3) position of the padas
or words as they stand in the Sarih-
hitā text, the word is often seen |'
used in this way in the comp2und
word पदवृत्ति; अान्पदाः पदबृत्तयः R.Pr.
TV.17; (4) modes of recital of the
Vedic text which are described to
be three द्रुत, मध्य and विलाम्बत based
upon the time of the interval and
the pronunciation which differs
in each one; cf. M. Bh. on P. I.4.
l09, Vart. 4; also I. j .69 Wart.11 ;
( 5 ) nature; cf. गुर्वक्षराणां गुरुवृत्ति सर्वम्
|R.Pr.XVIII.33; (6) interpretation
•ofa word; (7) verbal or nominal ]
form of a root; cf. अर्थनित्यः परीक्षेत |
केनचिद् वृत्तिसामान्यन Nir. II.1; (8)mode |
or treatment followed by a scienti- ||
fic treatise; cf. का पुनर्वृत्ति
शास्त्रप्रवृत्तिः l M.Bh. in Ahnika 1" on |
वृत्तिसमवायाथै उपदेशः Vartttika 10; (9) ||
manner of interpretation with the |
literal sense of the constituents
present Or absent, described usual- !
ly as tw9-fold जहत्स्वार्था and अजहत्स्वार्था, |
but with a third kind added by
Some grammarians viz. the
जहदजहत्स्वार्था; (I0) a compound
word giwing an aggregate sense
difierent from the exact literal
sense of the constituent words;
there are mentioned five vगृittis of
this _kind; cf. पराथाभिधानं वृत्तिः' कृत्तद्धि-
तसुमासैकदेशधातुरूपाः पञ्च वृत्तयः । वृत्यर्था-
वबोधकं वाक्यं विग्रहः S. K. "at the end
Qf the Ekaśeक्षुaprakarana; ( 11 )
340
वृत्तदीपिका
interpretation of a collection
of Statements; the word was
Originally applied to glosses or
comments on the ancient works
like the Stitra works, in which
the interpretation of the text was
given with examples and counter-
examples where necesSary; cf. वृत्तौ
भाष्ये तथा नामधातुपारायणादिषु; introdtic-
tory Stanza in the Kāśikà.Later on,
when many commentary works
were written,the wordवृत्ति was difी-
erentiated from भाष्य, वार्तिक, टीकl, चूर्णैि,
निर्युक्ति, टिष्पणी, पाञ्जका and others, ahd
made applicable to commentary
wOrks concerned with the expla-
nation of the rules with examples
and cOunter-examples and such
statementS or arguments as were
necessary for th1e explanation of
the ruleS or the exampl°s and
counter examples. In the Vyākara-
na-Sàstra the word occurS almo$t ex-
clusively used for the learned Vrtti
on Pā'jini-stitras by Vamana and
Jayāditya which was given the
name Kāśikā Vrtti; cf. तथा च
वृत्तिकृत् often occurring in works on
Pāt]ini's grammar.
:ः । वृत्तिः | वृत्तिग्रन्थ commentary works of the
type of Wrtti, which see abowe;
cf. तथा च वृत्तिग्रन्थषूपलभ्यते.
→、
वृत्तिचन्द्रिका name of a grammar work
written by a grammarian Kāśi-
nātha who also is believed to
have written वर्णविवेकचान्द्रिका and
वैयाकरणसर्वस्व.
वृत्तित्रयवार्तिक a very short work in
verse-form explaining in a very
general manner the nature of
Stitras and Varttikas; the work
is anonymouS.
a treatise on the different
ways in which the meaning is
conveyed by words according to
the conventions of grammarians,



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-357.png}}}}}}

वृत्तिपक्ष 341
written by a grammarian Kr$t]a-
bhat[a surnamed Mauni.
वृत्तिपक्ष the alternatiwe method of
speaking by the uSe of compound
words as contrasted with simple
words; both the methods are
obSerwed in u$e among the people:
cf. इह द्वौ पक्षैौ बृत्तिपक्षश्चावृत्तिपक्षश्च l स्वभाव-
तचैतद् भवति वाक्यं च समासश्च । M.Bh.on
P.II.1.l,II.1.51, III.1.7,IV .1. 82. !
वृत्तिपरिगणन a definite enumeration !
of words used in a specific se0se (as
contrasted with वतिंपारगणन) which
means a definite enumeration of
the senses in which an operation,
such as a compound-formation or
sO, takes place; cf. अथैतस्मिन्सति अन-
भिभ॒धाने यदि वृत्तिपरिगणनं क्रियते,वर्तिपरिगणनमपि
कर्तव्यम् ; cf. M. Bh. on P. II. 2.24
Vart. 16.
वृात्तिसंग्रह name of a gloss on Panini's
As[ādhyāyt written by Rāma-
candra. ||
वृत्तिसमवाय serial arrangement of |
letters in 'a specific way ( as for
instance in the Māheśvara Sütras)
for the sake of grammatical fun- ||
ctions; cf. वृत्तिस॒मपायृार्थ उपदे॒शः ! वृत्तिः |
शास्त्रप्रवृत्तिः। समैवायेा वर्णानामानुपूत्यैण संांर्नवैशः |
M. Bh. on Ahnika l. 1
वृत्तिसमुद्देशा name given to the last of !
वृद्धिप,द
दृद्ध (l) a term used in Pānini$ gra-
mmar for Such words or nouns
( प्रातिपदिक ) which have for their
first wowel a wpddhi. wowel, i. e.
either अा or ऐg or औौ; e.g. शlला, माला
etc.; cf. वृद्धिर्यस्य अचामादिस्तद् वृद्धम्;
(2) a ter m applied to the eight
prOnouns headed by त्यत् for pur -
pOses of the addition of tad. afiixes
presCribed for the Vjrddha words,
such as छ by वृद्धाच्छ: P. IV.2.l 14 ;
(3) a terrm applied to words having
ए, or ओो as the first vowel in them,
prowided such words denote dis-
tricts of Easterm India, e. g. गोनर्द,
भोजकट etc. cf. एङ् प्राचां देशे, P.I.1.73,
74 and 75; (4) a term used in the
|Prātisākhya works for a protra cted
vowel ( प्लुत ) which has three
mātrās; cf. तिस्रेो वृद्धम् R. T.44.
| वृद्धि (1) a technical term used by
|Panini to denote the wowels अा, ऐण्
and औौ; a vowel bclonging ' to
the third grade out of the three
grades of wOWels which are
known as zero, normal and long
grades; cf. , वृद्धिसदच् P I. 1.1; (2)
lengthening completely of a vowel
which is called प्छ्ति in grammar;
" the term is used in the Rk T antra
Prātiśakhya in this scnse.
the fÔürteen seétions of the third | वृद्धिनिमित्त lit. cause ofWrddhi (वृद्धेर्नि-
chapter of Bhartrhari's Vakya- |!
padiya ( viz. the संकीर्णकाण्ड ) in |
which the taddhita affixes and ||
their interpretations are discussed. |
वृत्तिस्सूत्र a rule forming the basis of
a WFtti, i. e. a rulc on which
glOSSes are Written, as contrasted
with वार्तिकसूत्र or वार्तिक a pithy
Stitralike statement' composed as
an addition or a modification of |
the original Sütra; cf. केचित्ताव-
दाहुर्यद् वृत्तिसूत्रॆ_इति ! संख्ययाव्ययासन्नादूराधि-
कसंख्यां; संखेयेये ( P. II. 2.25 ) ईति ।
M. Bh. on P. II. 2. 24.
मित्तम्)such as the employment of
the indicatory letter ञ् or ण् in an
affix or the lettter कू in tad.affixes;
the term is, howewer, found used
in the sense of hawing in it a
cause of Vfddhi, i.e. an indicatory
letter ञ्, एण् or क्. ; cf. वृाद्धनिमित्तस्य च
तद्धितस्यारक्तवेिकारे P. VI. 3.39. cf.
बृद्धेर्निमित्तं यस्मिन्स वृाद्धेनिमित्तः M. Bh.
on P. I.l .l.
वृद्धिपाद name given to the first pāda
of P'ānini's A$tādhyayÎ by gramm-
ariams, " as the beginning of' the
pāda is made by the Stitra वृद्धिरादैच्.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-358.png}}}}}}

वृषन्
342
वैदिक
वृषन् ( वृषा ), a ter[ँ) used in ancient
grammar works for a word of th€
rinasculine gender aS cOntrasted
with येोषा.
वृषादि a class of w9rds headed by
the word वृष which have their
initial vowel accented acute; cf.
Kā$. on P. VÎ.1.203.
एण् tad. afiix अ॒ण् prescribed by the
stitऐa ऋष्यन्धकवृष्णिकुरुभ्यश्च after wँÓrds
denoting memberS of tll6 Vg $ni
race; cf. वृष्ण्यणेाऽवकाशः वामुदेवः l बलदेव: l
वेदद् a term applicd to roots which
ðptionally admit the applicatiOra Of
the augment इ (इट्) to the Ardha-
dhātuka affixes placed after them,
e. g. roots having gOt the indica-
tory vowel ऊ added tO them
as also the rootS स्वृ, सू, धू and the
roots headed by रध् aS alsO SOme
specifically mention.ed roots under
certain conditions; cf.. P. VII.
2.44-51.
वेतनादि a class of words headed by
वेतन which hawe the taddhita
afiix इक (ठक्) added to them in the
sense of *earning a livelihood' e.g.
वेतनिक: । धानुष्कः:; दा|ाडिकः ; cf. वेतनेनन
. जीवाति वैतनिकः कर्मकरः Kāś. on P. IV.
4• 12. →
वेद language of the Vedic ILiterature
as contrasted with the term ठेीक ;
cf. नैव लोके न च वेदे अकारो विवृतोस्ति M.
Bh. on Màhesvara Stitra; cf.
also रक्षार्थ वेदानामध्ययं व्याकरणम् M.
Bh. Ahnika 1. The term वैौदिक
referring to words found in Vedic
language is also frequ 5"ntly used
in the Mahābhā&ya. ['ānini, how-
ever, has used the tertm छन्दम्, मन्त्र
and निगम,and not वेद, out of which
the first term श्छन्दस् is often used;
cf. बहुलं छन्दसि P. II. 4.39, 76; III,
2.88; V. 2.122; or नृछन्दसि च P. V.
1.67, V. 4, 142, VI. 3.126. VI.
1.34, WII. 1.8, etc,
वेदमित्र an ancient writer of a Prā-
ti$ākhya work mcntioncd in the
Rk Prātiśākhya.
वेबर् [ WEBER, ALBRECHT of
Berlin, 1825-1901 ] a SOund scho-
|lar of Wedic lLiterature who has
written maray articles on Sanskrit
Gratmmar in **IndiSche Studien.??
वेष्टक lit. enclosure or envelope; the
term is used in the sense of परिग्रह
with reference to the repetition
of one and the same word more
than once in the Krama and
other artificial recitals; cf. परिग्रहे
त्वनाष्र्घीन्तात् तेन वैकाक्षरीकृतात् । परभ्रां न्यास-
माचारं, व्यालिस्तैो चेचत् स्वरैौ परौ |II on which
Uvvata remarks परिग्रहेह वेष्टके.
वैकल्पिक ]it. optional, voluntary; the
term iS used in connection with
a rule or Operation ' prescribed
alternatively With another, where
there is an optiOn tO apply any
One of the tWO and arriwe at two
forms in thc saIne sense;.
वैकृत lit. subjected to modifications;
which have undergOne a change;
the term, aS cOntrasted with प्रीकृत,
referS to letter'S which are noticed
in the Sarhhitāpa!tha , and not in
the Padapājःha• The change of
अस् into ओो, or of the consonant त्
into द् before soft letters, as also
the insertion of त् bctween त् and
स् etc. are givcn as instances. cf.
वैकृताः थे पदपाठे अद्दृट्टाः । यथा प्रथमास्तृती-
यभूता:, अन्तः:पाताः इत्यवमादयः
S\	«S →
वैचिञ्याथै simply for the sake of
variety without any specific pur-
pose in view; cf. वषड्ग्रहूंणं वैचित्र्यांर्थम् ।
विचित्रा हि सूत्रस्य च॒ति: पा|ागिनेः | Kā$. on
P. I. 2.35 cf: also Kài$. on P. III.
3.96, IV. 1.148, 158, 160.
वैदिक found in Vedic Literature; the
term is used in contrast with
लेीक्रिक which means * found · in
cOm1non. use *; cf. · यथा लीकिकवैदिकेषु



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-359.png}}}}}}

वैदिकीप्राक्रिया
34%
वैयाकरणभूषण
M. Bh. Ahnika l. Kaiyata ex-
plains वैदिक as श्रुत्युपनिबद्ध.
वैदिकीप्रक्रिया name of that section
of Bha!toji's Siddhāntakaumudi
which dealS With Vedic pcculia-
rities noticcd by Pānini in his
stitras. Thcre is a well-known
commentary upon this section
named सुवेोधिनी written by Jaya-
kपृक्ष्ा]a a famous grammar Scholar of
the Maunin fatmily.
वैदिकीप्रक्रियाटीका (l) a commentary
on the sütras of Pāhini dealing
with the Vedic words and their
peculiarities written by a gram-
marian named Murāri; (2) a cOm-
mentary on the Scction of P3ha-
tgoji's Siddhāntakaumudi named
वैदिकीप्रक्रिया written by JayakSaa
Maunin and named Subodhini.
वैद्यनाथ, Vaidyanātha, Payagunde, a
famous grammarian Of the eigh-
teenth century, who waS One of
the chief pupils of NāgeŚa and
who prepared a line of pupils at
Varānasi. He has written learned
commenfaries on standard WOrkS
om grammar, the principal ones
being the Prabhā Ota the Sabda-
kaustubha, the Bhāvapraká$ikà
on the Brhaccabdenduśekhara,
the Cidasthimālā on the Laghu-
$abdenduśekhara, the Kà$iki or
Gadā on the Paribhāgendu$ekh3 ra |'
and an independent short treatise
named Rapratyaya-kharadana•
वैभत्त belonging to a case-aftix; cf.
क्राभ्यां सेो वैभेत्तः ( मूर्घन्यमापद्यंते ) । ऋक्षु_!
वणिक्षु । cf. also नैभक्तस्य णत्वे P. VI.
|1.85 Vārttika 6.
वैभाषिक optional, alternative;.cf; र्वेति
वैभाधिक:'T. Pr.XXII. 7; sce वैकक्ष्विक्र.
वैयाधेकरण्य lit. possession of Separate
residences, as contrasted With सामा-
नाधिकरण्यः absence of appOSition; uSe
in different cases, non-agreement
in case.
वैयथ्यै absence of any purpose or
utility; the word is used many
timeS in the case of a rule, or a
Word or two of it, in whose case
वैयर्थ्यं or absence of utility is shown,
and, with a view to prevent its
bcing looked upon as a serious
fault, SOtnething is deduced and
the purpose is.shoWn; cf सूत्रवैयथ्र्य-
प्रसङ्गात् and व्यथै सज्ज्ञापयति used in
grammar treatises,
वैयाकरण 1it. a student of gramtmar;
व्याकरणमधीते वैयाकरण: cf. KāŚ. on P.
|IV, 2.59. The word is used in
the sense of * a Scholar of Gram-
mar;' or, *a perSon Who has obtain-
ed proficiency in Grammar.' The
word is used Several times in this
sense in the Mahābhā5ya. cf. M.
Bh. on P. I. l.3; I.4.2, II. 1.53,
II.2.29, II.3.18, II.4.56, III.2.115
etc. The word is also used in the
sense of * pertaining to graInmar'
or *found in grammar.'
वैयाकरणर्जीवातु a term used for the
gramrnar treatise Written by Can-
gudāsa which is also called Cāh-
gustitra or Cihguvyākarana.
वैयाकरणभूषण a well-known work on
the gratnmatical interpretation
of words written by Koऐएँàabhatta
asan explanatOry Work (व्याख्यान) on
the small work in werSe consisting
of only 72 Kārikās written by his
uncle Bhattoji Dik$ंita. The trea-.
tise is also named Brhadwaiyā-
|karanabhui$ana. · A Smaller work
consisting of the Same Subject-
matter but Omitting discuSSions,
is written by the author for faci-
]itating the understanding of
students to which he has given
thc name Waiyakaraf}abhti$ana-
$āra. This latter Work has got
three commentary workS written



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-360.png}}}}}}

वैयाकरणभूषण सार
344
वैयाकरणसिद्धान्तकौमुदी
on it named Kā$ikā, Kānti and
Matonmajjā and one mOre SchO•*
larly one Sāihkari, recently written
by Shankar Shastri Marulkar.
& → →
वेयाकरणभूषणसार a slightly abridged
form of the Vaiyākara'?abhü$a'ha by
the author Kondabhat{a himself,
for students and beginncrs. It
consists of the Same number of
fourteen chapter'S aS the main
treatise, which are given the name
Nirnaya. See Vaiyākaraऐ1abhti$ama.•
वैयाकरणभूषणसारटीका a commentary
written on the well-known work
on the sense of words and syntax
written by Kondabhatta. There
are many commentaries out Of
which, the well-known oneS are
(1) Darpana by Harivallabha, (2)
Laghubhugat!akānti by Gopāla-
deva, a pupil of Balarihbhatta
Pāyagunde, and (3), Kāśikā , by
Harirāma KeŚava Kale and Sāh-
kari by Sankaraśastri . Mārula-
|kara.
वैयाकरणभूषणसारवृत्ति a commentary
on the Waiyākarar१abhi$a[?a,
written by Mahānanda in the
beginning of the nineteenth
cer1tury•
वैयाकरणशब्दमाला, वैयाकरणशब्दरत्नमाला a
treatise on the use of wordS written
as a helpful guide to Sanskrit
writers, by a grammarian named
Somayājin in 1848 A.D.
वैयाकरणशाब्दबोध import of a sentence
according tO the grarnmarians, in
which verba! actiwity occupies a
predominant place, and the resid-
ing place of the subject as also that
of the werbal actiwity is identical
in the active voice, while the
object and the verbal activity have
got the same place of residence in
the passive woice. The other
auxiliaries of actiwity such as the
instrument, location and the like,
are COn nected with the verbal
activity. The import of the
sentence चैत्रः पचति, in short, catn be
expressed as चैत्रकर्तृका वर्तमानकाालेका
पाकक्रिया.
वैयाकरणसर्वस्व a Small treatise on
gratmmar written by a scholar of
gratmmar named Kā$inātha who
has alSO written a, few more small
works बर्णविवेकचान्द्रका, वृतिचन्द्रिका, धातुम-
३ञ्जरी etc.
वैयाकरणसिद्धान्तकारिका a wery Scho-
|larly work by Bhattoji Dīksita
on the interpretation of words
and Sentences, based upon the
learned discussions On that subject
introduced in fhe Mahābhāgya,
Vākyapadiya, Pradipa , etc. and
discussed fully in his Sabdakau-
stubha by the author himself.
The work although Scholarly
and valuable, is compressed in
only .72 verses ( kārikas ) and
has to be understood with the
help of the Vaiyākaranabhti$ana
or Bhü$ansara Written by Koऐ]da-
bhatta, the nephew of the author.
See वैयाकरणभूषण' and वैयाकरणभूषणसार.
वैयाकरणसिद्धान्तकैीमुदी |an extremely
popular work on the Subject of
Sanskrit grammar written for the
use of students, which, although
difficult at a few places, enables
the students by its careful study
to get a command Ow6r the Subject
. and enablehim to read other higher
works on grammar. The work is
based on the A$गूंādhyāyÎ of Pāraini
withOut omitting a single Stàtra.
The arrangement of the Sutras is,
entirely different, as the author,for
the sake of facility in understand-
ing, has divided the work into
different topics and explained the
Sütras required for the topic by



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-361.png}}}}}}

वैयाकरणसिद्धान्तकौमुदीटीका
345 वैषयेिक
bringing them together in the
topic. The main topicS Or Praka-
ranaS are tWelwe in number, wi%.
( 1 ) संज्ञापरिभाष्प्रा, ( 2 ) पञ्चसंधि, ( 3 )
सुबन्त or षड्ालेङ्ग, (4) ख्त्रीप्रत्यय, (5) कारक,
(6) समास, (7) ताद्धत, (8) तिङन्त, (9)
प्रक्रिया, (10) कृदन्त,(11) वैदिकी and (12)
स्वर which ar€ Sometimes styled as
व्याकरणद्वादशीं. The work is generaIly
known by the term सिद्धान्तकौमुदी, or
even कौमुदी, and it has got a large
number Ofscholarly and ordinary
commentarieS as alSo commentari-
es on commentaries,alI numbering
above twelve, and two:abridgrnents
the Madhyakaumudi and the
Laghukaumudi. The work was
written by the reputed scholar
|Bhattojt Dik$ंita of Varanasi in the
seventeenth century. See Bhattojीं
|Diksita.•
वैयाकरणसिद्धान्तकौमुदीटीका or सिद्धान्त-
कौमुदीव्यास्व्या a general name given
tO the large number of commen-
taries Written by members of the
line of pupils, and pupils of pupils
of Bhattoji. The well-known among
the commentaries are प्रौढमनेीरमा by
the author himself, तत्त्वबोधिनी by
ज्ञानेन्द्रसरस्वती, सुबोधिनी by जयकृष्णभट्ट मैौन्नी
बालमनेीरमा by वासुदेवदीक्षित, and crown-
ing all, the लघुशब्देन्दुशेखर by नागेशभट्ट.
Theप्रैौढमनेीरमा has got a learned com-
mentary written by हरिदीक्षित called
लचुशब्दरत्न or शब्दरत्न, which also has
om it commentarieS mamed भावप्रकाश
by बाळेभट्ट and शब्दरढ्लदीप by कल्याणमल्छ्श्र्.
The LaghuŚabdenduśekhara has
got commentaries reaching about
ten in number.
वैयाकरणसिद्धान्तभूषण the same as
वैयाकरणभूषण, which see above. .
वैयाकरणसिद्धान्तमञ्ञ्जूषा	a Well-known
work on the Syntax and denota-
tion of words written by Nāgeśa-
bha¢¢a which is popular by the
44
name Laghumafijti$ā. The Para-
malaghumafjti$क्ष्à is an abridgment
of this work by the author him-
self.
वैयाकरणासेद्धान्तरत्नाकर name · of a
commentary on the .. Siddhānta-
kaumudi by Rāmakrंna in the
latter half of the severateerath
century.
वैयाकरणासेद्धान्तरहस्य name of a co-
mmentary on the Siddhānta-
kaumudi by Nilakantha.
वैयाघ्रपद्य hame of a treatise of gra-
mmar written in ten chapters
by an ancient grammarian व्याघ्रपाद्;
cf. दशकं वैयाघ्रपद्यम् Kaś,on P. IV 2.65.
|For details, see Vyākara?िamahā-
bha$ya Wol. VII. D. E. Society?s
&\ Bd. pp. 133, 134.
वेवचन a term used for the Pragrhya
wowel, possibly the same as द्वैवचन ,
which means a specific feature of
द्विवचन or the dual nupnber, The
term is used in Some Sik$ā workS.
वैवृत्त name given to the svarita or
circumflex accent on the wowel
following upon a wowel accented
acute, when there is a wiv[tti or
.pau8e between the tWo vowels;
&,.g: य इन्द्रः; cf.वैवृत्ततैरेय॒ञ्जनौ क्षैप्राभि-
से.निद्दितौ च तानू । R. Pr. III. 10.
वैशिष्टय specific feature, peculiarity.
वैशेष्य special differentiating feature;
cf. अनुप्रदानात्संसगीँत् स्थानात् करणविन्ययात् ।
जायते वर्णवैशेष्यं परीमाणाच्च्ल्च पञ्चमात् |॥ T.Pr.
XXIII. 2.
वैषम्य diversity in number or pro-
rties; cf. एवमपि पञ्चागमाख्त्रय अागमिनः
त्संख्यातानुदेशो न भवति M. Bh.
Āhnika 1; cf. also M. Bh. on P.I.
2, 27, I. 3. 10 Vart. 4, I. 4.101. ^
वैषायेिक (1) pertaining to,,the word
विषय in the stitra विषयो देशे P. IV.2.
52; the term refers to the tad.
affixes prescribed in the sense
of * country * or *district' (विषय) in



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-362.png}}}}}}

व्यत्ते ' 346
व्यतिकर
P. IV. 2.52-54 as contrasted with ||
नैवासिक affixes prescribed in the ||
sense of * inhabited district ' by P• |
IV. 2.69-80; (2) one of the three
senses of the locative caSe, viz• the ||
. sense * substratum ? of the locative
case, which is not physical büt |
which is a topical one, forming ||
an object or aim of an , action às |
specified by the word * about ' ; !
cf. अधिकरणं नाम त्रिप्रकारं व्यापक्रमैापश्ठाSकं ||
वैषयेिकमिति । }
व्यत्त distinctly perceived i e. !
perceived with reference to the
individual referred to, which en-
ables the speaker to apply the
specific afiixes in the sense of
gender and number;	cf प्रीतिपादकं
चाष्ट्युपदिष्टं सामान्यभूतेर्थे वर्तते । सामान्य
वर्तमानस्य व्यत्तिरुपजायते । व्यक्तस्य सतेो
लिङ्गसंख्याभ्यामन्वितस्य बाह्येनांथैन येोगेो भकति l
M.Bh. on P.I.l.57.
व्यति (1) lit.distinct manifestation, as
for instance that Of the generic
features in the individual object;
cf.सामान्ये वर्तमानस्य व्याप्तिरुपजायत, M.Bh.
on P.I.l,57; (2) gender, which in
fact,is the symbol of the manifesta-
tion of the generic property in the
individual object;cf.हरीतक्याादिषु व्यक्ति;
|P.I.2.52 Vārt. 3, as also ळुपि युक्तवद्
||
I
I
i
{
व्यक्तिवचने P. I.2.51; (3) individual|
object; cf. व्यक्तिः पदार्थः.
व्याक्तिपदार्थवाद the same as द्रव्यपदार्थवाद;
the vieW that a word denotes the
individual object and not the
generic nature. The oldest gra-
mmarian referred to as holding
this view, is व्याडि who preceded
Pataऐjali.
व्यङ्कटसुब्बाशाख्त्री a grammarian who
has written a grammar treatise
named भाषामञ्जरीज्याकरण.
व्यङ्गश् (1) Suggested Sense as contrast-
ed with the denoted sense; (2) the
supreme Or ultimate suggested
Sense viz. Sphota which is the
ultimate sense of every Sentence.
8यञ्जन a conSonant; that which mani-
festS itSelf in the presence Ofa vowel,
being incapable of standing alone;
cf.न_पुनरन्तरेणाचं व्यञ्जनस्येोच्चारणमपि भवति |
अन्वथै खल्ट्वापि निर्वचनम् 1 स्वयं राजन्ते स्वराः |
अन्वक् भवति व्यञ्घ्घ्घ्घ्घ्घ्घ्घ्जनम् । M.Bh.on I.2.30;
cf. also अथवा गतिरपि व्यञ्जेरर्थः | विविधं
गच्छत्यञ्जुपरागवशादिति व्यञ्जनम् । उपरागश्च
पूर्वपराञ्च्संनिधानेपि परेणाचा भवति न पूर्वेण ।
Kaiyata On P. I. 2. 30; cf. व्यञ्जर्न
स्वराङ्गम् T.Pr.I.6; cf. also व्यञ्जनसमु-
दायस्तु स्वरसंनिहित एव अक्षरं भवति l Uv-
vata Bhāsya on V. Pr.. III.45.
व्यञ्जनसधि a junction or coalescence
of fwo consonants as distinguished
frotm स्वरसंधि. In Pānini's system of
grammar the name हल्संधि is given
tO व्यञ्जनसंधि and the Siddhānta-
kaumudt has given a Separate Sec-
tion for it.
व्यञ्जनसंनिपात or संयेाग, conjunction or
falling together Of twO consonants;
cf. हलेोनन्तराः संयेागः P.I.1. 7.
व्यञ्जनाविद्यमानवद्भाव consideration of
a consonant being mot preSent aS
far as the accentuation of a vOwel
is concerned,thc vowel bcing look-
ed upon as the initial Or the final,
irrespective of the consOnant .or
consonants respectively preceding
it, or following it; cf. स्वरविधौ व्यत्र्जन-
मविद्यमानवद् भवति Par. Sek. Pari. 79.
व्यत् tad. affix व्य added to the wOrd
भ्रातृ in the sense of अपत्य,e.g. भातृव्यः;
cf. P.IV.1. 144.
व्यतिकर (1) confusion of one number-
affix for another number-affix
(वचन), as noticed in the statements,
e. g- अक्षीणि मे दर्शनीयानि; पादा म सुकुमा-
रंतराः M. Bh. on P.I. 4. 2l ; (2) any
confusion, say confusion of one
grammatical element for another;
cf. हिः परस्मैपदानां यथा स्यात्, स्व अात्मने-
पदानां, व्यतिकरो मा भूत् M. Bh. on P.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-363.png}}}}}}

व्यतिरित 347
、
व्यपंक्षा
IIi.4.] Wārt. 2.
व्यतिरिक्त distinct from', separate from,
cf. कर्मादिभ्येान्यः प्रातिपदिकार्थव्यतिरिक्तः
स्वस्वामिसंबन्धादिः शेषः । Kā$. on P.II. 3.
50.
व्यतिरेक (1) SurpluS, exceSS; (2) Sepa-
rate presence; (3) contrary thing;
cf. तत्र फलव्यतिरेकेापि स्यात् । M. Bh. on
Ahnika l.
व्यतिषङ्ग reciprocal junction or conne-
ction; cf. हृस्वानुस्वारव्यतिषङ्वत् पर;R.Pr.
XIII.16.
व्यतिहार exchange of activity; cf. कर्तरि
कर्मव्यतिहारे P.I.3.14.
व्यत्यय occurrerace of one fyr another;
transpOsitiop; cf. सुतेिडुपग्रह ... व्यत्यय-
भिच्छति शास्त्रकृदेषां ... M. Bh. on P.III.
1.85. See विपयय.
व्यथन alteration of a phonetic ele-
ment; change of SOumd; mispro-
|nunciation; cf. तदापायव्यथनानि दोषाः
R.Pr.X!W. 1.
व्यधिकरण characterized by different
caSe-relationS or case-affixes;
poSSesSed of different case-affixes;
कः प्रसङ्गेीं यद् व्यधिकरणानां समासः स्यात् M.
Bh. on P. II. 1.67.
व्यन् tad. affix व्य causing the acute
accent for the first vowel of the
word,added to the word भ्रातृ when
the sense of the word so formed,
is *enemy?; see व्यत् above; cf. P.IV
1.145.
व्यपकर्ष exception to a rule; cf. किमिदं
व्यपकर्षविज्ञानाादोतेि | अपवादधिज्ञानात् M.Bh.
on P.VIII.4.6|l Vārt 4.
व्यपदेश (1) special deSigmation or re-
presentation ; cf. अाकृतिव्र्यपदशानां प्राय
अादित अादितः R. Pr. XVII. 4; ( 2 )
main designatiUn; cf. निमित्तसद्भावाद्वि-
शिष्टोपदेशः व्यपदशः मुख्यो व्यवहारः Par.
Sek. Pari. 30; cf. also येो द्वयेाः षष्ठी-
निर्दिष्टयेोः प्रसङ्गे भवति, लभतेसैौ अन्यतरतेो
व्यपदशम् | M.Bh.onP.I.1.51 Wārt. 7.
treatmerat of a secon-
dary thing as the principal one,
e• g. a perSOn or a thing, without
any SeCOnd or any others, looked
upon as the first or the last;
cf. व्यपदेशिवदेकस्मिन् कार्ये भवतीति वक्तव्यम्
|M. Bh. on P. I. 1.21. Vārt. 2.
The remark or expression व्यपद-
शिवद्भावेन भविष्यति is found often
given in the Mahabhāgya; cf. ' M.
Bh. Āhnika 1 Wārt*'' i4; I.1.9,
I. !l.51 I,1.72;, T.2.48 etc. For de-
tails see Par. Sek. Pari. 30. ..
व्यपदेशिवद्वचन statement of Wyapade-
śivadbhāva ; cf. तत्र व्यपदाशवद्वचनम्-
एक[चेो द्वे प्रथमार्थं षत्वे चादेशसंप्रत्ययार्थम् ।
|M{. Bh. on VIII.3.59 Vārt. 7.
व्यपवर्ग (1) division of a single thing
into its constituent elements; cf.
स्थानिवद्भावाद् व्यपवर्गः M. Bh. on VII.
2.36, VII.3.44 Vārt. 3; (2) distinct
comprehension as posseSSed of a
specific quality; cf.. न हि र्गेरित्युक्ते
व्यपवर्गेौ गम्यत शुह्रा नीला कपिला कपेोतेति ।
|M.Bh. on P. I.2.64 Vārt 37 ; (3)
separation intO parts, cf. काश्रचेदेर्द्रे
प्रहारेण व्यपवर्ग करोति, M.Bh. on V.I.119
Vārt 5; (4) distinct notion as a
separate unit after the thingS
have been cormbined; cf. एकादेशे कृते
व्यपवर्गाभावः संबुद्धिलेीपेो न प्राप्नोति M. Bh.
on P. VI.1.69 Vārt 3; cf. also M•
Bh. on VII.l.80.
व्यपवृत्त distinctly separated as two
or more consonantsjoined together
in a conjunct consonant, as con-
trasted with the two wOWels in •'a
diphthong which cannot be gàllgd
व्यपवृक्त; cf. नाब्यपवृक्तूस्यावयद्वै ताद्वधिर्यथा
द्रन्ब्येषु. M. Bh. on Siva Sitra 3.4
vāt. 9. cf. also वर्णैकदशाः के वणैग्रहणेन
गृह्यन्ते ! ये व्यपवृक्ता अपि वर्णा भवान्त, M.
|Bh. on SiwaTStitra 3,4 Vārt. 1l.
व्यपेक्षा mutual relationship. in sense,
as obtaining between two different
words ( पद ) connected withi each
other in . a $entence, as cohtfश्s-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-364.png}}}}}}

व्यपत
348 व्यवधान
ted with compositeness of sense as
seen in two words joined intO a
compound word ( समास ); व्यपेक्षा is
given as an alternative definition
of the word सामथ्यै along with
एकार्थॉभाव as the other one, in the
Mahābhāśya; e. g. there is व्यपेक्षा
between सर्पिः and पिब in the sen-
tence सर्पिष्पिब, but not in तिष्ठतु सर्पिः
पिब त्वमुदकम्ः " cf. तथदमपरं द्वैतं भवति
एकार्थाँभवेिो वा सामथ्यै स्याद् व्यपेक्षा वेति ।
|M. Bh. on P. II,1.l ; cf. also Kā$.
on P. WIII.3 44,
व्यपेत having an intervention of ( a
letter, Or letters or a, pada); the
Word is used in the same Sense a$
व्यवाहित; cf. स्वापिग्रहणं व्यपेतार्यम् | व्यप-
तार्थोयमारम्भः l सुष्वापयिष्प्रति l M. Bh. on
P.VII.4.67.
व्यभिचार lit. deviation or discrepancy;
irregularity re: the application ofa
rule; cf.संज्ञाब्यभिचारार्थश्चकारः Kā$.on P.
III.3.19; cf.also. बहुलग्रहणं ध्यीभचाराथैम्!
प्रवाहिका, विचर्चिका । न च्व भवति । शिरोर्तिः;
:Kāś. on P. III.3.108,
व्यभिचारिन् deviating, being irregular
in application, not applying neces-
5arily:ः cf. अभ्रशद्वत्यंोपूर्वनिपातस्य लक्षणस्य
' व्यभिचारित्वात्.
व्यय lit. loss; disappearance; the word
3s used in the sense of infiectional
changes. An indeclinable is ca]Ied
अन्यय because it has no ir,fiectioraal
changeS. cf. तत्कथमनुदात्तप्रकृति नाम
· स्यात् 1 दृष्टव्ययं तु भवति t Nir. I.8; V.23.
व्ययचिवत् (1) pOssessed of व्यय or infiec-
' tional change; a declinable word;
cf यस्य पुनर्विभक्त्यादिाभैार्धेकारः क्रियते सं
व्य्यवान्म्.' अाद्धुदात्त: स च अन्तःशब्दो भवति |
V: Pr• II.26; (2) characterized by
a loSS of accent i.e. the loss of th6
original accent and the presence
of another accent; cf. पदान्तस्य पदे दृष्टं
स्वरितत्वं न दृश्यते | अदृष्टमनुदात्तत्वं च दृश्यते |
. 9'vva¢a on R. Pr. XI.3].
.यः ' (l)-usgless, .$erving mo purpoSe,
Superfluous; the word is usually
used in the sense of useless or futile
in cOnnection with a rule or its
part, which serveS nO purpOSe, its
purpOSe Or object being served
otherwise;Such wOrds or rules have
newer been cOndemned as futile
by commentators, but an attempt
is made invariably by them to
deduce something from the futile
wording and show itS necessity;cf.
व्यथै सज्ज्ञापयति a remark which is
often found in the commentary
literature; cf. अन्य॒था अ॒न्तरङ्गत्वाद्दीर्घे कृत
एव प्रत्ययप्राप्त्या तद्वद्यथैता स्पष्टैव l Par. Sek.
Pari. 56; (2) possessed of various
senses such as the words अक्षा: माषाः
etc.; cf. व्यर्थेषु च मुक्तसंशयम् l M.Bh.on
P.I.2.64 Vār t. 52. The word व्यर्थ
possibly stands for विविधाथै in such
cases. It appears that the word
व्यर्थ in the sense of futile was rarely
used by ancient grammarians; the
word अंनर्थक appears to have been
uSed in its place. See Mahābhāsya
in which the word व्यर्थ does not
occur in this Sense while the word
अनर्थक occurs at several places.
व्यवच्छिश्न (1) separated; detached
from a specific thing by the loss of
connection with it; cf. एवमेतास्म-
न्नुभयतो व्यवाच्छनेन यदि स्वार्थे जहाति जहातु
नाम M. Bh. on P. II. 1.1. Vārt. 2;
(2) characterized or possessed of
an interveration by similar things
cf. तद्वा अनेकेन • निपातनेन व्यवच्छिन्नं	न
|शक्यमनुवर्तयितुमिति | M. Bh. on P. III, .
3.83; cf. also P. VI. 4.2.
व्यवधान (l) intervention; the word
is used in connection with the
intervention or occurrence of
letters or phonetic units between
the cause ( निमित्त ) of an operation
and the operatee (विधिभाक् ); cf लेीपे
कृते नास्ति व्यवधानम् । स्थाानिवद्भावाद् व्यवधान-
मेव 1 The word is used ālso in
the sense of interveratiora in , g9pe-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-365.png}}}}}}

व्यवधायक 349
व्याकरण
ral, which separates the twO
, connected things; व्यवधानं च भवति
वाक्ये राज्ञ ऋद्धस्य पुरुषः; the wOrd व्यवाय
is used in the same senSe; cf.
अट्कुप्वाङ्नुम्व्यवायेपि; (2) an inserted
letter or phonetic element; cf..
व्यवधानः अन्त्यविकोरे T. Pr. 185, 186.
व्यवधायक causing an intervention;
intervener which is required to be
of a difierent kind; cf अतज्जातीयकं
व्यवधायकं भवति M. Bh. on P. I. 1.7.
Wārt 8.
व्यवस्था lit. definite arrangement;
reStriction regarding, the applica-
tion of a rule, especially when it
, seems tO owerlap, as done by the
Wārttikakāra, and later on by the
. Paribhāgās laid dow n by gram-
marians regarding the rules of
|Panini; cf. स्वाभिधेयापेक्षावधिनियमेो व्यवरंथा
S. K. on P. I.. 1.34; cf. also लक्ष्यानु-
साराद्वयवस्था Par. Sek. Pari. 99, 108. "
व्यवस्थितविभाषा an Option which
'does not apply universally in all
the instances of a rule which pre-
Scribes an operation optionally,
but applies necessarily in · Some
cases and does not apply at all
in the other cases, the total result
being an option regarding the
conduct of the rule. The rules
अजेव्र्यघञ्ञपेोः P. II. 4.56, लट: शतृशा-
नचावप्रथमासमानाधिकरणे III. 2.124 and
वामेि I. 4.5 are some of the rules
which have got an option describ-
ed as व्यवस्थितविभाषा. The standard
instances of व्यवस्थितविभाषा are given
in the ancient verse देवत्रातेो गलेो ग्राहः
इतियोगे च सद्विधिः । मिथसेत न विभाष्यन्ते
गवाक्षः संशितव्रतः |l M. Bh...on P. III.
3.156; WII.4.41.
: व्यवहित having an intervention by a'
dissimilar thing; separated by
something coming between; cf.
सं॒योग्ासंज्ञा व्यवार्हतानां मा भूत् M. Bh. on
दूI.*' 1,8. Wārt, 5.::· :',' '.· · .
व्यवाय intervention, separation by
inser tion ; separation by means of
the insertion ofa phonetic element.
See , द्वयुवध्ध॒ान above. cf. अट्कुप्वाङ्नु-
म्ब्यवायेपि P. VIII. 4.2: अडभ्येसिव्यवा-
येपि P. VI. 1.26; cf. अङ्कब्यवाये
चाङ्कपर: R. T. 190; संयेागानां स्वरभक्त्या
व्यवायः R. Pr. XIV. 25.
व्यस्त separated into its constituent
elements; separated by a new
insertion; a recital of the Wedic
text by separating a coalesced
wowel, which is looked upon as a
fault of recital.
व्याकरण Grammar; the development
of the meaning of the term can
be seen by the senses given below
in a Serial order and the exam-
ples after thOSe senses; (a) ana-
lysis or explanation by analysis;
(b) rules Of explanation; (c). spe-
cific rules explaining the forma-
tion of words; (d) explanation of
the formation of rules; (e) a
treatise in which such an expla-
mation is giwen; (f) a collection
of such treatises and (g) a syste-
matic explanation ofthe formation
of words in a language ( व्याकरणशास्त्र
or शद्वानुशासन); cf.(a) व्याक्रियते अनेन इति
व्याकरणम् ; M.Bh.on Ahnika 1, Vart.
12; cf. (b) लक्ष्यलक्षणे व्याकरणम्; M.
Bh. Ahnika 1, Vārt. 14; cf. (c) न
यथा लोके तथा व्याकरणे M. Bh. on P.
I. 1.1. Vart. 7; {d) सर्वत्रैव हि व्याकरोणे
पूर्वोच्चारितः सज्ञीं परोच्चारिता संज्ञा M. Bh. on
P. I. 1.1. Vārt 7; (e) न तथा लोके यथा
व्याकरणे M.Bh. on P. I. 1.23 Wārt.
4; cf.(f)इह च व्याकरणे शब्दे.कार्यस्य संभवः,
अर्थे असंभवः || M. Bh. on P. I. 1.68.
cf. (g) व्याकरणे नाम इयमुत्तरा विद्या l M.
Bh. om P. I. 2.32. The word .व्याक-
रण is mostly used in the sense of
* the Science of Grammar * in the
Mahābhā$ya. It is explained by
modern scholars as'* the, law of
, l: the , correctness ' of $pee¢ंh>;and



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-366.png}}}}}}

व्याकरणाचन्द्रिका
350
व्याघ्रपाद्
etymological science? and describ-
ed both as a science and am art•
व्याकरणाचन्द्रिका a short treatise on
grammar written by Kr$taācārya..
व्याकरणदशैोन the science of Vyaka-
rana with the element of Sphota
introduced in it and brOught
consequently on a par with the
other DarŚanas by the stalWart
grammar-scholar Bhartrhari Of
the 7th century A. D. For details
see Sarvad.arŚanasarihgraha * Pānāi-
nidarŚanam * and page 385 Vol.
VII. of the Vyākarana Mahā-
bhaya edited by the D. E-
Society, Poona.
व्याकरणदोप a small treatise on gram-
mar by Cidrtipāśraya.
व्याकरणदीपिका n \ me of a short gloss
or Vrtti on the Sutras of Pāt?ini
Written by a modern Scholar of
grammar Orambhatta of'Vārānasi.
व्याकरणप्रकाश name of the comme-
ntary written by Mahamiśra on
Jinendrabuddhi's great work
*Kāśikāvivaranapafंjikā* or Nyāsa.
व्याकरणमहाभाष्य see महाभाष्य.
व्याकरणमहाभाष्यगूढाथैर्दपिनी a brief
commentary on the Mahābhāsya,
written by SadāŚiva, son of Nila-
kantha and pupil of Kamalākara
Dikgita. The gloss confines itself
to th e explanations ofobScure and
difficult passages in the Mahā-
bhāsya and criticizes Kaiyata's
explanationS.
व्याकरणमहाभ the original
name of the learned commentary
on Patafंjali'$ Mahābhāsya by
Kaiyatabhatta the well-known
grammarian of Kashmir of the
eleventh century. See प्रदीप and
कैयट.
व्याकरणमहाभाष्यप्रदीपविवरण ( ) a gloss
©ra the Mahābhā$yapradipa of
Kaàyafa written by ईश्वरानन्द, a
pupil of सत्यानन्द; (2) a glogs on the
Mahābhāgyapradipa of Kaiyata by
नाराय0|.
व्याकरणमहाभाष्यप्रदीपेोद्द्येात the well-
knOwn Scholarly COmmentary by
the stalwart grammarian Nageśa-
bhaÉÉa on the Mahābha$yapradtpa
of Kaiyata. See उद्द्येात and नागेश.
व्याकरणमहाभाष्यव्याख्या महंाभाष्य
abOwe.
व्याकरणरत्नावली a short work on gra-
mmar written by विद्यारत्न गौरमोदन.
व्याकरणसंग्रह a small grammar work
written by a grammar scholar
Gaihgādhara which is based upon
the Mugdhabodha of Bopadeva.
व्याकरणसुधानिधि a gloss on the Stitras
of Pānini written by ViŚveśvara.
व्याकरणाध्ययनप्रयोजन the purpose of
the study of Grammar which is
beautifully Sumtmed up and dis-
cussed in the first Ahnika by Pat-
afंjali in his Mahabhā$ya.
व्याकरणान्तर a term used by Scholars
of the Pāniniyan System of gra-
mmar with respect to grammar
works of Other sy$tems such as the
|Kātantra, the Sakatāyana, and
others; cf. श्रन्थिग्रान्थदाम्भिस्वञ्जीनां लिटः
कित्वे व्याकरणान्तरे S.K. on अश्नोतेश्च P.
VII.4.72.
व्यारव्यान (1) explanation of a rule, or
a line, or a verse by analysing the
rule and giving examples and
counter-examples; cf. न केवलानि
-चच्चीँपदानि व्याख्यानं वृद्धिः अात् ऐजिति । किं
तर्हि । उदाहरणं प्रत्युदाहरणं वाक्याध्याहारः इत्ये-
तत्समुदितं व्याख्यानं भवति । M.Bh. Āhnika
l Vārt.l l ;(2)authoritative decision
given in places of doubtby ancient
scholars; cf. ळयाख्थानतेो विशषप्रतिपत्तिः न
हि संद्वेहादलक्षणम् M. Bh. Ahnika . 1;
Par.Sek.Pari.1.
See
| व्याघ्रपाद् name of an ancient gram-
marian who is quoted in the Prāti-
śākhya works and theMahābhāya•



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-367.png}}}}}}

व्याघ्रभूतेि
351
व्याप्य
His gramtmar wOrk waS called
*daśaka' possibly On accOunt Of its
consisting of 10 chaptcrS; cf. मlध्य-
. न्दिनिर्वष्टि गुणं त्विगन्त नपुंसक व्याघ्रपदां वरिष्ठ:
Kā$. on P.VII.194; cf. also दशक्रा
वैयाघ्रपदीयाः Kā$. , on P.IW.2.65.
name of an old gramma-
rian later than Patafijali who is
quoted by later grammarians; cf.
व्याघ्रभूत्यादयस्त्वेनं नेह पेटुरिति स्थितम् Sid-
dhāntakaumudi on अात्मनेदेष्वनतः
|P. VII. 1. 5. →
व्याघ्रादि a class of words headed by
व्याघ्र which, as standards of compa-
rison, are compounded with
words showing objects of compa- ||
rison provided the common pro-
perty is not mentioned; e•g.
पुरुषव्याघ्रः, नृसिंहः etc., cf. Kāś. onP.II.
|1.56.
व्यााडेि name of an ancient gramma-
rian with a sound scholarship in
Vedic phonetics,accentuation,deri-
vation of words and their inter-
pretation. He is believed to have
been a relatiwe and contemporary
of Panini and to have written a
very scholarly vast volume on San-
skrit grammar named *Sarihgraha'
which is believed to have consist- !
ed of a lac of verses; cf. संग्रहो व्याडि-
कृतो लक्षसंख्येो ग्रन्थ: Nāgeśa?s Uddyota;
cf. also इह पुरा पाणिनीये अत्मिन्व्याकरेण
व्याडट्युपराचेतं लक्षग्रन्थपरिमाणं निबन्धनमासीत्
Vāk. Pad. Tika.. The work is not
available at present. References
to Vyādi or to his work are found
in the Pratiśākhya works, the
Mahābhāgya, the Vārttikas, the
Vākyapadiya and many subsequent
treatises.A work on the Vyākaratha
Paribhāsas, believed to have been
written by Vyādi, is available by
the mame परिभाषासून्चन which from
itS style and othcr peculiarities
seerms to have been written after
the Varttikas, but before the
Mahābhāsya. Vyādi is well-known
to have been the oldest exponent
of the doc{rine that words denote
an individual object and not the
genus. For details see pp. 136-8,
Vol. 7 Vyākaraए]a - Mahābhāgya
D- E. Society's Edition.
व्याडोय name given to the pupils and
students belonging to the school
ofVyādi; cf. M.Bh. on P.WI.2.36.
व्यापक covering or applying to the
Whole in entirety, and not in
parts;.cf. अाधकरणं नाम त्रिप्रकारं व्यापकमौ-
पक्षेापकं वैष्प्रायिकमिति M. Bh. ०n P.VI.1.
72;cf. इतरो व्यापकत्वोच्छास्त्रासिद्धत्वं प्रदेशान्तर
एव स्थापितं मन्यमान अाह l Kaiyata on
P. VI.4. 22.
व्यापच्ति lit. loss or disappearance; the
word is used in the sense of com-
wersion of one thing into another
in the Prātiśākhya works; cf. अथा-
प्यन्तव्यापत्तिभैवति Nir. II. l ; cf. also
अन्यैरेकारान्नतिरत्र पूर्वी ततो व्यापतिभवतीति
विद्यात् R.. Pr.V.1.
व्याप्त occupied fully; cf. तदाधक२णं य त्र
कृत्स्न अाधारात्मा व्यातेा भवति M. Bh.. on
|P.I.3.1l Vārt.• 7: cf: also M.Bh. on
P.I.4.42; यावता सर्वमद्यापवादैव्याप्तिम्P.IV.
3.134 Và]rt. 2.
व्याप्ति occupation; presence; compre-
hensive nature; cf. व्याातैमत्वाञ्जु शब्दस्य
Nir.I.2, where व्याति refers to the
permanent presence of the word
in the minds of the speaker and
the hearer, the word शब्द referring
to the नित्यशब्द or स्फेाट.
व्याप्तिन्याय the general method of
taking a comprehensive sense
instead of a restricted one in places
ofdoubt; cf. व्यान्यिायाद्वा 'Kā$. on P.
III. 2. 168. `
व्याप्य lit. that which is occupied; the
word referS to a kind of an object
where the object iS occupied by the
verbal activity of the transitive
root; the word अाप्य is also used in



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-368.png}}}}}}

व्यायत
352
→、
व्युत्पांत्तवाद
this sense; cf. कर्म निवैत्यै विकायै प्राप्यं च
ग्रस्य प्रकृत्युच्छेदो गुणान्तरं वोत्पद्यते तद्विकार्यम्
Srihgāra-- Prakā$a 2. The term is
used aS a technical term instead
of the term कर्म in the Hemacandra,
Cāndra and other systems of
grammar; cf. Hem. II.2.3;Cāndra
I.1.23. 1
व्यायत separated; one out of the two ||
cOnjoined consonants separated by
inserting a wowel in between; cf.
व्यस्यन्त्यन्तमैहतेाऽ व्यायतं तं दीघाँयुः सूयेाँ
रुशदोतै ऊजैम् |R. Pr. XIV. 19, 'where
Uwvata gives the explanation-दीघाँ-
ल्परं अब्यायतं अपृथग्भूतं रेफेण सत्तमित्यथः एवं-
भूतं व्यस्यान्त पृथ्क्कुवैन्ति । यथा । दीरिघायुः !
सूरियः । रुशदीरिते | ऊरजम्. Rk Sarihhitā
I. 85. 39, X. 158. 1, IX. 91. 3 and
IX. 63. 2.
व्यावर्तन rewersing the order of words
and going back from a subsequent
word to the previous one, as in
the Krama, Jaga and other artifi-
cial recitals of Veda.
व्यावृात pushing aside; removal; the
word is frequently used in connec-
tion with the setting aside or
remowal of the application of such
rules, as also of the contingency of
such ruleS as are not desired in
the formation of a correct word,
by meanS of applying another rule
neceSSary for the correct forma-
tion; gf. तद्वि इद्रं तिष्यपुनर्वसु इत्यत्र
तद्वश्यावृत्त्यथैम् Par. Sek. onPari. 34;
as also तद्धेि असवर्णग्रहणं ईषतुरित्यादौ
इयङादिव्यावृत्यथैम् Par.Sek. on Pari.55;
cf. also the usual statement व्यावृत्तिः
क्रियते । →
व्याश्रय resting on, or applying to,
different wOrds or elements of
words Or parts of words; the word
is used in connection with a
grammatical operation which
affects one part of the word,
as distinguished from another j
Operation which aftects another
part ;..cf. अाभीयं कायै समानाश्रयमसिद्धम् ।
व्याश्रयं सिद्धं भवति l M.Bh. on P.III.i."
44, VI. 4.22 Vārt.12, VI.4.42 etc..
व्यास (1) shOwing separately; separate
expreS$ion as contrasted with
समास; (2) fault of pronunciation
of the type of unnecessarily ex-
tending the place Of Origin as also
the instrument of the production
of sound; cf. स्थानकरणयोर्विस्तारे व्यासे
नाम देोषो जायते Uvvatā on R. Pr.
XIV. 2.
व्याहृति or व्याहृती lit. the utterance of
a word; the word is generally
used in the sense of the specific
utterance of the wOrds भूस्ः, भुवः etc;
cf. एताभिव्यीँहृतीाभः प्रजापतिः Tait.
Sarih I. 6. 10; cf. also भुवश्च महाव्याहृतः
]P. VIII. 2.71.
व्युत्क्रमण the same as व्यावर्तन or परिवर्तन,
which see above. '
व्युत्पत्ति deriwation of a word from a
root which formed a special
feature of the Nairukta school of
Vedic Scholars in ancient times;
the word निवैचन is used in the
sarme sense; cf. सति सेभवे व्युत्पत्तिरन्यथा
कर्तव्या रूंढरनियमात् Kāś. on P.V. 2.93.
व्युत्पत्तिपक्ष the wiew that every word
is derived from a suitable root as
coratrasted with the othuer wiew
viz. the अन्युत्पत्तिपक्ष. The gramma-
rianS hold that Pānini held the
अव्युत्पत्तिपक्ष,i.e. the view that not all
words in a language can be derived
but only some of them can be so
done, and contrast him (i.e.Pānini)
with an equally great grammarian
Sākatāyana who stated that every
w'श्Ord has to be derived; cf. न्यग्रो-
धयतीति न्यग्रोध इति व्युत्पात्तिपक्षे नियमाथैम् ।
अव्युत्पत्तिपक्ष विध्यर्थम् Kāś.on P.VII.3.6.
व्युत्पत्तिवाद (I) name given to a topic
in grammar which deals with the
derivation of words as suitable to



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-369.png}}}}}}

→ →'
353
शकरशााख्त्री
the sense; (?2) name given to
treatises di8cuSSing the derivation
and interpretation of words.
व्युत्पन्नत्व derivation, correct under-
standing ofthe Sense by derivation.
व्युत्पन्नपक्ष the view that every word
in the language has been derived
from a root which explains its
sense; see व्युत्पत्तिपक्ष.
व्युदास setting aside of a rule or ope-
ration by means of another
more powerful rule, Or by means
of a cOnventional dictum.
व्युष्टादि a class of words headed by
the wOrd व्युश्ट to which the taddhita
affix अ (अण् ) is added in the sense
of the place where something is
givera Or prepar ed; cf. व्युष्ट दीँयते कार्य
वा वैयुष्टम् ! नैत्यम्; Kāś. on P.V.1.97.
व्यूईं (l) resolution or determination;
cf.. अकृतव्यूहाः पाणिनीयाः । न कृतो विाशेष्ट
जूद्देो निश्चयः शास्त्रप्रवृत्तिविषये यैः इत्यर्थः Par.
$ek. Pari. 56; (2) Separation ofthe
phOnetic elementS in a word, done
especially for the recital of the
Vedic texts according to mpetre;cf.
व्यूहैः संपत्स॒मीश्क्ष्येोने क्षैप्रवर्णैकंभाावनाम् । व्यूहैः
पृथकरेणेन Uvvata on R. Pr. VIII.22.
मिाङ्कन lowering of the chin, resulting
in_a fault of utterance; cf. हन्वोव्रडिने
नीँचैभवे संदष्टं नाम देोषो भवंति । Uvvata
on R.Pr. XIV.3.
नोह्यादि a class of words headed by
नीहि to which the taddhita affixes
इन् and ठन् are applied in the sense
of poSSession along with the usual
affix मत् ( मतुपुंप् ); e. g. व्रीही, व्रीहिकः
ब्रीहिमान् । मायी, मायिकः मायाबान् ; cf.
Kaś. on P.V. 2. 116.
व्द्दिदने [ WHITNEY, WILLIAM
DWIGHT, 1827-1894] a sound
Scholar Of Vedic grammar who
has, besides some books on Ling-
uistic studies, written a work on
Vedic Grammar and edited the
Atharvaveda Pratiśākhya.
45
श
श (1) a sibilant letter of the palatal
class, pOSSessed of the properties,
श्वासानुप्रदान, अघेाष and कण्ठविवृात्व; (2)
the initial indicatCry ( इत् ) letter
शु of a non-taddhita affix in Panini's
grammar, which is dropped; (3)
substitute for च्छ् when followed by
an affix beginning with a naSal con-
sonant; e.g प्रश्नः, cf. P.VI.4.19;(4)
substitute for स् when followed by शू
or any palatal letter;e. g. वृक्षश्छादयति
वृक्षश्शेते Kāś.on P. VIII. 4.40.
शा (1) conjugational sign(विकरण) appli-
ed to the roots of the sixth conju-
gation ( तुदादिगण ) in all conjuga-
tional tenses and moods C i. e. the
present, the imperfect,the impera-
tive and the potential ) before the
personal-endings; cf. तुदाादिभ्यः शः,
|P. III.1.77; this sign श ( अ ) has
got the initial consonant शू as an
indicatory one, and hence this अ
is a Sārvadhātuka. affix, but, it
is weak and doeS not cauSe गुण
for the preceding vowel; ( 2 )
tad. affix श in the sense of
|possession applied to the words
लेीमन् and others; e. g. लोमश:,
रेमशःcf. P.V.2. 100; (3) krt affix
(अ ) applied to the roots पा, घ्रा, ध्मा,
धे and ' दृश् when pre€eded by a
prefix,to the roots लिम्पू, विन्द् etc.not
preceded by a prefix, and Optiof१a-
ily to दा and धा of the third conju-
gation in the sense of *an agent';
e.g. उात्पबः, उत्पश्यः, लिम्पः, विन्दः ददः,
दायः ; cf. P.III.1.137-139.
शैाकरभट्ट name of a grammarian of
the eighteenth century who wrote
a commentary, called शांकरी after
|hirn, on Nāgeśa's Paribhā$endu-
śekhara.
|शंकरशाख्त्री ( मारुलकर ) a modern $ch9-
lar of grammar who lived in



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-370.png}}}}}}

शैखध्म ’ 354
शातृ
|Poona and did the work ofteaching
and writing commentaries. He haS
written a commentary mamed शांकरी
on the Vaiyākarat}abhü$anasāra of
Kothdabhatja.
शखध्म name given to a Yama letter
in theSik$ंā treatises.
शकन्धुक name of a class of words in
whose case the last vOWel of the
first word does not coaleSce with
the first woWel of the mext Word;
e. g. शक अन्धुक ईश l अक्षपा असि I
वपा इव त्मना । सुपथा अकृण्वन् l cf.
शकन्धुकादीनाम् R.T.87 which is ex-
plained by the commentator as
शकन्धुकादीनां च न संनिकृष्यत.
शकन्ध्वादि name of a class of words in
which an irregular cOalescence of
the vowels of the kind of the
latter vowel in the place of the
former and latter both is observed;
e-g• शकन्धुः, कुलटा, सीमन्तः,मनीष्धा etc. cf.
कन्ध्वाादेषु च (पररूपं वाच्यम् ) P.VI.l. 94
Wart. 4.
शावक्त endowed with शार्कत i. e. the
potentiality tO exprcSS the SenSe;
potent to show the particular
SCIn1S62.
शक्ति potentiality of expressing the
sense which iS p0SSeSSed by words
permanently with them; denota-
tive potentiality or denotation ; this
potentiality $hoWS the senses,which
are permancntly poSSeSsed by the
words, to the hearer and is descri-
bed to be of one kind by ancient
grammarian as contrasted with the
two (अभिधा and लक्षणा) mentioned by
the modern ones. It is described
to be of two kinds--(a) स्मारिका शारीते
or recalling capacity which com•
bines चैत्रत्व with पाक, and अनुभाावि-
का शक्ति which is responsible for the
actual meaning of a Sentence. For
details see Vākyapadiya III.
शाक्य the substratum of potentiality
which forms the object pointed out
by meanS of the potentiality to the
hearer by the word (i.e. शब्द) which
directly communicates the sense,
in Which case it is termed वाचक as
contrasted with भेदक or द्येोतक when
the sense,which is ofthe type ofसंबन्ध
is conveyed rather indirectly. This
mice division into वाचकता and भेदकता
was introduced clearly by भर्तृहरि;
cf. Vākyapadiya Kānda 2.
शङ्कटच्छ् tad. afiix शङ्कट applied opti-
onally with the affix शालञ्च॒ ( शाल )
to the prefix वि in the sense of the
base itself ( स्वार्थे); e.g. विशङ्कटम् ।
विशालम् l ; cf. S.K. on P.V. 2.28; cf.
KaŚ. on P.V.2.28 which states
विशाले विशङ्कटे शूङ्गे । तस्माद् गैौरपि विशङ्कट
उच्यते l
शण्डकादि a class of words headed.by
the word शण्डिक which hawe the
taddhita affix य ( ञ्य ) added to
them in the sense of *domicile? or •
*native place?; e. g. शाण्डिक्यः, सार्व-
सेन्यः, cf. Kā$. on P. IV. 3. 92.
शात् tad. affix शत् as seen in the words
त्रिंशत्, चत्वारिंशत् etc., cf. पाङ्केतविंशतित्रिं-
|शच्चत्वरिंशत्० P. V.1.59.
शातपाद conventional name given to
the fourth phda of the fifth adhyāya
ofPāthini's A$íādhyāyi which begins
with the stitra पादशतस्य संख्यादेवीँर्ष्टसायां
बुन् लेोपश्च P. V. 4.1.
शातेि tad. affix शति applied to the
word द्वि to form the word ार्वेशति;
cf. ]P... V. 1. 59.
शात्तृ kपू't affix अत् in the sense of * the
agent of the present time ', appli-
ed to any root which takes the
Parasmaipada personal affixes;
cf. लट: शतृशानचावप्रथमासमानाधिकरणे P.
III. 2.126,8. The words formed
with this शतृ (अत्) affix are termed
present participles in the declen-
sion of which, by virtue of the
indicatory vowel ऋ in शतृ, the



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-371.png}}}}}}

शात्तृस्वर
355 शाब्द
augment नुम् is inserted after the
last vOwcl of the base, and the
root receiveS Such modifications as
are cauSed by aSārvadhātuka affix, |
the affix शतृ being looked upon
as a Sārvadhātuka affix on account
of the indicatory letter शु. The
word ending in this affix शतृ ||
gOvernS a nOun forming its object,
in the accusative case.
शात्तृस्वर the acute accent specifically
stated for the vowel of the case-
affix beginning with a vowel etc.
prescribed by the rule शतुरनुमेा नद्य-
जादी P. VI. 1.173; cf. शतृस्वर | तुदती
नुदती •.. शतुरनुमो नद्यजादिरन्तेीदात्तादित्वघ्त्र
स्वरेी यथा स्यात् M. Bh. on P. VIII.
2.6. Vārt, 2.
शाध्ये, शध्यैन् krt afiix अधैयै in the sense
of the infinitive added, to.a root as
Seen in the Wedic Literature; cf.
तुमर्थे सेसनसञ्असेन्बसेकसेनध्यैअध्यैन्कथैयकश्यैन्-
|शध्यैशध्यैन्तवैतवेङ्तवेनः, P. III. 4.9.
२'र् a vikarama affix ( conjugatiomal
sign ) applied to roots of the firSt
conjugation and in general tO all
secondary roots i. e. roots formed
from nouns and from other rOotS
before personal-endings which are
Sarvadhātuka and which possess
the sense of agent, prowided there
is no other vikaraI}a affix prescrib-
ed; e. g. भवति, एधते, कारयति, हारयति,
बुभूषति, " पुत्रीयति, पुत्रकाम्यति, कामयते,
गेोपोयति, कण्डूयति, पटयति, दिनन्ति (यामिन्यः)
etc. cf. कर्तरि शप् , P. III.1 .68.
This affix शप् is dropped after roots
of the second conjugation (अदादि )
and those of the third cOnjugation
( जुहेात्यादि) and in Vedic Literature
wherewer observed; cf. P.II.4.72,
73, 75, 76.
शबरस्वामिन् a grammarian to whom a
metrical treatise ongenderS named
लिङ्गानुशासन is ascribed. This शवरस्वा-
मिन् was comparatively a modern
grammarian who was giwen the
title बालयोगीश्वर. This लिङ्गानुशासन has
a commentary Written by हर्षवर्धन.
|Bvidently theSe gratnmarians
शबरस्वाामेन् and हर्षवर्धन " are different
from the famous author of the
मीमांसाभाष्य and the patron of 'the
poet Bāna respectively.
I शबादशा the Wikarana affixes श्यन् , श*
श्नम्, उ and श्क्षा according to thOSe
who hold the wiew that these affixes
do not form the exceptions of शप्,
but they are substituted for शप् .
cf. शबादेशाः श्यन्नादयः करिष्यन्ते M. Bh.
on P. I.1.27, II.2.3, III.l.33 and
|IHI.1.67.
शब्द lit. *souamd' in general; cf. शब्दंकुरु
शब्दं मा कार्षीः । ध्वनिं कुर्वनेवमुच्यते । M.Bh.
in Āhnika l ; cf. also शव्दः प्रकृतिः
सर्ववणीनाम् । वर्णपृक्त: शब्देीं वाच उत्पातः T.
Pr. XXIII.1, XXIII.3.In grammar
the word शब्द is applied to Such
words only as poSSeSS senSe; cf.
प्रतीतप्रदार्थकी लेोके ध्वनिः शब्द: M. Bh. in
Āhnika 1; cf;.also_ येनेोच्चारितेन_ अर्थः
प्रतीयत स शब्दः Sringāra PrakāŚa I; cf.
also अथ शब्दानुशासनम् M.Bh. Ahnika
1. In the Vājasaneyi-Prāti$ākhya,
शब्द is said to be constituted of air
as fār as its nature is concerned,
but it is taken to rr`ean in the
Prātiśākhya and grammar works in
a restricted sense as letterS pOSSeSS-
ed of sense, The VājaSaneyi-
Prātiśakhya gives four kinds of
words तिङ्, कृत्, तद्धित and समास॒
while नाम, अाख्यात, निपात and उपसगैो
are described to be the four kinds
in the Nirukta. AS शब्द in grammar,
is restricted to a phonetic unit
possessed of sense, it can be appli-
ed to crude bases, affixes, as,alsQ
to words that are cOmpletely
formed with ca$e-endingS or perS0-
nal afiixes. In fact, taking it to be
applicable to all such kinds, some
grammarians have given का twelve
* ३ubdivisions of शब्द, viz• प्रकृति, प्रत्यय,



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-372.png}}}}}}

शब्दकौस्तुभ
शाब्दबोधप्राघ्केिय
उपत्कार, उपपद, प्रातिपदिक, विभासै,उपसजैन,
म्स, पद, वु[क्य, प्रकरण and प्रबन्ध; cf.
Sringara Prakāśa I.
शब्दकैास्तुभ a treatise on grammar,
9ritically explaining and discuss:
ing the meaning of Pश्anini's Stाtras
ंf the Order of the author himself.
3'he,work is written by |Bhattoji
Dīk$ita and is rmainly based on the
Mahābhasya.
→ a shOrt gloss on Bha-
t[Qjf's Sabdakaustubhā written by
aśग्ramri१arian named इन्द्रदचेतापाध्याय.
5S\
शब्दकैस्तुभटीका or _शब्दकैोस्तुभप्रभा a
8ommentary on Bhattoji's Sabda-
kaustubha written by Vaidyanātha
Pāyagutaçंe.
शब्दुकौस्तुभव्याख्या a COmmentary on
Bhattoji's Sabdakaustubha, nāmed
ख्या, a name probably
gईven to a commentary written by
NageŚa.
शब्दचान्द्रिकोद्धार name of a commen-
tary On the Sārasvata-Wyākarana
by Kafhsavijaya.
*ईतल्व lit. the essence of a word;
the ultimate sense COnveyed by the
w°rdwhich is terrmed स्फेटि by the
Vaiyākarar?as. PhiloSophically this
Sabdatattva or Sphota is thé phi-
lOSOphical Brahrrian of the Vedan-
tinS, which is named as Sabdabra-
hrma or Nādabrahma by the Vaiy-
ākaraऐas,and which appears as the
Phenomenal world of the basis of
jts oWn powers such as thc time
factor and the Iike; cf अना|ादनेिधनं
*नहम्शद्वतत्त्वं यदुक्षरम् ! विवर्ततेर्थभावेन प्रेकिं
जगतो यतः | Vàkyapadiya, I.l ;	cf.
al$9.Vakyapadya 'II.31.
शष्ददीपिका name of a c9fmmentary on
the Mugdhabodha Vyākarapā by
Govindarāma.
शब्दद्योत्यत्व the fndicatory power to
$how the sense; the worà is used
in connection with the Potentiality
? °9ंvey the sense possessed by
the Nipatas.
शब्दानित्यत्व the dOctrine of the Vaiyā-
karanas as also of the Mimafiीh-
SakaS that word is Permanent, as
C9ntrasted with that of the Naiya-
yikaS who advocate the impermān-
ence of words.
शाब्दपरविप्रतिषेध the compafàtivelysup-
erior strength possessed by a word,
which in the text of a particular
Stra is later than another word,
which_is put in earlier in the
Stra:This शब्दपरविप्रातधेधे is contra..
€q with th६ Standard शास्त्रपरविप्रतिष्ध
which is_laid glown by Panini in
his rule विपतिषेधे परं कार्यम् and' which
làyS down the superior Strength of
that f ule which i$ put by Panini
|later on in his A$¢ãdhyāyī; e. g. in
the rule विभाषा गमह्नविदावेशाम्,it is not
the,, word हन् although Occuring
5arlier, but the word वैिश॒ Occuring
later in the rule, which helps us to
decide,.which विद् should be' taken.
cfशानार्थस्य सत्य॒पि विदरूपत्वे अर्थस्य भेदकत्वे
रूपवद्[श्रय्ण्त्प्रति॒षेधाभावः । यद्यपि होन्तिनां
सँ[ड़्चयै॒ बिवेँदे॒रार्दूत त॒थापि " शब्दपरीवैप्रातैषैध
विशिव्यैवस्थाहेतुर्न हान्तः | Kaiyata on P.
VII.2.18;cf. alsO, P.VI.1.158 V.12.
२ाब्दष्भा name of a cOmmentary on
Bhartपू'hari*s Wākyapadiya which
ंs available only 'on ' the first
Karhda.
२ब्दपारयिण recital or enumeration of
9n° wOrd after another in a
laरुं'śप्uage; cf. वृहस्पातिरिन्द्राय दिव्यं वर्षसहस्रं
प्रतिपदेाक्त॒ान॒ां शब्दानां शब्दपारायणं प्रेोवाच नन्तें
जगाम M.Bh. Āhnika' I.
शब्दप्रयोग use of a word in the spoken
language which forms in ā way
the basis of grammar.
शब्दबोधप्रक्रिया a 8rarr1fmar treatise on
the denotation and relation of
words written by a grammarian
named Ramakछ्$ra.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-373.png}}}}}}

शब्दभूषण
357
शाब्दास्सेद्धि
शब्दभूषण name of a short gloss on the
Sutras of Pānini, written by Nāra-
yat]a Pat!dita.
name of a small gra-
mmatical work written by Rāma-
candra Dikgita.
शब्दमज्जरी name of a short grammar
work written by Nārāyat]a
Pandita.
शब्दरत्न name of a scholarly gloss
written by Haridikgita on · the
Manorama, a commentary by
|Bhatt:0ji Dik$ita on his own
Siddhāntakaumudi. The proper
name Of the commentary is लधु-
शब्दरत्न of which शब्दरत्न is an abridg-
ed form.The commentary लघुशब्दरत्न
is generally studied along with
the Manorama by students. There
is a bigger work named बृहच्छब्दरत्न
written by Hari Dik$ita, of which
the लधुशद्वरन्न is an abridgment.
शब्दरत्नटोका known by the name
भावप्रकाशिक!, a commentary on Hari
Dikंंंंंंंंंंita's Sabdaratna, written by
Vaidyanatha Pāyagunde.
a commentary on the
ILaghuśabdaratna written by a
grammarian named Kalyāna-
malla.
शन्दरूप ihe actual form of a word
aS a collection of letters or वर्णसमूह
or वर्णानुपूर्वाँ irrespective of the sense.
In grammar it is the शब्दरूप that is
mainly considered and mot the
meaning of the word; cf. स्व रूपं
शब्दस्याशब्दसंज्ञा, P.I.1.68.
शब्दरूपावलि a very brief treatise on
declension giving the forms of the
Sewen cases of a few choice-words.
The wOrk is studied as the first
clementary work and is wery
common without the name of any
Specific author.There are different
works named शब्दरूपावलि giving de-
glensions Qf different words which
are all anonymous, although from
the dates of manuscripts mention-
cd, they appear to be more than
five or six hundred years old.
शाब्दवाच्यत्व expression of its sense
by a word which occurs "to the
|mind of the hearer as soon as a
word is heard.
शाब्दविवरण a gratmrnar work on the
meaning of words and how it is
cOnweyed, written by a gramma-
|rian named वर्णिकुबेरानन्द. The work
forrns a part of his bigger work
दानभाग|व॒त. See वार्णिकुबेरानन्द.
शाब्दव्युत्पत्ति derivation of a word by
tracing it to the root from which
' it is formed.
तैौमुदी a Small treatise on
the deriwation of words written by
a grammarian named Rājārāma-
Sāstrin.
शञ्दशााख्त्र the Sciene ofwords.The term
is generally applied. to grammar,
although ,strictly speaking the
Mimārihsā Sāstra is also a science of
words.
शब्दसंचय an anonymous elementary
booklet on declension similar to
Sabdarüpāvalt.
शाब्दसंज्ञा a technical term given to a
wording irr^spective of the sense
element as contrasted with अर्थसंज्ञा.
See.e.g. धु, भ or the like; cf. शब्दसंज्ञायां
ह्यर्थासंप्रत्ययेा यथान्यत्र P.I. 1.44 Vārt. 2.
शाब्दसत्रंवप्रकाशा a work on grammar
said to have been written by a
grammarian named इन्द्रदत्त.
शाब्दसाध्यप्रयोग a grammar work on
the formation of wÓrds written by
a grammarian named रमानाथशर्मी.
शाब्दसिाद्धे (1)formation of a complete
word fit for use by adding proper
sufixes to the crude base and .
making the necessary modifica-
tions; cf. नैव व्याकरणादृते शब्दसिद्विः ]



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-374.png}}}}}}

शाब्दसुधा
358
शमादि
( 2 ) name of a commentary by ||
महादव on the Kātantra stttravjtti
by Durgasirihha.
शब्दसुधा name ofa grammar work by
a grammarian named अनन्तभट्ट.
शब्दानुशासन lit. science Of grammar
dealing with the formation of |
words, their accents, and uSe in a
sentence. The word iS used in
connection With standard workS
on grammar which are complete
and self-sufficient in all the above-
mentioned features. Patafijaji
has begun his Mahābhāsya with
the words अथ शब्दानुशासनम् referring
possibly to the vast mum! er of
'Vārttikas on the Stitras of Pātini,
and hence the term शब्दानुशासन
according to him means a treatise
on the science of grammar made
up of the rules of Pānini with the
explanatory and critical Warttikas
written by Katyāyana and other
Vārttjkakāras.The word शब्दानुशासन
|later on, became synonymons
with Vyākarana and it was given
as a title to their treatises by later
grammarians, or twas applied to
the authoritatiwe treatise which
introduced a System of grammar,
similar to that of Pānini. Hema-
candra's famous treatise, named
सिद्धहैमचन्द्र by the author,came to be
known as हैमशव्दानुशासन. Similarly"
the workS On grammar written by
पाल्यकीर्तिशाकटायन and देवनान्दिन् were
called शाकटायनशव्दानुशा!सन and जैनेन्द्र- '
शब्दानुशासन respectively.
शब्दान्तर a different wording, as it
resultS from modifications such as
āgama, Or ādeŚa, or lopa; cf. शब्दा-
न्तरस्य प्राप्रुवन् विधिरनित्यः' Par. Sek.
Pari. 43. .
शाञ्दामृत a work, explanatory of the
Stitras of Pānini, written by a
grammarian named विप्रराजेन्द्र.
शब्दार्थप्रतिपत्ति, शब्दार्थप्रत्यय knowledge
ofthe meaning ofa word from that
word when heard, the word being
either denotative ( वाचक ) or indi-
cative ( द्योतक ).
शब्दार्थरहस्य a grammatical work on
the interpretation of words by
Rāmanātha Vidyāvācaspati.
शब्दार्थसंबन्ध the connection between
a word and itS Sense which is a
pcrmanently established one.
According to grammarians,words,
their sense and their connection,
all the three, are established for
ever; cf. सिद्धे शव्दार्थसंबन्धे P. I.1.
. Vārttika 1,and the Bhāsya thereon
सिद्ध शब्दः अर्थः संबन्धश्चति । Later gra-
mmarians have described tWelve
kinds of शब्दार्थसश्वन्ध viz. अभिधा,विवक्षा,
तात्पर्य, प्रविभाग, व्यपेक्षा, सामथ्यै अन्वय,
एकाथीँभाव, दोषहान, गुणोपादान, अलंकारयेाग
and रसावियोग; cf. Srihgāraprakāśa.I.
शाब्दाथैव्याकरण explanation of the
SenSe Of a word aS ariSing frOm
the Word by stating the base, the
affीxes and the modifications to
the base and the affixes.
शब्दाथैशाख्त्र a sciemce fully dealing
with the words in a language and
their sense; the satme ae शव्दानुशासन
which See abOwe.
शब्देन्दुशेाखर a popular natne given to
the LaghuŚabdendusekhara written
by Nāgeśabhatta. See लबुशत्रेदेन्दुशेखर.
शब्देन्दुशेखरटीका, .शब्देन्दुशेखरव्य॒ाख्या
See लघुशब्देन्दुशेखरटीँकI and लघुशब्देन्दुशे-
रठरठ्यार६य[.
शब्दोपदेशा scientific and authoritative
citation or statement of a word
as contrasted with अपशव्देोपदेश; cf.
किं शब्दोपदेशा: कर्तव्यः अाहेोस्विदपशब्देापदशः
अाहेोस्विदुभयेीपदेश इति । M. Bh. in
Ahnika l.
शमादि a class of eight 'roots headed
by शम् which get their vowel
lengthened before the conंjuga-
tional sign य (श्यन्) as also before th६



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-375.png}}}}}}

शम्भु
krt. affix इन् ( धिनुष्ण् ) in the sense
of *habituated to'; e.g. शाम्यति, शमी,
भ्राम्यति, भ्रमी etc.; cf. P.VII.3.74 and
]P. III.2.!41,
शम्भु God Siva who is supposed to
|have compOsed, Or tO have inSpir-
ed Parimi to compOSe, the fourteen
. Stātras अइउण् , ऋलंट्रश्कू etc. giving the
aiphabet of the Pātini system ; cf.
त्रिषष्टि॒िः च॒तु:षटिर्वा वर्णाः शम्भुमते म्ताः Pān.
Sikgā, St. 3.
शर् a brief term or Pratyāhāra stand-
ing for the three sibi]an{, or spi-
rant consonants	, ष्म् and सू.
शारणदेव a promiraent gratmrmarian of
the Eastern school of Pānini's
system of grammar who lived in
the thirteenth century and Wrote
works on Pāt)ini's grammar. His
work named दुर्घटवृत्ति which ex.
plains according to Pānini's rules,
the Vārttikas thereon, and the
jÑोंāpakas deduced from them,the
various words difficult tO be ex-
|plained, is much appreciated by
scholars of grammar. He has quot-
ed from a large number of classi-
cal workS, and referred to many
works of the Eastern grammarians
who followed the Kā$ikā School.
शरत्प्रभृति the words of the type of
शरद् such as विपाशु, अन॒सु, मनस् ,
उपानेहूं etc. which have the com-
pound-ending अ (टञ्छ् ) added tO
them when they are at the end
of the Avyayibhāwa compOund;e.g
प्रातशरदम्, प्रतिविपाशम्.cf. Kāś. On P.V.
4.107.
शारादि a class of words headed by the
word शर which have the tad. affix
मय (मयट्) added to them in the sense
of *product? or *portiom?; e. g.
|शरमयम् , दभैमयम्, मृण्मयम्; cf. Kā$. on
|P. IV.3.144; '(2) a class of words
headed by शर which get their final
wowel lengthened before the
359
|शस्त्
tad.affix मत् when the whole word
forms a proper nOun; e.g. शरावती,
वंशाव॒ती, हनूमान् ; cf. P.VI.3.l 19.
शकैरादि a class of words headed by
शर्करा to which the tad. affix अ (अणुश्)
is added in the sense of इव wiz.
शुंimilarity:gf. शर्करैव॒ श॒!ार्करम् ,का॒पाालेक्रम्,
पौण्डरीकम् Kāś. on P. V. 3.107.
शर्ववर्मा a reputed grammarian who
iS believed to have been a contem-
porary of the poet Gutjādhya in
the cOurt of Sātavāhana. He w1ote
the Grammar rules which are
|named the Kātantra Sütras which
are mostly based on the Stitras of
Panāini. In the grammar treatise
raamed *the Kātantra Stitra?written
by Sarvawarman the Wedic section
and all the intricacies and difficult
elementS are carefully and Scrup-
ulously omitted by him, with a
wiew tO making his grammar
uSeful for beginners and students
of average intelligence.
शव्यैवाय intervention by any one of
the spirants श् , ष् and स्, which
prevents the substitution of ण्.for न्
but allows the Substitution of ष्ञ् for
सु; cf. चुटुतुलशव्यंवाये न M.Bh. on P.
VIII.4.2 as also नुम्विसजनीयशब्र्यवायेपि
P.. WIII.3.58 Wārt. 1. →
शल्छ् short term ( प्रत्याहार ) for the
sibilants शू • षूं , स् and हूं; cf. शलठं
इगुपधादनिटः क्सः P.III.1.44.·
शवर्ग class of letters beginning with शु
i.e. the COnSOnant$ शु , ष्ञ्, सुत् and ह्•
$५ » 3५१
शशिदववृत्ति name of a work on gra-
mmar by शशिदेव which is mention-
ed by A1 Heruni.
शस्त् (1) case affix ( अ॒स् ) Qf the accu-
sative plural;cf. स्वौजसमौट्शस्० P.I[W.
1.2; (2) tad.affix applied to words
, meaning much oar Iittle as also to
a numeral; e.g• बहुशे ददाति, अल्पशेो
ददाति, द्विशः, त्रिशः, पादशाः etc., cf.
P. V.4.42, 43. w



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-376.png}}}}}}

शांकरी
360
शाकलप्रतिषेध
`'_------------ ~ . " ^...
शांकरी (l) nafr१e of a glo:S oth Kot?da-
bhatta's Wāyākarānabhtā$a??a$ईr*
by $ārंhkara; (2) natf1° of a cotr1*
mīentary on thé |Paribhā$endu-
śekhara of Nàgeईंà wr itten by
Sankarabhatta; (ॐ) The Vyākarataa
vidyā or instruptions in Gratmmar
givén by Ggd Siva to Pātोini Or?
Which the Sikśā of Parjinं has been
based•	→
शाकट a tad. affi* added optionatly
Wh शाकिन to the word$.3ई and
6thers in the sense of a field pr0-
ducing the thing; °• 8* इक्षुश्दाक्रष्टम्, ;
cf. P.. V.2.29.
(1) name of an ancient re"
puted $cholar of Grammar and
?rātiśākhyas who is quoted b¥
Pātपूjini. He is despisingly referred
to by Pataऐjali à$.. à traitor gra-
mmārian sympathizinś with the
Nairuktas 6r etymologॉs$ in hold-
ing the view that a11 'substantiwcS
arc derivable and caf* be derived
from rootS; cf. तत्र नामान्याख्यातजानीति
शाकटायनेा नैरुक्तसमयश्च Nir.I.12: cf. alsO
नैचधातुजैमोह निरुकॢते_छ्युक्रूिर्णे शृकुंई
तोकम् M. Bh• On P.I II.3.1. Sākatà-
yana is believed to have been the
āuthor of the Unādistitrapātha
as also of the|BkTantfa |]Prāti$ākhya
of the Sāmaveda ; (2) na**° of a
• Jain gramfmarian imāmed पाल्यकीर्तिं
श्ीाकटार्येन who lived in the ninth
century during th° reign Of th€
Rāsर्भुraküta,king Amoghāvar$a and
wr6te the $abdānuŚā$ana which iS
much similar to the Stātrapātha of
Pānini and introduced a neW SySt*
em of Gramfhar• His work narraed
the Sabdānuśāsama consists of four
chapters which ar६ arranged in the
forrà of topics, which àr* mamed
सिाद्धे. The gramamar work is called
शघ्घ्घ्घ्घ्घ्घ्घ्दानुशासन,:
शाकटायनतरङ्गिणी a commentary ° Of
· $ākatāyama's $abdānuŚāsana•
;
||
||
||
[
||
शाकटायनव्याकरण the
grammar written
See शकटयिन्.
शाकटायनशाब्दानुशासन name of the
पृreatise 6n7 grammar writtem by
पाल्यकीर्ति-शाकटायन.
treatise om
by $ākatāyana.
शााकपार्थिवादि a claSS of irregular
samānādhikarana , Sarmà$a$? °r
Karnnadhārayacompound forf"***
tions, where according t° the
sense conveyed by the compound
word, a word aftef the first word
or so has to be taken *às omitted;
cf. समानाधिकरणाधिक्रोरे शाकपार्थिवादी-
नामुपसंख्यानमुत्तर्पुदलेपश्च वत्तव्य* ! शाकभेाजी
छैिव शाकपैार्थेवः l कुतपवासाः, सौश्रुतः
कुतफ्सैश्रुतः । यूट्भ्रुिधानेोँट्टुवृँ; यष्टिमौद्गल्यः1
M.bh. on P.II.!.69 Vārt• 8•
6ो an ancient writer ofNirपूktश्*
who is quoted by Yàskàं cf. विद्युत्
तडेिद्भवतीति शाकपूणिः Nir. III. 1:, or
अयन् जहीतीति म॒हाानेति शक्रुपूणैिः
Ni III.` 13 · or ऋत्विक्स्मि॑तुिं ! ईरणः l
त्रैा भवतीति शाकपूणिः Nir.III.!9•
शाकल a word frequently used in the
Mahābhāsya fof .a grammatigal
operation Or injunction ( विधि )
(ँhi6h forrms a specific featur° of
thegrammar ofशकॄिष्ट्य; viz. that the
vowels इ, उ,क्र, and ल remain with-
out phonetical conrabination and a
$hortening of thetm, if they are
long;cf.इकोऽसवर्णे शाकल्यल्य हृर्वश्र |P.Vi..
1. i27; शाकल्यक्ष्य इदं शुक्ळुिम्!; cf. alSO
|M.Bh. on P.VI.1.77• V.1.125,Vt.
1.27;VI.2.52, VIt.3.3 and VIII.
2.106; (2) pupils Qf, शूकं<यं; cf.
शाकल्यय छोत्रीः शकैिलाः M.Ph:9 P..
V.i.i8; (3) a villagein th° 'Vāhika
district; cf. शाकलं नुंमि वाहीकग्रामः M•
Bh.onTV.2.104 Vàrt• 3•
शाकलप्रकृतिभाव absence of a phonetie
66alescence ( प्रकृतिभाव ) a$ speci-
fically mentioned by शाक&य• See
शाकल.
| शाकलप्रतिषेध prohibition of th*



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-377.png}}}}}}

शाकल्य
361
शाङ्गैरवादि
coalescence of any of the vowels
इ, उ, ऋतं and ल with any disSimilar
vowel following it. See शाकल.
शाकल्य name of an ancient gra-
mmarian and Vedic scholar who
is SuppOSed to have revised the
Vedic texts and written their
Pada-pāj:ha. He is often quoted by
PāTini and the writers of the
Pratiśākhya works; cf. शाकल्यस्य संहि-
तामनुप्रावर्षत् M. Bh. on P.I.4.84; also
on P.I.l.l8, IV. 1.18; cf. also
उपचारं लक्षणतश्च सिद्धं अाचायाँ व्याालेशाक-
ल्यगाग्य: R.Pr.XIII.12.
शाकिन tad. affix (originally a word
formed from शाको by afÎixing न as
given in M. Bh. on P.V.2.100),
applied tO the word इक्षु in the
sense of a field producing it; e. g.
इक्षुशक्रिनम्.; cf. भवने क्षेत्रे " इक्ष्वादिभ्यः
शाकटशाक्रिर्नौ Kāś. on P. V. 2.29.
शाखादि a class of words headed by
the word शाखा which ha'ye the
taddhita affix य added to them in
the SenSe of इव i.e. similarity; e.g.
शाख्यः, मुख्यः, जघन्यः etc.; cf. Kāś. on
|P. V.3.103.
शानच् (t) krt afiix ( अान ) substituted
for the Atmanepada लट् affixes, to
which म् is prefixed if the base
before the affix ends in अ; e, g. |
एधमान, विद्यमान, etc; cf. P. III. 2.
124, l25, 126; (2) Vikarana affix
( अान ) Substituted for श्भा before
the personal ending हि of the impe-
rative second person singular, if
the preceding root ends in a con-
sonant; e. g. पुषाण, मुषाण, cf. P. III.
1. 83.
शानन् krt affix (अान) substituted for
the Ãtmampada affixes instead of
शानच॒, prescribed after the roots पू
and यजू; the application ofशानन्_for
शानच् is for the acute accent on the
initial vowel of the root;e.g. पवमानः
शाब्द
with the acute accent on the initial
46
wOwel as contrasted with विद्यमानः
with the acute accent on the last
vowel; cf. P. III. 2.128.
शान्तनव an ancient scholar of gra-
mmar who wrote a treatise known
aS the Phitः stātras on accents.
शाब्दबोध verbal interpretation; the
term is generally used with refe-
rence to the verbal interpretation
of a sentence as arising from that
of the words which are all conne-
cted directly or indirectly with the
verb-activity. It is defined as
पदजन्यपदार्थोपास्थातेिजन्यबोध:. According
to the grammarians, verbal
activity is the chief thing in a
sentence and all the other words
(excepting the one which expresses
werbal activity) are subordinated
to the verbal activity and hence
are connected with it; cf. पदशानं तु
करणै द्वारे तत्र पदार्थधीः । शाब्दबोधः फलं तत्र
शक्तिधीः सहकारिणी | मुक्तावली III.81.
शाब्दबोधतराङ्गेिणीं a treatise on the
theory of verbal import written
by ईश्वरानन्द.
a treatise on the
theory of शब्दबोध written by रामाकि-
|शोरन्चक्रवर्तिन्.
शाब्दबोधवाद theory of verbal import
or congnition; the theories to be
noted in this respect are thOse of
the Grammarians, the Naiyāyikas
and the Mimārihsakas, acCOrding to
whom verb-activity, agent, and
injunction stand respectively as
the principal factors in a Sentence.
Vikarana affix ( अाय) Substitut-
sdfor the Vikarar]a श्ना in Vedic
Literature; e. g. गृभाय जिह्वया मधु; cf.
Kāś. on P. III 1. 84.
शार्ङ्गरवादि a class.of words headed by
the wðrd शार्ङ्गरव which take the
feminine affix ई ( ङीन् ) making the
initial vowel of the word(to which
ई of the feminine is added) an



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-378.png}}}}}}

शालज्ञ
362
शिक्षा
acgte-agcented one; é•gः शार्ङ्गरवी;cf.
|शाईरवाद्यत्रेने ङीन् P, IV. 1•73.
शालच् tad. affix शाल applied to
the prefix वि in the sense of the
|base itself ( स्वार्थे ). See शङ्कटञ्च॒.
शालातुरीय name of the great gra-
mmarian Pānini given tO him on
account of hiS being an inhabitant
of शलातुर an old name of the
modern ILahore or a name of a
place near ILahore; cf. P IV.3.14
शाश्वातिक eternal or _permanent, as
contrasted with कायैi. e. produced;
cf.एतस्मिन्वाक्ये इन्दुमैत्रेययेोः शाश्वेतिकेो विरेधः
Siradeva Pari.36; cf. also एके वर्णीञ्जू
शाश्वतिकान् न कायीन् R.Pr.XIII.4.
शाख्च scientific treatment of a sub-
ject; a system of thoughts giving
a scientific treatment of any sub-
ject. The word is applied to the
ruleS of Panini and sometimes to
an indiwidual rule; cf. शास्त्रबाध
or अशास्त्रबाध or विप्रतिषेधशास्त्र,frequently
uSed by the commentatorS; cf. न हि
सूंदेहादलक्षणं शास्त्रामेत्यर्थः Nāgeśa's Par.
Sek. on Pari. 1; cf. पदान्तादिष्वेव
विकारशास्त्रम् R.Pr.II.2.
शाख्त्रकृत् the originator or the founder
of a Sāstra or system of particular
thoughts. The word was used by
ancient grammarians for Parini,
the founder of the great system of
grammar, or of grammar in gene-
ral; cf. व्यत्ययमेिच्छति शास्त्रकृदेष्त्रां सोपि च
सिध्यति बाहुलकेन M.Bh. ora P. III. 1.
85.
शारुत्रकृत brought about by a rule;
brought about by the Science of
grammar; cf. शास्त्रकृतो येोमश्च Nir.I.
2; cf. also काञ्चिच्च संनिपातकृतमानन्तर्ये
शास्त्रकृतमनानन्तर्यम् M.Bh. on P. VII.
3.54, VIII.2.38.
शाख्त्रहानि harm or injustice to a
Science; i.e. non-application of a
rule althOugh it could apply,there
, being no prohibition for it; cf.
शास्त्रहानिश्च । समुदायैकाचः शास्त्रं हीयते M.
Bh. on P. V[.1.I Vart. 12.
शाख्त्रातिदेश supposition of the original
in the place of the Substitute mere-
ly for the Sake of the application
of a grammatical rule as con-
trasted with रूपातिदशा, thतःe actual
restoration of the original form;
cf. किं पुनरयं श!ास्त्राातिदेश्ा: । तृचेो
यच्छास्त्रं तदातैदिश्यते । अंाहोस्विद्रूपातिदेशः
तृचेो यद्रूपं तदतिदिश्यते M. Bh. on P.
VII. b.95.
शास्त्राथै the purpose of a rule Of gra-
mmar; cf. " अतेोत्राप्यवयवेन शास्त्राथैः
संप्रतीयते M.Bh. on P.VI.i.84 Vārt.
5; cf. also, तद्यथा | लेाके वसन्ते ब्राह्मणेा-
ग्रनिादधीतेति सकृदाधाय कृतः शास्त्रार्थ इति
पुनः प्रवृत्तिर्न भवति { M. Bh. on VI.1.
84 Vārt. 3; VI.4.104 Vart. 3.
शाख्त्रासिद्धत्व thesupposed invalidity of
a, rule or a set of ruleS by virtue of
the dictum laid down by Pānini in
पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् VIII.2.1; cfशास्त्र[ासैद्धत्वम॒नेन
क्रियत । एकादेशशास्त्रं तुक्शास्रे असिद्धं भवति ।
M.Bh. on P.VI. 1.86 Vārt. 5.
शि case•affix इ Substituted for the
case-affixes जसु and शस् of the nOm.
pl. and the acc. pl. in the neuter
gender; cf. जश्शसो: शिः P. VII. 1.20.
This afiix श्शि is called सर्वनामस्थान
just like the first five case- afiixes
in the masculine and fem. gender.
This case affix is secn dropped in
Vedic pasSages; cf. शेच्छन्दसि बहुलं
( लोपः ) P. VI. 1.70.
शिक्षा general name given to a work
om t?honeticS. Although there are
many such works which are al!
called शिक्षा, the work, which is
ofte1] referred to, by the word, is
the Sikgā narned पाणिनीयशिक्षा, about'
the authorship of which,
however, there is a doubt
whether it was the work of Pārini
or of somebody belonging to his
school. The Sik$ā works are help-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-379.png}}}}}}

शिखा
ful, no doubt, for the study of
grammar, but no topic belonging
to Sik$a is given by Pānirai which
apparently means that these Works
do not come under the subject or
province of Grammar.The reason
why the Sik$a topics are nOt given
by Pānini, is worth consideration.
These Sik$ā works are not speci-
fically related to a particular Veda
and it cannot be said whether
they preceded or succeeded the
Prāti$ākhya workS.
शिखा one of the subdivisions of the
artificial recitals of the Wedic texts.
शिट् a term for सर्वनामन् (a pronoun) in
the wOrkS Of ancientgrammarians;
cf. स्वाङ्गशिटामदन्तानाम् Phitः Suitra 29,
where शिट् is explained as सर्वनामन्
in the gloSS.
शित् possessed of, or characterized
by, the indicatory letter शू; the
|krt affixes which are marked with
the indicatory शूं are termed Sàrwa•
dhātuka afiixes (cf. P.III,4.113),
while, the Ade$as Or Substitutes,
marked with the indicatory शू, are
substituted for thc whole of the
Sthānin or the original and not for
its fimal letter according tO the
rule अलेान्त्यस्य P. I.1.52; e. g. शि is |.
substituted,mot for the final सू ofजस्
and शस॒ but for the whole जसू and
' the whole शसू; cf. P.I.1.55.
शिरस्य produced at the top of the
orifice, cerebral.
शिरोमणिभट्टाचायै a grammarian WhO
wrote the gratmmatical workS
कारकविवक, तद्वितकेीश and तिङन्तशिरोमणि.
शिवभट्ट a grammarian, who wrote a
commentary named कुङ्कुमविकसि On
the Padamafijari of Haradatta. He
was the.’ graradsOra of Nilakantha
.'Bikgita:who .was also .. a gramma-
riara and who wrote an indepen-
368
शिवराम ( च्चक्रवर्ताँ )
शिष्ट
dent work on the Paribhā$às,
named the Paribhāsāvjrtti.
a grammarian
who wrote a commentary On the
Katantrapari$ista called the
Siddhāntaratnāhkura.
शिवरामेन्द्र ( सरस्वती ) a grammarian
who wrote (1) a glosS on the
stitras of Pānini, (2) a commen-
tary named सिद्धान्तरत्नाकर on the .
Siddhāntakatumudf, and (3) · a
commentary on the Mahābhā$ya
named Mahabhà$yaprakāśa..
शिवस्सूत्र mame given to the fourteen
small stitras giwing the alphabet
which Pānini took ās the basis of
|his grammar. The Sivastitras have :
got a well-known explanation in
verse,namedनन्दिकेश्वरकारिका on which
there is a commentary of the type
of Bhāsya by उपमन्यु. The origin of
the Sivāsitra given by the writer
of the Kārikā is summed up in the
stanza - नृत्तावसाने नटराजराजो .ननाद
ढकां नवपञ्न्ववारम् । उद्धर्तुकामः सनकादि-
सिद्धानतद् विमर्शे शिवसूत्रजालम् | Nand. 1.
शिवादि a big class of about ninety
words headed by the word शिव ०
which have the tad. affix अ ( अण् )
added to them in the sense Of a
descendant ( अपत्य ) in spite of
other affixes such aS' इ, ण्यत् and
others prescribcd by Other rules,
which sometimes do not take
place, or do SO Optionally; ۥ g-
शैवः; ' ताक्ष्णः, ताक्षप्रयः; गाङ्ग: गाङ्गेय:, .
गङ्कायनिः; cf. Kaś. on P.IV•1•l 12.
This class is looked upon as अ[कृति-
गण and a word is supposed to be .
included in this class, when the '
affix अ is noticed in spite of SOrme
other affix being applicable by
some other rule• •
शिाष्ट (1) cultured and learned people
* 'wh० want to spgak cprf६cty and
' who therefore ' hawe $tudied grā*



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-380.png}}}}}}

शिष्टप्रयेाग 364 शुद्धाशुबोधस्सूत्राथव्याकरण
mmar; cf. के पुनः शिष्टाः । वैयाकरणाः । शुक्छयजुःप्रातिशाख्य name of the
कुत एतत् । श॒ास्त्रपूर्वेिका हि शिश्चैिवँयाकरण॒ाश्च
३शास्त्रज्ञा: | M. Bh. ora P. VI.• l.-109;
(2) enjoined, prescribed; €f. विपयैयेा
ध्रुवाशष्टेऽपरेषाम् । R.Pr.VI.120.
शिष्टप्रयेाग the forms of words uscd by
the learned people; the expression
used by such persons; cf. स चावश्यं
शिष्टप्रयोग उपास्यः | M. Bh. on P.I.3.
1 Vārt. I13. →
शेिष्टव्याख्यान explanation (of doubtful
things or expressions) given by the
|learned people.
शिष्यहिता ( बृति) a work on grammar
written by उग्रभूति of which a men-
tion is made by Al Beruni in his
work.
शी (1) case afiix (ई) substituted for
the nom. pl. affix जस् (अस् ) in
the declension of the prOnOuns,
when the affix जसू is preceded by
the vowel अ; e.g. सर्वे, विश्वे; cf. Kā$.
on P VII.1.17; (2) case afiix (ई )
substitutedfor औौ of the nom.and
the acc.dual after fem. baSes end-
ing in औाँ, as also after bases in
the neuter gender; e. g.खट्टं रमे; कुएँडे,
, वने; cf. Kāś. on P. VII.1.i8, 19.
शघ्रतर lit.over-rapid; an extra quick-
neSS of breath (प्राण) which charac-
terizes the `utterance of a sibilant
which haS got one more property
viz- ऊष्मत्व in addition to the three
properties (बाह्यप्रयत्न ) possessed by
the other consonants; cf. शीघ्रतरं
सोष्मसु प्राणमेके । R. Pr. XIII. 6.
a persOn reciting Vedic passa-
ges more rapidly, when his recital
results into a fault of utterance.
शीर्षण्य principal; chief ; the word is
used in conncction with the uttera-
nce of Veda pasSages which are
uttered loudly at the time of the
third pressing ( तृतीयसवन ); cf. शिरसे
तारम् T. Pr.XXIII.12;cf. शीर्षण्यः स्वर:
M.Bh• Qn P. VI;1.61.
PratiŚakhya treatise pertaining to
the White Yajurveda which is also
called the Vājasaneyi-Prātiśākhya.
ThiS work appears tO be a later one
as cormpared with the Other Prāti-
$ākhya workS and bears much
similarity with Some of the Stātras
of Panini. It is divided into eight
chapters by the author and it
deals with letters, their origin and
their classification, the euphonic
and other changeS when the Sarांh-
|hitā text is rendered into the Pada
text,and accents.The work appears
to be a commOn wOrk for all the
different branches of the White
Yajurveda, being probably based
on the individually different Prati-
śākhya works of the different
branches of the Shukla Yajurveda
compOsed in ancient times. Kātyā-
yana is traditionally believed to
be the author of the work and very
likely he was the same Kātyāyana
who wrote the° Wārttikas on the
Stitras of Pārinai.
शुण्डिकादि a class of words headed by
|शुाण्डिका to which the taddhita affix
अ ( अण् ) is added in the sense of
*who has come from'; e.g. शौण्डिकः,
कार्कणः:; cf. Kāś. on P. IV. 3. 76.
शुद्ध pure, unmixed; the term is used
(1) in connection with a vowel
which is not masalized ( अनुनाासेक);
cf. भाव्यमानेन सवणीनां ग्रहर्णे नेति शुद्धो-
यमुच्चार्यते, Kāś. on P. VII.1.85; as
alsO, (2) in connection with words
which are used in their primary
sense and not in any $econdary
sense: cf, शुद्धानां पठितानां संज्ञा कर्तव्या ।
संज्ञोपसर्जनीभूतााने न सबदीनि M.Bh. on
P.I.1.27 Vārt.. 3.
व्याकरण a gloss on the
ĀśubOdha•grammar, written by
a grammariara named Rāraeśvara



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-381.png}}}}}}

→、
शुभ्राांदं
शुभ्रादि a class of words headcd by
the word शुभ्र to which the tadd-
hita affix एय ( ढक् ) is added in
the sense of a d¢ scendant in spite |
of other affixes being prescribed
by some other rules which some-
times are added optionally with
this एय; e.g. शौभ्रेयः, " वैधवेयः रैीहिणेयः.
This claSs is looked upon as अाकृति-
गण and hence if this afाँix एय is
seen applied although not p1 escri-
bed actually as in the word गाङ्गेय,
the word is supposed to have bcen
included in this class; cf. P. IV.
365
1.123•
२ाँ utterance with a swollen mouth
which is looked upon as a fault of
Vedic recital; cf. दुटं मुखेन सुषिरेण शूनम्
|R.Pr.XIV.2. . ॐ9
शूरसिंह n.ume of a grammarian who
wrote a gloss narmed दीपिका on the
Sārasvata Vyakarana.
शे casc-endir.g seen in Vedic Litera-
ture Substituted for amy one of
the 2I case-endings as found in
Vedic Language; words ending in
this शॆ ( एय्ं ) are not coalesced with
a vÓwel that follows; e.g अस्मे इन्द्रा- ||
बृहस्पर्ती; cf. P.VII..1.39 anid I.1.13. i
शेाष (l) any Other senses than what
are given above; cf. शेषे P.IV.2.92;
(2) Surname Of a repu¢ed family
of grammarians belongin? to
Southern India which produced
many grammarians, from the
fifteenth century to the eighteenth
century. Rāmacandra Se$a was the
first grammarian in the family
who wrote the Prakriyākaumudi
in the fifteenth century. His des-
cendants developed the system of
studying grammar by the study of
topics as given in the Prakriyā
Kaumudi and wrote several works
.of the nature of glosses and com-
'[ाaetat$
शैत्यायन
शेषश्छृष्ण one of the prominent gra-
mmarians belongihg to the Se$a
family, who was the son of नरासहशेष्ञ.
He wrote a gloss on the Prakriyā-
kaumudt and two small works
|PrākFtacandrikā and Padacan-
drikॐ. Two other minor grammar
wOrks viz. the YaihlugantaŚiromani
and Upapadamatihstitravyākhyana
are ascribed to शेष्प्रकृष्ण who may be
the same as शेषकृष्ण the son of नरसिंह,
Or another, as there were many
persons who had the name Kr$t)a
in the big family.
शेषचक्रपााणि a grammarian of the
Se$a family who wrote a small
treatise on case- relatibns named
कारकतत्त्व.
शेषशर्भन् also knoWn by the name
मनीष्त्रिशेषशर्मन् ,a grammarian who has
written सर्वमङ्गला, a commentary on
|Nāge$a's Paribha$enduśekhara.
शेषशारत्री a grammarian who wrote a
commentary on the Paribhā-
$enduŚekhara of Nāgeśabhatta. .
शेषाद्रि a grammarian of the seven-
teenth century who has written a
work, Paribhā$ॐābhāskara, on the
Paribhāंās of the Pānini system;
the treatise is written in the
manner ofSiradeva's Paribhā3āvtti
which has been taken as a basis
by him.
शेषे षष्टो the genitive case used
in any other senses , than those
given in the specific 'rules. The
expression शेषे षष्ठी भावष्यति is often
found in commentary works.
शैत्यायन an ancient Grammarian and
Vedic scholar who is quoted in
the Taittiriya ' Prātiśākhya for
recommending a sharp and dis-
tinct nasalisation of the anuSvāra.
and the fifth class-consonants; cf.
तीत्रतरमानुन॒ाासेक्यमनुस्वारोत्तमेषु इति शैत्यायन;
T. Pr. XVII. 1. *



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-382.png}}}}}}

शैशिरीय
366
शयन्
शैशिरीय recital of the Rgveda in
the schoql named after Siśira, a
pupil of $ākalya.'
शैषिक remaining, Or remnant; the
term is used With reference to
a tad. affix preScribed in senses
other than those mentioned before
the rule शेषे P. IV. 2.92; cf. शैषि-
कान्मतुबर्थीयाच् शैार्षको मतुबर्थिकः । सरूपः
प्रत्ययेो नेष्टः सन्नन्तान्न सनिष्यते |
शौण्डादि a class of words headed by
the word शौण्ड which are compo-
unded with a noun in the locative
case to form a locative tatpurusa
compound;e. g. अक्षुशैाण्डः, अक्षधूतैः |
etc.; cf. Kā$. on P.II.1.40.
शौनक a great ancient Vedic scholar
who is believed to have written
the Rk. Prātiśākhya, which is said
to be common for the tWo main
branches of the Rgweda but which
at present represents, in fact, all
the different branches of the
|RgVeda.
ाातेशाख्य a popular name of
ths well-gnown PrātiŚākhya of the
|Rgveda, named ऋक्प्राातेशाख्य as wel!
as ऋग्वेदप्रातिशाख्य.
शैौनकादि a class of words headed by
the word शौनक to which the tadd-
hita affix इन् ( णिनि ) is added in
the sense of*instructed by', prowj-|
ded the word so formed is a por-
tion of what is looked upon as a
part of the sacred Vedic Litera-
ture; cf. शौनकेन प्रेोक्तमधीयते शौनकिनः,
वाजसनाश्यिनः cf. Kāś. on P.IV. 3.106.
*चुत्च the substittytion of the palata]
conSonan!S श्,छ्,छ्,ज्,झ angl ञ्छ्ञ् respec-
tiwely for the similar consonants
स्, त् , भ्रु , द् , ध्रु 3nd न् of the dental
class;cf. स्तेः श्रचुना श्चुः P.VIII.4.10.
शितप् the syllable ति applied to the
., Wikarana-ending form of a root
to denote a root for a gramma-
tical operation. The specific men-
tion of a root with श्तिपू added,
shows that the root of the parti-
cular clasS Or Conjugation shown, is
tO be taken and nOt the same root
belonging to any, Other conjuga-
tion;	cf.' इक्ाश्तपौ धातुनिर्देशे; ' e.g.
अस्यतिवक्तिख्यातिभ्योऽ ङ् P.III. 1. 52.
Although operations prescribedfor
a primary root are applicable to a
frequentative root when the fre-
quentative sign. य has been omitt-
ed, operations prescribed for a
root which is stated in a rule with
ति C दितम्) added to it, do not take
place in the frequentative roots;cf.
श्तिपा शपानुबन्धन ... पञ्चैतानि न यङ्ळुाके.
श्ञ्म् a vikarana or conjugational
sign of the agama type to be inse-
rted after the last vowel of the
roots of the seventh conjugation
C रुधादि ); e.g. रुणद्वि, भिनत्ति etc.; cf.
रुधादिभ्यः श्नम् P.III.1.78.
श्ा a vikarana or conjugational Sign
Of the ninth conjugation, to be
added to roots headed by क्री be-
fore the Sārwadhātuka affixes; e.g.
क्रीणाति; cf. ऋश्यादिभ्यः श्ना.P.III.1.81. श्क्षा
is added optionally with श्रु ( नु ) to
the roots स्तम्भु, स्तुम्भ्, स्कम्भ्म् , स्कुम्भ्म् and
स्कु. e.g.स्तश्नाति, स्तभ्रेनोति, स्कुश्नाति, स्कुन्नेोति
etc ; cf. P.III.1.82.
शु a vikarana or a conjugational
sign to be placed after the roots
headed by सु (i.e. roots of the fifth
conjugation) as alsO after the root
श्रु when श्रु is to be changed into
श्ट, and the roots अक्षु and तक्षु; e.g.
सुनोति, सुनुते; cf. स्वादिभ्यः श्रुः P.III.
l.73. It is also added optionally
with श्ना to the rootS स्तम्भ्, स्तुम्भ्म् etc.
See *.
शयन् a wikaraha or cOnjugational sign
of the fourth conjugation added
to roots headed by दिघ् , before the
Sārvadhātuka affixes; e.g• .' दीव्यति,
' पुष्यति, etc. श्यन् is addcd optionall



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-383.png}}}}}}

श्रद्धा
367
¢、
श्रत
35
with शप् (अ) to the rOotS भ्राश्, भ्रम् ,
इछ्म् and others, as alsO to यस्•
श्रद्धा a technical term for nO un-
stems ending in अा in the feminin e
gender used in the Kātantra Gra-
ramar; cf. अा श्रद्धा Kāt. II• 1.l0.
श्रमणादि a class of words headed by
the word श्रमणा with which Words
in the masculine Or the feminine
gender are compounded when they
stand in apposition: cf. कुमारी श्रमणा
कुमारश्रमणा, युवा अध्यापकः युवाध्यापक:Kā$.
on P.II.1.70.
श्रवण hearing of a phonetic element
or a word in the actual Specch ;
audition; cf. तस्य चेोदात्तस्वरितपरत्वे श्रवणं
स्पष्टम् S. K. on P.I.2.32. In many
technicalgrammatical terms,affixes
and substitutes, there is somctimes
a portion of them which is not a
vital part of the word, but it is for
the sake of causing certain pre-
scribed grammatical Opcrations•
The lettersor syllables which form
such a portion are called इत् . and
they are only for the sake .9f gra-
mmfiatical operations ( कार्यार्थ ), as
contrasted with the other oneS
which are actually heard(श्रुत्यर्थ or
श्रवणाथै ).
श्राावेिन् lit. that which is heard; cf.
श्रवणं श्रावः । भावे धञ्म् । सोस्यास्तीति श्रावी
Nyasa on Kāś. V.2.37. The term
is'used in connection with an affix
for which no elision is prescribed
and hence which remains and · iS
' heard; cf. संशये श्राविणं वक्ष्यति M. Bh.
' on P..V.2.37; Kāś. on P.V.2.37.
श्रीकणोत्त a grammarian who has
written a small treatise On cor-
rupt words or ungrammatical
words,which is named अपशब्दखण्डन्.
श्रीधर a grammarian of the la$t
century Who has writtem a com-
. mentary named श्रीधरी after him,
on the Paribhā$enduśekhara.
श्रीधरी name of a commentary on
the,Paribhā$enduśekhara written
5y Sridhara. See श्रीधर.
श्रेीीनवास a grammarian who has
written a commentary on the Pa-
ribhāsābhāskara of Haribhāskara•
श्रीमणिकण्ठ a famous grammarian
Who held the titles महामहोपाध्याय,
प्रगल्भतर्कीासिंह and भट्टाचार्य and who has
written a systematic work on case-
relations named कारकखण्डनमण्डन; the
work is also known by the name
षट्कारकखण्डनमण्डन.
श्रीमानशर्मा a famous grammarian of
Pastern India who has written a
short scholarly gloSS named Vijaya
on NāgeŚa's Paribhāsendu$ekhara•
For details refer to Paribhāsa-
Safingraha.
श्रुत lit. what is actually heard; the
Word is used in connection with
such statements as are made by the
authoritative grammarians, Panini
and the Wārttikakāraby their actual
utterance Or wording,as contrasted
with such dictums as can be de-
duced only from their writings. cf.
श्रुतानुभितंथेो: 'औतः संबन्धेो बलीयान्. Par.
&ek; Pari. 104.
श्रुतकेवालेिन् a, term of a wery great
honour given to such Jain monks
as have almost attained perfec-
tion; the term is used in connec-
tion' with Pālyakirti Sāka!āyana,
the Jain grammarian शाकटयिन,
whose works शाकटायनशब्दानुशासन and
its presentation in a topical form
mamed शाकटायनप्रक्रिया are studied
at the present day in Some parts
of India. See शाकटायन above.
श्रुति (1) lit. hearing; $ound.cf, श्रुतौ च
रूपग्रहणम् M. Bh. on P. I. 2.64; per-
ception, as a prOof contrasted
with inference; 'cf. ननु च श्रुतिकृतेपि
भदेरित M. Bh. on P. VII. 1.72
Vārt. 1; cf. also M.' Bh. on P•



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-384.png}}}}}}

श्रुतिसामान्य
VIII. 2.25; cf. also तस्मादुच्चश्रुतीनेि
R. T. 61; (2) authoritative word;
the word is SOmetimes used in
connection with the utterances 。f
the Stitrakāras wiz. the Stitra.
श्रुतिसामान्य common hearingः com•
"mon form of technically different
wordings, such aS अा of टाप॒,,डाभ्प्
and चाप् feminine affixes, or ई of
ङीप् , ङीञ् , and ङीन् fem. affixes; cf. र
इति श्रुातसामान्यमुपादीयते Kāś.9n P.VIII.
2.18; cf. also Kāś. on VIII. 2.42
and WIII. 4,1.
श्रूयमाण heard, presented; cf. द्वन्द्वान्ते
श्रूयमाणः शब्दः प्रत्येकमभिसंबध्यते; cf. श्रूय॒मा-
ऐणपि नुमि स्वरो भवति ॥ पञ्चत्रपुणा M. Bh.
on P. VII. 1. 73.
श्रेण्यादेि a class of Words headed by
the word श्रेणि, which are com-
pounded with words like कृत if |
they stand in apposition, prOvided
the word so compounded has got
the ' sense of the affix चिव i. e.
having become what was not
before; cf. अश्रेणयः श्रेणयः कृताः श्रेणिकृताः,
एककृताः Kā$. on P. II. 1. 59.
*क्ष्लथबन्ध a loose commection as obtain-
ing between the wariouS Words in
the Pada recital, as contrasted
with श्लिष्टबन्ध in the Safhhitā text.
श्लिष्ट or श्लिष्ट्बन्ध compact arrange-
ment as Seen in the Sarihhitā text.
शलु a term used in the sense of eli-
sion or lopa in the case of the
affix शप् when it is elided after the
.roots headed by हु, i• e. roots of
the third conjugation as also after
any root wherewer it is so seen in
the Vedic Literature; cf. बहुलं छन्दसि
P. III. 4. 76. This श्ठु is '1ooked
upon as a Substitute zero, or nil
for the general vikarana शप्प् in the
case of these rOots; cf. जुहोत्यादिभ्यः
श्ळुः P. II. 4. 75. The specific
feature of this elision of the vika-
raha शप् by means of the term श्ळु,
368
ॐठैवास्स
is that it causes reduplication of
the roots to which it is added; cf.
ळुक्केि प्रकृते श्ळुविधानं द्विर्वचनार्थम् Ka$. on.
P. II. 4. 75 and P. III. 1. 10.
२लुट्ठवद्भाव treatment as before the
elision named श्ळु, i. e• reduplica-
tion of the preccding root. This
*लुवद्भाव is prescribed in the case of
the rOots भी, ह्री, भ्टं and हु; cf. भीह्वी-
भृहुवां श्ळुवच्च P. III. 1. 39. →
श्लुविकरण roots characterized by the
addition Or application of the
cOnjugational sign which is
elided by the use of the term श्लु
for elision; roots of the third con-
jugation; cf. य एते लुट्ठाग्वकरणाः श्लुवि-
करणाश्च M.Bh.on P.III. 1.67 Vart.2,
as also on P. III i!. 91•
श्लुविधि the specific operation caused
by श्छु viz.the reduptication for the
preceding root; cf. तत्र लुठाश्क श्लु-
' विधिप्रतिषेधः, M.. Bh. on P. I. 1. 62
Wart.. 6.
、 →、K → →
श्ठोकवाांतेक Vārttika or supplemen-
tary rule to Panini's rules laid
dOwn by scholarS Of grammar
immediately after Pātऐini, com-
,posed in verse form. These
Slokavārttikas are quoted in the
Mahabhāsya at various places and
SuppOsed to have been current in
the cxplanations of Pānini's A$jā-
dhryayi in the days of Patafप्jali.
The word is often used by later
COmmermtatOrS.
श्वस्तनी a term of ancient gramma-
rians for the first future called
ळुट् by Panini; cf. परिदेवने श्वस्तनी
भविष्यन्त्यर्थे । इयं नु कदा गन्ता यैवं पादैौ
निदधाति M. Bh. on P. III. 3.15.
*वास् lit. breath; the voiceless breath
required for uttering some letters;
the term is used in the Prātiśā-
khya and Vyākarana books in the
sense ofbreath which is promi-
rnently required in the utterance



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-385.png}}}}}}

. श्वेासानुप्रदान
369
of the hard consonants, sibilants,
visarga and the Jihvāmuliya and
Upadhmāniya letters ; the term is
used in connection with
letters also; the usual term in use
is, of course, श्वासानुप्रदान, the term
श्वास showing the property of the
breath, with which these letters
are characterized.
*वासानुप्रदान caused by the emission
of breath ; the term is used in con-
trast with नादानुप्रदान in connection
with hard consOnants,surds, visar-
ga,the Jihwāmtiliya and the Upadh-
māniya letters; see श्वास above.
श्वोभूतिवृत्ति a grammatical work of
the type of a glO8S on the Stitras
of Panini written by an ancient
grammarian श्वोभूति mentioned in
the Mahābhā3ya; cf. स्तेाष्याम्यहं
प॒ादिकमैौदवार्हि ततः श्वेाभूभेत शातनीं पातनीं च
M• Bh. on P. I.1.57- Possibly
the gramrmarian श्धोभूति is referred
tO in the wOrd श्धेोभूत in the verse.
ष
ष् (1) a sibilant letter of the cerebral
claSS of consonants possessed of the
properties श्चास, अघेोष्भ्र, कण्ठविवार arad
महाप्राण ; (2) mute indicatory Ietter घ्ञ्,
attached to nouns as also to affixes
with which nouns are formed,
such ,as ष्बुन् , ष्कन्, ष्टरच्च, ष्ट्रन् etc.
shOwing the addition of the femi-
nine affix ई ( ङीष् ); cf. षिद्भौंरादिभ्यश्च
P. IV. 1.4l ; (3) changeable to स्
when placed at the beginning of
roots in the Dhātupagha except in
the case of the roots formed from
nouns and the roots ष्ठिव्घ् and ष्वष्क्;
(4) Substitute for the last conso-
nant of the roots ब्रश्च, भ्रस्ज्, सृज्ञ, मृजु,
यज्, राज्, भ्राज्, as. also of the
rOOts ending in छ् and शू be-
fore a consonant excepting a nasal
and a semiwowel, as also when the
47
these |
consonant is at the end of the
wOrd; e. g. भ्रष्टा, खष्टा, यष्टुम् सम्राट् etc•
cf P. VIII.2.36; (5) substitute for
a visarjaniya preceded by a vowel
except अ and followed by a consO-
nant of the guttural or the labial
class which does not begin a difi-
erent word, as also before the
words पाश, कल्प, क, काम्य etc. cf. P.
VIII. 3.39; cf. also P. VIII 3.4],
43, 44, 45 and 48 for some speci-
fied cases; (6) substitute for सु when
placed near a consonant of the
cerebral class or near the conso-
nant ष्; e. g. बृक्षष्षण्डे, वृक्षष्टकारः Kāś.
on P. VIII. 4.41.
(1) consonant ष्रञ् , the vowel अ be-
ing added for facility of pronunci-
ation;(2) compound-ending अ,sub-
stituted for the final of the word
मूर्धन् at the end of a Bahuvrihi
compound when the word मूर्धन् is
preceded by द्वि or .त्रि e. g. द्विमूर्धः,
त्रिमूर्धः cf. द्वित्रिभ्यां ष मूर्ध्नः P, V. 4.115
(3) a technical term for तत्पुरुषसमास
in the.Jainendra Vyākaratāa.
षच् the compound-ending ( समासान्त )
ओ added for the final of the words
सक्थि, अाक्षे and दारु $tanding at the
end of a Bahuvrihi compound
under specific conditions. e. g.
विशालाक्षः, दीर्घसक्थः, द्वयङ्गुलं ( दारु ); cf.
P. V. 4.113, 114.
षदकारक (I) the six Kārakas or instru-
ments of action,which are differ-
ently connected. with the verbal
activity, viz. कर्तृ, कर्मे, करण, सेप्रदान,
अपादान and अधिकरण; for details see
कारक above; cf. तत्र शाक्तिमतेा द्रव्यस्य
कारकाख्यायामवान्तरद्भ्यापारानेबन्धना षडुपाएख्या
भवन्ति । कत कर्म करणं संप्रदानमपादानमधिकरणं
चति । Sringara Prakāśa IV; (2) a
work of the name (षट्कारक) written
by a Jain grammarian MaheŚa-
mandin•
षट्कारकखण्डनमण्डन known also as
केारकखण्डनमण्डन a grammar-wOrk On



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-386.png}}}}}}

षट्कारकनेिरूपण
न्
370
षष्ठी
the six case-relations written by
a scholar of grammar named
श्रीमणिकण्ठ.
षट्कारकनिरूपण a, WOrk dealing with
the six kinds of instruments of
the verbal actiwity ( kārakas )
written by Trilokanātha.
षट्कारकबालबोधिनी a, short work in
werses on the Six case-relation$
written by a grammarian Prabhu-
dāsa who has added his own
commentary to .it.
a small Work in werses
on the six case-relations ascribed
to Amarasirihha,but very likely the
author was Amaracandra a Jain
grammarian of the fifteenth cen-
tury. The Work is also named
षट्कारकविचार an anonymouS Sma}l
treatise on the six case-relations in
verse-form With a cOmmentary.
、
षट्कारकविवचन a, Small treatise on
the six case-relations written by
a grammarian Bhawananda who
held the title Siddhāntavāgंśa.
षडिकप्रस्ताव a popular name given
by grammarians tO the topic of
grammar which deals with the
abbreviated popular forms of pro-
per nOunS which are names of
perSons, as for example the form
ष॒डिक for षड्ङ्गुलिदत्त; cf. ठाजादावूर्ध्वे
fद्वतयिादचः: P. V. 3.83. →
षड्गवच् lit. a collection of six cows;
Secondarily *a collection of six
animals or quadrupeds.'The word
ष्त्रड्गव was prescribed by later gra-
mmarianS as a tad-affix by means
Of a Vārtika when they saw the
the word षड्गव used in language
after the wOrd अश्च etc. e. g, अश्व-
षड्गवम्; cf. प्रकृत्यर्थस्य षट्वे षङ्गवञ्च् Kāś.
on P. V.2.29.
षड्भाषाचन्द्रिका a Work on six dia-
lects Written by a Jain grammar-
ian लक्ष्मणसूरि.
षण् a term used instead of the desi-
derative affix सन् prescribed by
P- III. I.5 tO 7, especially when
the स्रुत् Of the affix is changed into
|ष्य्, as..for in$tanÇ:e in तुष्टूषति etc.;
cf. स्तैीतेण्र्यन्तानां ष्प्रण्भूत च सनि परतः अभ्या-
सदुत्तरस्य मूर्धन्यादेशेो भवति Kāś. on
स्तौोतिण्येोरेव षण्यभासात् P. VIII.3.61.
षत्व change of the consonant स् into
ष्ञ् in certain conditions in the
formation of a word, Or after pre-
pOsitions in the case of verbs
beginning with स॒. This cerebra-
lization of स् was a peculiar pho-
netic change which naturally occ-
urred when सुन् in utIerance came
after a vowel excepting अ. Some
of the !Prāti$akhya works have ex-
haustively treated this change and
Pātini haS also mentioned many
rules in connection With it.
षष् ( षद् ) a technical term used in
Panini's grammar for Such nume-
ral Words ( संख्थाशब्द ) as cnd with
|ँश्थ् Or न्, e. g• ष्षष्श्, पश्चन्, सतिन् etc.;
cf. ष्णान्ता षट् P. I. ].24,
घट a term used in connection with
thc sixth of the spirants viz. the
Jivhāmüliya letter cf. ऋकारल्ञ्कारावथ
घष्ट ऊष्मा R. Pr. I.18; the term is
also used in the sense of the sixth
vowel viz. ई. in the Rk. Prāti-
Śākhya; cf. मुख्ये परे पञ्चमषष्ठयोश्च R. Pr.
]II. 29. →
षष्टी the sixth case; the genitive case.
This case is generally an Ordinary
case or विभाते as contrasted with
कारकविभाति. A noun in the geni-
tive case ShowS a relation in gene-
ral, with anOther noun connected
with it in a sentence. Commen-
tators hawe mentioned many kinds
of relatioms denoted by the geni-
tive case and the phrase एकशतं
प्रष्ठश्यथर्गः (the genitive case ha



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-387.png}}}}}}

षष्टीतत्पुरुष
37]i षुक्
senses a hundred and one in all), ,
is frequerःtly used by gramma-
rians; cf. ष्ञष्ठी शेधे P. II. 3.50; cf.
also बहत्रेो हि षष्ठयर्थाः स्वस्बाम्यनन्त॒रसमीपसमूह-
विकारावयवाद्यास्तत्र यावन्तः शब्दे संभवान्ति
तेषु सर्वेषु प्राप्तषु नियमः क्रियते षष्ठी स्थानेयेोगा
इति ' Ka$. on P. I. 1.49. The
genitive case is used in the sense
of any kāraka when that kāraka ;
is not to be considered as a kāraka ;
cf. कारकत्वेन अविवक्षिते शेषे षष्ठी भविष्यति.
A nOun standing aS a Subject or
Object Of an activity is put in the
genitive case when that activity
is expresSed by a verbal deriva-
tive , and not by a verb itself; cf.
कर्तृकर्मणेोः कॄति P. II. : .65. For the
SenSes and use of the genitiwe
case, cf. P. II. 3.50 to 73.
षष्ठीतत्पुरुष a tatpurusa compound
with the first member (rarely the
second member as in the case of
अवयवतत्पुरुष ) in the genitive case.
The compound is very common
as prescribed in the case of a
word in the genitive case with
any other word connected with
it; e. g. राजपुरुष्षः, गुरुपत्नी etc. ; the
other tatpuru$a cOmpounds viz•
द्वितीयातत्पुरुष, तृतीयातत्पुरुष and otherS
prescribed in connection with
specific words or kinds of wOrds.
The word ष्प्रष्ठीसमास is also uSed in
thiS sense.
षष्ठीनिर्दिष्ट a word put in the genitive
case; a, Substitute given aS cOn-
nected with a genitive case which
replaces the whole word which
is put in the genitive case unless
the substitute consistS Of a single
letter or is characterized by the
mute letter ङ्. cf. षष्ठी स्थानेयोगा । अलेा-
न्त्यस्य । अनेकाल्शित्सवैस्य etc. cf. P. I•
1.49 to 55.
षष्ठीसमास a compound word formed
by one noun with another in the
genitive case; see षष्ठीतत्पुरुष्त्र above•
षष्ठयर्थ sense of the genitive case,
which is *a relation in general.
See षष्ठी above.
षाकन् a, kपुt affix applied to the roots
जल्प्र॒, भिक्षु कुड् लुण्ट् and दृ in the
SenSe of an agent, the mute
letter ष् signifying the addition of
the fem. affix ङीषू e. g. जल्पाकः,
भिक्षाकः etc.; fem. base जल्पाकी, वराकी.
etc.; cf. P. III. 2.155.
षिकन् tad. affix इक added to the
word पाथन् in the sense of * a stu-
dent of' * or * a, scholar of * when
the word पथिन् is preceded by the
* word शत Or षष्टि. e. g. शतपथिकः,
शतपथिको ! cf. शतष्प्रष्ट: ष्क्षेिकन् प्रथ: Kāś.
on P. [I. 2.60.
षित् am affix or sometimes a Word
marked by the mute letter ष्, The
mute letter ध्रुध् attached to roots
signifies the addition of the kt
affix अङ् ( अ ) in the sense of the
verbal activity ; e. g. क्षमा from the
root क्षमूष्ञ् ( क्षम् ), जरा from ञ्जूष् ( हूं );
cf. ष्विद्भिदादिभ्भोऽङ् P. III. 3.l04;
attached to affixes, ष्ञ् signifieS the
addition of the fera. affix ई ( ङष्ञ् ),
e. g. वराकी, शतपथिकी etc. cf. ष्षि॑िद्रैौरा-
दिभ्यश्र्च P.. IV. 1.41. A few roots
headed by घट् (roots from घट् tO
त्वर्) are to be looked upon as त्रित्
for the purpose of the addition
of the krt. affix अ; e. g. घटा, व्यथा
etc. cf. घटादयः षितः l Gat]a stātra in
Dhatupatha•
र्षीध्वम् combination of the verbal
ending ध्वम् With the augment
सीयुट् prefixed tO it, which is
changed intO षद्वृम् after a root-
base ending in a vOwel excepting
अ; cf. इमः षीध्वं लुडूलिटां धेोङ्कात् P.VIII.
3,78, 79.
षुक् augment षू added t0 (1) मनु be-
iore the tad. affixes अञ् and य e•gटं•
मानुषः मनुष्यः; cf. P. IV., 1.161; (2)



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-388.png}}}}}}

षणयए
-x
त्रपु and जतु before the tad. aff*
अण् e. g. त्रापुषम्, जातुषम्; cf. |P. IV.•
3.i38;" (3) धेनु before the tad•
afiix य, e. g. धेनुष्या cf. P. IV. 4.89:
(4) the root भी befor& the afiं&.णैि
ðf the causal, e. g. भीषयते cf. P.VII
3.40; (5) the root नी before the
afiix तृन् ' ( तृ ) e. g. नेनष्टI; cf. न्न॒यो॒तः षुक्रू
च P. III.. 2.135 Vārt 2 and Vàrt 4.
षेण्यएश्	tad. affix एन्य added tO the
word समिधु, e. g. समीाधेन्येो मेंन्त्र:
साामैधेनी क्रत्कूः cf. समिधामाधान षेण्यण्, P.
I[V. 3.120 Wārt.. 10.
षोडशाकारिका an anonymous wOrk
consisting of only 16 stanzas dis-
cussing the denotation Of words
and that of the case-relations with
a commentary by the authOr
|himself.
ष्कन् tad. affix क added to the word
पथिन् in the sense of * One whO
goes ', e. g. पथिकः पथिकी; cf. पथः
ष्कन् P. V. 1.75.
ष्टरच् tad. affix तर added to the Words
कोसू and गोणी in the sense of small-
ness; cf हृस्वा कासूः कासूतरी, गोणीतरी
]Ka$. on P. V, 3.90.
छुत्व cerebralization of the dental
consonants as prescribed by the
rule ष्टुना ष्टुः	P. VIII. 4. 41; e. g.
कोयष्टिकंष्टीकते, पेष्टा, उडुीन: etc; cf. Kāś.
on P. VIII. 4.41.
ध्रुट्रन् (l) krt.affix त्र,signifying the acute
accent of the initial vowel and the
addition of ई to the base in the
feminine,added to the root धा in the
sense Ofobject (कर्मन्) and to the roots |
दापू, नी, शस् and others in the sense
of instrument (करण); e.g. धात्री, दात्रम्,
नेत्रम्, स्तेोत्रम्, पोत्रम् etc; cf. P. III. 2.
l81-183; (2) Unādi affix त्र as seen
in the word गात्र from the root इ;
cf. अन्नवधकगात्रविचक्षणााञ्जराद्यथैम् P. II.
4.54 Vart 12.
ध्ट्लश् tad, affix ल, causing Vrddhi to
the initial wQw¢l and the addition
372
रुप
of the fem. affix ई, applied to the
word शमी in the sense of product
or portion; शामलिं भस्म; cf. P. IV.
3.142.
ष्ठच् tad. affix इक added to the word
देशैकादश in the sense of censurable
giving gf interest or profit; दशैकाद-
शिक:, दशैकादशिकी; cf. Kāś. on P. IV.
4.31.
ष्ठन् tad. affix इक (I) added to the
word कुसीद in the sense of giving a
sum or SOmething on an obje-
ctionable rate Of interest or profit;
cf. कुसीदं प्रयच्छति कुसीदिकः, कुसीदिकी; cf.
P. IW. 4.3|l ; (2) added to the
words पैारोडाश an पुरेाडाश in the sense
of *explanatory book thereon' ; e.g.
पुरोडाशिकः पौरोडाशिकः, पुरोडाशिकी, पौरो-
डाशिकी; cf. P. IV. 3.70; (3) addsd
to the words पर्प and others as also
to श्चगण, भस्त्रा and others, विवध, वीवध
किशर and others, the words शलालु
पात्र and the words अाढक, अाचित and
पात्र at the end of Dvigu compounds
in the specific senses mentioned;
e. g. पर्पेिकः, श्वगाणिकः, भासैत्रकः, शलालुकः
व्याढाकेिकी etc.; cf. P. IV. 4.10, 1l,
16, 17, 53, 54, V. 1.46, 54, 55.
" ष्ठल्छ् tad. affix इक added (1) to the
word अाकर्ष ( touchstone ) in the
sense of * living thereby ?; e. g. "
अाकर्घक:, अाकर्षिकी; cf. P. IV. 4.9;
(2) to the word अावसथ in the sense
of * dwelling im ', e. g. अावसथे वसति
अावसाथेकः, अावसथिकी; cf. P.IV. 4.74.
ष्फ feminine affix अायनी, termed also
तद्वित (1) added, according to the
Eastern $chool of grammarians, tO
words ending with the tad. affix
यञ्ज ( prescribed by rules	like
गगीँदिभ्येो यञ्म् IV.1.105) e. g. गाग्यीँयणी,
वात्स्यायनी as contrasted with गागf or
वात्सी according to the Western
school of Pātini; (2) added to
form feminine bases " of the
words from लोहित to कत to which



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-389.png}}}}}}

ध्फक
-、
यञ् has already been added as also
tg? the words कौरव्य॒ and माण्डूक. e. g.
लौहित्यायनी, बाभ्रव्यायणी, कात्यायनीं, कौरव्या-
यणी, माण्डूकायनी cf. P. IV. 1. 17-19.
एफक्र् tad. affix अायन, added to the
wOrds कापिशी and रङ्कुं as also to the
words बाह्रीं, उर्दि in the residual or
miscellaneOuS tad. senses; e. g.
कापिशायनं मधु, कापिशायनी द्राक्षा, राश्ङ्कवायणेो
गौः, बाह्रायनी, औौदीँयनी, पादीयनी, cf. M.
|Bh. on P. IW. 2.99 and 100.
ष्यङ् tad. afhx य (!aking Samprasārana
change i. e. ई before the words
पुत्र and पति and बन्धु in the Bahu-
vrihi cOmpound) added, instead of
the affix अण् or इश्, in the sense of
Ofispring, (1) to words having a
long ( गुरु ) vowel for their penul-
timate , only in the formation of
feminine bases; e.g. कारीषगन्ध्या कौमुद-.
गन्ध्या, वाराह्या; कारीषगन्धीपुत्रः, कारीष्ष-
गन्धीपतिः, कारीषगन्धबिन्धुः ( Bah.
cOmp.); cf P.IV.}.78; (2) to words
expressive of family names like
पुणिक, मुखर etc. as also to thc words
क्रौडि, लाडि, व्याडि अापिशलि etc. and
optionally to the words देवयज्ञि and
otherS in the formation of feminine
bases; e. g. पौणिक्या, मौखर्या, क्रौञ्ज्या,
ब्याङञ्या, अापिशल्या etc.; cf. P. IV.1.79,
80, 81.
ष्यञ्म् tad. affix (1) in the sense of
* nature ? applied optionally with
the afiix इमानेञ्च् to words showing
colour aS alsO to WOrds headed by
दृढ; e. g. शौक्ल्यम्, शुक्लिमा, काष्ण्यैम्
कृाध्णमा, दादयैम्, द्रढिमा etc.; cf. P. V.
|l.123; (2) in the sense of nature
as also in the sense of professional
work to wOrds Of quality and
words headed by व्राह्मण्'; e. g. जाङयम्,
ब्राह्मण्यम् cf P.V. 1.124; (8) to the
words चतुर्वर्ण, त्रिलेाकी and others in
thesamesenseas that of those wery
words; e.g.चातुर्वण्र्यम्,' त्रैलेक्यम् षाड्गुण्यम्,
सून्यम् etc, cf. P. V. 6.124 Vart, 1.
373
संक्रम
ष्चुन् k!t. affix अक added to a root in
the sense of a skilled artisan नर्तकः,
नर्तकी; खनकः खनकी; रजकः, रजक्री; cf.P.
III. j.i45.
स्
स् (1) a sibilant letter of the dental
claSS of consonants poSSessed of
the properties श्वास, अघेोष, कण्ठविवार
and महाप्राण ; ( 2 ) Substitute for
visarjaniya if followed by a hard
consonant excepting a sibilant
cf. P. VIII. 3. 34, 36, 38, 40, 42,
46, 47, 48-54,
स ( l ) short term for समास used
by ancient grammarians ; the
term is found used in the.Jainen-
dra Vyākaratha alSo ; cf. तित्राश्का-
रकाणां प्राक् सुबुत्पत्तेः कृाद्भि: सविधिः Jain..
|Pari. 100; cf. also राजाऽसे; ( 2 )
Unādi afÎix स placed after the roots
वृ, दृ, वद् , हन् and otherS; cf.Unādi-
Stitras 342-349; (3) tad. affix स
in the quadruple SenseS (चातुरर्थिक)
applied to the words तृण and
others. e.g. तृणस:; cf. P. IV.2.80;
(4) tad. affix स applied to the
word मृद् when praise is · in-
tended e. g. मृत्सा, मृत्स्ना:; alsO cf.
P. V. 4.41; (5) substitute for the
preposition सम् before the words
हित and तत; cf. समो हितततयोवर्ग लेपः
M. Bh. on P. VI.l.144 Varf. l.
संकर्ष non-resolution of the conso-
nantS युय् and क् intO इय् and उव्
e.g. व्यम्बकम् as contrasted with
त्रियम्बकम् which is called विकर्ष.
संक्रम ( 1 ) joining with a subse-
quent word after omitting a word
or two occurring betWeen; cf.
गालत्पदमतिक्रम्य अगलता सह संधानं संक्रम:;
e. g. शूद्रे अर्ये for शूद्रे यदर्यै where यत्
is passed over in the krama and
other recitals; cf. V. Pr. IV. 77,
165, 194; (2) a term used," in



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-390.png}}}}}}

सक्षेिप्तसार
ancient grammars for such affixes
and others which do not allow
the subst,tution Of gutaa Or v{ ddhi
for the preceding vowel; the
term is also used for the letterS
क्, गुश् and ड् when they are rnute,
serving only the purpose of pre-
venting guऐa or vrddhi; cf. मृजेर-
जादौ संक्रमे विभाषा, वृद्धिमारभन्ते M. Bh. on
|P. I.1.3. Vart. 10.
संक्षिप्तसार name of a complete gra-
mmar-work written by क्रमदीश्चर for
facility of study. This grammar
appears to have been written
before the time of कैयटं or हेमचन्द्र,
as can be seen from the popular
stanzrt परेत्र पाणेिनयिज्ञाः केचित् कालापकेो-
विदा; । एके विश्रान्ताविद्याः स्युरन्ये संक्षितसा-
रका; |ll
संख्या (1)a numeral such as एक,द्वि etc.
In Pātaimiś Aś|िःadhyāyi, although
the term is defined as applicable
to the word बहु, गण and words
ending with the tad. affixes वतु amd
डति, such as तावत् , कति and the like,
still the term is applied to all
numerals to which it is seen appli-
ed by the people; cf, M. Bh. on
P. I. 1.23 also Pari. Sek. Pari. 9;
(2) numerical order; cf. स्पशेष्वेव
सैरट्या V. Pr. I. 49.
संख्यातानुदेशा application respective-
ly of terms stated in the उद्देश्य and
विधेय portions in their numerical
order when the Stated term 3 are
equal in number: cf. यथासंख्यम-
नुदेशः समानाम् P. 1.3.10; cf. also
पञ्चागमास्त्रय अागमिनः वैषभ्यात् संख्यातानुदेशेो
न प्रामेति M. Bh. Ahnika 2.
संख्यान enumeration; statement; cf.
एकाजनेकाज्ग्रहणेषु च[वृत्तिसंख्यानादनेकाच्त्वं
भविष्यति, M.Bh. on Sivasitr.8} 1 Vārt.
|10.
सख्यापूर्व with a numeral word placed
first or at the beginning; a term
uscd for defining the Dwigu com-
→
374 → संघात
pound; cf. संख्यापूर्वो द्विगुः |P. II. 1.52.
संख्येय lit. those that are to be count-
ed ; objectS Of enumeration; cf.
बहुत्रीहौ संख्येय डज॒बहुगणात् P.. V. 4,73;
cf. also अथवा संरष्या नाम इयं परप्रधाना |
संख्ब्येयन्मनया विशेाप्यम्, M. Bh. on P. II.
2.24 Vart.. 9.
संगताथै a word unit where the senses
of two words are mixed together
completely as in a cOmpound word
such as राजपुरुषः etc. ; cf. संगतार्थ समर्थम्
|M. Bb. on P. II. 1.1. Vart. 4.
सैगम combination of things coming
one after another; cf. उदात्तपूर्वोप्य-
नुदाच्तसंगम: where the term is used
with respect to a combination of
grave syllables; cf. also व्यञ्जनसंगमं
संयेोर्गे विद्यात्, R. Pr. XVIII. 19.
संगृर्होत included; the word is often
used in the Mahābhā$ya in conne-
ction with instances which are
covered by a rule, if interpreted
in a specific way; cf. अथ निमित्तऽ-
भिसंवध्यमाने यत्तदस्य योगस्य मूधीभिषिक्तमु-
दाहरणं तदपि संगृहीतं भवति M. Bh. on P.
I. ] . 57 ; cf. also एकाथाँभवि सामर्थेयै
समास एकः संगृहीतो भवति, M. Bh. on P.
II. 1. l.
सेञ्ग्रह name of a very vast work on
grammar attributed to an ancient
grammarian Vyādi who is sup-
posed t० have been a relative of
Pataini; cf. संग्रहेस्तमुपागते Bhartr-
hari's Vākyapadtya cf. alsO संग्रह-
प्रतिकञ्चुके; cf.' संग्रहेीं नाम लक्षश्लोकात्मको
त्याटेिकृतेो ग्रन्थ: | Some quotationS
o;nly are found from the Sarih-
graha in grarmmar wOrks, but the
work is lost long agO.
सेघात (1) aggregatc, collection ; the
word is often used in grammar in
connection with letters ( वर्ण ); cf.
वर्णसंघातः पद्म् cf. also सं॑घातस्यैकाथ्यीँत्
सुबभावेो वर्णात् M. Bh. on Siva suitra 5
Vārt. 13; the word is also used
in connection with a collection of



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-391.png}}}}}}

संघातार्थ
375
संदष्ट
words; cf. संघातस्य समाससंज्ञा प्राप्नोति l
ऋद्धस्य राज्ञ पुरुषः M. Bh. on P. I.4.13
Vart. 8; (2) effort made in the
utterance of a word; cf संघातेो नाम
प्रयत्नः स बाह्योभ्यन्तरत्वेन द्विधा । अनन्त-
भट्टभाप्य on W. Pr. I. 9. cf. also स
संघातादीन् वाक् V. Pr. I.9.
संघाताथै collective sense giwCn by a
combination of letters called पदार्थ.
When the collective sense is given
by a combination of words it is
called पदाथै, and when the idea is
complete it is called वाक्यार्थ. Some-
times the meaning of a com-
pound word is taken indiwidu-
ally and not. collectively; Such a
meaning is called संधाताविगृहीतार्थ cf.
नामाख्यातग्रहणं संघाताविगृहीतार्थ द्रष्टव्यम् M.
Bh. on IV. 3.72 Vārt.. 1.
संचय a collection or a group; cf.
वर्णसंचय which means अक्षरसमाम्राय Or
|alphabet.
संज्ञा a technical term; a short word-
ing tO convey ample Sense; a term
to know the general nature cf
things; convention; cf. वृद्धिशब्दः
संज्ञा; अादेच: संज्ञिनः M.Bh. on P.I-1.1.
There are two main divisions of
संज्ञा-कृत्रिमसंज्ञा or an artificial term
such as टि, घु, or भ which iS merely
conventional, and अकृत्रिमसंज्ञl which
refers to the literal sense conveyed
by thue word such as अव्श्यय, सर्वनाम
and the like. Some grammar workS
such as the Cāndra avoid purely
conwentional terms. These SaIih-
jfias are necessary for every Scien-
tific treatise. In Pātāini's grammar,
there are the first two chapters
giving and explaining the techni-
cal terms whose number exceeds
well-nigh a hundred.
संज्ञाधिकार a topic or a chapter or a
portion Of a treatise in which
technical terms are given and ex-
plained; cf. संज्ञाधिकारोयम्; M. Bh. |{
| on P. I. 1.46, I. 1.56, I. 4.1, r.
«» 4.23; See the word संज्ञा.
an operation with respect
to which a technical term has been
&xpressly mentiongd; cf. संज्ञापूर्वैको
विधिरनित्यः, Par. Sek. Pari. 93.1 ;
^28Wyādi Pari. 53.
स्संज्ञाभ्त (1) that, which by usage has
become a technical word possessed
Of a conventionāl sense; cf. किं
पुनयाँनेि एतानि संज्ञाभूतानि अाख्यनिानेि तत्र
उत्पत्त्या भावितव्यम् , M. Bh. on III. 1.
26 Wart. 7; (2) which stands as a
prOper nOun or the name of a
person; cf. संज्ञाभूतास्तु न सर्वादयः S. K.
on P. I.:.27.
संज्ञाविधि a rule laying down the defi-
• .nition of a संज्ञा or a technical term
? :ंas contrasted with कार्यविधि or a rule
|laying down a grammatical opera-
tion; ' cf. संज्ञाविधौ वृाद्वरादैच् अदेङ्गणः
इति M.Bh. on Siva Stitra 3, 4. '
संज्ञाशब्द one of the four divisions of
words- जातिशव्द, गुणशब्दं, क्रियाशब्द and
संज्ञाशब्द; the संज्ञाशब्द is called also
यदृच्व्छाशब्द a word forming the name
of a thing by virtue of a conven-
tion; See यट्टच्व्?छाशब्द.
संज्ञेिन् the recipient or the bearer or
possessor of a technical term; cf. .
संज्ञासंज्ञ्यसंदेहश्च l कुतो हेह्यतद् वृाद्धेशब्दः संज्ञा,
अाँदैदचः संज्ञिन इति | M. Bh. on P. I.
1.1 Vārt. 3; cf. .also स्वभावात् संज्ञ1:
संाञ्ज्ञिनः प्रत्याय्य निवर्तन्ते M. Bh. on P.
I. 1.1. Wārt. 7.
संतान continuity; line; continuouS
recital.
सदर्भीमृत name of a commentary on
the Mugdhabodha Vyākarana of
Bopadeva, written by a gramma-
rian, named Bholānātha.
संदष्ट a fault of pronunciation when
the constituerat letters of a word
are uttered with the teeth kept
close together. Kaiya¢a has ex-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-392.png}}}}}}

**、
सदह
376
संनेिपातपरिभाषा
plained the word as वर्ध्नित.
सैसदेह ambiguity ; doubt regarding the
wording of a rule or its interpre-
tation or regarding thc cOrrect-
nesS of a word. It is looked upon
aS the main purpose of grammar tO
solve doubts regarding thc correct-
nes$ of words; cf. व्याख्यानतेा विशैषप्रति-
पातिर्नहि संदेहादलक्षणम् Parj. Sekh.Pari.1.
संदेहनिवृत्त्यर्थ lit. meant for the remo-
wal of doubt; the word is used in
connection with a word or am ex-
preSSion or an a3ldition of a mute
letter, as seen in the expression of
the stitrakāra for the purpose of
|leaving no kind of doubt regarding
the Wording or its meaning; cf. तत्र
अवश्यं संदेहनिवृत्त्यर्थे विशेषार्थिना विशेषोनुप्रयो-
क्तव्यः M.Bh. on P..II.• 2.24 Vārt. 6.
संधारण putting very close in utter-
" ance; Slurring of a phonetic ele-
ment when it appears as almost
$पृppressed; cf. संधारणं वर्णश्रुतेः संवरणम्
Uvwatःa on R. Pr. VI. 5.
संधि euphonic combination; phone-
tic cOmbination of two vowels or
tWO cOnSOnantS Or one vowel and
one cOnSOnant resulting from their
clOSe utterance ;many kinds of such
cOtnbinations and varieties are giv'-
en in the Prāti$akhya works. In the
SiddhāntakaumudÎ, Bhattoji Diksi-
ta hasgiven five kinds of Such San-
dhis at the beginning of his work;
cf. पदान्तपदाद्येोः संधिः | यः कश्चिद्वैदिकशास्वसं-
धिरुच्यत स पदान्तपदाद्योर्वेदेितव्यःते सैधयश्चत्वारो
भवन्ति l स्वरयेोः व्यञ्जनयोः स्वरव्यञ्जनयेोश्च V.
Pr. III. 3.
संध्य a diphthong; see below the
word संधिः cf. अस्थनामनी संध्यम् .
सैध्यक्षर diphthong, a vowel' resulr-
ing from a combination of two
vowels, but which is to be looked
upon as one single vowel by
reas9n Qf9nly a single effort being
required for its pronunciation; the '
letters ए, ऐ, ओो and औौ are termed
aS संध्यक्षर as contrasted with समानाक्षर,.
cf. अष्टैौ समानाक्षराण्यादितस्ततश्चत्वारि संध्यक्षर-
प्ण्युत्तराणि R. Pr. I. 10; cf. also T. Pr.
|II. 13, R. T. l l l ; cf. also संध्यक्षराणा-
मिदुतौ हृस्वादेशे Kāt. Pari. 43
संनमन interpretation, explanation;
cf. यथायर्थे विभक्ती: सनमयेत् Nir. 1.
संनिकर्ष cOr1tact, .juxtaposition; this
COntact between two letters is
called संद्दिती when it is very close;
cf. परः संनिकर्षः संहिता P. I. 4,109.
स्संनिधापन putting tOgether too close,
SO that the twO phOnetic elements
which are SO placed, coalesce
together and result into a third,
Or One of the twO merges into
another.
संनिाधे juxtapO$ition; coming toge-
ther phonetically very close; cf.
पदानामावेलम्बितेनोच्चारणम् Tarka Sarih-
graha; अव्य॒वधानेन अन्वयप्रातयोग्युपास्थतिः
Tattvacintāmat]i 4; the sāme as
संनिब्कर्ष which see above.
संनिपात (1) a cOntact Or relation of
twO thjngS. cf. संनिपातो द्वयोः संबन्धः |
Pari. Sck. Pari. 85; (2) coming
tOgether; cf. न लश्यत विकृति: संनिपाते
M. Bh. On P. III. 2.123 Vārt 5.
संनिपातपरिभाषा the maxim or con-
ventiOn that an Operation which
is based upon, Or is caused or
occasioned by, a |r€latiOnship bet-
ween twO thingS cannot 'break
their relatiOn ; in short, such an
9peration as results in ' breaking
the relationship between tw6
things .on which it is based, can-
not take place. This dictum is
many times followed in grammar
in _preventing the appli6ation of
$rch rules as are likely to spoil
the formation of the correct word;
many times, however, this dictum
has to be ignored; For details



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-393.png}}}}}}

सनेिपातलक्षण
377 »
संप्रसारष्
see Pari. $ek. Pari. 85; also| कियदनुदात्तम् l M.Bh. om P. I. 2.32.
Mahābhāsya On P. I• 1•39•
संनिपातलक्षण an operation which is
characterized by the relationship
between two words Or twO pho-
netic elements. See संनिपातपरिभाषा
abowe.
संनियेोग occurrence together of two
or more words in orie sentence
or in one grammatical rule; cf.
संनियेागशिटानामन्यतरापाये उभयोरप्यपायः M.
Bh. on IV 1.36 Vārt. 4; cf. also
एष एव न्यायो यदुत संनियेोगशिष्टानामन्यतरापाये
उभयोरप्यभावः | तद्यथा देवदत्तयज्ञदत्ताभ्याामेदं !
कर्तव्यमिति देवदत्तापाये यज्ञदत्तेोपि न करोति,
M. Bh. on V. 1.64 and 76.
संनिावष्ट placed together in a parti-
cular order at a particular place;
cf. व्र्क्र संनिावष्टानां प्रत्याहारः M. Bh. on
P. III. 1.40 Vārt,. 3; III. 2.127
Vart. 6.
संनिवेशा order or arrangement of
letters; cf. वर्णानामानुपूर्येण संानेवेशः
समवायः M. Bh. Ahnika I. Wart.
l5; cf. also संनिवेशेान्यः प्रत्याहारार्थः |R.
T. ]I. 3.
संनिहित (1) present by implication;
taken as grarated; cf. अपि च ऋकारग्रहणे
लकारग्रहणं संनिाहतं भवति M. Bh. on P.
|I. 1.9. Vārt. 5; (2) nearby, at
hand; cf. इह सर्वेषु साधनषु सांनेिहितेषु
कदाचित् पचतीत्येतद् भवति, कदाावेन्न भवति ।
M. Bh. on I. 3.1. Vārt. 2; I. 4.23
Wār*t.. 15.
संपद्यकर्तृ the agent of the actiwity
or of the event which is to take
place; cf. अभूततद्भावे संपद्यकर्तरि च्विः ।
संपद्यतेः कत संपद्यकतीं Kāś. on P. V.
4.50. →
संपृक्त completely mixed in such a
way that one of the two or more
letters mixed together can neither
be distinguished as different, mor
can be separated; cf. तद्यथा t क्षीँरोदके
संपृक्ते अामिश्रीभूतत्वान्न ज्ञायते , कियत् क्षीरं
कियदुदकम् । एवमिहापि न ज्ञायत कियदुदात्तं
48
संप्रातिपाति understanding, compre-
hension of the sense; cf. गौणमुख्ययेो-
र्मुख्ये संप्रतिपातिः, M. Bh. on P. VIII.
3.82 Wart, 2.
संप्रत्यय the same as संप्रतिपाति which
see above; cf. इंतंरथा ह्यसंप्रत्ययेो यथT
लोके M. Bh. on P. I. 1.1 Vārt.
2; cf. also येनोच्चारितेन सास्नालाङ्गूलककुद-
खुराविषाणिनां संप्रत्ययो भवतेि स शब्दः M.
Bh. on Ahnika 1•
संप्रदान a kāraka relation or a rela-
tion between a nOun and the
werbal activity with which it is con-
nected, of the type of the donation
and the donee; the word is tech-
nically used in connection with *
the bearer of such a relation; cf.
कर्मणा यमाभप्रैति स संप्रदानम् P. I.4.32.
संप्रधारणा simultaneouS occurrence•
अप्ड्श्रेोपस्य च यणादेशस्य नास्ति संप्रधारणा,
' M. Bh. on I. 4.2 Vārt. 9; cf. alsO
सिद्धसिद्वयोश्च नाास्त संप्रधारणा M. Bh.
on P. WI. 1.9. Wārt. 7•
संप्रयुक्त used together with; cf. ळूहकार*
मेति स एव चास्य ढकारः सत्रूष्मणा संप्रयुक्तः
|R.. Pr. I. 22.
संप्रसारणा lit. extension; the procesS
of changing a semi-vowel irāto a
simple wowel of the same sthāna
or place of utterance; the Substi-
tution of the vowels इ, उ, ऋ and ल
for the semi-vowels यु, व् , र्.and छ्
respectively; cf. इम्यणः संप्रस॒ारणम् ]P..
1. 1.45. The term संप्रसारण is ren*
dered as a *resultant vOwel? or aS
*an emergent vowel?. The ancient
term was प्रसारण and possibly it re-
ferred to the extension of युं and 3
into their constituent partS ई *+ अ,
उ-+अ etc. the vowel अ being of a
weak grade but becoming strong
afer the merging of the subsट्ठ-
quent vowel int9 it;. &:.g• cf. सर्वत्र
प्रसाराणेिभ्यो डः P. III. 2.8 Vārt.1• For
the words taking this safiaprasārama



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-394.png}}}}}}

संप्रसारणावलयिस्त्व
378 स्भव
॰-*, *
8»
' change, see P. VI. } • 13 to	l9•
According to some grarm fmariaas
· the term संप्रसारण is applied to the
stibstituted vowels w'hile accorditmg
to others the term · refers tO the
operation of the SubStitution; cf.
, M. Bh. on P. I. i.15. The · Sub-
stitutiora of the Sarihprasāratऐa
vowel is to be given preference in
the formation of a WOrd; , cf.
संप्रसारणं तदाश्रयं च कायै बलवत् Pari. Sek.
Pari. 1 l9.
सैप्रसारणबलीयस्त्व the relative Supe*
rior strength of the $arihprasāratऐa
change in comparisOn with other
" operations occurring simultane-
oüsly. The phrase न वा संप्रसारणबली-
यस्त्वात् is oftcn used in the Mahā-
bhā$ya which is based upon the
dictum of the Supcrior Strength of
the sarihprasārata SubStitutiOn,
" which is announced by the Writer
of the Varttikas; P. VI. 1.]17
Vart, 2. , See संप्रसारण.
संबद्धाथै with senses ( Of the two
words ) 1merely connected with
each other and not complctely
|mixed into , cach other; cf. संगतार्थ
. समर्थ संसृष्टाथै समर्थ संप्रेक्षितार्थे सम थै संबद्धार्थ
समर्थमिति ! . .. कः पुनरिह वश्नात्यर्थः । संबद्ध
इत्युच्यते यो रज्ज्वा अयसा वा कीले व्यतिषक्तो
भवति, M. Bh. ora P. II. 1, 1. Vārt.4.,
This संबद्धाथैत्व इंs connectcd with the
: definition व्यपेक्षा out of the two de-
finitions एकाथाँभाव and व्यपेक्षा cited
with respect to th5 word सामथ्र्थ.
सैबन्ध (1 } |lit.connection in general;cf.
धातुसंबन्धे प्रत्ययाः P.IHI. 4.I. The word
jiषु, explained by the geh९ral terrm
विशेषणविशष्यभाव; cf. सैवन्धो विशेधणविशेष्य-
· भावः Kā$. on |P.III.4.l ; (2) contcxt,
cf. संबन्धादत॒द् गन्तद्भ्ञ्यं ये प्राति यदप्रधाने तं
प्रति तदुपसर्जनं भवति M. Bh. on P. I.
2.43.• Vārt. 5.
* →	→
संबन्धपाद name given by convention
' by 'gratmmarians to the fourth
j
pāda of the third adhyāya of
Pàरे॒ini*s A$ं!ādhyāyi · which begins
with the sü tra धातुसंवन्ध प्रत्ययाः P.
IHI. 4.1.
संवन्ध्ञ्शिब्द् relatjve term; the terna
|referS tO wOrds connected in Such
a way by their meahing · that if
orae of therrn js uttered, the other*
has to be anticipated and under-
stOOd; e. g- पितॄं, भ्रातृ, मातृ, भार्या etc.
cf.तद्यथा ! संबन्धिशब्दाः ! मातरेि वर्तितव्यम् l
पितरि छूष्श्रूषितव्यम् | न चेोच्यते स्वस्यां मातरि
स्वश्रििमन्चां पितरि इति । cf. also M.Bh. on
|I 1 .71 ; cf. also प्रधानमुपसजैनं च संबन्धि-
शव्दावेती M. Bh. on P. I. 2.43 Vart.
5; Î. 2. 48 Vārt, 4,
संबुाद्धे (1) a term used in Pārोini'S
grammar for the case-affix of the
vocative singular; cf. एकवचनं संबुाद्धेः
P. II. 3. 49; the vocative ' is,
|however, not looked upOn as a
separate case, but the designatiort
संबोधन is given to the nominative
case, having the ser}se of संबंोधन;
(2) the word is also used in the
general sense of संबं[धन i. e. addre-
Ssing or calling; cf. ए॒कश्रुति दूरात्संबुद्धौः
क्रिामेदं पारिभाविक्याः संवुद्धेर्ग्रहणमेकवचंनं संर्बुद्विः
(II. 3.49) अाहंीस्विदन्धंर्थग्रहणं संवोधनं संबुद्धिः
M. Bh. om P. I• 2.33.
संबोधन calling or addresS which is
given as one of the additional
senses of the nominative case
afiixes ( cf. संवेोधने च P. II. 3. 47 )
in additiOn to those given irः
thc rule प्रतिपादिकार्थलिङ्गपरिमाणवच्चन-
भात्रे प्रथमा P. II. 3.46: cf. अाभिमुख्य-
करणं संबोंधनम् Kā$. on P. II. 3.47.
सेभव lit. possibility. The word is
uscd in the gश्encral sen$e of theटं
possibility of the application of a
rule or of the occurrence of a rule;
cf. धिाधेानेयमसंभधे विधिरेव ज्यायान् ,M.
Bh. on VI. 4.49 Vārt.; Pari.' $ek.
Pari. 100; cf. also असति संभवे बाधनं
भवति t अास्त च संभर्वेी यदुभयं स्यात् । Sira-



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-395.png}}}}}}

सैसर्ग
संयुक्त 379 →
deva Pari. 35.
संयुक्त (!|) closc!y connected;
गृहपतिना संयुक्ते त्र्थः P. IV. 4.90; (2)
joint, conjoint ; the term is used
frequently in connection with
tWO or more cOnsOnants in juxta-
position; cf. अन्ननुस्वारसंयुक्तम् T. Pr.
XXII. 15. *
संयोगा connection in general; the
word is used as a technical term
in the grammar of Pānini, in the
Sense of two Or more consonants
cOming cloSely together unsepara-
ted by any woWcl; cf.हलेानन्तराः संयोगः
cf. P. I. l.7; cf. also अनन्तरं संयोगः
V. Pr. I. 48.
संयोगादिलेप the elisiorn of the first of
the conjunct COnsonants if it is स्
or क्, prowided the conjunct con-
sonantS are at the end of a word
or folloWcd by a consonant Which
is nOt a Sermi-wOwel nor a rnaSa];
c. g. तक, तटवान् from the rOot तक्षु;
cf. स्कोः संयोगाद्येोरन्ते न्च P. WIII. 2.?9.
संयोगान्तलोप the clision of the final
of thc conjunct consonantS when
they are at the end of a word
prowided they are not formed of
गु as the first member and any
conSonant except स् aS the secOnd
member; e. g- गोमान्, ऊर्क् etc.; cf. |
सैयेोगान्तस्य लोपः,रात्सस्य P.VIII.2.23,24.
संवरण lit. concealment; slurring over
a consonantby practically merging
its sound into that of the follow-
img one; the technical term अभि-
भिधान' is also used in the same
. sense; e. g. षङ्ट् द्वा द्वा|; cf. संधारणे
.' संवरणं श्रुतेश्च R. Pr. VI. 5. →
संवादचिन्तामणि name of a · small
: , treatise on roots and their mean-
. ings written by , a " grammarian
. , mamed इन्द्रदत्तोपाध्याय who has also
-: writtefí a commentary Qn the
.. Sabdakaustubha called · कीस्तुभगुण
i. ,and सिद्धान्तकौमुर्दागूढफाकेकाप्रकाश,
cf. ]
H
सैवार one of the extornal efforts in
thc production of a sound when
the gullet is a little bit contracted
aS at the time of the utterance of
the third, fourth and the fifth of
the claSS-consonants; cf. कण्ठबिलस्य
संकेोच्चः संबार: Uddyota on P. I. 1.9.
संविज्ञात conventional; lit. known
widely among the people, as a
|reSult, of course, of convention; cf.
संविज्ञातानि तानि यथा गौरश्वः पुरुषो हस्तीति
Nir. I. 12. →
संविज्ञान apprehension; cf. बहुत्रीहौ तद्गु-
ण्ासंविज्ञानमपि.
संवृत lit.. cOwered or concealed;ःname
Of an internal effort in the produc-
tion of SOund which is accompani-
ed with a laryngeal hum; cf. संवृर्तौं
घोषवान् ; cf. also हृस्वस्यावर्णस्य प्रयेागे
संवृतम् । प्राक्रयादशायां तु विवृतभेव S. K.'Qn
P.I.1.9;cf. also तत्रे|ात्पत्तेः प्राभ्यदा जिह्वाग्रो-
पाग्रमध्यमूल्छानि तत्तद्वर्णे|ोत्पत्तिस्थानानां ताल्वादनिां
सूमीपमेव ' केवलं अवतिष्ठन्त तदा संवृतता
$abdakaus. on P. I, 1.9. →
संश्लिष्ट very closely held together
just as the sound of the COnsonānt
र् in the vowel ऋ; cf. ऋलवर्णे रेफलक्रंप्ररौ
सैोश्लश्ट्रैठौ अश्रुतिधरौ एकवर्णों where Uvvata
has explained the Word संाश्लिष्ट as
एकीभूत; cf. Uvvata on V. Pr. IV.
148. →
संसगै lit. contact, connection; ' (1)
contact of the air passing up
through the gullet atad striking
the several places which prodtice
the sound, Which is of three kinds,
hard, middling and Soft; cf. संसैर्गोाँ
· वायुस्थानसंसर्गः अाभिघातात्मकः 1 स त्रिविधः ।
अयःपिण्डवद्दारुपिण्डवदूर्णापिण्डवृा६तेि |!* तदुक्त-
मापिशलशिक्षायाम् । स्पैर्शयमवर्णकरेी वायुः ओंश्यः-
पिण्डवत्स्थानमापाडयति । अन्तस्थात्रर्णकरो दोरु-
पिण्डवत् । ऊष्मस्थस्वरवर्णकर ऊणीपिण्डवत् :}
com.. on. ,'T. Pr. XXIII. 1 ; .. (2)
\syntactical• connection between
. word$ themselwes which exists*':be-
, tween pairs Qf words as between



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-396.png}}}}}}

संसृष्ट
380
संहिता
nouns and adjectives _as alsO .be- ||
tween .. verbs and the kārakas,
which is necessary for understand-
ing the meaning Of a Sentence•
Some Mimāfmsakas and LOgicianS
hold that sarihsarga itself is the me-
|aning of a sentence• The syntacti-
cal relation between two words is
described to be of two kinds अभेभद-
संसर्ग of the type of अाधाराधेयभाव , and
भदसंसर्गे of the type of विषयावषाश्यभाव,
समवाय, जन्यजनकभाव and the like.
संस्सृष्ट words syntactically cOnnected
with each other, and hence, cap-
able of expressing the sense of a
sentence; cf. संसृष्टेो वाक्यार्थः Vākya-
padiya II. 2.
सैस्सृष्टवादिपक्ष the theory, that the
meaning of a sentence is a nowel
thing ( अपूर्व ), held bysome Mimā-
rihsakas who believe that Words
connected with activity display
their phenomenal capacjty ( अनुभा-
विकाशक्ति ) after the recalling of the
senses of words by the recalling
capacity (स्मारिकाशक्ति ).
सेस्ञ्कार (1)preparation such as (a) that
of a wOrd by placing the affix
after the basc and accomplishing
all the necessary changes, or (b)
that of a sentence by placing all
words connected mutually by
syntax and then explaining their
formation; these two wiews are
respectively called the पदसंस्कारपक्ष
and the वाक्यसंस्कारपक्ष; (2) gramma-
tical forrnation; cf. स्वरसंस्कारयोश्छन्दसि
नियम:ः । संस्कारो लोपागमवर्णावकारप्रकृतिभाव-
लक्षणः Uvvata on V.Pr. I.1; cf. also
तद्यत्र स्वरसंस्कारौ प्रोदशिकेन गुणेन अन्वितैौ
स्यातामुञ् etc. Nir.I.
सैस्कृतमञ्जरी a short handbook on
declension and case-relations
written by a grammarian named
Sādhusundara, who lived in the
century.
संस्पृष्ट lit. formed by combination or
compact; the term is used in the
PrātiŚākhyas for diphthongs which
are combinations, in fact, of two
vowels which are completely
mixed being produced with a
single effort. The diphthongs
and ऋ also, are called संस्पृष्टवर्ण.
सेस्वाद a peculiar phonctic element
described along with another one
named निगार both of'which have got
no definiteplace of utterance in the
mouth; cf.' अविशेषस्थानौ संस्वादनिगारौ ।
पकारनकारयकाराः वा संस्वादे । हकारमकारना.
सिक्या वा निगांरे | com. on R.T.l 1.
संस्वार a combination or collection of
the SwāraS or musical notes for
purposes of Singitlg the Sāma
hymns.
संहत a tone in which two or mOre
accents or tones are mixed up
with one another; cf. Bhāradvāja
Sikंā.
संहार unnecessary contraction Of the
place (स्थान) as alsooftheinstrument
( करण ), which results into a fault
of utterance called पीडन; cf. विहार-
संहारयोव्यीसपीडने R. Pr.XIV.2.
संहिता position of words or parts of
words in the formation of a word
quite near each other which results
into the natural phonetic coale-
scence of the preceding and the
following letters. Originally when
the Vedic hymns or the running
prose passages of the Yajur-
veda were split up into their
different constituent parts name-
ly the words or padas by the
|Padakāras, the word संहिता or
संहितापाठ came into use as contrast-
cd with the पदपाठ. The writers of
of the PrātiŚakhyas hawe consequ-
ently defined संहिता as पदप्रकृतिः संद्दिता,
beginning ' of the eighteenth
while Pānini who further split up



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-397.png}}}}}}

संहितापाठ
381
स्सए
-«.
the padaS into baSes ( प्रकृति ) and
affixes ( प्रत्यय ) and memtioned
several augments and Substitutes,
the phOnetic combinations, which
resulted inside the word or pada,
|had tO be explained by reason of the
cloSe vicinity of the several phone-
tic units forming the base, the
affix, the augment, the substitute
and the like, and he had to define
the word संहिता rather differently
which he did in the words परंः
संनिकर्षः संहिता; cf. P.I.4.109; cf. also
संहितैकपदे नित्या नित्या धातूपसर्गयोः । नित्याँ
समासे वाक्ये तु सा विवक्षामपेक्षते Sabdakau-
stubha On Maheshvara Stitra, 5.1.
संहितापाठ the running text or the
Original text of the four Vedas as
Originally cOmposed. This text,
which waS the Original one, was
split up into its constituent padas
Qr Separate wOrds by ancient sages
शैौनक, अात्रेय and others,with a vjéw
to facilitating the understanding of
it, and cOnsequently to preserving
it in the Oral tradition.The original
was called मूलप्रकृति of which the
पदपाठ and the क्रमपाठ which were
comparatively older than the other
artificial recitations such as the
जटापाठ, घनपाठ and others, are found
mentioned in the Prātiśākhya
works.
स्क्र् augment स् added to the roots यम्
रम् • नम् aS alSo to rOotS which end
in अा before affixes of the aorist
tense; e, g. अयंसीत्, व्यरंसीत्, अयासीत्,
cf. P. VII. 2.73.
सकर्मक a root which, by virtue of the
nature of its meaning i.e. verbal
activity, requireS or expects an
object which is covered by the
actiwity; a transitive root. In the
paSSive woice of these roots the
object is expressed by the verbal
termination and hence it is put in
thc nominative case.
सकारक accompanied by the qualify-
jpg wOrds Such as 'the differefit
Kārakas or causal agents for the
werbàl activity; cf. अाख्यातं साव्ययं
स्कार॒कं सकृारकावशेषणं वाक्यम् । सकारकम् ।
ॐठॆदनं पचति । M. Bh. on P.ii.i3ी:
Vārt. 9.
सकृदारव्यातनेिग्रह्या capable of being
u f"derstood on being mentioned
Only oncejust as the notion ofgenus
Or śerierality which is so urider-
stood; the phrase सकृदाख्यातनिग्राह्या is
cited as a definition of जाति; cf.
सकृदुख्ड्यूतनि॒िग्रह्यिा गोत्रं च चरणैः सह, MBh.
ora P.IV.1.63.
सकृद्भति or €कृद्भतिन्याय the maxim or
°9nvention of the non-application
of a grammatical rule or Oper aton
any longer when, on confiict with
àother;it has been once set aside.
The raaxim is सकृद्द्भतौ विप्रतिषेधे यद्वाधितं
तुद्वाधितमेव M. Bh. on	P.. " I. i: 56,
|!.4• 2, VI.3. 42 etc. cf. also Par.
Sek. Pari. 40.
सक्रियाविशेषण àcCOmpanied by a
Word qualifying the verbal acfi-
vity; sometimes a verb with such
ā.'wQrgl makes a sentence;cf. सक्रिया-
विशेषूर्णे चैति वक॒तय॒म् । सुष्ठु पचार्त | M.Bh.
On P. II. ].1 Wārt.. 9.
सगति or सगतिक acCOmpanied by a
PrePOsitiQn which is called' गति;
cf सगति॒पि॒ि तिङ् P.VIII. 1. 68; cf.
alsO सगतिरपि । प्रेपच्चति M.Bh. on P.
. VIII.i.68.
सड्ईं a shOrt term or प्रत्याहार made up
9fthe,स_ of सन्, in गुातिज्किद्भश्यः सन्
|P.III.1.5, and the ङ् of महिङ् in
P.III.4.78 with a view` to include
all affixes from सन् to महिङ्; cf, सङि
झलीति कुत्वादयेो न सिध्यान्त, M. Bh. on
|P.VI, 1.9 Vart. 7; cf. also M. Bh..
on P.• VIII.2.22.
स्सण्ं tad• affix सण् prescribed after the
word पर्धु in the sense of collection;
e. g. पार्श्वम् ; cf. पश्र्वाः सण् P,IV.2.43



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-398.png}}}}}}

सत्
Vārt. 3 for which there is an alter-
native reading पश्वाँ एगशुत् वक्तव्य:: for
facility of grammaticai operations
णस् is recommended with prefer-
ence in the Mahābhāśya ; cf. प्य॒वं
तर्हि णास् वक्तव्यः M.Bh. on P. IV.2.43
· Vārt.. 3; (2) सण् is given as a tech-
mica1 terrm for संयेोग in the Prati-
śākhya works; cf. सयुक् सण् l संयुक्तं
व्यञ्जनं संयेागसेञ्ज्ञे भवति R.T.27.
सत् a short term used for the affixeS
|शतृ ( अत् ) and शानच् C अान ) which
' are appiied to roots tO forrn the
* present and the future participles;
” cf. तौ सत् P III. 2. 127; cf. alsO छृट:
सद्वा P III. 3. 14,
सतिशिाष्ट |prescribed SubSequently;
occurfःing after the preceding haS !
taken place; cf. सति शिष्टेोपि विकरणस्वरः
सार्वधातुकस्वरं .न बाधते; although the
Words सति and शिष्ट: are Separate
' still it is habitual to take them
combined in an adjectival sense
and make the word सतिशिट an
adjective to the word स्वर as in the
. dictum सतिशिश्टस्वरबलीयस्स्वं च P. VI. 1.
• 158 Vārt. 9.
सूसतिशिाष्ट्रस्वरबलीयस्त्व the compara-
tivgly superior strength of a subse-
quent accent which prevails by the
emoval Of the accent obtaining
'' before in the process of the forma-
tion of a word; cf. VI. 1. 158 Vart.
. 9. See सतिशिश्ट abowe.
सतf exi;tence, supreme or univer3al
• * •
existence; the Jāti par excallence
which is advocated to be the fimal
Sense Of all words and expressions
in the language by Bhartrhari
and other grmmarians after him
who discuSSed the interpretation
of wOrds. The grammariar1s believe
that the ultimate sense of a word
is सत्ता which appears manifold and
',limited in Our eweryday experience
|àge t9difierent limitations such as
** ४ * '^ प्र ॰*
382 → सत्सप्तमी.
deŚa, kāla and otherS. Seen from
the StatiC viCwpoint, सत्ता appears
aS द्रष्ज्ञ्य while, from the dynamic
viewpOint it appears as a क्रिया. This
सन्ता is the sOul Of everything and
it is the samg as शव्दतत्त्व or ब्रह्मन् or
अस्त्यर्थ; cf. Vākyapadiya II. 12; .
The static existence, further; is .
called व्यत्तितं or individual with
reference to the object, and जाति
with reference to the common
forijn possessed by individuals.
सत्व an aspect of सत्ता of the type .of
the static existence posSessed by
Substantives as contrasted with
भाव the dynamic type of exist-
ence pOSSeSsed by werbS; cf. भाव-
प्रधानमाख्यातम् ! सत्त्वप्रधानानि नामानि. Nir.
I: cf. also सत्वाभिधायकतं नाम निपातः
पादपूरण: R.Pr. XII. 8. V. Pr. VIII.
50.
सस्वगुप्ण qualities of a substantive
such as स्त्रीत्व, पुंस्त्व, नपुंसकत्व, or एकत्व,
द्वित्व ānd बहुत्व cf. स्त्रीपुंनपुंसकानि सत्त्वगुणाः
एकत्वद्वित्वबहुवचनानि च । M. Bh. on
P. I. 1.38 Vārt. 6, श्also on P. I.
2.6{ Và;rt.. 53.
सत्वशब्द the wOrd सच्त्ध rmeaning द्रव्य;
cf. चादयोऽसरवे t अयं सत्वश|व्घ्द: अस्त्यव
द्रव्यपदार्थकः: । M.Bh. on P. I. 4. 57.
सत्यप्रवोध name of commentary work
on the SāraSwataprakriyā.
सत्स्लप्तमी the locative case prescrib2;
ed by the rule यस्य च भावेन भावलक्षणम्
|P. II.3.37 as scen in गोपु दुह्यमानासु
गतः; cf. ठ्ाके इति नैप्रा परंसaमी t का
तर्हि । सत्सप्तमी । लुाकं सति इति.. M, Bh.
on P.I.2.49 Vārt. 2. On accountः
of the frequent occurrence of the
word सति in a large number, of
exatmples of this locative absolute,
the term सतितप्तमी is used by
|modern gram tmariams for the
better word सत्सतमी in the Maba-
bhāsya; cf. M.Bh. on P,VI.4.?3 as
also on P.VIII. 3.61.. .
→
' • • xv



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-399.png}}}}}}

सदाशेिव-अाग्नेिहोत्रो
383
सदााशैव-अग्नेिहोत्री name of a modern
" grammarian of the seventeenth
century who lhas written a glosS
. on Prāti$akhya workS called प्रिित-
शारव्यदीपिका.:
सदााशैव-पण्डित a grammarian of the
Sewenteenth century who has
writtcn a commentary ori the
Stitras of Pānini and a brief
commentary on the Mahābhā-
$ya called गूढार्थदीपिनी or शूढार्थ-
दीर्पिका which is incomplete. .
सदाशिवभट्ट (घुले) a prOminent gram-
• ' marian of the latter half of the
eighteer!th century who was a
resident Of Nagpur and whose
श्gloSS On the ILaghuŚabdendu$e-
khara by name सदाशिवभट्टी is well
knOwn tO scholars.
सदााश्शेिवभट्टी name of a commentary →
written by सदाशिवभट्ट घुले on the
'LaghuŚabdenduśekhara of Nāgeśa.
र्देश् lit. belonging to the same
Place; the word' is used in the
$ense ofimmediately near:Qr quite
i३ proximity; cf. अनन्त्यविकारे अन्त्य-
सूदेशेस्य Pari. Sek. Pari, 103.
सधनिर् tad. affix अधीन proposed
by the Varttikakāra in the sense
Of *something in
that'; e.g. रजिनीदं राजाधोनं; cf. तस्मा-
त्तत्रेदमेिति सधीनर् P. W. 4.7 Vārt. 2.
The standard affix in such cases
is ख ( ईन ) by the rule अषडक्ष ...
अध्युप्तरपदात् ख; P. V. 4.7.
न्ञ् (1)desiderative afiix स applied to
any r0ot in the $ense of desire;
e.. g. चिकीर्षति, जिहीर्षति, बुभूषति; cf
धातो: कमैणः समानकर्तृकादिचछायां वेा P.III.
1.7; (2) applied in specific senses
pOssessed by the root to the roots
गुप् , तिज्. कित्, मान्, बध्, दान्, and
|शान् ; e. g. जुगुप्सते, तितिक्षेते, चिाकैत्सति,
मीमांसते, बीभत्सते, दीदांसते, शीशांसते; cf.
• P. III. 1. 5 atnd 6. The roots to
which सन् is · applied.are redupli-
that or from |
cated arःd the reduplicated form
ending with सन् ( स ) is looked
upon aS a differerīt root from the
original one for purposes of cOn-
jugation, which' takes, hoWever,
conjugatiomal affixes of the same
Pada aS the original root; cf.
सनाद्यन्ता धातध: III. 1.32.
सन्नतर graver, comparatively more
grawe; a, term used in connection
with a grave accent which iS
followed by a vowel with ani
acute or circumflcx accent; e.g•
the vowel इ of सरस्वति in इमं मे गङ्गे
यमुन सरस्वति शुतुद्रि; cf. सन्नं दृद्वृा सन्नतर
इत्येतद् भवति M. Bh. on P. I. 2.33.
सन्वद्भाच behaviour like that of the
affix सन् in point of its specific fea-
tu३res, viz. causing reduplication in
the case of the previous rOot, by
the rule सन्यडेीः VI.l.9, as also the
substitution of इ for अ in , the
reduplicated syllable ( अभ्यास ) , by
|P. VII. 4.79. This सन्वद्भाव is
prescribed in the case Of a root
ending in इ ( णिञ्चु ) before' the
aorist sigःn ( विक्ररण ) चङ्. cf. सन्वष्क्ष्श्र्चुनि
चङ्परेनग्लेीपे VII. 4.93.
सपादसप्ताध्यायी a term used in conriec-
tion with P'āmini's first Sewen books
and a quarter of the eighth, as
contrasted with the term Tripād!,
which is used for the last three
quarters of the eighth bOok. The
rules or operations given in the
Tripādi, are stated to be asiddha
or invalid for purpoSes of the
application of the rules in .the
previous portion, \viz. the Sapāda-
saptādhyāyi, and hence in the
formation of' words all the rules
givera in the first seven chapters
and a quarter, are applied first and
then a way is prepared for the
rules of the last three quarters.
It i$ a striking thing that the rules



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-400.png}}}}}}

सपूव
& 384
समयं
in the Tripādi mostly cOncern the
padas or formed words, th5_.P?rO-
Vince, in fact, of the Prāti$ākhya
treatises, and hence they shou!d,'
as a matter of fact, be applicable
to words after their formation
and evidently to accomplish this
object, Panihi has laid d9wn the
cofivention of the invalidity in
question by the rule पूर्वत्रसिद्धम्
P. VIII. 2,1.
९ → →
सपूर्वे together with a word that is
|!] { put before, and not with àny suffix
iiike बहुच॒ piac६d b६fट्रेge; ¢ईं: सपूर्बुयाः
}' ] प्रथमाया विभाषा. P.VIII. 1 26; सपूवंाच्च
t; !P, v. 2.87. 、
सष्म the seventh of the vowelS Stated
in the alphabet; a word used for
the wowel पू ( ऋ ) by ancient
grammarians; cf. ओोजा हृस्वा: सतमान्ताः
स्वराणाम् R. Pr. I.14.
सप्तमी ( 1 ) the seventh ca3e; the
locative case; a term used for the
locative case by ancient grammar-
ians and Pānini; cf. न सप्तम्यामन्त्रितयेोः
v. Pr. III 139; cf. ईदूतौ च सप्तम्यर्थे
P. I. 1. 19. or सप्उभ्थास्त्रळुट् P.V. 3. 10;
cf. also.. द्वितीयादयः शब्दाः पूर्वीचाँयेः सुपां
त्रिकेषु स्मर्यन्ते Kāś. on P. II. 3.2; ( 2 )
the 8eventh of the moods and
tenses; the optative mood; cf. Kat.
III. 1. 20; Hemacandra III. 3. 7.
सप्स्वर lit. the sewen accents; the
term refers to the sewen accents
formed of the SubdiwisionS of the
three main Vedic accents उदात्त,
अनुदाच्त and स्वरित viz उदात्त, उदात्ततर,
अनुदात्त॒, अनुदात्ततर्, स्वरि॒त, स्व॒रतदिात्त,and
एकश्रुति; cf. त एत तन्त्रे तरनिर्देशे सप्त स्वरा
भवन्ति ! उदाच्तः { उदात्ततर: । अनुदाच्त: ।
अनुदात्ततरः | स्वरित: । स्वरिते य उदात्तः सोन्येन
विशिष्ट:ः । एकश्रुतिः सप्तम: |II M. ]Bh on
P. I. 2. 33. It is possible that
these Sewen accents which were
turned into the seven notes
of the chantings Of the sā-
mans developed intO the seven
musical notes Which hawe tradition-
ally come down to the present
day known as सा रे ग म प ध नीं; cf.
उदात्त निषादगान्धारौ अनुदाचेत ऋष्षभधैवतौ ।
सूवरितप्रभव॒ा ह्यते षड्जमध्यमपञ्चम॒ाः ! Pān.
Sik$ā. The Vājasaneyi Pratis'akhya
mentions the seven accentS differen-
tly; cf. उदात्तादयः परे सुत । यथा-अभिनि-
हितक्षैप्र-प्राश्ठष्ट-तैरोव्यञ्जन-तैरोविराम-पादवृत्त-
ताथाभाव्याः Uvvata, On V.Pr.I.l l4•
सप्ताध्यायी a term used for the first
seven chapters or bOOks Of Pāniniं's
gratmrmar; cf. येन्ये सप्ताध्याय्य॒ां स्बूराले
न संगृहतिाः!| स्युःl M. B}a. orn P.• VI 1.7
158 Vārt. 1.
सम equal in nutmber , to SOmething
givén; cf. य॒थासं॒ख्य॒मनुदेशः समानाम् cf.
Kāś.. on P. I. 3.10.
समन्तभद्र a, Jain SchOlar Of great
repute who is beliewed to have
written, besideS many well-knoWn
religious books such as अ[प्तमीमांसा
गन्धहस्तिभाष्य etc. On JainiSm, a
. treatise on grammar called Cintā-
mani Vyākarataa•
समन्वयप्रदीपसंकेत a treatise on the
philosophy of Vyākarana written
श्as a cornmentary by the author
देवशर्मन् on his Owra Kārikas on the
subject.
समाभिव्याहार utterance together of
several vocal elements or words;
verbal concomitance; cf अनया परि-
भाषया स्त्रीप्रत्ययस॒मभिव्यहारे तद्रहिते दृष्टानां •••
पयीँप्तत्वमातिदिश्यते Par. Sek. Pari. 71.
समाभेहार repetition of an action; irà-
tensity of an action. पाँनःपुन्यं ' भृशार्थो
वा समभिहार: Kā$. on P. III. 1. 22.
समय the omission of words which
|have already occurred before in
the recital of the Pada and other
Pāghas or recitals, with a view to
avoiding an utinecessary repetition;
cf.दृष्टक्रमत्वात्समयान् संदध्यात् सर्वशः क्रमे पदेन
|च पदाभ्यां च प्रागवस्येदतीत्य च्व ।R.Pr.X.12.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-401.png}}}}}}

समर्थ 385
समन
समर्थ (1) hawithg an identical ser1se;
S. K. on P.WI. 4.11.
cf प्रोपाभ्या समर्थाभ्याम् ।* * *तौ चेत् प्रोपौ समर्थाँ समर्थाधिकार the prOwince or the juris"
तुल्यार्थाँ भवतः । क चानयेोरुक्षुल्यार्थता । आदि-
कमीणेि । Ka$. on P. I. 3. 42; (2)
mutually connected in meaning in
such a way that the meaningS are
connected together or commixed
together; समर्थः शक्वः । विग्रहवाक्या-
थीँभि॒िधाने यः शक्तः स समर्थोवेदितव्यः । अथवा |
समर्थपदृाश्रयत्वात्समर्थः । सुम॒र्थानां प॒दानां |
सेबद्धाथीँनां संसृष्टार्थीनां विधिर्वेदितव्यः | Kaś. |
on P. II. 1. 1; cf. also एकाथीँभावो
व्यपश्क्षा वा सामथ्र्यम्;। (3) connected with
diction of the rule समर्थानां प्रथमाद्वा
(F. IV• l• 82), all the three words
in which continue further on,
and become walid in every rule
uptO the end of the second pada
Of the fifth adhyāya; cf. समर्थानां
प्रथमाद्वा I त्रयमप्यधिक्रियते समर्थानामिति च
प्रथमादिति च वेति च l स्वा|ार्थेकप्रत्ययावधिश्चा-
यमधििवकारः | प्राग्दिशो विभाक्तिरिति यावत् |
स्वार्थिकेषु ह्यस्य उपयेोगेो नास्ति । विकल्पेापि
तत्रानवस्थितः । Kāś. on P.IV%.1.82.
relationship of senses, as between | समवस्थित appearing together, pre-
the activity and the subject,object,
instrument etc., or as between the
master and the servant or the
senting themselves together; cf.
द्वयेर्हि सावकाशयेोः समवस्थितयेोर्विप्रतिषेधो
भवति | M. Bh. on P. I. 1.3 Vārt 6.
POSSeSSor and the pOssessed; cf. राञ्ज्ञ: | समवाय (I') combination as contras-
पुरुष: or ग्रामं गच्छति,or सर्पिः पिब, but not
सर्पिः पिब in the sentence तिष्ठतु सर्पिः
पिब त्वमुदकम् । ; (4) capable of ex-
preSSing the sense e. g. a Word
with the Sandhis Well obserwed; cf.
समर्थानां प्रथमाद्वा | सामथ्यै परिनिष्ठितत्वम् |
कृतसान्धकार्यत्वमिति यावत् I S. K. on IV.
|l• 82; rिf. also समर्थः पटुः शाक्तः इति
पर्यीयाः। शक्तत्वं च कायाँत्पादनयेोम्यत्वम् etc.
Balamanoramā on the above.
समर्थनीय that which can be justified;
justifiable; एकेन वा द्रव्यवत्त्वमिति समर्थनी-
यम्, Kāś. on P. V. 2. 118.
ted with व्यवाय disjunction or sepa-
ration ; (2) the enumeration of
the letter$ ' Of the alphabet in a
particular order SO aS to facilitate
their cOmbination, technically
termedप्र॒त्याहार; cf. वृत्तिसमवायार्थ उपदेशः|
का पुनर्वृत्तिः | शास्त्रप्रवृत्तिः | अथ कः
समवायः | वर्णीनामानुपूर्वेयैर्णे संनिवशः । M.
Bh. Ahnika l W'ārt. 15. cf. also
समवायेा वर्णगतः क्रमविशेष: । Uddyota on
the Bhasya mentioned abowe; (3)
contact; cf. रतै रागः समवाये स्वराणाम्
|R. Pr. XIV.24.
समर्थपाद name given by Siradeva | समसण् .tad. affix समस् applied to, the
and other grammarians to the first
pāda of the second adhyāya of
|PaniniŚ A$!ंādhyāyi which begins
with the sütra समर्थः पदविधिः P.II.1.1.
समर्थविभाक्ति a case which is apprO-
word इदम् to form the word ऐषमः
meaning * this year '; cf. इदमः
समसण् l इदमः समसण् प्रत्ययेा निपात्यते
संवत्सरेभिधेये । अास्मिन्संवत्सरे ऐषमः । M.Bh.
on P. V. 3.22 V?irt. 3.
priate to express the sense of the || स्तमम concourSe, COming in close
tad. affix prescribed; e.g. तस्यापत्यम् l
quarters; cf. साङ्गसमागम R.T.224.
तस्येति षष्ठी समर्थविभातिः; cf. P. IV.l.92; | समाधान, समाधि, reply to remove the
तेन रक्तं रागात् | तेनेति तृतीया समर्थविभक्तिः ;
objection; conclusion.
cf. P. IV• 2.1 ; cf.प्रकृता समर्थाविभाक्तिरनु- || समान common; the same; cf. समान-
वतैते तस्येदामेति | M. Bh. on P. IW. 3.
134 Vart.. 2.
समर्थसत्र the rule समर्थः पदविधिः P. II. |
1.l.cf. समर्थसूत्र उद्भातार इति भाष्यप्रयोगात्
49
स्थानकरणा नासिक्यैौष्ठश्याः ! एतेषां यदव स्थानं
तदेव करणम्; W. Pr. I. 80. समानश्च
रेखदविगमेा गम्यायां च अगम्यायां च M. Bh.
on Ahmika 1•



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-402.png}}}}}}

समानकर्तृक 386
समानकर्तृक having gOt the Same agentः
the Word iS used inः connection
with actions ( क्रिया ) having the
Same , agent Of the activity; cf.
समानकर्तृकेषु तुमुन् P. III. 3. 158.
समानपद् the same word as contrasted
with भिन्नपद a compound word
which consistS of two Or more words.
cf. रषाभ्यां नो णः समानपदे P. WIII.4.1.
समानाक्षर simple wowels or monoph-
thongS अ, इ and उ aS contrasted
with diphthongs ( संध्यक्षर ); cf अष्टैौ
समानाक्षरांण्यादितस्ततश्चत्वारि संध्यक्षराण्युच्तराणि
|R. Pr. I. 11. cf. also अथ नवादितस्स-
मानाक्षरणि T. Pr. [. 2. Some writers
of Prāti$ākhyas held ऋ as संध्यक्षर and
not as समानाक्षर ; cf. अन्यहुतु मतम्-ऋकारा-
दानां त्रयाणां त्वरद्वयसंधिरूपत्वाभार्वेपि रूपद्वयस-
द्भावादेषा संज्ञा न युक्षेतति नवानामेवाहेति |
gloss on T. Pr. I. 2.
समानााधकरण words which have got
the same individual object ( द्रव्य )
|referred to by means of their own
SenSe,and which are put in the same
case; cO-ordipate words; cf. तत्पुरुष:
समानाधिकरणः कर्मधारयः P. I. 2.42; 'cf.
अधिकरणशब्दः अभिधयवाच्ची ! समानाधिकरणः
समानाभिधेयः ! Ka$. on P. I. 2.42.
समानाश्रय having got the same
wOrding to operate On ; the word
iS used in connection with opera-
tionS Which occur in the 8ame
word Or Wording as contrasted
with व्याश्रय;cf.समानाश्रय कोयै तदसिद्धं स्यात्
S. K. on P. VI. 4.22; cf. also अत्रेति
समानाश्रयप्रतिपत्त्यर्थम् KaŚ. on P.VI,4,22.
समापत्ति restoration of the resultant to
the original, as for instance, resto-
ration of the padapatha and the
kramapātha to the Safiahitāpāgha;
cf. प्रकृतिदर्शने समापत्तिः A. Pr. III. I.7.
स्मम्नाय traditional enumeratiora or
list of words or lctterS; cf. अक्षर-
समाम्नाय, वर्णसमाम्नाय, शब्दसमाम्नाय etc.;
cf. अथातेो वर्णसमाम्नायं व्याख्यास्यामः V.
Pr. VIII.1. अथ वणैोसमाम्नायः T. Pr. I.
स्मस्सच्न्घ्क्र
|l ; cf. alSO समाम्नायः समाम्नातः स व्याख्या-
तव्यः Nir.I.l.. समाम्नायः पाठक्रमः ! Com.
otn T. Prः- I. 1.
、-\. *~\ →
समाराांपत superimposed; secondary
nOtion.
समावेशा placing tOgether at One place,
simultaneOus application,generally
with a view that the two or rmore
thingS SO placed, should always go
tOgether althOugh in a few
i1}Stances they m1ay not go together;
cf. तदधोते तद्वद । नैतयोरावश्यकः संमोवशः {
भवति हि काश्चत्सं पाठं पठति न च वेच्ति |
काश्चिन्व्न्च वेवचिित न न्च से पाट्ठं पठति | M. B}h.
on P.IV.2.59;cf. also व्याकरंणेपि कर्तव्यं
हर्तव्यभित्यत्र प्रत्ययकृत्कृत्यरंसंज्ञानां समांवशो भवति
M.• Bh• orn P.. I.4.1.
समस्सि placing {ogether of two or
morc wOrds so as to express a
cOmpOsite sense ; compound com-
pOsitiOn; cf. पृथगर्थानामेवकींथींभाव: समासः।
AlthOugh the word समास in its
derivarive sense is applicable to
any wOrding which has a composite
Sense (वृत्ति), still it is by convention
applied tO the समासवृत्ति only by
virtue Of the Adhikarasutra प्राक्
कञ्ङारात् सम{स: which enumerates
in itS province the ccmpound
wOrds Qnly. The Mahābhitgya-
kāra has mention ed only four
prir1cipal kinds of these compo-
unds and dcfined thema; cf. पूर्वपदार्थ.
प्रधानेोव्य्यीभावः ! उत्तरपदार्थप्रधानस्तत्पुरुषः l
अन्यपदार्थप्रधानेा बहुत्रीहिः | उभयपदार्थप्रधानेो
इन्द्वः l M.Bh. on P.II.1.6; cf. also
M.Bh. on P.II.1.20, II.1.49,II.2.6,
II.4.26, V.1.9. ILater grammarians
|have given many subdivisions of
these .cOmpounds as for example
द्विगु, कर्मधारय and तत्पुरुष (with द्वितीयोत-
त्पुरु'ध्र, तृतीयात्पुरुप्रि etc.as also अवयवतत्धुरुष्प्र,
उप॒पदतर्युरुषand so on) समानाधिकरणबहु-
क्रीहि, द्वयधिकर॒णश्हुत्रीहि, संख्याबहुवीहि, समा-
हारद्वन्द्व, इतरेतरद्वन्द्व and so on.
समस्सच्त्रन a short anonymous treatise



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-403.png}}}}}}

समासमञ्जरी
387
स्मट्टश्र
on compoundS which is very popu-
lar and useful for beginners. The
work is attributed to वररुाचैचे and
called also as समासपटल. The work
is studied and cormrmitted to
memOry by beginnerS of Sanskrit !
studies in the Patha$ālās of the old
type.
समासमव्प्ञ्जरी a metrical work on
compOunds which has n0 author
|mentioned in or assigned to it.
समसवाद (1) a Short treatise on com-
pounds by गेाविन्दच्चक्रवर्तिन् ; (2) a
small compendium on cotmpounds
written by a gram marian naIned
सार्वभैोम.
समासशेाभा a short treatise on compo-
unds by यश:सागर.
समासान्त secondary suffixes which are
prescribed at the end of compOunds
in specific cases and which are look-
ed upora as taddhita affixeS;e.g.the
Samāsānta दृछ् ( अ ), causing elision
of the last syllable of the compo-
und word, is added to cOmpounds
called संख्याबहुत्रीहि;e.g. उप॒दशाः,पञ्चष्ष॒ाः
etc. P.W.4.73. Samāsānta अ is
added to compoundS ending with
ऋच्चु,पुर्, अप्, and धुर्,and अञ्च् to words
ending with सामन् , लेामन् , अक्षन् , चतुर्
पुंस् , अनडुह्, मनस् , वर्चस्, तमस् , श्रेयस॒स् ,
रंहसु, उरस्, गेो, तावत्, अध्वन् etc ;tunder
specific conditions; cf. P.V.4.68 to
85. अन्रुञ् ( अ ) is added at the end
of the tatpuru:&a compounds tO
the words अङ्गुलि, and रात्रि, under
specific conditions; cf. P.V-*.86,
' 87; टच् ( अ ) is added at the end
of tatpurusa compounds ending
in राजन् , अहन् , साख , गेो, and उरस्त्
and under specific conditionS to
those ending in तक्षन् , श्वन् , साक्थि, नैौ,
खारी, and अज्जालि as also tO wOrds
ending in असू and अन्, in the neuter
gender ira Vedic H,iterature, arad to
the word ब्रह्मन्नू underspecific condi-
tions; cf. P.V. 4.9] to 105; टच॒ is
added at the end ofसमाहारद्वन्द्व com-
pounds ending in च् , छ् , जू, इम्, ञ्ञ्न् ,
द्, ष्ञ् and हूँ and at the end " of
अव्ययीभाव compounds ending with
the words शरद् , विपशुि , अनस् , and
मनस्त् etc. aS also at the end of
words ending in अन् Or with any
of the claSS cOnSOmantS except
• nasals, cf. P.V.4.106-ll2; ष्प्रच् ( अ ) is
added to Bahuvrihi compounds
ending with सार्वञ्थ and अक्षि as limbs
of the body, as alsO with अङ्गुलि,
while ष्प्र , अप् amd अच् are added
to specified words under special
conditions; the Samasānta affix
असिञ्छ् ( अस् ) is added at the end of
a Bahuvrīhi compound ending in
प्रजi, and मेधा, the Samāsānta afiix
इच् is added at the end of the
peculiar Bahuvrihi cOmpound
formed of दप्ण्ड, मुसल etc. When they
are repeated and when they shOw
a fight with the instrutments of
fight exchanged; cf. P. V.4. l 13-
|128. Besides thesष्टे affixes, a general
समासान्त affix कप् is added necessarily
or optionally as specified in P.V.
4.151-159.
समासान्तशब्दादेश a Substitute for a
word or its part at the end of a
cormpOund prescribed for certain
specified words under specified
conditions; e. g• ञ्शु, for जानु , ऊधन्,
for ऊधस॒ , धन्वन् for धन्नुस॒, जानि for जाया,
गान्ध for गन्ध, पाद् and पद्, for पाद,
• दत् for दन्त, ककुद् for ककुद; cf. P. V•
4.129-150.
समासान्तोदाच्त the acute accent pres-
cribed in general at the end, Of
compounds excepting the Bahu-
vrihi and some specified cOmpO-
unds; cf. P.VI.1.223 and VI.2• l
to end. →
समाहार collection, cOllective raOtiora,
which is one of the four senses of
the indeclinable न्व. The collectiYe



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-404.png}}}}}}

समुच्चय
388 स्रूप
notion by nature being single, the
dvandva compound formed Of
words showing Such a Collection
takes the neuter gender and singu-
lar nutmber affixes;cf.यदा तिरेहितावयव-
विवक्षा संहतिः प्रधानं तदा समाहृार: Siradeva
|Pari. 16; cf. also P. II.2.29 and
IJ. 1. 51.
समुच्चय accumulation which is one of
the four senses of the indeclinablé च
and which means the anticipation
ofam allied another by the expreSS
mention of ot,e, in which SenSe
the Dwamdva compound prescrib-
ed by thc rule चार्थे द्वन्द्वः does not
take place: cf. समुच्चयः | प्लक्षश्च इत्युक्ते
गम्यत एतन्क्षश्यग्रोधश्चति M. Bh. on P. II.
2.29 Vārt.. 15.
समुदाय aggregate, totality, collection
of individual members; cf. समुदय
प्रवृत्ताः शब्दाः छचिदवयवेष्वपि वर्तन्ते also
cf. समुदाये व्याकरणशव्दः अवयवे नोपपद्यते
M.Bh. Ahnika 1 Vārt, 14; cf. also
समुदाये वाक्यपरिसमाप्तिःlPar.Sek.Pari.108.
समुद्देश Specific individual mention
or discuSsion; the terrn is used . in
comnection with the several sec•
tions of the third Kāààa or book
Of Bhartrhari*s Vākyapadीya.
समुपस्थापन · simultaneous presenta-
tion of different grammatica]
operations; cf. वसुसंप्रसारणादीनामाभाच्व्छा-
स्त्रीयाण॒मव , असिद्धत्वादन्तरङ्गयेार्युगपत्समुपस्थाने
नास्तीति परिभाषा न प्रवर्तते | Kā$. on P.
VI.4.22.
समुपस्थित presenting themselves si-
multaneOusly; the word is used in
COnnection with two grammatical
operatiOns which present them-
selves simultaneously.
सम्हैं aggregate, group or collec-
tion; one of the prominent senses
in which the tad. affixes अणु and
others are prescribed. ?ो'hese
afiixes are called ; 9• 8=
. . काकम् ( काकानां समूहः ); similarly भैक्षम्,
राजकम्, कैदार्यम्, जनता, मायूरम्, पाश्या, रथ्या
etc. cf. P. IV. 2.37 to 5|l.
सयुक् connected, the word was used
by ancient grammarians in the
sense of संयुक्त; cf. सयुक् सण॒ R.T. 27.
सर Utaadi affix सर mentioned in the
rule तितुत्रतथसिसुसरकसेषु च P. VII. 2.7.
e.g.अक्षरम्; cf. अशे: क्सरन् Urādi.III.70.
सरक्, सरन् (क्सरन् ) Ugaādi affix सर e.g.
कृसेरः, धूसरः, वसंम्, तर्सम् cf. Unādi III.
70-77.
सरला name of a comparatively
|modern lucid commentary written
by Tārānātha Tarkavācaspati on
the Siddhāntakaumudi.
सरस्वतीकण्ठाभरण called also सरस्वतीसूत्र,
name of a vOluminOuS grammar
work ascribed to king Bhoja in
the eleventh century. The gram-
mar is based very closely on Pāri-
ni's A$ंgadhyāyi, consisting of eight
chapters or books. Although the
affixes, the augments and the Sub-
stitutes are much the s:ame, the
order of the Stitras is considerably
changed. By the anxiety of the
author to bring together, the nece-
ssary portions of the GaT]apātha,
the Unādipātha and the Pari-
bhāsās, which the author' haS
included in his eight chapters, the
book instead Of being easy to un-
derstand, has lost the elemcnt of
breviंty and become tedious for
reading. Hence it is that it iS not
studied widely. For details See pp.
392, 393 Vyākarana Mahābhāgya,
Vo]. VII. D. E. Society's edition.
सरूप { 1) having the same form for
practical purposes such as the form
अा po. sessed by टापु, डाप्प् and न्वापू or
the form अ possessed by the affixes
अणु. अश्छ्, घ, क, ण and others; (2)
having the same form even literally,
but poSSeSSed of different senses;
e• g• the words माष, अक्ष, पाद.,..etC.;



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-405.png}}}}}}

सर्वत्र 389
समानानामेकशेष इत्युच्यमाने यत्र सर्व समानं
शब्देार्थश्च तत्रैव स्यात् । वृक्षा: प्लक्षाः ईति । इह
न स्यात् l अक्षाः पादाः माषाः इति । रूपग्रहणे
पुनः क्रियमाणे न दोषो भवति | M. Bh. on
|P. I. 2.64.
सर्वत्र lit. at all places, on all occa-
sionS; the Word is used in connec-
tion With an eSSential application
of a rule and not optionally in
SOme cases; cf. सर्वत्र लोहितादिकतन्तेभ्यः ।
पूर्वेण नित्ये प्राते विकल्पाथै वचनम् Kāś. on
|P. IW. l, 18; cf. also प्रत्यये भाषायां
नित्यवचनम् P. VIII.4.45 Vārt. 1, सर्वत्र
शाकल्यस्य ViII. 4.51. etc.
सर्वथा at all cOSts, in any case, in all
places; cf. सवैथावरकालैव M. Bh. on
P. I. 1.69Wart 4; cf. also तथा तेषां
घोषिणः सर्वथेाष्मभिः XII.2.
सवैनामन् pronoun; lit. standing for
any noun. There is no definition
as Such given, of the word pron-
oun, but the words, called pro-
nouns, are enumerated in Pānini's
grammar one after another in
the clasS or group headed by
सर्व C सर्व, विश्व, उभ, उभय, words end-
ing in the affixes डतर and डतम, अन्य
etc.)Which appear to be pronouns
primarily. Some words such as पूर्वं,
पर, अवर, दक्षिण, उत्तर, अपर, अधर, स्व,
अन्तर etc are treated as pronouns
under certatn conditions. In any
case, attention has to be paid to
the literal sense of the tcrm सर्वनामन्
· which is an ancient term and none
of these words when standing as a
proper noun, is to be treated as a
pronoum; cf. सर्वादीनि सर्वनामानि P. I.1.
27, cf. also संज्ञेोपसर्जनीभूतास्तु न सर्वादयः:
M.Bh. on P. I. 1. 27 Vārt. 2; ( 2 )
. The word सर्वनामन् means also a
common term, a gencral term; cf.
एकश्रुतिः स्वरसर्वनाम, यथा नपुंसकं लिङ्गसर्वनाम
M. Bh. on P. VI. 4.174 Vart 4.
सर्वनामस्थान a term used in Pānini's
; . grammar, for the first fiwe case-
सर्वप्रसंङ्ग
affixes सु, औो, अस॒, अम् and औौ as also
for the nom. and acc. pl. affix
इ ( शि ) of the neuter gender. The
term appearS to be an old One,
which was used, by a specific men-
tion, for the first five case-affixes
which caused a special change in
the base before them in the case
of many words; cf. शि .सर्वनामस्थानम् I
सुडनपुंसकस्य P.I.1.42-48. For details
see Vyākarathamahābhāईya Vol.
VHI. D. E. Society's ed. p. 239
footnote.
सर्वनिघात	grave accent ( अनुदात्त ) fot'
the whole word, generally for a
verbal form or a word in the voca-
tive case, if preceded by another
word which is not a verb. The
tertn is used in contrast with
शेषनिधात the grave accent for the
remaining voWels of a word when
a particular vowel is definitely fix-
ed as an acute or an independent
Swarita or circumflex; cf. P.WIII.
1.28 to 74.
सवैपदादेश a substitute for the entire
word and not for a part of it.
Thjs doctrine of सर्वपदादेशं every-
where is advocated by gramma-
rians in consonance with their
doctrine of शब्दनित्यत्व; cf. सर्वे सर्व-
पदादशा दाक्षीपुत्रस्य पाणिनेः l एकदेशविकारे
हि नित्यत्वं नोपपद्यते ॥l M.Bh. on P. I. l.
20, WII.i:.27.
सवैप्रतिषेध a general prohibition of
every grammatical operation that
presents itself; cf. नान्तःपादमिति
सर्वप्रतिषेधः | M.Bh. on P.VI.1.115.
सवैप्रसङ्ग a presentation of all the
substitutes for all the original ones
indiscriminately; an application in
all cases irrespective of any special
consideration; cf. स्थाानिन एकत्वनिर्दे-
शादनेकादेशनिर्देशाच्च सर्वप्रसङ्गः M.Bh.on P.
I. 1. 50 Vārt.. l and 12; cf also
|M.Bh. on P.I.1.60, I.3.2, 3,l0.etc



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-406.png}}}}}}

सवैग्पाातिपदिक 3
सर्वप्रातिपदिक any noun-base irrespec-
tive of any discrimination ; cf. अपरं
अाह सर्वप्रातिपादेकेभ्य अान्चारे क्रिव्वत्तब्येाश्धति
गर्दभतीत्येवमर्थम् M.Bh. on P. III. l . l l
Vārt.. 3.
सर्वमङ्गला a commentary on NāgeŚa's
Paribhā$endu$ekhar‘३ written by a
grammarian of the nineteenth cen-
tury mamed शैाष्प्रशमैन् or मनीष्भ्रिंशषशमन्.
The work is incomplete.
सर्वमुखस्थान the whole orifice of the
mouth as a place of utterance, as
for example for the vowel अ; cf.
सर्वमुखस्थानमवर्णमक इब्छन्ति I M.Bh.. on
P. I. 1.9 Vārt. 2.
सर्वरक्षित spelt as शर्वरक्षित also; a
Buddhist grammarian who is beli-
eved to have redacted or revised
the grammar wOrk Durgha![vFtti Of
Saranadeva.
सवैलकार the personal affixes in gene-
ral pertaining tO all the ten laka-
ras लट्,लिट् etc., cf. सर्वलकाराणामपवादः !
|KāŚ.on P.III. 3.144.
सवैलिङ्गता use in all the genders; cf.
सर्वलिङ्गता च वक्तव्या l ब्राह्मणार्थ पयंः |
ब्राह्मणार्थे सूपः I ब्राह्मणार्थ यवागूः ।
सर्वलोप the elision ०f the entire word-
ing instead of the final letter only,
which is prescribed by P. I. ]. ॐ2,
cf. तुः सर्वस्य लोपो वक्तव्यः अंन्त्यस्य त्त्रेोपो मां
भूदिति । M Bh. on P. VI. 4.154.
सर्ववर्मन spelt as शर्ववमैन् also, the re-
puted author of the Kātantra
Vyākaratऐa. He is believed to have
been a contcmporary of the p०et
Gunādhya at theS:ātavāhana court,
and to have rewised and redacted
the Kàtantra StitraS already exist-
ing for the benefit of his patron.
With him began the Kātantra
School of grammar, the main con-
tribution to which was made by
दुर्गसिंह who wrote a scholurly gloss
on the Kātantra Stitras. For details
see कातन्त्र,
सवोंपाधिव्यभिचारार्थ
e.→~、
→- नFर →
lit• cnding with all
cases ; the terrm is used as an adje-
ctive Of the word समास and refers
tO a compound which can be dis-
Solved by putting the first mernber
in any case; cf. सर्वविभक्यन्तः समासेो
यथा विज्ञायत । अल: परस्य विधिः; अलि विधि-
रित्यादि M. Bh. on P.I.1.56.
सवैस्यद्धेपाद COnventional name given
to the first pāida of the eighth
a.dhyāya of Pātini's Astādhyayi
which begins with the Stitra सर्वस्य
द्वे VIII.1.1.
सर्वदि lit. a grOup Or a class of
words bcgimning with the word
सर्वं as the first word in the
list ; the term is uscd in generai as
a synonymous term with Sarva-
nàman; cf. संज्ञेोपसजैर्नीभूतास्तु न सर्वादयः
KaŚ. on P.I.1.27.
९→\ →
स्व्दं२ a, substitute for the entire
wOrdIng instead of the final letter
aS prescribed by the rule अलेान्त्यस्य
|P.I.I.52; cf. अनेका|ाल्श्शेत्सधैस्य P.I.1.55.
सवनुदाच्त the grave accent for the
entire word. See सर्वनिधात.
सवीन्त्य final of all those that are
denotcd or enumerated; cf. यदेव
सर्वान्त्यमर्थादेशनं तस्यैव विष्प्रेय स्यात् । M.Bh.
on F. IV.2.67.
सर्वेपिसजैन all theconstituent members
Of which (compound) are subordi-
nated to quite a difierent word
and not mutually in the manner
of one member to another. The
Bahuvrihi cOmpound, as contrast-
ed with other compounds, is des-
cribed to be such an one, as all its
members are subordinate in sense
to anothcr word; cf. यस्य सर्वे अवयवा
उप॒सर्जनीभूता॒ः स_ सर्वोपसर्जनेा बहुत्रीहिर्गृह्यते 1
KāŚ. on P.VI. 3.82.
सर्वोपाधिव्यभिचारार्थ a term used by
the authors of the Kā$ikā in conne-
ction with the application of a
rule irrespectiwe of all limitations



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-407.png}}}}}}

सलिङ्ग
391
सहचरित
and not of any one limitation: cf.
अन्यभ्येोपि दृश्यते । अापिशब्दः सर्वोपाधिव्यभि-
चारार्थः Kāś. on P.III. 2.75;cf. also
Kā$. on P.II.1.32, III.2.10l, WIl.
1.38.
सलिङ्ग inclusive of the notion of
gender; the word is used in con-
nection with the sens3 of a Prātj-
padika or a crude base as
inclusive of the notion of gender |
and number; cf. अर्थग्रहणस्यैतत् प्रयेाजनं
कृत्स्नः पदार्थो यथााभिधीयेत सद्रव्यः सालेिङ्गः
ससंख्यश्रेचेति | M. Bh. ota P. II. 2 24
Vārt. 8.
सवचन with the notiom of number
included in the sense of the base
itself; see सलिङ्ग.
सवर्ग belonging to the same claSS of
letters; cf. उता सवर्गः | उकारेण लक्षित
अादिः सह वर्गेण ग्राह्यः । चेोः कुः !| Cāndra
I. l. 2.
सवणै cognate, homophonic; a lctter
bclonging tO the Same technical
category 0f letterS £?0ssessing an;
iderttica? £iace of 1¢#fera*rce and
internal effort; cf. तुल्यास्यप्रयत्नं सवर्णम्
P. 1. 1. 9. For example, the eigh-
teen warieties of अ, due to its
short, long and protracted nature
as alSO due to its accents and
masalization, are savarna to each
other. The vowels ऋ and ल are
prescribed to be considered as
Savarna alth01tgh th¢jr ?la0¢ 0f
ta¢terarace differs. The consonants
in each claSS of consonantS are
savarna to one another, but by
the utterance of one, another
cannot be taken except When
the vowel उ has been applied
to the first. Thus कु, Stands
for क्, खु, गु, घूम् and ङ्. cf. तुल्यास्यप्रय॒त्नं
सवर्णम् P. 1, I. 9
चाप्रत्यय: P. I. 1. 69.
and अणुदित्सवर्णस्य ||
||
सवणैग्रहण taking or including the |
cogmate letters; a convention of
grammarians to understand by the
utterance of a vowel like अ, इ or उ
all the 18 types of it which are
looked upon as cognate ( सवर्ण ),
aS alSO to understand all the fiwe
c0n$0nants of a claSS by the utter-
ance of the first- consonant with उ
added to it; e. g. कु denoting all
the five consonants क्, खु, गुण्, घ्र and
ङ्; cf. अणुदित्सवर्णस्य चाप्रत्ययः P.I. 1.69.
सवर्णदीर्घ the 1engthened form of a
woWe|[ which is Substituted for two
cognate woWels coming near each
other; cf. अकः सवर्णे दीधैः. P. VI.
1. 10l.
सविध of the same kind;
the Satme accent.
सविभार्त्ततेक with the suitable case-affix
added; cf. प्रयाजाः सविभाक्तका: कार्याः
M. Bh. in Āhnika 1.
ससंख्य possessed of the same number
एकवचन, द्विवचन or बहुवचन; cf. कृत्स्नः
पदार्थोभिधीयेत सद्रव्यः सलिङ्गः ससंख्यः ! M.
Bh. on P. II. 2. 24 Vart. 8.
सस्थान having got an identical place
of utterance; the Word is much
used in the Prāti$ākhya WorkS; cf.
सस्थानेन घेाषिणां घेषिणैव R. Pr. XIII. 5.
स्स्थ[नतर more sasthāna i. e. nearer
among those that hawe the same
sthāna or place Qf productiora; cf.
ननु च एङ: सस्थानतरौ अर्घेकाराधाँकारौ M.
Bh. on P. I. 1.48 Vart. 3.
सस्श्र lit. connected With a wowel;
the term is used in connection
with a consonant as cOnnected
with a woWel for purpOses of
syllabication, the vowel being
elther the previous one or the
Succecding one.
सहवरित going together; occurring
together; e. g. विपराभ्यां जेः ( where
परा is taken as the preposition परा
and not the pronoun परा which is
the fem. base of पर on account of
thc paribhāऽञ्ā सहचरितासहचरितयेाः सहच-
hawing



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-408.png}}}}}}

सहविवक्षा
392
साधकतम
रितस्यैव ग्रहणम्); cf. Pari.Sek.Pari.103.
सहविवक्षा the same as युगपद्विवक्षा,the de-
sire to put quite closely with each
other; 'cf. सहविवक्षायामेकञ्शषः |! युगपद्वि-
वक्षायामेकशेष्प्रेण भवितव्यम् M. Bh on P.
I. 2.64 Vārt 19, I. 2.105 Vārt. 5.
सहोत्ति simultaneous expression of
words as found in the IDvandwa
compound; cf. सहोक्तौ द्वन्द्वः H em.
III. 1-117.
सांख्य a rule or a, topic concerning
number; cf. यदि तर्हि कृत्स्नः पदार्थोभि-
धयिते लैङ्गाः सांख्याश्च विधयो न सिध्यन्ति,
M. Bh. on P. II. 2 24 Vārt. 8,9.
सांग्रहस्सूत्रेिक a, student of संग्रहसूत्र; the
word occurs in the Māhābhāsya
along with वार्तिकसूत्रेक, and it may
therefore mean a. student of the
stupendouS work mamed the Sariी-
graha of व्याडि which is believed
to hawe ' consisted of Small num-
erouS Sütralike asSertions, with
an exhaustive gloss thereon. See
संग्रह.
सांन्यासिक lit. placed as a deposit,
i.e. withOut any special purpose
for the time being; the word is
used in connection with a word
in a rule which apparently is
superfluous; cf. तदतन्नित्यग्रहणं सांन्यiासेकं
तिष्टतु तावत् M. Bh. on P. VII. 1.8] ;
cf. also M. Bh. on III. 2.107, VI.
1.8; VII. 2.86.
सांप्रतिक (l) what is actually expre-
ssed .or , found in the context; cf.
सांप्रातिकाभावे भूतपूर्वगैतिर्विज्ञायते M. Bh.: on
P. VI. 1.177 Vārt. 1; (2) Original,
found in the original context or
Prakrti; cf. सां|प्रातके प्रकृातेस्थे कण्ठे सति
हकारो नाम बाह्यः प्रयत्न: क्रियते T. Pr. II.
6; (3) of the present time; cf.
Purug. Pari. 15.
सांद्वितिक Original, as belonging to the
Sarihhitāpātha · of the Stitras and
not introduced for some additional
purpose without forming a part
of the actual affix; cf. अाकर्षीत् ष्ठछ् |
इद्दु के॒षंां चित्सुहिति॒कं षत्वं केषांचिांश्षिदथैम्
M. Bh. on P. IW. 4.9.
साकच्क tOgether with the affix अश्क
which is inSerted in a pronout
after itS last vowel; cf. साकच्ल्कlद्वा
सावैौह्व॒प्रातिषेधेो वक्तव्यः | असकौ असुकः
M. Bh. On P. VII. 2.107; cf. ' also
किमः कः | साकच्कस्याप्ययमोदशः | Kāई,
on P. WII. 2. |!08.
साकाङ्क्ष pQssessed 9f an, expectancy
in meaning: cf. भेवत् पूर्व परमोकाङ्क्षतीर्ति
साकाङ्क्षं स्यात्परं तु कर्थे साकाङ्क्षम् M. Bh.
on P. III. 2.l 14.
सागामक possessed of the augment; cf.
अनागमकानां सागमका अादेशाः M. Bh. on
|P. I. 1.20 Vārt. 5, also on P. I.
1.46; cf. also the werse सर्वे सर्वपदादेशा
दाक्षीपुत्रस्य पााणिनेः | एकदशविकारे हि नित्यत्वं
नेापपद्यते | quoted in the Mahābhā-
$ya to support the view that aug-
mentS are*3nOt inserted, but a
wOrd with .an augment replaces
a wOrd without:that augment; cf.
M. Bh. on P. I.' 1.20 Vārt 5.
साति (1) tad. affix in the sense of
entirety with respect to the occu-
rrence Of a thing where it was
nQt before.. e. g. उदकसाद्भवति लवणम्,
अामिसाद् भवति cf. P. 7. 4.52, 53;
(2) tad.affix in the sense of *hand-
ing Over' or *entrusting'; e.g.राजसाद्
भवति, ब्राह्मणसात् करोति, cf. P. V. 4.55. ' .
स्सस्व of a substantive, belonging
tO the object; cf. सत्त्वस्य इदम् । अपि
वा मेदसश्च पशेाश्च सात्त्वं द्विवचनं स्यात् ।
Nir. VI. 16.
स्साधक instrument of an activity; c*.
सर्वीणि कारकाणेि साधकानि M. Bh. on
I. 1.42; cf. also साधकं निर्वर्तकं कारकसंज्ञं
भवतीति वक्तव्यम् M. Bh. on I. 4.23.
See the word कारक above.
स्धकतम most efficient in the accom-
plishment ofan action; the kāraka
Called Karana; cf. साधकतमं करणम् l
P. ]I. 4.42. See the word करण.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-409.png}}}}}}

स्ाधंन
393
सामथ्यै
साधन the same as साधक or कारक
which See above; cf.साधनं च क्रियायाः |
क्रियाभावात्साधनाभाव: M. Bh. on P. I..
3. i • Vart. 1; cf. also पूर्वं धातुः
साधनेन युज्यते पश्चादुपसर्गेण and its'oppð-
site maxita also, पूर्वं धातुरुपसर्गेणै थुज्यते
पश्चात्साधनेन M. Bh. ðn P.. VI. 1.]35.
Vãrt. 9. cf. also Siradeva pari. 128,
129.
स्àiधारणा common, conveying a com-
raon , nOtion;.cf. साधारणान्युत्तराणि षट्
दिवश्चादित्यस्य च Nir II. 18.
स्साधुस्रुन्दर a scholar of grammar who
waS a pupil of साधुकीर्तिप्रवर and
whO Wrote a Short work on
gratmmar named उक्तिरत्नाकर..
सानुनाासिक na$alized; uttered partly
thrOugh the nOse; cf. सानत हि यणः
सानुनासिका निरनुनासिकाश्च M. Bh. on
P. WI. I. 67.
स्नुबन्*ध् or सनुिबन्धक an afiix or a root
Or the like, tO which a mute letter
has been attached; cf. निरनुबन्धकग्रहणे]
न सानुबन्धकस्य ग्रहणम् Par.Sek,. Parj.8|1.
सापवादक an injunction accompanied
by a rule or rules of exception. It
is a COnvention that an injunctive
rule getS itS Sense Completed when
prohibitions or exceptions to it
have been fully considered; hence
the convention rgn$, प्रकल्प्य वापुवाद-
विषयं तत उत्सगाँभिनिविशत | Par. Sek.
Pari 63; cf. alsO सापवादकः स विधिरयं
पुनर्निरपवादक: M. Bh. on P. IV. 3.
155, VI. 2. ]77; VIII. 1. 68.
सापेक्ष with an expectancy in sense:;
|althOugh in grammar expectamcy
is at the rOot of, and forms a sort
of , a connecting link for, the
wariouS kinds of relations whichi
exist between the different words
Of a sentence which has to give a
cOmposite Sense, yet, if a word
Outside a compOund is connect-
ed with a word jnside a com+
pOund, especially with a second
50
Or further member, the sense
becomes ambiguOus; and expect-
ancy in such cases is looked
upon as a fault; e. g. अप्रविष्टविषयो हि
रक्षसाम् Raghu XT. When, however,
in spite of the fault of expectancy
the sense is clear, the compound
is admissible; cf. यदि साश्वशषणानां वृत्तिर्न
वृत्तस्य वा विशेषणं न प्रयुज्यते इत्युच्यते देवदत्तस्य
गुरुकुलम् देवदत्तस्य गुरुपुत्रः,अत्र वृत्तिर्न प्राप्नोति।
अगुरुकुलपुत्रादीनामिति वक्तव्यम् । M. Bh.
on P II.1.1 ; cf. also the expression
सापेक्षत्वेपि गमकत्वात्समासः often used by
COtmmentatOrS.•
साप्तामेक prescribed in the seventh
chapter or Adhyāya of the A$ं±ā-
dhyāyi; cf.साप्तामेक अार्घधातुकस्येडिति पुनरयं
भवति । M.Bh. on P.VI.4.62, साप्तमिके
पूर्वसर्वर्णे कृते पुनः षाष्ठिको भविष्यति । M.Bh.
on P.VI.1.70.
साप्य furnished with अाप्य or object ;
a transitive root;the term is used in
the Sāka{āyana, Haimacandra and
Cāndra, gratmmars; cf. Cāndra
I.4.100, Hema. IIL,3.21, Sākat.
|IV., 3.55.
साभ्यास together with the reduplica-
tive syllable; cf. उभौ साभ्यासस्य P.
VIII. 4. 21.
साम् the case-ending(अाम्) of the geni-
tive plural with the augmcःnt स्त्
prefixed; cf. साम अाकम् P.VTI. 1.33.
सामतन्त्रव्याकरण an anonymous ancient
work of the type of thePratiŚākhya
workS dealing with the euphonic
changes and accents in thc pada-
pāgha of the Samaveda.
सामन् equalization of tones; cf. वणीँनां
मध्यमवृल्येोच्चारणम् t
सामथ्यै lit. capacity of a word to
express its sense; the wOrd is, how-
éver, used rather technically, as
derived from समर्थ, in the sense of
compositeness; cf. तत्र एकार्थीभाव:
व्यपेक्षां वा सामथ्र्यम् । Mf.Bh.on P.II.1.1-
See समंर्थ above.The word is alsO



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-410.png}}}}}}

सामवशा
394
सामान्यविशेषभाव
used in the sense of *conformity in
Sense' 9r*connectedness' ; cf. इसुसोः
सामथ्र्ये P.VIII. 3.41; cf. also उपसैर्गी:
सामथ्र्ये R. T. l05; cf. also R. T. 98
and i130.
सामवशा name of a Safindhi or eupho-
nic change of the type of the
vQwelS अ, इ and उ being lengthen-
ed in SOm e specified cases chiefiy
for the sake of music ( साम ) ०r
metre. This lengthening is given
the rःame प्टुति in the " Rk Prati-
śākhya; cf. दीधै हृस्वो ब्यञ्जनेन्यस्त्वृकाराद्
यथादिष्टं सामवशः स सन्धिः | R. Pr.VII.1.
सामवदप्रातिशाख्य name of a Prati-
Śākhya work on Samaveda. It is
prObable that there were some
Prātisākhya workS written dealing
With the different branches or
Sakhās of the Sāmaveda, as could
be inferred from indirect references
to Süch works. For instance in
the Mahābhā$ya there is a passage
** नूनु च भोश्छन्देगानां सात्यमुग्रिराणायनीयी:
अर्धमेकारमर्धमेोकारं चाधीयते | ... पाषैदकृतिरेषा
तत्रभवताम् ?' which ref♚rs to such wor-
kS. At present, however, one such
wOrk COmmon to the several
branches of the Sāmaveda, called
Rktantra is available, and it is
called Sāmaveda PrātiŚākhya. It
iS believcd to have been written
by औौदनजेि and revised by शाकटायन.
सामानाधिकरण्य Standing in apposition;
the word is uSed' many times in it$
literal Sense * having the same
Substratum.* For instance, in घटं
करोति देवदत्तः, the personal ending ति
andदेवदत्त are safd to be समानाधिकरण.
The.Samānādhikararप्!a words'are
Put in the Same case |although, the
śerder _ and number sorrietines
differ. See the word समानाधिकरण..
स्तामान्य lit. resemblance in any one
9r rmany respectS. In the Nirukta
the word is used .in the sense of
सामान्यग्रहणााविधात
`“	”-~---------
fesefnblance between the word to
be derived, and any form of a root;
the term refers there to 8Tafmma-
tical resemblance and rraay there-
f9re nean grammatical c6nside-
tiOr1 if general; cf. अविद्यमाने सामान्ये-
प्यश्क्षरवर्णसामान्य त् नित्रूयात् Nir.II.1.
सामान्यग्रहण mention of a te in
$uch .a general way as would
ir१clude SOrme varietie$ or Specific
forms Of it to which the expres-
$ion Put is common; e. śटं• the
w9rd अापू ( fem. affix ) for the
affixe$ टाप्, डाप् and चाप्; cf. सामान्य-
ग्रहूंणार्थेाँ णकारः M.Bh. on P.III. 1.30;
cf. alsO च्लयुत्सगै: सामान्यग्रहणार्थः P. II.
1.43 Wārt.. ].
the preserwation
of the inclusion of two or more
tcrfmS by . Such a wording as is
COtm rmOn tO those two or rnore
term$; e. g. ङीं for ङी५,ङीध् and ङीन्;
अाप्ं for टाप्, डाप् and चेाप्;' cf. अथवीं
अर्वृश्यमत्र स॒ामान्यग्रहणाविघातार्थः ककारोनुबन्धः
|कंतंयः I M. Bh. on P. III, 1.83
Vãrt.7. The phrase सामान्यग्रहणा-
विंवात॒ार्थ is vcry frequently used` in
the Kāśikāvयूt{i.
सामान्यभविष्यत् futurc tense in gene-
ral|; the general future tense ex-
preSSed by the verb-endings sub-
stitt1ted for छूट्रट्. There is also the
term शुद्धभविष्यत् or भविष्घ्श्यन्ती used in
tle saभू& sc!se; gf. लट् शेपे च । शेषे
ईछृद्धे,भाविष्यैति कुjळै धातोर्छट् प्रत्येर्येा भर्वति |
Kā$. on P. III. 3.13.
सामान्यविशेषभाच the relationship bet-
wcen the gerRcral and the particu-
lar, which forms the basis 'of the
typc Of apavāda, which is ex-
plaincd by the analogy of तक्रकौ-
ण्डिन्यन्याय; the word "ālso refers
t9 the rnethod followed by the
StitraS of Pinini, or any treatise
of grammar for the matter of
that, where a general rule is



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-411.png}}}}}}

सामान्यावहित 395
सारस्वत
prescribed arःd, for the sake of
definiteneeSS SOme specific rules
laying down exceptions, are given
afterwards: cf. किंचित्सामान्यविशषवल्छ्श्रुक्षर्णेीं
प्रवत्यै येनाल्पन यत्नेन महतः शद्वौघान् प्रति-
पद्येरन् ! M. Bh. Ahnik 1.
सामान्यविाहत a general rule, a rule
laid down in general which is
restricted by special rules after-
wards; cf. बाधकेनोनन भत्रितब्यं सामान्य-
विहितस्य विशेषविहितन M. Bh. on P. II.
l.24 Wart. 5, cf, also M. Bh, on
III.1.94, III. 2.77 etc.
सामान्यातिदेश extended application of |
a thing tO QtherS in general; cf.
समिान्यातिदेशे विशेषानतेिदेशः | तेन अनद्यतन-
भूतरूंप विशेषे विहितयेोलैङ्लिटेार्न * भूतव्रच्च ?
(3.3.932) इत्यनेननातिदशः | Pāri. 'Sek.
Pāri. ]01.
सामान्यातिदेशपरिभाषा name given to the
Paribhāga सामान्यातिदशे विशेघानतिदेशः
Pāri. Sekh Pāri. 101.
सामान्यापेक्ष refering only to a general
thing indicated, and not to any
specific instances. The word is
used in cOnnection with a Jiिa-
pana Or indication drawn from
the Wording of a rule, which is
taken to apply in general to kind-
red things and rarely to specific
सामूद्दिक name given to tad. affixes
preScribed in the Sense of collec-
tion ( समूह ) by the rule तस्य समूहः
and the following ones; P.IV.2.37.
to 51.
साम्य similarity, homogeneity: descri-
bed tQ be of two kinds- in words
and in sense; cf. किं पुनः शब्दतः साम्य
संख्यातानुदशेा भवत्याहेोत्विदर्थतः M. Bh. on
P. I. 3. 10 Vārt 3; cf. also स्थानकरण-
कालादिभिः तौल्यम् T. Pr XXIV. 5.
सायण, सायणाचार्य the celebrated Vedic
scholar and grammarian of Vijayā-
magar who flourished in the 14th
century and wrote, .besides the
|monumental commentary workS
on the Vedas, a grammatical WOrk
on roots and their forms known
by the name माधवीया धातुवृत्ति. As the
colophon of the work shows, the
Dhātuvptti was written by Sāyanā-
cārya, but published under the
name of Mādhava, the brother of
Sāyamacārya; cf. इति महामन्त्रिणा मायणसु-
तेन माधवसहोदरेण सायणाचार्येण विरचितायां
माधवीयायां धातुवृत्तैौ...Mādhaviyā Dhā-
tuvrtti at the end; cf alsO तेन
मायणपुत्रेण सायणेन मनीषिणा । व्याखेंयॆया माधर्वीं
चेय धातुवृत्तिाàरैच्यते | Mād. Dhātuvrtti
at the beginning• →
things; cf. इदं च सामान्यापेक्षं ज्ञापकं सारङ्गकवि name of a graanmarian,
भावतिङेपि पूर्वमुत्पत्तेः | Pari. $ek. on
the writer of प्रयुक्ताख्यातमञ्जरीसारसंग्रह..
Pāpri. 50. सारप्रदीपिका name of a commentary
सामान्याभेिधान denotation of the gen-
us factor of a word, as contrasted
by .jagannātha on the Sārasvata
grammar,
with द्रव्याभिधान denortation of. the || सारसत्वरी name of a grammar work
individual object; cf. तद्यदा द्रव्यtाभधाने |
written by Kavicandra.
तदा बहुवचनं भविष्य॒ति॒ि, यदा सामान्याभ॒िधानं सारसेिद्धान्तकौमुदी the same as लचुसिद्धान्त-
तदैकवचेनं भविष्यति M. Bh. on P. I. 2.
58 Vart. 7.
सामासिक pertaining tO a compound;
found inside a compound; cf.
मा भूतां यासैौ सामाासेकी	विभाक्तरूतस्य॒ाम्,
यासौ समासाद्विभक्तिस्तस्यां भविष्यतः || M.Bh.
on P. VII.1.1; cf. also सामासिकळुकः
अप्राप्त्या etc. Par. Sek. on Pari. 56.
कौमुदी. See लघुकौमुदी.
सारस्वत mame of a grammar work
which was once wery popular on
account of its brewity, beliewed to
have been written in the sप्ंtra
form by an ancient grammarian
named Narendra Who is $aid to
have composed 700 sप्ātras · under



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-412.png}}}}}}

सारस्वतटीका
396
सार्वविभक्तिक
the inspiration of Sarasvati. The
exposition of these Stitras by a
reputed grammarian named Aht!-
bhtitisvartipacarya whO pOSsibly
flourished in the thirteemth century
A. D., is known by the name
सारस्वतप्रक्रिया which haS remained aS
a text book on grammar to the
present day in sOme part$ 9f
|Îndia. This प्राक्रिया is popularly
ktnown as सारस्वतव्याकरण्प्. The techni-
cal terrms in this grammar are the
current popular ones. 7
सारस्वतटीका name in general given
to commentary works on the Sāras-
vata, Vyākarana out of which those
written by Rāmanārāyama,' Satya-
prabodha, K$emarihkara, Jagan-
mātha and Mahidhara are known
to $cholarS.
सारस्वतपरिभाषा a grammar work of
the Sārasvata school written by
|Dayāratna in explanation of the
technical ruleS giwing conventionS
and maximS.
सारस्वतप्रक्रिया the popular name
given to the gloss by Atnubhiti-
svarüpācārya On Narendra's gram-
mar rules. See सiरस्वत abowe.
सारस्वतप्रक्रियाटीका see सारत्वतटीका above.
सारस्वतभाष्य a critical टैloss on the
Sārasvata grammar by a gratmma-
rian named Kāśinātha.
सारस्वतव्याकरण see सारस्वत above..
सारस्वतसार a work giving a short sub-
stance Of the Sārasvata Vyākarata
with a commentary named Mitā-
|k$arā on the 8ame by Harideva.
सारस्वतस्सिद्धान्तचन्द्रिका a work on the
SāraSvata Vyākarana by a gra-
mmarian mamed Rāmāśrarna.
सारस्वताख्यातदीपिका a work on the
Sàrasvata Vyakarana byStirasirihha.
सारावली or सारावली-व्याकरण an in-
॥ dependent treati$e on grammar
by Narãyat?a Vandyopadhyāya.
सारासारविचेक name of a cormmentary
on Nagc$a's Paribhasenduśekharā
written by बालशास्त्री रानडे,the stalwart
grammarian of the nineteenth cen-
tury at Vārāt]asi.
साथैक lit, pOSSeSSed of Sense; signifi-
cant, as contrasted with निरर्थक; cf.
इतरे च सार्थकाः Rk. Prāti, XIII. 9.
सार्वकालिक denoting tirme, irrespective
of itS divisionS Such aS the past,
the present and the future; e. g.
the krt affixes prescribed by rules
before P. III 2.84; cf. अतः सार्वकालिका
विधर्येीं वेदितव्याः Kā$. on P. III. 2.. 83.
सार्वधातुक a term used in Pāmini's gra-
mmar for affixes applied to verbs,
Such as the perSor१al endings ' and
thOse kt.affixeS which are marked
with.the mute let'er शू; cf. तिङ्-
शित्सार्वधातुकम् P. III. 4. '1 13. The
term waS taken into his grammar
by Pātऐini fro1n ancient grammar
works and thet1ce in their gra-
mrinars by Other .gram marians; cf.
सार्वधातुकमिति पूर्बौचायैप्रासद्धा संज्ञेये निरन्वया,
स्वभावान्नपुंसकलिङ्गामेति ! Trilok-com. om
Kāt. III. 1.34, The term सार्वधातुका
also was used by ancient gra-
|rmrraarians before Pārhini; cf. अापिश-
लास्तुरुस्तुशम्यमः सार्वधातुकासु च्छन्दसैिित पठन्ति.
Kāś. om P.. VII. 3.95.
सार्वनामिक lit. pertaining to pronouns;
the term is used in connection
with rules or operations concern-
ing exglusivcly the pronouns; cf.
. नान्यत्सार्वनामिकम् ! Kāit. ÎI. 1.33.
सार्वभौम a grammarian of the eighte-
enth century who wrote a wery
brief critical work on compounds
named सम[सवाद.
सार्वविभत्तिक pertaining to all cases,
i. e. prescribed to convey the sense
of all case affixes; the term is co-
mmonly used by commentators
with reference to the tad. affix
Ç
→



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-413.png}}}}}}

स्चबकाश
४^\
397 ांसद्धकाप्gड
तस् prescribed by the rule प्रतियोगे
पत्र्न्चम्यास्तसिः and the Wārttika तसि-
प्रकरणे अाद्यादिभ्य उपसंख्यानम् thereon: cf.
|P. V. 4.44 and Vārt. I -
सावकाशा possessed of scope for its
application as contrasted with
निरवकाश; a term used in connection
with a rule which has got its app-
lication to Some cases without
confiict with amy other rule; cf.
द्वयेर्हि सावकाशयेोः समवस्थितयोर्विप्रतिषेधो
भवति l M. Bh. on P.I.1.3 Vart. 6.
सावण्र्य the quality of being cognate
or allied; see the word सवर्ण above.
साव्यय together with avyaya or ind-
eclinable; cf.अाख्यातं साव्ययं वाक्यम्। उचै:
पठति ! नीचै: पठति | M. Bh. on P. II.
1 1. Vārt 9.
साहचर्य presence together, mention
together, association; this साहच्वर्य
is many times of use in caseS of
doubt regarding the meaning Of
a word or the choice of a word
in a	particular sense; cf. अथवा
साहचयत्ताच्छब्द्यं भविष्यति | M. Bh. on P.
I.1, 70, I 2. 27; cf. सहचरितो यर्थ-
स्तस्य गतिर्भविष्यति साहचर्यात् ; M. Bh. on
|P.• I. 2. 51 Vārt,- 3.•
सि ( l ) personal ending सिप् of the
sec. pers. sing.; cf. तिप्तस्झिसिप्थस्थ-
. .महिङ् P.III.4.78; ( 2 ) Unādi affix
क्सि ( सि ) cf. लुटृाषकुषिञ्शुषिभ्यः क्सिः Un.
|III. 155.
सिंहावलोकितन्याय the analogy of the
backward look peculiar to a lion,
Who, aS he advances, does alWayS
look back at the ground covered.
The word ig used in grammar '
with reference to a word taken '
back from a rule to the preceding
rule which technically is called '
अपकर्ष; cf. वक्ष्यमाणं वेिभाष्प्राग्रहण!मेह सिंहावलेो-
क्रितन्यायेन संबध्यते Kā$. on P.III.3.49.
सिच्	one of the substitutes ( सुस् ) for
' the general sign चिल of the aorist
tense ( ळुङ्क ); cf. चिल ळुङि । व्ले; सिञ्च् P.
|III.i!. 43, 44.
सिाचैपाद name given by convention
tO the SeeOnd pāda of the seventh
adhyāya of Panini's Astãdhyāyi as
the pāda begins with the $iंitra
त सिचि वृाद्धेः परस्मैपदेषु. P. VII. 2. 1.
सेत् an affix markcd with the mute
letter' स् Signifying the designation
पद for the preceding base to which
that affix has been added; for
examplcS Where such affixes are
noticed, See the words भवदीयः,
ऊर्णीयुः, ऋात्वयः, पार्श्वमूः cf सिति च ' P,
|I. 4. 16.
सिद्ध (1) established; the term is used
in the SenSe ofनित्यor eternal in the
Vārttika सिद्धे शब्दार्थसंबन्ध where, as
Patafjali has observed, the word
सिद्ध meaning नित्य has been purpo-
sely put in tO mark an auspicious
beginning of the शब्दानुशासनशास्त्र
which commences with that Vār-
ttika; cf. माङ्गलिक अाचार्यो महतः शास्त्रौघस्य
म॒ङ्गलार्थ सिद्धशब्दमादितः प्रयुङ्ते M.Bh.on
Ahanika 1 ; {2) established, proved,
formed; the word is many times
used in this Sense in the Mahā-
bhāgya, as also in the Wārttikas
especially when a reply is to be
giwen to an objection; cf. P.I. 1.3
Vārt. 17, I•, 1. 4. Vārt. 6; I. 1. 5,
Vārt.5,I.1.9 Wārt. 2 etc,
सिद्धकाण्ड the chapter or portion of
Pamini's grammar which is .. valid
tO the rules inside that portion, as
also to the rules enumerated after
it. The word is used in connection
with the firSt seven chapters and a
quarter of the eighth chapter of
Pārini's A$ंādhyāyÎ, as contrasted
with the last three quarters called
त्रिपादी, the rules in which are
not valid to any rule in the'prece-
ding portion, called by the name
सपासताध्यायैो or सपादी as also to any
preceding, ruale in the T'ripādi’:it-
$elfः cf. पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् P. WIII.2.1, '



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-414.png}}}}}}

सिद्धनन्दिन्
398
स्सिद्धान्तरत्नाङ्कुर
सिद्धनन्दिन् an ancient Jain Sage wh0
is believed to have written a1a Ori-
ginal work Or1 gramriaar.
सिद्धहेमचन्द्र a title given to hiS gra-
mtmar by Hemacandra himself;
which subSequently . came to be
called हैमशब्दानुशासन or हैमव्याकरण.
For details see हेमच्चन्द्र.
सिद्धान्त established tenet or principle
or conclusion, in the statadard
works of the different ShāStraS.
सिद्धान्तकौमुदै a critical and scholarly
commenitary on the StitraS Qf
Pānini, in which the several Stitras
are arranged tOpicwise and fully
explained with examples and
* counter examples. The wOrk is
exhaustive, yet nOt vOlurminOus,
difficult yet popular, and critical
yet lucid. The work is next in
importance to the Mahābhāsya in
the system of Pātini, and its study
prepares the way for und€ rStand-
ing the Mahābhā$ya. Ît is prescri-
bed for study in the courses of
Vyākara'a at every academy and
Pāthaśālā and is expected to be
committed to memory by Studet॥ts
who want to be thorough scholarS of
Wyākarana.By virtue of its metho-
dical treatment it has tlarown into
the back-grOund all kindred workS
and glosses Or Vrttis on the Sütras
of Pānini. It is arranged into twO
|halves, the first half dealing with
seven topics ( l ) सैज्ञापरिभाषा, { 2 )
पञ्श्वसंधिं, ( 3 ) षड्लिञ्ञ्ङ्ग, ( 4 ) स्त्रीप्रत्यय,
( 5 ) क्रारक्र, ( 6 ) समास, ( 7 ) तद्धित,
and the latter haif dea!ing with
five topics, ( l ) दशगणी, ( 2 ) द्वादश--
प्राक्रिया ( 3 ) कृदन्त ( 4 ) वैदिकी and
( 5 ) स्वर.The author भट्टोजीदीक्षित has
|himself written a Scholarly gloss
On it called प्रौढमनेारमा on which,
his grandson, Hari Dikgita has
written a , learned commentary
named लञ्चुशब्दरत्न Or simple शब्दरत्न.
The Siddhāntakatāmudi has got
a large number Of commentaries
On it Out of Which, the commenta-
ries प्रौढमनेीर॒म[, ब॒ालमनोरमा, (by वासुदव-
दीक्षित) तत्त्वबेाधिनी and लघुशब्देन्दुशैखर
are read by almost every true
schOlatr of Vyakarana. Besides
these four, there are a dozen or
more cOmmentaries some of
which can be given below with
their narnes and authors ( I ) सुबेा-
धिनी by जयकृष्णमैानि, ( 2 ) सुबोधिनी " by
रामकृष्णभट्ट ( 3 ) बृहच्छब्देन्दुशेखर by नागेश,
( 4 ) बालमनेारमा by अनन्तपण्डित, ( 5 )
वैयाकरणसिद्धान्तरहस्य by नीलकण्ठ, (6 )
रत्नार्णव, by बृकॄष्णामश्र ( 7 ) वैयाकरणसिद्धान्त-
रत्नाकर by रामकृष्ण, C 8 ) सरला by तारा-
नाथ,(9) सुमनेोरमा by तिरुमल्छ्,( 10)सिद्वान्त-
कौमुदेाव्याख्या by लश्मीनृसिंह, (11 )सिद्धान्त-
कौमुदीन्ञ्ज्याख्या by धेिश्वेश्वरतीर्थ, (12) रत्नाकर
by शिवरामेन्द्रसरस्वती and (13) प्रकाश by
तोलापदीक्षित. Although the real name
of the work is वैयाकरणसिद्धान्ततकीमुदी,
as giwen by thc author, Still popu-
larly the work is well kmown by
the name सिद्धान्तवर्केौमुदी. The work
has got two abridged forrms, the
Madhyakaumudi and the Laghu-
kaumudi both written by Varada-
rāja, पुंàe pupil of BhattQji !Dik$ita.
सिद्धान्तकौमुदीगूढफकेिकाप्रकाशा a small
gloss on Bhattoji's Siddhāntakau-
|riaudi, explaining its difficul t lir1eS
an 4 passages, written by a
grammarian named इन्द्रदत्तोपाध्याय.
सिद्धान्तकौमुदीवादार्थ an explanatory
work, discussing the difficult Sen-
tences and passages of the Siddhā-
ntakaumudi, written by a gra*
mmariara named Rāmakrक्ष्r1a.
सिद्धान्तरत्न a gloss on the Sarasvafi-
stitra written by a grammarian
natned Jinacandra•
सिद्धान्तरत्नाङ्कर name of a commen-
tary on the Kātaratrapariśiईंa by



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-415.png}}}}}}

सिद्धान्तसारस्वत 399
Siwarāmacakrawartin. ||
सुदं
सिद्धान्तसारस्वत an independent work
On grammar believed to hawebeen
written by Dewanandin.
सिद्धान्तिन् a term used in connection
With the writer himself of a trea-
tise when he gives a reply to the
objections. raised by himself or
9uoted from others,the termपूर्वपाक्षन्
being uSed for the objector.
सिद्धि formation of a word; establish-
ment of the correct wiew after the
remowal of the objection; e. g.
संज्ञासिद्वि, कार्यसिाष्द्वे, स्वरासेाद्धे.
सिप् (1) the personal ending ( सि ) of
the Second person singular (मध्यमपुरु-
षैकवचन ) substituted for the affix ळु,
of the ten tenses and moods लट्,लिट्,
लुट् and others; cf. P.III.4.78; (2
Wikarafla affix स् added to a root
before the affixes ofलेट् or Vedic
Subjunctiwe.
सिम् a technical term used in the
Vàjasaneyi-Prātiśākhya for the first
eight vOwels of the alphabet, viz.
अ, आ, इ, ई, उ, ऊ, ऋ and ऋ; cf.
सिमादितोटौ स्वराणाम् V. Pr.. I.44.
ईं augment सीँश्य्, prefixed to the
perSOnal affixes which are sub-
stituted for the लिङ् affixes in the
Atmanepada; e. g. पचेत ५चैयाताम् cf.
P. III. 4.102.
सीरदेव a prominent grammarian of
the Eastern part of India who
|lived in the twelfth century A. D. !
|He WaS a wery Sound scholar of
• Pāmimi's grammar Who wrote a
feW gloSSeS on promfinent works
in the system. His Paribhāgāvrtti
is a masterly independent treatiSe
among the recognised
on the Paribhāsंās in which he has
quoted wery profusely from the
workS of his predecessors, such as
the Kāśika, Nyāsa, Anunyāsa and
others. The reputed scholar
works !
Maitreya Rakgita is more often
quoted than others.
सु (l) case afiix ( स् ) of the nomina- "
tiwe singular and ( सु ) of the
|locative plural; cf. P. IV. 1.2;
(2) Ut?ādi affix सु ( क्सु ) applied
to the rootS इष्; e.g, इक्षुः cf, इषेः क्सुः
Unādi 437.
सुक् augment सुक् added according
tO SOme grammarians to any
word optionally with असुक्, which
is prescribed in the case of the
Words अश्च, वृष, क्षीर and लवण before
the affix क्यञ्ट्व् ( य ) in the sense of
desire. e. g. दधिस्यति, मधुस्यति etc.
cf. P. VII. 1 51 Vārttika.
सुच् (1) tad. affix सुस् applied to द्वि,
त्रि, चतुर् and to ऐक optionally, in
the sense of * repetition of the
actiwity' e. g. द्विः करोति etc. cf. Kā$.
om P. V. 4. 18, 19; (2) Unādi
affix स्, see सु above.
सुजनपण्डित a grammarian Who Wrote
a small treatise on genderS named
सुद (l) short term ( प्रत्याहार ) for the
first five case-affixes which are
called सर्वनामस्थान also, when they
pertain to the masculine or the
feminine gender; cf. सुडनपुंसकस्य
I.1.43; (2). augment सू prefixed to
the root कृ and to the root कू when
preceded by certain prepðsitions
, and as seen in the words कुस्तुम्बुरु
and odhers as alsO in the words
अपरस्परे गोष्पद, अास्पद, अाश्चयै, अपस्क्रर्,
विप्किर, हरिश्चन्द्र, प्रस्कण्a, मस्कर्, कास्तीर्,
अजस्तुन्द, कारस्कर and words · in the
class of words headed by पारस्कर,
under certain conditions; cf. P.
WI. 1.135-57; (3) augment सुस्
prefixed to the case-affix अाम्
after a pronOun; e. g. सर्वेषाम् cf.
P. VII. 1.52; .(4) augment स् pre-
fixed to the consonant त् or थुय्
pertaining to लिङ् afiixes, e. g.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-416.png}}}}}}

सुधाञ्जन
400
सुब्धातु
कृर्षीष्ट cf. P. III. 4.107.
सुधाञ्जन an anonymous commentary
on the Siddhāntakaumudi Of
Bhattoji IDīk$ita.
सुप् (1) locative case affix सु; (2)
short term for caSe-affixes, aS
formed by the syllable सु (the
nom. sing. affix) at the beginning
and the final consonant प् of सुप् ,
the locative plural case-affix in
the rule स्वैौजसंमौट्...ङयेास्सुप् P. IV.
1.2. These case affixes are called
* vibhakti * also. These सुप्प् affixes
are elided after an indeclinable
word; cf. अव्ययादाप्सुपः P. II. 4.82;
in Veda सू, श्श ( ए, ), या, डा, ङया, याञ्च्
and अाछ् as seen, are substituted for
these case affixes, which SOme-
times are evem dropped or aSSimi-
lated with the previouS vowel of
the base; e. g. सन्तु पन्थाः, अार्द्रे चर्मन्
etc. cf, P. WII. 1.39. These ca5e-
affixes are as a rule, grawe-accent-
ed (अनुदात्त) excepting in Such cas३$
as are mentioned in B. WI.1. 166
to i84 and 19l.
सुपद्मव्याकरण an independent work
on grammar written by a scholar
of grammar named पद्मनाभ, who
fiourished in Mithilā in the fif-
teenth century A. D.
टीका a commentary
written by a Scholar of grammar
named विष्णुमिश्र on the Supadrma-
vyākarana, which see above.
सुपद्मसमाससंग्रह a treatise written by
a grammarian named रूपनारायण,
on the सुपद्मव्याकरण, which $ee below.
सुपद्मसमाससंग्रहटीका a commentary
by a grammarian mamed धिष्णुमिश्र,
on the सुपद्मसमाससंग्रह which " see
abowe.	→
सुप्सुप्समास, a p0pular name given
to a compound formed of two
nOuns, which cannot be ordinarily
explained by the rules of grammar
laid down in definite terms b
Panini in II.1.5I to II. 2.29. Thes6
SO called irregular compounds are
explained as fortmed in accord-
ance with the rule सह सुपा II. 1.4
wherein the word पद presents it-
sटुंंf by अनुट्टंति from सुबामन्त्रिते पराङ्गवत्
स्वरे II. !. 2, the rule सह सुप aS a
resuit being explained as सुप् सुपा
सह समस्यत. As these compounds
Cànnot be put under the ' topics
Of अव्ययीभाव, तत्पुरुष and others
mentioned by Panini in II. 1.5
to II. 2.29 they are called →
मास or केवलसमास. सुप्सुप्स
सुबन्त name given tO a word formed
with the addition of a case-affix
and hence capable of being used
in a sentence by virtue of its being
called a पद by the rule सुप्तिङन्तं पदम्.
The ancient grammarians gave
four kinds of words or padas wiz.
नाम, अाख्यात, उपसर्ग and निपात which
Pānini has brOught under two
heads सुबन्त including नाम, उपसर्गी and
निपात and तिङन्त standing for अाख्यात;
cf. सुतिङन्तं पदम् P. I. 4. 14.
सुबोधिनी name given to (1) a com-
mentary on the Siddhāntakaumudi
by K$r३amaunin or Jayakrsna-
maunin; (2) a cOmmentary on the
Sārasvata Vyakarana by ' Amgta-
bhāratÎ ; (3) a cOrmmentary on the
Sārasvata Vyākarana by Candra-
kir ti.
सुउब्धातु a root formed from a noun or
a Subanta by the addition of any of
the following affixes- क्यञ्च॒ ( by P.
III. 1.8, 10 and l9), काम्यञ्च॒ (by
P.III.l.9), क्यङ् (by P. III.1.1 1, 12
and 14-18), क्यघ्य् (by P.III.I .13),णिङ्
(by P III.1.20), णिच॒ (by P.III.1.21
and 25) and यक् (by P.III.1.27)and
also by ष्क्रिपू_ or zero affix by P.
III. k.1 l Vārttika. 3. All these
formations ending with the affixes
mentioned abowe are termed rootS



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-417.png}}}}}}

सुमनोरमा
40i
、
संद्
by the rule सनाद्यन्ता धातवः (P.III. 1. ||
32) and are regularly conjugated |
in all the ten tenses and moods |
with the generalconjugational Sigm ||
|शापू added to them ia the conjuga- ||
tional tenses, and स्य, तास् and others |
in the other tenses and moods, ||
and have verbal derivatives also |
formed by the addition of suitable
|k[t affixes,
सुमनेोरमा name of a commentary
written by a Southern gramma-
|rian तिरुमल्ङ्क्ष्छ on Bhattojp's Siddhānta-
kautmudi.
सत्र a short pithy assertion laying
doWn something in a scientific
treatise; aphorism; the Word iS
sometimes used in a collective
sense in the singular, referring to
the whole collection of Stitras or
rules; cf. व्याकरणन्य सूत्रम् M. Bh. on i
Ahnika 1. The term is defined as |
अाल्पाक्षरमसंदिग्धं सारवद्विश्वतोमुखम् । अस्तेो-
भमनवद्यं च सूत्रं सूत्रविदो विदुः. There are
given generally six kinds of Stātras
wiz. संज्ञासूत्र, परिभाषासूत्र,विधिसूत्र, नियमसूत्र,
प्रतिभ्रेधसूत्र and अधिकारसूत्र; cf. also संज्ञा
च परिभाषा च विधिर्नियम एव च प्रतिषधेोधि-
व्कांरश्रच षङ्किधं सूत्रलक्षणम् । Com. on Kāt.
I. l.2.
सूत्रकार the original writer of the
stitras; e. g. पाणिनि, शाकटायन, शर्ववर्मन् ,
हेमचन्द्र and others. In Pānini's sys-
tem, Pānini is called Sitrakāra, as
contrasted with Kātyayana,who is
calledthe Warttikakāra and Pataàj-
ali,who is called the Bhā$yakāra;cf.
पार्णिनेनः सूत्रकारस्य M.Bh. on P.II 2.1.1.
सत्रपाठ the text of Pānini's Stitras
handed down by oral ' tradition
from the preceptor to the pupil.
Although it is said that the actual
text of Pānini was modified from
time to time, still it can be $aid
with certainty that it was fixed at
the time of the Bhāsyakāra who
has noted a few different readingS
51
only. The Sutra text approved by
the Bha$yakāra was followed by the
authorS of the Kā$ikà excepting in
a feW cases. It is customary With
learned Pandits and grammarians
to say that the recital of the SÚtras
of Pāthini was originally a continu-
ous one in the form of a Sathhitā-
text and it was later on, that it
was split up into the different
Stitras, which explains according
to them the wariation in the
number of Stitras which is due to
the different ways of splitting the
Sütrapatha.
स्त्रभेद (1) splitting up of a gramma-
tical rule ( येोगविभाग ); (2) change
in the wording of a rule; cf. स एष
सूत्रभेदन लकारोपदेशः प्लुत्याद्यर्थः सन्,
प्रत्याख्यायत तैषा महतेो बंशस्तम्वाल्छूानुकृध्यते
M. Bh. on Siva Stitra 2 Vārt. 5.
सूत्रशाटकन्याय reference to something
as present, when, in fact, it is yet
to come into existence,On the ana-
logy of the expression अस्य सूत्रस्य
शाटकं वय; cf. भाविनी संज्ञा विज्ञास्यते
सूत्रशाटकवत् । M. Bh. on P. I. 3. 12
Wārt. 2.
सृष्कन् the place of the articulation or
' production of the sound व्.
सृष्टेिधर name of the famous com-
mentator on Puru$Ottamadewa's
Bhāsंāvrtti,who lived in thefifteenth
century A.D.
से (1) one of the several affixes found
in Veda in the sense of'तुमुन् ( तुम् of
the infinitive); e. g. वृक्षे राय:; cf.
Pāt]. III. 4.9; (2) personal-ending
substituted for थास् in the pres•,
perfect, and other tenses; cf. थास:
से P. ]III. 4. 80.
सेसदद् together with the augment * i¢ '
prescribed in general for being
prefixed to an Ārdhadhātuka afhx
beginning with amy consonant
except य॒य्. The word is also used



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-418.png}}}}}}

→、 402 स्त्री
सदक
in the sense ofa root which allows
the augment इट् ( इ ) to be prcfixed
to valādi Ardhadhātuka affixes
placed after it, in contrast with
such roots which do mot alloW it
and hence which are termed अनिट्.
सेदट्क pOssessed of the augment इट्.
See सेट्.
सेसतुसग्रह name of a commentary On
Bopadeva's Mugdhabodha Gra-
mmar written by a grammarian
named Gahgãdhara.
सेन् one of the seweral afifixes found
in Veda in the sense of the infini-
tive affix तुम् ; e.g. एषे रथानां, cf. P.
III.4.9.
सेनक name of an ancient grammar-
ian quoted by Pànini in the rule
गिरेश्च सेनकस्य P. W. 4.112.
सेाढ tad. affix सेाढ prescribed in the
sense of * milk ', optionally along
with the affixes दूस and मरीस after
the word अधि; e. g. अविसोढम् cf.
अवेर्दुग्धे सोढदूसमरीसन्नः P. IV. 2. 36.
Vārt. 5.
सोपसर्ग together with a preposition
( उपसर्ग ) prefixed; the term is used
in connection With a root to
which a preposition Such as प्र, परा
etc. has been prefixed; cf. अकर्मका
अपि वै सेीपसगाँः सकर्मका भवन्ति M. Bh.
on P. I. 1,44.
、 Q →
सेोम, सोमयाये name of the writer of
a glosS named त्रिभाष्यरत्न on the
Taittiriya Prātiśākhya.
सोमदेव a Jain Grammarian, the
writer of a gloss on the commen-
tary Jainendra Vyākarat]a named
शब्दार्णवचन्द्रिका by the author, who
Was a resident of thc Deccan and
lived in a village named Arjurikā
( called अाजर्र to-day ) near Kolha-
pur in the twelfth century.
→、 →、 →
सांमयाोंजेन्ञ् a modern grammarian of
the mineteenth century who wrote
a Short grammatical work as a
hand-book for scholars who as-
pired to be poets. The work was
called वेय{करणशव्दमाला.
सोष्मन् accompanied by a rush of
breath. The Word iS taken to
apply to the second and fourth
consonantS which are produced
by the rush of unintonated breath
throu%h the open mouth like
steam through a pipe: the secOnd
and fourth clasS consonants; cf.
युग्माः सोष्माणः |R. T. 16.
सौत्र belonging to the stitra; found
in the Stitra aS cOntrasted with
what is given elsewhere; cf. सौत्रोयं
धातुः or सौत्रं पुंस्त्त्रम् etc. cf. also सौत्रेो
निर्देशाः M. Bh. on P. III. 2.139,
III. 4.60, 64, IV. 2.64 etc.
सौनाग name of a School of ancient
grammarians whO composed Var-
ttikas in explanation of the sütras
of Pānini; cf. सौनागा: पटन्ति P. III.
2.56 Vārt. 1, IV. l.74 Vārt. 1.
cf. एतदेव सौनागैर्विस्तरतरकेण पाठतम् M.
Bh. on II. 2.18 Vārt. 4.
सोर्यभगवान् an ancierut grammarian
quoted in, the Mahābhāsya; cf.
तत्र सीर्यभगवतेात्तमनिष्टिशो वाडवः ' पठति ।
इ”यत एव चतुभ्र्भात्रः प् ट्रैत: M. Bh. on
|P. VIII. 2.i06 Vārt. 3.
सौवादिक a root of the स्वाादिगण or the
Fifth Conjugation.
स्कन्धच् a tad. affix in the sense of
collection, added to the Words
नर, करि and तुरङ्क; cf. Vārttika on P.
|IV. 2.51 quoted in the Kāśikā-
vrtti.
स्तु a term used for the sibilant स्
and dental claSS consOnants for
thc substitution of the sibilant शू
and palatal consonants in respec-
tive order; cf. स्तेोः क्षुना अ॒ः P.
VIII. 4.40.
खत्रो (1) the sense of the feminine;
cf. ास्त्रियाम् P. IV. ] .3-8l (2) a word



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-419.png}}}}}}

स्त्रीप्रत्यय
ending with an affix in the sense
of femihity Such as टापू, डाम् or चाप्
Or ङीपू, ङीष्ञ् or ङीन् or the like; cf.
स्त्रीभ्यो ढेकू IV. 1.120; (3) a w ord
in the ' sense of feminine cf. स्त्री
पुंवच्च P. I. 2.66.
ख्त्रीप्रत्यय (1) affixes added to the
maSculine base of a word to show
the SenSe of the feminine, $uch as
अा in टापृ, डाप् and चाप् and ई in ङीपू,
ङीष् and ङीन्. See 'P. IV. 1.3 tð
8l• (2) name of a section of Bha-
|ttQji's Siddhāntakaumudi which
gives the affixes added for the
forrmation of a feminine base.
स्थ based upon ; the word is pec11-
liarly u$ed in the Prātiśākhya
workS in the sense of * based on ?
* belonging to * or * made up of *;
cf. अस्थनाामेनी सन्थ्यम्, R. T. ' 9 1, so
alSo cf. वं नैगेि उस्थ R. T. 162.
स्थविरकौार्णडन्य name of an ancient
writer of PrātiŚākhya works who
is quoted in the Taittiriya Prā-
tiśākhya cf. T. Pr. XVII. 4.
स्थान place of articulation; place of
the prOduction of sound, which
is one of the chief factors in the
prodt9ction of SOund; cf. अनुप्रदानात्
संसर्गीत् स्थानात् करणविन्ययात् । जायते वर्ण-
वैशेष्यं परीमाणाच्च पञ्चमात्, T,Pr. XXIII..
2. Generally there are given
five places of the prOduction of
sound viz. कण्ठ, ताळु, मूर्धन् , दन्त and
ओोष्ठ, respectively for the articula-
tion of guttural, palatal cerebral,
dental and labial letterS and नासिका
as an additional one for the arti-
culation of the nasal consonants
श्म्, मुम्, ङ्क, णुश् and न्. For the Jihvā-
muliya sound ( xक ), र्जिह्वामूल is
given aS a specific one. For
details and minor differences of
wiew$, see T. Pr. III, R. Pr. 1.18
to 20,R. T. 2-10; V. Pr. I. 65 to
84 and M, Bh, on P, 1. !. 9.
403
स्थानिवद्भाव
(2) place, Substratum, which is
generally understo0d as the sense
of the genitiwe case-affix in rules
which prescribe substitutes; cf. षष्ठी
स्थोनयागा. P. I. ]. 49.
स्थानषष्ठी one of the Seweral kinds of
the genitive case when it means
a place or Substratum, see the
word स्थनि.
स्थानिन् the original word or part
of a wOrd such as श्रa syllable or
two of it or a letter of it, for
which a substitute ( अादेश ) is
prescribed; cf. स्थानिवदादेशोऽनाल्वधौ
P. l.l. 56.
स्थानिवत् similar to the original in
behaviour; cf. स्थानिवदादेशेोनल्विधैा
P. I. 1.59.. See स्थानिवद्भद्राव.
स्थानिवत्त्व acting iike the original. See
स्थानिवद्भाव.
स्थानिवद्भाव behawiour of the substi-
tute like the original in respect of
holding the qualiti( s of the ori-
ginal and causing grammatical
operations by virtue of thOse
qualities. By means ofस्थानिवद्भाव,the
substitute for a root is,for instance,
|looked upon as a rOot; similarly, a
noun-base or an afiix or So, is look-
ed upon like the original and it
can cause such operationS or be a
recipient of such operathorns aS are
due to its being a ro0t or a noun
or an affix or the lik5. This
स्यानिवद्धाव cannot be, and iS nOt
made also, a univerSally applicable
feature; and there are limitations
or restrictions put upon - it, the
chief of them being अल्विधैौ or in
the matter of such operationS as
are caused by *the property of be-
ing a single letter? (अल्विधैौ). There
are two views rcgarding this *beha-
viour like the original' : (1) Suppo-
sed behaviour which i$ only instru-
mental in causing operations • or.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-420.png}}}}}}

स्थानेद्विर्वचनपक्ष
undergoing them which iS called
शास्त्रातिदेश and (2) actual restoration
to the form of the original under
certain conditions only aS preScri-
bed which is called रूपातिदेश. The
रूपातिदेश is actually resorted to by
sOme grammarians in the case of
the reduplication of rOots; cf. Kā$.
on द्विवैच्चनचि P.I.1.59 and M.|Bh. on
P.I.1.59.See the Word रूपातिदेश also,
For details see Vol. VII p.p. 241-
243, Vyākarara Mahābhāsya D.E.
Society*s Edition.
^、 पक्ष one of the two alter-
|mative wiews regarding reduplica-
tion according to which tWo wOrd-
ings or units of the Same form
replace the original single wOrd-
ing, cf. स्थानेनद्विर्वच्वनपक्षे स्थानिवद्भावात्प्रकृति
व्यपदेशः Śiradeva Pari. 68.The other
kind of reduplication is called द्वि:-
प्रयेोगाद्विर्वचनपक्ष which looks upon re-
duplication as the mere placing of
an exactly similar unit Or wording
after the original first unit. This
alternative view is accepted in the
Kāśikā; cf. Kaś. on P. WI.1.1.
स्थानेयोगा a wariety ofthegenitiwe case
When it is connected in Sense With
the Prātipadika by the relationship
of स्थान Or place, as contrasted with
the relationships of the kindofीवैषय-
विषयेिभाव, अवयवावयविभाव and others.
ASgrammar iS a $cience ofwords,in
thOSe placeS wjuere ome word is me-
ntioned for another by the use of
the genitiwe Case it should be und-
erstood that the Word mentioned
is to be Substituted for the other;cf
the rule of Pश्ānini for that purpose
षष्ठी स्थानेयेोगा explained by Bhattoji
Dikgita as अानधीरितसंबन्धविश्शषा प्रठी स्था-
नेयेोगा बोध्या; cf. S.K. on P.I.1.49. In
$ome grammarS the sthānin and
āde$a are expressed in the same
case, wiz. the nominative case.
स्थान्यादेशभाव the rclation between
404 स्पर्श
the original and the Substitute
which iS described as of two kimds
(1) SuppOsed ar1d actual; cf.अानुमा-
निकस्थान्यादेशभावकल्पृनेपि श्रोतस्थान्योदशभा-
व्वस्य न त्याग: B'ari.Sek. Pari.
स्थापितव्य to be &stablished, to be
brought about.
स्थित (1) happened, come to pass;
e. g. राम ङस् इति स्थिते etc.: (2) esta-
blished; remaining intact after the
removal of doubts; cf. एर्श्वे हि
स्थितमेतत्; (3) remaining unafected
as referring to अस्पृष्टकरण;cf स्वराणामनु-
स्वारस्य ऊप्मणां च अस्पृष्टं करणं वेदितव्यम् तञ्च
स्थितामेत्युच्यतेl यत्र वर्णस्थानमााश्रित्य जिह्नावतिष्टते
तत् स्थितमित्युच्यते Uvvata on R.Pr.
XIII.' ; (4) established or stated in
the Padapātha; cf. स्थित पदे पदपाठे
इत्यथैः gloss on T. Pr. XX.2.
स्थिति utterance of a pada or padas
in the Padapatha without इति; the
utterance with इति being called
उपस्थिति; cf. पदं यदा केवलमाह सा स्थितिः
R. Pr. XI.15; (2) established prac-
tice or view; cf. शाकल्यस्य स्थविरसेयतरा
[&र्थेति: ! R. Pr. II. 44.
स्न tad. affix रुन added optionally
with स,to the word मृट् in the sense
of praiseworthy ; c. g. मृत्स्नां also
मृत्सा; cf. सस्नैो प्रशंसायाम् । P.V.4.40.
स्नञ्श् tad.afiीx स्न,added in many tadd-
hita senses, अपत्य, जात,समूह, अागत and
others mentioned upto P. V. lst
p3da end; &. g. स्त्रैण: पौंस्न:, cf. स्त्री-
पुंसाभ्यां नत्र्स्नञ्औी भवनात् |P.IV.1.87.
स्पर्ध a word used in the sense of*a
conflict of two rules' ( विप्रातेषेध )
in some grammar$ such as thOSe
of Jainendra, Sākatंāyana and
Hemacandra; cf. Jain. I.2.39,Sāk.
I.1.46 and Hema. WII.4. l l9.
स्पर्श a contact consonant; a terrm
used in connection with the cOnS0-
nants of the five claSSes, werily
because the karataa or the tip of
the tongue tor¢ches the place 9f



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-421.png}}}}}}

utterance in the mouth in their
pronunciation ; cf. कादयेीं मावसानाः
स्पशीँः S.K. Sarihjhāprakarana on
|P. VIII. 2.1 ; cf. also अाद्याः स्पशाँ:
पञ्च ते पञ्चवगर्गः R.Pr. I.78; cf. also
T.Pr.I.7.
स्पष्टाथै an expression used often by
commentators with reference to a
line Or a pasSage of the text the
meaning of which is clear and no
explanation is necessary.
स्पृष्ट name of one of the four inter-
nal efforts when the instrument
( क्ररण ) of articulation fully touches
" the sthāna or the place of the
405
स्६ाटन
advocated beforePānini. The word
स्फेाटायन has been put by Paniniin the
rule अवर्ड् स्फेीीटायनस्य only inciden-
tally and, in fact, nothing can be
definitely deduced from it although
Haradatta says that स्फेोटायन was
the originator of the स्फेोटवाद. The
word स्फोट is not actually found in
the Prātiśākhya works. However,
commentators on the Prāti$akhya
works have introduced it in their
explanations of the texts which
describe वणेांत्पाक्ति or production of
sound; cf. com. on R.Pr.XIII.4,
T.Pr. II.1. Grammarians have
given various kinds of sphota; cf.
production ofsound in the mouth.
See the word स्पर्श above; तत्र स्पृष्टं|!
प्रयतनं स्पशीनाम् S.K. on P. VI1I.2.] ;
cf. also M.Bh. on P.I.1.9.
स्पn a short technical term tnsed in ||
thc Jainendra Vyakarat]a instead
of the संयेाग in Panini's grammar.
स्फोट name giwen to the radical$abda
which communicate3 the meaning
to the hearers as different from ध्वनि
or the Sound in ordinary experien-
ce.TheVaiyākaranas,who followed
Pānini and who were headed by
Bhart[hari entered into discussions
regarding the philosophy of Gra-
mmar, and introduced by way of
deduction from Panini's grammar,
an important theory that शव्
which communicates the meaning
is different from the sound which
is produced and heard and which
is merely instrumental in the mani-
festation of an internal woice
" which is called Sphota.स्फुटयतेनेन अर्थः
इति स्फेाट:ः or स्फोटः शब्दो ध्वानस्तस्य ब्रयायमा-
दुपजायत Vakyapadiyā; cf. alsO अभि-
व्यक्तवादको मध्यमावस्थ अान्तस्: शब्दः Kai-
yata's Pradipa. For, details See
Vākyapadiya I and Sabdakaustu-
bha Āhnika 1. It is doubtful
{ Whether this Sphoja theory was.
स्फोटेो द्विधा | व्याक्तस्फेाटेा जातिस्फोटश्च ||व्यतिं-
स्फौटः सखण्ड अखण्डश्च । सस्त्रण्ड । वणैपदवाक्य-
भेदेन त्रिधा । अखण्डः पदवाक्यभेदन द्विधा ।
एवं पत्र्च व्यार्थतस्फेाटाः । जातिस्फेोट: वर्ण-
पदवाक्यभेदेन त्रिधा । इयेवमष्टौ स्फोटाः' तत्र
अखण्डवाक्यस्फेाट एव मुख्य इति नन्या: l वाक्य
जातिस्फेीट इति तु प्राञ्चः |॥|; cf. al$O
पदप्रकृतिः संहिता इति प्रातिशाख्यगत्र मानम् ।
पदानां प्रकृतिरिति षष्ठीतत्पुरुषे अखण्डवाक्यस्फेी-
टपक्षः । बहुत्रीँहैौ सखण्डबाक्यसेाटः|
स्फोटचटक a smail treatise On the
theory of Sphota by a SOund
modern scholar ofWyākarana and
Nyāya, by name Kjञ्$ंnaśāstri Arade
who lived in Benaras in the earlier
part of the nineteenth century.
स्फोटचन्द्रिका a small treatise on the
theory of Sphoja Written by Jaya-
|kg$na Maunाँ ofthe famous Maunin
family. The author is known as
|Kr$r]abhatta alsO.
स्फोटतत्त्वानेिरूपण a work on the
Sphota theory by the famous
grammarian Krst)aśesa of the SeSa
family of grammarianS.
स्फोटन (1) manifestation of the sense
of a word by the external sound
or dhvani; the same as sphota;
(2) separate or distinct pronuncia-
|! · tion of a consonant in a way by



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-422.png}}}}}}

स्फोटानेरूपण
breaking it from the cor.junct con- ||
sonants; cf. स्फोटनं नाम पिण्डीभूलस्य
संयोगस्य पृथगुच्चारणम् स देाष्षो वा न व! । V.
Pr.IV. 165.
स्फोटनिरूपण name ofa work discuss-
ing the nature of Sphota written
by Apadeva.
स्फोटवाद a general name given to
treatises discussing the nature of
Sphota written by the Vaiyaka-
ranas who defend and establish
the theory of Sphota and by the
Naiyayikas who criticise the theory.
F'amous among these works are
(1) स्फेीटवाद by a stalwart Gramma-
rian Kohdabhatta, the author of
the WaiyākaranabhtiSana and (?2)
स्फेाटवाद by NāgeŚa, the reputed
grammarian of the eighteenth
century.
स्फोटसिद्धान्त the doctrine of Sphota,
as advocated by the gratmmarianS
and criticised by otherS. See the
word स्फेोट.
स्फोटसिाद्धैद्व	(1) name of a short
treatise on the nature of Spho±a,
Written by a grammarian named
|Bharata Mi$ra; (2) name of a
short disquisition on Sphota by
MaऐएँanamiŚra.
स्फोटायन an ancicnt grammarian
' referred to by Pāmini in the rule
अवड् स्कॉटायनस्य P.VI.1.123, Great
gratmmarians like Haradatta
obSerwe that this ल्फेटायन was the
first advocate of the Sphota theory
and hence he was nicknained
स्फेोटायन; cf. स्केोट: अयनं परायणं यस्य स
स्फेोटायनः स्केाटप्रतिपादनपरो वैयाकरणाचार्यः |
Padama?jari on P. VI.1.123.
स्मात् case-ending स्मात् substituted
for the ablative sing. case-affix ङसि
placed after pronouns; cf. ङसिङयेोः
स्मात्स्मिनैौ P. VII. 1. 15, 16.
स्म्वति an authoritative dictum of an
ancient grammarian before the
स्वतन्त्र
fa mOuS author of the Vārttikas;cf.
तथा च स्मृतिः श्तिपा शपानुबन्धेन निर्दिष्टं
N etc, $iradeva Pari. 68.
स्मै case ending स्मै, substituted for
the dative sing. case-affix डे after
pronouns; cf. सर्मनाम्र स्मैP. VII.1.14.
स्य (1) case-er1ding रय Substituted for
the genitive Singular case-affix after
baSes ending in अः cf. टाङसेिङसामि-
नात्स्याः P. VII.1.12; (2) Vikaratप्a
affix स्य placed befor e the personal
eradings Of छूट् and तॄटृङ् (the second
ftuture tense and the conditional
1nood); cf स्यतासी छ्रुळुष्टोः P. III.1.33.
स्याट् augment स्या affixed to a case-
affix marked with the mute ङ् i.e.
डे, ङसि, ङस् and ङि of the dat. abl.
gen. and loc. siiigular after a
prOnoun and optionally after
तृतीय and द्वितीय ending , with the
fem. afiix अा; cf. सर्वस्यै सर्वस्याः सर्वस्याम्
द्वितीयस्यै, द्वितीयाय, तृतीयस्यै, तृतीयाय; cf.
|P. VII. 3.114, I ] 5.
स्यादि the Vikaranas headed by the
Wikaral?!a स्य mentioned in P.III.1.
33 upto II I.1.90.
स्व (1) personal-ending of the second
person sing. Ātmanepada in the
irmperative mood; cf. थास: से | सवाभ्यां
वामौ । P.III.4.80, 91 ; (2) a term
used in the sense of स्त्रवर्गींय (belon-
girig to the s3me claSS or category)
in the Prāti$ikhya works; cf. स्पर्शः
स्वे R.T.25; cf. also कान्त् स्वे R. T. 1.
55; cfalso R., Pr.IV.l ; andVI.l ; (3)
cognate, the same as सवर्ण defined
by P:inini in तुल्यास्यप्रयत्नं सवर्णम् P.
P.I.1.9; the term is found used in
theJain grarmrnar works ofJaine-
ndra, Sश्àkatayajna and Hemacanda
cf .jain. I.l.2 Sik- I. l.2; Hema..
I.i. 17.
स्वतन्त्र lit. independent; independ-
ent in activity; the Subject or
agent of an action ( कर्ता ) is defin-
ed as स्वतन्त्र independent in his



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-423.png}}}}}}

स्वतन्त्रपदोपस्थिातेपक्ष 407
स्वर
→ ||
activity, i. e. not depending upon |
any one for the same; cf. स्वतन्त्रः
कत P. I. 4. 54.
स्वतन्त्रपदोपास्थितिपक्ष an alternative
wiew regarding the exp!anation of
the rule * इको गुणवृद्धी * P. I. 1. 3 by
taking an additional word गुणवृद्धी
supplied in the,siitra. For full ex-
planation See Sabdakaustubha on
|P. I. 1. 3.
स्वपदार्थ meaning of one's own, as
pOSSessed by a word. In many
compounds especially in the Bahu-
vrihi compounds the meaning
expreSSed by the compound word
· is quite different from the one
expreSSedby the constituent words;
cf. स्व॒प॒दार्थे कर्मधारयः । अन्यपदार्थे बहुत्रीहिः ।
M. Bh. on P. II. 1. 69.
स्वपाठ the original recital of theVeda;
the Sarhhitapagha, as opposed to
the Padapātha which is looked
upOn more or less as artificial.
स्वर (l) wowel, as contrasted with a
consonant which never stands by
itSelf independently. The word स्वर
is defined generally :as स्वयं राजन्ते ते
रुवरा: ( M. Bh.' on pān. Tble Word
स्वर iS alwayS uSed in the sense of a
vowel in the PrātiŚākhya works;
Par]ऐini however has got the word
अञ्चु (short term or Pratyāhāra form-
ed of अ in *अइउण्' and च् at the end
of ऐऔौच् Māheśvara,sitra 4 ) al-
wayS uSed for wowels, the term स्धर
being relegated by him to denote
accents which are also termed स्वर
in the ancient Prātis*ākhyas and
grammars. The number of vowels,
although shown differently in dif-
erent ancient works, is the Same,
wiz. five simple wowels अ,इ,उ, ऋ, ल,
and four diphthongs एर्, ऐ, ओो, and
औौ. These nine, by the addition
of the long varieties of the first
four such as अा, ई, ऊ, and ऋ, are |
→--→--
increascd to thirteen and further
t9 twentytwO by adding the
pluta forms, there being no long
variety for ल and short one
for the diphthongs. *.ll these
tWentytWO varieties hawe further
Subdivisions, made on the crite-
rion of each of them being further
characterized by the properties
उदप्i, अनुदाप्त and स्वरित and
निरनुनासिक and सानुनाासक. (2) The
word स्वर als> means accent, a
property pOSSessed exclusively by
vOwels and not by consonants, as
they are entirely dependent on
vOWcls and can at the most be
Said to p0SSeSS the same accent
as the vowel with which they are
uttered together. The accents
are mentioned to be three; the
acute ( उदात्त ), the grave अनुदात्त
and the circumflex (स्वरित) defined
|respectively as उचैचरुदात्त:, नीचैरनुदात्तः
and समाहारः स्वरितः by Pānini (P. I.
2.29, 30,31). The point whether
समाहार meanS a combination or
coming together one after another
of the two, or a commixture or
blending of the two is critically
discussed in the Mahābhagya.
(vide M. Bh. on P. I. 2.31). There
are howewer two kinds of swarjta
mentioned by Paऐini and found
actually in use : (a) the indepen-
dent स्वरित as poSSeSSed by " the
word स्वर् (from which possibly
the word स्वरित was formed) and
a few other words as also many
times by the reSultant wowel · out
of two vowels ( उदात्त and अनुदात्त )
combined, and (b) the enclitic
or secondary svarita by which
name, One Or more grawe vowels
occurring after the udātta, in a
chain, are called; cf. P. WIII. 2.4
WIII. 2.6 and VIII 4.66 and 67.
The topic of accents is · fully



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-424.png}}}}}}

स्वरप्रतिरूपक
discussed by the authorS of the
PrātiŚākhyas as also by Pãnini.
For details, see R. Pr. III. l. l9;
T.Pr. 38-47 V. Pr, I. 108 to 132,
II. I.65 A. Pr. Adhyāya l pādas
1, 2, 3 and Rk. Tantra 51-66;
see also Kaiyata on P. I. 2.29;
(3) The word स्बर is used also in
the sense of a musical tone. This
meaning arose out of the Second
meaning * accent ? which itSelf
arose fi om the first viz. *wOWel',
and it is fully discuSSed in workS
explanatory of the chanting of
Sāmas. Pataihjali has given Seven
Subdiwisions Of accentS which may
be at the origin of the seven
musical notes. See सप्तस्वर् abOwe.
स्वरप्रतिरूपक a word or Prātipadika
which is exactly sittnilar to a
single vowel such aS उ or अा or .
ए, and3 the like; Such words are
to be looked upon as AwyayaS
and the case-affixes after them
are dropped when they are used.
cf. स्वरप्रतिरूपकमव्ययम्.
स्वरभक्ति a vowel part; appearance
Of a conSonant aS a vowel; the
character of a vOwel borne by a
consonant. Many times a semi-
vowel which consists of one letter
|has to be divided especially for
purposes of metre, as also for
accentuation intO two letters or
rather, has tO be turned into two
letters by inserting a wowel before
it Or after it, for instance युम् is to
be turned into इट्य् e. g, in त्रियम्बकं
यजामहे, while र् or रेफ is to be turned
into र्क्न् as for instance in श्कर्हि न्चित्
which is tO be uttered as कर् ऋ हि
चित्. This prefixing or suffixing
of a vowel is called स्वरभक्ति; cf.
स्वरभारीतेः पूर्वभागक्षराङ्गं द्राघीयसी सार्धमत्रितरे
च । अधेनान्या । R. Pr. I. 32.35; cf.
also न संयेार्गीं स्वरभातैर्विहन्ति R. Pr.
WI. 35; cf. also रेफात् स्वरेीपहिताद् व्यघ्घ्घ्घ्घ्घ्घ्घ्घ्घ्ज-
408
स्वरसर्वनाम
नेोदयाद् ऋग्कांरवणाँ स्वरभाक्तेरुत्तरा; R. Pr.
VI. 46. In Pārtini's grammar,
however, the word अज्भारीते, which
1means the same, is used for स्वरभक्तिः
cf. ऋति .. ऋ वा लति ल वा इत्युभयत्रापि
विधर्ये	व॒र्णुद्वयं द्विमात्रम् |, अाद्यस्य ' मध्ये द्वौ
रैफौ तयेोरेकं|[ मात्रा । अभितेोज्भत्तेरपरा | ' S.
K. on VI. i.101.
स्वरभिन्न differing in the matter of
accent ; words So differing are
practically lOoked upon aS one and
the $a me; cf. स्वरभिन्नानां यस्योत्तरस्वराविधि-
रूत॒त्येकशेघो वक्यव्यः | अक्षश्च अक्षश्च अक्षौ |
M. |Bh* on I. 2. 64 Vārt. 24. For
tcchnical purpOSes, they are Some-
timeS looked upon as different; cf.
सूवराभन्नस्य च प्रामुवन् विधिरनित्यः | Par.
Sek. Pari. 49.
स्वरभद difference in accents, See
स्वराभैन्न above.
स्वरविाधे a rule prescrit)ing an accent
or a modification of accent.
स्वरविराम a pause between two
vOwels in One and the same word
as in तितउ or पउगा or in two differ-
ent wOrds cCming close by the
visarga Or य् between the two being
elided, a$ for instance in देवा इह.
स्वरविवृाति ( 1 ) thc samc as स्वरविराम
which See abowe; ( 2 ) a short trea-
tise on Vedic accents written by a
mOdern Vedic scholar and gramm-
rian named Indradattopādhyaya.
स्ंवरसधेि euphonic combination of
twO vOwcls, a detailcd description
Of whichā . forms a small topic
in the Prātis'ākhya and grammar
wOrkS; wide R.• Pr. chapters II.
1-26; T. Pr. chapters 9 and 10
V. Pr. III and अच्साग्धप्रकरणम् in
the Siddhāntakaumudi.
स्वरसर्वनाम a common accent; the
accent which is stapposed to be .
pre8ent itn a word when none of
the three accents are definite. cf.
एकश्रुतिः स्वरसर्वनाम यथा नपुंसकं लिङ्गसर्वनाम



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-425.png}}}}}}

स्वरसाहेितेोच्चारण
M. Bh. on P. VI. 4.174.
स्वरसहितोच्चारण recital of the veda
Safmhitā text with intonation or
accents, as contrasted with एकश्रुत्यु-
च्चारण which is specially prescribed
in a few cases; tonal
showing distinction between
words of different senses although
pronOunced alike, in the Sarांhhitā
text. e. g. नतेन and न तेन.
स्वरार्थ for purposes ofaccent, meant
for accent; cf. अवश्यं चैचषा परिभाषा
( असिद्धं बहिरङ्गमन्तरङ्गे ) अाश्रयितव्या स्वरार्थम्
M. Bh. on P. I. 1.57.
स्वरित the circumflex accent, the
accent between the acute (.उदात्त )
and the grave ( अनुदात्त); for details
See स्वर..
स्वरितकरण marking or characterizing
by.a Svarita accent, as is supposed
to hawe been done by Pānini when
he Wrote down his stitras of
grammar as alsO the Dhātupatha,
the Gat}apātha and other' $ub-
sidiary appendixes. Although the
rules of the A5gādhyāyi are not
recited at present with the pro-
per accents possessed by the
various vowels as given by the
Suitrakāra, still, by convention
and traditional explanation, cer-|
tain words are to be believed as|
possessed of certain accents, In |
the Dhātupātha, by oral tradition|
the accents of the several roots are
known by the phrases अथ स्वरितेतः,
अथाद्युदाताः, अथान्तेादात्ताः, अथानुदात्तत: put
therein at differemt places. In the
stitras, a major purpose is served
by the circumflex accent with
which such words, as are to conti-
nue to the next or next few or next
many rules, have been marked. As
the oral traditiom, according to
which the Stltras are recited at
409
system |
present, has preserewd no acc-
52
स्वरूपग्रहण
ents, it is only the authoritative
word, described as *prartijha' of
the ancient grammariams, Which
noW is available for knowing the
Svarita. The same holds good
in the case of nasalization
( अानुनासिक्य ) which is used as a
factor for determining the indicat-
Ory nature of vowels as stated
by the rule उपदेशेजनुनाासेक इत्; cf.
प्रतिज्ञानुनासिक्याः पाणिनीयाः S. K. on P.
I.3.2.
स्वरितप्रतिज्ञा the conventionaldictum
that a particular rule or part of a
rule, is marked with the accent
स्वरित which enables the gramma-
rians to decide that that rule or
that part of a rule is to occur
in each of the subsequent Stitras,
the limit of continuation benig
aScertained from conwention. It is
po$sible that Pānini in his original
recital of the A$tadhyāyī recited
the words in the rules with the
necesSary accents; probably he
recited ewery Word, which was not
to proceed further, with one acute
Or with one circumflex wowel,
while, the words which were to
proceed to the next rule or rules,
were marked with an actual cir-
cunaflex accent ( स्वरित ), or with
a neutralization of the acute and
the grawe accents (त्बरितत्व), that is,
probably without accents or by
एकश्रुति or by प्रचय; cf स्वग्तेिनाधिकारः
P. I.3.11 and the Mahābhā$ya
thereon.
स्वरितेत्marked with amutecircumflex
wowel; the term is used in conne-
ction with roots in the Dhātupāgha
which are said to have been so
marked for the purpose of indicat-
ing that they are to take personal
eradings of both the padas; cf.
स्वरितञितः कर्त्रभिप्राये क्रियाफले P. I.3.72.
स्वरूपग्रहण mentionby the verbalform,



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-426.png}}}}}}

स्वरूपयोग्यता
4]10
स्वार्थ
||
and not by the description of |
' characteristics; e. g. मृजेर्दृद्विः P. ||
VII. 2.114; स्सुजिदृशेोइर्मल्यमाक्रिति VI. 1• !
58; cf.धातोः स्वरूपग्रहणे तत्प्रत्यये कार्यविज्ञानम्
|M.Bh. o:n P.VI.} .58.•
स्वरूपयोग्यता deserving by virtue Of
one's oWn form.
स्वरूपविधि an operation prescribed
for the verbal form of the wOrd
and not for such words as pOSSeS$
the mea1jing of the word; _cf. अास्त
कश्चित्पुरुषारम्भः 1 कः ! स्वरूपविधिन॒मि । हृन्ते-
रात्मनेर्पदमुच्यमाने हन्तरेव स्याद्वधेर्न स्यात् |
M.Bh. on P.I.1.56 Vārt. 1. In gra- |!
mmar there is a general dictum
that in connection with Words of
a Stitra, unlesS they are technical
terms, the Word-forms are to be
undetstood, and not those shown
by the sense of the word; cf. स्वं रूपं
शब्दस्याशब्दसंज्ञा P. I.l.68. This rule
has SOme exceptiOns; for example
in the rule नदीभिश्च P.II.1.20 the
warious riwers are to be understood
and not the word नदी.
स्वस्थ lit. remaining in its own fortn
without admitting any cuphonic
change for thc final letter; an an-
cient term for *pragrhya? of Pātaini.
स्वस्वामिसेसबन्ध relationship of the
pOSSeSSor and the pOSSessed; one
of the general meanings of the
type of rclation, expressed by the
genitive case;cf.अधिरीश्धेरे । ईश्वरः स्वामी!
सः च स्वमपेक्षते तदअं स्वस्वामिसंबन्धः कर्मप्रवचनी-
श्यसंज्ञेो भवति l Kāś. on P. I.4:97.
रेवङ्गीं (l) one's own limb, as contrast-
ed with that of another personः ; cf.
स्वाङ्गकर्मकाच्चेति वक्तव्यम् । स्वाङ्गै चेचह न पीिर-
भाष्त्र्रिकं गृह्यते । किं तर्हि स्वमङ्गं स्वाङ्गम् । Kāś.
on P.I. 3.28; (2) forming a part,
a portion; cf. स्वाङ्गाच्चेोपसर्जनादसंयोगो-
पधूात् l किं स्वाङ्गं नाम । अद्रवं मूर्तिमत्स्वाक्षं
' प्राणिस्थ॒मविकारजम् I अतत्स्थं , तत्र दृष्टं च
तस्य चैत्तत्तथा युतम् | अप्राणिनोपि स्वाङ्गम् |
→---
स्वातन्त्र्य independence, or autonomy
aS a characteristic Qf the agent
( कर्ता ); cf. कर्मकर्तरि कर्तृत्वमासु॑त । कुंतः ।
स्वातन्त्र्यस्य विवाक्षितत्वात् । स्वातन्त्र्येणैवात्र ' कती
विवक्षितः | M.Bh. on P. III. 1. 87
Vart.5.
स्वादि the affixes hcaded by सु; a
gट्रेneral term for gase-affixes; cf.
स्र्वोजसमैीट्शरुटाभ्यां ... ङयेास्सुप् P. IV.1.2.
स्वiद्युत्पत्ति the addition of case-affixes
which requircS the designation
प्रातिपदिक for the preceding base by
the rule अर्थवदधातुरप्रत्ययः प्रातिपादिकम्
or कृत्तद्वितसमासाश्च	P.I. 2.45,46. The
addition of a caSe-affix entitles
thc.word,made up of thc base and
thc case-afiix,to be termed a Pada
which is fit for usc in language;cf.
अपदं न प्रयुत्र्ञ्जीत; cf. निपातस्य अनर्थकस्य
प्रातिपदिकसंज्ञा वनतव्या । किं पुनरत्र पदसंज्ञया
प्रार्थ्यते । प्रातिपदिकादिति स्वाद्दुटु॑त्पत्तिः, सुवन्तं
पदमिति पदसंज्ञा, पदस्य पदादिति निघातो यथा
स्यात् । M. Bh. om P.I.2.45 Vārt.12.
स्वाभाविक natural, unartificial; the
word is used frequcntly in conne-
ction with the capacity of denota-
tion which Words naturally pOSseSS;
cf. अाभधानं पुनः स्धाभाधिक्रम् P. I. 2. 64
Vàं६rt. 36.
स्वाभाव्य inhcrcncc; natural capacity;
the word is used many times in
connection with the pOwer of
dcnotation; cf. शध्दशाक्तिस्वाभाब्यात् l
Nyāsa on P. III.1. 112 or अभिधान-
शाक्तिस्वाभाव्यात् Nyāsa on P. IV. 4.60.
स्वार a tcrm used in the Prāti$ákhya
works for स्वरित or thc circumflex
accent; स्वारः स्वरितः । Com. On T.Pr.
XVII.6; cf. also T.Pr.XX.20;
XXIII.24. Thcrc are scven varie-
tics of स्वार give1r in thc Prāti$ākhya
works, viz. क्षप्र, नित्य, प्रातिहत,७{ाभनिहत,
प्रश्लिष्ट, पादवृत्त and तैरोव्यञ्जन, cf. T. Pr.
XX.1-7.
र、
स्वाञ्थे one?s own sense possessed by a
· M.•Bh, on P. IV.1.54.
word, such as जाति, गुण, क्रिया or संज्ञीं



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-427.png}}}}}}

स्वार्थिक
411
हरदच्त
which is called प्रवृत्तिनिमित्त ii1 the
case of nouns, and क्रिया in the case
of verbs; cf. alsO अानेर्दिष्टार्थाः प्रत्ययाः
स्वार्थे भवान्त M. Blh. on P. III. 2. 4
Vart.. 2.
स्वार्थिक prescribed (after a base) in
the sense of itself; i.e. in the se।ase
of the base. Thc word is used in
cOnnection with a large number of
tad. affixes which are prescribed
withOut any special sense at-
tached to them; wide P. V.3,36 to
P. V. 4.67. The Samasānta affixes
prescribed from P.V.4.68 onwards
can also be called स्वार्थिक;cf.स्वार्थिकाश्च
प्रकृतितेा लिङ्गवन्वान्यनुवर्तन्ते । M.Bh. on P.
" V. 4. 14, 27. See the word स्वार्थ.
स्वाश्रय possessed as its own, as
contrasted with artificial or inten-
tionally stated ( अानुदशिक );cf. अस्त्वत्र
अानुदशिकस्य वलादित्वस्य प्रतिषेधः t स्वाश्रयमत्र
वलादित्वं भावेष्यति M. Bh. on P. I. 1.
59 Vārt. 6.
ह
इद् the last of the spirant consonants, |
which is a glottal, voiced letter
called alsO ऊष्म or spirant of a part-
ial COntact, i. e. possessed of the
properties कण्ठ्य, नादानुप्रदान, ऊष्म anad
ईषत्स्पृष्टत्व. This letter has been given
twice in the Pāninian alphabet,
viz• the MaheŚvara Stitras, and
the Bhā$yakāra has given the pur-
pOSe of it, wiz. the technical
utility of being included among soft
cOnSonantS along With semi-wowels,
naSalS and the fifth, the fourth,
and thc third clasS•consonants
(हशं अश्शू[etc.),aS alSO among the hard
cOnsonantS along With the fourth
and the third clasS-letters and spi-
rants ( झछ्, ). The Second letter
इद् in हछ् appears, however, to have
only a'technical utility,as the pur- →
pOse of itS place there among spir-
. antS is served by the Jihvāmüliya
and the Upadhmāniya letters
Which arc,in fact,the velar and the
labial spirants respcctively, besides
the other three शु,ष्य् and सृत्.The Rk
Prāti$akhya calls ह as a chest sound.
For details, see Mahābhāsya on
the Siva Stitra हयवरट् Varttikas 1, 2
and 3.
देहें (!) representation of the conso-
nant ड् with अ added for facility of
prOnunciation; (2) a technical
term for the internalefiort betwecn
विवृत and संवृत, which causes घेोष in
the cQnsonamts; cf. संवृतविवृतयेोर्मध्ये
_मथ्यमप्रकोर यः शब्दः क्रियत स हकारसंज्ञेो भवति|
संज्ञायाः प्रयेोजनं * हकारो हचतुर्थेषु ' इति ( तै.
' प्रा.२I ९) |! Tribhāsyaratna on T.Pr.
II.6; " (3} name of an external
effort causing घोष; cf. सांप्रतिके प्रकृतिस्थे
कणेठ सति हकारो नाम बाह्यः प्रयत्नः क्रियते | तेन.
च व्यञ्जनषु घेोषेो जायते | Vaidikābharatha
on T'Pr. II.6; (4) name of a kind
of external cffort of the type of
अनुप्रदान found in ' the utterance of
the consonant ( द् ) and the fourth
class-corasonants; cf. हकारॊ हचतुथैषु
T.Pr.]II.9.
हंसपदा name given to a kind of
swarabhakti,when the consonant. ऐ,
followed by षू, is read as र + ष् + ड्.
हकार See हृ as also ह.
हनु inside of the chin, mentioned as
a स्थान or place which is touched
by the tongue when a pcculiar
soumd described as Something like
किट्-किट् is produced; cf. किट्किडाकारो
हन्वां तिष्ठति R.T.l0.
हरदत्त name of a reputed gramma-
rian of Southern India who Wrote
a very learned and Scholarly com- .
mentary, named पदमञ्जरी, on' the
|KāśikāvFtti Which is heldby gramm-
arians as the standard Vrtti or gloss
on the Stitras of Pāpirii,and studied



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-428.png}}}}}}

हरेि
especially in theschoolsof theSOut-
hern grammarians. Haradatta was
a Drāvida Brāhmana, residing in a
village on the Bank of Kaveri. His
scholarship in Grammar waS very
sound and he is beliewed to hawe
commented on many grammar-
works.The only fault of the scholar
was a very keen sense of egOtism
which is found in his wOrk, althO-
ugh it can certainly be said that
the egotism was not ill-placed
and could be justified; cf. एवं
प्रकटितेास्माभिर्भाष्ये परिचयः पर:{ तस्य नि:शेषतेो
मन्ये प्रतिपत्तापि दुर्लभः |॥ also प्रक्रियातर्कगहने
प्रविष्टो हृष्टमानसः हरदत्तहीरः सैवैरं विद्दरन् !
केन वार्यते । Padamaऐjari, on P. I-1-
3, 4. The credit of popularising
Panini's system of grammar in
Southern India goes to Haradatta
to a considerable extent.
हरि a $hort form u$ed for भर्तृहरि, the
stalwart grammarian Bhartrhari,by
later grammarians and comme-
ntators in their references to him.
See the word भर्तृहरि above.
हृरिकृष्ण a Scholar of grammar who
wrote a short treatise on the
nature and function of prepositions
named उपसगैवाद.
हरिणी name of a kind of svarabhakti
when r ( र् ) followed by ś ( शु )
and S ( स् ) is read as र + इ +शु and
र + इ +सूत् respectively.
हरितादि a class of words headed by
the wOrd हरित to which the taddhita
affix 'फक् ( अायन ) is added in the
sense of a descendant after the
affix अ ( अञ् ) has already been
added to them by P. IV. 1. 104,
the Word.so formed possessing the
sense of the great grandchild
(युवापत्य) of the individuals denoted
पुं; हरित भू others; e. g. हारितायन:;
cf. इह् तु गेोत्राधिकारेपि सामथ्यीँद् यूनि प्रत्ययो-
भिधीयते KāŚ. on P, IV. iँ
4:12 हरिराम
हरिदत्त a grammarian who wrote a
conmentary on the Unādi Stitra५,
called उणादिसूत्रटीका.
द्दरिदीक्षित a reputed grammarian of
the Siddhàintakaumudl school of
Pānini who lived in the end of the
sewenteenth century. He was the
grandson of Bhattoji IDiksita and
the preceptOr of NageŚabhtta. His
commentary named लञ्धुशब्दरत्न, but
popularly called शददरत्न on Bhattoji
Diksंita's Praudhamanoramā,' is
widely studied by pupils along
with the Praudhamanoramā in the
Wyākaraए]1apātha$alās. There is a
work existing in a manuscript
form but recentlv taken for print-
ing, named * Brhat$abdaratna ?
which has been written by Hari-
dik$ंita, although Some scholars
beiieve that it was' written by
NageŚa who asCribed it to his
preceptor. For details See लघुशब्दरत्न.
इरिनाथद्विवेदी a grammarian of the
. nineteenth century who has written
a cOmmentary named अकाण्डताण्डव
on Nāgeśa's Paribhāgenduśe-
khara.
इरिभास्कर ( अग्निहोत्री ) a grammarian
of the Deccan who lived in the
seventeenth century at Nā$ik and
wrote cOmmentaries on grammar-
workS out of which his treatise on
|Paribhāsक्ष्as ( परिभाषाभास्कर ) written
independently but based upona
Siradeva's Paribhā$āvrtti, deserves
a special notice and mention.
इरिराम ( हरिराम केशव काळे ) a modern
grammarian who has written a
commentary named Kā$ikā on
Kondabhatta's Vaiyākaramabhti-
३anasāra. He lived in the second
half of the eighteenth century and
the commentary Kāśikā was
written by him in 1797, Heis said
to have been a pupil of the gन्eat



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-429.png}}}}}}

हरवल्छ्ठभ 413
हेतुमाण्णिच्
grammarian Bhairavamiśra.
इरिवल्लभ a grammarian whohas writt-
en commentaries named दर्पणा on the
Vaiyākaranabhti$anasara of Kond-
abhatta, and Laghubhtiganakānti
on the Sabdakaustubha of Bhattoji
Dik$ita.
हरिशाख्त्री ( भागवत ) a grammarian of
the nineteenth century who has
written Vākyārthacandrika, a
commentary on Nageśa's Paribhā-
$enduśekhara.
हर्षवर्द्धनस्वामिन a fairly old grammarian
who wrote an extensive metrical
compendium on genders named
लिङ्गानुशासन on which a commentary
was written by a grammarian
named शबरस्वााभेन्. These gramma-
rians were,of course, different from
the reputed king हर्षवर्धन and the |
MimārihSaka शबरस्वामिन्.
इछ् a short term ( प्रत्याहार ) for conso-
nants, made up of the first letter
. इ in हयवरट् and the last letter छ् in
हळु. The term is universally used
for the word व्यञ्जन in Pānini's gra-
mmar ; cf. हलेोनन्तराः संयेोग: P.I. 1.7.
हलन्ताच्च I. 2.10 etc.
हलन्त a term used for words ending
in consonants; cf. हलन्तस्येत्येवं भविष्यति
M. Bh. on P.I.1.3 Vārt.10; cf. also
the term हलन्तलक्षणा वृद्धि ' for the
Vrddhi prescribed by the rule
वदव्रजहलन्तस्याचः P.WII. 2. 3.
इलादि beginning with a consonant;
cf. हलादयेो विभक्तयः, M.Bh. on P. II.
4.32 Vārt. 2; धातुर्य एकाजुञ् हलादिः M.
Bh. on P. III. |l. 22. Vārt. 2. etc.
हलादिशेाष a term frequently uSed by
commentatorS for the omission of
all consonants except the initial
one in the reduplicative syllable
as prescribed by the rule of Pānini
हलादिः शेषः VII. 4. 60. The word
* हलादिःशेष ' as one word, is also
found used in the same sense•
हल्स्वरप्राप्ति a possibility of the applica-
tion of an accent to the consonant
by the literal interpretation of rules
preScribing an accent for the first or
the last letter ofa word, to prevent
which a ruling is laid down that
a cOnSOnant is not to be accented;
gf. हल्स्वरप्राप्तौ व्यञ्जनमविद्यमानवत् Par.
Sek. Pari. 80.
इं३ a short term ( प्रत्याहार ) for semi-
vowels, ड्, and the fifths, the
fOurths and the thirds of the class-
consonants; cf. इशि च P. VI.1.114.
हाांरंत name given to akind ofSvara-
bhakti when the consonant ळुि is
followed by श् and the conjunct
cOnsonant ल्ञ्शा is read as लूट्लश or
लृट् इ छ्; cf. वनत्पते शतवल्शा विरोह Tait.
Sarihh. 1. * .
द्दि (1) personal-ending of the second
pers. sing. Substituted for सि in the
imperative mood; cf.सेह्यपिच्च P. III.
4.87; (2) a sign-word used in the
Vājasaneyi-prātiśākhya fo mark the
termination of the words of the
Adhikārastitra V. Pr.III.5, TV.11.
हुष्करण the use of the sign-word हुष्,
put in the grammar of ApiŚali
according to SOme grammarians
who read हुष्करण for पुष्करण in the
Kāśikāvपृtti on P. IV.3.115.
^\
हृदयहारिणी name of a commentary
written by a grammrian named
दण्डनाथ on the Sarasvatikanghābha-
rana of Bhojarāja•
हेतु (1) cause; cf नतेः .पर॒स्योभयहेतुसंग्रहात्
R. Pr.XI.2; also cf.हेतौ P. II.3.23;
हेतुहेतुमतोर्लिङ् P.III.3. 126; (2) causal
agent cf. यः कारयति स हेतुः Kāt. II.
4.15; cf. also तत्प्रयेाजको हेतुश्च P. I.
4.55.
हेतुमाण्णिच् the affix णिच् added to a
root in the sense ofthe activity* of
the causal agent; see `हतुमत् above;
cf. तत्र हेतुमण्णिचः प्रतिषेधः .|P. I.1. 62,
Vārt.• 7- →



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-430.png}}}}}}

हेतुमत् 414
、
हेमचन्द्र
हेतुमत् the activity of the causal
agenit t0 €xpreSS which a ro0t haS
the affix णिच् added to it ; cf. हेतु:
स्वतन्त्रस्य कर्तुः प्रयेोजकः | तदीयो व्यापार:
प्रेषणादिलक्षणो हेतुमान् { तस्मिन्नाभधेये धातोर्णि-
छ्ं स्यात् | Kā$. on P. III. 1.26.
हेमचन्द्र a Jain sage and scholar of
|remarkable erudition in the reli-
giOuS wOrkS Of the Jainas as also
in Several Shàstras. He was a resi-
dent of Dँhandhukā in Gujarat,
whO, like Sahkarācarya took संन्यास-
दीक्षा at a very early age and wrote
a véry large number of original
bookS and commentaries, the fotal
number 9f which rnay well nigh
exceed fifty, during his long lieि
Of eighty-four years ( l088 to
!l 2 ). |He stayed at Anhilavāंà-
|Pa±tana in the North Gujarat ahd
WaS patrOnised with extreme re-
w€rengःe , by	King Kumārapāla
who, in fact, became his dev6ted
Pupil. Besides the well-known
workS On the vari०us Shāstras 1ike
KāwyānuŚāsana, Abhidhānacint-
āmani, Deśināmamālā, Yoga$ās{ra,
JDvyaSrayakंvya, Triङेasgśālākāpu-
ru$acarita a nd others which ?àre
well-knOwn, he wrote a big
Wof'k .0n grammar called सिद्हेंम:
श्वन्श्by hirm,but popularly known by
the hame हैमव्याकरणै or हैमशब्दानुशासन.
The , work consists ' of eight
bookS or Adhyāyas, out of whाँcb
the eighth book ' is devoted to
Prākrit Grammar, and can be
$tyled as a Grammar of al! the
Prakrit dialects. The Sanskrit
Grammar of seven chapters i$
based practically upon Pānjni'5
AŚādhyāyाँ, the rulés or sitras
· referring to Vedic words or vedic
affixcs or accents beirag entirely
9ffitted- The .wording of th6
Stitras is much similar tð that ' of
Pàfोini; at some placeS it i$ ewen
idetttical. Thc ord6r of the treat-
}nef t of the Subjects in the सिद्धहैम.
शान्दानुशासनग्टूत्र is not, hOwever, simii-
lar to that obtaining in the A$:à-
dhyàyÎ 9f Pifini. It is sof-
whàt topicwise as in !he Kātantra
Vyākarana. The first Adhyaya
श्ànd a quarter Of the second* afe
devoted to Sariajfiā, Paribhasā and
declension ; the s€cond Pāda of
thc $econd Adhyāya is devoted tQ
kãraka, while the third Pāda ofitis
9ंevOted tO cCrebralization and the
fourth tO the Stripratyayas.The first
twO Pad;१S ofthe thirà Adhyāya are
devoted t9.SafmasaS or cofnpound
wOrds, whilc thc last two Pādas of'
the third Adhyāyā and the fourth
Adhyāya arc devoted to corीjuga-
tion.• The fifth Adhyāya is deyoाँed
tO verbal derivatives' or krdanta,
while the sixth and the $eventh
AdhyàyaS are devoted to forma-
tionS Of nouns frorn nouns, or
taddhita w7rds- On this Sabdā-
nuŚāsana, which is just:like Panini's
Aर्भुãdhyiईंyाँ, the éighth adhyāya
9f Hemacandra being devoted to
th°.śrarumar_9f the Āfga language
$itnilar to Vedic grammar 6f
P:t'?ini, Hernacaracira has himself'
writtefी {wO gl०sses which are
named लधुष्वृति and वृहट्टवृति and the
fatmouS commentary known as
the Brhanriyāsa. Besides these
Works viz• the हैंमशब्दानुशासन, the
twO VFttis on it and the Brha-
nfyā$a, h६ has given an appendix
viz. thte LingānuŚāsana. The Gra-
mmar Of Hemacandra, in short,
introduced a new system of gram-
fnar different from, yet similar to,
that of Pāninj, " which by his fol-
l9w6rS wa$ ' made completely
sirhilar to the Pāniniya system by
writing works similar to the Sid•



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-431.png}}}}}}

हेमहंसगाणे
415
ह्रस्व
dhāntakaumudf, the Dhātuvपू'tti,
the Manoramā and the Paribhāgen-
duśekhara.
हेमर्हसगणि a grammarian belonging
to the School ofHemacandra, who
lived in the fifteenth century and
wrote a Work on Paribhāक्ष्ās
named न्यायसंग्रह, on which he him-
Self Wrote a commentary called
न्यायार्थमञ्जूषा and another one call-
ed by the name न्यास.
हेलाराज a learned grammariam who
wrote a commentary on the third
Kānर्षुa of the Wākyapadiya of
Bharthari to which he has given
*、 tँe name प्रकीर्णप्रकाश.
हैमकौमुदी an exhaustive commen-
tary On the SabdānuŚā8ana, of
Hemacandra written by a Jain
grammarian Meghavjjaya in the
Sewenteenth century which is
similar to the Siddhāntakaumudi
、 of Bhattojीं Dikgंita.
हैंमधातुव्याख्या written by a Jain gra-
mmarian named पुण्यसुंदर which
is similar to the Mādhavya
Dhātuvपूtti, →
हैमबृहत्प्रक्रिया a Work very similar to
the Siddhāntakaumudi written
by a comparatively modern Jain
Scholar named Gīrijāshatakar
Shāstri.
हैमबृहद्वृत्ति, a glOSS writtem on the
Hajma Sabdanuśāsana stitrapāgha
by Hemacandra himself. Sce
हेमचन्द्र above.
बृहन्व्यास an extensive critical com-
mentary written by Hemacandra
on his OwnWork, Haima Sabdānu-
$asana. See हेमचन्द्रं.
हैमलघुप्राक्रियावृाते a topicwjse work
based on Hemacandra's Sabdānu- |!
$āsana Written by Vinayavijaya, a
Jain Scholar of grammar.
हैमलधुवृत्ति a short gloSS on the $ab-
dānuŚāsana, written by Hema-
candra himself. See हेमचन्द्र above.
हैमलिङ्गानुशासन a treatise on genders
Written by हेमचन्द्र. See हेमचन्द्रabove.
&
हैमलिङ्गानुशासनविवरण a commentary,
written in the seventeentha cen-
tury by Kalyat?asāgara on the
& हैमलेिङ्गानुशासन.
हैमालेङ्गानुशासनञ्याख्या a commentary
named उद्वार al$o, written by Jayā-
|nanda on the हैमलिङ्गानुशासन.
हैमव्याकरण a treatise On grammar
written by हेमचन्द्र, called by the
name हैमशब्दानुशासन. See हेमचन्द्र above.
{ हैमशब्दानुशासन a treatise on gram-
mar written by Hemacandra.
See हेमचन्द्र above.
हैमशब्दानुशासनलघुन्यास a $hort comtm-
entary On Hemacandra'sSabdānu-
$āsana written by Devendrastiri.
हैमशब्दानुशासनवृाते a short gloss call-
‘ed अवचूरि alsO, written by a Jain
grammarian नन्दसुन्दर on the " हैम-
शब्दानुशासन. →
ह्यस्तनी imperfect tense; a term
uSed by ancient grammarians for
the affixeS of the immediate past
tense, but not comprising the
present day, corresponding to the
term लङ् of P'ātini. The term is
found in the Kātantra and Haima-
candra grammars; cf. Kāt. III.
1.23, 27; cf. Hema. III. 3.9.
ह्रस्व short, a term used in connec-
tion w"ith the $hort vowels taking
a unit Of time measured by one
mātrā for ,their utterance; cf.
ऊकालेोज्इरस्वदाधैप्लुतः P. I. 2.27.



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-432.png}}}}}}

| ग्रन्थप्रशास्त ! ।l
प्राातिशाख्यमहाभाष्यकौमुदीकाशिकादिकान् |
ग्रन्थान् वाक्यपदीयादींश्चाभ्यस्य श्रमपूर्वकम् ।। १ |l
ग्रन्थानां ग्रन्थकाराणां नामानि प्रत्ययांस्तथा |
विशिष्टशाख्त्रीयाथैस्य वाचकान् पारिभाषिकान् ॥ २ ॥l
शब्दान् समीक्ष्य संज्ञादीनादेशानागमांस्तथा |
यदारब्धं संग्रथनं कालात् श्राक् सुबहोर्मया । ३ |॥
अभ्यंकरोपाह्वकुठे वासुदेवस्य सूनुना ।
काशिनाथाभिधेनेदं कोषरूपं समाापितम् | ४ |
शालिवाहनशाकेस्मिन्नष्टादशशतेोत्तरे |
त्र्यशील्यधिकवर्षेस्मिञ्चैत्रस्य ग्रतिपात्तिथौ || ५ |
द्राग् व्याकरणकोषाख्क्ष्यं कृपया परया प्रभोः |
निव्र्यूढं कार्यमेतन्मे कुर्याद्विद्वद्धृदि स्थिातिम् । ६ ॥
इह व्याकरणे शाखेत्रे ग्रन्थभूयस्त्वकारणात् ।
कोषाहीँ बहवः शब्दा दिङ्मात्रामिह दर्शितम् ॥ ७ ॥
बुद्धिवैौचित्र्यतः केचित् कोषानहः स्थिता यदि ।
शब्दास्तदह्र्हीं गलिताः प्रार्थये क्षम्यतां बुधैः ॥ ८ ॥



{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-433.png}}}}}}




{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-434.png}}}}}}




{{{{{{/cns/oe-d/home/vvasuki/abhyankar/abhyankar_images-435.png}}}}}}